A

GREEK AND ENGLISH

L E X I C Ó N
TO T I I E

N E W TESTAMENT:
I5T W n i C H

THE WORDS A N D PHRASES OCCURRING I N THOSE SACRED BOOKS A R E

DISTINCTLY EXPLAINED;
A N D T H E

MEANINGS ASSIGNED TO EACH A U T H O R I Z E D B Y REFERENCES TO PASSAGES OF S C R I P T U R E ,

A N D Fr.EQUEN T L Y I L L U S T R A T E D A N D C O N F I R Í I E D BY

CITATIONS FílOM THE OLD TESTAMENT

ASI) FEOM

T H E G R E E K W R I T E R S .

TO T l f l S WORK IS r U E F I X E D ,

A P L A I N A N D E A S Y GREEK G R A M M A R ,
Adaptcd to ihe Use qf Learncrs, and tlwse who understaiid no oíhvr Language than English.

BY J O H N P A R K H U R S T , M.A.
EORMERLY FELLOiV OF CLARE HALL, CAMBRIDGE.

A NEW EDITION,
C O M P B I S I N G T H E M O R E V A L U A B L E P A R T S OF T H E W O R K S OF SOME L A T E R W R I T E R S .

BY I-IUGH JAMES ROSE, B.D.

OF TRINITY COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE.

MAT. XXII. 29.

nAANA~S0E, MH"EIAO'TES TA'S TPA'M 2 .

L O N D O N :
PRINTED POR C. .T. G. AND F. RIVINGTON ; LONGMAN, REES, AND CO.; T. CADELT.; J. RJOITARD-
SON; R. SCIIOI.EY; BALDWIN AND CRADOCK; IIURST, CHANCE, AND CO.; I¡AMII,TON,
ADAMS, AND CO.; WIIITTAKER, TREACTIER, AND ARNOT; TKEUTTEI, WURTZ, AND CO.;
JAMES DUNCAN ; SIMPKIN AND JTFARSHAUJ Y J. BOHN; G. 1VILSON; .JAMES NISBET.:
E. HODGSON; W. MASÓN; H. STEEL; \r. j . AND J. MAYNARD; j . V>-ICKSTEED ; HOULSTON
AND SON; STIRLING AND KENNY, EDINBURGH; AND J. AND .1. J. DEIGHTON, CAMBRIDGE.

1829
 LONDON Í
PR1ÍTTED EY THOMAS DAVTSON, W H I Í E Í E Í A S . 3 .
 HIS GRACE

WILLIAM, LORD ARCHBISHOP OF CANTERBURY,

THE CONSTANT FRIEND AND PATRÓN

OF

THAT SCRIPTURAL LEARNING

OF WHICH HE IS H I M S E L F SO D I S T I N G U I S H E D AN EXAMPLE,

THE

FOLLOWING HUMBLE ATTEMPT TO PROMOTE IT

IS I N S C R I B E ! ) ,

WITH SENTIMENTS OF THE DEEPEST RESPECT AND MOST

SINCERE GRATITUDE,

BY HIS GRACE's O B M G E D AND H U M B L E S E R V A N T ,

HUGH JAMES ROSE.

 P RE FA C E

TO T H E P R E S E N T EDITION.

IN presenting to tlie public a uew edition of P a r k h u r s t ' s Greek Lexicón, it i s

j u s t to tlie publishers to mention t h e additions wliich have been made to it a t tlieir
request.
Although t h e warmest acknowledgments are due from t h e English public
to tlie venerable and learned autlior of this useful work, it is not to be denied
tliat it labours u n d e r very considerable defects. T h e peculiar opinions of t h e
school of H u t c h i n s o n , of wliich M r . P a r k h u r s t Mas a t least an admirer, induced
liim to attribut.e great importance to etymological rescarches; and his own (in
wliich he indulged so largely in this Lexicón) are unfortunately iu t h e highest
degree fanciful and uncertain. T h e cosmological theories of H u t c h i n s o n and
Bate are d\relt on with a frequency and an e x t e n t little adapted to t h e plan of
t h e Lexicón ; and their other tenets occasionally give a tinge to t h e author's
interpretations and coraments which deprives them of t h e aiithority which his
sound learning and exceeding love of t r u t h v o u l d otherwise bestow on t h e m .
I presume not to pronounce an opinión on t h e merits of t h e Hutchinsonian p h i l o -
sophy. I reverence t h e piety and t h e learning of many of its followers: b u t a book
for general use and general readers was not t h e place for introducing tenets so
much doubted and opposed.
A still greater fault in t h e Lexicón is t h e want of accurate discrimiuation between
t h e various senses of tlie same word. G r e a t inconvenience also arises from t h e
paucity of instances given u n d e r each head, and t h e looseness of t h e references to
profane authors. These defects had altogether banished t h e work from t h e shelyes
of the critical reader, and its place has been supplied there by t h e labours of recent
Germán Lexicographersj those espocially of Schleusner, Bretschneider, and W a h l .
T h a t these books, liowever, should entirely u s u r p the place of a work as mucli su-
perior to them in sound principie as it is, perhaps, inferior in some other respects,
is a subject of serious r e g r e t : for although w h a t is commonly termed Rationalism
docs not appeav in its worst forin in t h e books I ha ve referred to, it has occasion-
VI PREFACE.

al!y liad no inconsiderable influence on t h e interpretations which they p r e s e n t * .

Ñ o r are tliey by any means free from defects of a different kind. L e t me not be
suspected of wishing to d e p r é d a t e those by whose labours I have so largely pro-
fited in the execution of t h e following work, ñor of being insensible to their very
great merits in many respects. Those merits are, however, too well known to r e -
quire any panegyric from me. I t is m y less grateful task to point out some d e -
ficieucies whicli render any a t t e m p t , however h u m b l e , t o produce a worlc likely to be
more useful to a t least one large class of readers, entitled to forgiveness, if not t o
commendation. Schleusner's work t h e n is, I t h i n k , characterized by one defect, of
a n a t u r e exactly opposite to t h a t which I have remarked of P a r k h u r s t . Instead of
confounding various senses u n d e r one head, he m u l t i p l i e s t t h e senses of t h e same
word in a manner frequently quite unreasonable, and calculated to mislead t h e
student. W h e r e t h e context, and t h e context alone, affixes a peculiar meaning t o
a word, t h a t meaning becomes, in Schleusner's hands, a distinct and recognised
sense of t h e word itself. I n respect to t h e a r r a n g e m e n t indeed of t h e various senses
of words, as well as in critical powers, W a h l appears to me very far to surpass
Schleusner. B u t Schleusner's work labours u n d e r another and very serious defect,
one indeed which r e n d é i s t h e execution of another Lexicón, on t h e same extended
plan as his, almost indispensable. N o one who has examined his work with any
accüracy can suppress a doubt whether he has consulted a large portion of t h e
places which he cites. H i s plan, it would appear, has been t h i s : — H e has col-
lected t h e best commentators, and has copied their references, very often w i t h -
out examining them. If there were no proofs of this from internal evidence, i t
would be impossible to doubt t h e fact, when things are so managed that
in the very same article we frequently find references to t h e same a u t h o r from
t h e book and section in one edition, and from t h e page in another, and t h e n find
t h e solution to t h e enigma by tracing t h e one reference perhaps to Elsner, and t h e
other to K y p k e f . W r i t i n g as I do, in t h e country, with a very small command of
books, I must freely own t h a t I have not always myself been able to verify t h e
references which I observe; b u t I confess m y surprise t h a t a man of Schleusner's
learning and diligence, resident, as I believe he was, at W i t t e n b e r g , should have
failed in discharging so necessary a p a r t of the task he has u n d e r t a k e n . The
s t u d e n t who uses Schleusner's work, if he finds a. statement t h a t such or such

* Y f i t h respect to Schleusr.er, it w i l l b e sufficient to notice, a m o n g m a n y instances, his article on the

word i'iuií;, as s h o w i n g his feelings. W h e r e v e r a voice from heaven is m e n t i o n e d , h e quietly ( § 6 . )
translates the word by t h u n d e r ; aud says, that it w a s a J e w i s h c u s t o m t o designate thunder in a similar
way. E v e n if he were right, it would be perfectly unpardonable for a L e x i c o g r a p h e r t h u s arbitrarily to
decide the sense of Scripture, in direct opposition to the general voice of scholars as w e l l as divines.
T h e reader who w i l l look to the words eávarof and 0SÓ;TVÉUÍ-°S in W a h l w i l l find that h i s o r t h o d o j y
is of a very questionable naturc.
f A s a s i n g l e instance, I would refer to Schleusner's article o n 'EiriXaft^ívu), §. 6 and 7-
í I t is curious that Schleusner is often contented with the first loóse reference even to those c o m m o n
authors w h o m he m u s t have liad by hiía. T h u s , for e x a m p l c , in Wtpm'unu, H e r o d o t u s is cited b y
puge.
 PREFACE. vii

an usage of a word is supported by various places of profane authors, o u g h t always

t o examine those places for himself, and not rely on t h e accuracy of t h e statement.
H e r e again, as far as I have had opportunities of comparing t h e m , W a h l is entitled
to t h e undoubted preference. I m u s t observe too, among Schleusner's minor de-
fects, t h a t he does not always cite t h e Scripture itself, either of t h e Oíd or N e w
T e s t a m e n t , with accuracy*, though I doubt not t h a t t h e carelessness t h u s evinced
arises from t h e severity of t h e labour he had undergone, and u n d e r which t h e most
patient and laborious spirit will occasionally bend.
Of Bretschneider's work I would only say, t h a t i t appears to me faulty because
t h e a u t h o r endeavours to reduce t h e fleeting and delicate senses of words to an
arrangernent too strictly logical, and t h u s sacrifices utility to t h e appearance of
philosophical accuracy. I t s principal valué arises, I t h i n k , from his intímate
acquaintance with t h e style of t h e Apoeryphal writings of t h e Oíd and N e w Testa-
ment, and t h e illustrations of t h e sacred writings which he is enabled to adduce
from t h a t source.
W a h l appears to me very far t h e first of t h e three in powers of arrangernent and
in critical knowledge of t h e language of Scripture. T o one who lived near a large
library, and did not regard trouble, his book would be most useful; b u t for common
readers, t h e mere fact, t h a t , for t h e sake of saving space, he rarely or never cites
t h e words of any authors, b u t gives references to them, is a serious, n a y , an insu-
perable objection. I n the edition, too, a t present in use f, t h e errors of t h e press,
especially in t h e references to S c r i p t u r e , are so numerous, (a defect very rare in
t h e works of Wahl's diligent and laborious countrymen) t h a t mistakes and trouble
are perpetually arising.
I n addition to these objections, t h e fact, t h a t all these works are w r i t t e n in
L a t i n , renders t h e m less useful to t h e class of readers for whom P a r k h u r s t ' s Lexicón
was especially designed. I t appeared to me, therefore, t h a t I m i g h t be useful, if
I endeavoured, with t h e assistance of these later Lexicons, to make such additions
to P a r k h u r s t , and to introduce such corrections as would a t once give t h e E n g l i s h
reader some of t h e advantages now exclusively possessed by t h e readers of t h e
foreign Lexicons, and present to t h e student in divinity a safe, and, a t all events,
a less insufficient assistant to his studies, than he could have found in P a r k h u r s t
heretofore.

* F o r exaraple, in the word KOTÉKMTI, h e quotes 9 r « , for Bím, in R o m . i v . 1 7 ; and in Kojnáíu he

quotes iir¡ and a dative, from J o h n iv. 6, where we find ¡x w i t h a genitive. S o a g a i n ( v o l . iii. 615.
in Ilnü/tu, § 2 0 . ) w e find an incorrect citation of R o m . viii. 2 ; and in professedly citing the L X X , it i s
not u n c o m m o n for h i m to u s e s o m e of the other versions. Schleusner's w a y , too, of citing the P s a l m s
is m o s t troublesome. H e follows n o general rule, b u t sometimos refers to the L X X , s o m e t i m e s t o the
Hebrew. T h u s , in npoerSoxáw, h e cites a g i v e n p s a l m , as P s . c x v i i i . , a n d i n the very n e x t word h e
cites it as P s . c x i x . I h a v e referred generally to M i l l ' s edition of the L X X , for the P s a l m s . T h e two
latter instances o f inaccuracy (viz. J o h n iv. 6. and R o m . v i i i . 2 . ) are not corrected in the G l a s g o w 4 t o .
edition o f 1 8 2 4 . T h e first is.

t T h e prospectas and a specimen of a new and improved edition h a v e j u s t appeared. To show

h o w inaccurate W a h l is, I would b e g the reader to e x a m i n e his arlicle on Umita.
VIH PIíEFACE.

I ara very far from t h i n k i n g t h a t I have done all t h a t ouglit to be done, or all tliat
under different circumstances of situation, of health, and of other occupations, I
m i g h t perliaps have been able to do myself. W h a t I have done has been nearly this.
I have carefully examined t h e three Lexicons referred to, and have selected from
each article such m a t t e r as appeared to me most useful, adding occasionally from
my own very limited reading, such other information as t h a t reading would supply.
In particular, I have often briefly adverted to t h e various interpretatious of t h e
same passage, having often experienced, when without access to books, t h e pleasure
and advantage of finding t h a t an interpretation which had occurred to myself was a t
least not so unreasonable as not to have been proposed by some writer of credit.
B u t I have not often presumed or pretended to decide on these interpretations,
being fully sensible t h a t t h a t momentous task belongs to more advanced learning
and m a t u r e r years than mine.
T h e additions to t h e present edition are enclosed within square brackets £ ] ;
and when it is remembered t h a t t h e number of additional pages in this edition is
above 200, t h a t a good deal of useless m a t t e r in P a r k h u r s t (especially his etymo-
logies) has been c u t oíf, or printed in smaller type as notes, t h a t many articles are
entirely rewritten, t h a t t h e page itself is very much increased in size, and t h e t y p e
closer, these additions will appear to amount to a t least one t h i r d of t h e work.
I have t h o u g h t t h a t it would be useful for those who are a t t e n d i n g to t h e style of
t h e N e w T e s t a m e n t , to distinguish t h e words which do not occur in t h e L X X
versión of t h e O í d ; and such words are distinguislied accordingly by t h e mark E§sp°.
I have usually added in such cases, as well as others, instanccs from t h e Apocryphal
writings, where such instances a r e f o u n d * .
I t may be r i g h t to notice t h a t no change has been made in P a r k h u r s t ' s view of t h e
Greek Article in t h e Lexicón. T h e fact is, t h a t , as is stated in t h e note there, I h a d
prepared a long article, according to B p . Middleton's view of this subject, adding
instances from t h e N e w T e s t a m e n t u n d e r each head, and v e n t u r i n g to suggest such
observations as occurred to me. B u t since I made t h a t statement, Professor Scholefield
lias republished Bp. Middleton's work, and it can now be procured by every reader.
U n d e r these circumstances, as I am not ashamed to own t h a t I cannot satisfy
myself on a point on which opinions differ so widely, t h a t , while B p , Middleton
inaiutains t h a t the article is always used in compliance with t h e strictest rules, a
living prelate has declared his opinión, t h a t its use is guided b y no rule a t all, I
have withheld the article in question for farther consideration.
I n t h e G r a m m a r I have endeavoured to introduce such additions from B u t t m a n
and Mathiai as may make it (especially in t h e Syntax) more generally useful.
I cannot conclude this preface without publicly expressing t h e obligations I am
under to my brother, t h e Rev. H e n r y Ptose, Fellow of St. J o h n ' s College, for t h e

* F r o m s o m e misconception, w h i c h I a m not n o w able t o e x p l a i n , this mark is not regularly pre-

fixeil to some of the words in the earlier sheets of this w o r k ; and occasionally afterwards a single word
h a s escaped m e . T h e reader w i l l find a l i s t of all these at the end of the A d d e n d a , and I request h i m
to note them with his pen.

f I ranouibcr, especially, that I am answerablc íbi the note on KXiJpc; I V .

 PREFACE. ix

great assistance lie lias given rae in t h e completion of t h i s work. W i t h the excep-
tion of a few additional notes, and a few trifling alterations, he is indeed entitled to
m y thanks for t h e wliole of t h e m a t t e r from t h e word Kap7rbe to Evpá(¿, from
"Yaicívdivog to "Tiro^éXKw, and from Xóproe t o ' H/xog.
I have restored t h e accents to t h e Greek * ; b u t I fear t h a t m y distance from t h e
press, and my consequently never seeing more t h a n t h e Jirst proof, will have caused
many eri-ors of t h e press both on this and other points, for which I m u s t entreat
t h e reader's pardon. H e is earnestly requested to make with his pen t h e corrigenda
given a t t h e end of the volume, as tkey are of some moment.

Horsham, Jan. 2, 1829.

* I should likewise h a v e preferred affixing the points to the H e b r e w , b u t as it w a s found on the

e o m m e n c e m e n t of the work that it w o u l d h a v e been necessary to procure n e w types to carry this
intention i n t o effect, and that d e l a y w o u l d h a v e thence arisen, the plan w a s abandoncd.
 PREFACE

T O T H E F I R S T E D I T I O N .

ABOUT seven years ago was published an H e b r e w a n d E n g l i s h Lexicón, with a

G r a m m a r prefixed; and I m u s t with g r a t i t u d e acknowledge t h a t t h e favourable
reception given by t h e Public to t h a t work has been a considerable support to m e
in going t h r o u g h t h e following laborious performance: t h e general design of which
is to facilítate an accurate and critical knowledge of t h e G r e e k Scriptures of t h e
N e w T e s t a m e n t to all those who u n d e r s t a n d E n g l i s h .
If we consider how long t h e Reformation has been established among u s , a n d
reflect t h a t the Church of E n g l a n d has always professed t h e highest r e g a r d for both
t h e volumes of t h e inspired writings, it m a y appear j u s t l y surprising t h a t t h e
a t t a i n m e n t of the languages, in which those sacred books were originally penned,
has not been long ago made as easy as possible to E n g l i s h P r o t e s t a n t s ; and i t is
still more astonishing t h a t t h e very first entrance on studies so delightful, a n d so
important, has been kept in a g r e a t measure barred against common Christians, by
requiring, as a postulatum for their admittance, t h a t t h e y be previously acquainted
with L a t i n .
A s a sincere friend to sound P r o t e s t a n t i s m , in contradistinction, I mean, from
t h e abominable errors and superstitions of P o p e r y on t h e one h a n d , a n d from t h e
unscriptural, absurd, and wicked reveries of t h e enthusiastic, self-illuminated sects
on t h e other, I could wish i t m i g h t be seriously weighed on t h e present occasion,
whether t h e extraordinary respect still shown by P r o t e s t a n t nations to t h e Román,
in preference to t h e sacred H e b r e w a n d Greek T o n g u e s , be not in trutb. a noxious
relie of Popery. Since t h e time and pains which y o u t h commonly spend on a
language of such real difficulty as t h e L a t i n , m i g h t , w i t h t h e assistance of proper
G r a m m a r s and Lexicons, be abundan ti y sufficient for t h e i r instruction in t h e H e b r e w
of the Oíd, and in t h e G r e e k of t h e N e w T e s t a m e n t , and m i g h t enable t h e m t o
read, in t h e i r original p u r i t y , those Divine W r i t i n g s , on which t h e i r profession as
Protestants, and, what is of yet g r e a t e r moment, t h e i r faith a n d hope as C h r i s t i a n s ,
are founded.
T h a t our country has, from t h e times of t h e Reformation down to t h i s day-, been
blessed with m a n y learned and pious men, will hardly be disputed by a n y who i m -
partially reflect on t h e history of L i t e r a t u r e and Religión among u s ; and y e t i t is
equally certain t h a t few, very few, have endeavoured to introduce t h e i r c o u n t r y m e n
to a direct acquaintance with t h e languages in which t h e Sacred Oracles were a t
first delivered. W h a t poor assistance has till of very late years been offered to t h e
mere English P r o t e s t a n t for enabling him to u n d e r s t a n d t h e original of t h e O í d
T e s t a m e n t , i t is not m y present business particularly to d e c l a r e : with r e g a r d to
t h e New, indeed, somewhat more h a s been a t t e m p t e d . I have now before me a
small octavo, entitled, " A Greek-English Lexicón, containing t h e Derivations a n d
various Significations of all t h e W o r d s in t h e N e w T e s t a m e n t , &c. by T . C , late of
C. C. C , in O x f o r d : London, printed in 1 6 5 8 . " W h o was intended by t h e initials
T . C. I know n o t ; b u t in Calamy's A b r i d g e m e n t of B a x t e r ' s Life, p . 188, it is said,
t h a t M r . Joseplí Caryl, a u t h o r of " An Exposition with practical Observations ou
xii PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION.

t h e Book of J o b , " liad a hand in the work j u s t mentioned. B u t it is t h c less won-

derful t h a t tbe editor, whoever he was, did not choose to p u t his ñame at length í o
t h e title-page of this Lexicón, since it is, in t r u t h , only an abridged translatiou of
Pasor's.; whieh material cireumstance, however, the translator has not been inge-
nuous enough to aeknowledge, ñor, so far as I can find, has ever once mentioned
Pasor's ñame. A t t h e cnd of thc Lexicón, besides a Greek and English Index, and
a grammatical explanation of the second chapter of Romans, are added an English
Translation of Pasor on t h e Greek Dialects of the N. T., and anotlier of t h e common
Greek G r a m m a r . On the whole, as this Lexicón has most of the excellencies of
Pasor's, which is no doubt a valuable work, so i t cannot be denied that it has like-
wise all its imperfections, and particularly t h a t very considerable one which arises
from r a n g i n g t h e Greek words, not alphabetically, b u t u n d e r their respective r o o t s ;
a method which m u s t to a beginner occasion a great deal of unnecessary trouble.
B u t t h e most remarkable work of this kind furnished by the last century is Symson's
Lexicón and Concordance, printed likewise in 1658, in a small folio, u n d e r t h e
titles of " Lexicón Anglo-Grseco L a t i n u m Novi Testamenti," & c and of " ' H T U S
I C A I N H S A I A 9 H K H S S Y M S Q N I A , or A n Alphabetical Concordance of all t h e
G r e e k W o r d s containecl in t h e N e w T e s t a m e n t , by A n d r e w Symson." A per-
formance this, which, whilst it exhibits t h e prodigious labour of its author, can
give one no very high opinión of his genius or skill in t h e a r t of instruction. If,
indeed, t h e method and ingenuity of this writer liad been proportionable to his ín-
d u s t r y , one m i g h t , I t h i n k , almost affirm, t h a t he would have rendered all future
Greek and English Lexicons to t h e N e w T e s t a m e n t in a g r e a t measure superfluous;
but by injudiciously m a k i n g t h e English translation t h e basis of his work, and by
separating the etymological p a r t of t h e Greek from' the explanatory, he has r e n -
dered his book in a manner useless to t h e young seholar, aud in t r u t h hardly m a -
nageable by any but a person of uncomraon application.
After t h e greater p a r t of t h e following sheets liad passed tlirough t h e press I got
a sight of D r . J o h n Williaros's " Concordance to the Greek T e s t a m e n t , with t h e
English Versión to each W o r d , " printed iii-¡ 7 6 7 ; of which I shall only observe,
t h a t t h e Doctor's method is so concise, and his plan so very diffcrent froin mine,
t h a t , liad his Concordance been published sooner, I could have derived no g r e a t
assistance from it.
T h e above-mentioned are all t h e English Lexicons to the Greek T e s t a m e n t t h a t
I can find to have been yet p u b l i s h e d ; and as I have freely and impartially deli-
vered m y sentiments concerning t h e m , it may be reasonably expected t h a t I should
now give some account of my own woi'k.
Proper ñames then being excepted (of which, however, I have inserted some of t h e
principal), the reader will here find all t h e words which occur in t h e New T e s t a -
ment, whether Greek, Oriental, or L a t i n , placed in alphabetical order, together
with the gender and genitive cases of substantives, and t h e terminations of adjectives,
which respectively denote t h e manner in which they are declined. A s t o t h e verbs,
I had once some t h o u g h t s of adding the first futures, perfects, and other principal
tenses, as Schrevelius has done, b u t , upon further consideration, j u d g e d it would
be more for t h e benefit of t h e learner, whenever he was at a loss for t h e tenses of a
verb, carefully to a t t e n d to its characieristic, and then to have immediate recourse
to the G r a m m a r , where, I hope, he will rarely fail of meeting with full in-
formation.
I have further endeavoured accurately lo dislinguish the primitivo from the de-
rived words, and t h a t t h e learner may instantly, by a glance of his eye, disceru t h e
one from t h e other, the former are printed in *capilals, the latter in small letters.
B y primilive words are meant such whose derivatiou can hcfairhj traced no farther
in t h e G r e e k ; and by derivalives, those t h a t are plainly deducible from some other
more simple word, or words, in t h a t language. I t must be confessed t h a t E t y m o -
logical writers have, by their forced and whirnsical derivations, drawn upon t h e m -
sclves p a r t of that contempt which has been so liberally poured upon t h e m ; and as

N . B . T h e Oriental and Ijatin words w h i c h oecui' in the N e w T e s t a m e n t ' ave l i k e w i s e printed i:i
capital*, since they also m i g h t to be considero.) as /irknitivc» with respect to tile Oretk.
 PREFACE TO T H E FIRST EDITION. xiii

to t h e Grcek Lexicographers in particular, notliing has r u n them into such risible

absurditics as their a t t e m p t i n g to assign Grcek dcrivations to primitivo words of
t h a t íongue. I t were no difficult m a t t e r to produce instances of this sort from
most of t h e Lexicons hitherto published, b u t t h e lcarned reader will easily" recollect
cnow; and for my own p a r t I very willingly forbear to expose raen who, with all
their mistakes, have dcserved well of learning and of religión, to t h e petulancy of
ignorance and t h e contempt of fools. Tile t r u t h of t h e case is plainly this, t h a t
whatever were t h e nature of t h a t confusión a t Babel, yet i t is as evident as auy m a t t e r
of fact can be, t h a t t h e traces of great numbers of H e b r e w words are preserved not
only in t h e Greek and Latin, b u t also in t h e various languages which are still
spoken in t h e world, and particularly in t h e * Northern tongues, where one should
least expect to find them : and in reíation to t h e Greek in particular, I will ven t u r e
to add, after long attention to t h e subject, t h a t almost all t h e f Greek primitives,
which virtually include t h e whole language, m a y be naturally a n d easily deduced
from t h e Hebrew. This, if I am n o t greatly mistaken, I have demonstrated in t h e
cnsuing Lexicón with respect to such %primitives as are used in t h e N e w T e s t a -
m e n t ; and these, i t must be observed, comprehend a very large p a r t of all t h e radi-
cáis in t h e Greek language. A n d though I am far from presuming t h a t in such a
number of derivations no oversights have escaped m e , a n d have proposed some with
a declared doubtfulness of their propriety, y e t i t is not a few mistakes,

Quas aut I n c u r i a / « ( Z í í ,
Aut h u m a n a parum cavit Natura,

t h a t can, with any equitable j u d g e , invalídate t h e general t r u t h which I have e n -

deavonred to establish on the'evidence of many plain and indisputable particulars.
By tlie Greek primitives being t h u s t h r o u g h o u t referred t o their H e b r e w rool.i,
the reíation between those two languages is clearly shown, a n d I cannot b u t hope
this p a r t of m y work m a y both prove a recommendation of i t to those who airead y
understand Hebrew, and incite others to u n d e r t a k e t h e easy task of acquainting
theniselves with t h e rudiments of t h a t original tongue.
Wheu t h e primitiva words in Greek are once settled, i t is no difficult m a t t e r for
a person, tolerably skilled in the language, to refer t h e derivatives a n d compounds
to their respective radicáis. H e r e , iudeed, former Lexicon-writers have contributed
ampie assistance, a n d I have scarcely ever seen reason to diífer from t h e m all in this
branch of our business.
Etymology, however, is b u t a small part of t h e Lexicographer's task. T o assign
t h e prhnary sense of every radical and derived word, a n d thence t o arrange in a
regular order t h e several conseqtiential senses, and to support these by apposite
citations or references, explaining likewise i n their proper places t h e various phrases
and idioms of the l a n g u a g e — H O C Opus, H I C Labor est; in t h e particulars j u s t
mentioned consista t h e main difficulty of writing a Lexicón, a n d b y t h e manuer in
which they are executed m u s t its merit or demerit be principally deterniined. All
I can say for myself in these respeets is, t h a t I have bonestly a n d conscientiously
done my best ,• ñor have I knowingly and wilfully misrepresented a single word or
expression, ñor paid a regard t o t h e opinions of a n y man, or n u m b e r of meu, w h a t -

* S e e T l i o m a s s i n . P r a f a t . i n Glossarium K e b i a i c u m , Pars I V . § v. p . OG, 07.

t T h a t what I have above said m a y not be deemed a novel o p i n i ó n , I think proper to remark, that
the leavned author o f the P o v t - R o y a l G r a m m a r , Preface, p . 8 , edit. N u g e n t , speaking o f the H e b r e w ,
says, it " is the most ancient o f all l a n g u a g e s , from w/icnce the Grcek itscíf derives its origin." And
the wiitcrs of the Universal H i s t o r y , vol. x v i . p . 5 3 , 8 v o . edit.. express thcmselvcs t h u s : " T h a t t h e
most ancient Greek tongue approached m u c h ncarer the Eastern l a n g u a g e s than those dialeets o f i t
used b y even the oldest Greek classics, appears from the obsoleto radices'of that t o n g u e , w h i c h g e n e ,
rally discover ¡rimar rchtiion to the Eust. T h e proximity of the earlicst Grcek l a n g u a g e to the Oriental
tongues w a s well known to I s a a c Casaubon and Erpenius, and m a y b e so to any who e x a m i n e s the Grcek
roots with proper attention." S e e also t h e learaed Gale's Court o f ¡lie Gentiles, P t . I . B . i. cli. 1 2 ,
entitled " Éuropean L a n g u a g e s , especially the Greek and Latin, from the H e b r e w . " [ V i t r í n g a O b s e r v .
Sacv. L i b . i . c a p . vii. and í>r. G r e g . Shárpe's V l l t h Loiter o n k a r a i n g t h e H e b r e w L a n g u a g e , a n d
his Hebrew L e x i c ó n and I n d e x . ]
$ O f these, however, I would be undei'ttood to excepr •.. few which are f o n n e d from the sonhá,
t l n t is, i m m e d i a t e ' . r / m w nature.
 xiv PREFACE TO T H E FIRST EDITION,

ever, further than they appeared to me agreeable to t h e Sacred Oracles, and to tíic
analogy of the Greek tongue.
W h e r e more senses t h a n one are assigned to a word, these are distinctly placed
in several paragraphs, with t h e Román, and in some cases, with t h e common,
numeral figures prefixed; and every sense, which occurs in t h e N e w T e s t a m e n t , is
authorized by citing or referring to t h e passage, or passages, where t h e word is so
applied. T h i s method, a t t h e same time t h a t i t presents t h e more advanced scholar
with t h e evidence on which each particular meaning is a t t r i b u t e d to every word,
will, I doubt not, be also found b y experience t o conduce greatly to t h e ease and
advantage of t h e beginner. A t least i t seems t o me far preferable t o t h a t followed
b y M i n t e r t a n d others, of h u d d l i n g t h e various senses of a word together, a n d
leaving t h e learner to assign t h e distinct meaning of i t in a particular passage as he
cao. O n t h e other hand, I have endeavoured to avoid a fault which, I t h i n k ,
Stockius's over-diligence has sometimes betrayed him into, namely, of multiplying
t h e meanings of words too much b y divisions a n d sub-divisions, which, I apprehend,
t e n d r a t h e r t o perplex t h a n to instruct.
A m o n g t h e various attacks t h a t have been, of late years, made upon Divine R e -
velation by open or disguised infidels, i t is n o t to be wondered t h a t t h e style of t h e
inspired penmen of t h e N e w T e s t a m e n t h a s not escaped their m a l i g n i t y : and i t
m u s t be ovvned t h a t some well-meaning Christian writers have undesignedly con-
tributed to propágate and confirm t h e notion of its barbarousness, b y calling m a n y
forms of expression Hebraisms, which do indeed agree with t h e H e b r e w idiom, b u t
which are also found in t h e purest of t h e Greek claseics, who cannot be supposed to
have h a d any direct acquaintance with t h e H e b r e w tongue* N u m e r o u s instances
of such phrases are given in t h e course of t h e following w o r k : and t o illustrate this
subject a little further, I would beg t h e reader's attention to t h e t h r e e following
observations. F i r s t , t h a t in t h e apostolic age * Greek was t h e most universally
spoken and understood of any language upon e a r t h : b u t secondly, t h a t in all the
E a s t e r n parts of t h e world i t had undoubtedly received a strong t i n c t u r e from t h e
H e b r e w a n d Oriental t o n g u e s : a n d lastly, t h a t t h e books of t h e N e w T e s t a m e n t
were written not only for t h e benefit of this or t h a t particular church, or people,
b u t of t h e whole world, both J e w s and Gentiles. Such being, in t h e time of t h e
apostles, t h e real state of t h e G r e e k language, and of m a n k i n d in respect t o i t , a n d
to t h e Evangelical writings, we m a y defy t h e utmost wit and malice of t h e enemies
of God's Revelation t o point o u t a wiser method of communicating t h e Scriptures
of t h e N e w Testament to t h e world, t h a n t h a t which t h e H o l y Spirit h a s actually
employed, namely, b y causing those Divine Oracles t o be penned in such a Greek
style, as, a t t h e same time t h a t it m i g h t in general be understood by every m a n
who was acquainted with t h e Greek language, was peculiarly conformable to t h e
idiom of t h e J e w s , a n d of t h e Eastern n a t i o n s : and t h e adorable propriety of this
l a t t e r circumstance will appear still more evident, if we reflect t h a t in t h e apostles'
days t h e world, both Jewish a n d f H e a t h e n , h a d been for nearly three h u n d r e d
years in possession of t h e Septuagint versión of t h e O í d Testament [ a t least of t h e
P e n t a t e u c h ] ; t h e Greek of which translation did likewise greatly abound in H e b r e w
and Oriental forms of expression, many of which are adopted by t h e Evangelical
writers.
L e t u s suppose, t h a t a person whose native language was Greek, and who h a d
read some of t h e best Greek authors, b u t was entirely ignorant of t h e Eastern
tongues, h a d m e t with some or all of t h e sacred books of t h e N e w T e s t a m e n t soon
after their publication ; t h e principal difficulty, I apprehend, which one t h u s q u a -
lified would have found in understanding their style, would have arisen, not from t h e
Oriental idioms occurring therein, (for most of these are used also by t h e purest
Greek classics, a n d t h e meaning of others is so plain as not to be easily mistaken,)
b u t from t h e vjeculiar senses in which t h e y apply single words; as, for instance,

* T h u s , about s i x t y years before Christ, Cicero tells a R o m á n audiencc, that " Grcck was read
among- almost all nations, w h i l s t Latir, w a s confined within its o w n narrpw limits. G r a c a l e g u n t u r in
ómnibus feré gentibus, Latina suis fmibus cxiguts sane continentur." P r o Archiá Poeta, § 1 0 , edit.
Gruter.
t [ S e e W h i t a k e r ' s Origin of A r i a n i s m , p . 2 1 3 . ]
 PREFACE TO T H E FIRST EDITION. xv

ílísis, Faith,or believing in God j ¿s.tKawíxvvr¡ for Imputed rigkteousness; Krío-ie

for Creation, or producéion from notking: a n d i t will be necessary t o observe, t h a t ,
in delivering t h a t blessed doctrine which was to the Greelcs foolishness, i t was
absolutely impossible for t h e sacred writers to express themselves a t all, concerning
t h e most essential points, unless they h a d either coined new words, or used such oíd
ones as they already found in a new sense,—New, I mean, t o t h e mere Gentile
Greeks, who were unacquainted even with t h e notions these words were intended t o
convey, till t h e y h a d learned them from t h e explanation of t h e t e r m s themselves, or
from t h e previous preaching of t h e Gospel,—but by no means new to the Grecizing
J e w s , and t o all those who h a d read t h e S e p t u a g i n t translation, since t h e same words
had been there applied in t h e same senses. T h e w r i t e r s , therefore, of t h e N e w T e s t a -
ment, or r a t h e r (with reverence be i t spoken'.) t h e H o l y Spirit, whose penmen
t h e y were, wiselychose,in expressing evangelical notions, t o employ such G r e e k t e r m s
as had been long before used for t h e same purposes b y t h e G r e e k translators of t h e
Oíd T e s t a m e n t : and t h u s t h e Septuagint versión, however * imperfect anáfaulty
in m a n y particulars, became, in this respect, n o t t o t h e first a g e of t h e clrurch only,
b u t also to all succeeding generations, t h e connecting link between t h e language of
t h e O í d a n d of t h e N e w Testament, a n d will be regarded in this view as long as
sound j u d g m e n t a n d real learning shall continué among men.
B u t it is time t o r e t u r n , a n d give t h e reader an account of t h e assistances I have
used in compiling t h e ensuing w o r k : I n deriving then t h e Greek primitives from
their H e b r e w origináis, I have received considerable help from Thomassin's M e -
thode d'étudier e t d'enseigner la Grammaire et les L a n g u e s . I have, however,
seen b u t too frequent reason t o dissent from t h e derivations proposed b y t h a t writer,
and have often substituted others more probable ( I hope) in their room. I n t h e
explanatory part, besides continually consulting t h e common Lexicons, a n d m a n y
of the best commentators and critics (a t list of whom m a y be seen below), a n d
occasionally r e c u r r i n g t o a considerable variety of other writers, I have also carefully
perused several of t h e best Greek authors in t h e original, with a direct view t o t h e
improvement of this work. T h e writings of Josephus, in particular, have furnished
m a n y passages for illustrating not only t h e phraseplogy, b u t likewise t h e histories and
predictions of t h e New T e s t a m e n t A n d here I would, once for all, request t h e

* " I t i s certain," say o u r E n g l i s h translators i n their preface, " that ( i . e. t h e L X X ) translation w a s

not so s o u n d a n d perfect, b u t that i t needed, i n many places, correction." A n d again : " I t is evident
that the S e v e n t y were interpreters ; t h e y were n o t prophets. T h e y d i d m a n y t h i n g s w e l l as learned
m e n ; b u t y e t , as men they stumUed and fell, one while t h r o u g h oversight, another w h i l e through
ignorance; y e a , s o m e t i m e s they m a y b e noted to a d d t o t h e original, a n d s o m e t i m e s to take from it.'*
f A l b e r t i J o a n . Observationes Philologica; in Sacros N o v i Fcederis L i b r o s . L u g d . B a t . 1 7 2 5 .
B l a c k w a l l ' s Sacred Classics, 2 v o l s . 8 v o .
Bocharti Opera o m n i a a L e u s d e n , & c . 3 v o l s . fol. L u d g . B a t . 1 6 9 2 .
B o s L a m b e r t E l l i p s e s Grajeas, edit. 7 m a . L u d g . B a t . 1 7 5 0 .
Doddridge's Family Expositor, 6 vols. 4to.
E l s n e r i J a c Observationes Sacra?, 2 t o m . 8 v o . T r a j e c t . a d R h e n . 1720.
F e l l ' s , B i s h o p , Paraphrase and A n n o t a t i o n s u p o n a l l the E p i s t l e s o f S t . P a u l , O x f o r d , 1 6 8 4 .
Gregorii J o a n . N o v u m T e s t a m e n t u m c u m Scholiis Graecis, O x o n . 1 7 0 3 .
Lardner's Credibility o f the Gospel H i s t o r y , v o l . l s t a n d 2d.
L e i g h ' s Critica Sacra.
L o c k e on S t . P a u l ' s E p i s t l e s .
M a r t i n i i C a d m u s Graeco-Phcenix.
M i n t e r t P e t . L e x i c ó n , & c . Francof. a d M e e n . 1 7 2 8 .
Pasoris Georg. L e x i c ó n , & c .
Pali Synopsis.
R a p h e l i i Georg. Annotationes i n S . S . e x X e n o p h o n t e , P o l y b i o , A r r i a n o , e t H e r e d ó t e . 2 tom. 8 v o .
Lugd. Bat. 1747.
S c h m i d i i E r a s m . Concordantia; N . T .
Stockii Christ. C l a v i s , N . T . E d i t . quinta. Lipsia;, 1 7 5 2 .
Suiceri T h e s a u r u s Ecclesiasticus, 2 tom. folio. A m s t e l . 1 6 8 2 .
T r o m i i A b r a n . Concordantia? G r a c a ; i n L X X Interpretes. 2 t o m . folio.
Westenii Joan. Jacob. N o v u m Testamentum G r a c u m , c u m Lect. V a r . et Commentario, 2 t o m .
folio. A m s t e l . 1751.
W h i t b y on the N e w Testament, 2 vols. 4to. Edinburgh, 1 7 6 1 .
W o l f i i J o . Christ. C u r a Philologica;, & c . ñ t o m . 4 t o . H a m b u r g , 1 7 3 9 .
t [ I h a v e also m a d e considerable u s e o f t h e works o f L u c i a n , w h i c h are generally cited according t o
B e n e d i c t u s ' s edition m 2 tomes 1 2 m o , S a l m u r i i , 1 6 1 9 . ]
 PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITlOÑ.

forgívericss of tlio candid and ingenuous, if, on some occasions, I seem to go too far
beyond my title-page, and instead of a Lexicón writer t u r n commentator. I n
mitigation of this offence (if such it be) I m u s t b e g leave to picad, that my grand
view was to throw light on t h e inspirad books of t h e N e w Testament, and to malee
them easily inteligible to t h e English Christian; and t h a t from this, my principal scope,
I hope it will not be found t h a t I have often deviated. And if an author m i g h t be
permitted to speak a word or two more in favour of his own performance, I would in
this place h u m b l y recommend t h e following G r a m m a r and Lexicón, first, to all
those who may have an inclination to learn t h e Greek language, though previously
unaequainted with L a t i n : secondly, t o those who having formerly acquired some
knowledge of Greek at school, b u t having afterwards intermitted such studies, are
in more advanced life desirous of consulting or reading t h e evangelical writers in
t h e original: thirdly, to t h e youth of our schools and universities; who will cer-
tainly meet with m a n y things in this, which are not tO' be found in t h e common
Lexicons, and which, I t r u s t , will t e n d to give them r i g h t apprehensions with re-
g a r d to many particulars, both of Christian faith and practice: and fourthly, m a y
I add t h a t I am in hopes this work m a y be of some service to my younger brethren
of the clergy ? who are not only here presented with a critical explanation of all
the words and pirrases in t h e N e w T e s t a m e n t , and with the illustration of many
difficult passages, b u t are also generally referred to the larger exposiiions of such
writers, both of our own and other countries, as seem to have excelled on t h e several
subjeets of sacred criticism.
After all, I am thoroughly sensible t h a t a work of this kind m u s t , from its very
n a t u r e , be capable of continual improvement, and really apprehend t h a t it is almost
an absurdity to talk of a perfect Lexicón, or D i c t i o n a r y : I have accordingly en-
deavoured, while the sheets were p r i n t i n g off, to supply such deficiencies and correct
such mistakes as had before escaped me ,• and it seems b u t a fair request t h a t no one
would pass a final j u d g m e n t on m y interpretation of any particular word or ex-
pression, till he has consulted not only t h e Lexicón, b u t t h e A p p e n d i x * .
I cannot conclude without expressing a chcerful hope of approbation from the
iruly candid and Christian r e a d e r : b u t as for those, qui se rerum, omnium prhnos
csse putani, nec turnen sunt, who imagine themselves to be much more aecurate and
aecomplished scholars t h a n they really are, and therefore assume a privilege of
haslily condemning or insolenily sneering whatever does not exactly coincide with
their own sentimenls—To such gentlemen as these I would j u s t whisper in t h e ear,

f M í i M E " I S 9 A I fáóv Í*LV r, M I M E ~ I 2 9 A I -

and if they doubt t h e justice of applying t h e proverb to t h e present case, I would

beg them to select a few such words as oceur p r e t t y frequently in t h e Greek Testa-
ment, and endeavour to go t h r o u g h their various acceptations in the manuer of
this Lexicón ; and, if their pride has not quite eaten u p their good nature, I daré
say t h a t two or three triáis of this kind will, át least, t u r n their contempt of t h e
Lexicographer into pity, and incline them to t h i n k t h a t even some considerable and
obvious mistakes m i g h t be j u s t l y pardonable in a work, which, t h e y will be con-
vinced, m u s t have required so long and so cióse an application.
B u t whatever censures malignant criticism may pass on t h e ensuing performance,
or whatever reception it may meet with from m y coúntrymen in general—praised be
the Fatker of Mercies and the God of all Comfort, who, amid a variety of avocations
and iiifirmities, hath enabled me to b r i n g it to a conclusión. A n d may t h e blessing
of the same God attend it to the h e a r t of every r e a d e r ! May Fíe prosper it, to his
own glory, to the dilfusion of Divine knowledge, to the promotion of Christian
practice, to the salvation of souls ! A m e n and A m e n .

* N . B . In this sccond edition the appendix is digested hilo the hody afilie work.
f " I t is easisr to llame, or snecr, than to iniitatc.'"
 XVli

ADVERTISEMENT TG T H E SECOND EDITION.

IN order to give the reader some distinct information in what respecta t h e present
edition of t h e Greek and English Lexicón diífers from the former, i t m a y be proper
to observe,
l s t . T h a t t h e typographical errors of t h a t edition a r e in t h i s carefully corrected.
2dly. T h a t the A p p e n d i x is here digested into t h e body of t h e L e x i c ó n ; so t h a t ,
on any occasion, there will be b u t one alphabet to consult.
3dly. T h a t , since the former edition, the author was, by means of t h e Rev. W i l -
liam Salisbury, rector of Moretón, Essex, favoured with t h e sight of a manuscript
Greek Lexicón ío the New Testament, in three t h i n volumes folio, w r i t t e n in L a t i n
by t h e Rev. J o h n Malí, formerly an eminent schoolmaster a t Bishop's Stortford,
H e r t s , and by him evidently designed and prepared for the press. ü n a careful a n d
attentive perusal it appeared a judicious and valuable work. I t is now reposited in
the library of St. J o h n ' s College. C a m b r i d g e ; and hopes are entertained t h a t some
member of t h a t respectable and learned society will ere long present i t to t h e
public, since it would certainly be a valuable accession to sacred l i t e r a t u r e , by s u p -
p l y i n g in a great measure to t h e youngest s t u d e n t , t h e want of those e m i n e n t
scriptural ciitics, Raphelius, Elsner, A l b e r t i , and Wolfius, not to mention others
therein quoted. However, as M r . Malí and myself liad drawn our information from
nearly t h e same sources, and our plans were in some respects different, I could
derive b u t little additional assistance from his Lexicón for t h e improvement of t h e
present publication.
4thly. T h a t , in this edition, some p a r t s of t h e preceding, which seemed w r o n g or
exceptionable, are expunged, many altered, and m a n y additions made, chiefly from
the accurate Kypke's Observationes S a c r » , and from works lately published in our
own l a n g u a g e ; such as B p . Pearce's Commentary, M r . Bowyer's Conjectures ( 4 t o .
edit. 1/82), D r . George Campbell on the F o u r Gospels, Michaelis's I n t r o d u c t i o n t o
t h e N e w Testament, translated by the learned M r . M a r s h , and by h i m enriched
with many critical and instructive" N o t e s .
5 t h l y . T h a t t h e most material and best authenticated various readings, p a r t i c u -
larly from Mill's, Wetstein's, and Griesbach's editions of t h e G r e e k T e s t a m e n t , a r e
here fairly, though briefly, presented to t h e reader's consideration and j u d g m e n t ;
and may, it is hoped, incite the more advanced student diligently to consult those
elabórate and critical editions, and may particularly induce him to peruse M r .
Marsh's excellent publication above mentioned.
L a s t l y , T h a t , in the whole, about a h u n d r e d and ten pages a r e now added to
t h e Greek and English Lexicón.

NOTICE CONCERNING T H E FIRST OCTAVO EDITION.

T H E reader will please to observe, t h a t in t h i s T h i r d Edition t h e typographical

errors of the former are carefully c o r r e c t e d ; t h a t some explanations a n d positiona
contained therein which seemed erroneous, are here e x p u n g e d or rectified; a n d
some additions made, principally from Kypke's Observationes Sacra?, and from
D r . M a c k n i g h t ' s luminous and valuable Commentary and N o t e s on t h e Apostolical
E p i s t l e s — a work highly m e r i t i n g a place in t h e library of every Christian divine.

"E'P'PaSO.
b
 PLAIN AND EASY

GREEK GRAMMAR,
ADAPTED TO

THE USE OF LEARNERS,

AND Oí"

THOSE W H O UNDERSTAND NO OTHER LANGUAGE THAN ENGLISH.

A N E W EDITION, CORKECTED AND IMPROVED.

—Minas snnt ferendi hanc A r t e m (Grammaticen scilicet) ut tcnuern ac jejumm canillantes, quce nisi
Orutori futuro Fundamenta fidetiter jecerit, quicguid superstruxeris corruet: Necessaria Pueris,
jucunda Senibus, dulcís Secretorum Comes, et qucc vel sola omni Studiarum Genere plus halet
Ojperis quam Ostentationis.
Q U I N T I X I A N . I n s ü t u t . O r a t . l i b . i. c a p . 4- § l«

— Utinam essem bonus Grammaticus ! Sufficit enim el, qui Auctores omnes prole vuti intelligere, esse
bonum Grammaticum.—}¡íon aliunde Dissidia in R e l i g i o n e pendent quám ab Ignoratione G r a m -
maticffi.
P r i m a SCALIGERANA.
 C O N T E N T S.

Page

PREFACE . X X N

Sect.

I . Of the Letters and Reading • • • • 1

I I . OfWords, and first ofthe Article . • . . 4
I I I . Of Nouns Substantive and their Declensions . . . 5
I V . Of the Gender of Nouns Substantive . . . 1 2
V . Of Heteroclites, or Irregular Nouns . • • .ib.
V I . Of Nouns Cognate, Feminine, Patronymics, Gentiles, Possessives,
Amplificatives, Diminutives, Verbals, and Compounds . 13
V I I . Of Adjectives and their Declensions . • • . 1 5
V I I I . Of the Comparison of Adjectives, Sfc. • • . 1 8
I X . OfPronouns . . . . . . 2 0
X . Of Ferbs, and first of Verbs in to . • . 2 2
X I . Ofthe Passive Voice of Verbs in b>, andfirst of the Auxiliary Verb hpl 30
X I I . Of the Middle Voice of Verbs in w, and of the Deponent Verb • 36
X I I I . Of Contracted Verbs . . . . . 39
X I V . Ofthe second Oonjugalion, or of declining Verbs in ¡u . 42
X V . Of Irregular Verbs in ¡j.I . . . . 47
X V I . Of Defective V.erbs 50
X V I I . Of Impersonal Verbs . . . . . 59
X V I I I . Of Adverbs and Interjections . . . . 6 0
X I X . Of Conjunciions . . . . . 61
X X . Of Prepositions . . . . . . i b .
X X I . Of Syntax, and first of Concord . . . . 6 2
Of Government . . . . . 6 5
Of Infinitives and Participles . . . . 76
Of the Construction of Adverbs and Interjections . . ib.
- Of the Construction of Conjunciions and Prepositions . . 76
X X I I . " General Observations for rendering Greek hito English . . ib.
X X I I I . Of Dialects, and particularly of the Attic . . - 7 7
X X I V . A Grammatical Praxis on the first Chapter of St. J o h n ' í Gospel . 79
 PEEFACE.

BEING desirous of assisting m y countrymen, to t h e best of m y abilities, in learnin^

the original G r e e k of t h e N e w T e s t a m e n t , I have t h o u g h t proper t o publish t h e
ensuing G r a m m a r , which is drawn u p in t h e plainest a n d easiest m a n n e r I could
devise, and adapted t o t h e use of t h e mere English reader. I t is t r u e indeed t h a t
we already have several G r e e k G r a m m a r s written in our.own language, a n d could I
have found a n y one of these t h a t would have answered m y purpose, I should have
been very glad to have referred m y readers to i t , a n d to have saved myself t h e
trouble of compiling a new o n e : b u t all t h e G r e e k G r a m m a r s I have y e t seen in
English proceed upon a supposition t h a t t h e learner already u n d e r s t a n d s L a t i n . T h u s ,
for instance, D r . Milner, t h o u g h in t h e preface t o his third edition he remarles t h a t
he has offered to his c o u n t r y m e n THE FIBST GREEK GRAMMAR IN ENGLISH, y e t ih
t h e course of his work h e renders most of t h e G r e e k examples not into English b u t
L a t i n , a n d a t page 8 observes, t h a t h e h a s omitted t h e defnitions of t h i n g s common
to Latin and Greek, because t h e y o u n g scholar is supposed t o be acquainted w i t h
them from his L a t i n G r a m m a r ; a n d t h e a u t h o r of t h e P o r t Royal G r a m m a r , a t t h e
beginning of t h e 7th Book, which t r e a t s of t h e Greek S y n t a x , " professes to comprise
no more precisely t h a n mhat the Greek varíes in from the Latin, j u d g i n g i t q u i t e
unnecessary to repeat h o w an adjective agrees with its substantive, or a verb with
its nominative, and such other rules as are exacily uniform in both languages."
E d i t . N u g e n t , p . 3 1 5 . L e t m e add, t h a t every m a n who has t h o u g h t much upon
such a curious and extensive subject as G r a m m a r m a y j u s t l y claim some indulgence
to his own notions concerning i t , a n d o u g h t to be allowed his own peculiar method
of arranging his conceptions, a n d communicating them to others.
W h a t I have j u s t alleged (not t o insist on other reasons t h a t m i g h t be u r g e d )
will, I hope, be deemed a sufficient apology for m y a d d i n g another Greek G r a m m a r
to those already published ; a n d far from designing in t h e least t o d e t r a c t from t h e
merit of t h e excellent g r a m m a r i a n s who have preceded m e , I very thankfully ac-
knowledge t h e almost continual assistance I have received from t h e m . Besides t h e
common G r e e k G r a m m a r , I have t h r o u g h o u t consulted t h e P o r t Royal, D r . Busby's,
D r . Milner's, and M r . S t a c k h o u s e ' s ; b u t am most especially obliged to M r . H o l m e s ,
t h o u g h in deducing the tenses of verbsfrom their theme I have preferred t h e com-
mon method, as appearing to me more easy and simple t h a n h i s ; and have in t h e
S y n t a x endeavoured to illustrate t h e government of Greek verbs, by the forcé of a
preposition underslood, in a fuller and clearer m a n n e r than is done in any other work
of t h e kind t h a t h a s come to m y knowledge.
I n m a k i n g use of this G r a m m a r , t h e rules and examples, which are printed in t h e
larger English a n d G r e e k types, should be carefully distinguished from those t h a t
are printed in t h e smaller. T h e former are t h e principal and most necessary, a n d
are * all t h a t even t h e youngest scholar needs t o learn by h e a r t : as for t h e others,
it will be sufficient t o read them over attentively two or t h r e e times, a n d t o consult
the G r a m m a r for them as occasion m a y r e q u i r e .
B u t since t h i s work m a y not improbably fall into t h e h a n d s of some persons w h o ,
though destitute of the beneft of a master, m a y y e t be desirous of acquainting t h e m -
selves with t h e original language of the New Testament, I shall, in t h i s place, a d d
some more particular a n d minute directions, to assist in such a t r u l y laudable, and
(lampersuaded) by nomeans impracticable, underta/áng.

* O n l y observe that the e x a m p l e s o f t h e active and passive voices o f Túwrw ( S e c t . X . a n d X I . ) , a n d

of the auxiliary verb E¡,a) (Seet. X I . ) , though alsolutely necessary to le learni by heart, are printed in
a smaller character, in order that each o f them m i g h t be presented to the learner at one view.
 xxiv PREFACE.

I t will be necessary, therefore, for such persons, after carefully perusing t h e two
first sections of t h e G r a m m a r , to make themselves perfect in t h e declension of t h e
article, Sect. I I . 14. T h e y should then proceed to t h e I l l d Section, and commit
likewise to memory t h e examples of t h e three declensions of simple nouns, T i / u i ? ;
Aó-yoe and SvXov; ¿S.é\<j>u> and Hwfxa: b u t on this first application to t h e G r a m m a r ,
I would advise them not to trouble themselves a t all with the conlracted nouns
u n d e r each declension, ñor with t h e Áttic nouns under t h e second. T h e principal
rules of t h e I V t h Section are soplain and easy t h a t r e a d i n g t h e m over two or three
times will be sufiicient; and Sect. V . and V I . should a t present be entirely omitted.
A s for t h e declensions of uncontracted adjectives, in Sect. V I L , they can occasion
t h e learner but little difficulty, süpposing him already perfect in declining t h e un-
contracted substantives: t h e conlracted a n d irregular adjectives in this Section
should be left for future consideration ; b u t t h e principal rules and examples in
Sect. V I I I . and I X . are to be now learned. T h e beginning of Sect. X . will require
particular attention, and t h e active voice of a verb in w must be gotten by h e a r t .
T h e principal of t h e following rules should also be committed to memory. I n
Sect. X I . , after reading t h e two first rules, t h e verb Efyu a n d the passive voice of
a verb in w must likewise be learned by heart, ñor can t h e principal rules in this
Section be'dispensed with. I f t h e directions hitherto giveu have been duly ob-
served, t h e formation of t h e middle voice, and of t h e deponent verb in Sect. X I I .
will be very e a s y ; t h e principal rules, however, will here also require t h e same
attention as in t h e preceding Sections; and t h e learner, to t r y his knowledge of t h e
Greek verbs, m a y now a t t e m p t to draw o u t several schemes or trees, as in Sect. X I I .
16, b u t m u s t not be discouraged if he finds t h a t a t first he makes some con-
siderable m i s t a k e s : to be perfect in t h e formation of t h e Greek verbs requires
long use a n d practice in t h e language, and greater readiness in the rules for
fo'rming "the tenses than can reasonably be expected from a beginner. Sect.
X I I I . X I V . X V . and X V I . should be as yet omitted, and an attentive read-
i n g or two will suffice for t h e four following Sections. T h i s brings u s to t h e
Syntax, Sect. X X L , in which t h e learner should commit to memory t h e prin-
cipal rules. A n d t h e general observations in Sect. X X I I . wili, I hope, well
repay his careful and repeated p e r u s á l ; b u t t h e X X I I I d Sect., Of Dialecls, is d e -
signed for his future instruction. A n d now he m a y w i t h o u t further preparation
proceed to t h e Grammatical Praxis in Sect. X X I V . , and should endeavour by t h e
references to t h e foregoing parts of t h e G r a m m a r , and by t h e assistance of t h e
Lexicón, to make himself perfect masier of every word in it, except only t h e con-
lracted nouns a n d verbs, t h e verbs in ¡xi, a n d t h e anomalous o n e s ; and even for all
these, when they occur, he would do well to consult t h e G r a m m a r . H a v i n g t h u s
mastered t h e first chapter of S t . J o h n , he may, with t h e assistance of t h e E n g l i s h
translation. go on to t h e * second and following chapters, still t a k i n g care to accotmt
grammatically for every word in t h e manner of t h e praxis ; a n d as he advances in
reading, he m u s t also peruse in order such p a r t s of t h e G r a m m a r as were before
omitted, and learn by heart t h e examples of t h e contracled substantives, Sect. I I I .
of t h e contracled and irregular adjectives, Sect. V I L of t h e conlracted verbs, and
those in ¡ii in Sect. X I I I . X I V . and X V . I would also particularly recommend to
him, for six or seven months at least, to write down t h e Greek words (especially
t h e primilives) t h a t occur, and their English interpretation, in opposite columns,
and to endeavour, by frequent repetition, thoroughly to connect these in his mind.
A n d t h u s he may, ere long, be enabled, even without t h e assistance of a master, to
read t h e New T e s t a m e n t in the t language wherein it was a t first w r i t t e n , and obtain
t h e satisfaction of examining for himself what were t h e real doctrines of Christ and
his apostles, in t h e words not of •¿.fallible, though t r u l y excelleut, Translation, but
in those of t h e infallible, because inspired, ORIGINAL.

* H o o l e ' s edition o f the Greek T e s t a m e n t , i n w h i c h t h e primitive roots o f t h e Greek words are

printed i n the m a r g i n , seems t h e best for the u s e o f a beginner.
•f I would here b e understood to speak o f the language o f the N e w T e s t a m e n t in general, without
dogmatically deciding that t h e G o s p e l o f S t . M a t t h e w w a s originally written in G r e e k ; o n which s u b -
ject the reader m a y d o well to compare D r . Lardner's History o f the A p o s t l e s a n d E v a n g e l i s t s , C h a p . V .
w i t h D r . George Campbell's Preface to S t . M a t t h e w ' s Gospel.
 rotaíw.TatjeJjrrammar.

T A B L E
O T

L I G A T U R E S O R A B B R E V I A T I O N S

E X J » J L A I N E B .

a\ ¡i ¡JL£V r rcüq

<M TZAÁ • l^v /xev mu rav

U
olv av % V TTjV

2>jro airo ¡W ¡JLÍ0 TT)C,

ap ap /v ¡¿¿¡a TO

7? a
©~ oc T° TO
W
•fio ysv y ov 7" TOV

T¿>
oin é
TOV

K 7%

D os
? OVTOQ
? $ TCV

olg. Sia,
& ¿l •ureqt nS TLO

D QZ T TwP
&VCLI

Otl £K es • s V

c (Xav VI
h a l H
CAJ ÍV <3 eO uv vv

6tn ttfl <% cdat V 7T

car CíT lz¡% VíTéO

o s crcr -LZUO V/TO

6i ÍV

luj rjv <xnw craav vr

MU R Cfl Jt au Xav

Hav
X xi X*i

C h.cL¡a 3 Tai yj.au

H-a-Q
 A PLAIN AND EASY

GREEK GRAMMAR, & . c

SECTION I.

OF T H E LETTERS A N D READING.

1. T H E L e t t e r s in Greek are twenty-four, of which t h e following Table shows,

The Ñames, Capitals, Small, Sound, or Power.

Alpha A a, a
Beta B b
Gamma r •f > 7 g hard, as in good
Delta A d
Epsilon E s e short
Zeta Z z
Eta H n ce, or e long
Theta 0 th
Iota I i i
Kappa K •¿ k
Lambda A x l
Mu M m
Nu N v n
Xi E x
Omicron 0 o o short
Pi n,r P
Eho p V
Sigma 2, C (final) s
Tau T r, 7 t
Upsilon T v u
Phi <D <P ph
Chi X % ch hard, as in cliord
Psi ps
Omega n o long
2 A PLAIN AND EASY SKCT. I.

2. Writing over the letters several times is t h e best way of m a k i n g them familiar
to t h e Learner, who should also, as he is going through t h e G r a m m a r , continually
exercise himself in reading.
3 . r before y, K, i, and x , is sounded like n, as in ayytXog angelos, áyráX?} an-
catee, Xvyt, lunx, tyvoe enchos.
4. 'Y before Í is proriounced like t h e E n g . wh, t h u s VIOQ pronounce ivhios. Comp.
Rule 11. below.
5. Of the Greek letters these seven, a, e, JJ, I, o, i/, to, are vowels ; t h e remaining
seventeen are consonants.
6. T h e vowels, in respect to q u a n t i t y or time in pronouncing, are divided into
long, r¡, to ; short, é, o; doubtful, a, i, v.
7. Diphthongs (AífOoyyoi, i. e. double sounds) are formed of two vowels joined
together, and in Greek may be reckoned t w e l v e ; six proper, cu, av, a , ev, oí,
ov; and six improper, re, r¡, to, r¡v, vi, w » ; t h e little stroke u n d e r a, r¡, to, standing
for Iota, and being called Iota subscribed, or subscript.
8. T h e Consonants are divided into nine mutes, ir, 6, <f>; K, y, %; T, S, 0; four
liquids, X, p, v, p ; o-, and three double letters, i¡ made of ce, or o-S; 0, made of ye,
Kc, or x c ; and \p, of irc, €c, or ée-
9. T h e nine Mutes are divided into tenues, or smooth, ir, c, r ; medite, or inter-
mediaic, €, y, c; and aspírate, or roi/gh, <t>, y. 6; of which t h e labials, or lip-
letters, ir, € , f; the palatines, or palate-letters, K, y, x S ^ ^he dentáis, or a n

teeth-Ietters, T, O, 0, are related respectively, and frequently exchanged for each

other, i. e. one labial for another labial, as TT for € or <p; one palatine for another
palatine, as ic for y or x ; or one dental for another dental, as r for o or 6.
10. If in a word one Mute follows another, a tennis is p u t before a tennis, a me-
dia before a media, and an aspírate before an aspírate, as rérvirrai, for rérvotrai, he
was smitten; e€So¡ios, for '¿TrTO¡xoe, the seventh; éríxpdrjv, for írínrQr¡v, I ivas
smitlen.
11. Every word having a vowel or diphthong for t h e first letter is, in most printed
books, marked at the beginning either with an aspírate, i. e. a rough breathing, ('),
as opoQ pronounce horos,'or with a smooth one ( ' ) , as opoe pronounce oros.
12. T h e former only of these breathings is of necessary use, and may be con-
sidered as a real letter, which was * anciently written H , t then \-, and for expe-
dition (') ; whence t h e other side of t h e letter, - | , in quick writing ( ' ) , was taken to
denote t h e smooth breathing. [Jlt oceurs in this form in t h e most aucient editions
of t h e Greek writers. T h e spiritus were introduced by t h e Alexandrian G r a m -
marians 200 years B . C.]
13. Almost all words beginning with v or % p are aspirated, or marked with a
rough breathing j and if there be two ps in the middle of a word, t h e former is
m a r k e d with a smooth, the latter with a rough, breathing, as Eppúio-w pronounce
errhoso, iróppto porrho.
14. Of t h e marks over words called Accents, I shall only observe, t h a t t h e Acide
( ' ) m a r k s t h e elevation of the voice in a syllable, t h e Grane ( ) t h e depressionv

of it, and t h e Circumflex ( " ) first t h e elevation of the voice, then t h e depression
of it, in the same syllable, and is therefore placed only on long syllables.
15. A Diaeresis ( " ) divides diphthongs, and shows t h a t t h e vowels are to be
sounded sepai'ate; as avirvos, pronounce a-upnos.
1 6. A Diastole ( , ) distinguishes one word from another ; t h u s TO,TE and the is
distinguished from rors then.
17. A n Apostrophe ( ' ) is t h e m a r k of t h e vowels a, e, i, o, or more rarely of t h e
diphthongs at, oí, being rejected a t t h e end of a word, when t h e word following
begins with a vowel, as áXX' Éyái for áAXa l y w ; and observe, t h a t if t h e first vowel

* See the L e x i c ó n under this letter H .

t See Montfaucon's Palaeographia G r a c a , p . 33, 275, 278.
í T h u s m a n y words nsed b y our S a x o n ancestors begin with kr, as h p a c o ' c e raggcd, lipen}» ra'.v,
lijieo"» ÍI rceñ, &e.
 SECT. I. GREEK GRAMMAR. 3

of the second word have an aspírate breathing, a preceding tennis or smooih con-
sonant must be changed into its correspondent aspírate or rcmgh one (comp. above
11.), as a<¡>' fjfiüv for airo rifiaiv, vvj(ff 6\r¡v for vinera o\r¡v. Comp. above 10.
18. N is frequently added to words ending in e or i, if t h e n e x t word begins with
a vowel, to prevent the concurrence of two vowels, as ÍIKOCTIV avdpet for eiKom avSpec
twenty men, TVTTTHÍTIV avróv for TV-KTUVI avrov they heat him, 'éSuiicey á u r w for '¿SIOKE
¿tvTy he gave to him.
19. A letter or syllable is called puré which has a vowel, and impure which has a
consonant, before i t ; t h u s u> in -noiíio is puré, in TVKTW, impure.
2 0 . T h e manner in which most Greek books were formerlv p r i n t e d makes it n e -
cessary ¿o add A Tahle of the most usual ABBREVIATIONS or I,IGATÜRES, which see
fronting page 1.
2 1 . As to the Greek Punctuation, t h a t language, in its present form, has four
marks or stops; the full stop and comma as in E n g l i s h , — a dot placed towards t h e
upper p a r t of the word, and serving both for a colon and a semicolon, as Xóyoe — -

and t h e mark of interrogation resembling our semicolon, as Xóyos ;

22. T h e Greelcs express their Numbers either by their small letters with a dash
over them, thus, ó, or by t h e i r capitals. T o express N u m b e r s by t h e i r small letters
they divide their ¡ilphabet, which, with the addition of t h e t h r e e É-¡rícr¡fin, ? ¡iav, L or
T KÓitira, and ^ adrirt, consistsof t w e n t y - s e r e n l e t t e r s , into t h r e e classcs: t h e l e t t e r s
of the first class, from a to denote Units ; of t h e second, from i to S or Tens ; of
t h e t h i r d , from p to Vj, Hundreds. Thousands are expressed in t h e same order by
adding a dot under the l e t t e r s ; t h u s is 1000.?

Uní Tens. Hundreds. Thousands.

a i / 10 P 100 a 10Ó0
/>' 2 // 20 IT 200 2000
y 3 V 30 T SOO y 300.0
€ 4 / 40 V 400 ¡i 4000
É 5 V 50 .500 E 5000
V
•7 G CO X G00 t 10000
'£ 7 Ó 70 7Ó0 K 20000
V 8 ir' 80 w 800 P 100000
.y 9 L¡ or T 90 TTl 900 <7 200000

T h e y join them t h u s , <á, 11 ; t/3', 12 ; ly, 1 3 , & c . ; 22 ; Xy', 3 3 ; ¡>S, 4 4 , & c . ;

pá, 1 0 1 ; <ná, 2 1 1 ; TK€, 3 2 2 , & c . ; qptá, 1 1 1 1 ; ? x ^ ' > 1768, &c.
I n denoting their numbers b y capitals t h e G r e e k s use six l e t t e r s , I, «* or pía, 1 ;
n , Tíévre, 5 ; A, Aína, 1 0 ; H, H e W w , 1 0 0 ; X , X Í X i a , 1 0 0 0 ; M, Mvpla, 10000.
T w o of these letters placed together signify t h e Sum of t h e N u m b e r s ; t h u s I I is 2,
ITIII 8, AA 20 : and when t h e letter II ( 5 ) incloses any one of these, it denotes that,
it is to be multiplied by 5, or raises it to 5 times its own valué ;_thus | A | is 5 0 ,
|H| 5 0 0 , | x | 5 0 0 0 , | M | 5 0 , 0 0 0 ; and 1768 m a y be t h u s expressed, X | H | H H | A | M I I I L

B 2
4 A PLAIN AND EASY SECT. II.

SECTION II.
OF WORDS, AND FIRST OF THE ARTICLE.

1. WORDS are, in Greek, usually distinguished into eight kinds, called P a r t s of

S p e e c h ; Article, Nonn, Pronoan, Verb, Parliciple, Adverb, Conjunction, Pre-
position.
2. Of wliicli t h e first fiVe are declined, the last three undeclined.
3. A word is said lo be declined when it changes its ending, and to be undeclined,
wlien it does not.
4. T h e Article, Noim, Pronoun, and Participle, are declined by Number, Case,
and Gender.
5. Numbers are two, t h e Singular, which speaks of one, as Xóyoe a, i. e. one,
word; and the Plural, which speaks of more than one, as Xóyoi words.
6. To these t h e Greeks have added a t h i r d Number, called the Dual, which speaks
of two only, as Xúyu> two words: £ T h i s number did not exist in t h e oldest staté of t h e
Greek language. I t is not found in t h e L a t i n , which is in many respects t h e oldest
fonn of the G r e e k ; ñor in the iEolic dialect, which retains far more of t h e ancient
language than t h e others. I t ] is not rauch used in t h e profane w r i t e r s ; and neither in
t h e New T e s t a m e n t , ñor in the Septuagint versión of t h e Oíd, do we ever meet with
a Dual, either Noun o r V e r b ; and therefore—Observe, once for all, that though
in the following examples, bolh of Nouns and Verbs, the D u a l N u m b e r is printed,
yet it may grcally conlribute lo the ease and progress of the Learner entirely to
omit it in declining.
7. A Case is a variation of the termination or ending, denoting certain particles,
of. to, &c.
8. T h e Cases are five in each number, Nominative, Genilive, Dative, Accusative,
and Vocative.
9. * ''• T h i n g s are frequently considered with relation to t h e distinction of Sex or
Gender, as being Male or Peínale, or neither one ñor t h e other. H e n e e "
10. " Substantives are of t h e Masculíne, or Feminine, or Neuter, t h a t is Neither,
Gender."
11. " T h e E n g l i s h language, with singular propriety, following n a t u r e alone,
applies the distinction of Masculine and Feminine only to t h e ñames of a n i m á i s ; all
t h e rest (except in a figurative style) are N e u t e r . " B u t ,
12. In Greek, very many Nouns, which have no reference to Sex, are Masculine
or Feminine.
13. T h e M a r k of t h e Masculine Gender is ó, of t h e Feminine ?;, and of t h e Neuter
TO. T o this t h e Grammarians have given t h e ñame of "Apdpoy, or Article, which
properly denotes ajoint in the body, because of t h e particular connexion it has with
t h e Nouns. A n d before we come to t h e declining of Nouns, it will be necessary t o
be quite perfect in
14. T h e manner of declining t h e Article b, i¡, TO, the or a.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
Mase. Fem. Neut. Mase. Fem. Neut. Mase. Fem. Neut.
Nom. ó, i¡, TU, the or a N. ¿Í, at, ra, the
Gen. rov, TT¡£, rov, of the G. TWV, T5IV, TWV, of the
N. A . TÜJ, ra, Tía, the two
or qf a D. TOÍQ, TOÍQ, TOLQ, tO ÜlC
G. D . TÓLV, raiv, róiv,
Dat. rio, TÍ¡, TI3, to the A. TOVQ, TO.Q, Ta, the
or to a the two
Acc. 7w, -i)v, 7-o, the or a

* B i s h o p L o w t h ' s Introduction to E n g l i s h G r a m m a r , p . 27, 2 8 , 2d e i i t .

SECT. III. GREEK GRAMMAR.

15. T h e Article has no Vocative, b u t the Interjectiou ¿ supplies the defect of this
Case in all Numbers, as O does sometimes both in L a t i n and English.
16. N . B . In declining the Article, and in all the following Declensions of Sub-
stantives, the Learner should repeat the Greek words, Jirst with, and then without,
the English; and should always, in declining, ñame t h e N u m b e r and Case, t h u s :
Singular, Nominative ó, ?'/, ro, the or a; Genitive r a , r)/s, r a , of the or of a; D a t .
rw, rrj, ra, to the or to a, &c. Plur. Nom. óí, CU, r a , Gen. TÜV, TWV, ráv, D a t . ro7e, &c.

SECTION III.
OF NOUNS SUBSTANTIVE, AND THEIR DECLENSIONS.

1. NOUNS or ÑAMES are of two kiuds, Substantive and Adjective.

2 . A Noun Substantive is t h e ñame of a substance or t h i n g , as ávdpwwoc a man,
•KuKefioQ war, KÍIKKOQ beauty.
3 . T h e r e are in Greek three Declensions, or ways of declining Substantives.
Comp. Sect. I I . Rule 3 .
4. Of which the two first have an equal number of syllables in all N u m b e r s and
Cases, and are therefore called * parisyllabic j but t h e last increases in t h e + oblique'
Cases, and so is called % imparisyllabic.

OF THE FIRST DECLKNSION.

5. T h e Jirst Declensiou of Substantives takes, iii general, t h e termination of t h e

Feminine Article, and hath in t h e Nominative four terminations, r¡ and a feminine,
r¡Q and a s masculine ; as i¡ Tifir¡, ?'/ Mova-a; ó 'Ay^itjrjQ, o 'Airelas.
[ T h e Ionic Dialect has n universally in t h e final syllable of this declension, as
ao(¡>ír], ímépn, MáVij, Mí&je. T h e Doric a . T h e A t t i c retains a where a vowel or
p precedes the termination, as trocía, a s , q, veayíac, t a ; iijxépa, ae, q, éxcept cidcipij,
7jc, husked wheat, ai6pr¡, fair weather, KÓQT), T h u c . vi. 5 6 , and t h e compounds of
fiírpétú §.]
[ I n iEolic, t h e forms ne and a s were changed into á, i. e. in the oíd G r e e k , and
so in H o m e r ^TIÍTCL, & c . ; whence t h e L a t i n form Poeta, cometa, &c. H e n e e too
t h e L a t i n s changed Greek ñames in ae into a , and t h e G r e e k s change t h e Román
ñames in a into ac, as SvAAas.l
6. 'H Ti/xí], the or an honour, is t h u s declined:
Singular. Dual. Plural.

N. r¡ Tifi-y'i, the or an honour N, cu Tifi-ái, the honours

N . A . V . ra Ti/i-á,
G. ríje Ttp-ije, of the or an— G . rü>v Tifi-óúc, of the
the two honours
D. rrj lip-ij, to the or an— D . r a l e TILI-CÜQ, tü the—
G. D. T'XÍV Tiyit-cür,
A. rijv Tifi-íjv, the or an— A . rae T¿^t-cig, the—
of the lwo honours
V. S> Ti¡j.-r¡, O honour V ' T¿/ii-ái, O honours

7. T h e Nouns t h a t end in a , r¡e, and a s , differ b u t little from those i 11 >j, and are
thus declined:

Sing. N . t¡ M S <ra, a Muse, G . r í j s MBVÍJS, D . TÍ¡ MSO-JJ, A . ri¡v M e o - a v , V . iu M ú a x i .

* F r o m the L a t i n par equal, and s y l l a b a a syllable.

+ A l l the Cases e x c e p t the N o m i n a t i v e are b y G r a m m a r i a n s called oblique because ti.ey dcvialc or
decline from the N o m i n a t i v e .
. :¡: F r o m the L a t i n impar uiieqiuil, and s y l l a b a a sijlhibk.
§ I n Picrson 011 Mocris, p . 1 8 4 . a l e w more c x a m p l c s are givci:.
 6 A PLAIN AND EASY SECT. TIL

Sing. N . !¡ 'Ay\iat]s, Anclases, G . r a 'Ayxícm, D . r¿> 'Ay^ían, A . TOV 'Ay^ío-tiv,

V. <¿ 'Ay^ítrr).
Sing. N . ó ' A t ^ t i a c , Mncas, G. rS ' A í v c í b , D . rjJ 'Aivhq, A . rov ' A i m a y , V. w
'Aivéia.
I n the D u a l antl Plural they are all declined like TIJUJ/.
8. N o u n s ending in Sa, da, p a , and a puré (see Sect. 1.19.) make their Genitive
in oe, and Dative in a, as Ar¡Sa, Máp0a, fi/xépa, (¡>i\la; a n d so do Nouns in a con-
tracted of «a, as ¡iva. from pvcia.
9. Nouns in a s and tjc reject g in their Vocative.
10. B u t Nouns ending in rr/g, and those denoting countries and nations, Poetic
N o u n s in TRR¡g, and t h e Compouuds of psrpéto to measure, ntoXéio to sell, and rpi£w to
beat, make their Vocative in a; t h u s , Kptrr¡e, Títpang (a Tersian), KVVÜJTTTJQ, yeo-
pírprjc, ¡3i£\wTr¿>\r]c, Traidorpl^ví, have t h e Vocatives \cpvra, Tíépaa, &c.
11. Nouns in O-TT¡Q have either r) or a i n t h e Vocative, as Xnariig, Voc. <u Xr¡o-T7¡
or Xr¡trrá.
12. Some Nouns in ag make a in t h e Genitive, especially proper ñames, a s
Boppac, QwfxÜQ, Krjty&g, Aaicáe, G . Boppá, Qcúfia, lír¡(j>a, AHKÜ. [ I n oíd Greek ( H o -
mer's Iliad, <j>. 8 5 ) , from t h e Nom. r¡g, two forms, ao and ew, occur, of which t h e I s t
remained i n Doric ( P i n d . P y t h . iv. 2 1 ) , t h e 2 d i n lonic (see H e r o d o t u s , p a s s i m ) ;
and, in some cases, in A t t i c . T h i s form is always monosyllabic; see t h e ü r s t line of
ihe Iliad. I t was, of course, originally written eo, a n d henee carne t h e A t t i c con-
traction a, and the iEolic form ev. F r o m t h e I s t form ao, aróse t h e Doric genitive
a, which is retained in proper ñames and some other nouns b y t h e Attics.]
13. Contraction is t h e drawing of two final syllables into o n e : A n d t h e r e a r e
contracled Nouns of every declension. I n this t h e general rule of contraction is, to
c u t off the vowel before t h e termination t h r o u g h o u t all t h e C a s e s ; t h u s , N . ?/ yaXtrj,
yaXfj (a weasel), G . ríjc yaXér¡g, yaXTjg, D . TT¡ yaXérj, yaXij, A. TR)v yaXérjv, yaXrjv,
V . T!> yaXít], yaXij; N . i¡ pveta, ¡J.va (a poundj, G. rfjg pváag, [ivas, D . rrj pvciq,
[IVA, A . -i¡v iiváav, ¡ivav. B u t ta is contracted into r¡, as N . 'TZppéag,—rjg, (Mer-
curij), D . "Eppéa, — A . 'JLpjxéav, —ijv, unless p or a vowel immediately precedes,
and then t h e contraction is in a, as ipéa, a , wool. O?; is contracted into r\, as (fem.)
hirXón, ¿iirXrj, simple,

OF T H E SECOND DECLENSION.

14. T h e second Declension takes, in general, t h e termination of t h e masculine or

neuter Article, and hath in t h e Nominative two terminations, og masculine and fe-
mine, and ov neuter, as ó Xóyog a word, r¡ ¿Siig a way, TO tyXov wood.
15. 'O Aóyog the or a word is t h u s declined :
Singular. Dual. Plural.

N . ó A ó y - o c the o r a word N. óc A ó y - o i the words

N . A . V . TU) Aóy-a>
G. rov Aóy-ov of the o r of a— G . Toiv Aóy-wv of the—
the two words
D. TÜ> A ó y - w to the o r to a— D . TOÍg Aóy-oig to the—
G. D . róiv Aóy-oiv of
A. TOV Aóy-ov the o r a word A . TOVG Aóy-ovg the—•
or lo the two words
V . <5 Aóy-e O word V. w Aóy-ot O words

16. T h e N e u t e r tyXav is declined in like m a n n e r ; only observe t h a t t h e N o m i -

native, Accusative, and Vocative of neuter Nouns are always alike, and in t h e plural
these Cases, both in t h e second and t h i r d Declension, end in a, t h u s ,
Sing. N . A . V . TO £,vXov, G. TOV £,{JXOV, D . T<¡> ZVXW.
D u a l . N . A . V . TW ¿júXw, G . D . róiv tfiXoiv.
P l u r a l . N . A . V . ra £vXa, G . TWV' tyXiov. D . ro'ig fyXoig.
1 7. T h e * Attics have a peculiar manner of forming some Nouns of this declen-

* T h c r e are three principal D i a k c t s of the Greek l a n g u a g e , ihe A t t i c , l o n i c , and D o r i c . See Sect.

XXIII.
SECT. I I I . GREEK GRAMMAR.

sion, by changing t h e last Vowel or D i p h t h o n g into u , 01 into <>, and a long or ai, t

before t h e termination, into e, as from ó vitos a temple, veó>s, from TO avtoyaiov an

itpper chamber avtoyzwv: And as t h e Attics in all other N o u n s have t h e \ oeative
like t h e Nominative, so in these Nouns also, t h u s ,
Sing, N . V . ó VE¿S, G. rS víí>, D . T<¡¡ vea, A, TOV VEWV.

Dual. N . A . V . TB> VE¿>, G. D . rolv VEÜV.

Plural. N . V . ¿i VEIO, G. TWV veiov, D . rólg VEÜQ, A . re'g VEÚQ.

Sing. N . A . V . TO ¿ivtoyétov, G. T5 ái'wyfw, D . TÍO civúyeo).

D u a l . N . A . V . TW ¿ivúyEi», G. D . TOÍV kvísyztgv.
P l u r a l . N . A . V . r a avúyEto, G. r&v avwyttov, D . rolg ávúyewg.
18. [ I n t h e Accus. t h e A t t i c s often omit v, as Xctyú a haré, É'W the morning;
and this is regular in proper ñames.]
19. T h e r e is one Noun in iog of t h e n e u t e r Gender, ro xpéwe a debt.
20. [ T h e Attics often declined after t h i s form words of t h e 3d_declension, for
we find, yéXaiv from yéXog, ijpuiv and rjpu> from ijpaig, and Mirto (both in t h e G e n . and
Acc.) from Mirtos. O n t h e other hand, t h e later Greeks declined some nouns of t h e
2d decl. in tos, according to t h e 3 d . ]
2 1 . Contractions in this declension are made t h u s , e and o before to or a d i p h -
t h o n g are dropped ,• co and oo are contracted into a; and ECI into ct. T h u s ó áeeX-
(piStog a sister's son :
Sing. N . ó ciceXijuS-Éog, •—5g, G. rS —in, —S, D . rio —íw, —£>, A . róv — ¿ o v , Sv, &c.
D u a l . N . A . V . ™ áSEXéiSéui, —¿i>, G . D . rolv &c¡EXtpiSÉotv, —olv.
P l u r , N . ¿i adEXtbiS-ioi,—OÍ. G. TSJV —ÉWV, —tov, &c.
Sing. N . A. V. ro óVt'oi', oVS)/, a bone, G. r a oVÉa, oVa, D . rt¡¡ OTE'U, ó^to.
D u a l . N . A . V. rio ó^éto, OTÍÜ, G. D . rolv o^íoiv, oVoTV.
P l u r . N . A. V . ra. ¿•zea, oVa, G. TWV ó^itov, ¿<zwv, D . rolg ó-éoig, ótolg.
Sing. N . ó vóog, vüg, the mind, G. TS vén, v5, D . r¿> VOTO, vw, A. róv vóov, vSv.
D u a l . N . A. V . rio vota, vw, G. D . rolv viioiv, voiv.
P l u r . N . V. bi vóoi, yol, G. TWV vówv, VWV, D . rolg, vóoig, volg, A. r¿g vóag, vSg.

[_" T h e Plural and D u a l of t h e form in oog do not occur, b u t are formed by ana-
logy. 'Ave-d/iaSSg and OvyarpiSSg are of this form also." M . ]

OF T H E 'i'HIRD DECLENSION.

22. T h e third Declension is impar'uyllabic, and h a t h in t h e Nominative nine

terminations, a, ¿, , n e u t e r ; to, femiuine; and v, 1, p, g, ib, of all G e n d e r s .
v

'O AEX<¡>ÍV a dolphin is t h u s declined:

Singular. Dual. Plural.
N . ó AE\<J>IV the or a dolphin N. oí AsXtpív-Eg the dolphins
G. TOV A¿k(fiv-og of the or of N . A. V. n i AiXfív-t G . TWV AtXtpív-tiH' of the dol-
a dolphin two dolphins phins
D . T ¿ AtX<fiv-i to the br to a D . ro'ig AíX<fi-o-i to the dol-
dolphin phins
A. rbv AeXflv-a the or a dol- A. rovg AeXflv-ac the dol-
phin G. D . rolv AeXtfiv-oiv phins
V . ¿5 AEX^IV O dolphin of or lo two dol- V. t¿ AeXf~ty-Eg O the or O
phins dolphins

22. T h e N e u t e r ro owpa a body is t h u s declined. Comp. R u k 1G,

Sing. N . A . V. -ó awpa, G . TOV AÓILIAROG, D . rto o-w/xuri.
D u a l . N . A. V. río o-toLiarE, G. D . ro\v tTWj.lárOlV.
P l u r . N . A. V. ra eái/xaru, G. rwv <rb>píi u»>, D . role T av/iam
 8 A P L A I N AND EASY SECT; I I I .

OP THIS GENITIVE SINGULAR.

23. \_Gaiiarally the Genitive ¡s og, e i t h e r — ( 1 . ) Added a t once to the Nominative,

as fií/v, fi-qvÓQ, t h o u g h in most cases t h e long vowel is changed into t h e correspond-
í n g short one, as Xip.yv, Xtpív-óg, l¡x¿>, ?5x°°¿ ( c ° - *)x** ) > ^>
n t r
s ALL< m
J ^his
S Ü M E s n o r t

one is rejected by syñcópe; as KVOJV, KÍÓVOQ, KVVÓQ; irarrip, irarépúg, irarpóg: or ( 2 . )

W h e n t h e Nominative ends in g, t h i s letter in t h e Genitive is changed into og, t h e
short vowel being, as before, introduced, as rpú¡pr\g, rpí-qpeog ; áiSúg, cuSóog —5g ; pág,
(loóg. T h i s rule embraces t h e words begihning with a double letter, as £, i. e. y e ,
Kg or x c , or \[>, i. e. (ig, irg, <pg; for exainple, ai£ (cítyc) ó.iy-óe ; aXánrri^,, (áXáxriKg)
a\w7T£Kog ; 6>pí£ (flpi'xe), rpi^óg j and <f>Xé\p (tpXéfig) (¡¡Xtjióg ; ¿!>\p (&irg) ¿iiróg ; KaTrjXnp,
(ran'fXii^e), /carí/Xi7roe. T h e Nominatives in ag, éig, ag, which make t h e Genitives in
avTog, evrog, ovrog, are hardly exceptions to t h i s rule, as the form of t h e Nominative
was originally avg, evg, and ovg, or more próbably avrg, & c , which was gradually
softened down to t h e present forms. I t m u s t be observed, t h a t in this large d e -
clension, the exceptions to t h e preceding rules are numerous. Próbably t h e forma-
tions were a t first far more regular, b u t as, from various causes, t h e forms of t h e
Nominatives have changed, an apparent i r r e g u l a r i t y has beén introduced. The
most usual is, t h a t , after a votvel in t h e Nominative, instead of og, the terminations
ooc, dog, and roe, are used to preserve t h e length of t h e termination of the N o m i -
native. Use will bést teach which of these terminations is received. T h e following
rules, however, may be useful.]
2 4 . ¡¡(1.) W o r d s in á and i take rog, as crüfia, péXi; except yáXct, yáXaKrog (from
yáXa£ próbably), and óívniri, <rivr]Tnog, (Attice (nrfiireiág.)—(2.) W o r d s in v (except
a-v, ¿fetoe or CUEWC, and TTWV, múcoe) and ág take arog. Some, however, in ag, whose
Jast syllable b u t one is short, take apog, as 'éap, '¿apúg, i. e. t h e y follow the general
r u l e . — ( 3 . ) Neuters in ag short, make arog or aog, which t h e A t t i c s contract into
wg, as Kpéag, Kpéarog, upéuig ; and fetninines iu ag short, make Sog as ¿rarcig, iraTÁSog.
— ( 4 . ) Words in ig make wg (Attice ¿wg), idos, tOde, irog. Próbably t h e original
form was tarog (seo H o m . Iliad, O . 87-), from which t h e others were formed by
elisión and provincial pronunciation.— (5.) Some words in r¡g have nrog, as iréving,
<¡>iXuTr)g. nápwjc (a niountain on t h e borders of A t t i c a ) has líápyrjdog.—(6.) Neu-
t e r s in og make eog ( A t t i c e ag).—(7.) Some words in vg make not only vog, b u t
vcog (as KXafiíg) and vdog (as ¡cópvg).—(8.) Some words in we make h>og, as ijpwg,
and üirog, as <¡>¿}gJ]
2 5 . [ I t m a y be observed generally, t h a t , to account for t h e apparent i r r e g u l a r i -
ties, the original forms of t h e Nominatives should be known. T h u s , for example, of
nouns in yg, some make avrog, some óvrog, some oóg. Those in Svrog are contracted
Nouns, as ¡IsXirug, p¿Xi~HVTog, from ptXvróag, —óevrog; and, as well as those which
form ovrog, fall under t h e general rule ( 2 ) , t h e oíd termination having been tvg or
evrg and ovg or ovrg. Those which form in oog, are próbably not derived from older
forms of this sort, and are therefore also obedient to t h e same r u l e . 'Ohúg was ori-
ginally perhaps óSwv ( H e r o d . vi. 107.) or ¿Sbvg. TíSg has Troíóg ; b u t it seems to
have had ánother form 7roe, as its compounds are often parisyllabic. Again, t h e oíd
forms of yáXa, yvv<], vScop, cruúp, were próbably yáXaí;, yvvaú;, v<Hag, iraie. T h e
diphthongal terminations have many irregular forms, as vávg, vaóg, and vr¡óg ; ypavg
'otal.y ypaóg. Km'e and lie make suág; tcXélg makes icXcicóe.]

OF THE ACGUSATIVE SINGULAR.

26. T h e Accusativc singular usually ends in a: B u t Nouns in ig, vg, avg, and
se, which have oc pura in the Genitive, cliange c of t h e Nominative into v in t h e
Accusative ; as N . ¿'0¡e a serpent, G. ó'^iog, A . ofLv; N . ¡oórpvg a bunch ofgrapes, G.
fjórpvog, A. fiórpvv; N . vávg a slúp, G . vliog, A . vauv; N . (35g an oí; G. fióog, A.
¡3au*. B u t Barytonas, i. e. Nouns not accented on the last syllable, which have og
impure in the Genitive, make in their Accusative botli a and v, as N . epig conten-
tion, G. t'pitoe, A . '¿pLca and ipiv; N . KÓpvg a helmet, G. KÓpuOóg, A . KÓpvOa and

* The Pocts, however, llave fiírpuu, 'i^a, /Sao-.

SECT. I I I . GREEK GRAMMAR. ¡7

KÓpw. Iféc a foot, in t h e Accusative has only TróSa, b u t its Compounds have both
a and v, as woXvwng many footed, TroXvwoSa, and TTOXVTT&V, &c. So K\EÍQ a key, h a s
in t h e Accusative both KXEÍ&I and KXE'LV; iralg a boy,nai¡Sa and iréüv; %ápig, G.
Xápiros, when signifying favour has only xV"; when Goddess xáp -
ira
C )f- a 0x

tones, i. e. Nouns accented on t h e last syllable, also having us i m p u r e in t h e G e n i -

tive, have only a, as ¿Xwíg, ÉXTríBa.~}

OF T H E VOCATIVE SINGULAR.

27. T h e Vocative Singular is generally like t h e Nominative, and always so in *

Participles of this t h i r d Declensiou : B u t sometimes i t diíTers—1. B y c h a n g i n g t h e
long Vowel of t h e Nominative into a short one, as N o m . ó répijv tender, Voc. o)
rípzv; N o m . ó 7r<m/p, Voc. ¿ nárep.—2. B y casting off t h e final c of t h e N o m .
from Nouns in evg and ug, and Barytones in i e and VQ, as N . fiamXevg a Mng, V . t5
(SaatXev; N . ¡3Sc, V . w ¿35 ; N . t t y t c , V . J tyi; N . vtí¡Xvg a stranger, V . ¿ ver¡Xv;
N . iraig, V. & wat. So N . iívat, a Mng, V . w ¿iva. B u t ó 7 r 5 a / o o ¿ , ó odas a tooih, £

have in the Vocative <5 TTBC, ¿ óSág.—S. B y c h a n g i n g s of t h e N o m . into v, or EN-

juto ÍV, as N . ó TíoXvlaiiag Polydamas, V. ¿> líoXvSafiav; N . ¿ ráXag miserable, V .
<5 r á X a v ; N . ó x p<"c agreeable, V . <3 x P' »'- C
a Tnis r u l e
a £
coincides with t h e
m f a c t

last, if we remeraber t h a t these formations in as and eig a r e in general corruptions

of t h e form avs and EVC-]—4. Nouns in w and u>g have t h e Vocative in oí, as A^rw
Laiona, Voc. A ^ r o i . — 5 . P r o p e r Ñames change t h e long Vowel of t h e N o m . into i t s
short one, as N . 'AiróXXwv, Voc. "AwoXXov ; N o m . SaHcpánjCj Voc. l¡í>icpareg.

OF T H E D A T I V E PLURAL.

2 8 . [ T l i e Dative Plural appears t o have been originally formed from t h e N o m i -

native P l u r a l by adding t or en, and considering t h e N e u t e r termination t o be eg
instead of a , as in Ionic, JEolic, and D o r i c , this form remained, rraíSea-cri, &vSpea-tn,
wpay¡xart<r-i. T h e n t h e usual changes for t h e salce of euphony took place, i. e.
some vowels and consonants were omitted, and other alterations were made when
necessary for t h e sake of quantity, which in t h i s case was determined b y t h a t of t h e
Nom. P l u r a l . T h u s opviOÉcrcn, oprídetri, opvidcri, opvwi; rvtyQívTto-ai, TvédévrEcnj
TvfQévrai, rvtpOiütn; a change analogous to t h a t already observed in t h e Nominative*
These r e m a r k s can be easily applied t o éxplain different e x a m p l e s : as practical
rules, t h e following may suffice.] T h e Dative Plural is f o r m e d — 1 . F r o m t h e
Dative singular, by taking o-before i, and rejecting <5, d, v, and r , as D . sing. flórpvi,
D . plur. (ió-pven; Xafj.Tru.Si, Xafnráai; opviQi, opvicn; (SEX<JHJ>I, SeXtjütri; cufian,
aiifiao-i.—2. F r o m t h e N o m . sing. by a d d i n g i to Nouns e n d i n g in £, i¡/, or e after
a diphthong, as N . KÚpa'É,. D . plur. f KÓpcifr; N . "Apaxb, D . p l u r . -\"Apat\ji; N.
(iao-íXeíg, D . plur. fiacnXevcn. B u t K-EÍ'C, G. KTÉVOS, a conib, makes STEO-Í ; wovs, G .
wólog, a foot, TTOO-Í ; and ove, G~. wróg, an ear, ¿>ITÍ.—3. T h e D a t i v e singular EVTI is
in t h e Dative plural changed into tio-t, OVTL i n t o oven, as from ridévti, TIQÉIGI, from
Xéovrt, Xéovcn.—4. Nouns in -qp, G. epoe, by syncope pos, make t h e D a t i v e p l u r a l i n
a¡7Í, as from iraríip, warpácn. So apíiv has cipvácn, virig^ a son, viácri; b u t yacrríip,
yacrríípcri, o w / f p , (rwrrjpcn.
5. T h e Poets often form t h e Dative plural from t h e D a t i v e singular, by
changing t into EO-I or eircn, as D . sing. rjpün to a hero, D . plur.-r/pwfcrt or i)p¿>Eorcn.

* See the Participles A c t i v e under the E x a m p l e s , Sect. X . 1 1 .

A s to the t w o D a t i v e s x f y a f i and "Af oiJ,i, this rule coincides w i t h that i m m e d i a t e l y p r e c e d i n g ; for
xópa£ makes in the D a t i v e sing. xípa.*,, and so in the D a t i v e p l u r . it w o u l d , according to that rule, h a v e
KÍpaxa,, of which y.íí.o'fy is only a different'expression. S o " A p a ^ , D a t . s i n g . "ApoSij'and D a t . p l u r .
'ApxSs-i or "ApxJ/i. C o m p . Sect. I . R u l e o.
 10 A PLAIN AND EASY SECT. I I I .

29. Conlractions in t h i s Declension are of two kinds. T h e first in t h e N o m i -

uative, as well as in all t h e other cases, w i t h o u t changing t h e n a t u r a l terruinations,
as in the two first Declensions. T h u s N . ó X a c t e , Xag, a sione, G. X á a o c , X á o c , & c ;
N . r) ¿ule, d&e, a torch, G. BátSog, Sáciog, & c ; N . TO tap, tfp, spring, G. É a p o e , rjpog,
& c ; N. ó TLLirieie, rtpije honourable, G . rtpr)tvrog, Tipíjvrog, & C . ; N . ó 7rXaKÓttg, i r X a -
KÜg, a calce, G. irXaKÓEvrog, irXaKÜvTog, &c. B u t
30. T h e second sort of Contractions have no place in t h e Nominative, b u t change
t h e n a t u r a l terminations of some other cases. Observe, therefbre,
3 1 . I. The Rules of Contraction.—1. All these N o u n s before contraction are
declined according to t h e example AtX<¡>ív; b u t — 2 . W h e n contracted, to avoid t h e
concourse of vowels, the Genitives singular change t h e i r a o or a w into ta; aot into
ta; o o into ov; and likewise t h e e o into ov, tta plur. into ta, tot dual into oí, if t h e y
come from Nouns in ?;s, tg, or og.—3. Datives singular always contract ai into q, ¿i
into et, u into i, o¿ into oí.—4. Nominatives, Accusatives, a n d Vocatives contract
a s and a a , a n d ta after p into a, ta from ijc puré into a or r\ (as iiyirig, Acc. vyia
a n d vytrj), ta, impure into-77; also te from r¡g, eg, or og into r) ; ttg, tag, into tig;
ta into t, and tag into tg; vtg, vag into vg ; otg, oag into ag ; oa into ta.
N . B . Though these Rules of Contraction must necessarily appear puzzling to a
beginner, yet, for his encouragement, he may be assured that PRACTIC E mili soon
make them familiar, and indeed the best way of learning them will be by diligently
committing to memory the following example of contracted Nouns. W e observe
then,
32. I I . The Cases to be contracted.
1. N o u n s in r¡g, og, and eg are contracted in all cases t h a t can a d m i t of contrac-
tion. A n d note, t h a t some N o u n s in r¡g are masculine, others f e m i n i n e ; N o u n s in
og and rjg n e u t e r only.
'O Aripoadtvijg Demosthenes is t h u s declined and c o n t r a c t e d :
Sing. N . ó Ar¡jxotrQtv-r)g, G . — t o g , ovg, D . —£Í, ti, A. —ta, v, V . — t g .
D u a l . N . A . V . Aiqpoadtv-tt, n, G . D . — t o t v , otv.
P l u r . N . V . AnjioaQtvttg, ttg, G . — t t a v , táv, D . — t a i , A . — £ a e , ttg"'.
N e u t e r s in tg and og are t h u s declined.
S i n g . N . A . V . TO réX-og (an end), G . —tog, ovg, D . — t i , ti.
D u a l . N . A . V. rt\-tt, i], G . — t o t v , otv.
P l u r . N . A . V . rÉX-EA, r¡, G. —ttav, tav, D . — t a i .
N o t e , T h e compounds of kXe'oc are doubly contracted, as N . ó 'H-patcX-big, ijg,
G. —éeog, tug, and tog, [observe also, t h a t , in neuters, if a vowel precedes ta, it is
contracted only into a, not r¡, as r a XP¿ ñ '
a o n l
X P ° e , nXéa from k X e o c J & c . b u t
£

Voc. ' H p á / c X - £ £ £ , —tig. Some proper ñames in r¡g form t h e Accusative in r¡v, as
'Aptcrrotpávng, Acc. 'Apiuro^áv-qv.—This is usually called the first Declension of con-
tracted N o u n s .
2. N o u n s in tg and t are contracted only in t h e D a t i v e singular, and in t h e
Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative p l u r a l ; tg is masculine or feminine, 1 neuter.
Sing. N ó otpig (a serpeni), G. —tog, D . — i i , 1, A. — i v , V . —Í.
D u a l . N . A . V . o(¡>it, G. D . —wtv.
P l u r . N . V. 0(¡>ttg, — t e , G. •—itay, D . — t a i , A. — l a g , ig.

N e u t e r s in 1, as o-ívnin mustard, are declined in t h e same manner, only t h e Nom.

Acc. and Voc. sing. are alike (conrp. R u l e 16'.), and t h e Nom. Acc. and Voc. p l u r .
are formed — t a — 1 . — T h i s Declension in tog is properly lonic, as appears from its
being used by H e r o d o t u s , who wrote in t h a t dialect. T h e A t t i c form, which is used
by t h e W r i t e r s of t h e N . T . is as follows:

* [ I t m u s t be observed, that proper ñ a m e s h a v e properly 110 plural. T h e learner w i l l , thcreíorc,

atteiitl only to t h e / ó r a w . ]
SBCT. I I I . GREEK GRAMMAR. II

Sing. N . ó ty-is, G. —eu>s, D . —¿i, EI, A. —tv, V . — i .

D u a l . N . A . V. 6(j>-ee, G. D . — EIOV.
Plur. N . V. 0<¡>-EE£, EIQ, G. EB)V, D . ECI, ACC. — EU£, EIS-
T h u s also a r e declined R¡ hvvapis poner, I) wúXis a CUY, &c.
T h i s is usually called t h e second Declension of contracted Nouns.
3 . N o u n s in EVQ, VS, and v, ( G . EOS) a r e likewise contracted only in t h e D a t i v e
singular, and in t h e Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative plural, as
Sing. N . ó fla<n\-EV£ (a kingj, G. — i o s , A t t i c —itas, D . — i i , E'I, A. — i a ,
V. — év.
D u a l . N . A . V . fiaaiX-ie, G. D . —íoiv.
Plur. N . V. $aaik-ÍE£, — E i q , G. —EIÚV, D . —Ivaí, A. •—ias, etg.
So ¿ iríjxve (a cubit), G. — E O S , A t t . — E Ü > S ; b u t A. — v v , V . — v , and D a t . p l u r .
7n';Y,£<"-—So t h e n e u t . ró atrrv a city ; only remember t h a t t h e Nom. Acc. a n d Voc.
sing. are alike, and t h a t t h e Nom. Acc. a n d Voc. plur. a r e formed in — e a , T¡.—
This is called t h e third Declension of contracted Nouns.
4. Nouns which end in vs, G. vos, contract only in t h e N o m . Acc. a n d Voc. p l u r .
as b fiórp-vs, G. — v o s , N . V . plur. f3órp-v££, vs, A. — v a s , vs. So ó < r á v v £ ear a n

of com, b l^Ovs a fish, i¡ apmvs a net, r\ b~pvs an oak.

[JThe following a r e somewhat irregular.
1. Sing. N . vavs. G. vE¿is, or vrjóg, o r vaos- D . vrjt. A . vavv, a n d in l a t e r w r i t e r s
rda. D u a l . Nom. and Acc. are w a n t i n g ; G. and D . VEOIV.
P l u r . N . VTIEQ, and vavs in later writers. G. VEGIV. D . vavai. A . vavs, and iu late
writers váas.
2. S. N . ypavs, G. y p a ó c , D . ypai and YPRF'I, A. ypdvv, V . ypav.
P . N . YPAES and YPRJES, G. ypátav, D . ypávcri, A. ypávs-
3. S. N. G. ¡3oós, D . j3oí, A. ¡3ev.
P . N . /3óe£, G. ¡3óü)v, D . ¡3aaí, A . ¡jas a n d /3óas.]
5 . N o u n s in w and u>s ai e contracted only in t h e singular, t h e i r dual a n d
-

plural being declined like Xóyos of t h e second Declension, as ?; \EX¿> « wornan in

child-bed.
Sing. N . // XE^-W, G. —óos, OVS, D . —¿'i, oí, A. — « a , w, V . — 5 t .
T h e r e are b u t two Nouns in o>s t h a t follow this form, i) alSús modesly, and i; i¡i>s
the morning. Nouns t h u s declined are feminine only.—This is usually called t h e
fourth Declension of contracted N o u n s .
6. Nouns n e u t e r in as pire and pas a r e contracted in all t h e cases t h a t admit of
contraction, t h u s ,
Sing. N . A. V . r o KÉP-as, (a horn) G. — c t r o c , aos, u>£, D . — a n , di, a.
D u a l . N . A . V. KÉP-are, a t , a, G. D . —aroiv, aotv, av.
P l u r . N . A. V. ICIP-ara, aa, a, G . — a r w v , awv, tov, D . —atri.
So r o Kpiac flesh.—This is usually called t h e ffth Declension of contracted
Nouns.
3 3 . I n all t h e Declensions of S u b s t a n t i v e s — 1 . T h e Nominative, Accusative, and
Vocative dual are always a l i k e ; so t h e Genitive and D a t i v e d u a l . — 2 . I n t h e plural
t h e Nominative and Vocative are always a l i k e ; a n d t h e Genitive always ends in
wv.—3. I n every N u m b e r t h e Nominative, Accusative, a n d Vocative of n e u t e r
Nouns are always t h e same, and in t h e plural these cases, iíuncontracled, always
end in a, except in A t t i c N o u n s of t h e second Declension in tov. See above
Rule 16.
34. N . B . Here leí the Learner, before he proceeds, write down with the
Arhcle through all the Numbers and Cases, and comwit lo memory, several other
examples of Nouns of each Declension, besides those above given.—*Opy»/ aiiger,
WPÓLIVA the poop a ship, ayopa a markcl-place, PIAPÍA Jblli/, rapiñe a biitlcr.
 12 A PLAIN AND EASY SECT. I V . — V .

oarpáirriQ a viceroy, Kpirrjg a judge, óu'oiruXrjs a vinlner, m a y be very proper ex-

amples of the first D e c l e n s i o n ; — ' H blóg a may, ra TÍKVOV a child, of t h e second ;
— A n d of t h e third, b ¡irjv a month, b aurrip a star, rj vv¡i, G. — / c r o e , the nighl,
i¡ <¡>Xé\p, G. —¿Gog, a vein, fiéXi honey, váivv, G.—vos, muslard, vót]¡J.a a design ;—
A n d for t h e Contracts in this Declension ?'/ rpivpng a galley, TO 'hnrófxavtQ the Hip-
pomanes, ó TLepocXérig Pericles, i] Svvapig power, both according to t h e Ionio a n d
A t t i c form, ó ¡3pa€evg an umpire, f¡ ypavs, ypáog, an oíd rvoman, i¡ <p£ÍSi¡i parsimony,
ro Kpíag fiesh.

SECTION IV.

OF THE GENDER OF NOUNS SUBSTANTIVE.

1. T H E Gender of Greek Nouns is known either by t h e i r significalion or by their

termination.

I. BY THEIR SIGNIFICATION.

2. Nouns signifying males, winds, months, and rivers, are generally masculine.
3. Nouns signifying Jemales, countrics, islañds, cities, trees, and plañís are for
t h e most p a r t yeminine.
4. N o u n s referring to both sexes are common, as ó kcu í¡ irapOévog a virgin.

II. BY THEIR TERMINATION.

5. In t h e first Declension, N o u n s in 7; and a are feminine, in tjs and ag mas-

culine (as in Sect. I I I . 5 . ) — 6 . I n t h e second Declension, Nouns in og (and <og) are
masculine, and sometimes feminine or common.
7. Nouns in ov are neuter, whatever t h e y signify, a s ' -ó mpámov a damsel, TU
Suycirpiov a little daughter.
8. N o u n s of t h e t h i r d Declension in v, l, p, if», a s — a v r o g , r¡g, eig, tvg, ug, wg, are
generally masculine; in w, iv, y'í,, rrjg—-r¡Tog, tg, vg, aig, avg, ag—aSog, generally
feminine; in a, 1, v, ap, op, ag—aros are almost always neuter.

SECTION V.
O F H E T E R O C L I T E S , OR I R R E G U L A R NOUNS.

1. HETEROCLITES (SO called from heptog icXiróg otherwise declined) are such
N o u n s as differ from t h e common way of declining, by being either defective, va-
riant, or rednndant.
2. Defectives in Number are either singular only, as generally proper Ñames a n d
such as w a n t t h e plural in sense, as t h e ñames of h e r b s , liquors, ages of men, vir-
tues, rices, and t h e l i k e ; or plural only, as t h e feasts of the Gods, t h u s , r a Awvv-
aia the Feast of Bacchus; some Ñames of Cities, as át 'AGiJyai Alhens, ra 'ítpo-
aoXvfia Jerusalem.
SECT. VI. GREEK GRAMMAR. 13

3. Defectives in Case a r e — 1 . Apioles (from a neg. and •KTCXILQ a case), which

have b u t one ending for every case, as t h e Ñames of L e t t e r s , aXéa, fii¡Ta, &c.
foreign Ñames. AatíS, 'I<rpa)'/\,'Names of N u m b e r s from four to a h u n d r e d , as izévre,
et, &c. and some Substantives neuter, as TO ypíwv fate, Bépag the bo^y, yirap a
visión, &c.—2. Monoptotes (from póvog a single, and •xTüoig case), which a r e
used b u t in one case, as >; ^peíw necessity ( H o m e r , II. x. lin. 1 7 2 . ) ?/ cois a gift,
¿ \av ho, such an one ! ho you, Sir.' át KaTaKX&deg the Futes.—3. Diptotes (from
Síg trvice, á n d TVTCIO-IC a case), which have but too cases, as ó Xig a lion, A . TOV Xív;
so t h e D u a l apipa, G. and D . apipoiv, both.—4. Triptotes (from rpíg thrice, a n d
TTTtdo-tg a case), which have b u t three cases, as ó ¡táprvg a witness, A . páprw, D.
plur. pápTvai. So t h e blessed ñame ó 'liicrSg Jesús, as to termination, N . o 'lntrüg,
G. D . V . 'IJ)0-5, A . '\r\a5v.
4. Variants in Gender are masculine in t h e singular, and mase, a n d n e u t . in t h e
plural, as Sing. N . ó Seirpóg a chain; P l u r . ói oeapoi and r a Séapa. So Síifiog, KVK-
Xog, &c. B u t Sing. i) icéXevOog a path ; P l u r . r a icéXevda. Sing. ó ICAT r¡ Táprapog
Tartarus; P l u r . RA T á p r a p a .
5. Variants in Case, as ro yóv-v the knee, TO Sóp-v a spear, G.—aroe; ro iSiap
water, Gen. iciarog; ?/ ywrj a woman, Gen. yvvaiKog, &c. V o c . yui'ai, as if from
yvvaXí. B u t these irregularities m a y be best l e a r n t by USE.
C. Redundants form t h e i r oblique cases in a two-fold manner. T h u s some N o u n s
in tig are declined after both the second and t h i r d Declension, as ó v5g the mind, G .
VH and vóog, D . va and voi. So ypüg, &c. Some Nouns in wg of t h e A t t i c form a r e
declined also according to t h e t h i r d , as ó yéXwg laughter, G. yéXui and yéXuirog; 6
KÚXiog a cable, G. KOXIÚ and itáXwTog. Some N o u n s in r¡g are declined after t h e first
and third, as ó QáXr¡g Thales, G. QáXu and QciXrjTog. 'O Muxjrjg Moses, M a t . viii. 4 ,
liath D a t . Moj/xíj, M a t . xvii. 4 . Acc. Mwafjv, A c t s vi. 1 1 , and also G . Mwo-éwg, M a t ,
xxiii. 2 . D . M w t c í , M a r k ix. 4 . A . Muerta, L u k e xvi. 2 9 , as if from Miomvg. So
from Míiró'0%, Acts vi. 14, we have not only Acc. Mwvtrijv, A c t s vii. 3 5 , b u t also G .
Miovtréwg, A c t s xv. 1 , and D . Miovaü, 2 T i m . iii. 8, as if from Miovirevg. Some
Nouns have a double Genitive, &c. of t h e same declension, i) ríyp-tg, a tigress, G .
—Sog and —toe ; r¡ Sep-tg right, Q. —iSog and — i ? o g . 'O Zevg Júpiter is t h u s de^
clined: G. Z-qvóg or Atoe, D . ZtjvÍ or Au, A . Zr¡vá or Ata, V. <S Zev. T h e t r u t h is^
Atoe, &c. are from Nom. Alg; Z-nvbg, —vi, —va ñ'om Nom. Zi)v.

SECTION VI.

O F NOUNS COGNATE, FEMININE, PATRONYMICS, GENTILES, POS-

SESSIVES, AMPLIFICATIVES, DIMINUTIVES, VERBALS, AND
COMPOUNDS.

1. CÓGNATE Nouns are of various s o r t s ; f o r — 1 . F r o m most Adjectives m a y be

deduced Masculines in wv, Feminines in rr¡g, ta, vvrj, and N e u t e r s in tov; as from
AíXog, i}, ov, come $ÍXti>v (a proper ñame) a n d <j>tXórrig iptXía, (¡>¿Xoirvvr¡, and ró tptXíov
s

love, friendship>. —2.

J
F r o m t h e D a t i v e p l u r a l of t h e t h i r d Declension in uo-i are
fórmed feminines in ta ; as from yépwv an oíd man-, D a t . plur. •yépuai, comes yeputría,
a senate.—3. F r o m Adjectives in i¡g come feminines in t t a ; as from áXr¡drig true,
a.Xr¡deia trulh.—4. F r o m Substantives are made Adjectives in atog, aXeog, and tog,
as cpopa'iog,, ¿pávtog, from Bpópog, ¿pavóg
2. Feminine Substantives from Masculines of t h e first Declension in i¡g end in
if, rpia, or rptg, as ?; irpofiJTig a prophetess, ?'; iroií]Tpta a poetess, y) ávXtiTpíg a inin-
streless, from ó 7RPO^nr))e, ó TROORR?)c, ó áuXtjrije- F r o m Masculines of t h e second
 14. A PLAIN AND EASY S-RCT. V I .

t h e y end !n a, trr¡, or a i r a , as Sea a goddess, BitXn a femóle slave, larpívn afemaie

f>hysician, XvKaiva a she-wolf from their Masculinos Qeós, oSXos, la-pos, XÍIKOC.
F r o m Masculines of t h e third they often end in aiva, ao-cra, ¿ta, as Xéaiva a lioness,
«.vaaaa a queen, lépeta a priestess, from b Xéwv a lian, o avat, a kíng, 6 lépeos
<z priest.
3 . Patronymics (from irarpog ovopa, the ñame of afalher) are ñames which t h e
Poets give to persons from their fathers or aneestors, t h u s TInXsíSris is the son of
Peleus, 'ArpelSns the son of Atrens, 'HpaKXeíSns a descendant qf Hercules.—1. Mas-
culine Patronymics end in aSr¡s, tSr¡s, or taSr¡s; for 1. F r o m primitive proper Ñ a m e s
of t h e Jirst DecJension in as or r¡s, or of the second in ios, come Patronymics in aSr¡£.
as 'AtvEi-áorjs, 'liriror-áo'ns, 'HXi-áBr¡s, from ' A i v a - a e , 'ITTTVÚT ns, " H X i - o s . 2. F r o m
t h e second in os impure, or from the Genitive of t h e third, in iSr¡s, as 'AiadSris,
NccTTop-íd'ris, from 'Ataic-óg, N é o r - w p , — o p o g * . B u t when t h e penúltima (i. e. t h e
last syllable but one) of any Genitive is long, t h e last syllable may be changed into
laSrjg, as 'Ayyacr-Lciciis, ' ArXavr-iáorfg, from 'Ay\lo--qs, a ; " A r X a e , avrog. So from
n ^ X t v c , éog, Ionic — i j o g , comes TliiXe-íSris, by crasis TÍj)Xr¡eíS7]s, and lonic IL/Xj/¿Úí!?JC.
— 2 . Feminine Patronymics end in as, t e , nís, tvr¡, or wvn; for 1. F r o m Masculina
Patronymics in aSqs and iSr¡s, by leaving out Sr¡, come a e and t e , as ' H X i á c and
KaBfiís, from 'HXiáSqs and KaS¡j.íSr¡s ; b u t t h e P o e t s often insert as KaSfinís,
üpicrri'is, Xpvo-r¡'íg. 2. Feminine Patronymics from primitive Nouns of t h e second
a n d ¿AÍVÍZ Declension with t h e last syllable t impure, end in tvr¡, with the last syl-
Jable puré in m'i\; as 'ASpacrr-ívn, Nrfp-ívn, from " A c í p a o r - o e , Nnp-eíg; and 'Aicpiai-
¿>VT\, 'lltTi-úvq, from 'Auptcn-os, 'Herí-wv. Note, P a t r o n y m i c s in c>?/e and are of t h e
first Declension, but in wv, as, and t e of t h e t h i r d .
4. Gentiles, or t h e ñames of Tomnsmen, end generally in rr¡s, a t o e , tos, tvos, or
f u e ; as ^TtaprúiTifS; 'AOnvaios, BáévXwvios, 'Prjyivos, 'AXe^avSpeíg, from t h e Cities
~2¡TtapTi\, 'Adijvaí, Ba€vXwv, 'Pnytov, 'AXe^avSpeía. Feminines end often in acra,
as Kpiicrcra, KiXícrcra, from Kp?;r?j, K t X t / í t a ; and sometimes in t a , from Masculines in
ios, as 'Adrjvaía, & C .
5. Possessives, or Adjectives expressing Possession or Relation, are derived both
from proper Ñames and Appellatives, and end in eos, tos, eius, KOS, VOS, or uSns; as
'Europeos, warpiíiiog, 'Ay(iXXewg, pacriKÓs, avdpwinvos, Xt6¿>Sns, from "E/crwp, warrip,
''A-^iXXevg, fitío-a, L'ivBpwñOs, Xtdos.
6. Amplijicatives increase t h e signiíication, and end in o e , tas, or iov, as apvtws
afull-grown lamb, from ípg a lamb; iraih'viig a great boy, a lad, from 7 r a t e a boy ;
•Kioywvías a man iviih a great beard, f r o m rrwyiov a beard ; arofiías one with a large
moiith, from arúfia a mouth ; yítXwv blubber-lipped, f r o m -^eíkog a lip.
7. Diminutives are derived both from proper Ñames and f r o m Appellatives. I.
Masculines generally end in wv, at,, CTKOS, XOS, VS, as p'vpíiov afool, from ptopós, Xí-
Bat; a little stone, from Xídos, av6pwwí<jKos a little man, a mannikin, from a V 0 p w 7 r o e ,
¿ p w r ú X o e a little love, f r o m epug, — U T O S , Atóvvg, D i m i n u í , of Atovítriog Dionysius.—
2 . F e m i n i n e s end in tg, m:rf, vr\, as xanvíg a little fountain, from Kpijvr], •¡raillo-i:r¡ a
little maid, from 7RATE, wa'iSog, TTOXíxvv a little city, from 7RÓXTE.—3. N e u t e r s in mv,
Svyárpiov a little daughter, from Bvyárrip — p o e , [and especially in Siov.']
8. Verbals are deduced, Ist, from t h e active present of Veros, as vkn a victory,
from vucáiú to conquer, etúos a form, from ttSu to see: 2dly, from t h e 2d Aor. as
(j>vyr)jlight, from efvyoi', 2 Aor. of <pevyw to Jlec; wciQog suffering, from eiradov,
2 Aor. of obsolete 7tí/0<<J to suffer .- 3dly, from t h e Perfect Middle, as X ó y o e a word,
from X t X o y a , Perf. Mid. of Xéyia to speak ; rpofr) food, from rérpofa, Perf. M i d . of
rpéipw to nourish: 4thly, from t h e t h r e e Persons singular of t h e Perfect Passive,
which end in ¡xai, aai, and raí, as ypá¡xiia a leiier, ypa¡xpr¡ a Une, from ytypa¡xfiat,
1 P e r s . Perf. Pass. of ypáipui to write ; úiaXpós a psalm, from '¿\paXpai, 1 P e r s . Perf.
P a s s . of uWcXXci) to sing to music ; xpiatg judgment, from KÉKpiaat, 2 P e r s . Perf. Pass.
of Kptvio tojudge; Boicipacraí proof, from SeSoKÍfiacrai, 2 P e r s . Perf. Pass. of 8oKifiá£ui
a proof ; •KOinrrfs a poet, Xpicrrós, C h r i s t (anointed), -^apaiCTrip a character, pjjrMp
an orator, KidapwTvg the art qf playing on the harp, opyy\aTpa the orchestra, and

* I o n i c Patronymics end in iwv, as from Kptwi Kpovim; D o r i c P a t r o n y m i c s in 8»f, as from Kfimn

f S e e Sect. I . 19.
SECT. V I I . GREEK GRAMMAR.

óp-)(t]arp¡s a dancer, Koiprirt'ipiov a cemetery, áporpov a plough, and Adjectives m

TÍOS, as Xc/créoc, from the respective third Persons Perf. Pass. ireiroír)Tat, K^xpiarai,
ippnrat, tcí^iBaptarat, ¿¡pxv h neKot/trirai,
trra
Kt\apaKrai, f¡p<i¡rai, XéXcwtit.
9. T h e Greeks delight in Compounds. Sometimes t h e y form these of two N o -
minatives, leaving out such letters as would seem harsh, as va.vp.ayia- a sea Jighl,
from vavs a ship, and payv afght; sometimes of a Genitive and Nominative, as
VCÍIO-OLKOS a dock, literally a ship's house, vetas, '¿cieos: sometimes of a D a t i v e (or, as
some cali it, an Ablative) and a Nominative, as ope¡rírpo<j>os nourished or bred in the
mountains, from D a t . P l u r . opeai in the mountains, and rpótpos nonrished; some-
times of a Noun and Verb, as vavtyfis mise, discreet, from vSv ( A c c . of vas) mind,
understanding, and iyw to have; sometimes of N u m e r á i s joined to o t h e r Nouns, a s
TtTpá-Kus a four-footed creature, a qtiadruped, from rérrapes (neut. —pa)four, and
•jrüs o, foot; ÍKaTÓvTapxpc a centurión, from '¿mrov a hundred, and ápxós com- a

mander; sometimes of several partióles added together, as Síowcp, ¿-¡rtaadriTrÓTtiv, &c.

— N . B . This Section is inserled in conformity to the method of that excellcnt Gram-
marian, M r . H o l m e s ; though, after all, most of the observations contained in it will
be besl learned by U S E , and by diligently consulting a good Lexicón.

SECTION VIL

OF ADJECTIVES AND T H E I R DECLENSIONS.

1. A NOUN Adjective, or * more properly an Adjective, so called becaüse adjec*

titious, or added to a Substantive, denotes some quality of t h e Substantive to which
it is j o i n e d ; so in the expressions áyaQós avdpu-n-os a good man, Kaki] yvvi) a fair
moman, píyag OIKOS a great house, t h e words good, fair, and great are adjectives.
2. Adjectives are declined in a three-fold manner, t h a t is, either by three ter-
minations, or two, or one.

OF ADJECTIVES OF T H R E E TEHMINATIONS.

3. Adjectives of three terminations end in os, vs, tov, as, eie, tos, and are declined
after the manner of Substantives according to their termination. Thus,
4. Adjectives of three terminations in os (as tcakbsfair, áyadós good, a n d P a r t í -
ciples in vos) are declined like Substantives of t h e second a n d first Declension, t h a t
is,—Mase. O S like the 2d, F e m . H like t h e l s t , N e u t . ON like t h e 2d, as
Singular. Dual. Plural.
M. F. N. M. F. N. M. F. N.
N. *(\-oe, — r ¡ , 1
—ov N. —oí, —ai, —a
G. N . A. V.
—ov, —r¡s, —ov G. —tav, —tov, t)>V
D. —b>, —a, —ta
— Vi —Vi —ti) D. —oís, ate, —ote
A. —ov, —r¡v, —ovt G. D . A. —ovs, —as, — a
V. —ov
— ) —v,
£ —otv, —atv, —otv V. —oí, —at, —a
5 . But_ Adjectives ending in os puré or pos make t h e Nom. F e m . in a, G e n . in
ae, D a t . in , &c. (Comp. Sect. I I I . 8.) as S i n g . N . ¿íy-toe a n d oV&Vpoc, a, ov,
?

G . «, as, u, D . w, a, «, A . ov, av, ov, V . t, a, ov: E x c e p t some contracted oues (of

which presently) and numeráis in ooe, as ó'ycío-oe eiglüh, which make r¡ in t h e F e m .
6. Contracted Adjectives in oe are declined like contracted Substantives of t h e

* See B i s h o p L o w t h ' s Introiluction to E n g l i s h Grammar, p . 4 0 . note [ 1 . ]

16 A P L A I N AND EASY SECT, V I I .

second and first Declension, as Sing. N . \pva-tog, 5g; ta, í¡; tov, Sv; G . éa, » ; ó/e,
ijg; éa, a; D . é<¡>, S; ér¡, rj; éu>, <jj; A. tov, av; ír\v, rjv; tov, av, &C. Sing. N .
apyvp-éog, 5g; éa, á ; éov, Sv ; & c Sing. N . ásrXóoe, ag; ór¡, ij; óov, av; G . óa,
á ; &c
7. "AXXoe, áXXq, aXXo, forms its N e u t . S i n g . in o, but is in all other respects de-
clined like <píXog. ( C o m p . Sect. I X . Rule 8.)
8. Adjectives of t h r e e terminations in vg, av, ag, ug, wg, are declined like S u b -
stantives of t h e t h i r d a n d first Declension, t h a t is t o say, t h e masculine a n d n e u t e r
are declined like the third, and the feminine like t h e first, t h u s , — M . YS like t h e
3d, F . E I A like t h e l s t , N . Y like the 3 d , as ijdíg sweet.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

M. F. N. M. F. N. M. F. N.
N. 'He-ve, —tía, —v N. —££e, £(e, — t i a i , —éa
N. A. V.
G. —éog, —éiag, —éog G. —éwv, —tiwv, —éwv
-E£, — u a
D. — t i , i i, —étq, —ti, ti D. —éai, —óaie,—£fi
A. —ív, —tiav, —v G. D . A. —éag, ¿ig,—éiag,—éa
V. —v, —tía, —v -toiv, —tiaiv, —éoLv V. —££e, tig, —tiai, —ta

[ N o t e , Some Adjectives in vg have ta for vv in t h e Accus. Sing. as t.vpta, tvdta.

Sometimes these Adjectives are considered as having only t w o terminations. See
H o m e r . O d . E . 467. M . 3 6 9 . T h u c y d . iv. 8 3 . 104. viii. 8. 6 4 . ]
M . £iN like t h e 3d, F . OYSA like t h e l s t , N . ON like t h e 3d, as e W willing,
a n d Participles in wv.
Sing. N."EKÍJJ', ovaa, ov, G . ovrog, ovar¡g, ovrog, &c.
M . A S like t h e 3d, F . A S A like t h e l s t , N . AN like t h e 3 d , as TRAC all, a n d P a r -
ticiples in a e .
S i n g . N . Ilae, 7RÁO-a, ira»', G . wárrog, irácrr/e, irávrog, &C.
P a r t i c i p . N . Tíipag, aira, av, G . a i r o e , acrije, avrog, & c
T w o Adjectives in ae are t h u s declined: —ag, aiva, av, G. —avog, aivr¡g, avog,
&c. c a m e l y , ¡xtX-ag black, ráX-ag miserable.
M . E I S like t h e 3d, F . E S S A like t h e l s t , N . EN like t h e 3d, as ^apiug gracious.
Sing. N . Xapt-£ie, taaa, tv, G. tvrog, tcra-i\g, tvrog, &c.
N o t e , otig, otana, OEV, are contracted into se, uaa, av, as ptXvró-tig, ag (honeyed);
óetrera, aaa; ótv, av, &C. r¡tig, r¡taaa, r¡tv, into r¡g, r¡crrra, r¡v, as ripr¡-ug, rjg (honour-
able); {¡too-a, y acra: rjtv, rjv: (Comp. Sect. I I I . 29.) A n d observe further, t h a t
Participles in ug form their F e m i n i n e in ao-a, as rv<¡>0tig beaten, tlo-a, év, G. évrog,
éio-qg, évrog.
M. O S like t h e 3 d , F . YIA like t h e l s t , N . O S like t h e 3d, as Participle Ttrvipwg
having beaten.
Sing. N . TETV(J>-WS, vía, óg, G. órog, víag, órog, &.C.
9. T h e Adjectives iróXvg much, a n d fiéyag great, have t h e i r N e u t . sing. voXv and
fiéya and their Accus. Mase. •KOXVV and ¡ityav, b u t borrow * all t h e rest from t h e
oíd words 7roXXe5e and ptyáXog, t h u s , Sing. N . iroXvg, TTOXXT), TTOXV, G . JTOXXS, iroX-
Xrjg, ÍTOXXS, &c. S i n g . N . fiéyag, fityáXr¡, fiéya, G. fieyáXa, fityáXr¡g, fieyáXe, & C . —
N . B . The Leamer skould here nirite out, through all the Cases and Numbers,
those of the above Examples which are designedly left imperfect.

OF T H E ADJECTIVES OF TWO TERMINATIONS.

10. Adjectives of two terminations end in og, oig, ag, r¡g, ig, ovg, vg, r¡v, wv; and
are declined after t h e m a n n e r of Substantives, according to their termination.

* The Poeta often use G . JTOÍ.EV, D. TTOAS'V, Plur. N. irohíeí, G. m\im, D . mKutri, A. vo^éz;, also
7ROX\OJ, ¿J, OY, like <35í'\O,.
SECT. V I I . GREEK GRAMMAR. 17

11. T h u s those in og and the Attics in we are declined like t h e second Declension,
all the others like t h e third.

EXAMPLES.

M a s e , and F e m . Neut.
Sing. N . o nal f¡ h'^ol-og, Kal ró 'évt>o£,-ov
ó Kal ?; Evye-ug, Kal TO tíyE-wv (Attic)
v Kal T) atív-ag, nal rb aeív-av
Ó Kal fl áXTjO-J/Cj Kal T6 áXr¡d-ég
¿ KOÍ i¡ tv-^ap-ig, nal rb e ü j / a p - c
ó Kal r¡ Síw-ovg, ical rb SÍTT-OW

b ¡cal ?/ ASAI;p-vg, Kal TO afiaKp-v

ó Kal )'; app-ijv, Kal TO dpp-EV
ó ICA'I i] ebdaíp-iov, i;al rb euSatp-ov.

12. These Adjectives m a k e their Genitives respectively in a, u, avrog, tog, tsg,

irog- oEog, vog, tvog, ovog, as Substantives of t h e like terminations.
13. Most derivative and compound Adjectives in og are t h u s declined with two
terminations, and t h u s t h e A t t i c s decline all Adjectives in og. Some Adjectives
are declined both with two and with t h r e e terminations, as alúvi-og, a, ov, and ó
Kal i¡ alúvi-og, nal TO — o v ; ríp-nv, eiva, EV, and ó Kal i¡ répr¡v, ical rb répev.
14. N . B . The Learner, in declining the above Adjectives, should repeal the
proper Articles with every Case, as, Sing. N . ó Kal ?; '¿vSol;og, Kal TO evholov, G . r a
Kal rijg Kal ra EvSó'fe, D . r¿> Kal rf¡ Kal ra ÉvSó^a, A . TOV Kal rrjv ical TO EVSO'Í,OV, &c.
Sing. N . ó ical f¡ ciXr¡dyg, Kal TO áXvOEg, G. ra Kal rfjg Kal ra ciXr¡d-Éog, Sg, D . r¿¡ Kal
rij Kal r¿¡ áXr¡d-É'i, E~I, A. TOV Kal ri]v áXnQ-éa, Ti, Kal TO aXr¡BEg, V . Mase, a n d F e m .
<3 aXijdiig, N e u t . w aXtidég- Comp. Sect. I I I . 3 2 .

OF A D J E C T I V E S OF O N E T E R M I N A T I O N .

15. Adjectives of one termination end in £, tv, o-, p , uV, and are declined after t h e
manner of Substantives, according to their termination, b u t * are scarcely used in
the neuter Gender.
Sing. N . ó Kal r¡ ixpirai,, G . yog, rapacious
rpiyXáj-iv, G. ivog, ihree-pointed
TToXvCEip-cig, G. áSog, many-topt
TpíapaKap, G. apog, thrice-happy
txiQío\p, G. oirog, swarthy.
1G, Decline apiraZ, t h u s , a n d so the r e s t : Sing. N . ó mi i) apiraí,, G . TOV KOI ríjg
típirayog, D . r¿> Kal TT¡ uptrayí, A. TOV nal ri)v á p T r a y e t , V . i¡ ápira^. Dual, N . A . V .
rio Kal ra apirayE, G . D . rolv Kal raiv cipTráyotv. P l u r . N . ói Kal cu típTrayeg, G.
TWV apwciywv, D . roíe Kal To.lg &pival,i, A . rovg ¡mi Tag aprrayag, V . w íipirayEg.

17. T h e Numeráis éig one, ovo two, rpÉlg three, TÍoaapEg, four, are declined as
follows :
Sing. N . 'Étg, pía, EV, G. Évóg, píag, ivóg, D . Ivl, pía, ívl, A. iva, píav, EV.
So its compounds piiMg a n d ovSelg no one, &c. N . pTidelg, firidepla, fiij^EV, G.
fiTjSEvbg, prjSeuíag, prjStvbg, & C .

* See P o r t - R o y a l Greek Grammar by N u g e n t , p . 74, and H o l m c s ' s , p. 2 5 ,

 IS A PLA1N AND E A S Y SECT. V I I I .

D u a l , * N . A . V . cío, G . D . v'uotv a n d iiveiv, D . Svoi Poelic. B u t <$íio is used for

all Genders and Cases except the Dative.
Plural, N . óí raí ,'u róele, raí ra rpía, G. rpíiov, D . rptai, A . rove mi rae rpe'ig,
i;ai ra rpía.
Plural, N . ót raí cu rérrtraper, caí reí rénrrapa, G. reoo-áptov, D . réorirapcri, A . rovs
« Í ! rñc réir-rapae, Kai ra rétrirapa.

S E C T I O N VIII.

O F T H E C O M P A R I S O N O F A D J E C T I V E S , &e.

1 . ADJECTIVES in G r e e k , as in English, have t h r e e Degrees of Comparison, t h e

Positiva, as great; t h e Comparativo, as greater, or more great, of t w o ; t h e Super-
lativo, as greatest, or most great, of m a n y .
2. Adjectives in os, after a t long syllable, form their Comparative and S u p e r -
lative by changing oc into orepqg, and oraroc, as Pos. evSo^os noble, Compar. evho'é,-
órepoQ nobler, Super. évdotóraroe noblesi; after a t short syllable, into wrepog and
oora-og, as Pos. aotpóe mise, Compar. cofárepog mise?; Super. aoajwrarog wisest. But
if the preceding syllable be doubtful, t h e Comparative and Superlative are formed
either in orepog and oraros, or in wrepog and coraros, as Io--oe equal, Compar. a n d
S u p e r . laórepog and laórarog, or ítxúrepog and íaóirarog.
3 . Adjectives in eig, to form t h e Comparative and Superlative, change t h a t
syllable into earepog and zorarog ; in ig, ap, and ovg, take repog a n d r a r o s ; in ^S?
n s , and a s , add to their N e u t e r s repog and rarog; in »¡v and iov add to their N o -
minatives plural repos and rarog; in £ change os of t h e i r Genitive singular into
tarepog and inrarog.

EXAMPLES.

Posit. Compar. Superl.

In £is, Xapítie eo-repog, cerraros
ap, Má/cap 1
rarog
«S, Í'ATTXSS ^ ) R £
P° '
E

7?S, 'Evo-£¡é-?/s, £S 1
vg, 'Evp-ús, v r rtpog, rarog
as, Ms'X-as, av J
Tiv, TÉp-nv, eveg \
-n >1 t repog, rarog
10 v, llpo<pp-u)V, OVES J
BXá-£, K-OS wrepog, tararog

* S o D u a l , N. A. V. a/upu lotli, G. D. á/upot». Comp. Sect. V. 3. 3.

-j- T h c last syllable b u t one that h a s a long vowel (see Sect. I. 6.) or a d i p h t h o n g i n i t i s always
long, as pí¡po¡-, VEAOTAR; so i f it h a s a short or doubtful vowel before tieo consonants or a double onc,
as 7É/IVO;, íVoofo.-: but if it has a sfrorí v o w e l before a single consonant, the syllable is short, as coipof.
T h e doubtful vowels, a, ¡, v, before another v o w e l are generally short, b u t before a consonant often
long. _
$ Y e t from S/JTAOO;, a,-, w e have Comparar. N e u t . hwKÓTepm, M a t . x x i i i . 1.5.
SECT. VIII. G R E E K GRAMMAR. i!)

4 . Some adjectives in og cast away o or w in t h e i r Compar. and Super. as ycnatog,

yepalrepoe, yepaírarog. So naXaiiig,
<7)(oXaiog, SépEíog, OE¿,ióg.
5. Tlie Attics compare many Adjectives in og by «¿-¿pos a n d cutcitoq, as Icíog,
líiíaÍTtpos, iSiaí-arog. So í¡trvy¡pg, 'íaoc, ¡léaog, trXrirríog, v-dnog, & c . ; a n d m a n y by
earepog and earu-og, as ¿iiíóiog, aiooiéarepog, áicoiéararog. So yevvciiog, airacaiog,
aviapóg, &c. Some with both, as aoptvog, aapEvaí-Epog and aajiEvéarEpoQ, &c.
A few by tarepog and tararos, as XáAoc, XaXíarEpog, XaXíaraTOs, by syncope Xá~
XÍOTOC.
[6. Adjectives in wc, a n d some in pos often change those endings into uov, and
¡•roe ; as ívpíig, kvpíav, ívpi^og ; áia^pog, aiayiwv, aiayi^og. So í-^Opúg, óiicrpóg, uvEpóg,
a n d ¡.latcpóg has ¡j.íiKi^og.
7. Some also euding in og, r¡g, and ag, form in t h e same way, though somewhat
irregularly.
Thus, i;aXóg, KaXXÍwy, KUXXÍTOS
Kai;óg, icaidiov (anaKÍoTEpog'), /CÁ/a^OE
(¡>tXoc, <¡>iXíu)v, (¡iD\i-og
(also <¡>í\rEpog, (¡)í\raroc)
XáXog XÁXITOG
uéyag ¡,iéyl<zoc
éXeyxvQ ÉXéy^og.
Some of these forms, in t h e Comparative, instead of t a n d t h e i r own consonant,
take aa or tt, or some form not far removed from this : as,

íXayyg, íXáatjü)v
paicpbg, fiáaaav, wheuce, p e r h a p s , pEÍ^uv
Kparvg, (LÍ-PANÓI.", i;páaau>v), i:píiaauiv
ra-^vg, (oíd form, Qa-^íg) Báaaov
{3pa%vg, fipiwaiiív.

So (itiaauív, yXvaawv, •n-áaawv, from fiadí/g, yXvicvg, Truyyg. "lIaat,n>,OV ?yVrwi', i s b y

some derived from ypiaíwv, b u t ijwra shows t h a t it is properly i / n W , from some
u n k n o w n Positive.
S. T h e r e are many Comparativas and Superlatives, wliich appear to be derived
from Substantives and Prepositions, and others whose Positive is lost or unknown.

FROM SUBSTANTIVES.

KÍpíOC, Ktpllw, KÍp&WC, 1 h e t t c r ¡ a n d b e ¡ ¡ l

Apne, apziíav, upitog, i

üXyog, i'CXywv, (adv.) aXyi-og, inore, and most painfid
píyog, piyUov, piyi?a, (adv.)
KiiSvg, KÍdi^og, most glorious
vfípfríic . vppi^ÓTEpog and — ó r a r o g , more, and most insolen t
KÍ\iog Ki'iSt-og
i)\poc, mbÍTEpog, vibitog.

FROM ADVERBS A N D P R E P O S I T I O N S .

úyxS, ayy(¿Típog, ay^i^og

Tpú, TrpÓTepog, (irpóraTag) irpürog
vrep, virÉprEpog, viréprarog
TPLTLÍ, TTpW'lTEpOg.
W e may herc observe, t h a t Adverbs and Prepositions form comparatives and su
pcrlativcs: as
livto, (CJITI-f'pw, ávwTciTO) or a)'í>rara,
«yx "?''':
0 a l K
^ ( ''yX '')
( í0
üaaoi'.
 A PLAIN A N D EASY SECT. I X .

FITÜM OKKNOWN I'OSITIVES.

üpeivwv, bcticr.
¡icXrepog, ¡iéXraTog, *"¡
or usually in A t t i c , >better, a n d best.
¡3eXrío)V, fléXn^os, J
These are usually assigned to áyaflóc, wliose regular forms oceur in later writers,
and such as are not A t t i c .
peúoy, fiütrroQ, less, least.
T h i s is assigned to piKpúc, whose regular comparative, ¡xiKpúrEpoc, is found.
TTXÍÍIOV or TTXÉWV, ttAíTOTOC, more, most,.
Tlie neuter is usually TrXéov, and in t h e plural in A t t i c we usually find TrXéoveg
or TTXEÍOC, wXéova or wXeíio.
pá.wv, pq.cTTog, casier, casicsl.
I t appcars, tliat t h e r e was an oíd word píftoc, wlience carne prj'iTepog, a n d prfiov,
or Dorice paírepog, and paíwv; t h e A t t i c form of which is poíwv, a n d in t h e super-
lativa piií-aroc, and pV/'iVo?, Dorice píüioc, A t t . pá^os-
•ftEÍpior, j^EÍpírog, worse, worsf.
Pei'haps from x¿P £> (which in U o m e r h a s a comparativo sense), from which
n

comes xípEÍwv, in H ó m e r , as c'ipeíwv from "Apr¡g.

¿TrXÓTEpoc, ¡irXórarog, younger, and youngest.
T h e following m a y class under t h e same h e a d ; t h e y are comnionly derived from
veros:
Xio'íwv or Xmov, Xwipu or Xápa, betler, a n d best.
These m a y come from Xíiios, which has Xm-epog.
féprepos, (liépraroQ, and (¡típicos, better, a n d best.
Said to be from fépoj, in t h e sense of TrpoípÉpii), whence comes Ttpotyéprig, AEvrspog,
&£VTa.TOS.~\
9. Sometimes Comparatives a n d Superlatives a r e compared again, as from
Compar. yEÍpiav worse, yeipÓTEpog much worse ; from eXci^to-roe least, * EXaj(io-~órEpoc
less than the least.
10. Comparatives and Superlatives are generally declined like other Adjectives;
b u t Comparatives in uiv, especially irregular ones, t h u s , Sing. N . h raí y irXeí-wv,
raí ru — o v , G. — o v o s , D . — O V L , A . — o v a , oa, u), raí TO — o v , V . . — o v , D u a l . N . A . V .
—ove, G. D . I — o v o i v , P l u r . N . V . •—oveg, oeg, ovg, raí ra —ova, oa, Ü>, G. —ovti)v,
D . —oui, A. — o v a g , oag, ove, ¡cal ra —ova, oa, tú. So ¡IEÍ'CWV, tcpElrrwv, & C

SECTION IX.
OF PRONOUNS.

1 . A PRONOUN is so called becausc i t stands P r o nomine, for, or instead of, a

Noun.
2. Pronouns may be distinguished into Personal or Primitive, Posses'sive, De-
monstraliue, Ilelativc, Compound, a n d Reciprocal.
3. T h e personal or primitive Pronouns are three, íyí> I, P l u r . i/pels we, of t h e
Jirst P e r s o n ; av tltou, P l u r . vpeíg ye, of t h e second; G. ov he or she, P l u r . e<¡>eis
they, of t h e third ; which are t h u s declined:

* S e e L e x i c ó n o n this word.
SECT. IX. GREEK GRAMMAR. 21

Singular. Dual. Plural.

N. 'Eyw I N. ?//LÍEÍ£ we
G. ¿ftov or fioi¡ of me N . A . vwi, vw me or us two G. fifiüv of us
D. ijxoí or fiol to me G. D . vwtv, vigv of or ¿0 two. D. yplv to us
A. ifié or ¡J.í me. A. i/jitae us.
N. S¿ ¿/w?e N. vlieíc ye
G. coC o/" ¿Aee N . A. <7C/)ñ£, ye or too G. ÍLJUCSJ/ o/* ?/0K
D. <rot ¿o thee G. D . o-ipwiv, G§WV qf or loyou troo. D . ¿ttív to you
A. CE //?.ee. A. v¡xae you.
N. Wanting N. c-Qúc. they
G. bv of him or her N . A. aéwí they two G. atywv of them
D. ¿i to tó« G. D . atbwiv of them two. D. a-tpío-i lo them
A. £ him. A. a<¡)de them.

4. [From t h e oblique cases of iyw, ai, 3, a n d t h e Nom. P l u r a l and Dual, are dc-
rived t h e Possessive Prououns, having the signilication of t h e Genitive of t h e P e r -
sonáis. T h u s , i/xúc, í), ¿y mines aóg, i\, óy thine; lúe or ó'e, ?/, ov his; o-fwírepog,
a, ov both yours; vwírepoe, a, ov botk ours; vpérepog, a, ov ours; v¡jLÍr£pog, a, ov
yours; tr<¡>óg, r¡, óv and aepirepos, a, ov your, in t h e p l u r a l ; and used by t h e poets
as the Pronoun possessive of t h e 3 d P e r s . sing. his.'}
5. T h c demonstrative Pronouns are [Ó'CE,] ¿Croe this, and ÍKEÍVOQ that, he. ["0&
is declined like the Article. I n A t t i c i t is ¿tí/.] Ouroe is t h u s declined : T

Singular. Dual. Plural.

F. N. M. F. N M. F. N.
N. ovrog, avrr¡, TOVTO N. A. - N. ÓVTOl, avrai, ruvra
G. tóvtov, róvrov
TCLvrnc. T0VTW, rávra, róv G. TOVTWV
D . tÓvto), rávrn, róvro) G. D . D . róvroig, rávraig, róvrotg
A. TOVTOV, ravrnv, TOVTO róvrow, rcívraiv, A . róvrovg, rávrag, rávrci.

6. I n like manner are declined t h e Componíais roi-Srog such, TOO--5TOQ SO mach,

TrjXiK-Sroc so great, as N . r-ifXuc-i-OQ, TrjXuc-avrr], TnXiz-Sro, G. T7]\IK-¿TH, ti¡\ii;-
aírric, Tr¡\tK-áru, &c. B u t t h e A t t i c s form t h e N e u t e r of these in ov.
7. 'EKEÍVOC is declined like t h e relative P r o n o u n óg, ending thc N e u t e r sing
S i n g . ' N . £/C£Í)'OC, iicúvr¡, ÍKCIVO.
8. T h e relative Pronouns are ó'c, i¡, ó, wlw, which, and avróc avríi, ávró, h
it. "Oc is t h u s declined:
Singular. Dual. Plural.
M. F. K. M. F. W. M. F. N.
N. íb 0 N . ó't, ¡íi, tí
G. ÓV, 'ÍC, ¿IV N. A. ¿>, a. (ti G. wv
D. !/' ú> G. D . ()[.", úiv, lílV D. ote, CÍÍIJ, OTE
A. ov, i) A . ove, cí.

'A-uróe is declined in the sanie manner, forming the Neut. sing. iu o. £ Avróc has
propcrly t h e signilication of he, alie, it, only in t h e oblique cases ; in t h e Nominativo
it is he, himself and if the Article precedes, it is the same. T h i s , by t h e Attics, is
made into ¿ivróc, avríj, ravró or ravrt'n; -avrS, &c. Mlv and vlv are used for t h e
Acc. sing. of cWóc in all g e n d e r s ; and vlv also in the Acc. p l u r a l . ]
9. T h e compound Pronouns ¿p-avrü myself, ae-avri thyself, have only t h c singular ;
b u t ÍAVTH himself, both t h e singular and plural. A l l o í t h e m w a n t t h e Nominative
and Vocative: Sing. G. ipavr-ü, rje, 5, D. épavr-oi, y, o>, A. ¿pavr-óv, i\v, (>• So
aííivrH and kavrü : b u t this last iu the Plural, G. iavr-wv, D . éavr-olc, alg, o7r,
A . kav~-¿e, ác, a. QTo express the Plural of i¡xavrñ and creavrS, t h c Greclcs use
j//i£tc ávroí, vpeic ávrói, & c , and wc find also tr^iti;' ávrüv, & c ]
10. T o t h e above m u s t be added t h e indefimlc I'i'oiioun valva a ccrlain per son or
thhig, aud thc indefinilc or i/Ucrrogalivc tic any one, also, who. tvhal '••
 A P L A I N AND EASY SECT. X.

11. Aüva is generally undeclined, b u t it is sometimes declined t h u s : Sing. N .

ó. >'/, ra Suva, G. deli'oe, D . Seivi, A, « ¡ r o , [Plur. N . dúveg, G . Seívuy.']
12. T¡c is t h u s declined :
Singular. I Dual. Plural.
M. F. N. M. F. N.

N . rio, N. TIVÍQ, Tívá

G. TIVÓQ N. A. TIVÍ G. TIVÍÚV
D. TLVÍ G. D . TlVO~lV D. Tiaí
A. TU'Cl, A. Tivág,

13. T!¡c compound oang who, whosoever, is declined like og and ríg, t h u s , Sing.
N. Ó'OTÍC, yric, o. rí, G. ürivog, I)(ITLVO<:, írnog, D . érivi, rjrivi, IOTLVI, A. ovriva, í\v-
riva, o, TÍ, &c. T h e Attics for. the G. and D . sing. of oang use ¿Ve and ¿V«, and
for tlie G. plural oriov.
1-1. [ T h e rcciprocal Pronoun aWí¡\wv is t h u s declined: G. á\\r)\u¡v, D . áXAi/-
Xotc, aXX?';Xaíf, A. áXX?^Xt¡c, ac, a, D u a l Gen. D a t . ¿tWiiXoiv, —a»', Acc. áXX?/Xa),
f(, 07ie anothcr7\

SECTION X.
OF VERBS, A N D FIRST OF VERBS IN íl.

* 1. " A is a word which signifies lo do, to suffer, or to be."

V E R B Henee,
2. " T h e r e are three kinds of Verbs, Aclive, Passive, and Neuter."
3. " A verb active expresses an action, and necessarily ímplies an agent, and an
object acted upon ; as lo ¡ove, I lovs T i l o m a s : " lo beal, I beal J o h n .
4. " A verb passive expresses a passion or a suffering, or the receiving of an
acíion, and necessarily implies an object acted upon, and an agent by which it is
acted upon ; as to be loved, Thomas is lovcd by m e ; " Jolin is beaten by me.
5. " So when t h e agent takes t h e lead in tjie sentence t h e verb is active, and is
followcd by the object; when the object takes the ¡cad t h e verb is passive, and is
followed by t h e agent."
G. " A verb neuter expresses being, or a staie or condilion ofbeing; when t h e
agent and the object acted upon coincide, and the event is properly neither action
nor passion, but rather something between both ; as / am, I sleep, I wallc."
7. Verbs iu G r e e k are declined by Persons, Numbers, Tenses, Moods, Voices,
and Conjugalions."
8. B y t h e dcsignation of Per son a Verb corresponds with t h e several Personal
Pronouns; by t h a t of Number it corresponds with t h e Number of t h e Noun or Pro-
noun i t belongs to, whether singular, dual, or p l u r a l ; of Tense or Time, it represents.
t h e action, passion, or being, as present, pasi, or future, whether imperfectly or
perfect]y, t h a t is, whether passing in such t i m e , or then linislied; of Mood or Mode,
i t expresses the various manner of the action, passion, or b e i n g : " of Voices, it d e -
notes action, passion, or bolh. Conip. above 2, &c.
9. Greek Verbs then h a v e — 1 . Three Persons; first, second, and t h i r d . — 2 . Three
Numbers; Singular, D u a l , and P l u r a l . — [ 3 . FJght Tenses or Times. T h e time in
which an action can take place, is either present, past. or future. 0,f the Present,
t h e r e is only one simple form in Greek, as TVTTTO>. Of t h e Past, we may observe,
t h a t an action is either, ( 1 ) , with relation to itself, cntirely passed, or, ( 2 ) , re-
lativo, passed with respect to another time expressed or understood. Now, t h e
Aorists desígnate the Unte wltoUy passed; the imperfect, perfect, and pluperfect,

* Tn the b e g m n i n g of t'.iis section I ain grcatly i n d c b U d to B i s h o p L o w í h ' s Introduction to E n g l i s h

G.air.mir, p p . i?,, 4 1 , 4 5 , 4 0 , 2 d edition.
 SECT. X . GílEEK GRAMMAR. 23

the relative time. T h e Imperfect represents a past aetion, as continuing cluriug

another past aetion, and aceompanying i t ; t h e Perfect. a perfect action continuing
t o the present time ; t h e Phiperfcct, also a perfect aetion continuing to a past time.
T h e future time has three inodifications, either, ( J ) , with respect to its future be-
ginning ( F u t . 1 and 2 . A c t . and F u t . Middle), or, ( 2 ) , as future and complete ( F u t .
1 and 2 Pass.), or, ( 3 ) , as future and finished with respect to an action to take place
hereafter (3d F u t . Pass.) Thus,
ypci(j>b), I write.
Aor. 'éypaipa, I wrote, but the writing may perhaps not be existing.
Perf. yéypatya, I have wrillen, and the writing exists.
Aor. '¿yti¡xa, I have married.
Perf. ytyáfirixa, I am married.
Pluperf. ?'/ ttóXíc irtrEÍyito, the city had been fortifica, and was so stíll a t t h e
time referred to.
Imperf.'¿ypa<¡>oi>,I ivas wrüing.
In the same verb, the difierent forms of t h e F u t u r e cannot be distinguished more
than those of the Aorists, except the 3d F u t . Pass. which has t h e same reíation to
the other F u t u r e s as the Perfect to the Aorist. T h i s tense properly niarks a futuro
action, the beginning of which, however, in regard to time, is past, b u t t h e conse-
quences of which continué. T h u s , fic¡.tíc,Erui ko-QXa micotaiT, mil be mixl (continu-
ing, not will have been mixt.) Sometimos it expresses rapidily of action.']—4. Five
Moods; the Indicaiive, or declaring Mood, as TVTCTÍÚ I smite; t h e Imperativo, or
bidding, as TVTTTE smite ihou ; t h e Optative, or wishingmood, as ESE TVTCTOIJIL I wis/i,
I smite; the Subjunclive, i. e. subjoined or p u t after a Conjunction, as íav rv-rio
if I smite j and, Jastly, t h e Infinitive mood, which is indefinite as to Person a n d
N u m b e r , as TV-KTEIV to smite, and has very much the n a t u r e of a Noun, for which i t
is frequently used in G r e e k . — 5 . Three Voices ; t h e Active, as TV-KTW I smite ; t h e
Passive, as TiiT.Toj.iaL / am smitlen (scc Rule 3 . a n d 4. above); a u d Middle; which
last is in signification frequently active, sometimes passive, b u t seems most properly
to express reflectad action, as rvirropai I smite myself*.
] 0. Tliere are imo Conjngations, or different ways of declining difierent V e r b s ;
those of the first Conjugation end in w, as tvttto) í smite, rip-ú-íj I honour; of t h e
second, in ¡u, as larnfii I place.
11. H e re folio ws the Conjugation, or metliod of declining t h e active Voice of a
Verb in w, which t h e Learner must diligently commit to memory, repcating every
Person in cacli Tense, first with the English (except in the O p t a t i v e a n d . S u b -
junctive Moods) as TV-UTU I smite, TÚWTEIC ihou smitesl, TÍnrru he smilelh; Phir.
TVWTO¡XEV we. smite, TÍIWTÍTE ye smite, TVTTTOOI they smite ; aud then withuut, as RÚ—,-W,
TVTTTEIC, TV7CTEI, &C.

ACTIVE VOICE.
Pi'es. lst Fut. Perf.
TÚ7R-W, rv\[u>, TÍTV(j>U.

INDICATÍVE JIOOD.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
Persous. 1 st 1,2d ilmu, 3 a he 2dye imo, 3d ihey two l s t we, 2dyc, 3d they
P r e s . I smite, TVTTT-U, «e, ti. ETOV, 0/.ÍEV, £TE, OVCTl.
Imperf. / did smite, 'PTVWT-OI>,EC, E. trov, O/XEV, ETE, OV.
1 F u t . I mili smite, Tíüi-w, EIC, EI. ETOV, ETOV. OjiEV, ETE, OVGl.
1 Aor. / smole, "Ervib-a, ac, E. arov, arrjv. ujxev, arE, av.
Perf. / have smitlen, Térvy-a, ac, e. aro y, arov. ajiev, arE, aa.
P I u p . Ihadsmütcn,'JÍT;-vó-cLv,Eic, EÍ. EtTO)', £¡~íi¡'. ElUEV, ELTE, Eiaav.
2 Aor. I smole, 'E-u--oy, t<;, c.
:

ETOV, ET1J1'. OfíEV, ETE, OV.

* Seo D r . Clark's N o t e on I-Iomcr, U . iii. line 1 4 1 , but especially L u i l . K u s t e r , D e vero U s u V e r ,

b o i u m Mediorum.
 24 A PLAIN AND EASY SECT. X .

I M F E R A T I V E MOOD.

P r . 2(1 P e r s . Smite than, Tínrr-t,

Perf. and P l u p . T¿-vc¡)-£, y¿T<i), let hini. erov, £Tb>v, £T£J erioerav.
2 Aor. Tvw-e, let them.
1 Aor. Tíiip-ov, cirio. are, ciTtoerav.

OPTATIVE MOOD, £ 1 0 £ I wisll.

P r . and I m p . 'ÍVTTT-Oljll,
1 Fut. TÚii-OL/XÍ,
Perf. and Pluperf. T£7V(p-0lf¿l, oís, 01. OlTOV, ÓlTVV. OljÁEV,
2 Aor. TvTT-Oipi,
1 Aor. Tv\f/-aipi, cus, ai. avrov, áirrjv. aipzv CUTE, aiEv.
1 Aor. * Molió. TirdiEi-a, as, £. arov, arnv. apev,

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, ECIV if.

P r . and I m p . TVTTT-W,
f 1 F u t . and 1 Aor. Túii-w,
r¡rov, r¡Tov. opev, nre, toeri.
2 Aor. Tíirr-o),
Perf. and P l u p , TcTÍié-íú

INFINITIVE MOOD.

P r . a n d Imperf. TvTTT-Ely, To smite.

1 Fut. Tvib-siv,
1 Aor. Tíi\p-ai, To smite hereafter.
Perf. and Pluperf. Tarvip-Évaí,
2 Aor. TVTT-ZÍV, To have smitten...

PARTICIPLES.

P r . and Imperf.
1 Fut.
TvTTT-WV,
Tvty-wv, } overa, ov, {Smiting.
Abont to smite.
2 Aor. TvTT-ü)V, overa, óv, Having smitten.
1 Aor. Tvúi-us, aera, av, Having smitten.
Perf. and Pluperf. TETV(J)-Ó¡S, vía, ¿e, Havins smitten.

[ I t m u s t be observed, t h a t t h e r e is no single verb which has all these tenses.

V e r y few verbs have both the A o r . 1. and Aor. 2 ; and t h i s observation applies also
to t h e Passive voice. T h e r e t h e l s t and 2d Aor. are seldom found in t h e same verb.
A g a i n , it is rare to find the Perfect Active, and w h a t is called t h e Perfect Middle,
in the same verb. Whenever t h e Imperfect a n d 2 d Aor. in t h e Active would have
t h e same termination, t h e 2d Aor. rarely oceurs. See some further observations on
t h e F u t u r e . W e may take t h i s opportunity of observing, t h a t probably the 2 d a n d
3 d P e r s o n dual were always t h e same.]
12. Participles are a kind of verbal Acljectives, a n d are so called because t h e y
particípale of the n a t u r e both of an Adjective and of a V e r b , being declined (comp.

* T h i s i E o l i c l s t A o r i s t , as the Grammarians cali it, is m u c h u s e d b y the A t t i c s i n the second a n d

third Person singular, and i n the third Person plural.
•f- S o m e Grammarians have said, that the Subjunotive m o o d o f V e r b s h a s no first Fnture. B u t they
are mistaken. F o r , M a r k xiii. 1 1 , w e have Ki/.K-f^nn; J o h n xvii. 2 . R e v . x i i i . 1G, ÍW S4<rj; E p h . v i .
3 , "•>«. éVÍ; l Cor. i x . 18, ha %su¡; M a t . x x v i . 17, l-niitútrmpti. S o i n the M i d d l e V o i c e , A c t s x x i .
2 4 , f«Z í'jfn^wvTcti; L u k e x x i i . 3 0 , Í'-CÍ xaüío-Jío-St; L u k e x x i v . 4 9 , á'wf 3 iMuriiriu I n the P a s s i v e ,
1 Cor. xiii. 3 , "YA XA^Á^/ÍA.; 1 P e t . iii. 1, Yva—XEPOYJ^JJIRWYTCTÍ; Mat. v. "25, fxriiroTí—§A/j(3)í¡r^.
X W h e n the F u t u r e ends i n cu circumflexed (see § 3 8 , b e l o w ) , the participle is —wv, 5<r«, h. G . SUTOS,
amif, ÍVTOS, & c .
 SECT. X. GREEK GRAMMAR. 25

Sect. V I L 8.) and joined with Substantives like t h e former, b u t denoting t i m e , and
expressing an action or state, and governing cases like t h e latter. Comp. Sect.
X X I . 55.

OF T H E FORMATION OF T H E T E N S E S I N T H E A C T I V E VOICE,
AND FIRST OF THE PRESENT TENSE AND CHARACTERISTIC
LETTER.

13. T h e Present Tense Active is t h e Theme (TO 6épa) or foundation of all t h e

rest.
14. T h e Characterisiic L e t t e r is t h a t which immediately precedes t h e t e r -
mination, as y in \éy-h>, \éy-£i£.
15. B u t when two consonants, TTT, KT, or \iv, precede t h e t e r m i n a t i o n , t h e former
of these is t h e Characterisiic, as TT in TVTTTII), p in répvta.
16. T h e Present, First Future, and Perfect are t h e three •principal Tenses,
whence t h e other Tenses respectively are derived or f o r m e d ; and in these t h r e e
Tenses t h e Characteristic L e t t e r is varied in a fourfold m a n n e r , whence t h e r e a r e
four classes of Characteristics.
17. T h e Characteristics—
1. Of t h e first class or * labials are in t h e P r e s e n t c ged
CO 4>
TT, 6, <j), 7TT. H
O a
rO. ai &
2. Of t h e second class or * palatines are in the P r e - "3
a
sent, K, y , isa, TT.
re

3. Of t h e t h i r d class or * dentáis are in t h e P r e s e n t % o

T, d, 6, '(, b) puré. l Ü fe a
4 . Of t h e fourth class or liquids are in t h e P r e s e n t X, p , v, p, r— Jto which Cha-
pv;
racteristics are added 6¡ circumflexed in t h e first F u t u r e , and ra in t h e Perfect, b u t
pü> is changed into pnna, and vG> into Ka.

OF THE IMPEBFECT T E N S E AND THE A U G M E N T .

18. T h e Imperfect is formed from t h e P r e s e n t by c h a n g i n g to into ov, and p r c -

fixing t h e augment, as TVWTO, ETVKTOV.

19. T h e a u g m e n t is of two kinds, Syllabic a n d Temporal. [ T h e use of t h e

a u g m e n t in the oldest writers is extremeíy fluctuating, i. e. in H o m e r a n d Hesiod.
Herodotus gcnerally uses i t . ]

OF THE SYLLABIC AUGMENT.

20. T h e Syllabic A u g m e n t is £ prefixed to a Tense when 'che V e r b begins w i t h a

c o n s o n a n t ; for then E is prefixed t o t h e Imperfect, Pluperfect, a n d to t h e I s t and
2d Aorist of the Indicative, b u t not of t h e other Moods f.
21. If the Verb begins with p, t h e p is doubled after E, as p'nrrw, íppnrrov.
22. T h e A t t i c s prefix £ to Verbs beginning with o or t¡>, and preserve t h e b r e a t h -
i n g of t h e T h e m e , ópáw, iwpaov.
23. T h e A t t i c s also change t h e syllabic a u g m e n t into t h e temporal, as from
péWw, 'ÉpsWov, A t t i c fiptWov.

* S e e Sect. 1 . 9 .
-)- See the ahoye e x a m p l e of TI/'TTTW.
 26 A PLAIN A N D EASY SECT. X.

OF T H E T E M P O R A L AUGMENT.

24. T h e * Temporal A u g m e n t is -r¡ or 10 prefixed to a Tense iustead of a change-

able vowel or diphthong.
25. T h e changeable vowels a n d diphthongs are a, E, O ; ai, av, oí; a a n d E are
ehanged into n, o into u>; and t h e i of t h e diphthongs is subscribed; as á/íó™,
Í¡KOVOV ; épEÍdu), i'ipEicov; ¿pirra, &pvrrov ; aipio, r)pvv; av¡,ávo), i¡vE,avov; oiicí^w,
tgKi^oy.
26. If a V e r b begins with a n unchangeable vowel or diphthong, t h a t is, with n,
i, v, a, EI, EV, e, t h e same will be t h e beginning of all t h e Tenses, as ?YX ' > VX ! £W E0V

kvQvVÍD, 'ÉvdvVOV, S . C
27. Y'et t h e A t t i c s change EV into vv, as EVSIO to sleep, lmperf. A t t i c 7/vSov.
[ T l i i s is m a t t e r of considerable d o u b t ; t h e change is often made i n t h e editions,
b u t with no consistency in t h e M S S . ]

EXCEPTIONS.

28. F o u r V e r b s beginning with a have no a u g m e n t , tíw to breathe, aov; aíoi to

hear, cdov; andéera-io to be unaccustomed, idjQEaaov; a n d ¿inSí^opai to be tired,
a.r¡oi(opr¡v.
29. Some Verbs b e g i n n i n g with E talce t after i t for t h e a u g m e n t , as É'XW lo
have, el^pv. So EXU, EXICU, É'pTrw, IOT>;/«Ü, 'éiropai, épéa, tanáa, íáio, eio, épvto, ¿dí£u>,
ípyá'Co¡xai, kXíuaoj. So EVOI, IVKOV, which last preserves t h e a u g m e n t t h r o u g h o u t all
t h e Moods.
30. E before o is n o t ehanged, b u t t h e o is ehanged into w as lopríiCa, iápra'Cov.
3 1 . Some Verbs beginning with oí have no a u g m e n t , particularly those derived
from ÜIVOQ mine, OIWVÓQ a bird, oía'i a helm.

OF T H E A U G M E N T OF COMPOUNDS.

32. Compound Verbs have t h e a u g m e n t in t h é middle if t h e y begin with a P r e -

position, or with Sve and EV before a changeable vowel or dijshthong, as ¡ca-ayiváuKw
to condemn, Ka-EyívuxrKov; ÉyKaTaXEÍirh) lo forsake, íyKaTÉXtnrov; SvaawKTTÉüi lo
disbelieve, OVGTITÍÍGTEOV ; ívepyETÉa, EVnpyérEov.
3 3 . ( E x c e p t a few in which t h e Preposition does not change t h e sense of the
word, as KaQEvSio to sleep, EKCIQÍVOOV ; or where t h e simple Verb is o u t of use, as
ÚVT&OXÉU) lo intercede, yvr&óXeov.)
3 4 . A l l other Compounds have t h e a u g m e n t in t h e beginning, as <j>iXoiro(¡)Éio tv
philosopkize, k([¡iXo(TÓ(¡)£ov; av-opoXiu) to desert, yvropóXeov; bpofpovía to agree,
ápotypóvEov; atppovéa to be unwise, ?)(¡)póvEov ; Svarv^éü) to be unforlunate, eOv-
oTvyeov.
3 5 . Some are augmented both in t h e beginning and in t h e middle, as ¿VO^AEO) to
disturb, riváyXíov; avopQóu lo corred, i¡váp6oov ; and a few e i t h e r in t h e beginning
or t h e middle, as ¿ivoíya to open, 1 A o r . ivoiífx.^ and ( A t t i c ) avíala.
3 6 . Prepositions in composition with a V e r b beginning with a Vowel f lose their
final vowel, as 7rapaK5w, irapíiiasov (except 7r£pi, Tcpó, and sometimes apefi, a n d Éttí);
a n d if t h e Verb begins with an aspírate breathing, t h e Prepositions change their
last tenuis into i t s corresponding aspírate, as in ¿apaipEw, compounded of á-wb and
¿iipÉw, é(j)í<;r¡pi of ¿-¡¡i and l^npi.
37. Compounds with EK change i t into E'Í before t h e a u g m e n t , as hctyípu, ¿'¿,é<¡>epov;
Compounds with EV a n d aw, which either change or cast off v, receive t h e v agaiu

* S o called because it lengthens the time ( l a n p u s — o r i s ) o f pronouncing the syllabic.

*(- Comp. Sect. I . 17.
SECT. X . GREEK GRAMMAR. 27

before t h e augment, as IXXeiViü, ívéXenroy; ELÍÍMTTIO, EVÉ%\ETIOV; ovppiLirrio, avvíp-

pairrov; o-vo-rpétpio, avvÉorpE<bov; av'Cnréti), avve(r\rEov.

OF T H E F U T U R E .

38. [ T h e original termination of t h e F u t u r e was, no doubt, iota i n all cases.

Then i n some words E, and in others, o- was rejected, p a r t l y for euphony, p a r t l y ,
it m a y be, t o distinguish difterent senses of t h e same w o r d ; [and t h u s two forms of
the future aróse.]
Verbs, whose Characieristic is X, have p a r t l y t h e l s t , p a r t l y t h e 2 d form of t h e
F u t u r e . T h u s ( 1 ) tkoto, (e'Xo-ai, II. A . 4 0 9 . ) from É'Xw; a n d ( 2 ) OTEXÓO, [from
oTí'XXoi.]
Verbs whose Characteristics are ¡x and v have regularly t h c 2 d form.
T h e Attics, especially, contract this form ECO into to. T h e y do t h i s exclusively i n
Verbs whose Characieristic is X, ¡x, v, p ; in t h e rest t h e y have generally o-, b ü t i n
t h e F u t u r e s in CICLO, éoio, ío-to, a n d ócrio t h e y frequently reject t h e a a n d contract
the remainder, as KOXÜ, óiKriw, &c.
H e n e e , as from t h e first form taco, ai-ose two new forms, t h e one in creo, t h e other
in éw, G¡, t h e latter being chiefly used in Verbs, whose Characieristic is X, ¡x, v, p ,
t h e former i n t h e rest, t h e G r a m m a r i a n s have chosen t o suppose t h e exist-
ence of two F u t u r e s i n each Verb, deriving this l a t t e r form from t h e 2 d Aorist j
b u t this is entirely false. T h e foregoing remarlís will sufficiently illustrate t h e
reasons for t h e following rules, as, for instance, in t h e case of TVTTTLO, rvirrEcrto, rvir-
TO-LO, TVÚJLO.'] T h e F u t u r e is formed from t h e Present by changing t h e Character-
istics of t h e first class into ip, as rínrrio, rispio;
of t h e second into £, as XÉyw, Xí'éxo;
of t h e t h i r d into cr, as TTÉIBLO, TTEÍCTLO * ;
and by adding t o t h e Characteristics of t h e fourth class LO circumfiexed, as VÉLLLO,
VE/XW. (Comp. above, 17. 4.)
39. [ S o - and rr are considered as y , K, and have £ in t h e F u t u r e , as raario-aio,
rapáí,io, b u t ] some Verbs form their F u t . in ato, as aypiooaio, á y p w o - w ; and m a n y in
£ w , va Ixo, as áui^w, IXILLÍXO ; a n d some of these l a t t e r in y £ w , as K\¿I'(LO to clang,
fc\áy£w. rjAp7rá|(t>, iral'^to, and avpí^to have both forms, in £ and in o - . ]
40. t T h e penúltima of t h e F u t . is commonly long, except in t h e fourth class of
characteristics, where i t is always short, and is made so either by s t r i k i n g o u t t h c
second of two consonants, as TÉJXVW, TE¡XÜ)\ o r t h e second vowel of a d i p h t h o n g , a s
Lpaívto, cjavLo ; or by using a doubtful vowel short, as Kpívto, Kptno.
4 1 . Four first F u t u r e s change t h e breathing of t h e Present, as Spé'íta from rpíyw
to run; Bpé\pto from Tpétpto to nourish ; Sínpio from rí/ajto to smohe; É'íjw from íyu) lo
have. T h e three last are t h u s distinguished from t h e 1 st F u t u r e s of rpéirto to lum,
of rvirrco to smite, and from t h e Adverb í%> wilhont, respectively.
42. Koíiii or tedio to burn, KKUÍLO or Kkáto to weep, change in t h e 1 st F u t . t into v,
as iMvaio, nXcivato.

OF T H E F I R S T AORIST.

4 3 . T h e first Aorist is formed from t h e first F u t u r e b y c h a n g i n g LO into a, a n d

prefixing t h e a u g m e n t , as Mío, í-vía; ohdaio, tóuaa.

* [ I n V e r b s puré, when a d i p h t h o n g precedes, t h e rule h o l d s , a s trií-tu, crsUcu. B u t V e r b s in ¿to, ¿a>, í w ,

iw, take the l o n g vowel instead o f the short one, or rather, daa>, ¿<™, ¡ótrw, becorae, as i n t h e a u g m e n t ,
s

<jocu a n d u,Sw. B u t TÍKÍU, apy.éui, fém, axée/uu, a.?Jw, i/xím, tety.íw, take the short t e r m i n a t i o n ; K K A S ' I U ,
O Í J E I O , 8SIO, Tronío, Í T I I M W , h a v e b o t h ; Mu>, viw, w\h>, n-Aw, péai, y}'», m a k e Í U V W . W h e n aií< i s p r e -
ceded b y ¡ , ,, A , , it m a k e s cura', e x c e p t ypát», v p « o u « i , a n d T Á Í W .
f OOJ m a k e s ítrt» m V e r b s not d e .
rivauvc]
t i- e. T h e last syllable b u t one.
 28 A P L A I N A N D EASY SiiCT. X .

44. T h e penúltima of t h e first Aorist is commonly long, and therefore, in Verbs

with t h e fourth class of characterisiics, a of t h e first F u t u r e is changed into * as
iktXw, 'é\¡i¡ika; e into si, as airepw, eairapa; and a doubtful vowel is used long, as
Kpivíó, iicpiva.
4b. A few first Aorists do n o t preserve t h e characteristic of t h e first F u t u r e , as
ídnKu I placed, É'cWa I gave, rjica I sent, e'nca I said, i\vzyKa I brought, '¿¡cr¡a I
burnt. [ S o m e of these were probably originally perfects.~]

OF THE PRETER-PERFECT.

40. T h e Preter-perfect is formed from t h e first F u t u r e by changing

in t h e first class of characterislics, xbu> into <j>a,
in t h e second, £w into x -¡ a

in t h e third, crio into na,

in t h e fourth, S> into Ka,
b u t /.ito into pr¡Ka, and vo¡ into Ka. A n d if t h e Verb begins with a single consonan/,
or t with a mute befare a liquid, t h e first l e t t e r of t h e t h e m e m u s t be repeated b e -
fore t h e augment, as rv\¡/io, rérvfa; ypcixjsw, y¿ypad>a: B u t a % tennis is prefixed i n -
stead of an aspírate, as averio, rédvKa: a n d to a double consonant, namely, 4, í, ib,
or t o a n y other t w o consonants b u t a m u t e followed by a liquid, || only e is prefixed,
as \ba\w, íipakaa; ami/io, ímcat^a. If p b e g i n s t h e V e r b , i t is doubled w i t h e, as
piilio, cppitya.
4 7 . I f t h e temporal a u g m e n t have place, i t is used in t h e Perfect and Pluperfect
t h r o u g h o u t all the Moods.
[ T h e regular ending of t h e Perfect seems to have been KU from crio, which rematas
in all words whose F u t u r e s are in in auto, serio, nerio, ocrio, loerio, a n d generally in
Verbs in Xio and pío. T h e F u t u r e in £w being, as has been shown, really, either
yerio, Kcrtí), or x >
aa
^ that
a n
'i'®! ^oa, Treno, or (pao), probably formed also originally
m

yKa, x^a, Pica, &c.; where, however, K had t h e forcé of an aspiration, and was omitted
after changing t h e preceding tense into an aspírate, which will be seen, from con-
sidering t h e conjugation of t h e Perf. P a s s . : a n d Verbs in peo> and vu>, in forming
either t h e Perf., suppose a F u t u r e in nerto and malte r¡Ka, or change the v beforc K,
or reject it. T h e following rules a r e more precise :]
48. Verbs of two sylíables of t h e fourth class change e of t h e first F u t u r e into a,
as erréXXio, erreXS), eoraXica.
4 9 . Verbs of t w o sylíables in eivio, IVIO, and wio cast away v of t h e F u t u r o from
t h e Perfect, as KTEÍVO), KTEVÍO, 'ÍKTCIKCI; Síivio, Srvyio, rédvKa. O t h e r s change § v into
y, as (patrio, <pavüi, TrEijiayica ¡ p.oXvyio, poXvvíó, pEfxóXvyica.
50. Perfects in mea often cast off t h e first vowel of t h e t h e m e , as t ó p » , napü,
KEKpnKa, for KEKcipr]Ka.

* A n d i f the V e r b h a d i i n the Present, w h i c h w a s lost i n t h e first F u t u r e , that letter subscribed a s

cpáivw, (pavüj, é'cpjíva; a n d s o m e t i m e s « i s preserved long, as KepoaíW, xepoaivw, sxephñvtx.
-f- T h e s e V e r b s h a v e e prefixed to t h e Perfect, n o t w i t h s t a n d i n g they b e g i n w i t h a m u t e before a
l i q u i d , as yj6oi to know, £yjwxa ; yvwpíZw to mafcchnoxvn, syvibpíxa, ypr¡yopí(t) to xuatch, éyprtyópqxa.
$ A tennis is l i k e w i s e used i n a n y syllable of the Preter-perfect whenever an aspírale b e g i n s the n e x t
syllable, a s SáxTu) to bury, %á^iu, Tercena ; Tpztyuf tonourish, %p¿->¡/w, rír^(pa.
¡| T h e s e repcat t h e first consonant, a l t h o u g h t h e y d o n o t b e g i n w i t h a m u t e and a l i q u i d , n a m e l y ,
mwyísui to be poor, Ttwtúiyíma.; T I T Ó W to fall, tríitTwxa. TO w h i c h add the D e p o n c n t s ( c o m p . Sect.
X I I . 1 5 . ) ix'ii.op.ai to remember, /IÉ¡X-JYI/J.XI; XTÍU>¡XM to possess, xémrifuu; b u t w e m e e t also w i t h

§ T h a t i s , they i n effect retain their » ; for y before x is pronounced l i k e ».

 SECT. X . GREEK GRAMMAR. 2!)

OF T H E P R E T E R - P L U P E R F E C T .

5 1 . T h e Preter-pluperfect is formed from t h e Perfect by changing a into eiv,

and prefixing e, if tlie Perfect begins with a consonant, as réTvfa, ¿Te-ícpeiv.

OF TIIE SECOND AORIST.

52. T h e second Aorist is formed from t h e Present by c h a n g i n g to into ov, and

prefixing t h e augment, as ypátjito, 'éypatyov.
5 3 . T h e penúltima of t h i s Aorist is commonly short, a n d therefore l s t Verbs
whose penúltima is * long because irr, XX, pv precede ta, cast away t h e l a t t e r con-
sonant, as rúirroi, ETVITOV ; icctpvw, ítca¡xov.—2dly, Verbs in '(to, trato, or TTW, if their
F u t u r e ends in £w, form their second Aorist in yov, as rítrrto, rát,ta, hayov, [for h e r e
aa, TT, and í; are considered as equivalent t o y, a n d lps is formed from yeato, yao>;]
if in ato, in dov, as fpá^to, fpáato, efpaSov, [because h e r e , t h e letter S, t h o u g h r e -
jected in t h e F u t u r o , existed once in t h e Present, and m u s t eníer again into t h e
Aorist.]—3dly, T h e vowels and diphthongs of t h e P r e s e n t are changed t h u s , v, to, ai,
av into a, as Xr/dto, 'éXadov; 7p¿¡yw, 'írpayov ', f álveo, '¿favov; iravto, 'éiraov. E is Ilke-
wise changed into a, as rpéVw, írpa-kov; except in '¿Xsyov from Xéyto, E&XETTOV from
/3XÉ7rw, ítpXzyov from tpXéyto. En is changed into v, as févyto, 'étpvyov; and ov into
o, as ¿movió, v'/KOO;'.—EÍ is changed into i, as Xénrto, '¿Xnrov; b u t in t h e fourth class,
Verbs of two syllables change EL into a, as airéipto, 'éawapov; of t h r e e , into e, as
o<¡>éiXti), ¿!KJ>EXOV.
54. T h e following Verbs have t h e penúltima of their 2d Aorist long by necessily.
— 1 st. Those of two syllables beginning with a vowel or d i p h t h o n g , as eirá, EXTTOV;
évpéti), Evpov.—2dly. Those where several consonants (except as in Rule 5 3 . ) precede
to, as irépdto, '¿-¡rapdov; Septeto, 'ÉSapicov.—3dly. M o s t coiilraclecl Verbs (of which h e r e -
after) retain their vowels and diphthongs, as Stnréoj, íomov.
5 5 . These have their second Aorists i r r e g u l a r ; fiXcni-Tio, 'é€Xá€ov ; KaXínrrto, i r á -
Xv'^ov; icpvwrto, É'/CPVOOY; (OWTT7LO, 'é€atpov; c/CÁTRRW, 'éamtpov; pcirrrto, eppatpov; Srórmí,
'Ératjmv; S'pvw7to, ¿rpv<f>ov; piVrw, 'Épptcjmv; TrXíjaaco, '¿TrXayov a n d 'ÉrrXijyov; a¡iíiy(o),
'¿afivyov; 4"vy(to, '¿ipvyov. [ M a n y of t h e 2d Aorists given above, as exaraplcs, do not
oceur; b u t only t h e 2d Aorists passive, or perfeets middle, derived from t h e m . T h u s ,
kairtipr¡v, É^ítXrjv, l iréirpaya, TréfpaSa, e\bvyi]V, trcttprjv, k%X¿i&r)v, occur, b u t
not t h e Aor. 2. active.]
56. T h e Tenses of the olher Moods are formed from t h e correspondent ones of
t h e Indicative, as in t h e following

TABLE OF T H E COGNATE OR C O R R E S P O N D E N T TENSES IN THE ACTIVE VOICE.

Indicat. Imperat. Optative. Subjunct. Infinit. Paríícip.

Pres. TvTvrto 7V7T7E 7VTT70ip.L 7VTC71Ú TVTTTELV
7V~7WV
Imperf. E7V1T70V
! Fut. 7vibo> 7V'i/0tLlL rí\p£iv
1 Aor. 7V\L(i)V
ETvdia TV\¡JOV 7i11batj.lL 7vibta 7V\pai
Perf. rÉrvtj>a TETVtpE TE7V<pOl¡J.L TETVtjHO 7£TVtj>ÉvaL 7v\bac
Pluperf. ET£TV(j>ElV
T£7V^>í>Q
2 Aor. ervTrov rvire 7VTroi¡ii rvirto 7V1TEIV
I n t h e fourth class t h e F u t . is circumflexed. TVTTLOV
1 Fut. a-KEpoi | OTÍEpaiflL atTEpiov.

N . B . The Leamer should repeat the Table first in the order of the T e n s e s ;
thus, Indicativo Mood, Tvitri», hvTtrov, 7vú/io, hviba, &c. and then in the order of the
Moods, as, P r e s e n t Tense, RÓTRRW, 7VTT-E, RV7RROI/.u, &c.

* I f a venvd comes before t w o consonants, tlic Grammarians cali the syllable long ly posiiion.
 SO A PLAIN AND EASY SECT. X I .

SECTION XI.

O F T H E P A S S I V E V O I C E O F V E R B S I N w, A N D F I R S T O F T H E
A U X I L I A R Y V E R B ki¡ií.

1. A s in English we have no passive Voice b u t w h a t is made of t h e Participle

passive joined to t h e auxiliary V e r b to be t h r o u g h o u t all i t s variations, as / am
smitten, I was smitten, I have been smitten, &c. so in Greek several forms in t h e
passive are expressed b y t h e Participle Perfect a n d t h e Verb h¡xí to be.
2. H e r e follows, therefore, t h e irregular Verb 'Ei/xí to be, declined t h r o u g h o u t ,
•which t h e L e a r n e r must repeat first with t h e English to each word, as Sing. hfií I
am, Eig or éi ihou art, kart he is ; P l u r . í<r¡xév we are, ¿aré ye are, huí they are ; and
t h e n without t h e English, as Sing. EILIÍ, lig or h, inri, &c. T h e succeeding example
of t h e Passive V e r b rv^ropai m u s t also be repeated in like manner.

INDICATIVE MOOD.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

Persons. 1. 2. _ 3. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3.
P r e s . / am, 'Eifií, kie or ei, inri • EO70V, EffTVV laixkv, ESTE, Eiai
Imperf. / was, ~IIv, 7/C, i) or i\v • l'lTOV, Í¡T11V ÍJLLEV, I)TE, í¡aav
F u t . I shall be, "Eu-opai, r¡, itrai OflEO Eddov, Ecrdov ó¡j.Eda,£(xdE,ovrai.

IMPERATIVE MOOD.

P r e s . Be thou, "ludí or EUO, '¿aria | > íarov, íamiv j EUTE, lanoirav.

OPTATIVE MOOD, E10£ I Wisll.

Pres. and P e r . I were, "Einv, £ir¡g,£iv Einrov, En¡Tr¡v £lt]fl£V, Elt]TE, ElTjUaV
F u t . Imay be hereqfter,'Eir-oí[xy]ViOio, oiro oí¡j.¿6ov, otadov,óiudr¡v ¿ÍJU£0a, oiude, oivro.

SÜBJUXCTIVE MOOD, ECIV if.

P r . a n d Perf. / be, T
í i , ng, y J i¡rov, ipov, \ áfiev, Í¡TE, ¿>ai.

INFINITIVE MOOD.

Pres. Eo'CÍI to be.

T
F u t . "EctuOcu to be hereqfler.

PARTICIPLES.

M. F. N. M. F. N.
Pres. Being, N . "£ív, bvaa, ov. F u t . About to be, N . 'E<rófiEv-og, ov.
G. "Ovrog, ¿vane, ovrog. G. ov, ?jc, ov.

QTo these Tenses m a y perhaps be added an imperfect middle, i?/*»7v.]

3. All Verbs in w are in t h e Passive Voice conjugated as t h e following example
of TvTTTOfiai I am smitten.

* f i n the I s t P c r s o n the A t t i c s often use >J; and in the 3 u gcnerally ?,:.']

-f- T!y a c o m m o n syncope, i'ercu.
 PASSTVE V O I C E .

Pres. Perf. 2(1 Aor.

TvTTTOLiai. TÍTVLILLO.I. irvitriv.

INDICATIVE HOOD.

Singular. Dual. Plural. ,

Persons. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3.
Pres. / am smitten, Tvirr-oiiai, £-cu ÓfXtQov, 1 eadoy, EOQOV ófieda, EO&E, OVTCIL
I n i p . / ivas smitten, '"Ervirr-ófiriv, ov, ETO ó/xedov, EtrQov, eaurjv ópsOa, cade, OVTO
Perf. / have been— TÉTV-fifiai, TTTÜL pitedov, <j)6ov, (bdoy LifxeOa, (¡>de, TETVfipÉvoi kial
P l u p . / had been— 'ETETÍl-LllinV, 7T70 piiedov, (bOov, LifieOa, tpds, TETVfiLiévoi r¡<rav
P a u l o post F u t .
I shall be—presently j- TeTvip-o¡j.ai, v> £rcu &c. as t h e P r e s e n t .
1 Aor.") / mas or f 'lEríif-d-nv,
2 Aor. / have been— } v s , V TJTOV, rjTnv 7]TE, i)oav
L'erótr-jjv,
1 F u t . \ / shall or J Tv<pQ-ri<joiiai }

2 Fut. i mili be— \ Tv7T-TI(TOLiai,

trat &c. as t h e P r e s e n t .
h

IMPERATIVE MOOD.

Pr. and Imp. T TviTT-OV, ECTOü) éaQov, éndcov ECTOE, éaQiúoav

Perf. and P l u p . | TÉTV-lpO, <pdo> (bdoy, LpdíúV <p6e, (jidiotray
Be thou smitten, •<
1 Aor. f* % Tvtbd-nrt,
2 Aor. ^ 7]T(0 rjTOV, ririov TJTE, r¡Tiocrav.
TvTr-riri

* T w o V e r b s , ÉÍKO/AM a n d Sio/ixi, m a k e t h e 2d P e r s o n i n si, A Í A E I a n d o<e». S o l¿o/mi, l s t F u t . of ¡¡rn/iai, m a k e s S^si. [ A n d all V e r b s in

the A t t i c dialect.]
t [ T h e existence of the l s t Person dual is very doubtful.]
í A f t e r an aspírate t h e 2d A o r i s t enda i n r¡ ¡, n o t ifii, as jriQmt.
T
 OPTATIVB MOOD, ElOe, I wisll.

P r . and I m p . / were— Tvrrr-óiixnv,

1 F u t . "1 / may be— J Tvij¡Qr¡a-óipt}v,
2 Fut. f hereafter \ TvTrrjcr-ótpnv, }• oto, óipedov, oicrQov, ¿tfiEQa, oitrde,
Paulo post F u t .
j-Tervip-óipny,
I may be—presently
1 A o r . \ / were or
2 Aor. ) had been— {
Tv<p9-Éir¡v,
TvTr-éir¡v, une,
} EIT] urjTOv, ur,-r\v EinpEv, ur¡TE, Eincrav
Perf. and P l u p .
/ had been— j>Tt.nTV[Xp.£VOS ElljV íine, 'éir¡
-ETvppéviú 'ÍUJTOV, Eir¡rr¡v TETvppÉvoi '¿ir¡pev, 'éirjTE, eincrav

SUBJUNCTJVE MOOD, EÓ.V, if.

P r . and I m p . I be- Tínrr-iopai, V> nrat pEdov, vcrQov, ncr&ov ¿peda, r¡crde, lovrai
1 A o r . } I have f Tv(j)d-k>, ->

2 A o r . J been— \ TvTT-ló, pe, V TJTOV, TJTOV mpev, VTE, tStrt

Perf. and P l u p .
/ had been— j- TeTvppévoe a, T¡¡Q, TETVpflEl'h), IjTOV, IjTOV
TETVfi/XEVOl lOpEV, Í)TE, WCTl

INFINITIVE MOOD. PARTICIPLES

M. F.
P r . and I m p . TvTTr-EaQai To be smitten. P r . and I m p . TvTi-rópEv-oe, ^ ' Being smitten *.
Perf. and P l u p . TETvtp-dat To have been smitten. Perf. a n d P l u p . Tírv^péy-oe, \ Having been smitten.
P a u l o post F u t . Ter¿¿-£tT0at To be smitten presently. P a u l o post F u t . TETV^ÓLIEV-OS, > n, ov, < About to be presently
1 Aor. Tv(j)8-r¡vai 1 Fut. Tv(pQ-r¡aúpEv-oe, I I About to be [_smillen.
To have been smitten.
2 Aor. Tvx-i¡vai
f 2 Fut. IW./txÓyUE.'-OC, J [ hereafter smitten.
1 Fut. Tv00-)/tretT0at ) rp ^ liten hereafter. j Smitten or having
o g sm 1 Aor. Tv(p6-Éie,
2 Fut. lv7r-ii<TEar0ai j ° 2 Aor. Tvrr-Éts, ' ' \ been smitten.

* O r rather, being in, or a', smiting, i. e. NOW suffcring under strokcs •; for being smitten implies having su See an excellent G r a m m a l í c a l E s s a y
i n G e n t l e m a n ' s M a g a z i n e for J a n u a r y 1775, p . 10, & c .
SECT. XI. GREEK GRAMMAR, 33

OF T H E FORMATION O F T H E TENSES IN T H E PASSIVE VOICE.

4. T h e r e a r e nine Tenses ín the Passive Voice, of which t h e three principal,

naihely, t h e Present, t h e ' Perfect, and t h e second Aorist, aré formed from t h e
Active.

0P THE PRESENT.

5 . T h e Present Tense is formed from t h e Present active by changing <a into

opai, as TVTTTta, TVTTTOpai.

OF THE IMPERFECT.

6 . T h e imperfect is formed from the P r e s e n t by changing ¡iai into pr¡v, and pre-*
fixing the augment, as rímropai, érvirrópriv; ayofiai, r)yópr¡v.

OF T H E SECOND AORIST.

7. T h e second Aorist is formed from t h e second Aorist active by changing ov into

i\v, as ETVTTOV, ÉTVTTTJV.

OF T H E SECOND FUTURE.

8. T h e second F u t u r e is formed from the t h i r d Person singular of t h e second

Aorist by adding ao¡iai, and dropping t h e augment, as krimt], rywíiaopai,

OF T H E PR É T E R - P E R F E C T .

9. T h e Perfect is formed from t h e Perfect active by changing, in t h e first class

of Characteristics, *a {l- impure

? ' .°into^pai,
U, eint
^' ^ >
a Sr i r a rérv

as rérspipa, réreppai;
ai

in the second, v « {™ W> t o

T '
ai aS
' X ¿ X

L after y into fiai, r/Xey^a, ijXeypai;

into apai, as Tri-KEiKa, iréirciapai;

in the third, ica | into ¡xai, when the penúltima of t h e Perf. active is long,
and t h e Characteristic of t h e P r e s e n t is ta puré, as

í ' *°
•xETvoínica, irEiroíVfMi j
in t h e fourth na U
' L í a t
' a s
^ ^ a K a
' é\í/a\juot: but irÉQayica. makes
L irÉ(¡>a<rpai,

EXCEPTIONS.

1 0 . Except, in t h e t h i r d class, some Verbs in ta puré, which make t h e Perfect in

opai, although t h e penúltima of t h e Perfect active be long, as tficuirpai, from tacata
lo hear, KÍKpwpai from Kpito to knock, 'éirraio-pai from irráito to slumble, KEKÍXtvapai
from KtXévta to order, KÉicketo-pai from K\eíta to shut, céo-sia-pai from o-eíta to shake,
iyvtaapai from yvóto to knom, rédpav&pat from Srpávta to break.
34 A. P L A I N A N D E A S Y SECT. X I .

11. In the second and t h i r d class the penúltima EV drops its E, as in •KÉcovypai from
<j>évyti> toflee, K.íyyiiM from \kb>, yívabí to pour.
12. From Verbs in aivw and vvio t h e A t t i c s form the Perfect passive in opai, as
•7TÉ<paa/j.aL from (patrio, pepóXva¡xai from ¡xoXvvio.
13. I n t h e first class, Verbs of two syllables, which have rpe in t h e penúltima,
ehange E into a, as c-pktpto lo tum about, 'korpefa, íarpapnai; rpkrrio, rérperjia, TE-

Tpaii¡iai; rpé<l>io, rérperpa, réOpafiLiai. Observe this last resumes t h e 0 of t h e l s t

F u t . active to distinguish it from t h e Perfect pass. of rpéirio.

OF T H E P E R S O N S OF T H E PERFECT.

14. T h e Persons of the Perfect are not in all Verbs formed as in rkrvfíifíai, but
variously in different Verbs, as follows:

In the Jirst class,

T h e Characteristic of t h e Perf. act. is t h u s changed before pai, trai, and raí: for
TÍrv(¡>¡iai, TÉrvfaai, rérviprai are used rkrvpfíai, rkrvbaí, rérvirrai, & C ; for TSTEpffiai,
rérEpijxrai, rÉrEpiprai are used rkrEpfiai, rkrEpihai, rérepirrai, from réprno. (Comp.
Sect. 1.10.)

In the second class,

F o r —Xr - ' —X >

10 1
^ —X
aai a n < r a t a r e
P ^ —yp-ah —% h
11 a a u
¿ —Krat, as \e\syfiat,
\ é a e £ c u , XéXeKrai, from Xéyw.

In the third,
For—Kfxai,—Kaai, a n d — K - a i are p u t -^apai, — a a i , and — j a i , as ^k-Kíiapai,
TrzTrzíaai, 7réireta~at, from irúQw.

In the fourth,
T h e Characteristic of the Perf. act. is altogether omitted, as in É'tpaX^cu, 'ktpaXcrue,
iú/aX-ai, from -d/áXXio ; b u t 7ré(j>aafj.ai, irk(j>avaai, Trkípavrai.

OF FORMING THE PERSONS OF T H E D U A L A N D PLURAL PERFECT.

1 5 . M before pai in the first class, y before ¡xai in t h e second, and o- before fíat
in t h e t h i r d , are preserved in t h e first Person dual and * plural, as in TEríppE-Oov
a n d — 6 a from rkrvfipai; XéXkyfit-Qov and — 6 a from XkXzypai; TrETTEÍapE-6ov and
—-6a from •Kk-KEwp.ai.
16. In the second and t h i r d P e r s o n dual and in t h e second plural t h e tenues of
t h e t h i r d Person singular are changed into t h e i r aspirates, as from rírvirrai, TE-
rvaodnv, rkfvajdE; from XkXEnrai, XkXEyQov, XÉXE-)(6E ; from Trkfavrai, TtkipavBov, irk-
<¡>av&E. B u t if the t h i r d Pers. sing. end in raí puré, then a is inserted before 6ov and
6E; t h u s from VEfk¡.ir¡Tai vEvkfinaQov,} VEVE\MI)0-6E.
17- T h e t h i r d Person plural is formed from t h e 3 d Person singular, if it e n d i n
raí puré, by inserting v before raí, as from KÍKpcrai, KkKpivrai.

* A n d where y precedes the Characteristic of the theme in the second class, i t i s preserved also in
the second and third person both of the singular and of the d u a l , and in the second person o f the plural,
a s from ixíyyu; Perf. pass. r¡Ki—"i!"-', — 7 ? ' , • — y x r a i . D u a l . — y / i t O o v , — y y Q o * , —yyOm.
K
Plur.
SECT. X I . GREEK GRAMMAR. 35

N . B . It would be very proper for the Learner in this place to wrile out, accord-
ing lo the above Rules, t h e Perfect passive ytypappai from ypá(¡»a, -KÍiiXtypai from
•KXÍKÍÚ, 7r£7rXjj(r|Ltat from TrXí¡dti>, íairapfiai from airdptt), XéXvpai from Xvto, through-
out all the Persons and Numbers.

0P THE PRETER-PLUPERFECT, AND MOODS OF THE PERFECT.

18. T h e Pluperfect is formed from t h e Perfect b y c h a n g i n g pui into pr¡v and p r e -

fixing E if t h e Verb begin with a consonant, as rérvppai, irervppr¡v.
i 9. T h e Persons of t h e Pluperfect are formed after t h e analogy pf t h e Persons of
t h e Perfect, preserving t h e terminations as in írtrvpfiiiv.
20. So, as to t h e other Moods, t h e Perfect Imperative derives i t s second Person
sing. from t h e second Person sing. of t h e Indicative, as rérvxpai, rérvxpo; XéXe^ai,
XÉXE'£,O ; icéicpioai, KÉtcpwo; its other Persons from t h e second P e r s . plural, as rérv^de,
TErítpdw ; XéXexde, XeXéxQu; KEKPKJOE, KEtcpíaOo). W h e n c e also m a y be deduced t h e
Perfect Infinitive, as XeXéxQai, KetcpíoQai. T h e Perfect Optative and Subjunctive
are most usually formed by t h e auxiliary EIVV a n d é ; b u t sometimes t h e O p t a t i v e
is formed from t h e Indicative b y c h a n g i n g pai into pnv, as XéXvpat, XeXvpÉvoe ¿írtv
a n d * XtXvpnv, vo, vro, &c. a, £, o , take t before pnv, as '¿tcrapai, EK.raípr\v, ato,
airo, &c. Sometimes t h e Perfect Subjunctive is formed b y c h a n g i n g t h e vowel of
t h e Indicative before pai into <5, as EKrapai, ÉKrwpai.

OF T H E FIRST ¿OR.IST.

2 1 . T h e first Aorist is formed from t h e t h i r d Person singular of t h e Perfect by

changing at into -nv, a n d tenues into their aspirates, a n d dropping t h e prefixed
consonant, if any, as rérvirrai, Érv(j¡di]v; ápvKrai, ¿¡pvxüiiv.

22. Verbs which in t h e Perfect h a d ehanged e into a, resume t h e i r £ in the-first

A o r i s t ; as '¿arpappai, érrrpéipdnv; and those which h a d cast away y poetically take
it again, as t hcXivQnv for EKXI'ÁTJV from KXÍVUJ.

23. Some first Aorists in t h e penúltima have r for 6 of t h e Perfect, as i-áfdriv

I was buried) from S-COTT-UJ, rídaiipai; ÉrpÉtpdiiy I was nourished, from rpéfu),
TÉBpappai, to prevent t h e disagreeable concurrence of aspirates. Comp. p a g . 2 8 .
Note ( f ) .
24. Some first Aorists assume a, as ípvr¡o-dr¡v from péuvnrai; and some reject
it, as écrwdr¡y from uírnaarai; and some change rj into E, as evpédrjv from Eupnrcu.

,QF T H E F I R S T FUTURE.

2 5 . T h e first F u t u r e is formed from t h e third Person sing. of t h e first Aorist by

adding tropai, and dropping t h e a u g m e n t , as irvfdn, TvtpOiitropai. (Comp, Rule 8 .
above.)

OF T H E PAUI/O-POST-FUTURE.

26. T h e Paulo-post-future is formed from t h e second P e r s . sing. of t h e Perfect

by inserting op before ai, as rérvipai, rervtpopai; TrétrXtZai, TreirXé'iopai.
27. T h e Tenses of t h e other Moods are formed from t h e correspondent ones of t h e
Indicative, as in t h e following

* See more in P o r t - R o y a l Grammar, b y N u g e n t , p . 1C2.

t'Aí-EXTá^i;» i n the N . T . (see R e v . i i . 1 3 . í x . Iti, 2 0 . M a t . x v i . 2 1 . ) is formed, after the same ana-
l o g y , from ájroxTt/Vw.
D 2
 36! A PLAIN AND EASY SECT. XII;

T A B L E OF T H E C O G N A T E OR C O R R E S P O N D E N ? 1
TENSES I N T H E P A S S I V E VOICE.

Indicat. Imper. Optat. Subjunct. Infin. Particip.

Pres. iTliirropai ~ywroy TVTTTlúLLai TVWTEO-dcil 'rvTtróptvog

rvjrrqípnv
Imp. \ÍTVTCTÓllr¡V
Perf. TETVfXLlU.1 rÉrv^o V TETVLlflÉroe 10 TETV<t>6(Xl TETVLLllÉVOQ
Plup. rervppévog e'it¡v\
íT£TVfiLlnV
P . p o s t F u . TETVlbofia.1 TETvtpEcrOai TETyllÓfXEVOQ
reTv^oípnv
1 Aor. £TV(j)6riV TVtj>dTjTl TV(j>BCÓ TV(j>6fjvai TV<J}6EÍQ
1 Fut. Tv<pdíiaofJ.at TVtpdEÍt]!' Tv<pdri<Tecrdai rvipBrjoópEvog
2 Aor. lrvwr¡v TVTrr¡Qi vcpdrjtroí/xriv TVTTIO Tvwrjvaí TVKEÍg
2 Fut. \ry wíj tro pai TVTTEÍrjV TvwijaEaBaL rvTTtjcróiiEvog
\rvirnaoípr¡v
2 8 . N . B . The Learner should repeat this in the same manner as the similar
Ttibie in thc Active Voice. Sect. X . 5 7 .

SECTION XII.
O F T H E M I D D L E V O I C E O F V E R B S I N £i, A N D O F T H E
DEPONENT VERB.

1. T H E Tenses of t h e Middle Voice are declined after t h e form of t h e Active or

Passive, according to their termination; t h u s Perf. M i d . rérvir-a is declined like
Perf. A c t . rérv<p-a, ag, e, &c. and 1 F u t . Mid. rvib-opai like Pass. P r e s . rvirr-opai,
TI, Erai, &c

2. H e r e follows, therefore,

A TABLE OF TIIE COGNATE OK CORRESEONDENT T E N S E S IN T H E M I D D L E VOICE.

Indicat. Imperat. Optative. Subjunct. Infinit, Particip.

Pres. Tvirrópai rvirrtí rvivroíiirfv TVTTTlúliai rviTTEaQai TVTTTÓflEVOg
Imperf. irvwróp-qv
1 Fut. Tvtf/oiiai rv\poífxrjV rv\¡/Ecrdai TV\¡/Ó¡XEVOg
or or or or
rvwapai TVKOÍixnv rvirEÍcrdaí rvirúiiEvog
1 Aor. £Tv\pá¡ir¡v rírdiai rvibaípnv TV\pb)Liai rviLciadaí rvtpáiiEvog
Perf. rÉrvira rírv-KE TErVWOlfll rETVTVÜ) TEryírévaí rETVir&g
Pluperf. ETErviTElV
2 Aor. Ervirófinv TVTTÜ TVTTOÍ¡Xr¡V ríwtoLiai TVKzaBaí TVKÓLlEVOg

3 . N . B . The Learner should here repeat all t h e Persons of every Tense, which
fie will easily do, if he is perfect in the Terminations of the Active and Passive
Voiccs.
4 . B u t t h e Terminations of t h e l s t Aorist, Indicative, Imperative, and Optative,
and of t h c 2d [form of t h e ] F u t . being somewhat peculiar, m a y be learned t h u s :
Iridie. 1 Aor. Sing. 'Erv\b-¿ipr¡v, w, aro. D u . ¿ipeBov, qoQov, ao-dnv. P l . ápeda,
ÍÍCOE, avro.
Imper. 1 Aor. Sing. Tv^-ai, c'urdco. D u . aadov, áaBwv. P l . UO-OE, áo-Btoaav.
O p t a t . 1 Aor. Sing. Tvip-aípi]u, aw¡ airo. D u . aíptQvv, awQov, aiuOr^y.
Pl. alpida, awOe, aivro.
 SECT. XII. GREEK GRÁMMAR. 3f

F u t . Indic. Sing. * TvK-ovfjat, r¡, ¿irat. D u . óvjxsQóv, ¿icrOov¡ éiaOov. P l . óvp¿Qa¡

ÍÍÍT0E, ovvrai.

OF T H E FORMATION OF T H E T E N S E S I N T H E MIDDLE VOICE.

5 . Tlie Present and Imperfect are t h e same as t h e P r e s e n t and Imperfect passive.

6. T h e Future is formed from t h e F u t u r e active by changing t¡> into o¡xai, as
TV\b(o, rvxbofiat, [ a n d w, S/ÍCU,] as ipaXw, \baXovpai.
7. T h e jirst Aorist is formed from t h e first Aorist active by adding pnv, as ¿rviLa,
¿TV\pápr¡v.
8. [ T h e Perfect middle is derived from t h e 2d Aor. passive by changing ui into
a, and prefixing t h e redüplication, as ¿TVTCVV, rirvira. B u t in t h e p é n u l t , ]
Q 9 . ) a (arising from E and £t in t h e P r e s e n t ) and é are changed into ó, as in
'íairopa, ¿oroXa, ¿Krova, rltopa, XÉXoya, pépova, & c ]
[ ( 1 0 . ) a from ai or w, or a long in t h e present, becomes r¡, as SéSr¡a, ré8r¡Xa, X¿-
Xr¡6a, except ídicpaya, wéirpaya, TréippdSa, edSa, ¿aya, XéXána.]
[ ( I I . ) I from SI is changed into oí, as itÍTroiQal]
[(12.) £ from I becomes long as ir¿(¡>piKar\
13. T h e Pluperfect is formed from t h e Perfect by changing á into ¿iv, and p r e -
fixing E if t h e V e r b begins with a consonant, as rírvira, ¿rerínreiv.
14. T h e second Aorist is formed from t h e second Aorist active by chaiigihg ov
into op-qv, as ¿TVTTOV, ¿rvnóprjv.

OF T H E D E P O N É N T VÉEB.

15. A Deponent Verb h a t h generally an f active signification, b u t is declined iri

some Tenses after t h e passive, and in Others after t h e middle form, as Séj(opai to
receive.

Pres. AE'XP/ÍGU, 1 F u t . oé^opai, Perf. S¿d¿ypai.

Indicat. Imperat. Optativo. Subjunct. Infinit. Particip.
Pres. Ac-)(Opai S¿x¿iprjv S¿x<ófJ.ai Séj(Ecrdai Se-)(ópsvoe
Imperf. ÉS¿xópr¡v
1 Fut. Séi,opai Z¿lpipy]v d¿£,¿crdai b¿Í,Ó¡l¿VOQ
1 Aor. ¿S¿^ápr¡v Sé^ai ()¿a,aípr¡v Mt,iopai déÍ,acrQai í¿íáp¿VOQ
Perf. SéS¿ypai McStiío S¿S¿ypévos ¿ir¡v c¡¿S¿yp.évo£ wS¿Sé-)(dai h¿S¿yn¿voc
Pluperf. ¿d¿S¿ypr¡v
P.p.Fut. S¿S¿^opai S¿B¿!-¿ipnv S¿S¿^,¿rrdai SeS¿^óp¿vos
2 Aor. ¡¿•%6nTi Se\d¿ír¡v Sej(dr]vai S¿j(6¿ÍC
2 Fut. (i¿yBh°~opai S¿xQt)croípr]V 3¿xdtio-£0-dai S¿xdv ó¡J.£vóe tT

] 6. T h e following Scheme or T r e e will show at one vieiv how t h e Tenses of a

Greek Verb are derived or branched off from t h e T h e m e or Root.

* T h e s e three V e r b s , É'SÍU, J T / W , fáyw, d o n o t circumflex their second F u t u r e m i d d l e , and are formed

as (píyo/j-m,—urcti,—STK. ; P l . — o / x i O a , — E O - 6 F , — ovrai; Infin. <píyít:()cti, ¿ce. T h u s íSoftai is d i s t i n .
g u i s h e d from É'Ss^ai, 2 F u t . m i d . of ejiu to.sit; b u t observe it m a k e s i t s 2 P e r s . sing. é'SIJ, A t t . litu
-f- T h e 2 d A o r i s t ( a s 'híyjíw) in these V e r b s h a s often a passive sense.
 38 A PLAIN AND EASY Ségt. XIL

ts
a.
a.

cu
'"ro, 3
-3-
f
^ 4 >1K
Ir-***"'

iirov r
ia f.Twrrev H

TVnTíi

N . B . 7/ ?£zZZ ¿e a very useful exercisefor the Learner to display other Verbs iñ

the same manner, as of t h e first class, rípita, Xhtw, ypcujiio; of t h e second, •¡fKÍKia,
\¿yu>, fipíyw, opvaau), or — r r o i ; of t h e t h i r d , avíni, o-wévSw, Tréidw, <j>pá^u>, TÍOJ ; of
t h e fourth, ipáXKo), vépio, <páivu>, Gtréipu), répvu>.
17. In parsing a Greek V e r b or Participle, i. e. in deducing it grammatically
from its theme, t h e best and most n a t u r a l way seems to be by n a m i n g those tenses
and words only, which, according to the above Rules, and t h e preceding T r e e , in-
tervene between the theme and t h e word proposed, or which are necessary to account
for its form : F o r instance, if it be required to parse t h e Verb rv^drio-erai, 3 d P e r s .
sing. 1 F u t . passive Indicát. of TV-KTIÚ, Jet the L e a r n e r proceed t h u s ; TVTTTW, (1 Fut.)
rvxpü), (Perf.) renací, (Perf. Pass.) rérv-ppai, — t / / c u , — r a í , (1 Aor.) erÍHpOriv, (1
F u t . ) Tv^Qí]ao¡xai, TV<pQ>iar), rv^díitreraí. Á g a i n , for rvTreirai, 3d P e r s . sing. 2 F u t .
Indic. middle of fínrrii); TVWTU, (2 Aor.) Irvwov, (2 F u t . ) TVTTW, (2 F u t . Mid.) TV-
rrüpai, rvTrfj, TvwEirai. F o r ÍTríivoíQei, 3d P e r s . sing. Pluperf. Indic. mid. of -tréSta,
let him say, TlhOw, (1 F u t . ) TTEÍO-W, (Perf.) iríwEiKa, ( 2 Aor.) * lirSov (Perf. M i d . )
•KÍ-KoSa, (Pluperf. Mid.) ínitóStiv, —EIC, — é i . Once more, for a.ire.<;ákpévóQ, P a r -
ticip. Perf. P a s s . Mase. Sing. Nominative Case from t h e compound Verb ¿WOOTEMW,
let him ñame a-KoaréW(i>, (1 F u t . ) á7rooT£Á£i, (Perf.) t áTrétrraÁKa, (Perf. Pass.)
ImiaraXpai, (Particip.) cnrEo-raXpévoQ.
18. F o r t h e manner in which Verbal Nouns are deduced from Verbs, see Sec-
tion V I . 8.

" T h e second Aorist should here he named because it is necessary to account for the form, i. c. in
the present instance, for the Cltaracierislic, of the Perf. M i d . jrtVoiía. See aboye í¡.
t See Sect. X . 8 2 , and 4 8 .
 SECÍ. XIII. GREEK GRAMMAR. 39

SECTION XIII.
OF CONTRACTED VERBS.

1. V E R B S ehding in ato, éto, and ato are in t h e P r e s e n t and Impcrfect of all Moods
most usually contracted; and henee arise t h e contracted or circumflexed Verbs ; t h e
•first kind in <3, (te, a, from Verbs in ato; t h e second in to, Éig, ti, from Verbs in éto;
t h e t h i r d in ¿5, oig, SÍ, from Verbs in oto.
2. I u these Verbs no Tenses b u t t h e Present and Imperfect are contracted, all
their other Tenses being formed regularly like Verbs of t h e t h i r d class in to puré.
3 . T h e Rules ofContraction are mueh t h e same as i n Nouns (see Sect. I I I . 3 1 . ) :
f o r — 1 . In Verbs in áo>, if o or to follow a, t h e contraction is into ñ ; if any other
vowel or diphthong follow it, into 5. * — 2 . I n Verbs in éto, tt is contracted into ti;
to into ov. B u t if a long vowel or a d i p h t h o n g follows t, t h e contraction is made
by d r o p p i n g e. [ I n short words t h e contraction is in general only used in t h e case
of it into ti. T h u s we say, rpeí, trpti, rzveiv; b u t rptw, ¿(topai, rpéopev, irvéso-i,
Tvér¡, & c ] — 3 . I n Verbs in oto, if w or ?j follows o, t h e contraction is into OJ ; if t,
,

or o, or ov, t h e contraction is into ov; if a n y other vowel or d i p h t h o n g follow o, t h e

contraction is into oí; except in t h e Infinitive, oti into pv, as ypvaótiv, xpvaovv, a n d
in t h e 2d Pers. P r e s . Indic. Pass. xpvo-óy, xpvo-ov.
4. These Rules would of themselves enable t h e L e a r n e r to give t h e contracted
form of these Verbs from t h e uncontracted, which latter is declined regularly, as in
Tvwrto. I t m a y , however, be proper t o add

5. A T A B L E O F T H E C O N T R A C T E D V E R B S D E C L I N E D I N T H E I R
PRESENT A N D IMPERFECT TENSES, ACTIVE AND PASSIVE.

ACTIVE VOICE.
INDICATIVE MOOD.

Present Tense.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
1. Tifi-áb), to áeíg-ag áei-S. át-d | áe-a
aov-io
2 . ínX-Éat, ¿5 tets-tie éti-tí tt-tí, TOV rov
to-ov, pev ét-tí, Tt éóv-ov, trt
3 . Xpva-ów, ü 6tiQ-oiQ óti-ol ÓE-OV I
óo-ov ót-ov óov-ov
Imperfect Tense.
1. 'Eríf/.-aoi>, átg-as
tov at-a áe-a. aé-á áo-to cte-á aov-uv
2 . 'JLtpíX-eov, teg-tig
ovv ee-ei ét-tí, TOV té-tí, T1¡V éo-ov, pev ée-ti, re eov-ovv
3. ,
ü,ygva-oov,ovv oee-ove ot-ov ót-ov ot-ov óo-ov óe-ov oov-ovv

IMPERATIVE MOOD.

Present and Imperfect.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
1. Tífi-ae, a at-a CIE-Cl ae-a ci£-a ÜE-Cl,
2. í>t'A-E£, El té-tí, rio ét-tí, TOV et-eí, rtov ét-tí, rt EE'-EI, Toiaav
3. Xpítr-ot, ov oé-ov óe-oij oé-ov óe-ov oé-ov

* [ S o m e f e w V e r b s m a k e R¡ ínstead of A . Thus h a s £ü, T¡¡; TJ, ?í», & c .

 40 A PLAIN AND EASY SECT. X I I I .

OPTATIVE MOODj E10E I iVlsk,

Present and Imperfect.

Singular, Dual. Plural.

1. 'tlfl-áoijXl, (pfilaoig-ioe aoi-to aoi-(¡> aoi-m áoi-<¡i aoi-<a

aoL-ti)
2. <I>lX-£OljUl, OLILI £OL£-0~l£ éoi-ól éot-ol, rov eót-ot, TTjV Éoi-ol, IIÍV ¿Ol-otfTE Éoi-ól,ev
3. Xpva-ootpt, ÓLfll ÚOIQ-OÍQ óoi-dí oói-ot ÓOL-OI óoi-di ¿01-0%

SUBJÜNCTIVE MOOD, kav if.

Present and Imperfect.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

1. Tip-áu), £> ar¡£-q£ arf-d an-a as-a Olú-tO ár¡-a aiú-ío

2. 4>lX-£al, ¿3 ér¡£-r¡£ Érj-rj, rov tr¡-rj, rov éui-iii, pev ér¡-r¡, re íw-hj, ai
3. Xpva-ów, ¿¿ Ór¡£-0~1£ ón-ói ón-ío ón-ü ón-Hi ma-S>

INFINITIVE MOOD.

Pres. and Imperf. ] . Tip-áeiv, q.v. 2 . «SIX-EEIV, EÍV. 3 . Xpva-óetv, ovv.

PARTICIPLE.

1. Tip-áiov, wv aovaa-waa áoV-G>V (áoVTQ£-¡¡i>VTO£ aovarj£-ti>ar)£ aovro£-ti¡vrO£

2. <5>i\-étov, wv ¿ovaa-ovaa éov-ovv Gen.-< éovTog-ovvTog Eovar¡£-ovar¡£ ÉovTOg-ovvroe
3. Xpva'óiav^&v óovaa-ovaa ÓOV-OVV\\ \^ÓOVTO£-OVVTO£
oovarjs-ovanc ÓOVTOQ-OVVTOS

PASSIVE VOICE.

INDICATIVE MOOD.

Present Tense.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
!. Tip-áopat, (o ar¡-aia£-a aó-ñ láf-a ao-u> LE-ít ao-w
2. <t>t\-iopai, 5, pai\\¿y-f¡ \EE-E~I, rail EÓ-5, pedov EE-ET, adov adov ¡EÓ-S, psda JE'E-ET, O-SE]£0-o5, j>ra¿
3< Xpva-óopai, S ór¡-5 ÓE-S oó-5 \óe-5 \oó-5 óo-S ¡eó-S

Imperfect Tense.

1. 'HTip-áo-£> áe-w ClE-á a¿-¿> áe-a aé-á ao-ui ás-a

2. 'JL(pi\-Éo-tí, pr¡v E'H-5 ££-EÍ, TO E Ó - s , p e d o v EE-EÍ, adov EE-EI, adr¡v EÓ-», psda £ £ - £ l , <T0E
3. 'Ey.pva-óo-ú óu-5 ÓE-S oó-u óe-S 0£-B oó-¿ Ó£ «
J

ÍMPERATIVE MOOD.

Present and Imperfect.

Singular. Dual. Plural,
1. 'Vip-áov ü as-a áe-a aé-á
aE-a a£-a
2. ÍVX-E'OV, OV
EE-EI, adw ££-£i, adov E£-£l, adblV ££-£l, adE EE'-EÍ, adwoay
3. Xpva-óov, ov OÉ-OV ÓE-OV OÉ-OV ÓE-OV oÉ-oíi
 SECT. X I I I . GREEK GRAMMAR. 41

OPTATIVE MOOD.

Present and Imperfect.

Singular. Dual, Plural.
1. Tip-aol-tJ aoi-t¡> aoi-b) aoi-tú áoi-jí aoi-íp aoi-to áoi-íjJ aoi-tf
2 . J^X-EOÍ-OÍ, ¡1T)Véoi-ól, o L eói-oí, pedo éoi-ot, odov eol-oí, aQr\v EOÍ-O'I, peOa Éoi-oT, O9E\\éoL-ot, VTO
3. Xpvo-ooí-ol óoi-ol
ÍOL-OÍ, T0\
óoi-o~í oói-ól ooí-oí óoi-ol óoi-ol
ÓOL-ÓÍ

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.

Present and Imperfect.

Singular. DuaL Plural,
1. Tip-áio-G> ár)-¡p arj-a aio-to ar¡-a aot-to áji-á ata-d
2. <&iX-£(d-£i, pai ér]-r¡ Ér¡-rj, raí eíi-ii, pedov\ én-fj, odov] E¿>-í>, peOa Ér¡-rj, odé É(i)-üj, vroi
3. XpvtT-ów-¡¡> óji-ot Oh)-tú ón-có oí)-¿) ów-ñ

INFINITIVE MOOD.

P r e s . and" Imperf. 1 . Tip-áeodai-ao-dai. 2 . <J>iX-É£o-0at-£Ío-0at. 3 . Xpvcr-óetr6ai-5tr0at.

PABTICIPLE.

1. Tip-aópevoQ-¿> \
2. <friX-eópEvos-ov f-pevoe, pévn, pevov.
3 . XpvtT-oópevos-ov )
- T h e M i d d l e Voice is contracted like t h e Passive, i t having t h e same P r e s e n t a n d
Imperfect Tenses.
6. I n contracted Verbs t h e Vowel before ota in t h e l s t F u t . a n d before Ka in t h e
Perfect, is generally long, as ripáto, ripr)crti>, rtrípriKa; tpiXéto, <¡>iXr)ata, iretpíXriKa; XP " V

nota, xpuffíio-ai, KexpvowKa.

EXCEPTIONS.

7. l s t . Verbs in ato, t h a t have £, t, X, or p puré, before ati, ( a n d some o t h e r s ) ,

form t h e i r first F u t u r e in atrio a n d Perfect i n aica, as íato, eaato, eiana; so Kowiáto,
y¿káto, Épáto.—2dly.
Some V e r b s in éto m a k e eoto a n d £/ca, as áiSéto, apuéto, épéto, &c.
and some of two syllables, in
EVO-OÍ a n d evita, as irvéta to breathe, TrXéto to sail, ¿(éto to
pour.—3dly. Some Verbs in oto m a k e otxto a n d otea, as ápóto to plough, ¿poto to srvear,
¿voto to blame.
8. Contracted V e r b s generally w a n t t h e 2d Aor. 2 F u t . a n d Perfect middle. B u t
9. T h e second Aorist, when used, is formed from t h e Imperfect b y casting away
t h e vowel before ov, as trípaov, hipov, étj>iXeov, 'étpiXov.
 42 A PLAIN AND EASV SECT. X I V .

A TABLE O F CONTRACTED VERBS CONJUGATED THROUGH T H E

TENSES O F T H E INDICATIVE-

ACTIVE VOICE. PASSIVE VOICE. MIDDLE VOICE.

Pres. Ti/xáw-ü) Pres. Tipciopai-üpai Pres. Tipáopai-üpai

Imperf. 'Erípaov-wv Imperf. 'Eripaóp-qv-üypnv Imperf. 'Eripaópriv-íúpriv
1 Fut. Tipi}Cri>) Perf. Tcrípr¡pai 1 Fut. Ttp-ticropai
1 Aor. 'Erípr¡ira Pluperf. 'EreTipi)pr¡v 1 Aor. 'Eripncrcipr]v
Perf. TtrípwKa P . p . F u t . Tenprieropai Perf. Téripa
Pluperf; 'ETeripñicsiv 1 Aor. 'EripriQrjv Pluperf. 'ErerípEiv
2 Aor. "Enpov 1 Fut. Tip.7lQriaop.ai 2 Aor. 'ÜTipópnv
2 Fut. Tipió 2 Aor. 'Eríprjv 2 Fut.. Tipovpai
2 Fut. Tipi)cropai

P r e s . <&iX¿u>-G> Pres. ^iXéopai-Spai Pres. ÜiXéopat-ovpaL

Imperf. 'EtpíXiov-av Imperf. 'E<f>iXt¿pr)v-ápr]v Imperf. 'E(j>iXeópriv-ovpT¡v
1 Fut. *ÍX?;O-(J Perf. TíerpíXripaL 1 Fut.' $iXr)cropai
1 Aor. 'E<f>í\7icra Pluperf. 'ETretyiXripnv 1 Aor. 'E¡piXr¡iyápr¡v
Perf. HetyíXrjica P. p. Fut. HeípiXíicropai Perf. HéífuXa
Pluperf. 'Eir£(j>i\f)K£LV 1 Aor. 'ErpikíiQnv Pluperf. 'E7r£</>t'X£tv
2 Aor. "EípiXov 1 Fut. <&iXr¡d{icropat 2 Aor. 'EtyiXóp-nv
2 Fut. Í>ÍXW 2 Aor. 'EtpíXrjv 2 Fut. $i.Xovpai
2 Fut. <biXi¡aopai

Pres. Xpi/cró&i-w Pres. Xpvcróopai-Spai Pres. Xpvaóopai-ovpat

Imperf. 'Expvo-oov-xv Imperf. 'Expviroópnv-¿pr¡v Imperf. ^Expvaoópvv-ovpnv
1 Fut. Xputrwcrw Perf. ~K.e%pvcr(i)pai 1 Fut. Xpv<rú>cropai
1 Aor> 'Expvo-uo-a Pluperf. 'EKeyjpvo-úpnv 2 Aor. 'E-npvo-aaíipnv
Perf. KfxpúcrwKa P. p. F u t . Kexpvcrwcropai
Pluperf. 'EKVX.? ' ÚKUV
V !
1 Aor. 'E-%pvcrtú6r]v
] Fut. Xpvcrti)6í]cropaí

1 0 . T h e other Moods a r e easily formed from t h e Indieative.

11. T h e formation of t h e Tenses is t h e same as in riraro, t h r o ú g h o u t all t h e Voicesr.

SECTION XIV.

O F T H E S E C O N D C Ó N J U G A T I O N , O R O F D E C L I N I N G V E R B S I N pt.

1. T H E Coujugation of Verbs in pi flows from t h e contracted Verbs in aw, £&>,

and ou>.
2. These V e r b s , t h o u g h rarely used in t h e Present, Imperfect, a n d second Aorist,
are, however, declined after a peculiar mauner in those t h r e e Tenses, their other
Tenses being formed nearly as Verbs in
SECT. XIV. GREEK GRAMMAR. 43

O P T H E FORMATION OF VERBS IN p h AND OF THEIR TENSES.

3 . Verbs in pi are formed from Verbs in a<o, eui, ota, \j)u>, & c ] by changing t h e
termination <o into pi, and t h e short characteristics a, e, o, into their long ones rj, y,
t o ; and by prefixing t h e reduplication of t h e first consonant with i, unless t h e V e r b
begins with a double or two Consonants, and then t only is prefixed; t h u s ,

"larypi to set, from o r á w ; (1 F u t . ) nryo-to, (Perf.) *«rrcuca.

Tídypi to place, from $ÉO> ; ( 1 F u t . ) Sytrto, (Perf.) rédeaca.
AíStopí to give, from doto; (1 F u t . ) 2 ú w , (Perf.) SéduKct.

4 . Some Verbs in pi have a letter inserted after t h e reduplication, as H-Í/MTXTJ/ÍI to

Jill from 7rXciw, irépirpripL to bum from irpáto.
5. Some are without a reduplication, as <¡>yfií to speak, a&ypí to extinguish, aktopí
to ta/ce, [and all whose radical form is more t h a n dissyllable, as Seiavvpi, & c ]
C. Sometimes, though very rarely, e is used in t h e reduplication instead of t, as
TÉQvnpi to die, from Sváia.

7. T h e Preter-imperfect Tense is formed from t h e Present, by changing pi into

yv and prefixing t h e a u g m e n t , unless t h e Verb begins with i , as rídypi, '¿riQyp;
'lüTUpx; '¿(TTTjV. .

8. B u t observe t h a t this Imperfect is not so often used as another formed, as i t

were, from 'Larato, rídeto, SíSoto, namely 'íar-tov, ae, a; irídovv, tic, ei; íSíS-ovv, ovg,
ov. So likewise for t h e second person singular of t h e Imperative is used lora, TÍOEL,

SlSov.
9. T h e second Aorist is formed from t h e Imperfect, by rejecting t h e reduplica-
tion, as érídyv, íQiiv; ínv, yv; b u t t before two Consonants is ehanged into t, as
taryv, earyv.
10. T h e P r e s e n t passive is formed from t h e Present active, b y changing pi into"
pai, and t h e long vowel before pt into a short one, as 'io-rypi, 'íarapai; rídnpi, ríde-
pai; SíSuipi, SíSopai. E x c e p t urjpai, and some others.
1 1 . T h e Perfect passive always has t h e penúltima short, except t h e Bceotic f
rédetpai.

12. Verbs in fii have no second F u t u r e , Perfect middle, ñor second Aorist p a s -
sive ; and indeed so great is their Imperfection t h a t there is scarce one to be found
in every respect regular. T h e most perfect are t h e three following, 'larypi, rídr¡pi,
<)í¡$(opi-, and 'ír¡pi to send.

* S o m e t i m e s Itmpui. See P o r t - R o y a l G r a m m a r , b y N u g e n t , p . 212.

f T h e p e n ú l t i m a , however, of t h e first A o r i s t E T É V i s shortenecU
44 A PLAIN A N D EASY SECT. X I V .

13. A TABLE OF VERBS IN ¡u D E C L I N E D IN THEIR PRESENT,

IMPERFECT, AND SECOND AORIST TENSES, ACTIVE, PASSIVE,
AND MIDDLE.

ACTIVE VOICE.

INDICATIVE MOOD.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

Pres. 1 • "Inr-ri/u*, ve, r¡ai a-
aai
Tíd-rifii,
ve, r¡ai £- £-
11 "
2. £
- TOV, TOV - ¡XEV, TE ~iai
3. AíS-LOfll, ios, o>ai 0 - 0-
ovaí
C4. AéiKv-vfii, ve, vai V- V- 1 ove
Imp. 1. "l<7T-r¡V, ve, V a- a-
2. V£, V E-
- T O V , TTjV
£-
<• flEV, T E ,
3. 'USíS-oiv, ae, LO 0- 0-
[4. 'JLCIEÍKV-VV, ve, V V- V-

2 Aor. 1 . "Ear-r¡v, ve, V ryrov, r\rr\v r¡fxev, T¡TE, •qaav

2. "E0-7JV, ve? V ETOV, ernv EflEV, ETE, saav
3. "EcW, <¡>s, <o OTOV, OTTjV OjXEV, OTE, oaaV

IM PER ATI VE.

Pres. 1. "Ior-a0í, a- a- a-
and 2. Tí0-£rt, É- £- £-
TOV, TIOV TE, Toiaav
Imp. 3. AíS-oOi, o-
0-
[4- AeUv-vdt, vl- v- v-
2 Aor. 1. Srr;-0t, arri-no, &c. QÉg, Be-reo, & CAóe, dó-Tio, &c. formed as
the Present ||.

OPTATIVE.

Pres. 1. 'larái- av
and 2. Tidii- nv, r¡s, r¡ TjTOV, 7¡TT]V r¡¡itVi r ) T £ , rjáav, an d £t-
Imp. 3. Bói-J
§ AiSó
2 A o r . 1. Srát-jjv, r¡e, &C. 2 . QEÍ-rjv, rjs, & c 3 . Aoí-rjv, r¡e, &e. formed as t h e
Present.

* [ T h e Learner m u s t observe the different forcé i n t h e difFerent parts o f this V e r b . T h e foUWing

T e n s e s are transitive.
Pres. "¡Tiy-i, I make to stand.
Imperf. "Irií>, 1 did stand.
Fut. STÍJC-W, / mili stand.
A o r . 1. "Es-jjo-a, / established.
T h e following are intransitivo.
A o r . 2 . "Erqv, Istood.
Perf. " s-i¡x«, / Aowe taken my stand, or / a?nJlxcd, or established.']
E

+ I o n i c or P o e t i c ; i n Ionic a n d A t t i c prose tíiseuri.

X [ I n prose, in the second person singular, the forms Wüsi, ÍVTIJ, 8/S«, £s',-/»u are u s e d . ]
|¡ [ I n the third person plural, for iérucrar, &c. the forms QÉVTWV, s-ávrw,
SÓÍTTO, are c o m m o n ; a n d
similar forms m a y b e observed i n m a n y other imperatives.]
§ [ T h e V e r b s i n u/i¡ h a v e only the Present a n d Imperfect T e n s e s after this forrh ; and they derive
the Optative and S u b j u n c t i v e o f these from forms in
SECT. X I V . GREEK GRAMMAR. 45

SUBJUNCTIVE.

Pres. 1. 'I<77>(5. ye, V v- )

and 2. Tid-w fi rj- Y rov, •, y- > rt, OJO
Imp. 3. Aici-w V ü- ) ta- )
2 Aor. 1. fie, V
2. e-£¡, ye> rov, rov , y- > re, toa
3. <¡>s, ó) £¡- J

INFINITIVE.

Pres. 1. 'Itrr-ávat, 2, TiO-évai. 3. AiS-óyai. fJ4. Aeuc^-Ímu.]

2 Aor. 1. Jirrjv-ai. 2. Q¿iv-ai. 3 . Aow»cu.

PARTICIPLE.

M. F. N.
Pres. 1. 'lar- atra, áv
2. 'Tífl- ¿iaa, év
M. F. N.
3. AIÍH overa, ov
Gen. 1."J á v r o e , áay£, ávroe
[4. A«K vera, ívj
2. tévros, derne, . ÍVTOQ
2 A o r . 1. S r - á , aaa, áv í óvros, ovayg, ÓVTÓ£
c

2. O-E/C, ¿iaa, év
) VVTOE, {¡ar¡£, ivro£2
3. Aroíe, ovaa, ¿y

PASSIVE VOICE.

INDICATIVE MOOD.

}
Pres. ]."Ierra-r
2 . TÍ0-E-
3. AíS-o-
ucu, trai, rat fJiedov, aOov, aOov ¡leda, a6e, vrai
4. AÚKV-V-

Imperf. L.
1. ' I'lar-á-
or-á-
22. 'Ene-É- f
¡inv, ao, ro fiíOov, aOov, adyv fíeda, aOc, vro
33. "EStS-ó- í
44. 'EoW-v-v- *
I n t h e 2d Person sing. t h e forras Uta, érída are also used.

IMPERATIVE.

Pres. 1. "lar-a-
and 2. TÍ0-E-
aOta adov, adiav adt, aOtaaav
Imp. 3. AíS-o-
4. AEÍKV-V )
T h e forms Uta, rídn, SíSu are also used in t h e 2d P e r s . sing.

OPTATIVE.

Pres. 1. 'lar-ai- 1
and 2 . TI0-£Í- \ fiyv ¡xedov, adov, oOtiv [isQa, oOe, vro
Imp.
3 . AiS-oí- )
46 A" P L A I N A N D E A S Y SECT. XIV.

Perf. 1. 'EOT-CU-
1. E o r - a t - ~\
2. Te6-eí- > ¡xrjv, o, ro, &c. formed as t h c P r e s e n t .
3 . AeS-oí- J

SÜBJUNCTIVE.

P r e s . 1. 'lar-:
-l r
»>??-) v-l , V'}
a n d 2 . Ti0- > Ü/ÍCK, ??, > ra¿ ¿ifieOov, fj->o-dov, adov, ¿ifieOa, f¡->
ade, divrai
I m p . 3 . Aio-
Perf. 1. 'EOT-~J
2. TE0- >ái^ai, &c. formed as the P r e s e n t .
3~. At \eS-J

INFINITIVE, PARTICIPLE.

P r e s . 1. "Icrr-aadat Pres. 1 . 'lar-áfievoQ,

2. Tíd-Eadaí 2. TIB-É/XEVOC,
• ¡iívr¡, ov
3. AíS-oadaí 3. AtS-ófiEvog
4. Adicv-vo-daí 4. AEIKV-VIIEVOQ

MIDDLE VOICE.

N . B . T h e P r e s e n t and Imperfect of all Moods are t h e same as in t h e Passive.

INDICATIVE MOOD.

2 Aor. 'Eo-r-áO
'E0-É- V ¡lev, OO, TO iiedov, adov, adr¡v fiEda, ade, VTO
'Ec5-Ó- )
In the 2d Pers. sing. t h e forms edu and eSa are used.

ÍMPERATIVE.

2 Aor. Srá-
9E- ao, adüi adov, adwv ade. adioaav
Aó-
In the 2d P e r s . sing. t h e forms ™ , d5, SS are used.

OPTATIVE.

2 Aor. Srcu'- l
* Qeí- \ /íne, o, ro fieOov, adov, adnv ¡leda, ade, VTO
Aoí- J

SÜBJUNCTIVE.

2 Aor. 2r-
e- > w¡xat, r¡, r¡~ > raí wfX.£dov,ij- y-adov, adpv ¿¡fiEda, r¡- >ade,
A- J W,(3-J bj-J Sl-J

INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.

M. F. N.
2 Aor. SráO 2 Aor. Srá-'l
GE- \ adaí 0E'- f ¡XEVOQ, fiívn, ¡1EV0V
- \ó- s aó- y
' A n d Soí—iir,v, —oío, &c.
SECT. XV, GREEK GRAMMAR. 47

A TABLE OF T H E V E R B S I N pi C O N J U G A T E D T H R O U G H T H E
TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE MOOD.

ACTIVE VOICE. PASSIVE VOICE. MIDDLE VOICE.

Pres. "lOTTIjXl Pres. "Icrrapai Pres. "IcrrajLtat

Imp. "larrtv Imp. 'Iorájttjjv Imp. "larap-nv
1 Fut. Perf. "Eorajucu 1 Fut. 2rriaopai
1 Aor. "Eo-rijcra Plup. 'EoTctjitjj)/ 1 Aor. 'EoTi7o-áju?)»/
Perf. "EtmjKa 1 Aor. 'TLo-rádnv 2 Aor. 'Eorájujjv
Plup. 1 Fut. 2ra0)jtro^at
I Aor. "JLarrriv P. p. Fut. 'Eorácro/uai

Pres. TíQnpi Pres. Tídepai Pres. TíOepat

Imp. 'JLrídriv Imp. 'ÜTidépriv Imp. 'Eridéprjy
1 Fut. 017 crw Perf. Tédeipai 1 Fut. Qiiuopai
1 Aor. *"E07)(ca Plup. 'Ere6eípr¡v 1 Aor. 'JL6nicápr¡v
Perf. Tt0£iKa 1 Aor. 'Urédnv 2 Aor. 'E0£JUÍ7)/
Plup. 'Er£0£Í(C£tJ' 2 Fut. Te6í)crouat
2 Aor. "E0i7^ P. p. Fut. T£0£ÍtTO/Xat

Pres. AíSwpi Pres. AíSopcíL Pres. AíSopai

Imp. 'ESlSuv Imp. '~ESiSópr]v Imp. 'E&ttyujjy
1 Fut. Awcrct) Perf. AéSoficti 1 Fut. A¿)cropat
1 Aor. *"EcW Plup. 'ESECSÓPJV 1 Aor. 'ESo)Kapr¡v
Perf. AÉcWa 1 Aor. 'E§(50i7i/ 2 Aor, 'EOOJUJJJ'
Plup. 'EÍ£,?(i/c£iv 1 Fut. Aodriaopai
2 Aor. "EoW P . p . F u t . A£c%o-o/nai

SECTION XV.

OF I R R E G U L A R VERBS IN P .

TABLES FOR CONJUGATING T H E MOST USUAL IRREGULAR VERBS IN /¿£.

1. For 'Efíti to be, see Sect. X I . 2.

2. [ EtjUt,
7
gof.
INDICATIVE.

Pres. 'Eijut, ele or el, elcri "iTOV, "iTttiV ipev, tre, iacrt
Imp. "HiEty, yete, yei yeirov, r¡eiTt]v rjeipev, f¡eire, r¡eiaav
or
rjpwv, r¡re, i¡e<yav, or r\<jav

Of t h i s Imperfect t h e r e exists another form also in common use, yia or íja, which
was probably originally t h e Ionic form, as ea, i)a, for r)v from elpí. T h e r e is also
another Imperfect found in t h e oíd poets, viz. "IOV (rfíov, i)ov).

IMPERATIVE.

Pres. "I0£ or Ii, I "iTOV, "iTiúV

* T h e first A o r i s t active, s8>ixa and é'Stuxa, (wher.ee 1 A o r . B l i d . íQiixápiív and éSwxá¡¿rit) ;vre irregular,
(see Sect. X . 4 5 . ) and not declined b e y o n d the I n d i e a t i v e .
I n the present h/ti a l w a y s significs, I will go.
 48 A PLAIN AND EASY SECT. XV.

OPTATIVE. SÜBJUNCTIVE.
Pres. "loifii or loívv | Pres. "Iu, tjjc, &c.

INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.

P r e s . 'lévaí | Pres. '\í>v, lüo-a, lóv.

I n composition t h e Infinitive has often t h e f o r m E t v a i . T

MIDDLE VOICE.

INDICATIVE.

Pres. 'lifiai, 'íeaai, &c.

Imperf. 'léii-qv, &c

Aor í' 'Eió-á/zij)/ } These t\yo chiefly occur in t h e oíd poets.

INFINITIVE.

Pres. "Ico-Gat.]
T h e other tenses are scarcely used.—"ly/ii to go is declined in t h e same m a n n e r :
b u t in prose are principally used of t h e compound Verb airírifxt, 3 Pers. P l u r .
P r e s . * áwíao-iv in t h e Indicative, ¿nríiacriv in t h e Subjunctive, and áiríevaí in t h e
Infinitive.

3. "I7ji« f, from £w to send.

INDICATIVE MOOD.

Pres. "IJJ/U, i»)?) 1r¡o-i itrov, itTOV ie¡j,ev, tere, ieiai or ta£t
I m p . % "lyv, 'ir¡£, Ir) terov, 1err¡v íeiiev, 'íere, ÍEO-CIJ'
1 Aor. Hica (for %<ra) r¡Kag, T]Ke, & C I F u t . "Htr&ij rio-eiQ, ^<T£í, &c.
2 Aor. Hv, T|C, y are not used. I n the Perf. El/ca, tlfcac,
plural 'íjxev, ere, eaav or t\¡xevai, P l u p . EÍK6H/, &c.

ÍMPERATIVE.

Pres. ¿Va), &c.

]• "IEOI or 'leí, liria, &c. I 2 Aor. "Ec,
Imp.

OPTATIVE.

1
Pres.
'leír¡v, ietr¡£, ÍEÍT), &C.
Imp.
2 Aor. e'ít]£, EIJJ, &C-

SUBJUNCTIVE.
Pres. 'I¿¡, ¿1J, &c,
T
2 Aor. íi, &c.
7
y,

INFINITIVE.

}
Pres.
'Iévat I 2 Aor. Etvcu
Imp.

PARTICIPLE.

Pres. 'Iet'c; lelaa, lev \ 2 Aor. E'lc, eiaa,

* S o iio-i'ari». H e b . i x . C.
f I t i s declined l i k e rllhi/u, o n l y h a s an irregular reduplicación.
Í A l s o 'in, 'ks, í't; whence in composition, from &$!r,(u ; ijtpii, M a i k i. 3 4 ,
 SECT. X V . GREEK GRAMMAR. 49

PASSIVE VOICE.

"le/iai to be sent is formed, t h r o u g h all its Tenses, like rldepai. T h e I s t aor. is

"édiiv, or w i t h t h e a u g m . e'ídr¡v.

MIDDLE VOICE.

INDICATIVE MOOD.

1 Aor. 'Hcájuijv, ÍJKW, iJKaro, &c.

2 Aor. "E/¿j)i', eco, ero | epedov, '¿adov, eadriv \ '¿peda, Zade, '¿vro
O r , with augment, "Eiprjv, &c.

IMPERATIVE.

2 Aor. "Eo-o, é'o-eoj | £o-9ov, ecrOoiv \ '¿"de, eadüicrav.

SUBJUNCTIVE.

2 Aor. r
Q,pai, jj, iyrcu, &c.

INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.

2 Aor. "Eo-0at | 2 Aor. "E/HEVOS, 1/iéVij, epevov.

"Inpi. to desire is found only in t h e Passive Pres. íepai, a n d Imperf. 'Lepr¡v.

4. ílpaL, from £o>toÍ¿Í.

INDICATIVE MOOD.

Pres. T
H/xcu ycrai, ?)rat, rjpedov, iiadov, r/adov ijueda, rinde, yvrai
Imp. "Hpnv, ^icro, ÍJTO, rjpedov, ijcrdov, ijadrjv ijpeda, tfade, i)vro
IMPERAT. 'H(TO, 7/V0ÍÜ, & C INFINIT. T
Ho-0at PARTICIP. r¡p£V0£.
So t h e compound li.ádr¡pai to sit, which is more used.

INDICATIVE MOOD.
Pres. lícid-rifxai, rjrrai, r¡rai, | íipedov, r\adov, r¡ardov | ypeda, -nade, r¡vrai
Imp. '~E.Kad-iijj.riv, t]iro, r¡ro | 1 F u t . Kadriaopai.

IMPERATIVE.
Pres. K.Cld-r¡(TO, 7JO-0O» r¡o~dov, r]ad(i)v r¡ade, íiadhitrav.
Imp. } Kádov A t t i c .

OPTATIVE. li.adoí¡lT]V, KCldoiTO. | SUBJUNCTIVE. KáBupai.

INFINITIVE. Kadfjadai. | PARTICIPLE. líadr¡pevoí.

5. "Evvvpi, from'¿h>to put on, "Ei¡xai I am clothed.

ACTIVE VOICE.

INDICATIVE MOOD.

1 Fut. "Eau or "Eaaw \ 1 Aor. "Eaaa, & c

INFINITIVE.
1 Aor. "Eo-at.
 50 A P L A I N A N D EASY SECT. XVI.

PASSIVE VOICE.

INDICATJVE MOOD.

Perf. "Etyiiai, iiaai, 'éirai, &c.

fJThe Perf. had also t h e form "Eafiai ; for we find
P l u p . "Eo-o-o, U.
PARTICIP. Perf. 'Rifleros. | 1 A o r . Mid. "¡Lo-<T¿iu.r¡v.

[N. B . T h e compound úfiajiévvvfii has F u t . a¡i<¡>iío-h>, and Attice cifi(j>iiá. A o r . 1.

Perf. Pass. iipipUo-fiai, i)f.iLpíetra.i, t'ififí^ai,
j'lfiijiíeiTa. &c]

SECTION XVI.

OF D E F E C T I V E VERBS.

1. [\A GREAT number of Greek Verbs are used only in some tenses, while t h e tenses
which are wanting are supplied by others derived from verbs of similar sense proceeding
from t h e same original and obsolete form, or even from Verbs entirely diiferent and
agreeing only in signification. T h u s Verbs in ávw have only..the P r e s . and I m p . A c t .
and P a s s . ; their other tenses are derived from t h e forms which are t h e basis of those
in ávu), Again, in ópáw only, t h e Imperf. ktopwv and Perf. háipaica are used. F o r
t h e F u t . we have o-¿ofiai from oir-ofiai; for t h e Aorist, elSov from eí<io>; for t h e A o r .
Pass. &(¡>dri)>. These Verbs are wrongly called Anomalous (or irregular) by t h e
G r a m m a r i a n s , because they choose to derive all their discordant p a r t s from one
determínate Present tense, though not according to common rules. I have, how-
ever, called them here, simply, Defective, adding t h e tenses from other Verbs, com-
monly used to supply their defects.]

* A LIST OF T H E MOST COMMON D E F E C T I V E VERBS I N T H E I R

MOST USUAL T E N S E S , T O G E T H E R W I T H T H E O B S O L E T E
VERB OR VERBS W H E N C E T H O S E T E N S E S A R E F O R M E D .

A.

To admire "Ayafiai, [ o r ayíwfiai (Hesiod. Theog. 619.) w h e n c e ] 1 F u t .

ayliaofiai, 1 Aor. i]yaaáp,r¡v; 1 Aor. pass. r¡ycicrdr¡v.
brcak "Ayvvfii, [from t h e obs. " A y w ] 1 F u t . cí£w, A t t . £a2;a>, whence t a -
rúi'iti), M a t . xii. 2 0 . 1 Aor. salía, [Ji^aifii, aíof\ whence mreá^a,
J o h n xix. 3 2 . 2 A o r . [pass.] tayr¡v; Perf. '¿aya t , whence
Karéaya.

* T h i s is b y n o m e a n s intencled a s a complete Catalogue of all the anomalous V e r b s observed b y

Grammarians, m u c h less o f all the tenses wherein they are to b e found in the Poetie and other d i a l e c t s ;
b u t is principally dcsigned to assist t h e Readers of the A t t i c writers, especially of the N . T . F o r more
particular information concerning the Anomalous V e r b s , D r . B u s b y ' s Prose G r a m m a r a n d Maittaire's
Gra»e:e L i n g u a : D i a l e c t i m a y b e consulted.
f [ T h e sense of this tense is passive, / am brol<cn.~]
SECT. X V I . GREEK GRAMMAR. 51

To bring "Ay<o, 1 F u t . cí£<o, Perf. iix'h A t t . áyi'/o^o, 2 A o r . iiyov, A t t .

i)yayóv, Imper. ¿íyay£, Infin. ayáyeiy. [_The l s t A o r . i{é,a i n
tlie simple verb is n o t used by good writers, b u t t h e compounds
occur. I n t h e Passive we have Perf. ?r/pai, A o r . i'¡xOr¡v, F u t .

sing "A<5io, 1 F u t . mid. ijio-opai; 1 A o r . act. i\aa,

take Aípéio, l F u t . alpytrui, 2 A o r . EIXOV, 2 F u t . kXZ; 2 A o r . mid. ú\úpr¡v,
2 F u t . íXüpai, from íXw. \J.t has t h e other tenses, fjpyKa, ijpnpai,
j;p£0i))'.]
[lift up
^Adow J"^" e
first is noticed for t h e 2 forms of Aor. mid. 'Apópnv
for ypópnv and i¡p¿ipnv both in Homer. I n t h e other maods, only
ápoípr¡y, apcopai, apeodcu. I n A t t i c , t h e forms r¡p¿i¡xnv, &c. a r e
usual, as in t h e Active i¡pa, &c. 'Aüpui is only used in t h e I n -
dicative. F r o m i t come áépai], yeppévoe, cuopro, which occur in
various w r i t e r s . ]
perceive 'AarOávopai, 1 F u t . m i d . alady/ropai; 2 A o r . tjaQópyv; Perf. pass.
¡¡irdnpai, from aladeopai [ a n d aíndopai.']
keep off 'AXé'£,o), 1 F u t . áXeÜÁo-o), 1 A o r . yXél,yo-a; b u t 1 A o r . infin. [Jmid.]
aXc^aadaí [[from CIXE/CÍO.]
ivander "AXT¡LII and ¿tXáXypi, Infin. áXyvaí, P a r t . iíXeig ; P r e s . pass. áXáXypat.
and aXrj/jai, Perf. i)Xf¡pcu, and ciXyXypai, from aXáco.
taken 'AXÍaico/xai, 1 F u t . áXwaopai, [ t h e following tenses h a v e ] a passive
signification Perf. yXwna and káXtoKa, from liXów; 2 A o r . i¡X(ov
and IcíXwv, Imper. áXiodi, Opt. ciXoír¡v, Subj. ¿XáV, Infin. aXüivaí,
P a r t . áXsc, from aXiopt.
consume 'AvaXímcu), 1 F u t . ávaXwo-íü, Q A o r . ávíiXbiau and j/j/áX&io-a,] Perf.
avyXcoica and j)váXcoKa ; Perf. pass. avyXiopai, [from áváXoio. The
2d a being long, t h e A t t i c s give no a u g m e n t . ]
sin ' Apaprávio, 1 F u t . apapryoropai, Perf. iipcipryKa, [jijxáprypai, ypap-
D';0Í¡V,] 2 A o r . ypaprov, ijpSporoy - Poet. from apapréio [and
<fyiáp-«.]
clothe 'Ap(piévvpi, I F u t . áptpié(Tio, 1 A o r . yp(pÍ£<ra; Perf. pass. yp<j>Í£trpai,
P a r t i c i p . r¡p<j>i£crpéj'oc, M a t . xi. 8 .
read 'Avayii/íÍKTKw, Imperf. áv£yiV(oo-icoi/, Perf. ayéyvioica, 2 Aor. ayÉyvwv ;
1 F u t . mid. ávayvájaopai, from áj/ayvóio and ayciyywpi, which see
in Lexicón.
refuse 'Avaíyopai, 1 A o r . mid. yvrjyapyv.
[please 'Avócivw from J'ÍSO), wbence t h e tenses also come. Aor. íacW, O p t .
¿ídoipi, Subj. acto, Suf. ctcViV, P a r t . oca»', Perf. Éacía. T h e F u t .
uSyo-io ( H e r o d . v. 3 9 . ) comes from á&'w. T h u s also t h e Perf.
cícVa- (See E u s t a t h . p . 1 7 2 1 . CO.) "ACSÍU is found in P l u -
tarch.]
open 'Avoíyw, [Imperf. á m o y o v , ] 1 F u t . avm¡,io, 1 Aor. ?;voi£a, A t t .
avítplp.; [Perf. act. ¿tvéu>x f} Perf. m i d . avéaya;
a
Perf. pass. áví-
biypai, 1 A o r . cti>E(¡íx@V - v

[order 'Aj'óiyw, F u t . avífoi), Perf. aVwya, ( w i t h o u t a u g m e n t in A t t i c

writers) P l u p . i)v¿iy£iv, Imper. avu>xdi, ayá>xQ<o, a n d also avwy£,
¿ivwyéTio, &c. MatthiíE thinks tliat t h i s verb aróse from t h e
Perfect livúya, which might be derived from t h e 2d F u t . form of
áj/áertrw.]
deprive 'Airavpáo), 1 Aor. awyvpa for airijípncra, 2 A o r . cnryvpov.
be haied 'ATTEx^ávopai, 1 F u t . awExQvo-opai, 2 A o r . a-Kyx^ópyv; Perf. pass.
b.-KÍ}ydr\\ía.i, 1 F u t . cnríxQopai.
destrojj 'ATróXXvpt. See 'OXXí<o.
picase 'Apéirieiú, 1 F u t . apeno, 1 A o r . ypecra, Perf. pass. ypzapai, £1 A o r ;
ypéaQyv from ripeo.]
E 2
52 A P L A I N A N D EASY SECT. X V I .

To increada 'Aviario and avíjo, 1 F u t . áv'i,í]o~<o, 1 A o r . r¡vt,r]oa and i'¡v¡,a, Perf.

pass. ¡¡v'^riftai, 1 Aor. i¡v'íí¡dr¡v from [aúyai.]
grieve "AyBofiai, 1 F u t . ayQ))<joi±ai and ¿i^déo-oLiai; 1 Aor. pass. ?;^0É<T0)jy.

go BCIÍVW, [ 1 A o r . Í / 3 ¡ ¡ í r a , 3 Perf. a c t . pé€r¡i:a; 1 F u t . m i d . fiíiaofiai:

2 Aor. £ É 7 j i ' , Imper. fjrfii, /3cí0i, and /3á [in compounds] (as if from
¡icuo,) [ O p t . j3ahp', Subj. /3¿5, Infin. (¡ijvaí, P a r t . /3óc. T h e r e is
(chiefly in t h e Poets) a shortened form of t h e P e r f e c t ; t h u s we
find fjéj3a¡.í£v, ¡Seftatri, fiefíóig. I t appears t h a t from pato aróse
several forms, [lijiáio a n d j3ifiá£u>, (which t h e A t t i c s used i n -
stead of ¡3í¡mo and e¡3rio-a, in a transitive sense) (3¡JLII a n d fiaívio,
only used in t h e Pres. a n d Imperf. T h e compounds have some-
times a Passive, as, Perf. rrapa¡3é¡ia¡xai, Aor. ircip£/3á0?/j/.]
casi [BúXXiu, F u t . ¡DOXÍÓ, (fiaXXíiaio occurs) A o r . '¿¡iaXov, Perf. fléfiXrjica,
Pass. A o r . kfjXridrjv. Homer uses tenses as if from a Verb, fíXrjfii.
BOXÉW is derived from this.]
Uve [Bióoj, F u t . (iiúaoLiai, 1 A o r . ífiluxra, 2 A o r . ífiltov, I m p . filio&i, O p t .
fitbíiiv, Infin. Biwi'cu, P a r t . /3is£. T h e 1 Aor. act. is Intransitivo,
t h e same tense middle is Transitive.]
germinate BXUGTÍIVIO, 1 F u t . /3Xacn'/<7iü, 2 Aor. 'éjíXaarov, [Perfect /SE/BXCWÍJ/CCT]
from /3Xúor£w.
jeed Bócncfc), 1 F u t . jGócojo-w, 1 Aor. e&óo-icrjcra, from pótriceío.
mili BovXoLiai, 1 F u t . finXíicrofxai, Perf. ¡3é€uXa; Perf. pass. ¡iit.éXri¡jLa.i,
1 A o r . k€aXÍ]Qr¡v, from (¡üXéoiiai.
cal BpoWw and (3i€pwo-¡cw, 1 F u t . (ipióaio, Perf. fié€pwKa, from /3pów;
2 Aor. tfipwy, from ftpw/M. [ T h i s Verb h a s also in t h e pass. ¡3áj3pto-
l-iai, F u t . ¡3e[3pá>troixai, Aor. 1. ¿fipwdrjv, F u t . PpiodriaoLiai.']

T.

marry Vaiiíto, 1 F u t . y a p / o - w , 1 Aor. kyáfjr¡au, Perf. yeyciiiriica; also 1 Aor.

íyyua, and 1 Aor. m i d . ¿yrifj.it ur¡v, from ycipto.
6e bcgot-~) [Teívo/iai, revio, an oíd Verb (preserved i n t h e L a t i n gigno, genui,)
¿CM or Se /• has two derivatives, as it appears t o have h a d two significations,
6or/í J ¿«gcf and 7 a?», or 7 a?« ¿orn. T h u s yeívoiíai, 1 Aor. ¿yeiváiirjv,
I bcgot, and]
Se fio? » 1 [PÍVO/ÍCÍÍ or yíyvopai,
-
which is used only in t h e Present and Imperfect.
or > B u t there are various tenses derived from t h e oíd V e r b still in
be J u s
F u t . y£vi]GOfiat,
e -
Perf. ytyéviTfjat, Aor. iy£ví¡Qr¡v, and again,
Aor. kytvótinv, Perf. yéyova. T h e form yéyacc comes from another
old form of t h e V e r b , y á w . ]
grow oíd TypátTKio, 1 F u t . yripciaio, 1 Aor. iyíipaaa. or £y»?pa; Infin. yr¡pávai,
P a r t . ynpág, from yr¡pr¡LU.
Icnoiv TIVÚIGKIO and yiyvwo-icco, l F u t . m i d . yvwoo¡iai; 1 Aor. act. íyvioaa,
[in compounds] Perf. 'Éyviona, 2 Aor. 'éyviov, [which is used in all
moods and numbers] from yvóio and yvúfii; Perf. pass. íyvioafiai.
f/The 2 Aor. mid. occurs inJEschylus o-vyyvo7.ro, 3 pers. s i n g . O p t . ]
malte Tprjyópsio. See 'EypnyópEw.

A .

hile AÍIKVIO, 1 F u t . eífofiai, Perf. SéSr/xa, 2 A o r . 'éSaKov; Perf. pass. ISÉ-

Sriyficu, 1 Aor. ídi'ixdi]!', from CÍÍJKW.
SECT. XVI. GREEK GRAMMAR. 53

To fear AEÍBIO, 1 F u t . Seítriú, Perf. BéBenca; Perf. raid. StSotica for BtBoiBa
for sound's salce, [and also oéSta, which makes in tlie plural üéBipcy,
SíBire, and we find in the 3d pers. of t h e Pluperf. kSkotaay,'] P r e s .
Imper. BéStOt, from oéBtpt.
show AÚKVVUI and oÚKvvpi, 1 F u t . Beirut. Perf. <5Éoetj¿ex; Perf. pass. oéSeiy-
pat, [1 Aor. pass. kcáyBriv.~\
ask Aéopat, 1 F u t . Ber¡trofiai; Perf. pass. Bteeripai, 1 Aor. kSe{]6r¡v, from
Btéopat.
see AépKw, 2 Aor. '¿cpatcoy; Perf. mid. BéBopica, [ P a s s . A o r . kBpátcriv and
éBép%driv, in active senses.]
Jiee [Aiopáoxw, F u t . Bpáaofiai, Perf. SéBpaica, 2 Aor. eBpdv, de, d, & c ,
3d pers. pl. '¿Bpáy, I m p . opáOi, O p t . Bpaínv, Subj. op£¡, ¿"pae, Inf.
Bpáyai, P a r t . cipút;.]
Ihink Aot-eo), 1 F u t . Bod¡(jd> and co¿;'w, 1 Aor. koóicr¡cra and e'ooiia, Perf. OE-
BúicrjKa ¡ Perf. pass. Béooypat, from cckw.
be oble Avvaiiai, Svvacrai and ¿úyj), ( R e v . ii. 2.) í m p . kBvvctpr)v, A t t . yüvvci-
pnv, 1 Aor. kBvvritjíipiiv; Perf. pass. BeSvyijpat, 1 Aor. r¡Bvvr¡Qr]V,
also hBvváoQinv and rióvva <jOr¡v.
go under AVVID and ¿5vw, 1 F u t . cóo-ui, Perf. SíSvica, -2 Aor. É'cW. [In t h e
Pass. we have ícv'Qr¡v; Pres. mid. (in an Intransitivo sense) <5óo-
ynai, F u t . Bíaopat, Aor. ¿ci/tráju?))/.]

E.

permit 'Eáw, 1 F u t . '¿aau>, 1 Aor. ¿lacra, Perf. e'iWa and scoca.

excite 'EyEípoi, 1 F u t . Iy£p¿>, 1 Aor. i/yEipct, Perf. ÉyjjyEpica; Perf. pass.
kyí]yeppat for y¡yeppai.
match 'Eyprjyopéo), 1 . F u t . kypr¡yopr¡crw, 1 Aor. kyprjyúpiícra, Perf. lypí/yopra.
for kypr¡yópy\tca; Perf. pass. kypnyópripai; Perf. mid. kypiíyopa,
every where dropping the a u g m e n t .
c«¿ "Ecicti, Perf. íBí]Botca; Perf. pass. ÉO//&<X/JCU; Perf. mid. '¿BnBa, 2 F u t .
eBopai for cBovpat. [_'EcrQíu> in pres. is common.]
í¿£ "E'Copat, 2 F u t . mid. koipat. See líad¿£opat.
will 'TLdéXoj. See 0ÉXW.
accustom " E Q w , Perf. mid. e'ítüQa for Ei0a, Particip. E i w f t ó c , -vía, -cíe.
["EÍCCO has two senses. ( 1 )
ice 2 Aor. EÍOW, (or, in H o m e r . íSov,) I m p . iSé, O p t . 'Icotpt, S u b j .
iíw, Inf. Í&ÍV, P a r t . icW. T h e r e is a passive and a middle in
oíd writers in t h e sense of appear or rcsemble, and t h e tenses
are "Eiáoitcu, Inf. úBóa-nv, Imper. iS5, 1 Aor. mid. twáp-nv. Tlien

knorj [ I t is not found in t h e Present. T h e r e are two forms of t h e F u t u r e ,

elBiicrta and eiuopai. F o r the Present, t h e middle Perfect is used,
and this is made u p either of irregular forms, or from p a r t s of
'lcrr\pi. T h e following tablc will be useful.]
[Perf. in the sense of t h e Present.
Indic. Imper. Optat. . Subj. Infin. Part.
olSa, otada, OlBs. "tadi, í™ ÚBÚT¡V EIBSI úSkvat ¿icíie
"t^ov, "t^ov
"tapey, ÍTE, ícracri WE, W w t r a j '
Plup. Imp.
ijBeiv, i\BetQ i)Bet IJBEÍTOV, &C.

Att. or or or A t t i c
. ijBr¡, ijBíLcrda, ySctv r¡iov, rf;i]v ytrpey, ?;<r£, yeray.
be like "Etico), Perf. mid. cuica and s W a , Pluperf. koÍKttv and kt¿Kety, Part.
¿oiKwe and tiicüe-
drive awaifEXavvui, 1 F u t . IXúcrcí), £and A t t . ÉX£i,3 1 Aor. i/Xcio-ct, Perf. .'¡Xaica,
54 A PLAIN AND EASY SECT. X V I .

A t t . kXr'iXaKa ; Perf. kXIjXapai and iíXaapai, 1 Aor. -¡jXádriv and

yXíiadrjv, P a r t . kXadúc, from éXáw, [_íXáv, occurs in H o m . '¿Xa as
I m p e r a t . in P i n d a r . ]
To hope "'EXiro/iai, 1 F u t . eXéofíat, Perf. mid. A t t . éoXwa, Pluperf. '¿OXTTEIV and
ÉWXTTEIV.

speak "ETTOI, 1 Aor. üira, 2 Aor. ZÍTTOV, Imper. «Ve, O p t . e'nroipi, S u b j .

¿Lirio, Infin. £í7r£tj', P a r t . elwúv, preserving t h e a u g m e n t t h r o u g h -
out t h e Moods. [ W e find air£iwáLir)v. " E ™ is not used, and
cannot be t h e base, as then E¿ would be a u g m e n t , and improperly
retained.]
follón [ " E T r o ^ a i , Aor. act. 'ÍGTÍOV, Aor. mid. iairóp^v. I t loses E in t h e other
moods, amo, tnréodaí, and so in the compounds.]
put on "EVVVJJ.1. See among t h e I r r e g u l a r s in ¡j.i.
say 'Hpkto, 1 F u t . épéo*w, Perf. É'pjjKa; Perf. pass. Eipr¡¡XAI, [Aor. pass. ip-
pt'ldrjv, F u t . priOjiirofiai], P . p . F u t . éipr)<rofiai; P r e s . mid. epofiai to
ask, 1 F u t . épí¡uopai¡ 1 Aor. ¿ipr¡<T¿i¡XR¡v, T)pápr¡v, 2 Aor. ripúfínv and
éipóprjv.
come "'Ep'xpfiai, [ I m p . i/p^ójur/v], 1 F u t . éXeútrofiai, 2 Aor. act. i¡X8ov, by
Syncope for f¡Xvdoi>, Imper. EXQE, S u b j . EA-SW, Perf. mid. i¡Xvda,
A t t . iXi'iXvda, Pluperf. EXTIXV8EII>, from éXsvOu). [ F o r t h e F u t u r e
sense, in good A t t i c , kifii I mili go, is found.] *
jinil EíipiVfcw, 1 F u t . Evpr]o~<ú, Perf. súplica, 2 Aor. £vpov, Imper. £wp£; Perf.
pass. £vpr¡fj.AI, 1 Aor. Evp¿8r¡v; 1 Aor. mid. Evpr\a-ápqv and Evpáprjv,
P a r t . EvpáfiEvoc, 2 Aor. Evpó/j.r¡v.
have " E x " ) I m p . ¿ i x c , 1 F u t . É'^W and <Tyí\aio, Perf. ¿Vx^ca, 2 Aor. 'ívypv,
Imper. o-^ki, O p t a t . o-yoír\v, Subj. <rx<5, Infin. o'xEtJ', P a r t . ayíiv;
Perf. pass. E<rxnr h 1 Aor. ETR%kdr¡v; 1 F u t . mid. 'k'^opai and crxi'í-
ia

tropai, 2 Aor. fVxó/xrjv, Imper. <rx.5, O p t . ffyoípWi Infin. <rx£'<rc ai, )

P a r t . o-YPRIEVOE, from trx£w [which is imaginary.]

aplace "Jiio, 1 Aor. Itira, F u t . mid. 'dirofiai, Aor. ¿i<rápr¡v, A t t . £ero*áju?i)/,]

Z.

&ie Záw [(£<¡T], £??)) I m p e r a t . fí; and £r70i, O p t . £áí>?j/ and £¿>»7¡',
(from CCÓLII) Infin. fíjiv, P a r t . fü)', I m p . E'(I]V (from £?tyu) [ a n d
Uiavji I F u t . £?';O-Ü>, I Aor. '¿'(no-a.
gird Ztúwvio a n d Z¿¡VVV¡J.I, 1 F u t . £<¿o-a> ( J o h n xxi. 18.) Perf. É'fwKa; Perf.
pass. £¿W/¿ai, l Aor. k'ClatyQrrv, as if from fúai.

[II.

sit 7
B.pai (really Perf. Pass. from EOJ I set) for Iipai. I n 3d P l u r . we
have earat for I v r a i , and in P l u p . '¿aro for T^JTO, I m p . 7jao, P a r t .
T'LFXEVOÍ. T h e Comp. icád-r/pai is more common : O p t . KaQoí¡xr¡V,
Subj. ¡cádiopai, Imperf. ÍKa8r]¡XT¡v.~]

e.
¿>?<n/ Gán-rw, 1 F u t . §á\lio, 2 Aor. traipov, Perf. TÉraipa.; Perf. pass. rkda.fi-
fiai, 1 Aor. iráú)8r]V.
mili QéXui and k8ÉXu>, I m p . ídeXov and ?}0£\o)', 1 F u t . QEXIJ o-u> and ÍBEXÍIOW,

1 Aor. kdkXrjaa and y'iOkXrjtra.

be amazed 9//7rw, 2 Aor. E-aéov ; Perf. mid. rkOirn-a.
¿je QVÍIO-KO), 1 F u t . $>vi){,ü> and T E Q ^ W , Perf. rkQvnKa., P a r t . TEQVÍ]KII>S, 2
Aor. t'0avov; 2 F u t . mid. Savñfiat. [ F o r t h e Perfect, we find. in
common use these forms in the Plural, rkdya¡iEV —cir£, —ao-i. T h e n
* There is a difference of opinión as to the use ofthe augment, Some contení! for íupoK, &c.
SECT. X V I . GREEK GRAMMAR. 55

irtQvauav, and Infin. Ttdvúvaí, O p t . redváiriv, Imper. r&dvádi, P a r t .

redvTiKÚe, and in N e u t . TEQVEWQ. F r o m réOyr¡Ka comes t h e A t t i c
Verb TtQvíiKh), F u t . reoVí/^o/Mí.]

To come to 'IceÉo/iai, 1 F u t . 'l^opái, 2 Aor. ÍKÓLIT]>'; Perf. pass. 'lyiiai, from Í'KW.
y/y "ÍKTr¡m, 1 F u t . 7rr//cra>, 2 A o r . '¿TTnv, a n d more used P r e s . mid. íVra-
¿jaí, 1 F u t . 7TTr¡o-o¡j.ai, 2 Aor. iwrá/irjv a n d íTtrópyv, S u b j . irrütLiai,
infin. irrcicrdaí and irréadaí, P a r t . irríiiiívog and ITTÓLIEVÜ£; Perf.
pass. -Tréwrafiai, from 7rráw. r T h e original V e r b is néroLiai, Aor.
iireTÓiír¡v, by Sync. iiiróiiy\v; whence aróse t h e form 'Lwrnfii in
G r a m m a r s , which is never used in Greek.]
£AHO?« "lo-qiiL. T h i s V e r b is regularly conjugated like 'tV?;jutj b u t only used
in particular p a r t s . T h u s , in t h e present, t h e singular is only
found in Doric writers. I n t h e Imperative t h e contracted form
'íuBt, iííítf, &c. is used for íaadi, & c ]

K.

sit Kadé^ofiat, 2 F u t . Kadc.cS/j.ai; 1 Aor. pass. ÍKaBéirQnv.

burn l í á i w , 1 F u t . KCIÍHTW, 1 F u t . mid. navo-tífiai, ( 2 P e t . iii. 10.) 1 A o r .
'¿Kr¡a, Perf. pass. KÉKaviiai, 1 A o r . ÍKávdnv, 1 F u t . novñíitraLiai, 1
F u t . Subjunct. Kavdr'itTti>¡j.ai, ( 1 Cor. xiii. 3.) 2 A o r . l/cár/y, P a r t .

cali KaXéo>, 1 F u t . KaX¿<rw, Perf. KÉicXi;Ka for KE/cáX^ra. [ T h e V e r b is

regular in other parts.]
labour líáiivu, 1 F u t . Ka/xQ, Perf. KÉKLIT]KU for Keic¿ifir¡Ka, 2 Aor. '¿Katiov, [ F u t .
Kayua^iaí.]
Z¿e líeífiai, [Pres. ¡ctlfxai, icüo-ai, KEÍTUL, Imperf. ¿Ketiiriv, EKSWO, ÉVEÍTO, &c.
I m p e r a t . KETÍO-O, KEÍO-OW, & C , O p t . Kzoíiir¡v, Subjunct. Kéwjucu, Infin.
KíJíQai, P a r t . KE'LLLZVOQ, F u t . KEÍVOJUCU.]
[Yeac/í Kt^áj/w, F u t . Kixwto, 1 Aor. mid. ¿Ki^rjcráiiriv, A o r . '¿KI^OV : also ÉKÍ-
Xr;)';, O p t . nv)(íírjv, S u b j u n c t . Kt'x<3.]
¿¿tt KXEÍVW, F u t . tcrEvw, 1 Aor. EKTtiva, Perf. EicraKa, eierayca rarely, 2 Aor.
tV-rai', from KTÍ//ÍI. fjlt h a s also t h e 2 d Aor. 'ÍKravov. I t appears
to have h a d a middle A o r . from inrav, as we find KT¿I¡XEVOQ a n d
KTÍiadaL in H o m e r * . ]

share Any^ávia, Perf. uX-r/xa, [JFut. Xíi£,oij.a.i], 2 A o r . 'éXaxov, from X//xw j

Perf. mid. Xs'Xoyxa.
take Aafj&ávui, 1 F u t . Xí)\jjofiai, Perf. íiXrifa, 2 Aor. É'XafOP, Infin. Xa§£(y;
Perf. pass. XéXTjLtLiai [ o r ] '¿CXypfiaL, 1 A o r . íXíiipQriv, (so KarüXr¡<pQr¡,
J o h n v i i i . 4 . ) Infin. Xn<p8rjvai, from X»;€w, [\Aor. mid. éXáSófiriv f . J
¿ee /¿¿<Z AavOói/w, 1 F u t . X?/o-w and Xyaofiai, [1 Aor. É'X??<7a], 2 A o r . i'XaoW;
Perf. pass. XéXr¡criiai, 1 Aor. íXí/adriv; Perf. mid. X^Xi/Sa, 2 A o r .
iXádofinv, from Xr¡6k>.

* [ T h e Verbs xtpáwu/u, xapéiwpi, and xps/nám/u f o m f regularly, as xsfiáw, xofiéw, and xptfiíui. So
afterwards ^•ETávyutíí,
í and others.]
t [ T h e Ionians have AiAíSw, and as if from Aá/j.Sw, ^« ü^^o u«l, ihíft^riv,
l J AlAu/i/xai,]
56 A PLAIN A N D EASY SECT. X V I

M.

To be mad Maívopat, 1 F u t . fj.avSfj.aL, 1 A o r . kpr¡vápnv, Perf. pípr¡va\ 2 Aor.

pass. ífiavrfv.
leam MavBciviü, Perf. pepáQr¡Ka, 2 A o r . 'épaOov; Perf. pass. pepádnpai; 1
F u t . m i d . pa6r¡aopai, 2 A o r . ípadóprjv, from [p;0w.]
fight M.áj(Ofiai, 1 F u t . pa^éaoftai and payjiaopai, 1 Aor. épa^Eacifinv and
ífxaxr¡(jáfir)v, 2 F u t . pa^Spai; Perf. pass. fiefilijoifiai, from jua-

divide Metpopai, Perf. m i d . ftépopa, P o e t . eftpopa; Perf. pass. eifiappai or

epappai, [Aor. '¿fifiopov.^
delay MéXktd, I m p . '¿peXXov, A t t . ijpeXXov, 1 F u t . peXXr)ait), 1 A o r . I/XEX-
\ ? ) < T a , from ¡j.eXXéui.

\jbe a eora-1 ME'XCU. péXopai, F u t . peXí¡aii>, p¿Xi)aopai, Perf. pefiéXnpai (in Homer
cerra ¿o j pépbXopai), A o r . ep¿kí)Qriv.~\
remain MEVW, Poet. fiípvco, 1 F u t . it£v¿í, 1 A o r . epeiva, Perf. pepévnna, as if
from /JEVÉW ; Perf. mid. ¡xépova.
mix Miyvvio and ¡xíyvvfu, 1 F u t . /¿Í£W, 1 Aor. <f/¿¿£a, Perf. pepita i Perf.
pass. pépiypai, 1 A o r . épí^driv, 2 A o r . ifiíyr¡v, from píyu>.
REMITID MifiviíaiOíi, 1 F u t . fivr¡o(I), 1 A o r . epvr¡aa; Perf. pass. pépvr¡pai, 1 Aor.
ípvr¡aQr¡v; [ F u t . pvr\a%í\aopaC\, 1 F u t . mid. pvifaopai, 1 A o r . é/x-
vi\aapnv, from ¡ivciw.

[N.

distribute Néjuw. F u t . j ' E j u o ) a n d v£pí,au>, A o r . 'éveipa, Perf. vevéprfKa. Aor. pass.

ivepr¡Qr¡v or kvepéQr¡v.
stvim NEÍÜ, F u t . ve.vaofj.ai or vevaSpai, A o r . 'évevaa.~\

O.

smell "0£<i>, 1 F u t . íícrw and ó'Cvabí, Perf. mid. o¿5wc!a.

open "Otyw. See above 'Avoíyio.
thinh 'Owpai a n d bifiai, CÍIEÍ, A t t . for ¡HJJ, I m p . tbóprjv and fpr¡v, 1 F u t . o i 7 ¡ -
crotiat; Perf. pass. &r¡pai, 1 A o r . ¿'STJV.
8° "Ovyppai, 1 F u t . óixíicopat, 2 A o r . é>xópr>v; Perf. pass. <úxripai, [Perf.
mid. ¿Wu>x<*-]
destroy 'OXXÍIÍO and oXXvpi, 1 F u t . OXEO-W, 1 Aor. fiXEo-a, Perf. <SX.£ica, A t t .
OXWXEIÍO:. [[Contracted F u t . is oXw, — E Í ? , — E I , F u t . mid. ¿XSpai,
Aor. wXópnv, Perf. c 3 X a . or r a t h e r oXuXa.]
QO/ivútu a n d '¿pvvpi, F u t . dpóau>, M i d . ¿pápai, el, ¿Irat ( t h e A t t i c s
use only t h e F u t . mid.) Aor. wpoaa, Perf. ópúpoica, Perf. pass.
opúpopai (or according to B u t t m a n opwpoapai), 1 A o r . topódrfv,
Aor. mid. ¿>poacipr¡v.~\
\jvipe off 'Opópyvvpc, F u t . 0juóp¿;w, A o r . mid. ¿ uop¿;áp)>'.] ,
J

help "Ov7¡pi and óvívrfpi, 1 F u t . óví)aa¡, 1 A o r . iSi/jjo-a; 1 F u t . m i d . oV//-

aopai, ] A o r . ¿¡vtfaápnv, [ P r e s . p . ovapai, I m p . ¿)vr)pr¡v, Aor.

excite "Opw [or op,>Dp], 1 F u t . opcrw, 1 A o r . (¿pera; Perf. mid. '¿pupa and
APOPA, r_Perf. pass. wpjucu.]
[smell 'Oa(¡>paívopai, F u t . óafpr¡aopai, Aor. ¿)atppópr¡v.^
orne 'OfEÍXio, 1 F u t . o(j)£Xr¡ato, 2 A o r . &<peXov, or o(j>eXov.

suffer n á t r x w , Perf. mid. izíwovQa, from Tcév6<I>; 1 F u t . m i d . iráaopai for

•KÍfaopai; 2 A o r . act. tiradov, from 7rj;0w.
SECT. X V I . GREEK GRAMMAR. 57

Tojix Uijyvvh) and Trr'iywfu, 1 F u t . irrilb), 1 A o r . ÉVÍ^CI ; 2 A o r . pass. EVÓ-

y-qv ; [ I Aor. pass. í-ití])(_dr¡v, Perf. pass. 7r¿Vi7yjiiai], 1 F u t . mid. 7n';-
Ío/Liat, I Aor. É7n¡iáfxr¡v, [Perf. 7r£7r»iya.]
clrinlc Ilá'a), 2 Aor. ÉVIOV, from TTÍU ; 1 F u t . rráio-u, Perf. irÉwwica; Perf.
pass. TvéTTOfxaí, 1 Aor. éiródnv, from JTÓW. [ T h e Pres. mid. Ttíopat
is used for t h e F u t . though irtajuat occurs.]
niirpcWco), 1 F u t . irpáaiú, Perf. irÍTrpaKa; Pres. pass. irnrp¿iaKo¡xai,
Perf. TrÉTrpafiai, I Aor. ¿irpádr]}', [ F u t . •KEirpáoop.ai *.]
ri£7rr(i), Perf. irtTcriDKa. from 7r7-ó(i), 1 A o r . £7r£tra, (Rev. i. 17.) 2 Aor.
tiretrov; 2 F u t . mid. ireaSfiaj., from irÉ™, which see in Lexicón.
[Matthiae t h i n k s t h e first form of the Aor. was ÉVETW. See Pind.
0 1 . viii. 50. & al.]
ask 1 TlvvBávofjai, 1 F u t . irsvo-OLMi, 2 Aor. Itrvdáfiriv, from TrzvQojiaL; Perf.
/zea?' J pass. rréirvtrjxai.
[ W e may add here two Verbs which form alike.
t /i/¿ TíífnrXri¡xi, \ T h e 3d pers. P l u r . of the Present, and t h e penult of
bum TlíjiwpTifii. / t h e Infinitive in each is in a short. T h e following is
the formation, irí/j.irXrjfJ.1, 7r\?;o-w 3 'éwXrjira, Tr¿irXr¡ica, 7T£7rXr;crjuai,
ktrXíi<jQr]v, and so t h e o t h e r . ]

work 'Pé£(t>, [ o t h e r forms are epSío and Ipyai], 1 Fut. pifa and 'ip'ífo b y
transposition, 1 Aor. '¿pe^a; Perf. mid. £opya for 'éppoya, [Perf.
pass. '¿pypui, possibly (II. E . 8 9 . ) ]
jiow 'PE'W, 1 F u t . pevcr[ofj.ai], 1 Aor. '¿ppevcra, Perf. ippvrjKa; 2 Aor. pass.
¿ppvrjv, from pvéío, [ F u t . pv{¡aofiai.^j
bréale 'Piiyvíoj a n d pnyvvjii* 1 F u t . pi'/£w, [ 1 Aor. É'pprj^a]; Perf. mid. Ép-
pwya, 2 Aor. pass. £ppáyiji>, [ F u t . payrjo-oticu.]
strengthen 'Pwvvvco and pi)vvv¡xi, 1 F u t . púcoi ; Perf. pass. '¿ppaipai, I m p . '¿ppaao
faremell, P a r t . Ippw/xEvoc, [1 Aor. eppu>tra, 1 Aor. pass. Éppwo-Qrji/.]

exlinguish Stevvíiú a n d <jt,évvvfxi, 1 F u t . o-ééVaí, 1 Aor. eo-€e(Ta, Perf.'¿LTGVKO.•

[Perf. pass. EO-SEO-JUCU, Aor. Éo-fiÉo'flnj'], 2 Aor. 'iat>r\v, Infin. o-Síjfcu,
from O-CEÜ) and o-éij/n f.
?»Oüe SEÚW, Aor. É'o-Eua; P r e s . pass. aeíopai, Perf. 'íarsvpai, 1 Aor. eaídrjv;
1 A o r . m i d . iaev¿i¡xi]v. [ T h e r e is a 2 Aor. act. íavijv or EO-O-ÚÍJI'.]
[ííiwipaíe Srcciáfpu/ji, F u t . O-KEÓYIO-W, A t t . O-KESÚÍ, 1 Aor. io-xédatra, Perf. pass.
iaicéSatTLiai, 1 Aor. ImcíSciadriv. Another form is o-ictcVáw.]

^"as'ati L^' '''^ > 1 F u t . GKÜ(T<I);

7r£ íü
1 Aor. EWEÍO-O:, Perf. pass. 'éa"rreio-¡iai, 1 Aor.
baiion I l<rTreítr6r¡y; 1 F u t . mid. mreítrofxai, 1 Aor. ka-n-EL<rá.fj.r¡v.

slrow \^ropévvv¡xi, ^ópvvfii, (from TOpéw) and <zpíivvv\íi, (from Tpów) F u t .

^opíam ( B u t t m a n gives also Tpoio-w), Aor. e^ópso-a and É'^pojo-a,
Perf. pass. ÉVpw/xcu, 1 Aor. £oropÉo-0r7)'.]

T.

cut Téfxvto, 1 F u t . TEfxüi, [ 1 Aor. '¿rprjfa, from r / u j / y w ] , Perf. rérpriKa, 2

Aor. írajxov; Perf. pass. Tér¡ir¡Liai, from rjuáw. [ T h e r e is an Aor.
'ér¡iayov and Erjuáyrij', from 7y¿)jy<d.]

* [Matthia: m a k e s F u t . act. •ntfkaw. B u t t m a n s a y s that there i s neither F u t u r e ñor A o r i s t . ]

-|- [ T l i c Perfect and 2 Aorist are intransitivo.]
58 A P L A I N A N D EASY SECT. X V I .

To bringforthTÍK-ü), 1 F u t . ré^io \jn- ré&pai}, 2 Aor. ETZKOV; Perf. mid. réroKa,

from r¿Kw.
pierce Tirpáw and rirpáivio, 1 F u t . rpr¡ou>, 1 Aor. írpnoa [and £7-£-P7?va] ;
Perf. pass. rérpnpai, from rpcíu.
wound Tirpúo-Ka., 1 F u t . -pido-iu, 1 Aor. '¿rpuiaa, Perf. rirpbiKa, [Perf. pass.
rérpüjpai, 1 Aor. £RPTÍ)0j¡v,]
[endure "1 TXúw or rXrjpi, F u t . rXíjcropai, Aor. ErXjjv, I m p . rXí/0i, O p t . rkoLÍnv,
or daré i Subjunct. rX<5. Infin. rXrjvui, P a r t . rXáf, Perf. rérXijKa.]
nourish Tpéíjno, 1 F u t . Spéúno, 1 A o r . '¿dpt^a, [Perf. rérpofa], Perf. pass. TE-
Qpappai, 2 Aor. krpciainv.
run Ipéyu), 1 F u t . Spéfa, 1 Aor. £0p£¿;'A, Perf. SsSpcipniea, 2 Aor. '¿Spapov;
2 F u t . mid. epápapai, [Perf. pass. ¿edpáprtpcu, Perf. mid. SéSpopa,
from OPE/UTÜ.]
¿e ") Tuy^ávít), 1 F u t . -vxwk), 1 Aor. lrvyr\Ga, Perf. r£Tvyr]KU, 2 Aor. f'rv-
oblain 5 yo i fr° " X ' i J^rf. t - rérev%a, and 1 F u t . mid. reíi^opat, from
v m J ll £ w a c

7-EÚX". [ T h e Pres. Imperf. and sometimes 2 Aor. a r e used in t h e

first sense, b u t n o t t h e o t h e r p a r t s of t h e Verb.]
[makereadgTtvxw is regular, except t h a t i t has in Perf. pass. a n d 1 Aor. pass.
rérvypcu a n d írvxOt]r, as Tré<j>vypcu, &c. from t/>£Úyw.]

promise "^iru¡x'>'£opai, 1 F u t . vTroaxvaopai, 2 A o r . virecr^priv, Perf. pass.

viréaxvpai, 1 Aor. vwEcrxéOr¡i; from VTrocrxÉopaL.

[eat <I>áyw, F u t . <j)áyopai, 2 A o r . 'éfayov. I n other parts, derivatives

from EO-FLIW or E'SW are used, as Perf. ¿cíjcoica., Perf. pass. éSí/Beo-pai,
P a r t . mid. '¿Sr¡Sa, 1 Aor. pass. iibérrQnv, and F u t . I ' t t y i c u . ]
carry \ <bépu>, F u t . OIERTÜ, from OÍW, 1 Aor. R/VEYM, 2 Aor. r\v£yKOv; Perf. pass.
¿•nwg- / kvr¡vtypai, 1 Aor. ijvíxQvv, from ¿véyKio; Perf. mid. £vr¡roxo-, whence
Trpoaevi'ivox"-! ( H e b . xi. 17.) as if from ÍPÉKW. [ F u t . pass. kvexOñ-
(ropat or óiadrirropcu *.]
jffee «tEÚyw, 1 F u t . <bevt,w, (pev^opat, and (j>Evt,ovpai, 2 Aor. '¿<pvyov; Perf.
mid. 7rÉ(p£vya..
[say >5?r¡pí. T h i s Verb is conjugated like íV^T, b u t only used in a few
p a r t s , viz. :
Indicat. Imper. Optative. Subj. Infin. Particip.
Pres. $JJ/ÍÍ *a0 ' t «táíj/v <frú> «frámt «freís
Imp. "EC/DJV
Fut. dij/o-íü
1 Aor."Ec/)7JCRA <&{}<jaipi <!>?'; era <I>¡;<rai <bí¡<rac;
N . B . I n t h e Imperfect 2 Pers. sing. efricrOa is used more com-
monly. I n t h e Optative, (pálpev, &c. a r e used for <pdir¡pev. I n
t h e Middle voice t h e forms <¡¡>¿w ( I m p e r a t . ) , <j)átrdai, <p¿ip£voc, and
¿<bápnv are found. I n t h e Passive some perfect forms, as ir£<pá-
<rQtú, leí it be said or have been said, TcetyacrptvoQ. By aphaeresis
i)pí, &c. are often used for (¡>r¡pí,'¿tynv,& c ]
prevent «frOávw, Imperf. ítyBavov, 1 F u t . fdd'crb), 1 Aor. '¿fdátra, Perf. Inflara,
from f/)9áw; 2 Aor. efQnv [and tpdíjo-opai, from <j>di¡pi, like EVXT/J'.]
produce \ <[>¿U>, 1 F u t . T/>V<R(T), 1 Aor. £<j>vira, Perf. iréfvKa; Perf. mid. TRAC/IVA, 2
spring up i Aor. É'C/IW, Infin. <pvvai, P a r t . e/iús, from </>V//T.

* [ T h e Ionians p u t an i i n all the parts formed from aíyxw, as 1 A o r . Í»EIX«, Perf, pass. itfouy/uiu,
1 Aor. >¡»iíyj)r¡-j.]
SECT. X V I I . GREEK GRAMMAR. 59

To rejoice Xátpa, Imperat. %aipe hail, F u t . j(aipii<rw, QAor. i^aípriiTa, Perf. Ktyá"
, , Perf. pass. «^ápjj/xa¿], 2 Aor. pass. i\v.pnv;
pyica
r Subjun. ¿(apio,
Infin. x pw i
n ai
Fut. x pv<ropai.
a

gape Xáo-Küi, 2 Aor. 'íyavov; 1 F u t . niid. xpfSpaL, Perf. Kty_V i from ^atVw
va

Poetic.
[yield Xá£ai, Aor. éy(aSoy, Perf. KÉ^avEa, F u t . p¿£tVojttaí.]
XÉw, 1 F u t . %EÚ<rw, 1 Aor. é'^tutra, É'^eua, and k'j¿£a; Tnfin. x* > 1
al
pour
Aor. mid. é^áprjv, Perf. Kty/yica, Perf. pass. Kt\vpaL, 1 Aor. E'X"~
0JJJ'J 1 F u t . yvOricopai, from ^úw.
/¡etfp ÍÍ^J Xuvvvu> and yiivvv¡u, 1 F u t . yixru, 1 Aor. lyb¡a<x; Perf. pass. KÍyu-
o-jxai, 1 Aor. éxf"jdr]v, from x«<<> or x^w, [ d ? ' conjugated]
í u l s s

[cofoz»- Xpúwupu.]

a.

drive "ílBia, and more usually WSE'W, 1 F u t . ¿i<rw and ¿>8ij<ru>, 1 Aor. Ewo-a;
[Perf. ¿ W a ] , Perf. pass. Ikxrpcu, 1 Aor. 'éwcr6r)v; 1 F u t . mid. ¿?ir-
Bycropai, 1 Aor. ¿><rcLpr¡v and ¿>0r¡<ríipr¡y.
buy 'Qfvéopai, ] F u t . mnicropai, Perf. pass. &vr¡pai and ¿úvrjpai, 1 Aor.
¿iyí¡dr¡y and éaivíidnv.
10. T h e COMPOUNDS of anomalous V e r b s are formed like t h e i r simple ones.

SECTION XVII.

OF IMPERSONAL VERBS.

1. A N impersonal Verb is a kind of Defective which has only one Person, namely,
t h e third Person singular, and in Participles only t h e Neuter Gender.
2. Most Impersonals are also very defective in t h e i r T e n s e s : b u t in t h e forming
of them let the Learner ñame their principal Tenses, if used, as in crvp^alvu it
happens ; if not, their other Tenses.
Pres. 1 Fut. Perf.
Hvp€aív£i. <rvnfiíi<ru. trv pt,é%7]K£.
3 . T h e most usual Impersonals active are as follow:
1. 'Aj/)';icEt and jrpoín;/vE¿ it is jit, I m p . ávrjice and Trpótrrjics, Particip. avr¡Kov
and irpócnicov.
2. AEI it behoved, I m p . ifai, O p t . Séoi, 1 F u t . Stiitreí, 1 Aor. iiínvt, Infin.
Seiv, Beíjareiv, Seijcrcu, P a r t i c i p . Séoy, Sérjffoy, Sér¡(ray. Compounds, 'ATTÓSCL, '¿ySeí,
KaráSeL, irpócrSei.
3. AOKÍ it seemeth, I m p . ¡¡Sokel, 1 F u t . Bofe. 1 Aor. EOO^E, Subj. dói;n, P a r t .
SoKÜy. Compounds, METOCOK-EÍ, o*vy$¿K£i.
4. ME'XEÍ it is a concern, Imperf. epeXc, 1 F u t . p¿kr¡tre.i, 1 Aor. épEXyffs, P a r -
ticip. péXoy. Compound, METO/ÍEXEÍ.
5. ILOÉVEI it becometh, Imperf. '¿irpeire, Infin. irpíiruv, Particip. irpbrov.
6. Xpr) it behoveth, Imperf. 't%pr\v or xpr¡v, 1 F u t . ypyati, Infin. ygrivm..
Compounds, 'ATtóypri, &c.
7. Several compounds of the Verb EVÍ, as tfy<;i it is larvful.
 60 A P L A I N A N D EASY SECT. X V I I L

4. T h e r e are also Irapersonals passive, as

1 . 'EvSÉxerai it may it he.
2. "Eipáp-ai it is decreed by the Fates, Perf. pass. A t t i c from peípio to divide.
3 . líé-n-pw-ai, the same, Pluperf. iréwpwTo, P a r t i c i p . •KE-wpwp.Evov, by Syncope
from TTEparóio to define, determine.
5. Besides the foregoing Impersouals, some Verbs n e u t e r , and all Verbs passive,
or t h a t signify passivcly, in their third Persons m a y be used impersonally, as
<¡>LXE~I it uscih or is wont, ipaívzrai it appears, zitirpéirETai it is permilied, yíypawrai
it is ivrilten.

SECTION XVIII.

OF ADVERBS AND INTERJECTIONS.

1. A N Adverb is an indeclinable Particle added to a Verb (ad Verbum) or A d -

jective, " to denote some modificaiion or circumstance of an action or quality," as
KaXwg ivell in icaXwg ávayivwo-icEi he reads well.
2. Adverbs in Greek are either primitive, as vvv now ; or derivalive, either from
N o u n s , as TTCIVV allogether, ávcpi<rrí manfully; or from Verbs, as áváipavSa openly,
Kpv€Sr¡v secretly.
3 . Adverbs in wg are derived from [the Nominatives of Adjectives in oc,] and t h e
Genitives of Adjectives [which increase] by changing og into wg, as from aXnQwv,
ctXrjdwg truly; from OL\EWV, bí,Ewg sharply.
4. Some Adverbs form Degrees of Comparison, t h u s ,
1. W h e n t h e positive Adverb is formed [as in § 3,] the comparativo Adverb
is [ s i m i l a r l y ] formed from the comparative, and t h e snperlative from t h e su-
perlative, by changing v into g, t h u s :
F r o m Adjective o-ócpog wise, is formed A d v . aotywg wisely ;
F r o m comparat. aotywrEpog wiser, Adv. ao^wrépwg more wisely ;
F r o m superlat. cro<l)¿>ra-og wisest, A d v . croajwTcirwg most wisely;
So from rayyg swift, A d v . raj(éwg swifily ;
F r o m comparat. Tayvrzpog swífter, Adv. rajíyrépwg more swifily ;
A n d from superlat. rayhrarog swiftest, Adv. rayyrárwg most swifily.
2. If t h e positive Adverb ends in w, so does t h e comparative and superlative,
as avia upwards, comparat. avwrzpw, superlat. avwrárw.

OF ADVERBIAL PARTIÓLES.

5. A in composition denies, collects, or increases, as aycipig unthanhfnl, ¡mavrec

all together, &¡,vXogfull of wood.
6. T h e syllabic Adjections, SE, CTE, 'CE, denote to a place, as OIKO.SE (to) home apá-
VOCTE into heaven, 'AQr)va'¿¡E to A t h e n s ; BEV and BE from a place, as ¿pavods from
heaven , Si, oí, ai, x > xjt
B m
place, as épávoOi in heaven, d'uwi at home, "AOrivijcri
a

in A t h e n s , wavraxS and Travrayfi every where.

7. Api, Epi, 'Qa, Xa, fis, prefixed to words, heighten their signification, as SfjXog
manifest, ApíSrjXog very manifest.
8. NTJ and vz deprive, as víjiriog an infant, from vi) not, and íirw to speak.
9. 'Eu in composition has a good sense, denoting easiness or kindness; Svg, an
ill one, signifying difficulty or ill will, as ivciXwrog easy to be taken, SvaáXwTog hard
to be taken ; ivpívrig benevolenl, Svo-pÉvr¡g malevolent.
SECT. XX. GREEK GRAMMAR. 61

OF ÍNTERJECTIONS.

10. U n d e r Adverbs in Greek are Comprehended Interjeciions, t h a t is, words

thrown into (interjecta in) a sentence to expresa some emotion of mind, as of joy,
"w, ko! of grief, '/a, i¡>, oh! of laughter, á, á, ha! ha! ha! of approving, ¿Ta
o brave ! eiye well done ! of condemning, S¡, fev Ofy ! of admiring, <5, /3á€at, 7ráircu,
altoi, O wonderful! of deriding, te ah ! of calling, J> ko! of grief, aai woe!

SECTION XIX.

OF CONJUNCTIONS.

1. A CONJÜNCTION is an indeclinable Particle t h a t joins logelhcr (conjungit) sen-

lences and sometimes single words *.
2. In Greek they may be distinguished into
1 . Copulative, as raí, TE, and, also, &c.
2. Disjunctive, f¡, Í¡TOL, iíyvv, either, or, &c.
3. Concessive, icaÍTrep, tkough, although.
4. Adversative, Se but, a\\a but, ó'itwg yct.
5. Causal, yapfor, Iva, ó'vrwc, that, to the end that, zwdm,TrEp since,
6. Conclusive or illative, apa, 5v, therefore, Síorrep wherefore.
7. Conditional, ¿i, av, if.

SECTION XX.

OF PREPOSITIONS.

1. A PREPOSITION is an indeclinable Particle put before (praeposita) Verbs in

composition, and Nouns in construction.
2. f " Most Prepositions originally denote t h e relation of place, and have been
thence ti-ansferred to denote, by similitude, other relations."
3. T h e Prepositions in Greek are usually reckoned eighteen, of which six are of
one syllable, he into, ÍK or ií, out of, ív in, irpb before, irpoe to, avv with ; and twelve
of two sylíables, ap<j>í round about, áva through, ávri instead qf, ¿uro from, Sia by,
éirl in, upon, ¡cara according to, perú with, irapá from, at, irepí concerning, about,
vwép above, over,viró under.
4. T h e Prepositions, and their various uses, both in construction and composi-
tion, are so fully explained in t h e ensuing Lexicón, t h a t I forbear saying any t h i n g
more of t h e m in this place, only t h a t ap\pí about, concerning, near (not used in t h e
N e w T e s t a m e n t ) , is in t h e Greek writers joined with t h r e e cases, t h e Genitive,
Dative, and Accusative.

* See the EncyclopEedia Britannica i n Grammar, N o . 1 1 5 , & c .

j - B i s h o p L o w t h ' s Introduction to E n g l i s h Grammar, p . 97, 2 d edit. B u t compare Encyclopa;dia
Britannica in Grammar, N o . 1 2 8 , &c.
 62 A PLAIN AND EASY SECT. X X I .

SECTION XXI.

O F SYNTAX, A N D FIRST OF CONCORD.

S. SYNTAX from t h e Greek word Svvrafyc Composition, is t h a t p a r t of G r a m m a r

which teaches how to compose words properly in Sentences.
2. Syntax may be distinguished into two parts, Concord, or Agreement; and
Government, [ T h e following remarks, deserve t h e attention of those who wish to
iiave a clear notion of t h e Elements of the Philosophy of G r a m m a r . ]
[ I n every proposition there m u s t be a t least two fundamental i d e a s ; ( 1 ) T h e
Subject, i. e. the t h i n g or person of which any t h i n g is asserted; and (2) T h e Pre-
dícate, i. e. t h a t which is asserted of t h a t person or t h i n g , or which, in other words,
expresses t h e action or quality, t h e condition, which is ascribed t o t h e subject. T h e
subject a n d predícate are connected, and t h u s formed into a proposition b y t h e
copula, which is always a Verb. Sometimes t h e copula has a proper Verb, as dpi,
which contains no idea itself; sometimes t h e copula and predícate are united i n
one Verb, as in t h e Verbs which express a condition by themselves, as Kvpoe rédvr¡Ks,
Cyrus is dead *. Sometimes t h e condition or action expressed by t h e V e r b r e -
quires to be determined by a relation in which i t stands to a person or t h i n g ; a n d
henee arises t h e determination of t h e oblique cases which are governed by t h e Verb.
Of this we shall speak below. T h e Verb whether i t be the copula alone, or a
copula with the predícate, is determined as to person and number by t h e subject.
Now in propositions which are independent of any other, t h e subject is in t h e N o -
minative (except in t h e case of t h e Acc. a n d I n f i n . ) ; a n d from t h e two last con-
siderations arises what is called t h e first Concord in common g r a m m a r . ]

or T H E FIRST CONCORD.

3 . T h e V e r b agrees with i t s Nominative case in N u m b e r and Person, as '¿yta

ypá(bio I write, cívOpíotroi Xéyovct men say.

4. T h e Nominative case to a Verb is found by asking t h e question who ? or

ivhat ? with t h e Verb, as in t h e sentence j u s t g i v e n ; men, answering to t h e question
who say ? is t h e Nominative case to t h e Verb say.
5. A l l N o u n s are of t h e third Person, except such as are joined with t h e P r o n o u n s
2 , ihou, we, or ye.

6 . A neuter Noun plural has f generally a Verb singular, as iravra iytvtro all

* [ H e r e i n E n g l i s h , Cyrus is the subject, h i s death is the predícate, a n d these ideas are connected b y
the copúlate is.]
f By no raeans always; see M a r k v. 1 3 . J o h n x . 2 7 . 1 Cor. x i i . 2 5 . J a m . ii. 1 9 . R e v . x v i i i . 2 3 . x x . 1 2 .
W e m a y further observe, that N o u n s plural [ a n d d u a l ] , both m a s c u l i n e and feminine, are l i k e w i s e
sometimes, t h o u g h rarely, joined with V e r b s singular i n the best Greek writers. T h u s P i n d a r , 0 1 . 1 1 .
lin. 4 , 5 , M E A j y á p u E f vpvot óa-rspuiv apyjxi X6yv» TEÁAETÍXÍ, Thc sxvcet hymns i s thepreludeto the dis-
courses which follo-w ; Plato, "OUK ÉCTC O"TIVE; c/.7iíyo o^^noatwy $ Kpírrer, There i s not itlio abstain
vTaí

from feasts except thc Crctans ; A r i s t o ü e , 'Oux ÍVS^EQ'JETO roif p.h ut rpíyjc, rolg SE T a vrTspoL, On some
grew no hairs, on others no fealhers. T h e author of the P o r t - R o y a l Grammar, w h o produces t h e
p a s s a g e s j u s t cited, accounts for this construction ( B o o k i x . R u l e 5 , ) b y observing, that " s u c h e x -
pressions are real Syllepses ( a n d the Syllcpsis is defined, B o o k vii. c h . 7, to b e a figure which m a r k s
s o m e disproportion and disagreement i n the parts o f a sentence), for, as w h e n w e s a y turba r u u n t , thc
multitude rush, t h e V e r b is p u t i n the plural, because w e apprehend a mnltitude b y the word t u r b a ;
so when w e s a y animalia currit [ £ 5 a rpéye'] t V e r b i s p u t i n t h e singular, b y reason w e conceive a n
n e

nnivcrsality b y the word animalia animáis, as if it were omne animal currit, every animal runs, or i n -
definitely animal currit, an animal runs. T h u s m y author, w h o s h o w s that similar phrases are used
b o t h in the L a t i n and F r e n c h l a n g u a g e s ; I a d d , that s o are t h e y l i k e w i s e i n H e b r e w ; see J o e l i. 2 0 .
Jer. x x x v . 1 4 , and m y H e b r e w G r a m m a r , Sect. V I I I . 2 1 .
SECT. X X I . GREEK GRAMMAR. 63

things mere made, '(Za rpé^Et animáis run. [ B u t even in A t t i c (in which this con-
struction is most common) i t often cloes not take place, and especially when t h e
n e u t . P l u r . signifies, living persons, or even where anímate creatures are t o be u n -
derstood.
7. T w o or more Nominatives, of whatever N u m b e r , generally have a Verb plural,
and if t h e Nominatives difTer in Person, of t h e most * morthy Person, as Ziréppa
KCIÍ xápiroc <¡ia(pépovcri, Seed and fruit dijfer; "TLyu> raí tro ra SÍKaia irovíiaopív, I
and ihou mili do righi things. [ B u t ( 1 ) their V e r b is not always in t h e plural,
b u t is frequently governed b y t h e nearest Substantive, especially if this be a sin-
g u l a r , or a n e u t e r plural, as in H o m e r . 11. H . 3 8 6 . r¡vá>yEi Típíapóe rs raí aXXoi;
(see also E u r . Supp. 146. T h u c . i. 29) and sometimes, when t h e sing. or neut. plur. i s
t h e more remote. W e m a y add, t h a t a plural V e r b is often given to a dual s u b -
j e c í , see I I . E . 2 7 5 , a n d sometimes a dual V e r b t o a plural subject, which only
relates t o two persons or t h i n g s . ]
8. A Noun of midtiiude, t h o u g h singular in form, m a y have a V e r b plural, as
L u k e viii. 37, 'Hptíinjo-ctv ávrov cíwav rb TrXijdoc, All the midtitude asked him. Comp.
J o h n vii. 4 9 , and R u l e 15, below. [ U . B . 2 7 8 . H e r o d . ix. 2 3 . T h i s is done very
often with eras-oc.]
9. A Verb placed between two Nominatives of different Numbers, m a y agree w i t h
either, as "E6Voc woXvavdpoiwíjTaTÓv íariv, or licav, "Apá&ec, The Arabians are a
most populous nation.
10. T h e primitive Pronouns, whether of t h e first or second Person, are generally
omitted before a Verb (unless some emphasis or distinction be i n t e n d e d ) , as ypáfio
I mrite, Xéyeie thon sayest.
1 1 . T h e Nominative case of t h e t h i r d Person is also often omitted, especially b e -
fore such Verbs as these, Xéyso-i, <¡>áat, they say ; elwdao-L, 0iASVi, they are mont, &c.
understand avdpi>nroi men. So before Verbs qf nature, as itpávr-qo-e it thundered,
i¡<rrpa\p£ it lightened, i. e. Bebe God, or 'épavoe heaven.

OF T H E SECOND CONCORD.

12. [ T h e Adjective is properly determined in gender and number b y (i. e. is

in t h e same n u m b . and gend. as) t h e Substantives, with which i t is p u t as an epithet
or predícate. ( I t is an epithet, when, with t h e Substantive, i t constitutes a whole,
which would be imperfect w i t h o u t i t ; a n d a predicate, when a new determination i s
subjoined to a Substantive considered as perfect.) T h u s x p ^ ° £ «V?)p, <píXate yí/vat^ivi]
13. [ B u t this rule is often violated; for t h e Greeks frequently refer Adjectives
to t h e Substantive only in sense, and p u t them in t h e Gender implied in t h e S u b -
stantive. T h u s , II. X . 84. (píXe TÍKVOV, because réwov here implies a male. II. I I . 2S0.
(¡¡dXayyee éX7rópEj'oi, because t h e troops consisted of men.']
14. [Henee, a Noun of number, Singular, F e m i n i n e , or N e u t e r , has very often
an Adjective Masculine and Plural, L u k e ii. 13. TíXf¡6oc crparíae ¿pavía, CUVÚVTUV,

A mtdtitude qf the heavenly host praising, &c. L u k e xix. 3 7 . ''Awav rb TrXrjdoe yaí-
povree, All the mullitude rejoicing. See T h u c y d . iii. 7 9 . X e n . H i s t . G r . ii. 3 , 5 5 . ]
15. [ B u t even without this reference to t h e sense, t h e r u l e is violated; t h e F e m .
D u a l is p u t with t h e Mase. T h u c . v. 2 3 . &pa>ü> río iróXee; t h e Mase, with t h e F e m .
both Singular a n d P l u r a l . E u r . H e c . 659. díjXvv (nropav; frequently Participles

* I n persons the first is called more worihy than the second, a n d the second than the t h i r d ; or a s
M r . H o l m e s states it, i n h i s Latin Grammar, p . 5 3 , N o t e , " 7 and another are toe, thou and another
are ye; so that the V e r b agrees with the Jirst Person rather than the second, and with the second
rather than the third." •
64 A PLAIN A N D EASY SECT. X X L

Mase, both Singular and Plural with Substaut. F e m . Pind. 0 1 . vi. 23. l-n-ra irvpav
TtXtaQévrtúv *.]
16. fJThe Adjective, as a predícale, not an epilhct, is often p u t in t h e N e u t e r
Singular. W h e n t h e subject is Masculino or F e m i n i n e , or in t h e Plural, as II. B .
204. «K ayaOov iroXvKotpavín, the rule of the many is not a good thing. (See V i r g .
E c l . iii. 80. Mn. iv. 568.) See M a t . vi. 2 5 , 3 4 . 2 Cor. ii. 6. Aristoph. P l u t . 2 0 3 .
L o n g . 3 1 , 3 2 . H e r o d . ii. 68. Sometimes xP'ty" Krijpa,
1 o
a thing, is joined to t h e
r

Adjective so placed.]
17. [If Adjectives refer to two or more Substantives, and these are of t h e same
G e n d e r , t h e Adjective is properly of this Gender and N u m b e r (yet very often in
t h e N e u t e r ) ; b u t if they are of diíferent Genders, then t h e N e u t e r Plural is p u t
when t h e objeets are inanimate, as H e r o d . ii. 132. rov avyiva tcal rrjv KE<j>áXr¡v tc£XP ~ v

awpkva; b u t with animated beings, in t h e Masculine, if one is Masculine, as Pind.

OÍ. ix. 66. Tívópa AEVKOXÍIOV re Kara&ávrE ; a n d very frequently i t is determined
both in Gender and N u m b e r by one only of t h e Substantives. T h u c . viii. 63. ~2¡rpop-
€iyj.<)riv ical rae vave cnre\r]\v8óra.'\
18. [ T h e Greeks, considering t h e Substantive very frequently as t h e whole, a n d
t h e Adjective as t h e p a r t , p u t t h e Substantive in t h e Genitive, and t h e Adjective
sometimes in t h e Gender of t h e Substantive, as )/9¿W XEKTÓÍ, for XEKTOI T¡BEOI, Soph.
CEd. T . 18. xpn^oi rwv ávdpúnrwv the good of men, i. e. such of men as are good;
and even in t h e Singular, especially in A t t i c , rS CTÍVS rov fipiffvv ; sometimes in t h e
N e u t e r , rb noXXbv rrje (rrparirje, Herod. viii. 1 0 0 . ]
[ N . B . Adjectives are often p u t alone in t h e N e u t e r Gender, or stand as S u b -
stantives for any indefinite objeets t h o u g h t of and understood. H e r e t h e common
G r a m m a r s say there is an ellipse of X9^F A
%> ^l" ]
o r 0 a7a-

OF THE THIKD CONCORD.

19. T h e relative Pronoun, be, r¡, b, agrees with t h e Substantive to which it re-
fers, called its Antecedent, in Gender, N u m b e r , and P e r s o n ; and if there be no
Nominative case between t h e Relative and t h e Verb, t h e Relative itself will be t h e
Nominative case to t h e Verb, as Maeóptós ¿<rnv b aví¡p be ¿Xirí^ei, Blessed is the
man who hopeth.
20. B u t if there be some other Nominative case to t h e V e r b , t h e Relative will,
as to Case, be governed by t h e Verb, or b y some other word in t h e sentence, as
Manápiov rb 'kdvoe ov Wvpioe b Bebe itrre Xáoe ov iieXÉ^aro, Blessed (is) the nation
whose God the Lord is, the people nhom he halh chosen. I n this sentence t h e first
Relative ov is, as to Case, governed b y t h e Noun 6EOC, (comp. R u l e 32.) t h e second
Relative bv by t h e V e r b ¿^eXé^aro. Comp. R u l e 43.
2 1 . B u t observe t h a t t h e Relative a n d Antecedent in Greek are often p u t in t h e
same case, as 'ETI-ÍOTEVOW—reo Xóya> J (for bv) ELTTEV, They believed—the word which
he spalce. John ii. 22.
22. T w o or more Antecedents generally have a Relative plural, agreeing in
G e n d e r a n d Person with t h e most w o r t h y , as 'Avi)p KOÍ yvvn bi áyawwm rov Qtóv,
A man and a woman who love God f.
23. A Relative between two Antecedents of diíferent Genders or N u m b e r s m a y
agree with either, as Lucían, DTÓXÍIS iio-iv Sg (baXéae vopí'Ceie, Those are cities which
yon take for caves. Gal. iii. 16, r¿¡ awéppari o-e, be iarl Xpiarrbe, to thy seed, which
is Christ. E p h . iii. 13, rale SrXÍ\¡j£o-í pa, rjne iern ¡?¿£a iipuiv, my afflictions, which
are your glory.

* [ T h e Greek Tragedians use the Masculine for the F e m i n i n e , when the Plural instead of the S i n -
gular of a female is u s e d ; and when a chorus of women speaks o f themselves.]
•f [See § 17, on A d j . M o s t o f the same observations apply to the Relativo.]
SKCT. XXI. GREEK GRAMMAR. C5

24. 'Avróg, ovrog, e'tCEivog, baog hom many, rjXiKog as great, 3wc of such kind, also
wóaoi hom many. iróaog of ívhat number, or, &c. rrórawog of what country, TioaarrXüg
and iroaaTvXáaiog of how many joíd, are sometimes used after t h e manner of t h e Re-
lative, as 'JLXftyávrov 'épt,pvov {éarl) ÍJXIKÓV (¿ori) ¡lóaypg, The felus of elephants
is as big as a calf; Xcipi^ÓLievog oi<¡¡ GOL ávSpí, Obliging such a man as you.
2 5 . Relatives often agree with their Antecedents, not as to their Gender, b u t as
to their Sense, as M a t . xxviii. 19, eOvr¡~-avrág. Rom. ii. 14, 'Édvr¡—3roi. Col. ü- 19,
7-))v K£(páXrjv, él, 3—Rev. xvii. 16, Repara—¡roí. So in L a t i n , Terence, Andr. I I í .
5, 1, Scelus, qui me pcrdidit. Horace, M o n s t r u m , quae—Lib. I . ode xxxvii. line 2 1 .
26. T h e Relative is often p u t before t h e Anteeedent, especially when in t h e same
case, as J o h n xi. 6, "EpEivEv év a i¡v roira, He stayed in the place in which he mas.
[ I n fact it puts the N o u n often into its own case, as Xen. Anab. i. 9, 11. ei riva
ópoír] Karaa-Kevá^ovra r)g dpxoi %ápag, for rr)v X^P av
VS apX - Henee, t h e Nouns
oí

which should precede t h e Relative, with a demonstrative Pronoun or Adjective, in

t h e same case with these, are frequently referred to t h e Relative, as Soph. CEd. c.
907. ug TTtp ovrog rúg vópag éio-yXd' '¿xwv, réroiiriv áppo<rQíi<r£Tai; and this construc-
tion is united with t h e preceding, ibid. 334. (J¡XQov) ¿,vv <SwEp tixov OIKETÜIV iri<7¿>
pavor. Sometimes t h e Substantive, even when standing first, takes t h e case of t h e
Relative which follows, as H e r o d . ii. 106. rag síiXag rag 'í=ra—SéVwerrpie, cu •n-Xévveg
bvKETi fdtvovrat -TrepieSrai. So in V i r g . Urbem, quam statuo, vestra est.]
27. A Verb, an Adjective, or a Relative, sometimes agree with a preceding I n -
finitive mood, or a s e n t e n c e ; and in such instances t h e V e r b is p u t in t h e t h i r d
Person, and the Adjective or Relative in t h e neuter Gender, as t%vp¿iv rov Xéovra
OVK iariv aacfiaXeg, To shear a lion is not safe; Mr) pedvo-KEo-de oivqi, év ¡¿ (neut.)
tarlv ciawria, Be not drunlc with rvine, in which (being drunk with mine namely^) is
profiigacy. E p h . v. 18. [ W e may add also, t h a t very frequently t h e Relative refers
to a t h i n g generally, and is t h e n also p u t in t h e neuter, as in Soph. CEd. T. 542.
rvpavvíoa Onpav 6 irXr'iOei áXío-Kerai, a thing which.2

OF GOVERNMENT.

28- Government is t h a t p a r t of S y n t a x which respeets t h e cases of Nouns and

Pronouns.

OP APPOSITION.

[ 2 9 . Apposition is when a Substantive or Pronoun Personal is accompanied by

another Substantive without a conjunctive Particle, and in the same Case and
Number, serving to explain t h e former, or supply any definition, as 'H Se \i'C (po'ipa)
ÍK Trérpr¡g irpopséi, péya wrjfia QEOIGIV. B u t very often t h e n u m b e r is not t h e same, as
in Soph. CEd. C. 472. Kpar»7p££ EIGLV, avSpbg '¿vx P°£ ¿X l' E - H i p p . ii. 'ImcoXírog,
£t T rr u r

Tlirdéwg Tren oEvpa-a; sometimes t h e case is e h a n g e d ; for example, t h e G e n . is used

when t h e Apposition refers to Pronouns Possessive, as in H o m e r II. r . 180, Aa?)p épbg
é'ovce KvvwiriSog : and so in Adjectives derived from proper ñames, where t h e proper
ñame includes a definition; II. B . 54. NEoropén Trapa vn't IívXyyevéog (iaciXrjog, The
ship of Néstor, the Icing, & c ]
30. Two or more Substantives belonging to t h e same t h i n g are p u t in the same
case by Apposition, as UavXog 'AirórrroXog, Paul an Apostle; Tipodéa TÉKVOI, To
Timothy (my) son ; "Aaumog iróXig, the town Asopus.
31. T h e proper ñame of a place, particularly of a tomn, ¡s sometimes p u t with its
Appellative in the Genitive, as 'Adr¡vüv iróXic, the city of Athens.
66 A P L A I N AND EASY SECT. X X I .

[ON THE NOMINATIVE.]

[ 3 2 . (a) V e r b s not constituting a complete Predícate, b u t requiring another

word, are generally t h e Passives signifying lo be called, named, or ckosen for any
thing, lo appear, to be considercd, to be hwrvn. H i e r e are also some not Passive,
signifying being or becoming, or conveying the same idea as Lpi, uévco, ire(¡>vica,
Kiiréiriv, & c , ancí these all have the additioual word in t h e Nominative.']
[(£>) Henee also with anua, when signifying to be called, and with ovopa E'T/ rivi
and ovopa É'X"J referring to a subject, the Nominative is p u t . T h e additional words
m a y be either Substantives or Adjectives.]
[(c) W i t h Verbs also which have a perfect signification, a second Nominative is
p u t as a predícate to be explained by iog, as. T h u s Soph. E l . 130, "IÍICETE Trapapv-
Oíov, ye are come as a comfort.]
[(d) A more precise definition is sometimos in the N o m . AE'CCÍ prai Eia(j>opá, Ten
mina: as tribute.]
[ ( e ) T h e Nom. is used also in exclamations.]

ON THE GENITIVE.

[ N . B . T h e other relations which t h e Verb in t h e Predícate requires to be ad-

joined, either according to its n a t u r e , or in certain combinations, are expressed by
w h a t are called the oblique cases, i. e. those which m u s t be dependent on other
words.]
[33. T h e Genitive may stand not only with t h e P r e d í c a t e , b u t with any word of
t h e Proposition, and expresses reíation in general. Each idea of reíation takes t h e
N o u n by which this reíation is determined in the G e n i t i v e . ]
[ 3 4 . I n many cases where the Substantive is joined with others in t h e Genitive,
in t h e question whose, t h e Greek agrees with t h e L a t i n and Engli'" T h e most
common case is when t h e Genitive signifies the t h i n g oí: person in which another is,
or which belongs to another, as t h e subject of t h e action, the situatíon, as oWa
néYptt, Peter's Jwuse, &c. B u t frequently the Genitive expresses t h e object of an
action or feeling expressed in another Noun, as TróBog'viS, regret with respect to the
son, or for the son; ávcpuq íviiévua, good will lowards a man. T h e following cases
m u s t be noticed where reíation is expressed by the Genitive.]
[ A . T o words of all kinds, other words are added in t h e Genitive, which show
t h e respect in which t h e sense of those words m u s t be t a k e n ; the Genitive then
signifies, with regard to.]
[ ( a ) T h u s with Verbs,- in t h e phrases ¿íc, ¿Vwe, irwg, é'ruc'¿x >t°
£L o e
qualified or
endowed in any way ; J e ríe kvvolag í) pvf)Lir]g E^EI, as each was with respect to be-
nevolence, or memory, i. e. as each wished well to a party, or remembered the
/cciXwc '¿x r'íQ lG> ^°
eiv
past; 7 u e r
P etty well as to drunkenness, i. e. to be prelty
drunk.]
[(¿>) A nd with other V e r b s , ítTeiyeaQai apnog, to be in liaste with respect to the batlle ;
cr^áX\£o-0ai EXTI-ÍSOC, to be deceived wjth respect to hope, i. e. to be disappointed.]
[ S o tcaríaya r?/e KeipaXfjg, I am broken as to my head, or my head is brolten, & c ]
[ ( c ) Again, with Adjectives, to give a more exact definition, fnraig appévwv TrcucW,
childless with respect to sons. So Soph. E l . 3 6 . áoKevog áo-;rícW. T h i s is very
common.]
[ ( ¿ ) So with Adverbs, 7rpóVw ápEríje áví/rav, to carry itfar with respect to virtue ;
iróppü) rijg ifkucia.g,far advanced with respect to age.]
[ ( e ) H e n e e t h e N e u t e r s , -¿Yo, roo-S-o, róSs, with a Preposition, take a Genitive as
a definition ; i\vvÉitEnov kg TUTO c'm'iyici/e, they carne to this with respect to necessity,
i. e. into such necessity.']
SECT. X X I . GREEK GRAMMAR. 67

[ ( j f ) Henee t h e Genitive is p u t with Verbs ( « ) , or Substantives ( 6 ) , or absolutely

(c), where otherwise Trepe would be used. T h u s . rije pnrpoe íj/coi rfjg kprjg (ppáuuiv,
about to speak about my mother (a); áyyeXía rfjg Xía, the relation concerning
Chios (6) ; rijg or¡c fpevcg, ev era BíloiKa, as to what regarás y our turn of mindf\
Lis) T ' Genitive, in t h e same way, also illustrates words and propositions, éitrépag
l e

Ltr¡Set' tsai ra á7raXXay¿j>>cu rS KivBvya, if there is to be no end, viz. with respect

to deliverance from danger.~}
__Some of t h e above cases may be r a r e . I n t h e following t h e Genitive regularly
oceurs, and is founded on t h e sense with respect ¿o.]
[ 3 5 . B . Words expressing Relation, b u t requiring another word as t h e object of this
Relation, take this object (which however must not be Passive) in t h e G e n i t i v e . ]
[ T h u s (a), Adjectives, with an active sense, derived niostly from V e r b s active, have
a Genitive, where t h e Verbs have an Accusative ; ciiSpínriau ¿ Sr/Xiipoyeg, not mis-
chievous with respect to men, i. e. which do not harm men ; óXédpioi ejiíXiov de-
slruclive to friends. M a n y adjectives in -inog, a n d many compounded with a
privative, have this government. So Participles s o m e t i m e s ; ro^üv eiSiog, skilful
with respect to boms.~\
[(¿) Words which express a situation or operation of t h e mind, a j u d g m e n t of t h e
u n d e r s t a n d i n g which is directed to an object without aífecting it. T h u s t h e
Adjectives experienced, ignorant, remembering, desirous, as TT)Q Qveríag ¿ic ádaíis,
áXX' '¿¡jnreipoc, not ignorant with respect to the sacrifíce, but experienced*.~\
[_And t h e Verbs, to recollect ovforget, to remind, to be careful or careless (with t h e
Adjective and Substantive corresponding to t h e m ) , lo consider, reflect, under-
stand, or long for any thing, as
Myi/crarrOe á X c í / c f, be mindful as to courage, i. e. remember your courage.
KÍKXunreg Aiós a c á X e y S o - u ' , are careless as lo Júpiter J .
'EvOvpü TWV iieiÓTwv, consider with respect to those who know [|.
"HO-BOVTO T£iyi{,óvTiúv,.thcy perceived them fortifying ¡|.
M i ) peyáXav ¿TnOvpeiv, not lo be desirous qf great things, not eager with respect
to-2
[_Her.ce also m a n y Verbs of sense take a Genitive, as Trjg (jxdvfjg áteáio, I hear the
voice, r \v'og beraSpavro T&V KapiíXuv, when they smell the camelsf\
[(c) Words tvhich indícate fulness or deficieticy, because t h e word which shows of
what any t h i n g is full or empty, shows t h e respect in which t h e significaron of
t h e governing word m u s t be taken. T h u s in Adjectives :
n ó X t c per>) epwópii)v,fnl! with respect to merchants.
H X á f f i o c IJIÓTOLO, rich with respect to the means of livelihood.
"Epnpog ¡píXiov, deserted as to friends.
Vvpvog ^oXLerparog, naked as to garment.'J
[ A n d Verbs,
AIKÜV r) TTÓXIS íyepev, The city mas full qf lawsuits.
Kopécracrdaí rivoe, to salisfy one's self as lo any thing; and so to enjoy or be
2ileased with, in t h e sense of to have enough qf.
'Oncog-érSeópeyog óaeerüv, a house needy as to domestics.
"AXeros t)pí/pujere Xeóvrdc, he made the grove desert as to the lion, i. e. took away
the lionf\
\_{d) Henee also t h e Verbs to bereave, deliver or clear, escape, Iceep off or lúnder,
desist from, any V e r b expressing dislance or separation, lo repulse, to malee a
way for, and to cease or malee to cease, as all implying deticieney in either a direct
or remote sense, have a Genitive, as ,
'ATro^epeiv riva rivóg, to deprive one of any thing.
Tvpávvwv iiXevQepíj/Qrjaav, they were deliveredfrom lyrants.
'OVK aXv&Tov popa Kaderra, ye shall not escape from the worstfate.
"Eipy£odai TS>V vopípuiv, lo be hindered from what is lawful.
* [ S o m e t i m e s these A d j e c t i v e s take irepi with a G e n i t i v e , and s o m e t i m e s the A c c u s a t i v e ; ¡ TOZT' ¡VI-
rñfjíw:, lie who lenca OT ivas acquainted with these things.]
f [ T h e s e V e r b s have s o m e t i m e s t h e G e n i t i v e w i t h nifi, s o m e t i m e s the A c c u s a t i v e , a s TUSSV á¡J-Í/JL-

X [íeíSojua. to spare, and f\,xáTTOfim to guará, b o t h contain the idea to be careful about, a n d there-
fore take a G e n i t i v e . ]
|| [ B o t h these classes o f V e r b s take the A c c u s a t i v e a l s o . ]
TS 2
 C8 _ A PLAIN AND EASY SECT. X X I .

'Air¿xtLV T w v
apyvpEíwv rpía tácita, tobe three stadia dislant from the silver mines.
Ti)v 'Aaíuv cuopi'£W rije Ai€vr¡e, separating Asia from África.
Wfjpae apvvs TtalcoQ, he repelled death from his son.
"EXn'fav tpóvü, they ceased from slaughler.}
[ L e t it be remarked, ( 1 . ) , t h a t al though every word eannot be iustanced, the
principie here noticed explains many c o n s t r u c t i o n s ; (2.), t h a t Verbs in their de-
rivative sense, though perhaps not having the same reference, retain the construc-
tion a d m i t t e d in their proper sense; (3.), t h a t Substantives and Adverbs having
t h e same significations as t h e above Adjectives, a d m i t t h e Genitive, as aXie rm> TE-
6V7]KOT(X>V, enough qfdead persons ; \uipic, & c . ; (4.), t h a t some of these words occa-
sionally admit other constructions.]
[ ( e ) T h i s signification, with respect to, shows why t h e comparative and words in-
volving a comparison, require t h e Genitive.
MEÍ£OJV Trarpóc, greater with respect to his falher.
AévrEpoQ ¿OEvbe, second with regard to none.
Tur ÉTnOvptiov ymapívae, overeóme by their passions, i. e. worsied, made in-
ferior to.}
[ I n the following Verbs, a comparison is also implied, t h o u g h indirectly.
[(].) To sur pass or to be surpassed by, as
TÍEpiyévoio av rrje ra (iairiXétoe bvvápeoje, you would surpass the king's poner.
'A-KÓkíi-KErai 'AXe^ávcpu, he is inferior to Alexander.}
[ ( 2 . ) To rule (i. e. be lord or superior over);
Kpaíveiv or (ÍOXEIV •rparS, to rule the army; and so xvpiEVEiv, Koipavsiv, rvpav-
VEVELV, &c. ( b u t these Verbs have frequently a Dative or an A c c u s a t i v e . ) ]
[ ( 3 . ) To obey or disobey ;
'E/xS iTEiQópEvoi, obeying me.}
[ ( 4 . ) H e n e e Adjectives and Substantives which imply rule or t h e contrary (and
t h u s superiority and inferiority) have a Genitive, as
T % r¡Soví¡e éyKparíje, master over pleasurc.
So íjrrcov, Kaprtpóe, aicpariie; and rjrra ra Tróparoe, defeat bymeans of drinking ;
lyKpáreía píyovc, mastery over cold, & c ]
[ ( 5 . ) A g a i n , words referring to valué imply a comparison ; and henee all such, as well
as those, to bny, sell, & c , which contain a determination of valué, have a Genitive.
T h u s a£ioe (properly eqnivalent) and ávrá^ioe ; as larpbe xoXXfiv kvrtMxoe aXXiov,
a physician is as good as (is worlh) many others; aé,ií>e rije abuáae, (let them be
punished) in a manner worihy of their crime; and again, rrócrn av nplaio, for
how much would you buy ? W h e n c e t h e Genitive oceurs in m a n y combinations,
Xpvabv avSpbe íbé^aro, she received goldfor her husband.}
[ ( 6 . ) T h e r e is, lastly, a comparison in words expressing a difference, as trepes, aXXoc,
Sutfopoe, aXXotoe, ¿tXXórpLoe, biacjiépu; aXXoíov ÉTri^ripne, differentfrom knowledge;
' ávi/p SiadtépEL rüv aXXcov '(¿¡wv, a man differsfrom other animáis.}
\ff) T h e Genitive also expresses the cause, and is then rendered on accounl of,
wliere relation is clearly implied, as with V e r b s ; '(r¡XS> GE rS vS, I admire you on
account of or with respect toyóur sense; ov psyaLpiú rSM aoi bwpt'iparoe, I do not
envy you on account of or with respect to this gift; and with A d j e c t i v e s ; Oaváru
rS 0-5 peXéa, wretched on account of or with respect to your death. Henee the
Genitive stands alone in exclamations, (j>lv ra ávbpbe, alas ! the man ! ¿> ZEV rije
ÁETrrórjjros, O Júpiter! his acuteness7 A n d with Substantives; pEXEbyparaTrarpbe,
grief on account of his father ; rb Tpoíae plcroe, hatred on account of Troy.}
[ H e n e e too, in prayers, t h e t h i n g appealed to as t h e cause of g r a n t i n g t h e prayer, is
p u t in t h e Genitive, Xío-aopai QÉpio-roe, I pray you by Themis, for the salte of
Themis: and so Xtraí QESIV, entrealies by the gods.}
[ A n d again, t h e Genitive is p u t with V e r b s to begin, ra (rjv airo Xvwije apxópEvov,
beginning Ufe with paiti.}
[ C . T h e second g r e a t relation expressed by the Genitive is t h a t of a whole to its
p a r t s ; and this is common in other languages, as tic r¿ru>v, unus horum, &c. O b -
serve these cases: (a), with A r t . and Relativo, rtov bv-tov r a \Av E^LV Ir/;' i\pív, ráb" ¿i¿
i<f iipiv, of all things exisling, some are in ourpomer, some not; Boaorüiv ói pi) / Í H -
Xó/.iEvoi, those Bccolians who mere iinwilliiig ; rb voahv TZIXEWV, the weak part of the
SECT. XXI. GREEK GRAMMAR. 69

watt, (this construction of the Participle is very common): with Relatives, 7rapa\a£¿¿p
Qrfialoiv »s XoyiacipEvog EITTOV, talcing those ofthe Thebans whom. (b) W i t h S u b -
stantives ( 1 ) , t h e country as the mhole is t h e Genitive, when a city of it is m e n -
tioned, 'Oivór) rrjg 'Ama¡g, CEnoe, a city of Attica. (2) T h e class to which a t h i n g
mentioned belongs, is on the same account in the Genitive, rpoxóg TG>V KEpapeiKwv,
a wheel of the class of the earthen, i. e. an earthen wheel.~]
[(c) W i t h V e r b s ; (1.) with iivaí, as avrog {¡OEXE rüiv pzvovrwv iivat, one of those
who remained at home (where he is often a d d é d ) ; and (2.) with Verbs of all kinds,
when t h e action refers to a p a r t only of t h e object, as trepov rfjg yijg, luid waste a
part ofthe country ; Xa€óvra rwv ratviwv, some of the J¡llets.~\
[_(d) W i t h Adverbs of place, tródi tppEvbg épag properly in what part of my mind ;
Iv ki K-CIKS, in what situation ofevil; and of time, as ÓÚ/E rrjg ¿¡pepas, in a late part
of the day.]
[(e) W e m u s t observe, too, t h a t for the same reason a Genitive is p u t with many
Verbs, signifying any participation, as pérzti, peréxEU', &c. T h u s '£,v\\a€e póxOiov,
take a part in the labours. So irpoaí¡KEi, TÍ -irpoaíiicEi poi líopívdiwv, what are the
Corinthians to me ? ^h.raSiSóvaí to impart; xpv ^ ¡3ápng pErabiSórai riñe tyíXoig,
T

give your friends a share in your grief. So the Verbs to enjoy, i. e. to have a
aliare in; áiroXavEiv rS áyadü, to enjoy the good. And henee, the Verb yeíopai
to taste, has t h e Gen. And ofoi to smell of, and irvéio to breathe of, have t h e
Gen. for the same reason : irávr éífei Qépng, every thing smells of summer, has a
parí of the summer smell; píiptov irvítig, you breathe of myrtle. Since V e r b s
signifying to impart, receive, give, have a G e n , it appears, t h a t henee Verbs sig-
nifying to oblain, receive, have the same case, as, 6vr¡r5 auparos ETVX^S, you have
a mortal body; &g óápwv Xá^jj, that he may get gifts; and so KvpElv, KXr¡poropEÍv
(the thing inherited; and again, the person from whom one inherits.) The
construction of t h e Verbs to take, or take hold of (in general Verbs middle) with
t h e Gen. arises from this cause ; irípwv rp/Epóvuiv XapópEvog, taking (some) of
other leaders, i. e. taking other leaders; (and henee, t h e same Verbs have t h e
Gen. with other meanings, as lo blame; ÉwEXáfiEro ra -¿rjipíapaTog, Mamad the
decree;) k^ópEda avrñ, we shall keep hold of him; Xípvt¡ '¿x eTat
™ ar/parog,
borders on; rrjg dvrijg yvtopr¡s '¿xopai, persevere in; airrEtíai avTÜv, to touch
them; whence other Verbs of touching, as \L>avw, Qiyycivui, have a Gen. The
p a r t seized is often in the Gen. with these Verbs, iXlifiovro rns '(¿>vr¡e rov
'Opóvrrjv, took him by the girdle. Henee, perhaps, t h e Verbs of contrary sense,
to let go, to miss, &c. have the Gen., and these are usually middle V e r b s ; ríjg
n-aidog a pedíiaopai, I will not let the girl go; so ¿upÍEadaí ( t h e actives of both
Verbs have t h e Acc.) •n-poiEadaí, cipaprávEiv.']

í(f) T h e Subst. m a r k i n g the class from which t h e Superlative takes t h e chiefest

as a part, is in the G e n . ; ?? pEyí^r¡ rtov vóatov ¿ivaí^sia, impudence is the greatest of
diseases: and henee t h e Gen. is p u t with Verbs, Adjectives, a n d Adverbs, derived
from Superlatives, or expressing preferableness; Trávrwv biairpérvEig, you excel all,
i. e. ara the first of all; Zia-KpEizE~ig dvr¡rCJv efvaav, and É'4'OX« •wárriov, chiefly of
all."]
[ 3 6 . D . T h e Gen. marks t h e person or t h i n g to which any t h i n g belongs, w h e t h e r
property, quality, habit, d u t y , &c. and those from which any t h i n g arises. Próbably
t h e r e is here the notion of the reíation of t h e quality, &c. to its possessor.]
[ ( # ) Property, Ta rwv OLKÚVTWV rr)v wóXiv oi/ceta rü¡v KaXüg (iaaiXEvóvruv ¿TI, the
property of the citizans belongs to good kings. So í<Stoe, &c. and Upbg ; as upog
rS Na'Xe, sacred to the Nile, i. e. made .his sacred property.- Eivai, T
yíyveadaí
especially signify, to belong lo ; eri ra flaaiXrjog, it is the kings ; iavrS zívaí, lo be
his own master ; .t=ri ra Xéyovros, he gives himself up to the speaker. Eivai also
7

expresses quality, power, custom, duty, efe. (ávoíag IVÍ, it is the quality or part
°f' folty > TTOXXH Tróvts áVt, it is a business of great labour); ability, {nravTog
avSpóg ETIV EKXÉíaaOai, every one can tell) ; habit or part, ETIV apa cumia ávSpbg ;
is it the part ofajust man ?]
[ ( 6 ) T h e Gen. with demonstrative P r o n o u n s shows in whom a quality is found,
as ovic ayapai ravr ávSpbg ápi^éog, I do not approve this in a prince; raro
éiraivü 'AyrjctXúa, / praisc this in Agesilaus. So 6avpá£a, & c ; and henee,
 A PLA1N A N D EASY SECT. X X I .

these Verbs have sometimes a Gen. of t h e object; <rS 8avuá£<i), I rvoiider at yon ;
ayajiai ríje ¿iperrjg, / admire their virtue.']
[ ( c ) T h e Gen. again expresses t h e person or t h i n g from which any t h i n g p r o -
eeeds: iÍKaaa ra áyyéX», I heard from the messenger; paBóvree rS icaracrK(Í7rs,
having learntfrom the spy ; Trarpoe kyévero Kapi3vcrn, he wasbornfrQm Cambyses
as hisfather.)
[_(d) T h e Gen. expresses t h e material from which t h e t h i n g is made, as o-rktyavoe
woíae, a croren of herb.~]
[(e) A n d t h e autlior of what is implied in t h e Subst. "lipas áXarelai, the wander-
ings (of lo) caused by Junar}
[ 3 7 . E . T h e Gen. is p u t witli Verbs compounded with Prepositions which govern
t h e (Jen. when t h e P r e p . m i g h t be separated from t h e V e r b , and set before t h e
case, without altering t h e meaning of t h e Verb, b u t not e l s e ; e. g. we cannot say
ávriXíyeiv TLVÓQ, to contradict any one; for Xéyeiv avrí nvoe is, lo speak in the
place of any onc7\
[ F . T h e Gen. determines place and lime, in answer to w h e r e ? w h e n ? & c ]
[IVhere? Aaiác x ^P° ohao-iv, on the left hand-2
e e

[TVhcn? iftei /ScliS xpóve, he will come in a short time; TUTO eaerai fipepwv
okíyuív, wiihin a few days ; and this last signitícation is common.]
£Since ? TTOÍH xpáva TreirópOr/rai TTÓXIS, since what time?'}
\_How long ? ti, krwv ¿iXt¡-oe,for six years, during six years.'}
[ G . Lastly, t h e word governing t h e G e n . is often omitted, as ¿ t o e , OÍKOQ, &C.
QouKuSíSrje ó 'OXópu, the son of; iv Kpoío-u, in the house of Crasus.}

ON THE DATIVE.

[38. T h e Dative in Greek ( A ) , as in other languages, answers t h e question, cid ?

or lo whom ? as iicóvaí rí rivi, to give any thing to any one; tyíXoe rivi, kxBpóe riví,
Scc.friendly to any one, ¿ye, and ( B ) answers to t h e L a t i n Ablative.J
[ 3 9 . A . T h e following cases may be especially n o t e d : ]
[ T h e V e r b s to order or exhort, to rule, obey or disobey, to yield, i. e. to give an
order, ófc. to yield obedience to, ¿ye. generally have t h e D a t i v e , (though KEXÉV(¡> has
also t h e Acc. and Infin., and MBETEIV, irapatcaXeiv, rcporpéireiv, irapo£,í)veiv, irapopfJtav,
&c. only t h e A c c . ; inraicieiv again t h e Gen. and D a t . ) and so VTTOTTT¡¡J<JEIV (which
seems to m a r k t h e same feeling oí subordination as t h e Verbs to yield, &c.) and
\arpeveiv lo serve, have the D a t . ]
[Again, Verbs of meeting, being in the way of, being troublesome to, (obvius esse,
molestus esse alicui) have usually t h e D a t . (though kvrvyxá-vio and crvvrvy have
also a Gen., and épiroSí^ui sometimes an Acc.) as r¿> 'tpvÉrvypv; whom did I meet ?}
[Verbs of reproaching, censar ing, rebuking, have often a D a t . of t h e person, (ex-
probrare alicui aliquid, to object a t h i n g to a person) and Acc. of t h a t in which t h e
reproof consists, and sometimes t h e D a t . alone, as rüró poi ¿pepea, you blamed me
for this; so k-Kiripav, e-KiKaXüv. B u t pkptyopai has also an A c c , and so has XOLSO-
ptiv, though t h e middle takes t h e D a t . ]
[ 4 0 . Verbs of helping, assisting, injuring, have both D a t . and A c c , t h o u g h
iipíiyeiv, auvveiv, aXe'íeiv, ¡DonBelv, k-iriKapelv, Xvo-ireXelv, only t h e D a t . ; ¿i<peXe7v has
both ; fiXéiw-h) and ovivr¡pi only t h e A c c ]
[Verbs and Adjectives signifying useful, injurious, inimical, have a Gen. as well
as D a t . ]
[ 4 1 . W o r d s signifying equality, suilableness, resemblance, on t h e contrary, have
t h e D a t . , and henee, ó cWoc the same, as rov av-'óv fíXov vop.i£ér(o rr¡ rtóXei, let him
reckon the same person hisfriend whom the cily reckons itsfriend; and so ele, as
ipoi pide kic parépos,from one mother with me; and roiS-oc, as Xóyuc ra o-(j>u> Kara
Kreívovri roíame, words such as he who condemned you to death would speak ; a n d
so ÍO-OC, where in English we have as, than, with, <rü rii-reí rae 'ítrac K-Xrjyae kpoí, as
many strokes as I. T h i s rule applies to t h e Advcrbs íaate, opolwe, & c , and to
Verbs lo suif.Jil, bccoinc. &c. vpinziv, hp^o-reiv, íoiKÉmi, and henee to t h e Adverb
SBCT. XXI. GREEK GRAMMAR. 71

encoróle. W e m a y atld tliat all Adjectives of a similar meaning with bpoioc, as

c\S¿\<¡¡oe a/cin, conformable to, and 'tvvifdóe take a Dative. B u t "icroc and opowc
have sometimes the Gen. also.]
[ ( « ) 4 2 . T h e Dative also expresses t h a t an action takes place with reference to a
person or t h i n g ; - especially to signify for the advanlage, good, or pleasure of
any one; as <J TOVIE wXSv i^EÍXapEv, for whom we undertook this expedition,
(and henee arise t h e phrases, TipcopeXv and ¿ipíveiv TÍ TLVI, as Tipwpíicreic Tía-
rpótcXa) rbv tyóvov, revenge the murder for Patroclus ; and so with Verbs to fear,
as CSEÍHELV TLVL, to fear for any one J ; and in honour ofj as ópxvvúpw- &£óí<riv,
dancing in honour of the gods. (b) Indecd, generally, a reference to a person
or t h i n g may be said to be implied in all Verbs, which can admit such a refer-
ence ; and in this case it is expressed by the Dative ; a¡,ióc IT¿ QCLVÍITH TT¡ TTÓXEI, he
deserves dealh with regard to the átate, i. e. lie deserves that the state should con-
demn him; 8EOS ÉKITÍ¡1¡EI pe, T¿>8E <3' o"t%opai, the god saves me, but as far as he is
concerned, I am undone; 'OSVO-CTEVC; 'Op>ip<¡> XmSopE~i, &c. Ulysses in Homer, efe.
(c) A n d t h u s the Dat. is p u t with Verbs, and Adjectives, where for is used in
English, as poíSioe, XUXETTOS, ciyaddv, KaXve, Evxp'iaroc, ái<n_p<<C; ijSvc., and others,
where the D a t . expresses t h e person or t h i n g , with reference to which one of
those predicates is applied as an object. (d) Henee we may explain t h e D a t .
(especially with WQ) when p u t to show t h a t a proposition is affirmed to be t r n e
only with respect to a certain person, as paicpciv ¿>Q yépovn wp^ciXEe ¿oov, you
have come a long way for an oíd man ; and when expressing a j u d g m e n t , as <TE
¿yio írípncra TO'IS <ppov5criv Iv, I have honoured you, according to the judgment qf
those who under stand; and very often in the phrase &Q ipoí, in my opinión, (e)
A n d the D a t . of the participle (in definitions of a property, distance, situation, &c.)
which expresses the action with respect to which the definition is applied, as ATTÓ
'~EXE(pavTÍvr¡Q avio ióvri, avavrés É^ix¿>piov, when one goes upfrom, efe; (f) A n d
in definitions of time, when an action has taken place, since a certain person has
done this or t h a t , as 7/v i¡pap SEVTEPOV •n-Xéorrí pot, the second day since I had been
sailing."]

l_(g) H e n e e , too, feeling of any kind is expressed by t h e Dative, as TTOQHVTI 7rpú(j>avri<;,

thou comest as I hoped; especially with Elvaí and yíyvEcrdaí, as rw Nidct rrpoo-SE-
Xppkvio i\v TIL TTEpi TLOV ' E y E o r a i W . Nicias expected the evenis in Segesta7\
\JJi) Henee also t h e D a t . is often p u t for the Gen. in other languages, and partly
because t h e D a t . implies reference or respect to a t h i n g ; for t h e Greeks under-
stand a person or t h i n g in relation to t h e action expressed in t h e Verb or Adject.,
and others take i t with relation to a Subst. T h u s <5££o-7ráo-0// ¿iv-cñe v TÍI'ÍLQ, their
ranks, efe.,' 'TXiac icaXóv ITI 7roír¡pa T¿> 'OTU/pw, Homer s Iliad is, efe. ; •warpiia
vpív oída, your paternal house. Probably this relation is t h e basis of the con-
struction of Eívaí, vTrápxEiv, &c. to be, with the Dat., and of jjassives with t h e
D a t . , instead of inri) and Gen. as TéXXo) Tra'iSee 7¡o-av, Tellus had children ; a n d
TrpocriróXoiQ (pvXácraETai, he is guarded by his atlendants7\
\_(i) Again, t h e D a t . expresses direction of an action to an object either real or
imaginary, as 'Adíivy yfipas CÍVECTXOV, they lifted up their handsto Minervas and
henee, Verbs of praying, (as in prayer t h e eyes or hands were lifted up) of look-
ing up to, (áva¡3Xéwio, épflXtTriú) have a Dative. Indeed the Dative alone ex-
presses this, as o-vvEXÉxOiicrav rate dvtríaie, they assembled for the sacrifico.
H e n e e , Verbs compounded with ÉTTI and jrpoe in t h i s sense have a Dat., t h o u g h t h e
Prepositions alone govern the Acc. in the same sense, as r a l e Trpat,Eo-i rcue á u r a l e
ETTExEÍpyo-av, they set to work on the same actions; and irpoafiáXXEiv TO> TEÍXEI,
lo set on or attack the fortifications; and so have Verbs compounded with other
Prepositions when they e x p r e s s t h i s direction.]
[ ( / Í ) Verbs compounded with P r e p . governing t h e D a t . also govern t h e D a t . if the
P r e p . can be separated without altering t h e sense, and those compounded with
7T£p¿, where it has no influence on t h e construction, as •KEpifiáXXeiv avp<j>6paic, &c.
[(/) Observe, t h a t Substantives derived from Verbs governing t h e D a t . have often
a Dat., as oúaiQ avQpímoia-iv, a gift to man.2
[ 4 3 . B . T h e Dative is used like the Ablative in L a t i n , and t h u s answers scveral
questions.]
72 A PLAIN A N D EASY SECT. X X I .

[(«) Wherewith ? where companionship is expressed. Verbs compounded with

avv and fiera, if the P r e p . can be separated from t h e V e r b , or r e p e a t e d ; Verbs of
following, as ETrsirdaí, aKok^dÉlv, óirnhlv, and Adjectives and Adverbs derived from
them or agrceing with them in meaniug, as tipie; Verbs of conversing or being
connected with, contending, have a Dative. T h e words expressing an army,
fleet, efe. when constituting an accompaniment, are in t h e D a t . , as cuj>iK¿p£voi r<5
aróXtp rérco, coming with the feet; and when t h e word expressing t h i s accompani-
m e n t has ávroe with it, both are in t h e D a t . , as cWoTc. '¿TTITOLC IÓVTEQ, going logelher
with onr liorses.~]
[ ( o ) W h e r e b y ? when an instrument is expressed, as Zvoív otpdaXpou' ópejv, to see
by means of, or with two eyes ; and even with Subst., as Kivr,o-£ic r¿ aupan, motions
with the body. Henee, xpv^Sai to use has a Dative, and in t h e same sense i t is
p u t with Verbs with which in L a t i n and English no mean is signified, as
reiepaípeadaí rote, irpáadev LopókoynpévoiQ, to infer from what was granted; pav-
TEÍovrai píijiloic, they prophecy by the help of rods ; and so araBpáatíai.]
[(c) F r o m w h a t ? whenee? where an aífection of t h e mind, &c. is given as a
motive, as ívvoíq ávSüi, I speak from good will.']
[(d) T h e D a t . also expresses t h e external cause, with Passives, where i t gives the
cause, not t h e person, by which an action is effected, as xpíipaaiv éiraipápEvoe, elated
by riches ; with any Verbs, when it is rendered, on account of as póvoi ¿virpayicus
OVK ií,vfipí'(op£v, we alone are not insolent on account of our success; and with m a n y
Passives and N e u t e r s , where it expresses t h e sense, occasion, or object, of an
action, as role •KtizpaypEvoic aiayyrópEvoi, being ashamed in consequence of what
had been done.]
[ ( e ) T h e Dative expresses t h e manner or Icind of an action, as (3íq ele oicíav
irapúvaí, to go in with forcé; i'^npLoiaav áv~bv <¡>vyr¡, punished him with banish-
ment.]
[_(f) '1 he D a t . expresses frequently with respect to, in this sense, noen rayye,
swift with respect to my feet, t h e feet being t h e i n s t r u m e n t of speed ; and henee
we have t h e Dative with Verbs of distinguishing one's self or excelling, as •KpoÉytiv
dpETTfT]
[ ( g ) T h e D a t . gives t h e measure of excess, as hiavrto irpEa^vrepoe, older by a
ycari]
\_(h) T h e D a t . answers the question when ? and w h e r e ? ]
[ W h e n ? rrj t¡ í/pépa dwriWaypai 0ó/3a, in this day I have been released, &c.
So rpicA pr¡aí, & c . ]
[ W h e r e ? MapaOwvi per OTE i\pEv, when we mere at Marathón."]

ON THE ACCUSATIVE.

[ 4 4 . T h e Accusative in Greek, as in other languages, marks t h e immediate object

affected by t h e Verb, as Xapftávio TI)V dairída, I take my spear ; and this wants no
farther illustration. B u t t h e r e are some particular cases. Practice, indeed, alone
can teach us all t h e cases where a word which in other languages is t h e remote ob-
j e c t , and introduced by a Preposition, is t h e immediate object in Greek, as he swore
by the gods, iopoaEv rae QESC.]

[ 4 5 . A . B u t some m a y be particularised.]
[(o) IIEÍSW, í>/3pi'f a>, a'cWw, several Verbs signifying lo assist orprqfit, and to injure,
dpeífÍEo-daí, to remunérate, •¡rpoo-K.vvÉw ( b u t not in t h e N . T . ) . Verbs of flattering,
(bdávu) to anticípate, Xav&civw, aVorj.Spáo-/au, i-nikéi-Kio, Verbs expressing t h e emo-
tion of shame,fear, pity, as áia-yíivopai, ¿woiKTEÍpai, &c. * have an Accus.]
[(6) Verbs properly intransitivo sometimes become transitive, and take an

* [ A n d so s o m e N e u t e r Verbs expressing an emotion, though, even without indicating the object,

they convey a perfect idea, as ? > ¡ j c > : c í ) T a j i ymfizo,, do not rejoice at thc death of, <5fc, and so i.>.ylu;
Qifpéui, ó W ^ s f a i ' r w , &c.]
SECT. X X I . GREEK GRAMMAR. 73

Accusative, as át irriyai píuoi pé\t, the fountains fcotv with honey. So aiaam, (latvio,
Qíto, Xáfiírto, o-irEvdta.]
[ ( c ) Intransitive Verbs often take an Accusative of t h e particular Substantive,
which expresses their meaning as an abstract, as
KIVCWEVO-Ü) THTOV TOV tcívtivvov, I will run this msk.
Zf¡ ¡iíov r¡Zinrov, he Uves a very pleasant life.~\
Xfd) T h e Greeks often p u t t h a t word in t h e Accusative which, according to t h e
laws of t h o u g h t a n d speech, is t h e remote object; t h u s in t h e Verbs to do, to speak,
the action done, and word spoken, are t h e near objects, and t h e remote ones a r e
t h e y to whom any t h i n g is said or d o n e : y e t (1.) by t h e Greeks these remote ob-
jects are p u t in t h e Accusative, as if they were t h e near ones, t h u s KCIKWC TTOIEIV riva,
to do harm to any one ; tcaicojc Xéysiv riva, to speak ill of any one. A n d , as in some
Verbs, two near objects may be t h o u g h t of, as I wrap the child in a mantle, or I
wrap the mantle round the child, both m a y be p u t in t h e A c c u s a t i v e : and (2.) t h i s
is t h e case in Greek, as TÍ 7rou]o-to ávrov, what shall I do to him ? where one is t h e
Accusative of t h e person, and t h e other of t h e t h i n g ; so irpárrio, Spáto, '¿pito, Xéyto
hirüv, ciyopévti), ÉptoTctto (for we m a y ask a person and ask qfter a thing), verbs of
asking or requiring, as G u a t e e xpVr f¡rr¡aav; of taking away any thing from one,
lara

as rvv Qeov r¿s ^etyávac. trtavXíiicaai, they deprived the goddess of the crowns; of
teaching, as (¡itSáo-Kuai rae wáiSae crto(j¡potrvvriv; of putting on or putting off, as evéSvtre
TOV nátSa TOV yiT&va, he put the vest on the boy ; of concealing, as '¿v ere uTTOKpvibio
r a e ípae Svmrpay'iae ; and t h e following, áiTtáo-dat, avapvtj,v, ¿nroXÚEiv, KWXVEIV, TTÉI-

Betv, rlaaaBaí, chiefly because m a n y Verbs m a y be referred sometimes to a person,

and sometimes t o a t h i n g , as KLOXÍEIV avdpioirov and KIOXVEIV trpáy fia '*.]
[N. B . Instead of a Verb active, we find sometimes t h e Substantive from which
i t is derived, with Troisiadaí in t h e Accusative, as dávfia Troi¿fiEvog rfjv ípyacríav ra
aiíifpu, wondering at the worhing of iron ; a n d in t h e same way, too, we have t w o
Accusatives, from a circumstance noticed above, as áputoo-av trávrae rae p-Eyi^ag
opKue, they made them all take the strongest oaths, and ipt rr)v rwv iráidiov itatSéiav
íwáiSevEv, he gave me the education of, & c ]
[ A g a i n , (3.), t h e remote object is in t h e Accusative, when i t signifies only a part,
condition, or definition, as
K a X o e én TO aupa, he is beautful in his body.
S ú p o e r)v ri]v irarpíSa, he was a Syrian by country.']
[ A n d henee t h e L a t i n s have their os Immerosque Deo similis. T h e G r e e k s some-
times p u t Kara.]
[(4.) Verbs which properly have not a Substantive of this sort in t h e Accusative,
take this case, as often as a Pronoun or other common expression takes t h e place
of any express definition, as
Ti yjptafiaL avT¿>,for what shall I use it ?
' OVK ovia on a-oi xptópat, I know not for what I shall use you.
Hcivra ivSaipoveív, to be happy in every thing.]
[ ( 5 . ) A n d henee (i. e. from t h e two last remarles) we may explain t h e double A c -
cusative in some cases, when not the person b u t thing is t h e more remote ob-
ject, as
'EvtKrjo-e rae /3ap€ápae rr)v iv MapaBtóvi páyr\v, he conquered the barbarians in
the battle at Marathón.
Ta péyi^a b)a>¿kí)trzT£ TI)V TTÓXIV, ye will benefil the city in the highest degree.
TXoXXá pe r¡íÍKr¡i;£v, he injured me in many things or much.]
[(G.) T h e Accusative, which expresses duration or distance, belongs t o this class, as
UoXw xpóvov irapépsivEV, he remained a long time.
T a TToXká /ca&Vu&í, he sleeps the most part of his time.
'Aw¿x£i (¡sica radíae, it is ten stadia disiant.]
* [ M a t h i í e observes, that as P r o n o u n s o f t h e N e u t e r Gender are p u t i n the A c c u s a t i v e w i t h a l l
V e r b s , instead o f their proper case, w e cannot decide that a V e r b governs two A c c u s a t i v e s from m e r e l y
finding one, a n d a n A c c u s a t i v e o f a P r o n o u n . W e find such w i t h é*Éyx ; iyiajrlpx<", ixtpoSlw, lyxu-
M

/xiá^w, wpoo-xvzyxáfri. T h e second A c c u s a t i v e m a y b e often explained b y a Preposition, as ra: aimhxs

nfdKixXSiT'xi, invite to a truce ; and s o ( « r o x p i W S c t i TI to answer to any thing, hxyxáfyív TI to forcé to
any thing, a s m o anayxct&fit, y_pña8¡x¡ mt TB, lo use any thing for any thing; a n d especially V e r b s o f
dividing, where u; is to b e s u p p l i e d . ]
74 A PLAIN A N D EASY SECT. X X I .

[46. I t will n o t be difficult now to comprehend t h e Adjective and Pronoun

N e u t e r , which in G r e e k are p u t in t h e Accusative, to express w h a t other languages
signify by a Preposition and Case, or an Adverb, as
Tuvavríov, BTOQ tráv révavríov 逿Xero pév, 5K yhvvaro Se, his wishes were exactly
in the opposite may, but, &c.
To Xeyópevov, áXX' ro Xeyópevov, tcarmiv eoprijs íjicopev, but, according to the
proverb, me come after thefeast.
To ra TROTR¡T5, áXXa yap, ro r a TTOÍTITS, epyov ¿Sév ovados, but, as the poet says,
no work is a disgrace.}
[ B . Adjectives, &c. derived from Verbs which govern t h e Accusative, sometimes
r e t a i n this case, as eré ovdets adaváriov <J>v¡,TFIOS, none of the gods escapes thee ; iroXXa
^vví^opa, knonñng many things."]
[ W e need not observe t h a t one Accusative (of t h e t h i n g ) is retained in t h e Pass.
of Verbs governing t w o ; b u t as in Greek, Verbs which in t h e Active take a D a t i v e
of t h e person, can i n t h e Passive be referred to this person as a subject, so t h e y
have t h e t h i n g in t h e Accusative, as 01 rS>v 'AOIJVCUWV KIRIRERPAPPÉVOL TT)V tyvXcucriv,

who mere entrusted with the match, for oís h fvXciKn kirer¿TPAIVRO, as in L a t i n , in-
scripti nomina regum, Flores, & c ]
[C. L a s t l y , t h e Accusative is p u t absolutely, i. e. without being governed b y
another word, Verb, Adjective, or Preposition.]
[(ÍZ) A s an apposition t o a whole proposition, as 'EXévnv ¡crávwpEv, MeveXéo)
Xvrrnv itiKpáv, i. e. o (ro Kreíveiv 'EX.) M E V . Xínrn irUpa ÉVcu.]
[(ó) T h e Substantive which contains t h e leading idea of t h e proposition, is
sometimes p u t a t t h e beginning in t h e Accusative, unconnected with t h e rest of t h e
proposition, as Mr¡répa c?, ¿i BI Ovpbs £<poppárai yapéeadaí, "Á\¡J"LTU> ÍLQ péyapov, i. e.
with regard to thy mother, let her go.]
[(c) T h e Accusative is often p u t in exclamations, as <3 ¿pé SéiXawv, O mreiched
me /]
[fd) Sometimes i t is determined by a Verb understood. Often in emphatie ad-
dresses Xéyu> or /caXtS is understood, as ere rr)v vevao-av is TTÉSOV rápa, (¡>r)s, tí Karaprij,
I speak to you who are inclining your head to the ground: with ovopa, nXrfios,
VEOS, cipos, and others,'éywis understood very often.]

GENERAL RULES.

47. Verbs compounded with Prepositions generally govern t h e same cases as

those Prepositions, as L u k e x ü i . 12, 'AwoXéXvcrai rfjs aaQeráas, Thou arl loosed
from thy infirmity; Acts xiv. 2 2 , 'Eppévetv r¡¡ iríaru, To persist in the failh;
M a t . xv. 3 , IIopa€áíj'£r£ rr)v évróXrjv, Ye transgress the command.
48. Verbs of Jtlling, separating, depriving, eslimating, exchanging, absolving,
condem.ning, admonishing, appeasing, besides a Genitive of t h e more distant S u b -
stantive governed by a Preposition understood, and having t h e signs with, from, of,
or for before i t in English, require an Accusative of the nearer, as L u k e i. 5 3 , ITEI-
víovras (a.v6p¿nrovs namely) tvéTrXnaív áyadwv, He hath filled the hungry with good
things; Demosth. Qytáwvs -rravo-ei rí/c v€péws, It will make the Thebans cease from
their insolcnce. Comp. above Rule 3 5 . A . (c.) ( á . ) 4 4 .
49. Verbs of giving, saying, showing, comparing, joining, agreeing, contriving,
and such like, govern an Accusative of t h e nearer Substantive, with a Dative of t h e
more distant, which latter mayWiwe. in English t h e signs to,for, or with before i t ;
as E p h . iv. 27, Míj-e StSore TOTTOV Sia&óXu, Neither give place to the devil: Herodian,
Tvváucí Súvarov épr¡%avaTO, He contrived death for the montan.
N . B . T h u s have I selected t h e most common and useful rules of Government ín
t h e Greek l a n g u a g e : b u t these are very far from comprehending all that m i g h t be
given upon such an extensive, and indeed almost inexhaustible subject. Govern-
ment, in t h e best writers, is so extremely various, t h a t it seems impossible to reduce
SECT. XXI. GREEK GRAMMAR. 75

i t within any certain R u l e s ; and it m u s t be confessed, t h a t it is often different

from those here laid down *.

OF INFJNITIVES AND PARTICIPLES.

50. T h e Infinitive is p u t after Verbs, Substantives, and Adjectives, as in English,

t h u s BovXópeda yvüvm, We tlesire lo hiorv ; 'TL'ípvalav ylvecQai, Power to become ;
"A£toe Kkrjdrjyat, Worthy to be called.
5 1 . Instead of t h e Infinitive is frequently used t h e Participle agreeing with t h e
Nominative case of t h e preceding Verb, especially with Verbs of persevering, de-
sisting, remembering, knorvledge, and ajfection, as 'Eirávcraro XaXtov, He ceased to
spealc, or spealcing ; Me¡j.vrjpat Troírtcae, I remember to have done ; 'AicQávopai dia-
¡xapTiov, I perceive I was mistalcen. •
52. T h e Infinitive mood is often governed by a Noun or P r o n o u n in t h e A c c u -
sative case going before, to which Noun or Pronoun in English is or may be p r e -
fixed t h e Conjunction that, as M a r k x. 49, Enrev áv-ov <f>wvT¡Qñvai, He ordered t h a t
r

he shoidd be called, or as we also say in English, He ordered him to be called.

53. T h e Infinitive with t h e neuter Article TO is used as a Noun in all cases, and
is often joined with Prepositions, as Tó fpovelr, Being mise, or wisdotn; 'Airo TÓV
fxíiXecdaí, From Jighiing; 'Ev rw xpñcOai, In using. Comp. H e b . ii. 15. L u k e
xxii. 15. Acts xxv. 11. Phil. i. 2 1 . ii. 13.
54. T h e Infinitive, when t h u s applied, admits a Noun in t h e Accusative case be-
fore it, as John i. 49, Tipo rov ce QÍXnnrov (puivrjcaí, Before that Philip called thee,
or before Philip's calling thee ; John ii. 24, Ata TO avTov yivúaKeiv Tccivras, Because
of his knowing all men.
5 5 . A Participle, of whatever Tense, with t h e Article, is in meaning equivalent
to t h e relative ó's and the Verb of t h e same Tense, as 'O átTiov, He who askelh ; 'O
XáXncag, He who spoke.
56. Participles govern t h e same cases as their Verbs, as 'OÚK ttrn rrévrjQ b fiijSev
eyisiv, aXX' ó TcoXXüJt' eTrSvpm', He is not poor who has nothing, but he who desires
many things.
57- T h e Verbal N o u n neuter in reov, denoting necessity, admits t h e case of its
V e r b , and moreover a Dative of t h e agent, as TpwrvTeov ipoi ewiaTÓXiiv, I must wrile
a letter, or, more literally, There is lo be wrilten by me a letter -f.

OF THE CONSTRUCTION OF ADVERES AND Í N T E R JE C T I O N S .

58. Adverbs govern cases.

59. Derivative Adverbs take after them such cases as t h e words they come from,
as 'Ai\iioQ r a yevüe, Worthily, i. e. in a manner worthy of his birth; KÍKXoOev TOV
•vpói'ov, R,ound about the throne.
60. M a n y Adverbs of quanliiy, place, lime, cause, order, conccaling, separation,
number, also Adverbs of the comparative and superlative degrees, are joined with a
Genitive, as TOLÓVTCOV aSr¡v '¿xppev, We have enough of such persons; Tíóppio r>7c
rróXetdg, Far from the city ; Xwplg ávrov, Without him. Comp. above Rule 3 4 . A .

* [ Y e t it m a y be hoped, that what is here given w i l l be sufficient for b e g i n n e r s ; and we refcr, for
farther information, to t h e sourecs from w h i c h w e llave derived the above rules, n a m e l y Mathia;'s a n d
B u t t m a n ' s Granimars. ]
•j- C o m p . L e x i c ó n under .GATÍ-SO?.
 76 A PLAIN AND EASY SECT. XXII.

6 1 . Adverbs which denote accompanying or collecting have a D a t i v e , as "Ajuct

ávrols, Together rvitli them; 6eoí¡ 6/J.OV, With the Gods, i. e. assisting.
62. Adverbs of swearing are followed by an Accusative, the Preposition irpos by
being understood, as M a Ata, By Jove ; Nr) rov ILXcWwva, By Pluto.
63. Two or more negative Adverbs in Greek deny more strongly, L u k e xxii. 18,
'Ov ¡ii) iriSi, I will by no means drink; verse 16, "OvKeri OV p¡ (¡>ayü>, I will by no
mcans any more eat; H e b . xiii. 5, 'Ov pi ae ávw, óvd' ov ¡ií\ ae eymTaXtirú, I will
by no means leave thee, ñor will I in any mise forsake thee. Comp. L u k e xxiii.
53*.
64. Interjections are joined with different cases, especially t h e Genitive, and fre-
quently with several cases together, as "Ai ¡101 rüv iíypuiv, Woe to me for myfields!
'éveica, on account of being in such expressions understood before t h e Genitive.

OF THE CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS AND PREPOSITIONS.

65. T h e Conjunctions "Eav if; ÉVaoW since; 'Iva, otppa, oirás, that, to the end
that; orav, oirorav when ; K§.V and yv for although, are joined with a Subjunctive.
66. "OTTÜJS and rrüc hom, with an Indicative.
67. "Orí that has an Indicative, and sometimes an O p t a t i v e and S u b j u n c t i v e ; so
its compounds S o n and icádort.
68. "ETTEL and ¿iréiSri after that, since, an Indicative, and more rarely an Infinitive.
69. "íle that, an Indicative, sometimes an Optative and Subjunctive, and more
r a r e l y an Infinitive.
70. "Ciare so that, an Infinitive, sometimes an Indicative.
7 1 . 'Et if, an Indicative, sometimes an Optative or Subjunctive.
72. "Av if, a Subjunctive, sometimes an Optative and Indicative.
73. F o r t h e construction of t h e PREPOSITIONS the Reader is rel'erred to t h e fol-
lowing Lexicón.

SECTION XXII.

GENERAL OBSERVATIONS FOR RENDERING GREEK INTO

ENGLISH.

1. E V E R Y f f n i t e Verb hath a Nominative case with which it agrees, either e x -

pressed or nnderstood.
2. E v e r y Adjective has a Substantive expressed or understood.
3 . E v e r y Relative has, in like manner, an A n t e c e d e n t expressed or understood.
4. E v e r y Genitive is governed by a Substantive, or by a Preposition, expressed
or understood.
5. E v e r y Dative either has in itself t h e forcé of acquisition, i. e. denotes t h e
Person or T h i n g lo or for which any t h i n g is or is done, or is governed by some
Preposition expressed or understood.
6. E v e r y Accusative is governed by a Verb transitive, or by a Preposition e x -
pressed or understood.
7. In rendering Greek into English let t h e L e a r n e r remember, in general, t h a t
t h e Nominative case (if expressed) with its Adjective, or t h e words connected with
it, is to be taken before t h e Verb, then t h e V e r b itself, and t h e Adverb (if any)

* S e e V i g e r u s , D e I d i o t i s m . C a p . V I I . Sect. x i i . R c g . 2 . and H o o g e v e c n ' s N c t e 4 3 .

•)- T h a t i s , every verb nol in the Infinitive mood.
 SECT. X X I I I . GREEK GRAMMAR. 77

which qualifies its signification; next t h e Accusative case after a Transitive Verb,
or the Nominative after a N e u t e r one, or t h e Infinitive mood; and lastly, t h e G e -
nitive or Dative case with or without a Preposition, or an Accusative with one.
Words expressive of t h e time when are usually to be taken towards t h e beginning
of t h e sentence. A Vocative case (if any) is to be thrown in where most orna-
mental ; and the Relative, with the words connected with it, to be ranged after its
Antecedent. Dependant Sentences, which are connected with the principal one by
a Conjunction, are most usually p u t before t h e principal sentence, or in t h e middle
of it, more rarely after it.
8. After all, U S E will be t h e best master in directing t h e Order in which English
words translated from t h e Greek may be most properly and elegantly placed.

SECTION XXIII.

OF DIALECTS, AND PARTICULARLY OF T H E ATTIC.

1. B Y Dialects are meant the várious manners of pronunciation or speaking

peculiar to several sorts of people who all use the same language. T h u s in
Englancl t h e Dialect of t h e N o r t h * differs from t h a t of t h e South, and t h e W e s t -
country man has a dialect distinct from both : b u t all England being subject to one
government, the Dialect of t h e Court and of the Metrópolis is t h e only one usually
committed to writing. I t was otherwise among t h e G r e e k s ; for as t h e y were
divided into a number of distinct sovereign states, t h e Authors who flourished u n d e r
those several governments wrote in t h e Dialect of t h e country wherein t h e y lived;
as the Italians did a few centuries ago.
2. T h e Greek Dialects, which are preserved in t h e writings t h a t are come
down to us, are principally t h e A t t i c , the lonic, and t h e Doric. f T o these some
add the iEolic, the Bceotic, and t h e P o e t i c : b u t as for t h e two former, there is
b u t little t h a t has escaped t h e ravages of time, except so far as t h e iEolic agrees
with t h e D o r i c ; and the Poets t h a t remain, except some few forms of expression
peculiar to their own style, wrote in one or other of the three Dialects first men-
tioned.
3. T h e inspired W r i t e r s of t h e N e w Testament generally write in common
Greek, such as it is described in the preceding G r a m m a r ; b u t of the Dialects t h e y
chierly use the A t t i c , which, being t h a t of the inhabitants of A t h e n s and its neghbour-
hood, was reckoned t h e politest of all, and is remarkable for being elegantly simple,
neat, and compact; not b u t t h a t the sacred Penmen have occasionally interspersed,
t h e other Dialects in their writings : b u t as they have done this sparingly, I shall
here take notice only of the A t t i c , and content myself with noticing t h e few other
dialectical forms in their proper places in t h e Lexicón.
4. T h e following then are

THE GENERAL PROPERTIES OF THE ATTIC DIALECT.

1. T h e ATTICS love Contractions; henee t h e contracted N o u n s and Verbs

belong principally to their Dialect.—2. B u t they are not only fond of contracting

* T h e s e differenecs are less n o w than formerly, and b y a more frequent and free communication o f
the several parts of the k i n g d o m with the capital, and w i t h each other, t h e y seem t o b e continually
diminishing. -
f See Maittaire D e D i a l e c t i s Introduct. p. i. ii. Strabo, l i b . viii. ad init.
 78 A PLAINÍ A N D EASY SECT. X X I I I .

syllablcs in the same word, but likewise blend diíferent words by Apostrophe, as
3-' avTo for TU avró, ra '¡la for r a ípa, rovr inri for TOVTO cari, u> 'yáde for <3 ayads,
nov 'O-TI, for TTUV ÍOTI, pí¡ 'crri for PI'I io-ri, or by Crasis, as tcuyoi for Kai EYW, KQPOL

for « t i IPOÍ, rovvavríov for ro ivavríov, rovvopa for ro '¿ropa.—3. T h e y change

a into í,, p, or r, as Zívsroc,. Bappelv, n'¡¡XEpov, BciXurra, for aúyerog, Baptrelv,
mipepoy, SáXatrcra. B u t in Preter-perfects passive t h e y use tr for P , as pepápacrpai
for ptpápappai.—4. In Nouns t h e y change a into E, and o into 10, as XEWC. tz
people, rétoc a temple, for Xáoc. and vcwe. See Sect. I I I . 17- In t h e Genitive of
contracted Nouns they use óijiéws, pao-iXéwg, for ó'^toc, fiao-íXeoe,; and indeed almost
t h e i r whole declension of contracted Nouns in te a n d i is peculiar. See Sect. I I I .
3 2 . 2.
5. T h e y use these syllabic adjections, ovv and ye, as BKSV not, 'úpévuv by no
means, é'ywye I, o-vye thou, adding ye t h r o u g h o u t all cases. T h e y often postfix i
to some Adverbs, as vvvi nom, a\i not, '¿rwai so, for vvv, éy_I '¿rwg; and to some
Pronouns, ÉKEtvoai, üroo-i, for EKEIVOQ, órog ; rérai, rúroví, for rara, rSroy; ra'rot and
rárt, for r a r o ; rávn for ravra. B u t we meet not with i t h u s added to Pronouns in
t h e New Testament.
6. In Vtirbs. I n the Pluperfect Indicative t h e y change EI into e, as ETETvtyetrav
for ETETvtpEicrav. So Rev. vii. 1 1 , iaryKEaav for karí]K£icrav.—In F u t u r e s of more
t h a n two syllables in iaw t h e y often reject o-, as in afopiw for cubopícco, M a t . xiii.
4 9 . xxv. 32 ; Staicadapiw for Siaicadapícw, M a t . iii. 1 2 ; écatpao for iSaojícno, L u k e
x i x . 4 4 . Comp. M a t . xii. 2 1 . L u k e i. 4 8 . — I n t h e syllabic augment of Verbs
t h e y often change E into r¡, as ijpeXXov for 'épEXXov, L u k e vii. 2 . xix. 4 . & al. So
in compounds BIYKOVÜV, M a t . iv. 11, & al. from SiaKovÉw to minisler; awíiXavov
from cnroXúvio lo enjoy. I n Perfects t h e y change Xe and ps into EI, as EÍXr¡tba
( R e v . ii. 27. iii. 3 , & al.) for XéXniba; EÍpapfxai for pépappai. In Pluperfects t h e y
cast off the prefixed E, as Mark xv. 7, •KETTOIYICEÍVAV for kitEicoiyKEíaav; J o h n xi. 5 7 ,
d£(Sú>KEio-av for icElwKEíaay ; M a r k xiv. 4 4 , SESÚKEI for EOEOWUEI ; M a r k xv. 10,
TrapaSeStoicEío-ay fqr rrapeSESioicEío-av. So L u c í a n , ©EWÍ' Kpto-¡£, § 4, edit. Leeds,
whom see, cnrotEtXi'iKEi for áw£&E&Xr¡K£i.—In t h e temporal a u g m e n t t h e y p u t e
before io, t h u s kwpwv, John vi. 2 ; Itíipara, John i. 34. & al. for Apaov, típa/ca ; and
sometimes before o, ot, and ?j, as EoX7ra for r)Xwa, from ÉX™ /o liope ; íoiKa ( J a m . i.
6, 23.), for tÍKa, from E'ÍKW ¿O be like; InicaÍQv 7¡KA I kavesentj they resolve r¡ into
ea, as in 1 Aor. Éaija for 7¡t,a, from ayw to bréale; they change EI into i;, as r¡Ka'(ov,
for EÍKa'Cov, from £iKa(w to likcn; they sometimes prefix t h e two first letters of t h e
P r e s e n t to the Perfects active and middle of Verbs beginning with a, O, E, as from
áyetpw to gatlier, Perf. act. ?;Y£pra, A t t i c ayíiyepKa; from CIK&W, Perf. mid. /¡coa,
A t t i c aKÍ/Koa, A c t s ix. 13. J o h n iv. 42, & al. from oXXvpi Perf. WXEKU, A t t i c óXw-
XEKa, so in Perf. mid. bXaXa; from kXávvw or IXáw Perf. r/Xa/ca, A t t i c íXí/Xatea;
b u t in t h e second Aorist t h e a u g m e n t is prefixed with a like reduplication, as from
cíyw to bring, 2 Aor. i\yov, A t t i c ijyayov; whence Imper. CTYAYE, Infin. áyayeTv.
T h i s A t t i c use of t h e second Aorist of ayw and its compounds is very common in
t h e N e w T e s t a m e n t . — I n Verbs of two syllables in t h e first and second class t h e y
change E in t h e penúltima of t h e Perfect active into o, as néjxirw to send, Perf.
•KÉITEPTPA, A t t i c -n-éiropcba; Ppí%W to met, Perf. pé€p£xa, A t t i c (jéflpoxa-—In
Imperatives, in t h e 3 d Pers. plur. for — E r a i c r a v a n d —arwo-aj' t h e y use ovrwv and
AVRIDV, as TvirTÓvriúv, rviLíivrwv, for rvirrÉrwaav, rvúárwo-av; in t h e passive and
middle, wv for — w a a v , as rv-réaOwv, rvipáadwv, for rvicrÉcdwo-av, TvtbáaQwaav.—
I n Optatives, t h e y often use t h e second and t h i r d Persons singular and t h e t h i r d
Person pural of t h e iEolic l s t Aorist, rvdiEía, ac, E, — a v ; t h u s L u k e vi. 1 1 .
•KOÁIVEÍAV; and in the Present after a contracted syllable t h e y change pi into r¡v, as
riptppi, <¡>c, o>. A t t i c ripánv, T¡£, r¡; (btXoipi, oc, OÍ; A t t i c (ptXoírjv, r¡£, r¡; and
c h a n g i n g ot into «, (¡>iXa>r¡v, r¡c, r¡. So in t h e t h i r d sort of Verbs in pi t h e y have
Súnv, ?)C, y, for boíyv, ns, r\, 2 Aor. O p t . of SíSwpi. See 2 Thess. iii. 16. 2 T i m .
i. 16. iv. 1 4 . — I n t h e contracted V e r b s , £áa> to Uve, úi\pciu> lo thirsl, TTEIVCUÚ lo
hunger, ypctopai lo use, t h e y contract by r¡, as 'Cys, Zjj, £r¡v, for 'Cae, '(óí, (av. See
Gall. ii. 14. M a r k xvi. 1 1 . L u k e xxiv. 2 3 , al. freq. X P ¡ í
f ° XP h
r a t r aTa
' T i m . i. 8.
F o r ¿ o n or ÉVESTI they often use ivi.
SECT. X X I V . GREEK GRAMMAR. 79

SECTION XXIV.

A GRAMMATICAL PRAXIS ON T H E F I R S T C H A P T E R OF ST.

.TOHN'S G O S P E L , T H E G R E E K W O R D S B E I N G P L A C E D I N T H E
ORDER OF THE ENGLISH.

1. I N tlie beginning was the Word, and t h e W o r d was with God, and t h e
'EN ápxfi 7¡v ú Aóyog, Kat t> Aóyog i\v npbg TOV QEOV, mi ó
W o r d was God.
Aóyoe i\v Otog.

'Ev a Preposition governing a Dative case. See Lexicón. 'Apxjii, a N . fem. sing. of
t h e first declension, like TÍ/J-T], D a t . case, governed by the P r e p . iv. 'Uv, a V . n e u t e r
or substantive, Indic. Imperf. 3d Pers. sing. from t h e irregular V . el¡xi, by * § X I .
2, agreeing with t h e Nominative case Xóyog, of t h e third Person, by § X X I . 3 , 4 ,
5. 'O t h e Article mase. sing. Nom. case, agreeing with Xóyog. Aóyog, a verbal
N . mase. sing. from XéXoya, Perf. mid. of Xéyto to speak (see § V I . 8.), of the second
declension, N o m . case to the V. T)V. Kai, a Conjunctiou. üpog, a Prep. governing
an Accusative case. See Lexic. T¿>, t h e Article m a s e sing. Accusative case,
agreeing with QEOV. QEOV, a N . mase. sing. of t h e second declension, like Xóyog,
Accusative case, governed by t h e Prep. 7rpág. 0£og, a N . mase. sing. Nom. case,
governed by t h e V . r)v, by § X X I . 3 2 . ( a ) -

2. T h e same was in t h e beginning with God.

'Ovrog i]v iv ápxv ir pos TOV QEOV.

*Ovrog, a demonstrative Pronoun (see § I X . 5.), Nom. case to the V . i¡v.

3 . All tlúngs were made by h i m , and without him not even one thing was made,
Tíávrcí iyívEro ¿Y dvré, Ktú \toplg dvra ÓV¡¡E EV eyévETO,
which was made.
ó yéyovEv.

TlávTa, a N . A d j . neut. plur. Nom. case, agreeing with xpvpara things understood,
b y § X X I . 10, [ N . B . ] from Nom. mase. sing. wag an Adj. of three terminations
by § V I L 8. 'EyéVfTo a V . mid. Indic. 2 Aor. from the obsnlete yeiVw (see
Anomalous Verbs uuder yívop,at, § X V I . 9-), 3d Pers. sing. though joined w i t h t h e
Nominative neut. j)lur. xpr¡fiara understood, by § X X I . 6!" At', p u t by Apostrophe,
§ I. 17- for ha, a Prep. governing a Gen. See Lexic. 'Avra, a Pronoun relative, §
I X . 8. Gen. case, governed by Prep. § t a . Xwpig, an Adv. governing t h e Gen. a V S ,
§ X X I . 35. B ( d ) (3.) 'OVSE, not even. See Lexic. "Ev, a numeral N . neut. sing. from
mase. EÍ'g, by § V I I . 17. agreeing with N . n e u t . sing. xpijfia understood (by § X X I .
16.) Nom. caseto t h e V. kyÉvEro. "O, a Pronoun relative, neut. sing. agreeing with
XPfifLa. understood, and Nom. case to the V . yéyovEv, by § X X I . 19. TéyovEv, a V.
mid. Indic. Perf. 3d Pers. sing. from t h e obsolete V . yúvu>, agreeing w i t h the P r o -
noun relative o of the 3d Person (see Anomalous Verbs under yívofiat); for yéyove,
t h e final v being added by § I. 18.

4. In him was life, and t h e life was t h e light of men.

'T¡v UVTÍÚ I)V £tor), Kai i) £ioi) i¡v TO tpüig rwv dvdptoTtov.

* T h i s marlt § denotes Ssction of the Grammar.

 80 A PLAIN AND EASY SECT. X X I V .

"Avrá, A Pron. reí. D a t . case, governed by t h e P r e p . év. Zu>i), a N , fem. of the

first declension, like rí/in, Nom. case to V . íjv. Tó, t h e Article neut. Nom. case,
agreeing with <piós. <S?ü>s, a N . sing. of the third declension, like aupa governed
by the V. i\v; Sing. nom. ro fus, Gen. T5 <pui-bs, &c. TóJv, t h e Article mase,
plur. Gen. case, agreeing with t h e N . ávdpwwwv. 'Avdoúirwv, a N . mase. plur.
Gen. case, of the second declension, like Xóyos, governed by t h e N . éws, by 6
X X I . 34.

5 . A n d t h e light shineth in the darkness, and the darkness did not receive it.
Kal TO <pu>s faívEí iv rrj aKoríq, Kal Í; aKoría ov KaréXáSev dvrb.

fyaíva, a V. act. Indicative Present, 3d P e r s . sing. from t h e theme faívto, like

rÍ7r-w, agreeing with (país; faívi¡>, tpaíveis, faívEí, &c. Sraría a N . fem. sing. of t h e
first declension, like <piXía, D a t . case, by § I I I . 8, governed by P r e p . iv. 'Ov, an
A d v e r b . KaréXatev, a V. act. Indicat, 2 Aor. from t h e obs. V . KaraXi'/6w, (see
Aa¡i£ávh> among t h e Anomalous Verbs, § X V I . 9.), 3d P e r s . sing. (v being added
hy § I. 18.) agreeing with rjKoría. As to the a u g m e n t in KaréXatsv, see § X . 3 2 .
'Avrb, a P r o n . relative, n e u t . sing. Accus. case, governed by t h e transitive V. Karé-
Xativ, by § X X I . 44.

6. T h e r e was a man sent from God, J o h n t h e ñame to him.

¡2yEVEro avQpoiros dtrEaraXpévos itapa OES, 'Iwcivvr¡s ovopa dvroi.

*AvdpwTros, a N . mase. sing. of the t h i r d declension, like Xóyos, Nom. case, governed
by t h e V. iyévero, here used impersonally by § X V I I . 5. 'Aireo-raX/jévos ; see §
X I I . 17. Tíapa, a P r e p . governing a Gen. 'Iwáwr¡s, a N . mase. sing. of the first
declension, like 'Ay^ío-ns, (by § I I I . 5, 7.), Nom. case to V. i¡v understood.
See § X X I . 3 2 . (o). "Ovofxa, a N . n e u t . sing. of t h e t h i r d declension, like crwfia,
Nom. case, governed by V . i¡v u n d e r s t o o d ; Sing. N . ró ovo/xa, Gen. rS ovÓLiaros, &c.
'Avrf to him; see § X X I . [ 4 2 . (/;).]

7. T h e same carne for witness, t h a t he m i g h t witness concerning t h e light, t h a t

'Ovrog i'iXdev sisfj.aprvpíav,'tva fiaprvpycrrj Trepl ra furos, "va
all m i g h t believ.e t h r o u g h him.
Trávres marevcrojaL ¿Y «urS.

^HXOEV, a V . act. Indic. 2 Aor. 3d P e r s . sing. (v being added by § I . 18.) of the ob-
sol. V . iXévdw, by Syucope for rfXvQtv; see u n d e r Anomalous V. ípxofiai, § X V I . 9.
'EÍ£ a P r e p . governing an Accus. see Lexic. Maprvpíav, a N . fem. sing. of t h e first
declension, like fiXia, Accus. case, governed by P r e p . its. Maprvprio-rj, a V. act. S u b -
j u n c t . 1 Aor. 3d Pers. sing. from the contracted V . fiaprvpéii), agreeing with auroe
he understood by § X X I . 1 1 . Comp. § X X I I . 1. and governed of Conjunct. 'Iva by
§ X X I . 64. fJ.aprvpé<i>, (1 F u t . ) /j,aprvpí]sw, (1 Aor.) i¡j.aprvpr)o-a (1 Aor. Subj.
fiaprvpyati), r¡s, y- ÜEpí, a P r e p . governing a G e n i t i v e ; see Lexic. a N. Jlávres,
Adj. mase. plur. Nom. case, agreeing with avdpuiroi men, understood. Hicrrevo-wcn,
a V . act. Subj. 1 Aor. 3d P e r s . plur., agreeing with avQpwicoi understood, and go-
verned of Conjunct. iva.

8. H e was not t h a t light, b u t mas sent t h a t he m i g h t witness concerning t h a t

'EKE'IVOS i)V ¿K ro <p<jós, dXX' 'Iva [iaprvpr¡o-ri irEpl rov
light.
furos-

'Eiftivoe, a demonstrative Pronoun by § I X . 5, 7- To, the Article N e u t . sing. Nom.

case, used definitely or emphatically; see Lexic. u n d e r ' O I. I I . 'AXX', by Apos-
trophe for a'XXct by § I. 1 7.
 GREEK GRAMMAR, 81
SECT. X X I V .

9. That was t h e t r u e light, which enlighteneth every man coming into

YLv rb üXndivbv TÚ (¡tus, o
r
(¡>uiT¿£ei rrávTa ávdpaiirov kp^ÓLievov £ic
the world.
TOV KOLTllOV.

T
Hi/ a V . Indic. Imperf. 3d P e r s . sing. from tipí, agreeing with EKEÍVO understood.
'AXndivbv, a N . Adj. of three terminations, like KaXbe, § V I L 4 . n e u t . sing. Nom.
case, agreeing with <¡>ÜIQ; sing. Nom. ttXridivbs, i), bv, &c. "O, a Pron, relative n e u t .
sing. agreeing with (pñc, and Nom. case t o V. <JHOTÍ£EL by § X X I . 19.^ <bu>Tt¡¡ei a V.
act. Indic. P r e s . 3d Pers. sing. from t h e t h e m e c/>a>rí¿>, agreeing with P r o n . r e -
lative 3. Tlávra, a N . A d j . of three terminations, mase sing. Accus. case from N o m .
irae, agreeing with ávdpwTrov by § X X I . 12, 13. "AvOpwirov, a N . mase. sing. Accus.
case from N o m . a V 0 p w 7 r o s , of t h e second Declension, like Xóyog, governed by t h e
transitive V. yiúrí'Cei by § X X I . 4 4 . 'Epx¿/x£vov is a Participle pres. from t h e d e -
ponent Anomalous V. ípypjJiai, and m a y be either t h e mase. sing. Accus. case,
agreeing with ávdpiorrov, or * r a t h e r t h e n e u t . sing. Nom. case, agreeing with (pwg;
comp. J o h n xii. 46. iii. 19. K ó o y w , a N . mase. sing. of the second Declension, like
Xóyoe, Accus. case, governed by the P r e p . hr.

10. H e was in t h e world, and the world was made by him, and t h e world
r
Hv kv T<¡) KÓaixtú, icol o KÓcrfioe kyévEro <)i C I V T S , nal ó KOUIXOQ
did not know him.
OVK 'éyvto O-VTOV.

"Eyj'w, a V. act. I n d i c . 2 Aor. from t h e obsol. V. yvüp.i, of t h e t h i r d kind of V e r b s

in ¡IL, like SíHuifit (see c_ X I V . 13. and § X V I . and yiriV/cw among the Anomalous
Verbs, § X V I . 9.) 3 d P e r s . sing. agreeing with KÓO-ÍIOQ.

11. H e carne u n t o his own, and his own did not receive him.
'HX0£ ki£ ra 'íBta, (caí ót íBwt óv irapkXc&ov ávTOV.

"iSia, a N . adj. of t h r e e terminations, like aywg, § V I I . 5. neut. p l u r . Accusative

case, agreeing with OIKÍI fiara drvellings u n d e r s t o o d ; sing. Nom. "IoVoe, a, ov, &c.
see Lexicón, u n d e r "iSioe, I. "iStoi, a N . A d j . mase. plur. Nom'. case, agreeing with
¿ivOptúwoi understood. HapéXaÉov, a V. act. Indic. 2 A o r . from obsol. V. •¡rapaXi)'Su>
(see Aaptávio among t h e Anomalous Verbs, § X V I . ) , 3 d P e r s . plur. agreeing
with ávOpomoi understood.

12. B u t as m a n y as received h i m , h e gave power to t h e m to become t h e

AE óooi ¿Xa€ov avrbv, '¿Sioicev k¡,¿criav ávro"lg ykvscrdaí
children of God, even to them t h a t believe on his ñame.
TÉKva 0£ov, roí£ •KiartVHaiv kt£ avTÜ rb ovofia,

Ac, a Conjunction. "Ocrot, an A d j . mase. plur. Nom. case, agreeing with avQpw-Koi
understood. "HXatov, a V. act. Indic. 2 Aor. from t h e obsol. Xr/Éw, 3d P e r s . plur.
agreeing with livdpwiroi understood. "ECWKEJ', a V. act. Indic. 1 Aor. by § X . 4 5 .
from t h e V. in ¡xi SíSiofii, 3d P e r s . sing. agreeing with avrbe he understood. 'EÍ;B-
triav, a N . fem. sing. of t h e first declension, like <¡>tXía, A c c u s . case, governed by t h e
V . 'éSu>Ke.v by § X X I . 4 8 . 'Airóle, a P r o n . reí. mase. plur. D a t . case, governed by
ÍSWKEV by § X X I . 4 8 . Ykveo-daí, a V . mid. Infin. 2 Aor. from t h e obsol. V. ydvio
(see u n d e r Tívofiai, § X V I . ) , governed by k&cnav; see § X X I . 50. Tktcva, a N .
n e u t . p l u r . from singular TEKVOV, of t h e second declension, like &Xov, § I I I . I 6. Non),
case following t h e V e r b yéveadaí by § X X I . 3 2 . a. Tole iriarívaaiv, To those who
believe; see § X X I . 5 4 . TiíaTtvnaiv, a Participle active P r e s . mase. plur. from t h e
theme TTÍGTÍVIÚ, Dative case (by § I I I . 2 8 , 3.) agreeing with ávdpwiroig understood,
which is governed b y 'ÉSIOKSV. "Ovo/xa, a N . n e u t . sing. of t h e t h i r d declension, like
* 1ílfx¡iium referred to á c v f l r w T o v , I think the Greek would have been TO> ¡,x°rt
J-tVCV.
52 A PLAIN AND E A S Y SECT. X X I V

o-wjua, Accus. case, governed by P r e p . étg. 'AVT5 his, or of him, a Pron. reí. mase,
sing. G e n . case, governed by ovo/xa; see § X X I . 34.

13. W h o were born not of bloods, ñor of t h e will of t h e flesh, ñor o f t h e will
'Oí eyevvr¡Qqtyav OVK i£ tiiitártov, ¿Se EK BtXí]¡j.arog trapKog, ¿Sé tK BeXr¡parog
of man, b u t of God.
avSpóg, áXX' tK Qeov.

'Oí, a Pron. reí. mase. plur. agreeing with avQpwirot understood, Nom. case to the V.
éyevvr¡dr¡crav by § X X I . 19. 'Eyevvn%r\aav, a V. pass. Indic. 1 Aor. 3d P e r s . p l u r .
agreeing with t h e relative ¿i, from t h e theme yevvím; yevváto, (1 F u t . ) ytvvíjo-ti),
( P e r f . ) yeyévvrjKa, (Perf. pass.) ytyévvqiLai, —crat, —raí, (1 Aor. pass.) éytvvridrjv,
—7¡s, —r¡, &c. 'Es or tí, a Pj ep. governing a Gen. see Lexic. ' Atiiítrtov, a N . n e u t .
-

plur. from Nom. sing. tiitia, of the third declension, like o-tó/ia, Gen. case, governed
b y P r e p . !£. OeXíjiiarog, a N . neut. sing. of t h e t h i r d declension, like o-w/xa, G e n .
case, governed by Prep. lie, from Nom. Be\r¡fj.a. Sctp/coc, a N . fem. sing. from N o m .
capé,, of the third declension, like SéXtpiv, Gen. case, governed by t h e N . B'eXr¡¡iaTog
by § X X I . 34. Sing. Nom. r¡ m'tp!;, Gen. rí/s crápKog, &c. 'AvSpbg, a N . mase. sing.
Gen. case from Nom. avr¡p (by § I I I . 2 5 . ) , of the t h i r d declension, like Sé\tj>iv, g o -
verned by t h e N . BtXriiictTog.

14. And t h e W o r d was made flesh and tabernaeled among u s ( a n d we beheld

Kai ó Aóyog eyévero trápí, Kai to-Ki'ivtoatv ev iifiív (jcal édeatrafieda
his glory, t h e glory as of the only-begotten of the F a t h e r ) full of grace and
a u r a rrjv vóí,av. Sotar toe /.tovoyevove Trapa ücirpóg TrXí]pr¡g x^pirog ' K a

of t r u t h .
üXridéiag.

ErrKÍivtoatv, a V . act. Indic. of the third kind of contracted Verbs, in ow namely,

l Aor. (by § X I I I . 6. compared with § X . 43.) 3d Pers. sing. agreeing with Aóyog
understood. 'II¡üv, a Pron. of the l s t Pers. plur. from sing. kyut, D a t . case by § I X .
3. governed by P r e p . iv. 'TLdeao-íi¡xtQa, a V . deponent, 1 Aor. 1 Pers. plur. from
t h e theme Seaóiiai, w¡xai, agreeing with y/ielg, t h e P r o n . plural o f t h e l s t Person
understood, by § X X I . 10. Beíwfiai, (1 F u t . ) Btítaoiiai, (1 Aor.) ¿6tatráp.r¡v, to, aro,
&c. A<5£aj', a N . fem. sing. Accusative case from Nom. Sót!,a, of t h e first declension,
like fiHo-a, governed of the transitivo V e r b tOtao-ctfieOa. "íig, an Adverb. Movo-
yevSg, a N . A d j . contracted of two terminations, like áXr¡Qfig, § V I L ! 0 , 14, agree-
i n g with the Gen. bia son understood, governed of the N . Sói,av. Há-pos, a N .
mase. sing. Gen. case by § I I I . 2 5 . from Nom. wtvnip, of the third declension, like
Sé\(j>t.v, governed by the P r e p . ir apa. TlXíjpr¡g, a N . A d j . contracted of two t e r m i n a -
tions, like a\r¡Qi)e, mase. sing. Nom. case, agreeing with Xóyog. Xáptrog, a N . fem.
sing. Gen. case from the Nom. x'tpie, of t h e third declension, like SéXtpiv, governed
by t h e A d j . 7rA//p?yg by § X X I . [34. A. c ] I V . 4. 'AXriQtiag, a N. fem. sing. G e n .
case from t h e Nom. aXndtta, of t h e first declension, like qjiXía, governed by t h e Adj.
•jrXíiprjg understood.

15. J o h n witnesseth concerning him, and cried, saying, T h i s was he of whom

'Iwávvrig fiaprvpeí Trepl aura, ra¡ ¡ceKpaye, Xéyiov, 'Ovrog i)v ov
I s p a k e ; H e t h a t cometh after me is become before me, for he was before me.
iiirov' 'O ipxpfíevog óiríato fin yíyovev tfAwpotrdtv fxn, orí r)v irptoTtig fin.

Maprupei, a V . act. Indic. P r e s . 3d Pers. sing. agreeing with t h e N o m . case 'Iwávv-qg,

contracted like tpiXéto; fiap-vptw, ¡o: éeig, elg; ¿ti, el. KtKpaye, a V . mid. Perf. 3d
P e r s . sing. agreeing with 'lojáwrjg, from the theme Kpíi£to, of t h e t h i r d class of cha-
racteristics by § X . 17. forming tlie l s t F u t . in £<o, and the 2d Aorist in yqv,
aceording to § X. 3 9 , 5 3 , ' epofr», (i F u t . ) puito, (2 Aor.) tKpayov, (Perf. M i d . )
K

K'vprtyu, cíe, .-. Aiytor, a Participa act. Pre«. mase. sing. Nom. case, from the theme
 SECT. X X I V . GREEK GRAMMAR. S3

Xéyto, agreeing with 'lioávvrie ; see § X . 12. "Ov, a Pron. reí. mase. sing. agreeing
with t h e antecedent avrbc or ávOpwtroe understood, Accus. case, governed b y t h e V .
enrov by § X X I . 20. "'Hnrov, a V : act. Indic. 2 A o r . I s t Pers. sing. from t h e theme
'¿•¡rio, with t h e irregular a u g m e n t t after e by § X . 2 9 . MS, a primitivo Pron. of t h e
I s t Pers. G e n . case (by § I X . 3.), governed by t h e Adv. of order oVío-w according
to § X X I . 5 9 . So fio by '¿Liwpoo-Bev. "On, t h e neut. of compound relative Sane by
§ I X . 13. used as a Con'junction ; see Lexicón. I7pwro£, properly an irregular s u -
perlative from t h e Preposition icpb by § V I I I . 10, (i, for •¡rpóraroe, b u t here used in
a comparative sense, and governing t h e Genitivo ¡J.S accordingly; see § X X I . 3 5 .
13. ( e ) . V I I I . 1.

16. A n d from his fulness all we have received, a n d grace upon gracc.
Kal éte ávrS ra 7rA?)p(<>/¿aro£ ircivree ripíele éXíi&ojxev, nal \apiv avri yapiroe-

nXripáfiarog, a N . neut. sing. of t h e third declension, like aü/xa, G e n . case, governed

by t h e P r e p . IK. 'liXa€o/j.ev, a V . act. Indic. 2 Aor. 1 s t Person plural from obsolete
\i'l€iú, agreeing with ri/xeíe- Xápiv, a N . fem. sing. Accus. case ( b y § I I I . 26.) from
t h e N o m . x P £> °^
C< L
t h i r d declension, like céXtjnv, governed by t h e transitive V .
t n e

éXá€o¡xev understood.

17. F o r t h e law was given by Moses, gracc and truth was by Jesús
"On ó vóuoe ¿M0r¡ Oía MÍIIJÍMS, ¡i x "->'
(,n
'í üXijOtia iyivi.ro fia 'IIJÍTB
Christ.
Xpiore.

Nó^os, a verbal N . mase. sing. from vhoLia, Perf. mid. of véuto lo distribulc (see
§ V i . 8.) Nom. case to V. ¿oódn. 'JLcóBrí, a V. pass. 1 Aor. 3(1 P e r s . sing. agreeing
with vóixoe, from t h e V . in ¡xi Síoto/xi; oíSioiu, (1 F u t . ) Sáo-ta, (Perf.) c¿ctoi;a, (Perf.
pass.) 8¿S*—oixai,—crai,—raí, (1 Aor.) i8ódr¡v, •—r¡Q,—r¡- Muicréuic, an heteroclite
N . mase. sing. Gen. case, see § V . 6, governed by P r e p . Sia; 'IJJO-S, an heteroclite
N . mase. sing. G e n . case, see § V . 3 , 4, governed by t h e P r e p . Sia; Xpiora a ver-
bal N . mase. sing. from KÉ^picrai, 3d Pers. Perf. pass. of xp'o> 1° anoiní (see § V I .
8.), Gen. case, p u t in apposition with 'hioa by § X X I . 2 9 .

18. N o one ever hath seen God, t h e only-begotten Son, w h o is in t h e bosom

'OvSúe TránorE etopatce QEUV, Ó ¡xovoy£vr)e 'Vioc, o wv iig rov tcóX^ov
of t h e F a t h e r , he h a t h declared him.
rov Ilarpoe, éneivoe élnyíiaaro.

'OvSeíe, a N . A d j . of t h r e e terminations, like éig, § V I L 17. mase. sing. Nom. case,

agreeing with avOptowoe understood. 'EúpaKE, a V . act. Indic. Perf. from t h e theme
¿pao), of t h e first kind of contracted Verbs in ato, 3 d Pers. sing. agreeing with ¿ív-
Bptoiroe understood, ¿pato, ( 1 F u t . ) ópíatú, (Perf.) A t t i c '¿apatía,—as,—£. Comp.
§ X X I I I . 6. 'Ytoc, a N . mase. sing. of t h e second declension, like Xóyoc, N o m .
c a s e t o V . efyyíio-aro. 'O &v, Who is, see § X X I . 5 5 . "ílv, a P a r t i c i p . P r e s . from
t h e irregular V. éiiií by § X I . 2. mase. sing. N o m . case, agreeing with móg. KÓXTTOV,
a N . mase. sing. of t h e second declension, like Xóyoc, Accus. case, governed by P r e p .
éie. 'Eicelvoe, a demonstrative P r o n . (by § I X . 7.) mase. sing. N o m . case, p u t in
opposition to vibe. 'E¿¡r/y rio-aro, a V . deponent, 1 Aor. 3d P e r s . agreeing with vwg,
from t h e t h e m e ehriyéoiiai, S/xai, compounded of e'i, a n d r)y¿oiiai, (see Lexicón) ilft-
yéoiiai, (1 F u t . ) E^nyf]o-ofj.ai, (1 Aor.) éi¡nyr)cr-áLiriv, — t o , —aro.

19. A n d this is t h e witness of John, when t h e J e w s sent Piiests

Kai avrri écrrlv f¡ ¡xaprvpía r« 'Itoávvti, OTE ¿I 'luSaioi ciTréo-reiXav 'lépele
and Levites from Jerusalem, t h a t they m i g h t ask him, W h o a r t thou ?
«ti Aevirae éi, 'ItpoQoXvj.iav.ha ipton'iotooiv ávrbv, Tig ei crv;

* ¿ t e Sect. X I V . 11.
84 A PLAIN A N D EASY SECT. X X I V .

' Avrn, a demonstrative Pron. fem. sing. from mase, ovroe b y § I X . 5 , agreeing with
ixaprvpía understood. "Ore when, a Conjunction. Tudaioi, a N . mase. plur. of t h e
second declension, like Xóyog, Nom. case to V . awéarEiXav. 'ATréaruXav, a com-
pound V . act. Indic. 1 Aor. 3d P e r s . plur. agreeing with 'luMioi, from t h e t h e m e
awoaríWb); aTroaréXXu), (1 F u t . ) ImoarcKS), (1 Aor.) &7récrT£Í\a, — a g , — E , &C.
'Uptie, a N . mase. plur. of t h e t h i r d declension, contracted like paaiXeíg (see § I I I .
32, 3 . ) , Accus. case, governed by t h e transitivo V . arckareiXav. Aevírag, a N . mase,
plur. from t h e Nom. sing. Aevírrjg, of the first declension, like 'Ay^í-ang ( § see

7, 10.), Accus. case, governed by á^Écr-etXaj/. 'lepocoXvixiov, a N e u t . plur. Genitive

case, governed by t h e P r e p . E£ from Nom. 'lepocróXvixa, ra. "Iva, a Conjunction g o -
v e r n i n g a Subjunctire mood by § X X I . 65. 'TZpwrriaioaiv, a V . act. Subjunct. 1 Aor.
3 d Pers. plur. agreeing with ávrol they understood, from t h e contract. V . Épwraw;
¿PUITÁÍO, (1 F u t . ) ipuiríiaw, (1 Aor.) r)p¿)rr]aa, (Subj.) ipwTTicr-w, —r¡g, —r¡, &c. Tic,
a P r o n . interrogative, mase. sing. (by § I X . 10, 12.) Nom. case, governed by t h e
V . ei by § X X I . 3 2 . ( a ) . E i , a V . n e u t . P r e s . 2d P e r s . sing. from t h e irregular V .
T

in ¡xi 'Eifxí by § X I . 2. agreeing with P r o n . of 2d P e r s . av.

20. A n d h e confessed, a n d did n o t deny, b u t confessed, t h a t I am n o t t h e

Kai i)jXÓXúynae, Kal OVK ijpvijaaro, Kal ¿)fioXóyr¡cr£, on ¿yio éifii OVK O
Christ.
XpíOTÓc

'Q:fxoXóyi]a£, a V . act. Indic. 1 A o r . 3d P e r s . sing. agreeing with avrbg he u n d e r -

stood, from t h e theme óiioXoyEw (compounded of bixS a n d Xóyog, see Lexicón), a
contracted V . like fiXéto ; ó/xoXoyéio, (1 F u t . ) b¡xoXoyr\ao>, (1 Aor.) ¿>txo\óyr¡aa,
— a c , — E ; see § X . 34. 'Hpj^o-aro, a V . deponent, 1 A o r . 3d P e r s . sing. agreeing
with avrbg he u n d e r s t o o d ; ápvÉofiai, üixai, (1 F u t . ) a.pví¡ao¡xai, (1 Aor.) r¡pvna-áfir¡v,
—to, —aro. ' O , t h e Article mase. sing. N o m . case, used emphatically; see
Lexicón, u n d e r 'O I I .

2 1 . A n d they asked him, W h a t t h e n ? A r t t h o u E l i a s ? a n d he saith, I am n o t .

Kat i)p(úTr\aav avrbv, Tí bvv; 'Et ai) 'HXt'ae; caí Xiyu, 'Etjut OVK.

A r t thou t h a t P r o p h e t ? a n d h e answered, N o .
T
Ei ai] o Jlpo(j)íiTrie; Kal ATC£KpíQr¡, "Ov.

Tí HV ; What then ? a r t thou, n a m e l y ; so TÍ is a P r o n . interrogative, n e u t . sing.

(by § I X . 10, 12.) N o m . case, governed by t h e V . It understood. 0w, a Con- r

junction. 'HXt'ae, a N . mase. sing. of t h e first declension, like 'AtvEt'ae, Nom. case,
governed b y t h e V. It. AÉyEt, a V. act. Indic. Pres. 3d P e r s . sing. agreeing with
avrbg he understood, from t h e t h e m e Xéyoj, like rínrrio, P r e s . Xéyta, —£te, — « •
ílpocpriT-qe, a N . mase. sing. of t h e first declension, like 'Ayjnar)g, N o m . case, g o -
verned by t h e V. ki. 'Arr£Kpí8r¡, a V. pass. 1 Aor. sing. 3 d Person, agreeing w i t h
tlvroe he understood, from t h e t h e m e dvoKpívio, see Lexicón cnroKpívto, (1 F u t . )
arroKpívio, (Perf.) airoKÍKpiKa, (Perf. pass.) aTroKkKpi/xai, —<rai, —raí, (1 Aor. pass.)
a.7T£Kpídnv, —r¡g, —r¡.

22. T h e y said therefore to h i m , W h o a r t t h o u ? t h a t we m a y give a n answer

'EiTrov bvv avrtS, TÍQ ÉI; iva Sw/xev cnrÓKpiaiv
to t h e m who sent u s : W h a t sayest t h o u concerning thyself?
rote •xép.ibaaiv rj/xag' Tí Xky£tq wepl aEavrü;

'AVTS, a Pron. reí. mase. sing. D a t . case, governed of t h e V . ÍVKOV, put acqnisitively
by § X X I . 3 8 . a n d Note. AWIXEV, a V. act. S u b j . 2 Aor. 1 P e r s . plur. from t h e V .
in [ii üt'owjut, governed b y t h e Conjunction '¿va, a n d agreeing with t h e P r o n . of t h e
l s t Pers. plur. r¡¡x£~ig understood b y § X X I . 10, SíSmixi, (2 Aor.) É'CW, (2 Aor. Subj.)
<5t5, ¡¡ág, ¡j¿¡, &c. 'Arróicpiaiv, a N , fem. sing. of t h e t h i r d declension, contracted like
etptg, Accus. case, (by § I I I . 26.), governed by t h e V . ¿)wix£v b y § X X I . 4 4 . Tote
wéfiípaatv, To those who have sent; Hépibaaiv, a P a r t i c i p . act. 1 A o r . mase. p l u r .
SECT. X X I V . GREEK GRAMMAR. 85

D a t . case (by § I I I . 2 8 , 1. and § V I I . 8.), governed by t h e V. bwiiev by § X X I . 3 8 .

from t h e t h e m e •KÍimia, of t h e first class of chai-acteristics by § X . 17- iriínrio,
(1 F u t . ) TrÉfj.\bw, (1 Aor.) '¿TT£Li\pa, (Particip.) TvÉLiibac, — a c r a , —av, &c. see § V I I .
8 . ; v is added a t t h e end by § 1 . 1 8 . 'H/¿ae, a primitive P r o n . of t h e l s t P e r s . p l u r .
Accus. case from t h e sing. ¿yi) (by § I X . 3.), governed by t h e Particip. act. TTE>-
ibaaiv by § X X I . 5 . Tí, a P r o n . interrog. n e u t . sing. Accus. case, governed by t h e
transitive V. Xéyeic. Zeavrü, a compound P r o n . Gen. case (by § I X . 9.), governed
by P r e p . -¡rept.

23. H e said, I am t h e voice of one crying in t h e wilderness, m a k e s t r a i g h t t h e

"E0?/, 'Ey¿> tpúvr) ¡3owvroe ¿v rr¡ iprifia, ivOíivare TT\V
way of t h e Lord, as t h e P r o p h e t Esaias said.
bZbv Kvpí'ov, Ká6co£ Tlpoibrirrje 'Utratac, iiirev.

"il<¡>ri, a V. 2 Aor. 3d P e r s . sing. agreeing with ávrbe he understood, from t h e i r r e -

g u l a r V. in fii tbrifií; see § X V . 4, 8. $wvr¡, a N . fem. sing. of t h e first declension,
like Ti/ir), N o m . case governed b y t h e V. iiiií understood. "BOWVTOQ, a P a r t i c i p . act.
Pres. from the contracted V . ¡loáio like Ttfiáw (see § X I I I . 5.), Gen. case, agreeing
with TÍVOQ of one or avQpúiru understood, which is governed of t h e N . <ptovf¡ b y
§ X X I . 3 4 . "Epjjjuos is properly an Adjective of two terminations, like '¿virolos,
§ V I L 1 1 . D a t . case, agreeing with x¿ipa a country understood, a N . fem. of t h e
first declension, Dative case governed by t h e P r e p . iv. 'EvdvvarE, a V . Imperative
1 Aor. 2 P e r s . plur. agreeing with vfxeic ye understood, from t h e t h e m e ivdvvio, a
V . of the fourth class of characteristics; ivdvvoi, ( l F u t . ) evOvvü, (1 Aor.) 'ivdvva,
(1 Aor. Iniperat.) 'ivOvvov, —arto, &c. see § X . 26, 4 0 , 4 4 . 'OSbv, a N . fem. sing.
of t h e second declension, like Xóyog, Accus. case, governed b y t h e transitive V e r b
ivdíivars. lívpíu, a N . mase. sing. of t h e second declension, like Xóyos, Gen. case,
governed by t h e N . bbóv. Kadúg, an A d v . see Lexicón. '"Raaíag, a N . mase. s i n g .
of t h e first declension, like 'Aiveíae, Nomin. case, p u t in apposition with lípocpriryc:
by § X X I . 2 9 .

24. A n d t h e y who were sent were of t h e Pharisees.

Kcu ó¿ aireo-TaXiiívoi -jjirav iic TSIV Qapwaítav.

'ATreo-TaXixévoL, P a r t i c i p . plur. of aw£.o~raXLiévoQ, for which see § X I I . 17, a g r e e i n g

with ávdpwTroi men understood, Nom. case to V . f¡<rav. JLo-av, a V . Indic. Imperf. T

3 d Pers. plur. agreeing with avdpunroL understood, from t h e irregular V e r b itiií by

§ X I . 2. á>aptera¿W, a N . mase. p l u r . of t h e second declension, like Xóyoc, G e n .
case, governed by t h e P r e p . ÍK.

2 5 . A n d t h e y asked him, and said to him, W h y t h e n baptizest thou, if t h o u á r t

Kai -r/púryo-av ávrbv, Kai ECKOV avTtS, Tí bvv ¡¡airrí^Eie, ii críi EI

not t h e Christ, ñor Elias, ñor t h a t P r o p h e t ?

ÓVK ó Xpiorrig) HTE 'ÜXías, are ó IlpocpriTrjc;

Tí why, used adverbially, b u t i t is properly t h e n e u t e r singular of t h e interrogative

P r o n . TÍQ, Accus. case, governed of t h e Prep. ha understood, q. d. lia TÍ ; for what ?
Bcrart'fEÍC, a V. act. Indic. 3d P e r s . sing. from t h e t h e m e ¡iaTrrí'(i>>, agreeing with
ov understood. "OVTE, a Conjunction ; see Lexicón.

26. J o h n answered t h e m , saying : I baptize with water, b u t t h e r e s t a n d e t h

'O Tiúávvns aitEKplOr) CLVTO'IQ Xiycov 'Ey¿> ¡3a-irrí(io iv vían, Sé 'í<Trr¡KEV

one among you whom ye d o not know.

fiio-oc VLÍÜV 8v i/fiEls OVK biSare.

'Avrolc, a P r o n . reí. mase. plur. D a t . case, governed by t h e V . anEKplQrt by § X X I .

[ 3 8 . A . ] "Yban, an heteroclite N . n e u t . sing. D a t . case, governed by t h e P r e p . iv,
from t h e N . íbwp, G e n . — aroc, rb, by § V . 5. "Ecrrr¡KEv, a V . act. Indic. Perf. 3 d
 A PLAIN A N D EASY SECT: XXIV

Pers. sing. (with v added) from t h e V . in pi 'iarr\pi (by ¡} X I V . 3 . a n d N o t e ) ,

agreeing with r í e understood. Mt'o-oe the midst (see L e x i c ) , a N . A d j . mase. sing.
of three terminations, like KCIXÓC, § V I L 4. Nom. case, agreeing with TÍQ understood.
'Ypüv, a Pron of t h e 2d Pers. plur. (by § I X . 3.) Gen. case, governed by perros by
§ X X L [ 3 o . B . (d) * ] . "OíSare, a V . mid. Indic. P e r f . . 2 Pers. plur. agreeing
with vfxüe, from t h e anomalous V. eiSw, which see in § X V I .
27. T h i s is he who cometh after m e , who is become before me, whose
'AVTÓS eariv b epxppevos óirícrio pa, os yéyovev epirpocrdév pa, óv [ a u r a ]
shoe's latchet I am not worthy t h a t I sh'ould loóse,
r e ímroSr)fiaros TOV tpávra éyix eipi ove: a^iog iva Xvrrui.
T
0 u whose, or of whom, a Pron. reí. G e n . case, governed of t h e N . ínrodrífiaros ac-
eording to § X X I . 2 0 , 3 3 . 'Aura his is here r e d u n d a n t (see L e x . u n d e r 'Auróc 1.)
'YTTOBÍIfiaros, a N . neut. sing. from t h e Nom. inrobijpa of t h e t h i r d declension, like
trapa, G e n . case, governed by t h e N . iixlivra, compounded of viro and Seto; see L e x .
'Ifiávra, a N . mase. sing. of t h e third declension, like SéXfiv, Accus. case, governed
by t h e transítive V . Xvrru); sing. N o m . ífi&s, G e n . — á v r o s , &c. "A^ws, an Ad-
jective of three terminations, like aytos, § V I L 5. mase. sing. agreeing with éy¿>,
N o m . case following t h e V e r b íipí by § X X I . 3 2 . ( a ) . Aúo-w, a V. act. Subj. 1 A o r .
l s t Pers. sing. agreeing with eyi> understood, from t h e theme XVOJ; Xíno-, (1 F u t . )
Xío-tú, ( 1 A o r . ) eXvo-a, (1 Aor. Subj.) Xhata, &c. governed by t h e Conjunction iva
by § X X I . 6 5 .

2 8 . These things were done in Bethabara beyond t h e Jordán, where John was
Taüra iyévíro ev B ? ) 0 u € á p a irépav rou 'lopSávov, oirov 'IwávvrfS 7\v
baptizing.
¡iarcríCiav:

T a ü r a , a demonstrative P r o n . neut. plur. from mase. sing. aros by § I X . 5. agreeing

with t h e neut. N . plur. ypíir things understood b y § X X I . 1 6. B»;0abápa, a
iaTa

N . fem. sing. of t h e first declension by § I I I . 7. D a t . case, governed b y Prep. iv.

Ilépav, an A d v . of place, joined with a Genitive. 'Iop^ára, a N . mase. sing. from
the Nom. 'lopSávris, of t h e first declension, like 'Ay^'o-Jíc, Genitive case. "OTTU, an
A d v . lív, a V e r b Indic. Imperf. 3d Pers. sing. agreeing with TWCWÍJS, from t h e
T

i r r e g u l a r V e r b eipí by § X I . 2.

2 9 . O n t h e morrow John seeth Jesús coming unto h i m , and

Trj iiravpiov ó 'íioávvrjs (üXéireí rbv Trjcroov épyt>pevov irpóc ¿tvróv, Kai
saith, Behold t h e L a m b of God, who taketh away t h e sin of t h e vvorkl.
Xéyei, "loe, 6 'Apvós r a QeS, 6 aipwv rr¡v ápapríav TOV KÓrrpov.

Tf¡, t h e Article sing. fem. D a t . case, by X X I . 4 3 . (h.) agreeing with D a t . iipépq. day
understood; see I . 2. 'Eiraíipiov, an A d v . see Lexicón. BAÉVEÍ a V . act. Indic.
P r e s . like rínrrio, 3 d Pers. sing. agreeing with N o m . case 'Itociwris- 'ITJO-ÜV, an h e -
terpclite N . mase. sing. Accus. case, governed by t h e transitivo V. fiXéitei. "iSe; see
Lexicón. 'Apvos, a N . mase. sing. o f t h e second declension, like Xóyoc, N o m . case,
governed by t h e V . ean this or he i s , understood. "Aipiov, a Particip. act. P r e s .
mase. sing. from t h e theme aipw, N o m . case, agreeing with apvós. 'Ápapríav, a N.
fem. sing. of t h e first declension, like tpiXía, (see § I I I . 8.), Accus. case, governed by
t h e Participle aipuv by § X X I . 5 5 .

30. T h i s is he concerning whom I said, After me cometh a m a n who

T
Ouro£ Inri wépi óv eyio e'nrwv, 'Oiríaio p» ep^erai avr¡p os
is become before m e , because he was before níe.
yíyovev 'iptrporrdév pa, orí r)v irpüros pa.

* rSIathúc i h l n k s Uiat this construction ot¡utr.¿;,'¡uaów, and is derived from that o f verbs
imnlying separalion.]
SKCT. X X I V . GREEK GRAMMAR. 87

'Avfip,a N . mase. sing. of t h e t h i r d declension, Jilee SéXfiv, Nom. case to V . '¿px^rat;

sing. Nom. ó a.vr)p, Gen. ra avipog and ávSpóg; seé § I I I . 2 5 .

3 1 . A n d I did not know him, b u t t h a t he m i g h t be manifested to Israel, for

Ka'yw ÓVK rjfcW avróv, ¿iXX' 'Iva (pavepádrj rw 'lapaf/X, Sia
this cause I am come baptizing with water,
raro Éyw ?¡X6ov fiairríZav iv vSart.

Káy¿> by an A t t i c crasis for « t í iytu and I; see § X X I I I . 4-, 2. "Wlc.iv, a V . a c t .

Indic. Pluperf. Ist Pers. sing. from t h e Anomalous V. hSu> or eiSeu (which see in §
X V I . ) ; A t t i c rjSeiv, sig, et. 3>avepá8ri, a V. pass. Subj. 1 Aor. 3d. P e r s . sing.
agreeing with ctvrós he understoood, from t h e contracted V . favcpóa, like xp^o'ów;
favcpów, (1 F u t . ) <¡>avepá>(Tü), (Perf.) •KcfavcptDKa, (Perf. pass.) •Ktfavcpwiiai, rrai, raí,
(1 Aor.) ¿(¡>avspó>8r¡v, (1 Aor. Subj.) favepáQu, yg, y. 'lapayX, an heteroclite (ap-
tote or undeclined) N . mase. sing. used here as a D a t i v e , as appears from t h e D a t i v e
article ra prefixed, and so governed by the V. favspádn by § X X I . 3 8 . Taro, a
Pron. neut. sing. Accus. case from Nom. mase, aros by § I X . 5. agreeing with
?rpáyfia affair, cause, understood, a N . n e u t . sing. t h i r d declension, governed by
the P r e p . ciiá.

• 32. And John witnessed, saying, That I saw the Spirit descending
Kai 'Iwc'ivvne i¡iapripyo-c, Xéyav, "On redéafiai ro ücEÍ^ia Kara€áivov
as a dove from heaven, and it remained upon him.
¿O"EI 7r£pt(7rEpñ)' ¿l óvpavov, Kal cpcivcv ¿tr' avróv.

" O r t ; see Lexicón under " O n I I . 1. TeOéa/xat, a V. deponent Perf. I s t P e r s . sing.

from t h e theme Seáoiiat, üiiai, agreeing with iyá u n d e r s t o o d ; $eáo¡j.ai, (1 F u t . )
SeácoLiai, (Perf.) Tc8éa¡ia.i. Tívevua, a N. neut. sing. of t h e t h i r d declension, like
aüfia, Accus. case, governed by the transitive V. rcdcaiiai, and derived from •KL-KVCV-
[xat, Perf. pass. oí^rvéa to breathe; see § V I . 8. Karafialvov, a P a r t i c i p . act. Pres.
neut. sing. Accus. case, agreeing with irvcíiia, from the V . Kara€aívo>, compounded
of liará and [iaíva. 'Clah an A d v e r b ; see Lexicón. Ilfpio-repáy, a N . fem. sing. of
t h e first declension by § I I I . 8. Accus. case, governed by t h e V. rcdéafiai under-
stood; see § X X I I . 6- 'Oupaj'S, a N . mase. sing. of t h e second declension, like
Xóyos, Gen. case, governed by t h e P r e p . i% "Eutivcv, a V. act. Indic. 1 Aor. 3 d
P e r s . sing. (v being added) agreeing with dvró it understood, of t h e fourth class of
c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s ; ficva, (1 F u t . ) tieva, (1 Aor.) '¿¡xava, ag, t. 'Eir' for ¿Vi, a P r e p .
(see Lexic.) by § I. 17.

33. A n d I did not know him, b u t he who sent me to baptize with water,
ItayA) ÓVK ySeiv avróv, dX\' ó néiv^ag LIE i3aTtTÍl¡£iv iv vSari,
he said to me,
On whomsoever you see the Spirit descending and abiding on
¿Ktlyog elwév fioi, 'Ef' ov av tSj;e ro Tlvevfxa Karat>aT.vov KOÍ fiévov irr
him, the same is he who baptizeth with t h e holy spirit.
avróv, ovrog cariv b i3aftrí'(wv iv ayía rrvcifxari.

'E(j> for P r e p . ÉTTÍ by § I. 17. "Av, i n d e f i n i t e , — s o e v e r ; see L e x . "iSyg, a V. act.

Subj. 2. Aor. (or 2 F u t . ) 2 Pers. sing. from t h e Anomalous V. ilda, agreeing with
o-ú thou understood, and governed, as to mood, by t h e Conjunction av. 'Ayía, a N .
A d j . of t h r e e terminations by § V I I . 5 , n e u t . sing. D a t . case, agreeing with TTVC'U-
¡iari; ííyt-og, a, ov, &C.

34. A n d I saw and witnessed that this is t h e Son of God.

Káyá tápaKa Kalp.e¡j.aprvpr¡Ka orí bvróg iariv b 'Ywg ra Ota.
o.~>. On the morrow John was standing again, and two of his disciples.
T>; e-avptov Tíüárrnc f.íi7T);«t iraXiv, Kal Dio ¿K rav ávrtí pa(h]riúv.
88 A PLAIN AND EASY SECT. X X I V .

'EioríyKtt, a V. act. Indic. Pluperf. A t t i c , 3d Pers. sing. agreeing with 'lwávvye,

from t h e t h e m e tVrijjui. HcíXij', an A d v . Aúo, a N . of number, D u a l , Nom. case
to V . úarnKEÍryv, or r a t h e r , as a dual V . is never used in t h e N . T . , to úaryKtiaav,
understood. Madr¡rwv, a N . mase. plur. of t h e l s t declension, like Kpírne (see § I I I .
10.), G e n . case, governed by t h e P r e p . ÍK.

3 6 . A n d h a v i n g looked on J e s ú s walking, h e saith, Behold-, t h e L a m b of God.

Kai ii&Xiibac rw Tncrs tcepurarüvri, Xéyti, "líe, ó 'Afivbe rS QsS.

'ELi&Xi\Lae, a Particip. act. 1 Aor. mase. sing. N o m . case, a g r e e i n g w i t h avrós he

understood, from t h e V. éjuéXeVw, compounded of iv and (3Xiirw (see Lexicón under
'Ev I I I . and 'E/JÉXÍTTW) ; ip&Xiirw, (1 F u t . ) ifi€\i\poj, (1 Aor.) ivi€Xtipa, (see § X .
37-) Particip. ifj.€Xi^/ac, acra, av, &c. 'II/CTS, an heteroclite N . (by § V. 3 , 4.) D a t .
case, governed by i¡j.€\i\pac by § X X I . [ 4 2 , i.] Tíepnrañvri, a Particip. act. P r e s .
from t h e V. irepiirariw, of t h e second kind of contracted Verbs, like <¡>t\ii>), mase,
sing. D a t . case contracted, and agreeing with 'IJJO-S ; irípiírar-íw, w, P a r t i c i p . 7repi-
•Kar-iuv, wv; iuaa, Stra; iov, SV; Gen. ÍOVTOQ, svroe, &c.

3 7 . A n d t h e two disciples heard him speaking, and they followed J e s ú s .

Kai ¿i Zvo fiadnral iJKHcrav ái/rS XaXüvroe, Kai r)KÓX¿dt]trav rw TT¡(T5.

"H-KHo-av, a V . act. Indic. 1 Aor. 3 d P e r s . plur. agreeing with N . mase. plur. Nom.
case fiadrjrai, from the theme &K¿W, a V . of t h e t h i r d class of characteristics by §
X . 17. ctKHfc), (1 F u t . ) átcáViu, (1 Aor.) rj/cao-a, ae, e, &c. 'Aura, a P r o n . demonstra-
tive, mase. sing. G e n . c a s e ; see § X X I . 3 5 . B . (b) *. AaXSvroc, a P a r t i c i p . act.
P r e s . from t h e theme XaXiw, of t h e second kind of c o n t r a c t e d Verbs, like ijiiXiw,
mase. sing. Gen. case, agreeing with P r o n . avrS; XaX-iw, w, P a r t i c i p . XaX-iwv, üv;
íacra, á t r a ; iov, Sv; Gen. AaX-eovroe, avroc, &c. 'rlKoXúdnffav, a V . act. Indic.
1 Aor. from t h e theme ¿IKOXUOÍW, of t h e second kind of contracted Verbs, like <¡>iXíw,
3d P e r s . plur. agreeing with áuroi they u n d e r s t o o d ; áKoXndiw, (I F u t . ) áKoXudño-w,
(1 Aor.) r¡KoXédr¡cra, ae, e, &c. 'Ijjtre, D a t . case, by 4 3 . B . ( a ) .

3 8 . A n d Jesús being t u r n e d , and seeing t h e m following, saith to t h e m ,

Ae ó 'Ijjcae orpaibúe, Kai Sreatrcifievoe dvráe aKoXovOovvrae, Xiyei avroie,
W h a t seek ye ? And they said to him, Rabbi (which, being interpreted, is called
Tí '(r¡r¿ÍT£; Ai ói e'nrov CÍVTW, 'Pa€Si (o, kp¡ir¡vtvóii£vov, Xeyerai
m a s t e r ) , where dwellest thou ?
didáiTKaXe), rrov fiiveig;

Srpafele, a P a r t i c i p . pass. 2 Aor. from t h e V. <rrpi<j>w (by § X . 5 3 , 3 , and § X I . 7-)?

mase. sing. N o m . case, agreeing with Tno-üe; arpitpw, ( 2 Aor.) evrpaipov, ( 2 A o r .
pass.) í<Trpá<j>r¡v, P a r t i c i p . arpa^úg, ¿lera, iv, &c. Zurciré, a V. act. Indic. P r e s . from
t h e contracted V. (ryríw, 2 d P e r s . plur. agreeing with v¡x¿le ye u n d e r s t o o d ; (r¡ríw,
¿5 ; ieie, ¿le ; ést, £«, &c. ' O t ; see L e x i c . u n d e r 'O V I H . ' P a é é i , a H e b . word, and
indeclinable; see L e x i c . ' O , a P r o n . reí. n e u t . sing. agreeing with pijfia word un-
derstood, or with t h e word pa€€i p u t rtyyiKwe, as t h e G r a m m a r i a n s speak, Nom.
case to V . Xe'yerat. 'Epiir¡vEv¡j.evóv, a P a r t i c i p . pass. n e u t . sing. from t h e V. kp¡ir}-
veíw, N o m . case, agreeing with t h e relative o. Ae'yerai, a V. pass. P r e s . from t h e
t h e m e Xéytü, 3d P e r s . sing. agreeing with P r o n . relat. o (see § X X I . 1 9 . ) ; Xiyw,
pass. Xiyofxai, r¡, erai. AirJátr/caXe, a verbal N . mase. sing. of t h e second declension,
like Xóyoc, Voc. case, from t h e P r e s e n t tense of t h e V. SISCHTKW ; see § V I . 8. US, an
A d v . ; see Lexic.

39. H e saith to t h e m , Come ye and see. T h e y carne and saw where

Ae'yei avro~ÍQ, "Ep^£t70e /cal "ibtrt. 'HX6W sai ti<¡ov irov

* [As the expression of perception generally requires the genitive, so the sepárate operations of it by
the senses take the same.]
SECT. X X I V . GREEK GRAMMAR. 89

he dwelleth, and t h e y abode with him t h a t day, for it was about t h e t é n t h

¡XEVEI, raí EfXEivav Trap' ávrtS rr)v ÉKEÍvnv rifxépav, Sé r)v log ¿Wárr/
hour.
&pa.

"EPXEO-OE, an Anomalous V. depon. I m p e r a t . P r e s . 2 P e r s . p l u r . agreeing with v/xelg

understood, from t h e t h e m e spxofxai, I m p e r . É'px > «"^«"j & - "I^ETE, an Anomalous rB C

V . act. I m p e r a t . 2 Aor. 2d P e r s . plur. agreeing with V/XEIS understood, from t h e

theme uSio, 2 Aor. ETCW, I m p e r a t . Í8-e, ¿-rio, &c. líap, a P r e p . for Trapa by § I .
17. 'Tifiípav, a N . fem. sing. of t h e first declension (by § I I I . 5, 8.) Accus. case,
by § X X I . 4 5 . ( d ) , (G). 'fíe, an Adv. Aeran?, a N . A d j . of t h r e e endings, like
ráXog, fem. sing. Nom. case, agreeing with &pa; ¿¡¿raros, JJ, OV. ''Sipa, a N._fem. sing.
of t h e first declension, like fyuÉpa, Nom. case, governed by t h e n e u t e r V . íjV.

40. One of the two who heard from John, and followed him was
T
E Í £ É/c TÜV Svo TÚ>V ciKovo-ávTiov Trapa 'íuicivvov, Kal aKoXtiQnaavTiúV a u r y , r¡v
A n d r e w , t h e brother of Simón P e t e r .
'AySpéae, !> aúeXifibg ~Sií¡xiovog üéYps.

Avo; see § VII. 17. 'AvSpéag, a N . mase. sing. of t h e first declension, like 'Aivelae,
Nom. case, governed by t h e neuter V. T)V. 'ACÍEX^ÓS, a N . mase. sing. of t h e second
declension, like Xóyoe, Nom. case, p u t in apposition with 'AvSpéag by § X X I . 2 9 .
Mfxiovoc, a N . mase. sing. of t h e t h i r d declension, like SéXtptv, Gen. case, governed
by t h e N . áSeXfog by § X X I . 34. sing. N o m . ó Sífiwv, G e n . rS Sífiíovog, &c. IIÉYpB,
a N . Mase. sing. of t h e second declension, like Xóyos, G e n . case, p u t in apposition
with Sífiiovog.

41. He . first findeth his own brother Simón, and saith to him,
'Ovroc irpiorog kvpídKEi TOV "iSiov rbv áSEXipbv 'Zíiiiava, Kal Xe'yei ávrw,
W e have found the Messias, which, being interpreted, is t h e Christ.
Eup?'/ra/x£j' rbv Mecrcríav, o fiEBEpiirfVEVófXEvóv écrrt ó Xpiaróc.

'EvptV/c£í, a V . act. Indic. P r e s . 3d Pers. sing. from t h e t h e m e ivpíaKw, agreeing with

¿Voc. "ISiov, a N . A d j . of three terminations, like &ywg, mase. sing. Accus. case,
agreeing with aSeXipbv. 'Evpr'iKafXEv, a V . act. I n d i c . Perf. l s t Pers. p l u r . agreeing
with {¡¡xeig understood, from IvpíaKia; évpío-Kio (1 F u t . ) Evpr¡cro), (Perf.) é'upTjra, ag,
E, &c. MEacrlav, a N . mase. sing. of t h e first declension, like 'AivE~iag, Accus. case,
governed by t h e transitive V . kvpíiKafxev. 'O, a P r o n . reí. n e u t . sing. agreeing with
t h e neut. N . p?/jua understood, or with Mso-aiav, p u t rExviKüg (as t h e G r a m m a r i a n s
speak), Nom. case to V. Icm by § X X I . 19. MEBEpfx-nvsvófiEvov, a Particip. pass.
Pres, neut. sing. N o m . case, agreeing with t h e relative ó, from t h e compound V.
fiEdepftnvEvo), which from fiera and Ep¡xr¡vEÍiid ; see Lexic. Xpierróg, a verbal N . mase,
sing. of the second declension, like Xóyos, N o m . case, governed by t h e n e u t e r V .
¿art, derived from KÉxptcrrat, 3d Pers. Perf. pass. of xp«"; see § V I . 8, and Lexic.
in Xpioróf.

42. A n d he b r o u g h t him to Jesús, and Jesús having looked on him said,

Kat ijyayfj' avrbv npbg rbv Tncrüv, SE ó Tr¡crig E¡xt,XÉ\bag ávrtjj ÉITTE,

T h o u a r t Simón t h e son of* J o ñ a s ; thou shalt be called Cephas, which is interpreted

S« £t Sífiwv ó vibg Mwi'a- fív K\r¡Qriirn Kr¡i¡>ag, ó icifiíivEVE-ai
a stone.
TTÉYpOC.

"Hyayc;', a V. act. Indic. 2 Aor. Sd P e r s . sing. agreeing with avrbg understood,

írom the theme ¿íyio ; aya, ¿ Ao\-J¡yov. and with the Attic r e d u p l i c a r o n ífyayoi'by
c
 90 A PLAIN AND EASY SECT. X X I V .

§ X X I I I . 4 , 6, ijyayov, se, e, a n d v being added by § I . 18, tfyayev, 'íiova, a N.

mase. sing. of t h e first declension, like Qw/xae (see § I I I . 1 2 ) , G e n . case, governed
by t h e N . libe. KXr]Qr¡ar¡, a V . pass. Indic. 1 fut. 2d P e r s . sing. agreeing with av,
from t h e t h e m e KCIXÉW, &c. Kr¡i¡>áe ; see Lexicón.

4 3 . O n t h e morrow Jesús would g o forth into Galilee, and findeth

Tr¡ éiraipiov o 'lr¡aSe r)6éXr¡aev í'é,tX6¿ív ele rrjv TaXiXaíav, Kai evp'iOKei
Philip, a n d saith t o h i m , Follow me.
QiXvKTtov, Kai Xéyet avrf, 'ÁKoXédei fioi.

'JídéXnaev, a V . act. I n d i c . 1 A o r . 3 d P e r s . sing. agreeing with 'lr¡aüe, from t h e

t h e m e kdeXéw, of t h e second kind of contracted Verbs, like <piXéw. 'E^eXOe'ív, a V .
act. Infin. 2 Aor. from t h e obsolete V . í^eXévdü), compounded of ¿£ a n d iXévdü), see
L e x i c , governed by t h e V . rfieXr)aev by § X X I . 5 0 , éfcXévdw, (2 Aor.) éZjfXvdov,
( 2 A o r . Infin.) QeXevQe'ív, a n d by Syncope íí.eXQe'tv; see § X V I . u n d e r "TZpxpfiai.
TaXiXaíav, a N . fem. sing. of t h e first declension, like <¡>iXía, Accus. case, governed
by t h e P r e p . elg. QíXunrov, a N . mase. sing. of t h e second declension, like Xóyog,
Accus. case, governed by t h e transitive V . evpíaKei. 'AKoXsdei, a V . act. I m p e r a t .
2d Pers. sing. agreeing.with av understood, from t h e t h e m e aKoXadéui, of t h e second
kind of contracted Verbs, like tpiXéco, aKoXudéw, w; I m p e r a t . aKoXüd—ee, ei.

44. A n d Philip was of Bethsaida, of t h e town of A n d r e w a n d of P e t e r .

A¿ ó $t'Xt7T7rO£ r)v ano Br¡8aaiSa, ÍK rr)e TróXecoe 'AvBpéa Kai Hérpu.

BrjOaa'iía, a n heteroclite N . aptote, or undeclined, by § V . 3 . IlóXewc, a N . fem.

sing. of t h e t h i r d declension, contracted like'¿<¡>is,G e n . case, A t t i c , see § I I I . 3 2 , 2 ,
governed b y t h e P r e p . ÍK.

45. Philip findeth Nathanael, a n d saith to h i m , W e have found him whom

<S>íXiinroe evptaKti TOV NadavarjX, Kai Xéyei ávriS, 'EvpnKafiev ov
Moses in t h e law described, a n d t h e P r o p h e t s , Jesús of N a z a r e t h , t h e Son
TAwafje ev r ü vóji¡¡> eypaibe, Kai bi Ilpo0í¡raí,'I^o-aV TOV ct7ró NafapÉí), TOV 'Xibv
of Joseph.
TS 'Iioar)tj>.

NafcWcu'/X, Na^apéd, 'Iti>an<j>, heteroclite N o u n s undeclined, by § V . 3 , 1. Mtoaije,

an heteroclite N . mase. sing. (see § V . 6.) Nom. case t o V . eypaúiev. "Eypaipev, a V.
act. Indic. 1 A o r . 3d P e r s . sing. agreeing with Mwarje, from t h e t h e m e ypáüjco, o f t h e
first class of characteristics, like TVTTTW. Hpotprjrai, a N . mase. plur. of t h e first d e -
clension, like KpÍTTje, N o m . case t o V . '¿ypa\pav described understood. 'lr¡auv, an
heteroclite N . mase. sing. Accus. case, p u t in apposition with ávrbv understood.

4 6 . A n d N a t h a n a e l said t o h i m , C a n a n y good thing be from N a z a r e t h ?

Kai Nadavar¡X elirev ávreo, Avvaraí n áyadbv elvaí ¿K Nafapáf;
Philip saith to h i m , Come a n d see. v

<I>£Xi7r?roc; Xéyei avra, "Ep^ov Kai "iSe.

Awarcu, an Anomalous V . depon. I n d i c . Pres.-3d P e r s . sing. agreeing with xPW a

understood, a n d declined, like 'íara/xai pass. of 'Larrifii, ívvaiiai, Bvvaaai, Svvarai.

'Ayadóv, a N . A d j . of t h r e e terminations, n e u t . sing. Nom. case, agreeing "with xPW a

u n d e r s t o o d ; see § X X I . 16. Eij/at, a V. Infin. from t h e i r r e g u l a r V . elixí, governed

T

b y t h e V . Svvarai. by § X X I . 50.

47. Jesús saw N a t h a n a e l coming t o h i m , a n d saith concerning h i m ,

'O 'lr¡anQ elbev TOV Na6avar)X epyó¡ievov wpbe avTOV, Kai Xéyei, trepl aura,
Behold, an Israelite indeed, in whom guile is n o t .
"Ide, 'lapar¡XÍTr¡e ciXrjdwc, iv i¡i cóXostaTiÓK.
 SBCT.XXIV. G R E E K GRAMMAR. 91

To-pari\ÍTnQ, a N . mase. sing. of t h e first declension, like KpÍTrje, N o m . case, governed

by t h e V ; íron understood. 'AXn8¿>e, an A d v . from aXndr)e. AóXoe, a N . mase,
sing. of t h e second declension, like Xóyoe, N o m . case t o V . '¿orí.

4 8 . N a t h a n a e l saith to h i m , W h e n c e knowest t h o u me ? Jesús answered a n d

lSadavarjX Xéyet 6\vrS, Hádev yiv¿>OKeiQ -fie; 'O 'liraág cnreRpídr/ Kal
said t o h i m , Before t h a t P h i l i p called thee I saw thee, being u n d e r t h e fig-tree.
e'nrev üvroj, Upo rS ^íXfKirov tytiivfjoát ae eíSóv ae, bvra VTCO rr¡v OVKTJV.

Uódev, an A d v . ; see L e x i c . TtvújaKete, a V . act. Indic. P r e s . 2 d P e r s . sing. agreeing

with av understood, from t h e t h e m e ytvtooKta. ÍIpo, a P r e p . governing a Genitive ;
see L e x i c . npó rS, &c. see § X X I . 5 2 , 5 3 , 5 4 . $h>vrjaat, a V. act. Infin. governed
by t h e Accus. N . $>[Xurirov, I s t Aor. from t h e t h e m e <¡>wvéw, of t h e second k i n d of
contracted V e r b s , like <¡>íXew. SE a primitive P r o n . of t h e 2 d Person, Accus. case,
governed b y t h e transitive V . <j>u¡vrjaai, from t h e N o u n . ov b y § I X . 3 . "Ovra a
P a r t i c i p . P r e s . from t h e irregular V . ü¡il lo be, A c c u s . case, agreeing w i t h t h e
P r o n . ai; elfil, Particip. áv, íaa, ov, G e n . OVTOQ, &C. OVKÍJV, a N . fem. sing. of t h e
first declension, contracted like yaXér], b y § I I I . 1 3 . A c c u s . case, governed b y P r e p .
viro; sing. N o m . 7/ avKÉt], rj; G e n . rí?e avKérje, rje, &c.

4 9 . N a t h a n a e l answered, and saith t o him, Rabbi, thou a r t t h e Son of God, t h o u

NaOavaijX áireKpídrí, Kal Xéyet O.VTS, 'Pa€€l, av el ó 'Ytóc rS QeS, av
á r t t h e K i n g of Israel.
el o HaatXevQ rS 'Io-paíjX.

BaatXeíe, a N . mase. sing. of t h e t h i r d declension contracted by § I I I . 3 2 , 3 . N o m .

case, following the n e u t e r V . el.

50. J e s ú s answered, a n d said t o h i m , Because I said t o thee I saw thee

Inoüe áireKpí8r¡, Kal elwev O.VTÜ, "Ort eliróv aot, 'EteW oe
u n d e r n e a t h t h e fig-tree, believest thou ? T h o u shalt see g r e a t e r ihhigs t h a n these.
viroKaro) rrjs avKrje, iriOTevetQ; "0\pet tieli^h) TUTÍOV.

'XiroKáro), an Adv. of place governing a G e n . see § X X I . 60. Jltarevete, a V . a c t .

I n d i c . P r e s . 2d P e r s . sing. agreeing w i t h <rú understood, from t h e t h e m e Triarevia.
"0\pet, a V . mid. or depon. ] F u t . 2d P e r s . sing. ( b y N o t e on rvimf, § X I . 3.) from
t h e t h e m e OTTTÜ) or oirTofiat; oirrofiat, (1 F u t . ) o^o/iat, et, &c. Meíloj, a N . A d j . of
t h e comparative degree, irregular from t h e positive ¡xéyae ( b y § V I I I . 6.) n e u t .
p l u r . Accus. case, contracted (by § V I I I . 11.), agreeing with xprifiara tkings u n d e r -
stood.^ TÚTIÚV, a demonstrative P r o n . n e u t . p l u r . from mase. sing. «roe, G e n . case,
agreeing with xpnficiTwv tkings understood, G e n . case.

5 1 . A n d he saith t o h i m , Verily, verily, I say t o you, F r o m henceforth

Ka¿ XÉyEt áur¿J, 'A¡ir)v, a¡j.r)v, Xéycj vfilv, 'An apn
ye shall see heaven
opened, a n d t h e Angels of God ascending and
o^eode TOV épavbv áveayóra, Kal r s g 'AyyE'Xee rS 0E5 avataívovTae Kal
descending upon t h e Son of M a n .
fcaraÉaÉiwrae inl rov 'Ytóv ra 'Avdpáiru.

'Aur)v, H e b . ; see L e x i c . "Aprt, an Adv. of t i m e ; see Lexicón u n d e r "Aprt 5 . 'Ovpa-

vos, a N . Mase. sing. of t h e second declension, like Xóyoe, Accus. casé, governed b y
t h e transitive V. oxbeode. 'Aveuryóra, a P a r t i c i p . m i d . Perf. after t h e A t t i c form
(by § X . 2 2 , a n d § X X I I I . 4, 6.) mase. sing. Accus. case, agreeing with t h e N .
épavbv; ávpíyu), Perf. mid, avéorya, P a r t i c i p . aveay-hz, v'ta, bs; G e n . óroc, vías,
92 A PLAIN AND EASY GREEK GRAMMAR. : SECT. X X I V .

¿roe, & c . ; see 'Avoíyia in § X V I . 'AyyéXae, a N . mase. plur. of t h e second d e -

clension, like Xóyog, Accus. case, governed by t h e transitive V. 'áipeo-de u n d e r -
stood. 'Avu€aívovrae, a P a r t i c i p . act. Pres. from t h e t h e m e 'Ava&aívut compounded
of ara and fiaívio (see Lexic.) mase. plur. accus. case, agreeing with t h e N . á y y £ -
Xug. WaTat,alvovTa.e, a Particip. of t h e same form as ava&aívovrae, from t h e
t h e m e KaraSaívu, compounded of rara and (3aívb>; see Lexic.

KN'I) OF T H E O R A M M A R .
 GREEK ANP ENGLISH LEXICÓN
TO T H E

N E W TESTAMENT.

A V

A a, Alpha. T h e first of t h e Greek

9 L e t t e r s , corresponding in ñame,
order, and power, to t h e Heb. tí Aleph,
b u t in form approaching nearer to t h e
Aleph of t h e Samaritans and Phenicians *.
Plutarch (in Sympos. Jib. ix. qu. 2.) in-
forma u s , t h a t this ñ a m e Alpha in P h e n i -
cian signified an ox, as Aleph likewise does
in Hebrew.
I . A , Alpha, being the first letter of the
G r e e k alphabet, is applied to [whatever is
Jirst, whether in time or rank (see B u x t .
L e x . T a l m u d , p . 106.) and henee t o ]
C h r i s t as being t h e beginning orjirst. occ.
Rev. i. 8. 1 1 . x x i . 6. xxii. 13. Observe
t h a t in Rev. i. 1 1 . t h e w o r d s ' E y ú Itpi rb
A caí ró í l , ó Tipiaros Kat ó ecr)(aTOC,
a r e omitted in t w e n t y M S S . , three of which
a r e ancient, in t h e V u l g . and several other
ancient versions, and in some printed edi-
tions, and are accordingly rejected by
Mills, Wetstein, and Griesbach. [ B y these
expressions m a n y of t h e ancients conceive
t h a t our L o r d ' s eternal divinity isdescribed
(See A r e t h . Csesar. in Apoc. p . 8 8 8 . and
others, w i t h a reference to Is. xliv. 6.), and
" Concerning t h e resemblance b e t w e e n t h e Phe-
nician and Greek Letters, i n ñ a m e , order, power,
and form, see ílerodotus, l i b . v . cap. 5 8 ;
con's Palaeographia Graeca, l i b . ii. cap. 1, 2 , 3 ;
D r . Gregory SJiarpe's Dissertation o n the O r i g i n a l
P o w e r s of Letters, p . 9 7 , & c , and h i s Structure of
the Greek T o n g u e , p. 2 1 9 , & c ; and Encyclopccdia
Britannica, in ALHIABET, P í a t e I X .
they are followeá by t h e modern orthodox
writers in general. See Eichhorn's Com-
m e n t a r y on these passages. T h e reader
may also consult t h e following works,
Ámuel. D i a t r . Philol. qua rb a et to appel-
latio Christi in Apoc. exponitur. Upsal,
1755, 4to. Nicolaus, Disquis. de Mose
A l p h a dicto. L . B a t . 1703. 8vo.]
I I . A s a Particle used in coniposition.
1. I t denotes negation or privation, from
artp or &vev, without; and is in this appli-
cation called negative or privative, as in.
acré¡}r¡e ungodly, from a neg. and trifilo to
worship; aóparoe invisible, from a neg. a n d
Uparos visible. T h e a, when compounded
with words beginning w i t h a vowel, fre-
Kal— quently takes a v after i t for t h e sake of
sound, as in avapáprnros being without
sin, from a neg. and apapréto to sin.
2 . I t heightens or increases t h e sígni-
fication of t h e simple word, and is called
intensive or augmentative, as in arevt£<a to
fix (the eyes) attentively, from a intens.
and 7-ttVo) to Jix. A t h u s applied is p e r -
haps from t h e H e b . n emphatic, or an a b -
breviation of áyav very much, which from
H e b . MiO to be lifted up, increased. [On
t h e intensitive power of a, see Valcken. a d
Montfau-
Adoniaz. p . 2 1 4 . Blomf. ad Prora. 9 0 4 .
K i d d . Critical Review, lxxxviii. p . 1 2 9 .
P o r p h y r y , Quaest. H o m e r . p . 49.]
3 . I t imports collecting or assembling,
from apa togelher (which see), and ia
 A B Y 2 A r A

callod colleclive or congrcgatiee, as in ¡í-ae M S . Brcm. cxplaiu t h e word t o mean, an

all logether, from a colleet. and vae all; infinite collection of waters, as do H e s y -
áSeXtjtós a brother, from a colleet. and chius and Suidas.]
bé\(¡)VQ a ivomb. 'Ayadoepyéia, w, from liyaOóc, good, mer-
'ABAAA&N. Heb.—Abaddon, H e b . ciful, a n d epyor, a work.—To do good,
p i 2 « Deslruclion, perdilion, a N . from t h a t is, ivorks of merey or charily. occ.
t h e V . I I N lo destroy. occ. Rev. ix. 1 1 . 1 T i m . vi. 18.
So t h e L X X render p í a s by áiráXeia, 'AyaQoTrote'fc), u¡, from áyadbe good, and
Job xxvi. C. xxviii. 22, & al. Comp. 'AwoX- TTOiéw to do.
\VOJV under 'ATCOXXVIÚ III. I. To do good. occ. M a r k iii. 4 . L u k e
'A/3ap?)s, toe, ove, ó, r], nal rb—ec, from a vi. 9, 3 5 . A c t s xiv. 17-
neg'. and ftítpoe, a bnrden, charge. Not I I . To do good to, to benefit. occ. L u k e
burdensome, not chargeable. occ. 2 Cor. xi. vi. 3 3 .
9. Comp. B á p o e V . I I I . To do well, act rightly. occ. 1 P e t .
'ABB'A. H e b . — F a t h e r or my father, ii. 15, 2 0 . iii. 6, 17. 3 J o h n , ver. 1 1 .
Abba, as t h e word was pronounced in our 'Aya0o7roiía, ae, from ayaQoíroLÉio.—<
Saviour's time (comp. u n d e r 'E/üpcú'e) for Well-doing. occ. 1 P e t . iv. 19. T h i s word
t h e puré H e b r e w father or >tO my is used in Clement's 1 E p . to Corinth. § 2
father. So t h e Chaldee J e w s used and 3 , in t h e sense of doing good. [ I t s
for the father or my father ". 1
occ. M a r k proper meaning is ?; áyadov ípya trpoQvpía
xiv. 3 6 . Rom. viii. 15. Gal. iv. 6. ["A?r?rac. a zealfor good woi-ks.~]
and (íinra seem t o Alberti of t h e same 'AyudoTTOibe, S, b, from ú y a 6 W o i é w . —
origin as lípfla. See Spanheim on Callim. A well-doer, a person acting rightly. occ.
H y m n . in Dian. 6.] 1 P e t . ii. 14. Sir. xii. 2 0 . [ á y a 0 o 7 r o í Ó £ yvvt¡
" Ajivanoe, H,M, i¡, teal rb—ov, from a in- in Sir. xlii. 14. is used in a bad sense—a
tens. and t h e Ionic (iverabe, for fivdbe the woman who entices men by kindfiesses.~]
deep (which s e e ) . I n Herodotus, lib. iii, 'AyaObe, T¡, OV, q. ayaaroe admirable,
cap. 2 3 , x P^
M uv
B Y 2 2 0 ' N signifies to from ayíi'Copai to admire, which from
sink to t h e boitom as in water. So Homer, ¿lyáio, opat, t h e s a m e ; or else áya0os m a y
II. xxiv. lin. 80, speaking of Iris plunging be derived immediately from áyáio or
to t h e boitom of the sea, ayapai to admire.—This is a very general
and extensive word, like t h e H e b . alto, to
'H fie ¿ BY220/N ópaaev.
S
which i t usually answers in t h e L X X .
I. Good. M a t . xix. 17. [ T h i s is t h e g e -
I. Very or exceedingly deep; for t h e neral sense of t h e word, which Schleusner,
profane writers use this word as an Adjec- I think, raises" sometimes higher t h a n is
tive. See Scapula's Lexicón. [So D e u t . necessary, or thr.n h i s instances bear h i m
xxxiii. 13.] out in, viz. what is entirely perfect of its
I I . I n the N . T."Afivcrcroe, a, y, an abyss, kind, and of the highest excellence. In
a deep. I t denotes M a t t . x i x . 16. J o h n i. 4 7 . 2 T h e s s . ii. 1 6 .
1. The common receptaele of the dead. nothing of this kind seems implied. T h e
Comp. u n d e r "Abye I I I . occ. Rom. x . 7. strongest instances are M a t t . x i x . 17.
[on which passage see L o w t h . de Sacra J a m e s i. 17.] N e u t . plur. ' A y a Q a , ra,
Pocsi H e b . p . 200. ed. Michaelis.] Good thitigs, L u k e i. 5 3 . x i i . 18, 19. x v i .
2. Hell, the place of éter nal punishment. 2 5 . [See also Prov. x i . 10. E u r . Phcen.
occ. L u k e viii. 3 1 . comp. Rev. i x . 1, 2, 1 1 . 906. Joseph. A n t i q . ii. 3 , 2 . H e n e e t h e
xi. 7. xvii. 8. xx. 1, 3 . and on t h e t e x t s in word denotes prosperous,forlunate, happy,
Rev. see Viiringa on Rev. and Bp. Newton Isaiah Ixiii. 7. J o b xvii. 15. 1 Macc.x. 5 5 .
on Prophecies, vol. iii. 8vo. [ I n this sense and cheeiful, P s . Ixxiii. 14. Zach. viii. 19.
i t oceurs in Euripides, Phcen. 1632.] T h i s E s d r . ix. 12. I n Sirach xiii. 2 5 . icapSía
word in t h e L X X commonly answers to ív ayadole is perhaps for icapbía ayaQf¡ i n
t h e H e b . t r i n n , which generally denotes this sense,] So Herodotus, lib. iii. c a p .
an abyss of waters. [ I t oceurs in this 135. and ix. 8 1 , u s e d n o t only by t h e L X X ,
sense G e n . i. 2. vii. 1 1 . J o b xxviii. 14. b u t likewise by Polybius, Xenophon, a n d
D e u t . xxxiii. 13. & c ; and t h e M S . Lexicón. Josephus (cited by Kypke on L u k e x i i .
Bibl. Coisl. p . 4 9 9 , and t h e L e x . Cyrill. 19.), and by t h e two latter particularly
applied t o t h e Fruits of the Earth. [In
which sense it oceurs, Gen. xiv. 2 0 . W i s -
* See m y Chaldcc G r a m m a r , sect. iii. 1 4 . and
sect. iv, ,'¡.
dom ii. 6. L u k e xii, 1 8 , 1 9 - ]
 A T A 3

II. Bountiful,kind,bcncvolcnt,mercifid. Pcarce, arid Campbell, and BlachvaW'A

M a t . x x . 15. [Bountiful or liberal, i. e. Sacred Classics, vol. i. p . 4 6 — 4 8 . 8vo.
Does m y liberaüty to othcrs provokc you edit.
to envy ? See Xenoph. C y r . iii. 3 , 4. and [ I I I . To be pleased with any thing_.
D ' O r v i l l . ad Charit. p . 722.] Rom. v. 7. J o h n v. 3 5 . and so to boast of it in L X X .
[Kind or bencvoient. 1 Thess. iii. 6. Good 2 Sam. i. 2 0 . Sirach x x x . 3 .
natured. 1 P e t . ii. 18. T i t . ii. 5 . See I V . To celébrate and sing the praise of.
Casaub. E p p . p . 79. X e n . CEcon, 1 1 . 6 . L u k e i. 4 7 . x . 2 1 . A c t s ii. 2 6 . See on
H e n e e rb ayaQbv denotes benevolence. t h i s word, Fischer. ad Well. p . 2 3 8 . Bergl.
1 Thess. v. 15. Rom. xii. 2 1 . G a l . vi. 10. ad Alciph. p . 5 6 . ]
P h i l . i. 5. Philem. 14. I t is p u t for Chris- 'AyapÓQ, H, b, from a neg. and yapas
t i a n i t y as t h e highest instance of God's marriage.—Single, w h e t h e r u n m a r r i e d or
benevolence, in Rom. xiv. 1 6.] widowed. occ. 1 Cor. vii. S, I I , 3 2 , 3 4 , 3 7 .
I I I . Profilable, useful. E p h . iv. 2 9 . See X e n . S y m p . i x .
I V . Fertile,good, as land. L u k e v i i i . 8 . 'AyavaKTÍid, w , f r o m &yav very much
So P l u t a r c h , D e Ubi educand. p . 2.. 'Eiri and ayQopai properly to be heavy loaded,
rfje ysLopyíaQ, irpürov psv ' A P A G ^ I I N pressed with a great weight, a n d thence
vTrápZai Seí ri)v yrjv. I n agriculture, first, to be oppresscd in mind, to be grieved,
t h e land m u s t be good. taken ill, resent, gravor, grávate f e r o (see
V. Puré, unpolluted. A c t s xxiii. ] . Scapula), w h i c h f r o m ay9os a weight,
(comp. Acts xxiv. 16. 2 T i m . i. 3.) 1 T i m . barden, a l s o grief. Comp. u n d e r Upoerox-
i. 19. (comp. 1 T i m . iii. 9.) 6 Í £ W . — T o b e moved or jilled with indigna-
'AyaQiútTvvr), r¡Q, r¡, from áyaOóc. tion or resentment, to resent deeply, to be in-
I . [Kindness and benevolence. Rom. x v . dignant, lo stomach. occ. M a t . xx. 2 4 . xxvi.
14. Gal. v. 2 2 . E p h . v. 9. So Nehemiah, 8. M a r k x. 14, 4 1 . xiv. 4 . L u k e xiii. 14.
ix. 2 5 . I n t h e L X X t h e word seems [ I t is u s e d e i t h e r absolutely, or w i t h ¿Vi,
often to signify the happiness arisingfrorn ^ f p i ^ a n d Trpóe, a n d in t h e L X X w i t h Ka-a. í
another's kindness, and thence happiness W í s d o i n j v. 23.]
generally. See N e h . ix. 3 5 . J u d g . viii. 'AyaváKrritriQ, LOO, a t t . eme, from áya-
35¿ 2 Chron. x x i v . 16.] vcucréo).—Indignation, resentment, occ.
I I . Goodness in general, occ. 2 Thess. 2 Cor. vii. 11.
i. .11. 'ArAIIA'a, w,
'AyaXXíame, ¡ o c , a t t . EWS, j¡, fromáyaX.- I . To love in g e n e r a l . M a t . xxii. 3 7 , 3 9 ,
Aiáw.—Exullalion, leapingfor joy, exces- & al. freq.
sivejoy. occ. L u k c i. 14. 4 4 . A c t s i i . 4 6 . I I . To desire, long for. 2 T i m . iv. 8.
H e b . i'. 9. J u d e , ver. 2 4 . T h e L X X severa] c o m p . 1 P e t . iii. 10. P s . x x x i v . 12. xl, 16.
times use this word for t h e H e b . [ I n T h i s w o r d in t h e L X X m o s t commonly
A c t s ii. 4 6 . i t seems to signify singingfor answers to t h e H e b .
joy, and in t h i s sense i t is also frequently [ I I I . To prefer. M a t . vi. 2 4 . J o h n xiii.
found i n t h e L X X . See Psalm x x i x . 6. 2 3 . Rom. ix. 1 3 . H e n e e OVK ayairav is to
xlvi. 1. Ixii. 6.] neglect. Rev. xii. 1 1 . — S í h l e u s n e r chooses
'AyaWiáco, ü, ( L u k e i. 47.) and more to g i v e as additional meanings of t h e w o r d ,
commonly 'AyctAAiácyiai, w¡iai, Pass. and (1.) To do good to, citing L u k e vii. 5. J o h n
Mid. from ayav very much and cíXXopai xiv. 2 1 , 2 3 , &c. (2.) To do one's duty to
to leap, or r a t h e r from t h e H e b . bi, or in ¡from love, c i t i n g E p h . v. 2 5 . Col. iii. 19.
H i p h . bon to exult, which t h e L X X fre- W h e n c e h e says ciyawav rbv QEOV always
quently render by áyaXXiáopai. means lo worship God with piely; and
I . To exult, leap for joy, to show one's (3.) To address with kind words, c i t i n g
joy by leaping and skipping. So t h e word M a r k x. 2 1 . P s . Ixxviii. 3 6 , &c. I n all
denotes excessive or ecstatic joy and de- these cases, he appears to m e t o give o n l y
light, J o h n v. 3 5 . A c t s xvi. 3 4 . H e n e e w h a t he imagines to be t h e probable ertect
it is sometimes p u t after X "'P Í which is of the love, while t h e writers merely state
C W

of less intense significaron, as M a t . v. 12. t h e existence of t h e love itself. H e gives,

1 P e t . i v . 13. Rev. x i x . 7. comp. 1 P e t . i. of course, analogous meanings t o t h e word
8. L u k e i. 14. áyáirn.]
I I . To be transported with desire, to 'Ayá-Ky), r\q, y, from ayairáw.
leap forward with joy, in order t o meet I . Love, charity, see L u k e xi. 4 2 . R o m .
t h e object of one's wishes, gestirc. occ. v. 5 , 8. 1 Cor. xiii. 1 T i m . i. 5.. 2 P e t . i. 7-
J o h n viii. 5 6 , where scc Doddridge, B p . O n 1 P e t . iv. 8, comp, Prov. x . 12, and
B 2
 A rr
then j u d g e how groundless is t h a t danger-
tras, but, I fear, common notion of atoning
for sins by almsgiving. T h i s N . in the
L X X usually ansvrers to the H e b . m r m .
I I . 'AyaTraí, iov, át, Love-feasts,feasts
qf charity. occ. J u d e , ver. 12. comp. 1 Cor.
xi. 2 1 , 3 3 . These love-feasls used to be
k e p t in t h e primitive church a t t h e time
of celebrating t h e holy eucharist. They
were furnished by t h e common oblations
of t h e faithful. Ricli and poor were to
p a r t a k e of them with decency and sobriety.
T h e disorders of the Corintliians on these
occasions are censured by the Apostle,
1 Cor. xi. 2 1 , & seq. See Cave's P r i m .
Christ. p t . 1. chap. 1 1 , and Suicer's T h e -
saurus in \Aya7ra1 I I . 3 . Pliny, I t h i n k ,
m u s t be understood to speak of these ' A y á -
7rcíí, when, in his famous 9 7 t h letter to
Trujan, he says of the Christians in B i -
thynia, of which he was governour, t h a t ,
upon examination, t h e y affirmed, t h a t after
t h e y had sung a h y m n to Christ as to God
(quasi Deq) and taken t h e i r sacramentum,
morem sibi discedendi fuisse, rursusque
coeundi ad capiendum cibum, promiscuum
t a m e n et i n n o x i u m , " t h e y usually de-
p a r t e d and carne together again to take an
innocenlrcpast in common." W h i c h passage
further shows, t h a t t h e Bithynian Chris-
tians k e p t t h e i r 'AycÍ7rat after t h e celebra-
tion of t h e eucharist. [ T h e 'Ayón-at lasted
till t h e 4th century, and were then abo-
lished by t h e council of Laodicea, in its
2 8 t h canon, in consequence of t h e l u x u r y
which had been substituted for t h e ancient
a n d frugal method of celebrating these
feasts.]
'Aya7r?)róc, V, > from áyairáw.
o v
[ I . Beloved, ruell-beloved. A c t s x v . 2 5 , &
al. freq.
I I . Only, used w i t h r e g a r d to Christ as
t h e only Son of God. M a t . iii. 17. L u k e
ix. 3 5 . x x . 13. T h i s sense is frequent in
t h e L X X . Gen. xxii. 2 . J u d g . xi. 3 4 . J e r .
vi. 26. and is often used to render t h e H e b .
1>rr. T h e Greek lexicographers espe-
cially give t o this word t h e explanation
¡iovoyévr¡c, or only-born. See H e s y c h i u s
in voce, Poli. iii. c. 2. and Zonar. col. 14.
t h e Schol. on H o m e r . Iliad. £. 4 0 1 . L u -
cían Catapl. c. 10. and D a n . H e i n s . E x e r c .
SS. lib. ii. c. 1.]
'Ayyaptvu), from " Ayyapoe, below.—To
press or compel another to go somewhere,
or to carry some burden. occ. M a t . v. 4 1 .
xxvii. 3 2 . M a r k xv. 2 1 . T h i s word is
derived from t h e Persians, among whom
t h e king's messengers or letter-carriers CHAPPAR.
4 A r r
were called "Ayyapot or Angari. Thus
Suidas u n d e r the word "Ayyapoe, (JVTWQ
ÍKÓAUV ót Hépcrai rwv ¡3acn\Éu)v áyyÉXec-
A n d H e s y c h i u s , "Ayyapoc, ?/ Xé^ts Hepaiá)
—aripalvti Sé Kal r¿£ EK SiaSo^flS [SaatXiKae
ypajuparofópog. T h u s Herodotus tells u s ,
lib. viii. c. 9 8 , t h a t t h e Persian post was
called Ayyapr'i'iov. A n d Josephus, A n t . lib.
xi. cap. 6, § 2 , says, t h a t on Esther's m a r -
riage t h e k i n g of Persia despatched TOVQ
'Ayyápsc Xeyopívac, t h e Angari as t h e y
are called, to order his subjects t o k e e p
t h e nuptial feast. A probable derivation
of t h e Persic ñame "Ayyapoe seems to be
from t h e H e b . ITON a letter ( y or v being
inserted before y, as u s u a l ) ; t h o u g h t h e r e
is a passage in Xenophon which would
almost t e m p t one to deduce it from t h e
H e b . TUjí a crane, on account of t h e i r
prodigious speed. F o r , speaking of these
"Ayyapot, Cyropffid. lib. viii. p . 4 9 7 , edit.
Hutchinson, 8vo. he observes, $áo-i TIVES
0A"TTON T Í T N TEPA'NÍIN raúnjv rr¡v
•wopúav avvTTEiv. " Some say t h e y p e r -
form t h i s j o u r n e y more expeditiously than
cranes." B u t Michaelis says t h a t t h e
Persian word " ayyapEvsiv is from P e r s .
Hangar (or Hanjar) a dagger, worn as a
m a r k of a u t h o r i t y by t h e Couriers in P e r -
sia, who have t h e power of forcing t h e p r o -
prietors of horses at every post station t o
supply t h e m as often as they have need,
and to accompany t h e m on t h e road."
Chardin, Travels, vol. ii. p . 2 4 2 , 12mo.
says, Ces Couriers sont fort reconnoissables
á l e u r e q u i p a g e ; ils p o r t e n t le poignard,
&c. I n t r o d u c t . to N . T . translated b y
Marsh, vol. i. p . 159, where see also
Marsh's N o t e i, p . 4 2 9 . Whichsoever of
t h e above etymologies be r i g h t , these Per-
sian messengers h a d t h e royal a u t h o r i t y
for pressing horses, ships, a n d even m e n ,
to assist t h e m in t h e business on which
t h e y were e m p l o y e d : a n d we find in t h e
modern government of Persia, as j u s t ob-
served from Chardin, officers n o t u n l i k e
t h e ancient Angari. T h e y are called
Chappars (ultimately perhaps from t h e
Heb. to be active, nimble) a n d serve
to carry despatches between t h e court a n d
t h e provinces * . " W h e n a chappar sets
out, t h e master of the horse furnishes h i m
with a single h o r s e ; a n d w h e n t h a t is
weary, h e dismounts t h e first m a n h e
meets, and takes his horse. T h e r e is no
pardon for a traveller t h a t should refuse
* S e e NCIÍI and Complete Dictionary o/Arts, in
 A r r
to let a chappar liave his horse, ñor for
any other who should deny him t h e best
horse m his stable." See Sir John Char-
din's Travels, vol. i. p . 2 5 7 , a n d M r . Han-
ivay's, vol. i. p . 26'2. [Reland. Diss. Mise,
viii. p . 125. Stanl. ad JEschyl. Pers. 2 4 7 .
Brisson. de Persar. prineipatu i. § 138.]
F r o m t h e Persic ñame "Ayyapos, t h e
Greeks, after t h e y became acquainted with
t h e affairs of Persia, formed t h e verb ay-
yapevit), t h e passive of which ayyaptvEo-Qai
is used in Josephus, A n t . lib. xiii. cap. 2,
§ 3 , where Demetrias t h e son of Seleucus,
in a letter to Jonathan t h e high priest and
t h e people of t h e Jews, says, KEXEÚOI
pnSe ' A i T A P E r E S O A I ra TacatW vwo'Cv-
yia—" I order moreover t h a t t h e beasts of
t h e J e w s be not pressed." B u t no doubt
t h e Romans, in our-Saviour's t i m e , often
pressed not only their beasts b u t t h e m -
selves for the public service. T h e N . 'Ay-
yapsía is used by Arrian, E p i c t e t . lib. iii.
cap. 26. p . 3 5 9 , edit. Cantal, (iv. 1. 79.
Schw.)
'AyyE~iov, e, ro, from ayyog t h e same, or
immediately from the H e b . a basin.
A vessel of any lánd. oec. M a t . xiii. 4 8 .
xxv. 4 . — I n the L X X [as N u m b . iv. 9.] i t
generally answers to t h e H e b . '?a a vessel,
[ a n d is used in classical authors, as Xen.
CEcon. viii. 1 1 . ix. 2.]
'AyyeXt'a, ac, ?/, from ayyéXXu) to tell,
deliver a message.—A message, or com-
mandment delivered as a message. occ.
1 J o h n iii. 1 1 . [and so in iElian. V. H . I .
21. In the L X X simply message. Prov.
xii. 26. xxvi. 16.]
' A I T E ' A A Q , Ta lell, deliver a message.
T h i s V . t h o u g h common in t h e G r e e k
writers, occurs not in t h e N . T . b u t is
here inserted on account of its deriva-
tives.
"AyyeXos, a, ó, from ayyíXXw.—"
ñame not of nature b u t of office," says
Ausiin in Leigh's Crit. Sacr. "AyyeXos in
t h e L X X usually answers to t h e H e b .
"JN?D, which is of t h e same import.
I . A human messenger, a légate, an
agent. M a t . xi. 10. M a r k i. 2 . L u k e vii.
24. ix. 5 2 . J a m . ii. 2 5 . I t is spoken of
t h e preachers qfthe gospel, M a t . xxiv. 3 1 .
M a r k xiii. 2 7 ; b u t Cor, xii. 7,"AyyeXos
'Sárav iva ¡¡LE KoXafí^y, That t h e agent of
Satán, i. e. one of those whom in t h e p r e -
ceding chapter (ver. 15.) S t . Paul had
styled SIIUCOVHS ministers of S a t á n , might
buffet me." Comp. 2 Cor. x. 10. [ I n a
sense somewhat similar to t h i s , as agent
or spy, Schleusner e x p k i n s the difficult
5 A r r
passage 1 Cor. xi. 10. Ata rCov ayyéXuiv.
" O n account of those who are sent to
watch you." See H e u m a n ' s Disquisitio
E x e g e t i c a mpl rüv ayyíXwv. 1 Cor. xi. 10»
commemoratorum.]
I I . The bishop or president of a p a r t i -
cular church. Rev. i. 1 9. ii. 1, &al. Comp.
Gal. iv. 14. 2 Cor. v. 2 0 * .
I I I . A created intelligent ángel, w h e -
t h e r good, as M a t . xxiv. 3 6 . xxv. 3 1 . xxvi.
5 3 . M a r k xii. 2 5 . xiii. 3 2 . L u k e ii. 1 5 .
H e b . xii. 2 2 . comp. A c t s xii. 15 f, with
M a t . xviii. 10, a n d L u k e xv. 1 0 ; or
evil, M a t . xxv. 4 1 . Rom. viii. 3 8 . 1 Cor.
SE vi. 3 . 2 P e t . ii. 4. Jutle ver. 6. Observe
t h a t in Rev. viii. 13. t h e Alexandrian and
another ancient M S . and fifteen later ones,
together with several ancient versions a n d
printed editions, have t h e very remarkable
reading of aera for á y y é X e ; and t h a t
reading is embraced by Mili and Wetstein,
and received into t h e t e x t by Griesback.
I V . " A y y t X o c K u p í ' a , The ángel, age.ú,
or personator, of the Lord. T h i s was
evidently a human form surrounded w i t h
light or glory, with or in which Jehovah
was present. A n d t h u s t h e expression is
used, A c t s vii. 3 0 . (comp. ver. 3 2 , a n d
Exod. iii. 2—6.) L u k e ii. 9. A c t s xii. 7.
(comp. ver. 1 1 , 1 7 . ) M a t . xxviii. 2 . (comp.
ver. 3 , 4.) [and perhaps L u k e xii. 8, 9.
(comp. M a t . x. 3 2 . ) ]
"AyytXoe or ¿ "AyytXos, The Ángel,
when alone, is sometimes used in t h i s sense.
See A c t s vii. 3 5 , 3 8 . (comp. E x o d . xix. 3.,
9, 20.) J o h n v. 4. A n d sometimes " A y y e X o s
Kuoí'a seems plainly used for a created in-
telligent ángel, as L u k e i. 1 1 , (comp. ver.
19, 2 6 , 35 $.)
• See Scoti's Christian L i f e , vol. i i . pt. 2 . ch. 7-
sect. 9. p . 4 2 1 , & c .
t I n A c t s x i i . 1 5 , the persons s p e a k i n g seem
A p l a i n l y to alinde to the J e w i s h notion, that every
g o o d m a n h a d a Guardian Ángel to attend a n d
watch over h i m (see B p . BulFs E n g l i s h W o r k s ,
vol. ii. p . 5 0 1 ) . B u t as there is n o reason to t h i n k
that these persons spake b y divine inspiration, n o
conclusión can, from v/hat they said, b e drawn for
the truth o f that opinión. P e t e r h i m s e l f considered
the Á n g e l w h o delivered h i m from prison, n o t as h i s
o w n peculiar Ángel, b u t as the Ángel qfthe Lord,
ver. 1 1 . [ T h e s a m e notion is alluded t o M a t t . x v i i i .
10. S e e . L i g h t f o o t o n the above p a s s a g e o f A c t s , a n d
D o u g t c e i A n a l . Sacra N . T . E x c . lvii. p . m . 9 4 .
P e r h a p s also, from the J e w i s h notion o f an Á n g e l
presiding over every department and particular i n
nature, the expressions i n R e v e l . i x . 1 1 . x i v . 1 8 .
x v i . 5. m a y b e e x p l a i n e d . ]
í O n this very difficult subject of Angels the
reader w o u l d do well to consult Bate's exceHent
Inquiry into the Similitudes; t h o u g h he will find
that i n the exposition o f several of the above texts
I do not concur w i t h that learned writer.
 a r i 1
V. ''AyysAoi, LOV, ¿Í. The crealcd agents
or angels of material n a t u r e , t h a t is, t h e
Jire, light, and spirit, or gross aif, by
which Jehovah acts, and becomes visible
to his c r e a t u r e s ; whence t h e y are called
his angels, i. e. personators, instrumcnts
of action or visibility. Comp. H e b . i. 6,
with P s . xcvii. 7. (see t h e L X X ) ; H e b .
5. 7, w i t h P s . civ. 4>*; and H e b . ii. 2.
A c t s vii. 5 3 . Gal!, iii. 19, with Exod.
xix. 18. D e u t . iv. 11. H a b . iii. 3 . Comp.
Aiaráyr].—Since, as very + learned and ex-
oellent men have observed, it appears to
have been t h e Apostle's direct design in
Heb. i. to prove t h a t t h e Son was superior
to the Angels, in opposition to t h e Simonians
and Cerinthians of t h a t time, who a t t r i -
buted t h e formation of t h e world to Angels,
and who looked upon Jesús as a mere
man, and as such inferior to A n g e l s ;
and since t h e t e x t s of t h e Oíd T e s t a m e n t ,
to which t h e Apostle refers, lead us to
utiderstand t h e word "AyysXoi Angels, in
t h i s first chapter to t h e H e b r e w s , of t h e
material agents of Nature ; is i t not evi-
d e n t t h a t the Simonians, Cerinthians, and
other ancient Gnostics, and their suc-
cessors t h e Valentinians, so far as t h e y
understood themselves, meant by their
Angels or JEonS no other than these ma-
terial agents ? Accordingly Irenceus (Adv.
Hocr. lib. ii. cap. 19. p a g . 140, edit.
Grabe) charges the Gnostics, and par-
ticularly t h e Valentinians, with having
s-tolen t h e genealogies of their JEons from
t h e Theogonia of t h e healhen poet Anli-
phanes : " Unde ipsi assument.es sibi fa-
bulam, quasi naturali disputatione cotn-
mcnti sunt, solummodo denudantes eorum
nomina. F r o m whom, says he, t h e y bor-
rowed their fable, and forged a physical
disquisition, as it were, only changing their
ñames." I n t h e same pago he adds, " Et
non solum quic apud cómicos, &c. A n d
t h e y aro convicted of publishing for their
own, not only what t h e comic poets have
advanced, b u t t h e y also colleet together
w h a t has been said by all those who are
ignorant of God, and are called Philoso-
phers, aud p u t t i n g together many wretched
shreds and scraps, they have endeavoured
by subtle speeches to set off the motley
liction: introducing a doctrine iu one r e -
" See CampucWs F r e l i m i n a r y Dissertations to
the G o s p e l s , p . 3 7 0 , & c
t B i s h o p Biilt, O p e r a , p . G4, and 3 2 0 , edit.
fírnhu. VfutcrlaniTs Importance of the Doctrine of
tile T r i n i t y , y>- 4<J\, A l edit. C o m p .
Obscrv. Sacr. lib. v. cap. x i i , & x i i i .
6 a r r
spect indeed nem, because at present it is
palmed upon t h e world by new artífices ;
b u t yet a doctrine oíd and unprofitable,
because patched u p of oíd notions which
smell strong of ignorance and irreligión."
This blessed champion for Christianity t h e n
goes on to support this charge, heavy
as it is, by an induction of particulars.
—Epiphanius, in like manner, t r e a t i n g
of t h e more ancient Gnostics, t h e p r e -
decessors of Valentinus, and from whom he
derived most of his heresy, says, t h a t t h e
Greek poets, and thúvfables, gave rise t o
all t h e s e c t s * : implying, no doubt, t h a t
tliese eider Gnostics likewise b o r r o w e d t h e
genealogies oí their Angels or JEons from
t h e oíd Greek poets, such as Orphcus,
Hesiod, Anliphanes, Philistion, &c. who,
it is certain, in their Theogonies or Ge-
nealogies of the Gods, meant only to d e -
scribe t h e parts or conditions oí material
nature, particularly of t h e heavens, and
their operations on each other. T h u s t h e n
t h e Gnostic doctrine of JEons or Angels,
oí their m a k i n g t h e world, and of t h e
religious regard due to t h e m , revived only
under other ñames (as Irenams repeatedly
observes) t h e vilest abominations of phy-
sical heatkenism, and not only so, b u t by
blasphemous jargon set aside t h e essential
divinity of t h e Son of God. F o r further
satisfaction o n t h i s subject t h e R e a d e r w i l l
do well to consult Irefiwus, as above c i t e d ;
Vossius's note on 2 t y % , in Ignaiius's
E p i s t . to Magnesians, § S, vol. ii. p . 1 3 1 ,
edit. Russel; Gale's C o u r t of G e n t . p t . iii.
book 2, chap. 1, § 7- p- 123, &c. and Cave'?
Life of Tilus, p . GO, 6 1 . I t should, how-
ever, be remarked, t h a t Enfield, whom see
in H i s t . of Philos. vol. ii. book 3 , ch. 3 ,
deduces t h e Gnostic h e r e s i e s a m o n g C h r i s -
tians from t h e eastern or Zoroaslrean p h i -
losophy, especially from t h e Oriental doc-
t r i n e of Emanalion ; and of Irenmus in
particular he observes, vol.ii. p.~296,7, t h a t
t h o u g h " he employed his learning and
industry in refuting t h e Gnostic heresies,
which liad, even in t h e first age of t h e
Church, arisen from t h c unión of t h e dog-
mas of t h e O r i e n t a l , E g y p t i a n , and P l a -
tonic philosophy with t h e doctrine of
C h r i s t ; i t is, however, to be r e g r e t t e d
t h a t this learned and zealous advócate for
Christianity, having been less conversant
with the Oriental t h a n t h e Greek philoso-
phy, did not perceive t h e t r u c origin of t h e
heresies which he undertook to refute."
Viliingn, * Hreres. x x v i . tom. i. p. Oí!, edit. Colon, Conf.
Hieres, x x x i . p. 1G5.
 A ri
"Ayi, an ady. of compellalion or ad-
dress, properly t h e imperative 2d pers.
sing. present of t h e V. ayio to lead, go.
comp. "Aya> V I . — Come, conté nom. occ.
Jara. iv. 13. v. 1. Wetstein, on J a m . iv.
13, shows t h a t the best G r e e k writers, p a r -
cicularly H o m e r , apply this word in like
manner where several persons are ad-
dressed.
'AyéXri, r¡c,'/) from the V. &yu¡ to drive,
or perhaps from t h e H e b . a bulloclc or
«leer; for in t h e ancient language of
H o m e r , 'Ayé\r¡ is scarcely ever applied but
to a herd qf the beeve kind. See D a m m i
Lexicón *.•—A herd, a drove. In t h e N. T .
i t is only applied to swine. occ. M a t . viii.
3 0 , 3 1 , 3 2 . M a r k v. 1 1 , 13. L u k e viii. 32,
3 3 . [1 Sara. xvii. 34.]
Eimf 'AyeviiuXóynTOQ, a, ó, r¡, from ci
0 yyiacrpévr] in Rom. xv. 16, and cite a si-
neg. and yeveaXoyéoj, to trace a genealogy.
•—Without a genealogy, or pedigree, hav-
ing no genealogy, i. e. from any sacerdotal
family, as t h e Levitical priests had,
namely from t h a t of Aaron, Exod. xl. 15.
occ. H e b . vii. 3 . comp. ver. 0'. 'AyeveaXó-
•yr¡TOQ can hardly refer to Melchisedec's
having no genealogy or pedigree recorded
in the Scriptures, because his being áye-
vs.a\óyr)Toc is mentioned as one instance
of his resemblance to Christ, whose g e -
nealogy is particularly traced both by St.
M a t t h e w and St. Luke, but who was not
however descended from t h e sacerdotal
¡ine, but sprung from J u d a , of which
tribe Moses spake nolhing concerning
priesthood, Heb. vii. 14.
E Ü p 'Ayevr)s, ÉOQ, ove, ó Kal í/, Kal TO
0
ayeres, from a neg. and yévoc birth.—
Base, ignoble, occ. 1 Cor. i. 2 8 . [ P l u t .
V i t . P a r a l l . Peric. c. 24. In Greek writers
t h e word is used either for one who has no
children, or one who is degenerate.~]
'Ayiá£(d, from &ywQ holy.
I . To sepárate, set apart, consécrate,
or sanctify, from a common to a higher,
or sacred use or purpose. Mat. xxiii. 17,
19. J o h n x. 36 f. xvii. 19. (Comp. ver.
17.) H e b . x. 29. xiii. 12. Comp. 1 Cor. vii.
14. [2 T i m . xi. 2 1 . See Gen. xi. 3 . Lev.
xxvii. '26.]
I I . To esieem or reverence as holy or
sacred, and, when applied to God, as in-
fmilely separaled from, and superior to,
all created beings. M a t . vi. 9. L u k e xi. 2.
1 P e t . iii. 15. Comp. Isa. viii. 12, 13.
xxix. 2 3 .
* [ H e r e P a r k h u r s t is mistaken. I t is applied to
horses, II. x i x . 2 8 1 . ]
t See D r . G e o r g e Campbell'o Translation and
Notes.
A ri
I I I . To purify, cleanse from pollulion,
whether ceremonially, as under t h e Levi-
tical dispeusation, H e b . ix. 13. comp. Lev.
xvi. 1 9 ; or really and t r u l y , by t h e of-
fering of the body of Christ, H e b . x. 10,
14, 2 9 . Comp. ver. 2, and ch. ii. 11. ix.
14. [ H e n e e it may signify, according to
Schleusner, to offer up as a viclim. J o h n
xvii. 19. See Chrysost. H o m i l . lxxii. on
J o h n . B u t t h e r e is, I think, with defer-
ence to Schleusner, no reason for giving a
different sense t o t h e word in t h i s verse
from t h a t which m u s t be assigned to it in
v. 1 7, where t h e same phrase oceurs. H e
explains v. 19- t h u s , " I offer u p myself
as a victim, t h a t t h e y may be ready to
offer themselves as victims for t h e faith."
H e and Kopp give t h e same sense to
milar use of the word from Dionys. H a l i c .
vii. 72. F r o m this meaning arises also
another, lo expiale, to redeem, lo be the
aulkor qf forgiveness ofsins, as in E p h .
v. 26. H e b . x. 10. xiii. 12. See also es-
pecially H e b . ii. 11, which Schleusner
translates " T h e Redeemer aud t h e R e -
deemed are from one common o r i g i n " —
with reference to Christ's h u m a n n a t u r e . ]
I V . To sanctify, malee holy, séparated
from sin, and so consecraled to God, A c t s
x x . 3 2 . xxvi. 18. E p h . v. 2 6 . 1 T h e s s . v.
2 3 . comp. Rev. xxii. 1 1 .
[V. I n the L X X , To celébrate, malee
lenown, or proclaim. See Joel i. 14. ii. 15.
Comp. below "Aytog.]
'Aytairpds, ov, ó, from iiyiutrpai perf.
pass of ayiá'Cto.—Sanciifi'catión, sanctity.
Rom. vi. 19. 1 T h e s s . iv. 3 , 4. [2 T h e s s .
ii. 13. 1 P e t . i. 2 . I t refers, in t h e N . T „
exclusively to t h e moral n a t u r e . I n l
Cor. i. 3 0 , Schleusner says, it is The
author and promoter of sanctity. Judg.
xvii. 3 . 2 Mac. ii. 17.]
"Aytoe, a, ov, from a neg. and yrj the
earth, q. d. séparated from earth ; or r a -
ther from ayos a thing sacred, purity,
which from cífw, to venérate. So t h e L a -
tin suspicio means both to loóle up, and to
honour.
I. Holy, set apart, or separaled for sa-
cred purposes, or for t h e service qf God *.
M a t , iv. 5. (comp. Isa. xlviii. 2. 3 Mac.
vi. 4.) vii. 6. xxvii. 5 3 . M a r k i. 2 4 . L u k e
i. 3 5 . ii. 2 3 . A c t s iii. 2 1 . vi. 13. xxi. 2 8 .
Rom. xi. 16. 1 Cor. iii. 17. E p h . iii. 5.—•
In 1 T h e s s . iii. 1 3 , áywis seem to denote
[* T h i s i s the defmition o f S t . C h r y s o s t o m , H o m .
L X X X I I . i n J o h . xupíu»? «yitx r a riZ @ny uvamtaf.a.
C y r i l l . A l e x . ad J o h . x. 3 4 , s a y s , ra aip^.i'Cófiivx
sis ¡W/HII BiS. S e e M a c r o h , Saturn. iii. c. 3 & 7.]
 A r i s A r K

t h e Holy Angels, by whom Christ shall be iv. 13. I n H e b . ix. 8, 12, 24. x. 19.
attended at t h e day of j u d g m e n t . Comp. Schleusner says we m u s t u n d e r s t a n d hea-
M a t . xvi. 27- xxv. 3 1 . J u d e ver. 14, and ven. See Schottg. H o r . H e b r . p . 1216.
M a c k n i g h t ' s note on 1 T h e s s . " A y i o j ' á y i W occurs in the L X X , E x o d .
I I . Holy, sacred, scparated at an in- xxvi. 3 3 - ] — " A y í o e . and its derivatives in
finite dislance from all creatures. J o h n t h e L X X nsually answer to t h e H e b . ttn¡?,
xvii. 1 1 . I n t h i s sense the word is often which is of the same meaning.
applied t o t h e Spirit of God, t h e t h i r d [fgp0 'Ayiórrie, TTJTOQ, r), from a y i o e . —
person of t h e Holy Trinity. who are called Holiness. occ. H e b . xii. 10. Comp. 1 P e t .
O'ní'M 0 > t i n p Holy Aleim, Josh. x x i v . 19, i. 1 4 — 2 3 . 2 Mac. xv. 2.
a n d c u n p Holy Ones, P r o v . ix. 10. xxx. 'Ayiwcrvvn, r¡e, r¡, from a y i o s . — S a n c t i -
3 . [ T h e Scripture (of t h e O. T.) is called f catión, sanctity, holiness. occ. 2 Cor. vii.
á y í a Rom. i. 2. probably as proceeding 1. 1 Thess. iii. 13. R o m . i. 4, where
from this H o l y Spirit. T h e epithet is rrvevpa ayiwrrvvr¡Q seems an Hebraical e x -
constantly applied to our Saviour in this pression for irvEvpa ayiov the holy spirit.
sense, A c t s iii. 14. iv. 2. L u k e iv. 3 4 . 1 See Doddridge's note, and comp. L u k e i.
J o h n ii. 2 0 . ] 3 5 . [ B r e t s c h n e i d e r says, " irv. ay. is t h a t
I I I . Holy, sanctifed, separated from rrvEvpa which made Jesús an object of
sin, and consecrated to God, M a r k vi. 20. worship and veneration. O t h e r s " (he
1 Cor. vii. 34. E p h . i. 4. Col. i. 2 2 . 1 P e t . means Schleusner) " explain this phrase,
i. 15, 16. 2 P e t . iii. 12. 1 J o h n ii. 20. ' T h e Divine Majesty,' and refer to t h e
F r o m t h e 1 st and 3d senses of t h i s word L X X , P s . cxlv. 4 5 . I n t h e other places
Christians are very frequently in t h e N . T . , CEcumenius (on 2 Cor. vii. 1.) and T h e o -
particularly in St. P a u l ' s Epistles, called phylact (on 1 T h e s s . iii. 13) explain t h e
"Ayioi,holy,saints. [ S e e A c t s i x . 13.(comp. word by aw<ppoo-vvn."~]
v. 14.) 3 2 , 4 1 . xxvi. 10. Rom. i. 7. viii. 27- ' A r K A A H , r¡Q, i). I t is usually deduced
xii. 13. xvi. 15. 1 Cor. vi. 1, 2. vii. 14. from 'Ayiciy t h e same, but seems r a t h e r a
Rev. xiii. 7. xx. 6. Chrysostom ( H o m . I. in derivative from t h e H e b . bpi¡ to be crooked,
E p . ad Rom. i. 7) says, áyíne Sé TOVQ TTITOVS as is likewise t h e adjective á y i c ú X o s crooked.
(ca\£t7ráj'rae,and(Hom.X. i n E p . ad H e b . ) —The arm, when bent. I t is sometimes,
irac m^tjQ ayioQ, KCIOÓ m^óg ITI, K<}V tcoerpi- t h o u g h rarely, used in t h e singular by t h e
KOQ i¡ riQ. T o t h i s m e a n i n g Schleusner profane writers (as by Lucían in D i a l .
refers t h e áyiov (¡>i\r¡pa in R o m . xvi. 16. N e p t . et N e r e i d . " " E y / w a nal rbv vibv
1 Cor. xvi. 2 0 . 2 Cor. xiii. 12. See 1 ! ? r " A r K A ' A H 2 ¡ — A n d h a v i n g h e r s o n upon
Mac. i. 4 8 . (comp. x. 39.) E c c l u s . iv. her arm"); b u t in t h e N . T . i t occurs
1 5 . 1 Sam. x x i . 4 . ] I n Rev. xv. 3 . t h e only in t h e p l u r a l " A y K a X a i , uiv, ai. The
Alexandrian and seventeen later M S S . , arms considered as bent or crooked to r e -
t o g e t h e r with several ancient versions and ceive any t h i n g . occ. L u k e ii. 2 8 . [ S e e
p r i n t e d editions, for áyíu>v read kQvwv, Prov. v. 2 9 . ]
w'hich reading is embraced by W e t s t e i n , " A r i í I S T P O N , a, rb, from t h e H e b .
whom see. [ F r o m t h i s sense arises a n - piü *, lo encompass.—A hook, from its
o t h e r — R e q u i r i n g holiness, as in Rom. vii. curve form. occ. M a t . xvii. 2 7 . T h e L X X
12. 2 P e t . ii. 2 1 , the L a w and Command- likewise use it for a Jish-hook, answering
m e n t are called ayiai. And t h i s seems to t h e H e b . r o n , Job xl. 20. Isa. xix. 8.
t h e sense of icXíjcric áyia in 2 T i m . i. 9. [ H a b . i. 15. and for any hook, 2 K i n g s
See D a n . xi. 28, 3 0 . ] xix. 2 6 . ]
I V . "Kyiov, rb, A place set apart to sa- i ijgf ' A r i i Y ' P A , a c , i).
cred pnrposes, a holy place. H e b . i x . 1. I . An anchor, from its curve form. occ.
[ S e e Josephus A . J . iii. 6, 4 . ] "Ayía, r a , A c t s xxvii. 2 9 , 3 0 , 4 0 . On v. 13, see
The holy of holies, or second tabernacle. Ros, p, 10. or Blair, Obs. in N . T . p . 3 4 5 .
H e b . ix. 8, 2 4 , 2 5 . x. 19. xiii. 11. I t is I I . I t is metaphorically applied to evan-
t h e same as t h e " A y i a 'hylwv, H e b . ix. 3 . , gélica! hope, which, amid all t h e waves
and is once used for t h e holy heavens of and storms of temptations and calamities,
Jehovah, of which it was a type. H e b . ix. preserves the believers sleady and safe. occ.
12. (comp. ver. 2 4 . ) ; as "Ayía likewise is H e b . vi. 19, where see Wetstein [ a n d S u i -
H e b . x. 19. [ T h e word óíyioc occurs in cer in voce. E u r . H e c . 2 9 . ]
t h i s sense, A c t s vii. 3 3 . 2 P e t . i. 18. a n d
of Jerusalem, M a t . iv. 5. xxvii. 5 3 . Rev. * F r o m w h i c h word m a y likewise b e derived the
Greek words áyxal the arms w h e n bent, ayxun t h e
xi. 2. x x i . 2. To áyiov is generally the
henil, of the a r m s , ¿Lyv.uxi a valley, hollow, and t h e
temple, cüpa being understood. Ecclus. L a t i n uncus curve, crooked, uncirius a hook.

A r N
Sjg§° "Ayvaejoc, a, ó, ?/, from a neg. and
yvónrui, to smooth cloth by carding, which
s e e u n d e r TvaxpEÍg.— Unfulled, which hath
not passed the hands of the fuller, and
" which is consequently much harsher t h a n
what has been often washed and worn, and
therefore, yielding less than t h a t , will tear
away the edges to which it is sewed. T h i s
sense A l b e r t i has vindicated from excep-
tions, Observ. p . 71 — 7 6 . " Doddridge. occ.
M a t . ix. 16. M a r k ii. 2 1 . comp. L u k e v. 3 6 .
'Ayi'fia, ac, ?;, from ayvóg, chaste.—
Chastity, purity. occ. 1 T i m . iv. 12. v. 2.
[ S e e Greev. a d ' H e s i o d . O p . 7 3 3 . I n t h e
L X X its sense is wider. 2 Chron. xxx. 1 9 . ]
'Ayví'Cw, from ayvÓQ puré.
I . To purify externally, ceremonially,
or levitically. occ. J o h n xi. 5 5 . [ S e e
Numb. xxxi. 23. Ex. xix. 1 0 * . ]
I I . 'Ayví'Co\xai, To be separated, or to
sepárate oneselfby a vow of Nazariteship.
occ. A c t s xxi. 24, 26. xxiv. 18. Comp.
N u m . vi. 2, 3 , 5, where in t h e L X X both
t h e V . ayví'Copai, and the N . áyvitr¡xbg
auswer to H e b . nn t -
I I I . To purify internally and spi-
ritually. occ. J a m . iv. 8. 1 P e t . i. 2 2 . 1
J o h n iii. 3 .
'Ayvicrpóc, from ijyvuxpaL perf. pass. of
ayvífbi.—Purification. o c c A c t s xxi. 2 6 .
[ B r e t s c h n e i d e r says, Chastity; Schleusner
refers it to t h e execution of t h e various rites
to be performed by those u n d e r a vow. See
Dion. H a l . A n t . R . iii. 22. N u m . viii. 8 . ]
'Ayvoéíú, ü, from a neg. and voéio to con-
cerne in the mind, to know, y being in-
serted for t h e sake o f t h e s o u n d ; or r a t h e r
from u neg. and obsol. yvóto to know.
I. Not to know, to be ignorant. A c t s xiii.
27. R o m . i. 13. x. 3 . 2 Cor. ii. 11. vi. 9.
Gal. i. 22, & al. freq. A c t s xvii. 2 3 .
Whom therefore ye worship ayvoüvrEg,
without knowing him, do I declare unto
you. [ I n the passage 1 Cor. xiv. 3 8 .
Schleusner renders the word to doubt, and
refers to Phavorinus. Bretschneider says,
ciyvoéid is t h e r e tobe ignorant or unskilful.
I n t h e L X X it denotes to sin, H o s . iv.
1 6 ; to act foolishly, N u m . xii. 1 1 . ]
I I . Not to nnderstand, M a r k ix. 3 2 .
L u k e i x . 4 5 . 2 P e t . ii. 12.
I I I . To err, sin through ignórame.
H e b . v. 2. I n t h i s last sense t h e L X X
use it several times for the H e b . tiim, and
JJttf to err, deviate. [ S o Bretschneider,
citing Ecclus. v. 18. Polyb. v. 1 1 . 5 . ]
* [ O n the J e w i s h R i t e s o f Purification, see
Lightf. H o r . H e b r . p . 1 0 7 8 . ]
t [See Lightf. H . H . p . 3G9, and M i c h a e l . J u s . ' Sacr, N . T . E x c . 5 8 . S o m e render the v/oráforcign,
M o s a i c . P . I I I . p . 1.]
9 A T O
'Ayvór¡pa, arog, ró, from ayvoéoi.—An
error, sin of error, or ignorance. occ.
H e b . i x . 7. [ I n L X X Gen. xliii. 12.
Schleusner gives, fortasse error est com-
missus. B u t on t h i s i m p o r t a n t word see
Archbishop Magee on t h e Atoneroent, vol.
i. p . 3 4 1 , and foll.]—In t h e L X X i t a n -
swers to t h e H e b . TMWD-
"Ayvoia,ag,7i,fromciyvoÉu>.—Ignorance,
want of knowledge. occ. A c t s ü i . 17. xvii.
30. E p h . iv. 18. 1 P e t . i. 14. [ I n t h e two
last it refers to ignorance of t rué religión.]—•
I n the L X X it answers to t h e H e b . o » K ,
[ a n d ratlíN guilt, mw error, and j?U/5
transgression. See 2 Chron. xxviii. 15.
Lev. xxii. 14. Gen. xxvi. 10.]
'Ayvóg, i], ov, from óíyog purity, which
see u n d e r "Aytog.
I. Chaste, puré. occ. Phil. iv. 8. T i t . ii. 5 .
J a m . iii. 17. 1 T i m . v. 22. [ P r o v . x i x . 1 3 . ]
I I . Puré, clear from sin or guilt. occ.
2 Cor. vii. 11. xi. 2. 1 P e t . iii. 2. 1 J o h n
iii. 3, in which last passage it is applied to
Christ, who was sepárate from sinners,
without sin, spot, or blemish. Comp. H e b .
vii. 26. iv. 15. 1 P e t . i. 19. ii. 2 2 . Prov.
x x . 9.—This word, and its derivatives, i n
t h e L X X usually answer to t h e H e b . 'into
puré, clean, and Wip sepárate, holy.
SfSp 'Ayvórrjg, rijrog, r), from ayvóg.—
0
Purity. occ. 2 Cor. vi. 6.
^^"'Ayi/üie^dv.fromáyyóc.—Purely,
sincerély. occ. P h i l . i. 16.
'Ayviúa'ia, ag, r¡, from ¿.yvoéco, or r a t h e r
^from a neg. and yvürrig knowledge.—Ig-
norance. occ. 1 Cor. xv. 3 4 . 1 P e t . ii. 1 5 .
[ A n d see J o b x x x v . 16. Wisd. xiii. 1. I n
t h e passage of P e t e r , Schleusner translates
ayvtotjía as false accusalions from ig-
norance, and so B r e t s c h n . ]
{§§¡P "Ayvwo-roQ, a, ó, r¡, from a n e g . a n d
yviorrróg known.— Unknown. occ. W i s d .
xviii. 3 . 2 Mac. i. 19. ii. 7. Acts xvii. 2 3 .
Lucian, or whoever was the a u t h o r of t h e
| dialogue intitled Philopatris, malees one of
t h e interlocutors swear, Ni) rbv " A r N í 2 -
2 T 0 N ív 'x\0r¡válg, " By t h e unknown G o d
in A t h e n s \" § 1 3 ; who is again mentioned
§ 2 9 . (See pag. 9 9 7 , 1 0 1 3 , tom. ii. edit.
B e n e d . ) — B u t for a more particular illus-
tration of t h e t e x t I refer t h e r e a d e r to
W h i t b y , D o d d r i d g e , W e t s t e i n , and Bishop
Pearce on t h e place, and to Ellis's K n o w -
ledge of Divine T h i n g s , from Revelatíon,
&c. ch. iv. p . 2 4 2 , & seq. l s t edit. *
' A y o p á , ag, -r), " aplace, dg ov ayúptrai
* [ S e e Gell. N . A . I I . 2 8 . M i n u c . O c t a v . c. 6 .
Dieterich. L e x . Phil. N . T . p. 3 0 . Dougt. Anal.
as i g n o t u s i n L a t í n . V i r g . Mu. v. 7 9 5 . i x , 4 8 6 . ]
 ato 10
ü \áoc, iu which t h e people assemble,"
says E u s t a t h i u s , plainly deducing i t from
áyeípo) to gather together, which is an evi-
d e n t derivative from t h e H e b . Us^ of t h e
same meaning. [A place of public con-
course ; henee, aforum, where justice was
administered, A c t s xvi. 19.—where ad-
dresses to t h e people were made, A c t s xvii.
17. (in this case in theCeramicus of A t h e n s .
See Olearius de gestis P a u l i in urbe A t h .
a p u d Iken. Nov. T h e s . T . ii. p . 6 6 2 . ) —
where objeets of traffic, especially food,
were exposed tosale. See Suidas a n d P h a v o -
rinus. H e n e e , i t mennslliese objeets t h e m -
selves, as t h e Scholiast on A r i s t . A c h . 2 1 .
says, (jai avra r a ¿liria trnpaíveí, t o which
words copied b y Suidas, and then by P h a -
vorinus, t h e latter adds ijroi ra iwrpcio-Kc-
fxeva. I n Ezek. xxvii. 12. i t is the traffic
or fair in t h e forum. In M a r k vii. 4 . some
t r a n s í a t e , They do not eat meat bought in
the forum, which is a G e r m á n idiom also,
vom M a r k t e essen, to eat of the market.
See X e n . Cyrop. vi. 2 , 1 1 . P l u t . P y r r h .
12. Casaub. ad Polyb. p . 183. ed. Gronov.
Cuper. Obs. iii. 2 0 . Krebs. Obss. Flav. p .
8 5 . Some, however, with our translation,
h e r e supply yevópevoi, and as in H e r o d .
ii. 7 8 . iiciav airó SEÍTCVÜ yiviovrai, construe
And after being at the forum. See Plerod.
vi. 129- a n d Fisch. ad Well. iii. p . 108.
Lastly, i t means any public place of mcet-
ing, as t h e streets, &c. M a t . x i . 16. ( T o
this meaning Bretschn. refers M a t . x x . 3 ;
b u t Schl. says t h a t the labourers for hire in
Judsea w e n t t o t h e market-places, which
were always near t h e gates) xxiii. 7. M a r k
vi. 5 6 . xii. 3 8 . L u k e vii. 3 2 . x i . 4 3 . x x .
4 6 . J o b ii. 3 . See too Eccl. xii. 4 , 5.]
'Ayopa(oj, from ayopá, a market-place.
I . To btiy. M a t . xiii. 4 4 . xiv. 15, & al.
freq. [ I t is properly tofrequent the forum
(see Salinas, de U s u r . p . 3 3 9 . and Schol.
Aristoph. E q . 1370. Ach. 720. Hesychius
and P h a v o r i n u s ) : and as we have seen t h a t
in t h e forum traffic was carried on, henee i t
is lo buy, a n d i t is construed usually with
an accus. and gen. of t h e price, or sometimes
w i t h iv and ¿V. See in L X X , Gen. xii. 5 7 .
D e u t . ii. 6. Isaiah lv. 1. A s slaves were
bought a n d sold in t h e forum among other
t h i n g s , t h e word, say Schl. a n d Bretschn.,
carne to signify also to redeem, and t o be
used of those slaves who were b o u g h t a t a
fixed price a n d set a t liberty. W h e n c e ]
I I . I t is applied t o our redemption by
t h e precióles blood of C h r i s t . 1 Cor. vi. 2 0 .
vii. 2 3 . Rev. v. 9.
!¡5§P 'Ayopaioc, s, ó, y\, from áyopá, a
market-place.
ATP
I. I n general, Of or belonging to the
market-place ov forum.
I I . 'AyopaToi, óí, Loósefellows spending
their time idle in the market-place. occ.
A c t s xvii. 5 , where see W e t s t e i n .
I I I . Judicial, forensic, comp. 'Ayopá.
OCC. A c t s x i x . 3 8 . 'Ayópaíot* (jipipai
namely) ayovrai, The forensic or court
Cdaysj are holden. T h i s interpretation,
which is t h a t of Casaubon (on T h e o p h r a s t .
E t h . Char. V I . ) and Grotius, seems t h e
best. T o confirm it, those learned writers
observe, t h a t t h e dies fasti among t h e R o -
m a n s were t h e days for judicial proceed-
ings. For 'Ayopaíoi ayovrai we should
say in English, The courts are silting, or
are holden.
'Ayopevia (in composition áyopéw), from
ayopá, an assembly of men, concio.—Pro-
perly, To speak in or to a public assem-
bly, a n d thence simply to speak. This V.
oceurs n o t in t h e N . T . , b u t is inserted on
account of its derivatives.
[ f g g "APPA, ae,
3
perhaps from t h e
H e b . "UN lo colleet—-A capture or catch-
ing; spoken of fishes, a draught. occ. L u k e
v. 4 , 9 f-
Elgp 'Aypápparog,
0
a, ¿, ?/, from a n e g .
and ypáppa a letter, learning.—Illiterale
unlearned. occ. Acts iv. 1 3 . comp. J o h n
vii. 15. [ T h i s is i t s sense in profane a u -
thors. See X e n . M e m . iv. 2. 2 0 . Arrian.
D . E . ii. 14. ] 5. P e r h a p s in t h e N . T . it
means, Ignorant of the Scripiures, which
were called ra ypáppara.~\
[¡§1?° 'AypavXiw, ñ, from áypós, theficld,
and avkl'Copai to abide, which s e e . — T o
abide in the field, or, in the open air;
when spoken of men, i t usually implies the
night X- See Bochart, vol. ii. 4 5 2 , 3 ; b u t
comp. Wolfius C u r . Philol. occ. L u k e ii.
8. Comp. Gen. x x x i . 4 0 . [Graev. L e c t t .
Iíesiod. c. xv. p . 8 2 . a n d Suieer.]
'AypEiíw, from aypa a taking, a capture.
I. To take, or catch, as beasts, birds,
or fishes. I n this sense i t is used by t h e
profane writers, [ b u t does n o t often occur,
H e r o d . ii. 9 5 . X e n . A n . v. 3 . 9. J o b x . 16.
Prov. vi. 2 6 . ]
I I . F i g u r a t i v e l y , To catch, ensnare, in
discourse or talk, occ. M a r k xii. 1 3 . [So
in L a t i n , captare, M a r t i a l . ix. 90.]
'Aypií'Xaioe, a, r¡, from aypiog wild, a n d
* [ S u i d a s s a y s that w h e n u s e d i n t h i s sense t h e
accent i s t h r o w n back. Bretschneider s a y s , that
íyugoTmi here a r e , P l e a d e r s , a n d translates, L e t t h e
Pleaders b e b r o u g h t , a n d t h e J u d g e s b e p r e s e n t . ]
f [ T h e capture is put for the thing caught, as in
P l i n . N . H . x . c . 4 0 . A d d M\. H i s t . A n . i. 3 . 1 8 . ]
í [ H e s y c h . ¿i h mxrífhnrts, and s o P h a -
vorinus.]
 Aro ii Ara
ékaía the olive tree.— The wild olive-lrce. B u t as to t h e aorists we may always observe
occ. Rom. xi. 17, 24. [ T h i s tree was bar- this difference: t h e I s t aor. i)í;a, alpv,
ren, whence S t . P a u l likens ,the Gentiles al,aipi, is always from ayu> to bréale; a n d
to i t . ] t h e 2 d aor. i¡yov, and ijyayov, is always
"Aypwg, ta, wv, from aypóe tliejield. from ayio lo bring. T h o u g h ayio to bring
I . Belonging to the Jield, ivild, occ. M a t . be used i n t h e fut. a£w, y e t we shall
iii. 4 . M a r k i. 6. I n which passages i t is scarcely ever find t h e I s t aor. Ifyn, a\ov,
applied to honey, which in Jadea was fre- in this signification, b u t always in t h a t
q u e n t l y found in hollow trees or t h e clefts other of breaking*." Comp. Karcíyw.
of rocks. Comp. D e u t . xxxii. 13. J u d . I . Transitively, To bring, lead genl.ly,
xiv. 8. 1 Sam. xiv. 2 5 , 26. P s . Ixxxi. 16. and without violence. A c t s v. 2 6 . ix. 2 7 .
H e n e e i t is so often called a land jlowing xxi. 16. 2 T i m . iv. I I .
with honey. B u t see Bochari's excellent I I . To bring, carry, drag, or hurry
Obscrvations on this subject, vol. iii. 51 9. away by forcé and violence. M a t . x . 18.
Comp. also Suicer, Thesaur. in MEAI. M a r k xiii. 1 1 . L u k e iv. 2 9 . x x i . 12. A c t s
I I . Of animáis, as opposed to tame ones, vi. 1'2. xvii. 5, 19, & al. [So in S o p h . A n t .
and henee, wild, jierce, turbulent, tem- 392. Iliad. ix. 5 8 9 , a n d i n L a t i n ducere,
pesluous. J u d e , ver. 13. So Wisd. xiv. 1, Plin. E p p . x . 97.]
"Aypia Kvpara. See also Wetstein. I I I . To lead, rule, govern. Rom. viii.
'Aypi'iQ, u, ó, from tlie verb áyeípio, bc- 14. Gal. v. 18. 2 T i m . iii. 6. 1 Cor. xii. 2 .
cause the necessaries of life are there and I V . To lead, entice. Rom. ii. 4 . Polyb.
thence collccted. See Eccles. v. 9. v. 15.
I. The jield. M a t . vi. 28, 3 0 . V. To spend, hold, or celébrate a p a r t i -
I I . A Jield, a particular spot of culti- cular time or solemnity. See M a t . xiv. 6-
vated ground. M a t . xiii. 2 4 , 27, 44. xxvii. (and Wetstein t h e r e ) , A c t s xix. 38.. O n
2, 8.—'Aypoí, bi, Lands, fields, M a t . xix. L u k e xxiv. 2 1 , Wetstein shows t h a t t h e
29. Mark x. 30. L u k e xv. 15. Greek w r i t e r s t apply t h e phrase ayíiv
I l í . 'Aypoí, oí, The country, in distinc- ypÉpav or iipépae to persons spending or
tion from cities or villages. M a r k v. 14. passing a day or days; a n d from Eusta-
vi. 56. L u k e viii. 3 4 . ix. 12. ihius I s m . h e cites T P E F S T A Y ' T A S
. 'Aypvirvéio, from a neg. and'íirvoc sleep; ' I I M E ' P A S " A r E I S SH'MEPON— You
or, according to t h e learned Duport on are to-day spending three days, or the
Theophrastus, p . 284, from aypa i n t h e third day." H e n e e i t m a y perhaps b e
sense of taking away, depriving (as in best, with Bcza, t o refer t h e V. «y > i n
£t

wóSaypa), and VTVVOQ sleep. L u k e , t o him who was expected t o deliver

I . To abslain íolally from bodily sleep, Israel. So Kypke, whom see.
to watch, walce, be awake. Comp. 'Aypv- V I . Intransitively, To carry, or con-
m'ía. O n 2 Cor. vi. 5 , Wetstein cites vey one's sclf To go, go away. M a t . xxvi.
Xeuophon repeatedly using t h e V. in this 46. M a r k i. 3 8 . xiv. 4 2 . J o h n x i . 1 5 ,
sense, to whom we m a y add Arrian, 16, & al. H o m . I I . vi. 2 5 2 . — H e u -
Epietet. lib. iii. cap. 26, K a i rae VVKTÓLQ mann on J o h n x i . 7 , having expressed
'ArPYIINE~I2, and y o u lie awake o' his doubts w h e t h e r t h e verb is used in
nights." this sense b y t h e learned G r e e k w r i t e r s ;
I I . To watch spiritually, be walchfal Kypke, among other passages, cites from
and atlcnlive lo spiritualihings. occ. M a r k Arrian, E p i e t e t . lib. iii. cap. 2 2 , p . 3 1 5 ,
xiii. 3 3 . L u k e xxi. 3 6 . E p h . vi. 18. H e b . ""AríiMEN ÉVÍ rov ávOviraror, Let us go
xiii. 17. T h e L X X generally use this V. to t h e P r o c ó n s u l a n d from Polybius, lib.
for the H e b . Ipil; to wake, watch. Isaiah vii. c . 3 . p . 704, « ' A T Í I M E N r'oívvv efij,
xxix. 2 0 . Wisd. vi. 15. TTOXIV r>)v livrriv bdóv, Let us go baek
' 'Aypvirvía, ae, i], from &ypvirvéu>.— again, says h e , t h e same way we carne."
Total absiinence from sleep, walching. [ V I I . To lead orset on his journey, like
occ. 2 Cor. vi. 5. xi. 27. [Xen. Cyr. v. 3 . •¡TpoTvLp-Kw, A c t s xi. 2 5 . xvii. 15. xxiii. 1 0 .
16. Mem. iv. 5. 9 * . ] I t may be added, t h a t in A c t s xx. 12, and
"ATO,from the Heb. nJÜ lo bring, carry,
remo-ve.—" "Ayw lo bring, and ayu> lobreak, * Duport on Theophrasi. Cliar. E t h . p . 3 5 4 , edit.
coincide in t h e present a n d first fut. Ncedliam.
t [Seo A r i s t o p h . N u b . G2G. P l u t . 6 2 . whore tito
sense i s lo pass, and MI. V . H . i x . 5. P l u t . S y m p n s .
* [ I n Ecclwiastíci x x x i v . 1. x x x v i ü . 2G, 27. x i i i . viii. 1. 2 M a c e . i. !>. i i s t h . i x . 17, to celébrale. See
0. it implica anxious vare] Palair. i n B i b l . B r e m . N o v . ch. iii. p . 2 1 4 . ] : .
 A R O 12 A A E

L u k e xxii. 5 4 , t h e sense is r a t h e r lo lead I occ. J o h n xviii. 3 6 . 1 Cor. ix. 2 5 . comp.

cway, and in John xix. 4 . 1 T h e s s . iv. 14. ! 1 T i m . vi. 12. 2 T i m . iv. 7. 2 Mace.
A c t s xix. 3 8 . toleddoüt or bringforward.] viii. 16» xiii. 14.
'Aytoyr), ije, ti, from &yu> to lead.— I I . To strive, endeavour earnestly, both
Course of Ufe, manner of leading or spend- bodily a n d mentally, q. d. To agonice.
ittg it. Comp."Ayw V. occ. 2 T i m . iii. 1 0 ; occ. L u k e xiii. 2 4 . Col. i. 29. iv. 12. QDan.
where Raphelius shows t h a t Polybius often vi. 15. 1 Mace. vii. 2 1 . ] — T h i s V . oceurs
uses ciyiayi) for a course or manner oflife, only in t h e above-cited t e x t s .
particularly in the p h r a s e s " A r E I N ' A T i l - HÜH* 'ASárravoe, », ¿, r¡, from A neg.
3

TH'N, and ' A r E I N ' A T Ü r H ' N TOV ¡3to, to and Scnraváh) expense. [ ' A o W c t i ' w e oceur.
keep a course or manner of Ufe. See E u r . O r e s t . v. 1 1 7 5 . ] — W i t h o u t expense
also Wetstein. [2 Mace. iv. 16. E s t . ii. or charge, not chargeable. occ. 1 Cor. ix.
20.] 18.
'Ayoiv, üvoe, 6, from t h e V. &yu>, i m - 'AüeXtyt], ije, r¡, from aScXcpóe, which see.
plying_/b?-ce or violence. Comp."Ayw I I . I . P r o p e r l y , A sister by the same mo-
I . Strife, contention, contest for victory ther, an uterine sister. See L u k e x. 3 8 ,
or mastery, such as was used in t h e Grecian 3 9 . J o h n xi. 1, 3 .
games of r u n n i n g , boxing, wrestling, &c. I I . A sister in general. M a t . xix. 2 9 .
I t is not used in t h e N . T . strictly in t h i s M a r k x . 2 9 . \_A haf sister. Gen. xx. 1 2 . ]
sense, which is very common in t h e profane I I I . A near kinswoman, a femóle cou-
w r i t e r s ; b u t to this St. Paul plainly* al- sin. M a t . xiii. 5 6 . M a r k vi. 3 * . [So in
Judes, 1 T i m . vi. 12. 2 T i m . iv. 7 , a n d L a t i n Sóror. See P e r i z . A n i m . c. 3 .
applies t h e word to t h e evangelical contest p. 107.]
against t h e enemies of man's salvation. I V . A sister in the common failh, a
Comp. 1 Cor. ix. 2 4 , & seq. Arrian uses christian moman. Rom. xvi. 1. 1 Cor. vii.
t h e pirrase ' A r f f N A ' A r í l N I ' Z E S G A l , 15. ix. 5 . J a m e s ii. 15. Comp. 'ASe\(póe V I .
E p i c t e t . lib. i. cap. 9 ; a n d before him 'A(¡E\<pós, o, ó, from a collect. and SeXfve
Plato, Apol. Socrat. § 2 3 , ' A r í T N A ' A r í l - a womb f, which from H e b . F|í>T to distil,
NIZO'MENOS. on account of t h e | periodical evacuation.
I I . A race, a place lo run in. occ. H e b . I . A brother by the same mother, an
xii. I ;. where Wetstein cites Dionysius uterine brother. M a t . iv. 2 1 . comp. M a t .
Mal. and Eurípides u s i n g t h e same e x - xx. 2 0 . M a r k x. 3 5 . [Schleusner gives
pression, ' A r í T N A TPE'XEIN or A P A - also a brother from the same parents, r e -
MEFNf. ferring to M a t . xxii. 2 5 . and iv. 18. T h a t
I I I . A struggle, contest, contention. occ. t h e word may be so used cannot be doubted,
P h i l . i. 3 0 . Col. ii. 1 Thess. ii. 2 . — T h e and t h a t i t is so used in t h e L X X as,
word oceurs only in t h e above-cited t e x t s . Gen. iv. 2. x. 2 1 . is t r u e , b u t i t is absurd
'Ayiíivía, a.Q, from layíiv. to fix any decided sense on t h e word in
I . Bodily strife, struggle or contest, M a t . xxii. 2 5 . a n d t h e r e can be only con»
such as t h a t of t h e champions in t h e Gre- j e c t u r e in t h e other passage.]
cian games. T h e N . T . writers use it not I I . A brother, though not by the same
in this sense. [ X e n . Cyrop. xi. 3.] mother. M a t . i. 2 . [xiv. 3. M a r k vi. 1 7 .
I I . Violent struggle, or agony, both of L u k e iii. 1, 19. G e n . xiii. 16. 1 K i n g s
body and mind. T h u s likewise used in Ü.7.]
t h e profane w r i t e r s ; see Wetstein. occ. I I I . A near kinsman, a cousin. M a t .
L u k e xxii. 4 4 . f_Dem. de Cor. c. xi.
2 Mace. iii. 14. J o s . A . I . vi. 6, 2 . ] * [ P a r k h u r s t classes M a t . x ü . 5 0 . M a r k iii. 5 5 .
here very absurdly, a n d S c h l e u s . , w i t h not less a b -
'Ayiovífofiai, from áyuvía, strife, strug-
surdity, m a k e s a new h e a d , One who is lovcd as a
gle. sister, for these passages w i t h R o m . x v i . 1. 1 T i m .
I . To strive, struggle, contend, Jight. ii. 2. T h e sense w h i c h Schleusner gives is not i n
t h e word b u t the context. T h e H e b r e w s called
a n y object o f love mnK. P r o v . vii. 4 . J o b x v i i . 1 4 . ]
* T h u s also d o t h Epictetus, E n c h i r i d . cap. 7 5 . •}• S o Hesychius. " ASAtpót' oí EX Tr¡; «I/TSÍ? ¿ÍX^OOJ
" I f a n y t h i n g , whether laborious or agreeable, g l o - yíyovÓTEf' &£l\<pvs yclp fl |U*]Tpí8 ÁEyETal. 'Aíe^tpóí are
rious or i n g l o r i o u s , present itself, remember Ó'TI ivv those w h o are born of the same womb, for the womb
ó ' A r í l ' N , x«< üJ'i ra-ágsr< Ta ' O X i ^ i r i c s , that n o w i s is calledSs^ipúf." [ H e n e e brothers and sisters. A n d o c .
the time of contest, n o w the Olympies are c o m e . " de M y s t . p . 2 4 . ed. i m p . Orat. 9 9 . t o m . iv. perhaps
-f [ S e e G r a v . on H e s i o d . C l y p . v. 3 1 2 . and L y d i i Matt. xü. 4 9 . ]
A g o n i s t . S S . c 27. T h u c y d . v. 5 0 . B u t i n this $ " D i l a t a n t u r vascula ideri, i t a u t s a n g u i n e m
place of the H e b r e w s , the race itself, not the place, i p s u m in cavitatem uteri siiUeni." Boerhaave, In.
is s i g n i ü c d . ] stit. M c d . § G6'5, edit. tert.
 A A E
xiii. 5 5 . M a r k vi. 3 . comp. M a t . xxvii. 56".
M a r k xv. 40. J o h n xix. 2 5 . L u k e vi. 1 5 ,
16. Observe t h a t in M a t . xiii. 5 5 , James,
and Joses, and Judas, are called t h e
'AbeXipoí of Christ, b u t were most pró-
bably only h i s cousins by t h e mother's
side ; for James and Joses were t h e sons
of Mary, M a t . xxvii. 5 6 ; and James and
Judas t h e sons of Alpheus, L u k e vi. 15,
] 6, which Alpheus is therefore próbably
t h e same w i t h Cleopas, t h e husband of
Mary, sister to our Lord's mother. J o h n
xix. 2 5 . See B p . Pearson on t h e Creed,
A r t . I I I . and Macknight, O n t h e Aposto-
lical Epistles, vol. iii. p. 1 9 0 * .
I V . A brother, one ofthe same race, or
nailon. Acts ii. 2 9 . iii. 17, 22. vii. 2 3 ,
2 5 . ix. 17. xiii. 2 6 . Rom. ix. 3 . [ H e b . vii.
5 . D e u t . xv. 2. E x o d . xxii. 2 5 . See Phil.
de Charit. p . 7 0 1 . ]
V . A brother, one of the same nature.
I t is used nearly as the word ó itXrirriov a
neighbour. M a t . v. 2 2 , 2 3 , 2 4 . vii. 3 , 4 .
[xviii. 15, 2 1 , 3 5 . and H e b . viii. 1 1 . G e n .
xxxi. 2 3 . Levit. xix. 1 7 . ]
V I . A brother in the common faith,
a son of God through Christ, and coheir
of eternal life. 1 J o h n ii. 9, 10, 1 1 .
& al. freq. I n t h e L X X it generally
answers t o t h e H e b . t"!N and appears t o
be used by t h e writers of t h e N . T . in t h e
same senses as t h a t H e b . word is in t h e
O . T . [ T h i s sense extends farther, and is
generally one of the same religión. Acts
xxii. 5. xxviii. 2 1 . A s j n s t a n c e s in t h e
case of Christians. M a t t . xxiii. 8. x x v . 4 0 .
A c t s vi. 3 . ix. 3 0 . x . 1. x i . 29. 1 Cor. v.
1 1 . xv. 6. Sometimes t h e words iv Kvpíco
are added, Phil. i. 14. an expression long
used in t h e C h u r c h . See Suicer. T h e s .
Eccles. T . 1. p . 86. I should refer to this
h e a d several passages t o which Schleusn.
gives t h e sense of Colleague, as 1 Cor. i. 1.
2 Cor. i. 1. ii. 13. E p h . vi. 2 1 . P h i l . iv.
2 1 . T h o u g h t h e last passage seems (from
t h e expression ayioi in v. 2 2 . applied to
all t h e believers in Rome) strong in his
favour. In M a t . v. 4 7 . t h e sense is friends
in general.—On t h e ellipse of t h i s word as
in L u k e vi. 18. A c t s i. 1 3 . (comp. J u d .
v. 1.) and perhaps Tob. iv. 2 0 , see Bos.
p . 1 8 . E d . Schsef. and S t u r z . de N o m . G r .
P r . i. p . 1 3 . O n t h e word in general, see
Fessel. Advers. S. lib. v. c. x i . ]
* [ T h e opinions o f the F a t h e r s t o this effect are
given b y Suicer. i. p . 8 4 . S e e a D i s s . b y Tiliander
on this subject ( U p s a l . 1772). Frater i s t h u s used
in L a t i n . See Curt. vi. 1 0 , 2 4 . ]
13 A A E
'AeJfX^óYjjc, TI)TOC, T], from aSeXfóc.—A
brotherhood, society of brethren, i. e. of
Christians. Comp.'AStX^óe V I . occ. 1 P e t .
ii. 17. v. 9. [ C y p . E p . 24. So éiXórrie or
rpíXoi &c. in good Greek *.]
"A^jjXoe, a, ó, ri, mi ró—ov, from a neg.
and BrjXoe, manifest.
I. Not manifest, not apparent, concealed.
I t is applied to graves overgrown with
grass or weeds, and t h u s concealed, as no
doubt t h e graves of t h e poor frequently
were, however carefully those of t h e rich
m i g h t be k e p t and beautiíied. C o m p .
Koviáio. occ. L u k e xi. 4 4 . Comp. N u m .
xix. 16. [ P s . Ii. 7 . Polyb. iii. 19, 2 .
5 4 , 5.]
I I . Not manifest, uncertain. occ. 1 Cor.
xiv. 8. [See Polyb. vi. 5 6 . 1 1 . viii. 3 , 2 .
2 Mace. vii. 3 4 . ]
'AtSrjXórrie, rr¡roe, J/, from aBnXos.— Un-
certainty, tnconstaney. occ. 1 T i m . vi.
17. [Polyb. xxxvi. 4 1 2 . See Vorst. P h i l . S.
p . 271.]
'ASíjXoie, A d v . from &Sr¡Xoe.— Uncer-
tainly, without attending to the prescribed
marks or Unes, or r a t h e r (considering
t h a t t h e expression ¿K aSr/Xog seems to be
p u t in opposition t o áépa bépiov beating
the air) Not manifestly, without being ex-
posed to the view of the spectators and
judge of the race. Comp. Macknight.
B u t B p . Pearson observes, t h a t t h e S y -
riac renders ¿¡e a'c aSr¡Xo)e by not as to a
thing unknown: and t h e V u l g . has, n o n
quasi in i n c e r t u m , not as to a thing un-
certain ; and a d d s , " I t h i n k I have e x -
pressed t h e t r u e m e a n i n g in r e n d e r i n g
it, not as to an uncertain goal." occ. 1
Cor. ix. 2 6 . [ " N o n in incertum even-
t u m . " Sch. and Bretsch. to t h e same
effect f . ]
'ABrjfiovétú, LO, from t h e verbal N . adr)pb¡v t
depressed and spent with labour or fa-
tigue, which from ijBnpai p r e t . pass. of t h e
V . aSéw, tofaini, or be spent with fatigue.
Tofaint, be spent, depressed, and almost
overwhelmed with sorrow, or labour of
mind. occ. M a t . xxvi. 3 7 . M a r k xiv, 3 3 .
P h i l . ii. 2 6 . See Wetstein, Kypke, and
Elsner, ( T o m . ii. p . 2 6 8 . ) on M a t . who
produce m a n y instances of t h e use of t h i s
V e r b by t h e G r e e k w r i t e r s .
"Adns, a, b, q. 'Aidr¡e (ag t h e word is
*[In I M a c e . x i i . 10. 17. it m e a n s Irotherly
love.1
•f [ S c h l e u s n e r however s u g g e s t s thatáijíxiu; m a y
b e for áxXiSf, as i n D i o n . H a l i c . A n t i q . R o m . x .
c. 4 5 . See P o l i . O n o m . vi. c. 5 5 . § 2 0 9 . ]
 A A E 14 A A I

spclt i n * Homcr and f Hesiod) obscure, place qf the ivicked, he t h i n k s t h e phrase

darle, invisible, from a neg. and loeiv lo here stands for the power qf the devil and
see. Sec P l u t . de Is. & Os. p . 3 8 2 . all the wielced, which C h r i s t promises shall
I. The invisible receptacle or mansión of have no effect, and Chrysostom u n d e r -
ihe dead, in general, occ. M a t . xi. 2 3 . L u k e stands t h e whole of the dangerous per-
x. 15. (comp. Isa. xiv. 12, 15.) A c t s ii. secutions h a n g i n g over t h e Christians.
27, 3 1 . 1 Cor. xv. 5 5 . [Gen. xxxvii. 3 4 . See Valck. ad E u r . H i p p . 1445. p . 3 2 1 .
N u m b . xvi. 3 0 . 1 Kings ii. 9. E z e k . xxxii. Bretschneider on Wisd. i. 14, takes &Sns
2 6 . ] — A c t s ii.27.is a citationof P s . xvi. 10, for the devil7\
where t h e H e b . word corresponding to <p¡u, [ I V . A low and miserable state. M a t . x i .
(ój.b'yv L X X Vatic.) is VitiXV infernus, t h a t 2 3 . L u k e x . 15. P s . x x i x . 3 . xlviii. J6.]
to ú/v)(íiv is ttfEU the body, or animalframe. [V. Death itself, as 1 Cor. xv. 5 5 , where,
Observe t h e phrases Itc 4Ss or etag óíSo a r
however, i t seems only a bold person ifi ca-
e

clliptical, for iic or'éu¡colmv or TÓTTOV óíSa, tión. Schleusner t h i n k s it is He who has
in or to the house or place in the grave. the Icingdom qf Hades, and i-efers to W i s d .
See Bos. p . 113. ed. Scha3f. H e n e e , i. 14.] S e e S o n g o f Sol,viii.6.Eccles.xiv. 12.
I I . The invisible place or state of sepá- — " OurÜJígZií'Aorrather Saxon word Hell,
rate souls, the unseen morid of sepárate in its original signification ( t h o u g h i t is
spiriis; w h e t h e r of t o r m e n t , occ. L u k e now understood in a more limited sense),
xvi. 2 3 . (where see Wetstein); or in g e - exactly answers to t h e Greelc word Hades,
neral, occ. Rev. i. 18. vi. 8. x x . 1 3 , 14, and denotes a concealed or unseen place;
where see Vitringa. and this sense of t h e word is still retained
I I I . TlbXcu óllt), The gales of Hades, or i n t h e eaíferw,andespeciallyin thewestern,
of the grave, occ. M a t . xvi. 18. T h i s e x - counties of England ; to hele over a t h i n g
pression seems allusive to t h e form of t h e is to cover it. See L o r d King's H i s t o r y
Jeivish sepulclwes, which were l a r g e s u b - of t h e Creed, ch. iv." Doddridge on Rev.
terraneous caves, w i t h a narrow mouth or 1. 18. Hell is used for t h e H e b . ViNttf or
entrance, m a n y of which are to be found G r e e k qSne in P s . xlix. 14. Iv. 16. lxxxviii.
in Judca to this day. These sepulchres 2. lxxxix. 4 7 , according to t h e oíd E n g l i s h
B p . Lomlh has described with his usual Translation retained in our L i t u r g y . See
aecuracy and elegance, Prrelect. vii. De also Leigh's C r i t . Sacr. in "AíBr¡c, á n d
Sacra Poesi Heb. p . 130, efe. edit. Got- Junius's E t y m o l o g . Anglican. in Heile and
ting. T h e phrase IlvXai ¿¡.Bu answers to Hele.
t h e H e b . biKU? the gales of the se- 'AütáicpiToe, e, ó, ?;, from a neg. a n d Sia-
pulchre, for which t h e L X X use it, Isa. Kpivto to distinguish.—Malcing no partial
xxxviii. 10. (comp. P s . evii. 18. W i s d . xvi. dislinctions,freefrom partial regards, im-
13.) A n d t h e full m e a n i n g of our L o r d ' s partial*. occ. J a m e s iii. 17- [ F o r examples
promise in t h e latter p a r t of M a t . xvi. 18. of passive adjectives t a k i n g an active m e a n -
seems to be, t h a t his church on carih, how- i n g , see H e m s t . a d h u c , i. p . 1 7 9 . ]
ever persecuted a n d distressed, should 'AStáXemroe, e, ó, r\, from a neg. a n d
never fail till t h e eonsummation of all SiaXEÍTrio to intermit, which see.—Unceas-
t h i n g s , and should t h e n , at the resurrec- ing, continua!, without intermission. occ.
lion of the just, Jinally triumph over death Rom. ix. 2. 2 T i m . i. 3 .
and the grave. Comp. 1 Cor. xv. 5 4 , 5 5 . — 'AtSiaXeíirrus, A d v . from áBiáXet-irrog.-—
T h e expression lííXat aSs is by no means Continually, without intermission. occ.
peculiar to t h e hebraical or hellenistic Rom. i. 9 . 1 T h e s s . i. 3 . ii. 1 3 . v. 17. [ S e e
style : Grotius, Whitby, a n d Wetstein on 1 M a c e . xii. 1 1 . ii. iii. 2 6 . ix. 4 . ]
M a t . xvi. 1 8 , show that. is used b y t h e 'ASiatpdopía, ac, ?;, from a neg. and Biá<p-
oíd G r e e k Poets, particularly b y Homer, Oopa corruption, which see.—Incorrupt-
Theognis, Eurípides, and Theocritus, and ness, integrity, freedomfrom corrupi mix-
was no doubt derived to t h e m from t h e e a s t . tures or adulterations. occ. T i t . ii. 7;
[Schleusner u n d e r s t a n d s t h i s place differ- where nine M S S . , four of which ancient,
e n t l y . A s tiSne implies sometimes t h e read, to t h e same sense, cubOopíav. See
Wetstein a n d Griesbach.
* II. ix. lin. 3 1 2 , ' A S I K É Ü ) , to, from a neg. and Bkn, right,
• — Atírto TÍT-AníTIV. justice.
T h e gates o f Hcll.
I . Intransitively, To act unjustly, do
t Thcogon. lin. 3 1 1 ,
* [In this sense the word does not occur elsewhere.
T h e brazcn.thi-oatcd d o g of Hcll, i Prov. xxv. 1. it is which cannot be separated.]
 15 Á A Y

ÍVRONG, SIN. Á c í s xxv. 1 1 . 2 Cor. vii. 12. [ P r o v . xvii. 15. Isaiah lvii. 20- E z e k .
Col. i ü . 2 5 . Rev. xxii. 1 1 . [Sometimes xxi. 3.]
with a rather strouger sense, TOCOMMIT A III. UNJUST, UNRIGHTEOUS, INIQUÜOUS,

CRIME. See 2 Cor. vii. 12. (comp. E u r i p . UNEQUILABLC. L u k e xvi. 10. xviii. 1 1 . [ R o m .
Androm. 673.)] iii. 5. H e b . vi. 1 0.]
I I . Transitively, TO ACT UNJUSTLY BY any IV. DECCITFUL, FALLACIOUS, MOCKING EX-
one, TO DO IVRONG LO, or INJIERE him. Mat. PECTATIVA, occ. L u k e xvi. 1 ! .
x x . 13. A c t s viii 2 4 , 2 6 , 2 7 . xxv. 10. P h i - 'AoÍKiús, Adv. from ACIMG.— UNJUSTLY,
lcm. ver. 18, & al. UNDESERVEDLY. occ. 1 P e t . ii. 19. [Prov. i.
I I I . TO HURÍ, DAMAGE, HARM. L u k e x . 11, 17. W i s d . xii. 13. 2 Mace. vii.
19. Rev. ii. 1 1 . vi. 6. vii. 2, 3 , & al. O n 1 6 . ] ^
Rev. vi. 6. WETSTEIN shows t h a t t h e V . is 'Acókiiioq, N, B, r), from A neg. and CÓIAPOS
in this sense applied to t h e EARTH or LAND PROVEA, APPROVED, which see.—The word
by t h e best Greek writers. is used both in a passive and an active
'ACKIIFUIJAROE, RO, from ílSlkéiú, TO INJURC. sense. In t h e former it is properly a p -
AN ACT OFINJUSLICE, A CRIMINAL ACT, A CRIME. plied to METÁIS, and refers to t h a t p a r t
occ. Acts xviii. 14. xxiv. 20. Rev. xviii. 5. of t h e m which upon refining is IHROMN
[1 Sam. x x . 1. xxvi. 18. Polyb. i. 66. AWAY as DROSSY AND WORTHLESS: so in the
6 and 8. Sometimes rather A SIN, as per- L X X ¿wÓKifioc answers to t h e H e b . t z W D
haps in Rev. xviii, 1 1 . See Isaiah lix. 12. DROSS. Isa. i. 22. Prov. xxv. 4.
J e r e m . xvi. 17-] I . I n a passive sense, DISAPPROVED, RC-
'ACIDA, ae, i), from &SiKoe UNJUST. JECLED, CAST AWAY. occ. 1 Cor. ix. 2 7 . Heb.
I . IVJUSLICC. Acts i. 18. Rom. ix. 14. vi. 8. comp. 2 Cor. xiii. 5 , 6, 7, where see
2 Cor. xii. 13. xviii. 5 *. comp. ch. iii. 4. Bj). F'CAREE and MACKNIGHT. [ O u r versión
I I . FALSEHOOD, DECEILFULNESS, as opposed construes t h e word by REPRÓBALE in every
to TRUTH or CONSLANCY. L u k e xvi. 9. comp. instance except 1 Cor. i x . 2 7 . Schleus-
ver. 1 1 . J o h n vii. 18. Rom. ii. 8. 2 Thess. ner gives t h e following versions.—2 Cor.
ii. 10 and 12. So in t h e L X X ¿ISUDA fre- xiii. 5, 6, 7. NOT GENUINE. 2 T i m . iii. 8.
quently answers to the Heb- 'ípttf, which NOT POSSESSING SUCH FAITH, AS IS RIGHL.
signifies to SPEAK or ACT FALSCLY or DECEIT- Rom. i. 2 8 . BAD AND PER-VERSE. 1 Cor. ix.
FULLY. comp. especially in t h e L X X , D e u t . 2 7 . UNWORLHY OF SUCH HAPPINESS. Tit.
xix. 18. Mic. vi. 12. P s . Ii. 3 . Comp. i. 16. and H e b . vi. 8. USELESS, MIFIT. I
under MAPPAVAG, and see WCLSLEIN in agree more with Bretschn. T h u s ,
Luke. 1. REPRÓBALE, REJECTED, or DESERVING
[ I I I . ANY SIN or VICE. L u k e xiii. 2 7 . A c t s REJECTION. I Cor. ix. 27- 2 Cor. xiii. 5 , 6, 7 .
viii. 2 3 . Rom. i. 29. ii. 8. iii. 5. vi. 13. 2 T i m . iii. 8. Rom. i. 2 8 .
2 T i m . ii. 19. James iii. 6. 2 P e t . ii. 13. 2. USELESS, UNFIT. T i t . i. 16. Heb. vi. 3.
1 J o h n v. 17. So in L X X H o s . x. 9. may be referred to either.]
Ezek. xxi. 27 ( 3 2 ) . Prov. xi. 5. Isaiah I I . I n an active sense, UNDISCERNING,
Iviii. 6. Tn P s . Ixxii. 8. it is BLASPHEMY. UNDISLINGUISHING, VOID OF JUDGEMENL. occ.
See Ps. lxxiv. 5. Eccl. xiv. 9. CISUDA ITOVR,PÁ Rom. i. 2 8 . 2 T i m . iii. 8. T i t . i. 1 6 ; on all
AVANCE AND ENVY INCILING LO INJUSLICE AND which t e x t s see MACKNIGHT.—The above
CRIME. O f t e n P E R V E R S E N E S S , as Ezek'. ix. 9. cited are all t h e passages of t h e N . T .
Isaiah xxxüi. 15. I n t h e passage 1 J o h n wherein t h e word oceurs.
i. 9. Schleusner construes this word THE "ADOXOE, A, B, ?/, from a n e g . and SÓXOG
PUNISHMCNL OF SIN. W e tind it in (Theod.) DECEIT. WITHOUT DECEIT, SINCERE, PURÉ. occ.
Job xxi. 19. and (Symm.) Prov. xxii. 8. 1 P e t , ii. 2. 'ÁOÓXWG Wisd. vii. 14.
Brctschn. more properly says t h e sense is, f§S§¡° 'ASPÓRR/g, rrjrog, ?/, from aopog
GOD MILI NOT ONLY FORGIVE BUT SANCTIFY THE ABUNDANT, which from t h e H e b . l i s MAG-
SINNER, I. E. will make him SÍICAIOG.'] NIFICENL.—ABUNDANCE, EXUBERANCE. occ. 2
"ÁCUEOS, s, Ó, I), Kai TO—OV, from a neg. Cor. viii. 2 0 . See Hesiod. O p . v. 4 7 1 .
and o/i;r¡ JUSLICE, 'AcWarÉw, w, from IISVVAROG.—TO BE
I. UNJUST, VNRIGHTEOUS,FALLING SHORT OF IMPOSSIBLE. occ. M a t . xvii. 2 0 . L u k e i. 3 7 .
THE RIGHLEOUSNESS REQUIRED BY THE DIVINE So L X X in G e n . xviii. 14. J o b xiii. 2. [See
LAM. 1 Pet. iii. 18. i Xen. Mem. i. 2, 2 3 . iii. 5 , 28.]
II. UNJUST, UNRIGHTEOUS, BAD, VITIOUS. '• 'A(¡vva70g, e, b, ?;, icaí 70—ov, from a
M a t . v. 4 5 . Acts xxiv. 15. 1 Cor. vi. 9. neg. and OÍIVAROG, POSSIBLC, or POMCRFUL. It
is used in a n e u t e r , b u t most commonly
* [The plnasc XPTRHC IÑ; efixíaj is forY.»NH; £fouf,]in ¡ a passive sense.
 A E T 16
' I . I n a neuter sense, Impotent, weak.
A c t s xiv. 8 . * Rom. xv. 1 .
I I . Passively, Impossible, not to be done.
M a t . xix. 2 6 . H e b . vi. 1 8 . x. 4 , & al. [ I n
t h e following passages Schleusner gives
t h e meaning Difficult. M a t . xix. 2 6 . L u k e
xviii. 2 7 . comp. 2 4 . H e b . vi. 4 . T h i s
sense is noticed and examples are given in
S t e p h . T h e s . i. p . 1 0 5 8 . and Schl. cites
Prov. x x x . 1 8 . where t h e Vulg. has diffi-
cilia. I t need not be remarked t h a t t h e
affixing this sense to passages containing
a doctrine which is altered by this transla-
tion is highly improper.]
"ALAÜ, for ' A É I O W , from the H e b . ¡Ti» to
confcss, praisej because t h e original use
of singing among both believers and idola-
t e r s was in t h e confessions and praises of
t h e i r respective g o d s ; and indeed in this
approprialed sense only is t h e verb ¿Sio
applied in t h e N . T . — T o sing, utter har-
moniously. occ. Rev. v. 9 . xiv. 3 . xv. 3 .
E p h . v. 1 9 . Col. iii. 1 6 . I n t h e two last
t e x t s it is applied figuratively to t h e
h e a r t . [ I n E p h . v. 1 9 . Col. iii. 1 6 . it is
r a t h e r to celébrate by singing, or praise.
See Hos. vi. 2 . J e r . x x x . 1 9 . ] I n the
L X X cfdovTEQ singing, once answers to
t h e H e b . m i n (from ¡ T i ' ) confession. J e r .
xxx. 19.
'AEÍ, from a intens. and É'OI to be (see
u n d e r iipi).
I . Always, cver. A c t s vii. 5 1 . 2 Cor. vi.
10.
I I . Always, ever, in a restrained sense,
t h a t is, at some stated times. M a r k x v . 8 .
[ T h i s is a common English idiom.]
I I I . Very frequently, continually. 2 Cor.
iv. 1 1 . 2 P e t . i. 1 2 . X e n . Cyrop. i. 4 , 2 7 .
iii. 3 , 9 . — H e n e e the oíd E n g l i s h aye,
ever.
' A E T O ' S , 5, b, according to some, from
iiio-aiú to rush with violence, which is
plainly from t h e H e b . ftf or H i p h . {"wn
to hasten; b u t ásrós m a y r a t h e r be d e -
duced from t h e H e b . W a bird qf prey,
a derivative from t h e V. aj? to fly or rush
impeluously. See Bochart, vol. iii. 1 7 0 .
An eagle, a well-known genus of rapacious
birds. occ. M a t . xxiv. 2 8 . L u k e xvii. 3 7 . 'Adavatría, as, r¡, from áQávaros immor-
Rev. iv. 7- x ü . 1 4 . O n M a t . and L u k e tal, which from a neg. and ¡¡¡avaros death.
comp. D e u t . xxviii. 4 9 , and r e m a r k t h e —Immortality, exemption from death. occ.
plain allusion to t h e Román military e n -
signs, [which Schleusner d e n i e s t . ]
* [ S e e X e n . d e V e n a t . c. 5 . § 1 4 . H e r o d . vi. 1 3 6 .
Borner. D i s s . de A c t i s P a u l , et B a r n . in N o v . T h e s .
Phil. 11. p. 6 3 0 . ]
T [ T h e eagle is said n o t t o f e e d o n c a i c a s s e s , and
A G A
"A'Cvpoc, » , o , from a neg. and í.vpr¡
leaven.
I. "A'(v¡xa, ra. Unleavened calces or
bread. L u k e xxii. 1, 7 . Acts x ü . 3 . x x . 6 .
Also, The feast of unleavened bread,
which lasted seven days, on t h e first of
which t h e passover was sacriliced. occ.
M a t . xxvi. 1 7 . M a r k xiv. 1 . 1 2 . See
E x o d . x ü . 6 , 1 8 , 2 0 . N u m . xxviii. 1 6 .
I í . Unleavened, free from fermenting
matter. I t is applied figuratively and spi-
ritually to christians. occ. 1 Cor. v. 7 .
comp. ver. 8 . See Suicer. i. p . 1 0 6 . —
T h i s word in t h e L X X constantly answers
to t h e H e b . r m n .
' A 1 T P , Époe, ó, from t h e H e b . n» toftow;
whence also t h e Chaldee T I N , Syriac 'IKN,
W e l s h awyr, L a t i n aer, and its modern
derivatives, all denoting t h e air. The air,
the celestial fluid s u r r o u n d i n g t h e e a r t h ,
and consisting of light and spirit, i. e.
gross air. A c t s xxii. 2 3 . Rev. ix. 2 . [xvi.
1 7 . T h e following phrases oceur in t h e
N. T.
( 1 . ) 'Etc hipa Xaküv ( L u c . iv. 9 2 9 . )
1 Cor. xiv. 9 . T o speak vainly or u s e -
lessly—of those who spoke in languages
not understood. Still a G e r m á n idiom.
E s ist in den W i n d gesprochen. I t is spoken
in t h e wind.
( 2 . ) 'Aépa BépELv. To beat t h e a i r —
either from t h e crKiapa^ía- of t h e wrestlers,
who for practice or vanity fought w i t h o u t
an opponent. (Lydius Agonist. S S . c. 1 5 . )
or from b o x i n g — t o strike t h e air, i. e. i n -
stead of t h e adversary, to miss your blow,
do nolhing. ( V i r g . JEn. v. 3 7 6 . 4 4 6 . ) — I n
E p h . ii. 2 . some transíate ai)p, by t h e
lower sphere of air, j u s t surrounding t h e
e a r t h , in which t h e clouds fty, in P a r k -
h u r s t ' s sense, because t h e J e w s t h o u g h t
t h e D e m o n s lived in t h e lower p a r t of t h e
air. O t h e r s transíate i t by darhness, a
sense found in elassie writers. H o m . II. x ü .
2 4 0 . Hesiod. T h e o g . 1 1 9 . ] — T h e L X X
twice use t h i s word in t h e Gen. p l u r a l
'Aépiov airs, t o express t h e H e b . tJ'pnttf
t h e confúcting airs or ethers. See Heb.
and Eng. Lexicón in pw I I .
there were n o t , s o m e writers s a y , a n y eagles in P a -
lestine. H e n e e s o m e construe ¿Wcí, as i f yvitacraí
or vultures. Schleusner e x p l a i n s the place, " A t
a g i v e n opportunity there w i l l b e f o u n d persons t o
use i t . " B r e t s c h n . s a y s , " W h e r e there i s gross
i m p i e t y , vengeance from heaven will overtake i t , " ]
 AGE
1 Cor. xv. 5 3 , 54. 1 Tim. vi. i 6. [ S e e
Wisd. viii. 14. where i t i s immortal Jame.']
'Adépiros, a, ó, i¡, ical rb—ov, from a neg.
and BéfiLToe lawful, from Siius law, righl,
which seems a derivative from the H e b .
O n complete, perfect.
I. Unlawful. occ. A c t s x. 2 8 . [2. Mace.
vi. 5. vii. 1.]
I I . Wiclted, abominable, occ. 1 Pet. iv. 3,
where it seems particularly to refer to the
abominable impuritics which accompanied
t h e heathen idolatries. So Josephus, lib.
iv. cap. 9, § 10, uses 'AGEMi'TOYS ifió-
vag for tmnahiral pleasures. See more in
Wetstein.
ÍÜI 3
"A0£oc, a, b, f¡, from a neg. and
Qeós, God. Wiihoat God, i. e. thetruc God,
an Aihcist in this sense. occ. E p h . ii. 12.
So ¿ÍQeoí is used by I g n a t i u s for heathen
and hcretics, Epist. ad Traillan. § 3 and
10. See also Wolfius on E p h , Suicer's
T h e s a u r u s in "Adeos I. 2, and Olivet's
Theologia Gradean, a t t h e end of t h e 3d
tome of his. edition of .Cicero's Works,
Genev. p . 659, &c, [In the same way t h e
Christians were called "AOÍOÍ by the hea^
then.]
"Adeerpog, tí, 6, ?;, from a neg. and Séerpos
a law, which from rídijpi or Séio to fix,
appoint, constitute.—Lawless, disregard-
ing law, and right. occ. 2 P e t , ii. 7. iii. 17.
[Oftener used of thijigs than of men. See
Kypke a n d Loesner, 3 Mace. vi. 26.]
'Adíríti), <a, from a neg. and Seros placed,
from ríQypi or Séio to place.
[I. Toabolish,anml, Gal.iii. 15,1 Mace,
xi. 3 6 .
. I I . To malee vain, or of no cjfect. L u k e
vii. 3 0 . 1 Cor. i. 19. Prov. i. 2 5 .
I I I . To despise ov rejeci. Gal, ii. 2 1 .
JurL v. 8. coinp.. 2 Pet. ii. 10. L u k e x. 16.
J o h n xii. 4 8 . M a r k vii. 9. 1 Thess. iv. 8.
í n H e b . x. 28, the sense is r a t h e r to vió-
late. I n t h e sense of despising or malcing
light of, it occurs in L X X . 1 Saín, ii, 19,
Isaiah xlviii. 8. J e r e m . ix. 2. xii. 1.
1 Chron. v. 25. D a n . ix. 7. See Poiyb.
xv. 1. iii. 2 9 . and Schweigh. Lex. Polyb.
p. 12. where the sense is perhaps to vió-
late. I should refer also to this head the
phrase aderétv rr)v reíariv, 1 T i m . v. 12.
which means to malte light qf or for salte
the promise orfaith. See Polyb. viii. 2.
xiv. 1. 1 Mace. xv. 27. P a r k h u r s t t h i n k s
t h e r e is a reference to t h e widows' break-
ing their former engagement to t h e C h u r c h
t h a t they would not abuse its alms. I n
M a r k vi. 26. t h e r e is difficulty—Parlc-
hui'St says, To vivíate one's engagement
17 A e ÍI
| Ib, to disappoint or fail one, referring to
Polyb. ix. c. 30. and also to Isa. i. 2.
xxxiii. 1. Ps. cxxxii. 11. W e may add
Exod. xxi. 8. J u d g . ix. 24. Prov. xi. 3.
Schl. translates Ei repulsara daré .noluil,
and gives t h e V u l g . Noluit eam con-
tristare; t h e Syriac frustrare, privare
eam ; t h e Arabio, prohibere eam, or re-
cusare. H e cites Joseph. A u t . J , xv. 2, C.
éDevbs íOerljo-Eiv év alxói, and translates it,
Fore ut nihil eoritm, ipice peterct, ei de-
neget. I should r a t h e r say, would not
reject the petilioner, with respect to any
aflús requests. B u t in St. M a r k we have
an accus. alone, and I should certainly
transíate, as in our versión, reject, as
in m a n y of t h e above passages. To. dis-
appoint would not be a bad versión, and
we find this in Ps. xiv. 6. See 1 Mace,
xv. 27.]
Ifglf 'A0érr¡enc, ioe, att. ewc, >/, frem
5
áOcréoi.
I. A putting away, an abolisking. occ.
H e b . ix. 26. \_Expiation, Sch. and B r . ]
I I . An abrogation, annulling. occ. H e b .
vii. 18. 0
¡•Üp 'AdXéio, 5>, contracted from.ckftXtw,
which is derived from ¿UOXos slrife, con-
test ; and t h i s may be either from a in-
tens. or &el always, and BXáto to shalec or
das.h together, or against each other.
T h u s t h e H e b . phttf, which generally sig-
nifies ta sport, play, or t h e like, is also
used, 2 S a m . ii. 14, for conjiieling, slcir-
mishing, plainly because t h e actions are of
a similar k i n d . — T o strive, conlend, be a
champion, in any of t h e Grecian games.
occ. 2 T i m . ii. 5. F r o m t h i s verb these
ancient champions were called aQXyrái, in
L a t i n allileia!, whence our English word
alhletic.
"ASXtjcnc, ios, a t t . etos, »/, from ádXéio.—
AJight, coniesl, strugglc, confiel, occ. H e b .
x, 3 2 . [See in L a t i n , H o r . i. E p . v. 8.]
•Advpéo), w, from a neg. and $v/.ws the
mind.—To despond, lose courage, be dis-
couraged. occ. Col. iii. 21 *.
'AOioos, a, b, from a neg. and 5ior¡ a
muid or punishmenl imposed on any one,
which B u s t a t h i u s derives from Séio, B¿i
to pul, impose, as '(m) Ufe, from '(ü> lo
Uve.
I. Not mulcícd, not punished. I t occurs
not in this sense in t h e N . T . b u t fre -
q u e n t l y in t h e profane writers. [Aristoph.
Nub. 1 4 1 5 . ]
* [ S c h l e u s n e r g i v e s t his versión, and also te ce
raigry with, as 1 S a m . x v . 1 1 . 2 S a m . vi. 8. 1 Chron.
x i i i . 11. X o n . A n a b , vi. 2. í). H e l i t n . v. 2 . 21.]
 A I O 18
I I . Innocent, free from guilt. occ. M a t .
xxvii. 4, 24. ^Ai^a aQioov, i s a phrase
often occurring i n t h e L X X for the H e b .
>p3 o í * . See 1 Sam. xix. 5. 2 K. xxi. 1C.
X X I V . 4. So ríSüoc. ét^tt—ciiru TWV aiixárwv
—is used by t h e L X X 2 Sam. iii. 2 8 , for
the Heb. WD—»25M—'pJ.
' Aiyewe, a, ó, y, Kai ro—ov, from cus,
ái-yóe « goat, which seems a derivative
from t h e H e b . 13? a goat.—Of or belonging
to a goat, a goat's. occ. H e b . xi. 3 7 .
[ E x o d . xxv. 4 . xxxv. C. N u m b . xxxi. 20-3
'AiyiaXóe, 5, o, from ciyw to bréale
( w h i c h , i n t h i s sense, seems derived from
H e b . p)) to squeeze), and ake the sea ; or
from cuo-tTw to rush, and aXe, because the
sea rushelh against i t . — T h e sea-shore.
M a t . xiii. 2, & al. A c t s xxvii. 3 9 . íxovra
luyiaXóv, with a shore, [ s a y our t r a n s -
Jators.] B u t " have not all créeles shores ?
I t should have been translated with a
smooth shore, convenient for l a n d i n g ; t h a t
is cuyíctAóg, Hesychius, 'AiyiaXóe, b irapa-
OaXáacrioe rórroe, \pappwbije, ij \pnijnSae
'¿Xuv. T h e L a t i n Poets cali t h e m bona
liltora et mollia." M a r k l a n d i n Bowyer's
Conject. [Schleusner approves this.] X e -
nophon, Cyri Exped. lib. 6. p . 4 5 2 . edit.
H u t c h i n s o n , 8vo., has Aipí¡v ' A i r i A A O ' N
'EXÍ2N.
'AtúLoe, 5, ó, ?/, from aéi cver, always.
I. _EiíerMíüZ,abso]utely, without beginning
or end. occ. Rom. i. 20. [Wisd. v i i . 26'.]
I I . Eterna!, i n a restrained sense, or á
parto post, perpetual, without end. occ.
J u d e , ver. 6. [See Wisd. ii. 2 3 . L e Clerc.
A r s Crit. yol. ii. p . 130.]
'Aibwc, ÓOQ, Se, )/, from a neg. and Ibcív
to see, look at, for modest persons are apt
to t u r n away their eyes, and not look a t
others.
I. Modcsty, deceney. occ. 1 T i m . ii. 9.
[ 3 Mace. i. 19.]
II. lleverence, veneration. occ. H e b .
x i i . 28. [and so Pudor i n L a t i n . T e r e n t .
A n d . i. 5. 28.]
'Aidíoé, oTroe, ó, from üíBw. to scorch
and &\¡J the aspect or counlenance.—An
Ethiopian, so called from his scorched and
black countenance and slcin. occ. A c t s v i i i .
27. comp. J e r . xiii. 23 t .
* [ A í / / a K S W O V is an innocent man. D e u t . x x v i i .
T
2 5 . 1 S a m . x i x . 5. innocent llood. 1 K i n g s ii. 5 .
J e r . x x v i - 1 5 . ¿ S ü o ? is innocent. P s . x v . 5. x x i v .
4 . x x v i . G. I x x i i i . 1 3 . Frcc, G e n . x x i v . 4 1 . N u m b .
x x v i i . 2 2 . J o s h . ii. 2 0 . XJnpnnished, E x . x x i . 2 8 . ]
f [ P l i n y ( N . H . vi. 29-) mentions Queen C a n .
tlace as h a v i n g reigned in M e r o e . B y iEthiopia,
i n Scripture, is m e a n t U p p e r j E t h i o p i a , i. e. the
country between the N i l e and the A r a b i c O u l f . ]
A I M
7
Aipa, aroe, rb, perhaps from áiButobe
hol, or from &w to breathe, because i t r e -
quires constaut refrigeralion from t h e ex-
ternal air, (comp. H e b . and E n g . Lexicón
in Wtii I I I . )
I. The blood, properly so called, t h a t
marm red liquor which circuíales in t h e
bodies of men a n d animáis, and in which
t h e i r n a t u r a l life eminently consists (see
Gen. ix. 4, 5. Lev. xvii. 1 1 , 14. D e u t . xii.
23.) L u k e xiii. 1. H e b . ii. 14. J o h n xix.
34. A c t s xv. 2 0 , 29. xx. 2S. H e b . ix. 7,
12, 13. In Col. i. 14. very m a n y M S S ,
six of which ancient, and several oíd ver-
sions, have not the words Sui -5 aipa-oe.
c'wrS, which are accordingly rejected b y
Wetstein and Griesbach.
I I . Blood, killiug a man, murder. M a t .
xxiii. 3 0 . xxvii. 6, 8, 24. [ A c t s i. 19. In.
| A c t s ii. 19. cupa ¿al Trvp may be murders
and fres. I n Coloss. i. 2 0 . we m u s t
transíate by his bloody death on the cross,
literally, by the blood of his cross, i. e.
shed on his cross. H e b . x. 29. The blood
qf the covenant, i. e. t h a t blood which was
shed to make the new covenant between
God a n d man. I t is alinost needless t o
observe, t h a t Schleusner gives his own
view of all those passages in which the
blood qf Christ is mentioned. In all of
these t h e plain sense is t h e t r u e one.
A c t s xx. 2 8 . Rom. iii. 2 5 . v. 9. E p h . i. 7.
ii. 1 3 . H e b . ix. 14. 1 J o h n i. 7. Rev. i. 5.
v. 9. W e find aipa in t h e sense of mur-
der, Ezek. xxiv. 6. 9. Ecclesiast. viii. 1 6 . ]
I I I . Guilt or punishment of shcdcUng
human blood, or of killing a man. Mat.
xxiii. 3 5 . (comp. ch. xxvii. 25.) L u k e x i .
5 0 , 5 1 . A c t s v. 2 8 . comp. A c t s xviii. 6.
xx. 2 6 , where it is applied spiritually.
[ J u d g . ix. 24. 2 Sam. i. 16. 1 K i n g s ii.
37. E z e k . xxxiii. 4 . ] — T h e profane w r i -
ters, as Sophocles, E u r í p i d e s [Elect. 136.]
and Demosthenes, use ¿upa for murder.
See Scapula [and Schwarz. Comm. L . G .
!>•. 2 4 . ]
I V . Blood, sced, or natural desceñí.
A c t s xvii. 26. comp. J o h n i. 13, where see
W e t s t e i n ; and comp. 2úp£ V I . H o m e r
uses ¿Xípa in this sense. II. vi. line 2 1 1 .
TaüTíjc TCJ yEys¡7f, TE xaV'AlMATOS EU^O/ÍKÍ £/vorí.
I boast to be of s u c h descent and llood.
And so, Odyss. iv. line 61V, Menelaus
says to Telcmaehus,
"A1MATOS 17? « y á í w o ,
T h o u art of g o o d (i. e. n o b l e or gencrous) hlood.
[See Sebo!. Hom. íliad. xix. 105. E u r .
 A I N 19
Phoen. 256. Ovid. M e t . xiii. 7 0 5 . Virg.
j £ n . i. 19. So 2 Sam. xxi. 2.] ; perly a fabulous
V. Sápí Kat cufia, Flesh and blood. See
under Súpi; I X .
'Ai/xar£K)(y<xía, ag, f¡, from cufia, aros,
blood, and iicyvu> to pour out, which see.
A pouring out, or shcdding, qf blood, blood-
skedding. occ. Heb. ix. 22.
'Aipoppoéw, io, from ¿Cipa blood, and púos
a flux, from pÉw tojlorv.— To Actué, or la-
bour under a flux qf blood*. occ. M a t . ix.
20. comp. Lev. xv. 3 3 , in L X X and H e b .
[Bartholin. de morbis Bibl. c. 7. & Wedel.
Exc. M e d . P h i l . Cent. ii. Dec. v. p . 4 5 . ]
"Aivtcric, t o e , a t t . EU>S, I), from á t r á u . —
Praise. occ. Heb. xiii. 15. [See Lev. vii.
1 3 . ] I n t h e L X X it frequently- answers
to the Heb. m i n confession, and to ¡"Pi"tn
praise. [See E z r a x. 11. N e h . ix. 5.
2 Chron. x x i x . 3 1 . ]
'Airea, <3, from cXivoc, if it should not be
r a t h e r deduced immediately from t h e Heb.
W)í in t h e sense of alternalcly singing
praises to God, as t h a t H e b r e w word is
used, Exod. xv. 2 1 . 1 Sam. xxi. 11. Isa.
xxvii. 2. comp. Exod. xxxii. 18. To praise.
I n the N . T . it only refers to praising
God. L u k e ii. 13, 2 0 , & al.—This word
in the L X X most commonly answers to
t h e H e b . bbn to pircase, and to íTnn to
confess, attribute power to. [ J u d g . xvi.
24. & Ps. xcix. 4 . ]
"Aiviypa, aros, rb, from i'iviypai perf.
pass. of áivÍT.Tto to kint, intímale, signify
with some degree qf obscurity, which p e r -
haps from t h e H e b . JiJJJ. infinitive of t h e
V . ¡iljí to ansnier, correspond.—An enig-
ma, in which one t h i n g answers or stands
in correspondence to, or as t h e represenl-
ative of, another, which is in some respecls
similar to it. occ. 1 Cor. xiii. 12. Now
(in this life) we see by means qf a mirror,
reflecting t h e images of heavenly and spi-
r i t u a l t h i n g s , iv dtvlypan, in an enig-
matical manner, invisible t h i n g s being r c -
presented by visible, spiritual by n a t u r a l ,
eternal by temporal, but then face to
face. T h e apostle here seems to allude
to N u m . x ü . 8, which is t h u s rendered in
t h e L X X , STO'MA KATA STO'MA \a- 1
Xí]crii¡ dvTtú iv EISEI, Kal H SI 'AINirMA'-
T í i N (nTDB H e b . ) Kal rr)v Sófav Kvptu
E I A E f-
T
* [ O n the absurd story of the statue erected to
Christ b y the w o m a n here s p o k e n of (mentioned b y
E u s e b . H . E . vii. 1 8 . ) See Suicer, i. p . 1 1 6 . ]
t [ T h i s is also B r e t c h n . ' s interpretation. P e r h a p s
all this w a s not i n the A p o s t l e ' s m i n d . iv i.my;j.drt,
Not clearhj. P a r k h u r s t ' s derivation and correspond-
A I P
T
A I N 0 ' 2 , a, ó, praise; {jlivqc is pro-
oration. (Seo Suidas
and Hesiod. O p . 202.) then assent, and
thence, encomium, or prense. See Ezra
iii. 11. P s . viii. 3 . (on which see Mede)
and H e r o d . vii. 107-] occ. M a t . xxi. lo*.
L u k e xviii. 4 3 .
" A i p É c i e * , t o e , a t t . EWC, I), from áípé'íii lo
choose.
I. A cholee. I t oceurs n o t in t h e N . T .
simply in this sense, but is t h u s used in
t h e profane t and ecelesiastieal writers, in
t h e L X X versión of Lev. xxii. 1 1 , 2 1 , and
in 1 M a c . viii. 3 0 .
I I . A sect of heathen philosophers.
T h u s used by A r r i a n , E p i c t e t . lib. ii. cap.
19. " W h y do you cali yourself a Stoic?
Confine yourself to w h a t you do, KUI
IvpiftrETÍ nvog 'Éuff ' A I P E ' S E Q S , and you
will discover of w h a t sect you a r e ; most
of you Epicureans, &c." So Lucian, in
H e r m o t i m . tom. i. p . 5 8 0 , ' E t Séi;a pavas
Ssifisv ras' A I P E ' S E I S iv (¡>i\oao<¡)ia—If we
suppose only ten scets in philosophy—"
Id. D e m o n a x , p . 10Q4. " One asked De-
monax, ríva ' A I ' P E S I N ácnrci'(Erai paXXov
iv (fiCXocrofíq. W h a t sect in philosophy
he chiefly embraced ?" And PJutarch, d é
Plac. Pililos, lib. i. cap. 3 . says, t h a t from
Th'aleSj i¡ 'ÍIOVÍKTJ ' ' A I P E S I S TrpocrayopEvQi],
t h e ionic sect was denominated."
I I I . A sect, secta, t h a t is, a form or
mode qf religious discipline or opinión
which any one chooses, follows, and pro-
fesses, or the persons who follow such
form or mode. occ. A c t s v. 17- xv. 5 . xxiv.
5, 14, xxvi. 5 . xxviii. 2 2 . — J o s e p h u s , A n t .
lib. xiii. cap. 5. § 9. Vit. § 2, and § 3 8 ,
calis the several sects of t h e Pharisees a n d
Sadducees, efe. among t h e Jews, 'Aipio-Eis,
in t h e same m a n n e r as St. L u k e does in
the Acts. H e n e e a sect among Chris-
tians, in some measure rcsembling those
among t h e J e w s and H e a t h e n , a religious
party or faction among Chrisiians, under
some h u m a n leader, occ. 1 Cor. xi. 19.
Gal. v. 2 0 . 2 P e t . ii. 1 %.
i n g e x p l a n a t i o n of the word itself are utterly absurd.
'A/VÍVCO/ÍCÍ; i s , to liint dbscurcly.\
* O n this m u c h controverted word, and the
several t e x t s wherein i t oceurs, see D r . G c o r g e
Ca.mpbelPs 9 t h P r e l i m i n a r y Dissertation to h i s
T r a n s l a t i o n o f the F o u r G o s p e l s . P a r t iv. p a g e
424, &c. ;
•)• S e e H c r o d o t u s , l i b . 1. cap. 1 1 . [ S o p h . A j . 2 0 5 .
See D ' O r v i l l . ad Charit. ii. c. 4 . p . 3 0 0 . ed. L i p s . J
% [ T h e o d o r e t on 1 Cor. x i . 1 8 . and Chrysost.
( H o m i l . x x v i i . i n E p . i. ad Cor.) both say tliat the
word m c a n s rather QiKvmv.íai than a n y opinions.
S c h l . i n the place of St. Pcler gives the sense per-
verse o¡Hitions.]
C 2
 A I P 20
'AipEr/^w, from áipéw to choose.— To
choose. occ. M a t . xii. 18.—In the L X X it
most commonly answers to the H e b . ItlS
to choose. Comp. esnecially 1 Chron. xxix.
1; in H e b . and L X X .
'AipíriKog, 5,. ó , from aipEfí(io. Comp.
"Aiptaie.—A founder, leader, or promoier
of a religious faction or sect among Chris-
tians, a man factious in Christianity *.
occ. T i t . iii. 10. comp. R o m . xvi. 17.
"Aipéio, ü, M i d . 'Aipéoiiai, Siicu, from
utpw to take up.
I . To take, take hold on. I t o c e u r s n o t
in this sense in t h e N . T . b u t frequently
in t h e profane writers.
I I . [ I n t h e middle voice] To choose.
occ. Phil. i. 22. 2 Thess. ii. 1 3 . H e b . xi.
2 5 . [ X e n . Cyrop. iv. 5. § 2 . ]
" A l P í i , from the H e b . or in H i p h .
1'l>ii to raise up. T h e general meaning
of t h e word is to lift, raise, or take up.
I. To lift up, as t h e hauds [to hea-
ven] t , Rev. x. 5.—the eyes, J o h n xi. 4 1 .
[ P s . cxxi. 1. cxxiii. 1.]
I I . To lift or take up, M a r k vi. 2 9 , 4 3 .
A c t s xx. 9. M a t . xvii. 2 7 . O n L u k e xix.
2 1 . comp. u n d e r Tídnpi II.
I I I . Applied to t h e mind, To suspend,
heep in suspense. J o h n x. 24. See Suicer's
T h e s a u r u s on t h e word, who cites from
Philostratus I I . 4, Kclp:e iráw " A I P E I ó
A ó y o e ov upqicev, A n d t h e discourse which
h e spake keeps me q u i t e in suspense."
T h e learned Elsner, Observ. Sacr. (whom
see) interprets t h e phrase 4' X^ ''f>£" ! V V a /
J o h n x. 24. by taking aivay Ufe, as it
plainly signifies, ver. 18. (comp. L X X in
Isa. liii. 8.) q. d. How long dost t h o u MU
us, i. e. with doubt and delay ? [Schleusner
approves P a r k h u r s t ' s explanation.]
I V . To take up on one, as a yoke, M a t .
xi. 29.
V. To take up, as a cross, M a t . xvi. 24.
V I . To bear or carry, as a burden,
M a t . iv. 6 . xxvii. 3 2 . [ C o m p . Psalm xii.
1 2 . ] . M a r k [ii. 3 . vi. 8.] xv. 2 1 . J o h n v.
8, 9. comp. Luke xxiii. 26. [ G e n . xliv. 1.
Valck. ad Theoc. Adon. p . 3 2 6 . ]
V I L To remove, take aivay. M a t . [xiv.
1 2 . ] x x i i . 13. John x i , 3 9 , 4 1 . comp. M a t .
xxiv. 3 9 ; p a r ü c u l a r l y to exeeution, L u k e
xxiii. 18, So Philo in Wetstein, comp.
ver. 2 1 , and J o h n x i x . 15. A c t s xxi. 36.
[Schleusner adds m a n y examples which
* See CampbelTs Preliminary Dissertations to
Gospels, p . 434, &c. [Suicer. i . ' p . 126.]
•f [ T h i s was the J e w i s h form o f swearing. See
also Aristot. iii. P o l i t c. 10. & Exód. vi. 8. N u i n b .
x i i i . 3.]
A I 2
have no difficulty, and then derives from
this sense t h a t oíkilling, to which he refers.
Mat. xxiv. 3 9 . L u k e xxiiü 18. J o h n xix.
15. Acts xxi. 36. 1 Mace. v. 2. somewhat
unnecessarily. H e adds examples of t h e
same sense with t h e addition of Í K - 5 ¡wapu
or aVó rije yf¡Q, A c t s xxii. 2 2 . Phil. in
Flacc. p . 53S, 20. ed. Mangey, and henee
in any sense to desiroy. John>xi. 4 8 . 2 Sam.
v. 2 1 . ]
V I I I . To bear, and so take atvay or
remove. T h u s Christ is said to bear,
aipeiv, t h e sins of t h e w o r l d * . J o h n i. 2 9 .
1 J o h n iii. 5. comp. 1 Pet. ii. 24.
I X . Toreceive, take. M a t . xx, 14. M a r k
vi. 8.
X . To loóse, a ship namely from shore.
A c t s xxvii. 13, where it is generally
t h o u g h t t h a t t h e expression is elliptical,
and t h a t vavv the ship, or ayKvpav the
anchor, o u g h t to be supplied. So T h u -
cydides, lib. 1. has oí Sé T A 2 pév N A " Y 2
" A P A N T E 2 dwi) rije yyje, t h e y loosing the
ships from t h e l a n d ; " and P l u t a r c h a n d
Polybius use t h e phrase 'AIPE'IN ' A I - 1
K Y ' P A N or ' A r K Y ' P A 2 . See Bos Ellips.
Wolf. and W e t s t e i n . [ T h u c . i. 5 2 . ]
X I . To lift up or raise t h e voice.
L u k e xvii. 13. A c t s iv. 24. [Schwarz.
Comm. p . 2 9 . ] — I n t h e L X X t h i s word
most commonly answers to t h e H e b . t W J ,
which is applied in nearly t h e same
senses.
'Aio-dc'ivopai or dio-Qéopui, from dicrflü to
perceive.
I. To perceive, properly by means of
t h e external senses, as t h e feeling, ¿fe. I t
is often t h u s applied by t h e G r e e k w r i t e r s ,
b u t not. by t h e inspired penmen.
I I . To perceive with the mind, under-
stand, occ. L u k e i x . 4 5 . [ T o b . xxiii. 5.]
"Ai(T0?¡t7tc, IOQ, a t t . e<i>c, v, from áio-uéopai.
See t h e last wovd.-r-Perception, properly
external, b u t in t h e N . T . it is used
only for infernal, occ. Phil. i. 9.-.—["Aicr-
dnme here (says Schl.) means quick
percepiion qf truth and falsehood, all the
intelligence oblained by use and practice.
See JEIian. V. H . i. 12. A r r i a n . Diss.
E p i c t . ii. 18. 8. Phavor. aiaQnaíc kan
Svvapie áiadrjnKrj.]
'Awdnrripiov, «, ró, from áiadéopai.—'•
An organ or instrument of sensation or
perception; so t h e aLadi^rypiov of seeing
is t h e eye—of hearing, the ear; b u t in
* [ T h e reference to the J e w i s h sacrifices need
hardly bé p o i m e d out, on which the sins of thc people
were laid. L e v . x v i , 21, 22..]
 í I s. 21 A i T

tkc -N. T . it is used only for t h e in- with the passion of shame. L u k e xvi, 3.
fernal senses, or senses of t h e soul, cor- 1 Pet. iv. 6 . ]
respoudiug to those outward ones of t h e ' A l T E ' í l , LO, and Mid. CUTÉOIICU, ñpai.
body. I n t h e Deflnitions ascribed to I. [ T o ask, reijuesl, or beg. M a l . v. 4 2 .
C a l e n , ái<r6i]TÍ¡piov is deflned, TO u.ia%r\aív L u k e vi. 3 0 . W h e r e Krebsius (Obss.
TLva rrEin^EvpÉvov bpyavov—i'jTOi oajOakpoe,Flav. p. 116. after Casaub. ad Theoph. p.
í¡ píe, r¡ yXwrra; t h e organ to which a n y 292.) says t h a t diTEÍv is to ask as a fa~
sense is i n t r u s t e d — e i t h e r t h e eye, or t h e vour, árraiTEiv to demand as a debí. M a t .
nose, or t h e tongue." See Wetstein, w h o vii. 9. (with 2 accus. as iEsch. c. Ctesiph.
also cites from Galen t h e verv phrase, T O p. 2 9 1 . Aristoph. A c h a r a . 475.) xiv. 7. x x .
1

'AISGHTII'PION "EXEI r E I T M N A S M E ' - 2 0 . Mark vi. 2 2 — 2 5 . E p h . iii. 13. See

N O N ; and in Josephus, D e Maccab. § 3 , Josh. xv. 18. 1 Sam. i. 17. for bvXi. D a n .
we haveTÜTN "ENAON ' A I S O H T H P m N , ii. 4 9 . vi. 7. for t h e Chaldee H » . Also
The inlcrnal senses. occ. H e b . v. 14. [See especially to ask in prayer. M a t . vi. 8.
J c r . iv. 19.] vii. 7, 8, I I . xviii. 19. (here alone with a
•Ifé^*'Átcr)(poKEp$iiQ, toe,Se, ¿,?;,from dicr- genitive of t h e thing.) Col. i. 9. J a m e s i.
Xpoe base, vile, and tcépüoe gain.— Grecdy 5. iv. 2 , 3 . as in H e b r e w bxw. 1 Sam.
or desirous of base or vile gain. occ. i. 2 0 . ]
1 T i m . iii. 3 , 8. T i t . i. 7. See Wetstein, I I . To ask, require. L u k e i. 6 3 . Acts
Kypke, and Doddridge on 1 T i m . and xiii. 2 1 . xvi. 2 9 . x x v . 3 . 1 P e t . iii. 15.
comp. under TpóYoe I I . [Aristoph. P a c . [ 1 Cor. i. 2 1 . 2 Mace. vii. 10.]
622. Herod. i. 187-j "Kirrijia, tiroe, TII, from ¿UTEÍO to ask.—
'Aio~)(poKepSwc, Adv. from áio-xpoKEpc'rie. A petition, a request, a thing required or
—For the sake or love of vile gain. occ. asked. occ. L u k e xxiii. 2 4 . 1 J o h n v. 1 5 .
1 Pet. v. 2. 'AITÍ'A, a e , )'/.
EfglP 'Aicrxpo\oyía, ae, ?';, from áuryjibs I . A cause, reason, inciiement. M a t .
vile, jilthy, a n d Xóyoc spcech, talle.— Vile, xix. 3 . L u k e viii. 4 7 . A c t s x. 2 1 , & al.
Jilthy, obsceno talle, occ. Col. iii. 8.—This I I . An aecusalion, crime, orfault. M a t .
word is used in like manner for obscene or xix. 3 . xix. 4 . xxvii. 3 7 . M a r k xv. 2 6 .
indecent discutirse in Epictetus, Enchirid. J o h n xviii. 3 8 . & al. I n this sense t h e
cap. 5 5 . [ X e n . de Rep. Lac. c. v. § 6. word seems an imniediate derivative from
SeeSchwarz. Lex. P o l y b J t h e verb atriio, to ask, require; because
"Atirxpóe, a, ov, from áwxoc, baseness, an aecusation or crime is t h a t for which
vileness; which some derive from a n e g . any one is required to appear before t h e
and "uiytí lo have, as denoting what one j u d g e s and questioned. O n M a t . xxvii. 3 7 ,
would not have, b u t reject.— Base, vile, see Wetstein and Suicer T h e s a u r . in 'Airía.
indecent, shameful. occ. 1 Cor. xi. G. xiv. [Schleusner says, crime, M a t t . x i x . 3 .
3 5 . E p h . v. 12. T i t . i. 1 1 . J o h n xviii. 3 8 . x i x . 4 , 6. A c t s xxii. 2 4 .
E§S§¡° 'Aia-)(pÓTr¡e, ryjToe, v, from diaxpóe. xxv. 18. 2 Mace. x i i . 4 0 . Poli. viii. 7 .
—FiÜhiness, obsceniiy. occ. E p h . v. 4 . jElian. V. I I . iii. c. 14. See T i t . i. 1 3 .
'AKTX.UI'»), ye, h-, from áicrxoe vileness. ( T h i s is quite fanciful; it is here cause.)
I. Shame, the passion ofshame, arising Aecusation, A c t s xxv. 27. X e n . Cyrop. V .
from some notion of one's own vileness. 5, 8. H e thinks t h a t á t r / a i n M a t t . xxvii.
occ. L u k e xiv. 9. [ E c c l u s . x x . 2 8 . In 37. is titie, or letters signifying the cause
a good sense, Ecclus. iv. 2 5 . T h u c . i. of Christ's dealh, written on a white tablet
{fEvKtapa) on t h e a u t h o r i t y of T h e o p h y -
I I . Ignominy, disgrace. occ. H e b . xii. lact on S t . M a t t . xxvii. p . 175. & Zonar.
2. [ I s a . liii. 3 , ] Canon, xxxvi. Concil. C a r t h a g . H e fan-
I I I . Cause of shame, somewhat to be cies again t h a t curia in L u k e viii. 4 7 .
askamed of. occ. 2 Cor. iv. 2. Phil. iii. 19. (simply cause) is diseasc, as in t h e G r e e k
medical writers, and refers to Casaub. a n d
J u d e ver. 13. Rev. iii. 18.
Salinas, and S p a r t . A d r i á n , p . 8 0 . ]
\^Aitr\vvofiui. Passive from áio~xí>vio to
make askamed.—/ am confounded, or, / I I I . A condition, a case. occ. M a t t . x i x .
am put to shame. Phil. i. 2 0 . (from dis- 10*.
appointment of hope). And see P s . x x v . 'Avríafxa, aroe, ro, from aináia t o nc-
2, 3 . xxxi. 1.) 2 Cor. x. 8. (from m y
* [So in L a t i n cansa. Cic. A g r . iii. 2. F a m i l . v i i .
office.) See Ecclesiastic. xxiv. 2 2 . 1 John •1. Martial. vii. Ü2, 5 . Scc Brisson. V e r b . SigniC.
ii. 2 8 . (from blamc cast on you.)—In t h e iii. p . 1 0 1 . Philost. V i t . A p o l l . vi. l ( i . íkhwarz. ad
middle, / am askamed, or / am affecled Oloar. de títylo N . T . p. 3 7 0 . |
 A I X 22
cuse, which from anta.—An accusution.
occ. Acts xxv. 7. T h u c . v. 72.
*AITIOV, TU, from a m a , which see.
I . A cause, rcasan, occ. Acts x i x . 4 0 .
I I . A crime, faull. occ. L u k e xxiii. 4 ,
14. comp. ver. 2 2 .
"Aínoc/, a, ó, ?/, from atría.—An author,
causer. occ. H e b . v. 9. [See Carpzov.
Obs. Pbilou. on this passage, and E u n a -
pius in ü í d e s . p . 3 7 . .Herodian. ii. 2. ] 2 .
Joseph. A . J . viii. 1. awr-qpiae C'UTLOC ye-
ytvri¡xévor. 2 Mace. iv. 4 7 . i E z r a x x i x .
"AifviiwQ, U, l>, i), from attj>vr¡£ unex-
pectedly, suddenly, which from atyvti) t h e
same, a derivativo from a n e g . a n d (paívoi
to appear, q. d. quicker than sight.—Stid-
den, unexpeeled, unj'oreseen. occ. L u k e
xxi. 3 4 . 1 Thess. v. 3 . [ W i s d . xvii. 1 5 .
T h u c . ii. 6 1 . ]
'Aixpa\u>cná, ae, i), from t h e same as
ái^fiáXtaroe, which seo.
I . Caplivity, 'state of being eaptive. occ.
Rev. xiii. 10. [ D c u t . xxviii. 4 1 . Ezek.
II. A eaptive muUiludc. occ. E p h . iv. 8.
which is a citation from Psal. lxviii. 18.
ncarly according to t h e L X X versión,
wherein uiypaXhujlav answers to t h e H e b .
which, as Rivetus h a t h well observed,
always denotes t h e caplives themselves, so
'fittf naty signifies * lo carry away eaptive,
and t h e expression yvpaXwrzvcev dt)(pa-
Xwo-íai' m u s t be interpreted accordingly.
[By aiypaXurría here, says Schl., we m u s t
u n d e r s t a n d all t h e adversaries of C h r i s -
t i a n i t y . " M e n , " says B r . " in t h e ser-
vice of sin and t h e devil." H e refers to
t h e T e s t . xii. P a t r . apud. F a b r . Pseud.
V . T . i. p . 6 5 4 , where we have (of t h e
Mcssiah's war on Belial), rr]v iuyfpaXtaaiav
Xá/3;/ airb T5 BíXtáp, ú/v^cie ayíwy ra! i~tr-
péú/Ei mpStae áiríiOiic Trpos Kvpwv.'}
'AixfiaXtoTEVüj, from át^áXairoc- To
lead or carry away eaptive. occ. E p h . iv.
8. 2 T i m . iii. 6, where sixteen M S S , of
which six ancient, t h e oíd commentators,
and several printed editions, read at^pd-
Xb>ri'(ui>T£e. See Wetstein and Griesbach.
[ I S a m . x x x . 3 , 5 . Amos i. 5 , & a l . ]
'AixfjaXu)TÍ(tj), from áiYjuáXwroc.
I . To carry away eaptive, or into cap-
tivilij. occ. L u k e xxi. 2 4 . [ 1 Mace. x. 3 5 .
E z e k . xii. 3 . ]
I I . F i g u r a t i v c l y , To bring into cap-
thñty, or subjectibn. occ. R o m . vii. 2 3 . 2
Cor. x. 5.
* Sw H e b . and E n g . Lexicón umlcr ñat\
A I íl
'AtxpáXwToe, a, ó, i), from ai%pí¡ a spear
(from áKfii), which see), and ctXuiróe luken,
(from t h e obsol. V. áXóti lo take, which
s e e . ) — A eaptive, a prisoner taken in war,
applied to spiritual caplives. occ. L u k e iv.
18. [Isa. Iii. 2.]
'Aiáiv, üvue, u, q. aéi tlív, always being.
— I t denotes duration, or continuance of
time, b u t with g r e a t variety. Comp. Suicer
Thesaur. in 'Ai¿v.
I. Both in t h e singular and plural i t
signifies eternity, w h e t h e r past or to come.
See L u k e i. 5 5 . Acts xv. 18. M a t . vi. 13.
M a r k iii. 2 9 . L u k e i. 3 3 . J o h n iv. 14. vi.
5 1 . E p h . iii. 1 1 . 1 T i m . i. 17.—'Eic rúe
aiivae rwv aiíivwv, For ages of ages, for
ever and ever. Gal. i. 5. Rev. i. 6, 18. v. 14.
x. 6. xiv. 1 1 . xv. 7. x x . 10.—'Eie íipépav
áuSroe, 2 P e t . iii. 18, " l i t e r a l l y , Until the
day of eternity. Bengelius on this e x -
pression remarles, t h a t i t teaches u s t h a t
eternity is a day w i t h o u t a n y n i g h t , a real
and perpetual day." M a c k n i g h t .
I I . The duration of this world. M a t .
xxviii. 2 0 . Comp. M a t . xiii. 3 9 . — ' A i r '
áiüvoe, Since the duration, i. e. t h e b e -
g i n n i n g , of the world, L u k e i. 70. A c t s
iii. 2 1 . So ÍK rS áim'oc, J o h n ix. 3 2 .
I I I . 'Atairee, bi, The ages of the world.
1 Cor. ii. 7. E p h . iii. 9. Col. i. 26. 1 T i m .
i. 17. H e b . ix. 2 6 .
IV. 'O 'Aiíov ¿Voc, This present Ufe, this
world, as we say, L u k e xvi. 8. x x . 3 4 .
Comp. M a t . xiii. 2 2 . L u k e xvi. 8 . G a l . i.
4. 1 T i m . vi. 17. 2 T i m . iv. 10. T i t . ii.
12. 1 Cor. i. 2 0 . ii. 6. viii. 13. 2 Cor. iv.
4. E p h . i. 2 1 . ii. 2 , Kara rbv aiüva rS K¿~
cr/ití rértí, According lo the course or m a n -
ner, of this world. Comp. Rom. xii. 2.
Gal. i. 4 . [Schl. says, t h a t after consider-
ing all t h e passages in which auov 3-ue
and liiuv ó péXXojv occur, he believes t h e
first to mean This present Ufe, a n d t h e
second t h e general state of all after t h e
resurrection, or t h a t of t r u e Christians in
particular, M a t . xiii. 4 0 . L u k e xx. 3 4 . 1
Cor. iii. 18. E p h . i. 2 1 . T i t . ii. 12. M a t .
xii. 32. (See Leusden de Dial. N . T . p . 9 4 ,
for a similar Rabbinical expression.) M a r k
x. 3 0 . L u k e xviii. 3 0 . xx. 3 5 . E p h . i. 2 1 .
Heb. vi. 5. These passages, he says,
clearly show t h a t t h e oíd explanation r e -
ferring cuwv ¡roe to t h e t i m e u n d e r t h e
O. T . a n d ái&iv ¡xíXXoiv to t h e time of t h e
Messiah, are wrong. T h e works of W i t -
sius and Rhenferdius contain discussions
of these phrases, a n d K a p p in E x c . i.
ad Epist. ad E p h . T . i. N . T . p. 3 8 1 .
Schleusner marks oiit some expressioae
 A I U 23 A K A

where luíov means not this lije, b u t this I I . Eterna!., without end. M a t . xxv.
syslem of things or universe, as H e b . i. 2 , 4 1 , 46. 2 Thess. i. 9. & al. freq. Phi.lcm.
where he gives, not t h e absurd Socinian ver. 15. 'Aiwvwv (Adj.) For ever, not
explauation, b u t " whose ministry he used only d u r i n g t h e t e r m of his n a t u r a l life
in creating t h e universe," xi. 3. 1 Tim..i. (comp. tjbyb E x o d . xxi. 5.) b u t t h r o u g h
17; and h e henee explains, 1 Cor. ii. 7, endless ages of eternal life and blessedness.
comparing 2 T i m , i. 9. T i t . i. 2. On the [ I t h i n k áiúvwc in this place has t h e same
use of aiiiv iov this'Ufe, the Ufe of man, sort of signification as I have noticed at t h e
see H o m . Iliad. iv. 4 7 8 . E u r . Phcen. 1545. end of dc&v. So in L a t i n wternus. Cíe.
Abresch. ad iEschyl. p . 436. Foes. CEcon. Catil. iv. c. 5. O vid. T r i s t . v. 2, 15.
H i p p . p . 10. Suid. & Hesych. in vóce. Pont. i. 2, 126. H o r a t . 1 E p . x. 4 2 .
É t y m . M . 4 1 , 9. 266, 10.] " Schleusner w i t h o u t hesitation (and t h i s
Y. 'O 'Aií>v b kpyópevog, Thc morid to deserves r e m a r k ) gives to t h e word, in all
come, the next Ufe. M a r k x. 30. L u k e xviii. passages referring to t h e futuro lot of the
3 0 . Comp, L u k e xx. 3 5 . So 'O 'Aiúv o wicked and the good, tlie sense of without
péWíov. E p h . i. 2 1 . end. T h a t t h e J e w s believed in t h e clcrnily
V I . An age, period, or periodical dis- óf p u n i s h m e i i í s a n d r e w a r d s , says Bretseh,
pensation qf' Divine Providence. In Mat. appears from t h e Testara. Aser. a p u d
xxiv. 3 , i t evidently refers to t h e Jewish Fabr. Pseud. V. T . i. p . 693. and Psalter.
age, or age under the Mosaic lam. (See Salom. P s . iii. 13, 15, 16.]
W h i t b y , Doddridge, and M a c k n i g h t on I I I . I t is spoken, J u d e ver. 7, of t h e
that Text.) B u t in M a t . xxviii. 2 0 , i t miraculous fire from heaven, which de-
seems plainly to denote the age under the stroyed t h e cities of Sodom and G o m o r r h a ,
Messiah, for Christ liad j u s t before de- not only because the effect thercof slíall be
clared, t h a t all power was given under of equal duration with the world (comp.
him both in heaven and in earth. Comp. 'hiíiv I I . ) , but also because t h e b u r n i n g
A c t s i i . 3 3 — 3 6 ; and for this use of \\ii>v of those cities is a dreadful einbleni of
see M a t . xii. 3 2 . 1 Cor. x. ] 1 (where con- t h a t everlasling fire (r¿ irvp rb duovwv,
sult Bp. P e a r c e ) , H e b . vi, 5. ix. 2 6 , and M a t . xxv. 41.) which awaits the ungodly
L X X in Isa. ix. 6. líwreKtíag rS 'Aiüvog, and unclean. Comp. J u d e ver. 15. 2 P e t .
t h e n , in M a t . xxviii. 2 0 , t h o u g h it does ii. G ; a n d see W h i t b y ' s note on J u d e ver.
not precisely signify th'e end qf the world, 7, and comp. H e b . vi. 2.
is equivalent to it. See 1 Cor. xv. 24. I V . Xpóvot áiúvioi, The ages qf thc.
V I L 'Aíwi'E!;, ót, seems, in H e b . xi. 3 , world, the times since the beginning of its
t o denote t h e various revolutións and existence. occ. Rom. xvi. 2 5 . 2 T i m . i. 9.
grand oceurrences which have happened T i t . i. 2 . Comp. E p h . i. 4. 1 P e t . i. 2 0 .
to this created system, including also t h e and 'Aiúv I I . [ P s . xxiv. 7.1xxvi. 4 . ] — T h e
syslem or world iiself. Comp. H e b . i. 2, L X X frequently use t h i s A d j . for t h e
¿md M a c k n i g h t on both texts.—'Atwv in Heb. OÍ>li>.
t h e L X X generally answers to t h e H e b . ' AKaQapaía, ag, í;, from a neg. and KSJCCÍ-
oVll*, which denotes time hidden from Qapaai, 2 d person sing. pret. pass. of w i -
m a n , whether indefinite or definite, whe- Qaípa to elcanse.
.ther past or future. [On t h e word aiLv I . Uncleanness, Jillh, in a n a t u r a l or
see Fessel. Adv. Sacr. iii. c. 2. Vorst.
physical sense. occ. M a t t . xxiii. 2 7 . [ L e v .
Philol. Sac. c. ii. and T i t m a n de Vestigiisv. 3 , 5 . N u m b . xix. 13.]
Gnostic. p . 2 1 0 . P a r k h u r s t does not no-I I . M o r a l uncleanness. R o m . vi. 19. 1
tice, as h e should have done, t h e inde- Thess. ii. 3 . iv. 7- [Lev. xvi. 34.]
.jiniteness of the word in somé cases, like I I I . Any kind of micleanness differeiit
t h a t of the words ever, nevei; always, in
from whoredom, as 2 Cor. xii. 2 1 ; any
•English. T h u s M a t . xxi. 19. ' Shall
unnaturailpollulion, whether acted by one-
iieucr grow, J o h n viii. 3 5 . Doth not al-
self, as Gal. v. 19. Col. iii. 5 ; or with any
ways abide, xiv. 16. Abode with you al-
other, Rom. i. 24. comp. ver. 2 6 , 2 7 . T h i s
ways here all your Uves, as in P s . civ. 5.
word in t h e L X X usually answers t o t h e
B a r u c h iii. 20. So a'íwvioc]
H e b . ¡iNDtO or «ato polhetion.
'Atúviog, a, ó, ?'/, and íuwvwg, a, ov, from 'AKadápryg, rnrog, by Syncópe for
diutv. dica0apórr¡g, from a neg. and Kadapórng
I. Eterna!, having neilher beginning cleaiiness.— Uncleanness, Jillhiness. occ.
ñor end, Rom. xvi. 26. (comp. 1 Tim. i. Rev. xvii. 4. according to the common
i 7.) Heb. ix. 14. editions: but observe, t h a t the Alexuii*
 A KA 24 A KA

drian and twenty-one later M S S . and prickles. M a t . vii. 16. xiii. 7. xxvii. 2 9 ,
some printed editions, for di;adciprr¡Toe read & al. Galcn, D e C u r a t . has a passage very
ra ddidapra TÍJQ, which reading is e m - similar t o M a t . vii. 1 6 , 'O yétopyog OVK
braced by Mili, Wolfius, Wetstein, and CLV Trore (¡vviicraiTO iroificrat fiárov ÍK<pí-
rbv
other learned m e n , and by Griesbach r e - PELV ¡iórpvv. " T h e husbandman would
ceived into t h e t e x t ; and indeed dicadcip- never be able to make t h e thom produce
TrjToe does n o t seem to be a Greek word. grapes*." See W e t s t e i n . " T h e Naba or
'ÁKciOaproe, tt, ó, y¡, Kal TO—ov, from a N a b k a of t h e A r a b i a n s , says Hasselquist,
neg. and KaBaípw to cleanse. Travels, p . 2 8 8 , is in all probability t h e
I . Unclean by legal or ceremonial un- t r e e which afforded t h e crown of t h o r n s
cleanness. A c t s x. 14, 2.8. xi. 8. Comp. p u t on t h e head of C h r i s t ; i t g r o w s very
L e v . v. 2. xi. 2 5 . xiii. 4 5 , efe. where t h e common in t h e E a s t . T h i s p l a n t was very
L X X dKáBuproe.. C o m p . 2 Cor. vi. 17, in fit for t h e purpose, for it has many small
which passage dKañápra seems ultimately and sharp spines, which are well adapted
to refer t o all idolatrous worship, and to give p a i n ; t h e crown m i g h t be easily
heathen impurity. See ch. vii. 1. made of these soft, r o u n d , and pliant
I I . Unclean, unjit to be admitted lo the branches : and w h a t , i n m y opinión, seems
peculiar rights and privileges qf the to be t h e greatest proof, is, t h a t t h e leaves
church, and particularly to baptism. occ. much resemble those of ivy, as t h e y a r e
1 Cor. vii. 1 4 ; where see Doddridge's of a very deep green. P e r h a p s t h e e n e -
note. [ T o t h i s head Schl. a n d B r . refer mies of Christ would have a plant some-
2 Cor. vi. 17. See É s d r . viii. 69. 1 Mace, w h a t resembling t h a t with which t h e e m -
xiii. 4 7 . ] . perors and generáis were rased t o b e
I I I . Unclean by unnatural pollution, crowned, t h a t t h e r e m i g h t Be eaJamny
E p h . v. 5 . [Evil, impure from vice. Schl. even in t h e punishment."
refers to this head all t h e passages r e - 'AKÚvdivoc, T), ov, from araj^a'.^
l a t i n g to unclean spirits. M a t . x. 1, &c. Thorny, made qf thorns. occ. M a r k xv. 17-
as he t h i n k s t h e phrase intended t o ex- J o h n x i x . 5 j so L X X in Isa. xxxiv. 13>
press their evil and ungodly n a t u r e . See "ÁKavBiva ¿iVXa, Thorny shrubs. [See
J o b iii. 8. xvii. 6, 7. L u k e vii. 2 2 . O t h e r s Wolf. T . i. p . 4 0 3 . ]
suppose t h e epithet given from t h e J e w s ' "ÁKapiroQ, a, ó, ?/, Kal TO—ov, from a neg.
believing them to inhabit sepulchres and and Kaprrbefruit.
unclean places. See B a r u c h iv. 3 5 . T o b . I . Unfruitful, bearing no fruit, Jude
viii. 3 . Isa. xxxiv. 14. and F a b r . Cod. ver. 12. Comp. M a t t . xiii. 2 2 . M a r k iv.
P s e u d . i. p . 1 9 1 . O t h e r s from t h e de- 19. T i t , iii. 14. 2 P e t . i. 8.
mons favouring idolatry. B a r . iv. 7. P s . I I . Unprojitable, 1 Cor. xiv. 14. E p h .
xevi. 5. 2 Cor. iv. 4 . F a b r . ubi supra, p . 9 7 , v. 1 1 ; on which last t e x t comp. 'A\i/o-o
167, 195. O t h e r s from their lewdness, TE\J)Q. [ S c h l . divides these passages t h u s :
G e n . vi. 2. Tob. iii. 8, 6, 14. See Zach. I. Unprojitable. 1 Cor. xiv. 14. M a t .
xiii. 2. F a b r . ubi supra, p . 7 3 2 . ] xiii. 2 2 . M a r k iv. 9.
'ÁKaipéopai, Spai, from a neg. and Kat- I I . Not acting in compliance with the
pi>Q opportunily. —To want, or be deslitute precepts of Christianity, and so losing its
:

qf, opporiuniiy. occ. P h i l . iv. 10. fruit or advantage. T i t . iii. 14. 2 P e t . i.

'ÁKc'upwQ, A d v . from aKaipos, unseason- 8. W i s d . xv. 4 . P l u t a r c h , Philop. c. 4 .
alie, which from a neg. and Katpóg oppor- I I I . Noxious. E p h . v. 1 1 , as neg. a d j .
iuniiy. Inopportunely, unscasonably, out sometimes are strong affirmatives of t h e
qf season. occ. 2 T i m . iv. 2. opposite qualities.]
"ÁKaKOQ, from a neg. and KaK¿c evil. 'AmráyvwTOE, u, o, Kal TO—ov, from
I . Frecfrom evil, or sin. occ. H e b . vii. a n e g . and Karáyvoi^oc blamed, which from
26. KarayevúaKLo to condemn.—Irreprehensi-
I I . Simple, undesigning, artless. occ. ble, not to be condemned or blamed. occ.
Rom. xvi. 18. Demosthenes and Polybius, T i t . ii. 8. [2 Mace. iv. 4 7 , in a forensie
cited by W e t s t e i n , apply t h e word in this sense.]
l a t t e r sense.—In t h e L X X &KCIKO<: answers 'A(cara/cáXti7rroc, a, !>, i), Kal, ro—ov, from
to CDD perfect, upright, J o b viii. 2 0 , and a n e g . a n d mrai.-cíXv?rroc veiled, which
t o >na simple, P r o v . i. 4. viii. 5 , & al. from KaraKoÁvTrTio to cover, hide, veil.—
"AicavBa, nc, ?/, from aVi) a point or * [ S c c ncarly the s a m e proverb in M c i d a n . A d a g -
pric/de, and dvBéw, lo flourish, abound.— a R o s e n m u l l . N . ii. p . 2 0 , a n d P r o v . A r a b . Cent.
A Ihoni or brier, which abounds with ii. N . Oü. p . 1 2 3 . c d . l i r p e n . ]
 A K, A 25 A K 31

Uñcovered, unvciled. occ. 1 Cor. xí. 5, 13, ' A K E A A A M A ' , Heb.—Akeldama, Heb.
T h e L X X use this word, Lev. xiii. 4 5 , for n m bpn a fieldqf blood. I t is compounded
the H e b . m*>ü stript of covcring. [Polyb. of t h e H e b . or Syriac bpn afeld, and fral
xv. 25. ri/v Aaváiiv kXKvaavrts diaiTa.i;¿i\v- blood. pbn is used both in Chaldee and
itrov, and s e e W e t s t . T . ii. p . 145. Schl. Syriac for a field (seeCastell's H e p t . L e x . ) ,
cites dKciXvirros, as t h e word in t h e L X X , próbably by transposition, from t h e H e b .
b u t t h a t is only the reading of the Vatican pbn a portion; b u t i t occurs not in t h e
M S . See Dieterich. Lexic. Philol. N . T . 0 . T . in t h i s sense, any more than n m
p. 6-8.] from H e b . D i doth for blood. T h i s word
IlgpP 'AKarcucpiTOc, a, Ó , I), Kai TO—ov, áKeXSapá therefore m u s t , I think, be ac-
from a neg. and KaríiKpiros condemned, knowledged an instance whereiu t h e H e -
which from KaraKpívio to condemn, which brew spoken in our Saviour's time had de-
see.—Uncondemned. occ. A c t s xvi. 37. viated from its ancient p u r i t y . C o m p .
xxii. 2 5 . [ R a t h e r , says Schleusner, One 'EÉpaí'e. occ. A c t s i. 19, where aKeXSafiÁ
who is punished without his cause being cannot be considered as Syriac, i. e. as a
hcard; dKpírws occurs in t h e same sense ñame in t h a t language whereiu t h e a n -
1 Mace. ii. 37. xv. 33.] cient Syriac versión is written : because
'AKCITCIXVTOS, ó, i¡, Kal TO—ov, from a t h a t versión, after saying, A c t s i. 19, t h a t
neg. and KaráXvros dissolved, which from the Jield in the language, njívbs, of the
KaraXvw to dissolve.—Not to be dissolved, country was called « D i bpn, adds, whose
indissoluble. occ. H e b . vii. 16. [Dion. H a l . inlerprelation (in Syriac, nainely,) is n n i p
x . c. 3 1 . 2 Mace. x. 11.] D I . S o i n M a t t . xxvii. 8, t h e same versión
l l g p 'AKaTcnruvToe,
0
a, ó, i], Kai rb—ov,
renders dypóe cufiaros not b y bpn Htii,
from a neg. and Karava-úio to cause to b u t by NDYI NiTIp.
•ectise, to restrain.-—That does not cease, 'ÁKÉpaios, a, ó, Kal r o — o v , [from a and
unecasing, as t h e word is used in t h e K£páü> lo mix (see Dioscor. v. 129. vii. 77-),
Grcek writers cited by W e t s t e i n a n d K y p k e . or Kípai^iü to hurt (see E u s t a t h . ad Iliad.
•occ. 2 Pet. ii. 14. [ T h e sense seems r a t h e r ii. 855.) T h e last is Schleusner's opinión.
here, according to the present reading, — Unhurt. (Vales. E x c . ex Diod. p . 2 7 3 .
passive, who cannot be rcslrained, (aVó) Joseph. A. J. v. 1, 15.) or actively, Hurt-
apaprías. Some M S S . read dKarairavTTti, ing no one, free from deceit; b pr) nva
in which case either sense is admissible. Kepaic,iúv, as E u s t a t h i u s says, or á?rXas
See Polyb. iv. 7. Heliodor. i. 13. Diod. (Schol. E u r . O r e s t . 920.) M a t . x. 16. R o m .
Sic. xi. j 7.] xvi. 19. ( A d d i t . E s t h . xvi. 4. Jos. A . J .
'AKaTa^acría, ac, i), from a neg. and Ka- 1. 2, 2. Arrian. E p i c t . iii. 2 3 . ) , and so
rá-racrie a sclling in its place, from KO0Í- Philipp. ii. 15. Hurting no one, harmless,
^r¡pi to place, set in its place.—[Henee for, as Br. observes, t h e Apostle is advising
Instabiliiy, or constant change of place, them to avoid quarrels, t h o u g h Schleusner
a n d tironee in t h e N . T . it signifies (as also transíales it one of puré Ufe.]
in Prov. xxvi. 28.)] Commolion, tumult. 'ÁKXIVTJS, eos, a.c, ó, i), Kal rb—se, from a
occ. L u k e xxi. 9. 1 Cor. xiv. 3 3 . 2 Cor. neg. and KXÍVIO to incline.— Without in-
vi. 5. xii. 20. J a m e s iii. 16. Clement uses clining or giving way, sleady. occ. H e b . x.
t h e word in the same sense, 1 E p . to Co- 2 3 . — [ L u ¿ E n e . D e m . p . 9 1 3 . Poli. viii.
rinthians, § 3 ; and so does Dionysius 1 0 . ] — S y m m a c h u s uses this word, J o b xii.
Iíalicarn. cited by Kypke, whom see on 14, or 2 3 , for t h e H e b . BlD'-bQ cannot slip
L u k e xxi. 9. asunder.
'AKaTwzuroe, a, b, j / , KOI TO—ov, from a 'ÁKfiá£oj, from dKfih, properly, ihepoint
neg. and KaOl^r/pi to sel lie.— Unseltled, or edge of a sharp instrumeni; thence t h e
unsteady, unstable. occ. J a m e s i. 8. [Isa. jlower, vigour, or malurily, of age, as it is
liv. 11. Hippoe. de H u m . § ii. p . 18. often used in t h e profane writers. Comp.
Poli. vi. 121.] 'XnépaKLios.—To be come to maturiiy, to
'AKarb-riyzTOC, a, ó, í , al TO—ov,
( K from a be ripie, occ. Rev. xiv. 1 8 . — T h u c y d i d e s ,
neg. and cure^M or Karciaxio (2d Aorist. ii. 19. and Xenophon apply t h i s V . in t h e
KÚmrrxov) to restrain.—Not to be re- same sense to corn, Dioscorides to apples.
strained, unruly. occ. J a m e s iii. 8 ; where See Wetstein, [and Sehweigh. L e x . P o l y b .
see Alberti and Wetstein. [ S e e 3 Mace, p. 18.]
vi. 17. Joseph. de Bell. J . ii. 11. p . 1/3. 'Aicp/, ijs, i/, from aV// t h e same.
v<\. Huyere. Diod. S k . xvii. 3 8 , where seo I . The poinl or edge. of a sharp i n s t r u -
Wesseliug.] ment. I t o.ccurs not. however, in the
 A KO
N . T . in this sense, b u t is t h u s used 2
Mace. xii. 2 2 .
I I . A point of time. T h u s applied by
t h e profane w r i t e r s ; and henee,
I I I . ' A K - U ) / ! ' t h e accus. case used ad-
( 1
verbially for KCIT dicpfii', at this point of
time, Yet, still. occ. M a t t . xv. 16. On
which passage Raphelius c i t e 3 Polybius
applying dtcpíiv in the same manner. See
also Wetstein and Kypke. [ T h i s i s t h c e x -
planation of t h e Syriac versión. I t m u s t
mean, Yet, still, after so many miracles
are ye without under slanding. O t h e r s say,
Very muck, or altogether, for which see
Eos. Ell. p. 445. T h e first is t h e com-
monest sense. Xen. A n a b . iv. 319.]
'AKOI), i}c, i), from 2d Aorist. Í)KOOV of
dictíu) lo hcar.
I. The act of hearing. R o m . x. 17.
comp. M a t . xiii. 14. Acts xxviii. 26.
I I . The sense of hearing. 1 Cor. xii.
17. H e b . v. 11. [2 P e t . ' i i . 8.]
I I I . The organ or instrument of hear-
ing, the car. M a r k vii. 3 5 . A c t s xvii. 20.
2 T i m . iv. 4.
I V . Somewhat which is, or may be,
hcard; a rumour, report, rclaiion. Mat,
iv. 24. xiv. 1. J o h n xii. 3 8 . R o m . x. 16.
1 Thess. ii. 13. H e b . iv. 2 ; in which two
last t e x t s AóyoQ dmije denotes t h e word
of t h e gospel preacked or published. See
M a c k n i g h t . T h i s I V t h sense is by some,
as Krebsius, supposed to be merely he-
braical or hellenislical, taken from t h e like
application of t h e H e b . WiDU? (see 2 K .
xix. 7. Isa. liii. 1, i n H e b . and L X X . ) I n
Eurípides, however, Phceniss. line 826, we
have ftciptapov ¿i£ 'AKOA'N íocir¡v, where
t h e Scholiast explaius dmáv by rb UKHÓ-
ptvov, what is hear A*.
V . A hearing effeclually so as to obey,
obedience. Gal. iii. 2, 5. So L X X in 1
S a m . xv. 22. T h u s M a c k n i g h t . Comp.
'Ák'Blí) V.
'AKO\OV6ÉOJ, ¿j, from a together, and KÉ-
Xevdoc a way, which from M ' X X W to moue
quick, (from H e b . bp light, quick,) and
ívOvc slraight.
I. Tofollow, altend. M a t t . iv. 25. viu.
10, 19. xxi. 9, & al. freq. O n L u k e ix.
49, K y p k e shows t h a t t h e phrase aKoXaOeív
pm'i TIVOQ, which occurs also Rev. xiv. 13,
is common in t h e A t t i c writers. [Park-
h u r s t should have observed t h a t t h e a t -
tendance expressed by this verb is often
t h a t of adisciple. M a t . iv. 20, 22. ix. 9.
* [See Honi. Iliad. x v i . 6">-i. T h u c y d . i. 2 0 .
P o l L i v . 17. M u s g r . ¡id E u r . I p u . T a u r . 8 1 8 . ]
A K O
1
in mínd, aíFection, and demeanour. M a t .
xix. 2 7 . M a r k i. 18. viii. 3 4 . ix. 3 8 . J o h n
i. 4 1 . viii. 1 2 . ]
I I . To follón, imítate, be conformed lo,
[iv. 20. ix. 9.] x. 3 8 . xvi. 2 4 . M a r k viii.
34. L u k e ix. 2 3 . J o h n viii. 12. xii. 2 6 .
[See 1 Kings xix. 20, 2 1 . ]
I I I . To reach in a continued irain.
occ. Rev. xviii. 5, Her sins, i'iKo\¿dr¡aa.v,
have followed one after another till t h e y
reach even to Heavcn. B u t in t h i s t e x t t h e
Alexandrian M S . and eighteen later ones,
with several p r i n t e d editions, read ¿VoX-
Xíldijaav; which reading is embraced by
Grotíus, Mills, and Wetstein, and by
Griesbach received into t h e t e x t ; b u t
comp. Wolfius.
'AKO'Yíi, derived, according to some,
from dio'] a sharp point, on account of t h e
aeuleness of this sense; b u t r a t h e r from
the H e b . Mp> lo hearlcen, obey ; so Onkelos
explains n¡~!¡7>, Gen. xlix. 10, by pl'Dntl/"'
shall hearlcen, obey.—It governs either a
genitive both of t h e person and t h i n g ,
or more usually an accusative of t h e
thing.
I . To kear, in general. M a t . xi. 5. xii.
19. xv. 2 4 . M a r k xiv. 64, & al. freq. A c t s
i. 4. íjv i¡K¿aar¿ pu, which ye have hcard,
from me. T h i s phraseology is not uncom-
mon in t h e best Greek writers. Raphelius
has produeed an instance of it from X e n o -
phon. I add from Herotlotus, lib. ii. cap.
104,"AKOYSAS "AAAQN, Hearing from
others; and from Plato, Apol. Socrat.
§ 2 9 . p . 114, edit. Forsicr, Ota íé Kai
T
uQio-Qe vpÜQ 'AKOY'EIN Til N "AAAQNj
Such things as ye have been used to hear
from others. Pha;do, § 1, "II "AAAOY
TO'Y "AKOYSAS, O r having hcard ( i t )
from any one clsc. § 2. "AAAOY 'AKO'Y-
ONTA, Hearing (of h i m ) from another.
See other instances in K y p k e .
I I . To hcar, hearlcen, or lisien to. M a t .
xii. 42. xviii. 15. L u k e v. 1. x. 39. xi. 3 1 .
xvii. 3. A c t s xv. 12.
I I I . To understand, hcar with the car
of the mind. M a t . ii. 9. xi. 15. [Rom. xi. 8.]
1 Cor. xiv. 2. J o h n viii. 4 3 ; where ob-
serve, t h a t A r r i a n uses ' A K O T S A I AY'-
N A 2 A I , Epietet. lib. ii. cap. 24. On
I Cor. xiv. 2, K y p k e shows t h a t t h e Greek
writers likewise use IIKÚUV for undersland-
ing*.
I V . To hear effeclually, or so as to per-
form or grant what is spolcen. M a t . xviii.
* [Schleusner allributes this meaning alto to A c b
xxii. 9.]
 A K i»
15. J o l m ix. 3 1 . x i . 4 1 . [ A c t s vii. 24.]
1 Jolm v. 14, 1 5 * .
V. To obcy. L u k e x. 16. xvi. 29. 3 1 .
Comp. J o h n viii. 4 7 . 1 J o h n iv. 6. On
Acts iv. 19, see W e t s t e i n .
[ V I . To hww by hearing. M a t . ii. 3 .
iv. 12. xiv. 3 . Gal. i. 2 3 . Philem. v. 15 &
al. and henee generally io hww. J a m e s v.
11. M a t . v. 43 (by tradition). 2 Cor. xii.
4 (by llevelation).]
[ V I L Passively. To be published, or
spread (i. e. to be much heard of) M a t .
xxviii. 14. M a r k ii. 1. L u k e xii. 3. A c t s
xi. 22. I Cor. v. 1. 2 Chron. xxvi. 1 5 . ] —
T h i s word in the L X X commonly answers
to the H e b . l'Díi», which is used in the same
senses.
£§§¡f' 'Aupcto-tá, oc, f¡, from ti neg. and
lepóme slrengih.— Want qf power to regú-
late one's appelites, intemperance, inconii-
nence. occ. M a t . xxiii. 2 5 , (where, how-
ever, t h e t r u c rcading seems to be abiKiáe-
See Wetstein and Campbell.) 1 Cor. vii. 5.
.[Plut. Gorg. 80.]
Ef2§f 'Áieparye, éoc, Se, 6, f¡, Kai rb—se,
from a neg. and lepóroe slrenglh.— Unable
ko govern his appelites, intémperate, in-
•continent. occ. 2 T i m . iii. 3 . [Prov. xxvii.
20. Polyb. viii. J E ]
"Aieparov, a, rb, from a neg. and KEpáw
to mix.—Puré mine unmixt with water, in
a figurative sense. occ. Rev. xiv. ] 0, where
see W e t s t e i n . — [ I n L X X thrice, J e r . xxv.
15. Ps. Ixxv. 8. 3 Mace. v. 2 . ] I t denotes
iu Revelations t h e unmixed severity of
Divine Vengeance.
'Aiepí€>íia, ac, y, from ÚKot&je.—Accu-
racy, exaelness. occ. A c t s xxii. 3 . Comp.
under 'ÁKpit>é~a-oe.
'AKp&é^aroe, r¡, ov, Superlative of áepc-
€ye- Most aecurate, or exact. occ. Acts
xxvi. 5. Josephus, in his Life, § 3 8 , speaks
in a very similar manner of t h e Pharisees,
t l I " S « ¿ A P I S A m N ' A I P E ' S E Q S , bi wepl
ra Trárpia vóptpa doKScri raiv CÍWÜJV 'AKPI-
BE'ÍAt AIA*E'PE1N. T h e sect of t h e
Pharisees, who are t h o u g h t to excel others
in their exaetness about their national in-
stitutions. Comp. De Bel. lib. i. cap, 5.
§ 2. & lib. ii. cap. 8. § 14.
'AKp£é^epoe, a, o>>, Comparativo of á/ept-
€r¡g. More aecurate or exact. Henee
''tíiepitérspov, N e u t . used adverbially, More
liccuraiely or exaclly. occ. A c t s xviii. 26.
xxiii. 1 5 , 2 0 . xxiv. 22.
'AKPIBH'Il, éoe, ac, ó, )/, Kul rb—se, de-
ri'ved, according to some, from ¿te áiepov
* [Oliissius ( P h i l o l . Sacr. p . OC 1, ed. D a t h . ) cites
O cu. xvi. 11. Ex. ii. 21. P s . iv, •!.]
27 A K P
/3;>at, going up to the top, or summ.it,
which requires great pains and diligence.
—Aecurate, exact. I t oceurs not in the
positive form in t h e N . T .
ÁKpiÉáb), ti), from iiKpi&íie.—To learn,
or lenow, by aecurate, or diligent inquirí/.
So V u l g . diligenter didicit, and exquisie-
r a t ; a n d Syriac. í] ?'. occ. M a t . ii. 7, 16.
1
See Campbell. [ X e n . CEc. xx. 10.]
'AicpiSóic, A d v . from ákpt€j'/c.—T>ili-
gently, accuratcly, exaclly. occ. M a t . ii. 8.
L u k e i. 3 . A c t s xviii. 2 5 . 1 Thess. v. 2.
E p h . v. 15. [ D a n . vii. 1 9 . ]
'Acpí's;, íSoe, ?'/, from ¿kpct the top or sum-
mit, because it adheres to t h e top of herbs
and plants, a n d * feeds upon t h e m . — T h e
locust, which t h e learned Bochart h a t h
shown, by a cloud of witnesses, M'as com-
monly eaten by m a n y nations of Asia and
África, both in ancient and modern times,
and the eating of several species of which
was permittod by t h e divine law, Lev. xi.
2 1 , 2 2 ; when ce we m a y be certain t h e y
were an usual food in J u d e a also. See
Bochart, vol. iii. 4 8 8 , & seq. Wolfii Cur.
Phil. D r . Shaw's travels, p . 1 8 8 , ¿}c. 2 d
edit. and H e b . a n d E u g . Lexicón, u n d e r
n m I V . [ O n t h e locust eaters, a people
of iEthiopia, see P h o t . Bibl. p . 736. See
also Ludolf. H i s t . i E t h i o p . i." c. 13. a n d
the Comment. on it, p . 168 and Casaubon.
E x . A n t i b a r . xiii. 7. Some persous have
however understood á/epte of a vegetable.
See Olaus Cels. Iiierobot. T . i. p . 2 2 9 .
ii. p . 7 2 . & Suicer. i. p . 169. 1 9 9 . ] T h e
L X X generally render t h e H e b , nííltí a
locust, by 'Acpt'e.
f f S p 'AKpoarypiov, a, rb, from
0
aKpoáopai
to hear, which from CIKOV<O io hear, p being
inserted, as in óxpoc (which see) from aVi).
—A place of hearing, or audience, an au-
dience-chamber. occ. Acts. xxv. 2 3 . — [ O n
this passage Krebsius (on Schoetg. L e x .
N . T.) says t h a t t h e Román provincial
governors summoned always as t h e i r a s -
sessors (not t h e t r i b u n e s of t h e soldiers,
who were necessarily p a r t of t h c council,
b u t ) all persons of any consequence from
their office or situation. See Cic. V c r r .
i. c. 2 9 . ]
'AiepourriG, rS ó, from áiepoíiopai lo hear.
See the preceding w o r d . — A hearer. occ.
Rom. ii. 13. J a m e s i. 2 2 , 2 3 , 2 5 . One who
lenows.
'AicpoéuTta, ae, ?'/, from iíiepov the exlrc-
mity, and ¡iva lo cover, which perhaps
from H e b . tVil lo come, come upon, or over.
* S o E t y m o l . B l a g . 'AKl'1'2, wttf&iü, ''AKl'As
üo-ixyym y.-Á TÜV !f t/J tu» N E',V) liííiAl,
 A K 1' 28
I. The forestan, or prcpucc, covcring
the extremity of t h e glans. A c t s xi. 3 .
I I . Uncir cumcision, either the state of
being uncircumcised, occ. Rom. iv. 10.
1 Cor. vii. 18. [Gal. v. 6. Col. i. 11.] or an
•uncircumcised man or men, Rom. ii. 2 6 ,
27- iü. 30. Gal. ii. 7. E p h . ii. 11. T h u s
also t h e H e b . nhlli is applied, J e r . ix. 2 5 ,
t h e abstract for the concrete.—In the L X X
this word answers to t h e H e b . íl"?*ü} the
superfluous foreskin. See J a m e s i. 1 2 . *
T h e A d j . 'Ai:pó€v^oe, Uncircumcised, is
used by I g n a t i u s , Epist. ad Philadelph.
§ 6. edit. Russcll.
'AKpoyioviaioQ, a, ov, from cÍKpoc extreme
(here the lower extreme, or bottom), and
yíovía a córner.—The foundalion-corncr
stoue, applied figuratively to Christ, who
not only suslains t h e whole s t r u c t u r e of
t h e church, but also imites t h e J e w s and
Gentiles i n t o f one mystical building. occ.
E p h . ii. 20. 1 P e t . ii. C. T h e L X X once
use this word for t h e H e b . ¡ D S a corner-
slonc, in Isa. xxviii. 16, the passage cited
by St. P e t e r ; and in t h e versión of S y m -
machus, dicpoyioviáíoQ answers to t h e H e b .
¡"US Wi^ib at the head qf the comer. Psal.
cxviii. 2 2 . ; b u t comp. under Tiovía I.
•"|3§¡° 'Aupodíviov, s, rb, from cí/epoe the
lop, and Ble or $lv, Gen. Sívoe, which
seems properly to mean a heap qf sandon
the sea-shore, or in general the sea-shore,
from Selva lo slrike or smite, because it is
continually smilten or beaten upon by t h e
waves. (Comp. ' A i y i c i A o ' c . ) I n this sense
t h e word is used by H o m e r , and is thence
applied to denote a heap of any t h i n g ,
particularly of corn.
I. The lop qf a heap qf corn: henee
the Jirstfruiis qf corn ; because these were
usually taken from the lop of the heap.
I t oceurs not in the N . T . in this sense.
B u t see W e t s t e i n .
I I . The lop qfihe heap ofwarlike spoils,
the chief and best qf those spoils. occ. H e b .
vii. 4 ; where D r . H a m m o n d remarles, t h a t
t h e sense is not, t h a t A b r a h a m gave M e l -
chisedec a t e n t h of t h e chief spoils only
(for he gave him tithes qf all, ver. 2. Gen.
xiv. 20.) b u t t h a t what he gave for a tenth
qf all was of the chief and best of t h e spoils.
T h e Apostle doth not say, SíKárnv TÜV
uicpodtviúv, a tenth of the chief spoils, b u t
ÍWCITJJV 'EK TÜV ¿wpodivíiúv a tenth (namely
of all, taken) from the chief spoils. Thus
t h e D o c t o r . — R a p h e l i u s on this passage
* [ I do not understand this reference.]
+ [ T h i s is the ¡uu-rprclaliou of Jtlpipliuiuus de
Jlicrcs. p, ¡Já-i.]
A A A
observes, t h a t t h e profane writers Hcro»
dotus, Thucydides, a n d X e n o p h o n cali that
part qf the spoil which was dedicated to
the gods átcpodívia, b u t t h a t t h e Apostle by
this word means all the spoils universally.
So K y p k e ; and t h u s Chrysostom and T h e o -
phylact explain ciKpoOívia by Xádtvpa spoils,
GEcumenius by Xátjwpa Kal oKvXa spoils
and plunder, Theodoret by X¿ia prey. O u
this latter interpretation deKarnv ÍK T&V
cÍKpodivíwv will mean j u s t t h e same as
Stuárriv airo Trávrwv ver. 2, and in in one
expression will answer to OTO in t h e other.
A n d if it be considered t h a t t h e Apostle is
here a r g u i n g from t h e history in t h e O . T .
which says indeed t h a t A b r a h a m gave
Melchisedec tithes of all (^On I t s j j a , G e n .
xiv. 20.), b u t mentions n o t h i n g of his doing
this from t h e best or chief spoils; t h i s ,
togetlier with t h e a u t h o r i t y of t h e G r e e k
commentators, may incline one to Raphe»
lius's opinión. B u t let t h e reader j u d g e
for himself. [See X e n . Cyrop. vii. 5, 13.]
"At;po£, ti, ó, t), t:al rb—ov, from aKi¡
(which see under ¿iKpy) a sharp point,
which is the top, extremity, or termination
of m a n y things.
, I. "Aicpov, rb, used as a substantive, The
lop, or lip. occ. L u k e xiv. 24. Pleb. xi. 2 1 .
I I . Extreme, extremity, end. occ. M a t .
xxív. 3 1 . M a r k xiii. 2 7 — I n t h e L X X t h i s
word is frequently used for H e b . Tííp the
end, and Das t h e termination, extremity ;
and w h a t is remarkable, t h a t versión, for
t h e H e b . friS the thumb or great toe, al-
ways uses iíicpov, as in Exod. x x i x . 20.
J u d g . i. 6, 7.
'Amputo, w, from a neg. and Kvpóot lo
confirm; so Appian in W e t s t e i n on M a t .
'Eicúpe rbv vópov, H e ratijied t h e law. To
makc qf no cffecl or aulhority, to abrógale
or annul. occ. M a t . xv. 6. M a r k vii. 13.
Gal. iii. 17- T h i s verb oceurs not in t h e
L X X ; b u t in t h a t versión, ¿wvp&c iroieiv,
to malte qf none effect, answers to the H e b .
p*iE) to reject, Prov. i. 2 5 .
!
AüiúXv-we, A d v . from áKÚXvroe not hin-
dered, which from a neg. and KWXVTOS hin-
dered, which from KÍOXÍUO to hinder.—•
Without hinderance, prohibition, or impe-
diment. occ. A c t s xxviii. 3 1 . [See Wisd.
vii. 23.]
"AKIÚV, acra, ov, for aÍKiav; which latter
is used by t h e Poets, particularly by H o -
mer, from a neg. and '¿KUV willing.—Un-
willing, occ. 1 Cor. ix. 17.
'AAA'BASTPON, a, rb.—Á vcssel to hohl
oinlmenl, or perfume ; so called, I think,
with Juróme and the ancicnts, from its
 29
A A A
being made of t h e alabaster stone, which
is a kind of valuable marble, concerning
which Pliny, N a t . H i s t . lib. 3 3 . cap. 8.
t r e a t i n g of the onyx, writes t h u s : " T h i s
some cali t h e alabaster stone (alabastriten),
of which t h e y make vessels to hold oint-
ments, which it is said to preserve freest
from c o r r u p t i o n * . I t is found about
Thebes in E g y p t , and Damascus in Syria.
T h e latter is the whiter of the two. B u t
the best of all used to be met with in Car-
mania, afterwards in I t a l y , and formerly
Syria and A s i a ; b u t t h e worst, and t h a t
which has no lustre, comes from Cappa-
docia." T h e Greek ñame áXáÉatpov is
by some derived from a neg. and Xapۇ-
víiv or Xateív to hold, because it is diffi-
cult to lay hold on' t h i s stone by reason of
its smoolhness: b u t may it not r a t h e r
have an oriental derivation from t h e H e -
brew or Arabic article bü; the, and nya, or
¡ D I O , which in Arabic signifies some kind
of whilish stoncs ? See Castell. L e x . H e p -
taglott. However this be, I apprehend
¿iXá€arpov was used as a name for an oint-
ment-vessel at first, because such were com-
monly made of the alabaster stone, though
it is afterwards sometimes applied to oint-
ment vessels, made of other m a t t e r . T h u s
K y p k e on M a r k xiv. 3 . cites from P l u t a r c h
in Alexandro, p . 676, a variety of vessels,
Kal 'AAABA'STPOYS, irárra pú¡ra j'/o-io;- x
péva Trepír-Loc, and alabasters, all curiously
w r o u g h t o f g o M / and in Theocriíus, Idyll.
15. line 1'14, we have 2vpíu> OE M Y ' P Q I
Xpv<x¿t 'AAA'BASTPA, golden alabasters
ñ d l of Syrian ointment. (See Alberti on
M a t . and Suicer. T h e s a u r . ) So we cali a
vessel for holding ink an mk-horn, though
made of glass or leather. Raphelius on
M a t . xxvi. 7. r e m a r k s , t h a t H e r o d o t u s ,
lib. iii. cap. 2 0 , among t h e preseuts sent
by Cambyses to t h e king of Ethiopia,
mentions MY'POY ' A A A ' B A S T P O N ; and
Cicero, Academ. lib. ii. (as cited b y N o u -
n i u s ) , speaks of alabaster plenus unguenti.
occ. M a t . xxvi. 7. M a r k xiv. 3 . L u k e vii.
37. See W e t s t e i n on M a t . — T h e L X X
once use áAáÉairpoc for t h e H e b . ftnbf a
dish or platter. 2 Kings xxi. 13.
Efgp"' '±\.Xa'(oveía, ac, i), from t h e follow-
ing áXá¿W.
I . A boast or boasting. occ. J a m e s iv. 16.
I I . 'AXa'(oveía ra ¡oía, The pride or
pomp of life, the ambitious or vain-glorions
pursuit, of the honours, glories, and splen-
dour of this life. occ. 1 J o h n ii. 16. O n
* S e e A t l i e n . v i . 1 9 . x v . 1 3 . P l i n . N . H . xiii.
2 . Martial. x i . 9.
A A A
which passage t h e learned Raphelius ob-
serves, t h a t Polybius uses t h e phrase i¡
irtpl rae /3iác á X a £ o r a a for all k i n d of
luxury in one's manner of living, w h e t h e r
in dress, houses, furniture, servants, e a t -
ing, &c. St. J o h n ' s expression seems t o
imply all this, and moreover to include all
those other p u r s u i t s , w h e t h e r of ambiiion
or vain-glory, b y which men aim at mahing
a figure in t h e eyes of their fellow-mortals.
See " Doddridge." [Theod. Prov. xiv. 13.
1
Hos. v. 5.]
'AXa^úy, OVOQ, ó, ?'), from a intens. a n d
\á'(oLiai to take, assume.—Self-assuming,
insoleul,vain-glorious, arrogant, boasting.
occ. Rom. i. 30. 2 T i m . iii. 2. J o b x x v i ü . 8.
' A X a X á £ ú ) , from ' A X a X á . — To cry Alala.
T h i s word Alala seems t o b e formed from
t h e H e b . ñames of God, riba ii^K, or bu
tiba. Henee ' A X a X á , t h e military s h o u t o f
t h e Greeks before a battle, was originally
an invocalion qf their gods to assist t h e m .
So t h e T u r k s , when e n t e r i n g upon action,
still cry out, Allah ! Allah ! H e n e e also
t h e accíamation of the chorus in t h e hynins
to Apollo mentioned by Suidas, ' A A A A A I ;
and henee t h e F r e n c h and E n g l i s h p a r -
ticles of grief, Helas! Alas! are, I a p -
prehend, to be ultimately deduced.
I. To shout as soldiers beginning a b a t -
tle * . — I t occurs n o t in this sense in t h e
N . T . , b u t frequently in t h e profane w r i t e r s
and in t h e L X X , 1 Sam. xvii. 2 0 , 5 2 , & al.
I I . To utter a loud, but mournful sound,
to wail, yell. occ. M a r k v. 3 8 . N o t only
t h e L X X vise t h e word in t h i s sense, J e r .
iv. 8. x x v . 3 4 . xlvii. 2 , for t h e H e b . bb> to
wail; b u t Elsner a n d Kypke on M a r k
have shown, t h a t t h e profane writers a p -
ply the V. á\a\á£ü) and the N . á X á X c i y -
poe to t h e same meaning.
I I I . To make a disagreeable, inharmo-
nious noise; spoken of a cymbal, to tinkle,
clank. occ. 1 Cor. xiii. i . [Pseíl. d e O p .
Dasm. p . 1 0 1 . ] — T h i s word in t h e L X X
answers to t h e H e b . j?'nn lo break out into
a loud sound [Josh. vi. 1 0 . ] , bb> lo yell
[ I s . xxv. 3 4 . ] , and once to j ) ' D » n to cause
to be heard [ E z . xxvii. 3 0 . ]
E§S¡¡¡° 'AXáXrjTOQ, a, ó, y, Kal ro—ov, from
a neg. aad XaXéoj to speak, utter.— Un-
spcakable, unutterable. occ. Rom. viii. 2 6 .
— [Schl. says t h a t this word is not w h a t
cannot be, b u t (according to analogy, as
¿IKÍVI]TOC) what is not expressed; a n d t h a t
in t h e jiassage of Romans t h e m e a n i n g is,
* S e e H u t c h i n s o n ' s N o t e 1 , on X e n o p l i o n ' s C y -
ropajd.p. 1 5 1 . fivo. [ X e n . A g e s . ii. 10. H i s t . Gr. iv.
c. 3 . 1 0 . 'Polyain. i. 2 0 . 1. p . 4Í!. viii. 2 3 . 2 . p . 7 3 5 . ]
 A A E 30 A A E

in secret and unexpresscd desires or aspi- the second cock-crowing, as is observed b y

rations. Br. says, ' intercessions not u t - Bochart and o t h e r s . " D r . Clarke's n o t e
tered in words like those of human beings, on M a t . xxvi. 34. occ. M a r k xiii. 3 5 . See
ñor speakabJe by man.'] Bochart, vol. iii. 119, and comp. u n d e r
"A\a\oQ, a, b, i¡. from a neg. and XciXós 'AXÉKrwp. [ B u x t . L e x . T a l m . p . 384.]
speaking, which from \a\éw to speak. ' A x V E ' K T Q P , o p o c , ó, from a neg. and
I . Not speaking, unable to speak, dumb. XÉKTpov a bed, according to some, because
occ. M a r k vii. 37- [ P s . x x x v i i i . 13.] by crowing cocks rouse men from their
I I . Making dumb, making unable io beds. B u t may not this ñame be as p r o -
speak. occ. M a r k i s . 17, 2 5 . So P l u t a r c h , bably deduced from t h e H e b . TiK n3Í?n the
De O r a c . Defect. p . 438, B, cited by W e t - coming of the light, of which this bird of
stein, speaks of the P y t h i a n priestess be- dawning (as Shakspeare calis h i m ) gives
i n g on a certain occasion ' A A A ' A O Y ra¡ such remarkable notice, and for doing
KÚKtí I I N E ' Y M A T O S — i r k i i p y e , F u l l of a which he was, among t h e heathen, sacred
dumb and malignant spirit. Coinp. K a f ó c to t h e Sun, who, in H o m e r , II. vi. line 5 1 3 ,
III. and II. xix. line 3 9 8 , is himself called
"A\ac, ame, rb, from cíXe t h e same. ' H A E ' K T Í i P ? Comp. H e b . and E n g . L e x i -
I. Salí natural, wliieh eminently purifies, cón u n d e r bi*>i. The mole of a species of
cleanses, and preserves from corruption, birds, the house-cock. M a t . xxvi. 34. & al.
L u k e xiv. 3 4 . H e n e e , freq. I n M a t . xxvi. 3 4 , our L o r d is r e p r e -
I I . Applied spiritually. 1 st, t o t h e dis- sented as saying, t h a t , before the cock
ciples of Christ, who were to m i x with and crew., P e t e r should deny him thrice; so
purify t h e corrupted mass of mankind, by L u k e xxii. 3 4 . J o h n xiii. 3 9 . B u t ac-
t h e i r heavenly doctrines and holyexamples. cording to M a r k xiv. 3 0 , he says, Before
M a t . v. 13. M a r k ix. 50. 2dly, t o purify- the cock crow twice, thou shalt deny me
ing faith and hope. M a r k ix. 50. comp. thrice. How are these texts to be recon-
Col. iv. 6. A c t s xv. 9. 2 P e t . i. 4. 1 J o h n ciled ? V e r y satisfactorily, I t h i n k , by ob-
iii. 3 . 1 Cor. xiii. 12, and see H e b . and serving, after m a n y learned Christians,
E n g . Lexicón in hVo I I . T h e above cited t h a t ancient a u t h o r s , both G r e e k and
are all t h e passages of t h e N . T . wherein L a t i n , mention two cock-crowings; t h e
« X a c , occurs.—This word i n t h e L X X is one of which was soon after m i d n i g h t , t h e
used only for t h e H e b . tibn. [Lev. ii. 13. other about t h r e e o'clock in t h e m o r n i n g ;
D e u t . x x i x . 23.] and this latter, being most noticed by m e n
'AAET<I>Í2, either from t h e H e b . f^J? to as t h e signal of their approaching labours,
cover over, or from a collect. and Xíwoefat, was called, by way of eminence, T H E
which see u n d e r Aí-rrapog.— To anoint with Cock-crowing{comT¡>.'A\£Kropoo}ü)vía); and
oil or ointment. L u k e vii. 46. & al. O n to this alone M a t t h e w , giving t h e general
M a t . vi. 17, Doddridge j u s t l y observes, sense of our Saviour's w a r n i n g to P e t e r ,
t h a t it was usual among t h e J e w s to anoint r e f e r s ; b u t M a r k , more accurately r e -
their heads, not only at feasts, b u t a t other cording his very words, mentions t h e two
imes *. T h i s he proves from R u t h iii. 3 . cock-crowings. See W e t s t e i n on M a r k xiv.
2 Sam. xiv. 2. J u d i t h xvi. 8, which see, 3 0 ; Scheuchzer P h y s . Sacr. on M a r k xiii.
« i d comp. 2 Sam. xii. 7. Eccles. ix. 8. Dan. 35 ; and W h i t b y ' s note on M a t . xxvi. 3 4 .
x. 3; and on L u k e vii. 3 8 , W e t s t e i n and "AXevpov, tí, rb,from ¿.XE'ÍÜ togrind, which
:Kypke cite passages from t h e G r e e k and perhaps from H e b . 'bi? apestle, with which
L a t i n writers, to show t h a t anointing the t h i n g s are brayed or ground in a m o r t a r .
feet wüh perfumed ointment was some- " F o r t h e first i n s t r u m e n t s used (for
times, t h o u g h rarely, practised by t h e b r u i s i n g or grinding corn) were only
ancients. In t h e L X X this word answers pestles and m o r t a r s of wood or stone. T h e
t o t h e H e b . tilVD to anoint, mto or nía io Greeks, Romans, and almost all nations
cover or daub over, and to to anoint.
were a long time before t h e y discovered
l i g ^ 'AXeKropoaiuii'ta, ae, ¿/,from aXénruip any other method of m a k i n g corn i n t o
51

a cock, a n d <p¿¡vr¡ a voice.—Cock-crowing, meal. M a n y nations even in our days have

the time of cock-crowing, " t h a t is, the no other machine for this p u r p o s e * . " —
time from twelve at night till three in the Meal oí corn. occ. L u k e xiii. 2 1 .
mor?iing,\vhich last hour wasusually called
* T h u s s a y s the learned Goguet, in h i s admirable
* [ I n s i c k n e s s ; see L i g h t f o o t , H . H . & T . on work intitled T h e Origin of L a w s , A r t s , and S c i -
M a t . vii. 1 7 : and death ; see Geler. de L u c t . H e b r . ences, v o l . i. p a g e 9 9 . E d i n b u r g h edit. T h e s e o b -
c. 2 1 . G e n . x x x i . 1 3 . 2 S a m . x i i . 2 0 - ] servations h e confirms from H e s i o d , O p . ver. 4 4 3 .
 A A II 31
'AXnOéta, as, v, from dXnOíic true.
I . [Objectively truth, eitlier according
to experience, as M a r k v. 3 3 * . (Joseph.
B . J . vii. 2.) J o h n v. 3 3 . Acts x . 3 4 . or
logical truth according to reason. H e n e e
often in t h e N . T . it is a r i g h t knowledgc
of absolute t r u t h , i. e. of God, Rom. i. 1 8 .
or of religión, as shown by revelation
from h i m , and therefore, logically t r u e .
J o h n viii. 4 0 . 4 5 , 4 0 . xviii. 3 7 , 3 8 . Acts
xxvi. 2 5 . Rom. ii. 2 0 . 2 Cor. xiii. 8. G a l .
v. 7. E p h . i. 13. Col. i. 5 . 2 Thess. ii. 10.
13. 1 T i m . ii. 4. iii. 15, iv. 3 . vi. 5. 2 T i m .
ii. 15, 18, 2 5 . iii. 7, 8. iv. 4 . T i t . i. 1. & 14.
1 P e t . i. 2 2 . 2 P e t . i. 12. ii. 2 . J a m e s i. 18.
J o h n i. 14. viii. 32. xiv. 17. leaching truth,
xv. 2 6 . xvi. 13. xvii. 17, 19. 1 J o h n i. 6.
/ do not act according to divine truth.
ib. 8. iii. 19. t r u e Christians. iv. 6. 2 J o h n
1, 2, 4. same as v. 6. to walk according to
thc command of God. 3 J o h n i. according
lo thc precepts of truc Christianity. So
1 John. ii. 4. Such a man has no real re-
ligión. H e b . x. 2 6 . J a m e s iii. 14. 1 J o h n ii.
2 1 . 3 J o h n 8. In J o h n xiv. 6. Christ is
called the Truth perhaps as t h e teacher
of this t r u t h . ]
[ I I . Subjectively truth. i. e. (1.) t h e
agreement of words with ihoughts. Mark
x ü . 3 1 . 1 T i m . ii. 7 . of performances with
threats, Rom. iii. 7. with promises, Rom.
xv. 8. John viii. 44. i. e. he kept not the
promises by which in the beginning he de-
ceivedour first parenls. S u c h i s B r . ' s . idea.
P a r k h u r s t translat.es t h e word as inlegrity,
and so Schleusner comparing 1 J o h n iii. 8.
T h e reader m u s t j u d g e . 2 Cor. vi. 7- by
spcalcing the truth. 1 J o h n v. 6. The spirit
is cntirely true,i. e. veracious. E p h . i v . 2 5 .
to be veracious. O r (2.) t h e agreement of
our words, t h o u g h t s , &c. with t h e precepts
of t r u t h , i. e. sincerity. M a r k xii. 14. L u k e
iv. 2 5 . x x . 2 1 . M a t . xxii. 16. J o h n xvi. 7.
Rom. ix. 1. xi. 2. 2 Cor. vii. 14. E p h .
v. 9. Phil. i. 18. Coloss. i. 6. 'AyctTraV kv
dXndéiq lo love sincerely. 1 Cor. v. 8.
1 John iii. 18. 2 J o h n 3 . comp. Ecclus. vii.
20. So John iv. 2 3 , 2 4 , i t is opposed to
pretended piel y, E p h . iv. 2 4 . vi. 14. comp.
1 Sam. xii. 2 4 . 1 Kings ii. 4. iii. 6. Br.
refers to this also t h e form of asseveration
in 2 Cor. xi. 10. T h e n (3.) Virtue, Inte-
grity. J o h n iii. 2 1 . Rom. ii. 8. E p h . v. 9.
PUny, l i b . 1 8 . § 3 . and 2 3 . Scrv. ad / E n e i d . i x .
ver. 4 . H i s t . Góncr. d e s V o y a g e s , t o m . iii. 8 1 . &
431. T o w h o m add Nichulir, Dcscription de
1'A rabie, p . 4 5 , and note.
[* T h e expression vaca» £\$imv lnrw is quite
dassic.il, See H o i n . I I . x x i v . 4 0 7 . H e r o d . viii. 8 2 . ]
A A Ii
1 Cor. xiii. 6. 2 Cor. iv. 4. James v. 19-
3 J o h n 2 . & 12. Tob. iv. 6. See Prov. xiv. 8 .
xxviii. 6. F a b r . Pseud. V . T . i. p . 6 0 4 . ]
'AXnOtvoj, from d\r¡dí¡s inte.—To speale,
or maintain, the truth. occ. G a l . iv. 1 6 * .
E p h . iv. 15. [ G e n . xiii. 16. X e n . A n . iv.
4. 10.]
'AXnO/yc, Éoc, 5 c , ó, Kai y, Kai ri dXyQéc-,
from a n e g . and Xy6o> to lie Mil, because
truth cannot be finally suppressed and
hidden.
[I. True, according to experience, or t o
t h e fact or event. T h u s J o h n iv. 1 8 . x .
44. x i x . 3 5 . x x i . 2 4 . 1 Jolm ii. 8. T i t . i;
13. 2 P e t . ii. 22.—opposed t o visionary,
Acts xii. 9.]
[ I I . True, logically, i. e. w h a t is of itself
t r u e and genuine. 1 P e t . v . 12. comp. W i s d .
i. 6.—of God as t h e a u t h o r a n d t e a c h e r ,
and g r e a t origin of t r u t h . J o h n ü i . 3 3 .
viii. 26.]
[ I I I . Veracious, acting and j u d g i n g ac-
cording to a knowledgc of t h e t r u t h of
God. Rom. iii. 4.—of a divine teacher,
M a t . xxii. 16. M a r k xii. 14. comp. L u k e
xx. 2 1 . J o h n vii. 18. 2 Cor. vi. 8. 1 J o h n
ii. 2 7 . comp. Wisd. vi. 17-—of testimony
as credible, J o h n v. 3 1 , 3 2 . viii. 1 3 , 14,
16, 17. 3 J o h n 12.
I V . Honest, sincere. P h i l . iv. 8. S o in
L a t i n verum, H o r . E p i s t . i. 1, 1 1 , b u t
Schleusner translates i t upright, virtuous,
I should be inclined t o refer J o h n viii. 16,
to a meaning somewhat like t h i s , just, in
agreement with juslicc, as Joseph. A . J .
vi. 5, 2. vii. 5, 4 . T h u c y d . iii. 5 6 . ]
'AXndivbe, ?}, o)', from dXydyc true.
I. True, as opposed t o false. J o h n iv.
37. xix. 3 5 . Rev. iii. 14. xix. 9, & al.—to
pretended or repuled. John xvii. 3 . 1 T h e s .
i. 9. Johnv.20.-—todcceilful. L u k e xvi. 1 1 .
I I . True, real, essential, as opposed t o
types or cmblems +. J o h n i. 9. vi. 3 2 . xv.
1. H e b . viii. 2. i x . 2 4 . [ J e r . ii. 2 1 . Zach.
viii. 3.]
I I I . True, sincere, as opposed to hypo-
critical or insincero. H e b . x . 2 2 . [ I s a .
xxxviii. 3 . J o h n ii. 3.]
[ I V . Veracious, worthy of credil. J o h n
vii. 2 8 . R e v . iii. 14. xix. 9, 1 1 . x x i . 5
xxii. 6.
V . Just. R e v . vi. 10. xv. 3 . xvi. 7. xix.
2. S o n g of 3 Child. iv. 7 . I s a . x x v . 1.]
'AXydoj, from dXéio to grind, which see
* [ T h e sense here is to teach thc truth, i. e. C h r i s .
tianity.]
f [ T h e h e a v e n l y t e m p l e of w h i c h that at J e r u s a -
lem w a s t h e t y p e . W i s d . i x . 8. See F a b r . C o d .
P s e u d . V . T . i. p . 5 5 0 . ]
 A A I
under "AXsvpor.—To grind. occ. M a t . x x i v .
41. L u k e xvii. 3 5 . — T i i e ancieut custom
of tvomen's being employed in grinding
corn, is not only mentioned in the O . T .
Exod. xi. 5. (comp. Isa. xlvii. 2.), b u t we
find t h e same in H o m e r , Odyss. vii. line
104, where speaking of Alcinous's fifty
inaid-servauts, h e says,
'AI fih 'AAETPE'rOYSI MT'AHÍ MTI pr,\ma xipivw,
Some at the mili grind the well-favour'd grain.
Comp. Odyss. xx. line 105, and H e b . and
E n g . Lexicón, under t D l T i I.—'AX)'/6<u in
t h e L X X answers to t h e H e b . jn¡2 of t h e
same import. [ N u m b . xi. 8.]
'AXriOaie, Adv. from dXndye.
I . Tritly, really, as opposed to pretend-
edJy. M a t . xiv. 3 3 . xxvi. 7 3 .
I I . Tndy, of a trutli, certainly. Mat.
xxvi. 7 3 . J o h n vii. 2 6 . xvii. 8. A c t s xü.
11. Observe, t h a t t h e second dXnQüís,
J o h n vii. 26, is not found in nineteen M S S ,
three of which are ancient, ñor in several
ancieut versions, ñor in t h r e e oíd printed
editions, and is accordingly rejeeted from
t h e t e x t by Griesbach. See also W e t s t e i n ,
B p . Pearce, and Campbell, on t h e t e x t .
I I I . Tndy, veraciously, as opposed to
falsely. L u k e ix. 2 7 . xü. 44. xxi. 3 .
I V . Truly, spiritually, as opposed to
naturally or externaüy. J o h n i. 4 7 . vi. 5 5 .
' AXitig, eos, ó, J'I, from &Xg the sea.—A
Jísher. occ. M a t . iv. 18, 19. (comp. M a t .
xvi. 1-8.) M a r k i. 16, 17. L u k e v. 2. [ I n
M a t , iv. 19. M a r k i. 17, the sense is m e -
taphorical. S o Qnpq-v is used X e n . M e m .
ü . 6, 8. P l a t . Sophist. c. 8, 9, and in L a t i n
venari. H o r . E p . i. xix. 37.]
'AX/eúw, from aXinc.— To fisk, eatch
jish. occ. J o h n xxi. 3 .
'AXíffci, from cíXc salí.—To salt. 'AXí-
'Copai, pass. To be salted, seasoned, or
sprinkled with salt. o c c M a t . v. 1 3 .
M a r k ix. 49, Ilae yap -nvp't aXwQí\atrai.
" T h e proper translation of this passage
is, Every one shall be salted for the fire,
namely, by you m y a p o s t l e s : for irvpí
here is t h e dative, not t h e a b l a t i v e ; as
i t is likewise 2 P e t , iii. 7, where t h e same
construction is found, irvpí TrjpSfieroi re-
served for the fre. Every one shall be
e a l t e d y b r t h e fire of G o d ' s altar, i. c, shall
be preparad to be offered a sacrifice to
God, holy and acceptable. F o r t h o u g h
t h e proposition be general, it m u s t be
limited by t h e n a t u r e of the subject t h u s :
E v e r y one who is offered a sacrifice unto
God shall be salted for t h e fire, as every
sacrifice is salted with salt." Note in
32 A A A
M a c k n i g h t ' s H a r m o n y on t h e place, where
seo more. Ih M a t . v. 13, aXierOiiaerai
refers to the salt itself, as seems evident
from comparing M a r k ix. 5 0 . — H o w shall
its saltness be restored? Campbell.
[Campbell's interpretation is t h a t also of
Schl. and in M a r k ix. 4 9 , he says t h a t , as
every victim was salted before being sa-
crifíced on account of t h e supposed p u r i -
fying qualities of salt, the verb signiries to.
destine to death, or to put to death, and
henee t h e passage means, Every wicked
man must perish by fire, as the victim
when salted, is slain. Other interpreta-
tions are, Every one consecrated to God
must be prepared for future happiness by
the salt qf truc wisdom. Every discip/c
must be amended and prepared by ajfiic-
tions, as all sacriftees are by salt before
they are acccpled by God. Every one
condemned will be imbued wilh fre, the
salt of hell, or will learn by punishment lo
repent. Br. says, All the condemned are.
by the fre of hell consecrated to God, as
the victim, efe. T h e word oceurs Lev. ii.
13. E z e k . xvi. 4.]
l^¡p° 'AXícryíipa, aros, TO, from dXicryéta
topolhite.—Pollution by unclean, i.e.for-
bidden,food. occ. A c t s xv. 20 ; where ob-
serve, t h a t what is in this verse expressed
by dXeeryr¡pár(i)v TÜV éiSwXwv pollutions qf
idols, is, a t ver. 2 9 , called ¿ISÍOXCIOÚTLOI'
meats offered to idols*. See G r o t i u s and
W e t s t e i n on ver. 2 0 . — T h e verb üXio-yéto is
used by t h e L X X , Mal. i. 7, 12 ; by T h e o -
dotion, D a n . i. 8 ; and in Ecclus. xl. 2 9 .
In t h e t h r e e former t e x t s it answers to t h e
H e b . or Chald. bul, and in all refers p a r t i -
cularly to pollution by meats or drinJcs.
'AXXcí, N e u t , plur. of ¿ÍXXos, diverse,
other, used as a particle implying in dis-
course some diversily, or.superaddilion to
what preceded.
1. But. 1 Cor. xv. 3 9 . & al. freq. 1 Cor.
x. 20 ; where " t h e obscurity of the place
is owing to an ellipsis of t h e word áyj- be-
fore ctXX'. T h i s is usual in t h e best w r i -
t e r s , b u t I do not know t h a t it has been
y e t observed." M a r k l a n d in Bowyer's
Conjectures.
2. After h in t h e former member of
t h e sentence, Yet. M a r k xiv. 2 2 . 2 Cor.
iy. 16. xi. 6. Col. ii. 5. & al. Comp. 1 Cor.
viii. C.
* [ T h e parts of the v i c t i m not offered to the gods,
were sold, or used at cntertainments. T h e s e are the
i i í í i l í t o r e . T h e J e w s t h o u g h t those w h o cat them
polluted b y the g u i l t of idolatry. W a h l tliinks « M o
y i i f « í 7 « are these polluted meats.]
 A A A 33
3 . Bul, except, unless. M a r k ix. 8.
(comp. Mat.xviL 8.) So Mat. xx. 23.—SV
i « v kjibv hoíivaí, áXX' oís firoipa^ai viro ra
7r«xpoe fia,—is not mine to give, except, or
unless, to those for whom it is prepared
by my fother*.
4. Neverth'eless, nolwithstanding. Mark
xiv. 3 6 . J o h n xi. 15. 1 Cor. ix. 12. Gal.
iv. 30. R o m . v. 14. comp. Phil. ii. 7. and
Doddridge's note on Phil. ii. 6.
5. After póvoe, either expressed or u n -
derstood in t h e former member of the sen-
tence, i t is used for 'AXXa ral, But also,
M a t . iv. 4. M a r k ix. 37; or for 'AXXa
paXXov, But rather. J o h n vi. 27. vii. 16.
6. Yea. John xvi. 2. Rom. vii. 7. 2 Cor.
vii. 1 1 , six times. Yea more, yeafurther.
Acts xix. 2, where there is an ellipsis of
the particle a or a'ic no before dXXa. So
we may, with Doddridge and Worsley,
render it, Nay.—'AXXa mi, Yea also, yea
moreover. L u k e xxiv. comp. L u k e xvi. 2 1 .
[xii. 7.]—'AXXa Kal, after el in t h e p r e -
ceding member of t h e sentence, Then
also, or then surely also; ergo etiam, ni-
mirum etiam. Rom. vi. 5 ; where see
Raphelius. I t is evident t h a t áXXa, in
these last applications, implies a super-
addition to w h a t was before affirmed or
intimated.
7. I t is used in supplication, and de-
Jiotes a peculiar earnestncss of desire.
M a r k ix. 22. O n which passages Raphe-
lius and Elsner have shown, t h a t it is a p -
plied by the best G r e e k writers in t h e
same manner. T o t h e i r citations may be
added Homer, II. i. lin. 3 9 3 . I I . xvii.
lin. 645. [See Krebs. Obs. Flav. i. 90.
G r e g . de Dial. p . 3 6 . ] — T h e British
Critic for December 1 7 9 5 , p . 6 1 3 , ac-
eounts for t h e use of áXXa by an ellipsis,
as in t h e last citation from Homer, Zev
Tlarep, 'AAAA* av pvaai vn -¡¡¿pos vías
'Aya-iiov. " O Júpiter, (we ask not to Uve
if thou deniest it) b u t deliver the Greelcs
from this darkness." (See t h e n e x t sense.)
Persons in earnestncss are a p t to speak
elliptically. [ R e n d e r , at least. See Soph.
E l . v. 4 1 3 . ]
8. I t is rendered therefore. Acts x .
20. comp. Acts xxvi. 16. B u t in such in-
stances, both in t h e profane (see Elsner
and Wolfius on Acts x.) and sacred, there
* [ S e e B i s h o p H o r s l e y ' s admirable S e r m ó n , in his
N i n e S e r m o n s , p . 2 8 1 , " I cannot arbitrarily g i v e
happiness, b u t m u s t bestow it o n those alone for
w h o m , in reward of holiness and obedience, i t is
prepared, according to God's j u s t decrees." T h e s e
are not H o r s l e y ' s words, but his m e a n i n g , ]
A A A
seems an ellipsis of something understood,
ex. gr. in the former text, Three men seck
thee; (Do not therefore hesitate) b u t
arise, &c. So A c t s xxvi. 16, (Do not
delay in speaking to me) b u t arise, &c.
9. 'AXXa ye, But indeed. L u k e xxiv.
21. Yet indeed, yet at least. 1 Cor.
ix. 2.
10. 'AXX' i], But only. L u k e xii. 5 1 .
(where see W e t s t e i n ) 1 Cor. iii. 5. 2 Cor.
i. 13. [ I n t h e passage of S t . L u k e , Schl.
translates, and r i g h t l y , with our versión,
but rather. See Deverius de G r . P a r t . p .
25. and Zeun. ad Vig. p . 4 6 1 . and for t h e
sense but only, D i o g . L a e r t . Proaem. p .
12. E s t . v. 1 2 . ]
1 1 . For. 1 Cor. iv. 3 . 1 Thess. ii. 2 .
So bal* in D a n . x. 7 - [ S c h l e u s n e r very
properly declines giving all t h e places
where t h e word occurs. N o t from t h e
labour, b u t from t h e diffieulty of fixing
dogmatically t h e fugitive senses of a p a r -
tióle.]
'AXXcWw, A t t i c . — r r « , from ¿ÍXXoe other,
different. [To change, alter. E i t h e r for
t h e better, as 1 Cor. xv. 5 1 . Gen. xxxi. 7.
Levit. xxvii, 3 3 . Symm. P s . liv. 2 0 . or
for t h e worse, Rom. i. 2 3 . P s . cvi. 2 0 .
J e r e m . ii. 1 1 . and so H e b . i. 12. with a
sense of entire corruption or destruction.
comp. Isa. ii. 18. H e n e e in Acts vi. 14. To
destroy, make void.—Simply, To change,
or vari/. Gal. iv. 2 0 , though B r e t s e h n .
says, to change for the better, speak more
mildly; b u t it seems only to express change
of speech according to circumstanccs. See
Á r t e m . ii. 2 0 . B r . also gives t h e sense of
change of one thing for another, to Rom.
i. 2 3 . citing 'AXX- kv from Lev. xx. 10.
See Gen. xii. 14.]
'AXXaypQev, A d v . from aXXayn else-
where (which from cíXXoe other), a n d —
Qev denoting from a place.—From else-
where. occ. J o h n x. i. [ E s t . iv. 14. iElian.
V. H . vi. 2.]
'AXXnyopew, w, from cíXXos other,
^ and áyopt'w to speak.—To allegorise, or
speak allegorically, where one thing is
spoken, and somewhat different is meant,
of which t h e t h i n g spoken is t h e emblem
or representative. occ. Gal. iv. 2 4 . Seo
Elsner and K y p k e , t h e l a t t e r of whom
shows t h a t this V e r b is not so u n c o m m o n
in t h e G r e e k writers as Elsner t h o u g h t i t .
' A A A H A O r i A , H e b . Alleluia, Heb. í ^ r r
n " Praise ye Jah, or Jehovah. occ. Rev.
1
xix. 1, 3 , 4, 6.—No doubt t h i s sacred
•form of praise was well known among the.
| heathen. H e n e e t h e Gyeeks plainly liad
 A A A 34 A A A

t h e i r ' E A E A E Y I I I * , t h a t solemn acclama- in t h e p l u r . may incline one to derive i t

tion with which t h e y both began and from t h e H e b . pronoun b», or n!?N.
ended their pceans or hymns in honour of V . Belonging to another, another's.
Apollo.—Where t h e H e b r e w TV iV^n oc- occ. 1 Cor. x . 2 9 .
curs, as i t very frequently does in t h e t f g p 'AXXorpios7río"K07ros5 a , ó , from áX-
0

Psalms, t h e L X X , when they do not omit, Xórpios another's, and 1-XWKOTXÍIÚ to inspecl,
give i t untranslated, ' A X X i j X á i a . observe.—A curious inspector, or meddler,
'AXXíjXiov, rwv ; D a t . áXXryXois, a i s , o í s ; in other people's affairs *, a busy body in
Accus. á\\r¡\tíc, a s , a . A defectivo N . other men's matters. occ. 1 P e t . iv. 1 5 ,
which occurs in t h e N . T . only in t h e G e - where i t seems particularly t o refer t o t h e
nitive, Dative, and Accusative plural. I t public aífairs of other people, a busy and
seems t o be formed from S X X o c repeated, insolent meddling with which was a vice
oXXos—aXXov one—another.—One—an- whereto t h e J e w s of this t i m e were r e -
other, each other m u t u a l l y or reciprocally. markably addictedf-—[jSchl. t h i n k s t h e
L u k e xiii. 12. M a r k ix. 5 0 . M a t . xxiv. 10. word means one given to the commission
& al. freq. of every crime, because áXXóVpios itself
'AXXoyevr)s, ¿os, a s , ó, ?/, from aXXog has this signification. Ecclus. xiv. 2 2 . a n d
other, and y¿vos a nation, race.—One of in P s . 1. 1. in Theod. E d . v. and vi. B r .
another nation, a stranger,foreigncr. occ. t h i n k s i t is, A superinlendcnt of affairs,
L u k e xvii. 18. [ E x . x x i x . 3 3 . ] not Christian, because he chooses t o u n -
" A A A O M A I , perhaps from t h e H e b . derstand ¿TTÍO-KOITOS after t h e words ¿>s Xpi-
TÍbi) to ascend, or tDbv to sport, j u v e - Ti'avos.]
nari. 'AXXóYpios, a, ov, from cíXXoe other.—
I. To leap, leap iip, as a man. occ. A c t s Belonging to other, foreign, or strange to
iii. 8. xiv. 10. onesejf.
I I . To spring, bubblc up, as water from I . Another's, belonging to another.
a spring. occ. J o h n iv. 14. [ V i r g . E c l . v. [ J o h n x. 5. R a t h e r , Not one's oivn.~] H e b .
4 7 . a n d see Pearson on I g n . ad Rom. ix. 2 5 . Rom. iv. 14. x i v . 4 . comp. L u k e
p. 56.] xvi. 1 2 . — [ O n t h e passage of S t . J o h n
" A A A 0 2 , áXXv, aXXo. which I have added, Schl. says t h a t t h e
I . Another, or in t h e plur. other; a n d word m a y also be taken for ignotus, un-
t h a t w h e t h e r in an inclusive sense, as M a t . known, and so B r e t s c h n . referring to E c -
iv. 2 1 . M a r k vii. 4. & al. freq.; or in an clus. viii. 18. P s . xlix. 1 0 . ]
exclusive one, as M a t . ii. 12, x. 2 3 . & al. I I . Spoken of a country, Strange, fo-
freq. reign, belonging to other people. A c t s vii.
I I . W i t h t h e prepositiva article 6, ?;, r o , 6. H e b . x i . 9.
prefixed, The other of two. M a t . y. 3 9 . I I I . Spoken of m e n or nations, A
xii. 1 3 . J o h n x i x . 3 2 . stranger, foreigner, alien, occ. H e b . x i .
I I I . ' O í ¿íXXoi, The oihers, the rest. 3 4 . — [ S e e G e n . xvii. 1 2 . 1 S a m . vii. 3 .
J o h n x x . 2 5 . x x i . 8. I Cor. xiv. 2 9 . D e u t . xvii. 35. O t h e r s , as S. and B., t r a n s -
I V . " A X X o e and cíXXoe r e p e a t e d in dif- íate t h e word here an enemy, as 1 Mace,
fereut members of a sentence, One, and i. 3 8 . Ecclus. xxix. 2 1 . P s . x i x . 1 3 . X e n .
another. J o h n iv. 3 7 ; and in t h e plur. A n a b . iii. 5 . 4 . ]
"AXXoi a n d aXXoi, Some, and some; or [ I V . Of another family. M a t . xvii. 2 5 .
Some, and others, M a r k vi. 15. So \~h& P s . xlix. 1 0 . ] — T h i s word is often used
and nbx in H e b . are used for these a n d in t h e L X X , and answers t o t h e H e b . 1Í1K,
these, or these a n d those. Psal. x x . 8. -IT, 133, a n d '133.
A n d t h e like application of á X X o s repeated 'AXXótpvXos, a , ó , i), from cíXXoe other.
different, and cpvXr) a tribe or race.—A
* W e are t o M i n L o r d O x f o r d ' s collection of
T r a v e l s , v o l . i i . p a g e 8 0 1 , that the V i r g i n i a n s (in * " Tantumne est abs re t u á ocii tibí,
N o r t h A m e r i c a ) u s e d t h e word AUchtjah i n their A l i e n a u t cures, caque nihil quas a d te atti-
sacred h y m n s . " I attentively hearkencd ( s a y s m y nent?
author) u p o n this word Allelujáli repeated sundry H a v e y o u s o m u c h leisurc from your otan business
t i m e s , and c o u l d never hear a n y other t h i n g . " H e that y o u can totee care of other people's, which does
adds, " A l l t h e other natioñs o f these countries d o not at all belong to you ? " s a y s t h e oíd m a n i n
the l i k e . " S e e also J e n k i n o n the Christian R e l i - Terence, H e a u t o n t . A c t i. Scene I . line 2 3 . W h a t
g i ó n , v o l . i. p . 1 0 1 , 3 d . e d i t . ; G a l e ' s Court o f t h e an exceílent h i n t , b y t h e w a y , m a y this aíford to
Gentiles, part 1. book 2 . chap. 4 . § 3 . a n d boók 3 . Christians !
chap. 1. g i l ; and D i c k e n s o n ' s D e l p h i Phcenicis- f S e e Lardner's Crcdibility o f t h e G o s p e l H i -
santes, page 5 0 — 5 2 . story, v o l . i. p . 4 2 5 .
 A A O 35 A A Y

fordgmr, one of anolher race or nation. common aloe-wood is also very agreeable,
occ. A c t s x . 2 8 . [ I Sam. vi. 10. xiii. 2. I s a . but n o t so strongly perfumed as t h e for-
ii. 6.] mer." occ. J o h n xix. 3 9 . comp. Psal. xiv.
"AXXwe, Adv. from ¿ÍXXOQ other.—Other- 8. Prov. vii. 17. Cant. iv. 14. I t is evi-
nñse. occ. 1 T i m . v. 2 5 . — [ " T h i n g s which dent t h a t t h e resinous and aromatic q u a -
are otherwise, i. e. not yet manifest, will lities of this wood rendered i t very proper
become so." Schl. " T h i n g s done otherwise, in embalming dead bodies.
i. e. badly." B r . B u t Schl. seems r i g h t . ] "AXe, aXoc, b, from &Xe, i), the sea, which
'ÁXoáto, Ú>, from cíXwc a ihreshing-floor. may be derived either from t h e Greek V .
See dXtav below.—To tread ont corn, to áXXopai to leap, on account of t h e impe-
forcé corn from the husles by treading. tuous molion of its waters, or r a t h e r from
occ. 1 T i m . v. 18. 1 Cor. ix. 9, 10, in t h e H e b . io urge, molest, because con-
which passages i t is transferred from t h e tinually urged by winds and tides. So i t s
o x ; who, according t o t h e * custom of t h e H e b . ñame fc> implies tumultuous molion.
E a s t , Irode out t h e corn from t h e hüsks, —Salí. occ. M a r k ix. 4 9 . [ E z e k . xliii. 2 4 . ]
to t h e christian minister, who from t h e 'AXvKoe, v, bv, from cíXe salt.—Impreg-
involving letter brings forth and dispenses nated with salt, brackish, salt. occ. J a m e s
t h e spirit of t h e divine law. Comp. 2 Cor. iii. 12. T h i s word is used in t h e same
iii. 6. Rom. ii. 2 7 , 2 9 . — T h i s word in t h e sense b y Aristotle, T h e o p h r a s t u s , and A n -
L X X generally answers to t h e H e b . "0)1; tigonus Carystius. See Wolfius a n d W e t -
and in D e u t . xxv. 4 , t h e passage referred stein, t o whom, concerning t h e t r u e read-
to by t h e Apostle, t h e N . ttfH oceurs. i n g of t h e l a t t e r p a r t of t h e verse, a d d
"AXoyoQ, a, ó, r¡, Kai rb—ov, from a neg. Griesbach and Macknight. [ N u m b . xxxiv.
and Xóyoe reason. 3, 12.]
f

I . Unendued with reason, irrational, 'AXvTrórepoe, a, ov, Comparat. of aXv7roe

brute. occ. 2 P e t . ii. 12. J u d e ver. 10. free from grief which from a neg. a n d
T h e word is applied in t h e same sense, Xíiirr] grief, sorrow.—More free from grief
Wisd. xi. 15. So '(¿¡wv and aXóywv are or sorrow. occ. Phil. ii. 2 8 . [ X e n . QEc.
in like manner joined together by Jose- viii. 2.]
phus, D e Bel. lib. iv. cap. 3 . § 10. & Cont. "AXvaiQ, we, A t t . EWC, r¡, from a neg. a n d
Apion. lib. i. § 2 5 . & lib. ii. § 2 9 . Xíib) to loóse.—A chain. M a r k r. 3 , 4 , &
I I . Unreasonable, absurd. occ. A c t s al. E p h . vi. 2 0 , Típtat,Evu> iv c'iXvcrsi I dis-
xxv. 2 7 . charge myembassy in a chain. T h e Apostle
'AAO'H, ve, y , from t h e H e b . t J ^ i i K or in these words alludes to t h e custom of t h e
rni>riK, which Á q u i l a renders b y dX¿>r¡, Romans, among whom i t was usual, as we
Cant. iv. 1 4 . — T h e aloe, t h a t is, t h e xylo- learn from Josephus, Séneca, and A t h e -
aloes, lignum-aloes, or aloe-wood. T h e nseus, t o confine prisoners n o t only b y
finest sort of " this t is t h e most resinous s h u t t i n g t h e m u p in prison, b u t also b y
of all t h e woods we a r e acquainted w i t h — chaining their r i g h t a r m to t h e left a r m
I t s scent, while in t h e mass, is very fra- of a soldier w h o guarded them. Comp.
grant and agreeable—The smell of t h e A c t s xxviii. 16, 2 0 . x i i . 6, a n d see G r o t i u s
on those passages, and L a r d n e r ' s Cred. of
* S e e D e u t x x v . 4 . H o s . x . 1 1 . Bochart, v o l . ii. Gosp. H i s t . vol. i. book i. cha]), x. § 9. a n d
3 1 1 , a n d W e t s t e i n on 1 Cor. i x . 9 . H o m e r draws Macknight's note on E p h . [2 T i m . i. 16.
a comparison from this method of threshing corn b y Rev. xx. 1. Polyb. iii. 8 2 . 8.]
the feet of o x e n , as practised i n h i s time a n d coun-
try. I I . 2 0 . line 4 9 5 , & c .
'AXi/o-ireX^c, íoe, Se, ó, y, Kai rb aXvcri-
reXig, from a neg. and Xvo-ireXye profitablé.
'Si! 5' OTE TIC £EI/|>! BO'AX apcnm¡ ivfvfJLcrwiwi See u n d e r AvmreXiw.— Unprqfitable. q. d.
TPIBE'MENAi KPr!\¡iix5v ivrpoyá'Kai Iv Axuíí.
that will not quit the cost. occ. H e b . xiii.
Pipr.<pK TE XE?TT ¡yEVOVTO ySáuív VTIO IIÓGG l^l[J.VXWV.
17, where however t h e word is used by a
A s with a u t u m n a l harvests cover'd o'er,
Litotes, and imports exccedingly hurtful,
A n d thick bestrown lies Ceres' sacred floor,
W h e n round and round, with never-wearied pain, or dangerous. So in H o m e r , I I . ii. line
Thc tramjñmgstecrsbcat ont th'winuniber'dgrain. 269, cixpuov Ibiov looking unprofltably,
PorE. means looking most miscrably; and D r .
D r . S h a w ( T r a v e l s , p a g e 1 3 8 - 9 , 2 d edit.) informs Clarke, in his note on t h a t passage, shows
us, that the A r a b s and M o o r s still tread o u t their t h a t t h e best Román writers in like m a n -
corn after t h e primitive c u s t o m of t h e E a s t . C o m p .
H e b . and E n g . L e x i c ó n , in ií>l a n d TV2.
ner use inutilis unprqfitable, in t h e sense
t N e w and Complete Dictionary of A r t s , i n Xylo- of exlrcmely wicked, hurtful, or pernicious.
aloes, where see more. Comp. Phiicm. ver. 1 1 . E p h . v. 1 1 . See
D 2
 •A M A 36 A M A

Blaclcwall's Sacred Classics, vol. i. page tive following i t , as Upa T£Ti irpu'i early
172 *. in the morning, apa TH"t ínirtpq at the
"AXwv, wvos. >/, from c'íXwc tlie same. beginning of the evening, apa TSZ~i icaípw
—A threshing-foor, where corn is tkreshed as soon as opportunity serves. So 1 M a c .
and rvinnowed. occ. M a t . iii. 12. L u k e iii. iv. 6, apa TH"¿ y pepa as soon as it was
1 7 . — [ T h e meaning is the corn on the day. Comp. N e h . vii. 3 , in t h e L X X ,
floor, as often in t h e L X X . Exod. xxii. 6. and see K y p k e on M a t . I t is evident t h a t
R u t h iii. 2 . J u d . xv. 5. Schl. t h i n k s t h e apa in this first sense should be considered
derivation is from áXÍ(w to collecl ( t h e corn r a t h e r as a preposition t h a n an adverb.
on t h e floor).] 2. Together. Rom. iii. 12. followed b y
'AX(Ú7D)Í, ÍKUQ, y. T h e G r e e k etymolo- t h e preposition o-vv with. 1 T h e s s . iv. 17.
gists derive i t from dXúiros cunning, or v. 10.
from ÚXCÍJ' wirag deceiving or escaping the 3. Moreover, also, rvithal, at the same
eyes, because i t is a solitary animal + wan- time. A c t s xxiv. 2 6 . xxvii. 4 0 . Col. iv. 3 .
' dering about by itself, a n d hiding itself in 1 T i m . v. 13. Philem. ver. 2 2 . — T h e above
lióles; b u t , like t h e L a t i n ñame vulpes, cited are all t h e passages of t h e N . T .
i t may be derived from t h e H e b . t]b¡) to wherein apa occurs.
cover. O u r English líame fox, and t h e 'Apadys, eos, Ss, ó, y, from a n e g . a n d
G e r m á n fuchs, from t h e V. foxa, which pavdávut, or óbsol. paduo to learn.— Un-
in t h e Islandic signifies to deceive, will leamed. occ. 2 P e t . iii. 16. [Schleus. says
correspond t o either of t h e above deriva- Impious, r e m a r k i n g t h a t words expressing
tions of t h e G r e e k aXíncnZ,. ignorance or knowiedge generally express
I . A fox, a well-knomn animal, occ. their eífects. See Glas. Phil. S. p . 8 2 8 .
M a t . viii. 2 0 . L u k e ix. 5 8 . ed. D a t h . ]
I I . A fox, a crqfty, cunning, malicious 'Apapávrivos, B, 6, y, from a neg. a n d
person. TI ydp i^iv aXXo XoíSopos Kal papaívopat, to fade, wilher, which see.
KaKo-yOns avdpanroe y 'AASi'IIH/2?: F o r That cannot fade away, not capable of
w h a t i s an opprobrious and malicious man, fading. So Hesychius explains ápapávri-
b u t a fox ? says E p i c t e t u s in A r r i a n , lib. vov b y do-y-nrov incorruptible, occ. 1 P e t .
i. cap. 3 . So Shakespeare, v. 4 , where t h e Apostle seems to allude t o
T h i s h o l y fox, those fading garlands of leaves, which
O r wolf, or both ,— crowned t h e victors in t h e heathen games,
H E S E Y V I H . A c t i. Scene 1. and were consequently in high esteem
H o g i n sloth, fox in stealth among t h e m . Comp. 1 Cor. i x . 2 5 . 1 P e t .
K . LEAR, A c t i i i , Scer.e 4 . i. 4. B u t observe, t h a t t h e learned H e n r y
Comp. Suicer T h e s a u r . in 'AXw7rij?, and Stevens, in his G r e e k T h e s a u r u s , t h i n k s
Téwypa I I . oce. L u k e xiii. 3 2 . T h e ñame it improbable t h a t Peter, in 1 E p . v. 4 ,
'AXúwn'é, in G r e e k is only feminine, and is should use apapávrivos for apápavrog,
therefore applied even t o H e r o d t h e T e - since apapávTivos is n o t formed from t h e
t r a r c h in t h a t gender. See Wetstein [and A d j . apápavros as signifying unfading,
SchStg. H . H . on this passage.] b u t from t h e Subst. apápavros t h e proper
"AXwo-ie, ios, A t t . £«£, y, from t h e obso- ñame of a flower, Amaranih, so called
lete áXów to take, which s e e . — A taking, from its not s p e e d i l y / a í f e g . 'A^apctjrtj'oe,
catching. occ. 2 P e t . ii. 12. therefore, will proper! y signify Amaran-
" A M A , an A d v . from the H e b . D J ) with, thine, b u t will be equivalent to unfading.
together with. See Wolf. and W e t s t e i n on 1 P e t . v. 4.
1. W i t h a D a t i v e followingi With, to- 'Apcipavros, tt, b, y, from a neg. and pa-
gether with. occ. M a t . xiii. 2 9 . H i t h e r t o paívopat tofade.—Thatfadeth not away,
should be referred apa irpw'i together with unfading. occ. 1 P e t . i. 4 . Wisd. vi. 13.
the morning, i. e. early in the morning. 'Apaprávh), from obsolete apapréoi, from
occ. M a t . xx. 1. I n t h e profane writers j which also it borrows most of its tenses.
apa often occurs i n this sense w i t h a D a - I . To miss a mark; so H o m e r fre-
q u e n t l y , as
* [ T h e adverb occurs i n the same sense. T h e o p h . Ta /ui/"AMAP0'
Char. viii. 4 . ]
H i m h e mist. I I . i v . line 4 9 1 .
f W h e n c e E u s t a t h i u s a n d B o c h a r t deduce the
ñ a m e áxá-itii* from áhaa-Qaí to •wander. Ti? fÁiv pairo TIÍT9OV"AMAFTEN.
X S e e V i g e r I d i o t i s m . c a p . 7. § 2 . reg. 4. [ T h e o p h . H i m h e scarcely mist. I I . x v i i . line 009.
Char. x x i v . D i o d . S i c . i. p . 6 1 5 . P o l y b . i, 1 2 . 2 . "Opwüo; //ív"AMAPTE
H o m , II. I I . 3 3 1 . ]
T h e bird h e mist. I r . , x x i i i . line 865.
 A M A
Tlie L X X use ii,apaprávuv, or aecording
to some copies, Siapaprdyeiv, in this sense.
J u d g . xx. 16.
I I . To miss, deviate from a way. So
Isocrates apapráyuv rrje oda to miss the
wáy.
Í I I . I n t h e N . T . it is used only in a
fgurative or spiritual sense, To sin in
general, to deviate from t h e will or law of
God, as 1 John iii. 8. 2 P e t . ii. 4. 1 J o h n
11. 1. v. 16. & al. freq.; by apostasy, H e b .
x. 26, comp. ver. 2 8 , 29. and see D o d -
dridge and M a c k n i g h t ; — o r of man, as
A c t s xxv. 8.
I V . W i t h ele following, To sin in re-
spect of or against, as heaven (God.)
L u k e xv. 18, 21.—or man. Mat. xviii. 15,
2 1 . L u k e xvii. 3, 4. Wetstein on M a t .
shows t h a t t h e Greek writers use t h e
phrase in t h e same sense. [1 Sam. xix. 4.
J e r . xxxvii. 17.]—In the L X X this word
most usually answers to the H e b . «ton, to
which it very exactly corresponds both in
a natural and spiritual sense. See H e b .
and E n g . Lexicón, under N¡on.
'Apáprripa, arog, rb, from apapréúi to
deviate, sin.—A dcvialion, from the divine
law, a sin. occ. M a r k iii. 2 8 . iv. 12. Rom.
iii. 25. 1 Cor. vi. 18. Gen. xxxi. 3 6 . Isa.
lviii. 1.
'Apapná, as, ?'/, from apapréio to de-
viate, sin.
I. Sin, or deviaiion from the divine law
in general. See 1 J o h n iii. 4. comp. Rom.
iv. 15.
I I . Original sin, with which all man-
kind, descended from fallen Adam by na-
tural generation, are universally infected
from their conception and birth, Rom. v.
12. vi. 12. vii. 8, 9. comp. Gen. v. 3 . E p h .
iv. 22. 1 Cor. xv. 4 9 . Gen. viii. 2 1 . Psal.
lviii. 3 , 4. Prov. xxii. 15. Job x i . 12.
xiv. 4.
I I I . Actual sin. J a m e s i. 15. v. 15. 1
J o h n iii. 8. & al. freq.— [ I t seems to be
obstínate incredulity. J o h n viii. 21 & 24.
xv. 22. xvi. 8. Heb. iii. 13. Defection
from trae religión. H e b . xi. 2 5 . 2 Thess.
ii. 4. libidinousness. 2 P e t . ii. 14. and so
Appian, Alex. p . 594. ed. Paris. so pecca-
tum in L a t i n . Ovid. A m o r . ii. Eleg. vii.
1 1 . & n«ton. 2 S a m . x i i . 13. Schl. t h i n k s
t h a t t h e word in John viii. 46. means
fraud, and others refer 2 Thess. ii. 4. to
t h a t sense. I n Rom. vii. 7. i t seems to be
r a t h e r a motive to sin, a n d in H e b . xü. 4.
Schl. t h i n k s it means t h e calamities which
m i g h t be the motives to t h e sin of defec-
tion.]
3/ A M A
I V . Original and actual sin considerad
together. 2 Cor. v. 2 1 . John i. 2 9 . comp.
Rom. v. 16. O n Rom. vii. 13- comp. H o s .
x. 15, in H e b . and E n g . M a r g .
V. A sacrifice for sin, a sin-offering,
on which the sin was put, or to which it
Was imputed. (See Lev. iv. 4 , 15. comp.
Lev. i. 4. xvi. 21.) occ. 2 Cor. v. 2 1 . comp.
H e b . ix. 2 8 . Isa. liü. 6, 10, 12. 1 P e t . ü .
24. 'Apapría is used in t h e same sense
by t h e L X X . Lev. iv. 2 1 , 2 5 , 34. (comp.
ver. 8, 20, 29.) Lev. v. 9, 12. vi. 2 5 , as
apáprnpa likewise is, Lev. iv. 2 9 . A u d
this manner of expression exactly corre-
sponds to t h e H e b . where both the sin and
the sin-offering is denoted by t h e same
word riKion or nUtotl. On Rom. viii. 3 .
comp. H e b . x. 6, 8, and L X X in Psal. xl.
6 ; and see W h i t b y ' s note on Rom.— [ O n
2 Cor. vi. 2 1 . Schl. t h i n k s t h a t apaptía
is for apaprioXbg, he has punished him as
a sinner, but says he does not object to
t h e explanation here given" by P a r k h u r s t .
T h e expression ws.pl apapríag, Rom. viii.
3 . H e b . x. 7- is elliptical, Ovala a sacrifice,
being understood. See Levit. vi. 2 3 .
N u m b . viii. 8.]
V I . Punishment of sin. Rev. xviii. A,
where see Vitringa's Comment, and comp.
Zech. xiv. 19- Gen. xix. 1 5 . — [ T o this
head Schl. refers John ix. 4 1 . x v . 2 2 , 2 4 .
1 Cor. xv. 17. 1 Pet. ii. 24. as wcll as John
i. 29. " Who tafees away the punishment
of sin" See Gen. iv. 13. P s . vii. 17.]
V I L A deviatingfrom lrulh,falsehood.
J o h n viii. 46 ; where see C a m p b e l l . — T h e
L X X generally use ¿ipapría for t h e H e b .
nuton.
'Apáprvpog, a, ó,- ?;, from a neg. and
papríip a witness.— Without witness. o c c
Acts xiv. 1 7 ; where see W e t s t e i n . [Jos.
A . J . xiv. 7, 2. Schwarz. p . 70.]
'ApapTioXbg, 5, b, >/, from apaprébi lo de-
viate, sin.
I . A sinner in general. M a t . ix. 13.
H e b . vii. 26. 1 T i m . i. 1 5 ; b u t i t fre-
quently denotes a heinous and habitual
sinner, M a t . xi. 19. M a r k ii. 15. L u k e vii.
3 7 . & al. Comp. M a c k n i g h t , on Gal. ii. 15.
— [ T h i s word, like apaprUi, is applied to
various sins. An impostor, John ix. 16, 2 4 ,
2 5 . a libidinous person, L u k e vii. 3 7 -
an obstínate unbeliever, M a r k viii. 3 9 .
W h e r e poi-^aXlg, says Schleus. means sin
in general, apapnoXbe obstínate. As t h e
Jews t h o u g h t t h a t nonc out pf their law
cared for holiness of life, t h e y called all
Gentiles sinners. Mat. xxvi. 4 3 . L u k e
vi. 3 2 . M a t . v. 47. Mark xiv. 4 1 . L u k e
 A M E 38
xxiv. 7. Gal. ii. 1 5 . Exod. xxxii. 3 1 . 1
K i n g s xiv. 16.]
I I . Sinful. occ. Rom. vii. 13.
"Apaños, «i b, from a neg. and payo-
¡xai to Jigkt, contend.—Not contentious,
not quarrelsome. occ. 1 T i m . iii. 3 . T i t . iii.
2.— [See Ecclus. xix. 6.]
'Apcuo, LO, either from t h e Greek apa
togelher, or immediately from t h e H e b .
tr>i> lo collecl; because com, &c. when
reaped or mown, is collected logelher.—
To reap, mow, or cut dorvn. occ. J a m . v.
4. In the L X X it constantly answers to
t h e H e b . ~¡£p to cut off, cut down.
'ApíQwzoe, a, o, from a neg. and péOv
mine. The amethyst, a species of precious
stones. occ. R e v . ' x x i . 20. P l i n y * says,
" t h e reason assigned for its ñame is be-
cause, though it approaches to t h e colour
of wine, iifalls short qf it, and stops a t a
violet colour."—t O t h e r s t h i n k i t is called
Amethyst, because its colour resembles
mine mixed with water, and in this view also
derives its ñame from ¿1 neg. and péOv wine,
which see u n d e r M E Q Ú O - K W . — I n t h e L X X
it answers to t h e H e b . Í I D ^ n « . — [ E x .
xxviü. 19. Jos. A. J. iii. 6.]
' A J U E X E W , W , from ci neg. and péXu to be
cared for by any one, cura; esse. — W i t h a
Genit. or ínfinit. following, Not to care
for, to neglcct. occ. M a t . xxii. 5. 1 T i m .
'iv. 14. H e b . ii. 3 . viii. 9. 2 P e t . i. 12.
[ J e r . x x x i . 3 2 . Wisd. iii. 10.]
" ApepirroQ, H, b, ?'/, from a neg. and pep-
Trrbe blameable, which from pépepirrai 3 d
person perfect of pípabopat to Mame.—
Blamcless, unblamcable. occ. L u k e i. 6.
P h i l . ii. 15. iii. C. 1 Thess. iii. 13. H e b .
viii. 7. [Gen. xvii. 1. J o b i. 1, 8. ix. 2 0 .
X e n . Cyr. v. 5, 10.]
'Apép-rmac, A d v . from apspwTOQ.— Un-
blameably. occ. 1 Thess. ii. 10. v. 2 3 .
[See Ad'd. E s t h . xiii. 3 . X e n . Cyrop. iv.
2, 37.]
Ifglf 'Apípifiroe, t*; 6, r), from o neg. and
pé.pipva care. Free from care, careful-
•ness, or solicitudes secure, easy. occ. M a t .
xxviü. 14. 1 Cor. vii. 3 2 . [Herodian. i.
6, 2 6 . W i s d . vi. 1 6 . ]
'AperLiOeroc, e, ó, ?/, Kal tu—ov, from a
n e g . and perarídripi lo change, which see.
— Unchangeable, immutable, occ. H e b . vi.
18. 'AperciOtrov, rb, N e u t . is used as a
Substantive, Unchangcableness, immuta-
* N a t . I l i s t . l i b . x x x i i i . c a p . 9 . [ S e e Casaub.
. 0 1 1 A then. p . 7*1.]
f See N e w and Complete D i c t i o n a r y o f A r t s , in
Amclhijü.
A M Ií
bility. occ. H e b . vi. 1 7 ; where see W e t -
stein. [ 3 Mace. v. 1. Polyb. ii. c. 3 2 .
5-]
í | § f ° 'Aperaicívr¡Tos, a, b, from a neg.
and peraKLvéto to move away, which see.—•
Unmoveable, or r a t h e r " unmoved, because
unmoveable is a quality not competent to
m e n in t h i s present life." Macknight.
Comp. dperavór¡Tov, Rom. ii. 5 . occ. 1 Cor.
xv. 5 8 . [So Seh.]
f§§p° 'Afi.ETajj.éXriroe, o, b, rj, from a n e g .
and pLerapéXopat to repent, which see.
I . Not to be repented qf, or regrelted.
occ. 2 Cor. vii. 10.
I I . Not subject to repentance,'OV change
of mind, irrevocable, occ. Rom. xi. 2 9 .
See Campbell's Prelim. Dissertat. to G o s -
pels, p . 2 4 8 . T h i s word is used also by
t h e profane w r i t e r s , as m a y be seen by
E l s n e r and W e t s t e i n . [Glass. P h i l . S. p .
944.]
[§gp° 'AptravórjroQ, «, ó, r), from a n e g .
and peravoíti) to repent, change one's mind,
which see.—Unrepenting, impenitent, ir-
reclaimable. occ. Rom. ii. 5 * .
"ApírpoQ, a, b, i), KCLL TO—ov, from a neg.
and pérpov measure.—Beyond ones mea-
sure or appoinied bounds. occ. 2 Cor. x .
13, 15.
'AMtTN, a H e b . word, F D M , signifying
truth, frmness, stabilily. H e n e e in t h e
N. T . as in t h e Oíd, it denotes,
I . Affirmation, In truth, verily, it isso.
M a t . v. 18, 2 6 . vi. 2 , & al. freq. comp. 2
Cor. i. 2 0 . B y comparing M a t . xvi. 2 8 .
with L u k e i x . 2 7 ; ar.d M a r k xii. 4 3 , w i t h
L u k e x x i . 3 , it is evident t h a t 'Apr)v is
equivalent to ¿iXr¡dios truly, in truth, a n d
so t h e L X X render the H e b . by áXij-
6ü>£, J e r . xxviü. 6 . — I t is remarkable t h a t
in t h e N . T . no one b u t our blessed L o r d
himself uses 'Apñv a t t h e beginning qf a
sentence, as a word of affirmation. I t seems
however in t h i s sense to conchi.de all t h e
four Gospels. T h r o u g h o u t St. J o h n ' s G o s -
pel, a n d in t h a t only, our L o r d uses t h e
word 'A[¿))v doubled, as being more e m -
phatical, after t h e H e b r e w m a n n e r . C o m p .
N u m . v. 2 2 . N e h . viii. 6. Psal. xii. 14.
lxxii. 1 9 . lxxxix. 5 3 . [Lightfoot on J o h n
i. 51.]
I I . Consent or desire, So be it; and in
t h i s sense i t concludes prayers. M a t . vi. 1 3 .
Rom. xv. 3 3 . 2 Cor. xiii. 13, & al. freq.—
and thanksgivings. R o m . xi. 3 6 . xvi. 2 7 .
comp. 1 Cor. xiv. 16. I n some passages it
* [ T h e word occurs i n the T e s t . x i i . P a t , in F a b .
| Cod. P s e u d . i. p . 0'85.]
 A M N
seems both affirmative and eucharislical,
as Rom. i. 2 5 . ix. 5 ; a n d iu others, both
affirmalive and supplicatory, as Rev. i. 7-
xxii. 2 0 .
I I I . Applied as a N- to our blessed Lord,
'O 'Afiriv The Amen, thefailhful and true
wilness. occ. R e v . iii. 14. comp. Isa. lxv.
16*.
'Apíiroip, opoe, b, from a neg. and ¡ir¡-
ri]o a mother. Without molher. occ. H e b .
vii. 3 . [Here ápyrinp is not having a mother
noticed in the genealogy of the priests, or,
as Pililo says (2. de^Monarch. p . 8 2 7 ) ,
pn éj(u pnrépa lepúav kt\ iepéiDv f. Such at
>v
least is the common explanation, in which
t h e r e are difficulties, especially t h e words
¡irire ápyriv íyav. Some therefore say,
Not bom qf father and mother in the or-
dinary way. See D e y l i n g . Obs. S. P . ii.
p . 7 1 . F a b r . Cod. P s . i. p . 3 1 1 . ]
'Apíavros, H, b, ?/, from a neg. and piaívto
to defile.—Undefiled, unpolluted. occ. H e b .
vii. 20. xiii. 4. J a m e s i. 2 7 . [See 2 Mace,
xiv. 3 6 . Wisd. iii. 13. P l u t a r c h . Pericl.
p. 173, D . I n 1 P e t . i. 4 , it seems to be
unmixed, or undefiled tvith grief]
"AMMOS, tí, y, perhaps from t h e H e b .
t ) J í to colleet, gather together.—Sand,
which is usually collected together in par-
ticles innumerable,
— — Oca ^.á{¿aQí$ TE KÓVíf TE.
HUJIER, II. i x . line 3 8 5 .
Rom. ix. 2 7 . H e b . x i . 12, & al. See
W e t s t e i n on Rom. [ G e n . xxxii. 15. Josh.
xi. 4.]
'AMNCrS, 5, b, perhaps from a neg. a n d
fieros anger, on account of its mild dis-
position. If t h i s as well as the feminine
' A M N i r be not r a t h e r derived from tiie
H e b . ¡"jintt truth, either on account of t h e
truth or simplicity oí t h e animal itself, or
of its being ancientiy t h e usual % truth—
ovfaith-ofiQx'mg (as t h e H e b . ÍTJDS seems
* [ S e c on this word G l a s s . P h i l . S. p . 39G. T h e
use o f this word i n t h e C h u r c h w a s derived, i t
w o u l d secra, from thc J e w s , D e u t . x x v i i . 15. N e h .
viii. 7. S e e W e t s t . ii. p . 102. E u s e b . H . J u . vii. 9.
Suicer. i. p . 2 2 9 . ]
f [ S e e also P h i l . de T e m u l e n t i a , p . 2 4 8 and
p. 490.]
$ T h u s likewise the Etruscan xáirfa., and L a t i n
caper, a goat, m a y not improbably be derived from
the H e b . isa to matee atonement, expíate; because
this animal was i n ancient times a usual expiatory
victim, as i n L e v . iv. 2 0 , 3 1 . v. x v i . 1 0 ; i n all
w h i c h passages the word 153 is used, and in the
last particularly applied to the scape-goat. Comp.
H o m e r , II. i. line 00'; and see V o s s i i E t y m o l o g .
Latin in CAI'JEH.
39 A M Y
used, N e h . ix. 3 8 . ) among both believers
and heathen. So in t h e t r e a t y between
t h e Greeks and T r o j a n s , in Homer, II. iii.
line 2 4 5 - 6 .
"APNE Sdvj, jicii otyov—&c.
" T h e heralds carried t h r o u g h t h e c i t y t h e
faithful oath-offerings oí t h e gods, two
lambs and wine," & c . ; and t h u s V i r g i l
makes one of t h e sacriíices at t h e t r e a t y
between L a t i n u s and i E n e a s to be inlon-
sam bidentem, a young sheep u n s h o r n .
Mn. xii. line 1 7 0 . — A lamb, which E n g l i s h
ñame seems a derivative from t h e H e b .
• n i to be mild, genile. occ. J o h n i. 2 9 , 3 6 .
A c t s viii,. 3 2 . 1 P e t . i. 19.
'ApoiSi), rjs, y, from ijpoiSa perf. m i d . of
apeítío to requite.—Requital, rctribuiion,
recompense, occ. 1 T i m . v . 4 . Josephus a p -
plies &ptí€ecrdai in t h e same sense as t h e
Apostle does apo&ae ¿iirooíBovaí, Cont.
Apion. lib. ii. § 2 7 , where h e speaks of
one rov UK 'AMEIBO'MENON ras Trap'
avTÜv (yovéwv seil.) ^ a p í m c , who does
not requite t h e favours h e has received
from his p a r e n t s . "
"AME.EAOS, n, Í\.—A vine-tree. M a r k
xiv. 2 5 . J o h n xv. 1, & al. [ I n Rev. xiv.
19, Schl. says i t is thefruit, and B r e t s c h .
says, " T h e enemies of C h r i s t ready for
destruction, and to be c u t oíF by t h e ángel
of t h e Lord, as t h e grapes are cut ofF for
t h e wine-press, are called áprreXos rije
yijs." O n J o h n xv. 1. See Ecclus. xxiv.
17]
'ApTrsXtípybs, 5, b, from cípireXoc a vine,
andtpyov work.—A vine-dresser, adresser
of a vineyard. occ. L u k e xiii. 7.
'Apntkbiv, (ovos, b, from apireXos a vine.
I . A vineyard, a place planted with
vines. See M a t . xx. 1 , 2 . K y p k e on M a r k
xii. 1, produces a n u m b e r of instances of
t h e Greek writers u s i n g t h i s word, because
its p u r í t y has been doubted * .
I I . F i g u r a t i v e l y , The vineyard qf God's
church. W h y so called, see M a t . xxi. 3 3 ,
&c. M a r k xii. I , &c. Isa. v. 1, &c.
[ I I I . A vine. 1 Cor. ix. 7. 1 M a c e . iii.
56. J e r . v. 1 7 . ]
'Apívopai. mid. from ápvvta to assisl,
defend, which from H e b . fDN to support—
To defend. occ. A c t s vii. 24. [ T h e proper
forcé of apvvopai is, / defend myself; b u t
here it has t h e forcé of t h e active. See
D i o n . ' H a ! . i. 12. Isa. lix. !6.]
* [ S e e W o l f . A n c c d , Gr. iv. p. 1 8 4 . ]
 A ¡VI * 40 A N A

' A M $ r , a Preposition, which perhaps spiritfor one, or because t h a t word is cafa-

from the H e b . tpK to surround, compass, chrestically and improperly used, not only
(p being inserted before another labial, as for two, b u t for t h r e e . " [ T h e o p h y l a c t . (on
usual in t h e Chaldee and Greek derivatives t h i s place) says expressly, t h a t t h e word
from t h e H e b r e w ; ) or from ap<j>o) both is applied t o three. See Hom. O d . xv. 7 8 .
(which see under apajórspog), q. d. onboth Aristot. R h e t . v. 36."]
•sides.—About, round about. I t oceurs ' Apiopvrog, tt, ó, ?), Kal rb—ov, from a
not sepáratela/ in t h e N . T . but frequently neg. and papnróg blameable, which from
in t h e profane writers. püpoQ a blemish, infamy, which see.—
'Aptpíf-Xnzpov, u, rb, q. * áptyi&kvrpov, Spotless, unblameable, blameless. occ. P h i l .
from ctptpitéiXrirai, 3d pers. perf. pass. of ii. 15. 2 P e t . iii. 14.
ápfL&áXXu), to cast round, surround, which "Aptopoe, tí, ó, f/, from a neg. a n d püpoe
from áptj>\ round about, and fláXXto to cast. a blemish, spot.
—A large kind qf Jishing-net, whose ex- I. Without blemish. 1 P e t . i. 1 9 . [ I n
tremities s i n k i n g e q u a l l y in t h e water, in- t h i s sense it is used of victims, which were
close whatever is within its compass, per- to be w i t h o u t defect. N u m b . vi. 14. xix. 2 .
haps not uulike a casting net, b u t of a L e v i t . xxii. 2 2 ; and t h i s is t h e reference
larger dimensión, occ. M a t . iv. 18. M a r k h e r e . ]
i. 1 tí. Menander in 'AXIEOC (page 12, edit. I I . Blameless. E p h . i. 4 . v. 2 7 . [ C o l .
Cleric.) has 'AM*IBAH'STPÍ2< I I E P I - i. 2 2 . J u d e i. 2 4 . Rev. xiv. 5 . In H e b .
B A A A E T A I , is surrounded by an 'Aptpl- ix. 14, Schl. t h i n k s t h a t C h r i s t is called
tXn^pov; and in the L X X this word a n - ápwpog on account of his perfect expiation
swers to TZNN, H a b . i. 1 5 , 17, and to MIYO, of t h e sins of t h e world.]
Eccles. ix. 12. See Wetstein on M a t . "AN.
[ I s a . xix. 8.] 1. A conjunction conditional, If In
'Aptpttvwpt, from apcpl aboíd, and evvvpt t h i s sense it is used in the profane writers
lo put on, which from ¿to t h e s a m e . — T o for 'éav; b u t not, as I can lind, in the N . T .
clothe, invest. [ M a t . vi. 3 0 . L u k e x ü . See J o h n xx. 2 3 . 1 T h e s . ii. 7.
2 8 , t h o u g h here Schl. says it is r a t h e r to 2. Indefinite, answering to t h e L a t i n
ornament, and he refers for instances of cunque, and English soever. See inter al.
the word applied to fruit and flowers to Mar. v. 19. x. 3 3 . x ü . 3 2 . M a r k iii. 2 9 .
Schwarz. Comm. C r i t . and P h i l . p . 7 3 , Rev. xiv. 4.
and Wolf. T . i. p . 142. In M a t . vi. 3 9 , 3. Potential. T h u s it is added to verbs
t h e future of t h e verb is understood. In of t h e Indieative^ and sometimes of t h e
tlie middle lo clothe one's self, to put on. O p t a t i v e moods, which m u s t t h e n in E n -
M a t . xi. 8. L u k e vii. 25.] glish have t h e Potential signs may, might,
" Apcj>ocov, tí, rb, from apfto both, the trio, would, could, or should, p u t before t h e m .
and bSbe a way.—A place where two ways See M a t . xi. 2 1 , 2 3 . xxiii. 3 0 . xxv. 2 7 .
meet, say our t r a n s l a t o r s ; b u t Hesychius J o h n xi. 2 1 . xviii. 3 0 . Acts ii. 12. v. 2 4 .
and Suidas explain it by pípnv, SíoBov, a 4. "Ewg iív, Until. M a t . ii. 13. v. 1 8 ,
Street, a thoroughfarc. P o l l u x likevvise 19. xvi. 2 8 , & a l .
observes, t h a t apipoda are used, in t h e 5 . "Orrtog av, That, to the end that.
Greek writers, for streets. See more in M a t . vi. 5 . Rom. iii. 4 . Comp. A c t s iii.
W e t s t e i n . occ. M a r k x i . 4 , [ P r o v . i. 2 0 . 19.
J e r . xi. 13.] 6. "Oe &v, Even as. J T h e s . ii. 7. Comp.
'Aptpórcpog, a,ov,from aptjiuboth.—Both, u n d e r 'Olg I . 1. [ S e e on dv Devar. de L .
of two. In the N . T . it is used only in t h e G . P a r t i c . p . 4 4 . Viger and Hoogeveen.]
plural. M a t . ix. 1 7 . xv. 14, & al. [ G e n . 'ANA.
xxi. 27.] On Acts xxiii. 8, Chrysostom I. A Preposition governing an Accusa-
(see W e t s t e i n and Gregory's G r . T e s t . ) tive case.
r c m a r k s , " H e r e are three t h i n g s m e n - 1. In,through. M a t . xiii. 2 5 . M a r k vii.
t i o n e d : W h y then does t h e historian say 3 1 . Rev. vii. 17. 'Ava pépog, In course,
¿tpfÓTípa ? E i t h e r as reckoning ángel a n d in turn. 1 Cor. xiv. 2 7 . 'Ava ptaov. Be-
tween, q. d. in the midst, 1 Cor. vi. 5 ;
Among, M a t . xiii. 2 5 .
* See the learned D u p o r t on T h e o p h r á s t u s , E t h i c . 2. I n t h e G r e e k poets, joined w i t h a
Char. page 2 8 0 , w h o g i v e s several other instances o f
the ñ a m e s of instruments e n d i n g in i-eoy, w h i c h are
dative or an accus. it signifies upon, super
derived in l i k e manner from the 3 d pers. perf. p a s s . (see S c a p u l a ) ; b u t is n o t t h u s used in t h e
by mserting a c. N . T . In both t h e above senses it may p e r -
 ANA 41
haps be best derived from t h e H e b . Miii,
'¿Xripa which denotes the presence of an object,
also lúllier. Comp. 'E>\
I I . An adverb importing distribution.
í t may be rendered a-piece. M a t . xx. 9, 10.
L u k e ix. 3.—or by, i. e. distributed into.
M a r k ' v i . 40. L u k e i x . 14. x. 1. [ X e n . A n .
iii. 4.] In this sense I would deduce it
from the H e b . nJV to answer, correspond.
•—'Ara, with a nominative, seems redun-
dant. R e v . xxi. 2 1 . See Wolfius and
Seapula's Lexicón.
I I I . In composition ít denotes,
1. Ascent, as in dvaoaívu) to go np.
2. Baclc again, in rcturn, as in dvat>áX-
XID to cast baclc, reject; dvayyiXXio to
bring word baclc again; dvaj¡ypém io go
baclc or away, depart.
3. Repetition, which implies correspond-
eney, as in aVafa'w to revive, Uve again,
aVaToupów to crucify again or afresh.
Henee,
4. I t adds an emphasis to the simple
word, as in dve^irav, L u k e ii. 4 4 , they
süiight diligenlly, i. e. again and again.
'Ara&adpoe, 5, ¿, from ara up, and
/xiOyuclc a step, which from ftahw to go.—
A stair. occ. A c t s xxi. 3 5 , 40. Josephus,
D e Bel. lib. v. cap. 5 . % 8. (whom see),
particularly mentions t h e i;ara€do-£ic, or
slair-cases, by which t h e castle, Antonia,
comnmnieated with t h e porticoes of t h e
temple. [2 Kings ix. 13- 2 Chron. ix. 18,
19.]
'AraSatVüj, from a'ra up, and /3aiVw lo
go-
I. To go, or come up, to ascend, in w h a t -
ever manner. M a t . iii. 16. v. 1. xiv. 2 3 .
L u k e v. 19. xviii. 10. xix. 4 . Acts i. 13.
ii. 34. viii. 3 1 , & al. freq. [ O n t h e phrase
lo ascend to heaven, see D e u t . x x x . 12.
Prov. xxx. 4. I s . xiv. 13, 14. J e r . l i . 5 3 .
Ps. cxxxix. 8. Comp. J o b xxxviii. 19, 3 8 .
I need hardly add, t h a t Schl. gives t h e
usual explanation of his party, viz. t h a t
to ascend into heaven means generally to
understand the plaus and t h o u g h t s of
God. In R o m . x. 6. he says, " Do not
think t h a t t h e doctrine of Christ's heavenly
orighi is beset with insuperable difficul-
ties." In J o h n i. 52, " Y o u shall see God
present with m e b y my working miracles."]
On M a t . xx. 17, W e t s t e i n shows t h a t J o -
sephus often uses the phrase 'ANABAI'-
NEIN ' E r S 1 E P O S O A Y M A ; and on Acts
viii. 3 ! , it may perhaps be worth r e m a r k -
ing, t h a t in like manner Ptolemy E v e r -
getes, king of E g y p t , iíívited the Jew J o -
sephus, t h e son oí Tobias, to come up hilo
ANA
his ckariot to him, 'ANABH~NAI iicl ró
TrapEk-áXso-ev. Joseph. A n t . lib. x i i .
cap. 4. § 3 * .
I I . To go on board, a ship n a m e l y ; t h e
word for ship being either expressed or
understood. See M a r k vi. 5 1 . J o h n x x i .
11.
I I I . To spring or grow up, as vegeta-
bles. M a t . xiii. 7. M a r k iv. 7, 8, 3 2 .
[Isa. liii. 2. Iv. 1 3 . ]
I V . ' Ava&alvtiv irri ri)v mpSíav, or iv
TÍ¡ mpdíct, To come into, or arise in, one's
heart. Spoken of t h o u g h t s , A c t s vii. 2 3 .
1 Cor. ii. 9. L u k e xxiv. 3 8 . T h e s e phrases-
answer to the H e b . ib by nbi\ which t h e
L X X accordiugly render b y dvaSaíveiv
E7T£ KapSíav. 2 K . xii. 4. J e r . iii. 16. E z e k .
xxxviii. 10.
'Ava£áXXu>, from dva baclc, and fiáXXur
to cast.—To cast baclc. 'AvaÉdXXopai,.
Mid. To put off, defer. occ. A c t s xxiv. 2 2 ,
where Wetstein shows t h a t t h i s V . Mid. is
t h u s used by t h e best Greek writers. [See
Philost. Vit. Apoll. iv. 10. X e n . M e m . i i í .
6, 6. Cicero ad L u c e . lib. v. ep. 12. B ü -
dteus, Comm. L i n g . Gr. p . 5 4 2 . D r e s í g .
de V e r b . Med. iii. 3.]
'Ara€í€a'£w, from dva up, and ¡5£d(ia
to malee to come.— To draw or bring up.
occ. M a t . xiii. 4S. [ X e n . H i s t . G r . 1. c. i .
2. H e r o d . iii. 7 5 . G e n . xxxvii. 2 8 . E x o d .
xvii. 5.]
'AvatXévo), from dva up or again, ámí
fiXÉTrii) to see or loóle.
I . To loóle up or upwards. M a t . xiv. 19.
M a r k vii. 3 4 . viii. 24. (where see C a m p -
bell.) Comp. A c t s xxii. 13. [2 Mace. vii.
2 8 . 1 Sam. xiv. 17.]
I I . To see again, to receive sight again.
M a t . xi. 5 . x x . 3 4 . L u k e xviii. 4 1 , 4 2 , 4 3 .
[ S o in good Greek writers, Aristoph. P l u t .
9 5 , 117. Philost. V i t . Sophist. ii. c. i. p .
547. Foes. CEcon. H i p p . p . 2 8 . ]
I I I . To see or receive sight, which one
never h a d before. J o h n ix. 1 1 , 1 5 , 18.
comp. ver. 1, 2 . [See D e D i e u Crit. S. p .
512.]
I V . To loóle again or aitentively. Mark
xvi. 4 . Comp. M a r k viii. 2 5 . [ G e n . x v . 5 . ]
So in t h e L X X dva^Xiicii) several t i m e s
answers to the H e b . t o o n .
'AvágXr^ts, toe, A t t . eioc, ?';, from dva-
tXéwti), io receive sight.—Recoveryqf sight.
occ. L u k e iv. 18 t -
* [ O n this phrase, w h i c h Schl. e x p l a i n s as re-
ferring to the h i g h m o u n t a i n o u s situation o f J u d e a ,
see M o r e on the íirst words o f X e n . A n a b . JEi. V .
H . viii. 17.]
•f [ S c h l . s a y s that this word docs n o t occur in the
 ANA 4: ANA

'AvabWw, tú, from dva e m p h a t i e , a n d way in L a t i n . See Corn. N e p . L y s .

podio lo cry out.—To cry out aloud, toex- &c.]
clahn. occ. M a t . xxvii. 4 6 . Mark xv. 8. I I . To read, as a book, letter, inscrip-
L u k e ix. 3 8 . [ S e e N u m . xx. 15. 1 Sam. tion, q. d. to know by reading. M a t . xii. 3 .
iv. 13.] J o h n xix. 2 0 . Col. iv. 16, & al. freq. In
,
Ava€o\n, i)g, i), from dva€é€o\a perf. which sense also it is used by t h e profane
mid. of áva£dWh> to defer.—Delay. occ. writers. O n A c t s viii. 3 0 , see A l b e r t i a n d
Acts xxv. 1 7 ; w h e r e W e t s t e i n shows t h a t W e t s t e i n , for instances of similar P a r o n o -
t h e phrase dvá£oXi)v •KotíaQai is used in masias in t h e Greek and L a t i n w r i t e r s .
like manner for making delay, by T h u c y - [In L u k e iv. 16, we have a notice of t h e
dides, [ii. 4 2 . ] P l u t a r c h a n d Dionysius r e g u l a r m e t h o d of reading and then i n t e r -
Halicarn. [ A . x i . 33.] p r e t i n g a small portion of t h e O . T . in t h e
'AvayyéWto, from dva in return, or em- Jewish synagogues, whence t h e p a r t read
p h a t i e , and dyyéXXiú to tell, declare. was called dváyviúo-ie and dváyvwo-pa.
I. To tell in return, bring back word. See also A c t s xiii. 2 7 . xv. 2 1 . 2 Cor. iii.
J o h n v. 15. comp. A c t s xiv. 2 7 . xvi. 3 8 . 15. 1 Thess. v. 2 7 . Rev. i. 3.]
2 Cor. vii. 7. 'Avayicá£io, from dvdyicri necessity.
I I . A n d most generally, To tell, declare I. To forcé, compel, by e x t e r n a l vio-
freely, openly, or eminently. M a r k v. 14, lence. A c t s xxvi. 1 1 .
19. J o h n iv. 2 5 . xvi. 1 3 , 14, 15. A c t s x x . I I . To forcé, compel, in a moral sense,
2 0 , 27- as b y authoritative command, M a t . xiv.
'Avaytvváiú, £), from dva again, and 22. M a r k vi. 4 5 . — b y i m p o r t ú n a t e p e r -
ytwáiú to beget.—To beget again, rege- suasión, L u k e xiv. 2 3 . Gal. ii. 14. vi. 12.
nérate- occ. 1 P e t . i. 3 . Pass. 'Avayevvdo- — b y injustice, A c t s xxviü. 19. See E l s -
¡xai, To be begotten again, regenerated. ner, K y p k e , M a c k n i g h t on Gal. ii. 14. a n d
occ. 1 P e t . i. 2 3 . [ W e find t h a t t h e Jewish B p . Pearce on L u k e xiv. 2 3 , and comp.
Rabbis used t h e expression a new creature Hapa€id£ofiat. [ F o r t h i s sense see Joseph.
of those who b y a n y change, as from vice A . J . vii. 1, 6. Aristoph. E q . 5 0 5 . H e r o -
t o v i r t u e , from idolatry, &c. were in an dian. iv. 9. 6. Valck. ad E u r . H i p p . 921.]
altered and improved religious state. See 'AvayaaloQ, a, ov, from áváyier] neces-
S c h o t g . H . H . on J o h n iii. 3 . a n d 2 Cor. sity.
v. 1 7 . ] I . Necessary, by a physical necessity.
'Avayivioo-Kb), from dva again, or em- 1 Cor. xii. 2 2 . comp. T i t . iii. 14.
p h a t i e , a n d yivibcrKu to know, take know- I I . Necessary, by a moral or spiritual
ledge of. necessity. 2 Cor. ix. 5 . P h i l . ii. 2 5 * .
I . To recognise, know, understand, ag- A c t s xiii. 46. H e b . viii. 3 . [ 2 Mace. iv.
noscere, nosse, intelligere. T h u s used in 23.]
t h e profane writers, a n d in this sense I I I . Near, intímate, closely connected.
K y p k e [ O b s . S. i. p . 1 1 9 . ] understands it, A c t s x. 24. T h e best G r e e k writers apply
M a t . xxiv. 15, t a k i n g away t h e paren- t h e word in t h i s sense, as m a y be seen
thesis, and considering t h e words b dva- in W e t s t e i n , who cites from E u r í p i d e s
yivibo-Kiov vodrio not as t h e evangelist's [ A n d r o m . 651.] a n d Dio Chrys. t h e very
b u t as C h r i s t ' s , He who recognises this, phrase ' A N A r i í A I ' O Y S í-I'AOYS. Comp.
i. e. t h e completion of Daniel's prophecy also K y p k e . — T h e above are all t h e t e x t s
b y t h e desolating abomination standing on wherein t h e word occurs.
holy ground, let him take notice and re- 'Avayxatórepoe, a, ov, Comparat. of dva-
ftecl: b u t in opposition to t h i s i n t e r p r e t a - yKaloc. More necessary, more needful. occ.
tion, see Campbeli's N o t e , who considers P h i l . i. 2 4 . Comp. 'Avayicaloe II.
t h e words in question as an admonition of l$g§P 'AvayKa^iiiQ, A d v . from avayicatóc.
t h e evangelist t o t h e reader, seriously to forced, which from avayicd^iú.—By con-
a t t e n d to w h a t h e was t h e n w r i t i n g . slraint, or compulsión, occ. 1 P e t . v. 2 .
[Schl. approves of K y p k e ' s explanation. [ T h e adj. occurs in Joseph. A . J . xviii. 3 ,
T h e word cogtiosco is used in t h e same 5. p . 873.]
'AváyKt], r¡s, from dva. emphatie,
and a y x t° constringe,w
bind hard, com-
versions of the O . T . I n this place it is a quotation press.
from I s a . l x i . 1, and i t occurs i n S y m m . P s . l x x v i .
4 . I n Isaiah it m a y be taken either spiritually, or
w i t h a reference to the miraclcs o f J e s ú s . I n the * [ I n these t w o passages S c h l . prefers the sense
H e b r e w it is an ojicning of ttie prison.] of useful, advantageous."]
 A N A 43 A N A

I . Necessity, conipelling forcé, as op- A c t s ix. 3 9 . L u k e iv. S. xxii. 66. & al.
posed to willingness. 2 Cor. ix. 7- Philem. Comp. M a t . iv. 1. L u k e xxii. 6 6 . A c t s
ver. 14. [See Irmiscli. on Herodian. i. 4 . xii. 4 . [Especially t o bring up from the
dead. R o m . x. 7. LTeb. xiii. 20. P s . xxx.
I I . Moral necessity. M a t . xviii. 7. q. d. 4. lxxi. 2 0 . Comp. W i s d . xvi. 13. P s .
Considering t h e depravity and wickedness xxix. 3 . ]
of men, there is a moral necessity that I I . To bring, or offer up, as a sacrifice.
o//'enees should come. [Schl. t h i n k s also A c t s vii, 4 1 . O n which passage E l s n e r
t h a t this is the necessity arising from the r e m a r k s , t h a t H e r o d o t u s , [iii. 60.] H e l i o -
condition qf human nature, or in technical dorus, and Philo, use t h e same phrase
phrase, a necessity of consequence. T h i s ' A N A T E I N BYSI'AS for offering sacri-
necessity qf consequence is t h e obvious ficcs. [Schleusner t h i n k s t h a t this phrase
sense iii Heb. vii. 12. ix. 2 3 ; t h e last of aróse from t h e victim's being led up t h e
which P a r k h u r s t liad improperly referred steps of t h e altar. See Abresch. ad iEschyl.
to head I I I . ] — " E ^ w dvíiyKr¡v, I have p . 2 1 2 . ]
need, I must necds. L u k e xiv. 18. xxiii. I I I . 'Aváyopai, Pass. litcrally, To be
17, & al. T h a t this is a good Greek carried up, i. e. as a ship appears to be,
phrase, used by approved writers, W e t - t h a t p u t s out to s e a ; so lo put out to sea,
stein has abundantly shown on L u k e xiv. to set sail. L u k e viii. 2 2 . A c t s xiii. 1 3 .
18, where see also Kypke and Schwartz xviii. 2 1 . & al. Wetstein on L u k e viii. 2 2 ,
Lex. N . T. [Schl. refers the passage 1 Cor. and A l b e r t i on A c t s xxvii. 2 , 3 , show t h a t
vii. 3 7 , to compclling forcé, and L u k e t h e Greek writers use ¿ivíiyeo-daí in t h e
xxiii. 17, to a necessity arising from cus- same sense. Comp. u n d e r líarciyio I I .
tom, a sense to which he likewise, and I I V . To bring back. Rom. x. 7. H e b .
t h i n k r i g h t l y , refers H e b . ix. 1G. O n the xiii. 20.
other passages where this phrase oceurs V . [To bring formard, or produce.
he refers to Olearias de Stylo N . T . p . A c t s xii. 4 . Comp. 2 Mace. vi. 10. L u k e
2 2 , in Sehwartz's edition.] xxii. 66. B r . explains t h e use of t h e word
I I I . Spiriliial or religious necessity. with r e g a r d to sacrifices in t h i s way.]
Rom. xiii. 5. 1 Cor. ix. 16. J u d e ver. 3 , 'Avalúnvvpi, or obsol. avaceUio, from
comp. H e b . vii. 2 7 . civd, u p , and Seii;vvpi or delicio lo show, [to
I V . Distress, ajjliction. L u k e xxi. 2 3 . show on high, so that all see publicly."]
1 Cor. vii. 26. 2 Cor. vi. 4 . x i i . 10. 1 I . To show plainly or openly. occ. A c t s
Thess. iii. 7. where see Macknight,- also i. 24. [Xen. H e l l . ii'i. 516.]
Wetstein on L u k e xxi. 2 3 , and Elsner and I I . To mark out, appoint, to an office
Wetstein on 2 Cor. vi. 4 , for proof t h a t by some oulward sign. occ. L u k e x. 1. I n
the Greek writers apply both t h e sing. this l a t t e r sense, as well as in t h e former,
'Aváyxn, and t h e plur. ' A r á y r a i , in t h i s t h e word is often used by t h e profane
sense, in which t h e word is likewise often w r i t e r s , and in t h e apocryphal books.
used by thc L X X , and generally answers to 'AVCISSÍÍ,IQ, ion, A t t . íwe, i¡, from ¿ivadeÍK-
the H e b . p l T O , H p l í D , ft, m y , all which vvpi io show forth.—A showing forth, or
signify dislrcss, oppression. See H e b . and openly, a being made manifest. occ. L u k e
E n g . Lexicón on these words. [1 Sam. i. 8 0 , where it is applied with peculiar
xxii. 2. Job xxxvii. 9. See Xen. Mera. iii.
propriety to J o h n t h e B a p t i s t ' s being ma-
12, 2. Diod. Sic. iii. 13. iEschyl. P r o m . v.
nifesled, in bis prophetical office, as t h e
107. iEIian. V. H . xiv. 24.]
foreruiuicr of t h c Messiah. See E l s n e r
'Arayj'wpí'fíü, from dvd again, and yvio- and Wetstein. [ S e e Polyb. xv. 24. E c c l u s .
¡>í'(io to hww.—To hioiv again, whence in xliii. 7. Schl. and B r . refer this place of
the pass. livayviopí^opai lo be, or be made, St. L u k e to the sense of inaugurallon, and
hwwn again. occ. A c t s vii. 13. [ G e n . t h e verb certainly oceurs in t h i s sense fre-
xiv. 1.] quently. 2 Mace. ix. 2 3 . x. 11. xiv. 12.
'Avíiy vwcric, ioc, A t t . £wo, 7 / , from ávayi- Diodor. i. 06. Polyb. xiii. 4.]
VIÚOKM lo read.—A reading, occ. A c t s xiii. I F S ^ 'Avacéxppai, from ¿iva Clliphatic,
]f). 2 Cor. iii. 14. 1 T i m . iv. 13.—In the and léypp-ai lo receive.
L X X it is once used for the H e b . Hipa, I . To receive hospitably and kindly. occ.
Neh. viii. 8. [See dvayivíiaKia II.] A c t s xxviii. 7. [ / ¿ l i a n . V . H . iv. 9.]
'Aváyw, from ¿iva up, again, or amay, I I . To receive. occ. H e b . xi. 17. [In
and ayui Iu bring, or lead. the Apocrypha, this word has always a
I. To bring, lead, eurry, or take up. diíferent sense. 2 Mace. vi. 9. to choose.
 A NA
viii. 3 6 . to promise, take on one's self,
which is t h e proper forcé of t h e v e r b . ]
Ej§§° 'ÁvaSíSiopí, from aya emphatic,
and Sícüjpi lo give, present.— To present,
dcliver. occ. Acts xxiii. 3 3 . [Polyb. xxix.
10, 7. x v . 3 1 , 8. I n Ecclus. i. 2 1 . to bud
fígainr\
Ejjgjp' 'Ava'(áu>, 5, from ava again, and
3
£áw to Uve.—To Uve again, to revive, occ.
L u k e xv. 24, 3 2 . Rom. vii. 9. xiv. 9. Rev.
xx. 5 . B u t in Rom. xiv. 9, t h e A l e x -
andrian, and another ancient M S , with
very many later ones, and some p r i n t e d
editions, read I'CTJÓCV; and this reading is
approved by Mili, W e t s t e i n , and Gries-
bach.
'Avafariu, •¡3, from ava emphatic, a n d
'¿,-nrliD to scelc.—To scelc, or scek diligcntly.
occ. Acts xi. 2o. L u k e ii. 4 4 . [ J o b iii. 4.
2 Mace. xiii. 2 1 . Polyb. iv. 3 5 , 6 . ]
'Ava^wyvvpi, from ¿iva np, and ¿¡úvvvpi
to gird.—To gird up. occ. 1 P e t . i. 1 3 ;
where it is applied to t h e mind by a figure
t a k e n from t h e custom of t h e eastern n a -
tions, who, when they had occasion to
e x e r t themselves, as in journeying, r u n -
süng, &c. used to bind up their longflowing
gatmenis bya girdleabout their loins. T h u s
in Herodotus, lib. i. cap. 7 2 . & al. we have
EÜfwvw dvSpí a mell-girded m a n , for a
nimble, expeditious, active one. Comp.
Scapula's Lexicón, in "Eu¿ÍWo£. So H o -
race, S a t . v. lib. i. lines í, 6, since t h e
Román toga also was a loóse jlowing gar-
menl, uses altius prsecinctis, literally,
girded np higher, or more expeditious or
active. Comp. E x e d . x ü . 1 1 . 2 K i n . iv. 2 9 .
ix. J. 1 Kings xviii. 4 6 , and Repiíwwvpi.
T h i s verb is once used by t h e L X X , Prov.
xxxi. 17, For t h e H e b . *un lo gird.
'Ava^ojTrvpéiii, S>, from dvd again, and
Ziorrvpéü} to revive a fire which is almost
dead, and hidden under the ashes, and this
from 'Cáit> to Uve, and Trvp a fire.—To re-
vive, stir up, as a fire. occ. 2 T i m . i. 6.
Clemens Romanus has this verb in h i s 1
E p . to t h e Corinthians, § 2 7 , edit. Russel.
'ANAZíllTfPHUA'TíI oiiv ?j TTÍVÍC dvrS iv
il/uv, L e t t h e faith of God revive or be
stirred up, in u s . So I g n a t i u s to t h e
Epheskns, § l/ANAZaHYPH'SANTESÉj'
Hipan QeS, s'tirring up yourselves b y t h e
blood of God. Josephus, speaking of H e -
rod's affection for M a r i a m n e , D e Bel. lib.
i. cap. 2 2 , § 5 , uses t h e V. in t h e passive.
'O tpue rrdXiv ' A N E Z O n Y P E I - T O , H i s
love was revived. W e t s t e i n on 2 T i m . i.
6, shows t h a t this V . both act. and pass.
is likowise applied figuratively by others
44 A NA
of t h e best Greek writers. Comp. under
seévvvpi I I . [Xen. de Re E q . x. 8. 16.
Dion. Halic. Marc. A n t ó n , vii. 2 . ] — T h e
L X X have once used this verb in t h e
active. G e n . xiv. 2 7 , for í r n to Uve, revive.
See H e b . and E n g . Lexicón, in í r n . I t
oceurs also in 1 Mace. xiii. 7-
'AvaddXXid, from dvd again, and BdXXia
to thrive, flourish, which m a y be e i t h e r
from t h e H e b . Verb bu¡ to send forth, or
from the N . Í>ÍD dem, which is frequently
mentioned in S. S. as a principal i n s t r u -
m e n t in vegetalion, a n d is well known t o
be so, especially in J u d e a and t h e neigh-
bouring countries. So Homer, Odyss.
xiii. line 2 4 5 , mentions T E G A A V I A epan,
t h e vegelative dew. Comp. H e b . and E n g .
Lexicón in !?Í3 I I . — T o thrive, ov jlourish
again, lo reftourish, as trees or plants,
which, though t h e y seem dead in t h e
winter, revive and flourish again a t t h e
r e t u r n of spring. occ. Phil. iv. 1 0 ; where
however t h e V . is used transitively, Ye
have caused your care of me lo thrive, or
flourish again; as it is also in t h e L X X ,
Ezek. xvii. 24, for t h e H e b . tTSrT to malee
to flourish. Comp. Ecclus. i. 15. xi. 2 2 . 1.
11. Suicer says t h e V . is t h u s used a c -
tively in imitaiion of the H e b . conjugaiion
(Hiphil he means), b u t I would n o t be
too positive of t h i s . W e have j u s t scen
t h a t H o m e r uses mdaXvl.a t h e particip.
mid. of t h e simple V . SáXXio for causing
to vegetóte. Comp. also u n d e r ' A r a T e W w .
A n d so P i u d a r applies t h e simple Verb
SdXXw transitively, O l y m p . iii. line 4 0 .
A £ V ¿ P E " E 0 A A A E x^poS' " T h e p l a c e p r o -
duced trees."
'AvdQepa, aros, rb, from dva-t6r¡pi to
sepárale.
I . An anaíliema, a person or thing ac-
cursed, or separaled lo dcstruciion. occ.
I Cor. x ü . 3 . xvi. 22. G a l . i. 8, 9. Rom.
ix. 3 , for I could ivish myself dvddspa
uvaí " A I I O " ra Xpi^a to be devoted B Y
Christ, namely to temporal destruction,
as t h e J e w s t h e n were. See M a t . xxiii.
3 7 , 3 8 . L u k e xiii. 3 4 , 3 5 . M a t . xxiv. 2 1 .
L u k e x x i . 2 1 , 2 3 . x i x . 4 2 , 4 4 , and W e t -
stein, in Rom. T h e preposition aV¿ is
used in like m a n n e r to denote t h e efficient
cause. M a t . x ü . 3 8 . xvi. 2 1 . Comp. 'Airó
I . 8 . — I t is observable, t h a t in t h e oíd
Greek w r i t e r s , dvddepa is used for a per-
son w h o , on occasion of a plague or some
public calamity, devoted himself as an cx-
piatory sacrifice to t h e infernal gods*.
* See S c a p u l a ' s L e x i c ó n , and W o l f i u s i n Rom.
ix. 3 , p a g e 171.
 ANA 4 A N A
[Schleusner after observing t h e change in
M S S . between this word and dvádnpa (as
Levit. xxvii. 2 9 . & al.) rernarks, and I
think t r u l y , t h a t w i t h o u t doubt t h e words
were a t first promiscuously used (see D e y -
ling. Obs. S. ii. 42.) T h e meaning was,
(1.) any thing offered to God, and sepa-
raledfrom human use, (Levit. ubi supra)
as gold and silver. N u m b . xvi. 3 7 — 3 9 . &
al. and then especially any animal devoted
as a sacrifice; henee (2.) any thing de-
voted to death was so called; and as t h e
Greeks applied t h e word to those devoted
to death to avert any calamity, i t (3.)
¡meant any one devoted to curses, one to
be removed out of the sight of mankind
(see Alberti Gloss. N . S. p . 105.) I n t h e
passage in Romans, then, says Schl., t h e
meaning is, I could wish myself lo be de-
voted to death for the Jeivs, or / could
wish to be deprived of all society with
Christ. I confess t h a t t h e last explana-
tion (which is also Wahl's) is to me quite
unsatisfactory, and t h e first takes no notice
of t h e difficult words' aVó XpiVs, B r . says,
" I could wish t o be destined by Christ to
death as an expiation." W a t e r l a n d , in
his 20th sermón (vol. ix. p . 2 5 3 . Oxford
ed.), says, I could wish myself exposed to
temporal destruction after the manner of
Christ, as in 2 T i m . i. 3.]
I I . A curse or execration, by which one
is bound to certain conditions. occ. A c t s
xxiii. 14. [ S e e D e u t . x x . 1 7 - ] — T h i s
word in t h e L X X always answers to t h e
H e b . í n i n , which in like manner denotes,
in general, total separation from a former
state or coudition, and particularly either
ihings or persons devoted to destruction, as
D e u t . vii. 2 5 , 2 6 . Josh. vi. 17, 18. vii. 12.
1
AvaQeparíZú), from dvádepa a curse.
I , To bind by a curse or execration.
occ. A c t s xxiii. 12, 1 4 , 2 1 .
I I . To curse, occ. M a r k xiv. 7 1 . — I n
t h e L X X i t answers to t h e H e b . verb
t J > 1 t n to elevóte. [ T h e L X X p u t both
dvaBíparí'(w ¡mddvarídr¡piíor to consécrate
to God, t h e first N u m b . xviii. 14. t h e s e -
cond Lev. xxvii. 2 8 . W h e r e i t signifies,
according to P a r k h u r s t , to devote, i t is
often entirely to destroy or make desoíate.
T h e way in which i t gained t h i s sense is
explained under dvádepa. See N u m b .
xxi. 2. J u d g . i. 17- Zach. xiv. 1 1 . D a n .
xi. 4 4 . D e u t . xiii. 15. 1 Mace. v. 5. I n
D e u t . x x . 17. it is simply to devote, a n d so
N u m b . xviii. 1 4 . ]
t^p " 'Avadeíopéü), ü, from ava emphatic,
6
and 5ewp£o> to view.
I. To view, behüld attentively. occ. A c t s
xvii. 2 3 .
I I . To consider attentively, contémplate.
occ. H e b . xiii. 7.
'Avádripa, aros, rb, from dvartOnpi to
sepárate, lay up.—A consecraled gifl,
hung or laid up in a temple, occ. L u k e
xxi. 5 *. Josephus expressly tells u s ,
A n t . lib. xv. cap. 1 1 . § 3 . page 7 0 2 , t h a t
afterthe reparation of the temple by Herod
t h e G r e a t , 7-5 t? iepS irávros r)v ¿v KVICXIO
TrETTTj'ypéyct aicvXa ¡3ap€ápiKa, ¡coi TCIVTCI
TrúvraTíaaiXevQ 'lipúj§¿£ 'ANE'GHKE,Trpocr-
delg otra raí rüv' Apc&wv '¿Xa€ev. " B a r b a r i e
spoils were fixed u p all round t h e temple.
All these K i n g H e r o d dedicated, adding
moreover those he h a d taken from t h e
Arabians." Comp. Wetstein and K y p k e
on L u k e . — T h e L X X , according to some
copies, use t h i s word, L e v . xxvii. 2 8 , 2 9 ,
for the H e b . C n n somewhat devoted; b u t
in 2 M a c . ix. 16, i t signifies, as in L u k e ,
a consecrated gift. Comp. Wolf. C u r .
P h i l . on R o m . ix. 3 . page 170, edit. 2d.
'AvaítStta, as, from avaiiHis impudent,
which from a neg. a n d ctio¿»£ shame.
I . Shamelessness, impudence. In this
sense i t is used b y t h e profane w r i t e r s .
I I . In t h e N . T . Ürgent, and, as it
were, shameless imporlunity, which will
take no denial. occ. L u k e xi. 8. [ I m p r o -
bitas, Vulg.]
'Avaípems, ios, A t t . ews, r¡, from t h e fol-
lowing 'Avaipéw.—Murder. occ. A c t s viii.
1. xxii. 2 0 . [ N u m b . x i . 15.]
'Avaipém, £¡, from dva emphatic or up,
and aipébí to take.
I. [To take up, (as from t h e g r o u n d )
MVi&xi. V . H . v . 16. xiii. 4 0 . X e n . Cyrop.
ii. 3 . 7- Josh. iv. 3 . D a n . i. 16. Used in
t h e middle, To take up to one's self, used
of children in oppósition t o t h e verb
ÍKríBnpi io expose, or abandon. A c t s vii.
2 1 . A r r i a n , Diss. E p i c t . i. 2 5 . 7. E u r i p .
Phoen. 2 5 . A r i s t o p h . N u b . 5 3 1 . See
D ' O r v i l l . ad Charit. p . 3 2 9 . T u r n e b .
A d v . ii. 6.]
I I . \_To take off, or kill. L u k e xxii, 2 .
xxiii. 3 2 . A c t s xxii. 2 6 . xii. 2 . E x o d . x x i .
29. J e r . xii. 8. 2 Sam. x . 1 8 . T h e verb
is used in t h e same sense of things, to take
off, or pxá an end to. H e b . x . 9. T e s t x i i .
P a t . a p u d F a b r . C. P s e u d . i. 6 8 1 . X e n ,
* [ T h i s passage s h o w s that the J e w s h a d t h e
same c u s t o m a s the Gentiles, o f m a k i n g offerings o f
all sorts. S e e 2 M a c e . v . 1 6 . i x . 1 6 . 3 M a c e . i i i .
17- O n Gentile ofFerings, see P o l i . O n o m . i, 2 5 ,
and the N o t e s o n C a l l i m . H . in V e n . 2 1 9 . ]
 A N A 46 A N A

Cyrop. i. 1. 1. I n t h e sense of killing, it by our translators very happily rendered

occurs^ Exod. xv. 9. D a n . ii. 1 3 . v. 2 1 . vii. gucsts, M a t . xxii. 10, 1 1 .
'AvaKecpaXatóopai, sfiai, from ¿iva. e m -
'AvaÍTioc, u, b, >/, from a neg. and aína phatie or again, and KEéaXaiów to reduce
a crime. Not criminal, guiltlcss, inno- to a sum, from KEibaXaAov a head or sum
cent. occ. M a t . x i i . 5 , 7. [ D e u t . xxi. 8. total, which see.
^ 1 . V . H . v. 18.] I . I n mid. To gather iogether again
'AvaraOifo», from ara up, and Ka8í£to to in one, to reunile under one head. occ.
sit. To sit up. occ. L u k e vii. 1 5 . A c t s ix. E p h . i. 10. comp. ver. 2 2 ; and see W o l -
40. fius and M a c k n i g h t . [Miav KE<j>aXr)v aira-
'AvatcaivLCti), from ¿iva again, and mi- aiv iir¿6r¡K£. C h r y s . ]
ví'(bi to rcnen), which from tcaivbc ñero.— I I . I n pass. To be summed up, lo be
To fenew again. occ. H e b . vi. 6. [ P s . ciii. comprised. occ. Rom. xiii. 9 ; where see
5. civ. 30.] W e t s t e i n . [See Polyb. v. 3 2 . ]
E§§p° 'Avatcaivóio, w, from apa again, and 'Ai'aicXívia, from ¿iva emphatie, and KXÍVIO
icaivbc new.—To rcncw, \j-cfresh,l¡ occ. to lay down.
2 Cor. iv. 16. Col. iii. 10. I . To lay down. occ. L u k e ii. 7. [ H o m .
'Avamívucrie, WQ, A t t . eojc, ?/, from II. iv. 113.]
avanaLvóü) to rcncw.—A renewing, reno- I I . To make lo recline, put in a posture
valion. occ. R o m . xii. 2. T i t . iii. 5 . of recumbeney, which t h e J e w s in our Sa-
'AvaKaXvwrw, from ¿iva back again, and viour's t i m é used in eating. (Comp. u n d e r
KaXímro) to hiele, veil.—To unveil, to take 'AvciKEipai I I . ) occ. M a r k vi. 39 * . L u k e
away a veil or covering. occ. 2 Cor. iii. 14. ix. 15. xii. 3 7 . I n the pass. To leanside-
18. [ J o b xii. 2 2 . Isa. iii. 17.] ways, recline, or be reclined. occ. M a t .
'AvaKcipTrru, from ¿iva back again, and xiv. 19. L u k e vii. 3 6 . comp. M a t . viii. 1 1 .
KápTrrii) to bend. L u k e xiii. 2 9 . [ J u d i t h xii. 1 5 . ] — T h e
I. To bend back. B u t in t h i s sense i t above cited are all t h e t e x t s of t h e N . T .
is not used in t h e N . T . wherein t h e word occurs.
I I . To bend back one's course, to return. 'AvaKÓwrii), from ¿iva back, a n d
occ. M a t . ii. 12. L u k e x . 6. A c t s xviii. KÓirrto to strilce, impel.—To beal or drive
2 1 . H e b . x i . 1 5 . [ E x o d . x x x i i . 2 7 . J o b back, to hinder. occ. G a l . v. 7. " I t h a t h
xxxix. 4 . ] been observed, says D o d d r i d g e , t h a t avi-
'AvánEipai, from áva emphatie, a n d KoipE is an O l y m p i c expression, answerable
KÚpai to lie. to erpÉXETE; a n d i t properly signifies
I . To lie, as a person dead. M a r k v. 4 0 . coming across the course while a person
I I . To lie, lie down, recline, which was is r u n n i n g in i t , in such a m a n n e r as t o
t h e posture used in e a t i n g a t table b y t h e * jostle a n d ihrow him out of t h e way." I
latterJews, Persians ( E s t h . i. 6. vii. 8.), cannot, however, find t h a t t h i s V . is ever
G r e e k s , a n d Romans. M a t . xxvi. 7, 2 0 . used as a n Olympic t e r m , t h o u g h T h e o -
J o h n xiii. 2 3 , 2 8 . & al. freq. So when p h r a s t u s , E t h . Char. cap. 2 5 , speaks of ra
our Saviour aváicEirai is reclining a t meat KvttpvriTH ' A N A K O ' n r O N T O S , a steers-
in t h e Pharisee's house, w i t h his face t o - m a n interrupting t h e course of a s h i p ;
wards t h e table, a n d his feet towards t h e and in P l u t a r c h , Crass. page 5 6 3 , T o V
Outside of t h e couch, t h e penitent woman i W o v ' A N A K O ' I I T E I N denotes stopping a
stands -¡rapa rSc iróbag avrS oirítriú at his horse, i. e. b y l a y i n g hold on his bridle.
feet behind him. L u k e vii. 3 7 , 3 8 . O n See more i n E l s n e r a n d Alberti. B u t in
which passage see CampbelFs P r e l i m . D i s - Gal. v. 7, very m a n y M S S , among which
s e r t a t . page 3 6 5 , &c. A n d a t h i s last six ancient, read EVÉKO^E ; which reading
supper one qf his disciples i¡v avaiceífievoe is approved b y Wetstein, a n d a d m i t t e d
was reclining i n J e s ú s ' bosom, J o h n xiii. into t h e t e x t b y Griesbach. [Wisd. xviii.
2 3 , where see W e t s t e i n . H e n e e avatcúpt- 23.]
voi, which properly denotes persons re- 'AvaKpá^co, from ¿iva emphatie, a n d
clining at table (see L u k e x x i i . 2 6 . ) , is Kpá£u> to cry.—To cry out, exclaim. occ.
M a r k i. 2 3 . vi. 4 9 . L u k e iv. 3 3 . viii. 2 8 .
xxiii. 18. I n t h e L X X i t commonly an-
* S e e B o c h a r t , vol. ii. 5 9 8 . CampbelTs P r e l i m .
swers t o t h e H e b . N"ip lo cry out, and rníT
Dissertat. to G o s p e l s , p a g e 3(51, & c . and N o t e i n
V i r g i l . D e l p h . / E n . i. l i n . 702. [ T h e earlier J e w s
sat upright. S e e G e n . x x v i i . 1 9 . 1 S a m . x x . 2 5 . 4 , * [ S c h l . s a y s , that in this place autü¡ refers to
E z e k . xliv. 3 . ] the A p o s t l e s , nana; to the multitude.]
 AN A 47 A N A

to shoiit. [See 1 Sam. iv. 5 . J u d g . vii. S p c n c e r d e L . H e b . Rit. iii. 10. Exod. x i x .

20. Josh. vi. 5. Zacli. i. 17.]_ 4. N u m b . i. 5 0 . ]
'Avatcpívia, from ¿iva emphatic, and Kpívm I I I . To take up, as on board a ship.
iojiidge. occ. Acts x x . 13, 14. T h e V. is r e p e a t -
I . To examine or queslion, in order to edly t h u s applied in t h e Life of H o m e r
pass a judicial sentence. occ. L u k e xxiii. ascribed to Herodotus, namely, in cap. vii.
14. A c t s i v . 9. xii. 19. xxviii. 18. viii. x i x . cited by Wetstein.
I I . To disccrn, judgc. occ. 1 Cor. ii. 14, I V . To take up, or sel, as upon a beasl.
15. iv. 3, 4. xiv. 24. occ. Acts xxiii. 3 1 , comp. ver. 24 ¡ or else
I I I . To examine accurately, or care- it may signify no more t h a n to take with
fully. occ. A c t s xvii. 1 1 . [1 Sam. x x . 12. one, or in one's company, as it does 2 T i m .
"Xen. C y r . i . 6. 12.] iv. 1 1 . [ G e n . xiv. 18. Xen. Hell. i. 1. 3 .
I V . To inquire, aslc qucstions, in g e - Cyrop. i. 5. 7-]
neral, occ. 1 Cor. x. 2 5 , 2 7 . [Sclileusn. V. To take up, take, as armour. occ.
suggests t h a t in these passages t h e sense E p h . vi. 13, 16. On t h e former of these
of rcjecling, or condemning, is possibly verses, W e t s t e i n (whom see) cites from
t r u c , though he allows t h a t t h e words Josephus and Hcrodian, ii. 2 3 . 'ANAAA'-
are in favour of t h e B 0 N T E 2 T A 2 H A N O I I A I A S ; from L u -
S
¿tu rijv avv£Íh)(xiv
o t h e r ; but he thinks t h a t t h e sense of cían, TxVS n A N O l T A I ' A S — ' A N A A H ' ^ E -
condemning must be given to 1 Cor. S O E ; and from Philostratus, T1TN " A 2 -
xiv. 2 4 . ] — T h e L X X have once used it 1IIAA—'ANAAA'BíiMEN, Let us take the
for the H e b . 'ipn io search oul, explore. shield. ( T h e above-eited are all t h e pass-
[1 Sam. x x . 12.] ages of t h e N . T . where t h e V . occurs.)
'Avcucpuris, toe, A t t . £u>s, i¡, from ctva- [ S e e J e r . xlvi. 3 . D e u t . i. 4 1 . 2 Mace. x .
Kpíviú, A judicial examinalion. occ. A c t s 27. Diod. Sic. x x . 3 3 . X e n . Hell. ii. 4 .
xxv. 2C. [See Budajus on this word and 12.]
Taylor on Demosth. t. iii. p. 5 5 5 . Polyb. ^S^'AváXn-J/te, ios, Att.EIOSJIfrom oVa-
viii. 19. 8. 3 Mace. vii. 4. Susann. 48, 5 1 . ] Xap&ávm.—A being taken up ; or r a t h e r ,
'AvaKvirrii), from dva baclc again, or up, according to Campbell (whom see), " a
and ICVTTTÜ] to bend. removal;" b u t perhaps best of all, accord-
I . To lift, or raise up, oneself from a i n g to Bishop Pearce (whom also s e e ) ,
bending poslure. occ. L u k e xiii. 1 1 . J o h n " a retiring," i. e. of Jesús from J u d e a ,
viii. 7, 10. T h u s used by Theophrastus, and t h e p a r t s about Jerusalem, where h e
E t h . Char. cap. 1 1 . was born. T h e days of his t h u s reiiring,
I I . To lift up oneself, or loóle up, as for he had lived in Galilee, were now com-
persons in hope. occ. L u k e xxi. 2 8 . J o - pleted. occ. L u k e ix. 5 1 . [Schleusner
sephus, D e Bel. lib. vi. cap. 8. § 5, uses and Br. both say, " Christ's ascensión
t h e phrase oXíyov 'ANAKY'^ANTES ac ra into heaven," and Br. cites t h e same e x -
t i t e e , recovering a little from t h e i r terror. pression from t h e T e s t . xii. P a t . F a b . Cod.
Raphelius, on L u k e x x i . 2 8 , shows, t h a t Ps. i. p . 5 8 5 . Heinsius t h i n k s t h a t dvd-
t h i s V. is used likewise by Herodotus, Xr¡4"-e has some reference to death, as dva-
Xcnophon, [QEc. xi. 5.] and Polybius, [ i . Xap&dvu) in A n t o n i n . I m p . iv. 3 . 14. See
55.] for recovering from a state of dejec- Suicer, i. p . 2 8 1 . ]
iion and sorrow, resuming hope or courage, 'AvaXío-Küi, from ¿iva away, and CIXÍOKIO
recovering one's spirits. See also W e t - io take.—To take away, deslroy, consume.
stein, and K y p k e on L u k e , and D u p o r t occ. L u k e ix. 5 4 . G a l . v. 15. 2 Thess. ii.
on Thcophrast. page 377. [ D ' O r v i l l . on 8. A s in t h e first of these t e x t s t h e word
Charit. p. 3 0 1 . ed. Lip s.] is applied to the action ofjire, so t h e L X X
'AvaXapSávid, from dva up, and Xap- often use it for t h e same, answering to t h e
ۇ)'w lo take. H e b . b i s to cal, consume. [See G e n . xii.
I . To take up. 'AvaXapSávopai, pass. 30. N u m b . ix. 3 3 . J e r e m . 1. 7. E z e k . v.
To be taken up, as Christ into heaven. occ. 12.]
M a r k xvi. 19. A c t s i. 2 , 1 1 , 22. 1 T i m . 'AvaXoyía, as, r¡, from ava d e -
iii. 16. comp. Acts x. 1 6. [2 Kings ii. 1 1 . n o t í n g disiribution, and Xóyoc account,
Ecclus. xlviii. 9. 1 Mace. ii. 5 8 . ] proportion.—Vroporiion. occ. Rom. xii. 6.
I I . To take up, and carry. occ. A c t s " The measure qffaith, ver. 3 , and pro-
vii. 4 3 ; where the correspondent H e b . portion offaith in this verse, signifies t h e
word to dveXáSere of St. L u k e , and of t h e . same t h i n g , viz. so much of t h a t p a r t i c u l a r
L X X , is o n s i l í ) . [Amos v. 26. See gift which God was pleased to bestow on
 A N A 43
a n y onc." Locke. See also Raplielius and
Wolfius ; the latter of whom embraces the
too common interpretation of ávaXoyíav
rrje TTÍ^eíoe by the analogy offaith, or the
general and consistent scheme or plan qf
'¿VTEVOEV doctrines delivered in thc Scriptures. But
in opposition to this interpretation, see
Campbell's Prelim. Dissert. t o Gospels, p .
1 0 9 — 1 1 4 , and comp. M a c k n i g h t on Rom.
{jSchl. agrees with P a r k h u r s t . ]
'Aya\oyt'4'opai, from ¿ r a denoting distri-
buiion, distinction, or repetition, and Xo-
yí'Copai to rec/con, think, which see.— To
consider accurately and disiinctly, or
again and again. occ. H e b . xii. 3, where
Kypke cites Xenophon, Lucian, and D i o -
dorus Sic. using the V. in the like sense.
— [Br. says consider and compare, (i. e.
C h r i s t ' s sutferings and y o u r s ) . T h e verb
oceurs in t h e sense to consider in Xen.
Memor. ii. 1. 5. P l u t . Vit. M a r . c. 46'.
3 Mace. vii. 7.]
tf^p" "AraAoc, b, ?'/, Kai rb—ov, from a
neg. and (ÍXe salt.'—Without sallness, not
having the taste qf salt. occ. M a r k ix. 50.
[again Ezek. xiii. 10. xxii. 2 8 . ]
'AváXvcrie, we, A t t . Ewr, from ctvaXvw.
—Departiere [or death.] Comp. 'ÁvaXvio
I I I . occ. 2 T i m . iv. 6. [Schl. explains this
sense as meaning dissolulion, separalion
of soul and body. See K r e b s . Obs. Flav.
page 366. Albert. Peric. Crit. page 102.
Schotgen. H . H . on Phil. i. 2 3 . Pililo,
in Flacc. p. 9 9 1 . T h e r e is no doubt t h a t
t h e Greeks frequently expressed death by
words referring to ajourney, a f'east, &c.
and it is therefore more probable t h a t this
word derived its sense from t h e second
m e a n i n g of ávaXvio. See Gataker. O p p .
C r i t t . p . 3 1 9 . D ' O r v i l l . ad Charit. p . 3 1 7 .
B a r t h . A d v e r s . Iii. c. 3 . xliii. c. 3 . O n
t h e other side, s e e D u k e r . a d F l o r . iv. 11.]
'AvaXvio, from ara back again, or de-
noting separation, and Xvio to loóse.
I . To loóse. I t is particularly applied,
by Homer, to loosing the cables of a ship,
in order to sail from a port. See Odyss. ix.
line 178. xi. line 636. xii. line 1 4 5 . xv.
line 5 4 7 . H e n e e
I I . I n the N . T . To relurn, or depart.
occ. L u k e xii. 36 ; where W e t s t e i n shows,
t h a t t h i s V . followed by á7ro rüv Setirviov,
CK crvpiroo-ia, is in t h e G r e e k w r i t e r s like-
wise used for returning or departing from
supper—from abanquet,íkc. Comp. J u d i t h
xiii.]. [See Polyb. iii. 69. Philost. V i t .
A p o l l . i i . 7. iv. 86. J o b i i . 2 . W i s d . ii. 1.]
I I I . To depart, i. e. out of this life. occ.
P h i l . i, 2 3 . Tlie V . is used for departing,
A N A
not only 2 Mac. xii. 7, b u t by Polybius
and Philostratus, cited by Elsner ,• so
Chrysostom explains avaXvaai by évrevdev
•n-pbe Spavov pedhaadaí, removing from
henee to heaven; and Theodoret by rt)v
cnraXXáynv, a departing henee.
Comp. Suicer T h e s a u r . in 'AvaXíioj. See
also Bowyer's Conject. and Kypke in P h i l .
'Avapáprvroe, s, ó, ?/, from a neg. and
dpap-éio to sin, which see.— Without sin,
sinlcss, guiltless. occ. J o h n . viii. 7.—•
(From a well known sense of apapria,
Schl. t h i n k s t h a t in this passage ¿ivapap-
rnroe means free from the guilt qf forni-
cation and adultery. See D e u t . xxix. 9.
Kypke Obs. Sacr. i. p . 3 1 9 . In its com-
mon sense it oceurs Xen. Mem. iv. c. 2 . 2 6 .
Diog. L a e r t . vii. 122. 2 Mace. viii. 4.]
'AvapÉvw, from dva emphatic, and pévia
to remain, wait.—To watt for, await, ex-
pect. occ. 1 Thess. i. 10. [Job vii. 2. Isa.
lix. 11.]
'Avapipvrio-KTÚ, from dva again, and pip-
VI'ICTKIÚ to pul in mind.
I . Active, To put in mind again, to re-
mind. occ. i Cor. iv. 17. 2 T i m . i. 6. [ X e n .
M e m . iii. 5. 9.]
I I . Pass. To be put in mind again, to
recollect, remember. occ. M a r k xi. 2 1 . xiv.
72. 2 Cor. vii. 15. H e b . x. 3 2 . [ G e n . viii.
1.] In the L X X this verb answers to
the H e b . "153 to remember, and V23n io
remind.
'Avapvluo, from dva again, and obsoleto
pvdu) to remind, put in mind or remem-
brance. Comp. u n d e r Mváopai. To re-
mind. occ. 1 Cor. iv. 17.—'Avapvcwpai,
pass. or depon. To cali in mind again, io
remember. occ. M a r k xi. 2 1 . xiv. 72.
Comp. 'Avapipvijo-Kio.
'Avápvncrie, we, A t t . ÍLÚQ, y, from dvap-
vcuo,
I . A commemoration. occ. H e b . x. 3 .
I I . A memorial, occ. L u k e xxii. 19.
1 Cor. xi. 2 4 , 2 5 . I n all which passages
it is applied to t h e celebration of t h e Lord's
S u p p e r ; and Christ saith, Do this he ryv
epi/v dvápvno-ív for a memorial or remém-
brame of me. I n which expression he
seems to allude to the correspondent in-
stitution of t h e Passover. Comp. Exod.
xii. 14, 17, 2 5 — 2 7 . D e u t . xvi. i. 3 , and
see D r . Bell, on t h e L o r d ' s Supper, espe-
cially § vi, and A p p e n d i x , N o . I I . [Schl.
seems to i n t e r p r e t t h i s word always as
memorial. T h e word oceurs Lev. xxvii. 7.
N u m b . x. 10. W i s d . xvi. 6 . ]
'Avavtóopai, Spai, from dva again, and
VÍOQ neiv,—To be renemed, occ. E p h . iv.
 A N A 49 A N A

23. [ J o b xxxiii. 14. Ps. Ii. 12. E s t . iii. 13.] lily of mind, as in Ecclus. vi. 2 9 . See also
T h u s frequently used in the Apocrypha. li. 3 5 . In t h e sense of rest it oceurs, R e v .
Efgg 'Avavi'iéio,
11
from a r a again, and iv. 8. xiv. 11.]
rytpu to be sober.— To amaice out of a [ I I . A place ofrest, or habilation. M a t .
drunken sleep, and become sober. occ. x i i . 4 5 . L u k e xi. 24. So Gen. viii. 9. R u t h
2 T i m . ii. 26. " T h i s word," says Dod- iii. 1. J e r . xxxiv. 14. See also N u m b . x. 3 3 .
dridge, " refers to an artifice of fowlers, I n t h e L X X it is tranquillity, Isa. xxxii.
to scatter seeds imprcgnated with some 17. 1 Chron. xxii. 9. P s . cxxxi. 8.]
•drugs, intended to lay birds asleep, t h a t 'AvaTravw, from dva again, and -xahu to
they m i g h t draw the net over them with give rest.
t h e greater security." B u t the Doctor I. Togive rest again, to quiet, recréale,
does not cite any ancient w r i t e r w h o men- refresh. occ. M a t . xi. 2 8 . 1 Cor. xvi. 18.
tions this artifice, ñor do I know of any Philem. ver. 20. I n pass. To be refreshed.
such. D r . Shaw, however, Travels, page 2 Cor. vii. 13. Philem. ver. 7. [ P r o v . xxix.
2 3 6 , takes notice of a method practised by 7. Isa. xiv. 3.]
t h e modera eastern fowlers, of carrying I I . 'AvaTt-avopai, mid. To rest, rest
before them a piece of painted canvas of oneself to tafee one's rest. occ. M a t . xxvi.
the size of a door, by means of which they 45. M a r k vi. 3 1 . xiv. 4 1 . L u k e x ü . 19.
stupify or aslonish their game, and thus Rev. vi. 11. xiv. 13. 1 P e t . iv. 14. On this
easüy destroy them. This V. is applied last passage comp. Isa. xi. 2, in t h e L X X ,
by Cebes in bis Piclure (p. 18. edit. Simp- where dvarravopai is in like manner a p -
son) to one who amaices from the intoxi- plied to the H o l y Spirit's resting upon
caiions of intemperance, l u x u r y , avance, Christ. So i-xavarcavopai is used in t h e
or fiattery. For other instances of similar L X X of N u m . xi. 2 5 , 2 6 , for t h e Spirit's
applications, see E l s n e r and Wetstein. •resting upon t h e seventy e l d e r s ; and
[See Porphyr. de Abst. iv. 20- L u c í a n , 2 K i n g s ii. 16, for his resting on Elisha.
H e r m . 8 3 . D e Salt. 48. Joseph. A . I. vi. T h e correspondent H e b . word in all which
11. 10.] passages is n i or nil to rest, remain. [See
'Avavrlppnrog, o, ó, j), from a neg. D e u t . xxviii. 65. xxxiii. 20. Isa. xxxiv.
dvrl again st, and péui to speak.—Not to be 14.]
spolcen against or conlradictcd, indisput- 'AvaTrúQo), from dva bacfe again, and
able, occ. Acts xix. 36. [Sym. J o b xi. 2. TTÚBOI to persuade.—To dissuade from a
x x x i i i . 12.] former, or persuade lo a different, opinión,
"fgjl 'AvavTÍppriTiOQ,
0
Adv. from dvcw- " Primara persuasionem novis rationibus
ríppr¡Tog.— Without gainsaying, or dis- labefactatam evellere." W e t s t e i n . " P e r -
puling. occ. Acts x. 29. [ P o l y b . xxiii. S.] suadeo,—impello (in aliam opiniouem
'Avafroc, «, ó, {¡, from a neg. and afros nempe)." Scapula. occ. A c t s xviii. 13.—•
worthy.— Unworthy. occ. 1 Cor. vi. 2. [ T h i s word is generally (as in this place)
[ E c c l u s . xxv. i i . ] used in a bad sense. See J e r e m . xxix. 8.
'Avafyws, Adv. from dvcifog.—Unwor- 1 Mace. i. 12. X e n . M e m . iii. 11. 10.
thily, irreverently, in an unbecoming man- CEc. iii. 7- Polyb. xxix. 3 . 3 . Plat. Pha3d.
ner. 1 Cor. xi. 2 7 , 2 9 . c. 26. Abresch. A u c t a r . D i l . T h u c . page
'AvcÍTravcnc, tos, a t t . £</)£, r/, from dva- 258.]
iravio. Efglf' 'Avairépiru), from dVci again, back
I . Refreshment, rest. occ. M a t . xi. 2 9 . again, and Trípxui to send.
xü. 4 3 . & al. On M a t . xi. 29, we may re- I . To send again, or bacfe again. occ.
mark, t h a t though the expressions in the L u k e xxiii. I I . Philem. ver. 12.
latter p a r t of the verse are certainly agree- I I . To send, remit. occ. L u k e xxiii. 7,
able to the Hebraical and Hellenistical 15. [Pol. 1. 7. 12.]
style (see J e r . vi. 16. Psal.cxvi. 7. Ecclus. ¡tg¡|° 'Aváirripoc, a, ó, from dva emphat.
Ii. 2 6 , 27.) yet we meet with t h e like in and Trnpbg maimed.—Maimed, having fost
Xenophon, Cyropaed. lib. vii. (page 4 1 3 , a limb or some part of the body. occ. L u k e
edit. Hutchinson, 8vo.) where Cyrus says, xiv. 13. 2 1 . [ 2 Mace. viii. 2 4 . See
" Now since a most laborious war is a t an Fischer. on P l a t . Crit. c. 14, p . 2 0 8 . a n d
end, ¿ W poi Kal i, kpi) * r X H ' A N A IIA Y"- W e t s t . i. p . 754. Relaud. ad Joseph. A . J .
S E í i ' 2 nvog d'éiSv T Y r X A ' N E I N , my soul iii. 1 2 . 2 . ]
also seems to think t h a t she ought to obtain
'AvarrÍTíriü, from dva emphat. and TTÍTCTOS
some rest." [ T h e sense in this passage
tofall.
appears to be r a t h e r comfort and tranquil-
I. To fall doren. I n this sense i t is
E
 A N A
sometimes used in the profane writers, but
not in tlie N . T . [Susan. 3 7 . ]
I I . To lie down in order to eat, either
upon the ground, as M a t . xv. 3 5 . (where
see Wetstein.) M a r k vi. 4 0 . viii. 6 ; or on
beds, as L u k e xi. 3 7 . J o h n x x i . 20. & al.
Comp. 'ÁvctKsipai I I . [See Plin. ix. E p .
2 3 . A t h e n . i. p . 2 3 . Schwarz. in Comm.
L . Gr. p. 9 8 . Schleusner refers M a t , xv.
3 5 . M a r k vi. 4 0 . viii. 6. to t h e sense to lie
down.] T h e L X X have once used i t , G e n .
xlix. 9, for H e b . J?13 lo bend down, crouch.
'AvairXripóu), o>, from dva up, or em-
phatie, and irKypóco to jzll, which see.
I. To jill, as a seat or place, occ. 1 Cor.
xiv. 1 6 ; where see Elsner and Wolfius.
[ T h i s is a mere Hebraism. See H o t t i n g e r .
de usu Scriptor. Hebr. apud Rhenferd.
p . 399. Buxtorf. Lex. T a l m u d . & Rabb.
p . 2001.]
I I . To Jill up, complete, occ. 1 Thess..
ii. 16. [Gen. xv. 16.]
I I I . Tojill up, or supply, a deficieney.
occ. 1 Cor. xvi. 17. Phil. ii. 3 0 . O n which
t e x t s we may observe, t h a t Clement, in his
l s t Epistle to t h e Corinthians, § 3 8 , has
t h e like expression, " L e t t h e poor man
praise God, because he has given him one,
Si' S 'ANAlTAHPQ'eHí dvrS rb 'YSTE'PH-
MA, by whom his want may be supplied."
So Lucían, H a r m o n . tom. i. p. 6 4 3 , edit.
Bened. has ANAIIAHPCfY TO evoeov, sup-
ply what is wanting." [ S e e Zosim. i. c.
17. Polyb. vii. 7. 7. P l a t . Conviv. p . 3 2 1 .
and Schwarz. Comm. L i n g . G r . p . 9 8 . Br.
observes t h a t from this sense aróse sense I .
and I tliink this remark j u s t . ]
I V . Tofulfil a p r o p h e c y . occ. M a t . xiii.
14.
[V. Tofulfilox observe a law. Gal.vi. 2.
So t h e simple verb TrXnpSv, which see.]
¡¡¡Up 'AvanoXóyrjTOQ, a, b, h, from a n e g .
a n d DIRÓ\OYEO/J,AL to apologize, excuse.—
Without apology, or excuse, inexcusable.
occ. Rom. i. 2 0 . ii. 1. Wolfius observes,
t h a t this uncommon word is used by Poly-
bius, and Cicero ad Attic. x v i . 7. [ I n
Polyb. xii. 12. E x c . Legat. 8 6 . Diop. H a k
vii. 4 6 . P l u t . B r u t . c. 4 6 . ]
'Ava-KTvaaio, from DVA back again, a n d
rrTvrraiii to roll up.— To roll back, unrol,
as a volume or roll of a book. T h e word
refers to the form of t h e books then used
among t h e J e w s , which did n o t , as among
us, consist of distinct leaves bound u p t o -
gether, b u t " were, as * t h e copies of t h e
* Several o f these are to b e seen i n the British
jlluseum.
¡O A N A
Oíd Testament used in tlie Jewish Syna-
gogues now are, long scrolls of parchment,
t h a t were rolled upon [one or] two sticks,"
and distinguished into columns. occ. L u k e
iv. 17. See W h i t b y and Doddridge on t h e
place, and L e i g h ' s Crit. Sacr. Raphelius
on t h e above texts cites from H e r o d o t u s ,
lib. i. cap. 125, t h e very same phrase ' A N A ' -
n T Y S A S TO* B I B A I ' O N unrolling the
book." Comp. Elsner. [Wagenseil. ad
Sota, p . 677.] I n t h e L X X this word is
several times used for t h e H e b . tifia to
spread out, and applied, 2 K. x i x . 14, t o
Hezekiah's spreading out Rabshakeh's
letter before t h e Lord. Comp. 1 Mace. iii.
48. [Herod. i. 125.]
'Avá-KTÜ), from áva intens. and arrrb) to
kindle. To kindle, light, set on Jire. occ.
L u k e xii. 4 9 . Acts xxviü. 2. J a m e s iii. 5 .
O n which last t e x t Wetstein cites from
P l u t a r c h , Sympos. viii. page 7 3 0 , E . Tó
Í T Y - P TI)V ' Y A I I N il ije ' A N H í - G H , pnrépa
Kal ¿rarépa éaav yadie, T h e Jire eats u p t h e
wood from which it was kindled, and which
is both its father a n d mother." [ O n L u k e
xii. 4 9 , Schleusner says, " B u t w h a t do I
say, when it is already kindled,'' or " lo !
it is already kindled," for t h e word h in
t h e L X X (Gen. iv. 14, a n d Ezek. iv. 14.)
answers often to íiüt!, as Krebsius remarks
here. Of course t h e phrase means to
cause or spread quarrels. See J e r e m . ix.
12. 2 Chron. xiii. 11.]
'AvapíQpr¡roQ, a, ó, ?;, from a n e g . a n d
apiOpÉiú to number.—Not to be numbered,
innumerable, occ. H e b . xi. 12. [ J o b x x i .
3 3 . P r o v . vii. 2 6 . Wisd. vii. 1 1 . ]
'A.VATT£Íca, from áva emphatie, a n d CE'OO
to move.— To move or stir up. I n t h e N .
T . i t is used only for stirring up t h e m u l -
t i t u d e or people; and Elsner on L u k e
xxiii. 5 , shows t h a t Dionysius H a l i c a r n .
[viii. 3 1 . ] and Diodorus Siculus [Eclog.
i. 5. 32.] apply i t in t h e same manner. occ,
M a r k xv. 11. L u k e xxiii. 5.]
É y p " ' A m o - K £ v á £ w , (from ává back, and
<7Kavá£to. to prepare, which from <TKEVOC a
vessel,furniture. [To movefurniture, togo
away or leavei]—To subvert, destroy. occ.
Acts xv. 24, where K y p k e cites P l u t a r c h
and Thucydides [iv. 116.] u s i n g i t for the
demolishing of buildings, a n d Polybius,
Demosthenes, a n d Eurípides applying it
to oaths, covenants, common report and
men. I t seems very nearly t o agree in
sense with á r a < r a r a V r e e , which is spoken
of t h e same sort of false teachers. Gal. v.
12. See 'Avararóio.
'Avamráu), 10, from ara up or back again,
 A N A 51 A N A

a n d (TTráíü to draw.—To draw up or back see Wetstein and Wolfiús. B u t comp.

•again. occ. L u k e xiv. 5. Acts xi. 10. Macknight. [ S c h l . says simply to crucify,
[Joseph. A. J . I I . 1 1 . 2.] In t h e L X X of and observes from Fischer (de Vit. L e x .
H a b . i. 15, i t answers to t h e H e b . ribün to N . T . Prol. i . p . 20,) t h a t ava in G r e e k
canse to ascend, bring up. and re in L a t i n are very often idle. O n
' A c á T c t f f i c , toe, a t t . £o>e, y, from ávfenpi t h e use of t h e word in t h e simple sense by
to rise. t h e Greeks see Schwarz. Comm. p . 101.
I. A standing on the feet ¡again, or Br. gives P a r k h u r s t ' s explanation.]
rising, as opposed to faliing. I t occurs, 'Ava<zevá£b>, from ava emphatic, and
t h o u g h figuratively, in t h i s view, L u k e T£vá£w to groan, which see.—To groan
ii. 3 4 . comp. Isa. viii. 14, 15. deeply. occ. M a r k viii. 12¡ [ S c h l . says, To
I I . A rising or restirrection of a dead be angry. T h e word occurs Ecclus. xxv.
•body .to life. H e b . xi. 3 5 . Comp. 1 K. xvii. 18. Susann. 2 2 . 2 Mace. vi. 3 0 . ] — T h e
2 1 , 2 K. iv. 3 4 . L X X use it, L a m . i. 4, for t h e H e b . TOS
I I I . A rising ov resurrection of the body to sigh, groan.
from t h e grave. Applied both to Christ, 'Ava^pétjM, from ara again, and Tpíajta
a n d to men in general, whether good or bad. to turn.
A c t s i. 2 2 . ii. 3 1 . J o h n v. 2 9 . (comp. ver. I . To overturn. occ. J o h n . ii. 15. [Polyb.
2 8 , ) A c t s x x i v . 15. & al. freq. [ I n J o h n v. 9. Isoc. Philip. 2. 13.]
x i . 25, by a cominon metonymy, C h r i s t is I I . To turn back, return; in which
called The resurrection, as the a u t h o r of sense it is used both by Polybius, [ I V . ii.
o u r resurrection. See D e u t . xxx. 20. He 2 . ] and Xenophon, as may be seen in
.is thy Ufe. W e t s t e i n . occ. A c t s v. 2 2 . xv. 16. [ G e n .
I V . The state consequent on the resur- viii. 7, 9. 1 Sam. iii. 5.]
•rection, the future life. M a t . xxii. 2 8 , 3 0 . I I I . 'Avarpéfopat, To be conversant,
M a r k xii. 2 3 . ] — I n t h e L X X it is twice have one's conversation, in t h i s sense to
used, L a m . iii. 62. Zeph. iii. 8 ; in both Uve. Mat. xvii. 2 2 . 2 Cor. i. 12. E p h . ii.
which texts it answers to t h e H e b . D l p 3. H e b . xiii. 18. x. 3 3 , Tüv Srwe ava^pz-
to stand up, rise, and in t h e former is <popév(i>v, Of those mho were thus con-
opposed to at»> sitting. I t also occurs 2 versant, i. e. in reproaches and aftlic-
M a c . vii. 14. xii. 4 3 . and in both these tions *. On M a t . xvii. 2 2 , W e t s t e i n shows
places denotes t h e resurrection of the body t h a t this V. is joined with a N . of place,
from the dead. | in t h e sense of being, or abiding, by Poly-
'Ava^aróú), ü, from ETVCWAROS disturbed, bius, [iii. 33.] Xenophon, Plutarch, a n d
overthrown, which is from aví^niii in t h e , J o s e p h u s ; and on H e b . xiii. 18, h e cites
sense of disturbing, overthrowing. I from A r r i a n , Epietet. lib. iv. cap. 4. ' O n
I. To overthrow, subvert, destroy. So K A A í T S ' A N E 2 T P A ' $ H 2 'EN RWCV T í T i
Hesychius explains ava^arSvree by ava- "EPPÍlt, Because you have behaved well in
rpéirorree, and avátarbe by Karc;papjiívHe- this affair. [Josh. v. 5. Ezek. xix. 6.]
occ. A c t s xvii. 6. (where see W e t s t e i n ) , Efgp 'Ava^pofr),
13
rje, t), from ávé-zpotpa,
Gal. v. 12, where see K y p k e , and comp. perf. mid. of avaspífw.—Behaviour, man-
'Avacncevá^w. [ ' A r á T t t r o c is used in Greek ner oflife. Gal. i. 13. E p h . iv. 2 2 , & al.
of any one who is driven from his own freq. Polyb. [iv. 22.] and A r r i a n , [Epict.
place and wanders. See Isocr. Paneg. c. 1. 9. iv. 1.] cited by Wetstein, use t h e N .
3 1 . MI V. H . iii. 4 3 . T h e n in the same sense. [In H e b . xiii. 7, Schl,
means to drivc any one from his place, and says t h a t from t h a t passage it appears t h a t
then to subvert or destroy. I t occurs in this word has t h e sense of calamities en-,
Symmachus Isa. xxii. 3. 2 Kings xviii. 34.] dured, evil destiny. T h e word occurs in
I I . To excite, stir up, to sedition. occ. Tob. iv. 19. 2 M a c . v. 8.]
Acts xxi. 3 8 . 'Avarácrcrü), from cera e m p h a t . and rlicrcri»
fUp 0
'Ava^avpóu), ¿j, from ava again, or to put in order.—'Avaráo-cropai, mid. To
up, and <zavpótú to crucify, which see.— compose. occ. L u k e i. 1.
To crucify again or afresh, or r a t h e r , 'AvaréWa, from ara up, and RFXXW, ob«
according to L a m b e r t Bos, A l b e r t i , and solete, to arise.
Raphelius, simply to crucify, hang up
on a cross; for these learned Critics ob-
serve t h a t the V. is never used by the * [ I n Greek authors it signifies even lo practisc a
Greek writers in the former sense, b u t al- trade. S e e P o l y b . i. 1 4 . A r r i a n . E p i s t . i v . 4 . I t
occurs as i n the N . T . P r o v . x x . 8. E c c l u s . x x x v i n .
ways in the latter, occ, H e b , vi. 6 ; where 2 8 . ]
E 2
 A N A
I. Intransitively, To rise, spring, spring
up, as the sun or solar light. Mat. iv. 16.
xiii. 6. & al. Comp. 2 P e t . i. 19. [ N u m b .
xxiv. 17- Polyb. ix. 15.]
II. Transitively, To cause lo rise. occ.
M a t . v. 45. D r . H a m m o n d on M a r k xiv.
54, Leigh in t h e preface to his Supplement,
page 2, and Masclef in his H e b . G r a m m a r ,
page 107, give this as an instance of a
G r e e k verb being applied in a transitive
sense, in imitation of t h e Hebrew Conju-
gation H i p h i l ; yet H o m e r uses t h e l s t
aor. transitively, II. v. line 777, where,
spcaking of Juno's horses, he says,
TGÍVÍV V c.{j£pGÍn1 Sífxorlf 'ANE'TElAE vlf-uo-Stól.
Simois causcd to sp?-hig
A m b r o s i a from h i s bauk, whereon they browsed.
COWPEE.
So Anacreon, Ocle liii. line 40, where h e
says t h e assembly of t h e gods caused t h e
rose to spring ('ÁNE'TEIAEN) from t h e
thorn-bush t h a t bears it. Pindar also and
Philo, quoted by Kypke, use t h e V. in t h e
like transitive sense. Comp. 'Hl;avaréW<o.
[ G e n . iii. ] 8 . Isa.lxi. 1 1 . 1 Sam. viii. 22.
& al. See Pricasus on M a t . v. 4 5 . ]
I I I . To rise, spring, as our Blessed L o r d
did, like a skoot, {rom the tribe of J u d a h .
occ. H e b . vii. 14. Comp. Isa. xi. 1.
IV. To rise, as a cloud. occ. L u k e xii.
54'. T h i s verb is very frequently used in
t h e L X X versión, where it most commonly
answers to the K e b . m í lo spring forth,
or spread upon, as the light ,• n í a to bud,
germinale ; or to r\tíí io sprout up. [See
Lev. xiv. 43. 2 Sam. x. 5. J u d g . xiv. 18.
& al. P a r k h u r s t ' s divisions 1, 3, and 4,
m i g h t be well reduced to one.]
'ÁvaríOrjpi, from dva emphatic, and rídrjpi
to propose.—'Avarídepai, mid. To relate,
comraunicale, declare, occ. Gal. ii. 2. A c t s
x x v . J4, where see Kypke. [ S e e 2 Mac.
iii. 9. Hcliodor. ii. 21. I t oceurs in t h e
L X X in the active, to suspend as a gift in
a temple, or consécrale. 1 Sam. x x x i . 10.
Lev. xxvii. 2 8 . ]
'Ava-oXi), ?7c, r), {rom dvaréroXa, perf.
mid. of t h e V. dvaréXXw.
I . The day-spring, or dawn. I t is used
only in a spiritual sense, b u t applied with
t h e most striking propriety to t h e dawning
of the gospel-day from on high, i. e. from
heaven, by t h e b i r t h of J o h n t h e Baptist,
previous to t h e rising of the S U N O F carry, bring, bear.
P J G H T E O U S N E S S . occ. L u k e i. 78.
[ I t may be doubted whether ávaroXi) is
* [ S o L u c . V e r . H i s t . ii. ¡Víi í ¡ airsxoi!J.afji¡v
not here that which springs, a race, orojf-
2 A N A
spring. For t h e Ilebrews compare their
children with plants, Isa. Ix. 2 1 . J e r .
xxiii. 5. See Plat. Symp. p . 1197. O vid,
M e t . ix. 280. AndaVaroX?) signifies a shoot
in Zach. vi. 12. T h e Hebrew word in
this place and in J e r . xxiii. 5, & al. is T\fíi,
which is certainly used in the O. T . of
Christ, Isa. iv. 2. Zach. iii. 8, antl in this
place of Zachariah. So Schleusner, who
does not give any positive opinión.]
I I . 'AvaroXri, and plur. 'AvaroXai, cu,
T h a t región, or those parts of the heaven
or earth, where t h e solar l i g h t first springs
up, and appears, the east. M a t . ii. 1, 2.
(where see Campbell.') ii. 9. viii. 11. & al.
Comp. liev. vii. 2 . — T h i s word in t h e
L X X very frequently answers to t h e H e b .
(Tifo the rising of t h e sun, and thence the
east.
'Avarpé-irio, from dva emphatic, or again,
and roeVw io iurn.—To subvert, overturn.
occ. 2 T i m . ii. 18. T i t . i. 11. [ D i o d . Sic.
1. 7 7 . See Wetstein, ii. p . 3 5 9 . ]
'Avarpécpío, from dva emphat. and rpécpio
to nourish, nurse.— To nurse, bring up,
edúcate, occ. A c t s vii. 20, 2 1 . xxii. 3.
[ W i s d . vii. 14. Herodian. 1. 2 . ]
'Avaéaívio, from dva emphatic, a n d
(palvio to show.
I. To show openly ; b u t it oceurs not in
t h e active voice in t h e N . T . [ P o l . v. 2 2 .
10.]
I I . 'Avafalvopai, pass. To be shown, or
appear, openly. occ. L u k e x i x . 11. A c t s
xxi. 3 , 'Ava(f>avévr££ Sé rr¡v Tívirpov we ap-
pearing as to Cyprus, for avaipaveíane
i'iplv ri]c Kínrpov Cyprus appearing to us.
A n accusative case is often t h u s joined with
a verb or participle pass. both in t h e p r o -
fane and sacred writers. See Rom. iii. 2.
1 Cor. ix. 17. Gal. ii. 7, and G r a m m a r , §
xxi. 44. iv. 2. A n d as to A c t s xxi. 3 ,
Wetstein cites from Theophanes (a Chris-
tian writer, however, of a late age) the
similar expression, 'ANA*ANE'NTÍ2N a V
rCov T1TN T H ' N ; and from Virgil, i E n . iii.
line 2 9 1 , Aérias Phaaacum abscondimus
arces, literally, We hide the lofty towers
of t h e Phasacians, i. e. They are hidden
from its, or get out of our sight*, as we
sail past them. So t h e English seaman
says, We opened such a bay, meaning, It
appeared to open to us. See K y p k e , and
comp. Upocráyüj I I .
'Avaéépio, from ava. up, and (¡>épio to
 ANA 53 A N A

I. Tó carry, qr bring up. occ. Mat. xvii. comforts of his kingdom of grace (comp.
] . Mark ix. 2. L u k e xxiv. 5 1 . [Polyb. M a t . xi. 29.) ; and t h e latter to his second
viii. 3 1 . 1.] and last coming, and t h e commencement
I I . To offer sacrifices, i. e. to bring them of his kingdom oí glory. occ. Acts iii. 19.
up * on t h e altar, occ. H e b . vii. 2 7 . comp. T h e L X X use t h e word for a brealhing
J a m e s ii. 2 1 , where see Macknight. H e n e e or brealhing time, a respite, Exod. viii. 15,
applied to Christ's offering himself as a where i t answers t o t h e H e b . tiHil of t h e
propitiatory sacrifice. occ. H e b . vii. 2 7 ; same import.
and to t h e spirilual sacrifices which Chris- 'Ávaipvx<¿, from ává again, and ipíxoe
tians are to offer in and t h r o u g h him. occ. cold.
Heb. xiii. 15. I. To cool again, refrigérate, refresh
III. To bear sins by imputation really, with cool air, as t h e body when over-heated.
as t h e ancient sacrifices did typically. occ. ( C o m p . Kara-d/vx^.) I t occurs not iu t h e
Heb. ix. 28. 1 Pet.'ii. 24. Comp. Lev. xvi. N . T . in this s e n s e ; b u t
2 1 , 2 2 . Exod. xxix. 10. Lev. i. 4. Isa. liii. I I . Figuratively, To refresh, relieve,
6. I n t h e L X X , when used in t h e first when under distress, occ. 2 T i m . i. 1 6 . —
sense, i t commonly answers to t h e H e b . In the L X X it is used only in t h e i n t r a n -
K'3n to cause to come; in t h e 2d, to nbyn sitive sense of taking breath, being re-
to cause to ascend, i. e. in llame and smoke freshed, and answers (inter al.) to t h e H e b .
as a burnt-offering ; and in t h e last sense, ti>EU lo take breath, and to m i refreshment.
to Hlitl to bear, and ÍJID to bear as a bur- [ E x . xxiii. 12. 2 Sam. xvi. 1 4 . ]
den, bajulare, as in Isa. liii. I I , 12, which EjgÜjf* ''Avlparcoci^ye, S, ó, from ávcpa-
see. •wooíCo) to reduce lo slavery, carry away
'Avaciwvéto, LO, from ává emphatie, and for a slave, which from ávSpíirodov * a
<¡>wvéio to cry out.—To cry out aloud. occ.captive taken in mar and enslaved, and
L u k e i. 42. [ 1 Chron. xv. 2 8 . 2 Chron. this from ávr¡p Gen. ávSpóe a man's, and
v. 13.] irSg, Gen. TTÓOOC, afoot, because he follows
[§§5° 'Aváyyaig, iog, a t t . e<o£, j), from or watts al his mastcr's foot.—A man-
tivaxyio to pour forth, áva emphatie, and slealer, a kidnapper, one whosteals men to
Xyu> to pour out. make them slaves, or sell them into slavery.
I. A profusión, or pool of water, col- T h e Scholiast on Aristophanes, P l u t . liu.
luvies, palus. T h u s Elsner shows it is 521, says, " A n ávopcnrooL^e is n o t only
applied by Strabo [iii. p . 206.] and Philo. he who by deceit reduces free men to
Comp. Wetstein and Kypke. Henee slavery, but also he who seduces slaves
I I . In a figurative sense, A sinJe or gulf from their masters, in order to convey t h e m
of vice or debauchery. occ. 1 P e t . iv. 4, elsewhere, and sell them. So likewise
where see Macknight. Pollux, and t h e Etymologist in W e t s t e i n .
'Ara^wpEW, w, from ává back again, or N o doubt both these enormities are p r o -
emphatie, and x P w
to go, depart.
£ W hibited to Christians. occ. 1 T i m . i. 10.
I. To go, or return back again. M a t . ii. [See E x . xxi. 1 6. D e u t . xxiv. 7 . ]
12, 13. 'Avopi(o¡iai, from ávfjp, Gen. ávSpós, a
I I . To depart. M a t . ix. 2 4 . xxvii. 5. man. To behave or acquit oneself with
Comp. M a t . xv. 2 1 . [ P o l y b . i. 1 1 , 15.] t h e wisdom and courage of a man, perhaps
I I I . To wilhdraw, retire. M a t . ii. 14, as opposed t o a babe or child in Christ.
22. J o h n vi. 15. Acts xxiii. t 19. [ E x o d ! occ. 1 Cor. xvi. 13. So Josephus D e Bel.
ii. 15. H o s . xii. 12. Herodian. i. 3 . 1 3 . ] lib. v. cap. 7. § 3 . rises ¿ívopí^aOcu for be-
'Avccdivfyc, ios, a t t . eiog, ?;, from áva\j/vxw having courageously, and H o m e r , ávtpsc
lo refresh.—A refrigeration, refreshing, ! ? E be men, t h a t is, courageous, II. v. line
or r a t h e r a being refreshed; for I appre- 529, & al. Comp. W e t s t e i n . — T h i s word
h e n d with Wolfius t h a t t h e times árauOú- is often used by t h e L X X , and most g e -
ijewe. qf refreshing, and t h e times qf the nerally answers to t h e H e b . pin to be
restitution qf all things, are to be distin- strong, or to fDK to be robust, valiant.
guished from each o t h e r ; t h a t t h e fbrmer [ D e u t , xxxi. 6. J o s . x. 2 5 . ]
relate t o Christ's first coming, and t h e 'Avúpo(j>óvo£, «, ó, from ávr)p, Gen.
¿ivSpóg a man, and iréejova, perf. mid. of
* [ S o the J e w s called the victim nbijí (from rh))
cpévto lo slay, which see under 4>oVoc.—A
to ascend,) í'iafapá i n P s . 1. 2 0 . ]
•\ [ S c h l . s a y s t h a t here i t i s to lead away, a s man-slayer, a murderer. occ. 1 T i m . i. 9.
íivax.wpíí'uj in X e n . Cyrop. vii. 1. 2 0 . A n a b . v. 2 . 9 . [ 2 Mace. ix. 2 8 . ]
bnt i$r. is o f a different opinión.] * [ T i i i s word occurs 3 M a c e . vii. 5 . ]
 A N E 54 AN E

tÜ^" 'AvéyKknTog, a, ó, f¡, from a neg. eastern edges of t h e earth in s u p p o r t i n g

and ¿yicaXéii) to acense, blame, which see. its diurnal motion, aud from t h e northern
—Not to be blamed, blameless, irreproach- and southern pole in regulating its de-
able. occ. 1 Cor. i. 8. Col. i. 2 2 . 1 T i m . iii. clination. [ J o s e p h . B . J . vii. 13. 1 2 . ] — I n
10. T i t . i. 6, 7. [ 3 Mace. v. 3 1 . Xen. t h e L X X , this word, except in two p a s -
H e l l . vi. 1. 4 . ] sages, always answers to t h e H e b . ni").
Efgp 0
'AvtKciiriywToc, a, ó, i¡, from a neg. "•fgg" 'AJ'ÉVOEICTO)', a, re, neut. from ct
and ÍKOir¡yéopai, to relate particularly.— neg. and ¿viSéyercu it- is possible, which see
Not to be fully or adequately expressed or u n d e r '~E v(S¿x°r '-—Impossíble.
¡
la
occ. L u k e
uttered, inexpressible, unutterable, ineffa- xvii. 1. Comp. M a t . xviii. 7, and ¿K évBé-
ble. occ. 2 Cor. ix. 15. So Arrian, see X rai, L u k e xiii. 3 3 .
£

Wetstein. 'AveO,ep£vvr]TO£, a, ó, r¡, nal rb—ov, frota

{"jgsp 'Av£K\ci\nroQ, a, ó, 7'/, from a neg.
0
a neg. and éi^epevvák) to search out, whielí
and tKXaXéb) to utter.— Unutterable, inex- see, and comp. L X X in 1 Chron. xix. 3 .
pressible. occ. 1 P e t . i. 8. Amos. ix. 3 . Obad. ver. 6. Joel i. 9.—Not
•"§§1° 'AvÍKktntToc, H, o, i], from a neg. to be searched out, inscrutable. occ. R o m .
and ¿CXEÍVÍIÍ to fail, which see *.— Which xi. 3 3 .
fáileth not, never failing, unfailing. occ. IlgÜ 'Avei,ÍKaKOQ, a, ó, ?;, from avéxopai
0

L u k e x ü . 3 3 . [Diod. Sic. iv. 84. M u n t h . to bear, and KÁKOS evil.—Enduring evil,

O b s . e . Diod. Sic. p . 1 6 2 . ] either men or things, patient,forbearing.
WS* 'AviKTÓTtpoc, a, ov, comparat. of occ. 2 T i m . ii. 2 4 . [ T h e substantive &ve-
avtKTóg tolerable, which from áv¿xo> to bear, ¡¡iKaría oceurs Wisd. ii. 19. and t h e verb
which see.—More tolerable, more easy to áj/££(KAIC£(ü often in eCcl. writers. See
be borne. M a t . x. 15. & al. Suicer, i. p . 3 3 6 , and Poli. Onom. v. 138,
'AvsXeñpwv, ovos, ó, i¡, from a neg. a n d t h e interpreters on Hesychius voce dveh-
íXíi'ipidv merciful, compassionate, which Karía, and D ' O r v i l l . ad Charit. viii. 4 . p .
s?e.—Unmerciful, incompassionate. occ. 616.]
R o m . i. 3 1 . [Prov. v. 9. xi. 7-] 'Avefrx ^ ^°S^
V A
5 ó, i¡, Kal rb—ov, from a
A

li^p" 'Av£jií£opai, from avepo£ the wind. neg. and ilxyj/^ ^ 1

to trace out, which from
—To be impelled or driven by the wind. Éi; out, and "ix voc
thcfootstep, which from
occ. James i. 6. [See Heisen. Nov. H y p . ÍKIO to come, and t h i s from t h e Chald.
ad E p . J a c . p . 4 3 8 . ] to come or go.—Not lo be Iraced out, un-
"Avspoe, a, ó, from anpi to blow, or ra- traceable. occ. Rom. xi. 3 3 . E p h . iii. 8.
ther from avüpai perf. pass. of ávínpi to [ J o b v. 9. ix. 1 0 . ] — T h e L X X several
loóse, set loóse, which see. times use t h e V. i\x Ci>> for t h e H e b .
via

I. Wind. M a t . vii. 2 5 . xi. 7. J o h n vi. 18.
A c t s xxvii. 14, 15. &al. freo,. Comp. E p h .
iv. 14. [Schleusner says t h a t TV)'! is t a k e n
in t h e same way for any thing light or in-
Ipn to search out minutely, and t h e N .
dve&xvía^oe for "ipil J'M there is no search-
ing out.
J l g p 'Av£7rdicrxvvro£, «, o, i], from oi
0

constant in J o b vi. 26. xv. 2. See Glass.
P h i l . S. p . 1066. in D a t h e ' s e d . a n d Ecclus.
v. 11.]
II. The four winds are used for t h e four
cardinal points, or t h e east, west, north,
and soutk. M a t . x x i v . 3 1 . M a r k xüi. 27.
Comp. Isa. xliii. 5, 6. D a n . vii. 2. Rev.
vii. 1. ED>nU>rt n i m i D5T)N the four winds
or spirits of the heavens, is a H e b . phrase,
used Dan. viii. 8. xi. 4. Zech. ii. 6, or 10.
& al. and denotes the four cardinal points,
because the forcé or action of t h e spirit or
gross air is in strict philosophical t r u t h
principally exerted a t t h e t western and
* [ T h e word ivi-Ami; i n the s a m e sense oceurs the body, and could not be caught
W i s d . vii. 1 4 . viii. 1 8 . ]
t See Catcott's V e t e r i s " & Vera; Phñosophiee i
P r i n c i p i a , p a g e C — 1 0 ; aud Catcott, the S o n ' s , Obss. Flav. p . 3 5 1 .
Manarla on Crcalion, p a g e 5 5 — 5 7 .
neg. and iivaiaxvvopai tobe ashamed.—Not
ashamed, i. e. of plainly preaching t h e
gospel of Christ. Comp. 2 T i m . i. 8. Rom.
i. 16. O r , Not to be ashamed, that need-
eth not to be ashamed. Comp. T i t . ii. 8.
T h e l a t t e r i n t e r p r e t a t i o n seemsmost agree-
able to t h e form of t h e Greek word. occ. 2
T i m . ii. 15, where see K y p k e . [ S c h l e u s .
concurs in t h e second explanation. The
adverb dveiratcrxvvr(i>£ oceurs commonly.
See W e t s t e i n . ]
í§g§f" 'AvETrí\r¡wro£, a, ó, i], from A neg. a n d
eTrtXnrrroe blameable, which from trriXap-
t>dvo¡j.ai to be catight. [ T h i s word is taken
from t h e ancient wrestling, and was used
of a man who was defended in all p a r t s of
any
where by his antagonist. See K r e b s .
H e n e e it. signified,
\ one in whom there was no place for blame.'J
 A NE A N II

i — IJnblameable, blameless, irreprehensi- found i t , why do we n o t use i t without

ble, occ. 1 T i m . iii. 2. v. 7- vi. 14. deviation ?" [This observation is also made
'A>/¿px r" > fr°
o u m a
' P> ^ *PX?f"" by Wolf. i. p . 1316. b u t Schl. doubts if i t
v a U a n c

¿o go, come.—To g o up. [ J o h n vi. 3 . is ever t r u e , and denies entirely ¡ts general
comp. J u d g . xxi. 8. 1 Kings xiii. 12. F a b . t r u t h . T h e passage of A r r i a n , he t h i n k s
Cod. Pseud. i. p . 5 4 6 . Like ávafiaívio it inapplicable, and Xen. Mem. ii. 9 , 3 . proves
is used of persons going to Jerusalem. In the contrary. dva has no forcé in this verb.
Gal. i. 1 7 . " Ñ o r did I return." Hesych. Suidas has a gloss on L u k e i i . 16. which
dvtpxoptvti); vivoQpéipovri.'] has escaped E r n e s t i ; he says /; aVa irpóQz-
"Aveaig, we, a t t . ews, i], from dvír¡pi to crie %dpiv KÓo-pu K¿írai7\
loóse, relax. 'Avé-xppai, M i d . from dva up, and é'^w
I . Liberty, some degree of relaxation lo hold, bear.—To bear, bear with, suffer.
from bonds or confinement. occ. Acts xxiv. I t is used either without a N . following,
23. [ H e n e e St. Paul is called by Euse- as 1 Cor. iv. 12. 2 Cor. x i . 4 , 2 0 ; or mueh.
bius ( H . E. ii. 22.) avEKrog. See 2 Chron. more frequently with a N . following i n
xxiii. 1 5 . Plat. Rep. i. Polyb. i. 6 6 , 3 . ] t h e Genitive, as M a t . xvii. 17. A c t s xviii.
I I . Remission or relaxation from un- 14. O n 2 Cor. xi. 1. see Wolfius C u r .
easiness, expense or trouble, ease, rest. Philol. and W e t s t e i n . [ I t has even a
occ. 2 Cor. ii. 12. vii. 5 . viii. 1 3 . 2 Thess. Dative in 2 Thess. i. 4 . W i t h Acts xviii.
i. 7. 14. (to bear patiently) compare S y m m .
'Avtrá'Ca, from dvaemphatic, and iranio
J o b x x i , 3 . Polyb. ix. 3 0 . Herodian. i. 17,
to examine, which t h e Etymologist de- 10. I t often signifies lo contain one's sélf.
duces from '¿rcov, rb, the truth, reality, as H e r o d . viii. 2 6 . G e n . xiv. 1. Isa. xiii.
if i t were ireát^oi to search out the truth; 14. I t has an accus. as well as a genitive
b u t ircoe, a, ov, is from zu> or íipl to be.— in Greek writers. Herod. i. 196. See
To examine strictly. occ. Acts xxii. 2 4 , 2 9 . Schweigh. L e x . Polyb. p . 4 7 - ]
[Schl. says t h a t t h e verb, like t h e simple 'Aveiiiibe, 5, b, probably from dvr)ajQai 10
one írá'Cia (Wisd. ii. 10.) has often t h e be conncctcd, perf. pass. infin. of dvá-^rio
same forcé as ¡3acraví£w to examine by tor- to connect, which from aVa emphatic, a n d
ture. iractp.be is used of t o r m e n t s : 2 Mace, airrio lo lie, which see under "Airropai.—
vii. 3 7 . See Susan. 14. J u d g . vi. 2 9 . A cousin-german, or nephem. occ. Col. iv.
W h e r e it means t o inquire or examine 10. [ A t first, any rclalion, a brolher.
into.'] See Gen. xiv. 15. see. Oxon. See for t h e
"ANEY, an A d v . governing a Genitive. word Tobit. vii. 2 . ]
— Without, not wiih. occ. M a t . x. 2 9 . {¡¡^"Avridov, H, rb.—Dill, a species of
1 P e t . iii. 1. iv. 9. Wetstein on M a t . herb, so called perhaps from dva up, and Sreív
shows t h a t ANEY 6ECTY is an expression to run, for * its stalk runs up t o t h e height
used b y Homer [Od. ii. 372.] and Lucían. of a cubil and half. If i t should not r a -
— I n t h e L X X i t twice answers t o t h e ther be derived from t h e H e b . toan to em-
H e b . p K . [ E x . x x i . 1 1 . Amos iii. 5. See balm, on account of its fragrant smel!, of
Job xxxi. 3 9 . Isa. Iv. 1.] which Virgil, Eclog. ii. line 4 8 , h a s taken
liggl 'Avevderoe, a, b, r¡, from a neg. and
0
particular notice,
kvdtroefit. TJnfii, inconvenient, not com-
modious. occ. A c t s xxvii. 1 2 . [ H e s y c h . • ~ctfloran jungit bene oleníis anctlii.
dvtvBtTH. a^pj'/cB.] A n d adds the flowcr o f Ocie fragrant dill.
'Avevpíoicui, from dva emphatic, and
evpícrk'ü) tofind.—To find, jind out by di- occ. M a t . xxiii. 2 3 . [ I t is here used for
ligent seeking. occ. L u k e ii. 16. Acts x x i . any eommon food. O n its use in t h a t way
4. Raphelius, in his Annotation on L u k e see Spañhcm. ad Aristoph. N u b . 978. I t
ii. 16, remarks, t h a t dvzvpío-ituv in t h e was used for pickling. See Coluín. xii. 8.]
present tense is lo seek diligently, dvcvpeiv Comp. "Avdoe-
in t h e 2 aor. to find out by diligent seek- 'Avr¡icw, from aVu up, and íjeo» lo come.
ing. This he confirms by a passage from I. To come up, come to.
A r r i a n , Epietet. lib. ii. cap. 11, Kai I I . To appertain, belong lo. [ 1 Mace,
a hirSfitv dvrbv, m i 'ANEYPI'SKOMEN, x. 4 0 . xi. 3 5 . ] H e n e e
« t i 'ANEYPO'NTES Xdnrbv dwapa^drtoe I I I . 'Avi'iicst, Impers. it appertainclh,
Xpápeda ? Wherefore t h e n do we n o t in- it becomelh, it isfit. occ. Col. iii. 18. P a r -
quire and diligently seek after this ( r u l e ) ;
and when by diligent inquiry we have * See B r o o k c f c V N a t : H i s ! . vol. vi. p. 1 0 0 .
 A N II 56 ANA

ticip. neut. 'AVÍJKOV, ovrog, rb, What is Jit, markable t h a t t h e ancient Greek poets,
becoming. occ. E p h . v. 4 . Philem. ver. 8 . particularly H o m e r , frequently use * (püg,
In E p h . v. 4, t h e expression, T a «k aríj- whose p r i m a r y sense is light (from ipáio to
Kovra, Which are not conveniente is a l i - shiné), for a man. [ I need hardíy ob-
totes, for, Which are highly inconvenient serve t h a t t h i s is entirely visionary, n o t
and improper. So r a pr¡ KadijKovra, Rom. to say a b s u r d . ]
i. 2 8 . O n which last eited t e x t , D o d d - I. Man, a ñame of t h e species. L u k e
ridge remarks t h a t H o m e r , in like manner, xi. 3 1 , 3 2 . & al. [ I n m a n y places where
uses díÍKea ípya ungentle deeds, for all t h e so used, i t is pleonastic, as Rom. iv. 8 .
barbarous indignities which Achules prac- and seems a n imitation of t h e H e b r e w ,
tised on t h e corpse of Héctor, II. xxii. Ps. i. 1. O r i t may be rendered by some
line 3 9 5 . Comp. 'AXvo-ircXíig. [ O n t h e one, any one, &c. See L u k e ix. 3 8 . A c t s
ellipse of this word, as L u k e xiv. 2 8 . A c t s iii. 14. So t h e G r e e k writers used t h e
xxviii. 10, see Palairet Obss. Phil. p . word. See E u r . H e c . 644. & M u n k e r . ad
348.] Antonin. Metam. p . 2 8 4 . ]
'Avíipepog, a, ó, )7, from a neg. | I I . A man, as distinguished from a wo-
and ijpepog mild, which see under " H p e i u o c . man or child. M a t . xiv. 2 1 . xv. 3 8 . [ F r o m
—Not mild, ungentle, fierce. occ. 2 T i m . a child. i Cor. xiii. 1 1 . 1 S a m . xvii. 3 3 . ]
iii. 3 . [Arrian. E p i c t . 1. 3 . D i o n . H a l . I I I . A man, as related t o a woman, a
A n t . i. 41.] husband. M a t . i. 16. (comp. D e u t . x x i i .
'ANITP, dvepbg, a n d dvbpbg, 6, either 2 3 , 24.) M a r k x . . 2 . J o h n iv. 16, 17, 18.
from avio uprvards (see u n d e r "Avdpioirog), & al. freq. [ S o WH, J e r . iii. 1. H o s . i i .
or perhaps from t h e H e b . 13 a lamp, with 7. See T h e o p h . Char. xiii. 5 . X e n . M e m .
M emphatic prefixed, according t o t h a t of ii. 2 , 5 . T e r e n t . Hecyr. act v. se. i. I n M a t .
Prov. x x . 2 7 , The spirit qf man is 13 * a i. 16. i t is one betrothed (comp. L u k e i .
lamp qf Jehovah. I n which view i t is r e - 27- Rev. xxii. 2.) for t h e r i g h t s of b e -
trothal and marriage were little diíferent. J
* A n d from this revealed truth, w h i c h , n o douht, See S u r e n h u s . plfiXog KaraXXayfjg, p. 1 3 7 .
was well k n o w n to the ancient believers l o n g before Gen. x x i x . 2 1 . a n d Liban. E p . 6 5 8 .
the time o f S o l o m o n (see G e n . ii. 7 ) , t h e heathens Zonar. L e x . c. 170.]
seemed to have borrowed their accounts o f t h e hu-
man soul, j m p i o u s l y attributing t o their arch-idol,
I V . T h e vocative plur. 'ArSpég is used
the heavens, the supporting of its spiritual life, and in addressing t h e discourse to men, and is
even m a k i n g the human spirit or soul a part o f equivalent to sirs or gentlemen in E n g l i s h .
their god, the heavens, air, or cther. T h u s P y t h a - See A c t s vii. 26. xiv. 15. x i x . 2 5 . xxvi. 10.
goras, as w e are informed b y D i o g e n e s Laertius ( i n
P y t h a g . ) , h e l d that the human soul is a portion of
V . I t is used, as i t were, pleonastically.
the ether (aVóo-nas-^a eii&gos), and therefore i m m o r - 'Avr)p 7rpo(¡>r¡Tr¡g a prophet, L u k e xxiv.
tal, because the ether i s s o : and Cicero (in the cha- 19.
racter o f C a t o ) declares that P y t h a g o r a s a n d t h e
"Avdpeg dbeXfoi brethren, A c t s i. 16.
P y t h a g o r e a n s never doubted " b u t our sonls were
portions o f the universal m i n d or god, q u i n e x u n i - vii. 2 . T h i s manner of expression, i t
versa m e n t e d i v i n a delibatos ánimos haberemus." m u s t be confessed, is very agreeable t o
D e Senect. cap. 2 1 . S o Horace, l i b . ii. S a t . 2 . line t h e H e b r e w idiom, and thence to t h e style
7 9 , calis the human soul— of t h e L X X . (See J u d . vi. 8. x i x . 1, 16,
Divina? particulam Auras.
22. i n H e b . and L X X . ) B u t then i t is no
less t r u e t h a t t h e purest Greek writers use
A partióle of Breath divine.
aV?jp in t h e same manner. T h u s Black-
V i r g i l , yEn. v i . line 7 4 6 . wall (Sacred Classics, vol. i. p . 2 9 . 8vo.)
TEthereum s e n s u m , áteme aurai simplicis IGNEM. produces from H o m e r , U . 3 . line 170,
A sentient Ether, puré aerial FIRE. B A S I A I N ' A N A P P ; from T h u c y d i d e s ,
A n d P l i n y the naturalist speaks t h u s of H i p p a r c h u s , lib. i . 4 1 , ' A Ñ A P A S T P A T B T O ' N ; a n d
g i v i n g u s thereby h i s o w n opinión. " T h e never from Demosthenes, "ANAPE'S A I K A 2 -
e n o u g h c o m m e n d e d H i p p a r c h u s , as b e i n g one than TAP. T o which we may add from H e r o -
w h o m n o m a n more fully approved the relation of
the stars to m a n , and the opinión of our sonls being dotus, lib. i. cap. 9 0 , edit. Gale, 'ANA-
a part of the heaven, A n i m a s q u e nostras partem esse P0*2 B A S I A E ' í i S ; and cap. 1 4 1 , 'AÑAPA'
cceli." N a t . H i s t . l i b . ii. cap. 2 6 . T h e s a m e doc- 'AYAH'THN; and from Plato's Phajdon,
trine is m a i n t a i n e d b y t h e Infidel, i n W i s d . ii. 2 . — § 9, * I A 0 2 0 ' * 0 Y ' A N A P 0 2 , so § 3 4 .
V

See also L e l a n d ' s A d v a n t a g e and N e c e s s i t y o f Chri-

stian R e v e l a t i o n , P a r t I . c h . x i i . p . 2 6 1 , & c . 8 v o ,
O f P y t h a g o r a s ; a n d c h . x i i i . p . 2 9 3 , N o t e (g); " Others d e d u c e (¡toj, w h e n u s e d i n t h i s sense,
and M r s . Carter's Introducción t o her Translation from 12Í32 a living or breathing creature (see Gen.
of E p i c t c t u s , § 1 9 , and 3 1 . ii. 7 - ) , or from faui to speak.
 A N O
[Sclil. considere the word as used iii many
places as an honourable t i t l e , as in the
common address to t h e Athenians, and in
Lucían ( J u p . Tragced. c. 15.) <3 aVSpee
9eoi. See Schwarz. Comm. p . 113. In
James ii. 2. the word means a rich and
powerful man, and is illustrated by Ecclus.
x. 26. T o show t h a t in Acts viii. 2 7 . it
means a man of dignity, see 1 Mace. ii.
2o. vi. 5 7 .
V I . An inkabitant. Mat. xiv. 3 5 . L u k e
xi. 3 2 . an imitation o f t h e Hebrew. See
Gen. xix. 4. xxvi. 7. 1 Sam. v. 7.—Schl.
adds the signification a soldier, referring
to L u k e xxii. 6 3 . compared with J o h n
xviii. 3 . and H o m . II. i. 7. Polyb. ii. 64, 6,.
b u t this is clearly fanciful.]
'AvQhr¡pi, from dvrí against, and ITTJ/LU
to stand.—To stand against, to resist,
whether in deed or word. M a t . v. 3 9 . E p h .
vi. 13. J a m e s iv. 7. L u k e xxi. 15. Acts vi.
10. & al.
'ÁvdopoXoyéopai, 5pai, Midd. from dvri
in return, and ópo\oyéio to confess, ac-
knowledge. W i t h a D a t . of t h e person,
To confess, return ihanks, to. occ. L u k e
11. 3 8 ; where Wetstein explains this word
by gimng thanks to God aVr' ivcpytGÍac
for the benefit bestowed, and cites from
Plutarch iEmil. (misprinted Timol.) p .
260, B . ' A N G O M O A O r E r s e A I riva
%dpiv, to return thanks for a favour.—In
tlie L X X the V. is used, P s . Ixxix. 13,
for H e b . m i n to confess. Comp. E z r a iii.
11, where L X X r e ñ d e r ¡ni ni") hbnZ 13J>»1
¡Ti¡TÍ? and they answered (each other) in
praising and confessing to Jehovah, by
lien dTrei;pidi](Tav EV ¿uva «raí dv6opo\oyí¡crEi
TU Kvpí.o>. [Schl. expressly denies t h a t
t h e word ever means to confess, in return,
and says it means both in this single place
in the N . T . and in those cited by P a r k -
h u r s t to praise simply.]
" A N e O S , rae, ae, rb. T h e Greek E t y -
mologists derive it from tino up, and §üv
lo run, because while growing it generally
tends upwards: B u t may it not be more
próbably cieduced from t h e H e b . toin to
embalm, make sntcet? See Cant. ii. 1 3 .
—A jiower of an herb. occ. J a m e s i. 10,
11. 1 P e t . i. 24. Comp. Isa. xl. 6, 7. So
Juvenal, Sat. ix. lin. 1 2 6 — 8 ,
• -Festmat enim decurrere velox
F l o s c u l u s angustaa m i s e r a q u e brevissima vitas
Portio;
[See N u m b . xvii. 8. Isa. xl. 6. Job xv. 3 3 . ]
' É l Ü 'AvQpada, ae, 1), from cívdpa'í, arae.
0
—A kaap or Jire qf Uve coals. occ. John
57 A N O
xviii. 18. xxi. 9. On the former t e x t
Wetstein shows t h a t this word is used by
Homer, [II. ix. 213.] Athena2us, A r i s t o -
phanes, [ E q . 777-], and Plutarch. Comp.
Ecclus. xi. 3 2 . [2 Mace. ix. 20.]
" A N 0 P A S , a/coe, b. A burning, or
Uve, cool. occ. Rom. xii. 20. [Schleusner
translates or paraphrases t h i s , You mili
créate great uneasiness in your enemy, or,
make him blush and grievefor his matice;
and he adds, t h a t St. Paul does not advise
us to confer benefits on our enemies on p u r -
pose to cause them uneasiness, b u t speaks of
t h e natural effect of such conduct. St. P a u l
certainly refers to Prov. xxv. 22. On
whicli see Schultens, Comm. p . 335.]
'AvQpwwáptijKOQ, a, ó, ?'/, from mSponroQ
a man, and apécricM to picase.— One that is
desirous qf pleasing men, a man-pleaser.
occ. E p h . vi. 6. Col. iii. 22. The V. ávdpto-
•KcipzaKÉio is used by I g n a t i u s in t h e same
view, Epist. ad R o m . § 2. [ T h e word,
like apecricoQ, is always used in a b a d sense.
Ps. liii. 5. See Psalt. Salom. apud F a b r .
Cod. Pseud. ii. p . 9 2 9 . ]
'Avdpinru'oc, r¡, ov, from iíx'dpiowos man.
Human, belonging to man, his manners,
customs, n a t u r e , or condition. occ. Rom.
vi. 19. 1 Cor. ií. 4, 13. iv. 3. x. 13. J a m e s
iii. 7. 1 P e t . ii. 13. T h e word is used in
like manner by t h e profane writers. See
Wetstein. [ N u m b . v. 6. E z e k . iv. 12.]
]
^^"Av6pio~oi:rúvos, a, ¿,from cú'9pw7roe
a man, and EK-OVU perf. mid. of KTEIVLÚ to
slay.—A man-slayer, a murderer. occ.
J o h n viii. 44. (where comp. Wisd. ii. 2 4 ,
and see Campbell.) 1 J o h n iii. 15. [Sch.
says, he who líales another, and makes him
unhappy, like a murderer.]
"AvOpiiiiroc, a, ó, from ario cidpe'iv rrj
inri looking upwards with his counicnance,
or from avio rpt-Eiv ibira turning his view
upwards. Ovid. Metamorph. lib. i. hav-
ing observed t h a t * P r o m e t h e u s , i. e. t h e
divine Counscl (comp. Gen. i. 20.) formed
man in the image of the all-ruling Gods,
adds in those well-known lines, lin. 8 5 , &c.
Pronaque cum spectent animalia ocotera terram,
O s H o m i n i s u b l i m e d e d i t : ccelumque tueri
J u s s i t , et erectos ad sidera tollere v a l t a s .
W h i l s t other creatures tow'rds the earth look
down,
He gave to Man afront sublime, and rais'd
His noblcr vicio to leen the starry Heavn.
Ñ o r is this of Ovid to be regarded as a
mere poetical fiight. T h e most serious
* Ufofi>i9rJ¡ from vgo/^'iSti/o/xaí lo próvido, take
thought beforc-hand.
 A N e ¡8
and sensible of t h e philosophical writers
a m o n g t h e Heathen u r g e the same senti-
inents. T h u s Cicero, in the character of
a Stoic, observes, " God raised Men aloft
from the ground, and made them upright,
t h a t , by viewing the Heavens, they m i g h t
receive t h e knowledge of the Gods. For
men (says he) are upon t h e earth not
merely as inhabitants, b u t as spectators of
things above them in the Heavens (super-
a r u m r e r u m atque coelestium), the view of
which belongs to no other animáis." De
N a t . Deor. lib. ii. cap. 56. edit. Olivet.
A n d again, D e L e g . lib. i. cap. 2. " Cum
cmteras animantes ad pastum abjecisset,
solum hominem erexit, ad cceüque qnasi
cognationis domiciliique pristini conspec-
t u m excitavit. W h e n God had made other
animáis prone to feed on the ground, he
made Man alone upright, and raised him
to a view of Heaven, as of his native and
original habitation." So A g r i p p a in Dio.
H i s t . lib. Iii. p . 3 1 5 , Tó ávdpíntivov rrav,
&TE EK TE SESV yEyovÓQ Kal ES $E¿£ d<j>íj^ov,
"Ana B A E ' Ü E I : T h e whole human race,
as being s p r u n g from t h e Gods, and de-
stined to r e t u r n to t h e m , looks upward."
I . Man *, a ñame of the species without
respect to sex, M a t . v. 13, 16. vi. 1. 1 Cor.
vii. 26. & al.—or to age, J o h n xvi. 2 1 .
[ P h i l . ii. 7. Comp. Plat. Phsed. ix. p . 929.
ed. B i p . l
I I . A man, as distinguished from a wo-
man. [1 Cor. vii. 1. more especially a hus-
band. M a t . xix. 3 , 5, 10. M a r k x. 7. Job
vi. 9. Test. x ü . P a t . apud F a b . Cod. i. p .
529. Schleus. says, t h a t in Rom. vii. 1.
i t means the woman or wife in opposition
to the husband, but Br. observes t h a t the
proposition is universal, and t h a t the spe-
cial one (with respect to the wife) is fre-
quently omitted by St. Paul. Schleusner
farther t h i n k s t h a t in t h e expression the
son ofman, the word al ways means woman,
when C h r i s t is spoken of. Some have
t h o u g h t that our Saviour, in using this
phrase (for none of t h e Apostles use it in
writing of h i m ) , meant to represent him-
self as coming with great humility, as the
lowest and most despised of men. B u t
Schl. says t h a t our Saviour meant to show
by it, t h a t he was the promised Messiah,
born of a virgin, who had taken on him
our n a t u r e , and come to fulfil t h a t g r e a t
decree of God, t h a t mankind should be
saved by one in t h e i r o w n / o ™ . ]
I I I . Every man, every one, any one. 1
* [ S e e Vale!;, ad T h c o c . Adoniar. p . 3 9 5 . ]
A N e
Cor. iv. 1. xi. 28. Gal. iii. 12. [Gen, xiii.
12. 1 Sam. viii. 22.]
I V . In the N . T . avdponroe is frequently
joined, as i t were pleonastically, with a n -
other N . See Mat. xi. 19. xiii. 2 8 , 4 5 ,
52. Luke ii. 15. & al. Comp. Gen. ix. 5 ,
20. xiii. 8. xiii. 3 0 , 3 3 , in H e b . and L X X ,
and 'Avr¡p V.—So Raphelius on L u k e ii.15,
cites from A r r i a n , A 0 Y ~ A 0 I 2 " A N G P í i -
nOIS for slaves,. NOMA'AES "ANOPO-
HOI for shepherds*. See Campbell's
Preliminary Dissert. to Gospels, p . 613.
[ I m a y mention here t h a t Schl. ascribes
many meanings to avdpwrros which i t
never possessed, except when placed in a
particular relation to other words. T h u s ,
" I carne to set a man against his f a t h e r "
oceurs M a t . x. 3 5 , and therefore Schleus.
ascribes the sense of son to avdponroe, and
in the same way t h a t of master (from
M a t . x. 3 6 . ) , slave (from L u k e x ü . 36.))
soldier simply from M a t . viii. 9.]
[V. A vile person (as perhaps in J o h n
xi. 47. and according to Maius Obs. Sac. ii.
p . 63. in Phil. ii. 8 ; see also L u k e v.
20. xxii. 58. and Mounteney on D e m o s t h .
Phil. i. p . 2 2 1 . and P e t i t . Obs. Mise. p .
181.) aud henee it is applied to t h e Gen-
tiles, M a t . xxvii. 2 2 . (comp. M a r k x. 33.)
and M a r k ix. 3 1 . L u k e xviii. 32.]
[ V I . The nature of man. T h u s in t h e
phrases so often oceurring, ó iraXatoe á. a n d
ó KULVÚC á. we understand respectively,
man's oíd and sinful n a t u r e , and his new
and regenérate one, and so of the phrase
ó é'crw á. Rom. vii. 22. E p h . iii. 16.]
[VIL Human, used for ¿ivdpioirít'oc, 1
Cor. i. 25. iii. 2 1 . and ahvays in an unfa-
vourable sense. T h e phrase tara avOpurrov
after the manner of mankind, has relation
to this sense. I t oceurs 1 Cor. iii. 3 . Rom.
iii. 5. 1 Cor. ix. 8. Gal. iü. 15. with some
sense in general of t h e weakness of man-.
I t often oceurs in good writers. See Karaf\
[ V I I I . T h e phrase iívQpumoi Qeü de-
serves notice. In t h e O, T . it is used
of the prophets and preachers. See 1 Kings
xiii. 1. 2 Kings iv. 40. D e u t . xxiii. 1.]
Efgrp ' 'AvñvrraTEvo),
1
from av6ÚTraTO£.-—
To be procónsul, to have proconsular au-
thority. occ. Acts xviii. 12.
E§§§P 'Av0¿7raros, u, ó, from avrlfor, in-
siead qf, and Waróg superlat.of vwEp q.lmép-
raroe, the supreme, highest; also, a cónsul,
* [ S o in L X X . G e n . i x . 2 0 . x l v i . 3 2 . L e v . x x i .
9. and the word is often found i n the L X X where
there is nothing i n the H e b r e w . See L e v . x x . 1 0 .
xxi. 20. & al.]
 A N I 59
so callee! by the Greek writers, because,
after the expulsión of the kings, t h e con-
stéis had t h e suprema or higkest authority
in the Román government.—A procónsul,
a person sent as governor into a Román
province rvith constelar poner. In the
time of t h e commonwealth, t h e authority,
both civil and military, of the proconsuls
was very extensive. B u t A u g u s t u s , a t
the beginning of his reign, divided the
provinces i n t o two p a r t s ; one of which h e
gave wholly over to t h e senate and people,
a n d reserved the other for himself. After
which time, those governors only who were
sent into the former división bore the ñame
of proconsuls; though they were denied
t h e whole military power, and so fell short
of the oíd proconsuls*. T h a t this title of
procónsul is with great accieracy given by
St. L u k e to Sergius Paulus, Acts xiii. and
to Gallio, Acts xviii. 12, may be seen in
Doddridge's notes on those t e x t s , and in
t h e authors there quoted by him. occ.
A c t s xiii. 7, 8, 12. xix. 3 8 . T h e latter
Greek writers use the N . 'AvQvrcaroe, and
the V. dvdvirarevu) in t h e same sense as
St. L u k e . See Wetstein on A c t s xiii. 7.
'Aviíjpi, from ava back, and ínpi to send.
I . To send back; b u t it oceurs not
strictly in t h i s sense in t h e N . T .
I I . To loosen, unloose. occ. Acts xvi. 2 6 .
xxvii. 4 0 ; where comp. u n d e r HnSáXtov.
I I I . To lessen, modérate, occ. E p h . vi.
9. So Epictetus, Enchirid. cap. 5 4 , cited
by Alberti and Wetstein, rfiv aieiw—'AN-
I E ' N A I , to lessen t h e respect. [Deut.
x x x i . 6.]
I V . To dismiss, leave. occ. H e b . xiii.
5. [ M a l . iv. 2 . ]
| ^ g ° 'AVÍXEIOQ, w, ó, ?/, att. for aviXaoQ,
from a neg. and iXewe (att. for ÍXaos) mer-
ciful. Without merey. occ. J a m e s ii. 13.
"AVLWTOQ, a, 6, ii, from a neg. and VÍTTTOI
to wash.—Not rvashed, univashen. occ.
M a t . xv. 20. M a r k vii. 2, 5 . [See Surenh.
Misch. vi. p . 480.]
'AvKnpi, from ara again, and írripi to
place, stand. See t h e remark URder'Tsi] pi.
I. In t h e 2 d aor. active, intransitively,
To stand again, to rise from a sitting or
recumbent posture. M a t . ix. 9. M a r k i. 3 5 .
ii. 14. xiv. 60. & al. freq. Acts xii. 7.
'AvóWa rise up, 2d aor. imperat. 2d pers.
active, for áA*r)6t. So E p h . v. 14. [ S c h l .
* See Kennet's A n t i q u i t i e s of R o m e , p . 1 2 5 , C.
Lardner's.Credibility of Gospel H i s t . V o l . I . B o o k
i. ch. 1. § 1 1 . and Crevier, H i s t . des E m p e r e u r s ,
T o m . I. p. 2 5 , 2 0 , 4 9 , 12mo.
A N' O
observes, and very j ü s t l y , t h a t la álí the
passages where t h e participio of t h i s verb*
is added to another' verb, or tlíis verb i s
joined with another, i t ís almost píeon-
astic, and is a H e b r a í s m o for in t h e H e -
brew, a verb of actio» has often a Verb
preceding i t which expresses a n action
necessarily preceding t h e action óf t h e
verb, as arabas k&jXOe. See D e u t . xvii,
18. xxxii. 38.]
I I . In the 2d aor. act. ancí l s t fut. raid,
intransitively, To rise, or arise from the
deacl, applied to Christ, M a t , xvii. 9. x x ,
19. & al. freq.—and to men in general,
M a r k xii. 2 3 , 2 5 . L u k e xvi. 3 4 . J o h n x i ,
2 3 , 24. 1 Thess. iv. 16. S e e 2 Ma«. vii,
14. H o m e r , 11. 2 1 . line 56. B u t in t h e
l s t fut. and l s t aor. active, transitively,
To raise, cause to rise fron* t h e d e a d ,
Acts ii. 2 4 , 32. J o h n vi. 39,, 4 0 . See 2
Mac. vii. 9. H o m e r , II. 24. line-551.
I I I . To rise from the spiritual death of
sin. occ. Eph. v. 14. eomp, J o h a v. 25„
E p h . ii. 5, 6. Col. iii. 1.
IV. I n t h e 2d aor. act. intransitively,,
To rise, arise, appear, begin to act. A c t s
v. 36, 37- vii. 18. 'Avítapai* pass^ T h e
same. Rom. xv. 12. H e b . vii, 1 1 , 1 2 . In
t h e l s t fut. act. transitively, Torease up,,
cause to appear. M a t . xxii. 2 4 , A c t s iii;..
22, 2 6 . [vii. 3 7 . ] xiii. 3 2 . & al. O n A c t s -
ii. 30, observe t h a t t h e words rb mra-
aápica áva^íioEiv rov Xpí^oV are o m i t t e d i n .
t h e Alexandrian and E p h r e m M S S . , and'
in t h e Cambridge one by correctio», as-
also in t h e Vulg. Syriac, and other a n c i e n t
versions, and t h a t Griesbach accordingly
rejeets them from the t e x t .
| V. In t h e 2d aor. act. intransitively, i t
imports hostility or opposition: To rise'
up, commence hoslilities or opposition,
M a r k iii. 26. A c t s vi. 9. [2 Chron. xiii.
7. T h u c y d . viii. 4 5 . ]
V I . To depart. M a r k vii. 24. x. 1.
comp. Mat. xix. 1. O n M a r k x. 1, K y p k e
! cites t h e best Greek writers u s i n g t h e V .
in this sense.—In the L X X it most fre-
quently answers t o t h e Heb. Q¡? to stand
up, arise.
'Avónroe, «, ó, r¡, from d neg. and voébt
to consider.
I. Inconsiderate, thoteghtless, foolish.
occ. L u k e xxiv. 2 5 . Gal. iii. 1, 3 .
[ I I . Ignorant. Rom. i. 14. T i t . iii. 3 .
In 1 T i m . vi. 9. it seems to be " t h a t
which makes men foolish or mad." See
E t y m . M . v¿ ebrtí'ypg.—The word oceurs,
Prov. xvii. 2 8 . xv. 21.]
" A m a , ae, ?/, from dvoor, mad, foolish,
 ANO
which from a neg. and vaos, mind, under-
standing.—Madness,folly, want of under-
standing. occ. L u k e vi. 11. 2 Tim. iii. 9.
[ I n 2 Tim. iii. 9. it is r a t h e r impiety, as
2 Mace. iv. 6. xiv. 5. e t a l . ]
'Avoíyot, from ava, and oíyut to open.
F r o m ávoiyu) we have in the N . T .
not only several tenses formed regularly,
b u t also several after the A t t i c dialect,
as the I s t aor. dvéyla, J o h n ix. 14.
perf. pass. particip. aveayiiévos, A c t s xvi.
27- & al. freq. Ist aor. pass. dvtiiyQnv,
L u k e i. 64. & al. and (with a triple a u g -
m e n t ) yvíáxdrj and yveá^dno-av. Rev. x x .
12. infin. dvEü>xdñvaL. Luke iii. 2 1 . perf.
mid. dvtyya. 1 Cor. xvi. 9. 2 Cor. vi.
11.
I. To open, as a door or gate, &c. M a t .
ii. 11. Acts v. 19, 2 3 . xii. 14. Comp. A c t s
xiv. 27.
I I . To open, as t h e mouth or eyes. See
M a t . v. 2. 2,Cor. vi. 11. M a t . ix. 30.
J o h n ix. 14, 17- comp, N u m . xxii. 28.
Psal. Ixxviii. 2. Gen. xxi. 19. 2 K. vi. 20.
Isa. xiii. 7. in the L X X and H e b . E l s n e r
in like manner cites from iEschylus
O I ' T E I N STO'MA. T o which we may
add from Lucian, R h e t . Prrec. tom. ii. p.
4 4 8 . edit. Bened. " A N O I S A S STO'MA,
and Ad Indoct. p . 537. *ANE£2irME'-
N O I S — T O r s "Oí>OAAMOIS, On L u k e
1. 64. comp. L u k e xii. 5 4 , 5 5 . 1 Cor. iii.
2 , and H e b . and E n g . Lexicón, under
n t t V.
I I I . I n the mid. and passive, To le
opened, as t h e heavens at the descent of
t h e Holy Spirit on Christ. M a t . iii. 16.
L u k e iii. 2 1 . comp. Ezek. i. 1. Acts vii.
5 6 . Rev. xix. 11. and under~2¿yí'(ti>I. See
Kypke on 1 Cor. xvi. 9. [This word is
often metaphorically u s e d ; the phrase, a
door is opened, often means, an oppor-
tunity is given. See 1 Cor. xvi. 9. (on the
passive use of avsáya here see Thom.
M . in voce, and Gra3v. ad Lucian. T . iii.
p . 5 7 5 ) . 2 Cor. ii. 12. See also A c t s
xiv. 17.]
'Avoncodopeá, w, from ava again, and
olKoSopéü) to luild a house, which see.—
To luild up again. occ. Acts xv. 16.—
T h e H e b . words answering to this in t h e
L X X of Amos ix. 1 1 , are TU lo fence,
rvall up, and n i to luild.
^^"'Avot^is, ws, A t t . E Í U S , r¡, from
dvoíyto to open. An opening, as of t h e
mouth. occ. E p h . vi. 19.
'Avopía, as, r), from avopos lamless.
[ I . A state of lamlessness or vice. M a t .
xxiii. 28. Rom. vi. 19. T i t . ii. 14. 1 J o h n
60 A N T
iii. 4. Wisd. v. 7. Ecclus. xiii. 24. Gen.
xix. 5.
I I . Any sin. M a t , vii. 2 3 . xiii. 4 1 .
Rom. iv. 7. vi. 19. H e b . viii. 12. x. 17.
Ecclus. x x i . 4. Exod. xxxiv. 9. & al. and
especially sins of violence or cruelty.
M a t . xxiv. 12. H e b . i. 9. Ezek. vii. 2 3 .
viii. 17.—Schleusner thinks, t h a t in 2
Thess. ii. 7, it has the meaning of apos-
tasy, (referriug to Job vii. 2 1 . viii. 4.
and especially to Isa. i. 5.) and in 2 Cor.
vi. 14. absolutely, the false religión of
Paganism.]
"Avopoe, a, ó, r¡, from a neg. and vópos
law.
I . Lamless, not having, knowing, or ac-
hnowledging a [revealed] law. occ. 1 Cor.
ix. 2 1 . where observe t h e paronomasia.
[ 1 Mace. ii. 44. Wisd. xvii. 2.]
I I . Lawless, transgressing the law, a
transgressor, wiclced. M a r k xv. 2 8 . Acts
ii. 2 3 . 2 Pet. ii. 8. & al. [In L u k e xxii.
37- comp. Isa. Iiii. 12. and M a r k xv. 2 8 .
1 T i m . i. 9. it seems to be, a transgressor
under punishment.]
'Avópws, adv. from avopos-—Without
having the law. occ. Rom. ii. 12 ; where
Alberti observes, t h a t Isocrates likewise
applies ávópws in this unusual sense,
Paneg. p . m. 94. T¿¡s " E M ^ r a s 'ANO'-
M Q S '(wvras, Kal o-wopítínv otcáVrae; T h e
Greeks living without laws, and in scat-
tered dwellings." [ P a r k h u r s t is quite
wrong in citing this passage. T h e word
in t h e N . T . means " without a revealed
law," i. e. " the law of Moses."]
'Avopdoá, Q, from otra again, and opBóta
to erect.
I . To malee straighl, or upright, again.
occ. L u k e xiii. 13. comp. H e b . xii. 12.
[Ecclus. xi. 12.]
I I . To erect again. occ. A c t s xv. 16.
[Herod. i. J 9.]
'Arao-ioc, e, ó, i), from a neg. and óVtos
holy.— Unlwly, impious. occ. 1 Tim. i. 9.
2 T i m . iii. 2. Comp. Ezek. xxii. 9, in
L X X and W i s d . xii. 4. 2 Mac. vii. 34.
viii. 3 2 .
{§§jp°'Avo-¡Q],rjs,v,íxoToa avíxopatto lear.
—Forlearance. occ. Rom. ii. 4. iii. 26. [ I n
this sense i t is not found elsewhere. I n
1 M a c . xii. 2 5 . it means, time of delay.
In Joseph. A . J . vi. 5. 1. and B . J . i. 8. 6.
it is delay, or truce.]
c f g p ° 'Avrayii>ví(opai, from avrl against,
a.ndayoiví(opattostrive.'—Tostriveagainst.
occ. H e b . xii. 4. L u c i a n uses this com-
pound V. D e M o r t . P e r e g . tom. ii. p . 759.
edit. Bened. 'Tov 'ANTArONI'ZESGAI
 A N T G) A N T

mi uvrijl r¿¡ .'OXvpmy ovvíipEvov, Who awodíh'üjpL to vender.—To recompense, re-

was able t o ' contend or engage tvitk even pay, return, whether good or evil. occ.
t h e Olympian Jove himself. So Josephus, L u k e xiv. 14. Rom. xi. 3 5 . x ü . 19.
p. 1335, edit. H u d s o n . 1 Thess. iii. 9. 2 Thess. i. 6. H e b . x. 3 0 .
'AvráXKay/xa, aroc, ro.from avn'iXXay- Comp. Ecclus. iii. 3 1 . T h i s verb in t h e
>¡iai perf. pass. of avraXXáao-oi to exchange, L X X most commonly answers to t h e H e b .
which from avrl insiead of, and ¿iXXáo~aü) "PDJ to requite, ^'i^n to return, tnb'úi lo
to change. repay. [Isa. iii. 9. Prov. x x . 22.]
I . A"thing giuen in exchange for an- 'Avrairódopa, arog, ro, from ávran-oSíSmpL.
other, a compensation, price. In t h i s I . Recompense, retribution, of good.
sense t h e word is used by t h e L X X , 1 K. occ. L u k e xiv. 12. [Ecclus. x ü . 2.]
xxi. 2. (Alex.) J o b xxviii. 15. So in J o - I I . Recompense, reialiation, of evil. occ.
sephus, [ A n t . lib. 14. cap. 16. § 3 , edit. Rom. x i . 9. [2 Chron. x x x i i . 2 5 . Ecclus.
H u d s o n , cited by Kypke,"] H e r o d , having xiv. 6.]
t a k e n Jerusaleni, prevented t h e massacre 'Av-arráSomc, toe, A t t . eojg, r¡, from áv-
of the inhabitants, saying, ¿>e ÍTCI roa¿r<o rairoó'íc'wpi.—Recompense, reward. occ.
iroXíroiv (¡>óvtí, ¡3pa%ii Kal rr¡v TÍJQ oiKiipévr¡e Col. iii. 24. [ I s . xxxiv. 8.]
tiyepoviáv ' Á N T Á ' A A A r M A , t h a t " he 'AvrarroKpívopai, from avrl against, and
should esteem even t h e empire of t h e ¿nroKpívopai to answer.—To answer in
world b u t a small compensation for such opposiiion, to reply against. occ. L u k e
a slaughter of the citizens." xiv. 6. Rom. i x . 20. [ J o b xvi. 8.] This
I I . A ransom, a price paid to redeem word in the L X X is used for t h e H e b .
from punishment or evil. occ. M a t . xvi. ^'ü/n to return, a n d mi? to answer.
26. M a r k viii. 3 7 . comp. Psal. xlix. 8. 'Avrércw, from avrl against, and 'émo to
[ S e e Ecclus. vi. 1 5 . xxvi. 18. J o b xxviii. say.—To gainsay, coniradict. occ. L u k e
18. R u t h iv. 7. J e r e m . xv. 1 3 . ] — T h i s xxi. 1 5 . A c t s iv. 14. [ J o b ix. 3 . 1 M a c .
word in t h e L X X answers to t h e H e b . xiv. 44.]
TTID a price, riS'^n change or exchange, 'Avré-xppat, Mid. from avrl against, and
'¿X<D m i D J i exchange, commutation, &c. to holcl, adhere.—It is construed with
ÍÜ^F ' AvravaTrXrjpáw, ü, from avri in a genitive.
turn or correspondeney, and ávairX-npóta to I . To hold any thing against some r e -
frulfil.—To fill up, or complete in turn, or sisting forcé.
in correspondeney. occ. Col. i. 2 4 . 'Av- I I . To hold fasi, adhere to, n o t w i t h -
TavaTrXnpü) ra v^epí¡para rwv 6Xíú/£ti)v rñ standing resistance or opposite forcé, occ.
XpL-5 iv rr¡ aapKÍ pov, I in m y t u r n fill u p M a t . vi. 24<. (where see W e t s t e i n ) L u k e
what is rvanting of the affiictions of Christ xvi. 13. T i t . i. 9. T h u s J o s e p h u s , d e -
{in his members, comp. Acts ix. 4 , 5.) in scribing the miseries of t h e famine d u r i n g
my otvnftesh, i. e. as C h r i s t once suffered t h e siege of Jerusalem, a n d how t h e se-
for believei-s, and for myself in p a r t i c u l a r ; ditious forced from t h e people whatever
a n d declared, t h a t in t h i s world his dis- food t h e y found, says, 'EKÓTTTOVTO Sé yé-
ciples or members should have tribulation, povree ' A N T E X O ' M E N O I rCv cnríuiv," O í d
so / in my turn fill up, &c. O r r a t h e r , as men were beaten while t h e y held fast
C h r i s t once suífered in theftesh m a n y af- their victuals." D e Bel. lib. v. cap. 10. § 3 .
fiictions, so I, in conformity to his ex- I I I . To succour, support, as an infirm
ample (JLVTL), am filling up in my own body by t h e hand from falling. [Rather
fesh what is wanting of such-like suffer- to attend to, to direct one's altention and
ings as he endured. See Wolfius and endeavours to. See T i t . i. 9.] occ. 1 T h e s s .
M a c k n i g h t on t h e t e x t , and comp. 2 Cor. v. 14. A n d in t h e same view t h e L X X
i. 5 . T h i s decompounded V. is used by appear to have used t h e word, J o b xxxiii.
Onosander, D i o , and Demosthenes, cited 24, ' A N B E ' S E T A I rS pr, irso-eív de Bá-
b y W e t s t e i n . [ S c h l e u s n e r says, t h a t avrl varov, He shall sustajn him from falling
has very often no forcé in composition, and to death. Comp. A c t s x x . 3 5 .
t h i s remarle is applicable h e r e ; and he ' A N T P , a preposition which denotes an-
farther construes this passage r i g h t l y , " I swering, correlation, or correspondeney
bear whatever sufferings are left for me to, or return for somewhat else.
t o endure on account of the Christian r e - I. Governing a Genitive.
ligión." B u t he neglects to justify their 1. For, in return for, for the salce of.
meaning of t h e phrase OXÍ^e rS Xpi-rS by Rom. x ü . 17. H e b . x ü . 16. & al.
examples. See Rev. i. 9 . ]
2. For, upon account of, ansmeráble to.
'Av-aTrodídújpt, from avrl in turn, and M a t . v. 3 8 . xvii. 2 7 . J o h n i. 16. x¿ipw
 A N T C2 A N T

ávTi x f ° £ grace, for, auswerable to

a r
'AvrídiKoe, a, ó, fi, from avrl against, a n d
(his) grace: for t h e pronoun c W S , which dÍKT¡ a cause or suit at law.
occurs after TrXrjptoparoe, m u s t be under- I. An adversary, or opponent in a law-
stood as repeated after x P " " — T h e suit.
a 0 C >
So Herodian, lib. vii. cap. 17, has
Word incarnate, says t h e Apostle, resided 'ANTI'AIKOYS iv •yrpaypatrtv ayopatoie,
among us.full of grace and truth; and adversarles in law-suits. occ. M a t . v. 2 5 .
qf his julness we all have reccivcd, even L u k e xii. 5 8 . xviii. 3 . QJer. I. 4. Isa. xii.
grace for his grace; " t h a t is, of every 11. I t is any enemy in L u k e xviii. 3 .
grace or celestial gift conferred above according to S c h l . ]
measure upon him, his disciples have r e - I I . I t is applied to t h e Devil, t h e g r e a t
ceived a portion according to their mea- adversary of man, and the aecuser of our
s u r e . " Campbell's Note, where see m o r e ; brethren. occ. 1 P e t . v. 8. comp. Kev. xii.
and comp. J o r t i n ' s Tracts, vol. i. p . 402. II). Job i. 9. ii. 5. Zech. iii. 1. and H e b .
edit. 1790.—[Schoetgen and Schleusner and E n g . Lexicón in | t D l 2 > .
say, from t h e H e b r e w , grace upon (or in ffgp 'AvrWemc, we, A t t . £<i>e, y, from
0

addition to) grace. See Theogn. 3 4 4 . avr ávrtríOrjpi to oppose, which from avrl
áviúv avtáe; and G a t a k e r , O p . P o s t h . 2 7 . against, and rlQr¡pt lo place.—Opposiiion.
So Bengel ad 1. quoting iEschyl. A g a m . , occ. 1 T i m . vi. 2 0 .
Chrysostom, and many moderns. D e y l i n g 'AvrncadÍTripi, from itvrl against, and
( P a r t iii. Obs. 33.) says, The favour qf KaQi^rjpt to place.— To place against, or
the Gospel instead of that ofthe law.~] in opposiiion to; b u t in 2d abr. to stand
'Avd' tov, an elliptical A t t i c expression against, resist. occ. H e b . xii. 4. [ J o s h . v.
for avrl rértov tov, literally, On account 7. Mic. ii. 8. in t h e A l e x . M S . ]
qf these things that, i. e. On this account ¡§^F'AvTuca\éüj, üi, from avrl, in return,
that, because that, because. L u k e i. 2 0 . and KaXéoj to cali.— To cali, or invite in
x i x . 4 4 . Acts xii. 2 3 . return. occ. L u k e xiv. 12. T h u s applied
3 . In the stead, or place, qf. M a t . ii. by Xenophon. [ S y m p o s . i. 1 5 . * ]
22. x x . 28. M a r k x. 4 5 . L u k e xi. 1 1 . 'Avrticetfiai, from avrl against, and KÜ-
comp. 1 Cor. xi. 15. J a m e s iv. 15. H e b . fiai to be placed, lo lie.— To be placed
xii. 2 ; where see Wolfius and Wetstein. against, or in opposiiion ; to be opposile,
I I . In Composition it denotes, lo oppose, be an adversary to. L u k e xiii.
1. Conlrariety, opposiiion, as in ávdí- 17. [ ( c o m p . 1 T i m . v. 14.) x x i . 15. 1.
<zr¡[xi to stand against, oppose. Cor. xvi. 9. Phil. i. 28. 2 Thess. ii. 4 . ]
2. A c t i n g in turn, return, or recipro- Gal. v. 17. 1 T i m . i. 10. [In t h e t w o
cally, as in ávTtperpéopat to measure back last places it does not imply active oppo-
again, avriKoilopiu> to revile in return, or sition. Zach. iii. 2. J o b xiii. 2 5 . ]
again. SfSip 'AvrtKpv, an Adv. governing a G e -
0

3. Answerableness, or correspondency, nitive, from avrl against, compounded with

as ctvríXvrpov a correspondenl ransom. rapa the head, or H e b . n"ip lo meet.—Op-
4. In the place or stead qf, as in avQv- posile to, over against. occ. A c t s x x . 15.
iraroe a procónsul. [ S e e notes on T h o m . M . v. cnravrucpvf\
T¡l¡g3F AvTi€áXXto,fravn avrl reciprocally, 'AvTiXaptávofiai, M i d . from avrl mulu-
and tttXXw to cast.— To cast, or iossfrom ally or against, and Xapt>ávtii lo take hold.
one to the other by turns, as a bal 1, or &c. I . W i t h a Genitive following, To take
H e n e e it is applied to discourse or mutual hold on another mutually, as by t h e hand :
discussion of a subject by speech. occ. henee figuratively, to support, as by t h e
L u k e xxiv. 17. Comp. 2 M a c . xi. 13. hand, from falling; to support, help, assist.
[where it is applied to t h o u g h t . ] occ. L u k e i. 54. A c t s xx. 3 5 . comp. Lev.
fISIf" 'AvTidtaTÍdypi, from avrl against, xxv. 3 5 , L X X , and Heb. and Ecclus. ii. 6.
and h)tarldrip.L lo dispose.—To oppose, or I I . To take hold, as i t were, on the op-
indispose. occ. 2 T i m . ii. 2 5 , where ávriSta- posile side. occ. 1 T i m . vi. 2. ót rí/e ivep-
riQepévovc means either those who direclly yeo-íag avriXap€avópti'Oi taking hold on
oppose t h e Gospel, or those who are in- the glorious benefit of Christ's redemption
disposed or disafj'ected towards i t ; the on the other side; for ávTtXup^áveadat,
l a t t e r sense seems preferable, becatise the says Piscator, properly denotes, to support
Apostle direets T i m o t h y to t r e a t t h e áv- a burden with another person, and, as it
TiStaTtQepívovQ in a very different manner were, on the other side. In this view t h e
from t h e avQt^apivove opposers, mentioned expression beautifully represents t h e mas-
oh. iii. 8, from whom he was to turn away, * [ S o revoco in L a t i n . See Cic. pro R o s e . A m c r .
ver. 5. c. 1 9 . ]
 A N T
lers as laying hold on the benefii. of the
Cospel on one side, while their slaves also,
who are now the Lord's freemen, have
hold on it, in like manner, on the other.
Elsner however observes, t h a t avriXap.-
€áv£rrdai often signifies, in the Greek writ-
ers, to partake of receive, enjoy, and
would explain the passage, but rother leí
them do service, because bt -rjg Ivepyeuíae
civnXapSavúpsvm they who receive t h e
benejit (of their service) are believers, and
bcloved. T h e struciure of the Greek words
seems greatly to favour this l a t t e r i n t e r -
pretation ; and I do not t h i o k Doddridge's
objection to it ( " t h a t hvzpynaía signifies a
benefii freely conferred, and thereforc is
h a r d l y fit t o express even t h e cheerful
and exact obedience of slaves") sufficient
to overturn it. Such a way of speaking
seems to me highly agreeable to t h e mild
and equitablegeniusof Christianity. Comp.
E p h . vi. 8. Philem. ver. 16. and Mac-
k n i g h t on 1 T i m . vi. 2 . [Schleusner says,
t h e word decidedly means, to be pariaker
qf, io enjoy, and mentious two interpreta-
tions, approving t h e first, in which avr.
is referred to the slaves, " W h o enjoy
m a n y benefits abounding from their mas-
ters to t h e m . " T h e second refers the
verb to the masters, " W h o by Chris-
tianity are made partakers of all the be-
nefits obtained by C h r i s t . " B r . gives
Elsner's interpretation. W a h l says, " A c -
tive in performing acts of d u t y to their
master." For the sense to enjoy, perceive,
see Thucyd. vii. 66. iEschin. Dial. iii. 16.
T h e word oceurs Ecclus. ii. 6. xii. 4 . — I n
the L X X , where this verb very frequently
oceurs, it answers inter al. to H e b . p n r i i í
to layfast hold on, ^KiQ to support, 1JJD to
prop, and to *)tj) to help.
'AvriXéyio, from ávrl against, and Xíyio
lo speak.
I. To speak against. J o h n xix. 12. A c t s
xxviii. 22. Comp. Rom. x. 2 1 . L u k e ii.
3 4 , and under Ko\á£w. [ X e n . Hell. vi. 5.
37-]
I I . To contradict, gainsay. Luke xx.
27. A c t s xiii. 4 5 . xxviii. 19. T i t . i. 9. ii.
9 ; in which last passage our translation
renders it in the text not. answering again,
which includes t h e sense of gainsaying,
which they have given in t h e margin, and
seems the more spirited and comprehen-
sive versión. Comp. 1 P e t . ii. 18. T h e
above cited are all the passages of t h e
N . T . [ I n L u k e x x . 27- t h e r e is a nega- j
tive after this verb, which is pleonastic, as
after tlápvoc, (see Raphel. Obs. Herod. on \
63 A N T
this place). See Kuiíioei's note. In L u k e
ii. 34. John xix. 12. Rom. x. 2 1 . T i t . ii.
9. Isa. xxii. 2 2 . Ixv. 2 . Sch. gives t h e
sense, io rebel.]
'ArríXn^ie, toe, A t t . u o ¡ , ?;, from arri-
Xap&ávopaL lo support, help.—A help.
occ. 1 Cor. xii. 2 8 . After examining v a -
rious opinions concerning t h e sense of t h e
word in this passage (of which see Suicer,
Thesaur. and Wolfius), I find myself
obliged to acquiesce in t h a t of T h e o -
phylact, who explains ávnATju^tc by dvrí-
j(E(r6a.L TSIV áaüzvSiv helping, or supporting
the infirm. So Gennadius in CEcumenius
interprets avrtXrrJjeic-hy rb livríyEavaí ríóv
acrQtvHVTiov KOÍ Trpo^areir avrCiv helping
the infirm, and laking care of themfor
which difiicult and self-denying office, i t
is probable, persons were, in t h e Apostolic
times, extraordinarily qualified by t h e
H o l y Spirit. Comp. A c t s x x . 3 5 . 1 T h e s s .
v. 14. Vitringa, D e Synagog. Vet. lib. ii.
j). 5 0 9 , from a comparison of t h e 28th and
29th verses of 1 Cor. xii. t h i n k s t h a t dv-
riXi]\pEie denote them who had the gift of
interpreling foreign languages. B u t to
express these, t h e word seems strangely
obscure. M a c k n i g h t , whom see, explains
it by " Iielpers, who, speaking by in-
spiration to t h e edification of t h e C h u r c h ,
are fitted to assist t h e superior teachers,
and to help t h e faith and joy of others."
[ S c h l . says, " Deacons, who h a d t h e
care of t h e sick," and so Br. In t h e i r
opinión, as in W a h l ' s , it therefore means
" helpers." I n t h e sense help, it oceurs
Ecclus. xi. 12. 2 Mace. xi. 26. P s . x x i i .
19. e t al.]
'Avrtkoyía, ag, ?/, from dvriXéyio lo con-
tradict.
[ I . Contradiction. H e b . vii. 7-1
[ I I . Opposition qf any kind. H e b . xii.
3 . I n J u d . ii. it is rebellion, and see Prov.
xvii. 11. I t oceurs also H e b . vi. 16. where
it is opposition at law. See D e u t . i. 12.
2 Sam. xv. 4 & al.]
^^ , =
'AvrCXoibopéü), io, from dvrí in
rettirn, and XoLSopéio to revile.— To revile
again, or in relurn. occ. 1 P e t . ii. 2 3 .
[ L u c i a n . Conviv. c. 40.]
5f§p° 'AvríXvrpov, «, ro, from dvrl in re-
turn, or correspondeney, and Xvrpov a ran-
som.—A ransom, price qf redemption, or
r a t h e r a correspondent ransom. " It pro-
perly signifies a price by which captives
are redeemed from t h e enemy, and t h a t
kind of exchange in which t h e life of one
is redeemed by the life of another *. So
* Hyperius, in Leigh's Crit. Sacra.
 A N T
Aristotle uses the verb dvriXvrpóu) for re-
deemiitg Ufe by Ufe. See Scapula. occ.
2 T i m . i i . 6'. comp." M a t . x x . 2 8 . Gal. iii.
13. C a s a r informs us, t h a t the ancient
Gauls practised h u m a n sacrifices on this
very remarkable principie, t h a t " * the
anger of the immortal Gods could be no
otherwise appeased than by paying
life of one man for that ofanother." What
is this but a corruption of the t r u e t r a -
dition, t h a t the Seed of the Wornan mas
to give himself or his Ufe, a ransom for
all ?- And was it not principally from a
like perversión of the same blessed t r u t h ,
t h a t the heathen world in general otfered
human victims, and t h a t the Canaanites,
Moabites, &c. had t h a t liorrid rite of sa-
crificing their own children. especially their
first born ? See 2 K. iii. 27- Mié. vi. 7.
and comp. under MóXox and H e b . and
E n g . Lexicón under 1 3 3 1.
S g p " 'Av-ipE-péu, 5, from dvri in return,
and ptrpeá to measure.— To mensure, or
melé, back again, or in return. occ. Mat. vii.
2. L u k e vi. 38. B u t in Mat. very many
M S S . four of which ancient, read pErp-q-
6)'](T£tcu, which reading is adopted by W e t -
stein and Griesbach. [See T a r g a m . on
Isa. vii. 8. for this proverb.]
fí^gS 'AvTLí.íLcrdia, ag, ?';, from avrl in re-
0 EKELva ETiy áXijOiva, ravra
turn, and piados a remard.—A recompense,
either in a good or bad sense. o c c Rom.
1. 27- 2 Cor. vi. 13.
'AvTirraptpxofiai, from dvri on the op-
posite side, and Trapzpyopu.i lo pass by.~]
To pass by on the opposite side, lo turn
out of the may, and so pass by. occ. Luke
x. 3 1 , 32 ; where the Priest and Levite
are represented by our blessed Saviour as
lurning out of the may a t the sight of the
poor wounded and half-dead man, and so
passing by, for fear, it should seem, of
being legally polluted by touehing a dead
carease. See instances of similar hypo-
crisy among t h e Jews, M a t . xxvii. 6. J o h n
xviii. 28.
'AVRTTÉPOV, Adv. joined with a Genitive
Case, from dvri against and irépav beyond,
on the further side.—Over against, on the
opposite shore. occ. L u k e viii. 26.
'Av-LwL-Tti), from dvri against, and JTÍVT-W
to fall.—To rush against, to assault, to
resist. as it were, by forcé and violence ;
literally, lo fall against. occ. A c t s vii. 5 1 .
[ N u m b . xxvii. 14. Pol. xxv. 9.]
* Quod pro vita, h o m i n i s , nisi vita h o m i n i s red-
datur, non posse aliter deorum immortalium
placan arbitrantur. Cansar. Comment. lib. vi.
§ 15.
04 A N T
Ifglf 'Avri^parEvojiai, from dvri against,
and ^parevo) to mar.— To war, to make
war, against. occ. Rom. vii. 2 3 . [ A r i s -
tasn. ii. Ep. 1. See Alberti Gloss. N . T .
p. 101.]
'Avriráo-cropai, from dvri against, and
rciorcrto to sel in array. Mid. To set one-
the self in opposilion to, and, as it M'ere, in
array against. occ. Acts xviii. 6. Rom.
xiii. 2. J a m e s iv. 6. v. 6. 1 Pet. v. 5 .
[Schleusner thinks, t h a t in J a m e s iv. 6.
it is to punish, as in 1 Pet. v. 5. comp.
Prov. iii. 3 4 . and in James v. 6. to revenge.
T h e word occurs in the sense of resisling.
E s t . iii. 4. Arrian, de E x p . ii. 7- of military
m-dters. Demosth. 0 1 . iii. See Elsner.
Obss. S. I. p . 4 5 2 . ]
'AjTíVuTroe, 7], ov, from dvri donoting
correspondeney, and rvwog, a form, or
fgwe.
I. Correspotiding inform, like, similar.
So Hesychius, ávrírvirog, íaog, '¿polos, and
in N o n n u s arrírvira ijdn similar manners.
H e n e e in t h e N . T .
I I . Figurative, typical, correspondent
to and representing a higher reality. occ.
H e b . ix. 2 4 . On which passage Chryso-
slom, Ov yap ítg ^£ipo7rot7;ra c t y t a ¿icrijXdev
ó XptTOC, avTÍrvira roiv ICXyBivZv. 'Apa
Se TY'ilOI. ' F o r
Christ is not entered into t h e holy places
made with hands, which are t h e avrírvtra
of the t r u e . These latter, t h e n , are t h e
t r u e , t h e former are iypes.' So the * a n -
cient Christians used to cali the bread and
wine in t h e cornmunion, t h e avrÍTvrea of
Christ's body and blood. B u t t h e y who
speak thus plainly reject t h e novel and
monstrous doctrine of Transubstantiation.
I I I . 'AVTÍTVTTOV, rb, Antitypical, or an
antitype, somewhat answering to, and r e -
presented by, a type, or emblem. occ. 1 P e t .
iii. 2 1 .
'Avríxp^og, u, b, from avrl against, and
XpiTog Christ.—An opposer of Christ, an
antichrist; and with 'O prefixed, THE an-
tichrist. occ. 1 J o h n ii. 18, 2 2 . iv. 3 . 2 J o h n
ver. 7. On all which t e x t s see M a c k n i g h t .
[See T i t m a n n V e s t i g . Gnost. frustra petit.
'AvrXéw, w, from avrXog, a, ó, a sink,
which may be from t h e H e b . D33>. infin. of
nj)) t to relum, compounded perhaps with
bü to cast down, because it retums the
moisture, &c. downwards to t h e e a r t h
whence it carne.
* See Suicer's T h e s a u r u s in 'AVTÍTKITOV I .
numen f I t seems worth remarking on this occasion, that
the sea is called, both b y H o m e r and Eurípides,
«Vxo;. C o m p . E c c l e s . i. 7-
 A N y 65 A N a

T. Properly, To emply a sínk. In this "Avo>, An Adv. from t h e P r e p . aya, in

sense t h e word is used in the profane
writers, as for instance by Lucian, Cata-
plus, tom. i. p . 444, b u t not in t h e N . T .
I I . To draw out, as water out of a well.
occ. J o h n ii. 9. iv. 7> 15.—as liquor from
a vessel. occ. John ii. 8. See H e b . and
Eng. Lexic. u n d e r 2 N t # — T h i s verb in
the L X X answers thrice to the H e b . aNtO
to draw water, once to nbl to draw out.
[ G e n . xxiv. 13, 20, 4 5 . E x . ii. 76.]
" AvrXnfxa, arog, rb, from ijvrXnpai perf.
pass. of ávrXéa.—Something to draw water
with, a pilcher. See G e n . xxiv. 15-—29,
and H e b . and E n g . Lexicón in 38ti>. occ.
John iv. 11.
f^¡§*'A>>TO(¡)Qa\péo>, w, from avrl against,
and ofdakpoc the eye.
I. To direct the eye against another
who looks at one, lo looh a person in the
face. I n this sense it oceurs not in t h e
N. T . but. is t h u s used by Clement in his
l s t Epist. to the Corinthians, § 34. edit.
ftussell. Comp. Wisd. xü. 14. and W e t -
stein on Acts xxvii. 15.
I I . Applied to a ship, To bear, (or, in
t h e sailor's phrase, to loqf) up against the
wind, to look the storm in the face, as i t
were. occ. A c t s xxvii. 15. I t is a very
aecurate t e r m , t h e propriety of which is
strongly illustrated by r e m a r k i n g , t h a t
" * on the prono of t h e ancient ships was
placed a round piece of wood, called some-
times ofdaXpog the eye of t h e ship, because
fixed in its fore-deele."
"AvvSpog, a, ó, ?;, from a neg. and viiap
water.— Without water, dry. occ. 2 P e t .
ii. 17. J u d e , ver. 12. [ I n M a t . x ü . 4 3 .
L u k e xi. 24. (and see Isa. xli. 19. xliii.
19, 20.) it describes t h e effect of d r o u g h t
on a country. Desert."]
EHH" 'AvvTrÓKptroc, a, ó, ?/, from a neg.
and viroKpívopai lo pretend, feign, which
see.— Without hypocrisy or simulation,
unfeigned. Rom. x ü . 9. J a m e s iii. 1 7 . —
[2 Cor. vi. 6. W h e r e see Theodoret. 1 T i m .
i. 5. 2 T i m . i. 5. 1 P e t . i. 22. Wisd. v. 19.]
¡§§f° 'AvvwóraKTog, a, ó, ?/, from á neg.
and vTróraKTOQ subject, which from ¿7ro-
rácrcra to subject.
I. Not subject, not put in subjectian.
occ. H e b . ii. 8 . [Phil. i. p . 473,]
I I . Not subject, disabedient to authority,
refractory, disorderhj. occ. 1 T i m . i. 9.
T i t . i. 6, 10. [Symni. J Kings, ü, 21.]
* See Potter's A n t i q u i t i e s of Greece, vol- ii. p-
140, l s t edition, and B e z a o n A c t s x x v i i . 15. [ a n d
P o l i . O n o m . 1. 9.11
the sense of ascent, upwards.
1. Up, upwards. J o h n xi. 4 1 . H e b . x ü .
15.
2. Above. A c t s i i . 19. [ D e u t . xxviii. 48.]
3 . W i t h the article ó, it is used as a N ,
denoting what is above, high, exalled.
J o h n viii. 2 3 . Gal. iv. 26. Phil. iii. 14.
Col. iii. 2. I t is once applied in this sense
w i t h o u t t h e article, J o h n ii. 7, And they
filled them eag dva up to the higher p a r t ,
or brim. Comp. Kárw I I .
'Aváyzov, a, rb, so called because ava
rfjg yfjg above the ground.—An upper
room, or chamber. occ. M a r k xiv. 15.
L u k e xxii. 12. [ I n Xen. A n a b . v. 4. 16.
it is a granary in the upper part of the
house.~]
"Avadsv, A n A d v . of place or time, from
ava above, and t h e syllable VEV denoting
from.
1. From above. John iii. 3 1 . James i.
17. & al. [ G e n . xxvii. 3 9 . E x o d . xxviii.
27. I n several of these places, J o h n xiii.
3 1 . xix. 1 1 . J a m e s i. 17. ü ¡ , 15. J o b iii.
4. A r r i a n . Diss. Epict. i. 13. 3 . Dio O r .
x x x ü . 3 6 5 , it is the same as ¿pavódev.']
2. From the beginning, or Jirst rise.
occ. L u k e i. 3 . Acts xxvi. 5. So Josephus,
A n t . lib. xv. cap. 7. § 8. fíXoi ya/>"AN£2-.
GEN 7\<rav, for they were his oíd friends.
See W e t s t e i n in L u k e . [Schleusner says
r a t h e r formerly than from the beginning.,
I t oceurs H e r o d i a n . iv. 13. 5. viii, 6, 13,
J u s t . M a r t . T r y p h . § 124.]
3. Again, anew, as before. occ. Gal. iv-.
9. J o h n iii. 3, 7• I t is plain t h a t again,
and not from above, is nearly t h e t r u e
meaning of avadtv in t h e two last-cited
texts, because it appears from ver. 4, t h a t
Nicodemus understood our Saviour in this
s e n s e ; and though there is an ambiguity
in the Greek word avaOev, there is no
reason to think there was the same ambi-
g u i t y in t h e language wherein our L o r d
spake to Nicodemus. B u t K y p k e , whom
see, remarks t h a t &vw&cv is a much more
emphaíical word t h a n Sevrspov, ver. 4 , and
signifies " D e n u o , inde á primis initiis, ¡\
primo veluti stamine," anew, from the very
Jirst beginning, from the Jirst rudimcnls
of being; and in Gal. iy. 9, where it is
joined with náXiv again, M a c k n i g h t , wlioni,
also see, renders ávwdev from the jirst, of
their conversión namely. So Galen, cited.
by Wetstein, ijlr)—DTA'AIN "ANQOEN
apí-áptyog, now beginning again from the
very Jirst;" and, ypáú¿ag IIA'AIN " A N Í 2 -
GEN vTrep ráv civrwv, w r i t i n g again froity
 ASI 66 A 3 I

the beginning on tlie same tliings. Comp. And lo! nothing worthy of, or deserving
Wisd. x i x . C, in t h e Greek. T h e Syriac death, has (in H e r o d ' s opinión) been done
versión in all t h e t h r e e t e x t s has tl^T ¡D by him, ' E 2 T I n E I I P A r M E ' N O N ' A Y T Í 2 Í .
anew,from the beginning. Raphelius, in his Notes on this place, h a s
4 . W i t h a preposition i t is used in t h e produced so m a n y instances of a similar
sense of a N . The top, or upper part. construction from t h e Greek writers, t h a t
M a t . xxvii. 5 1 . M a r k xv. 3 8 . Comp. I t h i n k h e has set t h i s i n t e r p r e t a r o n of
"Avio 3 . the t e x t beyond dispute. Comp. Wetstein.
[|§¡f' 'AvwrepiKog, »/, bv, from civwrepog I I . In a passive sense, Deserved, due.
upper, higher; Comparative from avio up, L u k e xxiii. 4 1 .
upwards.—Upper, higher. occ. Acts xix. 1 , I I I . Worthy, ft, suitable. M a t . iii. 8 .
where i t means higher up the country, x. 3 7 - L u k e i ü . 8 . A c t s xxvi. 2 0 . comp.
further or more distant from the sea, as 1 Cor. xvi. 4 . 2 Thess. i. 3 . [ 2 M a c . vi.
t h e districts of P h r y g i a and Galatia here 2 4 . Polyb. iii. 4 4 . ]
intended (comp. A c t s xviii. 2 3 . ) were. So I V . Worthy to be compared, comparable,
Josephus, Contr. Apion. lib. i. § 1 2 . ' O Í such as being put in the opposite scale, as
Se ravrr¡g (SaXáowijc namely) 'ANÍ2TE'POl it were, may draw down (* ayeiv) the
r a e oiKi'io-eic iypvrte, Those who h a d their beam. T h u s H o m e r , II. viii. line 2 3 4 , 5 .
habitationsjfart/íer up from sea. A n d D e
Bel. lib. i. Procem. § 1 , he uses r o i s " A N £ 2 Nüv 8 oJS' Évós "AHIOI IT(A!V
flcip&apoie, for t h e inland barbarians. See "EjíTOfo;,

more instances of t h e like expression in B u t n o w w e 're n o t a poise

t h e learned H u d s o n ' s N o t e on this place. T o I-lector single.
T o w h a t he h a s adduced I add, t h a t in
H e r o d o t u s , lib. i. cap. 9 5 , we have likéwise Comp. Ecclus. xxvi. 1 5 . — ' O V K afra—irpbc,
r?Js"ANíl 'ACTÍTJS t h e higher Asia, for t h a t Not comparable to, not to be compared with.
p a r t of it which was further from the sea. occ. R o m . viii. 1 8 . Raphelius shows, t h a t
Comp. W e t s t e i n on A c t s . in Herodotus t h e phrase OVK a^wg, joined
'Avúrepog, a, ov. Comparat. of avio above. with a genitive, or with t h e verb o-vp&Xr)-
—The higher, the upper; henee aviorepov, drjvaí to be compared, followed b y a dative,
N e u t . used adverbially. signifies not comparable to, not worthy to
I . Higher, to a higher place, occ. L u k e be compared with, or sometimes, with a
xiv. 1 0 . [ E z e k . x x i . 7 - ] genitive, not worth ; a n d t h a t both H e r o -
I I . Above, before. occ. H e b . x. 8 . dotus a n d Polybius use t h e preposition
'AviotpeXyie, éoe, 5g, ó, Kai i), Kai ro—ec, irpbg in comparisons. B u t I have n o t y e t
froin a n e g . a n d ¿KpeXéii) to prqfit.—Un- m e t with an instance, in a n y G r e e k w r i t e r ,
prqfitable. OCC. T i t . iii. 9 . 'AvwtpeXeg, rb, of a^íos being construed with repog in t h e
Unprqfitableness, t h e N e u t . being used same sense as in t h i s t e x t of St. P a u l . W e t -
for a Substantive, as usual, occ. H e b . vii. stein, however, cites from P l a t o ' s P r o t a g .
1 8 . [Prov. xxviü. 3 . J e r . ii. 8 . ] I n t h e t h e similar p h r a s e ' A N A ' S I A r)Sóvri I I P O ' S
L X X i t answers to t h e H e b . f?>líjn mb, and XvTrr)v, pleasure not comparable to sorrow.
bwn ' n i ? ! it doth not prqfit. — T h e modern G r e e k versión in Rom. viii.
'A£,tvr¡, r¡g, f¡, from cíyw or ayvvpi, l s t 1 8 , h a s SSev eivaí " A S I A I I P O ' S . — T h e
fut. a£w, to break, say t h e Greek E t y m o - L X X use ápyvplov a^iov (answering t o
logists.—An axe. occ. M a t . iii. 1 0 . L u k e t h e H e b . xbn f]D3 full money) for t h e
iii. 9 . money any thing is worth, G e n . xxiii. 9 .
"Afros, a , ov, from a y w , either as i t sig- 1 Chron. x x i . 2 2 , 2 4 ; a n d a^iog' followed
nifies to estímate, valué, or r a t h e r as i t by a genitive, in t h a t versión, denotes
refers t o a pair of scales, in which, when comparable to, Prov. iii. 15.-viii. 1 1 . [See
t h e weights on each side are equal, t h e y E c c l u s . xxvi. 2 0 . iEschin. Socr. ii. 3 . X e n .
áyaort bring or draw down t h e beam t o a Cyrop. viii. 5 . 1 1 . ]
level or horizontal position. Comp. under 'Adiólo, w, from a|io£ worthy.
Sense I V . I. To esteem, count, or rechon worthy
I . Worthy, deserving, meriting, whether
absolutely, as M a t . x . 1 1 (see Alberti and * U
*A£ÍOV enim iia^ck TO uyttv' est autem aytiv vox
E l s n e r ) , or with a genitive or infin. fol- TTJ; fa#fAÍx»í?, et ídem valet quod E'XXEÍV p e n d e r é ; á'yiv,
lowing, M a t . x. 1 0 . L u k e xii. 4 8 . J o h n i. á'fw, á'|io;. Illud igitur est á'fiov, quod ayn, h. e.
mSítetíi, TOV £uyov, l a n c e m , i n q u á ponitur, trahit ac
2 7 . 1 T i m . i. 1 5 . Rev. iv. 1 1 . & al. freq. d e p r i m i t . " D u p o r t in Theophrast. Char. E t h i c .
So it should be rendered, L u k e xxiii. 1 5 , cap. iii. p , 2 4 2 , 3 .
 A n A 67
or deserving. occ. L u k e vii. 7. 1 T i m . v. 17-
H e b . iii. 3. x. 29. [¿El. V. H . iii. 24.]
I I . To ilúnlc Jit or proper. occ. Acts xv.
38. Comp. A c t s xxviii. 22.
I I I . To count worlhy ovjít, io account,
or acccpt, as worlhy. occ. 2 Thess. i. 11.
'Ahitos, A d v . from a£ioe worthy.— Wor-
thily, suitably, as it bccometh. Rom. xvi. 2.
Col. i. 10. & al. [Always with a genitive.]
'Auparos, s, ó, nal rb—ov, from a neg.
and bparós visible.—Invisible, that cannot
be seen. occ. Rom. i. 20. Col. i. 16. 1 T i m .
i. 17. H e b . xi. 27. [Diod. Sic. ii. 21.]
'A7rayyf;'XX(i), from ¿TTO from, and á y -
yíXKio to iell.
I . To declare, lellfrom some one else.
ecc. M a t . xii. IS. H e b . ii. 12. 1 J o h n i.
2,3.
I I . To bring or carry ivord baclc, r e -
nunciare. M a t . ii. 8. xi. 4. L u k e vii. 22.
Comp. M a t . viii. 33. M a r k vi. 30. L u k e
ix. 36. xiv. 21. [ I t is construed either with
¿te, or with a dative. Gen. xiv. 13. N e h .
vi. 7. Xenoph. Ages. viii. 3.]
I I I . To lell, declare. L u k e viii. 47. xiii.
1 . & al.—This word in the L X X generally
answers to the H e b . 1 0 n io declare.
'A7ráy^w, from ano intens. and a y ^ w to
strangle, which from H e b . ¡X¡n to strangle.
To strangle, kill by strangling, or hanging.
H e n e e 'ATráy^o^cu, M i d . To strangle,
hang oneself. occ. M a t . xxvii. 5. T h e verb
a-n-riy'^aro is used in this sense by t h e L X X ,
2 Sam. xvii. 2 3 , where it answers to t h e
H e b . püii; and so it is by t h e profane
writers, particularly by Theophrastus,
E t h . Char. 12. rirt7e—w\r¡yas \á€wv
' A I I H T S A T O , a servant having been
beaten hanged himself; on which passage
t h e learned D u p o r t declares his assent to
t h e common exposition of M a t . xxvii. 5,
notwithstanding t h e cart-loads of notes
which, he says, certain modern i n t e r p r e t -
ers had, in his time, heaped together con-
cerning t h a t text. A n d Raphelius cites
from A r r i a n , E p i c t e t . lib. i. cap. 2, towards
t h e beginning, t h e very expression of t h e
Evangelist, ' A Ü E ' A G Í I N ' A I I H T g A T O ,
where it can have no other sense than, as
Mrs. Cárter translates it, " he goes and
hangs himself." Comp. Wolfius, L e Clerc,
Scott, and Wetstein on M a t . [ A s t h e r e
are two accounts of tíie death of J u d a s ,
one of which relates t h a t he hanged him-
self, t h e other t h a t his intestines b u r s t
out, Krebsius supposes t h a t he m i g h t have
attempted to h a n g himself, and t h a t the
noose m i g h t break, so t h a t by a violent fall
he might undergo t h c terrible fate alluded
A IT A
to. T h i s method of rcconciling t h e dif-
ferent accounts is approved by Schleusner.
'AwciyxopaL is used for " the suffocation of
grief." Áristot. Polit. vii. 7- Andoc. O r a t .
i. p . 2 3 5 . ]
'Airáyoi, from C I T O from, and Hyio io
carry, lead.
I . To lead, carry, or íake amay. M a t .
xxvi. 57. A c t s xxiv. 7- & al, comp. Acts
xxiii. 17. 1 Cor. xii. 2 * . [ D e u t . xxviii.
37.]
I I . Passive, To be led or carried away
io prison, punishmenl, or death. So H e s y -
chius, airliyeadaí, ÚQ Bavarov 'éXkecrdat.
occ. M a t . xxvii. 3 1 . L u k e xxiii. 26. J o h n
xix. 16. A c t s xii. 19. O n M a t . xxvii. 3 1 ,
W e t s t e i n shows t h a t this verb is in like
manner applied by the Greek writers to
those who are led io death or execulion.
T h u s from Galen he cites, '~EKÉ\SVIT£V
avrbv ' A Ü A X G i r N A I r£6vr¡t,ópsi'ov, H e
ordered him to be led away to d i e ; and
from Achules T a t i u s , 115 rolvvv b bi¡pioQ ?
' A I T A r E ' T í i rSrov \¿igwv: W h e r e now is
the executioner? L e t him take this m a n
amay, i. e. to despatch h i m . B u t on Acts
xii. 19, Kypke proves t h a t t h e Greek
writers sometimes apply t h e word to milder
p u n i s h m e n t s ; and such a one he t h i n k s
was inflicted on the soldiers there m e n -
tioned. [ E s t . ii. 23. Gen. xxxix. 22. I n
this sense the word oceurs also, iElian. V a r .
H i s t . xiii. 34. Philost. Vit. Apoll. iv. 39.
See A t h e n . vi. 2. Salmas. de Modo U s u r .
c. 17. Schweigh. L e x . Polyb. 6 1 . ]
I I I . To lead, or tend, as a way. occ. M a t .
vii. 13, 1 4 ; where W e t s t e i n produces from
S t e p h a n u s , T I P N " O A O N T f f N h: Becnriiov
' E I S nXaralac ' A T Í A T O Y S A N , T h e way
leading from Thespia; lo Platéese.
'ArraibEvroc, «, ó, ?'/, from a neg. and
•traidEvio to inslruct.— TJnlearned. occ. 2
T i m . ii. 23. [ P l u t . t. vi. 143.]
'Arraípio, from cirro from, and aípto io
take away.—To take away. occ. M a t . ix.
15. Maríc ii. 20. L u k e v. 35. [Schl. says
these passages also may bear t h e sense of
going away, in which sense t h e word oceurs
in good authors. See Palarph. de Incred.
vi. 6. Schweigh. L e x . Polyb. p . 6 2 . ]
'Arrairéio, w, from airo again, or intens.
and curtió to ask.
I. To require, ask again. occ. L u k e vi.
30.
I I . To require, demand. " 'AITEÍV, says
Casaubon on Theophrast. E t h . Char. xi.
* [ I n this place, it seems rather, as Schl, says, to
m e a n , To excite or influence]
F 2
 A n A 68
is to ask as afavour, dirairtív to demand
as a debt. So t h e orator Andocides, Tavra
/3«'\£(T0£, 'AITAT Et Si ¡J.J/ ¡3¿~
1
VflÜC,, il fliv
X£<r0£, 'AirAITÍT. " These things, if you
are willing, I ask of you ; if not, I dcmand
t h e m . " occ. L u k e xii. 20. But God said
unto him, Thoujbol, this night ¿nrairSo-tv
do T H E Y require ( E n g . M a r g . ) thy soul
of thee. Of whom must we understand
t h i s ? W h o are T H E Y t h a t can require
t h e ú/vxriv soul or Ufe of any man, b u t the
ever-blessed Trinity only ? of whom i t is
written, D e u t . xxxii. 39, See now that I,
even I, am «>n HE, (the very Essence)
'nny D>nbN pul, and there are no ALEIM
with me; I kill, and I make alive. Comp.
1 Sam. ii. 6. 2 K. v. 7. J o n a h i v . 3 . Wisd.
xvi. 13. Ts not Aleim then t h e noun,
though not expressed, with which t h e V.
plur. airairüaiv agrees ? As t h e V. Súictho-iv
THEY shall give, may likewise, L u k e vi.
3 8 . (comp. P r o v . xix. 17.) and perhaps
irapádevro THEY committed, and átrj/o-a-
tnv THEY will ask, L u k e xii. 4 8 . So t h e
H e b . O ' í i b s , when denoting the true God,
is sometimes joined wxúiplural verbs in t h e
O . T . as Gen. xx. 13. xxxi. 7, 5 3 . x x x v . 7.
2 Sam. vii. 2 3 . Comp. H e b . and E n g . Lex.
under nb« I I . 1. [ S c h l . says, t h a t in the
two places of t h e N . T . the verb has t h e
forcé of asking back ; and in Wisd. xv. 8.
there occurs ro rije -¿vyflQ a-rraiTydeie %p£0£.
I n Ecclus. xx. 15. ai'ipepav caviel nal áv-
pwv atra.irl\tjíi. So Br.]
t§3g° 'A?m\yÉaj, ¿i, from airo denoting
privation, and aXyéto to feel pain, which
from áXyocpain, and thisperhapsfrom Heb.
ntt to putrefy.— To grow or bccome in-
sensible, void of, or past, feeling. occ. E p h .
iv. 19. So Phavorinus h a s ' A n A A T O Y ' N -
TA2—ctVo rroXXS pt'yac losing their feeling
t h r o u g h intense cold. B u t Raphelius on
this word cites several passages from P o l y -
bius, wherein it signifies the utmost pilch
qf dcspair ; and remarks t h a t Hesychius
explains it by pr)i;erL QiXovrtQ rroveív being
no longer willing io work. These several
meanings of insensibility, despair, and in-
dolence, Raphelius is of opinión, were in-
tended by the Apostle to be included in
this dreaclfullycmphaticword arrrfXyrjKÓree.
See also E l s n e r , Wolíius, and W e t s t e i n .
[ S c h l . says t h e sense is metaphorical, and
t h a t it means in this place of Ephesians,
To lose all feeling qf shame, or morality,
and so Br. T h e word occalesco in L a t i n
(Cic. ad A t t . ii. E p . 18) answers to
this.]
'A7ra\\(((7írw. A t t . — r r w , from litro from,
A n A
and ctAXéWw to change. I t denotes i n
general change of place or condition.
[I. To dismiss, and henee, in t h e middle,
to dismiss oneself or go away. Acts xix-
12. and so iEsch. Socrat. ii. 2 1 . Herod.
viii. 44. T h e active occurs in this sense,
Xen. Mein. i. 7. 3 . A ges. ii. 26. Theoph.
Char. 4. I t occurs in its own sense, iEsch.
Socr. ii. 26. See J o b ix. 3 4 . Jer. xxxii.
31.
I I . Tofree. H e b . ii. 15. Xen. C v r o p .
v. 1. 6. iEsch. Socr. Dial. ii. 2 7 . W i s d .
xii. 2. 20. Carpzovius (Exerc. Philon. ad
E p . ad H e b . p. 110) shows t h a t t h e word
is used oífreedom from slavery.
I I I . Tofree, in a judicial sense, as a
debtor, or adversan/ ; and t h u s in t h e pas-
sive, to befrecdfrom a legal adversary, or
to make up a quarrel with him. L u k e xii.
58. Comp. M a t . v. 24. Xen. Mein. ii. 9. 6.
Demost. Or. in Med. p . 406. 4 1 2 . ]
'A7raXXorptdtü, ¿i, from ¿uro from, and
áXXo-ptóa» to aliénate, which from áXXó-
rpioc alien,strange,foreign.—To estrange,
aliénate enlircly, abalienare. occ. E p h . ii.
12. iv. 18. Col.'i. 2 1 . See Wolfius on E p h .
ii. and Kypke on E p h . iv. In the L X X
it most frequently answers to the H e b .
Ti~i\ to disperse (whence t h e N . ^Xforeign,
a stranger), and to It) to be separated.
[See J o b xxi. 29. Jer. xix. 4. Ecclus. xi.
3 5 . Polyb. H i s t . iii. 7 7 . ]
'ATraXoc, i), ov, according to t h e E t y -
mologist and E u s t a t h i u s , from ciajr), the
iouch, which from anro¡icu ta touch, which
see. Yielding io the touch, sofl, tender.
occ. M a t . xxiv. 3 2 . M a r k xiii. 28. [ S e e
Ezek. xvii. 4.] In t h e L X X i t constantly
answers to t h e Pleb. *p sqft. [Gen. xviii. 7.]
'Airavrlioi, w, from airo from, and avrciio
to meel.— To come (i. e.from some other
place) into the presence of, to meet, M a t .
xxviii. 9. L u k e xiv. 3 1 . & a l . W e t s t e i n on
L u k e cites Appian, Polybius and A r r i a n ,
applying this verb in like manner to meet-
ing in hostilitu. [1 S a m . x x . 17- 2 Sam. i.
15;]
'ÁTrcivrnine, toe, A t t . ews, f¡, from airav-
ráúi. A meeting. 'Etf wKavrr\<SLV to the
meeting, to meet. occ. M a t . xxv. 1, 6. A c t s
xxviii. 1 5 . 1 Thess. iv. 17. On M a t . W o l -
fius cites from Polybius, 'ESHt'ESAN 'EDT
T1TN 'AIIA'NTHSIN. [1 Sam. ix. 14. J e r .
xii. 1 6 . ]
"AiraX, Adv, from tt collective, and 7r¿t£
all,
I. Once, once for all. See H e b . vi. 4.
ix, 7, 26, 2 7 , 2 8 . x. 2. xii. 2 6 , 2 7 . 1 P e t .
iii, 18. comp. ver. 20, J u d e ver. 3 . O R
 A n A CD A ¡I A

H e b . ix. 7, comp. 3 Mace. i. 1 1 ; and ob- 'Atrapan, ve, from dito from., and
serve that. Wolfius cites Herodotus using dpx)l the beginning.
t h e very phrase " A Ü A S T O T 'ENIAY- I. TheJirst-fruits, i. e. the first ofthe
TO"Y. In 1 P e t . iii. 2 0 , for aa-aí iípM- first-ripefruits, ' T o n n ' U W i , as it is ex-
jtjro the Alexandrian and another aucient pressed, Exod. xxiii. 19, which (besides
M S . with many later ones, and several the sheaf of rpttW Jirst-fruits offered a t
printed editions, have ¿nre^Mxtro, which the Passover for the whole people of Israel,
reading is embraced by Mili and W e t - L e v . xxiii. 10, and the Jirst-ripe
stein, and received into t h e t e x t by fruits of wheat, which were offered a t
Griesbach. Pentecost, Exod. xxiii. 16. xxxiv. 2 2 .
I I . Once, one time. See 2 Cor. xi. 25. Lev. xxiii. 17.) every Israelite was bound
P h i l . iv. 16. 1 Thess. ii. 18. [ " In P h i l . by t h e law to b r i n g to t h e house of God,
iv. 16,several times ; in 1 T h e s s . i i . 1 8 , not and offer with those remarkable words
only once, but a second time.'' Schl. T h e ordered by Moses, D e u t . xxvi. 4 . I t oc-
phrase occurs 1 Sam. xvii. 3 9 . 1 Mace. iii. curs not, however, in this its p r i m a r y a n d
30, for several times.] proper sense, in t h e N . T . but frequently
I I I . Entirely, thoroughly. J u d e , ver. 5 ; in t h e L X X versión of t h e Oíd, where it
where join áiraU, with eiSórae; and see often answers to t h e H e b . D'UW), never to
this i n t e r p r e t a r o n embraced and defended
by Alberti and Wolfius. Comp. 2 Pet. i. I I . The Jirst-fruits in a figurafive sense.
12. T h e above-cited are all t h e passages I t is applied,
of t h e N . T . wherein t h e word occurs. 1. T o Christ risen from the dead, as
tfgjl 'ATrapátaroe,
0
«, ó, from a neg. t h e Jirst-fruits of them t h a t slept, and
and Tvapa&aiviú to pass.— Which passeth whom the frll harvest of those who are
not from one to another. ( E n g . M a r g . ) , as Christ's shall follow*. occ. 1. Cor. xv. 2 0 ,
t h e Jewish high-priesthood did from the 23. T h e resurrection of Christ in t h i s
father to his son and successor ,• so T h e o - respect \vas -\ typified by the sheaf of
phylact explains ¿nrapíi&arov by ciíiciSoypv first-fruits which was waved before the
not successive. occ. H e b . vii. 2 4 , where see Lord on the morrow after the sabbath of
Wolfius. t h e paschal solemnity, Lev. xxiii. 10,
ffgp*' 'AiraparrKEvasog, a, o, r), from a which was t h e very riay on which C h r i s t
neg. and itapao-KEvci'Cij> to prepare.— Un- rose from t h e dead. comp. M£ycí\?7 ^Upípa
prepared, not ready. occ. 2 Cor. ix. 4 . under Miyae I V .
[ H e r o d i a n . iii. 10. 19. Dion. H a l . A n t . v. 2. T o the gifts ofthe Holy Spirit, which
49. Xen. Mem. iii. 4. 1 1 . Poli. Onom. vi. believers obtaiu in this life as a %foretaste
143.] and earnest of their eternal inheritance.
' Airapvíopai, apai, from aVo from, and occ. Rom. viii. 2 3 . comp. E p h . i. 34. H e b .
dpvéopai to deny. vi. 5. [ I n Rom. viii. 2 3 , T h e y t h a t have
I. To deny or renounce another, to deny t h e first-fruits of t h e spirit are t h e apostles,
one has any connexion or acquaintance say Deyling. Obss. Sacr. i. p . 3 1 1 . and
with him, as P e t e r did Christ. M a t . xxvi. Schl. These gifts, says Deyling, are said
34, 3 5 . (comp. ver. 7 2 , 75.) L u k e xii. 9. to be typified by t h e first-fruits offered
I I . Joined with kavrbv oncsclf, To deny at Pentecost. Levit. xxiii. 17-]
oneself, renounce one's own natural in- 3. T o t h e Jemish believers, to .whom
clinalions and desires. occ. M a t . xvi. 24. t h e Gospel was Jirst preacbed, and who
M a r k viii. 3 4 . L u k e ix. 2 3 . [ I s a . xxxi. 7.] consequently were t h e Jirst converts to
E^gp 'Airctpri, Adv. from dito from, and Christianity. o c c James i. 18.
0

íip-L nom.—From this time, from hence- 4. T o believers, Jirst con verted i n any
forth. occ. Rev. xiv. 13. C o m p . " A p n 5. particular place or country. occ. R o m , xvi.
[Schl. says t h a t sometimes dirápri means 5. 1 Cor. xvi. 15.
exactly, precisely, truly. See Phavorinus, 5. T o the true believers d u r i n g t h e per-
and Foes. CEcon. Hippoc. p . 44. T h e r e secuted state of Christ's C h u r c h ; because
ctVáprt paicápiov is perfectly happy.] t h e y were more escellent t h a n others, p e -
'ATTcipriopos, S, ó, from dicnpritrpai perf.
pass. of diraprl^iü to perfect, which from
aVó intensivo, and dpTÍ'(t>> to perfect, finish, * T-íí ^^«^x? wávTttif ¿txo'kuBno'ii TÍ <pvoap.ct, s a y
from iíp-ioQ perfect, complete, which see. T h e o d o r e t .
•f- S e e B i s h o p Pearson on tire Creed, A r t V .
A completion, Jinishing, perfecting. occ. $ TifTifi TÍCV ^s^Aóy-rcuv ííS'i yEüo-á^rvoí, says. C h r y -
L u k e xiv. 2 8 , sostom.
 A n A 70 A II A

culiarly consecrated to God and the Lamb, i words shows t h a t Christ was t h e 'A7raí¡-
an earnest and assurance of more plentiful [ yacrpa and Xapaicryp of t h e F a t h e r , before
harvest t h a t should follow. See Rev. xiv. that, being made man, he expiated o u r
4, where see Vitringa, B p . Newton, and s i n s ; for t h u s r u n t h e words: "Oe ¿iv
Johnston. d-Kavyaapa, K. T . \. Who when he was
6. I t intimates t h e patriarchs and an- ( c u m e s s e t ) t h e effulgence of his glory, &c.
cestors of the Jewish people, Rom. xi. 16 ; having by himself purged our sins, sat
and implies, t h a t as they were eminently down on the rigkt hand," &c. T h e same
séparated and consecrated to God, so this order is observed in t h e parallel place,
prerogative should n o t cease in their Phil. ii. 6, 7, 9, ' O E iv póp(pr¡ K. T . \. Who
posterity. T h e above cited are all t h e being in the form of God,—emptied him-
passages of t h e N . T . wherein t h e word self, &c.—wherefore God hath very highly
oceurs. exalted him.—Thus Elsner. I add, t h a t
"ATTCIC, &Ka<ja, (xntav, from a collect. or both in t h e O í d and N e w T e s t a m e n t the
lipa together, and iráe all. Logos or Divine Word, and his offices a n d
I . All, the whole, universally. M a t . vi. acts, are described t o u s by t h e light, a n d
3 2 . xxiv. 39. L u k e ix. 15. xxi. 4. xxiii. its salutary and benign opefations in t h e
1. Acts ii. 1, 4. & al. freq. n a t u r a l world. (See Ínter al. 2 S a m .
I I . All, the whole in general, b u t n o t xxiii. 4 . Isa. ix. 2. xlix. 6. I x . 1 , 3 . M a l .
universally. M a r k xi. 3 1 . L u k e iii. 2 1 . iv. 2 , or iii. 2 0 . L u k e i. 7 8 . ii. 3 2 . J o h n
viii. 3 7 . xix. 4 8 . i. 4 — 9 . viii. 12. x ü . 3 5 , 3 6 , 46.) A n d
' A Ü A T A ' t i , Si, from a neg. and rcároe, u n d e r both dispensations t h e pectdiar
a higliway, according to some, b u t r a t h e r presence of t h e same Divine Person was
from t h e H e b . r i ñ a n , H i p h . of n n a to occasionally demonstrated to men by t h e
seduce, for which the L X X have fre- attendance of his emblem, a preternatural
quently used aVaráü).—To deceive, bring light or glory. See Exod. iii. * 2. (comp.
or seduce into error, occ. E p h . v. G. 1 T i m . Acts vii. 3 0 , 3 5 . ) Exod. xl. 34, 3 5 . 1 K.
ii. 14. James i. 26. [ I s a . xxxvi. 2 4 . ] viii. 1 1 . Acts xxii. 6. xxvi. 1 3 . comp. M a t .
'Awárri, ye, y, from aVct-áw.—Deceit, xvii. 2 , 5 . Rev. i. 1 3 — 1 5 . A n d besides
deceitfulness. M a t . xiii. 22. E p h . iv. 2 2 . these occasional manifestations of t h e
& al. glory of the Lord, t h e appearance of the
t§g^ 'Airáriiip, opoe, b, from a neg. and God-Man over the Cherubim in t h e H o l y
irariip afather.— Without father, i. e. of of Holies of t h e tabernacle and temple,
a priestly family. occ. H e b . vii. 3 . See was constantly accompanied with t h e like
Elsner. preternatural splendor or brighlness. T h i s
'Arravyacrpa, aroe, rb, from drrav- is evident from S t . Paui's calling those
yá¿fai to emit, or eradiate, light or splendor, sacred emblems the cherubim qf G L O R Y ,
'• lucem edo, splendorem reddo." H e d e r i c ; Heb. ix. 5 , and from t h e description of
and this is compounded of ano from, and t h e Man over t h e Cherubim in E z e k . i.
dvyci'Cw to shine.—Light or splendor 26, 2 7 . T h e same prophet, ch. x. 4 , d e -
emitted or eradiated, eradiation, efful- scribes t h e glory qf Jehovah, i. e. t h e a p -
gence, " Effulgentia, splendor," Hederic. pearance of t h e God-Man in Glory, as
So Hesychius explains aTravyaapa by ykíu going up from the Chcrub (whereon h e
<péyyoe the light or splendor of the sun; was, ch. ix. 3,) and standing over t h e
Suidas, by djravyy y 'éicXciLupie emitted threshold of the house ; and then he adds,
splendor or ejfidgence; t h e Vulgate r e n - And the house was fdled with the cloud,
ders it by splendor, and t h e Syriac versión and the court ivas full o f T H E B R I G H T -
by «noif, which is a derivative from t h e N E S S O F T H E G L O R Y O F J E H O -
V . n n y to springforth, (see the Syriac ver- V A H , m n -
tm n « , which H e b r e w
sión of Isa. xiii. 9.) occ. H e b . i. 3 ; where words i t seems impossíble to render into
t h e Son is styled 'Arraliyao-pa rfje (¡ófrie— Greek more literally t h a n bv ' A U A ' Y r A S -
abra, t h e effulgence of his ( God's) glory ; M A ( o r — A T O S ) T H " S A O ' S H S T O T
and t h a t , I humbly apprehend, in respect G E O ' Y or K Y P I ' O Y . I t is probable, t h e r e -
of his divine nature and glorious appear-
ances previous to his t a k i n g human n a t u r e * Observe, t h a t t h e fire mentioned i n this t e x t
Upon h i m . " T h e whole s t r u c t u r e of t h e was a fire wtiich consumed not; a n d it i s j u s t l y o b -
words, i. e. in t h e three first. verses of Heb. i. served b y one w h o well k n e w w h a t h e w a s writing
about, " I n d e e d light together ( w i t h o u t the m i x t u r e
says the learned Elsner (Observat. Sacr. of spirit) coulduot uppear otherreise iiut lilcejire.'"
u n t h e p l a c e ) — t h e whole s t r u c t u r e of t h e H u t e h i n s o n ' s W o r k s , vol. vi. p . 3 9 .
 A n E
fore, t h a t when St. P a u l , writing to t h e
Hebretvs or converlcd Jews, gave the Son
qf God this t i t l e , he alluded to this very
t e x t of Ezekiel, and t h u s referred to his
divine ckaracter and glorious appearances
before his incarnation. W e need not then
be surprised t h a t the Jewish author of t h e
apocryphal book of Wisdom (who most
probably was Philo J u d r e u s * ) should,
among other personal attributes of W i s -
dom, entitle her, ch. vii. 2 5 , 2 0 , 'AIIO'P-
'POIA T H " 2 TS TmvTOKpáropoe A O ' S I I S
ii\iKpiv>)e, a bright efflux, emanation or
stream ( E n g . Marg.) from or of t h e glory
qfthe Almighty, and also, 'A1JAYTASMA
éio-ue a'ibíu, t h e effulgence qf the eterna!
light. M u c h less o u g h t we t o wonder t h a t
Clement, t h e companion and fellow-la-
bourer of St. P a u l , (Phil. iv. 2.) should in
his first Epistle to t h e Corinthians (which
has often by learned men been remarked
to resemble t h a t to t h e Hebrews both in
sontiments and style) cali Jesús Christ
'AHAYTASMA rí/c peyaXioo-vvqe ávrS, the
eftulgence qf his (God's) majesty, § 3 6 ;
and t h a t t h e succeeding Christian writers
should largely iusist ( t h o u g h sometimes,
I think, with a m i x t u r e of error) on t h e
glorious title giveu to t h e Son by t h e
Apostle to t h e H e b r e w s . See Suicer's
T h e s a u r u s i n 'Airabyao-pa. [ S e e also P h i l .
T . i. p . 3 5 , and p . 337- ed. Mang.]
'AiréiSio, from á-¡rb intensive, and '¿woj lo
see.—To see or perceive. [See Jonah. iv.
5. I t seems rather to be used of seeing
with the mind or underslanding, in P h i l .
ii. 2 3 . I t does not occur again.]
[|ig§í° 'ATréideta, a c , from aireidriq..
I . Unbelief, want qf true faith. occ.
R o m . xi. 3 0 , 3 2 . H e b . iv. 1 1 .
I I . Resistance qf persuasión, contuma-
cy, obslinacy, disobedience. occ. Eph. ii. 2.
v. 6. Col. iii. 6. B u t in these latter pass-
ages t h e notion oiunbeliefis evidently in-
cluded, and in the former texts árráSeta
does also imply disobedience; so t h a t it
m i g h t perhaps be best to reduce this word
to the one general meaning of disbelief
or of dÁsobedience accompanying unbelief.
" I t signifies," says t h e judicious Leigh,
" thc want qf obedience of faith." I t is
more t h a n c u r f a i a , and implies obslinacy
in unbelief, and the rejection qf the true
faith when proposed.
* I Im ra not of any writer w h o lias provecí this
p o i n t so convinciii^ly as the learned W h i t a k e r , in
his Origlit <>/ Arianhm disclosed, p. 121, & c
l ; i , & c . 1 6 0 , cve.
i A II E
'AitíSití, ü>, from á neg. and véiOio lo
persuade.
I . Not to believe, to disbelieve, as i m -
plying also disobedience. J o h n iii. 36.
A c t s xiv. 2. Rom. x. 2 1 . H e b . iii. 1 8 .
[Schl. says, and I think j u s t l y , t h a t in t h i s
last place, want of confdence'm t h e divine
assistance is meant, as in Ecclus. xii. 3 ,
4, and D e u t . xxviii. 65.]
I I . To disobey, as t h r o u g h unbelief.
Rom. ii. 8. 1 P e t . iii. 20. ii. 8. where join
no \óy<¡> with atrsídSi'Tse, as ch. ¡ii. 1. iv.
17. See Bowyer. These two senses seem
almost to coincide, (comp. airhQEía) ;
only t h e word sometimes refers more to
the inward, sometimes more to t h e oul-
ward act. [ D e u t . xxi. 20. E x . xxiii. 21.]]
'A7m0i}c, ÉOQ, SQ, b, ?/, from a neg. and
wddío to persuade, or -xdQopai to obey.
I . Unbelieving. occ. L u k e i. 17.
I I . Disobedient. A c t s xxvi. 19. Rom.
i. 30. & al. In t h e L X X it several times
answers to t h e H e b . n í a rebellious. [See
N u m b . xx. 10. J e r . v. 2 3 . Isa. xxx. 9.
Deut. xxi. 18.]
'AirsLkéio, w—To threaten, menace. occ.
Acts iv. 17- 1 P e t . ii. 2 3 . [ I n A c t s iv. 17.
áíreíA?) is r e d u n d a n t , and this is a common
Hebraism. See Vorst. de Hebraism. p .
625, c. 3 4 . ] — I t is by some deduced
from CL-KO from, and the obsolete ikíto to
withdraw, because threats are used to
withdraw men from their purpose. I
know not however w h e t h e r t h e p r i m a r y
sense of ¿nrsiKéio be not to boast, vauni,
" avyüv, Kavyjj.crdai," Scapula, as t h e V.
is used by H o m e r , II. viii. line 150,
T h u s will h e vauut.
'ATTEÍAJ), ?]c, v, from cnrEiXáio to threaíen.
—A threat, threatenins:, menace. occ. A c t s
iv. 17, 24, ix. 1. E p h . vi. 9.
"Aireipi, from cWo from, and iipí lo be.
—To be absenl. 1 Cor. v. 3 . Col. ii. 5 . &
al.
"Airttpt, from áíro from, and tipt lo go.
—To go, go away. occ. A c t s xvii. 10,
where observe t h a t átrrjecrav is t h e 3d p e r s .
plur. imperf.
¡ÜsH" 'Aireípa^oe, a, ó, from a neg. and
3
•KíipLxCo) to templ.—Not to be iempted, in-
capable qf being iempted. occ. J a m e s i. 1 3 .
"AwEipoc, H, b, i), from a neg. and ireipa
experience. Unexperienced, unshilful.
occ. H e b . v. 13. [ I t is r a t h e r here un-
equal to, " tenable to undcrslaud the doc-
trines ef Christiani/i/." I t oceurs in its
 A ri E 72 A II E

primary sense, Xen. M e m . ii. 1. 2 3 . slavery, a freed-man; a man not íont,

T h u c y d . i. 141.] but made, free. I t is the Greek word for
'ATCZKSÍXOJÍO.1, from aVo intens. and éicdé- the L a t i n libertus : so Scapula cites from
XOLIUI to expect.— To watt for with earnest A r r i a n on E p i c t e t u s , 'AÍIEAE'YGEPOS
cxpectation and desire, to expect earnestly. rS Népwvog, Ñero's freed-man; and J o -
«ce. R o m . vii. 19. viii. 2 3 . 1 Cor. i. 7- sephus D e Bel. lib. vi. cap. 9. § 2. m e n -
Gal. v. 5. P h i l . iii. 2 0 . H e b . i x . 2 8 . [ I t tions iva TS>V 'AIIEAEY0E'P£lTf one of
is doubtful whether aVo has this intensi- ( T i t u s ' s ) freed-men, u n u m ex libertis.
iive forcé here. Schl. says simply to ex- H u d s o n . occ. 1 Cor. vii. 22, where it is
pect, though he says t h e other interpreta- used figuratively and spiritually. So Ig~
tion may be t r u e . ] natius, in his Epist. to t h e Romans, § 4 ,
J l g l 'ÁTTEKDVOPAI,
0
Mid. from cirro from, edit. Russell, applies t h i s word to himself,
aud ítcovui to put off. but if I suffer I shall be aTreXeírdepog
I. To put or strip ojf, as clothes. 'IncrS, Jesús' freed-man.
Henee it is in the N . T . applied figuratively 'A:f£X7rífw,froni arco d e n o t i n g p r i v a t i o n ,
to the oíd man, or t h a t corrupt nature and ÍXTÚL^IO to hope.—To despair. occ.
we derive from fallen A d a m . occ. Col. iii. L u k e vi. 3 5 , Mníev cnrtXn-í^OVTEG, Nothing,
9. [ T h e verb is used in this sense, Joseph. or nowise, despairing. I t does not appear
A . J . xiii. 7. 1. (as exuere in L a t i n , T a c . t h a t áwtXTrí^o) ever signifies to hope from
Auna!, xiv. 5 2 . ) ; b u t Schleusner says it or again, as our translators, after t h e
is rather derived from t h e H e b r e w use of printed copies of the Vulgate (inde spe-
the word whft in such phrases as, he puts rantes) render i t ; but the constant clas-
off his heart (dispositions). See Schót- sical meaning of this verb is to be hopeless,
g e n . H o r . H e b . i. p. 820. Krebsius ( O b s . despair, of which W e t s t e i n has produced
Flav. p . 342) says t h a t t h e phrase is per- m a n y i n s t a n c e s ; ánd t h e L X X have once,
haps borrowed from actors, who p u t off the Isa. xxix. 19, used the participle airriXm-
dress of one character to assume another.] crpévog hopeless, for the H e b . p ' l N indi-
I I . To strip, divest, of power or a u t h o - gent. T h e verb or participle oceurs like-
rity. occ. Col. ii. 15. [Schl. says t h a t t h e wise in the sense of despairing, J u d i t h ix.
verb means to strip, as, to strip the van- 11. Ecclus. xxii. 2 1 . xxvii. 2 1 . 2 Mac. ix.
(¡uished of their clothes, and henee to van- 18. F o r further satisfaction, see C a m p -
quish, or break the slrength of in t h i s bell's N o t e on L u k e vi. 3 5 . [Schl. sides
place of t h e Colossians. D r e s i g . (i. 17.) with our translators, and says from K r e b -
denies t h i s sense, b u t see Perizon. ad sius (Obs. Flav. p . 117.) t h a t often a
.Elian. V. H . ii. 13. Wakefield (Silv. notice of a word omitted is given by a
Crit. pt. iii. p . 120.) says t h a t a comma preposition, as kuQUiv ciVó rivog, shortly,
m u s t be p u t after th-e verb, which means arrecrdíciv, according to Athenams, xiv. p .
lo strip off clothes, as if to go less encum- 649, and aVcu-cu' in Theophrastus in t h e
bered to a contest,] same way. See Casaub. ad Theoph. Char.
E§g|f 'ÁTR¿KSvcri£, iog, a t t . tcog, r¡, from 12. Br. sides with P a r k h u r s t . ]
CIWÍKDÍIOPAI, A putling, or stripping, of. 'Awévavri, Adv. from aVo from, at, and
occ. Col. ii. 1 1 . See Suicer, Thesaur. in ívavri before.
'Arréicóvcrig. 1. Over against. occ. M a t . xxi. 2 . xxvii.
'ÁTreXavi'ü), or direXcuj, co, from DTRB 6 1 .
from, and tkavvta or éXáoj to drive.— To 2. Before, in the presence qf. occ. M a t .
drive away. occ. Acts xviii. 16. [See P l u - xxvii. 24. Acts iii. 16. Rom. iii. 18. [Gen.
tarch. M a r . p . 4 1 0 . and D'Orvill. ad xxv. 9. xlix. 30.]
Charit. vi. 1. p . 512.] 3. In opposition to, against. occ. A c t s
tj^p° ' A-K¿Xcypbg, 5, b, from aTcfiXe-ypcii xvii. 7- [Ecclus. xxxvii. 4 . ]
perf. pass. of aVeXÉy^w lo refute, confute ; 'ATTEVÍI), from dirb from, and tVw to
which from airo intensive, and éXéyx a í o
speak.— To renounce, disclaim. occ. 2 Cor.
refute. iv. 2. On which passage Raphelius shows
I. Refutation, confuiaíion, in which t h a t H e r o d o t u s often uses the same form
sense it is used in the profane w r i t e r s . of the V. i. e. t h e lst aor. mid. CNTENRÁPR¡v,
I I . Disgrace, disrepute, occ. A c t s xix. in the same sense. [ T h e verb signifies to
'17. ['EXsy^uoc oceurs 2 K i n g s xix. 3 . Isa. forbid. Joseph. A . J. iii. 12. 1. X e n . M e m .
xxxvii. 3 . as upbraidings.~] i. 2. 3 3 . Tofail. Xen. de re E q . viii. 5 ;
'ATcíXcvtitpoc, n, ó, i/, from cirro from, and so in the middle, to forbid myself
;:iid tXivtirmir free. — // man freed from. an'/ thing, lo give it up. H e r o d . vi. 10. 1
 A n E 73
A ni
K i n g s xi. 2, toforbid. See Zech. xi. 12.
V I . To return. M a t . ii. 2 2 . viii. 2 1 .
Job x. 3.] ix. 7. xiii. 46. L u k e i. 2 3 . G e n . iii. 19.
xxxi. 13. See Suidas, v. dntKQn.
' A T T í p a j T o c , a, b, í¡, from a neg. and Schl.
irepaívu to jXnisk, which from Trépete a adds a variety of other meanings which a r e
bound, end.—Endless, reducible to one or other of t h e above
infinite, or useless,
ending in nothing. occ. 1 T i m . i. 4, where heads.]
see E l s n e r , W e t s t e i n , K y p k e , and M a c -
'A7r¿x ) from airo from, and E^U to have,
w

k n i g h t . [Job xxxvi. 26. Schl. says, as xe- be.

(laívu) signifies also to prqfit, dirépavroQ is I. To receive, obtain from another, so
here useless, according to Kypke, Obs. Sacr. to have. M a t . vi. 2, 5. L u k e vi. 2 4 . Phil.
i. p . 3 4 7 , who gives instances from GEcume- iv. 18. Philem. ver. 15. Josephus applies
nius and Theophyl. See S t r a b . ii. p . 1 6 7 . ]
this V. as in M a t . vi. 'AXX' ¿y¿> plv ' A Ü E ' -
[fgp0 'ATTEpitrTrcWwc, Adv. from a V e p t V - X í i ríje dtreteíaQ TO* ' E I U T I M I O N , B u t I
•TraToe without disiraction, indeed receive or have the reward of m y
which from a
«eg. and wEpiairáia to distract, which see. wickedness. D e Bel. lib. i. cap. 3 0 . § 6.
— Without distraction, or distracting A n d Wetstein on M a t . cites from P l u t a r c h ,
care.
Solón, p . 90. F . t h e very phrase T O ' N —
T h a t t h i s is t h e t r u e sense of t h e word,
Raphelius has confirmed by citations from M I S G C T N ' A Ü E ' X E I ; a n d ó n P h i l . i v . 18,
* Arrian and P o l y b i u s ; agreeably to which from Arrian, E p i c t e t u s , lib. iii. cap. 2 .
Hesychius explains it by dfiepípvws with- ' A I T E ' X E I S awávra. [ S e e Gen. xliii. 2 3 .
out carefulness, N u m b . xxxi. 19- A t h e n . xiv. p . 6 4 9 .
dújpovríríüc without an-
xiety (so CEeumenius), and í/crú^we quietly. Gataker. ad M a r k Antón, iv. 4 9 . p . 135.
occ. 1 Cor. vii. 3 5 . T h e A d j . aTrepíaira^oe Fischer, de V i t . Lex. N . T . Prol. xxvii. p .
occurs Ecclus. xii. 1, which see, and comp. 12. 59.]
ver. 2 . [Polyb. ii. 2 0 . 12.] I I . To be distant, or at a distance.
'AirepÍT/inTos, a , b, i), Kal rb—ov, from a L u k e vii. 6. xv. 20. xxiv. 13. I t is t h u s
neg. and rcEpirp-nroQ circumeised, which applied figuratively to the heart. M a t . xv.
from •KEpiréjivu) to circumeise, which see.— 8. M a r k vii. 6. [Polyb. H . v i . 2 5 . X e n .
Uncircumcised. occ. A c t s vii. 5 1 . comp. de Vect. iv. 43.]
Lev. xxvi. 4 1 . Ezek. xliv. 7, 9- J e r . vi. I I I . 'A-Kí-^ei, impersonally, It is enough,
!0. i x . 2 5 . in L X X , and see H e b . and sufficient. occ. M a r k xiv. 4 1 . q. d. I have
E n g . Lexicón in blif.—In t h e L X X it exhorted you enough to watchfulness; I
always answers to t h e H e b . V"))/ having need not now give you any further direc-
the superjtuous foreslein uncircumcised; tions oii this subject. 'ATTÉ-^EI is used in
except in Josh. v. 7, where a - £ p i r p j r a e t h e same sense ( t h o u g h an Unusual one)
occurs for t h e H e b . a n í s "iba they had by Anacreon, O d e xxviii. line 3 3 ,
not circumeised them.
' Airípyppai, from a V o from, and ep^ppat *A.rXE XEI* [Z'KÍ'JTUI yup avrnv
to go. ' Tis noa> enough; herself I see.
I. To go, go away, deparl. Mat. ii. 2 2 .
viii. 15, 19. ix. 7. x. 5. xxv. 4 6 . & al. freq. Comp. W e t s t e i n . [Schl. says t h a t t h e
I I . To goforth. M a t . iv. 24. meaning is, Ye have slept enough. Schw.
I I I . To pass away. Rev. ix. 12. xi. 14. (Comm. p . 147.) says dnéyEi (&pa), The
xviii. 14. xxi. 4. [Song of S. ii. 11. A r r . time is absent, or the proper hour (for
Diss. E p . iv. c. 3 . ] sleep) is absent.]
[IV. To go. Mat. viii. 19. x. 5. xiv. 15, I V . 'AKzypiiai, Mid. To keep oneself
25. xvi. 2 1 . xxviii. 10. Mark v. 24. J o h n from, to abstain or refrainfrom. Acts xv.
iv. 47. Rom. xv. 2 8 . Gal. i. 17. Gen. xxiv. 20, 29.
56. xix. 2. Isa. xxxvii. 3 7 ; and this is 'ATTI^ÉÍO, ¿o, from a neg. a n d rrktgfaüh,
its sense where it is used with oVío-w and belief.
a genitive, io go after any one, i. e. to be I. Not to believe, to disbelieve. occ.
his diseiple. M a r k i. 20. John xii. 19, and Mark xvi. 11, 16. L u k e xxiv. 1 1 , 4 1 .
without the addition, L u k e xvii. 2 3 . A c t s xxviii. 24. R o m . iii. 3 . [Sometimes
V. To come. Mark ¡ii. 13. vii. 30. it is to disobey, as in the three last places,
Luke xxiii. 3 3 . Mat. viii. 3 3 . where see and in Xen. S y m p . iv. 4 9 . Apol. Soc. E .
Bois. Coüat. Vet. I n t p . Gen. xiii. 2 1 . ¡4. Polyb. iii. 98. 1.]
I I . To be unfailhful. occ. 2 T i m . ii, 13.
* Scc ¡llrs. Cartcr's N o t e (;•) on her Translation where it is opposed to nitÓQfaithful. See
o í Arriari's E p i c t e t u s , book iii. c a p . 2 2 , § 8. | Doddridge on t h e place, but comp. R o m .
 A n o
iii. 3 . [ S o A q . Symm. and Theod. in Ps.
xxiv. 3.]
'A7ri«r/a, a s , i), from a neg. and irkiQ
faith. Want offaith, unbelief. M a t . xiii.
5 8 . M a r k xvi. 14. Rom. iv. 2 0 . 1 T i m . i.
13. H e b . iii. 12, 19. comp. M a r k ix. 2 4 .
[ I n M a t . xiii. 5 8 . M a r k vi. 6. xvi. 14.
R o m . iii. 3 . xi. 20. Heb. iii. 12, 19, it
seems to be w'ilful disbelief. I n 1 T i m . i.
13. ignorance from disbelief]
"ATTI^OQ, a, b, ?/, Kai rb—ov, from a neg.
and 7n?ó£ credible, believing.
I . Iri a passive sense, spoken of a t h i n g ,
Not lo be believed, incredible. occ. Acts
xxvi. 8. [ P o l y b . xviii. 18, 7. Xen. Symp.
iv. 5 0 . ]
I I . Not to be trusted, unfaitliful, as a
servant, L u k e xii. 4 6 . Unfaithful, as
Christians, T i t . i. 15. See M a c k n i g h t .
[ S c h l . says, Hesitating, in T i t . i. 1 5 . ]
I I I . In an active sense, Not believing.
M a t . xvii. 17- J o h n x x . 2 7 . Henee,
IV. I t denotes one who disbelieveth the
Gospel of Christ, an unbeliever, an in-
fidel. 1 Cor. vi. 6. vii. 12, 1 3 , 14, 15. 2
Cor. vi. 15.
'ATTXÓOC, 5e¡ ór¡, r¡; ¿ov, av; from a d e -
n o t i n g unity, or together, and rréXio to be.
Comp. AnrXóoc.
I . Simple, uncompounded. I n this sense
i t is used in t h e profane writers.
I I . Applied to t h e eye, Clear. " I t is
opposed to an eye overgrown with film,
which would obstruct t h e sight." D o d -
d r i d g e . — " Sound. Both Chrysostom and
Theophylact represent t h e Greek word
as synonymous here with iyir/Q, s a n u s . "
Campbell, occ. M a t . vi. 2 2 . L u k e xi. 3 4 .
'ATr\órr)c, rjroc, r;, from airXóoc.
I . Simplicily, sincerily, purity qfmiiid,
freedom from sinister designs or views.
occ. Rom. xii. 8. 2 Cor. i. 12. xi. 3 . E p h .
vi. 5. Col. iii. 22. [1 Chron. x x i x . 17.
W i s d . i. 1.*]
I I . Bountifulness, liberality, springing
from simplicily or sincerity of m i n d . occ.
2 Cor. viii. 2 . ix. 1 1 , 13. comp. Rom. xii.
S, where see Kvpke. [ S e e K r e b s . Obs.
Flav. p . 3 0 2 . ] — I n the L X X this N . an-
swers to the H e b . lito uprightness, and to
¡Zín integrily.
'A-!r\wc, Adv. from ci7rXóo£.—Bounti-
fully, liberally. occ. James i. 5.
'ALTO' (by apostrophe, before a vowel
with smooth breathing, ¿nr ; with an,
aspírate one, ¿i<f; L a t . a b ; G e r m . ab, af;
Sax. o p ; E n g . of, ojf), perhaps from t h e
* [ S e c also T e s t . x i i . P a t . in F a b . i. p . 0 2 4 . ]
4 A II O
Heb. a « denoting t h e first author, or ori-
ginal. B u t , when ¿nrb implies motion,
may it not be best derived from t h e H e b .
F]i> tofly away?
I. A preposition governing a genitive
case.
1. [From, denoting t h e efficient cause.
M a t . xi. 19. xii. 3 8 . xvi. 2 1 . M a r k viii.
3 1 . L u k e xvii. 2 5 . Rom. i. 7. Vence from
God. xiii. 1. 1 Cor. i. 3 , 3 0 . iv. 5. 2 Cor.
i. 2 . Phil. i. 2 8 . J a m e s i. 17. Rev. xii. 6.
1 Mace. viii. 6. See D u k . ad T h u c . i. 25.]
2. [From.áenoÜBgthe place from which.
M a t . iv. 25. from Galilee. xxvii. 5 1 . M a r k
xv. 3 8 . Rom. xv. 18. H e b . viii. 11.]
3 . [From or away from, denoting local
removal or distance from. M a t . xxviü. 2.
rolled t h e stone away from t h e door. L u k e
xxiv. 2. J o h n x x i . 8. M a t . vii. 2 3 . xxvii.
4 1 . Henee i t is sometimes prefixed to
t h e description of t h e distance, and m u s t
be rendered, At the distance of. J o h n xi.
18. x x i . 8. Rev. xiv. 20. So Joseph. D e
Bell. iii. 8, 7, 9, 7. V. 2 , 1. See K y p k . i.
p. 390.]
4. [From, denoting an object from which
one is freed, or of which one is deprived.
Mat. i. 2 1 . Save t h e ~oeorAefrom their sius.
vi. 13. M a r k v. 3 4 . L u k e iii. 7. vii. 2 1 . Rom.
v. 9. 1 Cor. x . 14. 2 Cor. vii. 1.1 J o h n i. 7.]
5. [From, denoting t h e person so freed,
&c. L u k e vii. 2. from whom seven devils
had gone out, 3 3 , 3 5 . xii. 20. Rom. xi. 26.
M a r k xiv. 35.]
6. [Out of, as out qf a place. M a t . iii.
16. vii. 4. xiv. 2 9 . xxiv. 3 1 . M a r k vii. 4.
L u k e xxiii. 26.]
7. From. See M a t . i. 17, 2 4 . iii. 7, 13.
viii. 1 , 1 1 . M a r k vii. 4 , where observe t h a t
¿nrb ayópae is an expression very agree-
able to the styJe of t h e Greek writers, and
may be rendered either being come from
the market, or after market. T h u s 'AlJO v
AEI'IINOY after supper. Theophrast.
Char. E t l i . cap. 24. Comp. Sense 3 , H o m e r
U. viii. line 5 3 . and see Raphelius, E l s n e r ,
Wolfius and Kypke. Acts xvi. 3 3 . " washed
from the stripes, i. e. the blood from t h e m . "
Bp. Pearce.
8. From, after, of time. M a t . ii. 16.
L u k e ii. 3 6 . J o h n xi. 5 3 .
9. From, since, of time. Rom. i. 20.
(Comp. Ecclus. xvi. 26.) Acts xxiv. 11 ;
where observe ¿i<f TJQ agrees with SvoSem-
rr¡£ iipépae understood.
10. From, for, by reason qf. L u k e xix.
3 . x x i . 2 6 . M a t . xiii. 44. xviii. 7. J o h n
xxi. 6, where Kypke shows t h a t this señse
of ¿nrb is common in t h e Greek writers.
 A n o
11. From, qf, denoting t h e m a t t e r .
M a t . iii. 4 .
12. From, by, by means of. Mat. vii. 16.
13. Of time, At the distance qf, at, on.
Acts x. 30. airó reráprrjc i)pépas a t t h e di-
stance of, or on, the fourth day, reckoning
backwards. Comp. A c t s xxiii. 2 3 .
14. Of some of as if ri were understood.
L u k e xxiv. 4 2 . Acts v. 2, 3 .
15. Before, in presence of. coram, an-
swering to t h e H e b . »3Qtí. 1 John ii. 28.
So repeatedly, Ecclus. xii. 17, 18.
16. Of, belonging to, a place. J o h n xi.
1. Acts xvii. 1 3 . H e b . xiii. 24. Comp.
M a t . xv. I.
17- R e d u n d a n t , ' A x o pciKpoOev, M a t .
xxvi. 5 8 , where see Wetstein. 'A7ró aviodev,
M a t . xxvii. 5 1 . MarJc xv. 3 8 .
I I . In coinposition it denotes,
1. Removal or passing, as aVoTrXEw to
sailfrom or away.
2. Separation or privation, as diroKoirrii)
lo cut off, ¿uroKEc¡)a\í'(io to behead, cxVo&Wic
a putting off.
3 . Back again, as airoSíddipi to give
back, vender, cnroxadí^npi to restore.
4. Intenseness, as cureKSé-)(opai to expect
earnestly.
'AiroéeuVd), from airo from, out, a n d
¡Salvia to go, come.
I . To go or come out qf a ship. occ.
L u k e v. Í2. John xxi. 9. T h u s also fre-
quently used in the G r e e k writers. See
Wetstein on L u k e . [ T l i u c . i. 116. iv.
90
I I . To happen, to come, or turn out, as
we s a y ; so t h e L a t i n evenio to happen
(whence our English event, &c.) is in like
manner from é out, and venio to come. occ.
L u k e xxi. 1 3 . P h i l . i. 19. T h e G r e e k
writers often apply t h e V. in this sense.
See Wetstein on Luke. [ J o b xiii. 5. xv. 3 1 .
aiid especially Exod. ii. 4. J o b xi. 6. xiii.
16. See T i m e . iii. 9 3 . iv. 3 9 . Xen. Symp.
iv. 4 9 . A r t e m i d . iii. 67. A r r i a n . E p i c t .
iv, 10.]
'AiroSáXXw, from ¿iirofrom, and ¡jáXXio
to east. 1. To east off, or away. occ. M a r k
x. 50. [ 2 . Metaphorically, to lose. H e b .
x. 3 5 . So Isa. 1. 30. Xen. Me. xii. 2. Heliod.
v. 22. and often in Greek a u t h o r s . ]
'AwofíXéTUú, from ¿iwb intensive, and
pXéwio to look.—To behold, or look ear-
nestly or attentively ; respicio, suspicio.
occ. H e b . xi. 26. So in Xcnophon, H i s t .
Grajc. !ib vi. we have 'II oij irarple " E I 2
o-E 'AHOBAETIEI, T h y country looks ear-
nestly at thee. See Wetstein aud K y p k e .
[Sehleus. says, Ralioncm habeo, 1 take
o A II O
into account, and quotes Arrian. Epict. ii.
16, 46. Polyb. i i . 3 9 , 10. See K r e b s . O b s . ;
Flav. p . 3 8 6 , and Bishop Bull's Sermón
on t h e t e x t . I n P a r k h u r s t ' s sense it oc-
eurs, Ps. xi. 4. Song vi. 1. I n t h e T e s t ,
xii. P a t . a p u d F a b r . i. p . 694, it is, To
look to, or have respect ¿o.]
'AiróSXriros, ó, r), Kai rb—ov, from a7ro-
€é€Xnrai 3d pers. perf. pass. of á7ro€áXXw.
That is to be rejected. occ. 1 T i m . iv. 4 .
[ J e r . xxii. 28.]
'A7ro€oX)/, %, r¡, from t\irot>ít>oXa perf.
mid. of áirotáXXio.
I . A casting off, rejection. occ. Rom.
xi. 15.
I I . A loss. occ. A c t s xxvii. 2 2 . [Jos.
A n t . ii. 6, 9.]
E§gp° 'Airoyívopai from airo from, and
yívopai to become.—To die; in M'hich
sense it is frequently used by t h e G r e e k
writers, particularly * Herodotus. See
Raphelius and Wetstein. occ. 1 P e t . ii. 2 4 .
Comp. Rom. vi. 2.
'ATroypa<j>r), ije, r¡, from áiroypáipio, which
see. An enrolment or register of persons
and estafes, occ. A c t s v. 37- L u k e ii. 2 .
'Avrr) j) airoypatyr) irpiorn íyérero yiyepovtv-
ovroe rr)s ~2tvpíaQ K.vpr¡vía. In t h e first
edition, I embraced t h e explanation of t h i s
difficult passage which is given, a n d a t
large illustrated, by L a r d n e r in his C r e -
dibility of Gospel H i s t . p t . i. book 2. ch.
1. namely, " This was the first enrolment
qf Cyrenius, governor qf Syria, i. e. who
was afterwards governor qf Syria, and
best known among t h e Jews by t h a t title."
B u t I am since convinced, by D r . George
Campbell's Notes on L u k e ii. 2 , t h a t t h i s
exposition, t h o u g h very plausible, will not
stand t h e test of aecurate criticism (comp.
L u k e iii. 1. A c t s xviii. 12, in t h e G r e e k ) ;
and on t h e whole I concur with t h e i n t e r -
pretation of t h e last-mentioned learned
writer (whom see). " This first register
took eífect {lyívzro, comp. M a t . v. 18. vi.
10. xxvi. 4 2 . L u k e ii. 2 . - x x i i . 4 2 . M a t .
xviii. 19. 1 Cor. xv. 54.) when Cyrenius
was president of Syria." A n d t h i s effect
is w h a t A c t s v. 37 refers t o ; on which
t e x t , as also on L u k e ii. 2, see W e t s t e i n
and Josephus, A n t . lib. xviii. cap. 1. § 1.
[ M r . Benson, in his Essay on t h e Chrono-
logy of t h e Life of Christ, (p. 129.) s u g -
gests t h e following reading, éyévero irpúrij
r¡ yyepovevovTOQ, and translates, This lax-
ing took place before that which took place
when Cyrenius, &c. T h e transposition
* [ S e e T h u c . ü , 3 1 . Herod.. i i . 8 5 . ]
 A n o 70 A n o

ís justified by M S S . and his conjecture I I I . To exhibit as appointed, or to

t h a t one of t h e three E t a s was omitted
b y t h e transcriber is certainly happy.
B u t it need not be added t h a t correc-
tions of t h e S S . can hardly ever be ad-
missible.]
'Airoypáijxi), from airo intens. and ypátjxo
to write.
I. To cnrol, register. occ. L u k e ii. 1, 3 ,
5 . T h i s is a term referring to the Román
polity, and particularly to their Census;
for w h a t the epitome of Livy expresses by
census actus, a census was taken, Dio de~
notes by ¿nroypa<pác; iiroir)o-a.TO, he made
enrolments. A n d we learn from Florus,
t h e Román historian, t h a t * t h e business
of t h e Census was " to make a distinct re-
gister of every one's estáte, dignity, age,
employment and office." Such was t h e
'Airoypa<¡ir) or Census now made by A u -
g u s t u s Ceesar. See more in Grotius on L u k e
ii. I. in Lardner, as cited under 'Aitoypa<jiñ,
in P r i d e a u x Connect. p t . ii. book 9-. anno
5. and in Bp. Chandler's Vindication of
Defence of Christianity, vol. ii. p . 4 3 7 .
[ T h e first census ( L u k e ii. 1.) in H e -
rod's time, was from t h e mere ambition or
curiosity of A u g u s t u s , and was merely a
list of ñames, and, as it seems, not confined
to J u d e a ; t h e second (Acts v. 37.) ten
years after, and after Herod's death, was
an account of property. See Joseph. A n t .
xvii. 13, 1. xviii. 1, l . J
II. To be registered, enrolled, in a
figurative and spiritual sense. occ. H e b .
xii. 2 3 . Comp. N u m . iii. 40, 4 2 , 4 3 .
'AiroStiKvvbi, áirodeÍKvvpi, and obs. áiro-
SeÍKto, from <x7ro intensive, and ¿Wvúui or
SEÍKO) to show.
I. To show openly or publicly. occ. 2
T h e s s . ii. 4. O n which t e x t Wetstein
shows t h a t the Greek writers apply t h e
V . in like manner to a declaration qf dig-
nity. T h u s , among other passages, he
cites from Strabo, ' A n E ' A É I S E N ¿tvrov
¡ia&tXía, H e declared him k i n g ; and from
Diodorus Siculus, SivOpovov 'EAYTO'N
'AnOAEI'KNYNTOSrS pamXéwc role S¿>-
CEKCI Qedíe, T h e king showing or declaring
himself of equal dignity with t h e twelve
•gods. [ D i o d . Sic. xvi. 9 2 . ]
I I . [ T o show or set forth publicly, or
prove. Acts ii. 2 2 . xxv. 7- Xen. de R e p . i.
1. Mem. iii. 6, 8. See Krebs. Obs. Flav.
p. 168. 1 Mace. x . 34. xiv. 2 3 .
* " O m n i a patrimonii, dignitatis, astatis, artium
officiorumque discrimina in tabulas referre." Flor,
from oneself, as it were,jTor a price. Acts
lib. i. cap. (i. C o m p . Cicero, D e L c g . l i b . iii. c a p . 3 .
appoint, make, or constitule. 1 Cor. iv. 9.
Xen. de Re E q . i. 5. Isoc. P a n e g . c. 2 3 .
H e m s t e r h . ad Lucian. i. p . 4 6 0 . and I r -
misch. ad Herodian. i. p . 121.]
'A#ó&iJ¿e, me, A t t . tiog, r), from áiroSn-
KVÍIÍO. Proof demonstration. occ. 1 Cor. ii
4. [Pol. v. 10. 3.]
'A-KoSeKarób), Si, from airo from, and Be-
Karóu) to tithe.
I. To pay the tithe or tenth. occ. M a t .
xxiii. 23* L u k e xi. 42. xviii. 12. [ T e s t ,
xii. P a t . F a b . i. 5 6 9 / ]
I I . To take, or receive, tithe from, to
tithe. I n this sense, occ. H e b . vii. 5 . —
So in t h e L X X awoleKaróta answers to
the H e b . lüty in t h e senses both of paying
tithe, Gen. xxviü. 22. D e u t . xiv. 22. x x v i .
1 2 ; — a n d of receiving it, 1 Sam. viii.
15, 17.
'A7rócWroe, ó, i¡, Kai to—ov, from áiro-
Mx°r '—Acceptable,
iat
pleasing, grateful.
occ. 1 T i m . ü. 3 . v. 4. [ P l u t . O p p . x .
p. 380.]
'Airohéxppai, from a7ró intensive, and
Síx°P ai
t° receive.
I. Of persons, To receive kindly or hos-
pitably. occ. L u k e viii. 40. Acts xv. 4.
xviii. 2 7 . [ x x v i ü . 3 0 . 2 Mace. iii. 9 . ]
I I . Of God's word, To receive or em-
brace heartily. occ. A c t s ii. 4 1 . [ X e n .
Mem. i. 2. B . ]
I I I . Of benefits, To receive or accept
gratefully. occ. Acts xxiv. 3 . [Schl. and
Br. say, To celébrate or praise. See J o s .
A n t . vii. 12. Phil. L e g a t , ad Caium, p .
1014. in Flacc. p . 979. Krebs. Obs. Flav.
p. 2 5 3 . ]
Jgg§?° 'AiroSrjpéoi, ü, from á.7róSripo£.
I . To go from one's own people, lo go
or travel abroad, or into aforeign country.
M a t . xxi. 3 3 . [xxv. 14. M a r k xii. 1. L u k e
xv. 13.
I I . To be, or Uve abroad. L u k e x x . 9.
iElian. V . H . xiii. 14. Lys. O r a t . iii. p . 73.]
fggp 'Airódripoc, a, ó,
0
from divo from,
and Sijpoc a people.—Going from one's
people, going abroad, or into a strange
country. occ. Mark xiii. 3 4 .
'A-iroSíSuipi, from ¿LITOfrom or back again,
and SÍSÍO/JU. to give.
I. To give, bestow. 2 T i m . iv. 8. comp.
Rom. ii. 6, 7.
I I . Of testimony or wituess, To give,
bear. Acts iv. 3 3 . [See D ' O r v i l l . ad
Charit. p . 5 9 7 . ed. Lips.]
I I I . 'AiroSíSopai, Mid. To sell, give
v. 8. vii. 9, H e b . xii. 16. [ S e e G e n . x x v .
 A n o 77
3 3 . D e u t . ii. 2 8 . Xen. de Vect. c. 5.
§ 4. Hell. i. 6, 9. ii. 3 , 18. Polyb. iii.
22. 9.]
I V . To reivard, recompense, vender,
whether in a good or bad sense, as Mat.
vi. 4, 6. xvi. 27. Rom. ii. 6. xii. 17. 1
T i m . v. 4. 2 T i m . iv. 14. [ S c h l . adds,
1 Pet. iii. 9. Rev. xviii. 6. x x i i . 12. E c -
clus. xi. 26. xii. 6. xvii. 19. Isa. Ixv. 6.
J o b xxxiv. 2 1 . ]
V. To repay, restore, return. L u k e iv.
20. ix. 4 2 . x. 3 5 . x i x . 8. [1 Mace. xii.
46.]
V I . To pay, as a debt. M a t . v. 26.
xviii. 2 5 , 26. [ L u k e vii. 4 2 . ] — t r i b u t e ,
&c. Rom. xiii. 7. M a t . xxii. 21.—hire.
M a t . xx. 8. [ S e e also 1 Cor. vii. 2 2 . ]
V I I . 'ÁKoSídiupi Xóyov, To give or ren-
der an account. M a t . xii. 36. Luke xvi, 2.
A c t s xix. 40. H e b . xiii. 17- 1 Pet. iv. 5 .
So Plato in Phaedon, 'Yplv roíc Sacábale
¡3iS\opai rov A O T O N ' A n O A O V N A I , To
you, the j u d g e s , I will give an account.
Comp. Aóyoe I X .
V I I I . W i t h a D a t . of the Person 'ATTO-
StSwpt ópKüs, To render or perform one's
oatks to. M a t . v. 3 3 . Comp. D e u t . xxiii.
2 1 , 2 3 . [ J o b xxii. 2 7 . Ecclus. xviii. 2 2 .
Xen. Mem. B. ii. 1 0 . ]
I X . 'AiroSíSupt icapirov, To return; i. e.
to produce, or yield, friiit, as a tree. Rev.
xxii. 2. T h i s is a p u r é Greek phrase
used by Herodotus (lib. i. cap. 193.) and
Pausanias, b u t by them applied to t h e
earth. See Wetstein, and comp. H e b .
xii. 11.
If^T" 'AiroSiopí(h), from cWo from, and
Swpi£ti¡ io divide, sepárate, which from
<¡ia denoting separation, and bpi(io to limit,
which see.— To sepárate from, other Chri-
stians namely. occ. J u d e ver. 19.
'AiroSoKtpá^w, from áirofrom, and ¿Wi-
p¿i(w to prove.—To reject, disalloiv. M a t .
xxi. 4 2 . M a r k viii. 3 1 . Heb. xii. 17. See
L X X in J e r . vi. 30. Isocrates ad Demon.
cap. x x i . — T a c ^tvdopévee 'AnOAOKI-
M A ' Z O M E N , W e disapprove liars. [ T h e
word properly is used of metáis which could
not bear t h e Soiapoe.]
Elgp 'Airocsoj/ji, iJQ, ?/, from anroíéío^a.
0
perf. mid. of diroSé-^opat.—Acceptation,
acceptance, reception. occ. 1 T i m . i. 15.
iv. 9. comp. 'AiroMxopai, I I . Elsner on 1
T i m . i. 15, shows t h a t the phrase dwodo-
JQK a¿,tov, in the Greek writers, means
rvorthy io be received with approbation,
praise, and veneration. Comp. also W e t s .
[See Diod. Sic. iv. p . 239. v. p . 2 9 2 .
Diog. Laert, v. 3 7 . Polyb, H i s t , i i . 5 5 .
A n o
Joseph. A n t . vi. 14, 4. K y p k e Obs. Sac.
ii. p . 3 5 1 . Krebs. Obss. Flav. p . 2 5 4 ,
349.]
£|§§p 'A7ró0£cng, toe, A t t . eti>e, ?'/, from
¿uroTÍdiipt to put amay.—A puiting away
or off. occ. 1 Pet. iii. 2 1 . 2 P e t . i. 14.
'ArrodriKri, r¡e, í¡, from ¿moTÍQr¡pi to lay
up.—A repository, partieularly for corn,
a granary. M a t . iii. 12. vi. 26. [xiii. 3 0 .
L u k e iii. 17- xii. 10.]
'A~oQr¡aavpí'(iú, from ¿ T T O intensive, and
Sr¡cravpí¿¡<o to treasure.—To treasure up
in safety and security. occ. 1 T i m . vi. 19.
comp. M a t . vi. 19, 2 0 . — T h i s verb is used
by A r r i a n , E p i e t e t . lib. iii. cap. 22. p . 3 1 4 .
edit. Cantab. 1655 ; and by Lucian, P s e u -
domant. tom. i. p . 8 7 7 , edit. Bened. [ A r -
temid. i. 7 5 . ]
'ÁTrod\í€w, from curo intensive, and
$\í&u) to p?-ess. To press closely, to
squeeze. occ. L u k e viii. 4 5 . [ N u m b . xxii.
25. Aq. E x o d . iii. 9.]
'AiroQvíiaKii), from cirro from, or intens.
and •&)'»)oro to die.
I. To die a natural death, applied both
to men and animáis. M a t . viii. 3 2 . x x i i .
24, 2 7 . xxvi. 3 5 . & al. freq. 'AiriQvycncev,
3d pers. sing. imperf. was a-dying, Luke
viii. 4 2 , where Wetstein shows t h a t t h e
G r e e k writers use t h i s form of the V . i n
the same sense. T h u s A r r i a n , E p i e t e t .
lib. ii. cap. 2 3 . p . 2 4 9 . edit. Cantab. "Ore
' A n E ' O N H S K E N , W h e n it was a-dying;
and Maximus T y r i u s , x x i v . 9, MÉp<¡>erat
TÍ) SavdÍTTTrri óSvpopévrj ¿rt (read ore)
" A n E ' 0 N H 2 K . E , H e blames X a n t h i p p e for
bewailing when he was a-dying.
I I . 'AiroQavíív rjj apapria, To be dead
to sin, as t h e t r u l y r e g e n é r a t e a r e , b y
having renounced and abaudoned it, in
consequence of t h e i r baptismal engage-
ments to a canformity with C h r i s t in his
death, Rom. vi. 2. comp. Col. iii. 3 : B u t
when the expression is applied t o C h r i s t ,
it means to die for, or on account of, sin,
i. e. in order to make an atonement a n d
satisfaction for it. Rom. vi. 10. comp. H e b .
ix. 2 6 , 2 8 . T h u s I wrote in t h e former
e d i t i o n s ; b u t m u s t now observe, t h a t in
Rom. vi. 2, 10, 1 1 , M a c k n i g h t , whom see,
understands rr¡ apaprlq. as t h e dative of
the instrument or cause, dead by sin, so
¡ijv ra 9ef¿> living by God; and this i n -
terpretation is certainly recommended by
its simplicity in assigning t h e same forcé
of t h e dative both to apapria and OEJÍ, in
all t h e t h r e e t e x t s .
I I I . T y vópif á-rrodaveiv, To be dead ta
the law, i. e. T o have no more dependence
 A n o 7S A n o

on more legal righteousness for justifica- thing hidden or secrct. Rom. ii. 5. viii. 19.
tion and salvation, than a dead man would xvi. 2 5 . Gal. i. 12. L u k e ii. 3 2 , §S>s iis
liave, as being oneself crucified and dead ¿nroKc'iXvíLiv iQvCJv. If this last passage be
together with Christ. G a l . ii. 19. comp. compared with t h e L X X versión of I s a .
Rom. vi. 4 . Col. ii. 20. O r rather we xlix. 6, / have given thee iis <j>S>s íQvüi-
should with M a c k n i g h t , whom see, render for a light of t h e Gentiles, and with t h a t
Gal. ii. 1 9 , / through the law have died of P s . xcviii. 2, Before the Gentiles iurzv
by the law, so Lhat I must Uve by God. KaXvtbe TÍ,V Simioavvr\v ¿IVTS he h a t h r e -
Comp. u n d e r Sense I I . vealed or manifested his righteousness, it
I V . To die, or undergo a dissolution, may seem t h a t t h e words <^wc ¿te ¿uroieíí-
w i t h regard to w h a t it was before, as a Xvl/iv íQvSiv a r e p u t by transposition,
grain of corn t h a t is sown in t h e earth. which S t . L u k e frequently uses, for <¡¡ÜQ
J o h n x ü . 24. 1 Cor. xv. 36. See Clement's iQvüiv US ¿iTroicctXvtpiv a light qfthe Gentiles
1 st Epist. to t h e Corinthians, § 24. C u d - for revelation or manifestalion, namely of
worth's Intellectual System, vol. ii. p . 795. t h e righteousness of God. Comp. Rom. i.
edit. Birch, and Scheuchzer, P h y s . Sacr. 17, and see Grotius in Pole Synops. on
on both t e x t s . L u k e ; or else t h e words m a y be cleared
' AiroKaQi^npt, or 'AwoicaQi'závti), from ¿uro by pointing t h e m , ajüs, á c a7coicáXv¿w,
bucle again, a n d leadírniii or KaQuzávbi to kbvGiv. See Bowyer's Conjeetures.
constiiuie. I I . I t denotes t h e glorious appearing,
I . To restore, as to health or soundness. manifestation, or coming of our Lord t o
occ. M a t . x ü . 13. M a r k iii. 5. viii. 2 5 . j u d g m e n t . 1 Cor. i. 7. 2 Thess. i. 7. 1 P e t .
L u k e vi. 10. See W e t s t e i n on M a t . and 'i. 7, 13. Comp. 1 P e t . iv. 13.
Elsner on Mark. [Lev. xiii. 16. J o b v. 18. ¡"§§p" 'Arroteapacoiáa, as, r¡, from ¿uro
Polyb. ii. 28.] from, and rápct the head (which from H e b .
I I . To restore, reform, applied t o t h e to bend) and cWtw to expect.-—Alien-
reformation w r o u g h t by t h e preaching and tive or earnest expectation, or loolcing for,
m i n i s t r y of J o h n t h e Baptist. occ. M a t . as with t h e neck stretched out, and t h e
xvii. 11. M a r k ix. 12. Comp. L u k e i. 1 6, head thrust forward. o c c Rom. viii. 19.
17, a n d Mal. iv. 6, in L X X . P h i l . i. 20. Polybius, cited b y W e t s t e i n ,
I I I . To restore lost dominión or a u - uses t h e V. ¿uroKapadoidio for carnestly
thority. occ. A c t s i. 6, where K y p k e shows and solicitously observing or attending to ;
t h a t t h e Greek writers use t h e V. in t h e as Josephus likewise does. D e Bel. lib. iii.
same sense with a D a t . of t h e Person a n d cap. 7. § 2 6 , and /cctpaoWÉw, for carnestly
a n Accus. of t h e T h i n g . [Schl. refers t h i s expecting or waiting for, lib. iv. cap. 5.
to sense I I . W i l t thou reform t h e k i n g - § 1. a n d cap. 9. § 2. and lib. v. cap. 1. § 5 .
dom of Israel ?] Xenophon and Herodotus also apply t h e
I V . I n Pass. To be restored, brought, l a t t e r verb in t h e same sense as Josephus.
or sent bucle again. occ. H e b . xiii. 1 9 ; See Blackwall's Sacred Classics, vol. i.
where see W e t s t e i n . [Jer. xvi. 14. Polyb. p. 2 3 6 , and more in Wetstein on R o m .
iii. 5.] [ S c h l . t h i n k s t h a t in Josephus, as well as
'AiroieaXvTrTio, from ¿uro from, and KCI- in Polybius a n d other Greek authors, t h e
Xvirrio to hide, conceal. verb signifies simply to hope or expect.
I . P r o p e r l y , To remove a veil or cover- See A q . P s . xxxvii. 7. x x x i x . 8. cxxx. 5.
ing, a n d so to expose to open view what Prov. x . 2 3 . Hes3'ehius makes t h e simple
was before hidden. verb signify to watch the head or principal
• I I . To malee manifest, or reveal a thing part of the matter. Deyling, i. p . 3 0 4 , says
before secrct or un/cnown. M a t . x . 26. t h a t t h e phrase here ¿UTOK. rí/£ KTÍCTEWS is
L u k e ii. 3 5 . 1 C o r . iii. 13. I t is p a r t i c u - for ?/ KTt'trtc ¿uroKapadoKÜcra in t h e H e b r e w
larly applied to supernatural revelation. manner, and he understands mVte of all
M a t . xi. 25, 27. xvi. 17. 1 Cor. ii. 10. & the converted, because in H e b r e w t h e
al. [See D a n . ii. 2 2 . Amos iii. 7- I t seems phrase creatures, creation, or nations,
to mean simply lo display. Rom. i. 1 7 . ] — means t h e Gentiles. See L i g h t f . H o r .
T h i s word in t h e L X X generally answers H e b . ad M a r k x v i . 15.]
to t h e H e b . W?i to remove, or turn bacle a l U g l 'ArroKaraXXácrcrw, from ¿uro from,
0

g a r m e n t or covering; so to uncover, reveal. and KaraXXáaaiü to change, reconcile.—

'A-KOKaXvipis, ios, A t t . eios, >/, from ¿uro- To change from a state of enmity t o one
naXvTcrto. of friendship, to reconcile. occ. E p h . ii, 1 6.
I. A revelation or manifestalion of a Col. i. 2 0 , 2 1 .
 A n o 79 A no
E||f° 'ATromrá-ao-íc, i o s , A t t . eioc, r¡, from cut off his head, and in t h e apocryphal
&iroKadht¡ixi.—Resioralion, resliiution, re- psalm cli. 6. A n d Raphelius and Alberti
gulation. occ. Acts iii. 2 1 , " where, by ¿Ae cite several passages from Arrian, [Disc.
times qf the resliiution qf all things, is Epict. iii. 26.] where t h a t author applies
understood the day qf judgmenl, and qf it in t h e same sense. Comp. W e t s t e i n
the end qf the morid (comp. A c t s i. 11.) and Kypke on Mat.
which is so called by the A p o s t l e : l s t , ' A T T O ^ X E Í O ) , from áwb back again, and
Because then life shall be restored to t h e C X E Í W lo shul.—To shut to, as a door. occ.
bodies qf the dcad, and t h e image of God, L u k e xiii. 2 5 . T h e L X X use it in t h e
defaced [deperditd) by Adam's fall, shall same sense for t h e H e b . "¡JD, Gen, xix. 10.
be perfectly renemed in t h e blessed. 2dly, & al.
Because to God shall then be restored his ' A T T O / C Ó V - Í I ) , from airo from, off, and
glory, t h e glory namely of his most mise KOWTU) to smitc.
government, not thoroughly discoverable I. To sinile, or cut off. occ. J o h n xviii.
(non agnili) in this world, and of his portier 10, 2 6 . A c t s xxvii. 3 2 . comp. M a r k ix.
which the wicked seemed for some time to 43, 4 5 .
have eluded or escaped, and of his justice, I I . I t oceurs figuratively, Gal. v. 1 2 ;
in virtue of which he will t h e n render to where it denotes either being cut off by
every one according to his works. 3dly, excommunicaiion (see K y p k e and M a c -
Because t h e truth of the divine predictions, k n i g h t ) , or r a t h e r , according to E l s n e r
promises, and threalcnings, shall be then, and Wolíius, being cut offfrom all oppor-
as it were, restored to t h e m , by their exact tunity, hope, and poner of disturbiug the
completion, however scoffers and other Galatian Christians. Elsner shows t h a t
wicked men may have called their veracity awoKÓirrstTdaí is in t h i s view applied b y
into question, 2 Pet. iii. 3 , 4 . " T h u s Polybius to hopes, and Wolfius, t h a t X e -
Stockius. B u t Raphelius, comparing *Acts nophon uses i t for cutting off, or dislodging
iii. 2 1 , with 1 Cor. xv. 2 5 , thinks t h a t enemy's troops from an elevated post. B u t
airotcaráramv properly signifies a settling comp. under"Oc/ií:W. [Schl. t h i n k s t h a t
of all things, or a restoring of them lo a perhaps t h e following (which i s t h e opinión
state qf tranquillity after mars and tu- I of Chrysostom, Theodoret, Theophylact,
mults. T h i s learned and aecurate critic I and A u g u s t i n e ) may be t h e real m e a n i n g :
shows t h a t Polybius applies t h e word in " L e t them if t h e y please not only cir-
this view. Comp. 1 Cor. xv. 24, 2 5 . cumeise b u t m a k e themselves eunuchs."
— [ S c h l . prefers t h e opinión of Lightfoot See cnroicÓTrriü and its derivatives in this
and Knatchbull, who t h i n k t h a t t h e word sense. A r r i a n . E p i c t . ii. 2 0 , 19. H e s y c h .
means (as Iiesycliius shows it sometimes v. á7r(i/ro7ro£ and t h e Schol. of Lucian.
did) perfeclion, consummation, and t r a n s - Cronos. 12. So Grotius and R a p h e -
lates, Until every thing is completed mhich lius.]
mas foretold by the propheis.] ¡ 'ATvÓKpipa, aros, ro, from cnroKéKpi-
'' Airóicupai, from enrb from, and Keipai pai, perf. of ¿nroKpívopai.—A sentence, de-
to lie, be laid. cisión, occ. 2 Cor. i. 9. So Hesychius e x -
I . To be laid up, locally. occ. L u k e xix. plains ¿iirÓKpifia by icarciKpipa condeinna-
20. iion, \¡JÍÍ<¡MV sentence. See Wolfius.
I I . To be laid up, reserved, appointed. 'Airoicpívopai, Mid. and Pass. from Ú7ró
occ. Col. 1. 5. 2 T i m . iv. 8. H e b . ix. 2 7 . from, and ¡epívu lo sepárate, discern,
Elsner on Col. i. 5. shows t h a t this verb judge.
is applied, in the profane as well as in t h e I . Pass. To be separated, selected, in
sacred writers *, to such things as are not t h e profane writers.
only certain, hit of great valué. Comp. I I ; M i d . and Pass. To answer, relum
Kypke. answer, which o u g h t to be done with dis-
'A7roiccfa\í(io, from enrb from, and Ke- crelion, Mat. iii. 15. iv. 4. xxvi. 2 3 , 3 3 . &
<l>a\i) the head.—To cut off the head, be- al. freq. W e t s t e i n on M a t . iii. 15, remarles,
head. occ. Mat. xiv. 10. M a r k vi. 16, 2 8 . t h a t , according to t h e (oíd) grammarians,
L u k e ix. 9. T h e L X X use this word, awoKpidds does not denote ansmering, b u t
1 Sam. xxxi. 9. and (according to the disjoined, or separated. L u c í a n however
Complutensian edition) for ttfxi rVD they uses it in t h e former sense, and t h a t too
in a remarkable passage which is levelled
* [ S e e 2 M a c . xii. 4 5 . H o s . vi. 1 1 . P a u s a n , vii. 2 . against over-nicety in speaking. " To a
D ' O r v i l l . ad Charit. p . 4 6 U ] person of whom Demonax had asked a
 A n o 80 A n o

question, ral VTTEPCITTIKÍOS 'AnOKPIOE'N- authority whatever from t h e M S S . or

T I , and who had answer ed him too A t t i - (ancient) writers.
cally, he said, F r i e n d , I asked you Now, I I . To kill, slay, figuratively, as Christ
b u t you answer me (dirotcpívri) as in the did t h e enmity between the Jews and
days of Agamcmnon." Demonax, tom. i. Gentiles by his cross, E p h . ii. 16. comp.
p . 1008. [ T h i s word signifies to answer ver. 15.—as sin doth by bringing into a
aecusation, M a t . xxvi. 62. xxvii. 12. J o h n state of eternal death, Rom. vii. 11.—as
v. 17. Plat. Apol. Socr. § 2. On the usual the letter of the divine law doth by con-
phrases áiroKpiBdc HITE, &c. (Exod. iv. 1. demning to death and dcstruction, 2 Cor.
D e u t . xxvii. 7.) see Vorst. de Hebr. xxxiii. iii. 6.
p . 606, and on the other side Vitringa, 'ATTOICVÉOI, £>, from airo from, and KVW to
c. v i . ] be pregnant, which see.
I I I . To take occasion to speak or say, I . Properly, Z'o bring forth young, as
not strictly in answering, but in reíation females do. In this sense it is used by
or reference to some preceding circum- the profane writers, b u t not in the N . T .
stance. See M a t . xi. 2 5 . xii. 3 8 . xvii. 4. See Wetstein on J a m e s i. 15. [4 Mace,
xxii. 1. xxvi. 2 5 , 63. M a r k ix. 5, 17. xv. 17.]
L u k e iii. 16. vii. 4 0 . xxii. 5 1 . Rev. vii. 13. I I . To bring forth, as sin doth deatli.
T h e H e b . flJl? to answer, to which t h e V. occ. James i. 15.
drcoKphopai most commonly corresponds, I I I . To beget. occ. James i. IS. (comp.
is sometimes used in t h e O . T . in this latter 1 Cor. iv. 15. 1 Pet. i. 3 , 2 3 ) . So TÍK-EIV,
sense, as J o b iii. 2 . 1 K. xiii. 6. which properly denotes to bring forth as
' ATT óicpitris, wc, A t t . ECOS, j / , from dwoicÉ- t h e femule, is * often spoken of t h e mole,
Kpitjai 2d pers. perf. pass. of áiroKpívo- and St. Paul applies ¿¡bivio to be in labour,
pai. An answer. occ. L u k e ii. 4 7 . x x . to himself. Gal. iv. 19. Lucian, Philopatr.
2 6 . J o h n i. 22. xix. 9. [ J o b xv. 2. Prov. tom. ii. p, 1009, applies this V. to. t h e
XV. 1.] planet M e r c u r y as well as to Venus.
'ATTOKpvTrrii), from airo from, and nptnrrw 'AWOKVXIW, from ano from, and ¡aAiw to
¿o Mde.—To hide, corneal, occ. M a t . xxv. roll.~—To roll away. occ. M a t . xxviü. 2.
18. Col. i. 2 6 . E p h . iii. 9. comp. ver. 5, 6, M a r k xvi. 3 , 4. L u k e xxiv. 2 . — I t is used
&c. & al. thrice in t h e L X X , namely Gen. xxix. 3 ,
'ATróicpvrfioe, a, b, >/, i:ai rb—ov, from 8, 10, in which passages it answers to t h e
diroiíÉKpvaja perf. act. of diroi;pvirT<o. H e b . bl, or bbi to roll, and is in all these,
I . Hidden, concealed. occ. M a r k iv. 22. as in t h e t e x t s above cited from t h e N . T .
L u k e viii. 17. [Herod. ii. 3 5 . Xen. Symp. applied to a stone.
8. 11.] 'ATro\apt>ávio, from oVófrom, and Xa¡u-
I I . Laid up, as treasure in a coffer. occ. ۇvio to take.
Col. ii. 3 . So in Theodotion's versión of I . A c t . and M i d . To receive, get, ob-
D a n . xi. 4 3 , this word answers to t h e N . tain. [Rom. i. 2 7 . iv. 5. Coloss. iii. 2 4 .
• J D 3 0 hidden treasures; and in L X X of 2 J o h n ver. 8. 2 Mace. viii. 6. N u m b .
Isa. xiv. 3 , to 'JDtOD, which likewise denotes xxxiv. 14.
hidden treasures ; so in 1 M a c . i. 23 or 24, I I . To get or receive back. L u k e vi.
we meet with the phrase TOY'S GHSAY- 3 4 . xv. 2 7 . xviii. 30. Chariton. i. 13.
P O r S T0Y 2 An0KPY'$0Y2.
N ,
Polyb. ii. 6 1 , 1 0 . ]
'A-KOKTEÍvtú, from áVo intens. and KTEÍVO) I I I . To receive, as a g u s s t , to enler-
to kill, which from t h e obsolete icráia t h e tain. 3 J o h n , ver. 8.
same (whence in t h e profane writers, im- IV. Mid. To take aside. occ. M a r k vii.
perf. EKTCL, t f c r a e , É'cra, fut. Krf)aoi, & C . ) 3 3 ; where see W e t s t e i n and K y p k e , and
I . To kill, murder, buteher. I t gene- comp. 2 Mace. vi. 2 1 . [Joseph. Bell. ii. 7-
rally implies cruelty and barbarity, truci* P h i l o t . V i t . Apell. vii. c. 18.]
daré. M a t . x. 2 8 . xiv. 5. x x i . 3 5 , 3 8 , 3 9 . 'AwóXavcric, ios, A t t . eios, from ano-
xxii. 6. xxiii. 3 7 . I n M a t . x. 28. L u k e Xaíno to enjoy, from aVó intens. and obso-
xii. 4 , W e t s t e i n and Griesbach, agreeably lete Xavio to enjoy.—Enjoyment, fruition.
to m a n y M S S . and some editions, read occ. H e b . xi. 2 5 . 1 T i m . vi. 1 7 ; where see
¿LTTOKTEVÓVTIOV. T h e former observes, after Wetstein.^—The L X X have once used t h e
Mili ( P r o l e g . p . 109), t h a t cnroKTEivó VTLÚV V. d-n-óXaviú, for t h e H e b . MI") to be sa-
is a poetical word, or r a t h e r no word a t all, tiaied, drunken; E n g . translat. to take
b u t which, in the p r i n t e d editions, has
been received into t h e t e x t without any * See V i g e r u s , D e Idrotism. c a p . v. § 5,
 Ano 81 A I I O

one's Jill. Prov. vii. 18. [ H e m s t . ad L u c . i. picad infavour of oneself, to apologise. I t

p. 101.] is used either transitively with an accusa-
'A7roAE¿7ra>, from airo from, and X E I ' T T W to tive of the thing, as L u k e xii. 11 ; or in-
have. transitively, as A c t s xix. 3 3 . xxiv. 10.
I. To leave, leave behind. occ. 2 T i m . & al.
iv. 13, 2 0 . I I . Applied metaphorically to t h o u g h t s
I I . To leave, forsake. occ. J u d e ver. 6. or reasonings, To apologize, excuse, occ.
I I I . Pass. To be left, remain. occ. H e b . Rom. ii. 15.
iv. 6, 9. x. 26. ' AToXoyla, ae, »/, from aTroXoyéopai.—
'ATTOXEÍ^W, from aVó from, and An apology, a defence, or excuse. A c t s
XEÍ'XW ¿ O Zic/;, which may be either from xxii. 1. xxv. 16. 2 Cor. vii. 1 1 .
t h e H e b . ^nb (for which t h e L X X have 'A7roXa&), from airó from, and Xa'w to
thrice used the simple V. X E / ^ W , and as wash. To wash, wash away, abluo. I n
often the compound E/CXEÍ'XW) > or rather t h e N , T . it is used only in t h e middle
from pb to lick, lap, as a dog, which in voice, and in a figurative and spiritual
like manner the L X X rendered twice by sense, alluding to t h e baptismal washing
A E Í ' ^ W , and once by ¿KXCÍ^W. [See J u d g e s or ablution. occ. Acts xxii. 16. 1 Cor. vi.
vii. 5 . ] — T o lick, as a dog. occ. L u k e 11.
xvi. 2 1 . 'A-n-oXvrpüHTie, ÍOC, A t t . EÍÜC, r¡, from cWo-
'AiroXXvw or dn-óXXvpi, from ciVo intens. Xvrpóít) i o redeem as a eaptive, which from
and óXXíw to destroy. a-^b from, and Xvrpóto to redeem.
I. [To fose.-Mat. v. 29. x. 39, 4 2 . M a r k I . Redemption, as of a-eaptive from
Ix. 4. L u k e xv. 4, 6, 8. James i. 11. Henee captivity.
i t is in the passive, what is lost or fades. I I . In t h e N . T . it denotes figuratively
J o h n vi. 27- D e u t . xxxii. 28. Ecclus. xxix. the spiritual redemption ofmen by the blood
19. viii. 15. In the middle it is frequently of Christ from the bondage qf sin and
applied to animáis which are lost or have death. See Rom. iii. 24, viii. 2 3 . 1 Cor.
wandered. M a t . x. 6. 1 P e t . ii. 2 5 . M a t . i. 30. E p h . i. 7- iv. 3 0 . H e b . ix. 15.
xv. 2 4 , as l l w in Hebrew. 1 Sam. ix. 20. I I I . Deliverance from temporal perse-
Prov. xxxi. 6. See also J e r . xxxi. 2. I t cution or death. occ. L u k e xxi. 2 8 . H e b .
is used in the passive also metaphorically. xi. 3 5 . T h e L X X have used t h e V. á-o-
See John xvii. 12. 1 Cor. ii. 1 8 . ] Xvrpóío for H e b . niS to redeem, E x o d . x x i .
I I . [To destroy or make vain. 1 Cor. i. 8. [Job v. 20.] which s e e ; and for bt« to
19. and perhaps M a r k i. 24. to destroy our vindícate. Zeph. iii. 1. [See D a n . iv. 3 2 .
poner, and then to destroy or spoil in any Sec. Chis.]
may. M a t . i x . 17. and perhaps John vi. 'ATTOXVW, from ct7ro from, and Xvw to
12."] loóse.
I I I . [Tokill. M a t . ii. 13. xii. 14. xxi. I . To loóse, set loóse, reléase, as from a
4 l . xxvi. 5 2 . xxvii. 2 0 . L u k e xi. 5 1 . J o h n bond. I t is spoken of a disease, L u k e xiii.
x. 1 1 . Acts v. 3 7 . 2 Cor. iv. 9. Gen. xx. 4. 12. comp. ver. 16.—of bonds or imprison-
E s t h . ix. 1 1 , 16. 1 Mace. ii. 37- and henee ment, M a t . xxvii. 15, 17, 2 1 , 2 6 . & a l . —
in the passive to be perishing or in danger of punishment, M a t . xviii. 2 7 . [xxvii. 15,
oflife. M a t . viii. 2 5 . M a r k iv. 3 8 . ] 17, 2 1 . M a r k xv. 2 6 . L u k e vi. 3 7 . x x i i .
I V . [ T h e word is used of the destruction 68. xxiii. 16, 17. J o h n xviii. 3 9 . A c t s iii.
or punishment of sinners ih another life. 13. iv. 2 1 . H e b . xiii. 2 3 . Susann. v. 5 2 .
M a t . x. 2 8 . xviii. 14. J o h n iii. 15. Rom. 1 Mace. x . 4 3 . Xen. Mem. iv. 8, 6. A r -
ii. 12. and from this sense of punishment temid. iv. 3 5 . H e m s t e r h . ad Poli. viii. 2,
i t gets t h a t of inficting great pain or evil. 9. Valck. ad Herod. iv. 6 8 . ]
Rom. xiv. 15. (where perhaps it is rather, I I . To dismiss, suffer to depart. M a t .
" to expose one to future punishment by xiv. 15. xv. 3 9 . & al. comp. M a t . xv. 2 3 * .
setting him a bad example.") 1 Cor. viii. —'A-iroXí/opai, Mid. and Pass. To depart,
1 1 , 13. xv. 18. Ecclus. x. 3.—Lastly, ó A c t s xxviii. 2 5 . Polybius, as Raphelius has
'ATTOXXVCJV is used for the Destróyer or shown, uses the verb in t h e same sense.
King of Hell. See Vitringa's Comm. and Comp. H e b . xiii. 2 3 , where see M a c k n i g h t .
B . Newton on t h e Prophecies, iii. 96.] I I I . To dismiss, suffer to depart, from
'AiroXo-yÉopai, Spai, Depon, from airo t h e body, or out of this life. So Elsner cites
from, and Xóyoc a speech.
I. To defend oneself by speech from * [ S e e Gataker. ad M . A n t ó n , x i . 3 . p . 3 1 9 .
some aceusation, to speak in defence, or R a p h e l . A n n o t . P o l v b , p . 4 0 8 . ]
G
 A n o S2 A n o

from Porphyry, cirroXíieiv ra alopcuoe— I ful for one pollided with blood to perfora»
from .ZElian, diroXvuv ra Zrjv, and drroXvciv ' religious services to t h a t god.
ÍK - í v ra críiLiaroe úécrpwv, to dismiss from
the bonds of the body. occ. L u k e ii. 2 9 . X E P S I S' ' A N l ' n T O I X I A í i áiBma SivoV
"A^OJUCÍÍ* ¿'ÍE Ttr\ Ig-t x£?v(*ívE(pfi Kpovi'u-vl
comp. N u m . x x . 2 9 , in L X X , Tobit iii.
" A I M A T I x t a i \vB;ai I I E n A A A r M E ' N O N IU^ÍTO-
13, and W h i t b y , Wetstein and Kypke on aerdect.
L u k e . [ S e e Gen. xv. 2 . N u m b . x x . 2 9 .
J o b iii. 6. and Alex. Mor. Nott. ad quaj-
So JSneas, in Virgil, JEn. ii. line 7 1 9 ,
dam loca N . T . p . 6 3 . ]
speaking of t h e Penates or household
I V . To divorce a wife, discharge or dis-
gods, &c.
miss her by loosing the bond of marriage.
M a t . i. 19. v. 3 1 , 3 2 . xix. 3 . & al. freq. Me helio e tanto digressum et cjcde recenti
So M a r k x. 12, To put aivay a h u s b a n d ; Attrectare n e f a s ; doñee m e ilumine v i v o
an instance of which we have in Salome, Abluero.———
H e r o d t h e Great's sister, of whom Jose-
p h u s , A n t . lib. xv. cap. 7. § 10, says, t h a t Tn me 'tis impious lioly things to bear,
Red as I amfrom slanghter, n e w from w a r ;
having quarrelled with her husband Cos- ' Till in some livhig stream I cleanse the gnilt
tobarus, rríinru ¡xev evdvs clvrif ypappá- O f diré debate, and blood in battle spilt.
riuv, ' A I T - O A Y O M E ' N í I rbv yáfíov, she im- DKYBES.
mediately sends him a bilí of divorcement
t o dissolve t h e marriage. Comp. Bi&Xwv A n d t h e Scholiast on Sophocles' A j a x
11. and Joseph. A n t . lib. xviii. c. 6. § 4 , Flagel. line 6 6 5 , says, "E0oc r¡v iraXaioie,
and lib. x x . c. 6. § 3 . Doddridge's note orav i] (SO'NON 'ANGPÍi'nOY t) dXXdc
CgJ on M a r k x. 12, and Calmet's D i c - crcoáyas irroiav, "YAATI ' A l I O N r i I T E I N
tionary in DIVORCE. T A S X E ' I P A S "EIS KA'GAPSIN TO"Y
ES^HP 'Arropácr aopai, Mid. from divo from, MIA'SMATOS. I t was customary with
and páacru) to wipe off.— To wipe off. occ. t h e ancients, after having hilled a man, or
L u k e x . I I . [Adíen, iv. 149. C * . ] ' other animal, to wash their hands in
'Airovípco, from ano from, and vépoi lo water, in order to cleanse themselvesfrom
give, altribute.— To allot, give. occ. I P e t . the pollution. See also Elsner and W o l -
iii. 7. comp. TÍ'/.II? 1. [See D e u t . iv. 19. fius on M a t . xxvii. 2 4 . [Prov. x x x . 12,
3 Mace. i. 7. iii. 16. Lucían. Caucas. 17- 20.]
Herodian. i. 8.] 'AiroTrÍTrriú, from airo from, and7rí7rríü to
'Arrovlirropcu, Mid. from airo from, and fall.—Tofall off. occ. A c t s ix. 18. [ J o b
víirrtí) to wash.—To wash, as t h e hands, xxix. 2 5 . ]
occ. M a t . xxvii. 2 4 ; where i t h a s been 'ArrOTrXaváüi, ü>, from airbfrom, and 7rXct-
supposed by some, t h a t Pílate, in mashing váu) to seduce.— To seduce. In the N . T .
his hands, had respect to t h e Mosaic or- spiritually applied only. occ. M a r k xiii.
diuance, D e u t . xxi. 1—8. B u t i t should 22. 1 T i m . vi. 10. [Ecclus. iv. 2 2 . xiii. 7,
be considered, t h a t t h e case there m e n - 10. Prov. vii. 2 1 . Polyb. iii. 5 7 , 4 . ]
tioned and t h a t in M a t . are widely differ- "E^p" 'Airo7r\£w, ñ , from curo from, a n d
ent ; and t h a t even if they were similar, irXéco to sail.—To sail away. occ. A c t s
it is by no means probable t h a t a heathen xiii. 4. xiv. 2 6 . xxvii. 16. [Polyb. v. 70, 3.]
governor, and especially one of Pilate's 'AwOTrXvvb), from curo from., and TTXÚVIO
character, should show any regard to what to wash.—To wash, as nets. occ. L u k e v.
he would most probably esteem an instance 2. [ J e r . ii. 2 2 . Ezek. xvi. 19.]
of Jewish superstition. I t seems, t h e r e - Efgp" "A7ro7ri'íy<t>,from ¿uro intensive, and
fore, much more likely, t h a t w h a t he did Trvíyio to cholee.— To cholee, suffocate, " to
was in conformity to t h e notions and cus- cholee by exclusión or intercepción qf air."
toms of t h e Gentiles, who held t h a t the Johnson, occ. M a t . xiii. 7. L u k e viii. 7,
hands merepollutcd by human blood (comp. 3 3 . I n t h e two former passages i t is a p -
u n d e r Kadapí^M I V . ) and mere to be plied t o corn choked by thorns. F o r
cleansed by mashing with water. T h u s " n o t only animáis," says t h e learned D r .
in H o m e r , II. vi. line 2 6 6 , Héctor, when D e r h a m *, " b u t even trees a n d plants,
r e t u r n e d from battle, tells his mother t h a t and the whole vegetable race, owe t h e i r
he fcared t o ofFer libations to J ú p i t e r with
nnmashen hands, for t h a t it was n o t law-
* P h y s i c o - T h e o l o g y , b o o k i. c h . 1. c o m p . b o o k
10, a t the b e g i n n i n g ; a n d N a t u r e D i s p l a y e d , vol.
* [ S e e S p a n h . ad Caffim. H . i n D e l . 1 4 . ] iii. p . 1 8 1 . E n g l i s h edit. l'Jmo.
 A ¡I O S3 A n o

vegetation aud life to this useful e l e m e n t * j 'A-!eoppÍTTTO], from íi-b from, and p'nerio
(the a i r ) — a s is manifest from their glory to east.— To east from or out, to east. occ.
and verdure in a free air, and their be- A c t s xxvii. 4 3 ; on which t e x t Bos Ellips.
coming palé and sickly, languishing and in ' E a u r S , r e m a r k s t h a t eav-ác is u n d e r -
dying, when by a n y means excluded from stood, and produces a parallel ellipsis from
it." W h a t a proper emblem, therefore, is Lucían, Ver. H i s t . lib. i. t o m . i. p . 7 3 2 .
element of t h a t blessed ' A I I O P T r - ' i ' A N T E S hr¡x'W '
ea
this ivonderful casting
Spirit, who, in conjunction with t h e Di- kavrác ourselves namely, into t h e sea, we
vine Light, is t h e Lord and Giver of spi- swam. [See also T h u c y d . iv. 108. and
ritual ufe! H o w cautious should we be, D ' O r v i l l . ad Charit. iii. 5. T h e word
lest the cares or pleasures of this life, or oceurs Exod. xxii. 3 1 . 2 K i n g s xiii. 2 3 .
the deceitfulness of riches, or the lusl after & al.]
other things, intercept his gracious influ- Ifsgf ' Airop<¡>aví'(io, from arco from, and
1

ences from t h e good seed of the word sown op<f>aví'c¡Lo to bereave, properly qf parents,
in our hearts, and malee it unfruitful! from optpavoQ an orphan, one bereaved qf
See M a t . xiii. 2 2 . M a r k iv. 18, 19. L u k e parents, or qf somewhat else near and
viii. 14. W h e n we behold a plant in a dear.—To bereave, properly of parents.
palé or sickly, a languishing or dying occ. 1 Thess. ii. 17. " ' Awopfavio-Qivrce;
state, because deprived of a. free eommuni- may perhaps mean, saith Chrysostom, be-
cation with t h e viv'fying air, we behold reaved, deprived, as a father bereaved qf
a striking emblem of many among Chris- his children *. B u t this word á-¡ropfavi-
tians,—perhaps of ourselves ! Raphelius, CTQÍVTÍQ is applied properly t o children
on M a t . xiii. 2 2 , cites a similar passage waniing their parents; and t h e Apostle
from Xenophon's CEconomics, where he hereby expresses his love to t h e m , which
applies t h e simple verb icvíyui in t h e same he had before represented by t h a t of a fa-
manner, r¡v v\r¡ IINITUt crvvE^oppiocra TÍO t h e r to his children (ver. 11.) or of a
CJÍTIO, If wood springing u p with corn cholees nurse t o h e r infants (ver. 7.) N o t they,
it. See also Wetstein on M a t . xiii. 7. saith t h e Apostle, were made orphans
[ I t oceurs in Tob. iii. 9.] (cnrop(¡>avítrdiicrav), b u t as helpless y o u n g
'ATíopéopai, ¿pai, from cíieopoQ perplexed, children, who have been untimely reduced
not lenoiving which way to go, aud t h i s io an orphan state, greatly desire their
from a neg. and rrópoQ a way, passage, parents, so do we long after you. T h u s
from Treípío io pass ihrough, which seo. he showeth his concern at being separated
from t h e m . " Theodoret and Theophylact
I . To hesitóte, be ai a stand, as not
concur in t h e same interpretation.
lenowing one's way, or which way to go.
[ X e n . Hell. v. 4 , 4 4 . ] 'AirocrKtva(opai, Mid. from airo from,
I I . To doubt, hesilate, be perplexed, not and a-ieevoc furniture, baggage.—To pack
lenowing how to proceed, determine, speak, up one's baggage. occ. A c t s x x i . 1 5 ,
or act. occ. John xiii. 2 2 . A c t s xxv. 20. cnrocrieEvacrápevoí, taking what was ne-
Gal. iv. 2 0 . [See Ecclus. xviii. 6, 1 1 . cessary for the journey," saith CEcume-
Mace. viii. 20. Herod. iv. 179. I n 2 Cor. nius. Raphelius, however, explains t h i s
iv. 8. i t means to be vexed and distressed, word by sarcinas deponere ut expeditiores
as Gen. xxxii. 8. I Mace. iii. 3 1 — I t may simus, laying down or leaving one's bag-
be added, t h a t t h e original meaning is, to gage for t h e salce of greater e x p e d i t i o n ;
be in want of the means ofliving, as from and cites Polybius using it in this l a t t e r
•wópog vectigal. Xen. CEc. iii. 5 . Levit. sense. B u t , from t h e M S S . and ancient
xxv. 47.] quotations, it is probable t h a t in Acts x x i .
'Airopía, ac, y, from airopoc, which see 15, t h e t r u e r e a d i n g is iicitnctvao-ápEvoi
under 'A-a-opéopai.—Perplexily. occ. L u k e having laclen our baggage, as t h e word is
x x i . 25 ; where see Wetstein. [Properly frequently used in t h e G r e e k writers. See
want of money. D e u t . xxviii. 2 2 . E c c l u s . Mili, Wetstein, and Griesbach. [Schleus-
iv. 2.—See Lev. xxvi. 16. Isa. viii. 2 2 . ] ner cites Dion. Halic. ix. 2 3 , where i t is
said, t h a t certain fugitives had n o t power
¿nroo-iezváiracrdcu, b u t were contented w i t h
* H o w strongly does the Orphic H y m n to Hpa, r

Juno, or t h e Air, express this pliysical truth !

TlaiTOyhiQte'
* T h u s E l s n e r on J o h n i. 1 8 , cites from D i o n y .
sius Halicarn. l i b . i. p . 6 9 , 'OPOAN'ON TE'KNflN
M o t h e r o f All •' w i t h o u t w h o m n o u g h t e'er knew sSiWE. H e m a d e h i m childless. Comp. Kypke on
T h e breath of Life. 1 Thess.
G2
 A n o 8-í A IT O

saring tlieir persons. And this seems .5, and seo more in Wolfius on J a m e s
strong, though Br. thinks t h a t this passage i. 17.
is no authority for ours. Chrysostom says, 'Knoairáiú, ¿i, from ¿nrb from, and o-7rá«
r a irpoe ri)v bóotrropíav \a/3ói'r£?.] to draw.
Égp ''ArroaKuiapa,
13
aroc, rb, from arrea- I. To draw forth, or out, as a sword
Kiu.ap.ai, perf. pass. of a V o o x i á f w to sha- from its sheath. occ. Mat. xxvi. o 1. [ 1 Sam.
dow, overshadow ; which from a ' - o from, xvii. 51.]
and aKiá'Cia to shade, overshadow; from I I . Pass. To be withdrawn, retire, occ.
«aa a shade, shadow, which see.—A ska- Acts x x i . 1. L u k e xxii. 4 1 . where see
dowing, overshadomivg, or else a shadow, Wetstein and Kypke, t h e latter of whom
adumbralion, slight appearance. occ. James remarks and proves t h a t in t h e Greek
i. 1 7 ; where I am well aware t h a t * se- writers it often imports hurrying, and
veral learued men understand t h e ex- putting a kind of forcé on oneself.
pression á-n-oaKiáapa rporrije, as an allusion I I I . To draw away, withdraw, seduce.
to the various shadows cast by the Sun, occ. Acts xx. 3 0 . O n which passage
as he approaches to one or t h e other tro-pie Elsner shows t h a t both Lucian and jElian
or solsiice. A n d true indeed it is, t h a t use this V. for drawing away disciples
rpoTrr) is used in the Greek writers for the from their master. [ L u c . Lapith. 26.
solsticc; but I can find no proof t h a t ^El. V. H . xiii. 32.]
dtroaKÚiapa ever signifies the casting of a 'ATro-racíO, a c , ?/, from arpíi-r/pi to de-
shadow, as the Sun does, by shining on part.
on opaque object. Raphelius, therefore, I. A local depariing, or depariure. In
explains arroauciapa of t h e shadow which this sense it is used by t h e profane writers.
the earth casts when the Sun is under it,
I I . Afalling off, or defection in m a t -
and rpo-n-r) of the Sun's turning not from'
ters of religión, an apostasy. occ. Acts
north to south, or vice versa, b u t from
xxi. 2 1 . 2 Thess. ii. 3 , where see Mac-
east to west, by which, when it sets, night
knight, and comp. 1 T i m . iv. 1. [occ. J e r .
is caused. So Arrian, Epictet. lib. i. cap.
xxix. 32. 1 Mac. iv. 15.]
14. speaks of t h a t small p a r t of the uni-
'ATrotciatov, a, rb, from drjíhr¡pL lo de-
verse oaov oiov T t-KÍ^adaí ¿ira S K I ' A S
part.
yv i¡ yfj TTOíh, which may be covered by
the shadow which the earth makes. I. Properly, A departure.
A n d Budaaus, Comm. p. 1180, tcaches us I I . A divorce, or dismission of a wornan
t h a t t h e very word ¿nroa¡:iliapa is used for from her husband, or t h e deed or instru-
t h e earth's shadow by which the moon is ment of such divorce. occ. M a t , v. 3 1 . xix.
eclipsed: T o rT yi)c 'AnoSKI'ASMA, « 7. M a r k x. 4. In the L X X it is constantly
K

¿7; épireaaaa íj aíXi¡rr¡ EKXÍÍTTEI. T h u s R a - used in this l a t t e r sense, and answers to

phelius. Wolfius, however, is not satis- the H e b . n i l r l S divorce.
fied with this exposition, b u t interprets 'ÁTro^eyci^io, from airo from, and T E y á £ w
rpoTn) to mean not a turning, b u t , as he lo cover, which from ^éyr¡ a roqf.—To un-
shows it is used by Antoninus, a change, cover, remove a covering. occ. M a r k ii. 4.
and so would interpret ¿nroaKictopa rpoTrijc dirz^íyaaav ri]v tiy-qv. E n g . T r a n s . they
a shadow, adumbralion, or appearance qf uncovered the roqf, i. e. according to Bp.
change, such as t h e natural Sun is subject Pearce *, they opened the trap-door, which
to from clouds, mists, and eclipses. H e used to be on t h e top of the flat-roqfed
adds from H e n r y Stephens, t h a t Gregory house in J u d e a , (comp. 2 K. i. 2. D e u t .
Nazianzen has applied atcoaKiáapa in this xxii. 8.) and which lying even with t h e
sense, where he mentions rb ríjs dXyddac roqf, was a part of it when it was let
'ivSaXpa KCU ' A n O S K I ' A S M A , t h e appear- down and s h u t ; or, according to D r .
ance and adumbralion of t h e t r u t h . " Shaw's explanation, they removed the veil,
[ S c h l . says, t h a t it means any slight im- which, agreeably to the custom still p r e -
pression, as *iyy°£- Lex. M S . and E t y m o l . served in the East, was sjjread over t h a t
rpoTrijc drroaKiáapa avrl r « dXXoiúaEoic p a r t o f t h e court where Christ was sitting,
Kal p£ra€oXijí 'vyvog.'] Comp. 1 J o h n i. and which being expanded upon ropes from
one side of t h e parapet wail to t h e other,
m i g h t be folded and unfolded a t pleasure t .
* See H a m m o n d , Lambert, B o s s , and W e t s t e i n
on the place, Stanhope on the E p i s t . for the 4th * See h i s Miracles of J e s ú s vindicated, part iv. p.
S u n u a y after Easter, vol. iii. U n i v . H i s t . vol. x. p. 77—79, small 8 v o , and his N o t e o n M a r k ii. 4 , in
4 / 0 . B p . B u l l ' s H a r m e n . A p ó s t o l . Dissert. Poster. his C o m m e n t on N . T .
r:iy. xv. S, 2 0 . t See S h a w ' s Travels, p. 2 0 8 - 2 1 2 .
 A II O
B u t with regard to Bp. Pearce's exposi-
tion, it should be observed, t h a t the most
n a t u r a l interpretation of aVo=r£ycí££i>/ is to
unroof bréale up the roqf; and t h a t t h e
verb is twiee used by Strabo, cited by
Elsner and Wetstein, in this sense, which
also best agrees with the following word
ih]opví,avTF.e in M a r k . As to D r . Shaw's
explanation, there is n o proof t h a t iéyn
ever signifies a veil, for which the sacred
writers, in particular, employ other words,
as Tíá\v¡j.f.ia, \{.arar:É.-ao-p.a; but its usual
meaning is t h e roqf or fíat ierrace qf a
house *, and theuce t h e house itself The
history, as recorded by St. M a r k and St.
Luke, ch. v. 18—20, seems to be this.
Jesús, after some days' absence, returned
to Capernaum, and to the house where he
used to dwell. A n d when it was reported
t h a t he was there, the people crowded to
t h e square-court, about which t h e house
was built, in such numbers t h a t there was
no room for them, even t h o u g h they filled
t h e porch. T h e men who carried t h e pa-
ralytic endeavoured to bring him into t h e
court among t h e c r o w d ; b u t finding this
impossible, they went u p t h e staircase
which led from the porch (or possibly
carne from the terrace of a neighbouring
house) to t h e flat roqf of t h e house over
the upper room f in which Jesús was,
Kai ¿sopúíacT-Es, and having forced up as
much both of the tiles or plaster, and of
the boards on which they were laid %, as
was necessary for t h e purpose, they let
down t h e paralytic's mattress, cía -5>v
k-epapwv through the tiles or roof into the
midst qf the room, before Jesús.
'A7ro=r£A\w, from aVo from., and TÉXXW
lo send.
I. To send from one place to another,
to send upon some business, employment,
or office. M a t . ii. 16. x. 5. xx. 2. John x.
36. xvii. 18. & al. freq. I t is a more so-
lemn t e r m t h a n rrépiru). See D r . Geo.
Campbell's Note on J o h n x. 3 6 , and on
M a t t . ii. 16, comp. Josephus, Ant. lib.
xvii. cap. 7, at t h e end, and D e Bel. lib.
1. cap. 3 3 . § 7, at the end, and see W e t -
stein.
I I . To send away, dismiss. [ M a r k v.
10. viii. 26. Luke iv. 18. with violence.
* S e e M a x i m u s , cited b y W e t s t e i n .
f See W h i t b y ' s N o t e on Mark ii. 4 .
$ Si, quod m i h i plaeet, tcgula: fucrunt asserculis
imposita;, detegi facilé poterat tectum, & per aper-
turam factam lectulus u n a c u m fegro dcmitti."
¡•ichcuchzer l?hys. Sacr. in M a t . i x . 2 , w h o m scc, and
•lis ¡'¡ate. N o . í¡74.
85 A li O
Mark xii. 3 , 4. lo let go. Mat. xxi. 3 . M a r k
xi. 1, 3.]
I I I . To send, or ilirust forlh, as asickle
among corn. Mark iv. 20. This last use
of the word seems hellenistical; the L X X ,
in like manner, apply the decompounded
verb í^aTro^éXKio to a siclde, Joel iii. 13.
[ I V . Used of doctrine, To deliver. A c t s
x. 36. xiii. 26. Rev. i. 1. J u d g . xi. 2 8 .
Jer. ix. 7 . ] — I n the L X X , this word most
commonly answers to the H e b . Tiblü to
send, which is likewise a very general
word.
'Airo^Epéij), w, from aVo from, and ^epéio
to deprive.
I. To deprive, wrong, or defraud an-
other of what belongs to him. occ. M a r k
X. 19. 1 Cor. vi. 8. vii. 5. 'A-7ro9-£|0£Óiiai,
5pai, pass. of persons, To be defrauded.
occ. 1 Cor. vi. 7 *.—of a t h i n g , To be Icept
back byfraud. occ. J a m e s v. 4.
I I . 'Atro^epeópai, Pass. joined with a
genitive, To be deslitule, devoid of. occ.
1 T i m . vi. 5.—In t h e L X X it answers to
t h e H e b . ¡TU to diminish, Exod. xxi. 10 ;
(comp. I Cor. vii. 5.) and to put)) to op-
press. D e u t . xxiv. 14'. M a l . iii. 5. comp.
James v. 4.
'Airotókii, í/e, from aVÉ^oXa, perf.
mid. of aVo^éXXw to send.— The office qf
an apostle of Christ, apostleship. occ. A c t s
i. 2 5 . Rom. i. 5. 1 Cor. ix. 2. Gal. ii. 8.
comp. 'ATTÓ^OXOQ. [ I t s proper sense is a
mission, and then the thing sent. See
D e u t . xxii. 7. 3 E s d r . ix. 52. 1 Mace. ii.
18. 2 Mace. iii. 2.]
'A7róVoXoc;, H, ó, from diré^oXa, perf. mid.
of UVÓVEXXW io send.
I. A messenger, a person sent by an-
other upon some business. J o h n xiii. 16.
2 Cor. viii. 2 3 . comp. Rom. xvi. 7- Phil. ii.
25. and M a c k n i g h t on both texts. [ 1 Kings
xiv. 4 . ]
I I . I t is applied to Christ, who was by
the F a t h e r sent into the world, n o t t o con-
demn, b u t to save it, occ. H e b . iii. 1. comp.
John iii. 17. x. 36. xvii. 3 , 8, 2 1 , 2 3 . x x .
21. & al.
I I I . A n d most frequently, An apostle,
a person sent by Christ to propágate his
gospel among men, M a t . x. 2. L u k e vi. 13.
(comp. M a r k iii. 14.) Acts i. 26. Gal. i. I .
& al. freq. Herodotus, lib. i. cap. 2 1 . uses
this word for a public herald Or am-
bassador. [See Vales, ad Euseb. H . E .
[* Schl, and B r . conskler this, a n d l think rig'itly,
as vüddlc, and s a v , To bvar fraud. piiliciillif. Se¿
Drcsig. de verb. í l n ! . N . 1. ii. 3 . p. 5 1 1 . ] '
 A IT O SG
p. 19. I t need not be observed, t h a t the
word is applied frequently to t h e com-
panions and chosen assistants of the first
apostles, as being sent also on similar er-
rands, and they are called aVóVoA.01 ÍKKKT¡-
CLÜIV, because t h e y collected churches. See
2 Cor. viii. 2 3 . R o m . xvi. 7.]
J§§p° 'Aivo^oparíZio, from airo from, and
•zopa, a-oc, the mouth.—Todraw or forcé
words, as it v/eve,from the mouth of another,
to incite or provoke to speak; otherwise,
To question magisterially, as a master does
his scholars. T h e word is capable of both
these interpretations, which however do
not greatly differ. occ. L u k e xi. 5 3 , where
see Pole Synops. Wolfius, .Doddridge,
W e t s t e i n and Kypke, and Suicer T h e s a u r .
in 'ATro^ofia-í^Lo. [ I t s first sense was, To
repeat from memory, (See T i m . L e x .
P l a t . and Ruhnken. p . 31.) and then, to
command one to do so. See Plat. E u -
thydem. p . 14. tom. iii. opp. ed. B i p o n t . ]
'Airo-péqjiú, from diró from, or back
again, and ^pééw to turn.
I. To turn away. occ. Acts iii. 26. Rom.
xi. 26. 2 T i m . iv. 4. [ E c c l u s . iv. 4 .
ix. 8.]
I I . To pervert, incite to revolt. occ.
L u k e xxiii. 14. comp. ver. 2. [ E c c l u s . xlvi.
13.]
I I I . [Toput, or bring back. M a t . xxvi.
52. (of a sword, and see 1 Chron. xxi. 27.)
M a t . xxvii. 3 . Gen. xxiii. 12. xviii. 2 1 .
xxviii. 5. E x o d . xxiii. 4 . ]
I V . 'Airo^péíjiopai, Midd. pass. with an
accusative following, which seems go-
verned of the preposition rara understood.
(Comp. u n d e r 'Airorpérrü).) To turn my-
self away, or be turned away from, to
slight, aversari. occ. M a t . v. 4 2 . 2 T i m . i.
15. T i t . i. 14. H e b . x ü . 2 5 . Josephus
uses it in t h e same manner, D e Bel. lib.
ii. cap. 19. § 6. 'AIIESTPAMME'NOS ¿
6 E O E iíSr) raí TA* "AITA, God being now
averse to, or turned away from, even his
own holy t e m p l e ; and lib. vi. cap. 3 . § 4.
Kal T t r N ipi¡v ' A n O S T P E ' Í > E S 6 E 0Y-
—ÍAN, A n d ye turn away from m y sa-
crifice. F o r other instances of a similar
construction in t h e Greek writers see
E l s n e r , A l b e r t i , and Wetstein. [So to
slight. Ecclus. xviii. 2 5 . Wisd. xvi. 3 . and
t h e n to refuse a request, (see Psalt. Sal.
5. 7. in F a b r . Cod. Ps. i. p . 933.) which
is t h e m e a n i n g in M a t . v. 4 2 . ]
Ijlgp 'Airo'zvyéii), w, from aVo from, or
0
intens. and tvyéio lo shudder with horror,
lo hate, which is from the N . 2rv2;, <rúyoj,
¡i-, a shuddering or shivering.from intense
A fí O
cold. A n d is not this derived from the
Heb. * pnty lo be still, properly as t h e sea
after a storm, and thence applied (in the
Greek I mean) to t h a t convulsive motion
we cali shuddering, which is evidently
occasioned by some stop or chcclc given to
t h e perspiration, or to the circulation of
t h e blood, or of the nervous fluid by cold,
or &c. ? To abhor, rejcct with horror, occ.
Rom. x ü . 9, where see Kypke.
t§§p° 'AirocrvváyiúyoQ, a, b, from airo from,
and cvvaywyr) an assembly, a synagogue.
—Expelledfrom or put out of the congre-
gation, assembly or society, and so de-
prived of all civil intercourse or commu-
nication with the Jews, and by conse-
quence of t h e liberty of enteriug their sy-
nagogues of worship also. occ. John ix. 2 2 .
x ü . 4 2 . xvi. 2 f. T h u s the m a n men-
tioned John ix. became diroavvCiyuíyoQ, by
the officers of t h e Jewish Sanhcdrim t a k i n g
and thrusting him out of the assembly of
t h e J e w s there gathered together to a t t e n d
his examiuation. Comp. ver. 3 4 , 3 5 . So
C h r i s t tells his disciples, L u k e vi. 22, t h a t
men dtyopícr&cn shall sepárale them, t h a t
is, from their society, both civil and r e -
ligious. Comp. E z r a x. 8. A n d t h u s
Theophylact explains divoavvayLoyaQ TTOL-
r\üHínv, L u k e vi. 2 2 , by rSiv crvveSplojv Kal
ívoúi,Lov, Kal 6\u>e rfJQ dvrüv KOiriovíae d(j>o-
plaauív: T h e y shall sepárate you both from
their honourable assemblies, and even cn-
tirely from their society.
'Airo-íicrcropai, Mid. from dirbfrom, and
-cío-crio lo order.
I. W i t h a Dative of t h e Person, To
take leave, bid adieu to, bid farewell, va-
lediccre. occ. L u k e ix. 6 1 . A c t s xviii. 18,
2 1 . 2 Cor. ii. 13. comp. M a r k vi. 4 6 . Sal-
masius pretends t h a t t h e word in t h i s
sense is barbarous and vulgar. The J
elegarit Josephus, however, uses it exactly
in this sense concerning Elisha, who, after
Elijah liad cast his mantle upon him, de-
sired leave to go and salute his parents ;
which when Elijah had p e r m i t t e d , 'AIIO-
* Whcn'ce also the ñ a m e of the river zril!; S t y x ,
feigned to be i n the infernal r e g i o n s ; b u t there
really w a s o n e so callee! in Arcadia, v.'hose waters
are said to have been of so cold a nature as to be
deadly, and with some of this water, it is reported,
that A l e x a n d e r the Great w a s poisoned i n B a b y l o n .
See P r i d e a u x Connect. pt. i. book 0. an. 3 2 3 , and
the authors there quoted.
' -|- See H a m m o n d on J o h n i x . 2 2 , and V i t r i n g a de
S y n a g o g . V e t . l i b . iii. pars 1. p . 7 3 9 , & c . [ S e l d .
de S y n . 1. 7 . ]
X S e e J o s e p h u s , A n t . l i b . x x . cap. 10. § 2 , and
Contr. A p i o n , l i b . i. g 9.
 A II O B7 A í! O

T A S A ' M E N O S 'AYTCTI2 UTTETO having D . A E I be rúe irarépae rl¡v rwv íTTLTiprjpú-

taken leave qf them, he followed him." ri»v 'AÍIOTOMI'AN rí) irpaúri]Ti piyvvvaí,
A n t . lib. viii. cap. 13. § 7. See also W e t - F a t h e r s ought to temper the severily of
stein on M a r k , who cites Callisthenes and reproofs with milduess. See more in
Libanius using t h e V . in the same sense, Wetstein and K y p k e . [Diod. Sic. xii.
with a D a t . of the Person. Comp. also 16-]
Kypke on Luke. 'AirorópioQ, Adv. from d-óropoe.—<Se-
I I . W i t h a D a t . of t h e T h i n g , To re- verely, with severily, cutling off, or cutling,
nounce, bid adieu lo. L u k e xiv. 3 3 . T h u s as it were, to the quick. oce. 2 Cor. xiii.
applied also by P l u t a r c h , Iamblichus, Philo 10. comp. 1 Cor. v, 1—5. T i t . i. 13. O n
and Josephus, cited by Kypke. 2 Cor. xiii. 10, observe, t h a t tipív is u n -
flSg 'A7ror£X£w, w, from airí¡ intensive, derstood, T h a t , being present, / may not
0

and r£A£<ü io complete.—To perfect, ac- use or treat (you) with severity. Comp.
complish. occ. James i. 15. 2 Mace. xv. under Xpáw IV". O n T i t . i. 13. comp.
40. P l u t a r c h cited under 'Airoropía I I . [Polyb.
'Airorídnpt, Mid. ' ArroríQEpai, from ¿tiro xvii. 1 1 . 2 . ]
from, and rídnpi to lay. 'Airorpí-Kii), from ano from, and rpÉVw
I. To lay offor down. occ. Acts vii. 5 8 . lo turn.—'AirorpÉiropai, M i d . followed by
[Schl. thinks the meaning here is, To lay an accus. probably governed by the p r e -
up or lay by, to commit to some one's care. ¡ position rara understood, To turn away
See Suid. and Hesych. Xen. Cyrop. vi. 1. ¡from. occ. 2 T i m . iii. 5 . Comp. u n d e r
1 1 , Lev. xxii. 2 3 . ] 'Airo-pé(¡,u> V. [ P l u t . F a b . p . 183. A . ]
I I . To lay aside,put off, in a figurative ílgp^ 'Airsaía, ae, ?/, from diruiv—ucra
sense. occ. Rom. xiii. 12, (where see Mac- —by, particip. of aVeiui lo be absenl.—
k n i g h t ) E p h . iv. 2 2 , 2 5 . Col. iii. 8. H e b . Absence. o c c P h i l . ii. 12.
xii. 1. James i. 2 1 . 1 Pet. ii. 1. [ I t is 'Airotyépiú, from aVd from, and <pépo¡ to
common in Greek writers for To put off, carry. To carry away. occ. M a r k xv. 1.
as clothes, &c. Herodian. iv. 7. 5. and so L u k e xvi. 22. 1 Cor. xvi. 3 . Rev. xvii. 3 .
E z e k . xxi. 2 5 . 1 K i n g s xvii. 2 2 . and in xxi. 10. [ l í o s . x. 6.]
the fig. sense, E u r i p . I p h . A. 556. Dion. f Ü f " 'Awoíjitvyio, from dwb from, and
Halic. ix. 33.] (psvyu tofee. Governing either a gen. qr
'Airorivcio-cw, from ¿uro from, and ri- an accus. 'Tofee away from, escape, occ.
váaou to shake, which seems a derivative 2 P e t . i. 4 . 'ii. 18, 20. [ E c c l u s . xxii.
by transposition from t h e Heb. U?B3 to set 2 4 . ]
loóse or free, which word the L X X have 'Airo<j>9Éyyopai, from ¿uro from, and
rendered by ¿uroriváo-o-u), 1 S a m . x. 2 fQÉyyopai to uiter.— To ulter, declare,
To shake off. occ. L u k e iv. 5 . A c t s speak, particularly pilhy and remarkable
xxviii. 5 . sayings, as Elsner on Acts ii. 4 , shows
'Airarlo), from á7r¿ again, and ríoj to pay, t h a t t h e V. is used by Diogenes Laertius,
which see.—To pay, repay. occ. Philem. and I a m b l i c h u s ; and K y p k e shows t h a t
ver. 19. [ 1 Sam. xxiv. 19. E x . xxi. 19.] it is applied particularly to oracles or
' Airoro\¡iáo), íó, from á7ró inten- prophetic responses, by P l u t a r c h , Strabo,
sive, and roXpciw to daré.—To daré very Josephus and Philo, [ D e Vita Mos. i ¡ . p .
much, be very bold. occ. R o m . x. 2 0 . 139. 3 2 . ] occ. A c t s ii. 4, 14. xxvi. 2 5 . [ I
Josephus uses t h i s V. transitively in t h e Chron. xxv. 1. Ezek. xiii. 9.]
same view, A n t . lib. 15. cap. 10. § 3 , ^fSp 'ATroa¡)oprí'(ii>, from ¿uro from, and
0

ravra U ' A Ü E T O A M Í Í N , they h a d such <j>opTÍ(uj lo lade, which from (pópriov a bar-
greal boldness." See also W e t s t e i n . den, from <¡>épo) to carry.— To unla,de, as a
Jf§|p ' Airoropía, ae, i¡, from ¿uróropoe ship. occ. A c t s xxi. 3 ; where see W e t -
severo (used by Polycarp. Epist. ad Philip. stein, [ D i o n . H a l . A n t . iii. 4 4 . ]
§ 7-), which from ¿uroréropa, perf. mid. of t f í g ' 'ATróxp'/f'e, toe, A t t . £(0£, //, from
1

dirorí¡j.V(ii to cut off, which from dwofrom, ¿uro-^pcwpai to abuse, consume by use, or
and répvo) lo cut. simply lo use, (see Suicer T h e s a u r . ) which
I . A cutling off, so used in t h e profane from ¿uro from, or intens. and xpáopai to
writers. use. — An using, or use. occ. Col. ii. 22,
I I . Severily, as of a man cutting off a. £=-t 7rá."ru lie <pdopav nj ¿uro^pyo-ei—<pi;c
dead or useless boughs from a fruit-tree. omuia sunt in interitum ipso usti, V u l g .
occ. Rom. xi. 22, twice. comp. ver. 19, 20, So our translation, All n'/iich (kings are
24, &c. Plutarch, D e Lib. Educ. p . 13. to perish in the using. And this, I doubt
 A n p 3S A riT

not, is the t r u e sense of t h e words, (which and religión, occ. Phil. i. 10. B u t Chryv
I consider as paren thetieal) though a dií- sostom seems to have understood it in this
ferent one is proposed by Hammond, Dod- text transitively, as in the H l d sense be-
dridge, and Kypke. B u t see Wolfius on low; and t h u s Macknight, whom see, u n -
t h e place, and comp. M a t . xv. 17. M a r k derstands it. [Ecclus. xxxii. 2 2 . ]
vii. 18, 19. 1 Cor. vi. 13.—The new in- I I . Applied to the conscience, Not
terpretation, which Macknight has given stumbling or impinging, as it were, against
of the words in Col. ii. 22, appears to me any thing, for which, as St. John speaks,
not only quite unsuitable to St. P a u l ' s our hearts condemn us. occ. Acts xxiv. 16.
nervous lively style, but also inconsistent comp. Acts xxiii. 1. 1 Cor. iv. 4. 2 Cor. i.
with the plain meaning of t h e G r e e k — 12. 2 T i m . i. 3 . 1 Sam. xxv. 3 1 . and H e b .
-'1 i-i rrávra. B u t let the reader cónsult and E n g . Lexic. bwo V.
t 'iat very able and respectable commenta- I I I . Transitively, Not occasioning, or
t o i , and j u d g e for himself. [Schl. says, causing others io stumble, giviiig them no
TTse, consumption by use. And in this occasion to fall into sin. occ. 1 Cor. x. 3 2 .
ense probably it occ. Col. ii. 22. " T h e comp. 2 Cor. vi. 3 . In Ecclus. xxxii. 2 1 ,
use of which things brings mischief and or 22, ideo áirpoo-KÓirro}, or (as some copies
severe punishments." T h e writer speaks read) airpoo-KÓieu), is used for a plain may,
of things forbidden by t h e Mosaical law. where there are no stumbling stones.
B r . says, " all which things if we use {§§p° 'AirpocriowoXriTrrojg, Adv.from a neg.
them arereckoned pernicious according to and irpoaunro\r¡irri)Q, a respecier of persons,
t h e doctrine of these men." Neither de- which see.— Without acceptíng or respect
fends his opinión.] of persons, impartially. occ. 1 Pet. i. 17-
'Airox^pio], ai, from airo from, and x ~ T h i s word is used in the same sense by
a

píta to go.— To depart, gofrom. occ. M a t . Clement, in his l s t Epist. to the Corin-
vii. 2 3 . L u k e vii. 39. Acts xiii. 13. thians, § 1.
'Arrox^piCopai, from airo from, and x°>- " Airraisoc,, o, 6, i), from a neg. and wraíot
pí^io to sepárate, which from x P ' £ apart, to stumble.—Free from stumbling
w
orfall-
which see.— To depart. occ. Acts xv. 3 9 . ing. occ. J u d e ver. 2 4 ; where Wetstein
Rev. v. 14. [Gen. xiii. 14.] cites from Xenophon, [ D e re Eq. i. 6.]
Ej§p° 'ATTOIIvxüj, from airo denoting pri- "AIITAI2T0S "IrriroQ, A horse t h a t does
vation, and ¡pvx'i breatk, life, or soul To not stumble; and from Plutnrch t h e same
expire, die. occ. L u k e xxi. 26. Elsner shows word applied to t h e successful Pericles.
t h a t Arrian uses t h e V. in the same sense, [3 Mace. vi. 3 9 . ]
Epictet. lib. iii. cap. 26. p. 369, and A p - "AÜTOMAI, Mid. or Deponent, from
pian D e Bel. Civ. lib. iv. p. 9 7 3 , and cites áwriú to connect, bind.
from Sophocles Ajax Flagell. lin. 1656, I. To touck. M a t . viii. 3 . ix. 20.
t h e full phrase, ''AIIE'^rSEN plov he I I . To lay hold on, embrace. J o h n x x .
breaihed out his life. Comp. Wetstein and 1 7 , Lay not hold on me (nom), as t h e V.
Kypke. [Schl. and Br. say t h a t in St. L u k e is applied by the L X X , Job xxxi. 7. M a r y
it means to faintfromfear, to become not Magdalene was probably going to pro-
dead, b u t as if dead. So H o m . Od. xxiv. strate herself a t his feet, and embrace
347. See E u s t . ad Iliad. x. 2. A r r . Diss. them, as the other women did. [ S o S c h l . ]
Epict. iv. 1. 142. So expirare in Séneca, M a t . xxviii. 9. See Kypke on J o h n , and
N a t . Quaest. ii. c. 5 9 , and exanimor, Ter. comp. M a r k x. 13, and Wolfius there. [ J o b
A n d r . i. 5. 17. T h e word oceurs 4 Mace, xxxi. 7.]
xv. 18, b u t nowhere else.] I I I . To touch, have to do with. occ. 1
I§gp° 'AirpómroQ, 8 , o, ij, Kai rt>—ov, Cor. vii. 1. T h e word is used in this
from a neg. and -irpómroQ accessible, which sense by t h e Greek writers, as by Arisíotle,
from irpóo-upi to approach, and this from Epictetus, Plutarch. See Gataker [ O p .
irpóc unto, and ¿Ipi to go or come.—That Crit. p . 79. O x . ] in Pole Synops. Wetstein
cannot be approached, inaccessible [or in- and Kypke on the text. [¿El. H . A n . i. 13.
comprehensible], occ. 1 T i m . vi. 16. [ H e s . Valck. ad Phcen. p. 3 4 9 . ]
a
Xf>P1 £-lr0
IV. To take, as food. occ. Col. ii. 2 1 ; on
'Airpóo-KorroQ, a, ó, i¡, from a neg. and which t e x t Raphelius cites Xenophon ap-
TrpotrKÓrrrj an occasion of siumbling, which plying this V. to food. T h u s Memor.
see. So'crat. lib. ii. cap. 1. § 2. S í r 8 "AIITE-
I . Intransitively, Not siumbling ovfall- 2GAI is to /«/fefood: and inCyropasd. lib.
h i g , i. c. íiguratively, in the path of d u t y i. ]>. 17, edit. Hutchiuson, 8vo. "APTOY
 A n si
"A1TTE29AI is used for taking bread, as
Sríyeiv also is for taking other sorts of food.
It seems, therefore, t h a t in Col. ii. both
ju?) ílipri and p) Síyne may be best referred
to food. See Wolfius, Wetstein, and
Kypke. [Some refer 2 Cor. vi. 17, to food
also; but Schl. and Br. transíate, Form
no conncction or intimacy with the Gen-
liles; and Schl. thiaks. t h a t Col. ii. 2 1 ,
may be explained in the same way.]
V. To touch, hnrt. 1 John v. 18. Comp.
2 Sam. xiv. 10. 1 Chron. xvi. 22, in L X X .
I t is used thus also by t h e Greek writers,
as Raphelius and Elsner have shown.—In
the L X X this word generally answers to
the H e b . to touch, and t h a t in all the
above senses.
"AITTO, from H e b . M i s to heal through.
—To lighl or kindle, as a lamp orfire. occ.
L u k e viii. 16. xi. 3 3 . xv. 8. xxii. 55.
[See Perizon. ad M. Var. H. ii. c. 13.]
'Aniodém and ' A T T W Ó V I , from ano from,
and wOéto to thriist, drive. [ I t occurs
only in the Midd. in the N . T . ] — To
thrust away, repel, reject. occ. Aets vii.
2 7 , 39. xiii. 46. Rom. xi. 1, 2. xiii. 12.
I Tim. i. 19 *. [ I Kings xii. 22. Ezek.
xliii. 9.]
'AirwXeia, as, r¡, from cnróWv¡xi to de-
siroy.
I. Destruction, either temporal, as Acts
xxv. 16. comp. Acts viii. 2 0 ; or eternal,
M a t . vii. 13. Phil. i. 2 8 . iii. 19. 2 P e t . ii.
1. & al.—In 2 Pet. ii. 2, for cnrwXeíaie of
t h e common printed editions, very many
M S S . three of which ancient, have acreX-
yeíate ; which reading is confirmed by t h e
Vulg. luxurias, and other ancient versions,
and has accordingly been given in several
editions, is approved by Wetstein, and re-
ceived into the t e x t by Griesbach. " B u t
t h e common reading (says M a c k n i g h t )
should be retained, because any transcriber,
who did not know t h a t by deslructions
t h e Apostle meant the deslrtictive heresies
mentioned ver. ] , m i g h t easily write,
lio-eXyeíaiQ for aTrwkúaie. B u t no t r a n -
scriber would substitute ¿nr-wXeíaie, or a
word whose meaning he did not .know, in
place of aatXydaiQ, a word well understood
by him. [Schleusner a g r e e s t h a t átreXy. is
only a gloss. H e gives us the following
places from t h e O. T . T h e word occurs
* [ O n this t e x t B r . says, that he w o u l d refer ni
t o SVKTÍÍKV (not as s o m e do to m^if, or cviñlnsiv, re-
ferring to P r o v . x x i i i . 2!>. H o s . iv. (>.), and c o n -
strues, » which battle for the truc faith d e c l i n i n g , "
89 A pr
D e u t . xxxii. 3 5 . J o b xxxi. 3 , for 1>», a n d
Isa. xlvii. 11, for Mpl, and in (Theod.)
J o b xxvi. 5, where it means hell, for ViNttf.
I t occurs in Bel and the Dragón, v. 4 1 ,
where it is severe or capital punishment,
and Schl. gives this meaning to Acts viii.
20.]
I I . Destruction, waste. occ. M a t . xxvi'.
8. M a r k xiv. 4. [Theoph. Char. x v . ]
' A 7 T ( Ü V , So-a, bv, Particip. Pres. of aneipt,-
which see.—Being absent, absení. 1 Cor,
v. 3 . 2 Cor. x. 1 1 . & al.
'APA , 5c, r), from H e b . YiK or
V
ttf
curse, for which the L X X have used t h e
verb apáopai, N u m . xxii. 6. xxiii. 7 ; and
t h e compound narapciopai, Gen. v. 2 9 . xii.
3. & al. freq. and t h e decompounds éniKa-
rapa.ojj.aL and ¿Víicaráparoe, N u m . v. 19.
Gen. iii. 14. & al.freq.
A curse, cursing. occ. R o m . iii. 14.
[ G e n . xxiv. 4 1 . Prov. xxvi. 2 . ]
"APA, Adv. denotes affirmation or as-
severation.—Indeed, in truth. I t gene-
rally implies an inference from some-
w h a t preceding, and may frequently be
rendered Then indeed, therefore. See
M a t . xix. 2 5 , 2 7 . Heb. iv. 9. Gal. ii. 2 1 .
iii. 2g. v. 1 1 . I t is also sometimes used
where a question is asked, as M a t . xviii.
1. M a r k iv. 4 1 . L u k e xviii. 8. A c t s
viii. 3 0 . Gal. ii. 17- I cannot think t h a t
this particle (or indeed any other used by
the inspired writers) is ever merely ex-
pletive, i. e. totally insignificant. This
seems to be always affirmative, emphatie,
or illative. [ I t means perhaps in the sense
oí hope, M a r k xi. 13. Acts viii. 22. N u m .
xxii. 6, 11. In good truth (asseveration),
L u k e xi. 20. Gal. ii. 2 1 . 1 Cor. v. 10.
vii. 14. xv. 14, 18. H e b . xii. 8. P s . lviii.
' Apaye, from apa denoting an inference,
and ye truly.— Therefore, indeed, then
indeed. occ. M a t . vii. 20. xvii. 2 6 . A c t s
xi. 18.
'Apyéw, ñ, from cipybc idle.—To linger,
loiter. occ. 2 P e t . ii. 3, where Kypke shows
t h a t Polybius and Plutarch in like m a n -
ner apply to things this V. which properly
relates to persons.
'Apyóc, ?}, bv, contracted of áepybe,
which from a neg. and epyov work.
I . Not at work, idle, not employed, in-
active. occ. M a t . xx. 3 , 6. 1 T i m . v. 13,
15. T i t . i. 12. 2 P e t . i. 8.
I I . Idle, unprqfitable. occ. M a t . xii. 3 6 .
comp. 2 Pet. i. 8, and Kypke. In t h e
latter t e x t the Vulg. rendering apyúg by
vacuos preserves the ambiguily of the ori-
 A P f 90 A r E

ginal. Comp. E p h . v. 11. Symmachus j - m i t a n , or j - m i ^ a n lo strike, smite, which

uses t h e word ápybv for t h e Heb. bws from t h e H e b . tvsi to cut off, destroy, or
polluted. Lev. x i x . 7. [ I n M a t . x ü . 3 6 , it from *rotí> lo destroy, demolish. occ. A c t s
is r a t h e r evil or mischievous. See Chry- xix. 2 4 . [ T h e Vulgate has argentarías.
sostom, H o m . xliii. in M a t . p . 480. tom. i. Erasmus after Theophylact, faber argen-
ed. Inf. So dpyía is used 2 K i n g s ii. tarías. Beza, signator argenti, and see
2 4 , and t h e Chaldee word b¡D5, and Heb. J e r . vi. 2 9 . P l u t . O p p . T . ix. p . 3 0 1 , and
Van. See T a r g u m . E x o d . v. 9, and Eccl. 4 7 3 , ed. Reisk. with Hesych. and Harpoc.
v. 2. W e t s t , N . T . i. p. 394. Palairet (Obss. whence i t will be seen t h a t t h e word sig-
Phil. Crit. p . 40) and others, think this is nified any worker in silver or money f\
G i e e k ; but Fischer (de Vet. p . 8.) after
-

"Apyvpog, tí, b, from dpyóg rvhiie.

Vorst and others, says it is H e b r e w . See I . T h e metal called silver. occ. Rev.
Cren. Anal. Phil. H i s t . Crit. p . 142. xviii. 12. comp. Acts xvii. 2 9 .
Symm. Lev. xix. 7-] I I . Silver money. occ. M a t . x. 9. J a m .
'Apyvpéog, Sg; éa, á, íov, Sv\ from ap- v . 3 .
yvpoQ silver.—Made qf silver, silver. oec. I I I . Figuratively, such sincere and holy
A c t s xix. 24. 2 T i m . ii. 20. Rev. ix. 20. believers, as being built into Christ's
'Apyvpiov, a, ro, from apyvpog. church, will abide the fire qf persecution.
I. Silver, as distinct from gold or other occ. 1 Cor. iii. ] 2. Comp. under Uvp V . —
metal. 1 P e t . i. 18. comp. A c t s iii. 6. xx. A s * silver is called in H e b . e\01, on ac-
33. count of its palé colour ; so there is little
I I . A piece qf silver money, q. d. a sil- doubt b u t t h e Etymologists are r i g h t in
vcrling, a skekel qf silver, equal, accord- deducing its Greek ñame apyvpog from
sng to Bp. Cumberland, to 2s. 4fa'. of our áoyog rvhiie, which seems a corrupt deriva-
money, b u t according to Michaelis, to no tivo from t h e H e b . m» the moon or lunar
more than l i d . * M a t . xxvi. 15. xxvii. 3 , light, which is of this colour. T h u s in t h e
5, & al. Comp. Exod. xxi. 3 2 . Zech. xi. H e b . t h e moon or lunar orb is called n ^ ,
12, 13. from fnV ivhite, and Virgil, Ü5n. vii. lin.
I I I . Money in general, because silver 8, 9,
money seems to have been t h e most an- Nec candida cursum
cient, as Isidorus also affirms. So t h e L u n a negat, splendet trémulo sub l u m i n e poittus.
F r e n c h argent, which properly signifies
T h e moon w a s bright,
silver, is most commonly used for money A n d the sea trembled w i t h her silver l i g h t .
in general. M a t . xxv. 18, 27. L u k e ix. 3. DRYDEN.
& al. O n M a t . x x v . 18, W e t s t e i n cites
from Diogenes Laert. t h e same phrase, F r o m which circumstance of colour, I s u p -
' A P r r P I A ' I K A N A . Acts xix. 19, fifty pose it is t h a t t h e chemists have imagined
lliousand (pieces) of silver, probably A t t i c silver to have some peculiar relation to t h e
drachms, which, a t 7\d. each, would moon, calling it by her ñame L u n a , and
amount to 1562¿. 10.y. of our money. [On representing i t ir. w r i t i u g by t h e character
t h e money here mentioned, see Fisch. de of t h a t planet. So t h e poets frequently
V i t . iii. 1 1 . and xxiv. 12. Petav. ad compare t h e Light qf the moon to silver.
E p i p h a n . de Mens. T . ii. p . 428. Casaub. T h u s Miltou :
E x e r c . A n t i b . xvi. 8, 9- We may simply
T h e moon
remarle here, t h a t t h e shekel ( = A t t i c t e - R i s i n g i n clouded majesty, at l e n g t h
t r a d r a c h m , or Alexand.didrachm,) though A p p a r e n t queen u n v e ü ' d her peerías Ught,
translated by Symmachus and Aquila by A n d o'er t h e dark her silver m a n t l e threw.
Tci7))p, is always by t h e L X X called O - Í ' K X O E Paradise Lost, b . iv. l i n . 0 0 6 , &c.
or SíSpajdfJ-a, because t h e ^an'/p at Alexan-
dria was valued at 8 Attic or 4 Alexandrian "Apeíog, !¡, from "Apr¡g Mars, t h e s u p -
drachmse.] posed God of W a r . — O f or belonging to
Mars, Mars'. occ. A c t s xvii. 19, 2 2 .
'ApyvpoKÓiroQ, a, ó, from apyvpog silver, comp. U a y o c , [and P o t t e r ' s Grecian An-
and icéxoira, perf. mid. of KÓTTTOJ to beat—• tiq. i. p . 2 0 1 . ]
A silversmilh. Observe t h a t our E n g . word 'ApéaKeía, ag, ?;, from apéaico) to please.
smilh t , Saxon j - m r 8 , is from t h e V . —A pleasing. occ. Col. i. 10. " I t d e -
notes not so much t h e evenl, as t h e desire
* S e e H e b . a n d E n g . L e x i c . 3 d edit. under bfW
IV. * S o the E n g . ñ a m e silver seems of t h e sanie
-[• See J i m i a s , E t y m o l . A n g l i c a n . root as (he Grcck ¡•'¡'kSu lo shiric.
 A P E 91 A P I

and inlention, of pleasing *." Comp. R o m . often used in t h c Greek writers, a n d so

xv. 2. Gal. i. 10.—The L X X use it in t h e t h e íperr) of St. P e t e r will correspond with
plur. Prov. xxxi. 3 0 . for H e b . fn grace or the dvbpí^ecrdcu of S t . Paul. 1 Cor. x v i .
graceftilness, by which one picases others. 13. See H a m m o n d . 'Aperr) in t h e L X X
'APE'2Kíi, "lst fut. dpítrio, from njnn. answers twice t o T i n glory, thrice to TihTm
(the H i p h . of t h e H e b . rrjn) which would praise, as our translators render apt-iic,
signify to concíllate or ga'm the ajfections. 1 P e t . ii. 9.
So the L X X several times render t h e N . 'ApiBuéio, io, from dpidpbc.—To num-
,pj)1 will, pleasure, by dpe^bv pleasing, ber, rechón by number. occ. M a t . x. 3 0 ,
from this V. ápéexiao.— To picase, M a t . L u k e xii. 7. Rev. vii. 9. [Job xxxi. 4 . ]
xiv. C. R o m . xv. 1, 2, 3 . 1 Cor. vii. 3 2 . & 'Apidpbc, 5, ó, from dpQpcc coaplation,
al. On 2 T i m . ii. 4 , observe, t h a t in like eonjunction; from apio to adapt, join to-
manner Xenophon, Cyropasd. lib. iii. p . gether, compose ; which s e e . — A number,
172. edit. Hutchiiison, Svo, applies t h i s according to t h a t of Elidid, 'ApiBpbc, r¿>
V. to soldiers behaving so as to gain the EK pováSiov avyKÚpívov iiKi¡doe, Number
approbation of their commanders. ['Apé- is a m u l t i t u d e composed of u n i t s . L u k e
n-Kio is used sometimes in a bad sense, xxii. 3 . J o h n vi. 10, rbv dpidpbv ücrer.
almost like KoXaieevíiv. See Theoph. Char. TievraKicryCXioi in number ( r a r a being u n -
V. Athen. vi. 15. W h e n c e , perhaps, we derstood) ahout five thousand." So iii
may explain Rom. xv. 1, and 3 . ] Herodotus, lib. i. cap. 14. ¡cpr^ñpeg ' A P I G -
'ApETÓc, j), dv, from apéaKoi.—Pleasing, MO N É'| goblets in number s i x a n d J o -
v

agreeable, gratcful. occ. J o h n viii. 2 9 . sephus, in his Life, § 6 6 , re-paKio-xíXioc

Acts vi. 2. xii. 3 . 1 J o h n iii. 2 2 . Comp. TO'N 'API0MCVN, four thousand in num-
L X X in [ G e n . xvi. 6 . ] E x o d . xv. 2 6 . ber," and § 7 5 , 7repí ítearov Kai ivvcví\KOvrci
[Is. xxxviii. 3.] ovrag TO'N 'APIGMO'N, being about one
'Aptri), íjc, ?/, q •(-. á p E T í ) pleasing, from h u n d r e d and ninety in number" and iis
¡iploKti) to picase, or r a t h e r from "Ap-qe m a n y other places.
Mars, t h e supposed God of W a r (see u n - 'Apiráw, id, from apero»', which see.—
der "Aptios); for in Homer Aperr) generally To diñe. occ. L u k e xi. 3 7 . J o h n x x i . 1 2 ,
denotes military virtue, slrength, or bra- 15. See K y p k e on ver. 12, and comp.
very j and if, as Monsieur Goguet ( O r i - under "Apitov.
gin of Laws, &c. vol. ii. 392.) observes, 'AptTtpóe, a, bv.— The left, as opposed
the word apiri] be afterwards used to sig- t o t h e right. occ. 2 Cor. vi. 7. So f;
nify virtue in general, i t is because t h e dpi^epa is t h e left-hand, xhp being u n d e r -
Greeks, for a long time, knew no other stood, as be'iirepi) in Homer is t h e right-
virtue than vahur.—Virtue. I t is applied hand. occ. M a t . vi. 3 . 'ApiTtpa, ra, The
both to God and m a n . left-hand side, pépn parts being under-
I. Virtue, cxccllency, perfeclion. occ. stood. occ. L u k e xxiii. 3 3 . T h e left-hand
1 P e t . ii. 9. A r r i a n , E p i c t e t . lib. iii. cap. side, according to t h e superstitiou of t h e
24. p . 3 4 3 . Tac ípae ' A P E T A S étnySv- Grecian * heatheu, was accounted unlucky,
rai—i;al his vpvam, T h e y recount m y
• T h e omens that appeared to the east, s a y s
virlues, a n d celébrate m e .
A b p . Potter, were accounted fortúnate b y the G r c -
I I . T h c virtue, forcé, or energy of t h e cians, R o m a n s , and all other nations, because t h e
Holy Spirit, accompanying t h e preaching great principie of all light a n d heat, molion, a n d
of t h e glorious Gospel, here called glory. life, düfuses h i s first influences from that part o f
the world. O n the contrary, the iccstcrn omens
occ. 2. P e t . i. 3 . Comp. Aívapic, a n d see
were u n l u c k y , because t h e sun declines i n that
Alberti, Wolfius, a n d Wetstein. [Schleus- cjuarter.
ner considers it as often denoting espe- T h e Grecian augurs, when t h e y m a d e observa-
cially t h e benignily of God. I P e t . ii. 9. tions, kept their faces towards the north, and then
2 P e t . i. 3 . H a b b a k . iii. 3 . Isa. xiii. 8, the east m u s t needs b e u p o n their right-hand, and
the west u p o n their left: and that they d i d s o , a p -
especially Ixiii. 7. See Krebs. Obs. Flav. pears from a passage o f H o m e r , w h o brings i n H é c -
p. 398, 403.] tor teiling P o l y d a m u s that h e regardccl n o t the
I I I . Human virtue in general, occ. P h i l . birds:
iv. 8. 'EÍT ITTI V ZC l'waí 7r¡:of tiüi c ' rfaió';
: r:,
I V . Courage, foriitudc, resolulion. occ. En' fV* cigís-im Tolyt veri £ó£ov r,¡^í-iTet.
2 P e t . i. 5. I n this sense t h e word is II. x i i . ver. 2 3 9 .
Y e v a g r a n t s o f the s k y ! your wings e x t e n d ,
* Davenant in Pole Synops. Or where thc s u n s atine, or where descerní;
•f- See N o t e ;•! in init. l i b . v. X e n o p h o n Cyropred.
T o right or lefl unhccik.il take your way
edit. I-liitchins.on.
Pon;.
 A P Ií
and of evil ornen, and * i t was a p a r t of
t h e same superstition to cali such things
by more auspicióos ñames. Thus, ac-
cording to Eustathius, they called t h e left
dpt^epdc, from ciperos t h e best, i;ar évqjri-
¡iio-pbv. Comp. 'Evújfvp.oe, and see W e t -
stein in M a t .
"Apt^ov, H, TO, q. áópiTov indefinite, be-
cause taken at no certain t i m e , or r a t h e r
from r)pi early (which from t h e H e b . 11N
íhe light) ; because this meal was taken
early in t h e morning (comp. J o h n xxi. 4,
2 1 . ) ; so t h e L a t i n prandeo to diñe, and
prandium dinner, is derived from npav
(Doric for ^pSi) early, and '¿Sto to eat.
I. A meal ealen in the morning. So
Xenophon, Cyropaíd. lib. vi. p . 3 5 3 . edit.
Hutchinson, 8vo. " Avpwv cé Ü P Í T i —
•Kp&TOv plv xpr) 'APISTH'SAI Kal dv-
£pde Kal Í-K-KHC—To-morrow morning early
t h e men and horses ought first to take
some food.
I I . [ I n progress of time i t carne to sig-
nify, The mid-day meal or dinner. In
L u k e xiv. 12. it is distinguished from
eeÍTTvov, and is a feast to which others are
invited. See Luke xi. 3 8 . ; thence i t is p u t
for any great feast, as a marriage feast.
M a t . xxii. 4 . ] — T h e L X X have used the N .
ápi-ov, 2 Sam. xxiv. 15. for the H e b . ntlJ'D,
b u t I t h i n k erroneously; [for tznb food,
1 Kings iv. 2 2 . ]
'ApictToe, i), ov, from aprnoi.—Suf-
ficient, enough. occ. M a t . vi. 3 4 . x. 2 5 .
1 P e t . iv. 3 . A s to t h e construction of
M a t . vi. 3 4 , (comp. ver. 25.) where t h e
N . fem. racia is construed with t h e neut.
dpKsrbv, Raphelius observes, t h a t it is a
p u r é and elegant Greek phrase. H e r e -
fers to 2 Cor. ii. 6. for a similar expression.
[ S e e also II. B. 2 0 4 . Herod. iii. 3 6 . P l a t .
Rep. iv. p . 3 2 8 . Wetstein on M a t . vi. 3 4 .
and M a t t h . G r . G r a m . § 4 3 7 . On t h e
Proverb in Mat. vi. 34, see Vorst. de
A d a g . c. 9 . ]
' A P K E ' Q , w, from H e b . Ti)) to dispose,
order, adjusl.
F o r this reason, the signs which were presented to
than ( t h e Grecians) o n the right-lunul were ac-
counted fortúnate, and those on the left u n l u c k y .
A n t i q u i t i e s of Greece, vol. i. book ii. cap. 1 5 .
* " I l l - b o d i n g words they h a d a l w a y s a super-
stitious cafe to a v o i d ; i n s o m u c h that instead of
itir/xiuTípiov, i. e. a prison, they w o u l d often s a y
o-,m¡j.a a house, for tr/ÉV.o; (an a p e ) xraxxíaf ( a
b e a u t y ) , for /¿Sen; (an abominable crime) aya; ( a
sacred t h i n g ) , for hím¡; (the furies) Iv/xíviSi; or
t7 ¡xm¡ St¡:¿í ( t h e good-natured or venerable g o d -
;
desses), and such l i k e . " Pcttcr's A n t i q . of Greece,
vol. i. !;ook ii. cap. 17-
92 A P M
I. To sufftee, be sitfficienl, salisfy. occ.
Mat. xxv. 9. J o h n vi. 7. xiv. 8. 2 Cor.
xii. 9, where Kypke shows t h a t both E u -
rípides [ H e c . 1164.] and Sophocles [ T r a c h .
7 1 1 . ] use ápKsív for giving assistance,
helping, and Josephus (p. 1292, ad fin.
edit. Hudson) for helping sufficiently.
I I . 'Apicáoyuai, 5pai, Pass. governing a
dative.— To be satisfied, content with. occ.
L u k e iii. 14. 1 T i m . vi. 8. H e b . xiii. 5 . —
followed by t h e prepos. ¿Vi. occ. 3 J o h n
ver. 10. [2 Mac. v. 15. ^ s c h . Socr. Dial,
iii. 1 5 . ]
"ApKTOQ, H, ó, fi, from dpyóe idle, sluggish,
or from dpKÉto to suffice.— The bear, a
well-known animal, occ. Rev. xiii. 2. So
called either from his sluggishness, and
particularly from his remaining in his den
for several of t h e winter motiths in an un-
active sleepy state * ; which fact is u n a -
nimously afiirmed by many of t h e ancient
naturalists, as may be seen in Bochart,
vol. ii. 810. O r else his Greek ñame
ciperos may be derived from apKtüv, q.
apKsroc, because he is, as i t were, self-
sufficient while he continúes so long w i t h -
out external nourishment.
"Appa, arog, rb, from t)ppai, perf. pass.
of apo> to fit, join fitly together.—A cha-
riot or vehicle, from its ingenious struc-
lure, or being Jitted orjoined to t h e horses
with harness. occ. A c t s viii. 2 8 , 2 9 , 3 8 .
Rev. ix. 9. [ I t is a war-chariot in t h e
last passage. See Joel ii. 4.]
' A P M A r E A A S Í N , H e b . from in a moun-
lain, and n ; n or (Zech. xii. 11.) f n a a Me-
giddo.—Armageddon, or the mountain of
Megiddo. occ. Rev. xvi. 16. I t was a
place famous in t h e history of t h e O . T .
for destruction and slaughter. See J u d g e s
v. 19. 2 K . i x . 2 7 . xxiii. 2 9 . 2 Chron.
xxxv. 2 2 , and Vitringa in Rev. [Schleus-
ner t h i n k s it means a d r y and sterile
mountain country, such as t h e Jews be-
lieved to be inhabited by evil spirits. See
Castell. L e x . H e p t . fol. 5 0 7 . Olear, de
Stil. N . T . p . 349 and 3 5 9 . Glass. Philol.
S. p . 8 0 9 . ]
'Appó'Cti>, from appbc a compagesorjoin-
ing fitly together.
I. To adjust, join fitly together. In
this sense it occurs in t h e profane writers
(see Scapula's Lexic.) b u t not strictly in
t h e N . T . [Prov. viii. 3 0 . X e n . Anat.
iii. 5 6 . ]
* P o n t o p p i d a n ' s N a t . H i s t . of N o r w a y i n Modero
T r a v d s , vol. i. p. 2 2 1 , 2 . C o m p . D r . Brookc's Nat.
H i s t . vol. i. p . I Ü Ü .
 A P N 93 A P ÍI

I I . ' Ap/xó(o¡j.ai, Mid. To contract, (compare for the phrase Dion. Halíc. viii.
'espouse, or betrotk; or rather, To Jil, 8. Hesiod. Theog. 5 1 1 . Soph. A n t . 453 . :

•prepare, occ. 2 Cor. xi. 2 , 'B.ppotrápriv Maius Obs. S S . lib. ii. p . 77.) Acts iv. 16.
yap ¿p:¿sc ;c. r. X. .FOT I have prepared you, . I J o h n ii. 22.]
lo present (you as) a citaste virgin to I I . \_To deny or disonn, of Christ dis-
Christ*. So L X X in Prov. xix. 14. owning the wicked. Mat. x. 3 3 . lipvl¡o-opsii
llapci CE KvpÍB 'APMO'ZETAI yvvr¡ avSpl, ávrÚQ. 2 T i m . ii. 12. of men professedly
Bul by the Lord a nife is fitted lo a hus- Christians, b u t leading unchristian lives.
band. In t h e Greek writers the active T i t . i. 16. 1 Tim. v. 8. of open deserters
V . appó'(ii> is used for a father betrotlñng of Christ, or apostates. L u k e xii. 5 7 . M a t .
his daughter to a man, and the middle X . 3 3 . óVi£ ó' áv a.pvl]arrra.l p£. 2 T i m . ii.
ápuó'(opai for a man's betrothing a ivmnan 12. Rev. ii. 13. iii. 8. of those who refuse
to himself (see t h e passages cited in W e t - to believe at all. A c t s iii. 1 3 . 2 P e t . ii. 1.
stein) ; b u t it does not appear t h a t in this J u d . v. 4. In Acts vii. 3 5 , Not to aclcnon-
latter form t h e V. is ever applied tó a ledge the poner of. I t is once used for
man's betrothing a woman to another. It lo renounce in T i t . ii. 12, and perhaps t h e
seems, therefore, best to exelude t h e nup- p h r a s e d p v E i c r d a í iavrov, is of somewhat t h e
tial sense from 2 Cor. xi. 2 t - same forcé in 2 Tim. ii. 13. To renounce
'App:o£, a, ¿, from 7¡ppai perf. pass. of or change one's character.~\
apw to Jit.,join Jitly together. 'Apvíov, a, rb, a diminutive of úpe a
I. \_A joint. Ecclus. xxvii. 2 . and so lamb.
ap/iovía Ezek. xxxvii. 7. See E t y m . M . I. A lamb, a young lamb, a lambían.
in voce, and Poli. Onom. ii. 141.] [Poli. vii. 3 3 . 1 8 4 . ]
I I . A joint or articidalion of the bones I I . In the N . T . it signifies figuratively
in the human body. occ. H e b . iv. 12. t h e wealcest or feeblest qf Christ's flock.
'ApvÉopai, Sfxai. occ. J o h n xxi. 15. Comp. Isa. xl. 1 1.
I. To deny, [often used offaels laid to I I I . I t is applied to Christ himself, t h e
one's charge. M a t . xxvi. 70. 72. M a r k spotless antitype of the paschal and other
xiv. 68. 70. L u k e viii. 4 5 . J o h n i. 20. sacrificial lambs, which were offered by
t h e law. Rev. v. 6, S. & al. freq.
* [Sclil. would include rtp¡j.. y . i. L A. in a paren- 'Aporpiáu, w, from áporpov.— To plough,
thesis, and j o i n áy. a. T. \. w i t h £>JÁÚJ v¡J.c¿S, cultívate the earth by ploughing. occ. L u k e '
which would obvíate Krebs's objections ( O b s . F l a v .
xvii. 7. 1 Cor. ix. 10. [ D e u t . xxii. 10.
p. 3 1 1 ) to interpret the word in the sense, to espouse.
Krebs. says, To prepare.'] Isa. lxxxviii. 24.]
f For the above observations I a m indebted to an "Aporpov, a , ro, from ápótu to plough,
excellent M S . L e x i c ó n to the Greek T e s t a m e n t , de- —A plough. occ. L u k e ix. 62. In this
posited i n the library of St. J o h n ' s College, C a m -
passage t h e r e seems a k i n d of proverbial
bridge, the work o f the R e v . J o h n 3 I a l l , formerly
Schoolmaster at B i s h o p Stortford, Hertfordshire. expression for a careless, irresolule person,
T h e reader will not be displeased at seeing the which m a y be much illustrated by a pas-
learned writer's o w n w o r d s : sage of * Hesiod, where he is directing
" 'Apfj.í¡¡o¡jLui A p t o , adapto, accommodo, apté t h e ploughman,
compono. P l u t a r c h , S o l ó n . r a e . » ó | W » f 'APMO'ZETAI
toí; 7 r o ? . í w f , leges aptat, accommodat, cimbas. Et '05 x l'gyy ¡J.Í\Í7W^ lOsía'j C Í I A C K ' £Xrti/vo/,
in T h e m i s t . 'AFMOTTO'M E N 0 2 Tifa; SlChaaaal ci-
vitatis ánimos ad res navales d i s p o n e n s ; ¿[ ita sim. ©t7(Utov f'^wv.—'E *y. x a l 'H;^. l i n . 4 4 1 — 3 .
2 Cor. x i . 2 , f¡pn°-
f

plicius interpretan possitmus,

o-rt^wíjv &c. adaptavi enim vos (christianis doctrinis L e t h i m attend h i s charge, and careful trace
<§f virtutibus i m b u í , instituí, paravi, composui, or- T h e right-lin'd furrow, gazc no more about,
navi) iit uni viro tanqnam virgincm pnram sistam, B u t h a v e h i s m i n d intent upjon the work.
nempe Christo. Omncs interpretes y\:¡j.vcct,p.>Y¡ sensu
nnptiali accipiunt. Mihi vero parum soliciti vi- [See Schott. Adagialia Sacr. N . T . p . 75.]
dentar de differcntiá ínter áf/jiót^c/v & af^í^ieScu.
I n three passages out of four. wherein t h e
Pater enim dicitur ¿¡¡^ó^siv, E u r i p i d . E l e c t . ver. 2 4 .
Domi Electram tenebat Aigistlms, "HPMOZE L X X use t h e word aporpov, it answers to
yv¡j.t>íw jívt, nec sponso alicni d e s p o n d e b a t ; sponsns t h e H e b . í i « , and cannot signify t h e nhole
vertí áf,uó^£(79aí sibi depondere, sponsam sibi m a - plough, but only a part of t h e iron work
trimonio jungere. j E l i a n H . A . l i b . x i i . c. 3 1 ,
thereof, and most probably the coulter.
Eurysthenes & Procleas 'HPMO'sANTO t<x; BnaávSfv
T Í KXiwfiv^n SfvyaTÍfa;. Hinc putarc liccat sen- See Isa. ii. 4 . Joel iii. 10. Mic. iv. 3 .
sum Imnc mhms convenire lude loco. Prcitcrea 'Ap7ray>), ijc, //, from i'ipirayov, 2d aor.
Infinitivas rafarñoa-t hule verbi signijicationi mhms of ciptrá'(io.
uccommodatur, quoniam Aeensativiis alias cum Da-
tivo reprritiir."
* See W h i t b y ' s N o t e on L u k e i x . 0 2 .
 A 1' IT
I . Actively, The act of plundering or
yillage. occ. H e b . x . 3 4 . [Polyb. xvi. 5.
Xen. Cyr. iv. 2 , 12.]
I I . Passively, Rapiñe,plunder, the thing
unjnstly seized. occ. M a t . xxiii. 2 5 . Lulce
xi. 3 9 . [ S c h l . says t h a t the word in H e b .
x. 3 4 . is loss without violence, and t h a t in
L u k e xi. 3 9 , t h e sense is active. I do not
see t h e distinction between t h a t passage
a n d M a t . xxiii. 2 5 . but t h i n k t h a t both
m a y perhaps be better translated in t h e
active sense. T h e other, however, is known
in good Greek, as Xen. Hell. iii. 2, 19.
(See Schwarz. Comm. L i n g . Gr. p . 190.)
and so Isa. iii. 1 4 . ]
f f ^ ? 'Apwaypbc, 5, ó, from r¡p—aypai,
3
perf. pass. of ó p j r á i f w . — R a p i ñ e , robbery,
un act of rapiñe or robbery. So Hederic,
" Ipsa rapiendi actio, r a p t u s . " occ. P h i l .
ii. 6 ; where it is said of Christ, t h a t when
he was in the form of God, namely in his
glorious appearances under t h e P a t r i -
archal and Mosaic dispensations, ov-% ap-
Traypbv yyricrciTo, he t h o u g h t it n o t rob-
bery (as our translators, rightly, I t h i n k ,
render t h e expression) to be equal with, or
as, God. ( F o r proof of this, see inter al.
Gen. xvi. 1 1 , 13. xxii. 1 1 , 12. xxxii. 2 8 ,
29. Exod. iii. 2—G. Josh. v. 1 3 — 1 5 .
J u d g . vi. 11—23.) M a n y g r e a t and good
men, as well as others inclined to degrade
t h e Son of God, have, however, dissented
from this plain interpretation, and have
translated t h e Greek words by " he did
not arrógate to himself t o be equal with
G o d , i. e. he made no ostenlation of bis di-
v i n i t y ; " (so Archbishop Tillotson, in his
second Sermón on t h e Divinity of our
Blessed Saviour, vol. i. p . 4 5 2 . fol. edit.*)
or, " he did not cagerly covet to be (as he
was of oíd) equal, in all his appearances,
with t h e D e i t y ; " (thus t h e learned M r .
Catcott, Serm. 5. p . 96.) B u t I m u s t
confess t h a t , after diligent search, I can-
not find t h e phrase ' A P I T A r M O ' N T i r E F -
2 9 A I ever applied in either of these senses
by any ancient Greek w r i t e r ; t h o u g h
Archbishop Tillotson, t r u s t i n g , I suppose,
to t h e a u t h o r i t y of Grotius, says i t is so
used, i. e. in t h e former sense, by P l u t a r c h .
ITeliodorus, bishop of Tricca, in Thessaly,
who fíourishcd towards t h e end of t h e
fourth c e n t u r y . and in his youth wrote a
romance entitled The Ethiopics, has in-
deed an expression which greatly resembles
i t ; for speaking of a young man who r e -
* S e e intcr al. Plutarch, t o m . ii. p . 3 3 0 , D . J o -
* [ T h i s is Schleusner's opinión, but he offers little sephus, A n t . l i b . x i . cap. 5 . § G. S o E c c l u s . x v i ,
or no argument for atlopting it.] i 13 or 15.
£14 A P IT
jected t h e amorous advances of a queen,
he says óvx " A P Ü A r M A , áBe "Eppaiov
' H r E ' I T A I ro irpaypa, he does not regard
the offer as a prey (prize) or treasu r e -
trove, which is as near as I can transíate
the Greek. (See W h i t b y and Wetstein.)
B u t observe, t h a t t h e original word h e r e
is not ' A P l T A r M C r N , but "APÜArMA,
which latter signifies not the act of robbing
or plundering, b u t t h e plunder, spoil, or
prey itself " Quod r a p t u m est, rapiña,
prceda." Hederic. A n d applied in t h i s
sense, we meet with "Apiraypa in t h e
Greek writers * ; b u t in them 'Apway pus
is a word of very rare occurrence. P l u -
tarch however uses it, De Lib. E d u c . tom-
11. p. 1 1, 12. rbv I K Kpí¡-7ic icaXúpevov'AP-
Ü A P M C r N , where i t certainly denotes t h e
action. [See M . Casaubon. D i a t r . de V e r b .
U s u , p . 110, in Cren. Anal. Philol. Crit.
Historicorum, and Magee, i. 7 1 . ii. 479.]
'APÜA'ZQ, from t h e H e b . fpu to strip,
spoil.
I . To snatch, take away with liaste and
violence. M a t . xiii. 19. J o h n x. 2 8 , 2 9 .
Acts viii. 39- xxiii. 10. 2 Cor. x ü . 2 .
Comp. J u d e ver. 2 3 . [Schleus. observing
t h a t t h e original sense is to sleal or take
with violence, says, t h a t it is never so used
in t h e N . T . P a r k h u r s t ' s first instance
does not certainly imply violence, b u t i n
all t h e other passages i t appoars to m e
t h a t t h e verb is not as Schl. says, to take,
or take away, b u t to do so either with
liaste or violence. Indeed in J u d . 2 3 ,
where he translates it maturo eripere, I
feel surprise at his avoiding so clear a
sense. comp. Zech. iii. 3 . Amos iv. 17.]
I I . To seize, take by forcé or violence.
M a t . xi. 12. J o h n vi. 15. [ I n M a t . xi.
12, t h e sense is lo receive t h e happiness
offered with greediness, as in X e n . A n a b .
vi. 5, 11. P l a t . E p . viii. p. 716. ed. L u g d .
D ' O r v i l l . ad Charit. 1. 9. p. 2 6 3 , ed. Lips.]
I I I . To seize, as a wild beast doth i t s
prey, and so lo tear and devour. occ. J o h n
x . 12. E u s t a t h i u s on H o m e r asserts this
last to be t h e p r i m a r y and proper meaning
of the w o r d ; and in this sense i t is ver}''
frequently used by t h e L X X , answering
either to t h e H e b . bu to ravage, or tqlto to
tear in pieces. [See G e n . xxxvii. 3 3 .
Amos i. 1 1 . X e n . M e m . ii. 7, 14.]
"Ap7ra£, ayos, b, )/, rb, from apir¿d(ti).
I. Rapacious, ravening, as wolves. occ.
 A P P 05 A P T

Mat. vii. 15. "Apirai; in t h e Greek, and
rapax in the L a t i n writers, are t h e usual
epithets of toolves. [Lyeoph. 1309. H o r .
Carm. iv. 4 . ] '
I I . Rapacious, given lo rapacity or ex-
tortion, an extortioner. occ. Luke xviii. 11.
1 Cor. v. 10, 1 1 . vi. 10.
'A'P'PABÍÍN, wvog, b. This is plainly
in Greek letters t h e H e b . word j m i > a
pledge (from t h e r o o t m i ) to be surety),
which Grotius ingeniously supposes t h e
Greeks learned from t h e Phcenicians in the
course of their commerce with t h a t people;
t h o u g h very possibly t h i s , like many other
Oriental words which are found in Greek,
m i g h t have a far more ancient origin, and
even be coeval with t h a t l a n g u a g e . — A
pledge or earnest, which stands for p a r t of
t h e price, and is paid before-hand to con-
firm tile bargaiu. So Hesychius explains
i t by rrpóbopa somewhat given before-hand.
[ I t also signifies a pledge to assure the
fulfilment of a promise or contract, see
Gen. xxxviii. 17. See L e Moyne, Not. ad
V a r . Sacr. p. 4 6 0 — 4 8 0 . ] I t is used in
t h e N . T . only in a figurative sense, and
spoken of t h e H o l y Spirit, which God
h a t h given to the apostles and believers in
t h i s present life, to assure t h e m of their
future and eternal inheritance. occ. 2 Cor.
i. 22 (where see Kypke and M a c k n i g h t ) ,
v. 5. E p h . i. 14, where see M a c k n i g h t . —
I n the L X X i t is thrice used, namely,
Gen. xxxviii. 17, 18, 20. and always an-
swers to t h e H e b .
SfgSi "Abpafoc, a, ó, )'/, from a neg. and
0
M a r k vi. 5, 13. xvi. 18. 1 Cor. xi. 301
[ M a l . i. 8. 1 Kings xiv. 5.]
"APS, ápvbg, o, f¡.—A lamb. occ. L u k e
x. 3.
I¡§P° 'AptTEV0KÓiTr¡e, a, b, from apmp> a
mole, and KÓirr¡ a bed.—One that lieth
carnally, or abuseth himself, with a male,
a sodomite. occ. Cor. vi. 9. 1 T i m . i. 10.
comp. Lev. xviii. 22.
" A P 2 H N , EVOS, b, i¡, Kal rb—EV. It oc-
curs in t h e mase. plur. thrice in Rom. 1.
2 7 ; and in the neut. sing. aprxEv, JEVOQ,
sex being understood, M a t . xix. 4 . M a r k
x. 6. L u k e ii. 2 3 . Gal. iii. 28.
| g f " A P T E M I 2 , iboe, y.—Artemis, Di-
ana, occ. A c t s xix. 24, 27, 28, 34, 3 5 . A
heathen goddess said to be t h e d a u g h t e r
of J ú p i t e r and Latona, and twin-sister t o
Apollo. T h i s enigmática! genealogy is
easily explained: it is well known t h a t
the latter Greeks and Romans, by " A p r c p c
or Diana*, generally meant t h e M o o u ; and
even among the ancient Orphic hymns we
find one addressed to "AprEpte under t h i s
character. A n d indeed the word "Aprepie
itself may íinport as much, for it may be
derived from t TU* light, and t n n to per-
fect, because, according to t h e observa-
tions of t h e Son of Sirach, Ecclus. xliii.
7, 8. she not only decreaseth in her per-
fection, b u t also increaseth wonderfully in
her changing— shining in the firmament
of heaven. W h e n therefore the H e a t h e n
say t h a t Apollo or the S u n and "Aprecie
were t h e twin-children of J ú p i t e r and L a -
tona, what is this b u t a poetical disguise

or corruption of t h e Mosaic account of

pá<j¡i] a seam, which from '¿¿paLpa, perf. act.
their formation (Gen. i. 14, 16), accord-
of páTTTií) to sew.— Without seam, having
ing to which t h e Sun and Moon were in-
no seam. occ. John xix. 2 3 . [ O n the g a r -
deed formed or b r o u g h t forth a t a b i r t h ,
ment here spoken of (proper to Palestine.
as it were, after t h a t the Expansión (Jú-
Chryst. Hom. 84, on S t . J o h n ) , see E r n e s t .
piter) had begun to act on Latona, i. e. t h e
I n s t , I n t e r p . N . T . p . 258. and Braun. de
before-hidden m a t t e r of their orbs? For
Vest. Sac. H e b . i. c. 16. p . 2 5 9 . ]
Latona, or, as t h e Greeks cali her, Aí/rw,
"Appr¡v, EVOQ, b, t h e same as " Apcrr¡v, of
is a plain derivative from t h e H e b . íosb or
which it seems a corruption.—A mole.
occ. Rom. i. 27- Rev. xii. 5. comp. J e r .
x x . 15. * See V o s s i u s de O r i g . et P r o g . I d o l . l i b . ii. c a p .
f¡j§°"App>}70£, a, ó, ?j, Kal rb—ov, from 2 5 , 2 6 .
a neg. and pr¡rbc utterable, from péo> to •\ H o w e v e r , w h e n b y "AoTe/xif the ancient H e a -
then meant, as t h e y sometimes did, the w h o l e e.r-
speak, utter.—Either, A oí before spoken ; panse of the heavens, this ñ a m e m a y perhaps be b e s t
T

or, not utterable, not to be uttered, not pos- deduced from i n to Jiote, and nrn to bind; and to
sible, or lawful, to be ultered. V i t r i n g a , show that the celestial fluid in its several conditions
Obs. Sacr. lib. iii. cap. 20. § 8, whom see, " acts only b y m e a n s of mechanical impulses, and a
connection with even the most extreme or lowest
shows t h a t the Greek writers use the word parts of nature, a chain was carried d o w n from each
in both these senses. Comp. also Wolfius hand of the i m a g e (of the E p h e s i a n D i a n a ) and con-
and Wetstein. occ. 2 Cor. xii. 4. nected w i t h its feet," as M r . J o n e s has i n g e n i o u s l y
"AppwToc, a, ó, i/, from a neg. and pu- and j u d i c i o u s l y observed in his excellent Essay on
the First Principies of Natural Phüosophy, p . 199,
roc strong, from pojvvvco to strengthen.— which I g l a d l y embrace this opportunity o f r e c o m -
Iitfirm, sick, an invalid. occ. M a t . xiv. 14. m e n d i n g to every truly candid reader.
 A P T 9C A P T

!oV to hide, involve.—I cannot forliear add- of those who were coming, shouting ire
ing on this occasion, t h a t in the Orphic t h a t well known form of praise, " G r e a t
h y m n above mentioned is clearly preserved is ¿Esculapius!"
a remarkable point of true philosophy, 'Aprépiov, ovos, ó, from áp-áw to
namely t h e effect of 'Aprepts or t h e Moon suspend, hang up, which perhaps from
in vegetation, where he says, i)prai, 3d pers. perf. pass. ©f aipu> to lift
tip.—The meaning of this word is dubious,
—"ArOTZA KAAOTS KA'PnOTZ yám(. but it seems to denote either a sail in the
Thou bringcst from the earth the goodly fruits. fore-part of the ship>, or the top-sail whicli
Does not this exactly agree with the pre- hung towards t h e head of t h e mast. occ.
A c t s - x x v i i . 4 0 . [ L u t h e r makes i t the
cioas things put fortk by the Moon, or
mast, Grotius the sail next the prom. T h e
streams qf light from the Moon, H e b .
largest sail of t h e ship is still called Ar~
0>ni>, of which Moses speaks, D e u t .
timón by t h e Venetians, according to*
xxxiii. 14 ? Comp. Heb. and E n g . Lexic.
Schleusner.]
u n d e r » n a V . — " T h e Temple of Diana,
a t Ephesus, has been always admired as 1. "APTI, A d v . Nom, at present.. Mat»
one of t h e noblest pieces of architecture iii. 15. xxvi. 5 3 . John i x . 19. 1 Cor, i v ,
11, used with t h e prepositive article as
t h a t t h e world has ever produced: I t w a s *
an adj. comp. NCv I. 1. [ U s e d only with-
four hundred and twenty-five [ R o m á n ]
t h e present.]
feet long, two hundred [and t w e n t y ]
broad, and suppórted by a hundred and 2. Nom, already. M a t . ix. 1 8 ; where-
twenty-seven columns of marble, sixty [or, see Wetstein. [Schleusner says t h a t it¡
here means prope, fere, brevi, both from-
as some say, seventy] feet high, twenty-
t h e parallel passage, M a r k v. 2 3 . and from.
seven of which were beautifully carved.
Phavorinus, who says t h a t rípn signifies
T h i s temple, which was [at least] two
what is about to happen directly.]
h u n d r e d years in building, was b u r n t by
one Erostratus, with no other view than 3. Nom, lately. 1 Thess. iii. 6. [Poli. L
7. ./Esch. Soc. Dial. iii. 15.]
to perpetúate his m e m o r y : however, i t
4. " E w c apri, JJntil nom, lo this prc~
was rebuilt, and t h e last temple was not
sent time. M a t , x i . 12. J o h n v. 17-
inferior either in riches or beauty to t h e
5. 'ATT' apri, From this present time,
former, being adorned with t h e works of
henceformard. M a t . xxiii. 3 9 . xxvi. 2 9 .
t h e most famous statuaries of Greece."
Jolm i. 5 1 .
Appendix to Boyse's Pantheon, 2d edit.
p . 2 4 1 . Comp. Complete System of Geo- 'Apriyévvnros, a, ó, ?/, from cípn nom
graphy, vol. ii. p . 77. T h i s latter temple lately, and yívvnrbs born, which from
ytvváio to bringforth.—Lately born, nem
was (according to Trebellius Pollio in
born. occ. 1 P e t . ii. 2 ; where W e t s t e i n
Gallien. cap. 6.) plundered and b u r n t by
cites B P E ' í O S 'APTIPE'NNHTON from
t h e Scythians, when they broke into Asia
Lucian, who also uses t h e adj. áp-iyévvr¡-
Minor, in t h e reign of Galienus, about t h e
rov twice in his Pseudomantis. [On t h e
middle of t h e t h i r d century.—As to t h e
phrase see Schoetgen. H o r . H e b . and
cry of t h e Ephesian populace, mentioned
Talm. i. p . 1036.]
A c t s x i x . 28, M E r A ' A H ' H " A P T E M I 2
TWV 'H(j>£críiov, Elsner and Wolfius observe, "AprioQ, a, b, )/, from apto to fil.
[or rather from ápHZoj to perfect.]—Com-
t h a t this was a usual form qf praise
plete, sufficient, completely qualifed. occ.
among t h e Gentiles when they magnified
2 T i m . iii. 1 7 ; where see Wolfius and
their Gods for their beneficent and illus-
Wetstein.
trious d e e d s ; and cite a very similar pas-
sage from Aristides, p . 5 2 0 . H v KOI (ion
T "Aproe, u, b, from a'ípu to raise, lift up,
•xóWr) TWV re rrapbvrwv Kai ÍWLÓVTWV, rb
either because i t renews, and a'ípa raises
•KÓXvvpvnrov Sé rSro ¡3owvrwv' M E r A ' S 'O man's exhausted strength (see P s . civ.
15.); or because r¡prai it is itself raised
' A S K A H ' n i 0 2 ! A n d there was a great
or puffed u p with leaven, in French levain,
cry, both of those who were present and
which is in like manner from t h e V . lever
* See Pliny Nat. Hist. lib. xxxvi. cap, 2 4 . T h e
to raise u p .
l e n g t h of S t . P a u l ' s Cathedral, from east to west, I . Bread, propevly so called. M a t . xvi.
between the walls, is 4 6 3 E n g l i s h feet, and i n c l u d m g 11, 12. Also, A loafi or rather, according
the pórtico 5 0 0 feet, the breadth of the west front to t h e Jewish method of making their
1 8 0 , and i n the centre, where it i s widest, including
the north and south porticoes, 3 1 1 . Complete
bread, which still prevails in t h e Eastern
System of Geography, v o l . i. p. 9 4 . countries, A thin flat cake of bread, not
 A P X
unlike our sea-biscuils; which form shows
t h e propricty of t h a t common expression,
breaking of bread. M a t . vii. 6. x ü . 4. xiv.
17- & al. freq. comp. M a t . xxvi. 26. 1 Cor.
x. 16. L u k e xxiv. 50, 35.
I I . Food iu general, of which bread is
a principal p a r t , especially among t h e *
E a s t e r n people. (See Lev. xxvi. 26. P s .
cv. 16. E z e k . iv. J 6.) M a t . [iv. 4.] xv. 2,
2 6 . L u k e xiv. 1, 15. xv. 17. [ T h e phrases
icrQkiv aprov, &c. for to be at a meal or
feast, is H e b r e w . See Gen. xliii. 24. Prov.
xxiii. 6. 1 Sam. x x . 2 4 . ] — I t may be worth
observing, t h a t we have our English word
bread, from the Danish brod, or Germán
brot, both of which are probably of t h e
same root as the Greek ¡SpwToyfood. See
u n d e r Bpwoxw.
I I I . I t is applied to Christ the living
bread, or bread qf Ufe, who was typified
by t h e manna which fell from heaven in
t h e wilderness, and who sustains the spi-
ritual Ufe of believers here u n t o elernal
Ufe hereafter. See J o h n vi. 33, 35, 4 1 ,
4 3 , 50, 5 1 , 58.
I V . All things neccssary, both for our
temporal (comp. Prov. x x x . 8.) and spi-
ritual supporl. M a t . vi. 11. L u k e xi. 3 .
$ § 5 ° 'Aprítii, from &pu> toft.
I. To fit, prepare. In this sense it is
generally used in the profane writers.
[ A t h e n . ii. p . 6 7 . ]
I I . To prepare with seasoning, to sea-
son, as with salt. occ. M a r k ix. 50. L u k e
xiv. 34. Col. iv. 6. [In this last passage
there is allusion to t h e wholesomeness of
salt. Let your conversation be advan-
tageous to others. T h e word oceurs in
Symm. Song of Solomon viii. 2.]
'Ap^áyyfXoc, a, ó, from ap-)Qi head, and
tíyyEXoc an ángel.—An arcliangel, a chief
ángel, occ. 1 Thess. iv. 16. J u d e ver. 9.
comp. Zech. iii. 1, 2. 2 P e t . ii. 11. [ T h e
Jews t h o u g h t there were four, to each of
whom God had given a certain c h a r g e ;
see Syncell. Chron. p . 3 3 . Michael was
t h o u g h t t h e patrón of t h e Jews. See
T a r g u m on Song of Solomon viii. 9 . ]
'Apyaíog, ala, a'iov, from ítpyj\ the be-
ginning. Oíd, ancient. M a t . v. 2 1 . Acts
x v . 7. 2 P e t . ii. 5, the oíd, i. e. the original
(so Vulg. original!) antediluvian world.
& al.
'APXH\ ije,
I. A beginning, in order of time, an eiu
* See H e b . and Jiny. I ^ i r a n in arh I I . and
Shaw's Travcls, p. 2 8 0 .
9 A P X
trance into being or acl. M a t . xix. 4. xxiv.
8. John i. 1, ¿. Aap^ávuv
<
apyi¡v, to re-
cave its beginning, i. e. to begin, in a
neuter sense. occ. H e b . ii. 3 . O n which
, texts Raphelius cites several instances of
t h e same phrase from Polybius, and W e t -
stein from iElian. [ P a r k h u r s t has here
entirely neglected to notice numerous pas-
sages where the sense of apxn, (i- e. w h a t
beginning is alluded to) must be j u d g e d
from t h e context. The beginning of
Christ's minisiry on earth oceurs L u k e i. 1.
and perhaps John xv. 2 7 ; of t h a t of t h e
Apostles after his death, Acts xi. 1 5 ; of
acquaintance with Christianity, 1 John ii.
7, 24 ; of t h e life of the being spoken of,
Acts xxvi. 4. 1 John iii. 8 ; and frequently
what was before the creation. See espe-
cially 2 Thess. ii. 1 3 . ]
I I . A beginning, extremity, outermost
point. occ. A c t s x. 11. xi. 5. T h e L X X
use t h e M'ord for t h e H e b . riVip, E x o d .
xxviii. 2 3 . x x x i x . 16. [for t^lD 2 Chron.
xx. 16.]
I I I . A first or original slaie. occ. J u d e
ver. 6, [and so Schl. & Cyril. Alex. c. .Tul.
iv. p . 121.] where some would i n t e r p r e t
TI)V eavriov apyiiv by their own head or
chief, i. e. Christ; and in support of t h i s
l a t t e r exposition it may be observed, t h a t
ápxr)v is used in this sense by t h e L X X ,
Hos. i. 11 : B u t on this interpretation a
very u n u s u a l , and perhaps unparalleled,
meaning m u s t be assigned to 7-?;p>'/o-cu'-£c,
namely t h a t of adhering lo, or obeying, a
person. Macknight, whom see, r e u d e r s
n)i' kavrwj' apxfiv in J u d e by their own
office, and refers to L u k e x x . 20. for this
meaning of «px»). Comp. sense V.
I V . Christ is called 'Ap^fi, The begin-
ning, or head. Rev. i. 8 *. xxi. 6. xxii. 13.
comp. Rev. iii. 14. 'Apx>; ríjc CTÍ'O-EWC, The
beginning, head, or f efftcient cause of the
creation; because HE IS before all
things, and all things were crealed by
him and for him. comp. J o h n i. 1, 2, 3 .
Col. i. 16, 17. H e b . i. 10. 'Ap í) in t h i s X
application answers to t h e H e b . JTU/N"), b y
which ñame Wisdom, i. e. t h e Messiah, is
called;, Prov. viii. 2 2 , Jehovah possessed
* B u t observe, that i n R e v . i. 8 , 'Afxíj «al TS'XOÍ-
are w a n t i n g in m a n y M S S . (three of w h i c h ancient),
in several ancient versions, and in s o m e printed e d i -
t i o n s ; and these words are accordingly rejected b y
M i l i , W e t s t e i n , and Griesbach.
T I t m a y n o t b e amiss to observe, that O v i d u s e s
the abstract term, O r i g o , in l¡Ke manner for a n
itzeitt, nr pffinicuí cause. M e t a m o r p h . l i b . 1. l i n . 7 9
Ule. O/rifcv rermn, mtiiuli mcHoris O r i g o
11
 A P X 9: A P X

me I D l T t l W i the beginning, head, or Wolfius in H e b . xii. K y p k e in A c t s iii.

principie of his way, i. e. of his work of and M a c k n i g h t in H e b . ii. [See Micah
creation, as t h e eontext plainly shows. i. 13. 1 Mace. i x . 6 1 . Isoc. Paneg. c. 16.
And t h e first word in Génesis, n w i 3 , be- Iíerodiari. vii. 1, 2, 3 . See Wessel. ad
sides its resjicct to time, has been t h o u g h t Diod. Sic. v. c. 65.]
by some to refer t o Christ, by and for ¡Ul?* 'Ap^uparucbe, r¡, ov, from ap^tEpEvs-
whom t h e world was created. Accord- —Belonging to the chief priest, the chief
iugly t h e Jerusalem T a r g u m very remark- priest's. occ. A c t s iv. 6. Josephus, A n t .
ably renders n ' ^ K I l in Gen. i. 1, N D 3 i m , lib. xv. cap. 15. § 1. uses t h e same phrase
By Wisclom, i. e. t h e Messiah.— ín Col. i. 'APXIEPATIKCTY TE'NOYS.
18, " as t h e Apostle is speaking of Christ, ' ApytEpEvs, ÍOQ, A t t . t o l e , ó, from ápx>) a
as the head of the body, the Church, Mac- head or chief, and lepei/e a priest.
k n i g h t , whom see, explains 'Apyf¡, the I . A high or chief priest, applied b y
first cause or beginning, in respect. of t h e way of eminence, and according to its spi-
Church, which began immediately after ritual and real import, to Christ. See
t h e fall, in t h e view of C h r i s t s coming into Heb. ii. 17. iii. 1. v. 10. vi. 20. ix. 1 1 . '
the world to perform t h a t one great act of í I I . The Jenish high or chief priest
obedience, b y which t h e evil consequences (styled in H e b . ti?Nin p a *. 2 K i n g s x x v .
of Adani's one act of disobedience were to 18), properly so called, who was t h e insti-
be remedied. t u t e d type of Christ in qjfering gifts and
V. Authority, rule, dominión, poner. sacrifices for sins, and in entering into
whether h u m a n , L u k e x x . 20 ; or angelic, the Holy qf Holies, not without blood, there
w h e t h e r good or evil (see 1 Cor. xv. 2 4 , to appear in the presence qf God, and to
and B p . Pearce there) ,• b u t i t is generally make intercession for us. (See Epistle to
used in t h e concrete sense for t h e persons Heb. particularly ch. ix.) M a t . xxvi. 5 7 ,
or beings in whom t h e dominión or poner 58, 62, 6 3 , 6 5 . & al. freq.
is lodged. See Luke xii. 1 1 . T i t . i n . 1. I I I . 'Apx'£p£íc, 01, Chief priests, i. e.
R o m . viii. 3 8 . E p h . i. 2 1 . iii. 10. v i . 12. not only t h e high priest for t h e time being,
Col. i. 16. ii. 10, 15, where see Macknight. and his depuiy (called ruttfo JH3 the second
Wetstein on L u k e xii. 1 1 . produces a priest, 2 K i n g s xxv. 18.), with those who
number of instances of this N . being a p - had formerly borne t h e high priest's office,
plied by t h e Greek writers, particularly b u t also t h e chiefs or heads qfthe tmenty-
in t h e plural, to human rulers. [ S e e four sacerdotalfamilies, which David dis-
N e h . i x . 17. Amos vi. 1. D a n . vi. 2 6 . vii. t r i b u t e d into as many courses, 1 Chron.
27. E u r . Phcen. 990. Philost. V i t . Apoll. xxiv. These latter are styled in H e b .
ii. c. 3 0 . ] E n r o n >W chiefs of the priests, 2 Chron.
V I . T?)v 'Apx>)j', for icara rr¡v íipyfiv. x x x v i . 14. E z r a viii. 2 4 . x. 5 , a n d >WH1
occ. John viii. 25 ; where i t m a y either C n i l J í l heads of the priests, N e h . xii. 7 -
signify Verily, absolulely, as often used in Josephus calis them by t h e same ñame as
t h e Greek writers (verily what, or the t h e writers of t h e N . T . 'Apópele, Ant.
same as, I am nom lelling you, namely one lib. x x . cap. 7. § 8. a n d D e Bel. lib. ii.
from above, ver. 2 3 . ) ; or Ai first, for- cap. 15. § 2, 3 , 4. and lib. iv. cap. 3 . § 6.
merly, as also applied by t h e Greek writers, A n d in his Life, § 3 8 , mentions IlOA-
and by t h e L X X , Gen. xiii. 4 . xii. 2 1 . A O T S — T Í T N 'APXIEPE'QNw.wy/ qfthe
xliii. 18, 2 0 , a n d by Theodotion, D a n . chief priests. M a t . ii. 4. xxvii. 1, 3 , 4 1 .
viii. 1. F o r further satisfaction see Elsner, M a r k x i . 2 7 . L u k e xxii. 5 2 . Acts v. 2 4 .
Wolfius, W e t s t e i n , Bp. P e a r c e , and Camp- & al. freq. Comp. W e t s t e i n on M a t . ii. 4 .
bell, on J o h n . — I n t h e L X X , 'Apx») [ h a s — T h e word is once used in t h e singular,
m a n y other meanings, as office. Gen. xl. in this last sense, for a chief qf the priests,
11. cohorl. J u d g . vii. 16. J o b i. 17- and Acts xix. 14.
sum or principal part. Ecclus. i. 14. x. 12. flgH" 'Ap-xyxoípnv, EVOS, o, from ápx¿£
xi. 3 . ] chief, a n d -Kotpnv a shepherd.—A chief
'Apx^yáe, S, ó, from ápx>7 the beginning, shepherd. occ. I P e t . v. 4 , where t h e word
head, chiefi and áyeo to lead.—A leader, is applied spiritually to Christ, (comp.
[properly of soldiers] author, priuce. occ.
Acts iii. 15. v. 3 1 . H e b . ii. 10. x i i . 2 . R a -
phelius, o n Acts iii. 15, a n d H e b . xii. 2 , * [ T h i s word 3 m i s used i n several Oriental l a n -
g u a g e s , a n d m e a n s one ivho approaches to the láng;
shows t h a t Polybius l i a s aowral times used whence it was a p p l i e d to tiie h i g h priest, because he
"•PXT/°s for a first leader or author. Comp. entered the H o l y o f H o l i e s . ]
 A P X
H e b . xiii. 2 0 . ) ; b u t in 1 Sam. xxi. 7, ov
8, such an offieev is mentionecl in a natural
sense, under t h e title of t » j n n T a » the
chief qf the shepherds, or herdsmen. And
in some curious remarles 011 the sheep-walks
qf Spain, published in the Gentleman's
Magazine for M a y 1764, we find, t h a t in
t h i s country (where it is not at all sur-
prising to meet with Eastem customs,
still preserved from the Moors), they have,
to this day, over each flock of sheep a chief1
shepherd. " T e n thousand," says m y au-
t h o r , " compose a flock, which is divided
into ten tribes. O n e man has the conduct
of a l l : he m u s t be the owner of four or
five h u n d r e d sheep, strong, active, vigilant,
i n t e l ü g e n t in pasture, in t h e weather, and
in the diseases of sheep. He has absolute
dominión over fifty shepherds and fifty
dogs, five of each to a tribe. H e chooses
t h e m , he chastises t h e m , or discharges
t h e m at will. H e is t h e prwpositus, or
chief shepherd ofthe wlwle flock." One
of the Hexaplar Versions uses 'Ap^nroí'/jj/v
for t h e H e b . i p j , 2 K i n g s iii. 4 .
[ U p " 'Apxtcrvi'áywyog, a, ó, from ápx¿c
head, and crvrayojyi) a synagogue.—A
ruler or rector of a synagogue, " who go-
verned all the affairs of it, and directed
all t h e duties of religión therein to be per-
formed. H o w many of these were in every
synagogue is nowhere said. B u t t h i s is
certain, they were more t h a n o n e ; for
t h e y are mentioned in Scripture in t h e
plural number, in respect of t h e same sy-
nagogue. M a r k v. 22. (comp. L u k e viii.
41.) Acts xiii. 15. Comp. Acts xviii. 8,
17 *." Mention is made of this oíbicer of
t h e Jewish synagogue in an Epistie of t h e
émperor A d r i á n , cited by Vopiscus in Sa-
t u r n i n . cap. 8. Nenio illic (in JEgypto,
scilicet) Archi-synagogus Judajorum.
'ApyLriierm', ovoq, o, from cipx¿£ a head,
and téictiov a morkman, which s e e . — A
head—or master-workman, or builder, an
architect. occ. 1 Cor. iii. 10. [ I s a . iii. ¿7\
Efgp ' Apyi~E\í>vr\c, a, ó, from b\pyhq a
0 in t h e same impersonal sense. So also
head, chief, and r€kmn}c, a publican.—A
chief publican, or head-farmer or—col-
lector of the public revenues. comp. TE\Ü¡-
v))c. occ. L u k e x i x . 2.
E§gp° 'Apxi-pt/cXtj'oe, a, ó, from «px¿£ a
head, rule, and rpocXíviov a,dining-room,tri-
clinium,so called from rptifi tliree,and. t-Xivtj
a couch, because, among t h e Romans at
* S e e P r i d e a u x Connect. pt. i . b o o k 6. p . 3 8 5 .
l s t edit. 8 v o . V i t r i n g a , D e S y n a g o g á Veterc, l i b . i i .
cap. 1 0 and 1 1 . and l i b . iii. c a p . 1.
.99 A P X
l e a s t * , three conches were in their dining*
rooms usualiy set to one square table,'the
remaining fourth sitie of which was always
left free for t h e access of t h e servants. A
ruler, governor, or president qf a feast.
occ. J o h n ii. 8, 9, where see Wetstein.
Theophylact's r e m a r k on t h e 8th ver.
seems well worth our attention, and will
explain w h a t was t h e business of t h e á p -
X<-rpíi;\ivoc. " T h a t no one," saith h e ,
" m i g h t suspect t h a t their taste was so
v i ü a t e d by excess as to imagine water to
be wine, our Saviour direets it to be tasted
by the governor of the feast, who certainly
was sober; for those who on such occa-
sions are i n t r u s t e d with this office observe
the strictest sobriety, t h a t every t h i n g may,
by their orders, be couducted with r e g u -
larity and deceney." Comp. Ecclus. x x x i i .
1, and Arnald's note t h e r e ; and see Suicer,
T h e s a u r . on t h e word.
"Ap^w, from ápx») rule, beginning.
I. To rule, govern. occ. M a r k x. 4 2 .
R o m . xv. 12. Particip. pass. 'Ap-^óperoe,
" Ruled, governed, in subjection," to his
p a r e n t s namely. occ. L u k e iii. 2 3 . comp.
ch. ii. 5 1 , and see Campbell's note on
L u k e iii. 2 3 .
I I . In t h e profane writers, " A p x w act.
and"Apxoy^at mid. To begin. B u t in t h e
N . T . apxppai only is used in t h i s sense,
as M a t . iv. 17- xi. 7. xii. 1. & al. freq.
L u k e xxiv. 4 7 , 'Ap^ápsvov airo—Raphelius
observes t h a t apt\¿tpevov is here an imper-
sonal participle, and may be rendered ini-
tio facto, a beginning being made, i n i t i u m
faciendo, in making a beginning, ita u t
initium fíat, so that a beginning be made,
and produces a passage from H e r o d o t u s ,
lib. 2, where ciplápevov enri) is used in t h e
same manner. H e also r e m a r k s from
Weller, t h a t SEOV, zípv, rrapov, ivSe-j(ópEvov
(to which, from Vigerus D e Idiotism. cap.
vi. § 1. r e g . 2, a n d Not. we m a y add ívov,
(SoicSv, Soi]av, SuiajEpov, iyxy>p5v, Tráparrxpv,
itapárvxov), are used by t h e Greek w r i t e r s
KEXEVGQEV it being ordered, an order being
given, is applied by Josephus, D e Bel. lib.
; 1. cap. 11. § 2, and pr¡vvdEv it being told.
Ib. cap. 24. § 7. I t is evident t h a t 'Ap£-
ápevov, when t h u s applied, is in t h e n e u t e r
g e n d e r ; and from Bos, Ellips. in M e r a ,
p. 3 5 9 , we m a y r e m a r k , t h a t such p a r t i -
ciples are governed by t h a t preposition
* See D ' A r n a y ' s very ssnsible and i n g e n i o u s E s ^
say on the Prívate L i f e of the R o m a n s , and Camp-,
b o l l ' 8 r r c l i m i n a r y Dissertations t o the G o s p e l s ,
p. 3 6 5 , &c.
H2
 A 2 A 100 A 2 E

understood. [ T h e verb is frequently al- neg. and aaXevio lo agítate, which see.—
most pleonastic when joined with the in- Not to be shaken, unshaken, immoveable.
tínitive of another verb, i'ip^aro ¿nro^éXXeiv occ. A c t s xxvii. 4 1 . H e b . xii. 2 8 ; where
he sent. M a r k vi. 7, see also x. 3 2 . xiv. 6 5 . see Wetstein and M a c k n i g h t . [Diod. Sic.
L u k e iii. 8. xiii. 2 5 . xiv. 18, 24. So in ii. 4 8 . iii. 47.]
the L X X , G e n . ii. 3 . D e u t . iii. 24. J u d g . £¡§1° "Ao-étTOC, a, ó, r¡, Kai rb—ov, from
x. 18. xiii. 5.] a neg. and o-€tvvvio to quench. Not to be
"Apxo>v, ov-os, ó, from apx 1° 'nde.—A quenched, unquenchable,
a
inextinguisháble.
ruler, chiej', prince, magistrale. See M a t . occ. M a t iii. 12. M a r k ix. 4 3 , 4 5 . L u k e
ix. 2 3 . x x . 25. L u k e xii. 58. J o h n xiv. 30. iii. 17.
A c t s vii. 2 7 . xvi. 19. Rev. i. 5. I t should 'Ao-£Í=£ía, ae, y, from CIOE&IQ impious.
seem from a comparison of J o h n iii. 1, I. Impiety towards God, ungodlincss.
with J o h n vii. 5 0 , t h a t &px<>>v rwv'laíaíuvocc. Rom. i. 18.
in t h e former passage means a member of I I . Wickedness iu general, neglect or
the Jewish Sanhedrim; (comp. L u k e xxiii. violation of duty towards God, our neigh-
13. xxiv. 20. J o h n xii. 4 2 . A c t s iv. 5, 8.) bour, or ourselves, joined with and spring-
B u t it is plain from comparing M a t . ix. i n g from impiety towards God. occ. R o m .
18, 2 3 , with M a r k v. 22, and L u k e viii. xi. 26. 2 T i m . ii. 16. T i t u s ii. 12. J u d e
4 1 , t h a t apx<¡>v in those t e x t s of M a t , ver. 15, 18.
means only a ruler of a synagogue*'. Jo- 'Aae§éio, 10, from cicre€i)e.—To act im-
sephus, in like manner, mentions t h e ap- piously or wickedly. occ. 2 Pet. ¡i. 6. J u d e
Xovrtc rulers and counsellors as distinct, ver. 15.
D e Bel. lib. ii. cap. 17- § 1 • comp. BuXév-iis. 'AcreQie, ¿oc, Se, b, 7), from a neg. a n d
Wolfius on E p h . ii. 2 , observes t h a t there cré€io to worship, venérate.
is no solecism in this t e x t , if we consider I. Impious, ungodly, not observing the
irvevparoe as p u t in opposition with etlaaíae true religión and worship qf God. occ.
TS aépoe the aerial rulers, and understand 1 T i m . i. 9. ] P e t . iv. 18.
it in a collective sense, as denoting a band I I . Wicked from impiety. Rom. iv. 5 .
or army ofevil spirits. Compare t h e use 2 P e t . ii. 5. & al.
of TTveüpa in A c t s xxiii. 8, aud see J o h n 'Ao-ÉXyEíct, ae, from aaeXyi)e lascivia
xii. 3 1 . xiv. 30. On A c t s xvi. 2 0 , see ous; which, according to some, is derived
Bowyer. [ A c t s x i i i . 9. the magistrales from a intens. and 'ZéXyr}, t h e ñame of a
or senators, who iu ver. 20. are called =rpa- city in Asia M i n o r , whose inhabitants,
7-1770!, as in good Greek occasionally. I n say some, were remarkably addicted to
1 Cor. ii. 6 and 8, the tcrm is general, and luxury, wantonness, and lasciviousness.
may comprehend t h e heads of t h e J e w s Strabo, however, informs us (lib. xii. p .
a n d Gentiles, t h e chicfs of t h e philoso- 854. edit. Almclou.) t h a t SfXyr/, a city of
phers, &c. T h e devil is often in t h c N. Pisidia, was a colon y of t h e Lacedasmo-
T . called t h e apxwv of this world. See nians, and t h a t t h e inhabitants were á&o-
2 Cor. iv. 4. J o h n xii. 3 1 . xiv. 30. xvi. 1 1 . Xoyioraroi riov Miaricíiov the most consider-
In L u k e xii. 5 8 , we are to understand one oble of the Pisidians, and t h a t t h e y were
of the magistrales appointed in each town cnoippovee sober, and even o-ioijipové^aTot most
to decide minor cases. See Miscell. D u i s - sober; and Libanius Schol. in D e m o s t h .
burg. i. p . 2 2 2 . and Wesseling Diatr. de O r a t , in mid. 'Ev 'SéXyr¡ rrávrzc SiKaloi
Archont. J u d . in Maffei's Antiq. Gall. f¡crav, Kai áperíje ávcipe^oi, All in Selga
E p . 1 and 8.] were just, and full qf virtue. If t h e Sel-
"Apupa, aroc, ro, from ap or dpi very gians deserved this character, and áaeXyr)e
much, and b'(io to smcll.—An aroma tic, a be derived from t h e ñame of their city, it
spice, " a vegetable produclion, fragrant is plain t h a t the a m u s t be negative. B u t
lo the smcll, and pungent to the taste." m a y not ácrtXyrje be better deduced from
Johnson, occ. M a r k xvi. 1. L u k e xxiii. 5 6 . a intens. and H e b . to knom carnally,
xxiv. 1. John xix. 40. I n the L X X it an- whence also the Greek V. craXáyeiv to
swers to t h e H e b . tDtin, which as a V. in ravish, defower, and 'SéXyn t h e ñame of
t h e Oriental dialectical languages signifies, t h e city j u s t mentioned? See B o c h a r t ,
in like m a n n e r , to be sweet. [2 Kings xx. vol. i. p . 364.
13. E s t h . ii. 12.] I. Lasciviousness, lemdness, letchery,
'AtrcíXturog, a, ¿, r), Kai rb—ov, from a lustfulness. R o m . xiii. 13. Gal. v. 19.
E p h . iv. 19. & al.
* [ £ * e however Ernest. I n s t . I n t . N . T . p . 2 4 2 . ] I I . An cnormovs or insolent injury, or
 A 2 e 101
injustice. M a r k vii. 22. On which place
Raphelius j u s t l y observes, t h a t if ¿icríXysia
were in this passage designed to denote
lewdness, or lasciviousness, it would have
been added to potxeíai and -rropveíat, vices
of a like kind, in t h e preceding verse.
B u t as it is joined with oóXoc deccit, he
interprets it in general as injury ofa more
remarlcable and cnormous kind, and shows
t h a t Polybius has in several passages used
t h e word in this sense, [v. 28. viii. 9. A n d
so Poli. (vi. 3 0 . 12G.) has used t h e ad-
jective.]
"Amnpoc, a, ó, r¡, from a neg. and criipa
a mark or signad, which see.—Not re-
marlcable, mean, inconsiderable. occ. Acts
xxi. 3 9 ; where Wetstein, among other
passages, cites from Achules T a t i u s "€lv—
n O A E f t S 'OYK A 2 1 T M 0 Y ; and from
Eurípides, "ETI yap 'OYIÍ " A 2 H M 0 2 ' E X -
\vvo)i> I I O ' A I S . See more in his note on
t h i s t e x t , and on A c t s ix. 11. [ T h e
proper meaning of the word is not mar leed,
used of money, Herod. ix. 40. See O l y m -
piad. Caten, in J o b xxxiii. p . 607, and
L X X . Job xiii. 11.]
'Aadévíia, ac, r¡, from acrdeviiQ. [ G e -
nerally weakness, and imperfección; and
thence
[ I . Weakness of body, disease. Mat.
viii. 17. L u k e v. 15. viii! 2. xiii. 1 1 , 12.
J o h n v. o. xi. 4 . A c t s xxviii. 9. 1 T i m .
v. 2 3 . 2 Mace. ix. 2 2 . ]
[ I I . Thefrailtyofour human nature.
1 Cor. xv. 4 3 . 2 Cor. xiii. 4. Even with
respect to mind. Rom. vi. 19. 1 Cor. ii.
3 . Used of our inclination to sin, H e b . v.
[ I I I . The qfflictions \incideni tohiima-
nity. Rom. viii. 26. 2 Cor. xi. 30. x ü . 5,
9. Gal. iv. 13. H e b . iv. 1 5 . ]
'Acrdevéia, o>, from ácrdevric.
I. To be weak. I t oceurs not in the N .
T . strictly in this sense.
I I . To be injirm, sic/c. Mat. x. 8. xxv.
3 6 . L u k e iv. 40. & al. freq. Xenophon
and Demosthenes use the V. in this sense,
as may be seen in Elsner on M a t . xxv. 3 6 .
[See J u d g . xvi. 7. ii. 17. Ezek. xxxiv. 4 . ]
I I I . To be weak spiritually, as in faith,
Rom. iv. 19. xiv. 1,2. 1 Cor. viii. 9. & al.
Comp. 2 Cor. xi. 2 9 . — C o m p . H e b . vii. 18.
[ S e e 1 Mace. xi. 49.]
IV. To be meak in riches, to be poor,
indigenl. Acts x x . 3 5 . Raphelius, in his
note on this place, produces several pas-
sages from Herodotus, where he uses ácr-
Oívaa ¡ñu for porrrty qf condilion, and
shows Ihat Demoslhcues uses the superla-
A 2 I
tiva ácrdevé^aroc for very poor, or lott! iit
the world. [ S e e also J u d g . vi. 15. 2 Sam.
iii. 1.]
[ V . To be weak, destitule qf authority,
digniiy or power, contemptible. See Rom.
viii. 3 . Of the law being unable tojustify.
2 Cor. x i . 2 1 . xiii. 3 , 9. on which two last
t e x t s see Wolf. and Doddridge. Schleus.
t h i n k s t h a t in 1 Cor. xi. 2 1 , weakness
and folly qf conduct is implied, as in Isa.
xxxii. 4. cío-devavree means the foolish.
H e interprets t h e last t e x t , as also v. 4. of
t h e same chapter, and 2 Cor. x ü . 10, of
calamities suffered for C h r i s t i a u i t y . ]
'Acrdévnpa, OTOQ, TO, from cicrdevéw.—
Weakness, infirmity, [ f r o m w a n t o f loiow-
ledge.] occ. Rom. xv. 1.
'AaBtvr¡Q, éoc, 5c, ó, i), Kal ro—¿e, fi'Om
a neg. and crOévos strength.
I. Weak, without strength. [Of females,
as inferior in strength to males, 1 P e t . iii.
7, where see W e t s t e i n . P a r k h u r s t i n t e r -
p r e t s 1 Cor. x ü . 22, qf the weaker parís
oflhe body ; b u t I t h i n k Schl. is r i g h t in
construing it the viler (i. e. t h e p u d e n d a ) ,
from v. 2 3 . So in 1 Cor. i. 2 5 , What is
vile or valueless in divine thingsf\
I I . Injirm, siele, sickly. M a t . xxv. 3 9 .
Acts iv. 9. v. 1 5 , 16.
I I I . Without strength or weak in a spi-
ritual sense, weak with regard to spiritual
things. M a t . xxvi. 4 1 . M a r k xiv. 3 8 .
Rom. v. 6. 1 Cor. ix. 22. comp. Rom.
xiv. 1.
'AO-OEVEC, ro, N e u t . used substantive!)',
Weakness, as of t h e law for t h e justifiea-
tion of a sinner. H e b . vii. 18. comp. Gal.
iv. 9. H e b . i x . 9. x. 1. Rom. viii. 3 .
I V . Weak, destitute of authority or dig-
niiy, contemptible. 1 Cor. i. 2 7 . 2 Cor. x.
10*.
'Acrtápxai, LOV, bi, from 'Arría Asia, and
ápX¿s a head, chief.—Asiarchs. occ. A c t s
xix. 3 1 . These were qfficers of a religious
nature, who presided over t h e public
games i n s t i t u t e d in honour of t h e gods."
T h u s in t h e M a r t y r d o m of Polycarp bishop
of S m y r n a in Asia, § 12. (edit. Russel)
they ask rbv t 'Acníipyriv -¿ííXnrTrov Philip
the Asiarch (who is afterwards, § 2 1 .
called 'ApyíiptvQ t h e High-priesl), to let
out a lion upon Polycarp, which he de-
clares he could not do, because that kind
qf speclacle was now over. All the E a s t e r n
1
[ S c h l . interprets this, ais;/, good natural, but
without a n y other proof than the existence of a
similar Germán idioin. Seo B i s h o p (Jonybcare's
Sermón on 2 Cor. >:ii. 7-1
t See Uslicr's N o t o in H u s s e l \ i ' d i t ^ - ^ ~ > \
 ASM
provinces liad sucli officers as tlie 'Ao-icíp-
yzu, who, from t h e i r respective districts,
were called Svptápxai, $oivu;iápy?a.i, ~Bt8v-
rápxai, &c. See more in Grotius, H a m -
mond, Pole Synops. and Wetstein.
¡Hgl*' 'Aairía, as, j¡, from amroQ.—Ábsti-
nence from, or ncglect of, foocl. occ. A c t s
xxvii. 2 1 , il¿XX.r¡e Sé aaiTÍas virapy¿(TnQ.
' T h e m e a n i n g is, But when almost every
;
body neglected their food: having Iittle or
no r e g a r d to meats, as expecting every
m o m e n t would be their last. T h e n a t u r a l
consequence of this m u s t be lowness of
spirits, and dejection of mind, against
which P a u l exhorts them in t h e following
speech, knowing t h a t t h e i r appetite for
food would soon. r e t u r n after t h e y were as-
sured of their Uves." M a r k l a n d in Bow-
yer's Conject. [and so Schl. citing l Mace,
iii. 17.]
f§§p°" Acrvroc, a, ó, r/,from a neg. and tríroe
corn, food.—Without food, fasting. occ.
A c t s xxvii. 3 3 ; where see Wetstein, and
comp. lípoaSoKciíü. [Schl. says t h a t t h i s is
t h e proper meaning of the w o r d ; but he
t h i n k s t h a t in this place it means, One
who has only eaten a titile, as in Soph. A j .
3 1 5 . E u r . PJipp. 2 7 5 . Joseph. A n t . vi.
14. 8. vii. 7. 4 . ]
'ASKE'íl, I Ü , either from t h e H e b . pin to
act with strength, or from t h e Chald. pDJJ
to strive, endeavour; " s t u d u i t , operam
dedit." Castell.—To exercise one's self
lo exert all one's diligence, sludy, and in-
duslry. occ. A c t s xxiv. 16. Raphelius
observes t h a t this V. is used intransitivcly
b y t h e m o s t elegant G r e e k writers, of
which he produces several instances from
Xenophon. Comp. also Wetstein. [See
Soph. E l . 1030. A t h e n . v. p . 259. D . ]
'ASIÍC/S, n, b, from a collect. and o-x¿w
to conlain, according to some.—A bladder
or skin sewed like a bladder to hold liquids,
iu t h e N . T . A bottlc of skin, a skin-bottle ;
such as were * anciently used to hold
wine, and are so still i n m a n y countries to
t h i s dav. occ. M a t . ix. 17. M a r k ii. 22.
L u k e v. 3 7 , 3 8 . Comp. Josh. ix. 4 , 13.
J o b x x x i i . 19, in which three t e x t s the
L X X use t h e word á o v c ó s , and see W e t -
stein on M a t .
¡ I g p 'AcrpivoiQ, Adv. from aapevog glad,
0
rejoicing, q. d. {¡apívoQ delighted, particip.
perf. pass. of ¡¡Su lo delight, which see
* S o R o m c r maíces ímention of wine's b e i n g
brought cts-xw EV aiytíu, in a bottle m a d e of goatslán.
11. iii. l i n e 247. O d y s s . v i . l i n e 73. O d y s s . i x . l i n e shouts salute it. T h u s W e t s t e i n cites from
V)G. [ S e e Herod. ii. c. 1 2 1 . ]
102 A 2 n
under 'USéwQ, [ r a t h e r from a¡Sw to sing.l
—Gladly, joyfully. occ. A c t s ii. 4 1 . x x i .
17. On Acts ii. 4 1 , Wetstein cites from
Dionysius H a l . Diodorus Siculus [xii. 5 4 ] ,
and Josephus, t h e similar phrases, ' A 2 -
M E ' N í i S ' Y n O A E ' S A S e A I T ( J N AO'-
TON, and ' A S M E ' N Í I S I T P O S A E ' S A S -
GAI, and ' A S M E ' N í i S A E ' g A S G A I T 0 T 2
A O T O Y S . Comp. Kypke. [jElian. V. H .
xii. 1 8 . ] — T h r e e ancient M S S . , however,
and one later, together with the Vulg.
and two other ancient versions, omit
ao-pév(i)Q from t h e text in Acts, and Gries-
bach marks i t as a word probably to be
omitted. [ 2 Mac. iv. 12. 3 Mac. iii. 1 5 .
v. 21.]
E§5||° "Acroaioe, n, b, from a neg. and
cró<pog wise.— Unwise, foolish. [or, igno-
rant qf religión.^ occ. E p h . v. 15. [Prov.
ix. 8.]
'Acrirá'Copai, Mid. or Depon, from a col-
lect. or intens. and O T T Í Í W to draw. So
E u s t a t h i u s on II. p . 82. and p . 1249, says
it signifies íi£, or 7rpóc kavrbv cnrácrdaí to
draw to one's self; and to t h e same p u r -
pose t h e Scholiast on Aristophanes, P l u t .
Kvpiíoe ácnríicracrB'cu tVt rb Tr¿puikéictcrQái
riva, Sia rb "ATAN 2 n A " 2 9 A I Éi iavrbv S
rbv írepov, kal •Kepi&ciWetv ras x ' P £ ' £ a íV
ra (¡>iKo<f>povEÍctQai. 'Aa-Kíiaandaí properly
denotes to embrace any one, because when
benevolently aífected towards another, one
is a p t to t h r o w one's arms over h i m , and
to draw him strongly to one's self. B u t ,
after all, the Greek áo-Tráfojiiat may p e r -
haps be best derived from the H e b . ^DN
to collect, gather together.
I. To embrace, \Jciss, and thence to
receive with joy. L u k e x. 4. (comp. 2
K i n g s iv. 29.) Rom. xvi. 16. M a r k ix.
15.]
I I . To salule, hail, show some outward
tohen of love or respect to a person or t h i n g
present. M a t . v. 4 7 . x. 12. Mark ix. 15.
L u k e i. 40. R o m . xvi. 16. & al. freq.
Comp. M a r k xv. 18.
I I I . To salute or greet a person absent.
Rom. xvi. 2 1 , 2 2 , 2 3 . & al. freq.
I V . To embrace mentally, to lay hold
on with desire and affection. occ. H e b . x i .
13 ; where Kypke cites t h e G r e e k w r i t e r s
applying t h e V e r b to things as well as
persons in this sense. Paréus, after C h r y -
sostom and Theojmylact, says, t h a t t h i s
word is used by a metaphor taken from
persons sailing, who, when t h e y see a t a
distance t h e i r wished-for port, with joy ful
Vii-gil, / E n . iii. line 5 2 2 — 4 ,
 ASÍ!
Cam procul obscuros colles, humUanqitc vidcmus
I t a l i a m . I t a l i a m primus conclamat Achates;
Italiam la3to socii clamore salutant.
[Schleusner gives t h e following peculiar
meanings, which m e r i t attention. To
congratúlale, A c t s xxv. 13, where P e s t u s
takes possession. To love, in M a t . v. 47-
Comp. H e r o d . i. 122. Plat. in Lyside, t.
ii. p . 2 1 7 . S l i a n . V . H . ix. 4. Aristoph.
P l u t . 7 4 3 . To visil, A c t s xviii. 22. x x i .
7. To be glad, H e b . xi. 13. Comp. M a x .
T y r . Diss. xxi. 1. D ' O r v . Charit. 1. 5. p .
224. H e remarles also j u s t l y , t h a t acnra£-
o¡xai is lo salute either in approaching,
M a t t . x. 12, or leaving any one, Acts x x .
1. See on the word Jensius, F e r c . L i t t .
P- 13.]
[fgf 'AtnraaLiog, 5, ó, from -/'/oTrctcrjii.cn.
0
perf. of ¿lo-Trci^opai.—A salutation, [made
in any w a y . ] Mat. xxiii. 7. 1 Cor. xvi. 2 1 .
Col. iv. 18. & al. O n 2 Thess. iii. 17, see
Wolfius.
"Ao-ttíXoc, u, b, ?/, from a neg. a n d awikoQ
a spot.—Without spot, free from spot,
spotless. occ. 1 T i m . vi. 14. J a m e s i. 27.
1 P e t . i. 19. 2 Pet. iii. 14. [ S e e Symm.
J o b xv. 15.]
' A S I i r S , ícve, —-dn asp, a species of
serpent remarkable for rolling itself up in
a spiral form, as B o c h a r t h a t h proved, vol.
iii. 3 7 9 , 380. Henee t h e Greek E t y m o -
logists derive it from a neg. and arricio to
extend; but it m a y , in this view, be better
deduced from t h e H e b . F|DN to collect, ga-
ther together, if indeed karúc be not a
ñame formed from t h e sound-of t h e r e p -
tile's hissing. occ. Rom. iii. 13, which is a
citation of Ps. cxl. 4, where t h e H e b . word
answering to aaTÚSuiv of t h e L X X , and of
the Apostle, is n i t w y , which seems in like
manner derived from "]l> (Arab.) lo bend,
or U>DJ) (Arab.) to bend back, and X\W to
return. Comp. H e b . and E n g . Lexicón in
t Ü P " "AarrovooQ, n, b, f], from a neg. and
cnrtrm) a libalion, which from awévcio to
offer libations. Implacable, irreconcili-
able, occ. Rom. i. 3 1 . 2 T i m . iii. 3 . T h i s
meaning of the word is taken from a r e -
ligious ceremony, common to all the an-
cient nations, of offering sacrifices and
libations to their gods in t h e i r solemn
trealies. So in t h e treaty between t h e
Greeks and Trojans, in Homer, 11. iii. we
find t h a t they not only offered two lambs
for a sacrifico, but, line 2 9 5 , 6,
'OINON ÍX x^jTJÍfo; aVi'zrcrci.[AV/t>i
EKXEON, r,t}' É t y ^ o y 7 0 St^c. £¿£ly£YE7Í"]fflY.
103 ~í ~j 2¡
I n t o tlie cups they draw the sacred mite,
A n d pour libations to the powers divine.
See the prayer following.
A n d t h u s , in the t r e a t y between the L a t i n s
and the Trojans, in Virgil, i E n . xii. line
174, they in like manner sacrificed a swine
and a s h e e p :
Pat'erisquc altaría libant.
A n d on their altars the libations pour'd.
Comp. Isa. x x x . 1. and Bishop Lowth
t h e r e . — A n d this custom was so uuiver-
sally and constantly observed among all
t h e Grecian states, t h a t rnrívbto or o-tríveo-
fiai, which properly denote lo offer liba-
tions, are with t h e m t h e usual words for
making a treaty, as t h e N . rrwovbi), p r o -
perly a libalion, is for t h e treaty itself;
henee ticrwovboe rrokepoe is a deadly irre-
concileable wat..—We can be a t no loss t o
account for t h e original meaning of t h e
ceremony j u s t mentioned. T h e h e a t h e n
nations certainly derived it from t h e an-
cient believers. A n d what could i t denote
among these, b u t t h e staking of their
hopes of salvation and happiness, temjioral
and eternal, by the blood of t h e Redeemer,
t h u s typically poured out, on t h e per-
formance of t h e i r respective p a r t s of t h e
t r e a t y or covenant ?
¡§3§§p ' A S S A ' P I O N , s, rb. A word formed
from t h e L a t i n assarius, t h e same as A s . —
An As, a Román coin, equal to t h e t e u t h
p a r t of t h e denarius, [ o r drachin] and cou-
sequently to about three farthings of our
monejr. occ. M a t . x. 2 9 . L u k e xii. 6.
T h i s word is used likewise by P l u t a r c h ,
Dionysius Halicarn. and Athenseus, as may
be seen in W e t s t e i n on M a t . Comp. also
K y p k e . [ T h i s is Schl.'s opinión also on
t h e w h o l e ; but some say t h a t t h e ¿larcrítpuii'
is t h e half only of t h e Román A s . Piin.
N . H . xxxiii. 5 . T h e valué of the coins
is as follows:
1 Drachin = 6 Oboli,
1 O b o l u s = 6 Chalci,
1 Chalcus=7 Lepti,
and t h u s 1 A s according to S c h l . = a G e r -
mán k r e u t z e r , which is about five-sixtiis
of an English halfpenny. See Groiiov. de
Pecun. Vet. p . 4 3 9 , and Budieus de Asse,
p. 200.]
6pT A 2 S 0 N , A d v . comparative neut.
T
íyyvQ nigh, whence éyyiitv aod '¿rr-
SETTÍÍÍVÍT.V ücov, and neut. lo-crov and áero-oj' (see
¡ Wolf.) ; so from Trague, compar. TTOXIWV
 A 2 'J 104 A 2 T

ílild iráo-rxíoi', from rayjic, rayj-úv aud wrestlings, is wrestlings of God ( G e n .

§¿tacriúv,—Near, very nigh, cióse, occ.
Acts xxvii. 13. T h e word is t h u s used
n o t only in t h e poets, as may be seen in
Alberti and Elsner, b u t Raphelius shows
t h a t Herodotus [ii. 5 2 . iv. 3.] has several
times applied aacsov in this sense, and so
has Josephus, A n t . lib. i. cap. 2 0 . § 1.
Tac CE Xeiirofiévac A 2 2 0 N éieéXevev aieo-
T
XHBÉÍV A n d he ordered those t h a t were
behind to follow near, or at a small di-
slance. Comp. also Wetstein.
Sf5¡p° 'Alarios, ü, from a neg. and tarbc
jixed, sellled, which from 'Ur¡pi to stand,
be jixed. To be unsetiled, have no cerlain
or fixed abode. occ. 1 Cor. iv. 11. [¿í^-a-oc,
3 Mace. v. 3 9 Q
'ATEÍOC, a, or, from óVu a city.
I. One that divelleth in a city.
I I . Well-bred, polite, elegant, as t h e in-
habitants of cities usually are in compari-
son with those of t h e coiratiy. [Joseph.
A n t . ix. 2. 1.]
I I I . Bcaulifid, handsome, elegant in
form. I n this sense only it is used in t h e
' N . T . occ. A c t s vii. 20. ' H e b . x i . 2 3 . I n
t h c former of these passages, Moses is
said to have been a^eioc reo Qeoí * beauti-
ful through God, i. e. through his e x t r a -
ordinary and peculiar favour or blessing.
comp. 2" Cor. x. 4, and 1 Sam. xvi. 12, in
t h e L X X cited below. I am well aware
t h a t there is another more common, b u t I
apprehend erroneous, interpretation of this
phrase ci-doc rü Qci¿>, which, as i t seems
t o be clearly stated by Doddridge on t h e
x x x . 8.), goodly cedars are cedars of God
(Ps. l x x x . 10.), great mountains are moun-
tains of God ( P s . xxxvi. 6.), and an ex-
ceeding great city is a great city of God
(Jon.iii. 3.) 7ró\i£ peyéiXy rol 0£¿>.Septuag.
A n d in like manner in t h e N . T . 2 Cor.
x. 4, meapons mighty through God, !¡-¡rXa
corara r¿> Qe¿>, might not improperly be
rendered very strong meapons." Thus
the Doctor. L e t u s now review the texts.
— G e n . xxx. 8, Rachel, on t h e birth of a
son t o Jacob by lier maid Bilhah, saith
»nVn&3, t»n^K >^nEl3 By the ageney (Heb.
twistings) of God, I am intwisled with my
sister, i. e. m y family is now t h r o u g h
God's blessing interwoven with m y sister's,
and has a chance of producing t h e p r o -
mised seed ,• t h u s she acknowledged t h e
favour of God iu Bilhah's bearing this se-
cond son, as she h a d already done when
she bore t h e former. comp. ver. C. A n d
to this purpose t h e L X X , Aquila, a n d
Vulg. exjdain ver. 8. * Cedars of God,
Ps. lxxx. 10, are plainly parallel to cedars
qf Lebanon, which Jehovah halh plantea,
Ps. civ. 16, and which are therefore called
His. P s . xxxvi. 6, Thy righleousness is
like t h e mountains qf God, i. e. not high
or great, b u t steadfast and immoveable,
like the mountains which God hath esta-
blished by his almighty power, (comp. P s .
lxv. 6. Prov. viii. 2 5 . Amos iv. 13.) a n d
which therefore are claimed as His. I n
J o n . iii. 3 , Nineveh is styled TlVni
t) n'7HÍ' a g r e a t city f, "for, or belonging
,

place, I shall express in his w o r d s : to, the Aleim, t h e t r u e G o d ; and accord-

" Grotius and others," says he, " have ingly t h e inhabitants of i t repenled upon
observed it as a common Hebraism ; being
no more t h a n an emphalical expression to
* S e e H e b . and E n g . L e x i c ó n , under bns.
denote his extraordinary beauty, which -j- See Calcott's excellent Remarles on thc Second
might. perhaps be not unfitly rendered Part of the Bishoj) of Clogher's Vindicatton afilie
divinely beauiificl; t h e ñame of God being líistory of the Oíd and New Testament, part i. p .
40, and the learned Parker's B i b l i o t h e c a B i b l i c a , vol.
often introduced t o express such things
ii. p . 167, 8. A n d since writing the above in the
as were extraordinary in their kind. So first edition, I a m g l a d to find that able critic Orlas-
iu t h e Hebrew, what we transíate great sius concurring i n a similar explanation of the t e x t s ,
P h i l o l o g . Sacr. l i b . iii. tract 1. canon 17- 3. " I f the
whole nation of the A s s y r i a n s ( s a y s D r . W a t e r l a n d ,
'•" J o s e p h u s mentions the beauty o f M o s e s when Charge, M a y 19, 1731, p . 37.) were the posterity of
round in the ark of bulrushes, and relates, that w h e n A b r a h a m , s o called from A s h u r i m , G e n . x x v . 3,
lie w a s b u t three years o í d , n o o n e w h o s a w h i m descended from A b r a h a m b y K e t u r a h (as an ancient
c o u l d help being struck with h i s beauty, and that as writer i n J o s e p h u s , A n t . l i b . i. cap. 15. p . 44. edit.
h e w a s carried about, people w o u l d leave their H a v e r c a m p . asserts, a n d as a learned modern, J o h .
business to gaze at h i m ; and he introduces Pharaoh's Frider. Schroeerus, I m p e r i u m B a b y l o n i s et N i n i ,
daughter calling h i m nalia MO P<1>H 0 E " i O N a child sect. ii. p . 105, & c . n o w lately h a s undertaken to
divine inform. A n t . lib. ii. cap. 9. § 5, C, 7. P h i l o m a i n t a i n , ) w e m a y then t h e more easily account for
(in Vita U l o s i s , towards t h e b e g i n n i n g ) says, that the quick repentance o f t h c N i n e v i t e s u p o n the
t ¿
at h i s birth h e h a d a more elegant and beautiful warning given t h e m b y a single prophet of Israel, as
('ASTEIO'TEPAN) appearance than denoted an orcli- well a s for their manner of expressing their repent-
nary p e r s o n . " — A n d it appears from J u s t i n , l i b . ance ; not l i k e idolaters, b u t true w o r s h i p p e r s : (see
s x x v i . c a p . 2, that the famc of M o s e s ' uncommon J o n . iii. 3, 8, 9. M a t . x i i . 4].) They had not alio,
bruñí;/ had spveíut umnn:; thc l í c a ' K n . cfíihcrforgol í/ic religión nfl/tcirfalíicrs. '
1
 A 2 T 105 A 2 T

t h e preaching ofJouah, aud performed such I I I . The augels or bishops of churches

services as showed t h a t they kneiv what are figuratively denoted by stars, w h o ,
the t r u e religión was, though, in general, " having gained light from t h e Sun of
they had not~practised it." Lastly, do n o t Righteousness themselves, ought, by their
vrcXa hvvarh r¿> Q E Ü , 2 Cor. x. 4, plainly example, both in purity of doctrine a n d
mean not only very sirong wcapons, b u t integrity of life, to give light (prcelueere)
wcapons properly divine, weapons mighly to others." Stockius. Rev. i. 16, 2 0 .
ihrough God, namely, through the mira- [So in t h e O . T . illustrious persons, espe-
cidous gifls of the Holy Spirit bestowed cially teachers of the divine word, are
on t h e Apostles, which S t . Paul elsewhere called stars. N u m b . xxiv. 17- D a n . viii.
calis the demonstration of the Spirit and 10, 2 4 . xii. 3 . 1 Mace. i. 2 5 , and so t h e
qf power (cvváuaojt;), and with which he Greeks. See P l u t . M a r a t h . c. 3 0 . a n d
declares he was assisted in preaching t h e Palairet. Obs. Phil. Crit. p . 5 2 1 . ]
Gospel, t h a t thdvfaitk might not stand in I V . Jesús calis himself, Rev. xxii. 16,
(or depend vpoii) the ivisdom of man, but the brighl and morning S t a r , as u s h e r í n g
in the power (ovvápeí) qf God? See 1 in t h e Gospel-day of Knowledge, G r a c e ,
Cor. ii. 4, 5. T h e L X X use t h e word and G l o r y ; t h e last of which is especially
IITEIOV for t h e H e b . nlio goodly, beaut'ful, alluded t o under t h e same image in Rev.
agreeable, in t h e account of Moses' beauty, 11. 2 8 .
Exod. ii. 2 ; and in t h e description of ¡fá|lí° 'Acrrypu:roe, a, ó, í/, from a neg. a n d
David's, 1 Sam. xvi. 12, for >N1 lito they •zilpucroQ confirmed, established, which from
p u t ¿íyaOoQ opáo-EL KvpiM, fair in aspcct THpt£w to confirm, cstablish.-—Unsettled,
through t h e Lord, an expression very unstable, unsteady. 2 P e t . ii. 14. iii. 16.
similar to á-eíos T¿> QEÜ. ¡"Longin. de Subí. ii. 2 . ]
'A2T1TP, ÉpoQ, b. " A T o p y o c , a , ó, f¡, from a neg. and «ropyi)
I. A star. " one qf the luminous bodies natural affeclion, which from ^e'pyw to
that, appcar in the nocturnal sky," ( J o h n - love with such affeclion; and this may be
son), whether fixed star, planet, or comet. from t h e H e b . litlí lo be wrealhecl or knit
1 Cor. xv. 4 1 . comp. M a t . xxiv. 29. M a r k together.-—-Void qf natural affeclion, p a r -
xiii. 25. Rev. xxii. 16. ticularly of that love and affeclion which
I I . A luminous body, somewhat resem- parenls o u g h t to bear to their children,
bling a star. So Homer plainly uses and children to their parents, and which
(í^epa for t h e meteor commonly called t h e animáis in general have by n a t u r a l i n -
skooiing of a star, II. iv. line 75. stinct, and some of t h e m in a most r e m a r k -
able degree, particularly t h e storlc, whose
' OÍOV á A2TEPA tjxs Kaóvou TTKVS dyv.v'ho^j.nTÍvi.
1 -
English ñame seems t o be of t h e same
origiu as t h e Greek ropyij, and t o have
been given it on account of t h e reciprocal
A n d Lucian, Navig. tom. ii. p. 6 7 1 , ex-
<ropyi) between t h e parents and offspring
plains his own expression riva Xíipirpov
of this species ; of which see Bochart, vol.
"ASTEPA, a certain shining star, by Aioa-
iii. 3 2 7 , &c. and H e b . and E n g . Lexicón,
icápiov rov 'Érepov, i. e. one of those lumin-
under i o n I I . occ. 2 T i m . iii. 3 . Rom. i.
ous appcarances called by t h e ancient
31 ; where see Doddridge's Note, and
sailors Castor or Pollux. M a t . ii. 2, 7, 9,
Leland's A d v a n t a g e and Necessity of
& al. comp. J u d e ver. 13. * I t is evident
t h a t t h e moiion of t h a t luminous body Christian Revelation, vol. ii. p . 4 8 , 5 9 ,
which appeared t o t h e Magi was quite 8vo.
different from t h e apparent motion of a n y 'Ato-)(Éw, üi, from á^oype one who misselh
of the stars, and t h a t it differed from them his aim, which from a n e g . a n d ^oxáíopai
also by appearing in t h e day-time, and so, lo aim and lend lo the mark, and tisis from
no doubt, its light. was much more + in- T£i')¿w lo go in order or regularly.— To
tense than theirs, though inferior t o t h a t err, deviaie. In a figurative and spiritual
light above the brightness of the sun, sense. occ. 1 T i m . i. 6. vi. 2 i . 2 T i m . ii.
which shonc round Paul and those that 18. [Polvb.-Exc. L e g . 8 9 . Ecclus. vii. 2 1 .
journeycd wiíh him, Acts xxvi. 13. viii. 1 1 . P l u t . Galb. ]). 106. de Def. O r . p .
4 1 4 . ] — T h i s V . is several times used by
Plutarch in t h e sense of erring, and con-
* See B i s h o p Chancller's V i n d i c a t i o n of the D e - strued with a genitive, as in i T i m . i. 6.
fence of Christianity, p. -i 1 3 . See Wetstein.
t « c e I g i m l . E p i s t . ad K p l i c s . § 1 9 . cilit. R u s s c l . ' A 2 T P A f l i r , í/c, ¡,.
 A 2 * 106 A 2 O

I. Lightning. M a t , xxiv. 27- xxviii. 3 . ' A e r ^ a X r / e , eos, Se, ó, r¡, Kat rb—te, from
& al. a neg. and cr<¡>cí\\ta to supplant, trip up
I I . Vivid brightness, sprighíly lustre, the hecls, throrv down.
as of a lamp. occ. L u k e xi. 3 6 *. I. Firm, that cannot be thrown down.
'A^pcnrrai, from drpam).—To lighten, In this sense strictly it oceurs not in t h e
Jlash, or shine as lightning. occ. L u k e N . T . b u t in t h e profane writers.
xvii. 24. xxiv. 4. I I . Firm, sure, steady, that cannot be
"A^pov, a, ro, from d~r)p a star.—Pro- moved, occ. H e b . vi. 19. [ W i s d . iv. 3 . xiv.
perly, A constellation f consisting of se- 3-]
veral stars, as Orion, Pleiades, &c. Also, I I I . Safe. occ. Phil. iii. 1.
A star. occ. L u k e x x i . 2 5 . A c t s vii. 4 3 . I V . Certain. occ. A c t s xxv. 26. 'Au<f>a-
xxvii. 20. H e b . xi. 12. X ¿ e , rb, Certainty, truth, t h e adj. n e u t e r
'Acrvfj.füjroc, a , ó , ?/, from a neg. and being, as usual, employed as a substantive,
avfjtpwroe agreeing in speech.—Disagree- occ. Acts x x i . 3 4 . xxii. 3 0 . [ W i s d . vii.
ing in speech, discordant. occ. A c t s xxviii. 23.]
25 ; where Wetstein cites from Diodorus 'Aatpdkíi^b}, from acrc¡>a\r¡c.—To make
Sic. [iv. 1.] 'A2YM<M2'NOY2 ' E I N A I fast, safe, secare, occ. M a t . xxvii. 64, 6 5 ,
Í I P 0 * 2 ' A A A I Í A 0 Y 2 . [ W i s d . xviii. 10.] 66. A c t s xvi. 24. [Wisd. xv. 15. Pol. i.
'Aavveroe, a, ¿, ?/, from a neg. and 42.]
avverog understanding, knowing.—With- 'AaédKwQ, A d v . from ao-(¡>a\i)e.
out under slanding, uninlelligent, foolish. I . Sqfely. occ. A c t s xvi. 2 3 . M a r k xiv.
occ. M a t . xv. 16. M a r k vii. 18. Rom. i. 4 4 , where see Wolfius and Kypke. [ T h i s
2 1 , 3 1 . x. 19. [ S c h l . says, Rom. i. 2 1 . place is by the Vulgate, rendered cante;
a n d x. 30. ignorant qf the true religión. and by t h e Syriac, by a word i m p l y i n g
Rom. i. 3 1 . wiched or without religión. circumspection. Schl. says, ' L e a d h i m
'AO-VVETÉÜ). oceurs Ps. cxix. 157. for to act away safely, t h a t h e m a y not escape,' or
perfidiously, and acrvveros in W i s d . i. 5.
c
w i t h o u t danger or fear of e r r o r ; ' or
(comp. Ecclus. xv. 7. 8.) for impious or ' w i t h o u t fear of danger from those who
sinful.~] m i g h t be on his side.' I n Greek, t h i s
'AtrívOeroe, a, ó, from a neg. and word signifies, without danger or fear, in
avvríQrpii to make an agreement or cove- Pol. i. 19. iii. 110. Herodian. ii. Q. B a -
nant.—A covenant-breaker, one who doth r u c h v. 7- and diligently, Herodian iv.
not stand to, or perform, his covenant or 12. 3 . ]
agreement. So Hesychius, a ' o w Q á Y a c , pr¡ I I . Certainly, assuredly. occ. A c t s ii.
kppévovrar rale; avvQ!,KaiQ; and T h e o p h y - 3 6 . [Wisd. xviii. 6.]
lact, r o t e crvvTtEdtvnpévoie pf¡ éppévovrag. 'AtryjipovÍLo, io, from aayj]pov.— To be-
occ. Rom. i. 3 1 . [ J e r . iii. 8. 11.] have indecently, unseemly, or unbecom-
' A o ^ á X e t a , ac, ?';, from a'o-^aX?)e. ingly. occ. 1 Cor. vii. 3 6 . xiii. 5. [ S c h l .
I . Firmness, security, safety. occ. A c t s says, t h a t in the first passage, it is iofall
v. 2 3 . 1 Thess. v. 3 . [ I n A c t s v. 2 3 . into disgracc ( o n account of his virgin
f

the firmness or diligence in guarding is d a u g h t e r ' ) , and cites D e u t . xxv. 3 . E z .

m e a n t , b u t in I Thess. v. 3. t h e security
arising from such or similar precautions.
In t h i s sense it oceurs, Lev. xxvi. 5 . D e u t .
x ü . 10. Polyb. H i s t . iii. 27. 2 Mac. iii. 22.
iv. 2 1 . ix. 21.]
I I . Firmness, certainly. occ. L u k e i. 4.
[ X e n . Mem. iv. G, 15.]
* [ T h e H e b r e w word for l i g h t n i n g V í a ( E x .
x i x . 15.) is used i n the s a m e w a y i n D e u t . x x x i i .
4 1 . N a h u m iii. 3 . ]
•f "Ag-fov and « V í j differ, s a y s the Greek g r a m -
marian A m m o n i u s ; for «Vgov is a celestial sign
formed of several stars, as O r i o n , the B e a r , b u t
rVí¡.- a single star. [ S e e Macrob. S o m n . S e . i. 1 4 .
Huidas & A m m o n i u s . S c h o l . P i n d . 0 1 . i. S).; b u t
this is not ¡ilways o b s e r v a ! , as m a y be secn above,
and also in P i n d . 0 1 . i. 1). Mk\\. Socr. D i a l ,
iii. 7 . ]
xvi. 9. E u r . H e c . 4 0 7 . In t h e other sense,
it is of common oceurrence. See Xen. de
R e Eq. ii. 6.]
'Ao-)(ripocrvvy¡, ne, i), from a.ayi¡pi>>v.
I. Indecency, obscenity. occ. Rom. i. 27-
[and Ecclus. x x v i . 4 1 . x x x . 13.]
I I . Nakedness, shame, shameful parís.
occ. Rev. xvi. 15.—In t h e L X X it is fre-
quently used in t h e latter sense, answer-
ing to t h e H e b . írn)?. See Lev. xviii. [6.
7. H o s . ii. 11.]
1
Anyj\pt>>v, OVOQ, b, i¡, Kat rb—ov, from tt
neg. and o-)(fjpa figure, mien.— Uncomely,
indecent. occ. 1 Cor. x ü . 2 3 . comp. Rev.
xvi. 1 5 . — I n t h e L X X it answers in one
passage, D e u t . xxiv. 1, to the H e b . m"U?
nakedness.
'Acrtoría, a c , {¡, from cíeroiroc abandoned,
 A T I 107 A Y r

proflígate, riotously luxurious, from a neg. dfporrvvr) in v. 1. and means boasting, ün-
and o-úiiD or ¡rw¿> to save, reserve; be- worthy of a dignifica man. He trauslates
cause such persons usually waste their sub- K. a. A. t h u s : ' L e t me now speak boastingly
stance, yea themselves, in riotous living, a little. ]
1

reserving nothing. See Wetstein on L u k e "Aripog, a, b, ii, from a neg. and ripr¡
xv. 13. [ P r o v . x x v i ü . 7.]—Profligacy, honour.—Diskonoured, without honour.
debauchcry. abandoned riot. occ. E p h . v. occ. M a t . xiii. 5 7 . M a r k vi. 4. 1 Cor. iv.
18. T i t . i'. 6. 1 P e t . iv. 4. 10. [ I s . liii. 3 . Ixii. 4.]
EfSlP 'Ao-úriúc, A d v . from arrwroe, which 'Aripóoj, w, from clripoe-—To dishonour,
see under aawría.—Profligately, riotously. treat with indignity. occ. M a r k xii. 4 .
occ. L u k e xv. 13. Josephus uses t h e same 'ATMPS, íboc, i), from aw to breathe,
phrase CIGLOTWC '(r¡v, to Uve riotously, A n t . according to some. Vapour, particularly of
lib. xii. cap. 4. § 8. smoke. occ. A c t s ii. 19. J a m e s iv. 14,
' A r o m ' u , S>, from ara/croe.— To be- where see Wolfius and W e t s t e i n , and comp.
haveirregularly or disorderly. occ. 2 Thess. H e b . and E n g . Lexicón in blTi I . — I n t h e
iii. 7, where see Kypke. [ P r o p e r l y ¿o leave L X X t h i s word answers to pj? a cloud,
one's post, ov ráhe to desert, and then ? Í O ¿ namely of incensé, L e v . xvi. 13. Ezek.
to discharge one's duty. See Olear, de viii. 11.—to TíO'p smoke, vapour, as of a
Stilo N . T . p . 3 . Xen. Cyrop. viii. 6. 8. furnace, Gen. x i x . 2 8 , (so arpie, xairvái-
CEcon. v. 15.] Sr¡e .smoky vapour, to fU/i) smoke, H o s .
"Armeros, tí, b, i;, from a neg. and rÉraicrai xiii. 3.)—to minfn pillars, namely of smoke,
3d pers. perf. pass. of ráa-o-o) to set in order. Joel ii. 30. or iii. 3 .
[See ¿rafC7-£<u.] —Disorderly, irregular, i. e. ¡¡mf "Aropoe, tí, b, ?';, Kal rb—ov, from a
violating the order prescribed by God. occ. neg. and réropa perf. mid. of réprco to cut,
1 Thess. v. 14, where see Wolf. and Wet- divide ; which see.—Indivisible, "Aropov,
stein, and comp. 2 Thess. iii. 6, &c. rb, An indivisiblepoint of lime,an instant,
'ArÓKrwe, A d v . from araicrog.—Irre- a moment. occ. 1 Cor. xv. 5 2 .
gularly, disorderly. occ. 2 Thess. iii. 6, 11. "Aro-reos, u, b, y, Kal, rb—ov, from a neg.
" ATEKVOQ, a, b, i], from a neg. and TÉKVOV and rórroe place.—Literally, Without place,
a child, which s e e . — H a v i n g no child, or having no place.
childless. occ. L u k e x x . 2 8 , 2 9 , 3 0 . [ J e r . I . Of t h i n g s , Inconvenient, unsuiiable,
xviii. 2 1 . Ecclus. xvi. 4.] improper, amiss, wrong. occ. L u k e xxiii.
'Aruvi'Cü}, from á r w / s intent, viewing 4 1 . Polybius, as cited by Raphelius on
atlcntively, which from a intensive or a u g - the place, uses aro-aov in t h e same s e n s e ;
ment. and TEÍVW to tend, fix, which see. and in t h e L X X it several times answers
To fx the eyes, behold or look stedfaslly to t h e H e b . p « iniquity. Comp. also W e t -
or atlenlively. So Gr. Gloss. A l b e r t . ex- stein. Observe, t h a t in A c t s xxv. 5 .
plains aTtví'Coinec, by ¿i-EVEe (5\ÉTCOVTEC; e i g h t M S S . two of which ancient, for r¿rt¡>
and Hesychius, &T£VÍ£EC TTOOO-ÉXEI, /3\ETTEÍ. read CÍTOTTOV, and t h e V u l g . r e n d e r s ac-
Lueian. Contemp. tom. i. p . 3 3 8 . A . EV O cordingly—in viro crimen. Another M S .
•ATENI'SHiS if you look attenlively; & and t h e Complutensian edition, add i'iro-ov
D e Mere. Cond. p . 468. E . irpoe rb ÍKEIVH after -arw reading,
; and this which is also
irpócruTov 'ATENI'ZONTA' having your approved by B p . Pearce, appears to have
eyes fixed on his countenance. L u k e iv. been followed by our translators. [See
20. A c t s [ i . 10.] iii. 4. [vi. 15. vii. 55.] J o b iv. 8. x i . 1 1 . and x x x i v . 12. for
& al. freq. See Elsner and K y p k e on y u n n . ]
Acts. I I . Inconvenient, prejudicial, hurtful,
"ATEP, Adv.— Without, not with, either evil. occ. A c t s x x v i ü . 6 ; where W e t s t e i n
not having. occ. Luke xxii. 35 or in the cites t h e G r e e k writers u s i n g it in t h e
;

absence of. occ. L u k e xxii. 6. like sense, and Galen in p a r t i c u l a r apply-

'A-ipá£w, from a neg. and npáco to ho- i n g 'OYAE'N "ATOÍION to escaping t h e
nour.—To diskonour, treat with conlumely usual consequences of venomous bices.
or indignity. L u k e x x . 1 1 . J o h n viii. 4 9 . [2 Mac. xiv. 2 3 . Jos. A . xi. 52.]
Rom. i. 24. & al. [ E c c l u s . viii. 5. x. 32.] I I I . Of persons, Absurd, unreasonable.
'Aripia, ae, ?/, from empoe.—Dishonour, occ. 2 Thess. iii. 2 . [ S c h . says, wiched,
disgrace, ignominy. 1 Cor. xi. 14. xv. 4 3 . i?>ipious.~]
2 Cor. vi. 8. [ x i . 21.] & al. [ I n 2 Cor. xi. 'Avyá£b>, from ávy>).— To irradíale,
2 1 . Schl. says, t h a t dnpía is t h e same as beam, or shincforth. occ. 2 Cor. iv. 4 .
 AYA A YA

' A Y r t t , íjc, ,',,1]. cording to t h e Eastern mode of buildiug

]. Light, splendour. In tliis sense it is practised to t h i s day, it was built. See
sometimes used in tlie profane writers, and Shaw's Travels, p . 207. Henee
2 Mac. xii. 9. II. A lar ge house or palace. occ. L u k e
I I . The day-spring, day-brealc, first xi. 2 1 . See Wetstein on M a t . xxvi. 3 .
appearance of day-light. occ. A c t s x x . 11 ; I I I . A sheep-fold, a place where sheep
where Wetstein cites from Polyasnus, Kara are housed. T h u s used also in the Greek
•xpóir-qv ' A Y F I í N rije i/pépae, at the first w r i t e r s ; see W e t s t e i n . occ. J o h n x. 1, 1G.
dawning of the d a y . — I n the L X X this [It acquired t h i s sense from the sheep-
word answers to the Heb. MJtf, in t h e only fold being anciently t h e open court before
passage wherein it oceurs, Isa. lix. 9. t h e house.—The word oceurs 1 Chron. ix.
" A Y P O Y S T O S , », ¿.—Thc L a t i n ñame 22. 2 Chron. iv. 9. xxxiii. 5. J e r . xxxv. 2.
or titie, A u g u s t u s , in Greek letters. occ. E x . xiii. 2.]
L u k e ii. 1. See u n d e r Hé§a-oc. 'AvXnríie, 5, ó, from civXkio lo pipe.—A
'AvOtiSnc, coe, ec, ó, from dvroc him- player on a pipe orjlute, a piper orftute-
self and aceto io please. Comp. {¡déíoc.— player. occ. Rev. xviii. 2 2 . M a t . ix. 2 3 .
Sclf-willed, self-pleased,or rather pleasing Comp. Jer. xlviii. 3 6 , by which passage i t
himself and despising others, supercilious, should seem t h a t t h e Jewish funerals, so
hanghty, insolent, surly. T h i s vice in our early as the time of Jeremiah, were ac-
ordinary conversation is directly opposed companied with t h e music of pipes or
to courlesy or affabilily. See Theoplirast. futes, even as it is certain from J e r . ix.
E t h . Char. cap. xv. and D u p o r t ' s L c c t u r e s 1 7. 2 Chron. x x x v . 2 5 , t h a t in those days
t.hereon, and Raphelius aud Wetstein on t h e J e w s used to employ on such occasions
T i t . i. 7. occ. T i t . i. 7. 2 P e t . ii. 10. [ G e n . women, who made it their business to
xlix. 3 . Prov. xxi. 24.] mourn and sing at funerals. Josephus
Ifglí 'Áv9alpETO£, tí, Ó, f¡, from
0
CIVTUC expressly mentions these 'AYAHTA'S as
himself, and aipkio to choose.—Choosing being hired in t h e lareentations of t h e
or willing of himself or of his own accord. J e w s for t h e death of their friends, in his
occ. 2 Cor. viii. 3 , i 7. See Wolfius, W e t - time. D e Bel. lib. iii. cap. S. § 5 . See
stein and Kypke. [ S y m . E x . x x x v . 5.] Wetstein on M a t . i x . 2 3 , and H a r m e r ' s
HsH" 'Avdei'réto, to. from dvQévrr¡e * one Observations, vol. iii. p . 3 9 2 , &c. *
aclingby his own authorityorpower. Joined 'AvXí'Copai, from ¿tvXr) a sheep-fold.
with a genitive, To use or exercise au- I . To be pul or remain in a fold or
thoriiy or power over. So Hesychius, sidble, as sheep or other cattle. In this
ávQívríív, kífstnti'Cav, to exercise aulhority, sense it is used in t h e profane writers.
to dominecr. occ. 1 T i m . ii. 12, where see A n d because sheep were u$ua.]\y folded or
K y p k e and W e t s t e i n , housed at n i g h t , (see Bochart, vol. ii. 4 5 2 .
'AvXkto, to, from dvXoc a pipe or fule.— & seq.) henee,
To pipe, play on a pipe or fute. occ. M a t . I I . Spoken of men, To lodge at night t

x ¡ . 17. L u k e vii. 32. [where see Vorst. de take up one's night's lodging. occ. M a t .
A d a g . N . T . c. xi. p . 8 1 5 . ] 1 Cor. xiv. 7- xxi. 17- L u k e x x i . 37- T h e word is
'AYAíT ijc, i), either from ato lo blom, as frequently used in this sense botli by
t h e wind ; or r a t h e r , as M i n t e r t observes, T h u c y d i d e s and Xenophon, and also iu
from the H e b . btiiA a ient, tabernacle. t h e L X X , where it answers to t h e H e b .
I . Anciently and properly, An open pi> above t h i r t y times. [ J u d g . x i x . 15, 20.
court inclosed by buildings, a court-yard and so ptt? in J o b xi. 14. xv. 2S.] Iu the
exposed to t h e open air. So t h e E t y m o - G r e e k w r i t e r s , however, it is by no means
logist, 'AvXi), h TczpiTziyitrpivoc Kai íirai- confined to the night; for in Xenophon
Opoe TÚ-OQ. occ. M a t . xxvi. 09- M a r k xiv. Cyr. E x p e d . lib. iv. p . 2 / 0 , e d i t . H u t -
66. xv. 1G. L u k e xxii. 5 5 . Rev. xi. 2. chinson, Svo. we have TcWij!' o" áv rr¡v
Comp. M a t . xxvi. 3 . M a r k xiv. 54. John 'HME'PAN ' H Y A I S e i r S A N kv rale aú-
xviii. 15 ; in which t h r e e last t e x t s it may pate—That day they lodgcd in t h e vil-
denote in general a lar ge house or palace, lages,—and p . 4 5 1 , TcW^i' pkv év TI)»
including t h e open court, about which, ac- 'HME'PAN avrS TIYAI'ZONTO.—See also

* [ S e c Eiu-. S u p p . 4 4 2 . T h e common m e a n i n g , * [Schl. t h i n k s the c u s t o m of late date in Judaia.

liowevev, in ohl Greek, is a sclf-miirdercr. Sec H e refers lo B u x t o r f . L e x . T a l m . p . 1 5 2 4 . Geicr
V a l e s , ad J.íarpi.c. in Vocí'. M'isd, -xii. (i.j de Hcbr. L u c í . c. 5. §. Id, p. 7 5 . ]
 A Y S 109 A YT

Hutchinson's Note 6 . p . 2 5 3 , and Wetstein "AYPION, A d v . I t denotes time imme-

on Mat. xxi. 17. diately after, or suecceding soon after;
'AYAO'S, 5, o.—A pipe or jlute. T h e To-morrow, within a short time. M a t . vi.
Greek Lexicographers derive t h i s word 30. L u k e x ü . 2 8 . A c t s xxiii. 15, 2 0 . x x v .
from the V. * avia or áia to breathe, blow (so 22. W i t h t h e prepositive article fem. T í
the 'Eng. Jlute seems related to t h e L a t i n (the N . ¿¡pepa day being understood) i t
flatus, blowing) ; b u t it m a y perhaps be signifies The morrow, the immediately
better dedueed from t h e H e b . NI>N to per- succeeding day. M a t . vi. 3 4 . A c t s iv. 3 ,
fórate, fstulate; whence W N a pipe or 5. J a m e s iv. 14. comp. ~2d,pepov. O n
jlute, t o which word t h e Greek avkbg g e - 1 Cor. xv. 3 2 , W e t s t e i n cites from D i o -
nerally answers in t h e L X X . occ. 1 Cor. genes L a e r . TpvtpCocn cbg "AYPION 'AITO-
xiv. 7. [1 Sam. x. 5. I s . v. 12 -[.] OANO'YMENOI, T h e y indulge in l u x u r y
'Av£ávta, from avi\ia t h e same. as if t h e y were to die to-morrow.
I . To grow, increase in bullí, as vege- 'Av^npbg, d, bv.
tables or animáis. M a t . vi. 2 8 . xiii. 3 2 . I. Austere, rough. I t properly denotes
M a r k iv. 8. L u k e i. 80. comp. L u k e ii. 40. a taste or savour, as of unripe fruits, a n d
I I . To increase in number or mullitude. is dedueed by t h e Etymologists from t h e
A c t s vii. 1 7 . V . * ava to dry, because t h i n g s of an
I I I . To grow, increase, in a figurative austere taste make t h e mouth and palate
sense, as t h e word of God by e x t e n d i n g i t s feel dry and harsh. So in Dioscorides
influence over g r e a t e r numbers. A c t s vi. 'AYSTHPO'S 0 I N 0 2 is rough wine. See T

7. x ü . 24. xix. 20. comp. M a t . xiii. 3 2 . Scapula.

To grow, spiritually. E p h . iv. 15. Col. i. I I . Austere, harsh, severe in temper or
10. 1 Fet. ii. 2. 2 P e t . iii. 18. I n Col. i. disposition. occ. L u k e xix. 2 1 , 2 2 . [ 2 M a c .
6. after KapivofyopúiLEvov, Griesbach, on t h e xiv. 3 0 . ]
authority of twelve or thirteen M S S . (six lÜH" 'AvrápicEía, ag, )';, from avreipKne.
of which a n c i e n t ) , of both t h e Syriac, I. Sufficiency, competence. occ. 2 Cor.
V u l g a t e , aud other oíd versions, admits ix. 8.
into t h e t e x t t h e words ¡cal ¿iv'£,avópEvov, I I . Contení, conlentmcnl. occ. 1 T i m . vi.
as a probable addition. [ I t would be b e t t e r 6. See Wetstein on both texts. [ D i o n .
to say, T o increase in honour. J o h n iii. H a l . ii. 7 4 . ]
30. T o be propagated.Acts vi. 7.xii. 24. xix. 'AvrápKi-jQ, EOC, «£, ó,)/, i;al rb—EC, from
20. T o become more perfect. 2 Cor. x . 15. ávToc himself, and cipria to suffice.
Eph. iv. 15. Col. i. 10. 2 P e t . iii. 18. B r . I. Self-suficienl, si/fficient. I n this
says in 1 P e t . ii. 2. ' I n an improper sense, sense it is used by t h e profane w r i t e r s .
That ye may grow up to salvation, i. e. [Xen. Cyr. iv. 3 , f>. M e m . iv. 7- 1. P o l .
become perfect Cbristians. E p h . iv. 1 5 . v. 5 5 . 8. Ecclus. v. 1. xi. 2 4 . ]
that we may grow up into one body with I I . Contení, satisfed wilh one's lot.
Christ, i. e. be joined by love into one fel- occ. P h i l . iv. 1 1 . [ E c c l u s . xl. 1 8 . D i o g .
lowship under Christ.'] 1. 1 1 , 2 4 . ]
I V . In a transitive sense, To make to 'Avroicaraicpirog, a, ó, ?;, from avrbg, him-
grom or increase. 1 Cor. iii. 6, 7. [ G e n . self, and KaraicplyM to condemn. Self-
xviii. 6. J o b xiii. 10.] condemned, condemned by his own con-
" Av¿j\mg, iog, A t t . £íue, from av'éfivia.— scicnce, as knowing t h a t he acts in vio-
Growth, increase. I t is only applied spi- lation of such plain a n d i m p o r t a n t p r e -
ritually. occ. E p h . iv. 16. Col. ii. 19. cepts of our L o r d as those contained in
"AY¿?íi, from cíe'^o} to increase.—-To M a t . xxiii. 8, 10. Comp. 'AipEriiíbg, a n d
grow, increase, spiritually. occ. E p h . ii. see CampbelFs Prelim. Dissertations t o
2 I Col. ii. 19. [ I n t h i s place, Schl. t h e Gospels, p . 4 3 6 , &c. occ. T i t . iii. 1 1 .
;

thinks t h a t QE5 m a y be merely p u t to in- [ S e e CScumen. ad l o e ]

crease t h e forcé, ' T h e Church of C h r i s t
receives very g r e a t increase,' or if n o t ,
* W h i c h is b y s o m e n o t i m p r o b a b l y dedueed f r o m
' increases, so t h a t God gives t h e in-
«cu to ilota, as the air, o f w h i c h dryuess is t h e effect;
crease.'] and the V . &m seems a derivative o f Nin t h e Essence,
w h i c h as i n H e b . i t i s one o f the ñ a m e s o f the true
G o d , J e h o v a h , s o t h e idolatrous A r a b s , a n d , w i t h
* See N o t e on this word under 'hvg-^f'o;. little variation, the S y r i a n s a n d C h a l d e a n s also, a p -
t [ T h e p i p e w a s originally o f reed, b u t after- plied it t o their G o d , the Air, w h i c h they adored a s
wards o f m e t a l or horn. S e e P o l i . i v . 9 . I t w a s an eternal and sclf-existent Essence. See H u t c h i n .
used either 011 j o y f u l or on sorrowful occasions. | son's M o s e s sine P r i n c i p . page 3 1 , & c .
 A Y T 110 A Y T

'Avróparoe, n, ov, from av-bc, oneself', Greek writers applying t h e adjective t o

and pato to be exciled, desirous, which doors and gales in like manner.
m a y be from t h e oriental i s a or > « D to 'Avróirrne, a, ó, from avroe himself and
dilate, extend, excite. See Castell.—Spon- birropai to see.—One who lias seen with
taneous, of its own accord. occ. M a r k iv. his own eyes, an eye-witness. occ. L u k e i.
28. A c t s xii. 10. I t is evident t h a t íivro- 2. T h e G r e e k writers use t h e word in
párn in t h e former passage is opposed not the same sense. See W e t s t e i n . [ P o l . iii.
to t h e concurrent natural causes of vege- 4. Xen. Cyr. v. 4. 9.]
tation, heat and moisture (see J o b xiv. 8, ' A Y T O ^ S , avT}¡, avró.
9. 2 Sam. xxiii. 4 ) , but t o t h e assistance I. A pronoun relative, referring gene-
and cultivation of man. Hesiod applies rally t o some preceding word, He, she, it.
t h e word in a similar sense to t h e earth, Mat. i. 18, 19, 2 0 , 2 1 . & al. freq. I n t h e
where, describing the goldeu age, he says, style of t h e N . T . ávrbe is frequently r e -
"Epy. Kal Tlp. line 117, 118, d u n d a n t , as M a t . [iv. 10. vi. 4.] viii. 5 ,
2 3 , 28. M a r k v. 2. vii. 2 5 . ix. 2 8 . [ R e v .
m o 7 r c v ¿'' "ÍPECE ^ e í í w o o ; c í ' c w o a , ii. 7 , 1 5 ; ] b u t this manner of expression,
' A T T O ' M A T H , ETOXAÓV TE nal ápBany. t h o u g h agreeable t o t h e H e b r e w idiom,
T h e fertile earth yielded her copious fruit yet is n o t a mere Hebraism; since it is
Spontaucous sometimes used in t h e most approved a n d
p u r e s t Greek writers. [ S e e Soph. CEd.
So O vid of t h e same happy period, M e t a m . T . 2 8 7 - ] Xenophon Cyropaíd. lib. i. p . 2 3 ,
lib. i. line 1 0 1 , 2 , edit. H u t c h i n s o n , 8vo. a n d Note t h e r e ,
Blackwall's Sacred Classics, vol. i. p . 8 2 ,
I p s a quoque immunis, rastroquc intacta, nec ullis and Wolfius on M a r k v. 2 . [See Viger. p .
Sánela vomcribus, per s e dabal omnia telins.
1 6 8 . ] — I n J o h n i. 6- ovopa avrü has been
T h e ground u n t ü T d , ñor w o u n d e d b y t'ne share, supposed a mere H e b r a i s m , for <¿ ovopa;
D i d ofhcrsc'fher copious p r o d u c e yield. b u t K y p k e there cites t h e same phrase
from the eloquent orator and philosopher,
W h e r e ipsa and per se, of herself, are evi- T h e m i s t i u s , and from Dionysius Halicarn.
dently opposed t o being cultivaled by man. speaking of one of t h e Vestal Virgins,
C o m p . Lucretius, lib. v. line 935, 6. and 'Owipía " O N O M A ' A Y T I F i . " [ J o h n xv. 5 .
Virgil. Georg. i. line 127, 8.—In t h e Rev. ii. 18. xv. 10. Xen. Mem. i. 3 . 7 . ] —
same view Josephus applies t h e adverb I n L u k e i i . 2 2 , t h e Cambridge a n d four
avropá-wQ t o t l i e e a r t h , A n t . lib. i. cap. i. later M S S . for ávrCiv have ávrS, so V u l g .
§ 4 . where h e says, t h a t , after A d a m ' s ejus, whence has flowed avryje, t h e reading
transgression, God inflicted a p u n i s h m e n t of t h e Complutensian edition, and of those
upon our first parents, ri)v yrjv ¡ K CTL pev derived from it. Griesbach m a r k s dvra
avToiQ TÜIV íav rrje avaSúaeiv 'AYTOMA'- a reading equal or perhaps preferable t o
TS2S knrwv, ITOVÜVI Sé Kal role kpyoie rpt- ávrüv, which is, however, that of t h e
€ópevoie ra pév Trapé^eiv, rüv Sé ¿K cit,iw<jEiv, far greater number of M S S . is embraced
' by saying t h a t t h e e a r t h should no longer by Mili a n d W e t s t e i n , a n d defended by
yield its fruits to them spontaneously, b u t , Campbell in his N o t e on L u k e ii. 2 2 . —
t h o u g h they laboured a n d toiled in .cul- In A c t s xiv. 13, dvrwv is omitted after
t i v a t i n g i t , should produce some fruits, TróXewg in nine M S S . three of which a n -
b u t not others.' * Comp. Josephus in Life, cient, and in t h e Syriac, V u l g . and several
§ 2 , a n d W e t s t e i n on M a r k . I n t h e other ancient versions, and is rejected from
L X X , avrópara or avrópara avaréXXovra t h e t e x t by Griesbach.
answers t o t h e H e b . r r S d corn which
springs up the second year without cul- I I . Joined with a N . Himself, herself,
tivation. Lev. x x v . 5 , I I . 2 K . xix. 29.- itself. J o h n x x i . 2 5 . Rom. viii. 16, 2 1 .
A s t o A c t s x i i . 10, Josephus says of 2 Cor. x i . 14.—'E£ dvrije (¿Spots) From,
t h e eastern g a t e of t h e inner court of t h e or at, this very time, immediately. occ.
t e m p l e , &(p8i]—'AYTOMA'TSIS 'IINEQTR- M a r k vi. 2 5 . Comp. 'J¡¡,ávrije- [ T h e word
M E ' N H i t was seen t o open of its own is used also for I myself, I , T h o u , thyself,
D e Bel. lib. vi. cap. 5 . § 3 ; a n d t h o u , &c. £'x épavrbe, av, &c. M a t . xxiii.
w

accord.
in W e t s t e i n t h e reader m a y find other 3 7 . Sent t o thee. L u k e i. 4 5 . See Vorst.
P h i l . S. E . xxvi. p . 5 3 6 . J o h n xiii. I I .
H e b . x i . 2 1 . Rev. v. 10. dvrSe us, (see
* [ S e e also H e r o d . i i . 9 4 . D i o d . S i c . i. 8 . A r r . d e Storr. Obs. ad S y n t a x . e t Anal. H e b . p .
E x p . A l e x . vii. 4 . 8 . ] 391.) xviii. 24. G e n . xiii. 4 , 9. See Georg.
 A YT
Hieroc. N . T . P . i. p . ! 6 2 . and Vigor. Idiot.
I. 9 . p . 1 6 2 . ]
I I I . W i t h t h e prepositivo article, b, n,
rb, The same. M a t . v. 4 6 . M a r k xiv. 4 0 .
L u k e ii. 8. Acts xv. 2 7 . H e b . [i. 12.]
xiii. 8. So, when joined t o a noun, This,
the same. M a t . iii. 4 . xxvi. 4 4 . & al. [ I n
t h i s sense it sometimes governs a dative ;
see 1 Cor. xi. 5 . T h i s is common in good
G r e e k ; and t h e L a t i o s have adopted t h e
idiom, as in I í o r a c e , I n v i t u m cpii scrvat,
idem facit o c c i d e n t i . ] — ' E T T I - Ó CIVTO ( X ^ -
piov n a m e l v ) , Upon, or lo, the same (place),
together. M a t . xxii. 3 4 . A c t s i. 15. 1 Cor.
vii. 5. xiv. 2 3 . Comp. A c t s iii. 1, where i t
seems to signify together, simul, as in t h e
L X X , 2 Sam. ii. 1 3 , for H e b . n n » . See
AVolfius a n d K y p k e . So KUTII TO ávrb,
A c t s xiv. 1, where i t may otherwise sig-
nify at the same time, as i t is sometimes
used in t h e Greek writers. See Wetstein
and Kypke.
Tavra, for r a áv-a, The same things.
occ. 1 Thess-. ii. 14.
I V . B u t rarely, Ofhimself, qf his own
accord, spontaneous, J o h n xvi. 2 7 . A n d
t h u s t h i s pronoun is used b y H o m e r , II.
viii. line 2 9 3 , 4. [where see Érnesti,]
TÍ /ÁS CTrEbówTC xo.l 'ATTO'N
'OrpáilEí; • sense, b u t doubts whether i t can, by t h e like
Why dost thou rae excite,
Who of'myselfam eager for the fight ? ,
and by Callimachus, H y m n . in Apol. lin.
6, 7,
$ 'AYTO'l 1/KV WRTG^EP cnvcr/.y.ívítr'ji 7tv).ciuj:',
* "ATTA1 SE X^ÍSE;.
1
Ye bars, and bolts, that cióse the sacred gates,
Fall back spontaneous.
V . Being connected with a primitive
pronoun oí whatever person, i t adds an
emphasis, as L u k e ii. 3 5 , Kai G-5 SE ¿IVTÍJQ
TI)V 4 X l SiEXÉvciETai pópéaia, And a
lv 1 v
sword shall pierce through thine own soul
also. So 1 Cor. ix. 2 7 . 2 Cor. x. 1. xii.
13. J o h n iii. 2 8 .
V I . 'AVTO raro, governed by Kara or
cía understood, 2 Pet. i. 5, which I t a k e
• to be t h e arróSoo-tg, or correspondent mem-
ber of t h e sentence, to ver. 3 , 'ü.g, As or
since his divine power hath given us all
things that (pertain) to life and godli-.
ness, &c. Kai (/car') ávrb TSTO SE—So also
agreeably, or according, to this very t h i n g ,
or t o all t h a t I have j u s t said, giving all
diligence, add, &c. See Wolfius.
[ V I L Alone. M a r k vi. 3 i . 2 Cor. xii.
13. See Kuster. ad Aristopli. A c h . 506'.]
V I I I . \Au-5, &c. by contraction for
ÉuvrS, &c. which see.
* U
'AUTOt KFIDTO^'^ET;, Á U T ¿ ( )(A>¡$£-
S Id
¡IÍTO¡, ut Schol. sine davigeri opere."
] II A <í> A
I X . 'AurS, A d v . by syncope for avrodi.
In this or that place, here, there. occ. M a t ,
xxvi. 3 6 . A c t s xv. 3 4 . xviii. 19. xxi. 4 .
[In L X X , E x . x x i v . 14. N u m . xxii. 19.
2 Sam. xx. 4, we m a y add as peculiarities,
t h a t ávroQ is sometimes inserted to u l -
erease t h e forcé, and point out a person or
t h i n g of g r e a t dignity. T h u s in Rom. x.
12. H e b . xiii. 5. it is used of God, (see
Carpzov. ad H e b . i. 12.) and in M a t . i. 2 1 .
xxv. 3-1. M a r k i. 3 5 . & al. of Christ,
'Aurós and ipse were used by servants or
disciples of t h e i r master. See Casaub. ad
Theoph. Char. n-Epl KoXaKEutg. H e ñ í s , ad
Hesiód. O p . et D . p . 2 2 6 . H e n e e t h e
ciuróe Efa of t h e P y t h a g o r e a n s . ]
Elgij ''AvTÓxEip,
0
pos, b, ?/, from ávrbr
himself, and x^P hand. [ P r o p e r l y , Kill-
a
ing with one's own hands*, and henee,
g e n e r a l l y , ] — A c t i n g [or doing any thing]
with one's own hands. occ. A c t s xxvii. 19.
[Arist. Av. 1 1 3 5 . Herodian. vii. 2. 17-
and see Hoogeveen on Viger. p . 166.]
'Avxp-ripbg, d, bv, from ¿ivxpóg
drougkt by too much heal; and this from
avio to dry, which see u n d e r 'Avrripbc.-—
JDry, desert. occ. 2 P e t . i. 19, where K y p k e
shows t h a t i t is by t h e G r e e k writers a p -
plied to the earth and to places in this
a u t h o r i t y , be proved to signify darle, ob-
scure, [in which sense Schl. tai-res i t ] ; y e t
W e t s t e i n cites A r i s t o t l e D e Color, op-
posing ^[KÉov icai Xáfiírpov shining and
bright, to ' A Y X M H P Í T i and aXápwEi ob-
scure. [See Poli. v. 5. 110.]
'Acjiatpéü), LO, and M i d . cupaipíofiaí, S/iai,
from átrbfrom, and CLLOÉLO to take.
I . To take off or away. L u k e i. 2 5 . x .
42. xvi. 3 . [Rev. xxii. 19. D e u t . xii. 3 2 —
I n Rom. x i . 2 7 . H e b . x. 4. Ecclus. xl vii. 4.
we have t h e phrase tiipaipeív rag apapríag,
to take away (the punishment qf) sins.~\
[ I I . Specially, To cut off. M a t . xxvi.
5 1 . M a r k xiv. 17. and in L X X , 1 S a m .
v. 4 . xvii. 5 1 . ] M a c . vii. 4 7 . xii. 17.]
'A(j)avtie, ¿og, 5g, b Kai ? / , Kal rb—TR,
from a neg. and rpáivofiai to appear.—Not
appearing, not manifest. occ. H e b . iv. ! 3 .
[Ecclus. x x . 3 2 . X e n . E q . i. 18.1
'A<j>ai>í£io, from a neg. and <f>aívoj lo show,
bring lo sight.
I . To remove out qf sight. H e n e e in
Pass. To be removed out qf sight, dis-
appear, vanish away. occ. J a m e s iv. 14.
[iíil. V . H . xii. 1.]
I I . I n Pass. To be deslroyed, perish,
* [ W h e t h e r k i l l i n g . o n e ' s self or another. S o
CST CX'JTC-
H e s y c h i n s and P h a v o r i n u s . S e e M o n i s ad I s o c .
Buntley. P a n . c. [i2. X e n . H e l l . vii. 7-J
 A * E 1 12 A $ I

occ. Acts xiii. 4 ! . [Schl. refers this to I I . Remission,forgiveness, of sins. M a t .

another meaning, To be astonished orter- xxvi. 2 8 . M a r k i. 4. iii. 2 9 . [ L u k e i. 7 7 .
rified. So in L X X , E z e k . x x x . 9. H a b . iii. 3 . xxiv. 4 7 . A c t s ii. 3 8 . v. 3 1 . x. 4 3 .
i.'á.l xiii. 3 8 . xxvi. 18. E p h . i. 7- Col. i. 14.
I I I . To destroy, corrupl, spoil, as t h e I t is p u t absolutely in this sense in H e b .
moth or canker. occ. M a t . vi. 19, 2 0 ; ix. 22.. x. 18. Comp. D e u t . xv. 3.]
where Raphelius cites from Polybius, t l g p 'AcA>/, ijs, i), from aicrio to connect,
0

'Avrov r avsiXov, Kai ro yeros ávrS iráv whence Homer calis the limbs á-^ea, Odyss.
'H4>A'NI2AN, T h e y both killed him and iv. line 7 9 4 , airo rS avvrjfdaí from being
destroyed his whole family. [See Abresch. connected, says D i d y m u s ' s n o t e , — A j o i n t
ad .¿Eschyl. p . 5 3 8 . A u c t . V e t . iii. p . 4 1 1 . or arliculalion, where t h e bones are joined
Song of S. ii. 13. J e r . iv. 26.] or connected together. occ. [in a metapho-
I V . To deform, disfigure, as the hypo- rical sense.] Eph. iv. 16. Col.ii. 19. [ P l u t .
critical Pharisees did their countenances A n t ó n , c. 27.]
when they fasted. occ. M a t . vi. 16, where l Ü P " 'Aipdapcría, ac, i), from a neg. and
Wolfius, whom see, seems r i g h t in u n d e r - (pQcipcns corruption, which from 'étyQapirui
standing it as a general expression for 2d pers. perf. pass. of ipddpio to corrupt.
disfiguring the countenance, or inaking it I. Incorruption, incorruplibility, inca-
look dismal, by ivliatever means. Comp. pacity of [death, or corruption, used as
W e t s t e i n and K y p k e ; and observe t h e P a - to t h e body. 1 Cor. xv. 4 2 , 5 3 , 54. & al.]
ronomasia 'Á4>ANI'ZOYSI—Sirios $ A - I I . Incorruptness in a moral or spiritual
N í r a i . [See F a b . Cod. Pseud. i. p . 184, sense, freedom from corrupt doctrines or
192, 5 4 5 . ] designs. occ. E p h . vi. 2 4 . T i t . ii. 7 ; b u t
'Aipaviapus, 5, ¿, from i)tj>avÍBpai, perf. in this latter text ¿i<j>9apmav is not found
pass. of afai'í'Ctü.—A disappearing, or va- in very many M S S . , five of which ancient,
nishing away. occ. H e b . viii. 13. [In ñor in most of the ancient versions, ñor in
L X X it is generally desolation. E z . iv. some printed editions, and is accordingly
16. xii. 19.] rejected by Griesbach.
"Agarros, s, ó, 7/, from a neg. and [ I I I . Immortal Ufe in a future world.
ipaívopai io appear.—Not appearing, in- R o m . ii. 7. 1 Cor. xv. 50, where t h e sense
visible, occ. L u k e xxiv. 3 1 , where see is ' t h e body, as it is now, cannot be p a r -
W e t s t e i n a n d Bp. P e a r c e ; and to t h e t a k e r of immortal happiness.' In 2 T i m .
passages produced by t h e m we add, t h a t i. 10. it is ' t h e doctrine as to immortal
Anacreon, ode 3 3 , line 4, applies aipavrus life.' See Wisd. vi. 19, 20.]
to t h e swallow's disappearing, by m i - "A(j>dapros, a, ó, r/, from a neg. and fdap-
g r a t i n g , at the approach of winter, to t h e rbs corruptible.—Immortal, incorruptible,
southern countries. [Diod. S. iv. 65.] not capable of corruption. See Rom. i. 2 3 .
tfgp° 'AqjEopijv, ÓJVOS, b, from á7ró de- 1 Cor. [ix. 25.] xv. 5 2 . 1 P e t . i. 4, 2 3 ;
n o t i n g separation, aud ébpa a seat; which where comp. J o h n i. 13. I J o h n iii. 9.
s e e . — A sepárale or retired place, where [ W i s d . xii. 1. D i o g . L a e r t . x. c. 123.
meu sil to ease n a t u r e , a privy, a house of Bretschneider t h i n k s it is r a t h e r of uncon-
office, occ. Mat. xv. 17. M a r k vii. 19. taminaie purity. In 1 P e t . i. 4. and ¡ii. 4 .
EfSp" 'AfeiSia, as, í¡, from á<¡>ei¡r)s not it is r a t h e r eternal, perpetual?^
sparing, which from a neg. and <¡>¿ibopai 'A<f>ir¡pi, from cncbj'rom, and hipitosend.
to spare; which s e e . — A not sparing, se- I . To send away, dismiss. M a t . xiii. 3 6 .
verily. occ. Col. ii. 23 ; [used of t h e body, M a r k iv. 3 6 . [Theoph. Char. v. 1. JE1.
severely treated in fasting, &e.] where V. 1!. xii. 9.]
W e t s t e i n cites several of the Greek writers, I I . To emit, send forlh, as a voice.
u s i n g t h e phrase, ' A * E I A E I " N S Q ' M A - M a r k xv. 37- [ G e n . xiv. 2. E u r . Phcen.
T O S not to spare the body. [ T h u c . ii. 51.] 1461.]
$¡3^° 'Ac/)£Á.órne, rr¡ros, r¡, from á(p¿Xr)s I I I . To yield, give up, as the ghost or
simple.—Simplicily, sincerity, purity of spirit. M a t . xxvii. 50, where Doddridge
iuteution. occ. A c t s ii. 4 6 . supposes a peculiar emphasis in t h e ex-
"Agíais, ios, A t t . eios, i), from acjiííipi to pression 'Aí>Il~KE rb icvevpa, as iinport-
dismiss. [Properly, Emission (as of a d a r t ) , ing C h r i s t ' s voluntary dismission of his
Pol. xxx vii. 9 1 6 . ] spirit, see J o h n x. 18 ; b u t in t h e L X X of
I. Dismission, deliverance, liberty, as of Gen. xxxv. 18, Rachel is said ' A $ I E ' N A I
captives. occ. L u k e iv. 18. [twice. Un t h e rr)v •¿vxn and P l u t a r c h and L o n g u s ,
v

l a t t e r see Qpávw. Lev. xxv. 10. Pol. i. 7 9 . cited by A l b e r t i , apply t h e phrase 'A<I>H~-
72.] KE T>)V ilivxnv to the death of a mere
 A <!> I 11 3 A q> O

m a n ; and s& doth Josephus, D e Be!, lib. —To come from one place lo another, lo
vi. cap. 5. § 3 3 . (Comp. A n t . lib. vii. cap. come, arrive, reach. occ. Rom. xvi. 19.
13. § 3 . and lib. viii. c. 1 3 . § 3.) A n d [Ecclus. xlvii. 17.]
Wetstein, whom see, cites from Eurípides, 'AfiAítyaOoc, B, ó, ?/, from a neg. (¡>í\oc
Hecuba, line 5 7 1 , the very phrase ' A Í H " - a friend, and áyadog good.—Not a iover
K E I T N E ' Y M A . Comp. also K y p k e , [ G e n .qf good men, or qf goodness. occ. 2 T i m .
xxx. 17- Herod. iv. i 9 0 . ] iii. 3 . [¿x^P ' Ka.v7oc ¿iyu.05,
0
see Theophyl.
I V . To dismiss, or pul away, a wife. and CEcum.]
1 Cor. vii. 11, 12, 13. 'ArjnXítpyvpos, «, ó, y, from a neg. i^tXoc
V. To forsake, leave. M a t . iv. 20, 22. loving, and ¡ípyvpov money.-—Notjbnd qf
v. 24, 4 0 . xxvi. 5 6 . J o h n xvi. 2 8 , 3 2 . & money, not coveious, without covetottsness.
al. freq. occ. 1 T i m . iii. 3 . H e b . xiii. 5.
[ V I . To leave remaining. M a t . xxiii. 3S. " Aéifrc, t o e , A t t . E w c , ' ' / , from ¿iAu:vío¡J.ai.
xxiv. 2. Mark xiii. 2- L u k e xiii. 8. ( D a n . —A ¡roing away, depariurc. occ. A c t s x x .
iv. 12. and 23.) L u k e xix. 44. xxi. 6. to 29. [ H e r o d . ix. 17, 76. Dion. H a l . x. 8.
one's posterity or heirs, M a r k x ü . 19. See Alberti ad Hesych. in voce.]
John xiv. 2 7 . ] 'Atpísrifti, from á-jró from, a n d 'l-ypi to
V I L To leave, or let alone. M a r k xiv. pldce *.
6. L u k e x ü . 8. I. Intransitivcly, To depart, roilhdraw.
V I H . To omit, neglcct. M a t . xxiii. 2 3 . L u k e ii. 37- iv. 13. xiii. 2 7 . A c t s xii. 10.
xv. 3 8 . [xix. 9.] I T i m . vi. 5. 2 T i m . ii.
L u k e xi. 42. [ M a r k vii. 9. H e b . vi. ] . E u r .
And. 3 9 2 . & freq.] 19, & al. [ G e n . xii. 8,]
I X . To permit, suffer, let. M a t . iii. 15. I I . To refrain from, let alone, not io
vii. 4. viii. 2 2 . xiii. 3 0 . xix. 14. & al. freq. meddle with, or punish. occ. [ L u k e iv.
In M a r k i. 3 4 , ychit in t h e 3d pers. sing. 13.] A c t s v. 3 8 . Comp. A c t s xxii. 2 9 .
2 d aor. indic. active, as if from cufitéio *. [ a d d 2 Cor. xii. S. J o b vii. 16. Ecclus.
[John xi. 4, 8. ' If we suffer him t o act xxiii. 12. I n 2 T i m . ii. 19. i t is ' t o r e -
so.' See E x . xxxii. 10. 2 Sam. xvi. 1 1 . nounce.' I n 1 T i m . vi, 5. ' to avoid t h e
M a t . xxxi. 1. 13. Do not permit them to society of, as in Ecclus. vii. 2.]
enter, and M a r k v. 19. 37. vii. 12. Ecclus. I I I . To fall off, fall away, apostaiize,
xxiii. 1. In M a t . v. 40, and M a r k x i . 6, in respect of religión. L u k e viii. 13. 1 T i m .
t h e sense is ' to aliow a person to t a k e . ' ] iv. 1. H e b . iii. 12. [Ezek. x x . 3 . W i s d .
X . To renút, forgioe, as debts, sins, ov iii. 10. Ecclus. x. 14.]
offences. M a t . vi. 12, 14, 15. ix. 2, 5. I V . Transitively, To draw offor away,
[xii. 3 1 . xviii. 2 1 . L u k e xxiii. 3 4 . John to wilhdraw. occ. A c t s v. 3 7 . Raphelius
x x . 2 3 . ] 'Afétoirat is t h e 3d pers. plur. remarles t h a t H e r o d o t u s , lib. i. cap. 1 5 4 ,
perf. pass. indic. according to t h e A t t i c in like manner uses t h e verb in an active
dialcct for a<p¿ívrai. In this last sense, or transitive sense. T a c Aúoac. 'A1TE'~
t h e verb ¿u¡>!.r¡pi is sometimes used by t h e S T H S E N ctTTÓ líl/ps, líe drew off the L y -
profano writers (see Wetstein and Wolfius dians from Cyrus. [See D e u t . xiii. 10.
on M a t . vi. 12.), and frequently by t h e Ecclus. x i x . 2 . Isa. E v a g . p . 4 7 6 . H e -
L X X for t h e H e b . rtpD lo pardon, ¿i¡íi lo rodian. vii. 7, 9, 13.]
take away, &c. See Vitringa, Observ. "Athvio, A d v . q. d. aipavwe, from a n e g .
Sacr. lib. iv. cap. 3 . [ I s a . xxii. 14. D e u t . and tyaívofiai lo appear.—Suddenly, on a
xv. 2. Gen. xviii. 2 6 . T h e following are sudden ; i t strictly imports something so
single phrases, b u t all partaking of t h e quick and sudden as to elude t h e sighl.
general meaning of t h e word. ' N o t to occ, A c t s ii. 2. xvi. 26. xxviii. 6. [See Josh.
care for,' M a t . xv. 14. ' T o leave' or ' let x. 9. Ecclesiast. i s . 12.]
alone,' M a t . iv. 1 1 . Perhaps J o h n xii. 7. 'A(j>ó€u)e, A d v . from iiáoSoe fearless,
and Mat. xxii. 2 2 . may be best explained which from a neg. and (¡¡ó&ogfear.—Fear-
in the same way, ' T e r e m i t ' or ' g r o w lessly, without. fear. occ. L u k e i. 74. 1 Cor.
slack in.' Rev. ii. 4 . ] .
xvi. 10. P h i l . i. 14. J u d e ver. 1 2 . [ P r o v .
' A ^ i u v í o p a i , Spcu, (2d aor. iityiKÓpyv, ii. 3 3 . Wisd. xvii. 4..]
from obsol. ci(j>ÍKopai) from CITTÓ from, and 'AcjopoLvw, Lo, from C Í T T O denoting intense-
¡Kvéopai to come, which from ÍKU to come. ness, and ópoióoi to make like, liken.—To

* [ T h i s aorist oceurs M a r k x i . 1G. and in P h i l . * S e e D u p o r t ' s R e m a i k s under 'i(r>if¿i I. [ a n d the

Leg. ad Caium,. p. 1 0 2 1 . L u c í a n . T i m ó n , p. CG. distinctions between the senses o f various parís o f
P a u s . ii, 5 . See K y p k e i. p. 1 5 1 , ] the verb i n the Grammar. ]
 A <I> P
tnake very like. occ. H e b . vii. 3 . [ I t occurs
ouly iu the E p . Jerem. 5 , 6 3 , 7 0 . ]
'Áíjtopáw, w, from ¿7ro intensive, and
ópcao lo look. [ T h e obvious meaning is,
' T o look away from/ (as Xen. Cyr. vii.
] , S.) and thence, ' to look away from
other objects to one especially.' I t occurs
Diod. S'ic. xix. 2 3 . See Jos. A . iv. 4 . 7-
A r n a n . Dissert. E p i c t . iv. c. 1. Heliod. vii.
p. 3 3 0 . ] — T o look stedfaslly or intenlly.
occ. Heb. xii. 2 , where see Kypke.
'Aijiopí'Cw, from Inri)from, and opiato,
define.
~2tü)(fpucrvvy.'' I. To sepárale locally. M a t . xiii. 4 9 .
xxv. 3 2 . Comp. A c t s xix. 9. 2 Cor. vi. 17-
Gal. ii. 1 2 .
I I . To sepárate from, or cast out of,
the society, as wicked aod abominable, occ.
L u k e vi. 2 2 . Comp. 'ÁTroavrcíyayog.
I I I . To sepárale, selecl, to some office
or work. occ. Acts xiii. 2 . Rom. i. 1. Gal.
i. 1 5 . T h e Pharisees, of which sect St.
P a u l was before his conversión, (see vVcts
xxiii. 6 . xxvi. 5 . P h i l . iii. 5.) had their
ñame from VP\ü to sepárate, q. d. atywpur-
pévoi, separated ones; and to this irnport
of their ñame the Apostle is by some
learned men t h o u g h t to allude, Rom. i. 1.
•where he, who, as a Pharisee, was be-
fore íitybipiapívoQ EIQ rov vópov separated
t o the law of Moses, now says of himself
t h a t he was ci(pcjpto-p¿vos separated to the
gospel of God. See Wolfius on Rom. i. 1,
and compare i>apicra~ioc.
'Átbopui), fjc, y, compounded of ¿nrbfrom,
and cío/.»/ an ímpetus, violent tendency *.
—An occasion, an opportunity or casual
circumstance producing a tendency to
somewhat else. occ. Rom. vii. 8 , 1 1 . 2 Cor.
v. 1 2 . xi. 1 2 . Gal. v. 1 3 . 1 Tim. v. 1 4 .
'A(j>opfii¡v Xa€¿lv, To take occasion. Rom. vii.
1 1 . So Polybius and Dionysius Halicarn.
cited by K y p k e , ' A 4 0 P M I - F 2 , and 'A(I>OP-
M H ' N , AABE'IN.—'A(¡>oppyv ciEóvaí, To
give occasion. 1 T i m . v . 14. where Wetstein
cites Polybius, Appian, and Diodorus Sic.
using the phrase in the same sense.
SfSp 'Aa>pl£u>, from ¿icj>poe.—Tofoam or
0
frolh, as a man a t t h e mouth. occ. M a r k
ix. 1 8 , 2 0 . [See Foes. G3c. H i p p . p . 7 1 . ] 2 9 . ]
EÜp 'A<J>P0*2, 5, ó, deduced by some from
0
t h e Greek adverb i'apapquickly, suddenly, A c t s viii. 3 2 . T h e L X X have once used
because it is suddenly formed, and suddenly this word, namely in the correspondent
dispersed.—Foam,froth, i. e. a white light t e x t of Isa. liii. 7 , for the H e b . nn!>Ki mulé,
silent.
* [ T h e proper meaning is ' TTliatever is neces-
sary for any undertaking.' See Xen. de Vect. iii.
6, 9 , 12. Mein, iii, 12. 4 . Viger. p. 30. Schwarz.
p. 2 2 5 . ]
11 4 A * 11
substance, formed from certain fluids by
violent agitatión, and consisting of sphe-
rules or globules of the fluid expanded
with air. In the N . T . it is used only for
the human foam. occ. L u k e ix. 3 9 . [ E u r .
Iph. T . 3 0 7 . ]
'Aajpoavvn, ys, y, from átypiov.
I. Folly, foolishness, tvaiit qf wisdom.
occ. 2 Cor. xi. 1 , 1 7 , 2 1 . \fBoasting.
Schl.]
I I . Folly, foolishness, as opposed to
to spiritual wisdom and sobriely, " Foolish
ungovernable passion, in opposition to
Macknight's H a r m o n y . " L e -
vity!" Campbell, occ. M a r k vii. 22^ [ T h e
sense is not certain.]—In the L X X it ge-
nerally answers to t h e H e b . words T\1>11
vileness, n^D3 perverseness, JíVls foolish-
ness, &c. [Prov. xiv. 1 8 . D e u t . xxii. 2 1 .
Job iv. 6.]
"Áoipuv, ovos, ó, from a neg. and ajpyv
mind, wisdom.
[I. Foolish. L u k e xi. 4 0 . xii. 2 0 . 1 Cor.
xv. 3 6 . ]
[ I I . Ignorant qf the truth qf Chri-
stianity. Rom. ii. 2 0 . E p h . v. 1 7 . 1 P e t ,
ii. 1 5 . ]
[ I I I . Boasting. 1 Cor. xi. 1 6 . xii. 6 ,
11.]
'AajvTrvóio, ü, from Ú T T O intensive, and
VTVVOC sleep.—-Tofall asleep, to be asleep.
occ. L u k e viii. 2 3 . — " 'A^virvioo-e) Iíow
this word comes to signify, he fell asleep,
I do not k n o w : U(¡IVTTVÍ'CU> is of a contrary
signiíication. I t may be observed, t h a t
St. L u k e often uses words compounded
with ¿iiru in a very unusual signiíication,
which perhaps may be provinciality a n d
an Antiochism." Markland in Bowycr's
Conjectures. T h e r e is, however, but very
slender proof t h a t St. L u k e was of*
Antioch. B u t in the Martyrdom of Ig-
natius, § 7 . we have pÍKpov 'Atl'YIINÍi'-
S A N T E 2 , having slept a little. [ J u d g . v.
2 7 . in same sense.]
"AiJMvoc, a, b, y, from a neg. and fúry a
voice.
I. Dumb, having no voice. occ.T Cor,
xii. 2 . [ C o m p . H a b . ii. 1 8 . 2 Mac. iii.
I I . Dumb, mulc, ullcring no voice. occ.
* See Lardner's Hist. of Apost. and Evang. ch.
vii, ii. 3. p . 86. edit. Watson.
 A P X
I I I . Dumb, having no articúlate voice.
occ. 2 Pet. ii. 16.
l'V. Inarticulate, having no articúlale
signification. occ. I Cor. xiv. 10.
'A^ápi^oc, a, ¿, v, from a neg. and
X « p i £ thanks.— Unthankful, ungrateful.
occ. L u k e vi. 35. 2 T i m . iii. 2. See W e t -
stein on Luke. TWisd. xvi. 29. Herodian.
vi. 9. I . ]
'AxEtpo-¿!))roc, a, h, y , from a neg. and
X £ i p ó V o ! ) ) - o c wiffde Í;;?'<7Í hands.—Not made
with [human"] hands or art. occ. M a r k
xiv. 5 8 . 2 Cor. v. 1. Col. ii. 11, where
comp. Rom. ii. 29.
' A X A T 2 , voc, ?;.—A mist, a thick mist,
a fog. Galen, as cited by Scapula, says,
" that it properly denotes a distemperature
(perturbalioncm) ofthe air, t h e grossness
of which is somewhat between a cloud and
a mist, more dense than t h e latter, b u t less
so than the former. W h e n c e a certain
disorder of the eye is called ¿iy¡\ve, and
those t h a t are afflicted with i t <5iá nvoe
ay\vo£ uiovrai (ÍXÉTTELV, seem to see t h r o u g h
a sort of thick mist or fog." Elymas, t h e
sorcerer, was miraculously punished by
S t . Paul, with a disorder of this k i n d ,
previous to his total blindness. occ. Acts
xiii. 11. Comp. Horner, II. xx. lin. 3 2 1 ,
3 4 1 , 2, and see Wetstein. [ P l u t . Alex. M .
c. 45.]
' A x p t t o c , a, o v , from a neg. and X P
utility, usefulness.
I. Unprqfitable, useless. occ. Mat. xxv. 3 0 .
I I . Unmeritorious, of no valué. L u k e
xvii. 10. See Campbell s Prelim. Disser-
tations to Gospels, p. 604.—In t h e L X X
it is once, 2 Sam. vi. 22, used in t h e sense
of mean, despicable, answering to t h e
H e b . bí¡U> Ion), humble.
'Ayomm, ¿i, from áxp£<o£.—To make
unprqfitable. Pass. 'Axp£ióo/.tai, To become
unprojilable, vile. occ. Rom. iii. 12, which
is a citation of t h e L X X of Ps. xiv. 3 ,
where t h e correspondent H e b . word to
ilXptiLoxírioa.v is In ?^! they are become
1
stinking, Jilthy.
"Apyyros, a, ó, i¡, from a neg. and XP'!"
soe projilable.— Unprqfitable, useless. occ.
Philem. ver. 1 1 , where S t . P a u l seems t o
alludc to t h e ñame of Onesimus, which
signifies usefid. H e also uses ií^pv^og,
by a litotes, for hurtful, injurious. See
Wolfius and Elsner, and comp. under
'AXvairéXrjQ *.
* [ E x a m p l c s m a y b e found i n X e n . C y i . i. 3 , !3.
T h e o p h . Char. viii. 4 . and see Ernest. Clav. Cic.
roce imüilis. F i s c o , de V i t . L e x . N . T , Prol. x x v .
}>• 7-]
115 A y 1
"AXPI, and sometimes before a voweí
"AXPIS, an adv. construed with a genitive
or with a verb subjunct.
I . Of time, Uníil, either excluding t h e
subsequent time, as M a t . xxiv. 3 8 . L u k e
i. 20. xxi. 24. & al. freq.—or not excluding
j t , Rom. v. 13. viii. 22. [ O n Rom. v.
13. Schl. says, " Before t h e promulgation
of t h e law."]—-A^pis 'S, used elliptically
for"Axpt rS xpó>'« év 'to, Till the time in
which—\. Until, lili. Acts vii. 18. 1 Cor.
xi. 26. xv. 2 5 . Gal. iii. 19.—2. While,
nihilst. Acts xxvii. 3 3 . Pleb. iii. 13.
I I . Of time, In, roiihin. Acts x x . 6.
I I I . Of place, Unto, even unto. A c t s
[xiii. 6.] xx. 4. xxviü. 15. [Rev. xviii. 5.]
IV. In general, Unto, even unto. A c t s
xxii. 4, 22. H e b . iv. 12.
" A x u p o j ' , a, TO, from a neg. and tj(y'
pov Jirm, steady.— Chaff, * the husks
11
(and refuse) qf corn separated by thresh-
ing and winnowing" which have no stea-
diness, b u t are easily dislurbed or put in
motion by every blast of a i r ; so t h e L a t i n
palea, chaff, is derived from t h e G r e e k
iráXXíü to toss. Comp. J o b x x i . 18. P s . i-
4. occ. M a t . iii. 12. L u k e iii. 17. In b o t h
which texts iíyypov denotes n o t only chaff]
properly so called, b u t also t h e stalks or
slraw, and in short whatever, t h o u g h i t
grew with t h e grain, is separated from i t
a c and thrown away. I n Xenophon, &x P i v a
in like manner, includes t h e stalks qf corn.
See Raphelius, W e t s t e i n , and K y p k e .
[ T h e Jews used t h e stubble to b u r n , ( E x .
v. 7-) to heat their ovens and to cook with
(Gen. xxiv. 2 5 . J u d g . xix. 19-), whence
Christ compares t h e wicked with t h e stub-
ble which is to be burned.]
'AvpEwoí/c, ÉOQ, SQ, ó, í/, from a neg. a n d
v¿/£v¿Y;c false, a liar.— That cannot lie ov
deceive. occ. T i t . i. 2, where see Wetstein.
[Wisd. vii. 18. Sym. Job xxxvi. 4.]
"A-cW6o£, a, ¿, q. d. aTTivdog not to be
drunk, on account of its extreme b i t t e r -
ness, from a neg. and rrívu) lo drink. So
in H e b . i t is called rtilí'b from jjíí> to reject,
because «animáis reject or refuse to eat i t .
—Wormwood. occ. Rev. viii. 1 1 , where i t
is used figuratively, and, according t o t h e
opinión of f Bp. Newton, denotes Genseric
k i n g of t h e Vandals, who not only bilterly
afflicted t h e Romans in t h e year 4 5 5 , b u t
also espoused t h e bitier and poisonous doc-
trines pf A r i u s , and during his whole rcign
" Johnson.
t See h i s Dissertations on the F r o p h e c i e s , vol. iii.
p. < ) 0 _ 9 2 . 2 d edit. Ovo.
I 2
 A -i' I 1 A 1' Y

most cruel!y pcrxcciilcd the orthodox Chri- Deut. xxix. 17- Br. says, t h a t in Rev. it
stians.—But Vitringa on Rev. whom see, is the ñame of a star which descending i n t o
by this fallen star, whose ñame ivas the waters corrupts them with bitterness.
Wormmood, understands, and as it seems T h e image, he thinks, may be taken from
with greater probability, the heresiarch E x . xv. 2 3 . comp. Ecclesiast. vii. 2 7 . E c -
Arius himself. [ T h e herb is mentioucd, clus. xxviii. 25.]
Theoph. H i s t . Plant. ix. IS. Xen. Anab. "Aú/vj(0£, a, ó, ?/, KOÍ, ro—ov, from a i

i. 5 . 1. OÍ. Cels. Hierobot. P . i. p . 480. neg. añil évx>i life.— Without Ufe, inani-
Seo Prov. v. 4. Schl. on this place in Rev. inalc. occ. 1 Cor. xiv. 7- [ W i s d . xiv. 29.
refers to Jonnthan's Chald. Paraph, on Polyb. vi. 47, 10. x. 2 4 , 4 . ]

B.
B A A B A O

B 5'
P, €. Beta. T h e second letter of
the Greek alphabet, corresponding
in nanie, order, and ])ower to n Bcíh, of
t h e Hebrcws, b u t in form more nearly
resembling the Samaritan or Phenician
Belh.
BA'AA, H e b . Vi a.—[A ruler, probably
;
preserved in t h e termination Bal of Car-
thaginian ñames, as Asdrubal, &c. See
Fuller's Miscel. Sac. book ii. ch. 7- and
J e r . ii. S. N u m b . xxiii. 4 ; used in L X X
with mase. art. N u m b . xxii. 4 1 . 1 Sam.
xvi. 3 1 . I Kings vi. 3 1 . í t is t h e ñame of a
place in I C h r o n . v. 3 3 . of a man. 1 Chron.
vii. 5 . i x . 30. x. 50. See 2 K i n g s xi. 18.
O t h e r s supply oríjX;;, from 2 K i n g s x. 2 6 ,
27. T h e Bel of Isaiah xlvi. 1. J e r . 1. 2.
Ii. 44. is b^. contr. from b j n . ] — B a a l , A n
ido!. T h e word denotes a ruler, and by t h i s
ñ a m e , when singular, the idolaters of se-
veral nations worshipped the sun or solar
fíre, as t h e great independent ruler of
n a t u r e . T h u s Sanchoniathon (or whoever
was t h e a u t h o r of the Phenician Thcology,
published in Greek by Philo Byblius, and
EiKÓri rñ B « n X lite image (f Baal; or rather
fiáaX being t h u s used feminine, because the
idol itself, which was of the.¿ce/;clcind, was
sometimes a female. So good oíd Tobit,
who probably was an eye-witness of what
he relates, tells us t h a t all t h e revolting
tribes of Israel sacrificed T I F / B A ' A A T U " / .
A A M A ' A E Í tothe heiferBaal, Tobit i. 5,
and the L X X frequently use not oulv
B á c i X singular with a feminine article, as
Jer. ii. 8, 28. xi. 13. xix. 5. xxxii. 3 5 .
l í o s . ii. 8. Zeph. i. 4 ; b u t sometimes
fíaaXíp plural also, as T A ' 2 fiaaXip, l
Sam. vii. 4 *. I t is certain t h a t the Pagan
E a s t Indians still retain the most religious
vencration for a con. Comp. H e b . and
E n g . Lexicón in b¡>2. I I I .
TiaOpoc, 5, ó, from f¡aívu> lo go, which
see.
I . A step. B u t it occurs not in this
sense strictly in the N . T . [nbi'D a step,
2 Kings x x . 9, 10, 11. filÜD a threshold,
1 Sam. v. 5. Wisd. vi. 3 8 . fjaQjxov£ rpíStuv
" the traces of p a t h s " or " the thresholds."
Hescyh. fiadpol- "ix \~ núSze7\
v7

preserved by Eusebius, Proeparat. Evangel. I I . A degree, ran/c. occ. 1 T i m . iii. 13 ;

lib. i. cap. 10.), in his account of t h e an-
cient heathen, says expressly of t h e Sun
(lí\wv), TSrov Qzov ívófXÍ(ov póvov ¿pavu
liipiov, * BEEA2AMIIN KOXSVTSE, ó ¿TI
•ñapa $>oívií,i lívpioc ópavS. ' T h i s God
t h e y esteemed t h e only Lord of Heaven,
calling him Beelsamen (i. e- CD'Dttf bxri, or
f'Dttf bul), which, in t h e Phenician lan-
g u a g e , is Lo?-d of Heaven.' occ. R o m . xi.
4 ; where it is observable, t h a t BáoX has
t h e feminine article T~IIi prefixed; T"Ht
BúaX being either p u t elliptically for rf¡
~ P l a u i u s , ii' í>.e P u n i c l a n g u a g e , writc3 it Bal-
.aunen. P a s i u ! . . . i , v. seen. 2.
where see Wolfius. [" Prepare a way for
themselves to greater honours." T h e o -
doret and others refer this to t h e rewards
in a future life. I t occurs in t h e sense of
dignity and height qf honour in E u s . H . E .
iii. 2 1 . P l u t . A l e . ch. 17- so iiravapaírio
of soldiers rising. Xen. Cyrop. ii. 1, 10.
See A m m . M a r c . xv. 13. See Suicer.
T h e s . Eccles. i. p . 614.]
B A ' 0 0 2 , £ o c , s e , rd.
I. Deplh, a deep. occ. M a t . xiii. 5.
* See Selden, D e D i i s Syris, syntag. ii. ]>.
1GT¡, & c . [ a n d A d d i t a m . Beyeri, p . 1 3 7 and
i 2ü"4.]
 B A I 117
[Báítoe mdfiaOv, sigaiíyferlilUgot ground
iu E u r i p . Androm. 637. and see L u d a n .
Abdicat. ¡). 183. Prov. xxv. 3.] Mark iv.
5. L u k e v. 4.
I I . Deplh, in a figurative sense, as of
poverty. comp. Rom. viii. 39. [Refernng
to Ps. cxxx. 1 ; but Cbrysostoin explains
this passage as denoting things in heaven
and things on earlh ; and Schleusner says,
neilher heaven ñor earlh, noi/dng in the
univcrse.~]
I I I . Greainess, immcnsily, as of riches.
occ. Rom. xi. 3 3 . So Plutarch has BA'-
GOS yyepovíae for a vasl e m p i r e ; iElian,
n A O ' m i i BAGE~I; aud Eurípides, cited
by Polybius, compounds the two words
ftadíie and ir\5-oe, when he calis peace
BA6YTÍ AOYTE, ahundanl in riches. See
more in Raphelius, Wolfius, and W e t s t e i n .
To what they have produced I add from
Josephus, Ant. vii. cap. xv. § 1. IIAO'Y-
TON TroiTio-at BAOY'TATON, to acquire
immense riches. [ A g a i n , ¡3á0oe uaiciov,
Prov. xxiii. 3. signifies immense evils, and
in 2 Cor. viii. 2. y¡ Kara ftc'iOoe íi-ro^éía,
exeessive poverty. So in L a t i n profunda
avaritia. Sallust. J u g . c. 8 1 . ]
IV. Deplh, prqfoundness, inscrulabi-
lily, abslruscuess. occ. 1 Cor. ii. JO. E p h .
iii. 18. Rev. ii. 24. where see Vitringa.
[ T h i s sense oceurs J u d i t h viii. J4. and
Hcsychius has ra /3á6?;, rii <twir(':X7j7rra.]
fíaBvvia, from ¡jadíe.— To deepen, as in
digging. occ. L u k e vi. 48. [and J u d g . xiii.
10. See Ps. xci. o. J e r . xlix. 8. referring
to Bo.ec/e I V . ]
BíiSúc, E~ia, i. See BáOog.
I. Deep. occ. John iv. I I .
I I . ]_Great, immense, exeessive.^] as
slcep. occ. Acts x x . 9. So Theocritus,
ídyl. viii. line 6o, BAG'YS"Y1IN05¡ deep
sleep. Lucían, Timón, tom. i. p . 6 1 , Tov
BAG'YN rñrov "YIINON; and Plutarch,
tom. i. p . 7 9 3 . D . edit. Xvlandr. "YII-
NON BAGY'N. [ A n d in the'same way it
i s ] spoken of the morning, very early. occ.
L u k e xxiv. 1. O n which passage Elsner,
Wolfius, and W e t s t e i n show t h a t ópOnoe
paOúe, and opdps padéog, are phrases used
by thc best Greek writers.
[ I I I . Prqfound or insondable. This
sense oceurs in the L X X . Isa. xxix. 14.
xxxi. 6.]
iiaívio, from fíáio, t h e same, which is
plainly from the H e b . Ka, to go, come.—
To go, proceed. T h e simple V. oceurs
not in the N . T .
BAÍON, „, r o , — A branch of lite palm-
B A A
tree, as the gen. plur. fiaiiov is used simply
without (¡MivíKbiv, 1 Mace. xiii. 5 1 . So
Hesychius, Ha'ic, pí&Soc tpóivucog, Kai flaioy.
Bci'/'e, a branch ofthepalm-lrcc, also f>áíov.
A n d the Etymologist, ¡idiov—anpíuvEí rov
KKáDov T5 tpóivucog, fidiov signifies i/te
branch qf the palm-trce. B u t as this tree
was not indigenous to Greece, t h c Greeks
seem to have formed t h e word from t h e
E g y p t i a n ¡iai of the same import. Thus
P o r p h y r y , D e Abstin. lib. iv. § 7, speak-
i n g of t h e E g y p t i a n priest, says Koírn c!¿
avro~LQ ki: rüiv aicabÍKoiv r'ú 0)OÍVLKOQ, ele KCI-
XSo-t B'A'jS, ETckirKtKTo, T h e i r Jjed was a
m a t made of palm leaves, which tliey cali
Bais. A n d Salmasius in forms us, t h a t
thc Egyptian gospel in John xii. 13, t r a u s -
lates ra ¡iá'ia TS>V éoiv'uaov simply by ZAN
BAI, t h a t is ra fJa'ia, iov '(ay is only a
mark o f t h e plural number. occ. J o h n xii.
13, where see Wetstein and Suiccr, T h e -
saur. in Baíov. [ D u Cange, Gloss. p . i 67.
Salmas. ad Achill. T a t . i>. 621. Fischer de
Vitiis L e x . N . T . P r o l . ¡. p . 16.]
HaWávTiov, or BaXájrio)', a, rb, from
BáXXeij/ to east, or /jciXXetj/ kvrbe. io casi
in.—A bag or purse into which money or
other valuables are put or casi, a money-
bag. occ. L u k e x. 4. xii. 3 3 . xxii. 35, 36.
— I n the L X X , Prov. i. 14, it answers to
DO fl bag or purse.
BA'AAO.
I. To casi, ihrotv. M a t . iii. 10. iv. 6,
18. v. 13, 25, 30. xxvii. 35. J o h n viii. 7,
59. & al. freq.
I I . To casi, as a tree its fruit. Rev. vi.
13. [ S o in M a t . v. 29, 30. xviii. 8, 9.
Rev. iv. 10. the sense of casling away is
found.]
I I I . To pul. Sea M a t . ix. 17- [xxvii.
6.] M a r k ii. 2 2 . vii. 3 3 . John v. 7. [xii.
6.] xviii. 11. xiii. 2. [ x x . 3 5 . ] On t h e last
text b u t one, E l s n e r cites from P l u t a r c h
t h c phrase 'EIS NO~YN EMBA'AAEIN
lo pul into thc mind, in t h e same sense of
suggesling, persuading. I add from L u -
cían, D e Syr. D e a , tóm. ii. p . 897. 'II
"llpn ( J u n o ) 'E1TI NO'ON "EBAAAE. See
also Wetstein. B u t K y p k e , whom also
see, produces from Pindar, Olymp. 13. lin.
21, &c. HoXXci ó" 'EN K A P A I ' A I S avSpCov
' EBAAON "ílptu Tto\vávdzpai á o ^ á i a ero-
(¡nupaif. B u t t h e flowery H o u r s (i. c. t h e
daughters of J ú p i t e r ) have pul in the
hearls of men m a n y ancient arts. [ F r o m
this general sense of puiting, or r a t h e r
puiting iu, m a n y particular explanatious
are given of this word, To pul tt liquor
 B A n 11 8 B A n

into ci vessel, is to potir. M a t . ix. 7. M a r k serious evils on account of their hope of

ii. 2 2 . L u k e v. 3 7 . J o h n xiii. 5. So M a t . the resurrection qf the dead. H e refers
xxvi. 7. Again, to put seed into the also to the Biblioth. Brem. Cías. vii.
ground is lo son. L u k e xiii. 19. P s . cxxv. p. 667, 89.]
7. In M a t . xxv. 27- ¡iiiKkuv ro ápyvpiov I V . To baptize, as the Israelites were
is a Greek phrase, to put money out to in- into Moses in the cloud and in t h e sea,
terés!. See Salín, de Usuris, p . 632.] occ. 1 Cor. x. 2 ; where probably the t r u e
I V . To thrust. Rev. xiv. 16, 19. reading is k&awrLcrQincrav, as almost all t h e
V . To strike. M a r k xiv. 65. ancient, and some of the later M S S . read.
V I . In a neuter sense, To rush, as a See Wetstein's Var. L e c t . and Griesbach.
wind. occ. A c t s xxvii. 14. " They were baplized (not unto, as our
V I L In t h e pass. perf. and pluperf. E n g . versión has it, b u t ) into Moses, i. e.
To be cast down, lo lie, as upon a bed, the into t h a t covenant, and into obedience to
ground. Mat. viii. 6, 14. ix. 2. L u k e xvi. those laws which Moses delivered to them
20. & al. from G o d ; so ¡Scnrrí^ecrdaí EIC Upiarov is
Bairrii^ii) *, from ¡iáirro) lo dip. rendered lo be baplized into Christ, and
I . To dip, immersc, or plunge in water. signifies to be baptized into the profession
B u t in t h e N . T . i t oceurs not strictly in of Christ's laws and doctrine, in Rom. vi.
this sense, unless so far as this is included 3, and Gal. iii. 27-" B p . Pearce. [ S c h l .
in Sense I I . a h d I I I . below. agrees with B p . Pearce's e x p l a n a r o n . ]
I I . Bairrí'Copai, Mid. and Pass. To V. In a figurative sense, To baptize
wash oneself, be washed, wash, i. e. the with t h e Holy Ghost. " I t denotes t h e
h a n d s by immersion or dipping in water. miraculous efusión of t h e Holy Ghost
M a r k vii. 4. L u k e xi. 3 8 . Comp. M a r k upon the apostles a n d other believers, as
vii. 3 . Mat. xv. 2. a n d u n d e r TLvypi).— well on account of t h e abundance of his
T h e L X X use (iawrí&pai, Mid. for mash- gifts (for anciently t h e water was copi-
ing oneself by immersion, answering to t h e ously poured on those who were baptized,
H e b . VntD, 2 K i n g s v. 14. Comp. ver. 10. or they themselves were plunged t h e r e i n )
T h u s also it is applied in t h e apoery- as of t h e virtue and eflicacy of t h e H o l y
¡ilial books, J u d i t h xii. 7. Ecclus. xxxiv. Spirit, who like living water refreshelh,
25. washeth away pollutions, cleanselh, &c."
I I I . To baptize, lo immerse in, or wash Stockius. M a t . iii. 1 1 . M a r k i. 8. L u k e iii.
with, water in token of purification from 16. J o h n i. 3 3 . A c t s i. 5. x i . 16. 1 Cor,
sin, and from spiritual pollution. Banrí- xii. 13.
'Copai, Pass. denotes t h e voluniary recep- V I . Figuratively, To be immersed or
tion of baptism, To be bapiizcd, receive plunged in a flood, or sea, as it were, of
baptism, to be initiated by the rite of bap- grievous affliclions and sufferings. Mat.
tism. I t is applied to the baptism both of xx. 22, 2 3 . Mark x. 3 8 , 3 9 . L u k e xii. 5 0 .
J o h n and of Christ. Mat. iii. 6. (where see T h e L X X use it in a like view for t h e
W e t s t e i n ) I I . M a r k i. 8. L u k e iii. 16. H e b . ruQ to terrify, affright, Isa. xxi. 4 .
A c t s ii. 3S. xxii. 16. [ I n t h e Middle i t ' H 'Aropía pe B A U T I Z E I , Iniquily plung--
signifies to procure one's own baptism, as eth me, i. e. into terror or distress. So
in Acts xxii. 16'.]—In M a r k vi. 14. t h e Josephus, D e Bel. lib. iv. cap. 3 . § 3 , says
participle ó fairrí'Cm' is used, according of t h e robbers who crowded into J e r u s a -
t o the H e b . and Greek idiom, for ó ficur- lem, t h a t ' E B A ' I T Í T S A N ri¡v TTÚXLV, They
riTi/e the baptizer.—BairriítcrdaL irrep VE- plunged t h e city, namely into calamilies.
Kplov, 1 Cor. xv. 29, see under 'Y-rrep I. 3 . [So also Diodor. Sic. i. c. 7 3 . tSiúirac (la-rr-
[ D e y l i n g has collected all t h e opinions on rksLv rcíig hcr(j>opátQ. and J u s t i n . Mart. Dial,
t h i s difficult passage (ii. p . 509.) H i s own c. T r y p h . p . 3 1 3 . ed. P a r . f¡f.¡i(m-TUjpévog
is, t h a t vicip is used for ¿i'rt. inslead of-— cipapTÍcug, full of vice. Schleusner • cites
and he would explain t h e passage t h u s , these places on the last sense with his
who are bapiizcd so as to take. the place usual inclination to weaken the forcé of
of the marlyrs. Schleusner explains it such meanings.]
b y reference to sense V I . , and says, Those
who have offered themselves to the most Bá7rríoy¿ci, aroc, ro, from /jtéáTrric/jaí,
perf. pass. of ftaiiTÍ'(o).
I . An immersion or washing with water,
* See G e n t l e m a n ' s M a g a z i n e , vol. vii. p . 1 0 , 1 5 2 . henee used in t h e N . T . for the baptism
vol. viii. p . 1 8 2 , 2 8 5 . and vol. i x . p . 1 0 , 1 1 3 . both of J o h n t h e Baptist and of C h r i s t ,
 B A P 119 B A P

M a t . iii. 7. xxi. 15. Rom. vi. 4. E p h . iv. 5. t h e Arabic barbar, which signifies tó
Col. ii. 12. 1 Pet. iii. 2 1 . mnrmur. Strabo, lib. xiv.* t h i n k s it is
II. Baptism- or hnmersion in grievous formed by an onomatopceia from the
a n d overtvkelming afflictions and suffer- sound, as denoting a man who speaks
ings. Mat. xx. 2 2 , 2 3 . Comp. B a i r r í ^ u V I . with difficulty and harshness. Others
1§gg° Ba-irricrpoc, 5, v, from ftetáirriapai, deduce it from t h e H e b . bbi to con-
perf. pass. of [jairríi^io.—An immersion or foundf."—" T h e G r e e k s and R o m a n s
washing in water, occ. M a r k vii. 4 , 8. reckoned all other nations b u t their own
Heb. ix. 10. vi. 2 ; in which last cited t e x t Barbarians, as differing from t h e m in
i t includes also t h e Christian baptism. ¡ t h e i r customs and language ; and all m a n -
EfSgp Bo7rriTj;c, 3 , ó, from /3CT7RR/¡¿w.— kind are therefore comprehended by t h e
0

^4 baptizer, " a title from John's office, not Apostle P a u l u n d e r t h e distinction of

a proper ñame." Campbell, whom see. A n Greeks and Barbarians, R o m . i. 14."
agnomen or s ú m a m e of J o h n , t h e fore- D o d d r i d g e (comp. K y p k e ) . A n d henee
r u n n e r of our B . L o r d , taken from t h e St. L u k e , in conformity with t h e u s u a l
office committed to him by God. M a t . iii. style, calis t h e i n h a b i t a n t s of M e l i t a , or
1. xi. I I . & al. Comp. J o h n i. 3 3 ; and Malta, (¡áptapoi, Acts x x v i ü . 2 , 4 ; and
see Josephus, A n t . lib. xviii. cap. 6 . ^ 2 , no doubt t h e i r language was barbarous iri
and Lardnei-'s Coliectíon of Testimonies, respect to t h e G r e e k s and R o m a n s ; for as
vol. i. cap. 4 . the island had anciently a P h e n i c i a n colony
B ' A n T f l . — T o clip, plunge, immerse, settled in it (see u n d e r MeXítj]), so it was
occ. J o h n xiii. 26. Rev. x i x . 13. L u k e afterwards, for a considerable t i m e , s u b -
xvi. 2 4 ; where observe, t h a t (ián-ríiv—• ject to t h e C a r t h a g i n i a n s , who established
üaroe is a good. G r e e k phrase for dip- t h e P u n i c tongue t h e r e i n ; and henee t h e
ping in water. T h u s H o m e r , II. vi. line vulgar language of M a l t a , even to t h i s
5 0 8 , and xv. line 2 6 5 . Aéto-Oai JIO- day, contains a g r e a t deal of t h e P h e n i c i a n
T A ' M O I O (Ionic for UOTA'MOY) is to and oíd P u n i c , as t h e curious reader m a y
bathe in a river. Comp. II. xxi. line 5 6 0 , see very satisfactorily proved in t h e A n -
Aagtraápevoe ELOTA'MOIO. And W e t - cient Universal H i s t o r y , vol. xvii. p . 2 9 7 ,
stein cites from A r a t u s , BA'ÜTÍiN ' Q K E - &c. 8vo. Besides t h e t e x t s above cited, t h e
A N O I O , Dipping i n ' t h e ocean. In these word occurs Col. iii. 11.
expressions t h e preposition ¿Vi in, or I K j SüH" 5
Bapéa, S), from flápos weight,
with, is understood before t h e noun. See burden.
Pasor's Lexicón, Bos Ellips. in 'E7RT, a n d I. To burden, load, meigh down. In
D a m m i Lexic. col. 1433, 4 . [ W e find Pass. (iapeópai, Spat, To be oppressed,
t h a t ( E x o d . xii. 22) t h i s verb is construed weighed down, heavy, as t h e eyes or body
with cWó, /3CI7RR£TV airó RA Hiparos, stain- with sleep. occ. M a t . xxvi. 4 3 , (where see
ing with blood, i. e. dipping so as to stain. K y p k e ) M a r k xiv. 4 0 . L u k e ix. 3 2 . So
So Lev. xiv. 16. H e n e e perhaps t h e ex- in t h e Anthologia (see W e t s t e i n ) B E B A -
pression in L u k e xvi. 2 4 . m a y be e x - P H M E ' N O Ü "YlTNÍit; a n d Anacreon, O d e
plained. T h e verb is construed with ¿TE 5 2 , line 1 8 , speaks of a y o u n g woman,
in Lev. iv. 6. ix. 9. xiv. 6, and with ív in B E B A P H M E ' N H N I "Y1TNON, Weighed
S

D e u t . xxxiii. 2 4 . R u t h ii. 14.~J down to sleep. T h u s likewise Ovid. M e t .

_ B A P . H e b . — B a r . H e b . Chald. a n d S y -
riac 1 2 , a son. So ~Bap"lidva. Mat.xvi.
17. is son of J o ñ a s . Comp. J o h n i. 4 2 .
xxi. 15, 16, 17. and Baprípaios, son of
Timseus, M a r k x. 4 6 . comp. BAPÍTJTRAC,
Acts xiii. 6.
BA'PBAPOU, A, ó.—A man who speahs
aforeign or strange language, aforeigner.
[So Ovid of himself in P o n t u s , T r i s t . v.
10. 3 7 .
lib. 1, line 224,—gravem somno—heavy
with sleep. And Virgil, Mn. vi. line 5 2 0 ,
—somnoque g r a v a t u m .
I I . To be oppressed, burdened, weighed
down, with affliction or calamity. occ. 2
Cor. i. 8. v. 4 .
I I I . To be burdened or charged with
expense, occ. 1 T i m . v. 1 6. comp. Bápoc V .
[§§1° Bapéaie, Adv. from ¡iapvg.—Hea-
vily, dully. occ. M a t . xiii. 15. A c t s x x v i ü .

Barlarus hic ego sum, quia non intelligor ulli. * Oi/ixi SE to BA'PBAPON xot "Ag%as
r
lx.iri$mñ-
fféai tiras KCtr 'ONOMATOHOIÍAN Isri ra>v liviríxQogas
xa.) trzXijgas xa.) r^cí^swí Xc¿7.cvvrajv, ¿s ra ^a.TTa^tC ílv
See also E u r i p . Hec. 3 2 8 , and H e r o d .
977i
¡

xa) 7^cui\¡'(íiv xx) •^.iXXiXtiv, p . edit. A m s t e l .

11. 158.1 See 1 Cor. xiv. 1 1 . " Some," t S e e V i t r i n g a , O b s e r v . Sacr. l i b . i. c a p . 9.
says M i n t e r t , " derive this word from §16.
 B A P 120 B A 2

27. [Baptuc aKMiv role ¿ai. Properly, to lin.] 2 2 . B E B A P H K O ' T A juefof'vac'OI'Nílf,

hear with difficulty, b u t metaphorically M y m i n d o'ercharged with wine. And
saicl of those who, t h o u g h t a u g h t , are u n - Xenophon, cited by Raphelius on t h e place,
willing to receive t h e better doctrine d e - says t h a t L y c u r g u s t h o u g h t t h a t m e n
livered to t h e m . See Isaiali vi. 10. X e n . should take so much food, ¿>g viro rr\na)xov7jg
Cyrop. ii. 2. 1. A n a b . ii. I . 7.] fir)woTE B A P Y ' N E 2 6 A I , as never t o be
Bápog, eog, «c, rb, from fiaphg. oppressed with repletion. Comp. u n d e r
I . Weight, burden. í t oceurs not in t h e Tpétpü) I I I . a n d see W e t s t e i n and K y p k e
N . T . strictly in this s e n s e : b u t henee, on L u k e .
I I . I t is applied to t h a t eternal weight [ I I . Metaphorically, To /tarden ( t h e
qf glory, which will follow t h e temporal h e a r t ) , E x o d . viii. 15. 3 2 . i x . 7- 3 1 .
afflictions of believers. occ. 2 Cor. iv. i 7. x. ] . Malee dull ( t h e eyes or e a r s ) ,
S t . P a u l , in t h i s expression, /Sapos <Só"£,nsIsaiah xxxiii. 15. lix. 7. Malee heavy
weight qf glory, elegantly j o i n s together (of chainsj &c.) J u d g . i. 3 7 . L a m .
t h e two senses of t h e H e b . ITlü, which de- iii. 7. Zach. vii. 1 1 . Ecclus. x x x i i i .
notes both weight and glory, i. e. shining 3 3 . Multiply (as words, & c ) , J o b x x x v .
or being irradiated with light; for t h e n a - 16.]
t u r a l connexion between which t w o senses B A P Y ' 2 , tía, v.
see H e b . and E n g . Lexicón, u n d e r I3£j V I . I . Heavy. occ. M a t . xxiii. 4 .
and t h e authors there quoted. [ S e e Soph. I I . Weighly, imporiant. occ. M a t . xxiii.
Ajax ver. 130. E u r . H i p p . 626. Claudian. 2 3 . [ O t h e r s explain Bapús here by dif-
de L a ú d . Stilic. iii. 7 2 . Suidas,. filipag jicull. So Schleusner, giving, however,
CUTÍ r a ró TrXijdos, ritv io-yyvf\ our interpretation, a n d justifying i t b y
I I I . Burdensome labour, laborious em- reference t o Polyb. i. 3 8 . iii. 1 3 . 66. H e -
ployment. occ. M a t . x x . 12. I rodian. ii. 14, 7.] Comp. A c t s xxv. 7.
I V . A burden, burdensome injunction. [ I I I . Weighty, authoritative, severe. occ.
occ. Acts xv. 2 8 . comp. R e v . ii. 2 4 . [See 2 Cor. x. 10. [ H e s y c h i u s , B a p í c , «u-oc,
in sense I I I . a n d I V . 2 Mace. i x . 10. ar¡i¡íiQ, o-Kkr)póc.~]
Eccles. xiii. 2. Dionys. Pial. A n t . iv. 10.] IV. Grievous, ajflictive,oppressive. occ.
V . Burden, charge. Henee 'Ev ¡iápu A c t s x x . 2.9. comp. 1 J o h n v. 3 . [ W i s d .
elvaí, To be burdensome, chargeable. occ. ii. 15. Exod. xxix. 3 1 . x x x . 4 2 . 1 Mace. i.
1 Thess. ii. 6. comp. N e h . v. 15. 1 T i m . 1 9 . ] — T h i s word, in t h e L X X , generally
v. 16, ataprjg, a n d kiri&apéu). Wolfius, answers to t h e H e b . Y D 5 .
however, refers t h e phrase iv fiápeí kivat [ V . i n t h e L X X , t h e word signifies
to m a k i n g use of t h e apostolic authority great. I n Gen. i. 9, 1 1 . Ex. i x . 3 , t h e
and dignity in general. T h i s interpreta- word usually rendered by (iapvc is r e n -
r o n he coufirms from t h e use of fiaptiai, dered by fxéyac ( l i o ) . And Hesychius
2 Cor. x. 1 0 ; from an expression in P h a - says, ¡íapii—ór¡Xo~t Sé Kal /iÉya.]
laris's E p i s t . ¡Sapea rivi elvaí; and from Slígí? Bapúrtytioc, ó, ?/, from
0
fiapije
t h e opposition between iv (icipeí elvaí, ver. heavy, and rípn price.. [So in L a t i n
6, and t h a t i\-mÓTi¡ra, mildness, or genile- grave p r e t i u m , Salí. H i s t . i i i . ] — O f great
ness, which t h e Apostle professes to have price, very precious or valuable. o c c M a t .
observed, ver. 7. F r e n c h translat. of ver. 6. xxvi. 7.
—quoique nous eussions .pú m o n t r e r de Tiao-avi(b), from fiácravoe.
l'autorité comme les Apotres de Christ. I. To examine, try.
So Macknight. I I . To examine by torture. Henee,
V I . B á p t a , r¡, r a , Infirmities, faults, I I I . To torture, torment. See M a t . viii.
which in Christiaus are burdensome or 6, 2 9 . 2 P e t . ii. 8- Rev. i x . 5 . comp. R e v .
grievous, not only to others b u t to t h e m - xii. 2. [ 1 Sam. v. 3 . 2 Mace. vii. 1 3 . ]
selves. occ. G a l . vi. 2 . comp. R o m . x v . 1. I V . ~E>a<ravL'(opai, To be tossed, as a
1 Thess. v. 14. [ S o Schleusner, a n d refers ship or persons sailing, by t h e waves of t h e
to VVessel. on Diod. Sic. iv. c. 6 1 . a n d to sea. M a t . xiv. 2 4 . M a r k vi. 4 8 . Comp.
Salm. on Trebell. Poli. T r i g . T y r a n . c. 4 . Longin. D e Sublim. sect. x . towards t h e
for pondus in same sense in L a t i n . ] end. [ I t is also used in a somewhat milder
Bapí/Vb), from (3apve. sense, i. e. to afflict, vex, or annoy. T h u s ,
I. To oppress, overload, overcharge. in M a t . viii. 2 9 . M a r k v. 7. L u k e viii. 2 8 ,
occ. L u k e x x i . 3 4 . So H o m e r , Odyss. the word refers to t h e annoyance a n d
iii. line 139, ' O I ' N í í t B E B A P I I K O ' T E S , vexation experienced b y t h e devils a t
Cercharged with wine; a n d Odyss. x i x . being deprived of their power over m a n -
 BA2 121 B A 2

kind, uní t o any actual torments t h e n in- in particular, M a t . xii. 25. M a r k iii. 2 4 ,
Hicted. Again, in Rev. xi. 10, Eichhorn Luke xi. 17, 18, and perhaps A c t s i. 6,
explains t h e fia<javuj¡ivs as refen'ing to t h e A n d for t h e people of t h e state, M a t . xxiv.
restraint p u t on the zealots.] 7. M a r k xiii. 8. L u k e xxi. 10. H e b . xv.
Bao-avifl-fióe, 5, ó, from fte&aaávio-pat, 33.]
perf. pass. of (iaaaví'(u>.—Torment, tor- I I . " Eoyalty, royal power, or dignity.
ture. Rev. i x . 5 . xiv. 1 1 . & al. [Schleus. F o r t h a t i t was not a different kingdom
says, t h a t in Rev. ix. 5, t h e word denotes from t h a t wherein t h e nobleman lived, is
pain ; in xviii. 7, 10, punishment, and evidentfrom ver. 14. I t is equally so t h a t
perhaps, in xiv. 1 1 , the place of punish- there is in this circumstance an allusion
ment.] to what was well known to our Lord's
Batravisi/e;, S, b, from ¡3a<raví'(io.—A hearers, t h e way in which Archelaus, and
lormentor, or jailor. T h e word (3arravi?>)c even Herod himself, h a d obtained t h e i r
properly denotes examiner, particularly rank and authority in J u d e a , by favour of
one who has it in charge to examine by the Romans." Campbell, whom see. occ.
torture. Henee it carne to signify jailorj L u k e xiv. 12, 15. [ I t m a y be here ex-
for on such, in those days, was this charge plained of a, crown, and see Diodor. Sic.
devolved. Campbell, whom see. occ. Mat. i. 47- Rev. xvii. 12. I t also in this sense
xviii. 3 4 . [ W e may observe from Grotius's is used for reign, or government, or autho-
Notes on this passage, t h a t among t h e rity, M a t . vi. 13. Luke i. 3 3 . J o h n xviii.
jurisconsults the prison is called cruciatus 36. H e b . i. 8, and Rev. xii. 10, for
•corporis. See Fischer, D e Vit. p . 20. power.~\
Hesychius, f>a<ravwri¡g, b SnpbicoivoQ, T T O X - I I I . BatriXeta rwv ópavwv, The king-
Xák'ie Sé b StaiT7]r>]£, nal Trapa rtbv avSpa- dom of heaven, or qf the heavens, a phrase
TTÓÜOJV rr¡v aXr¡0eLav irvvdavápevoe,.] peculiar to St. M a t t h e w , for which t h e
BA'SANOS, a, )/. other Evangelists use (iaaiXda r a 0eS, the
I . An examination. [ P r o p e r l y an exa- kingdom qf God. Comp. M a t . iv. 17, with
mination qf metáis. Bútrai'oc was a L y - M a r k i. 1 4 ; M a t . x i x . 14, with M a r k x„'
dian stone by which gold was tried. 14 ; M a t . xi. 1 1 , with L u k e vii. 28 ; M a t .
iiácravoc' XWoc aro) KaXelrai JJ ró -)(pv{ííov xiii. 11, with M a r k iv. I I , and with L u k e
rraparpipóp-ívov (Soia^áírErai. Harpoer, and viii. 10. Both these expressions refer to
t h e E t y m . M a g n . cali it yovaoycfho) the prophecies of Daniel, chap. ii. 4 4 . vii.
Xídoc, adding t h e same explanation as 13, 1 4 ; and denote t h a t everlasting king-
Harpocration; and Hesychius says of ¡3aa-a- dom of the God qf heaven, which he
vl^r¡Q, Xi6os &TID Xéyerai, ÁvSucS XíQa yé- would set up and give to the Son qf God,
voc, KOÍ X'LOOQ fláaavos, (¡> •¡raparpípopreg or, in other words, t h e * spiritual and
rb ypvaíov iSuidpoXov. See Pindar. P y t h . eternal kingdom of Christ, G o d - M a n ,
x. 105.] " which was to subsist first in more i m -
I I . An examination by torture. I n b o t h perfect circumstances on earth, b u t after-
these senses it is used by t h e profane wards was to appear complete in t h e world
writers. [ i E l . V. H . vii. 18.] of glory. In some places of Scripture, t h e
I I I . Torture, torment. occ. L u k e xvi. kingdom of heaven more particularly sig-
23, 28. M a t . iv. 24, where Wetstein cites nifies t h e former of these, and denotes
Dio Chrys. a p p l y i u g i t to torments arising the state qf it on earih : (See M a t . ch.
from disiempers. [ í n 1 Sam. vi. 3, 4, 8, xiii. t h r o u g h o u t , especially ver. 4 1 , 4 7 .
17, rb rfje fiao-áva means the trespass qf- Mat. x x . 1.) and sometimes t h e kingdom
fering; the word kifXaa¡xa, or a similar qf God signifies only t h e slaíe of glory, 1
one, being understood, i. e. qffering for Cor. vi. 9, 10. xv. 50. Gal. v . ' 2 1 . But
guilt io escape punishment or torture. See generally both t h e one and the other ex-
Wisd. xix. 4. 1 Mace. ix. 5 0 . ] pression iucludes both." See Doddridge on
Mat, iii. 2, Suicer, T h e s a u r . in ¡iacnXúa,
BatriXa'a, ae, ?;, from (GacríXcúc.
and J o s . Mede's W o r k s , folio, p . 103, 4 .
I . A kingdom, or dominión qf a king.
Campbell observes, t h a t ¡3ao-iXeía signifies
M a r k vi. 2 3 . [ R e v . xvi. 10. I n M a t . iv.
not only kingdom, b u t reign, and t h a t in
8. and L u k e iv. 5, Schleusner explains it
both the above-mentioned expressions it
a province: rag /3acriX£Íac TS KÓo-pv the
should, when it relates to t h e place, be
provinces of Judaia, and so many others.
rendered by t h e former w o r d ; when to t h e
I n the L X X i t is often so used, E s t h . i.
22. ii. 18. iii. 1,3. I t is also used for a
síaie gencrally, not t h e dominión of a k i n g
* See J o h n x v i i i . ¡50. Lmke i. 3 3 .
 B A 2 ¡22 B A S

lime or duralion of t h e sovereigiity, by t h e from t h e last. Again (3.) the Messiah's

latter. See more in Preliminary Disserta- kingdom in t h e Jewish sense is meant,
tions to the Gospels, p . 136., &c. [Much Mat. xviii. I . xx. 2 1 . M a r k xv. 4 3 . L u k e
has been written on this formula. Kopp xvii. 20. xix. 1 1 . xxiii. 5 1 . ; and (4.)
( E x c . i. on the Epist. to t h e Thess.) and Christ's kingdom generally, M a t . iii. 2 .
Keill in his H i s t . Dogmatis de Regno iv. 17. L u k e xi. 2. Acts i. 3 . xix. 8.
Messioe, &c. (Lips. 178),) think i t al- xxviii. 2 3 , 3 1 . Coloss. iv. 1 1 , and else-
ways denotes Christ's future kingdom where. ( I n 1 Cor. xv. 24, it denotes t h a t
after the Resurrection; b u t Doederlein invincible kingdom of Christ by which he
especially ( I n s t i t u í . Theoi. Clirist. p . m. reigns over and assists his followers till
713), and Schleusner ditfer. All agree in the end of t h e world.) T h e following pas-
t h i n k i n g t h a t t h e formula was a Jewish sages are of doubtful, disputed, or difticult
one, and was used with reference to t h a t meaning, M a t . xvi. 19, a n d M a t . xvi. 2 8 .
kingdom of t h e Messiah which they e x - L u k e ix. 2 7 . M a r k ix. 1. T h e similar
pected. See Schoetgen. H o r . H e b . ' i . p . passages, M a t . xix. 2 4 . M a r k x . 2 3 , 24,
i 147. on this subject. And it appears to me 25. L u k e xviii. 24, 2 5 , are referred by
t h a t Campbell's remark as to both states Schleusner to t h e l i d sense.]
being a t leastin some degree almost always [IV. I t is used for fiao-iXEvg king.
implied is correct. Nevertheless, some- M a r k xi. J 0. (comp. L u k e xix. 38.) I n
times one, sometimes t h e other, is more Rev. i. 6, Eichhorn says flacriXEÍar IEOE'IQ,
strongly alluded to, and Schleusner gives which is t h e reading of many M S S . , is
seven distinct shades of diíference iii t h e for itpÉtúv, i. e. a body with the privileges
L X X . W e find ftao-iXEÍa rS QEÜ used iu qf priests, i. e. qf Christians who have
Wisd. vi. 4 , simply for God's kingdom, or free access to the Throne of Grace. See
rule over the earth ; a n d in Wisd. x. 10, ' 1 P e t . ii. 9 . ]
for the congregation qf sainís who sur- [V, Happiness, happy state, especially
round and worship God as their King in in the world to come. M a t . xxv. 3 4 . L u k e
heaven. W e may observe t h a t (1.) Ihe xii. 3 2 . xxii. 29 (perhaps.).]
future happiness qf Christ's followers in Ba<T('\£toc, a, b, r¡, from ¡iacrCkEvc.
his heaven/y kingdom is implied M a t . v. I. Royal, kingly. occ. 1 P e t . ii. 9.
3 , 1 0 * , 19, 20.-vii. 2 1 . viii. 1 1 , 12. xviii. [ C o m p . Exod. x. 7- xix. 6.]
3 , 4. x x . 1. M a r k ix. 47- (comp. v. 46.) I I . ~Qacrí\ziov, a, r o , (namely Süpa, a
L u k e vi. 20. xiii. 2 8 , 2 9 . xiv. 15. xxii. 16, house, being understood), a royal house,
18, 3 0 . xxiii. 4 2 . A c t s xiv. 2 2 . 1 Cor. vi. palace. occ. L u k e vii. 25 : where Wetstein
9, 10. xv. 5 0 . Galat. v. 2 1 . Ephes. v. 5. shows t h a t t h e word is used in t h e same
1 Thess. ii. 12. 2 Thess. i. 5. 2 T i m . iv. sense by t h e Greek writers. [ S e e X e n .
18. J a m e s ii. 5. 2 Peter i. 1 1 . T h a t (2.) Anab. iii. 4. 15. In t h e L X X t h e same
the blessings of his earthly kingdom, or word is often t o b e understood, Prov. xviii.
the Christian religión with all its present 19. Dan. vi. 18, and sometimes ^éppa or
gifls and blessings, is more especially al- ciíiúrjua, as 1 K i n g s xiv. 8. 2 Sam. i. 1 0 . ]
liided to, M a t . x. 7, 3 3 . xiii. 1 1 , 24, 3 1 , RavikEvg, éog, A t t . éuig, o. A king, ma-
3 3 , &c. xix. 12, (though this m a y be r e - nar ch. í t is applied as well to God and
ferred to t h e first head,) 4 3 . xxii. 2. xxiii. his Christ, M a t . v. 3 5 . 1 T i m . i. 17. M a t .
L V M a r k i . 15. iv. 1 1 , 2 6 , 3 0 . x. 15. xii. xxv. 3 4 , 4 0 . J o h n xviii. 3 7 ; as to men,
3 1 . L u k e viii. 10. ix. 6 2 . xii. 3 1 . xiii. 18, M a t . i. 6. ii. I. x. 18. xiv. 9. 1 Pet. ii. 13,
20. xvi. 16. xviii. 1 7 , 2 9 . Acts viii. 12. 17. I n tiie two last passages i t particu-
Rom. xiv. 17. 1 Cor. iv. 20. Rev. i. 9. In larly signifies t h e Román emperor, whom,
t h e following places t h e professors of this though t h e Romaus themselves abhorred
religión, or t h e Christian body, secm to the title of rex, or king, y e t t h e Greek
be pointed, Mat. xi. 1 1 , 12. xiii. 4 1 . xxi. writers, both ecelesiastieal and profane,
3 1 . (and so L u k e vii. 2 8 . ) ; b u t there is commonly called ¡3acrt\Évg or king. Thus
Jittle necessityfor separating thesepassages Josephus D e Bel. lib. iii. cap. 7. § 3 . T a
•¡repi r5g 'Pwpattdv BA2IAET2 ¿nápEva.
* [ S c h l e u s n e r strangely refers v . 1 0 . to the hea- " W h a t would happen concerning t h e
v e n l y , and v . 3 . w i t h L u k e vi. 2 0 , to the earthly Román emperors." So Cellarius, in his
state of Christians. T h e expressions are cntirely H e r o d u m H i s t o r i a vindicata, printed a t
the s a m e , used o n the same subject, and in the same the end of t h e 2d vol. of Hudson's Jose-
w a y ; ñor can a n y reason b e offered w h y l m m i l i t y
is not as m u e h entitled toreward i n a future state as
phus, shows t h a t not only Herodian, b u t
patience under suftering for conscience salte.] Pausanias, Diouysius Perieget. a n d D i o -
 B A 3 12.13
tlorus Sic. apply t h e ñame (SamXÉvc to tlie
llomau emperors. See also Wolfius on
J o h n xix. 15. O n Rev. xix. 16, s e e V i -
tringa, Elsner, and Alberti. [ T h e word is
used of any ruler, as of Herod, M a t . xiv.
9, and elsewhere, who was only a Tetrarch
—and, generally, Acts iv. 26. xxv. 13,
and probably H e b . vii. I. So Rev. ii. 11.
There is the same free use of the word in
good writers. See iEsch. Pers. 24. and
Fischer. ad iEschin. Socrat. Dial. iii. 2.]
BacriXévw, from patriXtvs a king.—To
be a king, reign as a king, whetber in a
proper or íigurative sense. See Mat. ii.
22. Luke i. 3 3 . xix. 14, 2 7 . Rom. v. 14,
17, 2 1 . 1 Cor. iv. S. xv. 2 5 . Rev. ix. 15,
17. xix. 6, where see V i t r i n g a . O n M a t .
ii. 22, Wetstein shows t h a t the phrase
B A S I A E ~ Y E I N ' A N T f T I N O S is used
not only by t h e L X X , 2 Kings xv. 7, and
in 1 M a c e xiii. 3 2 , but likewise by H e r o -
dotus, Aristophanes, Xenophon, and A p -
pian, for reigning in the stead or place of
another.
~BaaiXucüQ, ?), bv, from (OCMTIXEVC.
I. Roy al, kingly, qf or belonging to a
king. occ. A c t s xii. 20, 2 1 . James ii. 8.
I I . Bao-iXiKóe, b, (oiájcofoc an altend-
anl, or the like, being understood). A
courlier, i. e. an attendant, servant, or
minisier qf a king, as the Syriac versión
renders it fcOÍ?D " D I ? , i. e. oñXoc ¡iao-iXibic,
or (oaaiXiicbc, " qui vices regis gerebat, et
regius erat minister." Tremellius. occ.
John iv. 46, 4 9 . Comp. Wetstein, Kypke,
and Campbell. [ T h i s explanation is con-
íirmed b y P o l y b . i v . 7 6 , 2 . Joseph. A. J . xv.
8, 4. B . J . vii. 5. 2. B u t others, as Bos,
supply ¿no)p, i. e. one qf the royalfamily ; sense. See L X X in D e u t . xxviii. 54, 5 6 .
others ^paTiiirnQ. See Casaub. E x e r c .
Antibaron. p . 356. T h e Vulgate has re-
gulas.']
[ I I I . Greatesl, best. J a m e s ii. 8. Comp.
M a t . xxii. 39. T h e word denotes nobilily,
or excellence in classical authors. Xen.
Symp. i. 8. Polyb. viii. 24. p. 60.]
BacrlXiacra, r¡g, ?;, from ¡iacriXzvc.—A
queen. occ. Mat. xii. 42. L u k e xi. 3 1 .
A c t s viii. 27. Rev. xviii. 7. T h i s word is
used by Theocritus, Idyll. xv. line 24, and
by others of the Greek writers, whom see
in Wetstein. [See S t u r z . de Dial. Maced. 'SI; ¡¿ii B A S K A ' N Q Q 2 E , Tfis U;'E¡J.ÍI fa-ruua J t ó x m v '
p.-154.]
Bácrig, toe, A t t . cojg, i¡, from /3áw or
fíaíva to go, tread, which in the perf.
tense, (ietr¡i;a (Ionic/3£€aa],imports in the says a shepherd in Theocritus, Idyl. vi.
Greek writers, firmness, steadiness. [ S c h . 1. 3 9 . A n d another in Virgil, E c l o e . iii.
traces out the meaning of t h e word more 3. 103,
correctly, ftáme a going, from fiaívw lo go,
B AS
(as in S o p h . ' A j . 8, and see Hesych. and
Suidas.) Thence t h a t with which the s t e p
is made, or a foot. (Herodian. vi. 5, 12.
Apollod. Bibl. i. 5.) and thence again t h e
lower part, base, or foundation7\
I. A basis, base, orfoundation, [pave-
ment,~\ from its steadiness. [ L e v . i. 9.]
I I . The solé of the. foot, or, in a more
lax signification, the foot of a man, which
is, as it were, the basis on which he stands
or goes. occ. A c t s iii. 7. Elsner and A l -
berti show t h a t the profane writers use
the word in this sense. T h e former of these
authors intimates t h a t it may also denote
the footstep or tread. Comp. H e b . xii.
13 ,• and see Wetstein and Kypke on A c t s ,
[Wisdom. xiii. 19. Ecclus. xxvi. 20.]
B a o - r a t V w . — T o bewitch, properly with
the eye. So the Greek Scholiast on T h e o -
critus, Idyll. 5 . lin. 13, observes, t h a t
Beto-raras properly signifies ó r o t e ¿qjOaX-
fidíc Kaívu>r rat <j>ddpuiv rb bpaQiv VTT ávrS,
one who with his eyes kills or destroys
what he looks a t ; and the Etymologist,
and the Schol. on Arist. P l u t . 5, say,
t h a t ¡iaaKavoQ is for (pamcavoc, ó TO~IQ
<¡>aé(Ti Kaívwv, he who kills with his looks
or eyes*: and this derivationis confirméd
by the i n i t i a i y being found instead of t h e
b in the L a t i n fascino, lo fascínate or be-
witch wilh the eye. The superstitioits
H e a t h e n believed t h a t g r e a t mischief
might ensue from an evil eye, or from
being regarded wilh envious and malicious
looks. Henee f¡amzaívu> and its derivatives
are frequently used in t h e profane authors
for envy, and t h e L X X and apocryphal
writers apply such words in t h e same
Prov. xxiii. 6. xxviii. 2 2 . and Ecclus. xiv.
3 , 6, 8. xviii. 18. xxxyii. 11, or 13. P l i n y
relates from Isigonus, that " among t h e
Triballians and Iílyrians there were certain
enchanters, qui visu quoque effascinent i n -
terimantque quosdiulius inlueantur, iratis
prosserlim oculis; who with their looks
could bewitch and MU those whom t h e y
beheld for a considerable time, especially
if thej'' did so with angry eyes." Nat.
H i s t . lib. vii. cap. 2.
T o guard against the narra, of evil eyes,
T h r i c e on m y breast I spat,
* [ S e e also A u l . Gel. N . A . x i i i . C ]
 B AS
Nescio quis leñeros oculus mihi fascinat agiios.
S o m e evil eyes bcieileh m y tender l a m a s .
These ¡«issages, to which many more m i g h t
be added (see Wetstein on Gal. iii. 1.) are
suflicieut to show the ?iotio?is of the an-
cient Heathen on this subject; and we
may add, t h a t the same superstitious fan-
cies still prevail in Pagan a n d * Maho-
metan countries, and among the vulgar in
most of those t h a t cali themselves Chris-
tian. B u t when St. P a u l says, Ofoolisli
Galalians, ris vpas ÉQárritavE, who halh
bewitched you ? it is not to be imagined
t h a t the Apostle favoured t h e popular
e r r o r ; this is only such a strong expres-
sion of his surprise at their departure from
t h e p u r i t y of t h e gospel, as any man
m i g h t now use, who, notwithstanding, did
not give t h e least credit to the pretended
fascinalion qf an evil eye. occ. Gal. iii. 1.
[ T h e passage of Galatiaus Schleusner ex-
plains, Who has seduced you ivilh false
doctrine? See Irmisch. on Herodian. i.
p . 3 9 7 . ] — T h e L X X have fiarrK¿\.vEi TS
oij)0a\¡j.ó> avrS, shall envy wilh his eye, for
J?S¡1 his eye shall be evil, D e u t . xxviü.
5 4 ; and ver. 5G. fiarricáreí rto oajdaKpü
iLvrijt;, for MJ'JJ j>in. So Ecclus. xiv. 8,
MóVíjpoe ó fiao-Kai.vi.ov ó<j/daX¡j.M. He is
wicked who envielh wilh his eye, [and
Wisdom iv. 12.] Comp. under 'ÓáüaXaós
III.
Ba<rá£<i>. Martilláis and M i n t e r t derive
it from Báw lo go, and TÚHJ lo stand, i. e.
firm.
I. To bear, carry, properly, a heavy
burden, bajulare, as L u k e vii. 14. J o h n
xix. 1 7 . A c t s iii. 2. comp. M a r k xiv. 13.
I I . Tabear, carry, in general. L u k e x.
4. x i . 27- Comp. A c t s ix. 15. [ x x i . 35.]
* " N o nation i n the world (says D r . S h a w , T r a -
vels, p . 2 4 3 , 2 d edit.) is so m u c h given to super-
stition as the A r a b s , or even the Mahometana in g e -
neral. T h e y h a n g about their children's nccks'the
íigure of an open h a n d , usually the r i g h t ; which
the T u r k s and M o o r s p a i n t l i k e w i s e u p o n their ships
and houses, as a countcr-cfiarm lo an, evil eye: forfive
is with t h e m an u n l u c k y number, and jive ( m e a n -
i n g their iingers) in your eyes, is their proverb of
cursing and defiance. T h o s e of riper ycars carry
witli t h e m some paragraphs of their K o r a n , w h i c h
( a s the J e w s did their Phylacteries, E x o d u s xiii. 16.
N u m b . x v . 3 8 . ) t h e y place upon their breasts, or
s e w under their caps, to prevent fascination and
wilehcraft, and to secure themselves from sickncss,
and misfortunes. T h e virtue of these scrolls and
charms is supposed to be so far universal, .that
t h e y suspend t h e m even u p o n the necks of their cat-
tle, horses, and other beasts o f b u r d e n . " [ T h e same
superstition prevails at this day i n many parts of
I l a l y , and especially at N a p l e s a m o n g all classes, and
to a degrec hard!y credible to any but cyc-witncsscs.]
124 B A T
I I I . To.carry off ov take away, J o h n
xx. 15, where see Wetstein, Wolfius, and
K y p k e ; M a t . iü. 11, whose shoes 1 am
not worthy ''• fia^cuxai to take away (Diog.
L a e r t , p . 3 7 3 . edit. Meibom.), after having
pulled them off; t h a t is, whose slave I am
not worthy to b e ; this being the office of
slaves among the ancients." Markland, in
Append. to Bowyer's Conject. where see
m o r e ; also W e t s t e i n on M a t . J o h n xii. G,
é€á<^a£ev, carriecl off, i. e. siole. T h u s B p .
Pearce and K y p k e , whoconfirm this sense
from t h e Greek writers.
I V . To take up. occ. John x. 3 1 ; where
this V . implies the largeness of the stones
employed. So H o m e r , Odyss. xi. line 5 9 8 ,
Aarev BASTA'ZONTA irrAiu'fiov iti¿fori¡'ñr?¡1.
Ileaviug with both h i s hands a pond'rous stone.
[Comp. John viii. 5 9 . Joseph, A . l v i i . 1 1 ,
7. viii. 2 2 , and H o m e r , II. X. 5 9 3 , </>.
405.]
V . To bear, support, sustain, suffer,
whether corporally, M a t . xx. 12. Roni.xi.
1 8 : or mentally, J o h n xvi. 12. Rom. xv.
1 ; or both, M a t . viii. 1 7 *. L u k e xiv. 27,
Acts xv. 10. Rev. ii. 2. & al. On J o h n
xvi. 12, observe, t h a t t h e same expression
is used in Epictetus's Enchirid. chap.
xxxvi.—TI/J' crEavrtí (¡>ícnv KarápaBe, íi
AY'NASAI B A S T A ' S A I . Consider your
own nature, whether you are oble lo bear
it. So A r r i a n , Epictet. lib. ü i . cap. 15,
Ti A Y ' N A S A I BASTA'SAI.
B A ' T O S , n, ?';, perhaps (Uí being changed
into r as usual) from t h e H e b . nttfNíi, a.
noisome plant, which is rendered ficmis by
the L X X , J o b x x x i . 4 0 . — A bush or l¡ram-
ble, occ. Mark xii. 20. L u k e vi. 44. xx. 3 7 .
A c t s vii. 3 0 , 3 5 . B u t observe, t h a t in
Mark almost all the ancient, and m a n y
later M S S , with several printed editions,
have T5 before / 3 Ú - H ; and this reading is
adopted by Wetstein and Griesbach, whom
see. [ T h e L X X use fiaros for t h e H e b .
rDD in Exod. üi. 2, 3, 4 . D e u t . xxxiii. lti.
I t occurs in P l u t a r c h . T . vi. Opp. p . 3 5 5 .
ed. Reisk. Polyb. ii. 7 1 . 1. See on this
word Dioscond. iv. c. 37- Suicer. i. p . G72.
0 1 . Cels. Hierobot. ii. p . 53.]
B A ' T O S , ti, ó, from t h e H e b . T&.—A
* [Schleusner g i v e s the orthodox cxplana'tion
without hesitation, and m o s t c s n d i d l y , addíng of
course that the other sense, i. e. fiwrífa to cure,
m a y be t h o u g h t of, and, quoting G a l e n , de Compos.
M e d . per Genera I I . ^.UÍMS ^¡¡aKtÚFt %a\ úr.witn.
/¿refrían, and in I/atin, O v i d . P o n t . i. 3 . T h i s pas-
sage is í'ully discussed in A b p . M a g e e ' s work on
the A t o n e m e n t , i. 4 1 0 — 4 3 2 . j
 B AT 125 B A E

Balh, tho largest Jewish measüre of ca-
pacily next to the Homer, of which it was
t h e tenth part. See E z e k . xiv. 1 1 , 14. I t
is equal to the Ephah, i. e. to seven gallons
and a half English, a n d is always men-
tioned in Scripture as a measure of liquids.
occ. L u k e xvi. 6- [Josephus, A . J . viii. 2 ,
says the ficirog holds seventy-two sextarii,
b u t E p i p h a n i u s de Mens. p . 5 4 0 , says
only sixty. See Theodoret. O p . T . i. (ed.
H a l . ) p . 4GG, and t h e Schol. on Hexapl.
Origen. Moutfauc. 3 K i n g s v. 11. T h e
H e b r e w word occurs also in E z r a vii. 2 2 ,
and t h e Greek is written, according t o
Theodoret, either fiaros or (iádog, a n d
some M S S . have this variety in L u k e xvi.
!l, and others KÍwug and i;á(3&g. T h e L X X
in 2 Chron. iv. 5, render t h e Heb. word
by Li£T[>r¡ríis, and the Syriac, in S t . Luke,
has a word corresponding.]
Búrpct)£OC, a, ó, q- ¡Joarpa^pg,
T>)v ¡3ÜÍ¡V rpayfiav ¿X"''' ^
r o
the place of S t . M a t t h e w , see Schwarz.
Comm. Ling. G r . p . 246. and on the word,
Casaubon. E x e r c . Antibaron. xiv. 8. Stol-
berg. E x e r c . Ling. G r . ix. p . 364.]
BcSÉXuyua, arog, rb, from é€MXvypai,
perf. of pSeXvo-aopai.
I. An abomination, an abominable thing.
M a t . xxiv. 15. L u k e xvi. 15. & al. By":i
comparison of M a t , xxiv. 15, 16. Mark xiii.
14, with L u k e xxi. 20, 2 1 , it is plain t h a t
by t h e abomination qf desolation, i. e.
which maketh desoíate, are meant t h e Ro-
mán armies with their ensigns. " A s t h e
Román ensigns, especially t h e eagle, which
was carried a t t h e head of every legión,
were objeets of worship ,• they are, accord-
ing t o the usual style of Scripture, called
an abomination!' Lardner's Collection of
Testimonies, vol. i. p. 4-9, &c. See also
Josephus, A n t . lib. xviii. cap. 3 . § 1. a n d
Trepa rS cap. vi. § 3 . and De Bel. lib. vi. cap. 6. § 1,
and B p . Newton on Proph. vol. ii. p . 2 6 3 ,
m n a r s n

croaking. [See Bochart. Hieroz. p . ii. 4 . &c. Svo. and Randolph's View of our L o r d ' s
v. c. i. p . 6 5 1 . ] — A frog. occ. Rev. xvi. Ministry, p . 2 9 1 , Note. [ T h i s i u t e r p r e t a -
13. I s not our English ímvne frog like- tion is rejected by Schleusner with con-
wise formed from t h e sound of i t s croak- t e m p t as well as another (see Possin,
ing? [Artemidorus ii. 15, says t h a t ¡3¿i- Spicil. E v a n g . § 3.) which refers this e x -
rpay^pi, iívopag yon-rae k a!. /3tiiuoXóx«£ pression t o t h e statue of Caligula, when
É

irpoa-q¡¡aívnüL, and Eichhorn on this pas- placed in t h e temple of Jerusalem. H e

sage of t h e Itcvcl. explains t h e word i n says, t h a t as fiSsXvaaopai signifies to feel
this sense rightly.] disgust a t an object for its filthy smell
B c n - r o X o y É w , w, from plirrog, a síul.lercr, (for, says t h e E t y m . M . 1 92, 29, ¡3oéXvy-
properly one mito can.net speak plain, but pa, i/ovo-o-opía) or other odious quality, so
begins a syllabic several limes before he ¡3üéXvypa is an object of exceeding dis-
can jinish it *, a n d X ó y o c speech. A n d g u s t ; and henee ¡3céXvypa rrjg ipnpúo-twg
petrrog seems a derivative from H e b . 1" means either a great and abominable de-
lo speak foolishly, prate, babhle, eífutire. vastalion, or (from D a n . ix. 2 9 . xii. 11.)
— To use vain repelilions, as the H e a t h e n a devaslaling army which causes such a
did in their prayers. O f these we have devaslalion.~]—In t h e L X X , pSéXvypa
examples, 1 Kings xviii. 26. A c t s xix. 3 4 . most frequently answers t o t h e H e b -
Comp. Homer, II. i. lin. 4 7 2 , 3 . o c c M a t . m j í i h , ypw, or ppW; (which is t h e H e b .
vi. 7. Comp. Ecclus. vii. 14.—Simplicius word in D a n . ix. 2 7 . ) all of which d e -
on Epietet. p . 212, uses this very uncom- note somewhat very nauseous or abomin-
mon verb. See Wetstein on M a t . [ M i -able.
chaelis has a dissertation on Battologia in [ I I . An idol or idolatry, as a thing most
his Syntagm. Comm. P . ii. p . 5 7 . a n d on dAsgusting. 1 K i n g s x i . 5 , 3 3 . Isa. ii. 8 ,
20. xvii. 8. 1 Sam. xv. 2 . D e u t . xxix. 1 7 .
* Salmasius i n P o l e ' s S y n o p s . Exod. viii. 26. 2 K i n g s xxiii. 1 3 . (Comp.
•f- W h e n c e also m a y be derived t h e ñame of that
Wisd. xii. 25.) Jer. xiii. 27- a n d perhaps
E a t t u s , the son o f P o l y m n e s t u s the T h e r a i a n ; w h o ,
Herodotus s a y s , was TCÓSAOS, a stammercr. L i b . i v . Rev. xvii. 4 , 5 . T h e L e x . Cyrell. M S .
cap. 1 5 5 . o f B a t t u s , a s i l l y tmitologícul p o e t m e n - Brem. says, pSéXvypa'wcw '¿ISOJXOV üru ¿Va-
tioned b y Suidas, and to w h o m O v i d i s t h o u g h t t o Xeiro rrapd TuSáiotg. As idolatry was one
alinde i n the answer o f that babbling B a t t u s t o M e r -
of t h e foulest sins, t h e word describing
cury, M c t a m . lib. i i . line 7 0 3 ,
it is not improperly used for any g r e a t sin.
• • Sílb Ui'lS Rev. xxi. 2 7 . Eccl. xv. 14. xvii. 26. J e r .
Montibiis, iiifjuit, cruni, ut crant sub montibus lilis.
xi. 15. 1 Mace. i. 54.]
• • they s h o u l d B&XvtTÓc, ?), ói', from k&MXvKrai, 3 d
B e near those liills, and near those tíills they were.
pers. perf. of fiSeXvao-opaL.—Abominable,
See Suicer, Thesaur. in. TTOJIO} ta. exlrcmcly hateful. [ a n d so Hesychius.]
 B E B 12G B E B

oce. T i t . i. 16. [Prov. xvii. l o . Eccl. xii. 2dly, t h a t , according to S t . Paul's reason-
«•] ing in this passage, t h e H e b . phrase í í i d
BAEA'YSEOMAI. ¡ t ~ d , when referring to covenants, m u s t
I. To turn away through loathing or strictly and properly import the culting
disgtist, [properly * from an ill smell, see off, namely in sacrifice, such a purifier.
Aristoph. P l u t . 7ÜÜ.] ¿o abhor. abomínale, (Comp. Heb. and E n g . Lexicón in m i V.)
a versan, abominan, occ. Rom. ii. 22. Rev. B u t , 3dly, I m u s t observe, t h a t Sia0íiKr¡
x x i . 8 ; where EkSeXvypEvoi, according to (which see) should be rendered, when r e -
"Vitringa, means those who are polluted ferring t o God's transactions with m a n ,
with unnalural lusts, the apnsvÓKoirai and not a covenant, b u t an insiilution or dis-
jiúXaKoi, whose wiekedness is called in pensation. [Schleusner translates this
H e b . íllA'in abominalioH, Lev. xviii. 2 2 ; passage, A testament is ra'ified by lite
and t h e persons gúilty of i t eSSéXvypEvoi death of the testalor, as in our Ver-
by t h e L X X , Ros. ix. 10. [Schleusner sión.]
(referring also to Hosea) explains this Beocuorcpoe, a, ov, Comparat. of B Í -
r a t h e r of idol-worship. Isa. Ixvi. 5. Eccl. €aioj.—More firm, more confirmed. occ.
xx. 8. (In xi. 2. i t r a t h e r implies con- 2 P e t , i. 19, Kai '¿xppEV ¡j&aiórEpov rov
tempt.) Lev. xviii. 30. Prov. viii. 7 . ] •¡rpoepíiTiicov Xáyov, And we (aposlles )
[ I I . To declare a thing deleitable. Rom. have the prophelic word (qf the Oíd
ii. 22. T h a t this is t h e sense in this pas- Testament, comp. ver. 20, 21.) inore con-
sage appears from t h e words ó Xéywy p¡) firmed, i. e. in consequence of what we
poix vEiv.
£
T h e active is used in somewhat saw and heard on t h e M o u n t . " H e does
a similar way iu Exod. v. 2 1 . ÉpSsXv^arE not oppose," says Wetstein, " t h e p r o -
TXfV éapi)v í/püiv, ye made our smell o/Fen- phetic word to fables, or to t h e t r a n s -
sive, or made us haled.~¡ figuraron seen by himself. F o r (be-
B t é c u o c , a, ov, from péocia, Ionic, for sides t h a t w h a t we ourselves have seen,
jGeSnca, perf. of f>áw or ¡jaiva to go, and we know more certainly t h a n w h a t we
which in this time mrpoTets firmness, sica- have heard t h a t others have seen,) if
diness.—Firm, sure, sledfast. occ. Rom. P e t e r had intended such an opposition, h e
iv. 16. 2 Cor. i. 6. 2 P e t . i. 10. H e b . ii. % would have written '¿y(ppEv CE or E%ETE.
iii. 6, 14. vi. 1 9 f . ix. 17- T h i s ¡ast verse, B u t t h e prophetic word is more firm now,
a n d t h e immediately preceding one, D o d - after i t has been confirmed by t h e event,
tlridge paraphrases t h u s : " For where a than i t was before t h e event. So t h e Greek
covenant. is,—it necessarily imports the interpreters understood t h e passage, Schol.
death of that by which the covenant is con- -[Cod.] 16. "EXai§£ Trapa QE5 Sói,av, Kai
Jirmed (or, according to Pierce, qf the zXppev ÉK rara ¡ÍE&aiótEpav Teacrav n)v ii-o
pacifier, rS viadEpÉvu, comp. under A « m - rüv 7rpot¡>/'iro)v TTEpt civrS TrpOKarayyEXÍav-
tínpi I I . ) for you know t h a t sacrificial Trpocré~)(pv~EC T¿TOIQ aaéiéioQ ¿Tro TWV wpo-
rites have ever attended t h e most cele- <f>í]TWV éipnpévoic, vi: a'soyíicsETE rije ÉX7riSoc,
brated covenants which God hath made TWV Trpaypcirwv Kara rov iSíov Kaipov rrapa-
with man, so t h a t I may say, a covenant yivopévwv, á Kai r¡p.Épav cró(¡>WE SKCIXECTE, rrj
is confirmed over the dead (" dead sacri- rpÓTcn kppíivaQ. " H e (Christ.) received
fices," M a c k n i g h t ) É T T - Í vEKpcñe ¡3¿€aia, so from God glory, and henee we have all t h e
that it does not avail mhile that by which predictions of t h e prophets concerning h i m
it is confirmed, liveth." H e r e it is evi- more firm—taking heed therefore to w h a t
dent, l s t , T h a t , according to either D o d - h a t h been obscurely spoken by t h e pro-
dridge's or Pearce's interpretation b'taOé- phets, ye will n o t miss your hope, t h e
pEvos is b u t another ñame for t h e H e b . t h i n g s coming to pass in their own time,
rVÜ a purifier, or purificulion sacrifice, which t h i n g s he also judiciously calis day,
which always accompanied t h e solemn dis- continuing t h e figure * . " Comp. Mac-
pensations of God to m a n . See Gen. xv. k n i g h t . — A s to t h e sense here assigned to
J 8. E x o d . xxiv. ñ, 8. M a t . xxvi. 2 8 ; a n d the expression"EXEIN BEBAIO'TEPON,
Bowyer in his Conjectures on t h e T e x t
* H e s y c h i u s Hhh-JacrwQtu nevas-flai ñ» zoiXíav. (which see) cites from Isocrates, THC SE
To vo'id the stomach. TÓIÜTOV iivái pE vopí'Covrac íioc 7esp iipi
•f- I n this passage, aa^akri xai üíBaim m a y refer
either to m (se. Ixiríín) or to ayxvfat. I n the second
case the interpreters refer t o H e s y c h i u s , w h o e x - * C o m p . 1 P e t . i. 1 0 , 1 1 . L u l t e x x i v . 2 5 — 2 7 ,
plains this word b y ticíhvum;, not «hateen by the and see Jortin's Tracts, v o l . i, p . 4 1 2 — 4 1 4 , edit.
lidr ov •naves. 1700.
 127 B E E

BEBAIO'TEPAN rltvrnv "E/3EIN ri\v Siá- A n d in Virgil, Mn. vi. line 2 5 8 ,

vmav; (but I hope) " t h a t those who know P r o c u l ! o p r o c u l ! este profani.
me to be really what I am, will be more Far ! ye profane l O far !
confirmed in this opinión;" and from J o -
sephus, A n t . lib. v. cap. 10. § 4 . lávra So t h a t well-known fragment of O r p h e n s
fliutráfievoc op/coic '¿LTTEW CIVTÜ) TOV irpo<pi]Tr¡v begins,
"IÍXEL-ÍTL pciXXov B E B A I O ' T E P A N "EIXE
TI)V •xooo-e'oidav ríje TÍKVOIV ciKaiXuac,
" W h e n Eli had extorted thesé things by
I ' l l s p e s k t o w h o m 'tis l a w f u l , but these doors
oath from the prophet, he had the expecta-
O.' slmt 'gain.it the profane.
tion of his sous' destruction more fully
co?ijirmed."
Comp. N u m b . v. 1—4. xix. 13, 20. 2
Betawio, w, from (jé€aioc. Chron. xxiii. 19. [ L e v . x. 10. 1 S a m .
I. To conflrm, eslablish, \_siren{>;then.~\ xxi. 45.]
M a r k xvi. 20. 1 Cor. i. 8. Col. Ii. 7. & Be€í)\í5w, <ü, from j3t€r¡Xoe.—To pro-
al. fane, pollute, treat what is consecrated to
I I . To keep, verify, of promises. occ. God as if it were common. occ. M a t . xii,
Rom. xv. 8. Polybius and Aristides use 5. A c t s xxiv. 6. Comp. N e h . xiii. 18-
the. same phrase, pe^atücraL -de kwayye- Ezek. xxii. 26. in t h e L X X . [ T h e verb
Xiác, or T))V íi¡ayytXíav. See Raphelius is used of h u m a n beings in t h e L X X .
and Wetstein. [Lysias, p . 3 2 5 . ]
T h u s in Lev. xx. 2 9 . xxi. 9, 17. (comp.
B e é c u W t c , io£, A t t . EOIS, i,, from /3e- v. 14. J u d i t h ix. 2. Eccl. xiii. 14. and
€aww. Confrmation, corroboratioh. occ. Fessel. Advers. SS. lib. ii. c. 18. p . 146.)
Phil. i. 7. H e b . vi. 16. [Wisd. y. 20. it refers to the violation and prostitution
T h e r e is difficulty in Lev. xxv. 23.]
of women. I n L a m . ii. 2 . i t is simply t o
BE'SIJXOC, a, ó, ?/.—Profane, void of re- dishonour.]
ligión or pieiy. Applied both to persons. BEEAZEBO'YA. H e b . — B e e h e h d , as
occ. 1 T i m . i. 9. H e b . xii. 1 6 ; and to all t h e Greek M S S . constantly read it
things. occ. 1 T i m . iv. 7. vi. 20. 2 T i m .
with t h e final A, or as t h e V u l g . and m o -
ii. 16.—Bé€nXoe may be derived either
dera versions give it, Beelzebub, H e b .
from the * H e b . b a l in confusión, from bl
2 i a f b l > 2 from the Lord, and nn?
io confound, " because profane persons
gushing out. Baalzebub is mentioned 2 K.
confound t h e differences of t h i n g s , " or
i. 2 , 3, 6, 16, as t h e Aleim or God of t h e
from the particle pe, denoting privation
Philistines of E k r o n . H e appcars by t h a t
or separaiion (perhaps from the H e b . K l
to go, go away), and ftr¡Xoe t a threshold history to have been one of their medical
or pavement, particularly of a temple, so i d o l s ; and as b]!2 denotes the sun, so t h e
t h a t ¡ié€yXoe will properl? denote one who attribute l i a seems to import his power
either is or ought to be debarred from the in causing water to gush out of t h e e a r t h ,
threshold or entrance of a temple, as t h e ; and in promoting t h e fuidity and due dis-
L a t i n profanus likewise is strictly one who charge of the juices and blood in vege-
stands procul á or pro fano, at a distance tables, animáis, and men, and t h e r e b y con-
from or before the temple or consecrated t i n u i n g or restoring their health and vi-
inclosure. Both the Greek and L a t i n gour.—And as fies, from t h e m a n n e r of
words correspond to those solemn pro- their issuing from their boles, were no
clamatious which sometimes preceded their improper emblems oífuids gushingforth,
sacred rites : T h u s in Callimachus, H y m n . henee the epithet l i n t malíes it probable
in Apoll. line 2, t h a t íifly * was p a r t of the imiigery of t h e
Baal a t E k r o n , or t h a t a fly accompanied
• E:T'IF, EXCIJ, 05-í; ¿XÍTPO;. the bull or other imáge, as we see in m a n y
instances produced by Montfaucon; espe-
* See Gale's C'ourt of the Gentiles, vol. i. book i. cially since t h e L X X translators, who
p. 8 2 . certainly kuew m u c h better, t h a n we a t
•\- W h i c h seems a derivative from the H e b . bna
this distance of time can pretend to do,
to agítate, distiirb, because continually disturbad b y
the feet of those w h o g o in and out. S o the E n g l i s h * [ I t w o u l d s e e m rather that the idol of the E c r o n -
threshold from the S a x o n <5percjjalt) is plainly ites ( 2 K i n g s i. 2 . ) w a s worshipped as the driver
compounded of S r e r e a n to smite, strikc, thresh, a w a y of flies w i t h w h i c h their country was infested,
and (jal !) -eood; because the threshold is continually
1

l i k e the J ú p i t e r ¿INMUTO; or ^ ¿ n y o o ; o f the G r c e k s .

stnick and worn b y the feet of those w h o g o in and See S e l d e n de D i i s S y r i s , ii. c. °G. P o s s i n . S p i c .
out. See H e b . and E n g . L e x . in i r a I I . Evang. § 13. Plin. Nat. H . x. 2 8 . ]
 GEE
w h a t were tlie emblematic gods of tlie
H e a t h e n , have constantly rendered b)>2
rrnj by B A A A MY7AN," Betal Ihcfly*.
A n d however strange the worship of such
a deity may appear to u s , yet a most r e -
marcable instance of a similar idolatry is
said to be practised among the H o t t e n t o t s
even to our days. For (if Kolben is to be
believed) this people " adores, as a benign
deity, a certain insect, peculiar, it is said,
ío t h e H o t t e n t o t countries. T h i s animal
is of the dimensión of a child's little fm-
g e r ; the back is green, and t h e belly
spcckled with white and red. I t is pro-
vided with two wings, and on its head
with f two liorns. To this little winged
deity, wlienever they set eyes on it, they
render the kighesl tokens of veneration;
and, if it honours a Kraal (a village) with
a visit, the inhabitants assemble about it
in transports of dcvoiion, as if t h e LORD
OF Tii!3 UNIVERSE was come among them.
T h e y sing and dance round it while it
stays, troop after troop, throwing to it
t h e powder of Bachu, with which they
cover at t h e same time t h e whole área of
t h e Kraal, t h e tops of their cottages, and
every t h i n g without doors. T h e y like-
wisc kill two fat sheep as a thank-qffer-
ing for this h i g a honour. I t is impossible
to drive out of a H o t t e n t o t ' s head, t h a t
t h e arrival of this insect ío a Kraal brings
J'avour and prosperily to t h e inhabit-
a n t s +."—Baal-zebub's being represented
«líder the form of a Jly, m i g h t be one
reason w h y the J e w s in our Saviour's time
* A n d in t h i s t h e y are followed b y J o s c p h u s ,
•who, A n t . l i b . i x . c a p . 2 . § 1, says that A h a z i a h
sent 7ích$ TOV 'AxKrsfaiy B R O ' N MT'ÍAN"; TÍVTO yap ?ív paejne rí ETIV, ¿K av TIQ y w o í ? ; . ]
ojojuí» <TÜ ®iü to the God-Fly (for that was the deity's
ñ a m e ) o f E k r o n . " A n d an oíd writer, cited b y
S u i d a s under the word 'ahíx;, says concerning
A h a z i a h , 'üy;niTtt.TO M T ~ ¡ A < TOV SV A x x á c t u ' E i c W c u ,
h e applied to the Fhj the Idol of those of E k r o n . " hasien.—[This
N o t to mention the correspondent testimonies of vh'úi and L a t i n telum, implies any weapon
N a n a n z e n , T h e o d o r e t , P h i í a s t r i u s , and P r o c o p i u s ,
w h i c h are cited by B o c h a r t , vol. iii. p . 4 0 9 .
•f See H e b . and E n g . L e x . under ijf I V . and m p ,
and c o m p . below under Rspaj.
í T h e above account is transcribed from the
Complete System of Geography, vol. ii. p . 4 9 2 , the
authors of which h a v e very faithfully extracted it
from K o l b e n ' s Present State of the C a p e of G c o d
H o p e , in the first v o l u m e of w h i c h work, p . 9 9 , &c.
o f the E n g l i s h edit. the reader m a y b e entertained
w i t h a full detail of the worship of ( I h a d ahnost
s a i d ) B a a l - z e b u b a m o n g the H o t t e n t o t s . B u t find-
i n g that the authenticity of K o l b e n ' s account of this
people h a s been of late years severely arraigned b y
succeeding travellers, I m u s t leave it to the reader
h i m s e l f to determine w h a t degree of credit i s d u c to
him.
128 B E A
had changed t h e ñame into Beel-zebul,
i. e. *biat í?i»a, the Lord of dung, which
I need not stay to prove these winged
deiíies show a particular regard to. B u t
the J e w s then used this ñame for t h e
Brinco of the Devils, Mat. xii. 24-. L u k e
xi. 1 5 ; and our L o r d himself applies it,
M a t . xii. 26, 2 7 . L u k e xi. 18, 19, as sy-
nonymous with Satán, who, according to .
St. P a u l , E p h . ii. 2, is the Prince qf the
Power qf the Air, and therefore m i g h t
properly be called Beel-zebub, as being
the Lord of this fluid.- A n d he m i g h t also
be denominaíed Beel-zebul from his de-
lighting in all abominalion and unclean-
ness. (Comp. under ' A r á f l a p r o e . IV.) occ.
Mat. x. 2 5 . xii. 24, 27. M a r k iii. 22.
L u k e xi. 15, 18, 19.
B E A I A A , H e b . bvbz.—Belial. I t oc-
curs once, 2 Cor. vi. 15, according to
most of t h e printed editions, b u t I know
not t h a t any Greek M S . has this reading.
Seven of those cited by Wetstein, two of
which ancient, have fieXíav, and two ¡3E-
Xi'aS, but the greater number have ¡3e\iap;
and this last seems t h e t r u e reading, p
being substituted for the Heb. b in íwí>n,
because the termination X is unknown to
the Greek language. T h e H e b . bybi
may most próbably be derived from '¡?a
not, and b})' prqfit, and so signify worth-
less, wicked; and henee ¡3i\lap, in 2 Cor.
vi. 15, being opposed to Christ, seems to
denote ó •KÚvypog the wicked one, the Dcvil,
or Satán.
r_Be\óvr¡, a needlc. T h i s word is the
reading of some M S S , instead of pafíSog
in L u k e xviii. 2 5 . Phrynichus (p. 32.)
says ¡3z\óvr] Kal (3EXov¿Trü)\ig apeala y SE
B E A 0 3 , eoc, es, rb, either from páWui
(anciently fiXéoi) to casi, or r a t h e r imme-
diately from t h e H e b . bnl to agríale,
word, like the Hebrew
* "?3í signifies dung, not o n l y in the R a b b i n i c a l
writings, b u t in the Chaldee T a r g u m s , and in the
Syriac l a n g u a g e (see Castell's L e x i c . H e p t a g l o t . )
and there is n o reason to doubt b u t it was applied
in the same sense b y the J e w s , w i t h w h o m our Lord
conversed. A n d a m o n g the J e w s , says L i g h t f o o t ,
H o r . H e b . M a t . x i i . 2 4 , it was ahnost reckoned a
d u t y of religión to reproach idols and idolatry, and
cali t h e m b y eontemptuous ñ a m e s , o f which V o i
w a s a c o m m o n and general one, as h e proves from
a p a s s a g e in the T h a l m u d i c a l T r a c t Beracoth.
S y m m a c h u s , in like manner as the E v a n g c l i s t s , uses
H,ítk^iñ¡íK for 3131 "jm, 2 K . i. 2 . S e e more in
W e t s t e i n ' s Var. L e c t . on M a t . x . 2 0 . [Buxtorf.
Lex. Talmud, p. 333,]
 BHG
which is diseharged either from t h e hand,
a boiv, or other i n s t r u m e n t . T h e L e x i -
cographers say ¡3é\oc, rráv ro flaXXópevov.
I t is used for a thunderbolt in 2 Sam. xxii.
15. and see Ps. xvii. 6. cxliii. 7, and so in
a Greek Epig. apud Laert. Procem. p . 4 . ]
—A dart, arrow. In t h e N . T . it is only
used figuratively for Satanical lempla-
tions, or severe persecutions. occ. E p h . vi.
16, where t h e expression r a (3é\i] —ra TTE-
TTvpuipéi'a, the fiery or Jired darts, seems
an allusion to those javelins or arrows
which were sometimes used by t h e an-
cients in sieges and battles. T h u s A r -
rian, De E x p e d . Alex. lib. ii., mentions
txvptyopa (3é\y,Jirc-bearing darts, Appian,
D e Bel. Mithrid., irvpfopa ro'íevpara, and
Thucydides, lib. ii. 75, Tnipajopoi oi^oí,
Jire-bearing arrows*. Livy, lib. xxi. cap.
8, calis a weapon of t h i s kind a Falarica,
which he describes as ajavelin surrounded
at t h e u p p e r p a r t with combustible m a t -
ter, which when set on Jire, t h e weapon
was darted against the enemy. I shall
only add further, t h a t t h e learned Elsner
has produced the very phrase of St. Paul
from Apollodorus, who says, Biblioth. lib.
ii. [ c . 4. § 2 . ] , t h a t Hercules plagued the
Lernéan H y d r a B E ' A E S I B E n Y P f í M E ' -
N 0 I 2 . See Raphelius, Elsner, Wolfius,
W e t s t e i n , and Kypke.
~BE\TÍUJV, OVOQ, b, r), ical ro—ov. An ir-
r e g u l a r comparative, according to the
grammarians, of áyaOoc good, b u t really
derived from ¡3¿\opat to be willing, de-
sirous; or, according to D a m m . Lexic.
Graic. from ¡3¿\OQ a dart, q. d. " quod
magis scopum a t t i n g i t , what better hits
the mark."—Better. Whence BéXrwv,
neut. used adverbially, Well enough, very
well. occ. 2 T i m . i. 18. So KáWtov, Very
well. Acts x x v . 10.
B H 9 E 2 A A . Heb.—Bethesda, Heb.
m e n n o , the house of merey. So t h e
Syriac versión NIDH n u . T h e ñame of a
pool, or r a t h e r bath, of water, having five I
porticoes; and so called from t h e mira-
culous cures t h e r e mcrc'fully vouchsafed
by God to persons labouring u n d e r t h e
most desperate diseases. occ. J o h n v. 2 ,
where see Wolfius f. T h e y still show you
" t h e pool of Bethesda contiguous on one
side to St. Stephen's gate, on the other to
* [ S e e also Z o s i m . iii. 2b. C a s a u b . a d / E n e a :
Táctica, p . 1 0 3 . and V e g e t . de R e M i l i t . i v . c. sea-green.
18.]
t [ S o m e M S S . r e a d B»Wi'8oc,o>i w h i c h s e e W e s s e l . H i s t . lib. xxxvii. cap. 5, "
ad A n t o n i n . Itin. p . 5 8 9 . ] .
129 B II P
t h e área of t h e temple." Maundrell's
J o u r n e y , April 9. Comp. H a s s e l q u i s t ' s
Voyages, &c. p . 134.
B H ' M A , aros, rb.
I. Ajudgment-seat, a tribunal, a ihrone,
a raised, or elevated seat for a j u d g e Or
king. M a t . xxvii. 19. J o h n x i x . 13. A c t s
xii. 2 1 . xxv. 6, 17- T h u s J o s e p h u s , D e
Bel. lib. ii. cap. 9. § 3 . Ty Sé eble ¿ Bt'-
Xafos I Í A 0 I ' 2 A 2 ' E n r B I - r M A T 0 2 — a n d
lib. iii. cap. 9. § 10. 'Oveo-Trao-íavoe—-
KAGI'ZEI ' E n r TO"Y B H ' M A T 0 2 . So
A n t . lib. xx. cap. 5. § 2. Comp. Rom.
xiv. 10. 2 Cor. v. 10. I n t h i s sense t h e
word may be derived e i t h e r from fiaívu) or
firjpi to ascend. [ W e m a y observe, t h a t in
t h e provinces, j u s t i c e was administered in
t h e open air, t h e presiding officer s i t t i n g
on a t r i b u n a l on a raised g r o u n d covered
with marble planks. I n A c t s xxv. 10,
t h e phrase m a y signify either the tribunal
of Ccesar, or, according to some, the ma-
gistrate appointed by Cassar. T h e N . T .
use of t h e word is found in G r e e k authors ;
as Dionys. H a l i c . xii. c. 30. See Irmisch.
on Herodian. T . i. p . 142. I n A c t s xii. 2 1 .
Krebsius ( O b s . F l a v . p . 2 1 6 . ) says, we a r e
to u n d e r s t a n d a sort of t h r o n e erected b y
H e r o d in t h e t h e a t r e to see t h e games a n d
h a r a n g u e t h e people from. H e n e e , a m o n g
the Greeks, ¡3¡ípa is sometimes simply a n
orator's t r i b u n e . X e n . M e m . iii. 6. 1.
iEsch. Socr. D i a l . iii. 13. Comp. N e h e m .
viii. 4, where it signifies a place to which
you m o u n t by a step. See W i s d . xiv. 11.
2 Mac. xiii. 2 6 . ]
I I . Brjpa TToSbe, A space or room to set
thefoot on, q. d. a fooi's tread. occ. A c t s
vii. 5. [ I n this simple sense i t is to be
found ¡u Ecclesiasticus x i x . 26, and in
A q u i l a and Synim. 1 Sam. x x . 5 . ] In
this sense it is a derivative from ¡3éSr¡pai,
I s t perf. pass. of ¡3aívw, [3tix>, or f3ijpi, to
step, tread.—In t h e L X X , D e u t . ii. 5,
(3i)pa ITOSOQ answers to t h e Lleb. *]T1D bf\
ep, a foot's tread, E n g . t r a n s . a foot-
breadth.
B H ' P Y A A 0 2 , e, ó, or i¡. It may be
very n a t u r a l l y derived from H e b . nn,
puré, bright, and bbr\ lo shine; whence,
by t h e way, may also be deduced t h e
F r e n c h briller, t o shine, a n d theuce t h e
E n g l i s h brilliant, brilliancy.—A beryl.
A kind of precious stone of ugreen colour,
and t h e best sort of which are of a fine
T h e y are found in India, b u t
rarely any where else. So P l i n y , N a t .
Probatissimi
sunt ex üs qui viriditatem p u r i maris imi-
 B I A 130
tantur. In I n d i a originem habentes,
raro alibi reperti." occ. Rev. x x i . 2 0 ,
where see W e t s t e i n . [ O n t h e beryl, see
Solin. p . 5 6 7 , 1 105. E p i p h a n . de G e m m .
c. x i . p . 109. M . H i l l e r . de X I I . G e m m .
in P e c t . P o n t . p. 3 5 . See Exod. xxviii.
2 0 . xxxix. 1 1 , where i t answers to t h e
H e b . Dnttf: on which see B r a u n . de Vestit.
Sacerd. H e b r . lib. ii. c. 1 8 . ]
B I ' A , a c , f¡.—Forcé, violence. occ. Acts
xxi. 3 5 . xxiv. 7. xxvii. 4 1 . v. 2 6 , where
observe t h a t Polybius, [ p . 782.] cited by
W e t s t e i n , uses t h e same phrase M E T A 1
B I ' A S . [ T h e passage m a y be u n d e r -
stood as implying any i n s t r u m e n t s of
violence, as in Symmachus's versión of
Isaiah ix. 5. Bíat is used for vires, or
facúltales, poner s, in W i s d . vii. 2 0 . See
E x o d . xiv. 2 5 . ]
Biáftü, from B í a . — T o forcé, urge.
Henee B i á f ojuai, mid. To forcé oneself to
press. occ. L u k e xvi. 16.—Biá£opai, pass.
To be forcea, or invaded by forcé, occ.
M a t . x i . 12. See W e t s t e i n on both t e x t s .
[ T h e r e can be little doubt t h a t t h e mean-
i n g is t h e s a m e i n t h e two passages. Schleus-
ner explains t h e m t h u s : Men burn with
the most ardent desire to receive the Chris-
tian doctrine, or to become Christians.
So vElian. V . H . xiii. 3 2 . 'ETTI TT¡V áp£rr)v
r¡Kuv fiíáZopai, and X e n . Cyrop. iii. 3 , 6 9 .
fíiáZecrdaí éc rr¡v apxvv. See Krebs. O b s .
P l a v . p . 3 0 . Schgef. ad Bos Ellips. p . 612.
Appian Bell. S y r . p . 178. a u d Belk Civil,
p . 6 9 1 . Schwarz ( M o n u m . I n g e n . i. p .
171- a n d iii. p p . 3 9 a n d 5 9 . ) quotes Plato
(Sophist. p . 158. 160. a n d de L e g . viii. p .
647-) to show t h a t /3iáfco is used of teach-
ers who propose a t h i n g so clearly as t o
forcé t h e i r hearers t o receive i t ; a n d
henee he explains this passage t h u s , " T h e
reasons of Christianity are so clearly set
forth, t h a t t h e y who use t h a t sort of forcé
alluded to, a n d imítate i t , become t r u l y
p a r t a k e r s of divine grace."]
Bíaioc, a i a , aiov, from fila.— Violent,
vehement. occ. A c t s ii. 2 , where W e t -
stein cites from Philo, B I ' A I A I1NEY'-
M A T A , a n d from A r r i a n , Ü N E Y ' M A
B I ' A I O N . [ ( E x p e d . Alex. ii. 63.) Exod.
xiv. 2 1 . Isaiah lix. 19.]
Eigp"' Bía?))c;, e, ó,fromjSiáf(u.— Onewho
invades, orforcibly crowds or presses. occ.
M a t . x i . 12, where E n g . M a r g . they that
thrust men. See B p . P e a r c e . [ T h e word
oceurs in Philo de A g r i c u l t . p . 3 1 4 . ed.
M a n g . vol. iii. p . 4 2 . ed. Pñefer. in t h e
sense of violent, a n d is so explained in
glossaries. Biárne oceurs in P i n d a r . Nem.
B I B
ix. 130. In M a t . xi. 12. its sense dependa
of course on t h a t of fiíá^opai. T h e y who
i n t e r p r e t t h e first word of violence offered
to Christianity, m u s t construe this word
as the violent, or oppressors. B u t Schleus-
ner's sense seems t h e b e s t ; and Chryso-
Stom says, bi juera Lnru}>r\Q 7rpo<xióVr££,]
Biéáfw, from ¡3ciw, to go or come, with
t h e reduplication ¡3i. Comp. AISCHTKIO.—
To cátese or make lo come or go. T h i s V.
oceurs not uncompounded in t h e N . T .
1^^° ~BitXapíi)iov, s, ro, a diminutive
of pítXoQ. A little book. occ. Rev. x. 2 , 8,
9, 10. [See Montfauc. Palasog. p . 25 a n d
78.]
T3i€\íov, 8, ro, from ¡SÍ€KOQ.
I . A book, a roll or volume, as of t h e
prophet Isaiah, of S t . J o h n ' s Gospel, of
t h e Law. See L u k e iv. 17, 2 0 . J o h n x x .
3 0 . G a l . iii. 10. Comp. 'Avairrvcro-oi; and
on 2 T i m . iv. 13, see T&épfipava I I . , a n d
Macknight. [Comp. H e b . x. 7- a n d P s .
xl. 8 . ] — B L € \ Í O V is by no means neees-
sarily a diminutive; for t h o u g h iov be
frequently a diminutive termination, y e t
t h e r e a r e very m a n y G r e e k nouns in wv,
which differ n o t a t all in sense from 'the
more simple nouns whence t h e y are d e -
rived : t h u s OLKÍOV from OIKOQ, opietov from
bpicoe, <j>ópriov from (póproe, Briptov from
• & j j p , have a diminutive termination i n -
deed, b u t no such signification; %piov,
for instance, is not a little mild beast, b u t
simply a wild beast, as §ijp, whence H o -
m e r h a s péya Sriptov, Odyss. x. lines 1 7 1 ,
180,
ftxKa yap M E T A ©H'PION í s t .
So ¡iitXlov is n o t necessarily a little book,
b u t simply a book, according to t h a t of
Callimachus, M E T A B I B A I ' O N péya KCL-
KOV, A great book is a g r e a t evil. See
D u p o r t , in T h e o p h r a s t . E t h i c . C h a r . p .
3 8 5 , 3 8 6 . ed. N e e d h a m .
I I . A scroll, a bilí or billet, as of d i -
vorcement, which, if we m a y believe t h e
T h a l m u d i s t s , was always to consist of
twelve lines, neither more ñor less. L i g h t -
foot gives u s t h e form of such an i n s t r u -
m e n t , H o r . H e b . &c. on M a t , v. 3 1 . occ.
M a t . xix. 7 . M a r k x. 4. Comp. D e u t . xxiv.
1. J e r . iii. 8, where t h e L X X apply t h e
word in t h e same sense for t h e H e b . 1E3D. So
H e r o d o t u s uses fii€\íov for a letter of no
g r e a t l e n g t h . L i b . i. cap. 124, 125. comp.
lib. vi. cap. 4 . [_A letter, 2 Sam. xi. 14.
2 K i n g s xix. 14. x x . 12. B a r u c h , i. 1 4 ; an
edict, I Mace. i. 4 6 . O n t h e phrase
fliflXíov íw>7c ( R e v . xvii. 8. x x i . 27-) it is
 B I B 131 B A A

sufficient to refer to Rev. xx. 12. and to logue of those who were to be considered
t h e common notion in Seripture, t h a t God as heirs qf the kingdom qf Heaven, in con-
has a book in which are written all h u m a n sequence of their Christian profession, u n -
actions and t h o u g h t s . Glassius has much til by apostasy from it, thev throw t h e m -
on this point in his Philol. Sacr. p . 9 8 1 . ed. selves out of t h a t society to which t h e y
D a t h . ; and see Buxtorf. de Synag. V e t , v. before belonged." Comp. P h i l . iv. 3 ,
c. 2 5 . and Joh. a L e u t . Theol. J u d . c. 20. where see Macknight. Vitringa rernarks,
Suidas voce Zeus, and Lucian. Philop. p . t h a t t h e expression in Rev. iii. 5, alludes
2 5 1 . vol. ix. ed. Bipont. T h e /3íflXos ¿¡uiije to t h e Genealogical Tables of t h e Jewish
of t h e O . T . seems to imply only the ca- priests (see E z r a ii. 62. N e h . vii. 64.), as
talogue of t h e living. Exod. xxxii. 3 2 , 3 3 . t h e white raiment mentioned in t h e same
N u m b . xi. 15.] verse does to t h e priestly dress.
BÍ'ÉAOÍ;. «, ó, from /3ú€\oc the Egyptian Btoe, s, ó, from fita, strength, forcé.
papyrus. " Of the many travellers into I . Natural Ufe. L u k e viii. 14. 1 T i m .
E g y p t , says the Ahbé Winckelman, A l - ii. 2. 1 P e t . iv. 3 . comp. 1 J o h n ii. 16.
pinus is t h e only one who has given us an I I . Means of supporting Ufe, living,
exact description of this plant. I t grows substance, goods. Mark xii. 44. L u k e viii.
on t h e banks of the Nile, and in marshy 4 3 . xv. 12, & al. comp. 1 J o h n iii. 17.
grounds. T h e stalk, according to Alpinus, See Raphelius, Elsner, and W e t s t e i n on
rises to the height of six or seven cubits, Mark xii. 44, who show t h a t ¡3íog is fre-
besides about two under water. T h i s stalk quently used in this sense by t h e best
is t r i a n g u l a r . — T h i s reed, commonly call- Greek writers. [ E u r . Phoen. 4 1 5 . S u p p .
ed t h e Egyptian reed, was of t h e greatest 8 6 3 . Herod. ii. 1 2 1 . Aristoph. P l u t , 7 5 1 .
use to the i n h a b i t a n t s . — B u t the most See for more, Perizon. on iElian. V. H .
useful p a r t of this plant was its delicate xiv. 32. I t oceurs in t h e same sense in
rind or bark, which they used to write the L X X also. Solomon's Song, viii. 7-
upon.—The leaves of t h e papyrus were 2 Mace. xiv. 2 5 . P r o v . x x x i . 14. In W i s d .
drawn from t h e stalk, which may be easily x. 8. Bretschneider translates r¿> ¡3úo b y
séparated into thin layers.—This is con-
viventibus, to the living, i. e. to mankind.
íirmed by t h e inspection of t h e M S S . of
Schleusner translates it, by their Ufe or
Herculaneum. T h e y are composed of
way of living, as in Wisd. xiv. 2 1 . Ecclus.
leaves four fingers in breadth, which, to
xix. 8 . ]
t h e best of m y j u d g m e n t , shows the cir-
Bióoi, LO, from ¡3íog.— Tolive. occ. [Prov.
cumfereuce of the plant." T h u s t h e Abbé,
vii. 2. Wisd. xii. 23.] 1 Pet. iv. 2.
in his Critical Account of H e r c u l a n e u m ,
p . 8 2 — 8 6 , where see more. Híiocrig, WQ, A t t . ewg, h, from ¡iióia.—•
Life, manner of Ufe or living. occ. Acts
I. A s a N . the Egyptian papyrus ; in xxvi. 4 .
which sense it is used by Herodotus, lib. B i w r i K o e , >), bv, from (Iwu.—Of or be-
v. cap. 58. A n d t h u s t h e adjective ¡3í€- longing to [the support of] natural Ufe.
Xtvoe is applied for t h e Pleb. NEJ by t h e occ. L u k e xxi. 34. I Cor. vi. 3 , 4. [ T h e
L X X , Isa. xviii. 2. A n d because a n - (liojTucd KpiTripta are like the controversia;
ciently books were frequently written on privatm of the L a t i n s , i. e. strifes about
t h e vind of this plant, henee things qf this world, food, dress, &c. &c.
I I . A written volume, a book. M a r k xii. See P l u t a r c h . T . vi. O p p . p . 5 5 7 . viii. p .
26. L u k e iii. 4. & al. And t h o u g h these 704. (ed. Reisk.) E t y m . M . 604, 18.
Jewish books were generally w r i t t e n on Vales, ad Euseb. H . E. vi. 3 . p . 100. W e s s .
prepared ski.ns or parchment, y e t they ad D . Sicnl. Excerpt. T . ii. p . 611.]
were by the writers of the N . T . called HXa€epiig, d, ov, from tSXdSov, 2 aor.
pí§\oi; j u s t as Herodotus informs us, in of f3\áir~w.—Hurtful. occ. 1 T i m . vi. 9.
the passage above referred to, t h a t the [ P r o v . x. 2 6 . ]
lonians called the ci<j>6épag or skins, on Vikátv-oi. I t may be derived from the
which they wrote, iv rr-kvu BI'BAQN in obsol. /3\á€w, which in H o m e r signifies
a scarcity of papyrus, BI'BAOYS. to impede, hinder, and which E u s t a t h i u s
I I I . A catalogue, an. account. M a t . i. 1. accordingly explains by ipiroo'í'Ctiv. See
comp. TévecriQ. I t seems a good remarle inter al. II. xix. lines 8 2 , 166. xxii. line
of Doddridge, on Rev. iii. 5, " t h a t the 15. xxiii. lines 3 8 7 , 5 7 1 , 774. A n d ftXá€u-
Book qf Life does not siguify t h e cala- may be derived from obsol. Xíj&a) or XaSa
logue of those whom God lias absolulcly lo take hold on, prefixing ¡3. See D a m m i
purposed to s a v e ; but rather the cata- Lexicón, col. 1422.
K 2
 B A A 132 B A E

I. To impede, hinder; b u t not t h u s phemy. M a t . xii. 3 1 . xxvi. 65. Mark ii. 7.

used in the N. T . J o h n ' x . 3 3 . & al. [ D a n . iii. 2 9 . 1 Mace,
I I . To hurí or harm. occ. M a r k xvi. ii. 5 . ]
18. L u k e iv. 3 5 . [with t h e acc. J o b xii. BXámpr¡poe, u, b, r¡, ¡cal ró—ov, from t h e
7. W i s d . x. 8.] same as fiXacrtprifiéiú, which see.
B X a T á v u or /3XUT£W. I . Speaking evil, railing. occ. 2 P e t . ii.
I . Intransitively, To shoot, spring, 1.1. comp. 1 T i m . i. 1 3 . 2 T i m . iii. 2 .
sprout, as a p l a n t or seed. occ. M a t . xiii. [Herodian. vii. 8, 27.]
2 6 . M a r k iv. 27- H e b . ix. 4. [ S o J u d g . I I . Blasphemous, a blasphemer. occ.
xvi. 2 3 . 2 Sam. xxiii. 5. Xen. ( E c . xix. 10.] A c t s vi. 1 1 , 13.
I I . Transitively, To spring, cause to IlgH" BXéppa, aroe, rb, from flé€XEfipai
shoot, as t h e earth. occ. J a m . v. 18. T h e perf. pass. of fiXéirio.—Look, castqf the coun-
word is used in this latter sense by t h e tenance. In this sense W e t s t e i n shows t h a t
L X X , Gen. i. 1 1 , answering to t h e H e b . it is frequently used in t h e Greek writers ;
Nltfl to bud or cause to bud. [ N u m b . b u t I cannot find t h a t it ever signifies t h e
xvii. 8.] act qfseeing. occ. 2 P e t . ii. 8, where W e t -
BXao-07)/itfe), ¿i, either from ¡¡Xárcríiv stein says " BXÉppari and &KÓ¡I are those
rijv <¡>ypyv, hurting (or as we say, blast- of t h e Sodomites; Lot, beholding their
ing) the reputation or credit; or from lascivious looks, and hearing t h e report of
fláXXuv rale (prifiaie, smiting with reports their lewdness, was vexed with t h e i r u n -
or words. T h i s l a t t e r derivation is given lawful deeds.—BXéppa are not t h e eyes
by E u s t a t h i u s , and preferred to the for- which see, b u t which are seen, and which
mer by t h e learned D u p o r t on Theophrast. betray t h e affections of t h e mind." Comp.
E t h i c . Charact. cap. vi. [See Schwarz. Isa. iii. 9. A n d indeed fiXéppa, as being
Comm. L i n g . G r . p . 234.] immediately derived from t h e perfect pas-
I. To hurt or wound a person's reputa- sive, should likewise have a passive signi-
tion by evil reports, to speak ill qf, to rail, fication. [Schleusner explains t h e pass-
revile, calumníate. [Mat. xxvii. 3 9 . L u k e age by sight and hearing, i. e. wherever
xxiii. 39. A c t s xviii. 6.] T i t . iii. 2, where he directed his eyes and ears. T h e word
see W e t s t e i n & al. P a s s . (¡Xartf-rifití pai, to occurs, iElian. V . H . vi. 14. viii. 12. xiv.
be reviled. Rom. [ i i . 24..] iii. 8. 1 Cor. iv. 22. Herodian. iv. 5, 17.]
13. x. 3 0 . [Perhaps this is t h e sense also BAE'IKi.
in 1 T i m . i. 20. a n d in Acts xxvi. 1 1 . I . To see, behold. M a t . xi. 4 . M a r k v.
where i t may well be explained to renounce 3 1 . viii. 2 3 . & al. freq. comp. M a t . vi. 6,
Christ, as they who renounced Christian- 18. O n M a t . xviii. 10. comp. 2 K i n g s
i t y were compelled to curse and revile xxv. 19. E s t h . i. 14, and see Stanhope on
t h e i r master's ñame. See Euseb. H . E . t h e Epistles and Gospels, vol. iv. p . 4 9 5 .
iv. 15. yi. 4 1 . Suicer. i. p . 698. See 2 [ H e n e e t h e participle of fiXÉirerrOai some-
K i n g s xix. 4, 6, 22.] times signifies things present (as being
I I . To speak with impious irreverence seen, oculis subjecta) as in Rom. viii. 2 4 .
concerning God himself, ov what stands éXnle fiXeTTopévr), for fiXerropivcav m a y sig-
in some peculiar reíation to him, to blas- nify hope qf present good. 2 Cor. iv. 18.
pheme. See M a t . ix. 3 . xxvi. 2 5 . xxvii. I n H e b . x i . 1. e (iXeirópeva future things.
3 9 . M a r k iii. 2 9 . L u k e xxii. 6 5 . [John x. Ibid. ver. 7 ; in ver. 3 , t h e visible world
36.] A c t s xiii. 4 5 . T i t . ii. 5 . A n d on t h i s is intended.]
V . and its conjugates consult Campbell's I I . To look, look at, behold attenlively.
P r e l i m i n a r y Dissertations t o t h e Gospels, M a t . v. 2 8 . J o h n xiii. 2 2 . A c t s iii. 4 .
p . 394, & c — I n M a r k iii. 2 9 . L u k e xii. [ I n the place of St. Matthew, to look lasci-
10, ít is construed with ÍIQ. So Plato, D e viously is meant, which is often expressed
R e p u b . I I - ' E I S G E O T S BAA20HIM- by ¿Tro(j¡6aXpia.v, and EwifiXérreiv by the
E T N . See Wetstein. L X X . G e n . x x x i x . 7. in t h e Oxford M S .
BXaaipr)pía, ae, from f}\áo-(j>r¡poe. See Elsner on t h e passage. L u k e vii. 4 4 .
I . Wounding another's reputation by Soph. T r a c h . 406. T h e simple meaning,
evil reports, evil speaking, calumny, rail- To look attenlively, is expressed by t h e
ing. E p h . iv. 3 1 . Col. iii. 8. & al. Comp. L X X by kp-fiXÉTTEiv. Isa. v. 12, 3 0 . xl.
J u d e ver. 9, and Wolfius there. [Polyb. 1 , 2 , 6 . ]
x i . 4 . Demost. O r . de R h o d . p . 7 8 . ] I I I . To perceive by t h e outward senses.
II, Speaking impiously concerning God, M a t . xiv. 3 0 . [ S o A p p i a n . Alex. Bell.
or ivhat peculiarly relates to him, blas- A r n o b . p . 574.]
 B A E 133 B A II

IV. To perceiue by the eye of the mind, 24. Verbs of seeing in Hebrew have often
lo understand. See M a t . xiii. 13, 14, 16*. a sense of direclion, and even raad and
M a r k viii. 18. [John ix. 39.] Rom. vii. journey. In Gen. xix. 16. (comp. L u k e
23. [xi. 8.] James ii. 22. [I should refer xvii. 32.) and L u k e ix. 62. we have
to this meaning many places for which ¡3Xé\pai ÉIQ rb óVt'o-w. T h e first must, and
Schleusner gives other subdivisions. T h u s t h e second may, be rendered lo return.
2 Cor. vii. 8. Iperceive. Coloss. ii. 2. Un- F o r the sense of fiXéiria, see Xen. Mem.
dcrslanding or being informed of. In iii. 8, 9. Diog. iv. 1, 2. Herodian. vi. 5. 2 .
Rev. i. 12. fiXéirsiv ri\v <j>uivrjv is a some-A preposition, as EIQ, Kara, TTOOQ, is added.
w h a t strong expression ; b u t t h i s change [ See Irmisch. ad Herodian. I I . c. 11. § 16.
of verbs of sense, or rather the a t t r i b u t i n g p. 357- vol. 2 . ]
the general meaning of perceplion to all, V I H . TTo have the facully of seeing.
is common in the Greek writers. /Esch. L u k e vii. 2 1 . (see Palairet. Obss. Phil.
Prom. v . 2 1 . (where see Abresch.) Aristoph. Crit, p. 175.) M a t . xv. 3 1 . J o h n ix. 7 — 1 5 .
Pac. 1064. Schol. ad Soph. T r a c h . 396. So in Aristoph. P l u t . 126. W e may ob-
und see Schroeder. ad Musasum de I í e r . e t serve t h a t the H e b . n s a has almost as
Lcand. p . 5. Virg. JEn. ii. 7 0 5 . Fisch. ad many meanings as this verb. T h u s 2 Sam.
Well. Spec. iii. p . 2 . p . 66. So again, xii. 19. and J e r . xx. 12, t h e L X X r e n -
M a t . vi. 4, 18. Who knows or underslands
der it by avvínpi: in J u d g . ii. 7. J e r . xii.
even the most secrct things. J o h n v. 19.
3 , 11. by yij'wiTK'w.]
Heb. iii. 19. Rom. vii. 2 3 . A s in all lan-
BA?/j-£oc, a, ov, from ¡3ɧXyTai, 3d pers.
guages, so in Greek, the verb is often used
perf. pass. of fiáXXw to casi, put—To be
in metaphors, as in 1 Cor. xiii. 12. we
cast or put. occ. M a r k ii. 2 2 . L u k e v. 3 8 .
understand imperfectly (the future state.)
In which t e x t s observe, t h a t ftXrireov is a
In John ix. 3 9 . the pXÉ-rrov-Es are those
who (imagine they) understand what t r u e verbal N . in t h e n e u t e r gender, goveíaiing
religión is, the pr¡ IIXÉTTOVTEC the ig- the accusative case oivov; for this sort of
norant, and in M a t . xiii. 13, t h e sense verbal nouns govern the same cases as the
is, Though they really understand, they verbs whence they are derived. Thus
will not understand, bul shut their senses Demosthenes, Contra L e p t . T 0 F 2 pív
against truth. T h e same opposition oc- ' Y n A ' P X O Y S I N 0 ' M 0 I 2 X P I F 2 T E 0 N,
curs in Uemosth. i. in Aristog. p . 797. KAI'NOYS o' uKr¡ pr) 0 E ' T E O N , Use m u s t
ed. Lips. ( w h e r e see T a y l o r ) , Terenee, be made of t h e laws in being, but new
Prol. A n d r . and A u l . Gell'. xv. 24.] ones m u s t not be rashly enacted. A n d to
aecustom the learner to this idiom of t h e
V. To look aboul, be circumspcct, lo Greek language, I shall transcribe, from
take hced, beware. M a t . xxiv. 4. Mark viii. Prodieus's Hercules, p . 9 , edit. Simpson,
15. xiii. 9. A c t s xiii. 40. Ql Cor. viii. 9. a passage which m a y on other accounts
x. 12. Gal. v. 15. Phil. iii. 2 . H e b . iii. 12. also deserve his attention. Tüv yap ovruv
Connectcd with t h i s is t h e meaning, To ayaQüv Kal KaXñv ¿SEV.CÍVEV iróvtí Kal krci-
consider. ] Cor. i. 26. iii. 10. x. 18. xvi. peXéiag, Qeol SiSóao-iv avQpúiroie' c\XX' CITE
10. E p h . v. 15. Col. iv. 17- and lo altcnd Ttí¡ GEHC ÍXEWQ úvaí croi ¡3¿XEI, O E P A n E Y -
diligently. M a r k iv. 24. L u k e viii. 18.] TE'ON TC/Y2 0 E 0 T 2 - EITE VTTO (¡>ÍXm> É8É-
V I . BASVEII' ¿i£ TToáaiaiTov, To look al, AEÍC ayaváoBaí, TC/Y2 a>I'A0Y2 'EYEP-
regard, respect, the person or oulward r E T H T E ON' EITE viró nvoe TTOXEIÜQ ETTIBV-
appearancc of a man. occ. M a t . xxii. 16. pe7.c npao-Oai, TITN n O ' A I N '£M>EAHTE'-
M a r k xii. 14. I t is the same as Xap£ci- ON ELTE viro rrjí 'EXXá&e irltcrnc agiote Irr
-

VEIV Txpóaunrov (which see under Ao^ubái'w ciperf) Bavpáí¡eo-dai, ri)v 'EXXa'&t rtEiparíov
X I X . ) , as appears from comparing t h e év rroteiV EITE TI)V yrjv (¡>épeiv crol fiéXei
passages j u s t cited with L u k e xx. 2 1 . KápTrt< afQóvBs, TON n-I~N O E P A H E Y -
c

V I L ISXéwuv Kara, spoken of a haven TE'ON* EITE airo ¡3ocrKr¡parOJV OIEL SEJV TTXOV-
or harbour, To look towards. occ. A c t s rl^Eo-daí, T£TN B02KHMA'T£1N ' E H I M E -
xxvii. 12. Xenophon in like manner ap- AHTE'ON' £(?•£ día TroXÉps bppy.e avt,Ea8ai,
plies ftXéTTEu' irpi'w tfi a lenl, and Herodian, Kal fléXei ¿ívaadaí rág re (j)ÍXue ÉXEvdepüv,
to a body qfsoldiers, p . 214, edit. Oxon. Kal rúe. ¿x^pwc x P ^ ) TA*2 ITOAEMI-
£ t 5 ( r a i

See Blackwall's Sacr. Classics, vol. i. p . IÍA 2 T E X N A 2 avrá.Q TE Trapa rñv ¿Trt-a-
205, Albcrti and Kypke. [So Ezek. xl. pÉvwv MAOHTE'ON, Kal OTT'OJQ cWciíf S¿i
XpíycAai, liaKiiréoV EI ¡E Kal (rw/jari fiúXEi.
* [Schleusner g¡ve> to M a t . xiii. 10, tlic s i m p l e óvvaroc elvaí rr¡ yvúpy inr^pETEiv 'EOI-
s~n.se of sccitig.] 2 T E ' 0 N TO* 2 Í T M A m' I T M N A S T E ' O N
 B O A
ow TrófoiQ Kai íSpiúri, T h e Gods give to
men none of those t h i n g s which are really
good and honourable, w i t h o u t t h e concur-
rence of their own labour and care. B u t
w h e t h e r you would have t h e Gods propi-
tious to you, the gods must be worship-
ped; or you are desirous of being loved
by your friends, your friends must be
served ; or you w a n t t o be honoured by
a n y particular city, that city must be be-
neftled by you ; or you wish to be honoured
by all Greece on account of your virtue,
you m u s t endeavour to do somewhat for
t h e service of all G r e e c e ; or if you desire
t h a t your land should yield plentiful crops,
your lands must be cultivated; or if you
would get rich by feeding cattle, the catite
must be carefnlly tended; or if you are
eager to raise yourself by war, and are de-
sirous of giving liberty to your friends,
and of vanquishing your enemies, the arts
qf war must be learned from those who
know t h e m , and m u s t be practised to r e n -
der you e x p e r t ; or, lastly, if you would
be strong in body, your body must be ac-
customed to obey your mind, and must be
exercised with labour and fatigue. I t may
n o t be amiss t o add, t h a t t h e L a t i n s have
imitated this manner of expression, by
u s i n g the neuter of their participle in dus,
as t h e Greeks do their verbal in rcov. T h u s
L u c r e t i u s , lib. i. line 112,
Alternas—pcenas in marte timendum,
Eternal torments must in death befcar'd.
L i n e 139,
M u l t a novis verbis prccscriini cnm sit a g e n d u m .
F o r in new terms must many things be coucli'a).
Line 382,
—Mota privandum 'st corpora quccqne,
A l l bodies must of m o t í o n be depriv'd.
Comp. lib. iii. line 62G.—Thus also Virgil,
Ma. xi. line 230,
Aut p a c e m Trujano ab rege p e t e n d u m .
O r peace must from the T r o j a n k i n g be
A n d even Cicero, Tuscul. lib. ii. cap. 19.
I t e r a n d u m eadem ista mihi. Those same
things must be repeated by me.
B O A N E P r E ' 2 , Heb.— Boanerges. A word is used for the person who gives
H e b r e w ñame, denoting Sons qf Thunder,
u L^iy viol ¡3povTi)c, says St. M a r k . It
seems to be t h e * Galilean pronunciation
* S e e under raXiXiiOf. [ S c h l e u s n e r approves gclists, chap. i x . § 1 . : and Suicer Tliesaur. in
t h i s dcrivation, and refers fo Stock, Clav. p . 2 1 3 . UpOTY,, I V .
334 B O H
bf t h e H e b . tl>in ' 2 1 , expressed in Greek
letters. Now U?jn properly signifies a
violent trembling or commotion, and may
therefore be well rendered by fipovrftQ
thunder, which is a violent commotion in
t h e a i r ; so, vice versa, any violent commo-
tion is figuratively, and not unusually, in
all languages called thunder. W h e n our
Saviour surnamed t h e sons of Zebedee
tttyl ^a, he seems plainly to have had an
eye to t h a t prophecy of H a g g a i , ch. ii. G,
Yet once, and I will shake, ffi'inn, the
heavens and the earth, which is by t h e
Apostle to t h e H e b r e w s , ch. xii. 2 6 , a p -
plied to t h e great alteration made in t h e
economy of religión by the publication of
the gospel. T h e ñame Boanerges, t h e r e -
fore, given to J a m e s aud J o h n , imports t h a t
they should be eminent instrumenta in ac-
complishing this wondrous change; and
should, like thunder or an earthquahe,
mightily bear down all opposition by their
inspired preaching and miraculous pow-
ers*. occ. M a r k iii. 17. I t may be worth
adding, t h a t , as our Saviour here calis t h e
two sons of Zebedee Sons qf Thunder, so
Virgil, Mn. vi. line 8 4 2 , by a like figure,
calis t h e two Scipios,
Dúo F u l m i n a Jielli.
T w o Tlmnderbolts of W a r .
BOA'íl, o). A word formed from t h e
sound, like bellow,moo, in E n g . — T o cry,
cry aloud. M a t . iii. 3 . M a r k xv. 3 4 . L u k e
xviii. 7. & al.
BOT), rje, f¡, from /3oá<i>.—A cry. occ. J a m .
v. 4.
Boi'i&ua, ac, i'¡, from (¡ondea.
I . Help, assistance. occ. H e b . iv. 16.
I I . " I t is used to signify such helps as
would strengthen a ship, and prevent its
being beaten to pieces, when exposed to
t h e violence of t h e waves, such as hooks,
chains, ropes, and other naval i n s t r u -
ments." Stockius. occ. ( A c t s xvii. 17.
and Heb. iv. 16.) Aristotle applies i t in
begg'd. like m a n n e r to some things used aboard a
ship in a storm. See Wetstein. [ I n Acts
xviii. 17. some onlyexplain t h e passage of
t h e exertion of s t r e n g t h and such means
as oifered themselves. I n t h e L X X , t h e
help. P s . xlviii. 15. J e r e m . xlviii. 4. and
! Vorst. de H e b r . p . 478. Cren. A n a l . P h i l o l . Crit.
H i s t o r i c o i u m H e i n s . Aristarch. Sacr. p. 277-]
* S e e Lardncr's H i s t . of the A p o s t l e s and E v a n -
 B O P 135 BOY

often for strength, defence, or shield. See I. The north wind, which usually fon s
Ps. vii. 11. xxi. 20. lxxxviii. 4 2 . 1 Chron. with violence and noise. So Ovid. M e t a m .
xii. 16.] i. line 65, Horrifer Bóreas, The boisterous
BoijOiw, Ú>, q. ¿Vi /JO»)»', SÉOJ, to run on north wind. [ S e e Prov. xxvii. 16. Eccle-
occasion qf a cry, namely to give assistance. siasticus xliii. 2 4 . J o b xxxvii. 22. J e r . i.
I. To run or come to the help or assist- 14.]
ance of another. A c t s xvi. 9. xxi. 28. See I I . T h e north couutry or side. occ. L u k e
Wetstein on both texts. [Polyb. ii. p . xiii. 2 9 . Rev. xxi. 13.
1403. Aristoph. Vesp. 4 2 1 . ] Bócrub), from t h e obsolete ¡3óo> to feed,
I I . Tohelp, assist. M a t . xv. 2 5 . M a r k eat, which perhaps from ¡3üe an ox, who
ix. 22, 24, & al. [ I t seems in these places J'eedsoY lides up the gross va a r e m a r k a b l e
to refer to the giving assistance in disease. manner. See N u m . xxii. 4 . — T o tend in
See Dioscor. i. 28. and 106. Arrian. Epict. feeding. L u k e xv. 15. J o h n xxi. 15, 17-
ii. 15. See also, 2 Cor. vi. 2. Heb. ii. 18. [ A n d in t h e middle, ¡3ócrKopai to feed, as
Rev. xii. 16.] M a t . viii. 3 0 . ]
Bondbe, 5, ó, from fiondéoj.—A helpcr. Borávr], r¡e, y, from /3óYoc food, which
occ. Heb. xiii. 6. [Psalm cxviii. 7.] from pooi tofeed.—Herb, herbage, which
Bódvvoe, e, ó. from (3advvi¡> to dcepen.— affords t h e usual food of cattle, and makes
A caviiy, a ditch, a pit in the earth. occ. a considerable p a r t in t h a t óf man. occ.
M a t . xii. 11. xv. 14. L u k e vi. 39. H e b . vi. 7- [and in t h e L X X , Gen. i. 1 1 .
[Bódvvoe seems in t h e first of these J e r . xiv. 6.]
places to mean the cistern or pool dugfor B 0 ' T P Y 2 , voe, 6.—A bunch or cluster
water, ¿XÚKKOS ( E t y m o l . M . 204. 17.) as of grapes. occ. Rev. xiv. 18. [ P a r k h u r s t ' s
the catite were led to water. See in L X X derivation I have struck out, as likely to
2 Sam. xviii. 17. Isaiah xxiv. 17, 18.] mislead. Bórpve is not m e r e l y a bunch
Bo\r), ije, r¡, from (3é€o\ci, perf. mid. of qf grapes, b u t generally, autumn fruit.
ftáWh) to cast.—A cast, a throw. occ. L u k e See Suidas and E t y m . M. 206. i. 1 1 . I t
xxii. 4 1 . [ T h e same phrase, a stone's oceurs G e n . xl. 10. N u m b . xiii. 24, 2 5 .
throw, oceurs H o m . II. v. 12. T h u c y d . Cant. i. 17.]
v. 65. T h e phrase rót,s fidkii a bow- BOV\CVT))C, S, ó, from ¡3a\évio.—A coun-
skot oceurs G e n . xxi. 16. See Mac. v. sellor or senalor. occ. M a r k xv. 4 3 . L u k e
xxiii. 50 : in which t e x t it plainly means
J j g p BoXí£w, from /3oXi£.—To casi or leí a member of the Jewish
0
Sanhedrim.
down a line and plnmmet to iry the depth Comp. L u k e xxiii. 5 1 , and ~Zvví$pwv. J o -
of water, to plumb. sound, fathom. occ. sephus uses (3a\evT7ie in the same sense,
Acts xxvii. 28. [ E u s t . ad II. E . p . 4 2 7 . ] D e Bel. lib. ii. cap. 17. § 1. [ T h e V u l -
BoXic, íSoe, ?/, from ¡3é€o\a. gate has Decurio, the ñame given to Se-
I . A dart, ajavelin, a missive wcapon. nalors in municipal t o w n s . ]
occ. H e b . xii. 20. B u t observe, t h a t the Bovkívoj, from ¡3tí\r¡.
words i'i fioXtdi icaruro'i;ev6íicre-ai are want- I. [To give counsel to another, advisc.
i n g in very m a n y M S S . , three of which Isaiah xxiii. 8 ;] whence
ancient, in several of the ancient versions, I I . BovKivopai, M i d . To considt, deli-
and cómmentators, and are accordingly bérate, talee counsel in order to a deter-
rejected by M i l i , Wetstein, and Gries- m i n a r o n . L u k e xiv. 3 1 . J o h n xii. 10.
bách. Acts v. 3 3 .
I I . A sounding-line furnished wilh a I I I . To determine, purposc. occ. Acts
plummet, and cast or let down to iry the xv. 37- xxvii. 3 9 . 2 Cor. i. 17- [ S c h l e u s -
depth qf water. T h u s sometimes used by ner, and I t h i n k rightly, gives this sense
the profane writers. to J o h n xii. 10. H e doubts w h e t h e r in Acts
BO'PBOPOS, e, ¿, from ftopd (which xv. 3 7 . this is the r i g h t sense, or to advisc
from H e b . to feed), food, provender, (as 2 Sam. xvi. 2 3 ) . In this sense i t oceurs
according to t h e Greek Etymologists, as if Isaiah iii. 8. vii. 5. xlvi. 10.]
ftópSopoe properly denoted dung, ordure. BOYAI-T, ije, y-—Design, purposc, de-
B u t may it not be r a t h e r formed from a cree, counsel. L u k e vii. 30. xxiii. 5 1 . A c t s
reduplicaron of the H e b . 111 a pit ? ii. 2 3 . xxvii. [ 1 2 . ] 42. Heb. vi. 17. & a!,
Comp. J e r . xxxviii. 6, in Heb.—Mnd, freq.
mire. occ. 2 P e t . ii. 22. [ S e e Vorst. de BéXrjpa, aroe, rb, from /3aX)) or fiú\op<u.
Ádagüs Nov. Test. c. iv. p. 7 7 6 . ] —Purpose, will. occ. Acts xxvii. 4 3 . R o m .
BoppCie, « , ó. ix. 19.
 B O Y 136 B P A

BáXvpai, either from fiaXr). cali t h e ^treadingfloors) where t h e sheaves

I. To will, design, be determined. Mat. lie open and expanded in t h e same m a n -
i. 19. xi. 2 7 . Acts xii. 4 . 1 Cor. xii. 11. ner as they are placed aud prepared with
J a m . i. 18, where see Wolfius and W e t - us for threshing." Shaw's Travels, p . 1 3 8 ,
stein. [ T o t h e passage of James, Schleus- 9. Comp. under 'AXoáui.
ner aseribes t h e sense / am delighted, I Bów. See under B Ó O T C O Í .
favour any one. fiuXrjdáe (se. iv iipiv) tS§p° Bpa&üov, H, ro, from fipa&tvc the
From his kindness towards us. So 1 Sam. judge of a public game who assigns the
xviii. 2 4 . 2 S a m . x x . 1 1 . xxiv. 3 . and prize.
BéXetv among t h e other Greeks. See I. A prize in t h e Grecian games, which
M a r k l . ad L y s . p . 3 3 2 . T h e difference consisted of a crown or garland made of
between 6é\<i> and ¡jéXopai, which consists some kind of leaves: according t o t h a t
in t h e l a t t e r expressing a more determined well-known epigram,
and decided will, is mentioned by E u s -
t a t h . ad Iliad, i. v. 112. p . 4 5 . 5 1 . J itffffapsg íitriif "AyüjyEf, & c .
I I . To will with authority, to decree,
ordain. 1 T i m . ii. 8. v. 14. T i t . iii. 8.
which Addison gives us t h u s in f E n g l i s h ,
I I I . To will, be willing, or desirous.
from t h e L a t i n of Ausonius,
M a r k xv. 15. J o h n xviii. 3 9 . A c t s xvii. 20.
xxv. 20, 2 2 . xxvii. 4 3 .
Greece, i n foar g a m e s t h y martial y o u t h were
Buvdc, 5, ó . — A MU, hillock, rising train'd,
ground. occ. L u k e iii. 5. xxiii. 3 0 — T h e F o r Héroes t w o , and t w o for Gods ordain'd :
G r e e k Etymologists deduce ¡¡uvós from J o v e bade t h e Olive round his Victor w a v e ;
t h e V . flaívw to ascend. B u t E u s t a t h i u s Phcebus to h i s an Apple-gscila-aa g a v e ;
T h e Pine, P a l e m ó n ; ñor w i t h less renown,
on Odyss. xix. cited by Wetstein (whom Archemorus conferr'd the Pursley-cmwn.
see), says t h a t (iavóc, though used by H e -
rodotus, is a barbarous, namely a Lybian
o r African, word. A n d if so, may it n o t So t h e Etymologist cited by Wetstein
be r a t h e r derived from H e b . r ú a to build, (whom see) explains PpaSeíov by ó Trapa
build up ? for hills generally are built up, TWV füpáSívTwv SiSópevoe •5t<¡>avoq rjí vi-
as i t were, of various * strata lying regu- KWVTI, t h e crown or wreath given by t h e
larly, one above a n o t h e r . — T h e L X X have j u d g e s t o t h e victor. occ. 1 Cor. ix. 2 4 .
frequently used this N . twice for H e b . comp. v. 2 5 .
¡ l o a a high place, thrice for H e b . bl a I I . Applied figuratively to t h e prize of
heap, b u t most generally for i i s a i a hill, t h e Christian Calling, the Crown qf Glory,
as in Isa. xl. 4 , cited L u k e iii. 5. [ O n that fadeth not away. occ. Phil. iii. 14.
t h i s word see Schwarz. Comm. Crit. L i n g . comp. 1 P e t . v. 4 %.
G r . p, 2G1. Valck. ad H e r o d . iv. c. 158. BpdSévw, from fipa€évg, which see u n d e r
Georg. Hieroc. P . i. p . 113. Hesychius, ¡3pa€¿íov.
n o t i n g t h e word as used by t h e Cyprians, I. To assign the prize in a public game,
explains fiavóe, nfiás. ¡iuvoí, ¡iwpoí. See to be the judge or president on such an
also Salmas. de L i n g . Hellen. p . 112. occasion. I n this its proper sense i t is
T u r n e b . Advers. x x . 1 5 . B a r t h . Advers. sometimes used in the profane authors.
xl. 1 9 . ] [Wisd. x. 1 2 . ]
. Bá"e, ¡3oóc, ó, -¡i, from fiociw, w, to bellow, I I . To preside, rule, direct. occ. Col.
which s e e . — A beeve, a buü or cow. L u k e iii. 15. T h u s applied in t h e best G r e e k
xiii. 1 5 . xiv. 5. 1 Cor. i x . 9. T o ¡Ilús- writers. See Wolfius, W e t s t e i n , and K y p k e ,
t r a t e t h e last passage, we m a y remark [ A r i s t o t . R h e t . i. c. 5 6 . Polyb. v. 2 .
from D r . Shaw, t h a t t h e inhabitants of D ' O r v i l l . ad Charit. vi. 4. p . 4 4 5 . ]
Barbary still " continué to tread out their BpaEvvw, from (SpaSve slow.—To delay,
corn after t h e primitive custom of t h e make delay, be slow. occ. 1 T i m . iii. 15.
E a s t . Instead of beeves, they frequently 2 P e t . iii. 9. [ G e n . xxxv. 19. D e u t . vii.
make use of mules or horses, by t y i n g , in
like m a n n e r by t h e neck, three or four of * S o called perhaps ultimately from the H e b . Tijí
them together, and whipping t h e m after- to sever, sepárate, since t h e corn is in these places
wards round about t h e nedders (as they severed from the h u s k .
•f D i a l o g u e I I . on A n c i e n t M e d a l s .
$ [ T h e word is omitted in P h i l . i i i . 1 2 . twice
* S e e Catcott, o n the D e l u g e , p . 1 0 0 o f tile l s t ( c o m p . 1 Cor. i x . 2 4 . a n d see Chrysost.), and i n
criin or p . 2 1 8 of the 2 d . v. I X ]
 BPA 137
1 O, Ecclesiastic x x x v . 22. In 2 P e t . iii.
9 . Schleusner says, t h a t t h e verb is t r a n -
sitive, and h e translates i t " The Lord
does nol defer the execution qfhis pro-
mise." Grotius t h o u g h t t h a t t h e reading
should be rae ítray because ¡3paSvvi» as a
transitive governs the acc. as Isaiah xlvi,
13. See Fessel. Adv. Sacr. lib. i. c. 2. p .
23.]
BpacWXtfcw, ¿5, from (3paSvs slow, and
srXác. n-avigalion, sailing.— To sail slowly.
occ. A c t s xxvii. 7. [Artenvid. iv. 32.]
Ug" B P A A Y % üa, i, perhaps from fía-
nos a weight or burden, and Sieiy or ¿Wat to
go under; or r a t h e r from the oriental n a ,
which in H e b . is only used for hail, but
in Arabic moreover denotes cold, p a r t i -
cularly in an intense degree, and henee
p í a to be heavy, slow.—Slow, as opposed
t o rajtyc swift, or quick. occ. J a m . i. 19.
I t is used also in a spiritual sense, occ.
L u k e xxiv. 25, where see W e t s t e i n and
K y p k e . So in L a t i n , bardus signifies slow,
dull, heavy, immediately perhaps from
t h e Greek fipaove, b u t ultimately from
t h e oriental l i a to congeal. [Aristoph.
N u b . 129.]
Hpaovrr¡Q, r¡roc, }¡, from (3paSvs-—
Slowness. occ. 2 Pet, iii. 9. See Wetstein.
[ T h i s passage Schleusner explains, As
some rashly think that he defers the com-
pletion qfhis promises. See Isoc. P a n e g .
39. Xenoph. H i s t . G r . iv. 6, 5. P l u t . de
Sera N u m . Vind. p . 549. Appian. Bell.
Civil, iv. p . 1052.]
Bpaxt'wi', ovos, ó, from [3pajiys short, in
the comparative form.
I. Properly, The shorter part of the
armfrom the shoulder lo the elbow.
I I . The arm in general. A n d because
the arm of man is t h e principal organ or
instrument by which he exerts h i s s t r e n g t h ;
henee
I I I . Figuratively, The strenglh or
power of God. occ. L u k e i. 5 1 . John xii.
38. Acts xiii. 17. T h u s the word is often
used in t h e L X X for the H e b . i?ní. See
Exod. vi. 0. xv. 16. D e u t . iv. 3 4 . J o b
xxvi. 2. Ps. [ x x x v i . 18.] lxxxix. 10, 13.
[See also 2 Kings xvii. 36. Psalm cxxxv.
12. Dan. xi. 31. Ecclesiasticus, xxxvi. 17-
2 Mac. xv. 24.]
[Boa^úc, ¿ia, v.—Small, as (1.) of time.
L u k e xxii. 58. pera íSpa^íi (se.
T5 xpóva). After a short time. A c t s v.
3 4 . for a short lime. P l u t . Gall. p. 1055.
H e b . ii. 7, 9. Prov. v. 14. P s . xciii. 17-
Wisd. xii. 10. _ (2.) Ofspace. A c t s xxvii.
28. 2 Sam. xvi. 1. xix. 36. Iu several of
BPE
these places there is a peculiar idioni, vízV
an ellipse of t h e word pépoc, -part, (see
Bos. Ellips. p . 103.) and t h e same use is
extended to other t h i n g s . T h u s in J o h n
vi. 7- and 2 Sam. xiv. 29, we have fipayy
TI a little, referring to food only. (3.) Of
number. P s . civ. 12. Few in number, and
so Hesychius, (3p¿iyei-Si ¿Xiyot. Heb. viii,
22. Ata (ipayéuv in a few words, a.
phrase used by t h e best G r e e k writers,
of which W e t s t e i n gives m a n y instances,
and P a r k h u r s t adds iEschin. de Coron. §
5. T h e word is used in its simple sense
of small, very frequently. Gen. xxxiv.
30. D e u t . xxvi. 5. xxviü. 62. Exod. xviii.
22. (small, trifing.) See on t h e word
Zeun. ad Xenoph. de Re E q u e s t . i x . 3 .
See also Lexic. Xenoph. and Schweigb.
L e x . Polyb. W e may add of t h e passage
in Psalm viii. 7, 5, t h a t Schleusner r a t h e r
avoids giving any opinión on it, and t h a t
Bretschneider, t h o u g h rejecting t h e in-
terpretation " for a short t i m e , " explains
t h e passage to t h e same effect. Whom
thou madest a little lower than the angels,
viz. while he lived on earth."]
Bpécpoe, eoc, ug, ro, q. <¡>ép€os (by t r a n s -
position), from cpéptio to feed, nourish
(which from rpíptiv j3íov, bringing or af-
fording sustenance); for babes are nou-
rished in t h e womb, and when born r e -
quire frequent nourishment.
I . A babe in its mother's womb. occ.
L u k e i. 4 1 , 4 4 . [ H o m . Iliad. xxiii. & ibi
Schol. Apollod. Bibl. 4.]
I I . A new-born babe. o c c L u k e ü. 12,
16. A c t s vii. 19. 1 P e t . i. 2. [1 M a c i.
61. ii. vi. 10. E u r . Phcen. 8 2 1 . ]
I I I . An infant, a child. occ. L u k e xviii.
15. 2 T i m . iii. 15. [ S e e G r u t e r . Inscr. p .
679, for such an use of infants.]
I V . [ W e m a y observe, t h a t in G r c e k
writers fipétyos is used qf animáis. See
iElian, V . H . I. 6. Bretschneider says,
¡3pé([>os is for rpéajoc.]
BPE'Xíi. T h e most probable deriva-
tion seems to be from t h e H e b . 1"ia lo
bless, which word is in t h e O. T . often
applied to rain, dew, or moislurc, as G e n .
xlix. 25. D e u t . xxviü. 12. xxxiii. 13. Isa.
xliv. 3 . Ezek. xxxiv. 26, a n d t h e N . Hala
signifies a pool qf water.
I. To wet, make wet, as with a shower
of tears. occ. L u k e vii. 38, 44. So K y p k e
cites from Pausanias in Phor. lib. x. p .
628, K-al "EBPEXE d>aXávf) r?';r KetbáXjjv,
B
A n d wetted P h a l a n t h u s ' s head, with tíie
tears, namely, j u s t before mentioned.
[See Psalm vi. 6. Isaiah xxxiv. 3. Xenoph.
 B P Y B PíZ

de Re E q . v. 6. P l u t . T . i. O p p . p . 125. ed. the teeth together, as men in violent ragc

Reisk.] or anger. occ. A c t s vii. 5 4 . I t is said to
I I . Torain, send rain. occ. M a t . v. 4 5 . be properly spoken of mad dogs or lions,
J a r a . v. 17. T h i s seems an Hellenistical and seems to be a word formed from t h e
use of t h e word, t h u s applied by the sound, as the E n g . crash, gnash, and the
L X X , G e n . ii. 5. Amos iv. 7, for the H e b . j?-)n of t h e same import. [ W e have
H e b . ")¡DD, iustead of the p u r é G r e e k in P r o v . xix. 12. ¡jpvyfíós of t h e roaring
VÍIV. See W e t s t e i n . In J a m . Qeóg is of a Uon7\
understood. So Raphelius and Wetstein BPY'fí.
on M a t . v. 4 5 , cite from Xenophon, o-av I. To abound, as a tree with blossoms;
NI'<J>HÍ 'O GEO'U, when God sends snow ; or t h e earth with plants, animáis, foun-
a n d from Herodotus, " Y E I — ' O GEO'S, tains, &c.
God sends rain. Comp. Kypke, and J o - I I . To send forth or issue as a spring
sephus, A n t . lib. viii. cap. 13. § 2, and § its waters, scaturio. occ. J a m . iii. 11. See
6. [ í n Rev. xi. 6, we have a fuller ex- W e t s t e i n . [On this sense of fipvto see
pression, iva ¡x>) (ipíxn VE.TÓC, t h o u g h E u s t a t h . ad Iliad. P . p . 1126, 4 2 . H e s y -
Bretschneider, and perhaps rightly, r e - chius says flpí/ei, péei, •7rr¡yá£et,~¡
fers this passage to meaning I., and supposes Típula, aros, ro, from /3t'€po/xai, perf.
TT)V yrjv to be understood. See Psalm pass. of fipóut or (3p¿>cnco>.
(lxxvii. 31.) lxxviii.27. Exod. ix. 2 3 . I t I. Meat, solid food. 1 Cor. iii. 2. & al.
is curious t h a t Phavorinus and P h r y n i c h u s freq.—In H e b . xiii. 9. t h e Apostle " liad
say /3p£'x(<> was not used in ancieut writers in his eye t h e Levitical burnt-ofFerings
in this sense. T h e commentators on T h o m . aud peace-oíferings, which were made of
M a g . in (ipéxu, p . 1 7 1 , contradict t h e m . animáis fit for meat, and on [ t h e l a t t e r of]
See Xen. (Econ. xvii. 2. A r r i a n . E p . i. 6 . ] which t h e oíferers feasted in t h e court of
I I I . Intransitively, To rain, fall from t h e tabernacle, Lev. vii. 1 1 — 1 5 . D e u t .
hcaven, as fire and brimstone. occ. L u k e xii. 6, 1 1 , 12, in token of their being par-
xvii. 29. Comp. L X X in Gen. xix. 24. doned, and a t p e a c e with God." M a c k n i g h t ,
E z e k . xxxviii. 22. whom see.
I V . To wet or fall as rain. occ. Rev. [ I I . Any food whatever. M a t . xiv. 15. ,
xi. 6. M a r k vii. 19. 1 Cor. vi. 13. x . 3 . ]
Bpovrr), % , q - (ipojirn, from perf. mid. [ I I I . Forbidden food, with a reference
péSpoLia of (¡pífiuj to roar.— Thunder. occ. to t h e Jewish L a w . 1 T i m . iv. 3 . H e b .
M a r k iii. 17. J o h n xii. 2 9 . Rev. iv. 5 . ix. 10. xiii. 9. I n t h e E p i s t . Jerem. v.
& al. T h i s word in t h e L X X constantly | 9. Ppüua is used, as is also fipwcric for that
answers to t h e H e b . O J J i , which as a V. which eats or consumes, viz. rust, though
t h e y Iikewise render by ftpovrc'iw to thun- Scultetus and Casaubon doubt whether
der. [Schleusner i n t e r p r e t s (jpovríi in o % (caí (ipwcriQ mean any t h i n g more than
M a r k iii. 17. of t h e thunder of eloquence, crfjc (HpúxTKurra.]
as in A r i s t o p h . Ach. 5 3 0 . See Cicer. O r a t .
Bpúmpoe, y], ov, from ¡¡poto or (ipúmao
c. 9. Colum. de R. R. Prsef. lib. i. § 3 0 . to eat.—Eatable, fit lo cal. occ. L u k e xxiv.
See Booj.'Epyéc.] 41. [ I n t h e L X X , Levit, xix. 2 5 . ívhov
Bpox>)) ye, i,, Bpt'xw.— Violeni rain. occ. (¡pójcnpov is a tree beariug eatable fruit.]
M a t . vii. 25,' 27- Bpwcrif, tos, A t t . £(i)s, i], from (ipóoi or
BPO'XOS, B, ó. jQptúíTKw to eat.
I . A cord. I n which sense it is often I . Eating, the action of eating. 1 Cor.
used by t h e profane writers. viii. 4. Comp. H e b . xii. 16, where see
I I . Figuratively, A snare, a gin. occ. D o d d r i d g e and M a c k n i g h t , " A meal."
1 Cor. vii. 3 5 . So in t h e L X X versión of [ 2 Cor. ix. 10.]
P r o v . x x i i . 2 5 , it answers to t h e Heb. I I . Meat, food. J o h n iv. 3 2 . vi. 27.
U'p'iD a snare. R o m . xiv. 17, where Wetstein shows that
Bpvyjiós, 5, ó, from jSÉépuyjuat perf. fipwcns and iróais are in like manner men-
pass. of (3pvx<>>.—A gnashing, or crashing, tioned together by t h e profane writers.
as of t h e t e e t h in violent pain or agony. [Schleusner says of Rom. xiv. 17- " I "
M a t . viii. 12. & al. freq. So H o m e r a p - Christ's dispensation it is not a m a t t e r of
plics the participle f>£§pv)(¿>s to a wounded consequence, whether you make adifference
hero erashing his teeth in the agonies of in foods or no," and in Col. ii. 16, he re-
death, 11. xiii. line 3 9 2 . II. xvi. line 48o'. fers t h e passage to the prohibitions of the
BPY'XO,—To griud, gnash, or crash Mosaic law.]]

I I I . A canker, any t h i n g t h a t eats
and spoils metáis or corn. occ. M a t . vi.
19, 20. [ A q . in Isaiah 1. 9. See Scultet.
Exc. E v . ii. c. 3 5 . ]
B p ú o K w , from t h e obsolete |3pów to eat
(which see), whence also it borrows its
t e n s e s . — T o eat. occ. John vi. 13. [ 2 M a c .
ii. 12.]
B U 6 Í £ W , from fivQóg.
I. To iimncrse, dromn. T h u s i t occurs
2 M a c . xii. 4, b u t not strictly in t h i s
sense, as a V. active, in t h e N . T . Bv-
dí'Copai, pass. To be inanerscd, sink.
L u k e v. 7 ; j3vdífecrdai mere sinking;
E n g . translat. r i g h t l y " began to sink."
See Glassii Philol. Sacr. lib. iii. t r a c t . 3 .
can. 3 . [_2 Mac. xii. 4. Polyb. ii. 10. 5.]
I I . To drown, in perdition. occ. 1 T i m .
vi. 9. So Merrick, A n n o t . on P s . xviii. 5 ,
cites from an Epistle of Hippocrates,
BYGO'S ' A U O ' A E I A S . See also W e t -
stein's Note on BXaStpac. [ P s . lxix.
23.]
BYGO'S, 5, ó, from fi¿i6oe deep.—The
deep, the sea. occ. 2 Cor. xi. 2 5 , where
see Wolfius and Wetstein. S t . Paul ""says
he had even been a night and a day
the deep; meaning ( I suppose) t h a t he
had been for so long a time floating in
t h e sea upon some broken piece of t h e
ship." B p . Pearce, Note ( E ) on A c t s
xxvii. 9 [after T h e o d o r e t ] . So Josephus,
in bis Life, § 3 , tells u s , t h a t himself and
eighty of his fellow-voyagers, who had
been shipwrecked in t h e Adriatic, were
providentially taken u p by a ship of C y -
r e u e , after swimming all night, Si o\ne
7Í;? VÚKTOC ívfífipi'óa. [Theoc. Idyll. xi.
02.]
Elgp Bvpaévg, íog, A t t . éiog, from flíipaa
0
a skin or hide of a beast, when separated
or flayed off from i t s b o d y . — A tanner,
one who ians the ludes of beasts,
arius. occ. A c t s i x . 4 3 . x . 0, 3 2 . — T h e
L X X , in one place, J o b xvi. 15, use
ftvpca for t h e H e b . iba a skin or hide.
Bbacrivog, n, ov, from fibaaog.—Made
qf byss or coiton, occ. Rev. xviii. 16. x i x .
8, 14._ [1 Chron. xv. 2 7 . E s t h . i. 6. vi. 8.
Isa. iii. 2 2 . I t is curious t h a t ¡ivao-ivog,
which appears sometimes to express a very
•mhite garmcnt, as made of t h e fiuest a n d
139 13 O. M
into whitcst byss, is also explained by Hesy»
chius and Phavorinus as meaning purple ;
probably, because such expensive g a r m e n t s
were often dyed with t h a t esteemed colour.
T h i s is also t h e opinión of Schleusner.]
BY'SSOS, a, i), plainly from t h e H e b .
f n , t h e same.
I. Byss, the coiton plant, of which
Pausanias, in his Eliacs, vol. v. observes,
t h a t in his days i t grew in t h e country of
Elis, b u t no where else in Greece. See
Wetstein.
occ. I I . Cotton, clolh, calicó. B u t Pollux,
so in his Onomasticon, says t h a t t h e fi-úacros
of E g y p t was in his time, i. e. in t h e se-
cond century, composed oiflax and collón,
cotton t h r e a d s being t h e warp, and flaxen
ones t h e woof of t h e cloth. occ. L u k e xvi.
Í 9 . Rev. xviii. 12. T h e o c r i t u s mentions
byss as a clothing worn by women on
festive occasions, Idyll. ii. Une 7 3 ,
— — B T ' 2 5 0 I O xahhv aúpciffa. ylruwa.
T r a i l i n g a beauteous robe o f Byss.
in [See Salmas. E x . Plinian. p . 7 0 1 . Plin.
x i x . i. Reland. Diss. Mise. P . i. p . 2 1 2 .
and a p a m p h l e t published in London,
1 776, by F o r s t e r , on t h e H e b r e w B y s s u s . ]
BÍIMO'S, 5, ó.—An altar. I t seems a
derivative from t h e H e b . t i D Q high, ele-
valed;* either because altars were usually
built on ninti hills or rising grounds,
which are often in t h e O . T . mentioned
as places of religious worship (see H e b .
and E n g . Lexicón, u n d e r ¡Tin I.) ; or be-
cause t h e a l t a r s themselves were s t r u c -
t u r e s elevaled or raised to some h e i g h t
above t h e ground. T h i s derivation is
confirmed by E u s t a t h i u s on H o m e r , II.
viii. line 4 4 1 , who observes, t h a t pw/ioí
cori- signify not only w h a t t h e y sacrificed upon,
áXAct Kai—arrXiüg ávátnpa, í<¡¡' ¿ ETI ¡iijvaí
ri Kal redrjvaí, b u t also simply an eleva-
tion, upon which a t h i n g m a y go, or be
p u t . occ. A c t s xvii. 2 3 . — T h i s word in
t h e L X X several times answers to t h e
H e b . n a a or n i n ü , t h o u g h more frequently
to rniD an altar.
* [So Vitringa on Isaiah, T. I.p. 401.]

r .
TAZ
r
y, f, Gamma. T h e t h i r d letter of
5 t h e Greek Alphabet, so called as if
Gamla, by a corruption from the H e b . 3,
Gimel, to which i t corresponds also in form,
order, and p o w e r ; and in the forms T, /, is
evidently no other t h a n t h e Samaritan or
Phenician Gimel t u r n e d to t h e r i g h t hand.
rABBABA", H e b . — G a b b a t h a , A raised
or elevated place, from t h e H e b . V . rra3
to be kigk, elevated, eminent. occ. J o h n
x i x . 13 ; where observe, t h a t t h e E v a n -
gelist does not say t h a t AiOb^ptorov is an
interpretation or translation of t h e H e b .
Gabbatha, b u t t h a t t h e same place, which
was called (in Greek, namely) Aidórpio-
TOV, or t h e stone-pavement, was in H e b .
denominated Gabbatha, or t h e elevated
place.
I l g l * Tíiyypaiva, r¡g, i), from y pato or
ypáivto to eat, consume—A gangrene or
mortificaliori, which unless prevented by
timely remedies, spreads from t h e place
affected, eats away or consumes by putre-
faction t h e neighbouring parts, and a t
l e n g t h destroys t h e whole frame. occ.
2 T i m . ii. 17, where see W e t s t e i n .
TA'ZA, 7)c, ?/.—Treasure. occ. Acts viii.
2 7 . J e r o m e on Isa. x x x i x . informs us
t h a t Gaza is not an H e b r e w b u t a Persic
w o r d ; and from C u r t i u s , lib. iii. cap. 13.
edit. var. we learn t h a t t h e Persians called
t h e royal treasure G a z a — " pecuniam re-
giam, quam Gazam Persa: vocant*." We
also find t h e nouns >132, N'tíJ, used for
treasures or treasuries, in t h e books of
E z r a , E s t h e r , and E z e k i e l ; and in t h e
compound word l a l J a treasurer ( E z r a i.
8. viii. 2 1 . ) , t h e 3 is d r o p t as in t h e
Persic Gaza, and no doubt this l a t t e r is
from t h e same root 133 ( o m i t t i n g t h e 3),
which, not only in Chaldee, b u t in Syriac
and Arabic, likewise signifies to hide,
treasure, lay up. I t may not be impropcr
to add, t h a t t h e word Gaza was received
both into t h e Greek and L a t i n languages.
See W e t s t e i n on Acts viii. 2 7 .
Ta'(o<pv\á.Kiov, e, rb, from yá'(a a trea-
* [ S o P o m p . M e l . i. 11. T h e word then b e -
camc general. S e c A r i s t . H . P l . viii. 11. Cic. Off.
ii. 2 2 . Kcland. D i s s . M i s e . P . ii. p . l í i í . j
HO
r
A A
surc, aud <¡>vká<ro-io to keep.—A treasttry.
occ. M a r k xii. 4 1 , 4 3 . L u k e xxi. 1. J o h n
viii. 2 0 . T h i s N . is often used in t h e
books of t h e Maccabees. [Properly ' T h e
sacred treasury, where t h e gifts and money
of t h e temple were kept.' I n t h e court of
t h e women there were 13 chests for t h e
latter purposes (see Reí. de Spol. T e m p l .
c. xii.) all called by this ñame. See M a r k
xii. 4 1 , 4 3 . L u k e xxi. 1. T h e court of
t h e women is thence called by t h e same
ñame, as t h e r e also t h e silver and gold
vases, &c. of t h e temple were k e p t . J o h n
viii. 2 0 , where see L a m p e , vol. ii. p . 398.]
TA'AA, OK-OC, rb, r a t h e r perhaps abbre-
viated from t h e oíd word yXáyoe, used by
H o m e r , II. ii. line 4 7 1 , and II. xvi. line
643, for milk.
I. Milk. occ. 1 Cor. ix. 7.
I I . I t denotes, figuratively, the sincere
and sweet word qf Christ, by which be-
lievers grow in grace, and are nourished
to life eternal. occ. ] P e t . ii. 2. Comp.
Isa. Iv. 1.
I I I . — T h e rudiments qf Christianity,
which are proper to nourish those who
are, as it were, babes in Christ. occ. 1 Cor.
iii. 2. H e b . v. 12, 13. See Kypke. [ T h i s
was a common Jewish form of expression.
See Schostg. H o r . H e b . 1 P e t . ii. 2.]
Ya\r¡vr], r¡g, r), q. yeXávn from yeXáw lo
laugh, smile.—A calm, tranquillity, or
stillness qf the sea, when, according to
Ovid's expression,
—rident azquora Ponti,
or in D r y d e n ' s language,
T h e s t o n n is h u s h ' d , and dimplcd occan smiles.
occ. M a t . viii. 26. M a r k iv. 3 9 . L u k e viii.
2 4 . See Jortin'3 R e m a r k s on Ecclesiastical
H i s t . vol. i. p . 2 7 2 , 2d edit.
raXiXciíoc, «, ó, from TaXiXaía Galilec,
a c o u n t r y to t h e north of J u d e a , so called
after its Heb. ñame V^3, Isa. ix. 1. & al.
A Galilean, a native qf Galilee. Luke
xiii. I, 2, & al. A n d such, it is well
known, our Lord was generally reputed,
from his having been b r o u g h t u p at Na-
 F A A
aareth, and employing a great p a r t of his
public rainistry in t h a t country. A n d as
the apostles and first diseiples of Christ
were chieñy Galileans (see A c t s ii. 7-)>
and these were generally a despised peo-
ple, and particularly obnoxious to t h e
Romans, on account of their seditious
disposition, which liad been fomented by
J u d a s t h e Galilean (see Acts v. 3 7 , and
Josephus A n t . lib. xviii. cap. 1. § 1, a n d
¡} 6. lib. x x . cap. 4. § 2. a n d cap. 5 , § 1,
and D e Bel. lib. ii. cap. 8. § 1.), henee
t h e Heathen called t h e Christians Gali-
leans, in h a t r e d a n d contempt. Thus
doth E p i c t e t u s in Arrian, lib. iv. cap. 7-
So Lucian, or whoever was t h e author of
the Philopatris, satirizes S t . Paul under
t h e denomination of o TaXiXa'iog, the Ga-
lilean (Lucian, tom. ii. p . 999.) A n d we
are informed b y Sócrates, t h e ecclesiasti-
cal historian, lib. iii. cap. 12, t h a t t h e
eniperor J u l i á n usually called C h r i s t G a -
lilean, and t h e Christians Galileans, Ta-
XiXaiov siúdet b luXíavoc KaXelv rbv
Xpt^oV, Kal r5c Xperíáj/ac; TaktXaíug ; and
by Gregory N a z i a n z . O r a t . iii. p . 8 1 , t h a t
he even made a law t h a t t h e Christians
should be called Galileans. TaXtXaítie
avrl Xpi^iáviov—KaXelcrdat vopoQÉTr¡oag.
Comp. Suicer's T h e s a u r u s in Xpi^íavog
ii. 2 . — M a r k xiv. 70, Thou art a Galilean,
and thy speech agreeth thereto. Comp.
Mat. xxvi. 7 3 . T h e dialect of t h e Gali-
leans seems t o have been unpolished and
corrupt, which próbably proceeded from
their g r e a t communication a n d m i x t u r e
with t h e neighbouring H e a t h e n ; of which
Strabo, lib. xvi. p . 1 1 0 3 , edit. Amstel.
takes notice, T a ü r a piv TTpooápKria (i. e.
of J u d e a ) , r a 7roXXá <5' ¿>£ ¿Kara eioiv ¿nrb
tyvXSlV OÍKHfl£va piKTÜV, EK TE 'AlyVTCTÍlúV
'édvwv, Kal 'Apa£íiov Kal Q>OIVÍKWV ; whence
their country is called Galilee of the Gen-
tiles, Isa. ix. 1. M a t . iv. 15. 1 Mac. v. 1 5 .
T h e Thalmudists, in t h e T r a c t f O l l ' J ? , tell
us, " A s for t h e men of J u d e a , because
they were aecurate i n t h e i r language
( a m t l ^ b$ Wpmv), t h e law was con-
firmed in their h a n d s ; b u t as for t h e men
of Galilee, because t h e y were n o t aecurate
in their language, t h e law was not con-
firmed in t h e i r h a n d s ; " a n d to pro ve t h e i r
inaecuracy, they assert in t h e same place,
t h a t t h e Galileans did not in speaking
distinguish i n K a lamb, 1D1? wool, IlDn
a he-ass, and "inn wine. See more on
this subject in B u x t o r f ' s Lexicón T h a l -
mud. &c. under Vbi, and in W e t s t e i n ' s
Note on M a t . xxvi. 7 3 .
141 r A P
TapÉu, w, from ycipog.—To marry. I n
the active, it is properly spoken of t h e
man, M a t . v. 3 2 . x i x . 9. xxii. 2 5 , 3 0 . &
al. as yapiopai, pass. lo be married, is of
t h e woman. Mark x. 12, (where see W e t -
s t e i n ) 1 Cor. vii. 39 ; b u t yapelv in t h e
active is also sometimes applied to t h e
woman. 1 Cor. vii. 2 8 , 3 4 . 1 T i m . v. 1 1 ,
14. [ X e n . H i e r . i. 2 8 . ] — I n M a r k vi. 1 7 ,
it is applied to an unlawful marriage. O n
M a t . xxiv. 3 8 , comp. G e n . vi. 2. [Schl.
sensibly observes, t h a t i t is absurd to e x -
plain M a t . xxiv. 3 8 . by stuprum cominillo
(although in Greek writers such notions
obtain : see Spanh. ad Callim. H . in Del.
38. and 2 4 0 . and Barnes. ad Anac. 4 1 ) . ) ,
as from £Kyapí£ii>, which precedes, t h e
meaning is clearly, marrying in ease and
security. H e shows, too, by referrrng t o
1 Cor. vii. 9. 10, i t i s used of both p a r t i e s ,
i. e. generally of marrying.']
£ ^ g ° Tapio KLO, from yápoc.— To give in
marriage, as a father doth bis d a u g h t e r ,
whence in pass. yapíoKopat to be given in
marriage, as a d a u g h t e r b y her father.
occ. M a r k xii. x x v . [Sch. contends t h a t
t h e word yapí^io in t h e same sense occurs
1 Cor. vii. 3 8 , b u t others read Uya-
pí'(u.~\
T A M O S , s, b.
I . The matrimonial unión, viarriage.
H e b . xiii. 4, where, as Wolfius (whom see)
has j u s t l y r e m a r k e d , t h e imperatives p r e -
ceding and following show t h a t we should
r a t h e r u n d e r s t a n d É V W than ¿Vi. See also
H a m m o n d a n d M a c k n i g h t ; a n d observe
t h a t the A l e x a n d r i a n a n d two other M S S .
for IE in t h e following sentence read yap,
and t h e V u l g . translates by enim for.
[ W i s d . xiv. 2 6 . A r r i a n . I n d . viii. 6 . ]
I I . A nuptial or marriage feast*. M a t .
xxii. 8, 10. comp. ver. 4. J o h n ii. 1, 2 .
P l u r . Tápoi, ¿t. T h e same. M a t . xxii. 2 ,
3 , 9. & al. Raphelius on M a t . xxii. 2 ,
cites A r r i a n u s i n g n O I E T N PA'MOYS
for making a marriage feast, as E l s n e r
doth others of t h e G r e e k writers. See
also W e t s t e i n on ver. 1. [ S c h l . t h i n k s
t h a t t h e word henee carne to signify any
great feast, a n d t o this h e refers M a t .
xxii. 2. (where t h e Syriac renders i t by a
feast; and where with yápoi, compare
Theoph. Char. xii. 1. xxii. 1.) L u k e xii.
3 6 . xiv. 8. E s t . ii. 18. ix. 2 2 . a n d in M a t .
xxii. 10. it appears t h a t y¿ipog means the
place of t h e feast.]
TA P.
S
A conjunction.
" [Tácpof is a funeral feast i n H o m . O d . A. 5 4 7 - ]
 r A P
142
1. Causal, For. I t denotes the cause'
o r reason of something going before, M a t .
i. 2 0 , 2 1. ii. 2. B u t it m u s t be remarked,
t h a t it does not always, ñor particularly
in St. Paul's Epistles, refer to w h a t im-
mediately preceded, b u t to what went be-
fore a t a considerable distance (comp.
M a r k xi. 13. xii. 12. xvi. 3 , 4 . ) ; yea, t h a t
sometimes in S t . Paul's rapid style, i t r e -
lates to somewhat understood, and which
is to be supplied from t h e tenor of t h e
discourse. Numerous instances of both
these usages of yáp m i g h t be p r o d u c e d ;
b u t I daré not assert, with some learned
men, t h a t t h i s partióle is in the N . T .
sometimes adversalive, a n d even some-
times expletive. T h e attentive reader of
t h e N . T . will, I t r u s t , after this hint,
confute such assertions on any particular
passage for himself.
2. I t denotes connexion or continuation
of the same discourse, as nam often does
in L a t i n , and for in E n g l i s h . M a t . i. 18.
L u k e ix. 4 4 . See Raphelius and W e t s t e i n
on M a t . and H u t c h i n s o n ' s N o t e 1, on
Xenophon Cyrop'aed. p . 1 7 1 , 8vo.
3 . I t is used interrogatively or in ask-
ing a question, t h o u g h even in such in-
stances t h e question asked implies t h e *
reason of somewhat which preceded, either
explicitly or implicitly. See M a t . ix. 5.
xxvii. 2 3 . M a r k xv. 14, But Pílate said
unto them, TI yap KÚKOV írroínae; q. d.
(Why should I crucify him ? or, i" will
not crucify him;) for what evil hath he
done ? Comp. Acts xix. 3 5 . See Black-
wall's Sacied Classics, vol. i. p . 137. [See
D i o g . L . vi. 1. A r i s t . A c h . v. 5 9 4 . and
Krebs. Obs. F l a v . p . 7 1 . Viger. p . 478.]
4. Illative, Wherefore, therefore. Rom.
vi. 19. xv. 2. 1 Cor. i. 26.
5. Affirmative, Verily, truly. J o h n ix.
3 0 . A c t s xvi. 3 7 . 1 Cor. ix. 10. 1 T h e s s .
ii. 2 0 , where see M a c k n i g h t , J a m . iv. 14.
Rom. xv. 27, where we m a y observe i t is
t h u s used after t h e V . ivDÓKno-av r e p e a t e d ;
and in t h i s manner t h e learned H o o g e -
veeu's note on Vigerus D e Idiotism. ch.
vii. sect. 11. reg. 6, r e m a r k s , t h a t yap is
frequently applied in t h e G r e e k w r i t e r s .
[ T h e following usages are noted b y
Schleusner. Although. J o h n iv. 44. Rom.
ix. 15, 17. But. A c t s viii. 3 9 . (where
some say wherefore.) Rom. iv. 13, 15.
v. 7. ix. 6.]
* " Vix ausim affirmarc ( s a y s the learned
H o o g e v e e n o n V i g e r u s D e I d i o t i s m . cap. viii. sect. ' M e m . 1. 2 . 1. E c c l u s . x x x v i i . 5. and then foi pka-
5 . reg. 3 , w h o m s e e ) , soli serviré interrogationi citra sitre iu calhig. X e n . d e R e p . h. i i . 1. S e c F i s c h .
u l l a m causiE redditionem."
r E E
T A S T i r P , yasépoc, and by contraction
ya^pde, ?/.
I. The belly. Henee used by a figure
for a person given to his belly, or glut-
tony *. occ. T i t . i. 12. So H e s i o d , speak-
i n g of some shepherds, Theogon. line 2 6 ,
calis t h e m KCIK iXéyxta, P A S T E ' P E S Siov.
See Suicer Thesaur. in Tariip, and W e t -
stein on T i t , i. 12. [ D o n a t . ad T e r . Phor.
v. 7, 15.]
I I . The womb, whence t h e phrase kv
ya^pX ejEiv to have in the womb, i. e. to be
with child. M e t . i. 18. & al. I t implies all
t h e time from the conception to t h e birth ;
b u t crvXXap£áv£iv iv y a - r p i , L u k e i. 3 1 , is
to conceive in the womb, lo become with
child. B u t these phrases are elliptical,
yóvov or íptpvov afcetus or embryo being
understood. 'JLv yct=rpí íyz > ^ iv
'anc
y ^p ív a l
Xa&zív, are used by the Greek w r i t e r s .
See Wetstein on M a t . i. 18, and Bos E l -
lips. [See Gen. xxxviii. 24. J u d g . xiii. 5.
Atlien. x . p . 4 5 . Pausan. Mess. c. 3 3 . A r -
temid. Oneir. ii. 18. iii. 3 2 . ]
P E ' , an A d v .
1. Indeed, truly, surely, at least. Acts
ii. 18. Rom. viii. 3 2 . 1 Cor. iv. 8. ix. 2.
& al.
2. Yet truly. L u k e xi. 8. xviii. 5.
3 . I t is postfixed t o several o t h e r p a r -
ticles, b u t seems always to preserve some-
w h a t of its affirmative meaning.
T E E ' N N A , ag, i¡.—Gehenna. Vaierva
is used by t h e L X X for t h e H e b . t r ü n u ,
Josh. xviii. 16. So Yízvva of t h e N . T . is
in like manner a corruption of t h e two
H e b . words, a valley, and D 1 j n H i n -
nom, t h e ñame of a person who was once
the possessor of it. T h i s valley qf Hin-
nom lay near Jerusalem, and had been the
place of those abominable sacrifices in
which t h e idolatrous J e w s burned their
children alive to Molech, Baal, or t h e Sun.
A particular place in t h i s valley was called
T o p h e t , and the valley itself t h e valley of
T o p h e t , from the firestove, H e b . fisn, in
which they b u r n e d their children to Mo-
lech. See 2 K i n g s xxiii. 10. 2 Chron.
xxviii. 3 . J e r . vii. 3 1 , 32. x i x . 5, 6. xxxii.
3 5 , and comp. H e b . and E n g . Lexicón, in
nna I . and I ^ D , and MOAOX below.—
F r o m t h i s valley's having been t h e scene
of those infernal sacrifices, and probably
too from its continuing after t h e time of
k i n g Josiah's reformation (2 K i n g s xxiii.
* [ I t is used also for food i n X e n . Cyr. i. 2 8 .
, Prol. x i i . p. 7 . ]
 I 1
E A 143 r E N

10.) a place of abominable jillhincss and '• exult, or from to deride.—To laugh,
pollution (see Sense I I . below); the J e w s , be merry. occ. L u k e vi. 2 1 , 2 5 .
in our Saviour's t i m e , used t h e compound Té\(i>£, WTOC, ó, from yzXátú.—Laugh-
word DJHJ for hell, the place of the ter, mirth. occ. J a m . iv. 9.
damned. . This appears from t h a t word's Te.pi'Cd), from yépw.— Tofill. M a r k iv.
being t h u s applied by t h e Chaldee T a r - 37- [xv. 36.] L u k e xiv. 2 3 . xv. 16. [John
gums on R u t h ii. 12. Ps. cxl. 12. Isa. xxvi. ii. 7. vi. 13. Rev. viii. 5. xv. 9 . * G e n . x l v .
lo. xxxiii. 14. & al. and by the Jerusalem
17-]
T a r g u m , and t h a t of J o n a t h a n Ben Uziel,
r E ' M Í 2 , from the H e b . t a to increase,
on Gen. iii. 24. xv. 17- comp. 2 E s d r a s ,
fill; or Arabic CU to abound, be full; or
Apocryph. ii. 29.
Syriac tDDJ to be full. Comp. H e b . and
I. In the N . T . Ttévva TS wvpoe, A E n g . Lex. in t u . — T o be full. Mat. xxiii.
Gehenna offre, M a t . v. 2 2 , does, I a p p r e - 2 5 , 27 (where see W e t s t e i n ) , L u k e xi.
hend, in its outward and primary sense, 39. Rev. iv. 6. [ G e n . xxxvii. 2 4 . 2 Mace,
relate to t h a t dreadful doom of being iv. 6. Soph. P h i l . 8 7 2 . ]
burnt alive in the valley of Hinnom (as Tsve.it, de, }/, from yívoQ.
t h e innocent victims above mentioned, see I. A generation, a descent, or single
Grotius on M a t . or as those executed on
succession qf men from father to son. Mat,
the s t a t u t e s , Lev. 2 0 , 14. xxi. 9, see Dod-
i. 17. So H o m e r , speaking of Néstor,
d r i d g e ) ; t h o u g h this, as well as t h e other
II. i. line 2 5 0 ,
degrees of p u n i s h m e n t mentioned in t h e
context, m u s t , as Doddridge has r e m a r k - Tt¡¡ 8' rfa Siío fxh TENEAf ¡lépi-xa» av8fií>7rwi>
ed, be ultimately referred to t h e invisible 'E3>Si«9', •
world, and to t h e future vengeance of an T w o gcncraüons n o w had p a s s ' d away. POPE.
offended God.
H e r o d o t u s also often uses t h e word in t h e
I I . I t commonly denotes immediately
same sense, as lib. i. cap. 3 . AevTÉpn—
hell, the place or slate of the damned, as
r E N E H ~ i , in t h e second generation ; and
M a t . v. 29, 30. x. 2 8 . comp. M a t . xxiii.
15. J a m . iii. 6. A n d in M a r k ix. 4 3 , 4 4 , cap. 7. "Ap^avree tirl Sito Kat eiKom PE-
&c. our L o r d seems to allude to t h e N E A 2 itvSptov,—TTOAQ i¡apa irárpoc
%
CKSE-

worms which continually preyed on t h e XÓperoc ri)v ápx')

!/
" " R u l i n g for two-and-
dead careases t h a t were cast out into t h e t w e n t y generations—the son succeeding
valley of Hinnom, Teévvav' a n d to t h e t h e father in t h e government." See more
perpetual fire t h e r e k e p t u p to consume in Raphelius and W e t s t e i n .
them. Comp. Ecclus. vii. 17. J u d i t h xvi. I I . A generation or race of m e n , living
17, and see the learned Joseph Mede's a t t h e same t i m e . M a t . x i . 16. xii. 3 9 , 4 1 .
works, fol. p . 3 1 . [ x v i . 4. xvii. 17.] xxiii. 3 6 . Comp. M a t .
xxiv. 3 4 . L u k e x i . 2 9 , 3 0 . & seq. xvii. 2 5 .
r E 9 2 H M A N i r , or, as t h e best M S S .
A c t s viii. 3 3 , a n d see D o d d r i d g e ' s note on
read, r E G S H M A N E r . Undeclined, H e b .
—Gethsemane. A word compounded either t h i s last t e x t . So L u k e xvi. 8, The chiU
of the H e b . «'J a valley, and fnüf fatness, dren of this world are wiser itc rr)v yevéav
as being a very fruitful valley, or r a t h e r , rr)v iavrSiv in their generation, i. e. in t h e
according to Capellus and Lightfoot, of generation of m e n , wherein t h e y live.
ni a press, and \a\lf oil, as denoting a Comp. A c t s xiii. 3 6 . [ S c h l e u s n e r adds,
place of oil-presses. T h i s l a t t e r deriva- M a r k viii. 12, 3 8 . i x . 19. xiii. 3 0 . L u k e
tion is confirmed by observing t h a t it a p - i. 4 8 . ix. 4 1 . xi. 2 9 , 3 0 , 3 1 , 5 0 , 5 1 . xvii.
pears from Luke xxii. 3 9 , t h a t this place 2 5 . xxi. 3 2 . Acts ii. 4 0 . Phil. ii. 15. H e b .
lay near t h e Mount of Olives, occ. M a t . iii. 10. Eccl. i. 4 . H e gives also, I t h i n k
xxvi. 3 6 . M a r k xiv. 3 2 . See Capellus in r i g h t l y , another m e a n i n g . ]
Pole Synops. and Lightfoot, H o r . H e b . in I I I . \_The time in which such a race
M a t . xxvi. 36. Uves, and thence generally an age or pe-
Teírtov, OVOQ, o, }/, q. yeirtav or yrfiroír, riod. T h u s Lxike vii. 3 1 . A c t s xiv. 16.
from yéa or yíj a land, couniry.—A neigh- xv. 2 1 . E p h . iii. 5. Col. i. 2 6 . T o t h i s
bour, q. d. one of the same couniry, a head Schl. refers Acts viii. 3 3 , " W h o
countryman. occ. L u k e xiv. 12. xv. 6, 9. can speak (fitly) of his t i m e , of t h e t i m e
J o h n ix. 8.—In t h e L X X it generally in which he l i v e d ? " Pie says also t h a t t h e
answers to t h e H e b . pw an inhabitant.
[ J e r . vi. 2 1 . Job xxvi. 5 . ] * [ I t is construed with an accusative o f the s u b -
ject, and genitive o f the filling matter. S e e P o l i .
TEAA'ÍJ, <5, from t h e H e b . h¿ or i»J lo O n o m . i. 0 9 . X e n . H e l l . vi. 2 , 1 4 . and vii. 2 , 2 3 . ]
 TEN 144 T E N

word sometimes signifies, metaphorically, TévecriQ, iog, A t t . EIOQ, y, {rom ycíropai

disposilion; and t h a t this is i t s meaning to be born.
in L u k e xvi. 8, " Wiser in their disposi- I. Scott, on M a t . i. 1, shows t h a t
tion, or n a t u r e . " B r . says, t h a t in this in t h e Greek writers i t signifies ori-
place i t means family, " Have more r e - ginal extract, descent, birth. H e n e e in
gard t o t h e i r family." T h i s is a b s u r d ; N . T .
b u t t h e word h a s this meaning in a wider I I . Birth. occ. J a m . i. 2 3 , r o irpóo-airov
or narrower sense frequently. See J o - rrjs yevéo-EWQ civrS, the face of his b i r t h , i. e.
seph. A. v. 1, 5. Gen. xxxi. 3 . Lev. xxv. his native or natural face. [ S o S c h . aud
4 1 . J e r . viii. 3 . T o this meaning Schleus- B r . ]
ner refers, Mat. i. 17. b u t without reason. I I I . Successive generation, descent. occ.
I t means posteriiy in E s t h . ix. 2 8 . N u m . M a t . i. 1, ¡OÍ€XOQ yEvéo-Eüje the book of the
xiii. 2 3 . Joscph. A . i. 10. 3 . I t is t h e generation, i. e. the genealogy*. I t seems
same as yéyemc X e n . Cyr. i. 2, 1 3 . ] an Hebraical expression answering to t h e
Tti'eakoyéw, w, from yEVEa a generation, H e b . m b í n I f J D , as i t does in t h e L X X of
and Xóyoc an account.—To reclcon a ge- Gen. v. 1. See Wolfius on M a t . i. W e t -
ncalogy, descent, or pedigree. occ. H e b . stein cites from Herodotus, lib. ii. yívta-
vii. G. [1 Chron. v. 1. X e n . Symp. iv. Xoyiuai SE civrwv r>)v F E ' N E S I N , t h e y
51.] reckon their genealogy or descent.
FeycaXoyía, ae, y, from t h e s a m e . — A I V . Tp¿y¡0£ r i / c yzvítrEbiQ, the whecl,
genealogy. occ. 1 T i m . i. 4. T i t . iii. 9. course, of (our) exislence seems t o denote
See Wolfius and Wetstein on 1 T i m . and our life; so GEcumenius explains t h e
Doddridge a n d M a c k n i g h t on both texts. phrase by rijv C^nv rjpüv. occ. James iii.
[ G r o t i u s t h i n k s t h e Apostle refers t o t h e 6. comp. Tpóx°e- [See Wisd. vii. 5. J u d i t h
CEones of t h e Gnostics, a n d nll&D of t h e xii. 1 8 t . ]
J e w s ; b u t Schleusner says r i g h t l y , t h a t r£j/£n), ?;c, )/, from yEÍvofiai to be born.
it is far more probable t h a t h e refers to —A birth, a being born. occ. J o h n i x . 1,
t h e foolish passion of t h e Jews for reckon- where Wetstein shows t h a t ¿V yEVErye,
i n g t h e i r ancestors, a n d m a k i n g n e w p e - from the birth, is a common expression in
digrees from t h e fragments in prívate t h e Greek writers. [ L e v . x x v . 4 7 . Pol.
hands. Some perhaps abused these, to iii. 2 0 . 4 . Diod. S. v. 3 2 . ]
show t h a t Jesús did not descend from D a - P E N N A ' í l , ü, from n j p to get, obtain
vid ; or, on t h e other hand, t h e Jewish (which H e b . verb t h e L X X render b y
Christians by means of these asserted t h e i r yEyváu), Zech. xiii. 5 . ) ; see Gen. iv. 1.
superiority to t h e Gentile converts.] O r is i t not r a t h e r from t h e H e b . j:3 to
Ifgp' ' Tevecría, <ov, ra, from yÉv£<ri£. I t is form, machínate
1
X?
properly a N . a d j . neut. p l u r . agreeing I . To get, beget, genérate. M a t . i. 2. &
with 'Saipitóaiafeastings understood. See al. freq. comp. Acts xiii. 3 3 . H e b . i. 5 .
Bos Ellips. p . 1 8 4 . — A birth-day or r a t h e r 1 Cor. iv. 15. [ G a l . iv. 23.] M a t . i. 2 0 ,
the feastings and other tokens of mirth that which is, iv avrrj y£vvr¡dév, begotten
observed on the birth-day. T o t h i s p u r - in her. YEWCIÜI, when applied to females,
i c

pose Suidas explains it by y Si iviavrS does not signify to conceive, ( t h a t is o-vX-

£m<l>oiT<¡>cra r5 re)(6Évro£ pvypy, the annualXapigcivo), L u k e i. 2 4 , 3 1 , 3 6 . ) b u t to
commemoraiion of one's birth. occ. M a t . bringforih." Scott. See next Sense, a n d
xiv. 6. M a r k vi. 2 1 . W e find from Gen. Bp. Pearson on t h e Creed, A r t . ii. p .
xi. 2 0 , t h a t so anciently as t h e time of 117. edit. fol. 1662. N o t e t .
Joseph, Pharaoh k i n g of E g y p t did in like I I . To beget spiritually, i. e. convert
m a n n e r make a feast u n t o all his servants to t h e Christian faith. 1 Cor. iv. 15.
on his birth-day ( H e b . nibtl D I ' , L X X Philem. ver. 10, where see M a c k n i g h t .
y pepa yEvéo-ewe); a n d from H e r o d o t u s , III. To bring forih as t h e female.
lib. ix. cap. 109, we learn t h a t t h e Persian L u k e i. 1 3 , 5 7 . John xvi. 2 1 . T h e p r o -
k i n g s observed t h e same custom. T a r o rb
SEÍTTVOV Trapaanevá^srai cnra'É, - a iviavrS,
* [ T h i s word i n M a t . i. 1 8 . is referred b y S c h .
iipépy rr¡ ' E r E ' N E T O Bao-iXevc. T h i s and B r . to Sense I I . C o m p . L u k e i. 1 4 . and G e n .
supper is prepared once a year on the day x l . 2 0 . ]
in which the king was born. For the -)- [ S c h . n o w thinks that rp. y . m e a n s ihc eari'U
sense here assigned to eyéye-o, comp. lib. i. or K ' o r M . ]
X W h e n c e also m a y b e derived the S a x o n cennan
cap. 1 3 3 . [ S e e Schwarz- ad Olear, de St.
io beget, and henee, b y the w a y , the E n g . kin, kind,
p. 2 8 2 . ] kindle (bring forth), & c . C o m p . under TEIIW,
 T E N 145 P E T

íárj'e writers apply i t in t h e same sense. t h a t t h e profane writers apply rw yívti iii
See W e t s t e i n on M a t . i. 16 *. t h e same sense. [Sch. says, t h a t in Acts
I V . I n Pass. Tsvvaópai, To be bom. iv. 6. a n d Gal. i. 14, t h e meaning is order
M a t . i. 16. ü . 1. & al. comp. John iii. 3 , or sect. See E t y m . ]
4, 5, 6, 7 . Teputría, as, )';, from yépiov.-—An as-
V. To produce, genérale, occasion. sembly of eiders or oíd men, a senate, in
2 T i m . ii. 2 3 . So Plato E p . BXag,;v fjSov?) L a t i n , senatus, which is derived in like
Kal \vTrr¡v P E ' N N A Í , Pleasure generales manner from seuex, an oíd man. occ. A c t s
h u r t a n d grief. [ L o n g . vii. 2. S e e P a l a i r e t . v. 2 1 , w h e r e see Wolfius and Wetstein.
Obs. P h . p . 4 7 1 . ] T h e L X X frequently use t h e same phrase
Tévvr¡pa, aros, fb, from yeyévvripái, yeparríav rtov viiov 'ItrpahX, for t h e Heb.
perf. pass. of yevváw. PNltií » >J2 >jpl, as Exod. iii. 16. iv. 2 9 .
4

I. Offspring, brood, of animáis. M a t , (comp. 1 M a c . xii. 6. 2 Mac. i. 10. iv. 4 4 .

iii. 7. xii. 3 4 . & al. comp. 'ExtóVít I I . xi. 2 7 . 3 Mac. i. 8 ) ; a n d Josephus, A n t .
[ L u k e iii. 7- Josh. xv. 14. Ecclus. x. 19. lib. xii. cap. 3 . § 3- cites a letter of A n -
1 Mac. i. 4 0 . ] tiochus t h e G r e a t , wherein t h a t prince, in
I I . Fruit, produce, of vegetables. M a t . like manner, twice calis t h e Jemish senaté
xxvi. 2 9 . L u k e xii. 18. Raphelius shows yepacria ; and h e himself applies t h e same
t h a t Polybius [ i . 7 1 . 1-] several times t e r m to t h e assembly of Jemish elders at
uses yEvvr'ifiara for t h e fruits of the Alexandria in E g y p t , D e Bel. lib. vii. cap.
ground; and Anácreon caíls mine yóvov 10. § 1. Comp. u n d e r ~Zwílpiov.
apwéXa, t h e fruit or offspring of the vine. Téptov, ovros, ó . — A n oíd man,. ocC. J o h n
Ode 1. line 7. See also Wetstein a n d iii. 4. So called, say t h e G r e e k Ety¿
Campbell on M a t . a n d L X X in [ E x . mologists, q. yéav op5¡v looking on thé
xxiii. 1 0 . ] H a b . iii. 17. earth, for
III. Fruit, produce, effect. occ. 2 Cor.
ix. 10. [Hos. x . 13.] " With downeast loóles he views his place o f birth, _
A n d bows h i s bended trunk to naother Earth."
Vtvv7\rriQ, LOQ, A t t . £<ü£, ?/, from yevváio.
A birth. occ. M a t . i. 18. L u k e i. 14. [ H o s . So t h e L a t i n silicernium signifies a stoop-
ii. 3 . ] ing oíd man, from silex the pavement, and
Tíwíiwe, v> ° > from
v
yevvátú.—Bom, cerno lo behold^
produced. occ. M a t . x i . 1 1 . L u k e vii. 2 8 . Vévopaí, Mid.
Comp. L X X in J o b x i . 2 and 12. xiv. 1. I. To taste meat. or d r i n k with t h é
xv. 14. xxv. 4. tongue or palate. M a t . xxvii. 3 4 . L u k e
Vivos, eos, s e , ró, from obsol. yévto to xiv. 24. J o h n ii. 9. Col. ii. 2 1 .
form, or yívopai to become, be bom.
I I . To eat. A c t s x. 10. xx. 1 1. xxiii.
I. A kind, species. M a t . xiii. 4 7 . xvii. 14. comp. ver. 1 3 . and see R a p h e l i u s ,
2 1 . M a r k ix. 2 9 . 1 Cor. xiv. 10. [ G e n . Elsner, Wolfius, a n d K y p k e on Acts x .
i. I I . H e s . O p p . 11.] 10. a n d H u t c h i n s o n ' s N o t e 4 , on X e n o -
I I . Offspring. Acts xvii. 2 8 . Rev. xxii. phon Cyri Expedit. p . 9 8 . 8í"o. 1 S a m .
16. Observe, t h a t in A c t s S t . Paul r e - xiv. 2 4 .
fers to several (TÍVES) of the heathen poets, I I I . To taste, experience, whether good,
and accordingly t h e words h e cites a r e
Heb. vi. 4 , 5 . 1 P e t . ii. 3 ; or evil, M a t .
found not only in A r a t u s , b u t Cleanthes
xvi. 2 8 . J o h n viii. 5 2 . Pleb. ii. 9. [ I t a p -
also, i n a h y m n to J ú p i t e r , says,"EK SOY
pears t o be r a t h e r used in t h e sense of
T A P TE'NOS "ESMEN.
V
See Wolfius,
being a partaker of. L u k e xiv. 2 4 . H e h .
W e t s t e i n , a n d C u d w o r t h ' s Intellect. Syst.
vi. 4 . 1 P e t . ii. 3 . Comp. P s . xxiii. 8.
vol. i. book 4. p . 4 7 5 , 4 3 3 . edit. Birch.
Prov. xxxi. 18. H e r o d . vi. 5. Soph. T r a c h .
I I I . Afamily, kindred, A c t s iv. 6. vii.
1 1 0 8 . ] — T h e word is often used in t h e
13. [xiii. 2 6 . J u d i t h x v i . 1 4 . ]
sense of experiencing b y t h e profane
I V . A stock or race of men descended
writers (see Scott otí M a t . xvi. 2 8 , a n d
from a common parent. A c t s [iv. 3 6 . ] vii.
Alberti on H e b . vi. 4 . ) , a n d several t i m e s
19. [xviii. 2 . ] 2 Cor. x i . 2 6 . G a l . i. 14.
in t h e L X X answering to t h e H e b . £3íts,-
P h i l . iii. 5 . [ G e n . xi. 6. E s t . ii. 10. I s .
as P s . xxxiv. 8. Prov. x x x i . . 18. I t does
xliii. 2 0 . ]
not however appear t h a t to taste of death
V . A nation, country. M a r k vii. 2 6 .
is an Hebraism, or t h a t this expression is
A c t s iv. 3 6 . See Wetstein, who shows ever used in t h e Oíd T e s t a m e n t ; t h o u g h
* [ S e e also B a m e s ad E u r . I p h . A . 4 7 4 , 6 3 9 . fllD nlN~), to see death, i s , P s . lxxxix. 4 8 ,
and Pfochen, de Purit. L i n g . N . T . § 4 3 . ] or 4 9 . But «nía Caito, to taste death,

L
 146 r i N

oceurs n o t only in t h e Syriac versión of E u r . H e c . 16. Coluth. 2 7 1 . T h e L X X

M a t . xvi. 2 8 . J o h n viii. 5 2 . H e b . i i . 9. have yij for "j<A> in J e r . x x i x . 7. xxxiv.
b u t also in t h e works of Ephraem * . See 22. & al. b u t t h e H e b . word m a y stand
M a r s h ' s Note on Michaelis's Introduction for región.^
t o N . T . vol. i. p . 4 0 3 . V. The terraqueous globe, or globe of
Teupyítu, w, from yewpyóe.—To cultívate earth and water, as distinguished either
or lili the earth, whence pass. Tewpyeópai, from t h e material or from t h e holy hea-
Sjuat To be cultivatecl, tilled as t h e e a r t h . vens. See M a t . v. 18, 3 5 . vi. 10. x v i .
occ. H e b . vi. 7. [ 1 Chron. xxvii. 2 6 . ] 19.
Ttúpywv, e, TO, from yeíopyoe-—Hus- V I . The earth or ground in general.
bandry, or r a t h e r Cultivaled ground, A r - M a t . x. 2 9 . [xv. 3 5 . ] xxv. 18. & al.
vum. I n t h e N . T . i t is used only in a r H ' P A S , aroc, aoc, wc, TO, from yípwv
iigurative sense. occ. 1 Cor. iii. 9. comp. an oíd man.—Oíd age. occ. L u k e 1. 36-
J o h n x v . 1. Isaiah xxviii. 2 3 ' — 2 9 , a n d [ G e n . xxi. 7. Ecclus. iii. 2 3 . viii. 7 - ]
see Bp. Lovvth's Note on ver. 2 3 . I n t h e TnpácrKii), or ynpáta, from yrjpae.— To
L X X yewpyíov several times answers t o grow or be oíd. occ. J o h n xxi. 18. [ G e n .
t h c H e b . mu? a Jield. See Prov. xxiv. 3 0 . xviii. 1 3 . R u t h i. 12. of things H e b . viii.
xxxi. 16. rPoll. i i . 2 2 1 . ] 13. Xen. de Vect. i. 4.]
Tewpyoe, 5, o, from yéa or y>; the earth, Tívopai, ylyvofjai, OT ydvopai, from
and í'opya perf. mid. of obsol. '¿pyw to ivork. ydvu) or yévoj toform.
See u n d e r "Epyov. I . To be made or formed, lo become.
I . One who tilleth the earth or ground, M a t . iv. 3 . J o h n i . 1 2 , 1 4 . i i . 9. A c t s
a husbandman. 2 T i m . ii. 6. J a m . v. 7- xxvi. 2 8 . & al. Comp. Rom. i. 3 . — A c t s
I I . Particularly, A husbandman who xii. 18, T P apa 6 nérpoe ' E r E ' N E T O ,
cullivates vines, a vine-dresser. M a t . xxi. W h a t was become of P e t e r . T h a t t h i s
3 3 . J o h n xv. 1 . & al. freq. [ P a l a i r . Obss. phraseology is used in t h e same sense b y
p. 358.] t h e Greek w r i t e r s , is proved by Raphelius,
r?7 ve, >;•
5
Elsner, Wolfius, a n d Wetstein.—Tévto-Qai
I . The earth, land, or ground, considered Le, To become or be turnea into. L u k e
as íit or unfit for producing fruit. M a t . xiii. 19. J o h n xvi. 2 0 . 1 Cor. x v . 4 5 .
xiii. 5 , 8, 2 3 . M a r k iv. 2 8 . comp. H e b . T h i s is a Hellenistical phrase, answering
vi. 7. [ J o h n xii. 2 5 . Gen. i i . 1 2 . Joel i. to t h e H e b . ? ¡Tin, for which i t is often
J

10.] used b y t h e L X X , as Gen. i i . 7 . & a l .

I I . The dry land or ground, as distin- freq. [ I n t h e same sense as in A c t s xii.
guished from t h e waters. L u k e v. 1 1 . 18, we find t h e word in M a t . x . 2 5 . i. e.
J o h n xxi. 8, 9, 1 1 . & al. [Jonah i. 1 3 . ] to become, or be in any condition, a n d so
I I I . A particular land, truel, or coun- ( t h o u g h with a sense of progress in time)
iry. M a t . i i . 6, 2 0 , 2 1 . iv. 1 5 . ix. 2 6 . & M a t . v. 4 5 . xii. 4 5 . Rom. vii. 1 3 . 1 Cor.iii.
al. O n M a t . xxvii. 4 5 , where irao-av rr¡v 18. iv. 9. 2 Cor. vii. 14. F r o m this sense of
yi]v denotes all the L a n d of Judea, comp. progress, comes another, where gradual
L u k e iv. 2 5 , and see Doddridge's N o t e . change is implied, as M a t . iv. the stones
[_It is used for an island. A c t s xxvii. 3 9 . may become or be changed into bread. J o h n
comp, xxviii. 1. and see G e n . xii. 1 0 . xiii. ii. 9. xvi. 2 0 . 1 P e t . ii. 7- I am inclined
3 0 . E x . vii. 1 9 . for similar uses of Y"1N. to t h i n k t h a t this too is t h e origin of t h e
' I I yij TIVOQ is used for one's country. A c t s pirrases, ' I t became daylight' or ' I t be-
vii. 3 1 . comp. G e n . xii. 2.] came dark.' M a t . viii. 1 6 . xiv. 1 5 , 2 3 .
I V . The land, of Canaan namely, b u t xvi. 2-. xxvii. I , 5 7 . M a r k vi. 4 7 . H e r o d .
figuratively and spiritually denoting hea- i. 198. ii. 1 2 1 . iii. 8 5 . Exod. x . 1 3 . ]
ven. M a t . v. 5 . comp. P s . x x x v i i . 1 1 , 2 9 , I I . To be created, made, or produced
and see Campbell's N o t e on M a t . [Schl. from nolhing. John i. 3 , 10. Heb. xi. 3 .
adds very absurdly M a t . xxiv. 3 0 , and [ A d d J a m e s iii. 9. G e n . i i . 4 . I s . xlviii.
very doubtfully, A c t s iv. 2 6 . See E p h . 7. From this sense of actual crealion,
vi, 3 . I t would appear t h a t yij is used carne others connected with i t , as to in-
also for city. See M a t . x . 1 5 . x i . 2 4 , and slilute, of t h e sabbath. M a r k ii. 2 7 , where
lierhaps i i . 6 . yij "Iu8a city qf Judea. t h e Syriac has to créate, a n d of t h e law
See Schol. a d ']Esch. S e p t . T h e b . 1 0 5 . of Moses, G a l . i i i . 17. T h e compleiion
of crealion is implied, Pleb. iv. 3.]
* [It i«¡ also a Rabbirúcal-phrase. See Beresch. I I I . To be evenlually, t h a t is, lo hap-
Bab. 0. 9 . ] pen, occur, come to pass. M a t . i . 2 2 . x x i .
 ri N 147 ri N

4. xxiv. 6 . [ M a r k v. 14.] & al. Mr) Elsner shows t h a t t h e purest Greek wri-
May it not be! God forbid! ters use t h e phrase in t h e same sense.
L u k e x x . 1C. Rom. iii. 4, 6, 31. & al. [ S e e sense V I L ]
I t is an elegant a n d emphatic form of V I . To be celebrated, as a feast or
deprecating or denying, in which latter public solemnity. M a t . xxvi. 2. John [ii.
view it is frequently applied by Arrian, I.] x. 2 2 . So Xenophon, H i s t . GrKC. lib.
E p i c t e t . as Raphelius h a t h shown on iv. "IciBpia r i T N E T A I , T h e Isthmian
Rom. iii. 4 * . [ A d d M a t . xxvi. 56. games are celebrated, lib. \m. T a '0\íp~
xxvii. 5 4 . xxviii. 1 1 . M a r k v. 14. ix. 2 1 . Trta r i T N E T A I , T h e Olympian games
xi. 2 3 . xiii. 19. L u k e i. 2 0 . Gen. xlvi. are celebrated. [ 2 K i n g s xxiii. 22.]
33. T o this head we m u s t also refer V I L To be fulfdlcd, accomplished, [as
such phrases as " there aróse a storm," a prophecy. 1 Cor. xv. 54. as a tvish or
t h a t is where the occurrence of any fact is command. M a t . vi. 10. xxvi. 4 2 . L u k e
expressed. M a t . viii. 2 4 . ix. 16. xiii. 2 1 . xi. 2. xxii. 42. xxiii. 3 4 . as a law. M:ít.
xxv. 6. xxvii. 5 . xxviii. 2. M a r k i. 1 1 . ii. v. 18. (comp. 17.) T h i s sense is closeiy
2 1 . iv. 17, 3 7 , 3 9 . ix. 7. L u k e iii. 22.
connected with sense V.]
iv. 2 5 , 3 6 . vi. 4 8 , 4 9 . ix. 3 4 . xxii. 2 1 . V I H . Of place, followed by iv or he,
N o t very remote from this is t h e sense, To be in or at. M a t . xxvi. 6. M a r k ix.
To befall. Gal. iii. 14. L u k e xix. 9.] — 3 3 . [ L u k e i. 4 4 . J o h n vi. 21.] 2 T i m . i.
Followed by another verb with nal before 17. Acts xx. 16. xxi. 17- [ x x v . 15.] In
it, it means To come topass, to happen that t h e 2d aor. with K a - a or ÉTTÍ following, To
'EyéVtro Kal, It carne topass that—Mat. be come to. L u k e x. 3 2 . xxii. 4 0 . [xxiv.
ix. 10. M a r k ii. 15. Comp. under Kai 14. j 22. J o h n vi. 25.] On t h e former t e x t
'Eyivero is very frequently t h u s used Kypke shows t h a t Herodian, [ i . 7- 3 . ]
without m i intervening between t h e two , Josephus, and P l u t a r c h use t h e phrase
verbs, as M a t . xi. 1. xiii. 5 3 . xix. 1. r E ' N E 3 9 A I K A T A with an accus. in t h e
M a r k i. 9. L u k e i. 22. ii. 1. xi. 14. same sense. [See Krebs. Obss. Flav. p .
Both these last seem Hellenistical forms j 145.]
of expression corresponding to the similar I X . To be born. Rom. i. 3 . G a l . iv. 4,
use of t h e H e b . n>ii. [see Vorst. de H e b r . where see A l b e r t i and Raphelius, who
p . 6 . c. 1.] show t h a t t h e profane G r e e k writers ap-
I V . To be or become in general. M a t . ply t h e V . to t h e same meaning. Comp.
v. 4 5 . vi. 16. viii. 26. L u k e xii. 40. J o h n viii, and see M a c k n i g h t on Rom.
[ T h e verb has really t h e simple forcé of and Gal. [ G e n . iv. 2 5 . xxi. 3. J e r . vi. 2.]
elfil in m a n y cases. M a t . xi. 2 6 . This X . To grow or be formed, as fruit.
is ihy good pleasure, xxiv. 4 4 . xix. 8 . M a t . x x i . 19. [ X e n . de Vcct. i. 3 . ]
L u k e ii. 42. x. 3 6 . J o h n xiii. 2 . x x . 2 7 . X I . Févectdaí iv eavrü, To be come to
A c t s v. 2 4 . x x . 16. 2 P e t . i. 2 1 . I t is himself i. e. to have recovered his senses
then often used with participles. M a r k i. or undersianding. occ. A c t s xii. 1 1 , where
4. 2 Cor. vi. 14.]—Those t h i n g s are said Raphelius shows t h a t Xenophon and P o -
yíveaQái TIVI to be to any one, which he lybius use t h e phrase in t h e like view of
hath. M a t . xviii. 12. Comp. "Eipi V I L recovering from rage, or terror. See als:o
[ I n L u k e xx. 3 3 . the sense is t h e same, Wolfius, Wetstein, and Kypke. [ P o l y b .
b u t we have a genitive. From this dative, i. 49. Xen. An. 1. 5. 15.]
comes the phrase yévecrdái TIVI, used of a X I I . TévecrOai iig vdzv, To come to no-
woman's marrying or having conneclion thing. A c t s v. 36, where Raphelius cites
mith a man; and also t h e phrase to be-
from Polybius t h e similar phrase, iie r o
long to or be under the command of. Rom.
pnSév Karavrcjv. Comp. K y p k e . [ T h e
vii. 2 4 . ] — I n 1 Cor. xv. 20, iyévero is
following phrases are peculiar. Tívtcrdaí
wanting in seven M S S . five of which a n -
pera Tivoe, To be a man's pariner. Mari;
cient, in t h e V u l g . a n d Coptic versions,
xvi. 10. To conduct one's self lomaros
and is rejected from t h e text by G r i e s -
another. A c t s x x . 18. TíveaOai iv rirl,
bach.
To make use of 1 T h e s s . ii. 5 , and in
V. To be done, performed. M a t . vi. 10. Phi!. ii. 7. we may say, Having used
Acts iv. 16. xxi. 30. So with a dative the likencss qf man. Tívscrdaí « T T O radie,
following, To be done to. M a t . viii. 13, To departfrom, L u k e xxiv. 3 1 . ]
ix. 2 9 . xviii. 19. O n which last t e x t riNíi'SItíl, or n r N Ü ' S K Í i . I t is
formed from t h e obsolete V. yvóui to
* [ S e e K u i n o e l on S t . L u k e x x . ] C ] knom, by prefixing t h e rednph'cation.,
L 2
 r rN 148 PAÍÍ

and ínsei'ting ai; before u>, as in LUIXVÍIGKOI [XI. To know how, or (to be oble) t©
from ¡.ivcio), mirplioxu) from irptao, &c. do a n y t h i n g . M a t . xvi. 3 . T h e words
I . To know. M a r k [v. 43.] vii. 2 4 . scio and nescio, are so used in L a t i n , as
ix. 3 0 . [ x v . 45.] L u k e ii. 4 3 . [ix. 1 1 . Nescit vox missa revertí.]
xix. 15. xxiv. 18. J o h n iv. 1. v. 6. A c t s [ X I I . To investígate, especially judi-
i. 7. xvii. 13. So 1 Sam.'iv. 6. 1 Mac. cially. J o h n vii. 5 1 . A c t s xvii. 19, 2 0 .
iii. I I . In t h e Passive, M a t . x . 26. L u k e xxii. 3 0 . xxiii. 2 8 . xxiv. I I . 1 Cor. iv.
viii. 17. xii. 2. A c t s ix. 24. Xen. de V e - 19. 1 Thess. iii. 5 . — T h e following a r e
«at. xiii. 10.] peculiar expressions, To resolve. Luke
I I . Toperceive,feel. M a r k v. 2 9 . L u k e xvi. 4. T h i s is a conimon phrase in
viii. 4 6 . Greek. Schl. quotes Diod. S. iv. 57. P l u -
I I I . To know, be acquainted with, a tarch. L y c u r g . c. 3 . See Bergl. ad A l -
person. M a t . xxv. 24. A c t s xix. 15. 2 Cor. ciph. E p . i. 2 5 . B a r n e s ad E u r . D a n . 4 3 .
v. 16. Comp. J o h n i. 10. [ 4 8 . ii. 2 4 . To think or expect. M a t . xxiv. 5 0 . L u k e
Gen. x x i x . 4 . To be acquainted with a xii. 4 6 . Schl. gives t h e sense to teach,
seienee or, language, &c. A c t s xxi. 3 7 . as found in J o h n v. 4 2 . Rom. ii. 18. and
John vii. 4 9 . 1 Cor. viii. 2. xiii. 9. I n in t h e Passive, in 1 Cor. viii. 3 . Gal. iv.
t h e two last, knowledge of Christianity is 9, adding, t h a t t h e word is so used i n
implied,] Pind. 0 1 . vi. 148. xiii. 3 , b u t i t does n o t
I V . To know, understand. M a t . xii. 7. appear t o m e t h a t this u n u s u a l sense is
xiii. 1 1 . xvi. 3. [xxii. 45.]. M a r k iv. 13. admissible in t h e two first passages. T h e
[viii. 17. xii. 12. xv. 26. L u k e i. 1 8 . ] last I should refer with little hesitation
A c t s viii. 3 0 . [ J o h n iii. 10. vi. 69. vii. to sense V I L , as Sch. himself does 1 Cor,
17. viii. 4 3 . xiii. 12. I add to these, viii. 3.]
passages which Schl. gives under a fresh TXEVKOQ, toe, se, ro, from yXvicve sweet.
head, To consider, b u t without reason, —Sweet wine. occ. A c t s ii. 13. T h e E t y -
M a t . vi. 7. xxiv. 3 9 . L u k e xix. 42. J o h n mologist explains yXeín:oe by ro á7ró rrje
xv. 18. 2 Cor. viii. 9. H e b . iii. 1 0 . ] Xr¡v5 ¿nró'raypa avropárüie tcarappéov airo
V. To know, be conscious of. 2 Cor. r % ^afvXr)Q, Ui SE rSro r A Y K T T A T O N .
v. 2 1 . caí XnrapwTarov, which distils of its own
V I . To know, discern, distinguisk. accord from t h e grapes, which is t h e
M a t . xii. 3 3 . L u k e vi. 4 4 . J o h n xiii. 3 5 . sweetest and smoothest: and t o t h e same
[1 Cor. xiv. 7 . ] 1 J o h n iv. 2, where ob- purpose H e s y c h i u s , rb aTTÓtaypa rrje
serve, t h a t eightecn M S S . read yivwo-KE- <?o.(bvXt¡c, Tfplv -rrarífiy, t h e juice of t h e
-ai; and t h i s reading is followed by t h e g r a p e , before it is trodden. I f i t be
ancient Syriac and V u l g . versions. asked, how t h e r e could be any yXEvuoc
V I L After t h e Hebraical and H e l l e - or sweet wine a t Pentecost ? i t m a y be
nistical u s e , To approve, acknowledge suífieient to reply, t h a t i t appears both
with approbation [ o r love.] M a t . vii. 2 3 . from t h e H e a t h e n and Jewish writers,
Rom. vii. 15. 2 T i m . ii. 19. Comp. J o h n cited by W e t s t e i n on A c t s ii. 1 3 , (whom
x. 14, 15. So we say in E n g l i s h , I don't see,) t h a t t h e ancients h a d a method of
understand, ínstead of I don't approve. preserving t h e sweetness, and, by conse-
Comp. H e b . and E n g . Lexicón in yi» I V . quence, t h e strongly inebriating qualily
[ A d d J o h n viii. 5 5 . xvii. 3. 1 Cor. viii. 3 . of t h e yXzvKOQ for a long time * .
(Sch. gives this m e a n i n g , a n d yet strangely r A Y K T S , ¿ia, i.
explains this passage differently, is taught i I . Sweet, as honey. occ. Rev. x. 9, 10.
by God.) H e b . xiii. 2 3 . ] I I . Sweet, agreeable io, the taste. occ.
V I I I . To know carnally. I t is used J a m . iii. I I , 12. So in Lucian, Dial.
by t h e Greek writers in t h e same sense. A l p h . and N e p t . PAYKY* pEtdpov a sweet
M a t . i. 2 5 . L u k e i. 3 4 . See E l s n e r , stream is opposed t o w h a t is mixed with
W e t s t e i n , K y p k e , [Fessel. A d v . Sacr. ii. t h e sea-water.
14. See G e n . iv. 1. xxiv. 1 6 . ] T A Í i ' S S A , ? e, >/.
;

I X . To think,beware. M a t . xxiv. 5 0 . I . The tongue, of a man. M a r k vii. 33,

L u k e xii. 4 6 . 9,5. L u k e xvi. 2 4 . 1 P e t . iii. 10. & al.
X . TivúaKojv, particip. Thinkíng, re- I I . I t ís used for t h e fiery tongues, or
Jli'cting upon, being mindful of. Rom. vi. 1
flames résembling tongues, which a p -
(i. 2 P e t . i. 2 0 . Raphelius has shown t h a t
t h e profane writers use t h i s participle in * [ I n Job x x x i i . 1 0 . we have uwittp iayX; yhií*
the same manner.
 r N A 149 r N íi

peared over the Apostles on t h e day of thistling, which V. is from the Grcek Krr'tut
Pentecost. Acts ii. 3 . Comp. Isa. v. 2 4 , lo scrape, rub.—A fuller,
p a r t of whose
where we read of WH \wb a tongue (fiame) business it was to comb the cloth ro'ig yvá-
of Jire devouriug t h e stubble. See Wol- rj)oig* mith cards or thislles, and so clear
fius on Acts, a n d B p . Lowth on Isa. i t óf i t s superfluous extremities, i. e. of i t s
III. A tongue, language. [Mark nap, hairs, &c. occ. M a r k ix. 3 . — T h e
xvi.
17.] A c t s i i , 4 , 11. [ E s t . i. 2 2 . ] L X X have several times used this word
I V . A foreign or strange language. for t h e H e b . D21D, which also signifies a
[ A c t s x. 46. xix. 6.] 1 Cor. xii. 3 0 . xiv. 2 , fuller of cloth, from D 1 3 lo wash, rinse, be-
4, o, 6, & al. [ W e find yXcotraa for a cause another p a r t of the fuller''s business
language in Wisd. i. 6. H o m . II. iv. 4 3 8 . was to rinse a n d scour cloths from their
X e n . CEc. xiii. 8, for a dialect. X e n . filth, grease, & c . — [ 2 Kings xviii. 17. Isa.
M e m . iii. 14. 7, a sense noted b y t h e vii. 3 . xxxvi. 2 . T h e word is written also
E t y m . M . I t seems t o be the gift of Kvatptvg, especially, says Harpocratio, in
speaking with tongues in 1 Cor. xiii. 8. A t t i c . O n this change, see H e m s t . ad
as in ver. 1. of t h e same chapter, i t is for L u c . D i a l . Voq. p . 8 6 . O n t h e general
the gift of eloquence. O n i t s being p u t subject, see Theoph. Char. x. P l u t . O p p ,
for a strange language, see Stosch. A r - T . viii. ]>. 108. Schcetg. An.tiqu.it.'Tri-
chasol. CEc. N . T . p . 9 3 . Gataker. ad turae e t Fullonia;. Lips. 1713,]
M a r c . A n t ó n , p . 120, a n d Ernesti L e x . Yví¡awg, a, ó Kai r¡.
Techn. Gr. Rhet. p . 62.] I . Lamfully bom, legitímate, as op-
V. A people speaking a particular lan- posed to vódog spurious, or a baslard.
guage. [ P h i l . ii. 12.] Rev. v. 9. xiv. 6. T h u s used in Herodotus, lib. iii. See
So TXüicrnai, ¿ti, Meíi of different lan- Raphelius, and Wolfius on 1 T i m . i. 2.
guages. Rev. vii. 9. Theodotion uses t h e [Jos. A . iii. 2. 1. a n d o f t e n t . ]
word in t h e same sense for t h e Chald. I I . Genuine, truc, not degeneratefrom.
JK»V, D a n . iii. 2 9 , and plur. emphat. K>2U7Í>, his parents. T h u s it is applied, b u t in a
D a n . iii. 4 , 7, 3 1 . v. 1 9 . spiritual sense, b y S t . Paul. occ. Phil. iv.
TXwertrÓKOLiov, t ¡ , ró, from yXivtrcra a 3 . 1 T i m . i. 2. T i t . i. 4 . — Y v í ¡ o - i o v , ra,
tongue, a n d Kopía to keep, preserve. used as a substantive, Gcnuinencss, sin-
I . Properly, A case to keep the tongues cerity. occ. 2 Cor. viii, 8. [ I n 3 Mace,
qf wind Instruments in. These tongues iii. 13, i t is love, a n d so Schl. translates
yXwtraai, did, I suppose, nearly resemble T i t . i. 4 . ]
t h e reeds which are used in playing on Yvr\alts>g, A d v . from yvíimor.—Genuine-
several sorts of wind-instruments among ly, naluraíly, sincerely. occ. P h i l . ii. 2 0 .
us. See Wetstein on J o h n xii. 6, and [Pol. iv. 3 0 , 2. comp. 2 Mace. x i v . 8.]
Pearce's Note on Longinus, sect. xliv. Fvó(¡iog, », ti, from vétpog a cloud e being
p. 244, edit. 3d. [Krebs. O b s . Flav. p . changed into o, and y assumed after t h e
152. a n d E t y m . M . ] iEolic manner according to E u s t a t h i u s
I I . A purse, or rather perhaps a little [on Iliad, M . p . 489. 1 6 . ] — ^ thick darle,
case or box to put money in. occ. J o h n xii. cloud. occ. H e b . xii. 18. Comp. D e u t . iv.
6. xiii. 2 9 . Josephus, A n t . lib. vi. cap. i. 11. v. 2 2 , in both which passages t h e
§ 2 , uses i t for t h e titile chest or cqffer in Heb. word answering to yvótpog iu t h e
which the Phílistines p u t t h e golden mice L X X is f:j? a cloud; a n d in Exod. x x .
and emerods, and which is called in H e b . 2 ) , a n d in other places, t h e L X X uee
p i s . 1 Sam. vi. 11. T h e L X X also have yvótpog for ?Q1¿' thick darkness. [Job
this word, 2 Chron. xxiv. 8, for t h e H e b . xxiii. 17. Isa. xliv. 2 2 . ]
a chest, cqffer. See also Kypke on Yv¿¡pr¡, rjg, r/, from yivtocKüj or yi'ów, lo.
J o h n xii. [ H e m s t . ad Aristoph. Plut. 7 1 1 . know, ihink, determine.
Helladius, in his Chrestomathia, p . 11. I . An opinión, sentence,judgment. occ,
(ed. Meurs.), says t h a t t h e word was first 1 Cor. i. 10, vii. 2 5 , 4 0 . 2 Cor. viii. 10.
p u t for a case for the tongues qf mind On 1 Cor. vii. 2 5 , Wetstein cites D i o r c -
instruments, a n d t h e n for any case. I t peatedly u s i n g t h e phrase T N O M I I N Al-,
is curious t h a t t h e word was adopted by AON A l , for giving an opinión, or advicc,
t h e Rabbis afterwards. See T a r g . Jon.
and Hieros. on G e n . 1. 26. and Buxtorf. * A s to the modern method of fullíng, see N a -
Lex. T a l m . p . 4 4 3 . ] ture D i s p l a y e d , vol. vi. D i a l . 1 1 . E n g l i s h edition,
rVa0£uj, toe, ó, from yj'aVrw or yi'dtjita 12mo. and UncyclopaxliaBritannica, in FCLI.INGI
-|- |..Strab. vii. p . 4 1 1 . A . says y ^ r i » , ¿> yif¡j.y.-,i\
lo elcar or smoolh a doth by carding. or
 r N a 150
r N ÍÍ

which Kypke also produces from Diodorus 8th verse, But meat, & c ] seem plainly
Sic. and Dionysius Halicarn. On ver. enough to be t h e words of t h e Corinthians
-10, Wetstein quotes KATA* TNSi'MHN in their Epistle t o S t . P a u l , t o which h e
TIPN "EMHN from Herodotus, and KATA' answers iu this and t h e two following
ye Tim "EMI1N TNÍi'MHN from Poly- chapters. I n this view of them this chap-
bius aud iElian. [Sclil. says, tliat in ter will appear much more intelligible
1 Cor. vii. 2 5 . and 2 Cor. viii. 10. i t is than in our English translation. See
r a t h e r to advise; and Hesychius ccrtainly Tillotson, vol. iii. fol. p . 3 6 6 . " [Schleus.
has yvínpnv cíbapc crv/x&ttktvw. See X e n . says, " W e have all t h a t knowledge of t h e
de Vect. iv. 22. and S y m m . J o b xxxviii. Christian religión which shows us t h e
2.] vanity of i d o l s ; b u t t h a t knowledge alone
I I . A design, purpose, occ. Acts x x . 3 . leads to pride." I n 2 Cor. vi. 6. viii. 7,
I I I . Mind, will, consent. occ. P h i l e m . yrüoic is p u t for praclical knowledge qf
ver. 14. Comp. R e v . xvii. 1 3 , 17- O n religión, and in 2 Cor. i i . 14. iv. 6 . x . 5 .
which latter t e x t s Wetstein quotes many Phil. iii. 8. 1 T i m . vi. 2 0 , i t signifies reli-
instances of t h e Greek writers using t h e gión itself, and for j u d g m e n t or prudence
phrases TNQ'MHN "EXEIN, and TNÍ2'- in 1 P e t , iii. 7 . ]
MIIN ÜOIErseAI; and on ver. 17, Yvá¡^7]c, a, o, from yivíiaKw or yvów.—
comp. K y p k e . [ H o r . i. 2 0 7 . ii. 7. T h u c . Knowing, skilful. occ. A c t s xxvi. 3 , where
ii. 8 6 . I n Rev. xvii. 7. Schl. says Decree. see Wolfius, K y p k e , and Bowyer's Con-
See T a y l . a d Demosth. i i . p . 6 0 4 . a n d ject, who r e m a r k , t h a t yvútnv ovra ere are
Theod. 'Dan. ii. 15. E z r a iv. 19. v. 3 . ] here p u t in t h e accusative case absolute,
Pi'wpí'iífíü, from YIVÚITTKOJ or YVÓW to know. which is likewise used by t h e A t t i c Greek
I. [ T o make known, declare. J o h n xv. writers. B u t observe, t h a t t e n M S S .
1 5 . xvii. 2 6 . Rom. ix. 2 3 . 2 Cor. viii. 1. among which t h e Alexandrian, do, in one
Gal. i. 1 1 . E p h . i. 9. vi. 19, 2 1 . Col. i. 2 7 . place or another of t h e sentence, add ÍTTL-
iv. 7- 2 P e t . i. 1 6 . ; i n t h e Passive, Rom. •sápevoc or íibo¡Q knowing. A n d to this
xvi. 2 6 . E p h . iii. S. I n L u k e ii. 15. and purpose our En g l i sh translators, because
1 Cor. xii. 3 , i t is r a t h e r To signify I know. See Wet st ei n a n d Griesbach.
clearly, as in E z e k . xliv. 2 3 . See S t e - 'Emrctpevoe a n d ¿ibaie, however, seem s p u -
phens's T h e s . and J e n s . F e r c . L i t t . p . 3 6 . rious additions t o t h e text, made by copy-
I n 1 Cor. xv. 1, i t is perhaps To admonish ists who did not understand t h e construc-
or put in mind; for w e find w h a t h a d tion. See Michaelis, I n t r o d u c t . t o N . T .
been said before, repeated, and Zonaras, vol. i. p . 3 0 6 . edit. M a r s h . [ T h e word
L e x . col. 4 4 6 , so explains t h a t passage. oceurs in 1 Sam. xxviii. 3 . 2 Kings x x i . 6.
A g a i n in A c t s ii. 2 8 , it is To show, where and answers to a diviner, and so Theodoret,
t h e sense is, Thou reslorest me to life, I n Susannah, v. 4 2 . simply a knower.']
aud Glassius (Phil. S. p . 2 2 3 . ) gives Tvwzbv, ?}, bv, from yivíanKw.
m a n y examples of a notification of a t h i n g I . Known. [Used either of persons or
being p u t for the actual performance of i t . ] t h i n g s , as J o h n xviii. 15, 16. A c t s i. 19.
I I . To know. occ. Phil. i. 2 2 . I n this ii. 14. iv. 10. i x . 4 2 . xiii. 3 8 . xix. 17-
l a t t e r sense, as well as t h e former, i t is xxviii. 2 2 , 2 8 . E z e k . xxxvi. 3 2 . ]
used in t h c profane writers. See Wolfius, I I . Tvwzbi, bt. Persons known to one,
W h i t b y , [ H e s y c h i u s , P h a v o r i n u s , ] and acquainlance. L u k e ii. 4 4 . xxiii. 4 9 . John
Scapula's Lexicón. [ J o b xxxiv. 2 5 . P r o v . xviii. 15, 16. [See P s . Ixxxviii. 8. N e h .
iii. 6 . ] v. 10.]
ri'üiiT¿c, tos, A t t . ¿(ov, ?;, from yiví>aKi>) I I I . Tvwtbv, rb, N e u t . Knowablc, which
or yvúii> to know.—Knowledge. See L u k e may be known. occ. Rom. i. 19. So A r r i a n ,
i. 7 7 . x i . 5 2 . 1 Cor. [i. 5. xiv. 6.] xiii. 2. Epictet. lib. i i . cap. 2 0 . towards t h e be-
2 P e t . i. 5, 6. [iii. 18.] Rom. x i . 3 3 . [xv. ginning. TívtiKTue, orí SSev ETÍ TNÍiSTO'N,
14.] C o l . i i . 3 . l S a m . i i . 3 . O n 1 Cor. viii. 1, áXXa rravrcí ¿iréKpapra, Know t h a t nothing
Raphelius and Wolfius (whom see) t h i n k is to be known or knowable, b u t t h a t all
th a t th e begi n n in g of t h e paren th esis sh oul d things are uncertain. [ S c h l . translatcs
be placed after bivaptv in t h e first verse, Rom. i. 19. " A l t h o u g h t h e y have a know-
and t h e end of i t after av-S t h e last word ledge of God given by himself;" as in
of t h e third. B u t B p . Pearce s a y s , These ii. 4 . rb yfinvrov is p u t for xp??o-ro™/c, and
l ;

words [namcly, we know that we all have sec G e n . ii. 9. in which opinión Bretsch.
knowledge, as als¡> íhosc in ver, 4 . tve know, a g r e e s ; or rb yvtooTvv ~S OeS may be
ikc. to thc er.d of ver. 6- aud likcwifc thc ¡ " W h a t c v c r can be known of God." In
 r o II 151 r o N

A c t s xv. 8. Schl. translates Dear unto | t h u s JEschines in Ctesiph. joins yór\s and
God, &c. (see ytyvúoiaa, sense V I I . ) and ¡ payos a magician together, as P l u t a r c h
so Br. who however adds, or " God h a t h I and L u c í a n do yótiras and airareüvas
decreed all t h i n g s from e t e r n i t y , " b u t cheats; and Plato mentions yóns in com-
wishes to adopt Griesbach's reading, ó pany with <pappaK£vs an enchanter with
iroiüv retira yvwora áir' uiwvoc. In Acts drugs, and coiperiis a cheat. See W e t s t e i n
iv. 16. t h e word means either notable, as on 2 T i m .
our translation has i t , and Bretsch. t h i n k s I I . I n t h e N . T . An impostor, a cheat.
r i g h t , c i t i n g 2 K i n g s x . 12. and P s . lxxvi. occ. 2 T i m . iii. 1 3 . So Josephus, A n t .
1. (and S y m m . Prov. x x x i . 2 3 . where t h e lib. xx. cap. 7. § 5 . (comp. § 6.) mentions
L X X have TTepi^Xeirros) or undoubted, T O H ' T í l N "ANePílIIQNÓiT-cV o x W í l i r a -
which Schl. suggests.] TOIV, t h e impostors (meaning t h e false
T O r r Y ' Z í i . I t seems t o be a word prophets and false Christs) who deceived
formed from t h e sound, like murmuro, the people, d u r i n g t h e government of F é -
mussito, in L a t i n , and murmur, mutter, lix ; and, u n d e r t h a t of F a d u s , h e p a r t i -
grumble, growl, in E n g l i s h . [ I t is pro- cularly specifies one of t h e m , by ñame
perly used, says P h a v o r i n u s , o í t h e noise T h e u d a s , whom hecalls r O ' H S TLS " A N H P ,
of doves.] ibid. cap. 4 . § 1. L u c i a n also has t h e
I . To murmur, mutter, spea/c in a loro phrase T O ' H T A S " A Ñ A P A S , Reviv. t o m .
and indistinct volee, occ. J o h n vii. 3 2 . i. p . 3 9 6 . [ S e e Gottleb. ad Plat. M e n e x .
I I . To murmur from dislike or discon- c. 2 . p . 18. Fisch. ad Phced. § 3 0 . ]
tent, to grumble. occ. M a t . x x . 1 1 . [see T O A r o e A " . H e b . — G o l g o t h a , as t h e
E x . xvi. 7.] L u k e v. 3 0 . J o h n vi. 4 1 , 4 3 , Evangelists i n t e r p r e t it, the place of a
6 1 . [see N u m b . xiv. 2 7 . ] I Cor. x . 10. s/cull. So i t is a plain derivative from t h e
[see N u m b . xiv. 1.] I n t h i s l a t t e r sense H e b . fibibi a skutt, and t h e J e w s in our
it is always used by t h e L X X (unless Saviour's time called t h e place Golgotha ;
perhaps in J u d g . i. 1 4 . ) * , and m o s t c o m - for Golgoltha, dropping t h e l a t t e r b ( 1 ) ,
monly answers to t h e H e b . V\b to murmur, as in t h e S a m a r i t a n versión of N u m . i. 2 2 .
grorvl. [ N . A n t o n i n . ii. 2 1 . A r r . Diss. i n fi}b>, w i t h o u t t h e second b, is used for a
E p i c t . iii. 2 6 . ] s/cull. " N o doubt, saith Stockius, [and
Toyyvcrpbs, 5, ó, from yzyóyyvcrpai, so Schl.] t h e place where C h r i s t was c r u -
perf. pass. of yoyyvfa. cified was called by this ñame, because
I . A murmuring or muttering in g e n e - many slculls of those who h a d suffered
ral, occ. J o h n vii. 12. crucifixión and other capital p u n i s h m e n t s
I I . A murmuring from disconient, a were there scattered u p and down." occ.
grumbling. occ. Acts vi. 1. P h i l . i i 14. M a t . xxvii. 3 3 . M a r k xv. 2 2 . J o h n x i x .
1 P e t . iv. 9. [ E x . xvi. 7, 8, 9, 12. N u m b . 17.
xvii. 1 0 . ] Topos, a, ó, from yéyopa, perf. m i d . of
Ijlgp Toyyv;r¡Q, a, ó, from
0
yoyyv'(a.—A yépüi to be full.
murmurer, grumbler. occ. J u d e ver. 16. I. The burden or lading of a ship. occ.
[ T h e word is applied to t h e H e b r e w doc- A c t s x x i . 3 . H e r o d o t u s [i. 194.]. and D e -
tors, probably from their contentious and mosthenes use t h e N . in t h e same sense,
argumentative t u r n . See Prov. xxvi. 2 1 , See Wetstein. [ E u s t a t h . ad II. O . p . 104,
where Theod. has this word, and t h e 139. any burden. E x . xxiii. 5. 2 K i n g s v.
L X X XoíBopoe- comp. Wisd. i. 10, 1 1 . ]
Tone, TITOS, b, from yoáeo, -naoi, lo moan, I I . Merchandize. occ. Rev. xviii. 1 1 , 12,
which may be either a word formed from Tovtvs, eos, b, from yíyova, perf. m i d .
t h e sound, or dedueed from t h é H e b . nj'J of t h e oíd V. yávbi to genérate, which see,
lo low as an ox. So E u s t a t h i u s derives —A parent. I n t h e N . T . it is used only
yóns from yóos moan, mournful sound, in t h e plural n u m b e r , denoting bolh pa~
saying t h a t yóns means rbv ¡IETO. TO'OY renls, father and mother, as i t also fre-
íirciSovTa, one who utters his incanlations
quently does in t h e profane w r i t e r s * . See
or spells in a mournful tone. Comp. Isa.
W e t s t e i n on M a t . x . 2 1 . Comp. L u k e ii.
viii. 19. xxix. 4. 27, 4 1 . J o h n ix. 18. 2 0 . E p h . vi. 1, a n d
I. A conjurer, an enchanter. I n t h i s u n d e r Tlarrip I I .
sense yóns is used in t h e profane writers ; PO'NY, vos, and aros, rb, from the' H e b .
* [ I n tliis place the u s e of the word i s , I think, to bend down, depress, humble; whence
inexplicable. S c h l . thinks i t a mere conjectural
translation.] * [See Hesiod. Opp. 2 3 3 . Aristoyh. Nub. 9 9 0 . ]
 r P A 152
also t h e L a t . gcnu, G o t h . knu, Saxon.
cneop, Danish and E n g . hiee.—The ¡mee,
which is capable of incurvaiion or being
bent itself, and so of humbling or depress-
ing the whole m a n ; and to this property
and use of the human hice, there is a ma-
nifest reference in every passage of the N .
T . (except L u k e v. 8, and perhaps H e b .
xii. 12.) wherein t h e word occurs. See
A c t s ix. 4 0 . Rom. xi. 4. E p h . iii. 14. Phil.
ii. 10. and on L u k e v. 8, see Wetstein.
[ S e e Isa. xiv. 2 3 . T h e phrase -a yúvara
TiBéviu, is to bend the lcnee. M a r k xv. 19.
L u k e xxii. 4 1 . Acts vii. 60. ix. 4 2 . x. 36.
xxi. 5 . ]
FovvTreréio, io, from yóvv the knee, and
t h e obsol. V. wé-to lo fall.—To fall donn
on the hiees or kneel to one. occ. M a t .
xvii. 14. xxvii. 2 9 . M a r k i. 4 0 . x. 17.
T h e particip. fem. yovvKtrüaa, is used by
Polybius, lib. xv. cap. 2 7 .
Ypcippa, aros, rb, from yiypappai, perf.
pass. of ypáípw to write.
I. A letter or character of literal writ-
ing. occ. L u k e xxiii. 3 8 . (where see W e t -
stein's note, and comp. u n d e r Meaóroixov)
2 Cor. iii. 7- Gal. vi. 1 1 ; on which last
t e x t , see W h i t b y , Doddridge, and W e t -
stein, to whose observations, I t h i n k , we
m a y add, t h a t i t is very n a t u r a l t o s u p -
pose t h a t a person who had been chiefly
accustomed to write H e b r e w (which was
probably St. P a u l ' s case, comp. Phil. iii. 5.
A c t s xxii. 3.), would, when he a t t e m p t e d
to write Greek, form t h e characters strong
and large. B u t compare L a r d n e r ' s H i s -
t o r y of Evangelists and Apostles, ch. xii.
sect. 3 . towards the end, who, with many
o t h e r learned m e n , prefers t h e i n t e r p r e t a -
r o n given in our English translation.
[Schl. and Br. say " H o w long a letter.''
See J e n k i n on t h e Reasonableness, &c.
tom. i. p . 100. T h e word occurs in this
Sense I. in Isa. x x i x . 1 1 . L e v . xix. 28.]
I I . [Any thing committed to wriling,
as a bond or caution. L u k e xvi. where t h e
V u l g . has cautio. Joseph. A n t . xviii. 1. 3 .
ti letter. A c t s xxviii. 2 1 . X e n . H i s t . G r . i.
1, 15. See Jos. Life, § 4 6 , 4 9 . H e r o d . i.
124. The written law, as J o h n v. 4 7 .
w h e r e , however, it may be simply the
'writings of Moses. In vii. 15. Schl". and
B r . give t h e same m e a n i n g : others say
simply, letters or learning, meaning H o w 1 1
s h o u l d . h e have any k n o w l e d g e ; " and I
.should doubt if ypáppara, without the
article, could be used of t h e S c r i p t u r e s ,
though in the singular it is so. See Rom.
¡i. 29. vii. 6. where the letter qf the law is
r p A
meant. I n Rom. ii. 27- I should give t h e
same i n t e r p r e t a r o n with Br., who says,
" T h e y condemn (by their piety) you
who transgress t h e law, though you p r o -
fess to adhere to its letter and to circum-
cision." Schleusner says it there means
" Knowledge of t h e Jewish religión." In
2 Cor. iii. 6, t h e same meaning occurs.
In 2 T i m . iii. 15. ra. kpa ypáppara are
t h e Scriptures of t h e O. T . So Joseph.
A n t . iii. 7- 6. and Philo de V i t . Mos. ii.
p . 179. 2 1 . (ed. M a r g . ) Josephus also
uses iepal /3¿€Xoi. A n t . i. 6. 2 . iii. 6 . 1 . ]
I I I . [The learning acquired from let-
ters or books. Acts xxvi. 2 4 , and John vii.
15. See W e t s t e i n and Kypke on St. J o h n
and X e n . M e m . iv. 2, 2 0 . ]
Tpappar¿vg, IOQ, b, from ypáppa .—A r
scribe.
I . In the L X X this word is frequently
used for a political officer, whose business
it was to assist kings or magistrates, and
to keep an account in writing of public
acts and oceurrences, or of t h e royal r e -
venues. Such an officer is called in H e b .
ibion ^5D. L X X , ó ypappareve rñ fiaví-
Xewc, the king's scribe or secretary,- 2
Kings xii. 10.
I I . T h e L X X use it for a man of learn-
ing, especially for one skilled in the Mosaic
law. See J e r . xxxvi. 26. E z r a vii. 6, 1 1 ,
12, 2 1 . Comp. 1 Mac. vii. 12. 2 Mac. vi.
18. Ecclus. xxxviii. 24 or 2 5 ; and t h u s
in t h e N . T . it denotes either a man of
learning in general. M a t . xiii. 52. xxiii.
3 4 . 1 Cor. i. 2 0 ; or particularly one
learned in the law of Moses, and who sal
in Moses seat. M a t . xxiii. 2 , 3 , [examined
the aecuracy of t h e copies of the law] and
explained t h e law to t h e people in the
schools and s y n a g o g u e s ; henee perhaps
called scribes, i. e. public instructors of
the people, M a t . ii. 4, where see Wetstein,
and comp. N e h . viii. 4, and seq. Whence
also we find a scribe who was likewise a
lawyer, i. e. a doctor or teacher of the law.
Comp. M a t . x x i i . 3 5 , with M a r k xii. 2 8 .
T h e scribes are frequently in t h e N . T.
joined with t h e Pharisees, and probably
most of them were of t h a t sect. See espe-
cially A c t s xxiii. 9.
I I I . A civil magislrate of Ephesus, a
iomnclerk, or r a t h e r a recorder or chan-
cellor; for he appears by t h e history to
be an officer of considerable infiuence and
a u t h o r i t y . occ. A c t s xix. 3 5 *. See W e t -
stein.
* [ B r . l'n'nk.-. that in Easr. vii. 2 5 , il is a m a g b -
 1' P A 153 r pA
rpairroí;. )/, uv, from ypá<po>.— Writien, ayipeía Cía x p J " " '
w u r ( t
¿KTVTr5t>. a n d tíi<3
inscríbed. occ. R o m . ii. 1 5 . [ F o r t h e method of delineating characters, not by
phrase comp. vEsch. Prom. 2 6 7 . and sculpture, b u t by colour. T o explain t h e
Koppe's note.] expression reívaKi rr-vieríf, a doubled tablet,
rpa<pij, T]Q, from ypá<po>.—A mriting, it m a y be necessary further t o observe,
as tlie word is used by t h e Greek authors ; t h a t t h e engraved tablet was covered with
but iii t h e N . T . i t always refers to the another, a n d t h a t both being tied together
Holy Scriptures, and ahnost constantly to and sealed, constituted t h e form of an a n -
those of t h e O . T . a n d t h a t both iu t h e cient epistle, or l e t t e r . — T h e L X X several
singular and plural n u m b e r ; b u t in t h e times apply t h e word in t h i s sense of en-
singular it generally denotes a particular graving, carving, or culling out, as 1
p a r t or portiou of Scripture. See 2 T i m . Kings vi. 2 9 . Isa. xxii. 16. comp. J o b xix.
iii. 16. A c t s viii. 3 2 . M a t . xxi. 4 2 . x x i i . 2 3 , 24. A n d i t appears from E x o d . xxxi.
29. L u k e xxiv. 2 7 , 3 2 , 4 5 . M a r k xii. 10. 18. xxxii. 16. 2 Cor. iii. 7, t h a t t h e first
xv. 2 8 . L u k e iv. 2 1 . Observe t h a t in 2 literal mriting of which we have a n y
P e t . iii. 16, S t . Paul's Epistles a r e reck- precise account was of t h i s k i n d . Henee
oned a part of the Scriptures.— [ I t is p u t I I I . To write, i. e. to delinéate literal
for a prophecy in Scripture. L u k e iv. 2 1 . characters on a tablet, parchment, paper,
J o h n xvii. 12. A c t s i. 16. and for those or, &c. See L u k e i. 6 3 . (where, with r e -
t h a t refer to t h e Messiah especially M a t . g a r d to t h e expression, 'íypa-bz \éywv,
xxvi. 5 4 . M a r k xiv. 4 9 . L u k e xxiv. 3 2 . comp. 2 K i n g s x . 1 , 6 , in L X X a n d H e b .
J o h n xix. 2 4 . x x . 9. A c t s xvii. 2. xviii. and see Wolfius) L u k e xvi. 6, 7- J o h n
2 8 . 1 Cor. xv. 3 , 4 . I t seems p u t for t h e viii. 6, 8. x i x . 19. A c t s xxiii. 2 5 . 3 J o h n
author of Scripture in Gal. iii. 8, 12.] ver. 1 3 . If I were obliged to add m y
Tpci<l>w, from ypáw to cal, also to en- conjecture to those of others concerning
grane, to diminish. w h a t o u r L o r d mrote on the ground, J o h n
I. To cut in, malee an incisión. Thus viii. 6, 8, I should mention J e r . xvii. 1 3 ,
used in H o m e r , II. xvii. lino 5 9 9 , or p a r t of t h a t verse. B u t let t h e reader
• rPA'íEN 8s íi oreo» S.y_pig consult H e b . a n d E n g . Lexicón u n d e r
'Atyj.tr¡. 3.rc, a n d j u d g e . [Schl. t h i n k s , t h a t as
A n d the spear ras'd h i m t o the bone.
t h e word is of course often applied t o
letters, i t means sometimes to mrile and
Comp. also t h e use of ¿Vtypááw, II. iv. send a letter. A c t s xv. 2 3 . (See Abresch.
139. II. xi. 3 8 8 . II. xiii. 5 5 3 . a n d II. vii. ad ¿Esch. p . 18. 5.) Rom. xvi. 2 4 . 1 Cor.
187, where see E u s t a t h i u s ' s and Pope's xvi. 24. 1 P e t . v. 12. and so in Pol. v. 3 8 .
Note. 1

Isoc. E p . iv. p . 9 8 8 . Aristsen. ii. E p . 13.]

II. To GRAVE, cnurave. Thus Ho- IV. To describe in mriting. J o h n i. 4 5 .
mer, II. vi. line 169, Rom. x. 5 .
• Xlápsv S' ' y S H ' M A T A X u y p i ,
0 s
V. To mrile a law, command or cnacl
in mriting, as a legislator. M a r k x. 5. xii.
I T h e fatal martes h e sent, 19. [ L u k e ii. 2 3 . x . 2 6 . 1 J o h n ii. 1 1 , 12.]
A n d o n a tablet G I Í A V ' D h i s diré intent. This is a classical and elegant use of t h e
V. a n d t h u s it is applied by P l u t a r c h ,
H e r e E u s t a t h i u s explains yplit¡tuv by 'é,hiv
Diogenes L a e r t i u s , and others of t h e
to carve, and observes t h a t t h e expression
Greek writers, as m a y be seen in E l s n e r
is agreeable to t h e custom of t h e a n c i e n t s ;
and Kypke on M a r k xii. 19. [ T h i s sense
t h a t t h e use of alphabetical letters, as well
occurs in J o b i. 6. 3 E s d . vi. 17. .flilian.
as t h e invention of paper, was of later date
V . H . xiii. 2 4 . vi. 10. See S. Petit. L e g .
than t h e times of which t h e poet is here
A t t . ii. T i t . i. p . 174 and 183. Schl. adds,
speaking; t h a t the ancients used to en-
t h a t t h e word means sometimes To pro-
grane on wooden iableis various figures *
phecy. L u k e xxii. 3 7 . xxix. 4 6 . J o h n i. 4 6 .
to denote w h a t they d e s i r e d ; t h a t letters
xii. 16. H e b . x . 7. Rom. x. 5.]
were afterwards invented, ¡cal ra ra atiera.
¡f§p° TpaiilSr/Q, eoc, ac, ó, )/, Kal ró—ec,
from ypaüc, ypáog, an oíd woman.— Of
trate. 1 M a c e . v. 4 2 . T h e Syriac translates the
word i n A c t s x i x . as The first person in the city, or belonging lo oíd monten, oíd womcn's.
and so w e find in E z r a i v . 8 . S e e E c c l u s . x . 5 . occ. 1 T i m . iv. 7 . S o Cicero, D e N a t .
SeW. M a m . O x . p . 1 1 0 . or V a n D a l e D i s s . p . 4 2 3 . Dcor. lib. iii. cap. 5. and H o r a c c , lib. ii.
í'esscl. Advcrs. 1. c. 1 . )
* Comp. l l c b . and E n g . L e x i c ó n , in T3'i I V . I.
* Bilt comp. Exod, xxiv. 1, 7, 12, xxviü. 21, 36.
 r Y M 154 r YM

sat. 6. line 7 7 , mention fabellas añiles, oíd t h a t i t means especially abstinentia a

tvomen's stories. See Wetstein, who cites V e n e r e (1 Cor. vii. 5.) and P a r k h u r s t r e -
from Strabo, [ I . p . 3 2 . A . ] r P A S l ' A H fers t o Col. ii. 2 3 . Rom. xiv. 17- 1 Cor.
M Y 6 0 A 0 r i A ' N , and from Galen MY"- viii, 8 . ]
GON T P A ' O S . I f g p Tvpvrjréviii,from
0
yvpvá'Co).—To be
Tpnyopéto, io, for éypr¡yopío¡, which is naked or ill-clad. occ. 1 Cor. iv. 1 1 . [ B r .
used by t h e profane writers, and which * says, i t means To be deprived of the ne-
D u p o r t forms from iyiiyopa, t h e A t t i c cessaries qf Ufe, or To Uve in conlempt.
perf. m i d . of íyétpco to rouse, by insert- H e refers to Sam. i. 8. H o s . ii. 1 1 . where
i n g p. t h e H e b r e w word nakedness is p u t for
I . To match in a n a t u r a l sense, i. e. to necessity, or a lom condition.~]
abstain from sleep. M a t . xxvi. 4 0 . M a r k Tvpvóc, ?), iiv, q. yvia pava k^Lov having
xiv. 3 7 . his limbs alone, i. e. uncovered.
I I . To make, be amaice, i. e. olive, as I . Naked, stark-naked. occ. M a r k x i v .
opposed to t h e sleep of our bodies in death. 5 1 , 5 2 . Comp. Rev. xvii. 16, and see
occ. 1 Thess. v. 10. comp, chap. iv. 1 5 . H a r m e r ' s Observations, vol. ii. p . 4 2 1 .
Rom. x i v . 8 , 9. [ J o b xxxi. í 9.]
I I I . To match, be matchful, or vigilant, I I . Comparatively naked, i. e. meanly,
in a spiritual sense. M a t . xxv. 13. M a r k or ill clothed. occ. M a t . x x v . 3 6 , 3 8 , 4 3 ,
xiii. 3 7 . A c t s x x . 3 1 . 1 Cor. xvi. 13, & al. 44. J a m e s ii. 15. comp. 2 Cor. v. 3 , and
[ X e n . C y r . i. 4 , 2 0 . A n a b . v. 7. 6 . ] J o b xxii. 6, i n L X X . So in H o m e r ,
Tv/Jivá^io, from yvpvóc. yvpvbg often means not absolutely naked,
I. Properly, To exercise one's self b u t naked or stript qf armour; thus, II.
naked, as those who purposed to be c h a m - xvi. line 8 1 5 , h e calis Patroclus, I T M -
pions in t h e Grecian games did. So yvp- N O N iv ZrjiórnrL naked in t h e b a t t l e , b e -
(

váowv is a place of exercising, or even of cause stript, n o t of his clothes, b u t of his

slriving naked, róVoe iv ip ayuví^erat, arms. Comp. Iliad xvii. lines 122, 6 9 3 ,
says H e s y c h i u s ; and t h o u g h t h i s noun 711 t - [ J o b xxiv. 10. Isa. lviii. 7 . ]
oceurs n o t in t h e N . T . y e t in 1 M a c . i. I I I . Naked, or stript of the upper gar-
14, we read of certain apostate Jews, who i ment. J o h n x x i . 7. Acts xix. 16. I n this
uiKoSópno'av yvpvcicrwv built a place of e x - | sense t h e word is several times used by
ercise in Jerusalem, after the manner of t h e L X X , answering to t h e H e b . o l j ) .
the Heathen. Comp. 2 M a c . iv. 9, 12. See 1 Sam. x i x . 2 4 . (where Saúl is said t o
I I . To exercise i n a mental a n d spi- have s t r i p t off his % upper garments,
ritual, and t h a t w h e t h e r in a good or bad and to have lain down naked). Isa. x x . 2.
sense. occ. H e b . v. 14. xii. 1 1 . 2 P e t . ii. Mic. i. 8 ||.
1 4 . 1 T i m . iv. 7, where see W e t s t e i n , who I V . Naked, open, uncovered, manifesl.
shows t h a t t h e expressions, yvpváfeiv, or occ. H e b . iv. 13. comp. J o b x x r i . 6, in the
yvpvá£ecrdai, 7rpóe, a r e used b y t h e G r e e k L X X . E l s n e r hath shown t h a t t h e pro-
w r i t e r s , particularly A r r i a n . [ I t is used fane writers use t h e word in t h e same
b y P h i l o s t r a t u s (Heroic. c. xix. s. 2.) and view.
A r r i a n . (Diss. E p . i. 2 6 . 3.) i n t h i s sense.] V . Naked, bare, mere. occ. 1 Cor. xv.
Elgp ' Tvpvaaía,
1
ac, ?;, from yvpvóc.— 3 7 . [Clem. i. ad Cor. p . 34.]
[ Theexerciseof mrestlers, forthepurpose of V I . Naked of spiritual clothing, i. e. of
g a i n i n g s t r e n g t h and p r e p a r i n g themselves t h e imputed righteousness qf faith. occ.
for public contests. I n these preparations Rev. iii. 17. xvi. 15. [ I t is said by Schl.
t h e y abstained from every t h i n g likely t o to be used in t h i s sense of naked or desti-
h u r t t h e i r s t r e n g t h , a n d t h i s sort of trial tute, with respect t o t h e body. I n Plat.
of t h e body was also called yvpvaaía. C r a t . 2 0 . we fiud The sóul without
Schleusner t h i n k s t h a t in 1 T i m . iv. 8,
which is t h e only place t h e word oceurs,
it refers to t h e first or active exercises, and f S e e D r . S. Chandler's L i f e o f K i n g D a v i d ,
says, " Bodily exercise is of little use, and vol/ i. p . 9 3 .
X S e e G e n . x x x i x . 1 2 — 1 5 , a n d D r . Samuel
only for a s h o r t t i m e ; " b u t B r . a n d P a r k - Chandler's R e m a r k s on this subject, i n h i s excel-
h u r s t refer i t t o t h e second or ascetic ex- lent R e v i e w o f the H i s t o r y of t h e M a n after God's
ercises, B r . refers t o verse 3 , and says own Heart, p . 6 8 , & c .
|| [Cupér ( O b s . i. 7. p . 3 6 . ) observes, that i n the
profane authors, they are said i n war to b e naked
* O n Thcophrast. E t h i c . Charact. p . 2 E 5 , edit. w h o h a v e n o t suflicient a r m s , or nonc. S e e ¿Elian
Nécdham. V . H . vi. 1 1 . X e n , d e R c p . L a c . x i . 9 , ]
 r Y N 155
(yvpvi)) the body. iElian V . H . A n . ix.
3'.). T a r g . on J o b xxxviii. 14. So he ex-
plains 2 Cor. v. 3 . We shall not be with-
out a body. So yvpvbv i\i§oe, a sword
without a shealh. In iElian V. H . ii. 14.
ayvpvbe rS>v OTTXUV without arms, xiii.
37- I n Rev. xvii. 16, i t is To prostitute.
Comp. Hos. ii. 12. J e r . xiii. 26.]
TvpvórrjQ, TIITOC, r/, from yvpvoe.
I. Nahedncss, t h a t is, a being destililte
of convenient or decent cloihing. occ. Rom.
viii. 3 5 . 2 Cor. xi. 2 7 . Comp. Yvpvoe, I I .
and Yvpvhrsvo). [ D e u t . xxviii. 4 8 . ]
II. Spiritual nakedness, being destitute
qf the spiritual cloihing qf the righteous-
ness which is by faith. occ. Rev. iii. 18.
[Comp. Gen. ix. 22.]
E§5||' Yvvaticápiov, a, rb, a diminutive of
3
ywr), ywaiKbe.—-Alrifing, weale, silly wo-
inan; Lat.muliercula; French,femmelette.
occ. 2 T i m . iii. 6. Arrian in Epictet. several
times uses this diminutive as a term of
conlempt. [ M a r c . A n t ó n , de reb. Sacr.
v. 11.]
Yvvaace'ioe, ¿la, tíov, from yvvi), yvvai-
fcoc.—Peínale, womanish. occ. 1 P e t . iii.
7. [ I t is, Of or belonginsr lo the woman,
in E s t . ii. 11. Tob. ii. 11.]
Yvvi), yvvaucbe, r¡.
I . A woman, as distinguished from a
man. M a t . xiv. 2 1 . A c t s v. 14. viii. 3 ,
12. ix. 2 . 1 T i m . ii. 11, 12, 14. iii. 11,
where see M a c k n i g h t , & al. [ I t is used
Of femóles of any age; of girls, L u k e
xxii. 57- Rev. ix. 8. E s t . ii. 4. grown
women, M a t . v. 2 8 . ix. 2 9 . & al. be-
trolhed women. M a t , i. 20, 2 4 . L u k e ii.
5. X e n . de R e p . L a c . i. 5. H o m . II. i.
3 4 8 . as conjux and mulicr in Latin. See
Broukh. ad Tibull. iii. 2, 4. Serv. ad
V i r g . Mn. ii. 687. wives, M a t . v. 3 1 . &
al. widows, M a t . xxii. 24. M a r k xii. 19.
L u k e xx. 2 8 , 2 9 , 3 0 . mothers, J o h n ii. 4 . ]
I I . A woman considered as related to a
man, a mife, and t h a t whether espoused
only, M a t . i. 20, 21<. L u k e ii. 5 ; or who
h a t h cohabited with her husband, L u k e i.
5, 13, 18. & al. freq.
I I I . Yvvaí, Voc. when addressed t o a
woman, does not of itself imply any rude-
ness or disrespect, any more t h a n avbpeg
when applied to men (comp. "Avr¡p I V . )
r ÍI N
b u t is generally equivalent to madam in
E n g l i s h , and is t h u s frequently used in
t h e best G r e e k writers. occ. John ii. 4.
xix. 26. xx. 15. See Miracles of J e s ú s
vindicated by Bishop Pearce, p a r t iii. p .
56, 7- 1 2 m o ; and his N o t e on J o h n ii. 4.
r í i N I ' A , ac, from yóvv the hiee.
I . An outward comer, as of a strect.
occ. M a t . vi. 5.—of a b u i l d i n g ; in which
latter view i t is applied only to the spiri-
tual building of God, namely to t h e church
consisting of J e w s and Gentiles, of which
Christ is said, in reference to P s . cxviii. 2 .
to become ele Ke<pa\r)v yiavíae the head-
stone ofthe comer ( H e b . ¡733 m-ib), t h a t
is, the upper corner-stone, which doth n o t
only imite and strengthen t h e whole build-
ing, b u t is exalted to t h e summit of it, so
t h a t upon whomsoever ii shall fall from
this elevation, it must grind him to pow-
der. (Comp. Zech. iv. 7.) F o r it seems
a j u s t observation of D o d d r i d g e , t h a t t h e
stone ele Kefa\r)v ytúvíae does not appear
exactly t o answer t o ák-poyitivícuoc, E p h . ii.
20. 1 P e t . ii. 6, which l a t t e r is Üxafound-
ation corner-stone. occ. M a t . x x i . 4 2 .
L u k e xx. 17. A c t s i v . 1 1 . 1 P e t . ii. 7.
I I . An inner comer, so by a very n a -
t u r a l figure, a secret or private place. So
G r o t i u s cites from t h e Adelphi of Terence,
" Inlereá in a n g u l u m aliquó abeam. la
t h e mean time I may go somewhere into
a comer." See also W e t s t e i n . occ. A c t s
xxvi. 2 6 . [ T h e m i s t . xxii. p . 2 6 5 . B . ]
I I I . An extremity. occ. Rev. vii. 1. x x .
8. T h e L X X have frequently used t h e
word in t h i s sense, as 2 Chron. iv. 10, for
t h e H e b . £]rO a side, E x o d . xxvii. 14. &
al. for üfp'O an end, extremity, Exod. xxvi.
24. N e h . iii. 19. A s t o t h e phrase ría-
crapae yúviag rrje yr¡S, the four coruers
or extremities of the earth, mentioned t o -
gether with t h e four winds, i t evidently
¡ denotes those four cardinal extremities
! thereof, where t h e four winds or spirits of
thc e a r t h exert their actions in p r o d u c i n g
its diurnal and annual motion. Comp.
u n d e r "Avepoe I I . So these four e x t r e -
mities a r e with philosophical p r o p r i e t y
called in Heb. p s n nlE33D línlK the four
W I N G S of the carlh, Isa. xi. 12. E z e k .
vii. 2 .
 A.
A AI A AI

A S, Bella. T h e fourtli letter of t h e not devils, b u t * some powers or ima-

j Greek alphabet, corresponding in ginary intelligence
ñame, order, a n d power, to t h e H e b . 1, B u t it m u s t be observed t h a t , according
of material nature.

Daleth, and in t h e form A very nearly to t h e highly probable opinión of t h a t

resembling t h e Phenician Daleth. learned J e w Maimonides f, t h e error of
Aaipoví'(opai, from Baipóviov or o'aí- the first idolaters consisted in maintain-
puv.—To be possessed by a demon or i n g , t h a t , as t h e stars and planels
devil. M a t . viii. 2 8 , 3 3 . & al. freq. I t (Q'IJJM'I t3»3.Di5) (to which I t h i n k wc
is t h e same as Saipóvtov íxuv to have a should add the circulating fluid of ihc
demon or devil, J o h n vii. 2 0 , for which heavens) were created by God t o govern
t h e H e a t h e n writers most commonly use t h e world, so i t was his pleasure t h a t
Batpovcjv and KaKoSaifiovcfv, as may be seen t h e y should be honoured a u d worshipped
in L a m b e r t Bos E x e r c i t a t . p . 6 1 . & seq. as his ministers, and that accordingly men
a n d in Wolfius on John vii. 2 0 . E u r í - proceeded t o adore t h e m , in order to pro-
pides Phceniss. line 8 9 5 , has SaLpovüvrae, cure the good mili qf him who created
for persons possessed with demons; in them, t h u s m a k i n g t h e m medialors be-
which sense I find t h e Scriptural word tween m a n and G o d ; and this, says he,
AAIMONIZOME'NOYS once applied by was the foundation of idolatry. ~ W h i c h
P l u t a r c h Sympos. lib. 7. quest. 5. p . 7 0 6 . assertion is amply confirmed b y t h e plain
D . edit. Xylandri. A n d see Alberti Prasf. traces of this doctrine being found among
ad Observ. Phil. ad fin. a n d K y p k e on t h e heathen, even down to t h e time of
M a t . iv. 2 4 . Those who were possessed Christ and his Apostles, and indeed long
with prophesying demons (see A c t s xvi. after. Most express are t h e words of
16.) were called b y t h e Greeks Aaipo- Plato in Sympos. U A ~ N ro oaipúviov M E -
vóXnirroL. See Arclibp. P o t t e r ' s A n t i q u i - TA&V éri G E S r£ m i $VT)TO. EVERY
ties of Greece, book i. chap. 12. p . 2 0 8 . I s t demon is a middle being between God
edit. and mortal. If you ask what he means
Aaipóviov, u, rb, from calpiav, which " b y a middle being >" h e will tell you,
see. G E O C avdpwiria a píyvvrai, ciXXa ota Sai-
I. A deily, a god, or more accurately. povíwv Traerá í^iv r¡ bpiXLa Kai »/ ciáXacroc
some power or supposed intelligence in Síoic; 7rp¿e avQpúrirtíQ. God is not a p -
that grand object of heathen idolatry, the proached ¡mmediately by man, b u t all t h e
material heavens or air. T h u s t h e word
is generally applied b y t h e L X X , who * A n d that this i s true the reader m a y find
use i t , Isa. Ixv. 1 1 , for ii, the destructive a b u n d a n t l y proved h y testimonies divine a n d h u -
iroop, or powers of the heavens in t h u n - m a n , a n d b y a profusión o f entertaining and useful
der, lightning, storm, & c . ; in D e u t . learning, i n the 2 d and 4th v o l u m e of H u t c l ú n s o n ' s
x x x i i . 17. P s . cv. 3 5 , for tzplttf the W o r k s , and i n B o t e ' s A n s w e r to Berrington, p . o,
& seq. S e e also P r i d e a u x Connect. p . i. book iii.
pourers forth or genial powers qf nature ; anno 2 2 2 , p . 177, 8 , I s t edit. 8 v o , and H e b . and
and as by Saipovín peanp&píva the mid- E n g . L e x i c ó n i n tyuur under au> X I .
day demon, P s . xci. 6, (answering to t h e f T h o u g h I m u s t profess i n general t h e utmost
Hebrew tPliTí Titi?> i t o p n ) , we m a y be dislike to the R a b b i n i c a l writings, and the greatest
certain t h e y intended n o t a devil, but a abhorrence o f t h e b l a s p h e m o u s a n d abominable
fictions and reveries they contain, yet, since truth is
pernicious blast of air (comp. Isa. xxviii. truth xaherever it le found, I cannot forbear recom-
2. in t h e H e b r e w ) , so from this a n d t h e m e n d i n g M a i m o n i d e s D e Idololatria, as affording
fore-cited passages we can be a t no loss to one o f t h e best and truest accounts o f the Origin
know what t h e y meant, when, in their and Progrcss of Idolatry to be met with in any hu-
m a n writer. T h i s treatisc i s printed, with a Latin
translation of P s . xcvi. 5 , t h e y say, All translation, a t the end of V o s c i u s D e Origine &.
the gods of the Gcnlilcs are caipóvia, i. e. Progresan Idololatria;,
 A AI 157 A AI

commerce and intercourse between Gods of t h e Gentiles, t h a t t h e sovercigu a n d

and men is performed by the medialion qf celestial Gods were to be worshipped only
demons. W o u l d you see t h e particulars ? p u r a mente, wilh Ihc puré mind, and wilh
T o Aaipóvióv i~,iv kppnvevov Kal ciairopd- hymns and praises ; a n d t h a t sacrifices
¡xtvoi' Seoíc ra trap' aiSpóiirosv, Kal ayOpw- were only for demons." I will n o t , how-
iroig ra Trapa Beüv, ro>v fizv rae Kal ¿ET/ITEIC ever, take upon me positively t o affirm,
Svrríae, rtov ce rae liriráijetc; Kal apoi&dg t h a t St. Paul had in view this latter t e n e t
riov %0-iwv. Demons are reporters and of heathenism in t h e above passage. I t is
carriers from men to t h e gods, and again sufficient to prove his assertion, t h a t t h e
from t h e gods t o men, of t h e supplications general objeets to which t h e Gentile sa-
and prayers of t h e one, and of t h e injunc- : crifices were offered, were nothing higher
tions and rcwards of devotion from t h e | t h a n some powers qf material nature, or
other. T h e philosopher P l u t a r c h , w h o some inteUigences supposed to reside
flourished a t the beginning, and Apuleius, t h e r e i n ; a n d t h a n t h i s , n o t h i n g can b e
who lived after t h e middle of t h e second more certain, from all accounts sacred a n d
eentury, teach t h e same doctrine *. A n d profane. A n d t h u s Aatpóvwv is used,
" t l i i s , " says t h e learned Mede, " was t h e 1 Cor. x . 2 0 , 2 1 .
(ecumenical philosophy of t h e Apostles' I I . Besides those original IXaipóvia,
times, and of t h e times long before them. those material mediators, or t h e * inteUi-
Thales and Pythagoras, all t h e Academics gences residing in them, whom t Apuleius
and Stoics, and n o t many to be excepted, calis " a higher k i n d of demons, who were
unless t h e Epicures, t a u g h t this divi- ahrays free from t h e incumbrances of t h e
nityt-" N o w when S t . Paul affinns, body, and out of which higher order P l a t o
1 Cor. x. 20, t h a t what the Gentiles sa- supposes t h a t guardians were appointed
crifice, they sacrifice Aaipóvtoig not to unto m e n , — " Besides these, t h e heathen
God, we m a y understand Áaipáyia to acknowledged another sort, namely % " the
mean either some pomers or supposed in- souls qf men deified or canonized after
telligences of material nature in general, death." So Hesiod, one of t h e most a n -
or in a more confined sense, according to cient heathen w r i t e r s , describing t h a t
t h e common opinión of t h e Gentiles i n h i s happy race of men who lived in t h e first
times, such pomers or inteUigences con- and golden age of t h e world, saith, " t h a t
sidered as mediators between the supreme after this generation were dead, t h e y were
Gods and mortal men. For this," says by t h e will of g r e a t J ú p i t e r promoted t o
í c

M r . Mede %, " was ( t h e n ) t h e very t e n e t be D E M O N S , keepers of mortal m e n ,

observers of t h e i r good a n d evils works,
* A s m a y be seen i n t h e learned J o s . M e d e ' s
clothed in air, always walking about t h e
W o r k s , page 6 2 7 , a n d i n B p . N e w t o n ' s D i s s e r t a , earth, givers of r i c h e s ; a n d this, saith
tions o n the Prophecies, v o l . i i . p . 4 3 7 , & c . 2 d edit. he, is t h e royal honour t h a t t h e y enjoy."
8vo. Plato concurs with Hesiod, a n d asserts,
-|- A n d to these reputedly learned H e a t h e n , m a n y
more m i g h t b e added from the less civilhed parts of
t h a t " he and many other poets speak ex-
the world : for instance, the P a g a n inhabitants o f cellently, who affirm, t h a t when good m e n
the Caribbce i s l a n d s in the W e s t I n d i e s are said t o die, t h e y attain g r e a t honour a n d d i g n i t y ,
have regarded then- Chcmcns or Chemim ( i . e. and become demons." T h e same P l a t o in
p l a i n l y , according t o t h e I'reneh pronunciation o f
Morinus, w h o g i v e s them this latter ñame, ryüw
another place maintains, t h a t " all those
S H E M I M , or Heavens), as the messengers, agents, who die valiantly in w a r a r e of Hesiod's
or mediators o f a supreme, solé, eternal, infinite, a l - golden generation, a n d a r e made demons,
m i g h t y , invisible B e i n g , called b y them Joeanna,
( r r a m r r Jehovah the Mueliinator, Q ? ) See P i - themselves." Comp. Leland's Advantage and N e -
cart's Ceremonies a n d religious C u s t o m s , &c. v o l . cessity o f R e v e l a t i o n , part i. c h a p . 5 . p p . 1 3 8 —
iii. p . 1 4 2 , & c . and H e b . and E n g . L e x i c ó n , under
142, 8vo.
a i a V. I.
* T h i s notion o f InteUigences in the heavens i s ,
X P . G3G, from P o r p h y r . in E u s e b . P r a p . E v a n g . according to M a i m o n i d e s , very a n c i e n t ; for h e malees
H e r m . T r i s m e g . i n A s c l e p i o , A p u l e i . D e D a s m o n i o the third stage o f the A n t e d i l u v i a n idolatry t o b e ,
Socrat. P o r p h y r y ' s words, l i b . i i i . § 5 8 . D e A b - " when certain impostora aróse, w h o pretended that
stinentia, are remarkable to this purposc. 'OuSe tlie Star or Planet (blby) itself or an ángel h a d
ToT; G>Eo7f, üKKa. A a / ^ o p - í , ra; S u a / a ; , Ta? 5íá TUIV ái-
spoken t o t h e m a n d c o m m a n d e d t h a t t h e y s h o u l d
/¿írw jrpoo-r¡yayov ¡¡ Ta; h T í T i F I A N T I 1
ouváfiu;
worship the Star, or, &c. in s u c h a particular m a n -
xaTapáQovTe?, ¡tai THTO 7ríjr¿VwTaí -rrap üvTüJy ra» ner, a n d directed w h a t i n their worship w a s t o b e
SsoKóyiuv. " Ñ o r d i d those w h o were thoroughly
done, what a v o i d e d . " M a i m ó n . D e I d o l . § 4 .
aajuainted with the p o w e r s o f t h e U n i v c r s c ( t h e TO*
-|- I n M e d e ' s W o r k s , a n d B p . N e w t o n ' s D i s s e r .
1JA~N, N . B . ) offer bloody sacrifice to the gods, b u t
tations, v o l . i i . p . 4 4 0 .
to demons and this i s aflírmcil b y the T h e o l o g i a n s
;
X See B p . N e w t o n , u t s u p . p . 4 3 0 .
 A A I 158 A A I

and t h a t we ought for ever after t o serve his cásting them o u t . See M a t . xii. 2 2 —
and adore t h e i r sepulchres as t h e sepul- 2 8 . M a r k iii. 2 2 — 2 6 . L u k e x . 1 7 — 2 0 .
chres of demons. T h e same also, says he, xi. 1 4 — 2 6 . xiii. 1 1 — 1 6 . A c t s x. 3 8 . J a m .
we decree whenever a n y of those who were ii. 19. F r o m t h e t h r e e first cited passages
excellently good in life, die either of oíd it appears evident, notwithstanding t h e
age, or i n a n y other m a n n e r . " A n d ac- objections of D r . Campbell (Prelim. D i s -
cording to this notion of Aaipóviov, the sert. t o Gospels, p . 1 9 0 ) , t h a t Salan is
word appears to be applied in several pass- equivalent t o t h e Demons and to the
ages of t h e N . T . * T h u s A c t s xvii. 18, Prince qf the Demons (comp. also 1 Cor.
some of t h e A t h e n i a n s said of S t . P a u l , v. 5 . I T i m . i. 2 0 ) ; a n d I submit i t to
he seemeth to be a proclaimer E,évwv Sai- t h e consideration of t h e intelligent reader,
povíinv of strange f demon-gods, because whether, in opposition t o w h a t t h e Doctor
he preached unto them J e s ú s a n d t h e r e - asserts (p. 189), possessions are not plainly
surrection. I n t h e similar sense of demon- ascribed t o o Aiá€o\oe the Devil, in A c t s
gods, or souls of dead men deified or ca- x . 3 8 . — I t m a y be worth observing t h a t
nonized, t h e word is used Rev. i x . 2 0 , Saipóvwv is used in this t h i r d sense in t h e
(where see V i t r i n g a , p . 417, 2d edit.) and Apocryphal Book of Tobit, ch. iii. 8. vi.
in that expression StSacncaXíat Satpovíuiv, 17- viii. 3 ; a n d t h a t , according t o P l u -
doctrines concerning demons, 1 T i m . iv. 1, t a r c h , t o m . i. p . 9 5 8 , E . edit. X y l a n d r . i t
as ¡iawrío-piov SiSa^ye, doctrine concerning was a very ancient opinión, t h a t t h e r e are
baptisms, H e b . vi. 2 ; rjj SiSaj(i¡ r5 Kvpíu, certain wickcd and malignant demons
the doctrine concerning the Lord, Acts ((pavXa Saipóvia Kal who envy
fiáaKava)
xiii. 12. F o r proof I refer t o M r . M e d e good m e n , a n d endeavour t o disturb and
a n d Bishop N e w t o n , a n d to w h a t t h e y hinder them in t h e p u r s u i t of v i r t u e , lest
have adduced on this subject shall only r e m a i n i n g firm (a-n-ridree unfallen) in good-
a d d , t h a t I g n a t i u s , who, according t o ness a n d u n c o r r u p t , t h e y should after
Chrysostom, had conversed familiarly with death obtain a b e t t e r lot t h a n t h e y t h e m -
t h e Apostles, plainly uses ¡Saipóvwv for a selves enjoy." See also P o r p h y r y , D e
human spirit or ghost, a n d t h e adjective A b s t i n . lib. ii. sect. 3 9 , 4 0 , 4 2 . p. 8 3 , 84.
fiaipóviKoc for one disembodied, a n d in the edit. Cantab. 1 6 5 5 . [ S c h l e u s n e r gives for
state qf spirits. E p i s t . ad S m y r n . § 2 , 3 . t h i s word t h e following senses:]
edit. Russel. I. [Genius or spirit, being betweeu h é -
I I I . A n d most generally, An evil spi-
roes a n d gods, t h e a u t h o r s of good or m i -
rit, a Devil, one qf those angels who kept sery, a n d commonly held as t h e authors
not their first estáte, and are called by the also of all events, t h e causes of which
collective ñame S a t á n , a n d AtáSoXoe the were n o t understood. See Jamblich. V i t .
Devil; a n d w h o , a t t h e t i m e of our Sa- P y t h . c. 2 1 . C u d w o r t h ' s Intell. System,
viour's appearance in t h e world, were p e r - iv. 14.]
m i t t e d t o possess, a n d in various a n d I I . [_Any divine being ( J u l . Poli. Onom.
dreadful m a n n e r s t o t o r m e n t t h e bodies i. 1.) as A c t s xvii. 18. See iEIian V . H .
of m e n , b y which means was manifestly ii. 1 3 . D i o g . L a e r t . i i . 14.]
displayed t h e i r malice to m a n k i n d , as our I I I . [A God qfthe Gentiles. 1 Cor. x.
Saviour's divine power a n d benevolence 20. (comp. 19. 2 1 . ) So in L X X . D e u t .
to h u m a n n a t u r e were demonstrated b y x x x i i . 17.]
I V . [The rebel angels. (See L u k e viii.
* See Blede, p. 6 3 5 . 2 9 . E p h . vi. 1 2 . ) So 1 T i m . iv. 1. which
•)• W h e r e there is n o nccessity frorn t h e u s e o f the he t r a n s l a t e s false and impious doctrines,
plural word Aai/íovfwv t o s u p p o s e , a s s o m e learned J a m e s ii. 19.]
m e n h a v e done, that t h e A t h e n i a n s took J e s ú s a n d
'Avás-autí for t w o distinct Actipúna (see B o w y e r o n
lUgli 0
AaipoviúSrje, eog,, s e , b, ?/, Kai ro
A c t s ) ; for Sócrates h a d i n l i k e m a n n e r b e e n accused — s e , from Sai¡xóviov.—Demonian, devilish.
KA1NA* AAIMO'NIA Uatyépen o f introducing n e w occ. J a m e s iii. 1 5 .
demons i n the plural, b e c a u s e h e said that t h e &k\- AATMÍ2N, OVOQ, b, q. Saypiav knoning,
MO'NION singular u s e d to forewarn h i m . T h u s according to Plato i n C r a t y l u s [ 2 3 . ] , which
X e n o p h o n , M e m o r a b . Socrat. l i b . i. c a p . 1. § 2 .
AlET£$púkKriTO yccp á)g <pái*¡ 5wxpáT>jí TO' AÁIMO'-
from ¿ W o i to learn, know.
NION ÉauTíp* <rr¡p.éuvtiv' S9ÉV SÍJ /xáTwrá ¿uot SoxSinv I . A Demon, an Intelligence. Its
áuT-ov á/Tjajj-cííjSaí KAINA* AAIMO'NIA iia<plpslv. senses in t h e heathen writers m a y be seen
F o r i t w a s notorious, that Sócrates u s e d to s a y that u n d e r Aaipóviov I . I I . besides which it
the dtmon warned' h i m ; w h e n c e p i i n c i p a l l y indeed
sometimos s i g n i f i e s / b r t o e , sometimes an
t h e y seem to m e to h a v e a c c u s e d h i m of introducing
new demons. attendant genius. T h e L X X , according
 A A K 159
to the Complutensian etlition, have once
used it for t h e H e b . i i , Isa. ixv. 1 1 .
Comp. under Aaipóviov I. T h e learned *
D u p o r t has remarked, t h a t in no (pro-
fane) Greek writer till t h e t i m e of Christ
does this word occur in a bad sense. T h i s ,
however, may be doubted; since Plutarch,
D e Vit. ¿Ere A l . tom. ii. p . 830, F . men-
tions bi Qeífka-oi Kai ¿pavoTríreic ÍKÚVOL T5
'EfiireSoKXf.as AA'IMONES. Those De-
mons of Empedocles who were east out by
t h e gods, and fell from heaven. B u t i t is
not certain whether Aalpoves was t h e
word used by Empedocles, or whether it
is Plutarch's.
I I . In t h e N . T . it is used only for an
evil spirit, a fallen ángel, a devil, unless
perhaps in Rev. xviii. 2, which passage
seems an allusion to t h e L X X versión of
Isa. xiii. 2 1 , where t h e H e b . t3*i>l»lt>,
rough, hairy crealures (so Aquila rpcyiwv-
rai and Vulg. pilosi s u n t ) is rendered by
Saipóna demons, agreeably to t h e heathen
notions, t h a t their demons, such as Pan,
t h e Fauns, Salyrs, Sec. appeared in t h e
shape of rough, shaggy anivials. Comp.
L X X , Aquila and Symmachus, in Isa.
xxxiv. 14, and Baruch iv. 3 5 . I t oceurs
also M a t . viii. 3 1 . M a r k v. 12. L u k e viii.
29. Rev. xvi. 14.
AítKviú, from t h e obsolete cW&> or dij/cw
t h e same. To hite. [ P r o p e r l y used of
venomous animáis, as D e u t . viii. 15. N u m .
x x i . 6, 8, 9 . ] I n the N . T . it is used
only in a figurative sense. \To injure or
annoy, especially by abuse or calumny, as
in Gal. v. 15. if you annoy one another
with abuse and calumny. So Xen. C y r .
i. 4 , 13. iv. 3 , 2 . and in L a t i n mordeo is
so used. See T e r . E u n . iii. 1. verse 2 1 . ]
" Plato (Resp. ix. 2 / 4 . ad fin. edit. M a s -
sey) uses expressions very similar to those
of the Apostle, AA'KNE2¡9A'I re nal pa-
XÓpeua ' E 2 9 P E I N "AAAHAA to Ule, and
fighting to devour one another:' See
BÍackwall's Sacred Classics, vol. i. p . 207.
W e t s t e i n and K y p k e .
_ AA'KPY, voc, rb, from obsolete ISCIKIO to
hite (see SÚKVU) and pvu> toflow.—A tear,
which foivs from t h e eyes, and is of a
briny, biting, or pungent taste. L u k e vii.
38, 44. H e b . v. 7.
¡XaKpvov, u, rb, from baKpv.—A tear.
occ. Rev. vii. 17. x x i . 4 .
AaKpvw, from SáKpv.'—To weep, shed
tcars. occ. John xi. 3 5 .
AaKTvXwe, a, b, from baKrvXoc,—A ring
* On Theophrast, Ethic. chap. xvi. p. 4 5 1 , edit.
-Xcedham.
A A n
for Üwfi?igcr. occ. L u k e xv. 2 2 . Comp.
James ii. 2. [ X e n . A n a b . iv. 7- 19 * • ]
Ac'iKrvXoe, tí, b, q. SeÍKrvXog, from SEÍKO)
lo show, poinl out, whence also t h e L a t i n
ñame digitus, q. ceUerog.
I . The finger, with which men show
or poinl out objeets. (Comp. Isa. Iviii.
9.) M a r k vii. 3 3 . L u k e xvi. 24. & al. I n
M a t . xxiii. 4 , [we have a proverb used of
those who do n o t thcmselves make t h e
slightest eftbrt to accomplish a purpose
they desire. I t oceurs in Lucían D e -
monact. p . 999. Julián. O r a t . vi. p . 2 0 0 .
See L u k e xi. 46. M a r k vii. 3 3 . J o h n viii.
6. xx. 2 5 , 27.]
I I . The finger of God is used for his
power, and as synonymous with t h e spirit
of God. L u k e xi. 2 0 . Comp. M a t . xii. 18,
and see E x o d . viii. 19. x x x i . 18. P s . viii. 3 .
Aapci'(u>, from Sapciw t h e same, which
from H e b . ¡TO7 or ¡ n n l . to reduce to still-
ness or quietness, whence also t h e L a t i n
domo, and E n g . tame..—To subdue, lame.
occ. M a r k v. 4-. James iii. 7, 8.
AápaXig, ios, A t t . £(¡>s, i), from Sapúa)
lo tame.—A heifer of fit age to be lamed
to t h e yoke. occ. H e b . ix. 13. [ T h e word
oceurs Is. vii. 2 1 . xv. 5. Hosea iv. 6, 16.
I n H e b . ix. 13. of course, The red heifer,
(see N u m b . xix.) m u s t be understood.]
Aaveí'(u), from Saveíor.
I . [Properly, To give or bestow, see
Hesychius.]
I I . [To lend without interest. L u k e vi.
3 4 . D e u t . xv. 8. xxviii. 12, 4 4 . P r o v .
xix. 17. xxii. 7. X e n . Cyrop. iii. 7, 19.
Sympos. 4 , 4 4 . Rarely, to lend al usury,
as ¿EL V. H . iv. 1, unless t h e words ETTL
TÓKIÚ are added. See Salmas. de Usuris.
T h e passive is to borrón without usury,
M a t . v. 4 2 . W i s d . xv. 16. Prov. x x . 4 .
L y s . or. xi. p . 1 6 8 . ]
Aaveíov, n, rb, from cávos a gift, also a
loan, somewhat lent.—A loan, a debt. occ.
M a t . xviii. 27. [ D e u t . xxiv. 11.]
Aavei^rjs, 5, b, from Saveí^w.—A lender,
a creditor, occ. L u k e vii. 4 1 .
AaTraváoj, S>.
I . To spend, in general, occ. M a r k v.
26. 2 Cor. xii. 15. A c t s x x i . 24, where
see Wolfius, W e t s t e i n , and D o d d r i d g e .
[ I n these three instances it is taken in a
good s e n s e ; r a t h e r , to expend, and so in
¿El. V a r . H . i x . 9. See M a r k l . ad dys.
p. 605. B u t it is also used in a bad sense,
to consume by spending, as J u d i t h xii. 4.
2 Mac. i. 2 3 , and henee,]
* [ I n the L X X , it is u s u a l l y a scal-rins, as G e n .
x l í . 4 2 . D a n . vi. 17- & al. freq.]
 ICO A E l

II-. To spend, properly in ealing and 11. xxv. 9. A c t s xii. 9. 1 Cor. vii. 2,
l u x u r y . occ. L u k e x v . 14. James iv. 3 . 1 T i m . vi. 1 1 . e t al. freq. I n this sense
S o H e s y c h i u s , Háptpayog, irávra Sairavü/V, it is very frequently preceded by pív in
and Suidas explains Aarravq.v, by ¿ ró t h e former member of t h e sentence, as
cnrXítíE avaXícrKtiv, áXXa ró Xap7rpi¿g Cnv M a t . iii. I I . Comp. u n d e r MsV.
Kai airaQ^v Kai Sajravcjv ri)v acríav, Not 12. I t is used after a negative partióle
simply t o spend, b u t t o live splendidly, for áXXct but, H e b . iv. 15, where Raphe-
and be prodigal a n d devour one's s u b - lius shows t h a t both Xenophon a n d Poly-
stance. See Wetstein on L u k e . [iElian. bius apply i t in t h e same manner.
V . H . ix. 9.] 13. Although, though. 1 P e t . i. 7.
A a v r á v T / , r¡Q, y, from ca.7ra.vla>>.—Ex- Air¡aig, 10Q, A t t . £ÍO£, v, from Síopau
pense, cost. occ. L u k e xiv. 2 8 . [ E s d r . vi. [I. Properly, Want. iEscli. Dial. ii. 3 9 ,
4. 1 Mac. iii. 3 0 . ] 40. Perhaps this, or affticlion in P s .
A ¿ , a conjunction, perhaps from Seta to xxii. 24.]
bind, connect. [II. The petition of the needy, supplica-
1. Copulative, And also. M a t . xxv. 19, tion. L u k e i. 1 3 . Rom. x. 1. 2 Cor. i. 1 1 .
3 8 , 3 9 . M a r k iv. 3 7 . . R o m . vi. 1 8 . J u d e ix. 14. Phil. i. 19. iv. 6. 1 T i m . ii. 1.
ver. 8 . After Kai in t h e same member of 1 P e t . iii. 12. 1 K i n g s viii. 2 8 . J o b x l .
t h e sentence, b u t separated from i t by one 2 2 . ]
or m o r e w o r d s , Also, likervise, moreover, [III. Deprecation qf evil. H e b . v. 7.
yea. J o h n viii. 17- xv. 2 7 . A c t s iii. 2 4 . J a m e s v. 6.]
v. 3 2 . A n d t h u s these two partióles are [ I V . Generally, Prayer. L u k e ii. 3 7 .
often used in t h e Greek writers. See R a - v. 3 3 . A c t s i. 14. E p h . vi. 18. Phil. i. 4 .
phelius on A c t s iii. 2 4 , a n d Alberti on 1 T i m . v. 5 . 2 T i m . i. 8. D a n . ix. 3.]
2 P e t . i. 5. A E Í , Imperson. See u n d e r Aéw.
2 . Even, e t quidem. Rom. iii. 2 2 . P h i l . t§gp° Aeiypa, arog, ró, from SéSeiyjxai,
ii. 8, where Raphelius shows t h a t H e r o - perf. pass. of O E Í K W or SeÍKvvpt.—An en-
dotus applies Sé in t h e same sense. sample, a specimen, ( p r o p e r l y * say H a r -
3 . Moreover, farther. M a t . v. 3 1 . L u k e pocration a n d t h e Etymologist, what is
xv. I I . 1 Cor. xv. 1. shown of things sold, i. e. a sample,) [and
4. Or. 2 Cor. vi. 14, 15. so used in Isoc. ad Demon. p . 4 . and often
5. I n some passages i t seems almost elsewhere. B u t in t h e N . T . it is used
illative, a n d m a y be rendered, Then, as an example, proposed to deter from
therefore, so. L u k e vii. 6. xiii. 7 . R o m . crime. J u d . 7. '-An example of t h e fu-
viii. 8. x i i . 6. t u r e t o r m e n t i n eternal fire.* 2 P e t . ii. 6.
6. Causal, For. M a r k xvi. 8. L u k e iv. 3 Mac. ii. 5 . ]
3 8 . xii. 2. & al. freq. A n d t h u s i t is [ j ^ P AEiyp,arí¿¡tx>, from Süypa, To ex-
often applied in t h e best Greek writers. hibit a specimen, or to make a public show
See Raphelius on M a r k xvi. 8, and Elsner or spectacle. T h e ancients, particularly the
on L u k e iv. 3 8 . [Hesiod. Scut. H e r e . 2 5 1 . Romans, exposed their captives, a n d t h e
Aristoph. A n . 5 8 5 . ] spoil of their conquered enemies to public
7. I n t h e sacred as in t h e profane w r i - view, in their t r i u m p h a l processions;
t e r s , i t conneets historical faets or cir- [ a n d henee, t h e verb means to exhibit as
cumstances, as M a r k i. 6. L u k e xxiii. 2. conquered, or triumph ove?; Col. ii. 15.
M a t . i. 18, where see Raphelius. He openly triumphed over the powers.
8. I t conneets t h e l a t t e r p a r t of a sen- B r e t s c h . p u t s a stop after i&vo-íag, and then
tence w i t h t h e former, giving i t a pecu- says, ¿SeLypári^e (se. atavTÓv) iv
Trappnaía,
liar emphasis or confirmation, a n d m a y he showed himself as an example qf con-
be rendered then. A c t s xi. 1 7 , where see fidence and inlrepidity of mind to us:
Raphelius, who shows t h a t H e r o d o t u s a n d b u t irapp-no-ía is usually, confidence in,
A r r i a n use Sé in t h e same manner, as t h e n o t generally t h e quality, confidence or in-
L a t i n writers do a t and vero. trepidityf\
9. I t is used in resuming a subject, AtÍKwpi, or AttKvvco, from t h e obsolete
and m a y be rendered, / say, however. V. BeÍKti), which see.
2 Cor. x . 2 . H e b . vii. 4 . I . To show, exhibit, cause to be seen,
10. I t denotes t h a t somewhat is t o be
supplied in a discourse, so m a y be r e n - * [Harpocr. says there w a s a place in the forum
at A t h e n s , called &üyixo., because the samples were
dered, And that. G a l . ii. 4 . shown there. See Schol. ad A r i s t o p h . E q . 9 7 - & 5

1 1 . Adversative, But, sed, M a t . xxiii. C a s a u b . ad A t h e n , i. 2 2 . v i . 4 . ]

 A B I 1G1 A E I

whether naturally, M a t . viii. 4 . Mark xiv.. 4 0 . Rev. xxi. 8 ; where see W e t s t e i n .

15. John x x . 20.—or in a divine visión,, [Schl. says, t h a t in Rev. xxi. 8. it is an
Heb. viii. 5. Rev. xvii. 1. xxi. 9. & a l . —• apostate or desefter from fear, a had per-
or by a deceitful representatiou, M a t . iv., son. See Schol. Soph. A n t i q . 3 6 6 . Valck.
8. L u k e iv. 5, where, from t h e circum-• ad E u r . Phcen. 10, 11. Alberti Obss. on
stances of t h e story, i t appears t h a t t h e: N. T. p. 498.]
Devil really showed our Saviour as great; AEI~NA, ó, 77, ro. [ G e n . Selvoc, D a t .
an extent of country * as was visible from Stívt, Acc. Selva. A n indefinite pronoun.
the high mountain, supplying, in a mo- A certain one, any one. I t is generally
ment qf time, an illusive view of t h e other 1
used when t h e speaker cannot, or will not
great and glorious kiugdoms of t h e world. ñame t h e person or t h i n g he speaks of.
See D r . H a m m o n d ' s P h a r a p h r a s e . I t only occurs in M a t . x x v i . 18, b u t often
II. To show, teach, declare. M a t . xvi. in good Greek. See Viger and his c o m -
2 1 . 1 Cor. xii. 3 1 . Comp. Acts x. 2 8 . mentators.]
[ D e u t . iv. 5. E x . xv. 2 5 . 1 Sam. xii. 2 3 . AíivSiQ, Adv. from SÍIVOQ, [signifies n o t
J o b xxxiv. 3 2 . ] only terrible, b u t any thing great or ex-
I I I . To show, prove, demónstrate. J a m . cessive. See Perizon. ad iElian V . H . i. 1.
ii. 18. iii. 13. [jElian V. H . ix. 35.] Henee t h e two senses of this A d v e r b . ]
IV. [To prcdict. Rev. i. 1. iv. 1. I. Dreadfully, grievously. occ. Mat.
xxii. 6.] viii. 6.
V. [To perform, show forth. John ii. I I . Vehemently. occ. L u k e x i . 5 3 .
18. x . 3 2 . 1 T i m . vi. 15. P s . Ix. 3 . lxxi. Auirvíb), ü, from Seíirvov.— To sup, eat
20. Gen. xii. 2 1 . Xen. Cyrop. vi. 4, 5 . a supper, fan evening meaT\ * . occ. L u k e
iElian V. H . xiv. 3 7 . Schl. says, t h a t in xxii. 8. 1 Cor. x i . 2 5 . Rev. iii. 2 0 . Also
J o h n v. 20, i t is to give power; B r . ex- transitively with an accusative, To eat for
plains it, to teach!] supper. L u k e xvii. 8. [ I n 1 Cor. xi. 2 5 .
AeiXía, a c , r¡, from SeiXbg, which see.— Schl. and others transíate, After the first
Fearfulness, timidily, shrinhing forfear. service, i. e. the Paschal Lamb was re-
So Theophrastus, É t h i c . char. xxv. d e - moved; because t h e wine was served with
fines SuXía t o b e " Y I I E I S I S ríjs ^X^S tp- t h a t , and a cup d r u n k after e a t i n g i t , b e -
<¡>o€oc, a yielding or shrinhing of t h e soul fore touching t h e second service, t h e bitter
t h r o u g h fear. A n d Andronicus, A E I A I ' A herbs and unleavened bread. See B e a u -
írVtv ' A n O X Í 2 ' P H S I 2 ¿LITO (paivopívs icaQñ- sobre's Introduction in t h e chapter on t h e
KOVTOQ Sia (jxxvrao-íav SeivS. AuXla is t h e Holy Seasons. In Rev. iii. 2 0 . i t implies
wilhdrawing from some object coming to be intímate with!]
upon us, because i t appears terrible, occ. Aíitrvov, B, rb, so called from Seícrdcu éic
2 T i m . i. 7. [ L e v i t . xxvi. 3 6 . P s . liv. 5 . ] rróvov, men's wanting it for labour, or to
A f í X t á w , ü¡, from SeiXía.— To shrinkj'or enable them lo labour. See Suicer's T h e -
fear, as t h e heart. occ. J o h n xiv. 2 7 . saurus on this word.
[ D e u t . i. 3 1 . xxxi. 6. 2 Mace. xv. 5 . Isa.
I. I n H o m e r i t generally denotes the
xiii. 7.]
breakfast, or morning-meal, as I I . ii. lines
AEIACT2, ?), av.—Shrinhing for fear, 3 8 1 , 3 9 9 , and II. viii. line 5 3 ; (comp.
fearful, limid. occ. M a t . viii. 2 6 . M a r k iv. lines 1 and 6 6 ) , b u t sometimes food in
general, [as the mid-day meal. (See H e -
* T h e A b b é M a r i t i ( T r a v e l s through C y p r u s , sych. and A t h e n . I . 9, 10. Poli. vi. 1.)
&e. cited i n the E n g l i s h R e v i e w for N o v . 1 7 9 2 , p . a n d ] even t h a t which is taken tovvards
3 4 6 ) in h i s description of the m o u n t a i n m e n t i o n e d evening, as II. xviii. line 5 6 0 . Henee
in M a t . i v . íí, s a y s , " H e r e w e enjoyed the most
beautiful prospect imaginable." T h i s part o f the I I . I n t h e l a t t e r Greek writers, as in
m o u n t a i n o f F o t t y D a y s overlooks t h e m o u n t a i n s t h e N . T . a supper, an evening meal, or
of A r a b i a , the country of G i l e a d , the country of the ,feast. M a t . xxiii. 6. M a r k vi. 2 1 . L u k e
A m m o n i t e s , the plains of M o a b , the plain of J e r i - xiv. 12. [ I t is generally an evening feast,
cho, the river Jordan, and the whole extent of the
D e a d Sea. I t was here that the D e v i l said to the especially in t h e last passage, and L u k e
Son of G o d , All these kingdoms •will I give thee, if xiv. 17. P e r h a p s in John xiii. 2, an even-
thou mili fall down and worship me. [ S o m e C o m - ing meal. T h e phrase TXOIÜV Sáirvov,
mentators m a k e Siímu/a here signify to describe, as which occurs M a r i vi. 2 1 . L u k e xiv. 1 6 .
ostendo in Latin. S e e Gra;v. L e c t t . H e s i o d . c. 1 2 .
A l b e r t i Peric. Crit. c. 1 3 . p . 4 7 - a n d Olearius a n d J o h n xii. 2, is to give a feast. I t is a
Palairet here. W a h l , S c h l . and B r . s a y , absolutely to feast in Messiah's kingdom. Rev. x i x . 9 ,
show, place before t h e e y e s ; and S c h l . s a y s , t h a t
x(fffM¡ is Palrestine, or that the show w a s i l l u s i v e ]
* [ S e e X e n . M e m . ii. 7, 12.]
M
 A E I 162 A E K

17. Comp. D a n . v. 1. 4. E s d r . iii. 3 8 . ticularly knowing him, b u t who, though

vi. 4 9 . ] to t h e m utiknown, made the world and all
• I I I , KvpiaKÓv Aéíirvov, The Lord's Sup- things therein, and is the Lord qf heaven
per. occ. 1 Cor. xi. 2 0 . I t appears, how- and earth.
ever, from t h i s and t h e following verses, EjÜP" Autnlaipovía, ac, ?), from Deíai-
t h a t t h e appellation does not strictly mean Saífuov.—Superstition, or religión, or re~
t h e E u c h a r i s t , b u t a supper in imitation ligious worship. occ. Acts x x v . 19. " A s
of t h a t of which our L o r d partook when A g r i p p a was a J e w , and now carne to pay
h e instituted t h e Eucharist. F o r t h i s r e - a visit of respect to F e s t u s on his arrival
m a r k I am indebted to D r . Bell, O n t h e in his province, i t is improbable t h a t he
L o r d ' s S u p p e r , p . 1 5 1 . 2 d edit. where see would use so rude a word as superstition „-
more. so t h a t t h i s t e x t affords a further argu-
{§g¡p° Aeío-iSaípiúv from SeiSio, l s t F u t . ment, (comp. Aucriíaipové^epog) that the
(¡derio tafear, and Saipov a demon. [ E i t h e r word Aeto-iSaiporía will a d m i t a milder
religious, pioits, as in Xen. Cyr. iii. 3 , 2 6 . i n t e r p r e t a r o n . " — D o d d r i d g e . A n d t h u s
& al. or superstitious. See Theoph. Char. Suidas explains SeimSatpovía by év\á€eta
xvi. and P l u t a r c h ' s book on laailaipovía •n-epl TO Qelov, reverence towards the Deiiy,
( W o r k s , vol. ii. p . 4 6 0 . ) ] — C o m p . Aaípwv aud Hesychius by <po&odda, fear of God,
I . " T h e word Aeío-iScdpov," says Mede in which good sense i t is several times
( W o r k s in folio, p . 6 3 5 ) , " by etymology used b y Diodorus Siculus * [ I . 70. Polyb.
signifies a worshipper ofdeinon-gods, and vi. 56. 7f\ So H e r a c l i t u s says of O r p h e u s ,
was anciently used in t h i s s e n s e ; and so h e led men iig heío-tíaiiiovíav, a n d exhorted
you shall find i t often in Clemens Alex- t h e m ¿Vi Vó íva&Av, to be pious, where it
d r i n u s his Protrepticon * , not to speak of is manifest SetcnSaipovía m u s t mean reli-
others." A n d t h u s t h e Etymologist ex- gión, not superstition. B u t , w h a t is more
plains i t by ív\aÉi)g Kal HtiXog irepl Sfe¿g t o our present purpose, t h e word is used
pious andfearing the gods, and Suidas by in t h e like good sense in Josephus, not
$£otre€r)g a worshipper qf God, or qf the only where a H e a t h e n calis t h e P a g a n re-
gods. occ. A c t s xvii. 2 2 ; where S t . P a u l ligión hiaiSaipovíag, ( A n t . lib. x i x . cap.
begins his speech in t h e Areopagus in a 5. § 3.) or w h e r e t h e Jewish religión is
m u c h less t qffensive m a n n e r t h a n i t spoken of by t h i s ñame in several edicts
sounds in our translation. Ye men qf t h a t were made in i t s favour b y t h e Ro-
Aihens, I perceive that in all things ye mans (as in A n t . lib. xiv. cap. 10. § 13,
are wg SeicrtSaipoveTépag, somewhat, or, as 14, 16, 18, 19.) b u t also where t h e histo-
it were, too m u c h addicted to t h e worship rian is expressing his own t h o u g h t s in
of demon-gods. [Schleusner, and I t h i n k his own words. T h u s of k i n g Manasseh
r i g h t l y , says, I see that you are especially, after his repentance and restoration he
and more than others, attentive to reli- says, ko-ir¿b'a'(Ev—iráar) wzpl avTOV (Qcbv)
gious matters; adding, t h a t P a u l would, rrj AEISIAAIMONI'At xpñ^h t h a t he
of course, use a word which could not ir- strove to behave in t h e most religious
rítate t h e A t h e n i a n m i n d ; a n d t h a t so manner towards God, A n t . lib. x. cap. 3.
h e j u d g e d this fittest for t h a t purpose, § 2 ; and speaking of a r i o t t h a t happened
a n d yet to convey a tacit reproof to their among t h e J e w s on occasion of a Román
s u p e r s t i t i o n . ] — I n t h i s exordium, h e also soldier's b u r n i n g t h e book of t h e law, he
insinuates an answer to t h e charge b r o u g h t observes t h a t t h e J e w s were drawn to-
against him, ver. 18, t h a t h e seemed to be g e t h e r on t h i s occasion ry A E I S I A A l -
a proclaimer qfnew d e m o n - g o d s ; namely, M O N f Ai, b y t h e i r religión, as if it had
t h a t since h e saw t h e m so m u c h addicted been b y an engine, ópyávw TIVI. D e Bel.
to t h e worship of demons airead y, h e would lib. ii. cap. 12. § 2 . Comp. cap. ix. § 3.
n o t introduce any new demons among [Schleus. takes i t in a good sense in this
t h e m ; b u t , as h e goes on to declare, h e passage of t h e A c t s . Bretsch. in t h e sense
would wish to recall t h e m to t h e worship of s u p e r s t i t i o n ; b u t Schleus. is assuredly
of t h a t God, whom, out of their g r e a t Sei- r i g h t , for t h e reasons given by Doddridge.]
aiSaipovia, t h e y worshipped w i t h o u t par- Ática, bi, ai, ra. Indeclinable.—The
number Ten, from U^daí (Ionic Séicea-
* E t Strom. lib. vii. p. 604, AenriSiipuní, ó SESIO!;
Oai) to receive, contain, because it con-
TU §ixifi6¡/ta,
•)• See Lardner's Credibility of Gospel History,
vol. i. book i. ch. 8. § 7, 3. p. 412, 413, and note, * See Hammond on Acts xvii.. 22, and Pole
lst edition. Synops.
 A EN 163

tains all t h e units u n d e r it. M a t . x x . 2 4 . vii. 17, 18, 19. xiii. 3 2 . & al. freq. I n
x x v . 1. M a r k viii. 2 4 , many M S S . , five of which
AeKabíio, bi, di, ra, from $ém ten, and ancient, a n d some editions read, BXeVw
Súo two.—Twelve. occ. A c t s xix. 7. xxiv. ras dvdpwTrtis brl ¿>£ BévSpa bpG> Trepara-
11. [See E x . xxyiii. 2 1 . E s t h . ii. 12.] TSvrae,, I see men, because I see them as
AetcaTrévre, bi, di, r a . Indeclinable, trees (confusedly, like t h e trees which t h e
from fóca ten, a n d irévre man knew were growing in t h e fields near
five.—Fifteen,
occ. J o h n xi. 18. A c t s xxvii. 2 8 . Gal. i. Bethsaida, a n d which h e also knew could
18. [ E x . xxvii. 15. J u d g . viii. 10.] not n a t u r a l l y move from t h e place where
AcKciTíacrapEQ, ói, di, Kai ra BeKaréiraapa, t h e y grew, whereas w h a t h e took t o be
from Sé-Ka ten, a n d réVo-apEe four.—Four- men he saw) walking. See W e t s t e i n V a r .
teen. occ. M a t . i. 17- Gal. ii. 1. [ G e n . Lect. Wolfius, and Griesbach. [ I t is a
xxxi. 4 1 . N u m b . x x i x . 1 3 . ] shrub in M a t . xiii. 3 2 . M a r k iv. 3 2 . L u k e
AéKaroe, v, ov, from Sém. xiii. 19. See Salmas. E x e r c . de H o m o -
I . The tenth. occ. J o h n i. 3 9 . Rev. x i . nymis H y l e s I n t r . p . 15.]
13. xxi. 2 0 . At£,ió\a&oe, a, ó, from kv rrj (Setya
I I . AfKari?, f)£, r¡, {¡xo'ipa, part, being Xá&éiv, taking in the right hand.—A sol-
understood.) The tenth part, tithe. occ. dier who takes and carnes a spear or j a -
H e b . vii. 2, 4, 8, 9. See W e t s t e i n on velin in his right hand, a spearman. occ.
verse 4, for instances of t h e H e a t h e n dedi- A c t s xxiii. 2 3 . [ T h i s word occurs in. n o
cating to their gods t h e tenth of spoils good Greek a u t h o r ; b u t in Theophylact.
t a k e n in war. [ I t is tithe of spoil. H e b . Simocatta, iv. 1. a n d Constantin. P o r p h y r .
vii. 2. G e n . xiv. 2 0 . X e n . Ages. i. 3 4 . Of T h e m a t . i. ] . M e u r s i u s , in his Lexicón
the fruils qf the earth. H e b . vii. 8. L e v . Graeco-barbarum, says t h e Sí^ioXat,oi were
xxvii. 3 0 . O n t h e Jewish T i t h e s , see H o t - t h e constables or pólice, who seized t h e
t i n g e r ' s T r e a t i s e ; on t h e H e a t h e n T i t h e s , guilty a n d took them t o prison or to p u n -
see m y Inscriptiones Grsecaj, p . 2 1 5 . ] ishment, Schleusner t h i n k s t h e y were
AtKaróiú, ü, from SéKaroc, SEKCITTI, the royal g u a r d s , who carried a lance in t h e i r
tenth.—To tithe, receive tithes of. occ. r i g h t h a n d , who n o t only g u a r d e d t h e
H e b . vii. 6. AíKaróopai, Spai, pass. To king, b u t t h e captives whose r i g h t h a n d
be tithed, pay tithes. occ. H e b . vii. 9. was c h a i n e d . ] T h e Alexandrian M S .
[ N e h . x. 3 7 . ] reads Se^iotóXue; b u t since all t h e other
AeKrog, r¡, ov, from oéScKrai, 3(1 pers. M S S . (except one mentioned b y E r a s -
perf. of déxopai to receive. m u s ) have ^ l o X á É a c , Mill's opinión seems
I . Accepted, acceptable, agreeable. occ. highly probable, t h a t Se^iotóXue is no
L u k e iv. 2 4 . Acts x. 3 5 . P h i l . iv. 18. [ S e e more t h a n a gloss, which was originally
P r o v . xxii. 1 1 . L e v . i. 4 . Isa. Ivi. 7- M a l . placed in t h e m a r g i n , a n d thence c r e p t
ii. 13. Ecclus. ii. 5.] into t h e t e x t . T h i s gloss, however, which
I I . [Fortúnate, propitious. L u k e iv. 1 9 . signifies those who casi darts or javelins
a n d 2 Cor. vi. 2. T h e word does not oc- mith the right hand, confirms t h e i n t e r -
cur in good G r e e k . ] p r e t a r o n of Seé,ióXa£oQ j u s t given.
IT^L" Aéktái^ti), from SéXeap, aros, rb, a Aeiitbs, a, bv.—Right, as opposed to
hait.—To take or catch, properly w i t h a left, so applied t o t h e eye, M a t . v. 2 9 . —
bait, as birds or fishes are c a u g h t . o c c 2 t o t h e cheek, M a t . v. 3 9 . — t o t h e ear,
P e t . ii. 14, 18. J a m e s i. 14, é^tXKÓpevoQ L u k e x x i i . 5 0 . — t ó t h e foot, R e v . x. 2 .
nal S¿Xna'CópEvoQ, " These words," says B u t properly a n d most generally Be^ia d e -
D o d d r i d g e , " have a singular b e a u t y a n d notes the right hand, a n d t h a t w h e t h e r
elegance, containing an allusion t o t h e joined with x¿~'P: M a t . v. 3 0 ; or n o t , M a t .
m e t h o d of drawing fishes out of t h e w a t e r vi. 3 . x x v i i . 2 9 . G a l . ii. 9. [ T h e phrase
•with a hook concealed u n d e r t h e bait, Se£idc SiSóvaí nvi, like t h e L a t i n dextram
which t h e y greedily devour." T h u s also daré (Tac. A n n . xv. 29. Virg. iEnead. iii.
Xenophon, Memor. Socrat. lib. ii. cap. 1.
610.) means to make a covenant, or agree-
§4, where, disputing with Aristippus about
ment, t h e r i g h t h a n d being a sign oífaith
pleasure, h e says some animáis are yáspi
as 'well as of charily and love. So G a l . i i .
AEAEAZO'MENA, caught b y their belly i
9. 1 Mace. x i . 6 2 . xiii. 5 0 . X e n . A n a b . i.
or appetite. See Raphelius, W e t s t e i n , I
6, 6. Joseph. A . J . xviii. 9, 3 . — A E Í J I Ó C ; is
a n d Kypke. [So Herodian, i. 12. .¿Elian
u s e d for that which is on the right, in 2
V . H . xiv. 1 7 . ] !
Cor. vi. 7.]
AévSpov, o, rb.—A tree. M a t . iii. 10. Ae^tct, r a . N e u t . p l u r . (pépr¡ parts, being
M 2
 A E P 164 A E 2

understood) The parís towards the right 236, ¿KciépEcrdat. [Aristoph. R a n . 6 3 2 .

hand, i. e. the right hand side. M a t . xx, Diog. L a e r t . vii. 2 3 . I n L u k e xii. 4 7 ,
2 1 , where see W e t s t e i n . M a t . xxii. 44 48, t h e Verb is followed by TroXXac, ¿XI-
xxv. 3 3 . & al. M¿pr¡ is expressed, J o h n yae; irXrjyae is understood, as in Aris-
xxi. 6. O n t h e expressions of Christ sil toph. Nubb. 9 6 8 . Vesp. 1277. Soph. E l .
ting on the right hand of God, being ex- 1438. See Bos, p . 3 8 5 . ed. Schcef. T h e
alted to his right hand, and t h e like, word SapTicrerai oceurs in A g . Prov. x . 8.
M a r k xvi. 19. Acts ii. 3 3 , &c. see Vitrin for he shall suffer punishment.~]
ga's Observ. Saer. lib. ii. cap. 4. a n d 5. I I I . To beat, strike in general, as a
edit. 3 t i í E . [Vitringa's decisión is that, as person. occ. J o h n xviii. 2 3 . 2 Cor. xi. 2 0 . *
to sit, in Scripture, frequently means to — t h e air. occ. 1 Cor. ix. 2 6 ; where i t
reign ; and to sit with a king even m o r e seems t o refer to t h e '¡¡Kiapáyia of t h e a n -
strongly implies t o be joined in his p o w e r ; cient athleta?, or their exercising t h e m -
and íinally, to sit on his right hand, in selves in imaginary combats, in which
which the sceptre is placed, even y e t more they would of course strike nothing b u t
decidedly shows participation in his a u - the air. So Virgil of a boxer p r e p a r i n g
thority, t h e phrase, as applied t o o u r for t h e combat,—verberat ictibus auras,
L o r d , expresses t h a t communion of power ¿En. v. line 3 7 7 . See Wetstein on 1 Cor.
and glory which exists between H i m and ix. 26.
the F a t h e r . See Bishop Pearson and his Aecrpévb).
N o t e s on this article of t h e Creed.] I. [ T o iie together, or bind as sheaves.
Aéopai. See u n d e r Aéto. Gen. xxxvii. 7. J o b xxvi. 8. X e n . A n a b .
Aéppa, aroQ, rb, from bépoi toflay, strip v. 8.]
off the skin.—A skin of a beast flayed off I I . [To enchain. A c t s xxii. 4 . X e n o p h .
t h e body. occ. H e b . x i . 3 7 . Comp. u n d e r H i e r . vi. 14. vii. 12.]
Mr¡k¿)rr¡. [ I t is r a t h e r a g a r m e n t made I I I . [ T o bind upon any thing. Mat.
of a skin, such as was used by t h e p r o - xxiii. 4 . T h e metaphor is obviously from
phets. See Zach. xiii. 4 . 2 Kings i. 8.] beasts of burden.]
Aepparivbc, i), bv, from Séppa.—Made Astrpéoj, G>, from (¡écrpoc.—To bind. occ.
of skin, leathern. occ. M a t . iii. 4 . M a r k i. L u k e viii. 2 9 .
6. [ C o m p . Gen. iii. 2 1 . L e v . xiii. 5 8 . ] Aeo-pt), f¡s, r), from SéSecrpai, perf. pass.
AE'Píl. A t t i c of Mu to bind.—A bundle; which
I . To flay, strip off the skin. I n t h i s English word is derived in like manner
its proper sense t h e word oceurs not i n from t h e V. to bind. occ. M a t . xiii. 3 0 . —
t h e N . T . b u t in t h e L X X versión of T h e L X X use líaprt. Exod. xii. 2 2 , for
2 Chron. x x i x . 3 4 , for t h e H e b . B>ü>&n t h e Heb. TtíM a bunch, of hyssop namely.
to flay. I t is also t h u s used by H o m e r , Aécrpwe, a, o, from bícrpoQ.—One bound,
speaking of sacrificial victims, II. i. line a prisoner. M a t . xxvii. 1 5 , 16. Acts xvi.
459, 2 5 , 2 7 . & al. freq. O n Philem. verse 1,
see Macknight. [ T h e expressions b Ma-
-Av -ico
pioc Kvpíti, &c. mean one who is in prison
F i r s t t h e y drew back their necks, then kill'd a n d for Christ's ía/ce.Lam. i i i . 3 3 . Zach.ix. 1 1 . ]
Jlaifd. Aíapoc, «, ó, p l u r . bícrpa, ra,f ( b u t T¿Q
¿Eoyisc, P h i l . i. 13.), from (¡¿Eéo-pat perf.
So II. vii. line 3 1 6 ,
pass. A t t i c of Sé<¡> to bind.
Tov AE'PON •—• I . A bond or chain, such as prisoners
T h e steer they jluy'd. or others were bound with. A c t s xvi. 2 6 .
xxvi. 2 9 . L u k e viii. 2 9 . & al. freq. I n
I I . Toflay by beating with fods or t h e H e b . x . 3 4 , t h e Alexandidan, Clermont,
like, to beat or scourge severely. occ. M a t . and t h r e e later M S S . , together with t h e
xxi. 3 5 . M a r k xii. 3 , 5. xiii. 9. L u k e xii. Vulgate, both t h e Syriac, and several other
47, 4 8 . xx. 10, 1 1 . xxii. 6 3 . A c t s v. 4 0 . ancient versions, read beerpíote prisoners,
xvi. 3 7 . xxii. 19. T h o u g h this is a very which reading is embraced by W e t s t e i n ,
uncommon sense of t h e V . y e t t h e diligent and by Griesbach received into t h e t e x t .
K y p k e , on M a t . xxi. 3 5 , produces Aristo-
phanes in Vesp. applying t h e simple V. * f I t here i m p l i e s contumely."]
+ [ T h i s is A t t i c . S e e Maaris i n V o c e , and E u s -
cépeiv and Séptcrdaí, and t h e compound
tath. ad H o m . O d . i x . p . 1 5 9 8 . 17- R o m . T h e
arrobépta-daí, to this m e a n i n g ; a n d like- other declension i s found in the L X X . J e r . i i . 2 0 .
wise A r r i a n E p i c t e t . lib. ii. cap. 2 0 . p . v. 5 . H a b b a k . iii. 1 3 . ]
 A E S 165 AES

II. The string or ligament of the t h e common reading, t h e w a n t of the a r -

tongue. occ. M a r k vii. 3 5 . Theognis, ticle rov before Kvpiov shows t h a t Jesús
Tvwp. line 1 7 8 , TXüaaa lé ói A E A E T A I , Christ is t h e r e styled rov póvov AESITO'-
H i s tongue is tied. THN Qebv, the only L O R D God, as well as
I I I . I t is spoken of an infirmity owing our Lord. B u t if, with t h e Alexandrian,
to a satanical agency. occ. L u k e xiii. 1 6 , and another ancient M S . , and eleven later
where see Wolfius and Kypke. ones, a n d t h e V u l g . versión (see Mili,
f§§p° Aeapoojvka'í,, aicoc, o, from Séo-fioe, Wetstein, a n d Griesbach), we omit t h e
a n d (¡>v\áo-<rü> to Iceep.—A keeper qf pri- word QEOV, t h i s application of póvov A E 2 -
soners, a jailer. occ. Acts x v i . 2 3 , 2 7 , nO'THN to Jesús Christ will be still
36. more evident. A n d t h e same sort of per-
Aeo-purripiov, u, rb, from cW^tów to bind, sons, who in J u d e ver. 4 , are said to deny
which from Séo-pog.—A place where per- the only A E 2 n O ' T H N , L O R D , are in t h e
sons are bound and confined, a prison. parallel t e x t of S t . P e t e r , 2 E p . ii. 1 , d e -
occ. M a t . x i . 2 . A c t s v. 2 1 , 2 3 . xvi. 2 6 . scribed as denying the L O R D , A E 2 B 0 ' -
Ascpúirní, u, ó, from Secpó'i) to bind, THN, who bought them. W h o he is, we
which from Béo-pog.—A person bound, a may learn from Gall. iii. 1 3 , a n d t h e
prisoner. occ. A c t s xxvii. 1 , 4 2 . [ G e n . h y m n i u g elders in Rev. v. 9 . will also i n -
xxxix. 21.]. form us, for t h e person there addressed
AEO-7TÓY71C, tí, ó. bought them to God with HIS OWN
[ I . Generally, One who commands, or B L O O D *.—Lastly, that t h e title of
is at the head qf any thingf] AE2IT0'TH2, in Rev. vi. 1 0 , belongs t o
I I . A sovereign lord, a sovereign. Ap- Christ, will be manifest b y comparing
plied t o C h r i s t a n d t h e Holv Spirit. occ. Rev. iii. 7 . M a t . xxviii. 1 8 . J o h n v . 2 2 .
L u k e ii. 2 9 . A c t s iv. 2 4 . 2 "Tim. ii. 2 1 . — G r o t i u s therefore was not mistaken, as
2 Pet- ii. 1 . J u d e ver. 4 . Rev. vi. 1 0 . — D r . Clarke asserts he was, in saying t h a t
D r . Clarke, in his Scripture Doctrine of Christ is sometimes called A E O T T Ó Y T / G i n
t h e T r i n i t y , N o . 4 0 7 * , asserts, t h a t t h e N e w T e s t a m e n t . I add further w i t h
" Christ is no where in t h e N e w T e s t a - r e g a r d to t h e Holy Spirit, t h a t L u k e ii.
m e n t styled A£<77TÓY?)£ ( b u t God the Fa- 2 9 . A c t s iv. 2 4 . furnish us with clear i n -
ther only, as L u k e ii. 2 9 . A c t s iv. 2 4 . stances of His being religiously invoked
2 T i m . ii. 2 1 . J u d e 4 . a n d Rev. vi. 1 0 ) . "by holy m e n , a n d of His having divine
L e t us then examine these t e x t s . — L u k e attributes expressly ascribed t o h i m .
ii. 2 6 , It was revealed to him (Simeón) [ P a r k h u r s t ' s a r g u m e n t here is very i 11
vwb (not ota) b y t h e Holy Ghost, that he b r o u g h t forward, a n d some of his reason-
shoidd not see death before he had seen ings are very imperfect. The argument
the Lord's Christ; a n d on seeing him, he for t h e divinity of C h r i s t , from t h e a p -
says, ver. 2 9 , A E ' S I I O T A , L O R D , now plication of the word A E O T T Ó V Í J C . t o him, is,
lettest thou thy servant depart in peace, t h a t (as D r . J . P . S m i t h , on t h e Person
according t o t h y w o r d ; for mine eyes of Christ, vol. ii. p . 6 0 2 , h a s well observed)
have seen thy salvation. I s not t h e n t h e t h e title of dominión, elsewhere a p -
Holy Ghost here styled A E W O J - G : . — A c t s plied in a very marked m a n n e r to t h e
iv. 2 4 , 2 5 , They lift up their voice to F a t h e r , is given also t o Christ. B u t
God with one accord, and said AE'SITO- P a r k h u r s t takes away i t s use from t h e
T A , L O R D , thou art God, which hast F a t h e r , to whom i t appears t o me, beyond
made heaven and earth, and the sea, and all doubt, to be applied in A c t s iv. 2 4 .
all that in them is; who by the mouth of for creation is oftener predicated of the
thy servant David hast said—But b y Father, a n d t h e very t e r m s here used,
A c t s i. 1 6 , i t was the Holy Ghost who lead one to t h i n k of t h e God of Israel. I
spake by t h e m o u t h of David. I t is He, should also so j u d g e of L u k e ii. 2 6 , a n d
therefore, who in Acts iv. 2 4 , is styled this is t h e general opinión of t h e critics.
Aéo-Trora.—In 2 T i m . ii. 2 1 , T Í T Í A E 2 - In 2 P e t . ii. 1 , and J u d e v. 4 , i t is beyond
HO'THi the Master (of t h e house) t h e r e a d o u b t t o be applied t o Christ. Even
spoken of, m a y most naturally be referred Bretsch. allows these, a n d Schl. t h e first
to Christ, who is named ver. 1 9 . comp. of t h e m . I t is curious, t h a t , in order t o
H e b . iii. 6 . If in J u d e ver. 4 , we follow t a k e away t h e second from C h r i s t w i t h

* Comp- N o . 1 5 , and Clarke's C o m m e n t on 4 0 * S e e the reverend a n d learned W i l l i a m J o n e s ' s

Texis, N o . 15. Catholic D o c t r i n e of the T r i n i t y , chap. i. N o . 4 0 ,
 A EY 166 A E X

more show of reason, he persists in a who shows that Homer often uses
reading rejected by Griesbach, and with Acvre.
sufficient ground in most persons' opinión. TLGP AtvrípaíoQ,
0
a, ov, from Stírepog.
M r . Sharp has, however, shown t h a t , even —Doing somewhat on the second day;
with this rejected reading, t h e place m u s t for these nouns in áloe denote the day.
still be referred to Christ. See Nares's Comp. Terapraioe. occ. A c t s xxviii. 1 3 ;
Remarks on t h e Improved Versión, p . on which t e x t Raphelius observes t h a t
239. I o u g h t t o cite some passages in t h e Xenophon [ C y r . v. 2. 1.] uses Sevrepcüos
L X X , where Aetnrórne is used qf the in t h e same s e n s e . *
Father. J o b v. 8. Prov. xxix. 2 6 . J e r . AevTepcnrpioros, ti, o, from Seírepoc
xv. 1 1 . See again in t h e Apoc. Wisdom the second, a n d Trpüroe the Jirst.—The
vi. 7. viii. 3 . I n t h e follovving i t is used first sabbath after the second day qfun-
for >JIN or p i K , Gen. xv. 2 , 8. Josh. v. 14. leavened bread, from which day t h e seven
P r o v . xxx. 1. J e r . i. 6. iv. 12. F o r its weeks (called ITIRÜTT? sabbaths, Lev. xxiii.
use as to H e a t h e n gods, see Palairet. Obss. 15. comp. L e v . xxiii. 8. L u k e xviii. 1 2 .
Crit. p . 2 8 3 . ] A c t s x x . 7 . 1 Cor. xvi. 2.) were t o be
III. A human lord or master, as of reckoned, L e v . xxiii. 15, 16. D e u t . xvi.
servants. occ. 1 T i m . vi. 1. 2 T i t . ii. 9. 9. O n t h i s sabbath t h e barley was nearly
1 P e t . ii. 18.—In t h e L X X Atcnrórne six ripe in J u d e a . occ. L u k e vi. 1. T h i s a p -
times answers t o t h e H e b . p i * or }17K, as pears t h e most probable interpretation of
applied either t o m a n or God, a n d p a r - this difficult word, a n d is t h a t which
ticularly to t h e divine Captain of J e h o - Stockius a n d D o d d r i d g e have embraced.
vah's host. Josh. v. 14. Comp. v. 15. [So Scaliger, Casaubon, KuinSel, a n d
[ I V . A possessor. T o t h i s head Schl. Schleusner.]
a n d Br. refer 2 T i m . ii. 2 1 . T h i s mean- AevTspoe, a, ov. T h e learned D a m m ,
i n g is found elsewhere. Theophyl. E p . Lexic. col. 4 6 1 , derives i t from de-úu to
19. Schl. gives t h e sense, A husband, a n d fail, fall short, a n d says i t is p r o p e r l y
quotes 1 P e t . iii. 6, referring to G e n . spoken of those who are second in a triol
xviii. 1 2 ; b u t t h e word in eaeh case is qf skill or aclivity. H o m e r certainly a p -
¡aptos. T h e sense oceurs, E u r . Med. 2 2 3 . plies i t in t h i s sense, II. x. line 3 6 8 . II.
Hel. 5 7 8 . ] xxiii. lin. 2 6 5 , 4 9 8 . B u t w h a t properly
Atvpo. A n adv. both of place and t i m e , confirms t h i s derivation is, t h a t H o m e r
signifying hither, perhaps from Sita to uses not only t h e comparative Aévrepoe,
come, enter, as Sevre beloiv. b u t also t h e superlative Aévraroe the last,
I . Of place, Here, hither. In the N . T . II. xix. line 5 1 . Odyss. i. line 2 8 6 . Odyss.
w h e n implying place, it is used only in xxiii. line 3 4 2 .
calling or encouraging, a n d m a y be ren- Second. Mat. xxi. 30. xxii. 26, 3 9 .
dered, Come, come hither. Mat. xix. 2 1 . & al. Aívrzpov n e u t . is used as an adverb,
L u k e xviii. 2 2 . J o h n xi. 4 3 . & al. See Secondly, a, or the, second time. J o h n iii.
W e t s t e i n on M a t . a n d observe t h a t H o m e r 4. x x i . 16. 1 Cor. x i i . 2 8 . 2 Cor. xiii. 2 .
frequently uses t h i s word. See D a m m i Rev. xix. 3 . ' E K (¡tvríptj (íceupa time,
Lexic. col. 1 0 6 1 . [ I n A c t s vii. 3 , a n d namely, being understood) A, or the, se-
34. a n d in 2 K i n g s iii. 13. v. 19. i t seems cond time. M a t . xxvi. 4 2 . J o h n i x . 2 4 . &
to have t h e opposite signification, go.] al. Comp. u n d e r ' E K 4 .
I I . Of time, with t h e n e u t e r article, AÍ opai.
X _ _
"A^pi r a S¿vpo, Till this time, hitherio, I. To receive, contam mithin itselj, as
occ. Rom. i. 1 3 , where see W e t s t e i n . a place doth w h a t is p u t therein. occ. A c t s
AEVTS. A n adv. of compellalion or call- iii. 2 1 . [ L u t h e r translates t h i s place,
ing.—Come, come hither, addressed t o se- who must oceupy heaven. So B e n g e l a n d
veral. M a t . iv. 19. xi. 2 8 . xxv. 3 4 . L u k e Wolf. See E u r . Alcest. 8 1 7 . ]
x x . 14. T h i s word doth in form resem- II. To take, receive wilhin or between
ble a verb 2 d pers. plur. i m p e r a t i v e ; and t h e a r m s . L u k e ii. 2 8 . [into the hands,
since both in t h e sacred and profane w r i - xxii. 17.]
t e r s i t is applied in no other manner t h a n III. To receive, entertain, as a person.
as a V . in t h a t form would be, t h e most M a t . x. 4 0 , 4 1 . [ x v i i i . 5 . L u k e i x . I I .
n a t u r a l derivation of i t seems to be from
Síia to come, e being inserted, as if from
* [ S e e also Diocl. S i c . x v i . G8. P o l y b . ii. 70.
t h e V . ÍEÚW. Comp. Avio. See W e t s t e i n
Perizon. ad j E l i a n . V . H . iii. 1 4 . a n d V i g e r . d e
on M a t . and D a m m i L e x i c . col. 1 0 6 2 , tdiot.iii. 2, 15.]
 A E £1 167 A Efí

xvi. 4.] A c t s xxi. 1 7 . [2 Cor. vii. 15. Col. s a l e m ; and refer to v. 2 3 . a n d x x i . 4 .

iv. 10.] Gal. iv. 14. [ H e b . xi. 31.] Beza, Vitringa, and others say, it means,
Comp. Acts vii. 5 9 . [ X e n . A n a b . vii. 7, bound or compelled by the Holy Ghost lo
26.] go to Jerusalem. E r a s m u s has, corpore
I V . To reccive, embrace, as a doctrine. líber, sed spiritu alligatus. Alberti t h i n k s
[ M a t . xi. 14. L u k e viii. 13.] A c t s viii. it is here for slrengthened (bound round)
14. x i . 1. xvii. 1 1 . 1 Thess. i. 6. & al. by the Spirit. Wolf and others t h i n k t h a t
Comp. 2 Thess. ii. 10. 1 Cor. ii. 14. 7 T V . is h e r e t h e m i n d of P a u l illuminated
[ A r i s t o t . R h e t . iii. 17. T h u c y d . iv. 16. b y revelation, b y which h e foresaw his
Schl. makes óv Séx° r
iaL
™ 2 Thess. ii. 10. future imprisonment. Schl. t h i n k s it is
(as in T h u c y d . v. 32.) I refuse or reject, compelled by my mind or inclination. In
b u t i t seems to me, simply, t h e negative L u k e xiii. 1 6 . t h e binding means t h e ac-
of t h i s 4 t h meaning. H e also refers M a t . t u a l contraction or binding together of
x . 4 0 . to t h i s h e a d . ] t h e woman's limbs, see verse 1 1 . She
V. To receive, bear with, bear patienlly, was, says Wolf, w h a t t h e G r e e k p h y s i -
as a person. 2 Cor. xi. 16. So D e m e t r i u s cians cali épirpoo-doToviKi), drawnforward.
in P l u t a r c h D e Defect. Orac. p . 4 1 2 . F . See Hippoc. v. E p i d e m . § xii. and xv. for
AE'S?AS6E r)fiae—Kat OTTCOS Ú crvva&TE t h e same use of oéw. T h e T e t a n u s E m -
r a e ó(ppvQ—cricoirÚTe, Bear with us, and prosthotonus is often a chronic disease in
t a k e heed not to frown. See E l s n e r and not countries.]
Wolfius. [¿Elian. V . H . iii. 2 6 . Schwartz. I I . To bind up, swathe. J o h n xix. 4 0 .
ad Olear, de Styl. N . T . p . 3 4 8 . ] _ I I I . To bind or oblige by a moral or
V I . To receive, somewhat given, or religious obligation. Rom. vii. 2 . 1 Cor.
communicated. A c t s xxii. 5 . xxviii. 2 1 . vii. 2 7 , 3 9 .
P h i l . iv. i 8. Comp. 2 Cor. viii. 4 . [Xen. I V . To bind, pronounce or determine
Cyr. i. 4 , 10. and 5. 5. A r r i a n D i s s . E p . to be binding or obligatory, i. e. of duties
ii. 7, 11.] to performance, of transgression t o punish-
V I L To loóle for, expect. A¿xppo.t is m e n t . M a t . xvi. 1 9 . xviii. 1 8 . Comp.
often t h u s applied iii H o m e r , as in II. John xx. 2 3 .
xviii. line 5 2 4 , AE'Q.
I . To have need, to want, lacle. Thus
t h e V . active is sometimes, t h o u g h rarely,
AE'rMENOI óVíróVe fxr¡\a ISOJCÍTO xa) khixois (3u¡. used in t h e profane writers, as in H o m e r ,
II. xviii. line 100.—'Ep¿io Sé A i r S E N ,
T w o spies at distance lurk,'and leatchful seem
I f sheep or o x e n seek the w i n d i n g stream. H e wanted m e . So P l a t o in Apol. Socr¿
POPE. § 1 8 & 2 7 . edit. F o r s t e r , TTÓXXB AE'£2,
I want much, i. e. I am far from- And
SO II. ii. line 794, and II. ix. line 1 9 1 . L u c í a n , Rev. iv. t o m . i. p . 4 0 6 . B . "Eyw
T h e simple V. however, is not in t h e dé TOO-STÜ A E ' Í 2 , I am so far from.
N . T . ñor scarcely by any prose writer, I I . [As a verb impersonal. Att. ( 1 . ) It
used in t h i s sense, which is here inserted is necessary, it behoves. M a t . xvi. 2 1 .
on account of t h e derivates íídSéxppai, xvii. 1 0 . J o h n x. 1 6 . & al. freq. ( 2 . ) It
Trpotx(Sé)(ppa.i, which see. is becoming, proper, or one's duty. M a t .
Aéw. xviii. 1 3 . xxiii. 2 3 . x x v . 2 7 . M a r k xiii.
I . To bind, tie, as with a chain, cord, 1 4 . L u k e iv. 4 3 . xxii. 7 . 1 T i m . iii. 2 , 7 ,
or t h e like. M a t . x x i i . 1 3 . xxvii. 2 . M a r k 1 5 . T i t . i. 7 , 1 1 . H e b . ii. 1 . x i . 6 . 2 P e t .
v. 3 , 4. & al. freq. Comp. M a t . x x i . 2 . iii. 1 1 . Schl. translates i t in L u k e xiii.
xiii. 30. A n d on L u k e xiii. 16, see 1 4 . by, it is lanfid, and in L u k e x i x . 5 .
Wolfius. [ I n t h e following places, i t by, it picases me, b u t q u i t e unnecessarily.
means, To throw into chains, malee a Both fall u n d e r t h e first head, w i t h o u t ,
prisoner. M a t . xxvii. 2 . M a r k . xv. 1, 7. however, a n y m a r k e d expression of n e -
A c t s ix. 2 , 14, 2 1 . x x i . 13. xxii. 5 , 2 9 . cessity in t h e first place, / am to work.
xxiv. 2 7 . Col. iv. 3 . I n 2 T i m . ii. 19, I n t h e second, t h e necessity is s t r o n g e r ,
t h e meaning is, to resirain or hinder. I n It is arranged or decreed that I am to be
A c t s x x . 2 2 , t h e r e are various explana- in your house. I n 1 Cor. x i . 1 9 . Schl.
tions of (SECEJUEVOC T<Ú Trvívpari. Some, as says, It is advaniageous, a n d so, p e r -
E r a s m u s Schmidt, i n t e r p r e t icv. of a reve- haps, H a m m o n d ,• b u t I t h i n k i t is, It
lation b y t h e H o l y Ghost, t h a t P a u l cannot be but that there will be divisions,
should be thrown into chains a t J e r u - i. e. from t h e propensities of h u m a n n a -
 A II M 168 A I A

t u r e ; and so R o s e n m ü l l e r . l — A e ó v , ró. and áyopéio to speak to or liarangue.—

Neecl, needful, becoming. See [Acts xix. To speak to or harangue the people *,
1 9 . ] 1 T i m . v. 13. l P e t . i. 6 * . to make a public oration, [used generally
I I I . Aíopai, pass. To be in want or of great men's speeches.T, occ. [ P r o v . x x x .
need, to rvant. I n this sense it is not 31.] A c t s xii. 2 1 .
used by t h e writers of t h e N . T . in t h e Anpiupybs, a, ó, from ¡¡ripios public
simple form, t h o u g h t h e compound Trpoc- (which from Sijpos a people), and ípyov
work.
oíofiai is, [ X e n . de Rep. A t h . ii. 3.]
I V . To pray, beseech, supplicate, I . One who workeih for the public, or
used
absolutely, Acts iv. 3 1 . Rom. i. 10.—with performeth public works, also an archi-
a genitive of t h e person, M a t , ix. 3 8 . tect. So Suidas from t h e Schol. on A r i s -
L u k e v. 12. A c t s x x i . 3 9 . & al. freq.— toph. Koivios SE tkíyov br/píhpyas, r¿s ra
with a genitive of t h e person and an ac- Bripórria kpyai^opévas' iróre <5¿ Kal r5c áp-
cus. of t h e t h i n g . 2 Cor. viii. 4, With [ I t is t h e ñame of t h e Achaean
•)(ir¿KTOvas.
much inireaty requesting of us this favour magistrates. See Pol. E x c . L e g . 4 7 . A r i s -
a n d t h e communication qf this ministra- tot. Polit. ii. 1 0 . ]
tion to the sainis. F o r t h e words Zílfia- I I . I t is applied to God, the architect
6ai ripás at t h e e n d of t h e verse seem a of t h a t continuing and glorious city which
spurious addition, being w a n t i n g in t h i r t y - Abraham looked for. occ. H e b . xi. 10,
four M S S . , four of which ancient, u n n o - where see W e t s t e i n . [ G o d is so called b y
ticed in t h e Vulg. in both t h e Syriac and Josephus, A . J . vii. 14. 1 1 . X e n . M e m . i.
other ancient versions, and accordingly r e - 4. 2.]
jected by Wetstein, and thrown o u t of t h e Arjpos, a, ó . — A people. occ. A c t s xii.
t e x t by Griesbach. [ W i t h ínrep or 7r¡rpt, 22. xvii. 5 . xix. 3 0 , 3 3 . [Schl. makes i t
1 pray for any one, as L u k e xxii. 3 2 . the forum, in A c t s xvii. 5 . x i x . 3 0 . b u t
A c t s viii. 2 4 . P s . x x i x . 8. J o b ix. 15.] Br. properly says, the people in their
A H \ A n adv. public assembly. S o i E l i a n . V . H . ii. 1.]
1. Of affirming, Truly, in truth. occ. Ar/pócrios, a, ov, from Srjpos.
2 Cor. xii. 1. Comp. M a t . xiii. 2 3 . [ J e r . I . Public, common. occ. A c t s v. 18.
xxxvii. 2 0 . ] I I . A-npoo-ía, Publicly. I t is t h e t
2 . Of e x h o r t i n g , \Comef\ by all means, dative case used adverbially by an ellipsis,
or t h e like. occ. L u k e ii. 1 5 . Acts xv. 3 6 . for kv Sripoala x ^ W ) m a
public place, or
Comp. A c t s xiii. 2. &c. occ. Acts xvi. 3 7 . xviii. 2 8 . x x . 2 0 .
3 . Of inferring, Therefore. occ. 1 Cor. [ S o 2 M a c . vi. 2 0 . X e n . M e m . iv. 8 .
vi. 2 0 . Blackwall, Sacred Classics, vol. i. 2.]
p . 145, observes, t h a t Plato applies this Üg AHNA'PION, a, rb. L a t . — A word
0

particle in t h e same manner. B u t in this formed from t h e Latin denarius, which

use of Sñ, its affirmative or hortative sense denotes the Román penny, .so called b e -
seems also to be included, q. d. Therefore cause in ancient times i t consisted, denis
truly, or therefore by all means*. [So assibus, of ten asses. I t was a silver coin,
in t h e Song of t h e T h r e e Children, and and equal t o about sevenpence half-penny
X e n . M e m . iii. 4 , 7.] of our money. See M a t . x x . 2 , 9, 10.
AH"AOS, í ) , ov.—Manifest, evident. xxii. 19. T h e former passages show, t h a t
occ. M a t . xxvi. 7 3 . 1 Cor. xv. 2 7 . G a l . t h e price of labour was i n our Saviour's
iii. 1. 1 T i m . vi. 7. time nearly t h e same in J u d e a , as i t was
ArfKóto, w, from Br¡\os. not very m a n y years ago in some p a r t s of
I. To make manifest o&evident. occ. England.
1 Cor. iii. 1 3 . H e b . i x. 8. Annorz. A d v . from Sn truly, and iror£
I I . To make manifest, declare, show, ever.—Soever. occ. J o h n v. 4.
signify by words, [teach.] occ. 1 Cor. i. AÍ?VTB. Adv. from cbj truly, and 7ra
1 1 . Col. i. 8. H e b . xii. 2 7 . 2 P e t . i. 14. where.—Truly, \_altogether.~] occ. H e b . ii,
Comp. 1 P e t . i. 1 1 . 16.
Ar¡pT¡yopkio, £¡, from Srjpos the people,- AIA . A preposition. V

* [ I n t h e p l u r a l i t generally signifies, what is * [ S e e T a y l o r on L y s . Orat. p . 1 7 1 , and S p a n h .

necessary for support of life, as E x . x x i . 1 0 . 1 K i n g s on J u l i á n . O r . p . 2 0 8 . X e n . M e m . iii. 6. 1.]
iv. 2 2 . P r o v . x x x . 8 . 2 M a c xiii. 2 0 . ] f T h i s elliptical u s e o f the dative is very c o m m o n .
» [ I t seems s o m e t i m e s to b e redundant, a s A c t s See H o o g e v e n ' s N o t e on V i g e r u s D e I d i o t i s m . c a p .
xiii. 2 . ] iii. sect. 1. reg. 9 .
 A I A
I . Governing a genitive case,
1. I t denotes a canse of almost any
kind, By. See J o h n i. 3 . L u k e i, 70.
J o h n i. 7. Rom. v. 1 1 . iii. 2 4 . A c t s yiii.
18. [Critics differ in t h e i r explanations
of this preposition according to their
views of Theology. A s for instance, Schl.
refers it in J o h n i. 3 . to t h e efficient
cause, Bretsch. to t h e instrumental. W e
may first observe, with Archbishop M a -
gee, (vol. i. p . 73.) t h a t with t h e ge-
nitive i t never signifies t h e final cause.
In Rom. vi. 4. Schl. says decidedly and
rightly, t h a t i t is through (the glory o r j
power qf the Father; he, however, with
Beza, gives 2 Pet. i. 3 . as an instance of
t h e final cause, b u t even Rosenmiiller
translates t h a t place, by his glorious kitid-
ness; and Vitringa has a long and satis-
factory dissertation against this i n t e r p r e -
tation. Diss. I I I . lib. i. c. vii. p . 2 2 4 . ed. 4.
See also Suicer i. p . 706. A l b e r t i , p . 460,
and Wolf. in loco. W e will now give in-
stances and other senses belonging to this
head.]
( 1 . ) [_Efficient and principal cause:
J o h n i. 3 . Rom. i. 5 . 1 Cor. i. 9. So
Rom. v. 1, 2 , 11, w h e r e Schleusner calis
it the meritorious cause.^
(2.) [Efficient and ministerial, or in-
strumental cause. M a t . i. 22. ii. 5, 15.
M a r k xvi. 20. L u k e i. 70. viii. 4. J o h n i.
17. Acts xviii. 9. xix. 26. x x i . 19. Rom.
iii. 20. iv. 13. 1 Cor. iii. 5. perhaps iv. 15.
Heb. ii. 10. (where Schleusner translates
it after.) In m a n y passages we are said
t o be justified, &c. t h r o u g h t h e r e d e m p -
tion made by Christ, or t h r o u g h faith in
h i s blood, as Rom. iii. 2 2 , 2 3 , 2 4 , 3 0 . Gal.
ii. 16. These m u s t be referred to this
head, t h e death of Christ being the effi-
cient, faith the cause of our salvation. T h e
expressions hit x P"£ rivos, &c. M a r k
£L
v i . 2 . Acts v. 12. xv. 2 3 . x i x . 2 6 , m u s t
be referred hither also.]
2. Of place, By, through. M a t . ii. 12.
[ M a r k x. 1. xi. 16.] L u k e vi. 1. [ A c t s
ix. 2 5 . ] 1 Cor. iii. 15, Ata wvpbe, through
a fire, [& al.] Comp. P s . Ixvi. 1 1 , or 12.
Isa. xliii. 2, in L X X . E u r í p i d e s , E l e c t r .
line 1182, has a similar expression, AIA*;
IIYPCyS ífxoXov, I carne through a fire.
S o Aristophanes, Lysist. line 133,
Kcív ¡XÍ y^pTJ, Al A' TOT~ TITPO'S
T h o u g h I were to p a s s through fire, I ' d g o .
B u t see bv all means Elsner's excellent
169 A I A
N o t e on 1 Cor. iii. 15, to whom I am iti-
debted for the above c i t a t i o n s ; and comp.
Wetstein and Macknight.
3 . O f t i m e , Through, ihroughout.lMke
v. 5. [ H e b . ii. 15. Acts i. 3 . xxiv. 17-]
4. —After. M a t . xxvi. 6 1 . M a r k ii. 1.
G a l . ii. 1. See W e t s t e i n on M a t . a n d
M a r k , and observe t h a t this use of Sia is
common in t h e G r e e k writers. Comp.
K y p k e on M a r k . [ O u r translators, on
M a t . xxvi. 6 1 , say, in three days. Schl.
says wilhin, and cites M a r k xiv. 5 8 . A c t s
(the two places cited by P a r k h . in N o . 6,
and) xvi. 9. xxiii. 3 1 . Bretsch. says in,
citing t h e same places; and this, as R a -
phelius observes, m u s t be correct, if we
refer to M a t . xxvii. 4 0 . T h e preposition
is used in t h e sense after in A r i s t o p h . P a x .
v.569 and 709. iElian. V . H . xiii. 4 2 . & al.
Blomf. ad ¿Esch. P e r s . 1006, indicates
T h u c y d . iv. 8.]
5. D e n o t i n g t h e state, In. Rom. iv. 1 1 .
Comp. ch. ii. 2 7 . 2 Cor. v. 10. 2 P e t . iii.
5 . 1 T i m . ii. 15, where comp. Sense I I .
6. — T h e t i m e , In, by. Acts v. 19. xvii.
10. So Herodotus, lib. i. cap. 62. ALA
ivStKO.ru íreoQ, In t h e eleventh year. L u -
cían, D e m o n a x , tom. i. p . 1010, ALA ^ á -
pwvoQ, In winter.
7. •—The adjunct, With. Rom. xiv. 2 0 .
8. Before, in the presence of. 2 T i m .
11. 2. So P l u t a r c h , cited bv W e t s t e i n ,
AIA Geñv M A P T r P Q N , Before t h e Gods
V
(as) witnesses. [ I t is used in adjurations,
Rom. xii. 1. xv. 3 0 . 1 Cor. i. 10. 2 Cor.
x. 1. B r e t s c h . says t h e speaker means in
these cases to set t h e object by which he
adjures, as it were, in t h e presence of t h e
person whom he addresses. I t is used
adverbially, as is often t h e case in good
Greek, as H e b . xii. 1. Sia vivopovrjQ pa-
tiently. P e r h a p s in all these cases t h e
genitive expresses the instrument in some
degree through or by means qf patience.
See L u k e viii. 4. Acts xv. 2 7 . Rom. viii.
2 5 . 1 P e t . v. 1 1 . and H e b . xiii. 22.]
I I . Governing an accusative,
1. I t denotes t h e final or impulsive
cause, For, on account qf, by reason qf.
1 Cor. ix. 2 3 . Rom. i. 26. [ I t denotes,
strictly, t h e impulsive cause in M a t . xxvii.
18- M a r k xv. 10. L u k e i. 7 8 . J o h n x. 3 2 .
t h e final cause in M a t . xv. 6. xix. 12.
M a r k ii. 2 7 . J o h n xi. 4 2 . xii. 9, 3 0 . Rom.
iv. 2 3 , 24. xi. 2 8 . (where B r . explains it
t h u s : with respect to the gospel, they are
reclconed enemiesfor your salces, i. e. that
the gospel may come to you ; with respect
lo the promises, they are agreeable lo God
 A I A 170 A I A

for their ancestors' sakes.J xiii. 5 . 1 Cor. to acense. So ¡oXaaaj-npeív may be from
xi. 2 3 . (for the salce of spreading the fiáXXetv TCÜQ <j>ñfxaic, smiting with reports.
gospel. J ] See B/\ao-(¡>np¿h>. occ. L u k e x v i . 1, where
2. Through, by means of. L u k e i. 7 8 . t h e V. is applied t o a true aecusation, as
J o h n vi. 5 7 , where see Alberti. Comp. Kypke shows i t is likewise in t h e G r e e k
H e b . ii. 9. 1 Cor. vii. 5. Rev. xii. 1 1 . [ S c h l . writers. [ A r i s t o p h . R h e t . iii. 1 5 . Schl.
calis i t t h e efficient cause in John vi. 5 7 . says, ( 1 . ) , Properly to transfer, transmit,
Rev. xii. 1 1 . a n d 1 J o h n ii. 12. I n J o h n make to pass through, (as D i o g . L . i. 1 1 8 . )
vi. 5 7 . Alberti, Wolf and P a l a i r e t coin- and especially used of wrestlers, who t r y
cide with Schleusner. I t is an A t t i c i s m , to deceive one another. See Salmas. a d
(see Budíeus Comm. L. Gr. p . m . 5 2 3 . ) Solin. p . 6 6 3 . H e n e e , in t h e middle i t i s ,
See L o n g i n . Sect. I I I . and Faber's N o t e , ( 2 . ) , io deceive, as H e r o d . v. 1 0 7 , a n d
T>. 2 6 5 . Aristoph. P l u t . Socrat. ad Philip, elsewhere. ( 3 . ) To transfer a fault to
p . m . 168.] others, to aecuse. So Theodotion's versión
3 . In. G a l . iv. 1 3 . comp. 1 Cor. i i . 3 . of D a n . iii. 8. H e r o d . vi. 2 5 . (4.) To de-
4. For, in respect of or to. H e b . v. 12. nounce, attack, b u t with a t r u e aecusa-
So R o m . iii. 2 5 , Ata rr)v irciptcnv, As to, tion, as Philost. V i t . Apoll. iii. 3 8 . See
with regard to, (quod a t t i n e t ad) t h e r e - N u m b . xxii. 2 2 . 2 Mace. iii. 1 1 . ]
mission; where Raphelius clearly shows fUsjp' Aiat>sfíaíopai,
3
ü/tai, from Bia e m -
t h a t Polybius uses t h e preposition Sia with p h a t . and fie^aiów to conjirm.—To affirm
an accusative in this sense. O t h e r expo- or assert, strongly or constantly. occ. 1
sitors, however, here render i t by (as in T i m . i. 7. T i t . iii. 8. [Polyb. V i r . p .
J o h n vi. 5 7 . ) ; or for, denoting t h e final 1396.]
cause (as in R o m . iv. 25.) See Wolfius, {fgjp ' AtaéXe'jrw, from día e m p h a t . a n d
1

and comp. u n d e r Tlápecng. [ B r e t . refers ¡SXÍTTÍÚ to see. [ N o t found in other Greek.]

M a t . xiv. 9. to this h e a d . ] —To see plainly or clearly. occ. M a t . vii.
5. W i t h a V e r b , infinitive, h a v i n g t h e 5. L u k e vi. 4 2 .
n e u t e r article prefixed, Because- Mat. Aia&oXos, s, ó, i?, from Sia'Sé^oXa, perf.
xxiv. 12. Phil. i. 7. [ W e m u s t not omit m i d . of Sta€¿iXXw.
t h e phrase Ata raro wherefore. M a t . vi. I . An aecuser, a. slanderer. occ. 1 T i m .
for this cause. M a t . xiv. 2. M a r k x i i . 24. iii. 1 1 . 2 T i m . iii. 3 . T i t . ii. 3 . [Schleus.
L u k e xiv. 20. J o h n i. 3 1 . therefore (a par- and B r e t . refer, E p h . iv. 2 7 , to this sense,
tióle of transition a n d conclusión.) M a t . and Schleus. says, i t is either do not give
xii. 2 7 , 3 1 . xiii. 5 2 . L u k e xii. 2 2 . Rom. ready heed to the slanderer, o r do not act
v. 12. xiii. 6. & a l . ] so that the adversary of Christianity may
I I I . I n composition, be oble to Jind any ground of aecusation.
1. I t is emphatical, or heightens t h e See X e n . A g e s . xi. 5 . Demost. de Cor.
signiíication of t h e simple word, as in c. 8.]
SiaKadapíí^bi to cleanse t h o r o u g h l y . I I . The Devil, so called because he o r í -
2 . I t denotes separation or dispersión, ginally accused or slandered God i n P a r a -
as in Biao-irúopai to be pulled in two. M a r k dise, as averse t o t h e increase of m a n ' s
v. 4 . SiayvojpíZb) to publish abroad. L u k e knowledge and happiness (see G e n . iii. 5 .
ii. 17. J o h n viii. 4 4 . ) , and still slanders h i m by
3 . — P e r v a s i o n or transition, as in ¿"ta- false and blasphemous s u g g e s t i o n s ; a n d
toívio to pass t h r o u g h , liaMyppai to re- because on t h e other h a n d he is the a e -
cave by transition. Acts vii. 4 5 . cuser of our brethren, which aecuseth them
Ataéáivto, from Stct through, a n d fiáwto before our God day and night, Rev. x i i . 9 ,
to go.—To pass through, pass over. occ. 10. (Comp. J o b i. 6 . * ) ; whence also he i s
L u k e xvi. 2 6 . Acts xvi. 9. H e b . x i . 2 9 . called our adversary, 1 P e t . v. 8. See
Aia€áXXu>, from Sia through, and fiáXXu 'AvrídiKog. F u r t h e r , AtáÉoAoc is used
to cast. e i t h e r for t h e Prince of the Devils, as
I . To dart or strike through, whence M a t . iv. 1. Rev. xii. 9. x x . 2 ; or for those
I I . I n a * figurative sense. To strike evil spirits in general, Acts x . 3 8 . A n d
or stab with an aecusation or evil report, Christ calis J u d a s Aiá€oXoe, J o h n vi. 7 0 ,

* &m§¿\Xtt>i semper metaphoricé, q u a s i verlis * [ S e e Z a c h . i i i . 1 . S u i d a s v o c e larañ;. Grot.

Irajicere, colutnniís transfigcre, transfodere, calum- ad M a t . i v . 1. I t occurs i n t h e O . T . J o b i . Z a c h .
niari. D u p o r t i n T h e o p h r a s t . Char. E t h i c . cap. iii. 1. 1 Chron. x x i . 1. W i s d . i i . 2 4 . I n t h e A p o -
x v i . p . 4 6 2 . B u t see S c a p u l a ' s L e x i c ó n . cryphal O. T . v o l . i. p p . 5 3 4 , 5 3 C , 0 7 2 , 6 9 1 . ]
 A I A 171 A I A

because " under t h e influence of t h a t ma- ||¡p° Ataypijyopt'w, ¿5, from ¿"ta e m p h a t .
lignant spirit he would t u r n his accuser and ypnyopéoj to amake.—To awake tho-
and betrayer," says Doddridge in para- roughly. occ. L u k e ix. 3 2 . [ H e r o d i a n iii.
phrase. B u t as it does not appear t h a t 4, 8.]
J u d a s did, strictly spealdng, acense our Atáyw, from ¿"ta through, and cíyw to
Lord, it m i g h t be more proper to render lead. '
AtágoXoe in this t e x t b y spy or informer, I. To lead [or make to pass. 2 Sam.
as J u d a s t r u l y proved. See Campbell's xii. 3 1 . 2 K i n g s xvi. 5. J o b xii. 7.]
Prelim. Dissertat. to Gospels, pp. 185, I I . [To pass (of t i m e ) . 1 T i m . ii. 2. 2
188. [Schleusner refers J o h n vi. 70. to Mace. xii. 5 8 . Soph. CEd. C. 1614. I t is
t h e sense of an adversary, and quotes 1 sometimes used elliptically, for to Uve, as
Mace. i. 3 8 . L a m p e there quotes E s t . vii. it is i n ] T i t . iii. 3 . [ E c c l u s . xxxviii. 3 0 .
4. viii. 1. Bretsch. says, it is for ¿toe Sta- Xen. M e m . i. 3 , 5 . ] See W e t s t e i n on
éóXn, one led by the devil, and quotes xiii. both t e x t s for similar expressions in t h e
2 ; b u t this is w i t h o u t any reason.] B y G r e e k writers, and comp. K y p k e on T i t .
t h i s word Aiá€ó\oe, t h e L X X constantly AiaSéxofiai, from Sid denoting iransi-
render t h e H e b . fiotí?, when meaning Satán tion, and Sé^opcu to receive.—With an
or the Devil (see Job, ch. i. ii.), and from accusative of t h e t h i n g *. To receive by
t h e m no doubt i t is t h a t t h e writers of t h e succession, or by passingfrom one to an-
N . T . have so commonly used i t in t h a t other. occ. A c t s vii. 4 5 , where K y p k e p r o -
sense, in which it likewise oceurs, Wisd. duces t h e Greek writers u s i n g it in t h e
ii. 24. same manner. [ i E l i a n V. H . xiii. 1.]
AtayyÉXXw, from cita denoting disper- AiáSiipa, a-oc, rb, from StaSéta to bind
sión or emphasis, and áyyÉXXw to tell, de- round, which from Sta about, and Seto to
clare. bind.—A diadem, a tiara, i. e. not a crown
I . To tell, declare, or publish abroad, properly so called, but. a srvathe, or JUlet
lo divulge. occ. L u k e ix. 60. Rom. ix. 17. qf mhite Unen bound about t h e heads of
I I . To declare, or signify plainly. occ. t h e ancient eastern kings, and so t h e e n -
A c t s xxi. 26. " To give notice to t h e sign of royal a u t h o r i t y . occ. Rev. xii. 3 .
rjriests t h a t he obliged himself by vow for xiii. 1. xix. 12. [ E s t . i. 1 1 . ii. 17. Isaiah
seven days ( d u r i n g which time he devoted Ixii. 3 . See Casaub. ad Suet. Cas. c. 79.]
himself to prayer and fasting in t h e t e m - AiaSíSwpt, from cita denoting transition
ple) ; after which t h e y were to offer " or dispersión, and SíStopí lo give.
M r . Clark's note. Comp. u n d e r 'Ayví^to I . To distribute, divide, occ. L u k e x i .
I I . and N u m b . vi. 13, &c. 22 +. xviii. 2 2 . J o h n vi. 1 1 . A c t s iv. 3 5 .
Aiayívopai, from Sid through, and yiv- I I . To give from hand to hand, i. e.
o¡xai to be.—Of time, To pass, pass over. from. oneself to another, to deliver. occ.
occ. M a r k xvi. 1. A c t s xxv. 13. xxvii. 9. Rev. xvii. 13, where t h e verb fut. SiaSi-
T h u s used also in t h e Greek writers. See Sóio-so-i is formed with t h e reduplication
W e t s t e i n on M a r k . [^Elian V . H . iii. 19.] Si, as t h e Infin. SISWO-EW is in H o m e r
AiayivixKiú, from Did denoting separa- Odyss. xxiv. line 3 1 3 , and fut. StSúcropEv,
tion or emphasis, and ytvwo-Kto to knom, Odyss. xiii. line 3 5 8 : b u t observe, t h a t
discern.— To discuss, examine thoroughly, in Rev. xvii. 1 3 , t h e A l e x a n d r i a n and
[Jalee cognizance of.] occ. A c t s xxiii. 15. fourteen l a t e r M S S . read StSóacriv. See
xxiv. 22. See W e t s t e i n on both t e x t s . W e t s t e i n and Griesbach %.
[ I t appears to be taken in a lorv sense in Atc'tSoxpe, a, ó, ?), from StaSÉxppcu.—A
hoth places. See Dion. H a l . A n t . ii. 14.] successor. occ. A c t s xxiv. 2 7 . [See note
Aiayvoipí'Coi, from Sta denoting di- on AtaSÉxppai.']
spersión, and yvwpí'(o> to make knomn.— Ata'(¿>vvvpi, from Sta emphat. and £¿>y-
To make knomn, or publish abroad. occ.
L u k e ii. 17. [ S e e Jensii F e r c . L i t . p . 3 7 . ]
f l § ° Aiáyvuo-is, toe, A t t . E W S , i), from * [ W i t h a n accus. o f the p e r s o n , i t i s to succeect.
oíayivwcrKG). Discussion, examination, cog- D i o g . L . i v . 1. and e v e n a h s o l u t e l y , 2 M a c e . i v .
nizance. occ. A c t s xxv. 2 1 . [ W i s d . iii. 18. 3 1 . i x . 2 3 . t h o u g h i n these t e x t s S c h l . t h i n k s i t i m -
plies n o t a successor, b u t l i e u t e n a n t . ]
Joseph. A. J . xv. 3 , 8 . ] t [ S c h l e u s . translates here to plunder, from t h e
Atayoyyú¿fw, from (Sid. emphat. and yoy- phrase, M a t . x i i . 2 9 . and so fomi/utrflou. SeejVorst.
yvfta to murmur.—To murmur \_from in- P h i l o l . S . p . 7 9 , in F i s c h e r ' s e d i t i o n ; b u t B r e t s c h .
dignation.2 - L u k e xv. 2. xix. 7. [ E x o d . agrees w i t h P a r k h u r s t . ]
o c c

í [ I t is to dissemínatc, E c c l u s . x x i v . 17. 2 M a c .
xvi. 3 . xvii. 3 . Ecclus. xxxiv. 24.] iv. 3 9 . 3 M a c . ií. 27. i M a c , i v . 22.]
 A I A 172 A I A

vvpi lo gird.—To gird, gird about. occ. dangerous opinión has been built on t h a t
J o h n xiii. 4 , 5. xxi. 7. exposition, as if polluted guilty man could
Aiadr/Kr/, 7¡c, f¡, from SúOrjica l s t aor. of * covenant or contract with God for his
Siarídr/pi.—A disposition, insiitidion, ap- salvation, or h a d any t h i n g else to do in
pointment. " * I t signifies/' saith J u n i u s , this m a t t e r , b u t humbly to submit, and
" neither a t e s t a m e n t , ñor a covenant, ñor accept qf G o d ' s dispensation qf purifica-
an agreement, b u t , as t h e import of t h e tion and salvation t h r o u g h t h e all-atoning
word simply requires, a disposition or in- sacrifice of t h e real i r l a , or Purifier,
stitution of God." T h e H e b . word in t h e C h r i s t J e s ú s . [ W i t s i u s says (de CEc.
O í d T e s t a m e n t , which almost constantly Nov. Fced. i. 1, 13.) t h a t t h e covenant
answers to SiadnKt] in t h e L X X , is rvia, being between two very unequal parties,
which properly denotes a purification or was of t h e n a t u r e of those called 7rpo<zá-
jmr¿/iCfl¿¿o»-í#cr¿/zce,never,strictly speak- ypara, or o~vvBr)icai ÍK TÜV ímraypciTwi', on
i n g , a covenant, t h o u g h n m tro which see G r o t . de J . B . e t P . I I . c. xv.
cutting
off, or in pieces, a s. 6. I n short, t h e superior p a r t y offers
purification-sacrifice,
be indeed sometimes equivalent to mahing certain conditions, and binds t h e inferior
a covenant, because t h a t was t h e usual to t h e performance of them. So W a h l
sacrificial rite on such occasions, a n d was says, t h a t Siadr¡Kn, in i t s sense oí fcedus,
originally, no doubt, an emblematical ex- m a y be e i t h e r mutual promises or pro-
pression of t h e parties staking their hopes mises annexed to certain conditionsi]
of purification and salvation by t h e great I I . A s n n n in t h e O í d T e s t a m e n t ( I s a .
sacrifice pn their performing their respec- xiii. 6. xlix. 8.), so Aia&nKv in t h e N . T .
tive conditions of t h e covenant on which may be understood as f a personal title of
t h e tx>*0 or sacrifice was offered f. Comp. Christ. Both S t . M a t . ch. xxvi. 2 8 . a n d
u n d e r " AairovSoQ. St. M a r k ch. xiv. 2 4 , render t h e Hebrew
I . A disposition, dispensation, institu- words spoken by our Saviour a t t h e insti-
tion, or appointment of G o d to m a n . I n tution of t h e Eucharist by t h e G r e e k Taró
t h i s view our English word dispensation ¿TI ru áipá MO~Y, T O TÍJQ tcairrJQ A I A -
1

seems very happily t o answer it. T h u s i t OH'KHS, a n d t h e most n a t u r a l construc-

denotes, tion of these is t o refer AiadiiKrie to pS,
1. The religious dispensation or insli- This is the blood qf M E , (namely) that
tution which G o d appointed to (oiédero of the new Aiadr/ici) or Ji>ia %. T h e s e e x -
T T O Ó C ) A b r a h a m and t h e P a t r i a r c h s , A c t s pressions plainly allude to the dedication of
iii. 2 3 . Comp. L u k e i. 7 2 . Acts vii. 8. the oíd dispensation, E x o d . xxiv. 8, where
2 . The dispensation from Sinai. H e b . t h e blood of t h e sacrifices is in like m a n -
viii. 9. Comp. G a l . iv. 2 4 . ner called the blood of ¡ n a , L X X Ata-
3 . The dispensation of faith, andfree 6f)Kr¡Q: so H e b . ix. 2 0 . (Comp. Zech. i x .
jnstification, of which Christ is t h e M e - 11.) A n d t h u s , H e b . xiii. 2 0 , The blood
diator, H e b . vii. 2 2 . viii. 6, and which is of Christ is called the blood AiadnKrie
called New, in respect of t h e Oíd, or Si- áiwviü of the eternal AiadhKri, iu H e b .
naitical one. 2 Cor. iii. 6. H e b . viii. 8 , 1 3 . rinn. Comp. H e b . x. 2 9 . Gen. xvii. 7, in
ix. 15. [xii. 2 4 . ] A n d henee ' H Kaivñ
•Aiadr¡Kri became t h e t i t l e of t h e books in * Grotius j u d i c i o u s l y remarks, that w h a t M o s e s
and the other sacred writers cali n n a ( w h i c h word
which t h i s new dispensation is c o n t a i n e d : h e h a d j u s t observed that the L X X and the inspired
b u t by whom this title was first imposed writers o f the N . T . interpret b y SixHxi) i s g e n e -
appears n o t ; b u t it was próbably given rally o f that sort as to require no consent from o n e
because of the p a r t i e s ; sínce i t s obligatory forcé arises solely
from t h e c o m m a n d a n d authority o f t h e superior,
4 . ' H TlaXaia AiaQr¡Kn, The oíd dispen-
as o f G o d suppose, w h o doth however s o m e t i m e s
sation, is used for t h e BooJcs qf Moses, oblige h i m s e l f qfhis oten accord b y promise. P o l e
containing t h a t dispensation, by S t . Paul, S y n o p s . v o l . i v . p . 1.
2 Cor. iii. 1 4 . — I am well aware t h a t in -j- T h u s also t h e abstract words 'Avár»o-/f resur-
most of t h e preceding passages our t r a n s - rection, ZSn life, J o h n x i . 2 5 ; 'E¡pr¡vi¡ peace, Eph.
i i . 1 4 . ; Soiprá misdom, A/xaiooróij rightcousness,
lators have rendered t h e word Ata6V//c?; 'Ayiáo-/jof sanctification, 'ArraXirpiiicri; redemplion,
by Covenant, a n d a very erroneous and 1 Cor. i. 3 0 , are used as personal titles o f Christ
Jesús. AÚ o f w h i c h , l e t i t b e observed, e x c e p t
* " Ñ e q u e testamentuvn, ñ e q u e fcedus, ñeque 'Ayíátr^oc, are feminine nouns.
pactionem significát, s e d prout simpliciter notatio J N o d o u b t , s a y s Grotius, our Lord d i d , on this
vocis postulat, dispositioncm v e l institutionem Dei." occasion, u s e the word m a , for w h i c h t h e Greek
J u n i i L o e . parall. apud L e i g h , Crit. Sacra. writers, in imitation o f the L X X , h a v e p u t a i a ü í x i i í .
t S e e H e b . and E n g . L e x i c ó n under m a V . P o l e S y n o p s . vol. i. p . 1. o n Ara0íx>K.
 A I A 173 A I A

Heb. [ I can find n o t h i n g whatever tó Christ. Tlie sense, The ñero dispensa-
countenance P a r k h u r s t ' s construction of tion, oceurs M a t . xxvi. 2 8 . M a r k xiv. 2 4 .
t h e passages in M a t t h e w and Mark, ñor L u k e xxii. 20. 1 Cor. xi. 2 5 . 2 Cor. iii. 6.
his assigning StaOriK-n as a personal title to Heb. vii. 2 2 . viii. 6, 8, 10. xii. 24. xiii.
Christ. W h a t he says as to t h e blood 20. I n Heb. viii. 7. x. 16, 2 9 . it is, the
shed at t h e dedication of the oíd Covenant second covenant .]
is t r u e , and applies to these passages, b u t [ I I I . B y M e t o n y m y . (1.) W h o l e for
not in a literal sense. T o talk of the p a r t . (a) Laivs and commandments to
blood of the oíd Covenant, as if by t h a t which promises are annexed. H e b . ix. 4 .
phrase was implied t h a t t h e oíd Covenant A c t s vii. 8. (the precept about circum-
itself possessed blood which was shed, and cision.) See E x o d . xix. 5. N u m b . x. 3 5 .
thence to argüe t h a t in t h e words, t h e D e u t . ix. 9, 10. (b) Promises annexed
blood of the new Covenant, t h e new Cove- to laws. L u k e i. 72. Acts iii. 2 5 . R o m .
nant's blood is m e a n t ; and t h a t , t h e r e - xi. 2 7 . Gal. iii. 15, 17- comp. v. 16.
fore, the new Covenant is Christ, because See P s . xxv. 14. lxxiv. 2 0 . (2.) Con-
i t was Christ's blood which was shed to t e n t s for container. T h e books in which
ratify it, is quite u n w o r t h y a serious wri- the laws and promises are contained.]
ter. I t is, as Kuinbel says, " sanguis qui Aialpzcrie, toe, A t t . eto¡, 1), from Siaiptüj.
pertiuet ad novum fcedus," i. e. t h e blood —A distinction, diversity, difference. occ.
of Christ shed to establish t h e new Cove- 1 Cor. xii. 4 , 5, 6. [ I t is always in these
nant, and such an use of t h e G r e e k geni- cases joined with a substantive, so as t o
tive is too common to need remark.] make a periphrasis for t h e adjective dif-
I I I . A solemn dispensation or appoint- ferent, as v. 4. different gifls.~]
ment of man. occ. Gal. iii. 15, where, saith Ataipew, S¡, from iih, denoting separa-
Grotius, BtcidiiK-n denotes a promise. tion, and aípéio to take.
[ I V . A testamentar!) disposition, in par- I . To divide, occ. L u k e xv. 12. [Diod.
ticular. H e b . i x . 1 6 , 1 7 . T h e s e passages, Sic. 4 2 . Polyb. v.]
P a r k h u r s t p u t s under head I. as a dispo- I I . To distribute. 1 Cor. xii. 1 1 . [Xen.
sition, &c. or appointment qf God to man, Cyr. iv. 5. 5 1 . ]
where if not palpably wrong, he is at least AiaKaQapí'(ú), from Bdt e m p h a t . and KO>
very obscure. T h a t Aiadí¡Kn has often Qapí^w to cleanse.—To cleanse thoroughly.
t h e meaning I have assigned to it, is occ. M a t . iii. 12. L u k e iii. 17. I n which
shown by Suicer from t h e various L e x i - t e x t s dicacadapieí is t h e 3 d pers. sing. I
cographers, and so Theodoret p . 4 3 6 , and fut. indicat. ef t h e verb SLaKadapí¡¡to, A t t i c
Theophylact p . 4 6 9 , understood it here. for biaicadapiersi. [ C o n r p . J e r . i v . i l . A l -
I n t h e Classics this sense is common. ciph. iii. 20.]
See Budaeus Comm. L . G. p . m. 2 6 5 . and Ef^" AiaKarekéyxopai, from Sia e m -
A l b e r t i Observ. Phil. p . 199. A m o n g p h a t . and Karekéyxu to confute, which
m a n y others t h e y give Lucían Dial. M o r t . from K a r a against, and i\éyx^ t° argüe.
p. 272. A r r i a n . Epictet. 1. 1 1 . c. 13. p . —To confute strenuously, or thoroughly.
180. Isoc. ¿Eginet. p . 14. 758, 7 5 9 , 760, occ. Acts xviii. 2 8 * .
& al. Demosth. i. in Aphob. p. 5 4 9 , and tfgp [Aiatcovéto, <5.]
0

very frequently. W i t s i u s ( D e GSc. Nov. [ I . To minister, o r , give service, to

Fced. i. 1, 3.) says t h a t in H e b . ix. 15. any one; used (1.) Of a n y service, a n d
ciadr¡Kri is testament, b u t t h a t when a p - often of kindness in affliction, M a t . x x .
plied to t h e dealings of God with m a n , it 2 8 . x x v . 4 4 . M a r k x . 4 5 . J o h n xii. 2 6 . A c t s
signifies, Rule qflije, and also, an agree- xix. 2 2 . Rom. xv. 2 6 . 2 Cor. iii. 3 . (a
ment and engagement. I am inclined to letter written by the service, i. e. the as-
t h i n k Wahl's división r i g h t , of t h e senses sistance of any one. 2 T i m . i. 18. P h i l e m .
of this word. H e divides t h e m t h u s : ] 13. 1 P e t . iv. 10. Assisting one another
[ I . Testament. H e b . ix. 16, 17-] by means of that gift. I n 1 P e t . i. 12. i t
[ I I . Covenant, or promises annexed to is perhaps, to supply. (2.) Of those who
certain conditions, used (a) Of t h e earlier wait at table. M a t . viii. 1 5 . M a r k i. 3 1 .
covenants made t h r o u g h Abraham, Isaac, L u k e iv. 30. x . 4 0 . xii. 3 7 . xvii. 8. x x i i .
Jacob, and Moses, with t h e Israelites. 27. J o h n xii. 2 . X e n . A n a b . iv. 5 . 3 3 . ]
T h e sense, The oíd dispensation, oceurs
Rom. ix. 4. E p h . ii. 10. H e b . ix. 15, 2 0 .
* [ T h e V u l g . h a s revincere. T h e Syr. and
viii. 7, 9. ix. 5. (b) Of t h e new l a w
A r a b . disputare. V á l e l o S e h o l . p . 5 5 9 , saya t h a t
and promises given to mankind t h r o u g h 8i« often g i v e s t h e i d e a o f c o n t e n t i o n . ]
 A I A 174 A I A

[ I I . To supplyfood. M a t . iv. 1 1 . M a r k Christ's church, a deacon, whose especial

i. 1 3 . xv. 4 1 . Luke viii. 3.] business i t was to t a k e care of, and mi-
[ I I I . To act as Deacon. 1 T i m . iii. nister to t h e poor. (See A c t s vi.) Phil. i.
10, 13. 1 P e t . iv. 1 1 . especially in col- 1. 1 T i m . iii. 8, 12.
lecting alms. 2 Cor. viii. 19, 20. H e b . vi. I V . Aiáicovoe, 8, ii, A deaconess, a siated
10. A c t s vi. 2.] femóle servant of the church. Rom. xvi.
Aia\covía, ae, i), from t h e same as Sta- 1. Comp. 1 T i m . iii. 1 1 . v. 9. P l i n y in
KOvébJ. his 97th E p i s t . to Trajan, styles t h e dea-
I . A ministering,. [ g e n e r a l l y . ] L u k e x. conesses of t h e Bythynian Christians,
4 0 . H e b . i. 14. [ 2 Cor. xi. 8. 2 T i m . iv. " Ancillis quce ministra? dicebantur, F e -
i I-] male a t t e n d a n t s , who were called minisiers
I I . A ministration, or ministering to the or servants." See more in Suicer's T h e -
necessities of others, A c t s vi. 1. 2 Cor. saurus u n d e r Ata/cóVio-tra, and in L a r d n e r ' s
ix. 1, 12, 1 3 . Rev. ii. 19.—Relief given. Collection of Testimonies, vol. ii. p . 4 2 ,
A c t s xi. 2 9 , where observe t h a t t h e da- and M a c k n i g h t on Rom. xvi. 1 *.
tive ciSeXajoXe is governed by t h e N . sub- Aiaxóo-ÍOÍ, at, a, from ¿"te iwice, and
stantive Sianaviáv. C o m p . u n d e r T ó r n u ttcaróv a hundred.— Two hundred. M a r k
V. vi. 3 7 . & al. Acts xxvii. 3 7 , We were in
[ I I I . Ministry in the church; either all in the ship two h u n d r e d threescore
generally, as Rom. xii. 5 . 1 Cor. xii. 6. and sixteen soids. T h i s to some not suf-
E p h . iv" 12. Col. iv. 17. 2 T i m . iv. 5 . ; ficiently acquainted with t h e state of t h e
or of particular offices, as A c t s vi. 4 . ancient shipping about t h i s time, may a p -
Siamvia Xóya, office qf teaching; 2 Cor. pear an extraordinary number, b u t it is
iii. 7. rS Qaváru, office qf announcing the not. Josephus, who a very years before,
law, which threalened death, &c. ibid. namely, in t h e procuratorship of F é l i x ,
8. re TTvevparoe, office qf announcing the was sent from J u d e a to Rome, tells u s in
dispensation which promised the Spirit; his Life, § 3 , t h a t t h e ship in which h e
ibid. 9 . KarakQÍo-ewe, office qf teaching sailed, and which was shipwrecked in t h e
the law, which condemned, ibid. curatoo-ú- A d r i a t i c , had on board about six hundred
vr¡e, office qf teaching the system qf m e n , irepl k^aicoa-íus rov apidpov ovrEe-
grace. So 2 Cor. v. 1 8 : and in ix. 12. Atatcúoj, from Bia emphat. and ÁICAÍÜ to
\ETRAPYTAC, office qf attending to public hear.—Ata/céuat, M i d . To hear tho-
collection and distribution qf alms; or roughly. occ. A c t s xxiii. 3 5 . [ I t is t h e r e
again, more especially the Apostolic office. used in a forensic sense. A n d so in t h e
A c t s i. 17, 2 5 . xx. 2 4 . xxi. 19. Rom. xi. L X X , for yntit D e u t . i. 16. See also J o b
13. 2 Cor. iv. 1. vi. 3.] ix. 5 3 . I n Xen. H i e r o , vii. 1 1 . CEc. xi. 1.
Aiákovog, a, ó. See AiaKovéw. and Cyr. iv. 4. 1 i t is to hear diligently
[ I . A minister in general. M a t . x x . 26. and plainly. Polyb. i. 3 2 . P l u t a r c h Cic.
x x i i . 4 3 . xxiii. 1 1 . M a r k i x . 3 5 . x . 4 3 . p . 862.]
R o m . xiii. 4 . An assistant. Gal. ii. 1 7 . ALaKpivo), from Sia denoting separation,
I t is used especially of servants a t table, and Kpívtii tojudge.
J o h n ii. 5 , 9.] | I . To discern, distinguish. M a t . xvi. 3 .
I I . A minister, or servant of God or I I . To make a distinction or difference.
Christ in his church, by preaching t h e A c t s xiv. 9. So SiaKpívopai, mid. or pass.
Gospel, &c. 1 Cor. iii. 5 . 2 Cor. vi. 4 . xi. Rom. xiv. 2 3 , (where see W h i t b y ) , J u d e
2 3 . Col. i. 7. Comp. 2 Cor. xi. 1 5 . E p h . ver. 2 2 . J a m . ii. 4 , Kai a' SieKpidrjre iv
iii. 7. T h u s Christ himself is called Rom. íavrdie; Do ye then not make a partial
xv. 8, BUIKOVOV Trepiroprjs a minister qf the distinction (comp. ver. 1.) among, or
circumcision, " as h e was a Jew by birth, " within," ( M a c k n i g h t ) yourselves ? See
a n d received circumcision himself, in token
of his obligation to observe t h e law, a n d * [From Bingham (ü. ch. 22.) it appears, that,
confined his personal ministry, according by some laws, they were to be widows of one hus-
band, with children, and sixty years of age. In
to w h a t h e himself declared concerning Epiphanius's time, virgins were allowed, and the
t h e limitation of h i s embassy (Mat. xv. age always varied. They seem to have been conse-
24.) to t h e lost sheep of t h e house of crated by laying on of hands. Their offices were,
Israel *. however, not priestly, but merely to assist at the
baptism of women, to instruct female catechumens,
I I I . A particular sort of minister in attend the female sick, the martyrs in prison, and
to govern the women at church* The order lasted
* Doddridge's Paraphrase. nowhere longer than the eleventh century.]
 A I A 175 A I A

Wolfius, and observe t h a t if this 4-th verse AiaXaXéu, w, from día denoting disper*
were, according to Wetstein and Bowyer, sion, or transition, and XaXéio to speak.
to be read without an interrogation, diz- I. To speak abroad, publish, divulge.
icpSí¡T£ and íyEvéañt should have been in occ. L u k e i. 65. [ E u r . Cyclop. 174. Sym.
t h e subjunctive mood. Ps. 41. 16.]
III. To distinguish, make to differ. I I . To speak one with another, to com-
1 Cor. iv. 7. xi. 29. mune. occ. L u k e vi. 1 1 . [Polyb. xxiii. 9.
I V . To judge, determine. 1 Cor. vi. 5.
Comp. 1 Cor. xiv. 2 9 . *• _ AiaXéyopai, from día denoting separa-
V. Aiaicpívopai, pass. To contend, dis- tion, and Xéyoi lo speak.
pute with another, q. d. to be distinguished I . To discourse, reason. A c t s [xvii.
or divided from him in discourse. Acts xi. 2. xviii. 4 , 19. x i x . 8, 9.] xx. 7, 9. xxiv.
2. J u d e ver. 9. 25. [Exod. vi. 2 7 . I s . lxiii. 1. X e n . M e m .
VI. AicucpívoLiai, pass. To hesitate, iv. 5. 2 . ]
doubt, to be distinguished (as it were) or I I . To dispute. M a r k ix. 3 4 . A c t s xxiv.
divided in one's own mind, M a t . xxi. 2 1 . 12. J u d e ver. 9. [ J u d g . viii. 1. T h e two
M a r k x i . 2 3 . A c t s x. 2 0 . Rom. iv. 20. first of these passages are r a t h e r , to dis-
J a m . i. 6. [ f I can have no hesitation in cuss. P a r k h . has omitted H e b . xii. 5 .
thinking P a r k h u r s t wrong in referring where t h e sense is, to address, as H e r o -
Rom. xiv. 2 3 , to I I . instead of V I . T h e dian. i. 5 2 . ii. 7. 10.]
Vulgate, indeed, has discerno, and E r a s - AiaXEiVdi, from día denoting separa-
mus, dijudico; b u t all t h e fathers (see tion, and XEÍVW to leave.—With a parti-
Suicer i. p . 8 6 7 . ) , our translators, Wolf, ciple, To leave off, cease, intermit, namely
Schleusner, W a h l , Bretschneider, Rosen- t h e action expressed by t h e participle.
müller, aud indeed most commentators, T h i s phraseology is purely G r e e k , and
are against him, as is t h e context. I n common in t h e best writers. occ. L u k e vii.
sense I I I . I should r a t h e r say, to distin- 45, where see W e t s t e i n . [ T h e r e is, in
guish with a preference, and so Rosen- fact, an ellipse of %póVov, for diaXtí-irü) is
müller explains t h e two passages alleged to leave between, or put between. See
by P a r k h u r s t . T h e second of t h e m , 1 Cor. MWim. V . H . xv. 2 7 . Lucian. P r o m e t h .
xi. 29, is by Schl. Br. and W a h l , as well 17. X e n . Apol. Socr. § 16. See 1 Sam.
as our translators, referred to sense I I . x. 8. Diod. Sic. i. p. 7 3 . W e have an ex-
Not distinguisking the body qf Christ from pression exactly similar to ours in J e r e m .
common food.'] ix. 5.]
Aiá/ípto-is, ios, A t t . sute, í;, from d i a - AiáXeKToe, e, r¡, from diaXéyopai to
Kpívii)—A discerning, distinguisking, di- speak, discourse.—Speech, manner qf
judication. occ. 1 Cor. xii. 10. H e b . v. 14 speaking peculiar to a particular people
So Rom. xiv. 1,—not to dijudication of or nation, a language. Acts ii. 6, 8 ; in
(his) thoughts, i. e. without presuming which passages diaX¿Krii> is plaihly used as
to judge his prívate t h o u g h t s . See t h e synonymous with yXwacaic, ver. 1 l,(comp.
following context, Wolfius, W etstein, and ver. 4.) ; and, as Stockius h a t h j u s t l y r e -
T

Bowyer. B u t comp. M a c k n i g h t . [ I n marked, denotes not a different dialect

1 Cor. xii. 10, it is the power discerning. (as we cali i t ) of t h e same language, b u t
In R o m . xiv. 1. t h e r e are g r e a t diíferences a different language; and in this sense
of opinión. Wolf and Rosenmiiller, with only, I apprehend, with t h e same learned
m a n y others, agree w i t h P a r k h u r s t ; b u t w r i t e r , diáXeicroe is applied in all t h e
Schl. Bretschn. and W a h l , construe it, other passages of t h e N . T . wherein i t
hesitation or doubt, as do our translators. oceurs, namely, Acts i. 19. x x i . 4 0 . x x i i .
Schl. says, lest new doubts arise ; Bretschn. 2. xxvi. 14, as i t likewise is in t h e L X X
Do not so act with the weak as that of E s t h . ix. 2 6 . W e m a y further observe,
they should be overwhelmed with doubts qf t h a t as S t . L u k e has TÍ) 'E€paídi AIA-
thoughts, i. e. scruples qf conscience.] AE'KTÍ1¿ for t h e H e b r e w language, so
AiaicioXvio, from día emphat. and ¡CUXVÍO Josephus uses ri)v 'Etpaíwv A I A A E K T O N
lo hinder.—To hinder, earnestly. occ. in t h e same sense, as synonymous w i t h
M a t . iii. 14. [ T h e r e seems to be no rea- r A I Z T T A N rr)y r & v 'EÉpaíoiv. See
son for m a k i n g día emphatic h e r e ; i t is A n t . lib. i. cap. 1, § 1, 2. So Cont.
not always so, as Schl. r e m a r k s , for e x - Apion. lib. i. § 22. p . 1345, where speak-
ample, in dityúpü), &c. I t oceurs J u d i t h i n g of t h e word Kop€av, h e says dnXóí S'
xii. 6.] ¿)£ &v úiroí Tic ÍK fije 'EÉpcuW pt$eppr¡-
 A I A 176 A I A

vivófitvoe AIAAE'KTOY, Awpov Qs5. T h i s ii. 3 5 . 1 Cor. iii. 2 0 . — O n L u k e ix. 4 6 .

means, if one would transíate i t out of K y p k e , whom see, observes t h a t t h e word
t h e language of the Hebrews, the gift of should be rendered thought, which is e x -
God. A n d in t h e same section Clearchus, pressed in t h e n e x t verse by íiaXoyto-pbv
t h e disciple of Aristotle, introduces t h a t rrje napSiac.—Jam. ii. 4. Kpiraí SiaXoyicr-
philosopher speaking of one who was 'EX- pG>v rrovíipiav, Judges of evil thoughis, i. e.
XrjviKoc—TT¡ AIAAE'KTíli, a Grecian in who think or reason ill. So L u k e xviii.
language, as opposed to a J e w *. Comp. 6, Kpiri/e aSirías, A judge of injustice, is
Cont. Apion. lib. ii. § 2. T o all which an mrjust j u d g e ; 'AtcpoariiQ emXíicrpoi'nc,
we may add, t h a t in t h e N . T . another A hearer of forgetfulness, a forgetful
word, namely XaXía, is evidently used for hearer, J a m e s i. 2 5 . I t is well known
a different dialect of the same language. t h a t this kind of expressions are very
See Mat. xxvi. 7 3 . M a r k xiv. 70. agreeable to t h e H e b r e w idiom ; but it is
AtaXXáo-crw, from ¿"ta denoting transi- also t r u e , t h a t m a n y of the same sort oc-
iion, and aXXáeraw to change. cur in t h e ancient Greek writers. See
I. To change, exchange. [ X e n . H i s t . Ecclus. ix. 20. x x v i i . 6.
i. 6 . 4 . ] I I . Doubtful reasoning, doubt. occ.
I I . ALaXXáaaopai, pass. To be recon- L u k e xxiv. 3 8 . 1 T i m . ii. 8 ; b u t comp.
ciled to another, i. e. to be changed from Sense I I I .
a state of enmity to one of good-will. occ. I I I . Discourse, dispute, dispntation.
M a t . v. 24. [ S e e 1 Sam xxix. 4. T h u c y d . P h i l . ii. 14. [ I am iuclined to think t h i s
viii. 70. Diog. Laert. ii. p . 127. Schwarz. passage should be referred to Sense I I .
C o m m . L i n g . G r . p . 334. and Hemster- Wolf says t h a t it means without hesitaiion
hus. ad T h o m . M a g . p . 2 3 5 . ] T h e best or distrust qf God's protection; and so
G r e e k writers use t h e V. active for recon- Martianay. Rosenmiiller, without hesila-
ciling. See W e t s t e i n . tion: so Wahl. A n d Schleusner says,
AiaXoyíl¡opai, from dta emphat. or de- with a ready mind."]
n o t i n g separation, and Xoylc\opai to rec- AiaXva, from Sia denoting separation.
kon, reason. and Xíioi to loóse.— To dissolve, dissipate,
I. To reason, discourse, and t h a t whe- disperse, occ. A c t s v. 36, where see W e t -
t h e r in silence with oneself, as M a r k ii. 6. stein. [Polyb. iv. 12, 1.]
L u k e i. 29. iii. 15. v. 22. xii. 1 7 ; or by Aiapaprvpopai, M i d . from día emphat.
speech with others, M a t . xvi. 7, 8. L u k e and paprvpopai to witness, bear witness;
xx. 14. See K y p k e on M a t . or from Sia in the presence qf, and páprvp
I I . To consider. occ. J o h n xi. 5 0 . a witness.
I I I . To dispute. M a r k ix. 3 3 . [¿Elian. I . To bear earnest witness, testify ear-
V. H . xiv. 4 3 . See 2 Mac. xii. 4.] nestly or repealedly. I t is used e i t h e r
AiaXoyiapóe, 5, ó, from SiaXEXóyttrpai, absolutely, L u k e xvi. 2 8 . Acts x. 4 2 . xx.
perf. of hiaXoyí(opai. 2 3 . H e b . ii. 6 ; or with an accusative of
I . Reasoning, ratiocination, thought. t h e t h i n g , A c t s x x . 24. xxiii. 1 1 . xxviii.
M a t . xv. 19. M a r k vii. 2 1 . [ i x . 47.] L u k e 2 3 . — a n d with a dative of t h e person to
whom, Acts xviii. 5. x x . 2 1 .
I I . To charge, as it were, before wit-
* Since writing the a b o v e . I a m g l a d to find the
nesses, obtestor. A c t s ii. 4 0 . 1 T i m . v. 21..
interpretation here g i v e n o f SiáXtUTO?, confirmed b y
W o l f i u s on A c t s ii. 6, a n d b y R a p h e l i u s , w h o , o n 2 T i m . ii. 14. iv. 1. See Raphelius on 1
A c t s ü . 8 , observes, t h a t n o t o n l y S t . L u k e u s e s , T i m . v. 2 1 , and H u t c h i n s o n ' s N o t e 2, on
SiáXíKTof, for a language, b u t that P o l y b i u s does Xenophon's Cyropaed. p . 3 6 9 , 8vo. edit..
the s a m e , l i b . i. c a p . 6 7 , where t h a t historian, [ I prefer Schleusner's a r r a n g e m e n t . ]
s p e a k i n g of the mercenary troops i n the Carthagi-
n i a n a r m y , s o m e of w h o m were Spaniards, others
[ I . To prove or show by sufficient ar-
G a u l s , others of L i g u r i a or the B a l e a r i c I s l a n d s , guments, to prove like a witness, publish
not a few G r e e k s , b u t the greatest part A f r i c a n s , or teach. A c t s viii. 2 5 . x i . 4 2 . xviii. 5. x x .
s a y s Tov yuev yap rparr,yov E.'Sévetí T « f e x á V u A 1 A - 2 3 . x x i i i . 1 1 . H e b . ii. 6. E x o d . xviii. 2 0 . ]
A E / K T O T 2 a 3 ¿ » a ™ , for it w a s i m p o s s i b l e for the
[ I I . To cali to witness, or charge ear-
General to k n o w the languages of each. S o P l u -
tarch in A p o p h t h e g m . ( s a y s h e ) speaks o f ITepo-ixíii/ nestly. L u k e xvi. 2 8 . A c t s ii. 4 0 . 1 T i m .
A l A A k / K T O N , the P e r s i a n language; to w h i c h I v. 2 1 . 2 T i m . ii. 14. iv. 1. 1 Sam. x x i . 2 .
add, that Strabo, l i k e w i s e , l i b . x i v . p . 9 9 7 , p l a i n l y N e h e m . ix. 2 6 . Polyb. i. 3 7 . iii. 15.]
u s e s n/j.írípu A l A A E ' K T f i i , for our, i. e. the Greek
Aiapáxopai, from (¡ta. emphat. and pá-
language, and D i o n y s i u s H a l i c a r n . A n t R o m . lib.
i . p . 5 . edit. S y l b u r g . h a s 'ZKKv¡v¡xñ A I A A E ' K T Q i
%opai to contend.—To conlend, or dispute
the. Greek language. earnestly. occ. A c t s xxiii. 9. I t is t h u s
 A I A 1 77 A I A

used also in the best G r e e k writers. See v. 2 0 . and so Schl. adding, or the porver
Wetstein. [ E c c l u s . viii. 1. T h u c iii. of understanding, and citing Xen. Mem.
42.] iii. 12. 6.]
Aiafiévti), from dta emphat. and pévo) io Aiavoíyio, from Sia through, and avoiyo)
remain.—To remain, continué, [not lo lo open.
changef¡,occ. L u k e i. 2 2 . x x i i , 2 8 . Gal. ii. I. \Toopen, in t h e proper sense. L u k e
5. H e b . i. 1 1 . 2 P e t . iii. 4. [ í n L u k e ii. 2 3 . Of t h e first-born opening the
xxii. 2 8 . Siaiiéveiv fiera is, not to clesert. womb, see Exod. xiii. 2. N u m . iii. ) 2 . ]
T h e dative without t h e preposition is I I . [To open, metaphorically, t h e eyes,
commouer, as Ecclus. xxii. 2 3 . Diod. Sic. ears, &c. closed by disease ; i. e. to restore
xiv. 4 8 . X e n . H . G. vii. 3 . l . j the faculty of sight, efe. M a r k vii. 3 4 , 3 5 .
AiapEpl'Cto, from cita, denoting separa- (comp. Is. xxxv. 5.) L u k e xxiii. 3 1 .
tion, and pepí'(ia to divide.—To divide, 2 Kings vi. 17. H e n e e , i t is applied (1.) to
part. See M a t . xxvii. 3 5 . L u k e xi. 17. the mind, in the sense of giving a power
xxii. 17. A c t s i i . 3 . B u t observe t h a t , in of understanding. L u k e xxiv. 4 5 . he
M a t . xxvii. 3 5 , almost all the ancient and laught them the way or gave them the
later M S S . omit all t h e words from K\ÍJ- pomer of understanding the Scriptures;
pov to ickTJpov, which therefore, agreeably and (2.) to the heart, in t h e sense of, giving
to the opinión of Wetstein, seem an addi- pomer of receiving and attending to mhal
tion to M a t . from John xix. 24. Gries- is laught. Acts xiv. 14. comp. 2 M a c . i.
bach accordingly omits them in his edi- 4. F r o m t h e two last expressions, t h e
t i o n ; and Campbell, in his Translation, verb gets t h e sense of, to explain or leach
m a r k s them as spurious. See his Note. simply, as L u k e xxiv. 3 2 . A c t s xvii. 3 . ]
[ J u d g . v. 3 0 . Nehem. ix. 2 2 . ] AiavvKTEpEvo), from Sia through, and
L\iapEpwpÓQ, 5, ó, from SiapEpÉpurpai, vvKTEpEviii to pass the night, which from
perf. pass. of Siapzpí'(<¡).—División, dis- víiKTEpoe, nightly, acting in the night, and
sension. occ. L u k e xii. 5 1 . Comp. ver. this from vi)*, wKróe, the night.—To pass
52, 53. the mhole night. occ. L u k e vi. 12.—So
Aiavépio, from Sia, denoting dispersión, H e s y c h i u s explains SiavvKTEpévovrEe by
a n d véfiú) to give.—To distribute, [Deut. áypvTTVevTíe rtacrav ri)v vvKra, matclling the
x x i x . 2 6 . ] disperse, divulge,spread abroad. mhole night. See also W e t s t e i n .
occ. A c t s iv. 17. Aiavvü), from Sia emphat, and avvio to
AiavEVh), from Siá, emphat. and to perform.—To
VEVIO complete, Jinish enlirely.
nod, beclcon.—To intímate or signify by occ. A c t s x x i . 7, where W e t s t e i n cites
nodding, or bechoning. occ. L u k e i. 2 2 . from Xenophon, A I A N T S A N T E S TO'N
So in mid. Lucian, Bis Accusat. tom. ii. nACTYN de Sapbv KATHNTH'SAMEN.
p . 3 2 0 , Ti o-iycJ.e Kal AIANEY'Hi; w h y a r e See also Bowyer's Conject. on t h e t e x t .
you silent, and beckoni?ig? [ P s . xxxv. [ X e n Cyr. i. 4. 2 8 . iv. 2. 15.]
19.] kiaTravTÓe, Adv. for Sia Travróe through
Aiavónpa, arog, rb, from Siavoiio to all, xpóra time namely.—Almays, conli-
agítale in the mind, which from Sia em-
ntially. M a r k v. 5 . L u k e xxiv. 5 3 . & al.
p h a t . or denoting separation, and voéio to
[ I t is used of daily service, H e b . ix. 6 ;
think.—A thought, reflection. occ. L u k e
and for frequently. L u k e xxiv. 5 3 . A c t s
xi. 17. [Is. lv.^9, and Ecclus. xxii. 17. x. 2 . ]
X e n . H . G . vii. 5 . 19.] [Aiairaparpijifi, ije, Afoolish dispute,
Aiávoia, ag, i), from Siavoéco. or violent dispute about trifles. T h i s is
I . Understanding, iniellect, intellectual t h e reading of many M S S . in ] T i m . vi.
facidty. M a t . xxii. 3 7 . [ M a r k xii. 3 0 . 5.]
L u k e x. 2 7 . ] E p h . i. 18. iv. 18. H e b . viii. Ata7r£páai, ü, from Sia denoting tran-
10. [ x . 16.] Comp. Col. i. 2 1 . 1 P e t . i. sition, and vrepáo» to pass, from rcEÍpii) the
13. 1 J o h n v. 20. same, which s e e . — T o pass, pass through,
I I . An operation qf the understanding, pass over. M a t . ix. 1. L u k e xvi. 26. & al.
thought, imaginalion. L u k e i. 5 1 . [ W a h l See Wetstein on both t e x t s . [ E x c e p t in
calis this a method of thinking or per- L u k e xvi. 26. it is used of those passing
ceiving, and refers Col. i. 2 1 . and E p h . ii. a sea or lalce. See D e u t . xxx. 13. Polyb-
3. to t h e same (citing also X e n . CEc. x . xi. 18. 4 . X e n . Ven. ix. 1 8 . ] — T h e L X X
1.) T h e two last passages Schl. translates have twice used this verb for t h e H e b .
by, zperverse method of thinking. Wahl laj? to pass over.
says, it is intelligence or insight, in 1 John AiaiiXÉw, io, from Sia through, and
N
 A I A 178 AI A

tr\éoj to sail.—To sail through, or over. [Aiafipr/yvvpi, Siappi'io-aio, froni Sta a n d

occ. Acts xxvii. 5. X e n . An. vii. 8. 1.] píiyvvp.1 or píiarrw to breah.— To bréale, or
Aicurovéiú, w, from ota emphat. a n d retid; used of rending g a r m e n t s in in-.
irovíiú to labour. dignation, or grief, M a t . xxvi. 6 5 . M a r k
I . To labour, elabórate, [ A r i s t o p h . xiv. 63. Acts xiv. 1 4 ; of a net, b u r s t i n g
Poet. xxv. 5 . ] whence from too great weight, Luke v. 6. where
I I . AiaTTovéo¡xai, 5/j.ai, Pass. To be ex- P a r k h u r s t construes Suppyyvvro was
erciscd, or fatigued by labour, also to be breaking; and Schl. t h i n k s we m u s t t a k e
wcaried, or gricved al the continuance of the expression as hyperbolical, like f3v-
a n y t h i n g . occ. Acts iv. 2 . xvi. 18. I n dífeadat in t h e n e x t v e r s e ; of chains
t h e L X X of Eccles. x. 9, this word in burst asunder, L u k e viii. 2 9 ; o n t h e t e a r i n g
t h e pass. answers to ilfl? to labour, gríeve. of garments both among t h e Greeks a n d
Aiairopévopai, from Sia through, and Jews in anger, mourning, or violent grief,
iropeíopat to go.—To go, or pass through. see Schol. 2Eschyl. P e r s . 166. Gen. xxxvii.
L u k e vi. 1. Rom. xv. 2 4 * . & al. [ G e n . 2 9 . xliv. 1 3 . 2 Kings x i x . 1. T h e word
xxiv. 62. Polyb. xii. 1 7 . 2 . ] occurs Josh. vii. 6. Joel. ii. 13. 2 S a m .
tfgp" AiaTTopéii), a, from Sia emphat. xxiii. 16. & al.]
a n d ¿nropéüi to be in perplexity and doubt. Aiao-aajéío, w, from Sia e m p h a t . a n d
See u n d e r 'Airopéopai.—To doubt exceed- trábelo to manifest, declare, from oaajlis
ingly, to be in great doubt or perplexity. man fest.— To declare plainly, or fully.
occ. L u k e i x . 7. xxiv. 4. A c t s ii. 12. v. occ. M a t . xviii. 3 1 . [ 1 Mac. xii. 8 . D e u t .
24. x. 17. [ S y m m . D a n . ii. 3 . Polyb. 1. i. 5 . Polyb. iii. 8 9 - ]
60.] Aiao-úoi, from Sta emphat. a n d osito lo
E^gp" Aiarrpayparívopai, M i d . from Sia shake.—To use violence to, lo treat with
e m p h a t . a n d irpayparívopai to negoíiate, insolent violence, or, according to Grotius,
trade, gain by trading, from irpáy/xa, To extort money, or goods, by forcé, or
aros, business; which s e e . — T o gain violence, which was expressed by t h e cor-
by
negociating, or business, respondent L a t i n word concutere, here
occ. L u k e x i x .
15. [ I n a different sense, Plat. Phced. § used b y t h e Vulg. a n d was a crime t o
24. and 6 5 . ] which t h e Román soldiers of this time
AiaTrpíio, from Sia through, a n d irpiía lo were much addicted, as their own authors
sam, cut with a saw. testify. occ. L u k e iii. 14. I n 3 M a c . vii.
I . To saw through or asunder, lo di- 19, we have t h e full phrase A I A S E I S -
vide by a saw. I n this sense i t is used G E ' N T E S T£TN 'YITAPXO'NTÜN, vio-
b y t h e L X X , 1 Chron. xx. 3 , for t h e lently deprived qf their goods. See E l s n e r ,
H e b . 1W, which see in H e b . and E n g . Wolfius, and W e t s t e i n on L u k e , a n d S u i -
Lexicón, under I f. cer Thesaur. in Aiaadt¡¡.
I I . Aiairpíopai, Pass. P i g u r a t e l y , To Aiao-Kopirí'Cu, from Sta emphat. or d e -
be cut or sawn, as it were, to t h e heart. noting separation, a n d aKopw'Xia to scat-
occ. Acts v. 3 3 . vii. 5 4 . See Suicer T h e - ier.
saur. in Aiairpíü). [Schleusner says, t h a t I . To scaller abroad, slrow, as seed in
Sian-plopai expresses t h e gesture of those sowing. occ. M a t . x x v . 24, 26. [Is. xxxviii.
who from rage gnash with their teeth, as 24.]
if any one drew a saw along, and to whom I I . To scaller, disperse, occ. M a t . x x v i .
t h e phrase StairpUtv rus óSórrag applies. 3 1 . M a r k xiv. 27- L u k e i. 5 1 . J o h n x i .
In Aristophanes, t h e word, however, oc- 52. A c t s v. 3 7 . [Zech. xiii. 7- ^Elian.
curs twice ( E q u i t . 7 6 8 . & Pac. 1262.) in V. H . xiii. 4 6 . ]
t h e sense of, To be sawn asunder.] III. To dissipate, waste. occ. L u k e x v .
AiapwaCu), from Sia emphat. or de- 13. xvi. 1.
n o t i n g separation, and a.pir¿ii¡w lo snatch, Aiao-KÍtw, w, from Sta denoting separa-
seize.—To plundcr, spoil. occ. M a t . xii. tion, a n d cTrciw to draw, pulí.—To draw,
2 9 . M a r k iii. 2 7 . [ G e n . xxxiv. 2 7 , 2 9 . pulí, or pluck asunder, or in pieces. occ.
I s . xiii. 2 2 . Diod. Sic. iv. 66.] M a r k v. 4 * . Acts xxiii. 10.
Aiao-irdpw, from Sia d e n o t i n g separa-
tion, and arxdptú to sow, scaller seed.—
* I t here answers to the L a t i n obiter, en pas-
sant.
f [ S e e Casaub. a d Sueton. Calig. p . 427- Suicer. * [ I n t h e parallel passage in L u k e viii. 2 9 , w e
ii. p . « 3 1 . Schcetgen. H o r . H e b . p . !)í¡7. and others have Siappr¡aacitrix 8SIT,M«, as i n P s . i i . 3 . for which,
cited b y W o l f . on H e b . x i . 3 7 . ] in Jer. ii. 2 0 . there is 5íatr?¡-5v.]
 A I A Í79 A I A

To disperse, scatier. occ. A c t s viii. 1, itself. A c t s xiii. 10. B u t in this view it

4 . xi. 19, [ T o b . xiii. 3 . Polyb. iii. 19. is in t h e N . T . applied figuratively only.
7.] [Exod. v. 4 . ]
ÁLacnropd, ac, i¡, from oiéWopa perf. Aiacrói'Cio, from lia through or emphat.
mid, of Stao-TTEÍpa). [ I t is used periphras- and o-wfw to save.
tically for a participle or adjective in I . To save, preserve, occ. A c t s xxvii.
general. J o h n vii. 3 5 . Siao-wopd rSv 'EX- 4 3 . 1 P e t . iii. 2 0 , where see Wolfius,
Xhviov, i. e. for ol "'EXk-qvee oí diatrwapÉv- Doddridge, W e t s t e i n , and M a c k n i g h t .
TEQ, i. e. the Jews scattered among the II. To carry or convey safe. occ. Acts
Greeks. See Gesenius Lehrgebaude p . xxiii. 24. Aiaaái&pai, Pass. To be car-
644. 2, Fischer. ad Well. T . iii. P . i. p . ried, or conveyed safe, i. e. To escape
2 9 3 . J a m e s i. 1. cu SíodsKa <j>vXaí iv rrj safe. occ. A c t s xxvii¡ 4 4 . xxviii. 1, 4. In
diaairopcj, The twelve tribes dispersed out this sense t h e L X X have often used it for
of their c o u n t r y ; of course, meaning those t h e H e b . isba) to be delivered, escape.
Jews who had become Christians. So And, as in A c t s xxiii. 24, we have
1 P e t . i. 1. TrapETTÍürjLioi Stao-iropa£, 1. e. TíavXov A I A S Í l ' S í l S I rrpbe <J?/;Xiica, Might
The dispersed. comp. 1 P e t . i. 14, 18. and bring P a u l safe to F é l i x ; so Raphelius
iii. 6. with ii. 10. iv. 3 . v. 14. T h a t and W e t s t e i n cite from Diogenes L a e r t .
t h e r e were Jews in almost every country A I E ' S í i S E N ' E I 2 "Adnvac, lié brougiü
in t h e world after t h e Babylonish cap- him safe to A t h e n s ; aud from Polybius,
tivity, especially in E g y p t and Asia M i - AIESÍi'ZONTO I I P 0 2 ryv wóXiv,.
,
They
nor, where they had synagogues, &c. is escapea to t h e city. T o t h e passages t h e y
well known. See Joseph. de B . J . vii. have produced I add what Josephus, D e
3 . 1. See also D e u t . xxviii. 2 5 , 65. x x x . Bel. lib. i. cap. 6. § 2 , says of one A n t i -
4. Nehem. i. 9. P s . cxlvii. 2. 2 Mac. i. pater, 'EÍC r¡)v KaXüpévnv Tlérpav ÁlA^
27.] S í i ' Z E T A I , He escapes to a place called
AiaréXXw. P e t r a ; so of Herod, cap. xiii. § 8, 'Eig
I . F r o m fita denoting separation, and ro <¡>pápiov A I A S G ' Z E T A I , He escapes to
"TE'XXO) to send. To sepárate, distinguish. t h e castle ; and of T i t u s , lib. v. cap. 2. §
I n this sense t h e verb oceurs not in 2. Tí'roc ' E n r ró SrparÓ7r£&^ A I A S O ' -
t h e N . T . b u t generally in t h e L X X . ZETAI, T i t u s escapes to t h e e a m p ; where
Comp. Aiatóki). [ D e u t . x. 8. x i x . 2. R u t h observe t h e V. is constructed with t h e
preposition ¿Vt and an accusative, as i n
I I . From ¿id denoting transition, and A c t s xxvii. 44, where see Wetstein. [ A d d
ft'XXw to send, Aia^iXXopai, mid. To give Gen. xix. 19. Is. xxxvii. 3 8 . 2 Mac. x i .
in charge, to command, charge. [ M a t . 12. Diod. Sic. xi. 44. X e n . A n a b . v. 4 1 5 .
xvi. 2 0 . ] M a r k v. 4 3 . [vii. 3 6 . ix. 9.] Polyb. viii. 1 1 . Joseph. A . J . ix. 4. 6. and
A c t s xv. 2 4 . I n pass. To be given in see Krebs. Obss. Flav. p . 250. W a h l a n d
charge, commanded. occ. H e b . xii. 2 0 . Schleusner refer A c t s xxvii¿ 4 3 . t o this
[ E x o d . xviii. 2 8 . ] 2d head, instead of t h e l s t , with P a r k -
Aiá^npa, afoc, TO, from Sikn/xi to part, h u r s t ; ]
sepárate ; which s e e . — I n t e r v e n t i o n , dis- III. To save, or deliver from some
tance, space [of time.'] occ. A c t s v. 7. present bodily disorder, to heal, cure. occ¿
Polyb. ix. 1. 1. M a t . xiv. 3 6 . L u k e vii. 3 :
Aia<7o\r)j r¡Q, ii, from cuÉVoXa perf. mid. Aiarayú, rje, r¡, from BiarEray'a perf.
of Sia^ÉWo).—Distinction, dijference. occ. mid. of Siaráo-crio.—A disposition, ordi-
Rom. iii. 22. x . 12. 1 Cor. 7. [ P o l y b . xvi. nancé, appointnient. occ. Rom. xiii. 2 .
28. 4 * . ] A c t s vii. 5 3 , who helve received the law,
Ata<rp£^>a>, from cua denoting separation, Ei£ diarayci£ ayyíXmv, by, or t h r o u g h ,
and -ípÉfiü to turn. t h e dispositions of angels. W e r e a d of no
I . To turn out of the way,. pervert,
other angels being present a t t h e giving
\corrupt7\ See M a t . xvii. 17. L u k e of t h e law b u t t h e material ones, in t h e
xxiii. 2. A c t s xiii. 8 , and Kypke on M a t . form of fre, light, darkness, cloud, and
and L u k e . thick darkness. See Exod. xix.. 18. D e u t .
I I . To pervert or make crooked t h e way iv. 1 1 . v. 2 2 . H a b . iii. 3 . Agreeably to
which passage i t is said, D e u t . xxxiii. 2,
* [It is decree in Numb. xix, 2 , xxx. 7. dijfer- Jehovah carne '3>DO from, or a t , Sinai,
ence or división in Exod. viii. 2 3 . price qfredemp- and his light aróse TJJ'ii'D a t Seir; he
t'on in 1 Mace, viii. 7.] shined out pt^Ej lilD at mount Paran;
N2
 A I A 180 A I A

Wlp nínlo níiai and carne forth * at so S t . Stephen calis him on M o u n t Sinai,
Rabbath Kadeshj iní> nitt>K
W D » » at Acts vii. 3 8 . A n d there can be no doubt
his right hand (comp. H a b . iii. 4.) the t h a t t h e Jewish tradition was, that God,
fire (acconrpanied with t h e cloud and on M o u n t Sinai, was attended by legions
thick darkness, comp. D e u t . v. 26, with of a n g e l s ; for in P s . Ixviii. 8, t h e words
ver. 22.) was placed, Sierciyv, or stood, by Sinai is in the sanctuary, (for t h a t is t h e
him, as a servant ready to execute his t r u e translation, see W i t s . de GScon.
pleasure. comp. P s . ciii. 20. civ. 4. So Foed. p . 6 1 2 . and Horsley's Translation)
these, and particularly the fire, as being follow t h e description of God being in t h e
t h e immediate instruments o f h i s a g e n c y , midst of t h e thousands of a n g e l s ; and t h e
see D e u t . y. 2 5 , were properly his ay- meaning is, t h a t as God former] y gave t h e
yeXoi, agents or ministers; and i t is well law on Mount Sinai in t h e midst of t h o u -
worth our observation, t h a t t h e L X X sands of angels, so now t h e same m a y be
accordingly render t h e H e b . words last seen in t h e sanctuary, where h e gives
cited from D e u t . xxxiii. 2, ü/M lj»n»a oracles from t h e midst of t h e cherubim.
\xh ni by 'EK Sei^iQv avrñ "ArrEAOI T h e n , as t h e angels were present at t h e
per avrü, On his right hand t h e angels,
giving t h e law, (Deut. xxiii. 2.) and as
or agents, with him. T h r o u g h t h e dis- t h e author t o t h e Hebrews ii. 2, says, t h a t
positions or ranges, Siarayae, of these
the law was spoken by angels, we m a y
terrible agents (see E x o d . xix. 16. D e u t .
suppose, t h a t as God, properly speaking,
v. 24, 2 5 . H e b . x i i . 18, 21.) f o n t l i e

uses no voice, t h e ministry or disposition

right hand, and on the left of Jehovah
of t h e angels produced t h e sound h e a r d ,
(for he spake unto them out of the midst
or t h e t h u n d e r in which t h a t sound was
of the fire of the cloud, and of the thick
conveyed. See D e Dieu on A c t s vii. 5 3 .
darkness, D e u t . v. 22.) i t was t h a t t h e
Israelites received the law, which was in W i t s i u s ubi supra. Horsley's Note on
t h i s sense only Siarayeíg ordained, Gal. , Ps. Ixviii. 17. Bretschneider cites an
iii.or 19, or XaXnOeíg spoken, H e b . i i . 2 , Si' important passage of Josephus, A . J .
ayyéXwv, among, by, or with the ministry xv. 5 . 3 . B u t h e , and Schleusner u n -
qf angels: for i t was t h e Aleim, or Je- derstand this place diiferently, and, s u p -
hovah himself, though attended indeed by posing, a s I have said, t h a t t h e choirs
his material agents, who ordained or of angels were present at t h e giving t h e
spake the law. See Exod. xx. ] 9. D e u t . law, make Siarayai the ranks, or orders
iv. 3 2 , 3 3 , 3 6 . A n d t h e tremendous m a - of angels. W a h l says, eig Star' is for iv
nifestation of Jehovah's power and ma» SiarayaÍQ, and translates, by the promul-
j e s t y on t h a t occasion was indeed a most gation of angels. I do not see w h y Schl.
awful enforcementof obedience to his law, and Bretsch. do not agree in this, for
as i n t i m a t e d by St. Stephen in t h e t e x t , t h e y both transíate G a l . iii. 19. as pro-
t h o u g h they kept it not. See D e u t . mulgatcd in the presence of the angels.^
iv. 9 — 1 2 . v. 2 2 — 2 6 . [ T h i s subject is Aiáraypa, aros, rb, from Siaréraypat,
somewhat difficult. T h a t i t was- God perf. pass. of Siurc'to-o-íü.—An order, com-
who gave t h e law is clear from E x o d . x x . mandment. occ. H e b . x i . 2 3 , where see
19. A n d with respect to t h e particular Wetstein. [ E z r a vii. 1 1 . 2 Wisd. x i . 7.]
person of t h e T r i n i t y , Allix has shown Aiarapcirro), from Sta emphat. and ra-
clearly, t h a t t h e universal tradition of t h e párrw to disturb.—To disturb, or trouble,
older Jewish church has represented i t as exceedingly. occ. L u k e i. 2 9 , where W e t -
the Word. (See Allix's J u d g m e n t , c h . x i i i . stein cites Dionysius Halicarn. [ A n t . vii.
a n d xiv.) B u t then it is also t r u e , t h a t , 3 5 . ] using t h e participle SiciTaparbpevoQ
in many of those instances where t h e W o r d in t h i s sense. So Josephus, A n t . lib. xiii.
appeared to t h e Patriarchs and Moses, h e cap. 11. § 2 , ad fin. A I E T A ' P A S E N
is called an ángel, as in E x o d . iii. 2. A n d greatly disturbed. [ X e n . M e m . iv. 2. 40.]
Aiaráami), or — r r w , from Sta emphat.
and ráauía to appoint, order.
* C o m p . H e b . and E n g . L e x i c ó n , i n 33"), under I. To dispose, regúlate, set in order.
r o í ; a n d see t h e learned B a t e ' s Integrity of t h e occ. 1 Cor. xi. 3 4 *.
printed H e b . T e x t , p . 7 4 , 5 , and h i s E n q u i r y into I I . To order, ordain, appoint, com-
the S i m i l i t u d e s , p . 0 2 , 3 .
f S o the T a r g u m of J o n a t h . B e n U z i e l on E x o d .
x x . 2 , describing the awful delivery of the l a w , * f l t is used especially, o f putting soldiers in
s a y s , -\$ab a blaze qf fire flamed at h i s right hand, array. 2 M a c . x i i . 2 0 . 1 K i n g s x i . 1 8 . X e n . ( E c .
and a blaze offire at his left. j iv. 2 1 . ]
 A I A 1S1 A I A

maná. M a t . xi. 1. L u k e iii. 13. viii. 5 5 . Comp. under BÉécuoc- [ P a r k h u r s t ' s se-
fjxvii. 9.] A c t s xviii. 2. & al. On A c t s paration of SiaOkpEvoQ, as if a participle
see Suetonius. in Claudio, cap. xxv. and received a different sense, is quite u n -
L a r d n e r ' s Collection of Testimonies, vol. reasonable. T h e meaning of t h e verb in
i. chap. 8. p . 364.—Atarátrcropai, Pass. this place has been m a t t e r of much con-
and Mid. T h e same Acts vii. 44. xx. 13. troversy. O u r translators make it, to
xxiv. 2 3 . 1 Cor. vii. 17- O n A c t s xx. 13, make a testament, rendering t h e p a r t i -
Wetstein cites Strabo using the verb Se- ciple, the testator. So Wolf, A l b e r t i ,
rhaKTO in an active sense, had appointed. Bengel, Schleusner, W a h l , E r a s m u s , &c.
And t h u s ivréraXrai is applied, A c t s xiii. &c. Indeed, from v. 17, i t would appear,
47. [ I have already given in Siarayt), t h a t t h i s translation is necessarily t r u e .
t h e explanations of the three Germán L e x - T h e whole passage, however, is one of
icogr. of t h e passage, Gal. iii. 1 9 ; and it g r e a t difliculty. I t would appear, t h a t as
•will be seen also from t h e note there, Siadúicn, like t h e H e b r e w word Í 1 H 3 , means
t h a t , in conformity with Witsius, W a h l , both covenant and testament, (each being
and others, I transíate, promulgated by or a solemn disposition) and as covenants in
through the intervention qf the angelsi] general anciently (and especially t h a t on
AtaTEXéít), w, from Buz emphat. or M o u n t Sinai) were ratified with blood,
through, and TEXÉO) to Jinish.—To con- t h e apostle, in comparing the new Siadi)Kr¡
tinué, persevere, occ. Acts xxvii. 3 3 , where with t h e oíd, represents it in a double l i g h t ,
see Wetstein. [ D e u t . ix. 7. J e r . xx. 7. a covenant ratified by blood, of which t h e
Xen. Mem. i. 2. 28. See Irmisch on H e - former sacrifices were t h e types, and a
rodian, i. 4. 12. p . 843.] t e s t a m e n t ratified and b r o u g h t into action
Atarripéo), ü, from Sia emphat. and by the death of the testator. T h e points
rrjpéto to keep.—To keep, or preserve of comparison are t h e ñame, and t h e death
carefully, or exactly. occ. L u k e ii. 5 1 . in each case. Bengel says, " These two
Acts xv. 29. T o t h e expression in L u k e , words denote an agreement, or disposition
t h a t in Theodotion's versión of Daniel, ratified by blood. W h e n this is ratified
chap. vii. 2 8 , rb pfjpa iv rrj icapSítf pn by t h e blood of animáis which cannot
Sir)T>'ipr¡o-a (Chald. anba rfmi 'a^a) isagree, much less act as teslators, Sta8r¡Kii
plainly parallel. Comp. L X X in Gen. is not properly a will, yet it is ¡Tía a co-
xxxvii. 11. [ I n Acts xv. 29. it is rather, venant, which has no remote reíation to a
to abstain from or be on one's guard testament from t h e death of t h e v i c t i m s ;
against, as t h e simple verb in 1 John v. b u t when t h e disposition is ratified by t h e
2 8 . Is. lvi. 2 . Aristot. H i s t . An. ix. 7f\ blood (i. e. t h e death) of him who makes
Aiarl, Adv. from Sia for, and. rí what ? it, it is properly a t e s t a m e n t , which is
—For what, why? M a t . ix. 14. xv. 2 . & also called n > i 3 , by extending t h e signifi-
al. freq. [Exod. ii. 18. N u m b . xi. 11.] cation of the word. "06EV m u s t not be
Aiarídripi, from Sia emphat. and ríQr¡pi translated too strictly, as if t h e Oíd T e s t ,
lo place. was ratified by the death of t h e t e s t a t o r ;
I . Ata-ídepat, Mid. To dispose, ap- b u t yet it intimates t h a t both N e w and
point. occ. L u k e xxii. 2 9 . Acts iii. 2 5 . Oíd were ratified by blood." So Gusset.
H e b . viii. 10. x. 16. Comp. Atadr^n. Commentar. L i n g . H e b r . p . 149. a n d E r a s -
Gen. xv. 18. D e u t . v. 3.] mus's Paraphrase.]
I I . AiaOifiEvos, Particip. 2 Aor. Mid. AiarpiSta, from Sia emphat. or through,
occ. H e b . ix. 16, 17. " M r . Pierce would and rpí£tx> to wear, spend, which see.
render it, qf that sacrifice which is ap- I . To consume, wear out. T h u s some-
pointed by God lo pacify ; and he brings times used in the profane writers, b u t not
a remarkable instance from Appian, where in the N. T . [Aristot. H i s t . A n . vi. 17-
StaOépEvoe signifies * pacifier. H e saith Tob. xi. 8.]
t h e scope of the writer requires i t should I I . Both in t h e sacred and profane
be so translated hére (ver. 16.), and ac- writers it denotes, to spend t i m e , and is
cordingly in the n e x t verse lie renders it, either joined with words expressive of
the pacifier can do nothing as long as he time, as A c t s xiv. 3, 2 8 . xvi. 12. xx. 6,
liveth. B u t I t h i n k if StadÉpEvoe be ren- or, such words being understood, it m a y
dered, that by which it is confirmed, the be rendered lo tarry, continué, or t h e
a r g u m e n t will be clearer." Doddridge.
like, as J o h n iii. 2 2 . (where see W e t s t e i n )
xi. 5 4 . & al. [Xen. Cyr. i. 2. 12. M e m .
* Scc S c a p u l a L e x i c . i n ¿uníSe/iai. ii. 1. 15.]
 A I A 182 A I A

t ^ p " Aiarpoipr),
1
%, r), from Siarirpoipa, lisk abroad, to divulge. occ. M a t . ix. 3 1 .
perf. mid. of Biarpéajoj to nourish, which xxviii. 15. M a r k i. 4 5 . [Dion. H a l . x i .
from Sta emphat. and rpé/pw lo nourish. 4 6 . ]
—Food nourishment. occ. 1 T i m . vi. 8. Aia<j>ddpix>, from Sia e m p h a t . and (¡>6dpii)
1 M a c . vi. 4 9 . Ag. 1 Kings v. 1 1 . ] to corrupt.
lEf-sÜ" A u u / y á £ ( ü , from Sdi through, and I. To corrupt, spoil entirely, destroy,
¿tvyá(oj to shine.— To daivn, q. d. to in a natural sense. occ. L u k e xii. 3 3 . Rev.
shine through t h e darkness. occ. 2 P e t . i. viii. 9. x i . 18.—Aiatpdeípopai, To be de-
19. [Polyb. iii. 104, 5. Aiavyaapa, I n c . stroyed, decay, perish. occ. 2 Cor. iv. 16.
Plab. iii. 3 0 4 . ] where see Wolfius.
AiaajavíiQ, éog, Ss, ó, ?;, Kal ro—éc, from I I . Aia<j>détpopai, To be corrupted, or
<Siá through, and <baívia to show.— Trans- corrupt, in a spiritual sense. occ. 1 T i m .
parent, pcllucid, diaphanous. occ. Rev. vi. 5 . For similar expressions in t h e
xxi. 2 1 , where t h e Alexandrian and six- G r e e k writers see Wolfius, W e t s t e i n , a n d
teen later M S S . Siavyíie, which reading K y p k e .
is accordingly embraced b y Wetstein, and AiatpQopá, áe, f¡, from SiécpOopa perf.
by Griesbach received into t h e t e x t , b u t mid. of Siatpdéipw, which see.
t h e sense is t h e same. [ E x o d . x x x . 3 4 . ] I . Corruption, dissolution, as of t h e
Aiaajépo), from Sia denoting transition flesh in t h e grave. A c t s i i . 2 7 , 3 1 . & al.
or separation, and 0Ép« to carry. [Ps. xvi. 10.]
I . To carry through. occ. M a r k xi. 16. II. The grave, the seat qf corruption,
[ 3 E s d r . v. 7 8 . ] as t h e correspondent H e b . word nnü> like-
I I . To carry through, or abroad, to wise signifies. A c t s xiii. 3 4 , where see
pnblish throughout. occ. A c t s xiii. 4 9 . Doddridge. [Comp. J o b xxxiii. 2 8 . ]
[ W i s d . xviii. 10.] Ataibopbc, 5, b, r¡, from cia(¡>épti).
I I I . Aiaibépouai, Pass. to be carried, I . Different, diverse, occ. R o m . xii. 6.
driven, or tosí different ways, or hither H e b . ix. 10. [ * D e n t . xxii. 9 . ]
and thither, or up and down. occ. Acts I I . Excellent. I n this sense, however,
xxvii. 2 7 . So in Lucian's H e r m o t i m u s , t h e positive form occurs n o t in t h e N . T . ;
tom. i. p . 5 5 8 , we have, ' E N r ¿ wákayci b u t Wetstein on H e b . i. 4 , cites from
AIAÍE'PESGAI, To be tosí up 'and down P l u t a r c h , A I A $ O P O S irpoe crorrnpiáv,
v
ex-
in t h e sea. Comp. Kypke * . cellent for saving. [ I t occurs in t h e ]
I V . Governing a genitive, To differ. c o m p a r a t i v e . — M o r e excellent. occ. H e b .
occ. Rom. ii. 18. (where see E l s n e r and i. 4 . viii. 6. [So E z r a viii. 2 0 . See
Wolfius), 1 Cor. x v . 4 1 . G a l . iv. 1. Phil. D u k e r . ad T h u c y d . vi. 5 4 . ]
i. 10. [ D a n . vii. 3 . W i s d . xviii. 9 . ] Im- AiaipvXácro-ü), or —rru>, from C?ÍCI e m -
personally, Aiai¡>épci, It malceth a differ- p h a t . and (f>v\áiTcriú to keep.—To keep or
ence, it is qf consequcnce, it imporlelh. occ. preserve carefully. occ. L u k e iv. 10. [ P s .
Gal. ii. 6 ; where see W e t s t e i n . [Polyb. xci. 1 1 . X e n . Mem. i. 5 . 2.]
iii. 1 1 . & freq.] AiayeipíZopai, M i d . from Sia e m -
V. Governing a genitive, Tó"excel, be p h a t . and yzipiQt,) to handle, which from
of more importance, or valué than. occ. X¿lp the hand. [ S e e D r e y s i g . de V e r b .
M a t . vi. 2 6 . x. 3 1 . xii. 12. L u k e xii. 7, Med. Sect. I I . § 8. T h e proper sense of
24. T h u s likewise in t h e profane writers, t h e active is t h e same as t h e simple verb,
as m a y be seen in W e t s t e i n on M a t . vi. and i t so occurs in X e n . A n . i. 9, 1 0 . ] —
26. [ T h u c y d . ii. 3 9 . ^Esch. Dial. iii. 6. To MU or dispatch, properly with t h e
X e n . A n . iii. 1. 37.] hand. occ. A c t s v. 3 0 . xxvi. 2 1 . F o r i n -
Ato^EÚyw, from Sia emphat. a n d fEvyw stances of t h e like use of t h e Verb in t h e
lo fly.—To escape, occ. Acts xxvii. 4 2 . G r e e k writers, see Wetstein a n d K y p k e
[Prov. xix. 5 . P o l . i. 2 1 . 11.] on A c t s v. [Polyb. viii. 18. Strab. vi.
¡ J g ^ Aiatpr¡p.í£w, from Sia denoting 263.]
dispersión, and <pr¡pi(u> to report, which \_Aia-)(ki.va(ü), from Sia and %A£im£(u to
from <¡>r¡pí to speak.—To report, or pub- laugh at, or deride.—To laugh at, or de-

* [ T h i s is the proper foree'of the word. I t occurs * [Schleusner says S/a^opo; is here that ichieh
so in the active, X e n . ( E c . i x . 1 8 , 8<i¡ denoting se- martes a difference. Bretsch. reads tmtfipms, ño.w-
paration. F o r further e x a m p l e s o f the verb a p - Tia-jc/oTf ¡tai (with some M S S . ) , and says i t i s offer.
plied to tossing at sea, see Philo de Migrat. i. p . ings, washings, and disciplines, & c . F o r this
4 5 9 . 9. (ed. M a n g . ) Gataker a d A n t o n i n . i x . 27- See meaning e f fozQéptx, h e refers to P o l y b . iv. 1 8 . 8 .
florat. E p o d . x . C,.\ 3 Esdr. iv. 3 8 . 2 Mace. iii. 6 . ]
 A I A 183 A I A

ridé. This is Griesbach's reading in Acts I . To leach, instruct by word qf mouth.

ii. 13. instead of x\ev¿t'(ovreg. See Poli. M a t . iv. 2 3 . xxviii. 20. T i t . i. 11. Col. iii.
Onom. iv. 3 2 . Polyb. xvii. 4. 4.] 16. & a l . — B y infernal and spiritual illu-
Aiax'opí^h), from Sta denoting separa- mination. J o h n xiv. 26. Comp. 1 J o h n ii.
tion, and ^wpí'fw t° part.— To sepárate. 27.—Byfacts, as Nature, i. e. t h e con-
occ. L u k e ix. 3 3 . [Gen. xiii. 9.] stitution of God in t h e n a t u r a l world,
ffgp AiSakTticós, >/, bv, from SiSámcio to teaches us, that if a man have long
0
hair,
leach.—Apt to teach, rvell qualified, and it is a shame to him ; but if a woman have
willing to teach. occ. 1 T i m . iii. 2. 2 T i m . long hair, it is a glory to her; because
ii. 24. t h e h a i r of t h e m a n naturally grows to a
AtSaicroe, i), bv, from Stoáo-Kw to teach. less length than t h a t of t h e woman, to
—Taught. occ. J o h n vi. 4 5 . 1 Cor. ii. 1 3 . whom her hair is given for a covering.
G r o t i u s remarles, t h a t in this latter pass- T h i s Milton has r e m a r k e d in his compa-
age we have SiSatcróic twice joined with a rativo description of Adam and Eve, Pa*.
genitive case signifying t h e cause, as in radise Lost, book iv. line 3 0 1 , &c,
J o h n vi. 45, where iri like manner we read
SiSaicról BeS taught by G o d ; an expres- —His hyacinthin lóeles
sion used by t h e L X X in Isa. liv. 13, t h e R o u n d from h i s parted fore-lock m a n l y h u n g
Clust'ring, b u t not bencath his shoulders broadi
t e x t referred t o , for the H e b . m¡T >Tiní>. í

She, as a veil doten to the slender tpaist,

N o t t h a t these phrases are inerely hellen- H e r unadorned golden tresses wore
istical, as is evident from t h e following Dishevell'd.—
passage of P i n d a r , O l y m p . ix. towards
t h e end, cited by W e t s t e i n on 1 Cor. 1 Cor. xi. 14, 15. Comp. Rev. ix. 8, a n d
see Wolfius on 1 Cor. xi. 14. [ I n 1 T i m .
Tí) Sí; (pia. ypáTls~ov altav. ii. 12, t h e word is used of public teaching.
n o K X o l Úe A I A A K T A ' I Z I n Rom. ii. 2 1 , t h e m e a n i n g is, Dost thou
' A N 0 P Ü ' r m N 'Apnáíg x\éo¡ not require qf thyself what thou requirest
"Slfaaav hKiu^ae
qf others ?2
A l l that is natural, is best. AiSaxf], í¡£, i/, from SsdíSa-xa, perf. act.
. M a n y , howe'er, b y virtues taught by men of SiSácncio.
H a v e a i m ' d to purchase g l o r y — I . A teaching, the art of teaching. See
Acts ii. 4 2 . 2 T i m . iv. 2 .
AtSatTKaXía, ac, i), from SilácricaXoc. I I . Doctrine, taught or delivered. Mat.
I. A teaching, the art or office of teach- xvi. 12, J o h n vii. 16. A c t s v. 2 8 . & al.
ing. Rom. xii. 7. 1 T i m . iv. 13. v. 17. freq.
I I . Instruction, information, conveyed I I I . Any trulh of the Gospel concern-
by teaching. Rom. xv. 4. 2 T i m . iii. 16'. ing faith or manners. Locke. occ. 1 Cor.
I I I . The subject qf teaching, doctrine,xiv. 6. comp. ver. 26. See M a c k n i g h t ,
precepts, delivered or taught. M a t . xv. 9. and on E p h . iv. 11. [ W a h l and Schl.
E p h . iv. 14. 1 T i m . i. 10. T i t . ii. 1. say, t h a t in M a r k i. 2 7 , t h e abstract is
AiSáo-KaXoc, «, ó, from StSáo-Kw to teach. p u t for t h e concrete, and t h a t SiSayji ¡s
•—A leacher, master, instructer. See M a t . leacher. T h e r e seems little reason for
ix. 1 1 . x . 24. L u k e ii. 46. iii. 12. John iii. this.]
10. A c t s xiii. 1. 1 T i m . ii. 7. 2 T i m . i. 11, AíSpa-^pov, s, ro, from S¿c twice, and
and Campbell's Preliminary Dissertations Spa-^pii a drachm, which s e e . — A didrach-
to t h e Gospels, p . 3 2 1 . & seq. [ I n James mon, or double drachm, equal to two R o -
iii. 1. Schleusner explains t h e meaning to mán denarii, or about fifteen pence E n g -
be, Do not take upon you the teaching lish. * Josephus has iuformed us, t h a t
others or censuring them loo much. The
word is used of teachers in t h e JeM'ish w i t h the learned J u n i u s ( E t y m o l . A n g l i c . i n teach),
synagogue. L u k e ii. 46. J o h n iii. 10. that the Lacedtemonians for oiüáaxsiv used SÍSCÍJÍJÍE^,
Rom. ii. 2 0 . ] as appears from a decree of their senate preserved
b y l i o e t h . l i b . i. c a p . 1. A r t i s Musiese. T o which
AtSátrnio, either from Sátta or Sáw lo we m a y a d d , that the F u t . Silájw, A o r . 1. iSÍSa^a,
knom or teach, whence Ionic ¿ > á o ™ , and, and the derivatives SjSce^jj, 8i8axT¡>f, & c . point to the
with t h e reduplícate syllable Si, Sioáo-icw ; same t h e m e Stítíxxw, or SíSctycu. C o m p . Maittaire's
or else it may be from * Sel™ to show, D i a l e c t s , p . 2 0 9 . F r o m the V . 8e/xw m a y also, w i t h
with t h e r e d u p l i c a r o n Si. great probability, b e dedueed the L a t i n doceo, t h e
S a x o n t a j e a n , and E n g . teach, all of which are of
similar import. C o m p . Aiíxmfii.
* T h i s derivatíon m a y be confinned by o b s c i v i n g * A n t . l i b . xviii. cap. 10. § 1. TÍ,TE í/Sjjajyíov
 A I A 1S4 £ I A

every J c w used to pay yearly to God a
didrachmon into t h e temple a t Jerusalem.
Now Jehovah, in Exod. xxx. 12—16,
commanded, by Moses, t h a t whenever t h e
people were mustered, every IsraeJite from
t w e n t y years oíd and upwards should give,
for the service of t h e tabernacle, hcdf a
shelcel. A n d we find the same t a x r e -
quired for the repair of the temple in t h e
reign of Joash, 2 Chron. xxiv. 6, 9. B u t
after the r e t u r n from the Babylonish cap-
tivity this tax in the davs of Nehemiah
was reduccd to onc-third of a shelcel, N e h .
x . 3 2 . If, according to Josephus's asser-
tion, Ant. lib. iii. cap. 8. § 2, the H e b r e w
shelcel be reckoned equal to four Attic
drachms, two such drachms, or one di-
drachmon, will be equal to half a shelcel,
t h e tribute enjoined by Moses. B u t the
same historian, in another place, A n t , lib.
ix. cap. 1 1 . § 1, compared with 2 K i n g s
xv. 20, makes t h e shelcel equal only to one
drachm, or seven pence t h r e e farthings
English ; and it may be doubted whether
t h e shelcel was much more in valué than
eleven pence *. A n d if it was not, every
Jew's paying of a didrachmon iov the sa-
cred t r i b u t e in our Saviour's time must
be deemed an increase of t h e sum ordered
b y Moses and k i n g Joash, even as t h a t
ordained in Nehemiah's days was a dimi-
nution of it. occ. M a t . xvii. 24, where ob-
serve, t h a t the collectors of t h e didrach-
mons, ra díSpaxpa, ask, Does not your
master pay ra cíSpaxpa ? By which they
do not mean t h a t Christ should pay more
than one didrachmon for himself; b u t
either t h e expression is indefinite, or ra-
t h e r it intimates a question, whether he
would not pay for his disciples also, as we
find he in fact did for P e t e r ; for he paid
tarijpa a stater, a coin equal to two di-
drachmons,, or four Román denarii, for
T£ @s¡p y.xT<y.§?J.htt'j '¿ éx«ro~p Trárpiw, T h e didrach- Schleusner makes t h e verb, in 2 Cor. viii.
mon which it w a s the custom ( a m o n g the J e w s ) for 5, signify to be very liberal and
each person to p a y to G o d . ( C o m p . Cicero, Orar, to others;
pro L . P l a c e o , § 2 8 , and M i d d l e t o n ' s Life of Cicero,
vol. i. p . 303, 4to.) A n d D e B e l . l i b . v i i . cap. 6.
§ G. (Jiopoy Se xoTf ¿VH §¡Í7rOT btroj'ltíOatOíe ¿nÉSahs, Syo 15, he, with W a h l , classes under t h e
opa^/iaf íy.us-cv xeAÉUffaf ává 7rav erog lig TO Ka7reT(ú- meaning to reslore or give baelc. Rev. ii.
ÁÍOV fytpst'j, üít77rep xpórepov iig TQV S'J 'lepoG"ó'AuU0íf ye'wv 2 3 , it is lo pay bacle. H e refers Rev. iii. 9,
J
himself and t h e Apostle together, ver. 2 7 .
— T h e L X X frequently render t h e H e b .
bplü a shelcel by SíSpa^pov; t h e reason of
which, according to Grotius, is t h a t t h e
Alexandrian drachm, by which those
translators constantly reckon, was double
of the A t t i c or common drachm. See
Prideaux, Preface to bis Connections, p .
2 1 . l s t edit. 8vo.
Aídvpos, a, 6, from Sío * two, by r e -
duplication of the first syllable, and chang-
ing v into i . — D i d y m u s , or The Twin.
I t has the same signification in Greek as
Thomas, from n s t i or tDlXn a twin, h a t h
in Hebrew. P e r h a p s , says Lightfoot on
John xx. 24, Thomas was a native of
some place inhabited both by t h e J e w s
and Greeks, such as was t h e región of
Decapolis, and so t h e Jews called him by
his Hebrew, and t h e Greeks by his G r e e k
ñame. occ. J o h n xi. 16. xx. 24. xxi. 2.
AíScapi and SiSóio (whence ESÍSH, ídícStsv,
and imperat. SíSu, L u k e x i . 3 . ) , formed
by reduplication from t h e obsolete oow.
I n Mark xiv. 44, t h e 3d person singular
pluperf. SESÓIKEL without t h e £ is used for
lc)£c!(í)fCEi, after t h e Ionic m a n n e r ; so J o h n
xi. 5 7 , SeSójiceíaav for íSíStoicEicrav; and in
Rom. xv. 5. E p h . i. 17- 2 Thess. iii. 16,
we have the A t t i c Sár¡ for Soín 3d person
sing. 2 Aor. optat. in J o h n xvii. 2, oiíio-?/
3d person 1 fut. subjunct. Doric, used
likewise by Theocritus, I d y l l . xxvii. line
21.
I. To give, " bestow, confer without
price or rcward." Johnson. M a t . vii. 7,
11. L u k e xi. 13. J o h n iii. 16. vi. 5 1 . &
al. freq.
I I . To give, deliver into the hands of
another. M a t . xiv. 19. xv. 3 6 . xix. 7.
xxvi. 26, 2 7 . L u k e vii. 15. J o h n xiii. 26.
& al.
I I I . To give up, deliver. Rev. x x . 13.
2 Cor. viii. 5 , where see Kypke for similar
expressions in t h e G r e e k writers. [ N . B .
benefeent
while t h e other passage, Rev.
x x . 13, with Rev. xviii. 7. and L u k e vii.

ffuvsTí?.uy. V e s p a s i a n (after the destruction of J e - to this head of P a r k h u r s t ' s ; and adds, t h a t

r u s a l e m ) i m p o s e d a tribute on the J e w s wheresoever
residing, ordering each of them to p a y two drachms in the following it is lo deliver up to death.
annually into the capítol, as they formerly u s e d to L u k e xxii. 19. Gal. i. 4. 1 T i m . i. 6. T i t .
p a y them into the temple at J e r u s a l e m . Comp.
S n e t o n i u s i n D o m i t i a n , cap. x i i . and Lardner's Col-
ii. 14. J Mace. iv. 44. Some refer J o h n
lection of T e s t i m o n i e s , & c . vol. i. p . 370. iii. 16. to t h i s last m e a n i n g ; b u t Schleus-
* See M i c h a e l i s S u p p l e m . and L e x . H e b . under
m j , p. 307, H e b . and E n g . L e x i c ó n , i n bpv I V . * So the English twin is related to two.
 A OY 185
ner thinks, from 1 John iv. 9, it means
here lo señal into the morid.']
I V . To commit, inirust. M a t . xxv. 15.
M a r k xii. 9. L u k e xix. 2 3 , where K y p k e
shows t h a t Demostheues likewise uses it
for lending. [ T h e s e passages, with L u k e
x x . 16, Schleusner translates to place out
al interesé. L u k e xii. 4 8 . xvi. 12. xix. 15.
John xvii. 6. Col. i. 2 5 , he translates by
to inirust any thing lo any one. Wahl
p u t s all these, with some others, under
this fourth h e a d . ]
V. ASrat íavrov l i e — T o venture oneself
into a place. Acts xix. 3 1 . Polybius, D i o -
dorus Sic. and Josephus cited by W e t -
stein, use t h e same phraseology.
V I . To give, infict. John xix. 3 . 2
T h e s s . i. 8.
V I L To give, injoin, appoint. John
[ v . 3 6 . ] vii. 22. xvii. 8.—AiSóvaí ípyov,
M a r k xiii. 34, To appoint a mork, assign
a task, as a master to his servants. X e -
nophon, in CEcon. uses t h e phrase in t h e
same sense, where a mistress of a family
is said, " E P r A raXáaia Oeparraívaie A I -
AO'NAI, to assign a task of spinning,
carding, &c. to her maid-servants. See
Raphelius.
V I I I . To give, attribute, ascribe. J o h n
ix. 2 4 . Rev. xi. 13.
I X . To give, grant, permit. M a t . xiii.
11. Mark ix. 1 i. (where see W e t s t e i n ) x.
3 7 . John xix. 11. Acts ii. 2 7 . Comp. Ps.
xvi. 10, in the L X X . H e r o d applies t h e
verb in t h e same sense. See Raphelius
on Acts xiii. 3 5 . [Schleus. adds to t h e
examples here given, M a t . x i x . 11. x x .
2 3 . John iii. 27. vi. 65. Acts xiii. 3 5 . Rev.
vi. 4. vii. 2. ix. 5. xiii. 7, 14, 15. xvi. 8.
xix. 8. So iEschyl. A g a m . 1344. E u r .
Phcen. 1374. Dion. Hal. i. 5 1 . & freq.]
X . To give, yield fruit, as vegetables.
M a t . xiii. 8. Mark-. iv. 7, 8. T h u s t h e
L X X use it for t h e H e b . i r o , E z e k . xxxiv.
27. Zech. viii. 12. & al.
X L AiSóvaí fwvnv, To yield, utter a
sound. occ. 1 Cor. xiv. 7, 8, where W e t -
stein cites Pindar applying t h e same phrase
to a person, N e m . v. line 192.
X I I . To propose, promise. M a t . xxiv.
24. M a r k xiii. 22. O u r Lord does not in-
tend to say, t h a t any of those false pro-
phets would exhibit or perform great
wonders. T h e original word is Súmm,
they mili give: t h e same word t h a t is in
t h e Scptuagint versión of D e u t . xiii. 1,
If Ihere arise among you a prophet, or a
dreamer of dreams, and he giveth thee a
sign, or a monder, Kal A£2~i troi onpüov r\
A I E
répag, t h a t is, shall propose, or promise
some sign or wonder, as t h e sequel shows.
L a r d n e r ' s Large Collection of T e s t i m o -
nies, &c. vol. i. p . 67, where see more, a n d
comp. 1 Kings xiii. 3 , 5, in L X X , and see
K y p k e in M a t . [Schleusner adds, M a r k
x. 3 7 , (where our translation, with P a r k -
h u r s t , says grant; but Schleus. so t r a n s -
lates from Mat. x x . 2 1 . J o h n xiv. 2 7 .
I n t h e last cited place of S t . John, I t h i n k
t h e best Commentators (especially Lampe)
refer t h e peace spoken of to t h e peace
of juslifi'catión; and as t h a t could n o t
be given, as Lampe says, till t h e sacrifice
necessary to ensure it was made, per-
haps Schleusner is r i g h t in translating
t h e verb to promise. J o h n xvii. 2 2 . ( T h i s
place Schleusner understands of t h e fu-
t u r e glory and happiness of Christ and
t h e apostles iu heaven. B u t I would refer
here to what I have said on Safa, as t h e
meaning of SíSwpi in this place m u s t
depend on t h e meaning of SóH,a.) 2 T h e s s .
ii. 16. ( T h i s interpretation is, I t h i n k ,
unnecessary; t h e verb may be simply to
give. 2 T i m . i. 9.) See Diod. Sic. x x .
15. Xen. Ages. iv. 6.]
X I I I . To place, appoint, constitute.
E p h . i. 2 2 . iv. 11. Comp. 1 Cor. xii. 2 8 .
T h e L X X use it in t h e same sense, 2
Chron. ii. 11. Isa. Iv. 4. J e r . x x i x . 2 6 ,
answering to the Pleb. \tv¡. Comp. also
Gen. xii. 4 1 . D e u t . xvii. 15. J e r . i. 5, in
t h e H e b . and see Gusset. Comment. L i n g .
H e b . p . 544.
X I V . To place, put. L u k e xv. 22. H e b .
viii. 10. x. 16. T h u s it is frequently a p -
plied in t h e L X X for t h e H e b . fnl, as
J e r . xxxi. 3 3 . xxxv. 5. xxxvii. 4 , 17-
xxxviii. 7. & al.
X V . [To suggest or supply. M a t . x .
19. M a r k xiii. 1 1 . E p h . vi. 19. D e u t . x i .
32.]
X V I . [To place or send. L u k e xii. 5 1 .
2 Cor. xii. 7. H e b . viii. 10. Rev. xvii.
17
1
X V I I . [To teach or deliver. J o h n xvii.
7 and 8. A c t s vii. 3 8 . Prov. ix. 9. jEsch.
Dial. ii. 20. So in L a t i n clare is used for
dicere.~\
AiSóvaí ÍKSÍKYIO-IV, To inflict punish-
ment. 2 Thess. i. 8.
AtSóvat páiriapa, To give a slap on ihe
face. occ. J o h n xviii. 2 2 . xix. 3 . So Sca-
pula cites from P l a t o , IlXyyae AI'AQMI,
I give strokes. [ O n t h e phrase SiSóvaí
ípyátjiav. See Markland ad Lys. p . 5 4 5 . ]
Aieyeípoj, from Sia emphat. and iyápu
to raise, rouse.
 A I E 186 A I E

I . To mise, excite, as t h e sea by a vio- Aiépxp¡xai, from Sia through, and epx"~
lent wind. occ. J o h n vi. 18. pai to come, go.
I I . To raise, or rouse from sleep, lo I . To go or pass through. See M a t .
awake. occ. M a t . i. 24. M a r k iv. 3 8 , 3 9 . xix. 24. L u k e ii. 3 5 . ix. 6. xix. 1, 4 . J o h n
L u k e viii. 2 4 . iv. 4 . viii. 5 9 . H e b . iv. 14. Comp. L u k e
I I I . To stir up, lo rouse, in a spiritual ii. 15. Acts x. 3 8 . [ I n L u k e xix. 4, t h e
•sense. 2 P e t . i. 13. iii. 1. sense is to pass by. See Krebs. Obss.
Ail&dog, H, TI, from cía through, and Flav. p . 128. Abresch. Annot. ad loca
é'íoooc a way out.—An outlet, a passage quaedam N . T . p . 5 5 3 . I t is henee used
outwards. T h u s applied by Thucydides of time in good Greek. Xen. Mem. iv. 3 ,
a n d Dionysius Halicarn. [v. 47.] occ. 8. Irmisch. ad Herodian. i. 5 , 2 1 . A g a i n ,
M a t . xxii. 9. See Scott's Note. [ D e in some other passages it is to go or travel.
D i e u understands by this phrase the ends L u k e ii. 15. xvii. 1 1 . J o h n iv. 4. A c t s ix.
of the streets, where there were frequently, 32, 38. x i . 1 9 . ; and with cWó, to go away,
in the E a s t , gates separating t h e street A c t s xiii. 14. xviii. 2 7 . Again, it is to go
from the n e x t . K y p k e , after Beza, t h i n k s or travel over, or about, in M a t . xii. 4 3 .
it means those squares or open places L u k e ix. 6. xi. 24. A c t s viii. 4 . x. 3 8 . xiii.
where many streets m e t ; because in such 6. Josh. xviii. 4. Gen. xii. 47-]
places the people assembled. B u t Fischer I I . To pass over. M a r k iv. 3 5 .
(de Vit. L e x . N . T . p . 637.) observes, t h a t I I I . To go or be spread abroad. L u k e
from St. L u k e (xiv. 2 1 , 23.), i t is clear v. 15, Ainpxzro—ó X ó y o c , The report or
our Lord speaks of t h e country, and not a rumour was spread abroad. Raphelius
city; for t h e oiiXodoi are distinguished from shows t h a t Xenophon applies t h e verb
t h e 7rXar£i'ai and pvpai; and t h a t if Ste%- Biépxppai in like manner. [ A n a b . i. 4, 7.
liad signified these open places, he and not T h u c . vi. 4 6 . ]
¿Vi would have been used. I t appears EÜP° Aiepwráoj, ü, from Sia e m p h a t .
t h a t Hesychius has t h i s gloss on dú'íoSoí, and Épiorciu) to ask, enquire.—To enquire
odev tKiropévovrai. T h i s cannot apply to diligently or repeatedly. occ. A c t s x. 17-
diÉ¡¡oSoi iSárwv, Ps. i. 3 . and cxix. 3 6 . as E§gp° Aifrí/c, éoc, Se, ó, i), Kal rb —£f,
¿Xeroi or channels of water are t h e r e from Sis twice, and '¿roe a year.—Of two
m e a n t ; and hardly to t h e same words in years' contimiance or two years oíd. H e n e e
P s . cvii. 33 and 3 5 , as i t seems to require —Aierée, rb, The age qf two years. occ.
t h e addition of some word showing its M a t . ii. 16, where enrb Bmr5e means, I
application to streams of water. T h e gloss th'mk, from the beginning or entrance into
therefore, probably, refers to this place. their second year. Aristotle uses t h e
T h e phrase cutí; bSüv does not occur either word in this sense, when he says, H i s t .
-

m t h e L X X , or in any Greek author. F i s - A n i m . lib. ix. 5, stags Biertie of t h e second

cher explains it with t h e L a t i n versión, year begin first to produce homs. But it
as exilus viarum or loca unde exitur, is certain, t h a t stags do this a t t h e begin-
a n d says t h a t our Lord, under these ning of their second year. F u r t h e r , H e -
country roads, signifies t h e foreign and rod is said, M a t . ii. 7, to have accurately
barbarous people who were to receive t h e learned qfthe Magi the time qfthe stars
cali to which t h e Jews would not listen. I t (first) appearance, rov xpóvov rS <j>aivo-
m i g h t be well t o look to t h e meaning of t h e pívü a^époe, and verse 16, to have slain
word in Ps. cxliii. 14. and Joshua xv. 4.] all the children árro SierSe and under, ac-
Aitppr)Vtvrr¡Q, tí, o, from SiEppn- cording to t h e time which h e h a d of t h e m
vívw.—An interprete?: occ. 1 Cor. xiv.,28. learned by aecurate enquiry. B u t i t is
[ T h e miraculous gift of i n t e r p r e t i n g u n - improbable t h a t t h e Magi, w h e t h e r t h e y
known languages is. m e a n t h e r e , says were of Arabia or Persia (comp. u n d e r
Schleusner rightly, as in t h e verb in 1 M á y o c ) , should spend more than a year
Cor. xii. 3 0 . xiv. 2 7 . T h e word occurs in coming to Jerusalem, and thence t o
2 Mace. i. 26. Polyb. iii. 2 2 . 3 . ] Bethlehem, which confirms t h e i n t e r p r e -
lÜH" Aiepprjveva), from Sia e m p h a t . a n d tation of arro StarHe here g i v e n * . [Mr.
íppijvevoj to explain, interpret. Benson, in his admirable Essay on t h e
I. To explain clearly and exactly. occ. Chronology of our Saviour's Life, says,
L u k e xxiv. 27. t h a t although the passages in Aristotle
I I . To interpret, transíate, explain, out
of one language i n t o another. occ. A c t s ix. * See Sir N o r t o n K n a t c h b u l l ' s and CampbeH'a
3 6 . 1 Cor. xii. 3 0 . xiv. 5, 13, 27- N o t e s on M a t . ii. 16.
 A I H 187
aud Hesychius justify t h e attribution of
this meaning to Aim/e, yet t h a t , both in
sacred and profane authors, and, as far
as he knows, in every one of t h e F a t h e r s ,
i t is almost universally used in t h e sense
which our versión gives. H e observes,
t h a t t h e time about which H e r o d en-
quired, was probably t h e time when t h e
star appeared, which m i g h t probably have
been a considerable time before t h e birth
of C h r i s t ; this time m i g h t have been
spent in deliberation, as to t h e course to
be pursued. Herod, as St. M a t t h e w says,
enquired d i l i g e n t l y ; and t h e M a g i p r o -
bably answered accurately. T h e infer-
euce, of course, is not t h a t Christ was
born, b u t t h a t perhaps t h e star h a d a p -
peared more t h a n a year before t h e m a s -
sacre. Besides Herod, when he found
t h a t the M a g i d i d not r e t u r n , m i g h t
fancy they h a d deceived him, and t h e r e -
fore to make assurance doubly sure, and
from the wanton cruelty which certainly
(see Jos. de B . J . i. 19. p . 766.) was a
p a r t of his disposition, he m i g h t , very
probably, extend the slaughter unneces-
sarily in time, as he obviously did in
space. Schleusner, Wahl, and Bretsch-
neider, all agree in this, observing t h a t
¿neo bierüs is for á-7ró Sierüv, all the child-
ren of two years oíd, and disapproving of
the supposition t h a t yp° VH
is
t 0
under-
o e
stood. W e have á7ró rpierSs in 2 Chron.
xxx). 16. curo iucotratrüc Kai leárb) in 1
Chron. xxvii. 2 3 . See E z r a iii. 8. and 3
E s d r . v. 5 8 . airo ÍIK- cal liráva, N u m b . i.
4 5 . T h e word oceurs 2 Mace. x. 3.]
Alerta, ac, ?'/, from ble twice, and '¿roe a
year.—The space qf two years. occ. A c t s
xxiv. 27. xxviii. 3 0 .
Ainyéopai, Spai, from Sia through, and
yyéopai to tell, declare ; (though I do not
find that t h e simple verb r¡yéopai is used
by t h e G r e e k writers in t h e sense here
assigned; but comp. "Efyyéopai.)—To de-
clare thoroughly or particularly, to re-
count, relate. M a r k v. 16. L u k e viii. 3 9 .
ix. 10. & al. [ I t is properly used of hi-
storical narration. See T h u c y d . vi. 54.
B u t it has sometimes the sense of encomi-
asiic narration, as L u k e viii. 3 9 . See P s .
xlvii. 13. L u k e ix. 10. A c t s viii. 3 3 . ix.
27. xii. 17. H e b . xi. 3 2 . I t is construed
Acc. of thc thing, and D a t . qf person ; with
or with 7rw£, ocrov, rrepl.]
Acóyncrie, ios, A t t : EWC, ?;, from cwjyÉ-
opai.—A narration, history. occ. L u k e
i 1.
Air¡i>£K>)g, éog, 5s, ó Kai i¡, Kai ro —es,
A I I
from fita emphat. or through, and r/yeicfis
extensive, prolonged, which from EVE'XW lo
extend, from iv in, and É'Y_W to have.—
Continual, perpetual. Henee—AirjveKeg,
ro, used as a substantive, 'Etg ró bir¡veK¿s,
For a continuance, continually. occ. H e b .
x. 1. During life. H e b . vii. 3 . T h u s used
likewise by t h e G r e e k writers. See A l -
berti, Wolfius, Wetstein, and M a c k n i g h t .
Also, For perpetnity, for ever. occ. H e b .
x. 12, 14. I n verse 12, " connect lis ™
BinveKée with w h a t precedes: After he
had offered one sacrifice for ever, not, sat
down for ever, for t h e n i t would have been
SITTETH DOWN for ever." Bowyer. B u t
Q u ? and see M a c k n i g h t . [ N o t h i n g cant
be harsher than Bowyer's and M a c k n i g h t ' s
versión. Bowyer's objection is frivolous,
for t h e aorist h a s perpetually t h e sense
of t h e present. See Mathiae's G r . G r a m .
§ 5 0 5 , 3 , or r a t h e r § 5 0 6 . ]
E^P° AidáXacraos, a, b, from Sis twice,
and Bá\ao-aa a sea—Where two seas
meet, or r a t h e r , Washed on each side by
the sea, bimaris. occ. A c t s xxvii. 4 1 . B o -
chart, vol. i. p . 5 0 2 , says, T h i s Isihmus i s
shown to this day on t h e n o r t h - e a s t e m
p a r t of the island of M a l t a , and is called
by the inhabitants L a Cala * di S. Paolo,
The landing-place of St. Paul.
AÜKvéopai, Spai, from día through, a n d
ÍKvéopai to come. See under 'AipiKvéopai.
To go through, pierce, penétrate, occ.
H e b . iv. 12. [ E x o d . xxvi. 2 8 . ]
Ait^npi, from Sia denoting separation,
and hr¡pi io stand. [ I t is properly to
part or sepárate, in an active sense. Seé
Isa. lix. 2. P r o v . xvii. 9 . ]
I. To part, be separated. occ. L u k e
xxiv. 5 1 .
I I . To part, depart, remove, proceed.
occ. A c t s xxvii. 2 8 .
I I I . I t denotes distance or interval qf
time. occ. L u k e xxii. 5 9 , Kai bia^áans ¿)crel
Hipas pías, and about the space of one hour
after; literally, and about one hour separ-
a t i n g or intervening. So Montanus, in-
t e r s t a n t e . Comp. Aiá^npa.
Aiio-¡(ypí'(opai, from bia e m p h a t .
and iaj(ypíZopai io corrobórate, confirm,
affirm, which from lo~xypós firm, strong.
— To affirm, or assert strongly or vehe-
mently. occ. A c t s xii. 15. L u k e xxii. 5 9 ,
where W e t s t e i n and K y p k e show t h a t t h e
Greek writers use t h e V e r b in t h e same
sense. [ S e e ¿El. H . A n . vii. 1 1 . ]
* [ S c h l . and Bretsch. s a y i t is rather a projecting
•rock than an i s t h m u s , here spoken o f . ]
 A I K 188
AiicaitKpio-ía, ac, r), from SíicaLog just,
a n d Kpícrig judgment.—Just or rigkteous
judgment. occ. Rom. ii. 5. [ H o s . vi. 5. a
just cause.~]
AlKawe, ata, ciwv, from tfoj right,
justice.
I . Of persons, JÍÍÍÍ, acting conformably
to justice and right, without any deficiency
or failure. T h u s it is applied to God,
J o h n xvii. 2 5 . Rom. iii. 26.—to Christ
G o d - m a n , Acts iii. 14. vii. 5 2 . xxii. 14.
1 P e t . iii. 18. James v. 6. 1 John ii. 1.—to
mere men, of whom in this sense it is said
there is not one just, Rom. iii. 10. In
M a t . xxvii. 24, Pílate seems to have
meant no more t h a n t h a t our L o r d , to
whose character he was probably a s t r a n -
ger, was Skaiog in t h e forensic sense, i. e.
innocent, or not guilty, of the crime
whereof he was accused. Comp. L u k e
xxiii. 14. and see Campbell's N o t e on
Matthew.
I I . T h e Pharisees t r u s t e d t h a t t h e y
were Sítcaioi (see L u k e xviii. 9. M a t . ix.
13.) not absolutely without sin, b u t righ-
teous of themselves by the wúrlcs qf the
law, i. e. they t h o u g h t themselves righte-
oas or just in the sight of God, by their
own external, or at best partial obsérvátion
of w h a t is called t h e moral law, and by
g r e a t scrupulosity and zeal with respect
to the ceremonial; the oulward expiations
enjoined, by which latter t h e y t r u s t e d
would procure them forgiveness of such
breaches of d u t y as they m i g h t incur.
Comp. R o m . x. 3 , and Doddridge there.
See also L u k e xv. 7, and B p . Pearce on
t h a t text.
I I I . Just, upright, righteous, though
not in t h e strictest sense, ñor without a
m i x t u r e of human infirmities and failures.
See M a t . i. 19. v. 4 5 . x. 4 1 . M a r k vi. 2 0 .
L u k e i. 6, 17. 1 T i m . i. 8. 1 J o h n .iii. 7.
& al. [ T h e word is used, according to
t h e Germán Lexicographers, not only to
express righteousness or virtue in general,
b u t also particular virtues, especially
t h a t of clemency or mercy, and they
quote M a t . i. 19. J o h n xvii. 2 5 . Rom.
iii. 26. 1 J o h n i. 9. as instances. Schleus-
n e r quotes Longin. de Sublim. xliv. 1.
E u r i p . Med. 724. O n t h e two pas-
sages, M a t . i. 19. and Rom. iii. 26, there
is a valuable note by Archbishop Magee,
vol. i. p . 4 7 7 , and following. W h i t b y
says, t h e word oceurs eighty times in t h e
N . T . , and he t h i n k s not once in the sense
of mcrciful. T h e r i g h t interpretation of
M a t . i. 19, is, according to Archbishop
A I K
Magee, Joseph being a just man, i. e. ac-
tuated by a sense of r i g h t , in obedience to
the law ( D e u t . xxiv. 1.), resolved to p u t
M a r y away ; and yet not willing to make
her a public example, &c. T h a t nal has
this sense of tamen, may be seen in Ra-
phel. ii. p . 5 1 9 . Palairet, pp. 4 1 , 96, 2 2 1 ,
236. E l s n e r , i. p . 2 9 3 . Krebs. p . 147- A n -
other sense ascribed to Skaiog, is true or
aitached to truth, J o h n vii. 24 * . ] Stockius
remarks, t h a t Síicatog is never t h u s applied
by any of the heathen Greek writers, who,
to express this meaning (saith h e ) , would
use xp?¡TOc, áyaOóg, icákdg K ayaOóg ; a n d
therefore he is of opinión, t h a t we m u s t
say with Vorstius (Philol. cap. ii.) t h a t in
t h e N . T . SiKaiog answers to t h e H e b .
word p^fít, which, according to him, sig-
nifies not only a just, b u t also a good, up-
right man, as Gen. vi. 9. xviii. 2 3 . F o r
m y own p a r t , I much doubt, whether \p-fít
ever h a t u this latter sense in t h e O í d
T e s t a m e n t . I n the two passages referred
to by Stockius, and indeed in all others
where i t is applied to men, it seems t o
denote, not a just b u t a juslifed person,
one who hath obtained justif catión in t h e
sight of God through faiih in the promised
Redeemer. See H a b . ii. 4. Gal. iii. 1 1 .
Comp. Gen. vi. 9, with H e b . x i . 7. A n d
I would wish t h e reader to consult a Greek
Concordance, and attentively consider
whether in all t h e passages of t h e N . T .
where (SÍKciLog has been supposed to be
used for what we commonly cali a just,
upright, or good man, it does not more
properly inrport a man justif ed by faith,
and showingforth his faith by his worlcs,
except perhaps in those where a heathen
is t h e speaker, as M a t . xxvii. 19, 2 4 .
L u k e xxiii. 4 7 ; and if so, then this t h i r d
sense of Síicaiog here mentioned, but by no
means insisted on, will coincide with t h e
following one.
I V . Just or righteous with the righte-
ousness which is through the faith of
Christ, the righteousness which is of God
by faith; ( P h i l . iii. 9.) or justif ed through
faith, (Rom. v. 19.) and bringing forlh the
fruits of righteousness or justification.
(Phil. i. 11.) Mat. xiii. 4 3 . xxv. 4 6 . L u k e
xiv. 14. H e b . xi. 4 . (Comp. M a t . xxiii.
3 5 . 1 J o h n iii. 12.) H e b . xii. 2 3 .
V . Of things, Just, right, righteous,
* [ T h i s m e a n i n g i s found i n P l a t . Pha;d. 3 4 .
T h e o p h . Char. V. 2 . H e n e e s o m e commentators
interpret aSixíaia L u k e x v i . 8 and 9 , by false, fal-
lacious, citing E u r . Phoen. 4 8 4 . L e v . v . 2 2 . J o b
x x v i i . 4 . J e r . v. 3 1 . a l . ]
 A I K 189 A I K

conformable to justice or righteousness. by a voice from heaven, and by t h e d e -

J o h n [v. 30.] vii. 24. R o m . vii. 1 2 . — A Í -
•KCUOV, ró, What is just or right, justice,
Mat. x x . 4, 7- Acts iv. 19. E p h . vi. 1.
Col. iv. 1. 2 Thess. i. 6.—This word i n
the L X X most commonly answers to t h e
H e b . f»Tí or pIV, which primarily denotes
t h e equipoise of a balance, or the equality
of weights and measures. Comp. Lev. xix.
36. D e u t . xxv. 15. E z e k . xiv. 10, and see
H e b . and E n g . L e x . in piv.
AUawiyvvri, JJC, í;, from VÍKCUOQ. [The
reader will observe t h a t P a r k h u r s t h a s
adopted a división which appears t o m e
to be fanciful. T h e word expresses, un-
doubtedly, virtue in general, and perhaps
some particular virtues. I n Sense I I . h e
makes i t express natural v i r t u e ; in Sense
I V . Christian v i r t u e acquired t h r o u g h
t h e assistance of t h e spirit. All t h a t can
be properly said is, t h a t the word, like any
other expressive of good qualities, m a y
be and is used of man in a state of n a t u r e
and a state of g r a c e : b u t i t does not of
itself point out any differeuce in t h e qua-
lities ascribed to h i m in those states,
either in kind or in origin. Sense I I I . is
clearly established. Bretschneider gives
i t as justificaiio; Schleusner and W a h l ,
apparently with some reluctance, as favor
divinus, a n d immunitas a peccatorum
pcenis. T h e r e is difiiculty in some p a r t i -
cular passages, a few of which I have no-
ticed a t t h e end of t h e article.]
scent of the Holy Ghost upon him, in t h e
view of t h e multitudes who were assem-.
bled t o J o h n ' s baptism." Comp. Rom. vi.
4. Col. ii. 12. 1 John v. 6, and M a c k n i g h t
on those t e x t s . — M a t , xxi. 3 2 , John carne
in the way of righteousness. H e was a
Nazarite even from his mother's womb
( L u k e i. 15. comp. N u m . vi. 3. J u d e xiii.
4, 5.), a strict observer of legal righteous-
ness, and a zealous preacher of repentance
and righteousness t o others. [ T h e word
means n o t only virtue in general, b u t
seems to designate some particular v i r t u e s ;
as ( 1 . ) líberalily or beneficence. See
M a t . vi. 1. rf/v SiKaioavvnv rroitív, to exerl
your beneficence, or perhaps to do your
alms. See Lightf. H o r . H e b r . on this t e x t .
See also P s . lxxxv. 1 1 . Isa. xiv. 8. Ii. 5-, 6.
Prov. x. 2. Tobit. ii. 14. xii. 9. xiv. 9, 1 1 . ;
and (2.) veracity, Rom. ix. 2 8 . O n t h i s
point, Fischer de Vit. L e x . N . T . p . 5 7 6 .
( P r o l . x x v . 4 . ) , observes, thattruthemA jus-
tice are so nearly allied, t h a t in both Greek
and L a t i n , words expressing them a r e
perpetually interchanged. See Abresch.
Diluc. T h u c . p . 334. Biel. ad Hesych. i .
p. 2 2 7 . a n d m a n y instances in Fischer's
Note, Schleusner thinks, t h a t in 2 Cor.
ix. 9, t h e word means the reward qfbe-.
neficence; and in Heb. xi. 7, t h a t qf'inte-
grity. Piety is supposed by some t o be
expressed in various passages, as A c t s x .
3 5 . M a t , v. 2 0 * . ]

I . Justice, righteousness, as of God, in I I I . Righteousness imputed t o sinful

j u d g i n g the world, Acts xvii. 3 1 . Comp. man t h r o u g h faith i n Christ, b y which
Rev. xix. 11.—in r e m i t t i n g or passing by his past sins are forgiven or covered, or
sins, Rom. iii. 25, 2 6 . he is cleared, acquitted, or absolved from
I I . Righteousness of man, inherent and his past sins, a n d is himself accepted, as
proper, which consists in performing the righteous, t o life eternal. See Rom. iv.
commands a n d works of t h e law of God. 6, 7, 8, 11. v. 18, 2 1 . x . 10. Phil. iii. 9.
Phil. iii, 6, 9. T i t . iii. 5. Comp. Rom. vi. T h i s Evangelical or Gospel righteousness
13, 18, 19, 20. x . 5 . I n a similar view, is opposed t o t h a t last mentioned, Rom.
Christ says t o J o h n t h e Baptist, M a t . iii. ix. 3 0 , 3 1 . x. 3 . & al. I t is several times
15, Thus it behoveth us tofulfil all r i g h - called Aiicaiocrífrí QES, The righteousness
teousness, i. e. t o perforan all the works, of God, Rom. f i. 17. üi. 2 1 , 2 2 . x . 3 .
and submit t o all the ordinances, a p - (comp. M a t . vi. 33.) as being t h a t method
pointed b y G o d . M a c k n i g h t , on t h e
Apostólica! Epistles, vol. i. Essay i. t o -
* [ I t i s truth i n I s a . x x x v i i i . 1 9 . S e e G e n .
wards the beginning, remarks t h a t " T h e x x i v . 4 9 . ]
Son of God, in prosecution of the purpose •j- See Clark and D o d d r i d g e on t h i s t e x t . I add
for which he took on him t h e h u m a n n a - from CEcumenius on R o m , iii. p . 2 6 9 . AixcaccCvn
t u r e , carne t o J o h n at J o r d á n , a n d was
baptized. To this rite h e submitted, not á$c£iwo"ip xat á7raAXftyí) TOI'J apaprían. The righte-
ousness of God, that w h i c h i s g i v e n b y G o d , or
as i t was t h e baptism of repentance, for justification from G o d , accmittal, a n d absolution
he was perfectly free from s i n ; b u t as it from s i n s ; and f r o m T h e o d o r e t o n R o m . x . 3 . p .
prefigured his dying and rising again 8 2 , ©Éa S/KOÍJOC-[5VÍ]V 7rpoar¡y6pevt7s rqv x«Ta x«í &
riv ÍÍK

from the dead, and because he was on t h a t T ^ Í Tr/rfoif yjywj/is»))». H e calis t h a t the righteous-
ness of God, w h i c h is according t o grace t h r o u g h
occasion t o be declared God's beloved Son
faith.
 A IK 190 A IK

which G o d hath exhibited in t h e Gospel, maintenance of those who cannot labour

of man's jusiificalion, or being made righ- for themselves." Macknight. Cotnp. ver.
teous through the merits and death qf 9, where righteousness signifies benefi-
Christ, whence it is once termed the righ- cence. This word in t h e L X X answers
teousness qf our God and Saviour Jesús most usually to t h e H e b . p l » or npi¥.
Christ, 2 Pet. i. 1. * ; and Christ is styled [ I n addition to these senses, t h e last of
our righleousness, as being t h e procurer which m a y be referred to t h e 2d, t h e
qf righteousness to us through his merits word appears to signify, truth or true doc-
and sufferings, 1 Cor. i. 3 0 . ; for h e is JE- trine in religión. See 2 Cor. x i . 15. I n
liOVAH OUR RIGHTEOUSNESS, Jer. XXÜi. the passage John xvi. 8, 10, there is
5 , 6, (comp. Isa. xiv. 2 4 . ) : He clothes t h e much dilficulty. Schl. says, He shall
church with the garments qf salvation, teach men what is the duty incumbent on
and covers her with the robe qf righteous- me, viz. to die according to the divine
ness, Isa. lxi. 1 0 . ; a n d qf Him we must, decrce. W a h l , ' He shall teach concern-
buy whitc raiment, that we may be clothed, ing that which is just, viz. regard being
and that the shame of our nahedness do had to Jesús. F o r it was j u s t t h a t one
not appear, Rey. iii. 18. F o r , further, who had done so much for mankind should
H e is the Sun or Light qf righteousness, receive t h e highest reward.' Bretsch.
Típti ©D», Mal. iv. 2, (comp. Wisd. v. 6.) ' He shall teach you concerning my in-
with which t h e church is represented as nocence, which will be manifested by m y
clothed, 7repi£,e&\r)fiévri clothed all over, resurrection and r e t u r n t o heaven.' In
Rev. xii. 1. Comp. Mat. xiii. 4 3 . I n a 2 Cor. iii. 9. ó Xóyoc rije ¿"ir is for ó X-
word, God made Him, who Icnew no sin, \ treplrfjeSuc—Again,there is aphrasewhich
lo become sin (or a sin-offering, to which often occurs, Xoyí^Ecrdat rt ele Sucatoavvriv,
t h e sin was imputed, or on which i t was I and b y which i t is signified t h a t t h e qua-
luid, see Lev. i. 4 . iv. 4 , 15. xvi. 21. I s a . ! lity mentioned, as, for example, faith, is
liii. 6, 10, 12. 1 Pet. ii. 24.) for us, that so attributed to a person, t h a t on t h a t
we might be made the righteousness of\ account h i s sins are pardoned, and h e is
God in Him. 2 Cor. v. 2 1 , i. e. righteous considered as justified. See Rom. iv. 3 .
in t h a t manner which God h a t h ordained Gal. iii. 6. T h e word occurs in Gen. xv.
t h r o u g h faith in him. (See W h i t b y on 6. Ps. cvi.31.]
this t e x t . ) For as by one man's disobe- Alicaído), w, from Sínaioe.
dience, THE many (or multitude of m a n - I . To justify, aclenowledgc, or declare
k i n d ' 0 1 T T O X X O Í ) were made or conslituted to be just or righteous. M a t . xi. 19-,
(Kararádncrav) sinners, so by the obedience (where see Bowyer and Wolfius) L u k e
qf one shall THE many ('Oí TTOXXOÍ) be vii. 2 9 , 3 5 . xviii. 14. Rom. iii. 4 . 1 T i m .
made or constituted(icaTa<zadíi(TOVTai) righ- iii. 16, where i t is said of God incarnale,
teous. Rom. v. 19. Comp. Isa. liii. 1 1 . 1 'ESiKatúdrí iv Tívévpari, He was justified
Cor. i. 30, 31 ; and on this whole subject by the Spirit, r. e. his high claims of being
see Whitby's Discourse on t h e imputation t h e Son of God, t h e Messiah, t h e K i n g
of Christ's perfect righteousness, a t t h e of Israel, and t h e Redeemer of mankind,
end of his Comment on t h e 1 st E p i s t l e t o | were justified, or proved lo be true, by
t h e Corinthians.—In James i. 20, p u t t i n g • t h e descent of t h e Holy Spirit upon h i m
t h e effect for t h e cause, the righteousness a t his baptism ; by those miracles which
of God, seems to be used for " the faith he w r o u g h t by t h e Spirit of God ; by his
which God counts to men for righteous- being declared or marked o u t as t h e Son
ness." Macknight. of God with power, according t o t h e
I V . Righteousness, good works wrought operation of t h e Spirit of Holiness, or
in faith, and proceeding from it through Holy Spirit; by t h e resurrection from t h e
sanctification of the Spirit. L u k e i. 7 5 . dead, Rom. i. 4 , (comp. 1 P e t . iii. I S . ) ;
A c t s x. 3 5 . E p h . v."9. i John ii. 29. iii. and lastly, b y t h e Holy Spirit shed forth
7. Comp. M a t . v. 20. 2 Cor. vi. 7- I n on h i s disciples in miraculous gifts a n d
2 Cor. ix. 10. " Honest iuduslry is fitly sanctifying graces. [This interpretation
t e r m e d righteousness, because i t is a righ- of 1 T i m . iii. 1G. is in substance, t h a t of
teous t h i n g in t h e sight of God, to labour Schl. and W a h l . W i t h respect to t h e
for o u r own maintenance, and for t h e other passages which P a r k h u r s t has passed
over in silence, some explanation is r e -
* ni'STlN ' E N — F a i t h in—Comp. R o m . iii. 2 5 . quired. In Mat. xi. 19. Schl. says, Wis-
1 T i m . iii. 1 3 . 2 T i m . i. 1 3 . iii. 15. dom can be riglüly appreciatcd by iís
 A I K 191 A IK

cultivators. Walil gives nearly t h e same, 3 3 . 1 Cor. vi. 1 1 . T i t . iii. 7- J a m . ii. 21 j

adding, ' T h e sense is, only a wise man 24, 25, & al. or to final juslificalion at
can judge who is a wise man.' Fischer t h e last day, Mat. xii. 3 7 . Comp. Rom.
( D e Vit. Lex. N . T . p . 574 seq. Prol. xxv. ii. 1 3 . See Suicer T h e s a u r . on t h i s word.
No, 4.) defends a t great length an e x - —AiKaibopai, Spai, To be or continué in-
p l a n a r o n offered by M u n s t e r and Perizo- herenlly just or righteous, or perhaps in
nius, not diífering, perhaps, in foundation a justified state. occ. Rev. xxii. 1 1 . If
from t h e s e ; The divine doctrines which indeed dacaiwdiiria be t h e t r u e reading in
1 teach, and, which are reciled by the this t e x t ; for t h e Alexandrian, and six-
heads qf the Jews, are approved and teen later M S S . , with several printed
reckoned true by the people. T h e y , as editions, instead of tWa(w6Y/rw have <Si-
receiving it, would be properly called rí«.va Kawavvnv woincráTiii, let him do righteous-
rfjc cofíac, children, disciples qf wisdom. ness still, an expression very agreeable to
"We know t h a t t h e Jews called their S t . John's style elsewhere, 1 E p . ii. 2 9 ,
teachers fathers from M a t . xxiii. 9. T h a t iii. 7 ; a n d this reading is confirmed b y
SIKCUÓU will bear t h e sense to rechon good t h e Syriac in W a l t o n ' s Polyg. 12}?:) NÍTIPLT
or right is clear e n o u g h ; and t h e gloss let him do righteousness, and is accord-
on ¿ripijdn was found substituted for this ingly embraced by Mili and W e t s t e i n , a n d
word in a M S . , and is used by Theo- received into t h e t e x t b y Griesbach. I t
phylact on S t . L u k e p . 2 4 6 . Rom. in should, however, be observed, on t h e other
explaining t h e passage in this way. hand, t h a t t h e V . active biKatóui is used
Elsewhere Theophylact on S t . M a t . p , by t h e L X X i n t h e sense of making just,
4 4 . aud also S t . Jerome on t h e place, righteous, puré, holy, for t h e H e b . n2t to
make aoéía to be Christ himself. I t cleanse, purifiy. P s . Ixxiii. 13. Comp.
may be added, t h a t K a i has often t h e Rom. vi. 7, where Basil, cited b y Suicer,
adversative sense, which t h i s explana- Thesaur. u n d e r Atmiów I . explains btbi-
tion of t h e passage makes necessary. Katwrai arco rrjs apapríae by á7r?')XX.aKrai,
See m y note on bUaios, Sense I I . I n •¡¡Xevoépoirai Keicadcipitai Trácrne cipapriac,
L u k e vii. 2 9 , t h e verb seems also t o sig- is released, is fireed, is cleansed from all
nify, to approve, to praise, to rechón righ- sin. Comp. I Pet. iv. 1.
teous, and so Fischer, W a h l , Schleusner,
AiKaío>pa, aros, rb, from Zzb'iicaíwp.ai,
Rosenmiiller, and others. I n Rom. iii. 4 .
perf. pass. of bacaióio.
W a h l says, That thou mayest, in thy pro-
I . [Law, precept, or statute. ( I n good
mises be, or be declared, such as thou
G r e e k , it means, thc sentence pronounced
oughtest to be, i. e. true and faithful.
by the judges to do justice to the injured,
Schl. That thou mayest be reckoned true
and punish the oppressor, and so Rev. x v .
in all thy decrees, and conquer or be pro-
4. Henee it comes to signify any thing
nounced victorious, (over thy adversarles)
pronounced or decreed.) Used of God's
when thou art judged. These words are
laws. L u k e i. 6. Rom. i. 3 2 . ii. 2 6 . viii.
taken from P s . Ii. 4.1—AiKaiSv tavrbv,
4. H e b . ix. 1 , 1 0 . Perhaps in Rom. i. 3 2 .
To justify oneself, to show, pretend, or
it is r a t h e r , threals of punishment. The
feign oneself to be just or righteous. L X X use i t for p n , Exod. xv. 2 5 . rípTi
L u k e x. 2 9 . xvi. 15. Comp. M a t . xxiii. Levit. x x v . 18. R P Y D , D e u t . xxx. 16. See
28. also E x . x x i . 3 1 . P s . xix. 9.]
I I . I t is most usually applied to evan- I I . {Jusiification, remission qf the pu-
gelical justificatión. To justify, to csteem, nishment due to sin. R o m . v. 1 6 . ]
pronounce, or declare just or righteous, I I I . [Righteousness, or freedom from
i. e. to acquit or absolve from past qf- sin. Rom. v. 18. Rev. xix. 8. I n t h e last
f enees *, and accept as just to the reward place, i t answers, says P a r k h u r s t , t o t h e
qf righteousness. I n this view it is H e b r e w mp75f in I s . xiv. 2 4 . ]
plain] y a forensic term, answering to t h e AiKaíwe, Adv. from SUaioe.
H e b . pnvn, for which t h e L X X have I . Juslly, conformably to justice. occ.
used it, D e u t . xxv. 1. 1 Kings viii. 3 2 . 1 P e t . ii. 2 3 . [ X e n . M e m . iii. 5. 2 0 . ]
2 Chron. vi. 2 3 . Isa. v. 2 3 . & al. Comp. I I . Juslly, honestiy, without injuring
Prov. xvii. 15. I t is in t h e N . T . applied any one. occ. 1 Thess. ii. 10. T i t . ii. 1 2 .
either to present justification in this life, I I I . Juslly, deservcdly, j u r e , mérito,
Acts xiii. 3 9 . Rom. [iii. 20.] v. 1, 9. viii. occ. L u k e xxiii. 4 1 . [Polyb. iv. 19. 3 .
X e n . S y m p . iv. 6 0 . ]
* [ S o used L u l i c x v i i i . 1 4 . ] I V . As il is fit, proper, or right, r i t e ,
 A I A 192 A I O

debité, occ. 1 Cor. xv. 3 4 , 'EKM'/UWE $i- fraudulent; and Theodoret, by trepa, plv
icaúog, Amaice from your drunken sleep, rara, 'érepa Bi eiceírto Xéyovrag, saying one
as i t is fit you should. So Castalio, u t thing to this man, and another to that.
«equum est. A r r i a n and Menander use [Theophylact, on this place of T i m o t h y ,
SiKciíwg in this sense, as may be seen in uses nearly t h e same words, and so Zu-
Alberti on t h e t e x t . ñeras L e x . col. 5 1 0 . AiXoyéw and SiXoyía
AttcaÍLocng, wg, A t t . eo¡g, from diKawio. are used by Xenophon aud Diodorus. See
Justification, a being esteemed, or ad- Xen. de R e E q . viii. 2. Diodor. x x . 3 7 . ]
judgedjust or righteous. occ. Rom. iv. 2 5 . Ató, a Conjunction, from But for, and o
v. 18, in which latter passage it is op- ( n e u t . of os) which.—For which, where-
posed to Karciicpifxa condemnation.—The \fore, therefore. See 2 Cor. iv. 13. Rom.
L X X have once used this word for t h e i. 24. iv. 2 2 . M a t . xxvii. 8. H e b . xiii.
fflfDttfa lam, judgment, L e v . xxiv. 2 2 . [ I n 12.
good Greek, i t is generally used for sen- AtocVúw, from Sta. through, and boeíoj
tence of condemnation, or punishment ac- to journey.—To journey, travel, or pass
cording to senlenc.e.'] through. occ. L u k e viii. 1. A c t s xvii. 1.
. AiKa<ri)c, 5, ó, from oWt£w to judge, [Gen. xiii. 17- Isa. lix. 8.]
which from SÍKT].'—A judge. occ. L u k e xii. AióVep, a Conjunction, from cuó and Trep-
14. A c t s vii. 2 7 , 3 5 . [Exod. ii. 14. iElian. an emphatic particle.— Wherefore truly,
V . H . i . 3 4 . X e n . C y r . i. 3 . 1 7 . ] wherefore by all means, or especially.
AI'KH, ng, from" t h e H e b . p w or pnl occ. 1 Cor. viii. 13. x . 14. xiv. 13. [ W a h l
just, or t h e fem. nplX jtisiice, t h e !f b e i n g says, for that same cause. It oceurs
dropt by t h e Greeks, because they h a d Diod. Sic. i. 6 5 . X e n . M e m . N . 8. 7.]
not t h e sound of t h a t letter in their lan- AiOTrerr'ig, eog, ng, b, i/, from Attic
guage, though we m a y observe i t is r e - (gen. of At'c or Zevg) Júpiter, and TTETOJ
suined in t h e Latin, judex, judico, and (obsol.) to fall. [Which fell from Jú-
in t h e E n g . judge, judicial, judicature, piter, or heaven. I t oceurs A c t s x i x . 3 5 .
&c. which m a y be from t h e same root where ¿íyaXpa an image, is understood.]:
So N u m a persuaded t h e Romans, t h a t a
I . A judgment, a judicial sentence. occ. certain shield fell from heaven, to which
A c t s xxv. 15. P l u t a r c h , in N u m a , p . 6 8 , E , applies t h e
II. Judicial punishment, vengeance. same word A I O I I E T H ' S , as he also doth
occ. 2 Thess. i. 9. J u d e ver. 7. [ T h e (Parall, p . 3 0 9 , F.) to t h e famous Trojan
phrase díicnv vwtyti-v here, is t h e same as Palladium, or image oí Pallas which p r o -
lÍKr¡v SiSóvat (i. e. lo suffer punishment tected T r o y , and was supposed to have
inficted,) a n d oceurs in iElian. V. H . ii. 4. fallen from heaven ; and Euripides, speak-
See Perizon. ad iElian. V. H . iii. 3 8 . and i n g of t h e image of D i a n a Táurica, says,
W e t s t e i n , N . T . ii. p . 7 3 4 . Wisd. xviii. I p h i g . in T a u r . line 86 *,
11. 2 M a c . viii. 1 1 , 1 3 . ]
III. Vindictive justice, of which the AM^ETU. T á'yaX^a © E « f ó (páffiv etSaSs
heathen made a * goddess. I n t h i s sense E/f T 8 f 8E váus ¿gavy TTIGUV ceno.
i t is used by t h e pagan inhabitants of A n d til* i m a g e o f the Goddess take, which fifí,
Melita or Malta, A c t s xxviii. 4. [ A r r i a n T h e y say, from hcav'n into this h o l y fane.
E x p . Al. iv. 9. 9.]
Aucróov, a, ró, E u s t a t h i u s deduces i t And afterwards calis it AIOITETE'S
from SÍKO) to cast, cast domn.—A net for "ArAAMA, the image which fell from
fishing. L u k e v. 4 , 5. J o h n x x i . 6. & al. Júpiter. So Herodian, lib. i. cap. 3 5 .
[ H e r o d i a n . iv. 9. 1 2 . ] edit. Oxon. calis the image qf the mother
E^gjf AíXoyog, a, ó, ?/, from ¿Ye twice,
0
of the gods. "ArAAMA AIOIIETE'2.
a n d Xóyos speech.—JDouble-tongued, vary- Comp. also W e t s t e i n on A c t s . — I n t h e
ing, or deceitful in one's words. occ. apology which t h e town-clerk makes for
1 T i m . iii. 8. So Chrysostom explains t h e Apostle and his followers, Acts xix.
SiXóyag by Wa'Xac, SóKepág, deceitful, 3 5 , &c. there is an artfulness beyond w h a t
has been commonly observed. D e m e t r i u s
* S e e P o l e S y n o p s . A l b e r t i , W e t s t e i n , a n d B o w - had aecused P a u l , ver. 2 6 , of teaching
yer o n A c t s , Bochart. Opera, v o l . iii. 3 7 1 . 2 . the t h a t t h e y were no gods which were made
O r p h i c H y m n to A I ' K H , and H e s i o d O p . e t D i e s ,
lin. 2 1 8 , & c 2 5 4 , & c . [ P r o c l u s in T h e o l . P l a t ó n ,
iv. 6. p . 2 0 5 . P l i n y N . I I . x i . 4 5 . P o l l u x O n o m . * [ S e e B a r n e s o n this p l a c e , a n d I r m i s c h . o n
viii. 1.] H e r o d i a n . i. 1 1 . 2 . ]
 A fO 193 A I S

with hands; and he h a d thence inferred, thology of the heathen. T h e y were

t h a t there was danger t h a t t h e Great usually represented u n d e r t h e form of
Diana ofthe Ephesians, a n d h e r temple, two young men armed with helmets and
should come to be despised. I n answer pikes, with a star above each of t h e i r
to this t h e town-clerk intimates, t h a t heads, and sometimes standing each by a
Faul's doctrines could not apply to t h e horse, or seated on horseback *, and were
Ephesian Diana, and lo the image which regarded as t h e tutelar deities of m a r i -
fcll down from Júpiter, and consequently ners. occ. A c t s xxviü. 1 1 . See W e t s t e i n .
was not made with hands; and t h a t [ T h e y are called AiócrKovpoi o-wrriotg in
therefore Paul and his companions were -ffilian. V . H . i. 3 0 . See X e n . Symp. viii.
not blasphemers of the goddess. 29. and Cyrop. iii. 3 . 2 6 . Spanh. ad C a ¡ -
YAiópQbjpa, rog, TO. Amendmcnt. T h i s lim. Lav. Pall. v. 2 4 . and de U s u Numism.
is t h e reading of t h e Alex. and t h r e e i. p. 2 9 5 . T h i s word is also w r i t t e n
other ancient M S S . in A c t s xxiv. 3 . T h e Aióo-Kopoi, on which point see Lobeck on
common reading is Ka-opd. T h e word Phrynichus p . 2 3 5 . ]
occurs in Polyb. iii. 118. 3.] AtóYi, A Conjunction, from Sidfor, and
t l g p Aiópdwtrig, wg, A t t . saig, r¡, from on what,
0
which.
Siopdóto to corred, amend, which from Sia 1. Illative, Wherefore, therefore. Rom.
emphat. and opdów lo make right, which iii. 20.
from opdbg right.—An amendmenl, re- 2. Causal. For, because, L u k e i- 1 3 .
formation. occurs H e b . ix. 10. [ T h e ii. 7. xxi. 2 8 . Acts x. 2 3 . & al. [Schl.
phrase is, The times of reformalion, and says t h a t in Rom. i. 2 0 . i t is allhough, but
the time of t h e Messiah, when a better this does not seem necessary.]
state of worship and religión would be in- AnrXóog, 5g; ón, íj; óov, Sv; from Sis
troduced, is signified. So Theophylact ex- twice, and T T X Ó O C a termination denoting,
plains the passage. T h e word occurs Polyb. like wXáo-iov, times or —fold.—Double.
v. 8 8 . 2. vi. 3 8 . 4. Diod. i. 7 5 . AiópOow occ. 1 T i m . v. 17. Rev. xviii. 6, where see
occurs iu J e r . vii. 2. I s . xvi. 5. lxii. 7. W e t s t e i n , a n d on 1 T i m . Macknight.
See Sallier ad Thora. M a g . p . 2 4 1 . ] [ I n both places it means, great or in-
Aiopvamo, from Sia through, and opvrrrrta creased, and not definitely double. So in
to dig.—To dig, or bréale through, as t h e Soph. CEd. T . 1328. See I s . xl. 2. J e r .
walls of a house. occ. M a t . vi. 19, 20. xvi. 18. Ecclus. xx. 10. I t is p u t for
xxiv. 4 3 . L u k e xii. 3 9 . Thucydides uses r ü u m in G e n . x l i ü . 15. tPJti? in D e u t .
the word in t h e same sense, lib. ii. cap. 3 , xxi. 17. and VED in Job x i . 6. x l . 2 . ]
A E 0 P Y S E 0 N T E 2 rovg Koívovg TOÍ)(ovg, AiwXorepov, s, rb, Comparat. N e u t . of
digging through t h e p a r t y walls. Xeno- SiirXüg, used a d v e r b i a l l y . — T w o f o l d more,
pbon in Conviv. 'E^oSé/t^v ¡iv ríg pu twice as much again. occ. M a t . xxiii. 1 5 .
rr)v oíriav A I O ' P Y S A S — I was afraid t h a t [Schleusner, Rosenmiüler, a n d K y p k e ,
some one digging through (i. e. breakiug make SiTcXórepog here an a d j . from SirrXóog
into) my house— And Aristophanes, P l u t . signifying crafty, deceitful, as in X e n .
5 6 5 . K A E ' I T T E I N ical rág ro'^g A I O - Hellen-. iv. i. Ecclus. ii. 13. a n d so SnrXóri
P Y ' T T E I N . Comp. Kypke on M a t . 6 . — is deceit in Suidas.]
I n t h e L X X i t answers to t h e H e b . "inri AITTXÓW, Si, from SnrXóog.—To double.
to dig through, J o b xxiv. 16. Ezek. xii. occ. Rev. xviii. 6, where see D a u b u z .
5, 7, 12, which s e e ; as t h e N . Siópvyua Comp. J e r . xvi. 18, a n d Lowth t h e r e .
does to t h e H e b . n i í i n n a digging AÍ'S, Adv. from Svw two.—Twice, two
through, Exod. xxii. 2 . J e r . ii. 3 4 . — times. M a r k xiv. 3 0 . & al. O n L u k e
H a r m e r , in his Observations, vol. i. p . xviii. 12, we m a y observe, t h a t H e r o d o t u s ,
175—8, remarks a peculiar propriety in lib. ü. cap. 3 7 , uses a similar phráseology.
t h e expression of digging through houses, ASV-cu—AI'S T l - r S T I M E ' P H S E « W J ; E —
Job xxiv. 16, by observing, t h a t t h e mi A I ' S E K C W J J C ; NYKTO'S.
Arabians, E g y p t i a n s , and inliabitants of
A i T c i f w , from Sig twice (two ways),
Damascus, stiíl build of mud and slime, or
and TÓW to stand.—To doubt, waver. It
of u n b u r n t brick, and t h a t their walls are
is a figurative word, taken either from a
of a great thickness.
person standing where two ways niect,
Atómcupoi, av, m, from Aióg (gen. of not knowing which t o choose, b u t i n -
AÍ'C, or Zcúg) Júpiter's, and cupos a young
man.— Castor and Pollux, Júpiter's sons * See M o n t f a n c o n A n t i q u i t ó E x p l i q u é e , tom. i .
by Leda, according to t h e fabulous m y - part2. p. 295. pl. 194.
O
 A IY 194 A I X

clining sometimes t o one, sometimes t o L X X versión of Amos vi. 6, where w e

t h e other ,• or from t h e tremulous motion read of A I Y A I S M E ' N O N olvov, sirained
of a balance, when t h e weights on both or fdtered wine. [ F r o m Aristot. H . A .
sides are nearly equal, and consequently v. 19. and Buxtorf. L e x . p . 5 1 6 . we find
now t h e one, and now t h e other scale, there is a wine-gnat which breeds in t h e
seems to o repon derate and fix t h e beam. wine.]
T h e French word balancer very exactly AiyJi'Cbi, from Bíya in two parts, which
answers t o Si^áfeiv in this latter view. from Síg twice.
occ. M a t . xiv. 3 1 . xxviii. 17, where see [ I . T h e p r i m a r y meaning is, To divide
Eowyer's Conject. [ T h e word occurs into two parts. I n c . I n t e r p . (who is said
Clero. E p . ii. ad Corinth. p . 1 7 5 , a n d E p . to be Aquila) L e v . i. 17- D e u t . xiv. 6.
i. p . 8 2 . Plutarch. tom. v. p . 6 2 0 . for XBW. P l a t . Polit. 8. T h e sharp t e e t h
(Reiske's ed.) Diod. Sic. iv. 6 2 . ] are called Si^a^rípEs, because, says Pollux.
Afeopos, a, b, y, either from Sis twice, ii. 9 1 . Bij(á£tío-i rb irpocnrEabv. See X e n .
and topa (in t h e Hellenistical style) an A n a b . iv. 8. 1 5 . E u s t a t h . ad Odyss. H .
edge, (comp. S r ó / i a V . ) ; or r a t h e r from p . 1582. 1 1 . Rom. T h e above is from
Sis twice (two ways) and ropos cutting, Fischer de V i i . L e x . N . T . p . 3 3 4 . ]
sharp, from réropa perf. mid. of répvti) to II. To divide, set at variance. occ.
cut; for Elsner on H e b . iv. 12, cites from Mat. x. 35. [ T h e word JD&, which, like
Eurípides Orest. line 1303. A I ' 2 T 0 M A this, is properly, to divide into two parts,
(bcio-yara, swords cutting on both sides, or
is also metaphorically used i n t h i s sense.
two-edged; and from / h i s Helena, line See Buxtorf. L e x . T a l m u d , p . 1730. a n d
9 8 9 , A I ' S T O M O N Ufos a two-edged. Schaef. L e x . S y r . N . T . p . 4 5 0 . ]
sword.—[If derived from ropos we m u s t [jfgp Aij(o?acría, as,
0
from Sfya m
write Siarófios. See Barnes. ad E u r . H e l . two parts, and táais a faction, sedition.—
989. B u t Schleusner and W a h l derive it A sepárate faction, división, separation.
from T ¿ u a , which m a y figuratively be occ. Rom. x v i . 17. 1 Cor. iii. 3 . G a l . v.
used of an e á g e . ] — H a v i n g two edges, 20. [1 M a c . iii. 2 9 . Dion. H a l . viii. 7 2 . ]
two-edged, or cutting on both sides. occ. Aiypropéb), £¡, from ¿Y^a separately, in
H e b . iv. 12. Rev. i. 16. ii. 12. So Ecclus. two, a n d ríropa perf. m i d . of répvia to
xxi. 3 . — T h e L X X use t h e word in t h e cut.
same sense for t h e H e b . ni'S edges ; Prov.
I . To cut in two or asunder. If this
v. 4 ; for ITi'S'Ei several edges. P s . cxlix.
word be understood in i t s p r i m a r y a n d
6 ; a n d for nv& 'Jü? two edges, J u d . iii.
literal sense, i t m u s t denote t h a t most
16.
horrible punishment of being cut in sun-
Aio-%íkioi, ai, a, from SÍQ twice, a n d der whilst olive, b y which there is a t r a -
y>í\ioi a thousand.—Two thousand. occ. dition t h a t t h e prophet Isaiah suffered;
M a r k v. 1 3 . and t o t h i s t h e Apostle is t h o u g h t t o a l -
Aivkí'(w, from Sia denoting separation, lude, H e b . x i . 3 7 , hrpíaQnaav they were
and vkí'Cia to Jilter, perecíate, strain, sawn asunder. T h e r e are m a n y instances
which from v\r¡ matler, also dregs.—To in ancient writers * , of t h i s manner of e x -
sepárate from liquor by fdtering, to strain ecuting crimináis (see W e t s t e i n on M a t .
off. So V u l g . excolantes, occ. M a t . xxiii. x x i v . 5 1 . a n d comp. 1 Chron. x x . 3 . ) , and
2 4 , where see Bowyer's Conject. and it is still practised by some nations, par-
Geutleman's Magazine for J a n u a r y 1779, ticularly b y t h e western Moors in B a r -
p . 2 6 . T h e t e x t alludes t o a custom t h e bary, as we are assured b y D r . Shaw f-
Jews had of fdtering t h e i r wine, for fear [ T h e verb is used simply to express,
of swallowing any insect forbidden b y t h e cutling in two, in Lucian. Dial. M e r . p .
aw as unclean *. Maimonides, in his 7 4 5 . Polyb. vi. 2 8 . 2, and thence in t h e
Treatise of forbidden meats, cap. i. a r t . sense of dissecling into many parts, Exod.
2 0 , affords a remarkable illustration of xxix. 17. Polyb. x . 15. 5.] B u t in t h e
our Saviour's proverbial expression: " H e N . T . AixpropÉiú seems r a t h e r t o denote,
who strains wine, or vinegar, or strong
d r i n k , " says h e , " and cats t h e gnals, or
* [ S e e J u d g . x i x . 2 9 . D a n . ii. 5 . iii. 2 9 . 1 S a m .
fies, or worms, which h e h a t h sirained x v . 3 8 . 2 S a m . x i i . 3 1 . H e r o d . iii. 1 3 . D i o d . Sic.
off, is whipped." T h a t t h e J e w s used to i . 2- Sueton. Calig. 27. L i v . i . 2 8 . viii. 2 4 . Gell.
strain their wine appears also from t h e ! x x . 1 . J o s e p h . A n t . J . viii. 2 . P o l i . O n . viii. 3 2 .
10.]
-f T r a v e l s , p . 2 5 4 , 2 d edit. C o m p . Harmer s
* S e e Bochart, vol. iii. 5C5. Observations, v o l . i v . p . 4 6 8 .
 AI !'
1
195 A I íl

I I . Figuratively, To scourge with the ¡ luc. T h u c y d . p p . 3 8 2 , and 8 3 7 . and G a t -

utmost severity, to cut asunder, as i t were, aker. Opera Critica, p . 118.—See Suicer
by scourging. occ. M a t . xxiv. 5 1 . L u k e Thesaur. on this M'ord. T h e forms Ziú/q.
xii. 46 * . T h i s seems tlie t r u e sense of in John vii. 3 7 . Si\pcjv Rom xii. 2 0 , which
t h e word in these passages; for scourging are found also in ¿Eschin. D i a l . Socrat.
was usually inflicted upon idle and negli- i i i . 3 8 . A t h e n . iii. 4 7 4 . are not ancient
g e n t servants among t h e Jews (see E c - Greek forms. See Lobeck. ad P h r y n i c h .
clus. xiii. 5.) and in M a t t h e w t h e servant
is represented as surviving his punish- Aíipoe, toe, ae, rb, See A t u V w . — T h i r s t .
m e n t ; and in t h e verse following t h e occ. 2 Cor. xi. 27. [ X e n . Cy'r. viii. 1. 12.]
t e x t of L u k e , express mention is made of Ef3g° Atyvxoe, n, b, r¡, from cíe twice,
t h e many stripes with which t h e wicked and \pvxñ the mind.—Double-minded,
servant should be beaten, bapriaerai vo\- having the mind divided, or having, as i t
Xae. Comp. Aépw. [ S c h l . thinks t h a t were, two minds tending opposite ways.
t h e sense is, generally, To punish cruclty. occ. J a m . i. 8. iv. 8. [Schl. observes, and
H e s y c h i u s has Siyorojutiv ávaipcív, and
-

I t h i n k rightly, t h a t in James i. 8, no
Schl. refers to Krumbholz in t h e Bibl. want of sincerity, b u t doubt or uncer-
Bremens. Class. vii. p . 234. Bonnet (Bibl. tainty is indicated, and so CEcumenius i n -
H a g a n a , Class. iv. p . 471.) t h i n k s i t is, t e r p r e t s t h e place. T h e word oceurs i n
to remove from his office, dismiss, like the same sense in t h e Constitutt. Apóstol.
ItJ in 2 Chron. xxvi. 2 1 , and other words vii. 1 1 , and 1 E p . Clem. ad Corinth. p .
in Hebrew. O n t h e other h a n d , scindo 82. and so Siipvxzu in E u s t a t h . E r o t . 2 8 6 .
and descindo are used for scourging. See (356.) See Dougtaei Anal. Sacr. p . 146.
P l a u t . Mil. Glor. v. 1. 2, Sueton. Calig. I n J a m e s iv. 8. on t h e contrary, want of
3 9 . Martial. iii. 9 3 . W a h l gives both sincerity is clearly meant.]
senses.]
A I Í i F M O ' S , 5, ó, from BtSlíúypai, perf.
A¿uVá&), ñ, from c?n¿/a thirst. pass. of cíiwiew.—Versecution, hostile prose-
I . To be dry or athirst, to thirst. Mat.cution. M a t . xiii. 2 1 . A c t s viii. 1. 2 T i m .
xxv. 3 5 , 3 7 , 42, 44. & al. iii. 1 1 . [& al. Pol. i. 8 7 . 7.]
I I . To thirst iu a fgurative sense, to Aiúntrne, 8 ) ó, from SIÚKW.—A perse-
desire ardently. M a t . v. 6. J o h n vii. 3 7 . cutor, occ. 1 T i m . i. 1 3 .
Rev. x x i . 6. xxii. 17. Comp. Isa. xii. 17. AIÍl'KQ.
iv. 1. P s . xiii. 2. lxiii. 1, in t h e L X X , I . [Properly, To run or fly quickly,
and see Campbell's Note on M a t . v. 6, used offugitiv'es. T h u c y d . viii. 120. X e n .
and Wolfius on J o h n vii. 7. T h e Greek A n a b . vii. 2 . 1 1 . T h e n ]
writers likewise use Sii¡/Q for vehement I I . VTopursue afugitive hostilely. See
desire. T h u s Xenophon, "Ovrwe éyoi vpiv T h u c . i. 1 3 7 . and M a t . xxiii. 3 4 . and g e -
AI^Q" ^apt'fco-flai, So much do I thirst nerally, To proseante, persecute, pursue
to oblige you. Cyropaid. lib. iv. 6. 7. with enmity, used especially of t h e p e r -
In Josephus D e Bel. lib. i. cap. 3 2 . § 2. secutions of t h e Christians. See M a t . v.
Aia0ÉvÍ£rc¿£ é" ¿Ssle A f ' Í I I S A S rovpov 10, 1 1 , 12, 4 4 . L u k e x x i . 12. J o h n xv.
capa, No one (says H e r o d ) shall escape 20. A c t s vii. 5 2 . ix. 4, 5 . xxii. 4 , 7, 8 .
who ihirsls for m y blood; where observe xxvi. 1 1 , 1 4 , 15..1 Cor.iv. 1 2 . x v . 9. 2 Cor.
t h e V . is foliowed by an accusative, as in iv. 9. Gal. i. 1 3 , 2 3 . iv. 2 9 . v. 1 1 . vi. 12.
M a t . B u t in lib. iv. cap. 1 1 . § 4, h e Henee in M a t . x. 2 3 . i t is, to pursue or
says, t h e emperor Vitellius was AI^OTN drive into exile (see Polyam. viii.) and
álpa-og ¿vyevSe, thirstingfor noble blood; from t h i s sense, perhaps, i t comes t o s i g -
t h u s joining ¿ u u w with a genitive, ac- nify, to acense. (See J u l . Poli. Onom.
cording t o t h e more usual G r e e k con-
viii. 6. 3 0 . and 7. 67.) as in J o h n v. 1 6 . ]
struction. Comp. u n d e r Ueiváw. In H o -
I I I . [To follow as one's master or
mer, II. iv. line 1 7 1 , rroXvSíipiov, from
guide. L u k e xvii. 2 3 . and so in X e n .
TroXve much, and Sí\jjoc thirst, means much
M e m . ii. S. 5. Appian. Bell. Civ. ii. p .
desired or longed for. [ I n J o h n iv. 14.
7 4 1 . v. p.T-113. See W a r t o n . ad Theoc.
vi. 3 5 . the meaning of t h e phrase He shall
xi. 7 5 . and Abresch. ad ¿Eschyl. p . 8 8 .
not thirst again, is, He shall have nothing
H o r a t . Serm. i. 9. 1 6 . ]
more to desire. So in Rev. vii. 16. On
this meaning of cV^/ciw, see Abresch. D i - I V . To follow or press hard after, to
pursue with earnestness and diligence in
order to obtain, to prosecute with desire
* See Whitby and Doddridgc on these texts. of obtaining. Rom, ix. 3 0 , 3 1 . P h i l . iii.
0 2
 A O K 196 A O K

12, 14. [ o n which last place we may ob- I V . [To seem or appcar, Acts xvii. 18'.
serve, t h a t SLWKU) is used, in Greek, of the 1 Cor. xii. 2 2 . 2 Cor. x. 9-*ru SoKÜvra
racers who were left behind and followed pé\r¡, the limbs which seem, & c ]
after the others. A d d 1 Thess. v. 15. 1 V. I t imports dignity or eminence.
T i m . vi. 1 1 . 2 T i m . ii. 22. Heb. xii. 14. T h u s AoK5)/r£E, ¿t, Persons of eminence,
Plat. de R e p . t . vi. p . 2 1 0 . E u r i p . J o n . note, or reputation. G a l . ii. 2 , 6. E u r í -
440. Ecclus. xxvii. 8. I n Rom. xii. 1 3 . pides, Heraclid. line 8 9 7 , a n d Troad. i.
xiv. 19. aud 1 Cor. xiv. 1. t h e meaning is 608. Herodian, lib. vi. cap. 1. a n d X e -
nearly t h e same, to be studious o/*.] | nophon in H i e r o use this particle in t h e
Aóypa, aros, ro, from SéSoypat perf. same sense (see Grotius, Elsner, and
pass. of t h e verb Sodio, to think good, de- K y p k e , on Gal. ii. 2 . ) ; and t h e Apostle
termine, decree.—A decree, ordinance, explains his meaning, ver. 6, b y ¿WBJ riov
whether divine, occ. E p h . ii. 15. Col. ii. elvaí TI, those who appeared to be some-
14, where see W h i t b y and Macknight, what, i. e. who really were eminent, con-
and comp. A c t s xvi. 4 ; — o r h u m a n , occ. siderable. Comp. ver. 9, and under Tls
Luke ii. 1. Acts xvii. 7. [ D a n . vi. 9. X e n . III. Theophylact explains Tote ¿WSo-t, G a l .
A n . viii. 1 . 2 0 9 . ] 11. 2 , b y rote peyaKols, rols évBo&is, the
Aoyparí'Cu), from Bóyfia, aros.— To de- great, the eminent; a d d i n g ¿K ávatpeí
cree, impose a decree or ordinance ; [ a s in rb tivat ávrus, áXAct rijv tcotvnv enravrtov
Diog. L a e r t . iii. 575. See 2 Mac. x. 8 . ] \pijifiov ríQnoi, h e does not deny their
whence in t h e pass. Soyparíi^opat, To being (i. e. what t h e y seemed), b u t d e -
have decrees or ordinances imposed upon clares t h e common suffrage of all.—And
one, to be subject, or submit, to ordinances. in t h e like view I think, and n o t as a
occ. Col. ii. 2 0 , where see Wetstein and mere expletive, it is joined with t h e V .
K v p k e . [ D a n . ii. 1 3 , 15. Sec. Chish.] ap%eiv to rule, M a r k x. 4 2 , as it often is
AOKE'Q. in t h e Greek writers with other words
I . To think, imagine, judge. M a t . vi. expressive of dignity or authority. So
7. L u k e xvii. 9 . John v. 3 9 . [1 Cor. ii. Epictetus Enchirid. cap. 5 1 , speaks, rwv
9.] & al. freq. O n 1 Cor. vii. 40, "Wolnus 'EN 'YlTEPO'XHi AOKO'YNTON, of those
remarks, t h a t the V . Sonéio imports not an who are elevated in r a n k or dignity.
uncertain opinión, b u t conviction and Herodian, lib. vii. cap. 15, rwv—rrpw-
knowledge, as J o h n v. 3 9 . [and perhaps TEÍEIV AOKO'YNTON, who were the prin-
1 Cor. i v . 9.] So in Xenophon C y - cipal persons. Josephus, D e Bel. lib. i.
ropsed. a t t h e end of t h e procem. Tí<r- cap. 5. § 3 . ck al. ót ITPOY'XEIN A O -
eña-daí AOKO'YMEN, expresses assur- KCTYNTE2, those who were most emi-
ance, not doubt. See Hutchinson's Note, nent. A n d lib. iv. cap. 3 . § 12, he has
and Macknight on 1 Cor. vii. 40. [ H e - the very phrase T í T N "APXEIN AO-
rodian. v. 8. 5.] KOY'NTÍiN. Comp. Kypke in M a r k .
I I . [ T o judge, or pass an opinión. [Some, with Beza, transíate this place of
L u k e xvii. 9. John v. 39. 1 Cor. xii. 2 3 . S t . M a r k , Who are thought to rule; for
H e b r . x. 2 9 . ; and henee, eotcéi poi means, CWEÍÜ has this sense in T h u c y d . viii. 90.
it appears to me, it is my opinión. M a t . P l u t . Rom. p . 1 1 . P y r r h . p . 4 0 6 . B u t
xvii. 2 5 . xviii. 12. xxii. 2 . L u k e x . 3 6 . there are many passages, where Soneto is
Acts xxv. 2 7 . ] nearly or wholly an expletive. See L u k e
I I I . [ T o decree or determine, used g e - xxii. 2 4 . 1 Cor. iii. 18. iv. 9. vii. 4 0 . x.
nerally impersonally, k t i poi, it seems 12. xiv. 37. H e b . iv. 1. Schl. even refers
good to me, I determine. L u k e i. 3 . Acts M a t . iii. 9. fií] Só¡,r¡re \eye~iv to this head.
xv. 22, 2 5 , 2 8 , 3 4 . Henee, ro ¿WSV, Bretschn. says, it there implies arrogance,
•what seems good, H e b . xii. 10. K a r a rb Do not arroganily say. Gataker makes
COKÍÍV ávrols, according to their own plea- it, Do not think within yourselves. Ad-
sure, where Chrysostom says, Often ful-
vers. Miscell. i. 3 . p . 1 9 1 . See Hist. Su-
Jilling their pleasure, and not every- sann. v. 5. Soph. A j . 1114. E u r . Heracl.
where seeing what is advantageous. 8 6 5 . ]
T h u c y d . i. 8 4 . Simplic. in Epictet. p . &oKi/j.á¿¡w, from ¿Wt/J>;.
115. S y m m . 1 Sam. x x . 9. Theod. D a n . I. To trij, prove, assay, as refmers do
iv. 14. 3 Esdr. viii. 12. X e n . Anab. iv. metáis by fre, in order to know how puré
1. 10. P a r k h u r s t , without sufficicnt they are from heterogeneous mixture,
grounds, in m y opinión, refers 1 Cor. x i . occ. 1 Pet. i. 7. So Isocrates to Demoni-
16. lo this sense, See, however, Wolf.] cus, cap. 12, To ¡xiv yap XPYSI'ON iv r¿>
 A O K 197 A O K

HYPR AOKIMA'ZOMEN, r«e Sé <¡>í\oc thing agreeable to God's will; Parkhurst

iv rcüs áru^icuc Siayiviocncopev. F o r we says it is To allow, to choose. Bretsch.
try gold in the fire, and distinguish our has, In that mhich he approves.~\ The
friends in adversity. Ovid has expressed profane writers use t h e V . iu this sense,
the same t h o u g h t , T r i s t . lib. i. eleg. 4. as may be seen in Wetstein on Rom. i.
line 2 5 , 6, 28, and on 1 Cor. xvi. 3 . I add from
Xenophon's Memorab. lib. i. cap. 2. § 4,
Sciliceí ut fulvum spectatur i n i g n i b u s aurum, Tó piv év vwepstjQlovra vwnpwnvtív aireSo-
Témpora sic duro est inspiciendajides. KÍpa^e, ro Se uaa n i¡ivj/i] Sé^erai, ravra
kavwe ÍKTTOVÜV 'EAOKI'MAZE. H e (Só-
See Wolfius. Comp. P s . Ixvi. 10. Prov. crates) disapproved of a person's, who
xvii. 3 . Zeeh. xiii. 9 ; in t h e two former had eaten immoderately, labouring e x -
of which t e x t s the L X X use Soupá^eiv cessively, b u t approved of digesting mo-
for t h e H e b . j n a io try, prove, and in dérate food by labour.
the last, for t h e H e b . fpm. See also AoKifii'i, r¡e, h, from SOKÍÍO to approve.
W i s d . iii. 6. a n d Ecclus. i i . 5. [ J e r . ix. I. Proqf, trial, properly of metáis by
3.] fire, to examine their p u r i t y . [ P l e n c e ,
I I . [Henee, generally, To try, prove, generally proqf or trial, as of faith by af-
examine, try the fitness or goodness qf. fliction. 2 Cor. viii. 2.1
Used of oxen. L u k e xiv. 19 ; of men t r y - I I . TTlial mhich is made clear by proqf,
i n g themselves or others. Rom. xii. 2 . the approved and excellent nature qf any
1 Cor. xi. 2 8 , where comp. Simpl. ad thing. Rom. v. 4 . And patience, experi-
E p i c t . p . 90. 2 Cor. viii. 8. xiii. 5. Gal. ence, and experience, hope, i. e. our pa-
vi. 4. Eph. v. 10. 1 Thess. v. 2 1 . 1 T i m . tience makes us approved, and thus gives
iii. 10. 1 John iv. 1. So the Hebrews us a hope of future remará. 2 Cor. ii. 9.
use JNN, J o b xxxiv. 5. P s . xvii. 3 . xxvi. 2 . That I might know your praiseworthy
J e r . ix. 7. Xen. de Rep. iii. 4. In two disposition towards me. ix. 13. Sotcipr) TÍJQ
or three passages, it seems to be r a t h e r , SiaKovíag, i. e. SiaKovla BoscifiaardeTo-a. (See
to discem or distinguish by trying. L u k e Gesen. 6 4 1 . 2. Fischer ad W e l l . T . iii.
xii. 56. (in t h e parallel place of S t . M a t . P . i. p . 293.) By means qf this approved
xvi. 3 , t h e r e is SiaKpívuv) Rom. ii. 18. or excellent minislration. So P h i l . ii. 2 2 .
You can distinguish between good and rr)v Soicqxyv aura yircoo-tcere, you know his
evil. 1 Cor. iii. 13. P h i l . i. 10. I n Heb. excellent or approved nature. And Sym-
it is used in the same sense of trying or machus in P s . lxvii. or Ixviii. 3 1 , has So-
tempting God, according to Wahl, but Ktpíj lipyvpia for tried silver. In 2 Cor.
Schleusner and Rosenm. say it means To xiii. 3 , t h e word is r a t h e r a criterion, ar-
doubt qf God's power and goodness ; t h e gument, or proof^
H e b r e w is ¡FTA, which appears to be To Aoúpiov, u, ró, from Sóicipoe.
try God, to see what he would do. See I . A proqf, criterion, test, that by mhich
Schulz. in V o c ] any thing is proved or tried, as faith by
I I I . [ T o have experience qf by qfflictions. occ. J a m e s i. 3 . See Wolfius
triol. 2 Cor. viii. 22. PVhom we have and Wetstein, and comp. 1 P e t . iv. 1 2 . —
found by experience to be diligentj and T h e L X X use t h i s word, Prov. xxvii. 2 1 ,
henee, to approve. 1 Cor. xvi. 3 . whom if for t h e H e b . fjlín a rejiner's crucible.
ye approve. (Joseph. Ant. iii. 4. 1. xiii. 2, [ S o L o n g i n . § 3 2 . yXwrrara yeícrecog Bo-
3 . Lucian. Scyth. 8.) 1 Thess. ii. 4. We dpwv. Dion. H a l . t. ii. p, 65. H e r o d i a n .
are approved by God, so as to have the ii. 10, 1 2 . ]
gospel trusted to us. A n d so 2 Mace. I I . [ T h e same as ¿Wipj, The approved
iv. 3 . Xen. Mem. iii. 5, 20. P a r k h u r s t nature of any thing. So 1 P e t . i. 7, it is
Bretsch. and W a h l add Rom. i. 2 8 , a n d I our tried and approvedfaithf\
think rightly. They did not approve qf AÓKipoQ, .a, ó, i¡, from SOKÍLO io ap-
God, so as io know him, did not think prove.
him worthy qf being known. Schleusner I. Proved, tried, as metáis by fire. In
says i t is to wish; they did not misil to this sense i t is used by t h e L X X for t h e
know God, which is merely p u t t i n g the H e b . pptD refined, 1 Chron. xxviü. 18.
effect for t h e cause. H e cites Joseph. x x i x . 4 ; for liníD puré, purified, 2 Chron.
A n t . ii. 7. 4 . Again, in Rom. xiv. 22, ix. 1 7 ; for tata solid, 1 Kings x. 18.
Schleusner refers the verb to t h i s mean- I I . Proved, approved, as aceeptable
ing, and translates, If he judges any men in t h e furnace of adversity. (See
 A OA 198 A O 8
Ecclus. ii. 5.) occ. J a m e s i. 12. Comp. See M a t . xxvi. 4. Acts xiii. 10. 1 Thess.
Rom. xvi. 10. ii. 3 . 1 P e t . ii. 2 3 . I n t h e N . T . it is
I I I . Approved, accepted. occ. Rom. xiv. used only in a bad sense; for, 2 Cor. xii.
18. 2 Cor. x . 18. xiii. 7. 2 T i m . ii. 15. 16, áXX' virapxuiv rxavñpyog BóXip vpüg
Comp. 1 Cor. xi. 1 9 * . eXa&ov, but being crafty I cqught you b y
Aoicbg, 5, f¡, from Béiceadaí, lonic, for guile, seems plainly an objection or insi-
Béyeo-daí to receive, because in building nuation p u t b y t h e Apostle into t h e m o u t h
beams are received a t their ends into other of his opposers. [ T h i s last r e m a r k is
pieces of timber. So t h e H e b . ñame Tfip confirmed b y Wolf and Rosenm. B u t
or ¡iTip>, t o which cWóc several times a n - Schleusner does not agree in t h e opinión,
swers in t h e L X X , is from t h e V . n l p to and says t h a t t h e word is used for pru-
meet.—A beam, or rqfter in building. B u t dence. H e cites t h e Schol. on Apoll.
in t h e N . T . i t is only used figuratively, Rhod. iii. 8 9 . JEschyl. P r o m . 4 7 6 . Suicer
for a great fault or vice t , according to i. p . 939, and others. P a r k h u r s t is surély
t h e Jewish proverb applied by our Sa- r i g h t . ]
viour, Mat. vii. 3 , 4, 5. Luke vi. 4 1 , 4 2 . AoXáu, W, from SóXog.— To corrupt,
AÓXÍOC, t a , LOV, from BóXog.—Deceitfid. falsify, falsare. occ. 2 Cor. iv. 2, where
occ. 2 Cor. xi. 13. [Xen. A n . i. 4. 7.] observe, t h a t Wetstein cites Lucian, in
AoXwio, ¿i, from SóXwg.—To use deceit. H e r m o t i m . applying t h e Verb to vintners
occ. Rom. iii. 13, where observe édoXlucrav, adidterating mine; and comp. 2 Cor. ii.
which t h e Apostle seems to have taken 17, and under KainjXebu). [So Wolf a n d
from t h e L X X versión of P s . v. 9, is t h e Rosen müller, a n d t h e Commentators i n
3d pers. plur. imperf., according to t h e general. B u t Schleusner mentions t h a t
Bceotic or Doric dialect, for íSoXtuv. Verbs some transíate SOXÚOJ like SoXióu h e r e ;
of a similar form in t h e imperfect and 2d We do not deal craftily with the mord of
Aorist are very common in t h e L X X . God, either suppressing the iruíh, or mix-
T h u s Exod. xiv. 9, we have 'ivpoaav for ing upfalsehood. T h i s seems very nearly
ívpov; D e u t . i. 2 4 . r¡Xdocrav for 7¡X6ov; t h e same. See Suicer in Voce.]
verse 2 5 . kXá€ocrav for eXaSov. This pe- Aópa, arog, ro, from Séb'opai, perf. pass.
culiarity may, I think, be easily accounted of SíBii>pi to give.—A gift. occ. M a t . vii.
for, by r e m a r k i n g t h a t t h e L X X versión I I . L u k e xi. 1 3 . E p h . iv. 8. P h i l . iv.
was made in E g y p t , where t h e Greek 17.
language was introduced by t h e Macedo- Aó¿;a, T)C, j / , from SOKÍIO to seem, think,
ñians under Alexander, and gained ground esteem.
u n d e r his successors; a n d t h a t i t is pro- I . [Glory, honour, esteem, praise. I t is
bable t h e Macedonian dialect did in many used, ( 1 . ) , of honour given to men.] L u k e
respects agree with t h é Doric. A n d i t xiv. 10. John v. 4 4 . 1 P e t . i. 2 4 . I n this
m a y not be amiss, for t h e sake of t h e sense i t is frequently used in t h e Greek
younger reader, to a d d from Maittaire's writers.—Aó^ai, c u , Dignities, an abstract
Dialects some other instances of t h e 3d t e r m is used for t h e concrete, occ. 2 P e t .
person plural imperf. of contracted Verbs
ii. 10. J u d e verse 8. I n which both t e x t s
being formed in — <rav, like íSoXiSaav.—
Vitringa, Obs. Sacr, lib. iv. c. 9. § 3 6 , e x -
Ist, then, of Verbs in áw, we have in t h e
L X X kyevvwaav, G e n . vi. 4 ; i&aav, Jer.
i plains Aó£as of t h e Gentile, i. e. t h e R o -
! m a n magistrates, b u t W h i t b y , on 2 P e t .
xxxiv. 10. 2dly, I n íw, Karevottaav, ii. 10 (whom see), of t h e angelical powers
Exod. xxxiii. 8 ; k-wnt^ovaaav, N u m . i. 1 8 ; or angels, [as in P h i l o de Mon. tom. ii.
¿>KoBopScrav, N e h . iv. 1 8 ; ¿TrotScrav, J o b i. p. 2 1 6 . I t is sometimes p u t for, that
4. 3dly, I n ów, r)vo¡xH<rav, E z e k . xxii. from which glory is got, as in 2 Cor. viii.
11. [See S t u r z . de Dial. Maced. p . 5 8 . 2 3 , where i t is used of Christian teachers,
Fisch. ad Well. i. p . 192. T h e word oc- i who are said to be a source of glory to
Curs, N u m . xxv. 17. P s . cv. 25.] i C h r i s t ; and so 1 Thess. ii. 20. A similar
AóXog, s, ó, from SéXoj to take ruith a , use of KvSog occurs in H o m . Iliad ix. 669 ;
bail, which see under AeXeá^io.—Deceit, j and of gloria in Macrob. Somn. Scip. i.
fraud, guile, whether i n actions or words. I c. i. and Valer. Flacc. i. 162.—Aó£a is in
this sense used, ( 2 . ) , of t h e glory, honour,
and praise given to G o d . ] L u k e ii. 14.
* [ W a h l and Schleusner refer all these passages,
e x c e p t R o m . x i v . 1 8 , to S e n s e I I . ]
xvii. 18. A c t s xii. 2 3 . Rom. [iv. 2 0 . ] xi.
+ See Stockii C l a v i s o n the word, a n d P o l e S y - 3 6 . xv. 7. & al. freq. J o h n i x . 2 4 . give
ü o p s . and W e t s t e i n o n M a t . vii. glory to God, i. e. glorify God by confess-
 AOE 199

íng ingenuously t h e t r u t h . Comp. Josh. see 1 Cor. xi. 7. In Rom. i. 2 9 , t h e word

vii. 18, 19, 2 0 , and see Doddridge and means the glorious form qf God. I t h i n k
Campbell on John. [See P s . x x i x . 1. t h a t t h e phrases, " the God or Lord of
cxiii. 4. 1 Sam. vi. 5.] I n 1 P e t . iv. 14, Glory," in A c t s vii. 2. and 1 Cor. ii. 8.,
there " is an allusion to Isa. xi. 2 . The and which mean t h e glorious God or Lord,
spirit qf glory, which rested on t h e perse- may be referred to this sense, or to t h a t
cuted disciples of Christ in t h e first age, which I have noticed, at t h e end of t h e
was a spirit qfforlilude enabling t h e m to preceding h e a d . ] — I do not find t h a t Aó^a
suffer t h e greatest evils, without shrink- is ever used for light or splendour by t h e
ing, a virtue which t h e heathens greatly profane G r e e k writers (though P l u t a r c h ,
admired." Macknight, in whom see more. in Nicias, tom. i. p . 5 3 8 . F . speaks of I I
I I . [Excellence of any kind, either of n x á - w w e 'EKAA'M"*ASA A O ' S A , The
mind or body. I t is used of t h e beauty of glory of Plato shining forlk) ; b u t very
frequently by t h e L X X , answering to t h e
t h e body. 1 Cor. xv. 43 : and so P h i l . iii.
22. of Christ's glorified body. I n 2 Cor. H e b . T n " J . See, Ínter al., Exod. xxiv. 1 7.
iii. 7. iytví¡Qn iv Suí,r¡, i t means had an xl. 3 4 , 3 5 . D e u t . v. 24. Isa. Ix. 1, 2. T h i s
exlernal excellence, and also verse 8. I t I l l d Sense of t h e word, therefore, I a p -
expresses glorious aitribuies of God very prehend to be Hellenistical.
frequently. I n J o h n xi. 4. Rom. vi. 4. and I V . A s t h e divine n a t u r e in C h r i s t is
40, i t is (power) i x . 2 3 , (mercy) xiv. 1, in t h e O . T . styled nin> 1 U D The Glory-
(power) E p h . i. 12. iii. 16, (mercy). Jehovah, o r — o f Jehovah (see H a b . ii. 14.
V i t r i n g a Obss. Sacr. p . 2 2 7 . (Diss. iii. Isa. xl. 5. Ix. 1, 2 ) , so in t h e N . T. this
lib. i. c. 7 ) , says, t h a t in both t h e O í d and is expressed, Rom. vi. 4 , by ríje AófriQ rS
N e w T e s t a m e n t i t denotes t h e strength ílarpóc, the Glory qf the Father (i. e. of
a n d majesty of God, as i n S t . M a r k xiii. the Essence, for Christ raised himself
26. and Rom. vi. 4 . See E x o d . xxxiii. from t h e dead, J o h n ii. 1 9 — 2 1 . x. 18.),
19. Isa. xii. 2. xl. 2 6 . xiv. 24.] and by rrje Aó?)/e, James ii. 1. Comp.
I I I . Visible glory, splendour, bright- Rev. xxi. 1 1 , 2 3 . [ P a r k h u r s t has here
ness, irradiation of light, w h e t h e r n a t u r a l , entirely neglected some very importaut
1 Cor. xv. 4 1 . comp. M a t . vi. 29.—or su- passages in which t h e word oceurs in a
pernatural, L u k e ii. 9. i x . 3 1 , 3 2 . 2 P e t . i. peculiar sense, namely, t h e especial glory
17. Acts vii. 5 5 . xxii. 1 1 . 2 Cor. iii. 7. given t o Christ in his mediatorial capa-
Comp. J o h n xii. 4 1 . I n Rom. ix. 4. ' H city, i. e. in his twofold n a t u r e , as differ-
Aó£a seems to denote t h a t supernatural i n g from his glory as God, and his glory
light, splendour, or glory, constantly ac- as man. See J o h n i. 14. xvii. 5 and 22.
companying t h e a r k of t h e covenant, L a m p e , on J o h n i. 12, says t h a t t h e glory
(which is therefore called the Glory, P s . consisted i n t h e prophecies and types of
Ixxviii. 6 1 . 1 Sam. iv. 2 1 , 2 2 . ) a n d t h e the O . T . , t h e manifestation in t h e ílesh,
Cherubim, which are therefore styled by t h e effusion of t h e spirit after t h e exalta-
S t . Paul Cherubim of Glory, H e b . ix. 5. tion t o the r i g h t h a n d of God, t h e preacli-
Comp. 1 Kings viii. 10, 1 1 . [See L a m p e ing of t h e gospel, and t h e a u t h o r i t y over
on J o h n i. 14. T h e word especially d e - t h e church. T h e very attentive consi-
notes the majesty or splendid glory qf deration of t h e xviith chapter of S t . J o h n
God's staie or appearance, of which bril- will, I think, confirm this opinión. B u t
liant l i g h t conveys t h e best image t o u s ; m a n y of t h e fathers, H i l a r y , Chrysostom,
see M a t . xvi. 27., several of t h e passages A u g u s t i n e , Theophylact, and others,
quoted by P a r k h u r s t a t t h e beginning of as well as most L u t h e r a n writers, t h i n k
this sense, and 2 Thess. i. 9 . ; and so of t h e t h a t t h e glory spoken of in verse 5, is
glory of Christ in his heavenly kingdom, Christ's glory as a m a n . L a m p e answers,
on which I shall speak at t h e end of t h e t h a t i t is t h e same glory as is spoken of
word. I t would seem, says Schleusner, in verse 1, t h a t t h a t is t h e glory promised
t h a t Aó£a, when used about t h e A r k , d e - to t h e person of Christ in t h e eterna! co-
noted especially the cloud, which was a venant for m a u ' s salvation, t h a t t h e glory
symbol of God's glorious preseuce. E x o d . possessed by Christ as God before t h e
xl. 3 4 , 3 5 . Levit. ix. 6. E z e k . x. 4. Rom. world began, can never be shown to be
ix. 4. S t . P a u l tells us especially, 2 T i m . t h e same as t h a t which he possessed in
vi. 16, t h a t God dwells in light inaccessi- his h u m a n c h a r a c t e r ; for they who t h u s
ble. So any t h i n g which denotes, or is a argüe, m u s t either say t h a t Christ pos-
symbol of God's glory, is called o¿£a Q E S ; sessed this glory by predestina! ion, or.
 200 A O 2

with Glass, must confound t h e divine es- state of happiness in t h e Apocryphal

sence with the ecouomy of graee, by say- books, Ecclus. iv. 16. 2 Mace. xiv. ti.
ing t h a t Christ possessed the glory, which A n d so L u k e ii. 3 2 . ]
lie seeks in his human character here, in Aoíjáfw, from dó'^a.
liis divine character, not by predestina- I . To glorify, make glorious or honour-
tiou, b u t by real communication through able, or to cause to appear so. John xi.
i h e eternal generation, inasmueh as, being 4. xii. 28. xiii. 3 1 , 32. xv. 8. xvii. 4. xxi.
t h e only begotten Son of God, he partakes 19. Acts iii. 13. 1 Cor. xii. 26. In this
fully of t h e F a t h e r ' s n a t u r e . If it be said
view it particularly refers to t h e glorious
t h a t Christ says, Now glorify me, it is to resurrection of Christ, and his ascensión
be remembered t h a t the full manifestation to t h e r i g h t of God. J o h n vii. 3 9 . xii. 16.
of the glory of the Mediator could only [ E x o d . xv. 6. Ecclus. iii. 3 . ]
be made when the sacrifice was aceom- I I . To glorify, honour, magnify, praise.
plished. If it be urged t h a t God could M a t . v. 16. vi. 2. ix. 8. & al. freq. Comp.
not be glorified, it may be replied, ( 1 . ) , Rom. xi. 13. [ W h e n used of one's self,
that all which is meant here is a mani- it means lo claim glory or praise for, as
festation of bis glory, and t h a t it may be J o h n v. 54. H e b . v. 5. Rev. xviii. 7. I n
shown t h a t there was to be such a mani- Rom. xi. 13. it is I think my office glori-
festation iu h e a v e n ; and ( 2 . ) , t h a t i t isous. Schleusner says, I get glory from
not as God, b u t as t h e Mediator, t h a t the my office.'}
Son is here to be glorified. These seem I I I . To glorify, admit to the eternal
t h e most material objections and answers state qf glory and blessedness. Rom. viii.
to this view of the subject. Some minor 30. Comp. under Sense I . and Aó£a V .
ones may be found in L a m p e iii. p . 3 8 2 . and 1 Cor. xv. 4 0 — 4 3 . [ I t signifies
I must. add, t h a t in J o h n xvii. 2 2 . G r e - sometimes To judge of from Safa an opi-
gory Nyssene (i. p . 7 1 0 . ii. p . 1 7 . ) A m - nión, as Ecclus. x. 3 1 . ]
monius (Caten, in Johan. p . 4 1 5 . ) and
Aopriic, ádoc, ¿i, from lópt, the same,
Theophylact on this place ( p . 8 0 3 . ) ex-
which from Seoupica, perf. mid. of MpKw to
plain thc glory to be t h e Holy Ghost.
see, behold, of which see under Apa™)'.—
B u t Suicer, as well as L a m p e , explains it
A gazelle, or antelope, which is very com-
of the vioÜEcría (see J o h n i. 1 2 . ) t h e pri-
mon in Greece, Syria, and Palestine, and
vilege of becoming sons of God, heirs of
seems to have its Greek ñame from its
God, and coheirs of Christ. See L a m p e ,
fine eyes, which in those countries are
vol. i. p . 3 5 2 . and Suicer, vol. i. p . 9 4 4 .
even proverbial. '0£óc?Ep<c££ yap r a £wov
Comp. Rom. viii. 1 7 . 1 J o h n iii. 2 . ]
Kai kvópparov, " F o r it is a sharp-sighled
V . The glory, or state of glory and o.í¡ifine-eyed animal," says the Etymolo-
blessedncss, reserved for t r u e believers. gist in AopKag. . See Shaw's Travels, p .
See Rom. viii. 1 8 . Col. iii. 4 . 2 T i m . ii. 414, and H e b . and E n g . Lexicón, u n d e r
1 0 . 1 P e t . v. 1 , 4 . T h i s is called, Rom. n a y I V . occ. Acts ix. 3 6 , 3 9 . — T h i s word
v. 2 , Aóiívc rS OeS, The glory qf God. in t h e L X X constantly answers to t h e
Rom. iii. 23, All have sinned, Kai v^epSv- H e b . >a5f, or fem. TOV an antelope. [See
rai rije cú'inQ rS Qeü, andfall short qf, or iElian. H . A . xiv. 14. Bochart. Hieroz. P .
fail of altaining, the glory of God, i. e. i. L . iii. c. 2 5 . p . 925. B u t iu Acts ix.
" t h a t glory which God hath appointed 3 6 , 39, it is a proper ñame, as it was a t
for the righteous," L o c k e ; or " the frui- Rome also. See G r u t e r . Inscrip. N .
lion qf God in glory without a free act of DCCCXCI. 4 . ]
, justification by graee." W h i t b y . " B u t AóVtc, toe, A t t . ewg, r;, from cíSocrai 2d
sílice J o h n v. 4 4 , Só^av vrap' aWrjXüv pers. perf. pass. of SíSiopí to give.
praise from one another, is opposed to I . A giving. occ. Phil. iv. 15. [ T h e
Svíav ri¡v Trapa TH G E S the praise which phrase is coate Kai XhxpLc, which oceurs
cometh from God; and the loving of fr¡v also Ecclus. xii. 24. xiii. 7. W a h l and
lái,av the praise of men more t h a n rr¡v Schleusner transíate the phrase Xóyos ¿5oo-
ioífiv TH QeS the praise of God, is men- K' X)'/uV an account of what has been given
tioned J o h n xii. 4 3 , the words SóE,>¡s THand received, i, e. says Schleusner, ihe
G E S in this passage [ R o m . iii. 2 3 . ] may church has sent me money which it might
very well be translated, ihe praise or ap- charge as paid, and I acknowledge as re-
probation qf God." Macknight. [ W e ceived.}
m u s t add, 1 Cor. ii. 7 . H e b . ii. 1 0 . 2 Cor.
iv. 1 7 . 2 Thess. ii.. 1 4 . Aó£a denotes a I I . A gift. occ. J a m e s i. 17. [ C o m p .
Ecclus. xxxviii. 8. Prov. xxi. 14. xxv. 14.
 A O Y 201 A OY

Beisen (Nov. H y p . ad E p . Jacob, p . 541.) he was t a k i n g ; Kaíp<¡>, on t h e contrary,

says Sóaie means a smaller gift, and 2 ¿ - was written a t length in t h e ancient
pi)/.ia a largar. Wolf thinks n o t . ] M S S . , which a transcriber would hardly
• AóYjje, a, ó, from USorcu 3d pers. perf. mistake for Kvpít¡>. Henee we may con-
pass. of Sáiofii to give.—A giver. occ. 2 clude t h a t icaípa is the false 3'eading, be-
Cor. ix. 7. [ C o m p . Prov. xxii. 8 . ] cause this m i g h t arise through error from
¿XovXaywyéw, w, from SovXoe a servant K v p í w , not Kvpío) from icaípw." Michaelis,
or slave, and aya to lead, carry.— To Introduction to N . T . vol. i. p . 2 8 4 , edit.
bring or carry into servitude or subjec- Marsh.
lion. occ. 1 Cor. ix. 27, where Deylingius AovXn, r¡e, f¡. See AoüXoc,—Afánale
in Wolfius observes, t h a t this is a worá servant, a handmaid. occ. L u k e i. 3 8 , 4 8 .
taken from the boxers, who dragged off Acts ii. 18. Comp. AoSXoe I V . [ I n both
their conquered antagonists, like slaves. cases it is used figuratively.]
Longinus uses this uncommon verb, D e AO'YAOS, ov, ó, and n e u t . plur. SovXa,
Sublim. sect. xliv. towards the middle, p . ra.
2 4 6 , edit. 3tiae, Pearce. {To treat like a I. One in a servile state, a servant, or
slave, say W a h l and Schleusner.] slave. M a t . x . 24. x x i . 34, 3 5 , 36. xxv.
AovKeía, ae, í/, from BovXoe a servant 5 1 . 1 Cor. vii. 22. xii. 13. E p h . vi. 5. P h i l .
or slave. Servitude, slavery, bondage, as verse 16. & al.—Of t h e wretched condi-
opposed to liberty. In t h e N . T . it is tion of slaves, according to t h e laws and
used only figuratively. occ. Rom. viii. 15, customs of t h e Romans, a late * learned
2 1 . Gal."iv. 24. v. 1. I n H e b . ii. 15, [ i t writer gives us t h e following delineation.
is misen/.] — " T h e common lot of slaves in general,"
AovXevw, from SovXoe a servant or slave. says he, " was, with the ancients, in m a n y
I t is construed with a dative. circumstances, very deplorable. Of their
I . To serve, in a civil sense, as a ser- situatiou take t h e following i n s t a n c e s :
vant, or slave. 1 T i m . vi. 2 . Comp. M a t . T h e y were held pro nullis, pro mortuis,
vi. 24. [ E p h . vi. 7 . ] pro quadrupedibus, for no men, for dead
II. To serve, be in subjecíion, in a po- men, for beasts; nay, were in a much
litical sense, as a conquered nation. J o h n ivorse state than any cattle whatsoever—
viii. 3 3 . Comp. A c t s vii. 7. Rom. ix. 12. T h e y had no head in t h e state, no ñame,
III. To serve, be serviceable to one an- tribe, or r e g i s t e r — T h e y were not capable
other, [ L u k e xv. 2 9 . Rom. xiv. 1 8 ; ] even of being injured ; ñor could they take by
by the reputedly meanest or most servile purchase or descent; had no heirs, and
acts of charity. Gal. v. 13. therefore could make no will of course.
IV. To serve, or be in bondage to, in Exclusive of w h a t was called their pecu-
•A religious or spiritual sense, as t o God, lium, whatever they acquired was t h e i r
Mammón, sin, t h e law, idols, legal cere- m a s t e r ' s : they could not plead, ñor be
monies, lusts. See M a t . vi. 24. Rom. vi. pleaded, b u t were excluded from all civil
6. vii. 25. Gal. iv. 8, 9. T i t . iii. 3 . So in concerns whatsoever;—were not entitled
Xenophon Apol. Socrat. § 16, we have to t h e rights and considerations of matri-
A O Y A E r O N T A rale rS awparoe 'EIH- mony, and therefore had no relief in case
©YMI'AIS, serving, or enslaved to, the of a d u l t e r y ; ñor were t h e proper objects
lusts of the b o d y ; and in Lucian's H e r - of cognation ñor affinity;—they could be
motimus, tom. i. p . 5 3 7 , ' E n i G Y M f A I S sola, transferred, or pawned as goods, or
—AOYAEY'Hi. See more in W e t s t e i n personal e s t á t e ; for goods t h e y were, and
and K y p k e on T i t . iii. 3 . — " Several such were t h e y e s t e e m e d ; m i g h t be tor-
M S S . have r<j¡ Kaipta SüXevóvree, for re? t u r e d for evidence; punished a t t h e dis-
Kvpíü) StiXevópree, Rom. xii. 11 ; where, creción of their lord, and even put to death
setting aside other arguments alieged by by his a u t h o r i t y ; together with many
Wetstein in favour of the latter reading, other civil incapacities, which I have not
we may be convinced t h a t it is genuine, room to enumérate." So t r u l y deplorable
by the very circumstance t h a t gave rise was t h e legal state of these u n h a p p y p e r -
to the former. T h e M S S . in general,
and t h a t of Gottingen in particular, ab-
breviate very frequently Kvplio into Kib, * D r . J o h n T a y l o r , E l e m e n t s of C i v i l L a w , p .
which m i g h t be mistaken by a'later t r a n - 4 2 8 , 9. S e e also Pottcr's A n t i q u i t i e s o f Greece,
book i. ch. 1 3 . p . 5 6 . l s t edit. L e Clerc's N o t e o n
scriber for an abbreviation of Kaípw, which E x o d . x x i . 2 0 . L c l a n d ' s A d v a n t a g e , & c . of C h r i s -
he would therefore write in t h e cópy t h a t tian R e v c l a t i o n , part ii. ch. 3 , 4. vol. 2. p p . 4 4 ,
6 0 , ílvo. /'"T^X
/
 A O Y 202 APA

sons u n d e r t h e Román" government, far to enslave, in a civil or political sensé. occ.

different from t h a t of H e b r e w servants 2 P e t . ii. 19. Acts vii. 6. [ I n 1 Cor. i x .
a m o n g t h e Jews, as t h e reader m a y be 19. where we have rracnv epavrbv loeAwo-a,
easily convinced b y perusing t h e Mosaic the sense is figurative. / made myself
ordinances respecting their tr eatm en t, every one's servant; I served or obliged
E x o d . xxi. 1—11, 20, 2 1 , 26, 27. Levit. every bodyf\
xxv. 3 9 — 5 5 . D e u t . xv. 12—18, which II. I n pass. To be enslaved or in bond-
will afford a striking contfast to t h e hea- age, in a figurative sense, [i. e. to obey,
t h e n institutions in this respect. A n d I follow. Rom. vi. 1 8 / 2 2 . ] occ. 1 Cor. vii.
have t h e r a t h e r transcribed t h e above af- 15. G a l . iv. 3 . T i t . ii. 3 . [Herodian, i.
fecting account of slavery according t o 13, 15.]
t h e Román law, because by i t we shall be Ao^i), ve, r¡, from Séxecrdaí receiving,
t h e better enabled to enter into t h e full namely, t h e g u e s t s . — A n entertainment, a
meaning and spirit of several passages of feast. occ. L u k e v. 2 9 . xiv. 1 3 . [Gen. xxi.
t h e N . T . particularly in t h e epistles of 8. xxvi. 3 0 . E s t . i. 3 * . ]
S t . P a u l . See 1 Cor. vii. 2 1 , 2 2 , 2 3 . A p c u w , OVTOQ, b, from '¿Spaxov ( H o m e r
E p h . vi. 5. 2 P e t . ii. 19. Comp. R o m . Odyss. x . T i n e 197.) 2 A o r . of cépKuv to
vi. 16. 1 Cor. ix. 19. see, which perhaps from t h e H e b . TT! to
I I . Christ is said, Phil. ii. 7. póp(j>r¡v proceed, go formarás; for t h e sight, or,
<Sá\y Xa€¿ji', to have taken the form qf a more philosophically speaking, t h e rays
servant, because h e t r u l y served h i s F a - qf light, by which we see any object, pro-
t h e r (comp. Isa. xiii. 1. xlix. 3, 6. Iii. 13. ceed only in straight Unes.—A dragón,
liii. 11.), not only in declaring his will to i. e. a large kind of serpent, so called from
men (see M a t . xv. 24. Rom. xv. 8 . ) , b u t his sight, which is very acute, (comp.
in submitting to t h e most servile offices "Oajie); b u t i n t h e N . T . i t is used only
for their salces. See M a t . x x . 2 6 — 2 8 . in a figurative sense for t h e devil, t h a t
L u k e xxii. 27. J o h n xiii. 1 3 , 14. oíd serpent, Rev. xii. 9. x x . 2. & al. Comp.
I I I . A servant of God, whose ministry Gen. iii. 1.
he uses in declaring his will t o m e n , as [Apácro-w Or Aparro), a n d in t h e middle
Moses a n d t h e Prophets, Rev. xv. 3 . x. 7, Apárropai, from cpa£ thejist. See Levit.
and Apostles, A c t s xvi. 17. (where see ii. 2 a n d 12. N u m b . v. 2 6 . See E u s t a t h .
Elsner) T i t . i. 1, who also cali themselves, ad Odyss. T . p . 707. 4 4 . Diod. Sic. xviii.
i n t h e same view, the servants of Christ. 17. Dionys. H a l . i x . 2 1 . I t is properly
See Rom. i. 1. Gal. i. 10. Phil. i. 1. 2 P e t . to endose in the fiist, a n d t h e n ] to take
i. 1. James i. 1. J u d e verse 1. Rev. i. 1. fast hold on. occ. 1 Cor. iii. 19, w h e r e
[ I n t h e O . T . mn> l l i f is similarly used, i t answers to t h e H e b . OÍ> to take, catch,
u

of Moses, Joshua, David, t h e P r o p h e t s , in J o b v. 1 3 , for which t h e L X X use c a -

E x o d . xiv. 3 1 . N u m b . xii. 7. Joshua i. 1. raXau§áj/w to take hold of.
xxiv. 2 9 . J u d g e s ii. 8 . P s . xxxvi. 1. J e r . A P A X M I f , rje, r'i, from SéSpaypai, perf.
vii. 25. I n 2 Cor. iv. 5. S¿\ae vpüv Sia pass. of t h e preceding Spáacria to hold,
'Ino-tív administering to you for Christ's clutch in the hand.—A drachm, so called
salee, i. e. occupied in teaching you Christ's according t o E u s t a t h i u s in II. iii. (whom
religión.] see in D a m m i Lexic. col. 2 6 1 . ) because
I V . A servant of God, or Christ, i. e. anciently equal i n valué to six dSoXót or
one who worships, serves, a n d obeys h i m . bars of iron, of such a size t h a t six of
See L u k e ii. 2 9 . 1 Cor. vii. 2 2 . E p h . vi. them were as m a n y as a m a n could clutch
6. 1 P e t . i i . 16.—of righteousness, who in his hand, ó W 'EIIIAEAPA'XGAI íSv-
earnestly conforms himself t o it. Rom. vi. varo xeíp. A n d henee t h e ñame being
]9.—of sin, who is enslaved to t h e prac- retained after t h e use of iron money
tice of it. J o h n viii. 3 4 . Rom. vi. 16, 17, ceased, t h e A t t i c drachm of silver was
19. 2 P e t . ii. 19. [ C o m p . ¿Elian. V . H . equal to t h e Román denarius, or about
ii. 4 1 . X e n . M e m . i. 3 , 11. Again, t h e seven-pence t h r e e farthings of our money.
occ. L u k e xv. 8, 9. [ T h e Spá-^pn of t h e
word is used of one who gives himself up
Oíd T e s t a m e n t was a golden corn equal
entirely to a n d depends on another, as in
to one-eightieth of an ounce. Hesychius
1 Cor. vii. 2 3 . D o not depend entirely, or
says, t h a t in brass a n d iron t h e drachm
make yourselves blind followers of men.
Man. V . H . ix. 1 9 . ]
AovAóítf, w, from §5X.os. * [See Athen. viii. p. 3 4 8 . F. And ímMyJi oc-
I . To reduce to servitude or slavery, curs in Diod. Sic. xvii. 1 0 5 . ]
 A Y N 203
was onc-eighth, in gold one-eiglitieth of
the ouuce. Sec Poli. Onora. ix. 60.]
\_Apépo) To run. See rpíy¿»-~\
Apéiravov, a, r o , from cpéirw lo crop, cul
off; or else dpliravov may be derived im-
mediately from tbe H e b . f i T i a sharp in-
slrument, wliicli the L X X render by Spt-
iravov, 1 Sam. xiii. 2 1 . — A sickle, a reap-
ing orpruning-hook. M a r k iv. 2 9 . Rev. xiv.
14. & al. [Joel iii. 15. Artemid. ii. 2 4 . ]
Apúpoc, a, ó, from oéúpopa perf. mid. of
Spépui.—A cotirse. I t properly denotes
Úie act of running ; and so the L X X ap-
ply it, 2 Sam. xviii. 27. & al. for the H e b .
¡ T i l l o * ; b u t in the N . T. it is only used
figuratively for a course of action or mi-
nisiration. occ. Acts xiii. 2 5 . xx. 24. 2
T i m . iv. 7. I n which last passage, as in
many others, t h e Apostle alludes to t h e
Grecian games, and particularly to t h a t
of running in a race. See Alberti.
AY'NAMAI.
I . To be oble, lo have power. M a t . iii.
9. ix. 2 8 . xvii. 19. & al. freq.—AíraaOai
AK¿£LV to be oble to hear, M a r k iv. 3 3 .
T h i s phrase, Raphelius has j u s t l y ob-
served, means t h e same as Svvaadcu /3a-
«ráfaj' to be able to bear, J o h n xvi. 1 2 ;
and he confirms this i n t e r p r e t a r o n by a
passage of A r r i a n , E p i c t e t . lib. i. cap. 2 9 .
a t the end, who uses it in t h e same sense.
Comp. Wetstein on M a r k .
I I . To be capable, have a capacily.
M a t . xix. 25. J o h n xiv. 17. 1 Cor. xv. 5 0 .
•—Our English word can comprehends
both t h e above senses. [ T h e word is used
also t o express capacity from knowledge,
skill; ovvaph'HC Ko\vp£av, who knew how
to swim. Acts xxvii. 4 3 . and perhaps M a t .
xvi. 3 . though SiaKpivíiv may be u n d e r -
stood, and t h e verb referred to Sense I .
X e n . Symp. iv. 64. Hell. v. 4, 8. B u t it
also expresses natural capability, as M a t .
v. 14. A cily on a hill cannot (from its
n a t u r e as to position) be hid. M a r k iv. 3 3 .
ix. 3 9 . (perhaps John v. 19.) vii. 7. xii.
39. 1 Cor. iii. 2. H e b . iv. 15. 1 J o h n iii.
9. Rev. ii. 2 . (where Súvy is for Bvvacrai.
Ion. cvvtai, and by crasis Zvvn, as in Soph.
Phil. 798. E u r . H c c . 2 5 7 , ' & al.) Sec
Xen. CEc. xi. 11. and Ages. xi. 10. Georg.
Hicrocrit. N . T . P . i. pp. 118 and 184,
and Wetstein N . T . t . ii. p . 7 5 3 . ]
I I I . To be able, or capable, justly,
rcasonably, or lawfully. Acts x . 4 7 . xxv.
11. 1 Cor. iii. 11. x. 2 1 . 1 Thess. ii. 6.
* [Tt is also u s e d for tlic course or place of run-
ning. See X e n . Ecuiit. iii. G. A r i s t o p h . N u b . 2 8 ,
and T b o m . JJag. in V o e u . ]
A Y N
I V . I t implies propriely, ov finess, as
L u k e xvi. 2,"0v ydp dvvycrrj íri óucoyopeír,
For you cannot (i. e. with propriety) be
any longer steward, [ a n d so in M a t . ix.
15. Schleusner and W a h l refer, M a r k ii.
7, to this sense, b u t I think it belongs to
Sense I. J o h n iii. 27- (See E r a s m u s O p p .
t. ix. p . 1509. C.) Acts iv. 20. (See
Glass. Philol. S. p . 4 1 3 . ed. D a t h e ) v. 3 9 .
x. 4 7 . x x v . 1 1 . 1 Cor. x. 2 1 . 2 Cor. xiii. 8.
So Gen. xliii. 3 2 . N u m b . ix. 6. D e u t .
xii. 17. See Palairet Obss. Phil. p . 315.]
V. \_To wish or will. Hesychius has
oíivacrdat, 8é\eiv, and another gloss to t b e
same purpose. Alberti cites T h e o p h r .
Char. c. vi. and Schleusner refers to notes
of Valckeneer on two passages of Herodo-
t u s (vii. 133. and ix. 44.) in neither of
which does t h e word oceur. H e m a y
mean vii. 163, t h o u g h there is no note of
Valckena;r's. I confess I cannot find any
decisive authority in good Greek for this
sense. B u t it is found in t h e L X X , J o b
vi. 7 ; and in M a r k vi. 5. He could do no
mighty works there, t h e Greek fathers,
Episcopius ( L e c t . Sacr. ad Apoc. xi. 2.)
Grotius (in l o e ) , Heinsius, Saubert, ( O p .
Posth. p . 72.) Deyling, (Obss. Sacr. I .
Diss. xlvi. p . 226. ed. 3.) Bentley, ( S e r -
mons on Atheism, Serm. vi. p . 180. edit.
1809), and m a n y others, decide t h a t t h e
verb has this sense. Bentley observes,
with g r e a t justice, t h e frequent change,
in all * languages, between words expres-
sive of will and power. Deyling thinks
t h a t the word has the same sense in A c t s
iv. 2 0 . J o h n vii. 7. 2 Cor. xiii. 8. Rev. ii.
2, which are referred above to another
head. Bentley also refers t h e two first to
this sense. W i t s i u s (Meletem. Sacr. p .
342.) has t h e following i n t e r p r e t a t i o n :
Christ did not do miraeles usually, except
at t h e request of others, and where t h e y
had faith in his power of doing t h e m .
Henee, as t h e people were not believers,
he could not do any miraeles t h e r e . T h i s ,
however, as Wolf says, comes to t h e same
meaning as he would not. Olcarius (on
M a t t h e w , p . 422.) proposes t h e same i n -
terpretation in substance, by saying t h a t ,
from t h e disbelief of t h e people, no sick,
&c. were b r o u g h t to Christ, he had no oc-
casion of doing any miraeles. So Rosen-
miiller. Kuinoel, with others, translates,
He did no mighty works; and observes,
t h a t Biivapai is often r e d u n d a n t , as D e u t .
* [ S e e V i r g . i E n . x i i . 177- O v i d M e t . iii. 430'.
Scha-ffer. ad Phaxlr. iii. 7, >>•]
 A Y N 204 A YN

xii. 17. Gen. xviii. 17. xliii. 3 2 . Jolin xii. eleven or twelve later M S S . after Só^ns add
39. See Gregor. de Dial. p . 5G. Fischer Kai ovvápewe, and this reading is favoured
ad P l a t . Phoed. 4 9 , 4 2 . Krebs. ad Decret. by several ancient versions, and received
A t h e n . p. 76.—Kidder says (Demonst. P . into t h e text by Griesbach.
ii. p. 5 9 ) t h a t t h e Arabic versión is, He 3. Of the divine essence in general.
did not, and t h a t this is agreeable to t h e M a t . xxvi. 64. M a r k xiv. 62. L u k e xxii.
Hebrew, which says, That cannot be which 69, in which passages t h e expressions of
ought not, or shall not be. So he explains sitling at the right hand of poner, or of
D e u t . xii. 17. xvi. 15. Josh. ix. 19. & al. the power of God, denote t h e communi-
H e therefore says t h i s place means, It cation of divine power and rule to Jesús
was not Jit that Christ should do miracles Christ, represented in such a posture as
there, as the people had not faith."} to appear a partaker of t h a t royal sceptre,
Avvapie, wc, A t t . £ W £ , from Sívapai. which was in the right hand of God,
I. Power, energy, strength, abilily to seated as a k i n g , on his throne. T h e e x -
act, as of God, M a t . xxii. 2 9 . Rom. i. 20. pression immediately refers to t h a t solemn
& al.—of Christ, L u k e iv. 36. H e b . i. 3 . declaration, P s . e x . 1, 2. A n d t h e reader
& al.—of angels, 2 P e t . ii. 11.—of t h e may find this subject excellently and a t
heavens, M a t . xxiv. 2 9 . M a r k xiii. 2 5 . — large illustrated by V i t r i n g a , Observ.
of man, M a t . xxv. 15. Acts iii. 12. [ W h e n Sacr. lib. ii. cap. 4, 5 . [ T h e Jews called
used of speech, doctrine, &c. i t expresses God m i m . See Buxtorf. L e x . Talmud,
their efficacy, power qf persuading, ex- p. 3 8 5 . and Carpzov. Exerc. ad Heb. i. 3 .
ciling, &c. as Rom. i. 4. év Hwápu, so as I n Tobit. i. 5 , t h e word is used of Baal.]
lo succecd in persuading, and verse 16, | III. Abundance, as vis, power, is used
1 Cor. i. 18, is, by Schleusner, aod per- in L a t i n , and Vfi iu H e b . J o b x x x i . 2 5 .
haps rightly, referred to this head, 2 Cor. Ezek. xxviii. 4, and poner vulgarly in
iv. 7. Phil. iii. 10. the efficacy of his re- English. occ. Rev. xviii. 3 .
surrection in amending men's Uves, (or, IV. Forcé, import, of a language. 1
according to Macknight, its power in Cor. xiv. 1 1 . £See iElian. V . H . ix. 1 6 . ]
confirming my faith and hope of salva- V. AvvápELC, éwv, cu, Attic, for ¿ W á -
11011.") 2 T i m . iii. 5. the power qf piety, pus, twv, ai, Angelical powers, angels,
which shows itselfin works, H e b . vi. 5. the
whether good or bad. Rom. viii. 3 8 . I P e t .
powers of the life to come, where, as Wolfiii. 2 2 . Comp. 1 Cor. xv. 2 4 . E p h . i. 2 1 .
says, " t h e goods of heaven are called Sv- [ I t is a disputed point, whether, in
víiptic, from their efficacy on t h e minds Rom. viii. 3 8 , angelical powers, or per-
of believers." W e may also refer, 1 Cor. sons in power on earth be referred to.
iv. 1 9 Cwhat effecl they produced) and 2 0 , Angels are directly mentioned j u s t before,
to t h e same head. W a h l refers A c t s iv. and this seems to militate against a repe-
3 3 , and 2 T i m . i. 7, to this s e n s e ; Schl. tition of t h e mention of them. Limborch
translates i t there, liberty or freedotn.] ad loe. and Elsner (Obss. Sacr. p . 43.) a r e
O n 2 Cor. viii. 3 , Wetstein cites from doubtful, Olearius (see W o l f ) , H a m -
Polybius Kara Sivapiv, and from P l u t a r c h mond, Schleusner, W a h l , and Rosenmiiller,
virep Sívapw, used in t h e same senses as refer the phrase to earthly rulers, b u t Wolf
by t h e Apostle. and others are against t h e m , referring ay-
yeXoi, apxai, and Svváptic to angels, and
I I . I t is used as a title,
1. Qf Christ. 1 Cor. i. 2 4 . Comp. Acts saying, t h a t t h e J e w s called angels pow-
viii. 1 0 * . ers or virlues (See J a l k u t Chadasch, fol.
89. col. 4.) as Valesius ad E u s e b . p . 2 5 4 .
2. Of the Holy Ghost. L u k e i. 3 5 .
(and see Praep. Evang. iv. 6.) shows t h a t
(Comp. M a t . i. 18, 20.) L u k e xxiv. 4 9 .
t h e Greeks did. A n d 1 P e t . iii. 2 2 ,
(Comp. Acts i. 8. x. 38.) G r o t i u s r e -
where t h e same words occur, is from t h e
m a r k s ou L u k e i. 17, t h a t as often as t h e
context in favour of this opinión. I n t h e
word (Sívapts is mentioned together with
two other places angels are certainly
Trvívpa spirit, a power of ihe Spirit
meant.]
greater t h a n usual is intended. H e in-
stances in L u k e i. 3 5 . Acts x. 3 8 . 1 Cor. V I . Avvíipuc, ai, Mighty, i. e. miracu-
ii. 4. I Thess. i. 5., where see Macknight. lous, powers, M a t . [xiii. 54.] xiv. 2. M a r k
— I n 1 P e t . iv. 14, t h e Alexandrian and vi. 14, 'A¿ Svvápeie kvEpySaiv iv avrio,
The or these mighty, or miraculous, pow-
* See A l l i x ' s J u d g n i c n t , p - 1 3 3 , 4 . and Enficld's
ers opérate in him. [ A c t s vi. 8.]
H i s t . of P h i l o s . v o l . ii. p . 1 6 1 — 1 6 3 . VII Avvápeie, ai, mighty, i. e. mira-
 A Y N 205 A Y 2

culous, ivorks, or miracles, effccted by a u n d e r s t a n d Karnyop¿iv a n d t r a n s í a t e , they

supernatural a n d divine pomer. M a t . vii. who are able lo discharge the office of ac-
22. xi. 2 0 , 2 1 . xiii. 5 8 . A c t s xix. 1 1 . cusers.') 1 Cor. i. 2 6 . Rev. x. 15. So X e n .
1 Cor. xii. 2 8 . Gal. iii. 5. H e b . ii. 4. de Rep. Lac. i. 1. See his Hell. vii. 4. 3 4 .
Comp. H e b . vi. 5. [ I n 1 Cor. xii. 2 8 . i t T h u c y d . ii. 25. and Ecclus. xxix. 2 5 . I t
seems r a t h e r , one endued mith the power also frequently signifies, one able by skill
of morking miracles. So Schl. and or knowledge to do any thing. See A c t s
Wahl.] xviii. 2 4 . Schl. understands L u k e xxiv.
V I I I . The pomers or hosts of heaven, 19, and Acts vii. 2 2 . in t h e same w a y . ]
i. e. the stars. Avvapte and vis in L a t i n I I . Avvaróv, ró, used as a substantive,
often denote t h e armies or forces of a Power. Rom. ix. 2 2 .
kingdom. See T h u c y d . iv. 2 6 . I s o c P a - I I I . I n a passive sense, Possible, capa-
neg. 2 6 . Polyb. v. 3 3 . Flor. iv. 2. A n d ble qf being done. M a t . x i x . 2 6 . [xxiv. 2 4 .
henee, Svvápuerwv ¿pavwv (like D'Dti/Tl N3¥ xxvi. 3 9 . ] M a r k ix. 2 3 . Acts ii. 2 4 . x x .
in Heb. Gen. ii. 1. which t h e L X X render 16. & a l .
by uparía in 2 Chron. xxxiii. 5 . J e r . AVVLO, from Svw, which s e e . — T o go off,
xxxiii. 22. and b y Sívapie in P s . xxxiii. 6. or set, as t h e sun. occ. L u k e iv. 4 0 .
Is. xxxiv. 4. D a n . viii. 10. 2 Kings xvii. AY'O, A t t . AY'íl, ¿Í, ¿li, ra, from t h e
16.) denote the stars, or splendid bodies Chald. YÍ two.—A noun of number, Two.
with which t h e heavens are adorned. M a t . M a t . iv. 18. xviii. 16. x x i . 3 1 . xxiv. 4 0 ,
xxiv. 29. B u t in 2 Chron. xviii. 18. 4 1 . xxv. 2 2 . & al. freq. I n t h e N . T . Svo
(Comp. Neh. ix. 6.) and 1 K i n g s xxii. 9. is used for t h e nom. gen. a n d accus. of all
t h e phrase denotes the angels, whence g e n d e r s ; and t h e inspired penmen, r a t h e r
Schl. explains ayyeXoi SvváptLoe áurS i n (as it should seem) t h a n express a word
2 Thess. i. 7. B u t others take this to be in t h e dual form (of which there are none
only His powerful angels, and so I j u d g e either in t h e N . T . or in t h e L X X versión
from R u t h iii. 11. J u d g . iii. 2 9 . xviii. 2 . of t h e O í d ) , employ t h e poetic Sval or
xx. 46. 1 Sam. x . 26- I n Acts iv. 2 . and ¡Svo-iv for t h e dative of Svo. M a t . vi. 2 4 .
1 Cor. v. 4. t h e word is perhaps, au- xxii. 4 0 . & al. Aval, however, is used by
ihority, right, a n d so Schl. makes i t i n Thucydides * , as well as b y t h e L X X ,
Rev. iii. 8.] J u d . xv. 1 3 . See W e t s t e i n on M a t . vi.
Avvapów, LO, from ívvápai.— To make 24. L u k e x v i . 1 3 .
strong or pomerful, to strengthen. Pass. AY S.—A partióle used only in compo-
V

Awattóopai, epai, To be strengthened. sition. I t is t h e opposite to Iv well, and

occ. Col. i. 1 1 . [ P s . Ixviii. 2 8 . D a n . i x . denotes badly, grievously, hardly, diffi-
27. Synes.de Provid. p . 100. B . ] culty.
Avvá<zn,Q, H , ó, from Svvapai.—A mighty, Auo-€á=raicroe, a, ó, r¡, from Svg hardly,
or pomerful one. and ¿SaTa/cróc borne, carried, which from
I . A potentate, a sovereign, spoken of ¡3aaT¿i'(ti) to bear, carry.—Hardly borne
men. occ. L u k e i. 52.—of God. occ. 1 T i m . or carried, grievous to be borne, occ. M a t .
vi. 15. Comp. 2 M a c . xii. 15. x v . 2 3 , 2 9 . xxiii. 4. L u k e x i . 4 6 . T h e L X X have
Ecclus. xlvi. 5. once used this word for t h e H e b . bur-
I I . A man of pomer, though not sove- densome. Prov. xxvii. 3 .
reign, a great man, a grandee. occ. Acts Avaerrepía, ag, i¡, from Uve d e -
viii. 2 7 . [ L e v . xix. 15. J e r . xxxiv. 19.] noting illness or sickness, and tvrepov a
t§gp° Awarén), ió, from dvvaróc.—To be bomel, intestine, which from ívrog within.
pomerful. occ. 2 Cor. xiii. 3 . [and perhaps —A dysentery, a diarrhwa, or flux,
Rom. xiv. 4.] wherein t h e stools are mixed with blood,
Avvaróg, í¡, óv, from hvvapai. and t h e howels miserably tormented with
I. I n an active, or neuter sense, Pomer- gripes f," a bloody flux. occ. A c t s x x v i ü .
ful, mighty, able, strong. L u k e i. 4 9 . 8. [This, says Maeris, is t h e A t t i c form,
xxiv. 19. A c t s vii. 2 2 . R o m . iv. 2 1 . x v . the Hellenic is Svo-evrépiov. I t occurs
1. & al. [ I t seems t o be properly, able Polyb. xxxii. 2 5 . 14. and t h e Adjective
to do any thing. See L u k e xiv." 2 1 . 2 tSvo-evTEpLKÓs, P l u t a r c h t . vi. p . 3 8 4 . x. p .
Cor. xii. 10. J a m e s iii. 2 . a n d henee, to 483. R e i s k . j
get t h e sense of pomerful, &c. I n 2 Cor. Ilglr AviTEpprivevrog,
3
B , ó, fj, from Svg
x. 4. it is ejfectual. I t frequently sig-
nifies, one who is pomerful by sitúation or * S e c Maittaire's D i a l e c t s , p . 34. B .
office, chief men. Acts xxv. 5. (though others f N e w and C o m p l e t e D i c t i o n a r y of A r t s .
 A Y 2 206 A £1 M

hardly, and kpfxr¡vívros explained, which j I . [Words of ill ornen. P l u t . ii. p . 3 4 1 .

from tppr¡vevb> to explain.—Hardly, or and viii. 3 2 3 . R e i s k : and henee,, abuse,
with difficulty, explained, hard to be ex-, and sometimes, wickedness, crimes, either
plained. occ. H e b . T. 1 1 . [ A r t e m . iii. 67. as things of ill ornen, or objeets qf abuse f\
P h i l . de Somn. t . ii. p . 6 4 9 . ] I I . Evil report, infamy. occ. 2 Cor. vi.
AvcrKÓXoe, n, b, r), from (Svg importing. 8. [ 1 Mac. vii. 3 8 . iii. Eccl. i. 4 3 . D i o n .
difficulty, and tcokovfood. H a l . vi. 4 2 . Aristid. ii. p . 4 8 2 . ]
I . P r o p e r l y , Difficult in taking food, AY'Q, Bvvu), or Svpi.—It seems properly
squeamish. to denote, in general, to go in, or under.
I I . I t is applied t o any t h i n g t h a t is So Scapula, subeo, ingredior.
difficult or disagreeable. occ. M a r k x. 2 4 , I . To go under, i. e. t h e enlightened
where it seems plainly to imply t h e fas- hemisphere, to go off, set, (subeo, ingre-
tidiousness with which t h e rich are b u t dior, occido, M i n t e r t . ) as t h e í/Xtoc or
t o o a p t t o receive, or in effect t o reject, solar light doth, of which H o m e r II. i.
t h e humbling and mortifying doctrines of line 6 0 5 ,
t h e Gospel, which are indeed far from
being suited to t h e taste of a proud, a — K C Í T É S U Xá/xirpov tp¿o$ r,thíoto.

covetous, o r a luxurious worldling. [Xen. T h e s u n ' s resplendent light w a s set.

GBc. x x . 10. A r r i a n , de Venat. xviii. 4 . ]
{§§p° AvtxKÓXiúQ, A d v . from SvaicoXoe, occ. M a r k i. 3 2 . L u k e iv. 4 0 . [ G e n .
which s e e . — H a r d l y , with difficulty. occ. xxviii. 1 1 . M i c a h i i i . 6. X e n . A n . ii. 2 . 2 .
M a t . xix. 2 3 . M a r k x . 2 3 . L u k e xviii. 2 4 . jElian. V . H . iv. 1.]—In t h e L X X t h e
[ P o l i . Onom. iii. 3 2 . ] verb is frequently used in this sense for
Avcrpr), ije, I], from Svw or Svvo) to go off, t h e H e b . * « a to go off.
set, as t h e sun, or solar light. I I . To invest, put on clothes, i. e. to go
I . The going off, or setting of the sun, into, or under t h e m , as i t were. Thus
t h o u g h I do not íind t h a t t h e N . in t h e H o m e r says n o t only ¿Wat riv^a, but
singular is used in this sense; b u t henee ¿Wat iv rév^ecri, literally io go into, i. e.
I I . Avapal, wv, c u , The setting of t h e to p u t on, armour. T h e simple V. occurs
sun. T h u s t h e profane writers apply i t , not in t h i s Iatter sense in t h e N . T . b u t
and t h e L X X in G e n . xv. 12, 17. Exod. henee EVSÍUJ, ÍKSV<¡>, &C.
xvii. 12. & a l . [ I s . i x . 11.] AtíicWa, ÉL, ai, ra. Undeclined, from
I I I . The western parts of t h e e a r t h or outü two, and ¿ora ten.—Twelve, M a t . ix.
heavens where t h e sun seis, the west. occ. 2 0 . x. 1. & al. freq. A s t h e G r e e k ñame
M a t . viii. 1 1 . xxiv. 2 7 . L u k e xiii. 2 9 . is derived from Svu two, and otra ten, so
Rev. x x i . 1 3 . L u k e xii. 54, on which t e x t t h e E n g . twelve, Saxon t p e l p , is from
comp. 1 Kings xviii. 4 3 — 4 6 , and Shaw's r p a two, and belipan to leave, i. e. two left,
Travels, p . 3 2 9 , t o which I add from or remaining above t h e first ten. Comp.
M o n s . Volney's Voyage en Syrie, tom. i. u n d e r "EvSeica.
p . 2 9 7 , " L'ouest & le soud-ouest, qui r e g - AojSémroc, r¡, ov, from ¿wc?£tca.—The
n e n t (en Syrie & Palestine) de Novembre iwelfth. occ. Rev. xxi. 2 0 .
en Fevrier, sont, pour me servir de l'ex- !¡§p° AiúíeiccifvXov, a, rb, from twelve,
pression des Árabes, les peres des pluies. and <pv\r) tribe.—Twelve tribes. occ. A c t s
The west and south-wesl winds, which in xxvi. 7. Comp. u n d e r 'I¿$aioe.
Syria and Palestine prevail from N o - Awpa, aros, rb, q. Sópnpa, which from
vember to F e b r u a r y , a r e , t o borrow an Sopéai to build, and t h i s from Sépio the
expression of t h e Arabs, the fothers of same, which see.
showers." [Josh. i. 4 . X e n . A n a b . vii. 3 . I. A house. T h u s generally used in the
34.] ancient Greek writers, b u t not in t h e N . T .
{HIT AvavónroQ, tí, b, i¡, from Svg hardly, I I . The roqf of a house, which, i t is
a n d vonrÓQ understood.—Hardly under- w e l l k n o w n , in J u d e a and t h e neighbour-
stood, hard to be understood. occ. 2 P e t . i n g countries was commonly flat, as i t is
iii. 16. [ D i o g . 4 . ix. 1 3 . ] in t h a t p a r t of t h e world to this day. See
[Av(T<j>r¡pÉw, a. To abuse, or properly, M a t . x . 2 7 . xxiv. 17. Acts x . 9. W h e -
to speak words of ill ornen. T h i s is t h e t h e r t h i s import of t h e word be merely
r e a d i n g of some M S S . in 1 Cor. iv. 13. Hellenistical, or n o t , has been doubted.
See 1 M a c . vii. 4 1 . ]
Avaénpía, ac, //, from cve badly, and * C o m p . H e b . a n d E n g . L e x i c ó n i n ¡ a and
<¡>npr¡ fame, report. IMS*.
 AQP 207 A ¡QP

T h e L X X indeed (unless in Mal. i. 3.) %ápic are often joined. See Rom. v. 15,
use it in this sense, and generally for t h e 17. Diodor. Sic. iii. 3 7 and 72. Joseph.
H e b . ii a flat roof; [ a s for ex. Josh. ii. A n t . V . i. 1 6 . ]
6, 8. 1 Sam. i x . 2 5 , 2 6 . P s . cxxix. 6.] Awpeav, A d v . I t is properly t h e accu-
b u t t h e most usual meaning of Sapa in sative case of Swpea, used adverbially, q. d.
the Greek classics, on t h e other hand, is K a r a Swpeav for a gift.
a house or chamber. (See Wolfius on M a t . I . Freely, gratis, as a free gift. Mat.
x. 27.) E u s t a t h i u s however (aud, I think, x. 8. Rom. iii. 24. 2 Cor. xi. 7.
j u s t l y ) explains Swpaai in Homer's Odyss. II. Undeservedly, without cause, occ.
x . line 5 5 4 , t o mean a flat roof, a n d A l - J o h n xv. 2 5 . T h i s seems an Hellenistical
berti, p . 5 0 4 , shows t h a t Herodian [ i i . sense of t h e word, in which i t is used b y
6. 19. vii. 1 1 , 1 2 . ] applies t h e N . in t h e the L X X , P s . x x x v . 19. lxix. 5. cix. 3 .
same sense * . I t may be worth adding, Lam. iii. 52, for t h e H e b . tzun. [ A q . Tob.
t h a t Josephus likewise uses i t for a jlat ii. 3 . ]
roof. A n t . lib. xiii. cap. 5 . § 3 . Tíóv 'Se III. In vain, without cause, occ. G a l .
'ItíSaíwv enrb AQ'MATOS iwl ASTMA ii. 2 1 . [ J o b i. 9. Ezek. xiii. 1 0 . ]
Sia-mnbwvrwv, B u t t h e Jews leaping from Awpéw, w, from Swpov.—Awpeópai, Spai,
roof lo roof—So D e Bel. lib. iv. cap. 1. mid. and pass. To give freely. occ. M a r k
§ 4. ¿urOTi-Urov-eQ—TWV AQMA'TíiN, fall- xv. 4 5 . 2 P e t . i. 3 , 4 , in which last verse
i n g from t h e roofs. A n d to illustrate it m a y be translated either actively or
w h a t our Saviour says, M a t . x. 2 7 , we passively, b u t I r a t h e r prefer t h e active
observe, t h a t Josephus, D e Bel. lib. ii. sense; for t h u s i t is used in t h e i m m e -
cap. 2 1 . § 5, tells u s , t h a t he himself diately preceding verse, a n d so t h e L X X
harangued t h e Jews a t Tarichaase, áva§ae apply t h e perf. pass. of this verb, G e n .
kirl rb réyoe, having got upon the roof; x x x . 20. [ E s t . viii. 1.]
and t h a t t h e modern eastern houses are
Aw'prjaa, aroQ, rb, from SeSwpnpai perf.
commonly low, not more t h a n two stories
pass. of Swpéopai. A gift, a free gift. occ.
high f . — O n L u k e v. 19, see under 'ATTO-
Rom. v. 16. James i. 17.
%eyd?w. [Schleusner says, t h a t in Acts
x. 9. it means an upper chamber, and he
Awpov, a, rb, from t h e obsolete V . Sów
quotes Jerome, E p . ad Sunniam, a n d on to give, which see u n d e r AíSwpi.
D a n . vi. 10. I n t h e E p . ad Sunniam, J e - I . A gift, of God t o m a n . occ. E p h .
rome says distinctly, t h a t Swpa means a ii. 8.
flat roof See Irmisch on Herodian. i. I I . A gift, present, of m a n to m a n , occ.
12. 1 6 . ] Rev. x i . 10.
I I I . Most usually, A gft, or offering,
AíüpEct, a c , »/, from* Swpov.—A gift, a of m a n to God. M a t . v. 2 3 . x v . 5. M a r k
free gift. See Acts ii. 3 8 . Rom. v. 15, vii. 1 1 . H e b . v. 1. xi. 4. Comp. M a t . ii.
17. J o h n iv. 10, where Campbell, whom 1 1 . where see Suicer Thesaur. in AíSavoe.
see, renders i t bounty, as t h e N . is used On M a t . xxiii. 18, we m a y observe t h a t
W i s d . xvi. 2 5 . [ I n E p h . iv. 7. i t seems Josephus, in his l s t book against Apion,
t o be the benignity, kindness. Awpe'a and § 2 2 , expressly mentions t h e oath b y t h e
Corban or Awpov, as peculiar to t h e J e w s ,
and observes from Theophrastus, t h a t t h e i r
* [ A d d TEsop. F a b . x i . and see Gataker d e S t y l .
N . T . c. 2 3 . Schwarz. C o m m . p . 3 8 5 . ] Tyrian neighbours were by their own laws
-f- See Shaw's Travcls, p . 207- B u s b e q u i i E p i s t . prohibited from using it. Comp. K o p é á V
T u r e . iii. p . 1 5 0 , 1. " T h e houses (says D r . below. [ I t especially meant, the money
R u s s e l ) consist of a ground floor, which is gene- put into the ireasury. L u k e xxi. ] . a n d
rally arched, a n d a n upper story w h i c h i s flat o n
the top, and either terrassed with hard plaster, or
thence, was p u t for the Ireasury itself.
paved with stone.'' N a t . H i s t . of A l e p p o , p . 2 . Luke xxi. 4 . comp. M a r k xii. 4 3 . ]

E.
E A N
e. T h e fifth letter of t h e Greek
i» alphahet, corresponding in order and
power to t h e H e b . n He, but its form is
t h a t of the Samaritan or Pheuician He
t u r n e d to t h e r i g h t - h a n d ; and there is
little doubt but its ancient ñame in Greek
was nearly the same as in Hebrew or
Phenician, though the latter Greeks cali
i t E psilon, (E -JJÍXOV) i. e. E slender, or
short, to distinguish it from their H Eta
or E long, j u s t as they called their O
O fiiKpbv, or small, in contradistiuction to
their long O named £1 péya, or great.
See Thomasinus's Preface to his Glossa-
rium H e b . p. 87.
"EA, I n t e r j — I t may be understood as
a n a t u r a l exclamation of indignation or
grief, like Ah ! Hah ! as it is often used
by the Greek writers (see Wetstein and
R a p h e l i u s ) * ; and t h u s Grotius makes it
parallel to t h e H e b . partióles Mil, ¡"iriN;
or else i t may be taken as t h e 2d pers.
sing. imperative of t h e V . íáw lo suffer,
let alone. So t h e Vulg. renders it in
L u k e sitie, and our own translation in
both t h e following passages let alone, occ.
M a r k i. 24. Luke iv. 3 4 . T h e former in-
t e r p r e t a r o n seems preferable.
'Eíiv, A Conjunction, from av, or imme-
diately from the H e b . tDH, if, to which
this word, when used in the L X X , ge-
nerally answers ; or else iav may be from
t h e Chald. ¡n if, for which t h e L X X use
it, E z r a iv. 13. v. 17. D a n . ii. 5, 6 ; or
from the H e b . \T\ hehold, to which it cor-
responds in the L X X of Job xl. 2 3 , or 18.
1. Conditional, If on condition that,
supposing that. M a t , iv. 9. vii. 10. viii. 2.
& al. freq.
2. Concessive, Though, although. 1 Cor.
iv. 15. 2 Cor. x. 8. Comp. M a r k viii. 3 6 .
3 . Repeated, 'TLav—'Eáv Whether—or.
Rom. xiv. 8.
4. When. 2 Cor. v. 1. 1 J o h n iii. 2 .
J o h n [vi. 62.] xii. 32, (where see W h i t b y
and Doddridge) [xiii. 20. xiv. 3 . xvi. 7.
& al.] So Clement, 1 Cor. § 44, 'EA'N
KoifiñQwcriv, When they were dead.
5. Indefinite, answering to t h e E n g .
—soever, and L a t . •—cunque. [ I t is so
* See Polycen. ii. 3 0 . A c h i l l . T a t . vi. p. 3 3 9 .
20S
E A Y
used, when it follows OQ, I% !>, or ó'o-oc,
bo-ade, and óVa.] See Mat. v. 19. viii.
19. x. 14. 42. xviii. 19. 1 Cor. vi. 18.
Comp. "Av 2. T h a t this use of iav is
not peculiar to the L X X , and the sacred
penmen of the N . T . but frequent also in
t h e purest Greek writers, may be seen in
Zeunius's edition of Vigerus, D e Idio-
tismis, cap. viii. sect. 6. reg. 14. p . 5 1 6 .
[ I t must be observed, t h a t , íáv and av are
so little different, t h a t H e r m á n on Viger,
proposes in the Classics to correct alwavs av
for iáv. H e r m . ad Vig. p. S55. No. 313.]
6. 'Eciv pr¡, If not, unless, except. M a t .
v. 20. [ J o h n iii. 22.] Rom. x. 15. But,
in an adversative sense. Gal. ii. 16. Comp.
'Ei p'i u n d e r 'Ei 8.
'TLávwep, AConjunction, from iav if, and
7T£p e m p h a t . — i f indeed, if truly. occ.
Heb. iii. 6, 14. vi. 3.
'Eavrov, ije, a, A Pronoun wanting
t h e nominative case, and compounded of
t h e Ionic eo, for á, qf his own, and áu-5
him.
I. Himself, herself, or itself. See M a t .
xii. 26. ix. 2 1 . — T h i s pronoun is pro-
perly of the third person, b u t is sometimes
used for t h e second, as Rom. xiii. 9. Mat.
iii. 9. xvi. 8. xxiii. 3 1 . 2 Cor. vi. 4.
Comp. 1 Thess. v. 13, and Wolfius there ;
and for t h e first, A c t s xxiii. 14. Rom.
viii. 2 3 . xv. 1. These uses of t h e word
are not peculiar to the sacred p e n m e n ;
the classical Greek writers apply it in like
manner, as Schmidius h a t h shown on Mat.
iii. 9, (see Pole Synops.); and as might
easily be pi'oved from numerous other in-
stances. B u t observe, t h a t in Rom. xiii.
9, eleven M S S , three of which ancient,
read atavrbv. See Mili and Wetstein.
[ T a k e as examples of the l s t person,
Polyb. ii. 3 7 . 2 . iElian. V. H . i. 32. T h u -
cyd. i. 82. See B u t t m a n . § 114. not. 5.
M a t t h . § 4 8 9 . Pisch. ad Well. t. ii. p .
2 3 9 . ; of t h e 2d sing. iElian. V. H . i. 2 1 .
^Eschyl. Agam. v. 1308., of the 2d Plur.
Polyb. xviii. 6. 4.]
I I . Plur. One another. See E p h . iv.
32. Col. iii. 16. J u d e ver. 20. [ A d d
M a r k x. 26. xi. 3 1 . J o h n xii. 19. Rom. i-
24, 2 7 . 1 Thess. v. 13. Xen. Mem. iii. 5.
2. and 16. T h u c . iii, 8 1 . Soph. A n t i q .
 E A Y 209

153. See Perizon. ad ^Elian. V. H . i. 2 1 . from which t h e glory of all t h e elect fo

Reitz. ad Lucian. ii. p. 98. Matthioe § 4 8 9 . the end of world will be derived. Again,
Fisch. ad Well. ii. p . 2 4 1 . ] in E p h . ii. 15. iv iavro) is by his inter-
I I I . I t sometimes denotes a person's vention. Rosenmüller seems to t h i n k it
home. T h u s J o h n x x . 10, rcpós eavréo to is t h e same as iv rrj crapKÍ eavrS by the
their own home. So L u k e xxiv. 12, sufferings endured in his person. In Acts
¿nrijXde rrpós kavróv, he rvent to his own xxviü. 16. James ii. 17. KaCT kavróv is,
home. See Griesbach. T h u s t h e French Alone, by one's self, (and so npóe kavróv
say, chez eux. Comp. under IIpoc I I L in Luke xviii. 11.) See Polyb. i. 24. 1.
1. [ S e e N u m b . xxiv. 28. Prov. xv. 27. X e n . Mein. iii. 5 4 . ]
Gen. xliii. 3 1 . 1 Sam. xxvi. 12. Joseph. 'Eáw.
A n t . x. 10. 3. Polyb. v. 9 3 . 1. So ad I . To permit, suffer. M a t . xxiv. 4 3 .
sese rediré in P l a u t u s Menoeehm. v. 2. 12. L u k e iv. 4 1 . & al. L u k e xxii. 5 1 , 'EOYE
Hap l a u r a is, in his own house. 1 Cor. xvi. ecos TÚTB, " Let this suffice—Let pass
2. Xen. M e m . ii. 13. 3.] what is done—Enough of this—No more
[ I V . 'EJ/ kavrü yevéndai. To come to qf this." Campbell, whom see, and comp.
one's self, as after faintiug or stupefac- M a t . xxvi. 5 2 , 5 3 . J o h n xviii. I I . D i o -
tion. Acts xii. 11. See D'Orvill. ad dati renders L u k e xxii. 5 1 , as if there was
Charit. vi. l . p . 510. ed. Lips. and Locell. a comma after id-e, " Lasciate, non piii;.
ad Xen. E p h . p. 228. Polyb. i. 49. 8. X e n . Have done, no more." R u t K y p k e , whom
Anab. i. 5. 17.] see, " t h i n k s t h a t t h e words, iáre ewtj
[ V . 'E¿c kavrbv epyeo-dai. Originally this TÚTB were spoken to t h e men who were
had t h e same meaning as I V . ; b u t thence about to carry off Christ as a prisoner,
it carne to signify, To return to a beiler and translates them, desist so far, i. e.
mind after being vicious. L u k e xv. 17. leave me a t liberty u n t i l I shall have
Kee Schwarz. Comm. L i n g . G r . p. 388.J] healed t h e m a n , whose ear is cut off, a n d
[ V i . 'A<¡> éaurS, Of one's self, qf one's
afterwards I will make no resistance t o
own accord, qf one's own power, or at
your carrying me away bound. After eáre
is to be understood ¡xi, leave me at liberty.
one's own bidding. J o h n vii. 18. xi. 5 1 .
comp. A c t s v. 3 8 , a n d L X X in Exod.
v. 19. 2 Cor. iii. 5. ( I n t h e two last i t
xxxii. 9. J u d . xi. 3 7 . J o b vii. 1 6 ; after
is power.) L u k e xii. 5 7 - 2 Cor. x. 7. See
r á - a supply xpóvB. Polybius likewise uses
M a r k l . ad L y s . O r a t . xxxi. p . G03.J]
É'WC r a r a elliptically for so long." Comp.
[JVII. 'EJ/ iavrü. In one's mind, within.
Doddridge. [Sch!. says t h e meaning is,
Mat. iii. 9. ix. 3 , ' 2 1 . J o h n v. 26. vi. 5 3 !
Be content, acquiesce, do not go fur-
M a r k v. 30. J o h n vi. 61. xi. 38. Acts x.
ther, do not offer violencc. Wahl trans-
3. O t h e r phrases are eo'íáí,eiv iv kavrá. lates, Desist (from revenging me) ; so
J o h n xiii. 3 2 . which is difficult. Kuinoel far! i. e. what is done is enough, and
after Heuman says, t h a t t h e words iv supposes the words directed to t h e disci-
lav-cfi are reclundant, and added only be- ples. So Rosenm. Kuinoel and Bretschn.J]
cause iv ¿ivTto stood in t h e former p a r t of
the verse. Rosenmüller avoids a clear ex- I I . To let go, let fall. occ. Acts xxvii.
planation, saying, " God will glorify him 40. Comp. under Hepiaipéoo II.
by himself i. e. by raising him from t h e 'EOoiUijmiTa, ¿1, a, ra, Indeclinable,
dead, t a k i n g him to heaven, &c.—'Ei/ from e€dopoc the seventh.—Seventy, i. e.
iavroi either by himself, or with himself." seven tens. occ. L u k e x. 1, 17- Acts vii.
L a m p e doubts whether l a u r a here relates 14. xxiii. 2 3 .
to God or Christ. If to t h e first, God '~E£SopyiicóvTae'£„ from eÉSopíjKovra, and
glorifies Christ in himself because by him- e'(, six.—Seventy-six. occ. A c t s xxvii. 37-
self, by his own divine glory (See Rom. 'ILSSopnKÓvraKis, A d v . from i€Sopr¡icov-
vi. 4 . ) , his perfections all shining in t h e ra, and' K I C , t h e numeral termination,
Son—because he will himself be glorified which s e e . — S e v e n t y times, occ. M a t . xviii.
by t h e gloriíication of t h e Son—because 22, 'H&Sopr¡icóvTaKiQ eirra, seventy limes
he glorifies his Son with himself, giving seven. I t is an Hebraical or Hellenistical
him a communion and equality of glory, phrase for a number qf times however
&c. If to t h e Son (and to this sense great. Seven itself is in H e b r e w t h e
Lampe inclines) he is glorified in himself, n u m b e r of sufficiency, and seven times is
because t h e glory, t h o u g h given by t h e used for often (see Prov. xxiv. 16.) ;
F a t h e r , is his own, and because by t h e seventy times seven therefore is an infinite,
gloriíication, he possesses an eterna! fount or indefinitely great, number qf times.
 E B P 210 E B P

Comp. G e n . i x . 2 4 , in t h e L X X , where 6, t h a t he passed through the land,

í&opnxóvraKig É'írra oceurs in this sense. and d u r i n g his pilgrimage from one place
"Etcopog, r¡, ov, from íirra seven, the to another in t h e land of promise, wherein
tenues w and r being changed into their he sojourned, as in a strange country, the
respective medias /3 and ¿5. Comp. " O y - epithet iyys, t h a t is, t h e pilgrim or so-
(¡ooc.—Seventh. J o h n iv. 5 2 . J u d e ver. 14. journer ( L X X Treparij passenge?-), formed
& al. as »7DJ a stranger, is applied first to h i m ,
fÜgl?" 'E^pa'íKtíe, V, <>"> from * E € p a T o c . Gen. xiv. 1 3 ; and aflerwards became t h e
H e b r e w . occ. L u k e xxiii. 3 8 . ñame of t h e holy family and nation d e -
' E b p a t o c , día, díov, from H e b . > i a i ? , of scended from him. See Gen. x x x i x . 14.
which p r e s e n t l y . — A n Hebrew, a native xl. 15. xliii. 3 2 . Exod. ii. 6, 1 1 . iii. 18.
Jew, in opposition to ' E X X j j i ' f n / e , or one !|§§P 'Eépcttc, icog, •>/, from t h e same
who had been converted from Heathenism as 'EÉpaíoe Hebrew. I t is applied only
to Judaism. (Comp. 'EXXTJJ'Í^J/C;.) OCC. to t h e H e b r e w language. Comp. A t á -
A c t s vi. 1. 2 Cor. xi. 2 2 . P h i l . iii. 5, Xesrococc. A c t s xxi. 4 0 . xxii. 2 . xxvi. 14.
'H€pdíog i'é, ' E é p c u W , an Hebrew qf, or A strange notion, originally derived from
from Hebrews, i. e. descended from He- t h e * Jewish Rabbins, t h e descendants of
brews, or native Jews, both by t h e fa- those who crucified t h e L o r d of Life,
t h e r ' s and mother's side. Josephus, t h e hath prevailed, and is b u t too generally
Jewish historian, who himself tells u s in received, t h a t , d u r i n g t h e Babylonish cap-
his Life, § 1. t h a t he was of a sacerdotal tivity, t h e H e b r e w language ceased to be
family, and by his mother related to t h e vernacular among t h e J e w s ; and it is
Asamonéan race, is b y E u s e b i u s (Demons. pretended t h a t t h e y b r o u g h t back t h e
E v a n g . lib. vi. cap. 18. p . 2 9 1 . edit. Co- Chaldee, or Babylonish, instead of it, and,
lon.) styled ' E S p c u o c I ? E/3paíW. Comp.
!
in consequence, t h a t t h e language com-
K y p k e . [ I n A c t s vi. 1. t h e native J e w monly spoken in J u d e a in our Saviour's
is certaiuly distinguished from t h e H e l - time was not Hebrew, b u t Syriac, or
l e n i s t ; b u t in 2 Cor. xi. 2 2 . Phil. iii. 5 . Syro-Chaldaic. B u t , — 1 st. P r e j u d i c e a p a r t ,
the Hebrew is distinguished from t h e Is i t probable t h a t a n y people should lose
Israeliie, and t h e Jew, whence Carpzoff. their native language in a captivity of no
(Proleg. ad E x e r c . P h ü o n . in E p . ad longer than seventy years' continuance t ?
H e b r . p . 3.) t h i n k s t h a t Hebrew pointed (Comp. E z r a iii. 12. H a g . ii. 3.) A n d is
out t h e religión, Israeliie a n d Jew, the it not still less probable t h a t a people so
nation. Eretschncider entirely denies tenacious of their law as t h e Jews, should
t h i s . ] — ' E é p c ü o c is in t h e L X X constantly y e t be so negligent of their language,
used for, and is plainiy derived from, naj? wherein t h e institutes of t h a t law both
an Hebrew, which word m a y need some religious aud civil were contained, as t o
explanation. T h e V . 73J> then signifies suffer such a loss, and exchange t h e i r
to pass, pass through, remove from one mother tongue for t h a t of their detested
place t o a n o t h e r ; and * Shem t h e pro- and idolatrous enemies; especially since
genitor of t h e holy line is called, G e n . x. t h e y h a d been assured by t h e prophet
2 1 , Injj »3i UK the father qf all the Jeremiah, ch. x x v . 11, 12. xxvii. 2 2 .
children (not qf Eber his g r e a t grandson ; x x i x . 10. (comp. D a n . i x . 2 ) , t h a t after a
for how was he more t h e father of t h e m captivity of no more t h a n seventy years
t h a n of his other descendants ? b u t ) of t h e y should be restored to t h e i r own
passage or pilgrimage—The father of all land ? B u t , — 2 d l y , J I t appears from
those who were passengers, pilgrims, iti- Scripture, t h a t under the captivity the
nerants, passing from one place to a n - J e w s actually retained not only their lan-
other, as t h e holy line were till their set- guage, b u t their manner of w r i t i n g it, or
tlement in Canaan, and also confessed the form and fashion of their letters. Else,
themselves to be strangers and pilgrims
apon earth, plainly declaring thereby that
* See W a l t o n P r o l e g o m . I I I . § 2 4 .
they sought a better counlry, that is to
+ [Carpzoff also supposes that the J e w s l i v e d to-
say, an heavenly. See Gen. xxiii. 4. xlvii. gether very m u c h i n Chaldaja l i k e a colony, and
9. H e b . xi. 8—10, 13—16. Of A b r a - refers to E z e k . i. 1. b u t that does not seem very clear.
h a m , iu particular, i t is w r i t t e n , G e n . xii. P r i d e a u x ( C o n n e c t . B . iii. at the b e g i n n i n g ) says
they l i v e d i n different parts, t h o u g h he does n o t g i v e
any proof.]
* S e e the learned B a t e ' s A p p e n d i x to h i s E r . - X S e e J e n k i n o n the Christian R e l i g i ó n , vol. i.
quiry into the S i m i l i t u d e s , p . 3 2 7 - p a g e 1 9 7 , 3 d edit.
 E B P 211
what meaneth E s t h . viii. 9, where we read
t h a t the decree of Ahasuerus, or A r t a x -
erxes Longimanus, was written unto every
province according to the writing thereof,
and unto every people after their lan-
guage, and to the Jews according to their
writing, and according to their lan-
guage ? (Comp. E s t h . i. 22. E z r a iv. 7.)
And let it be remarked, t h a t this decree
was issued, according to Prideaux (Con-
nect. pt. i. book 5.), fine years after E z r a
liad obtained his commission for his re-
t u r n to Jerusalem with those of his nation,
of which see E z r a vii.—3dly. " Ezekiel,
who prophesied d u r i n g the captivity to the
Jews in Chaldea, wrote and published his
prophecies in H e b r e w . " Leland's Reflec-
tions on Lord Bolingbroke's Letters, p.
229, 3d edit. where see more.—4thly.
" T h e prophets who flourished soon after
the r e t u r n of the Jews to their own
country, namely H a g g a i and Zechariah,
prophesied to them in Hebrew, and so did
Malachi, who seems to have delivered his
prophecy * about an hundred years after
t h a t event. Now if Chaldee was t h e ver-
nacular language of the Jews after t h e
captivity, what tolerable reason can be
assigned, why those inspired men ad-
dressed not only t h e priests and great
men, b u t also t h e body of the people, in
Hebrew, and did not, as Daniel and E z r a
have sometimes done, use t h e Chaldee
language? I t is, I think, by no means
sufficient to answer, with Bishop Walton,
t h a t they did this because t h e rest of t h e
sacred books were written in H e b r e w ;
for if there were any forcé in this reason,
it would prove t h a t Daniel also and E z r a
ought to have written in Hebrew only.—
óthly. Nehemiah, who was governor of
t h e Jews about a hundred years after
their r e t u r n from Babylon, not only wrote
his book in Hebrew, b u t in ch. xiii. 2 3 ,
24, complains t h a t some of t h e Jews,
d u r i n g his absence, had married wives of
Ashdod, of A m m o n , and of Moab, and
t h a t their children could not speak n'TiiT
the Jews' language, b u t spake a mixed
tongue. Now t Í T l i r i * is H e b r e w , as ap-
* See P r i d e a u x Connect. p t i. book C. an. A . C.
42<1.
-|- I f any one should be so unreasonable as to
contend, that m i n * in this text of N e h e m i a h m e a n s
not H e b r e w b u t Chaldee, the l a n g u a g e pretended to
be then. spoken b y the J e w s ; I answer, thst the
Chaldee l a n g u a g e is in .Scripture not only always
called b y other ñ a m e s , once B n t o 3iu>b the lan-
,-
guage qf the Ghalñces, D a n . i. 4 ; and usually
E P, P
pears from all the other passages wherein
it occurs, namely 2 Kings xviii. 2 6 , 2 8 .
2 Chron. xxxii. 18. Isa. xxxvi. 1 1 , 13.
B u t how impertinent is t h e remark, and
how foolish t h e complaint of N e h e m i a h ,
t h a t t h e children of some Jews, who had
taken foreigners for wives, could not
speak puré Hebrew, if that tongue had
ceased to be vernacular among the people
in general a hundred years before t h a t
period? " So t h a t (to use t h e words of a
learned w r i t e r * , to whom I am greatly
indebted in t h e above observations) this
very text of Nehemiah, I t h i n k , refutes
t h e received supposition of t h e H e b r e w
being lost in t h e Babylonish captivity."—
6thly. I t is highly absurd and unreason-
able to suppose t h a t t h e writers of t h e
New Testament used t h e term H e b r e w
to signify a different language from t h a t
which t h e Grecizing Jews denoted by
t h a t ñ a m e ; b u t t h e language which those
Jews called Hebrew after t h e Babylonish
captivity, was not Syriac, or Chaldee, b u t
t h e same in which t h e law and t h e pro-
phets were written. T h i s appears from
the prologue to Ecclus. which, according
to P r i d e a u x , was penned by t h e grandson
of Jesús about t 132 years before C h r i s t ;
for he there observes, t h a t " t h e same
things u t t e r e d in H e b r e w ( ' E B P A t S T I '
Xeyópsva) and translated into another
tongue, have not t h e same forcé in t h e m :
and not only these things (this book of
Ecclesiasticus), b u t t h e law itself, and
t h e prophets, and t h e rest of t h e books
have no small difference, when thev are
spoken in their own language."—Last]y.
I t may be worth adding, t h a t Josephus,
who frequently uses the expressions rf¡v
' E B P A I ' S I N ZiáXeKrov, yXürrav rr)v ' E -
B P A ' I Q N , 'EBPAVST1', for the language
in which Moses wrote (see Ínter al. A n t .
lib. i. cap. 1. § 1, 2. comp. lib. x. cap. 1.
§ 2.) tells us, De Bel. lib. vi. cap. 2. § 1,
t h a t towards t h e conclusión of t h e siege of
Jerusalem he addressed not only J o h n ,
the commander of t h e Zealots, b u t r o t e
TTOXXOÍC the (Jewish) multitude who were
with him, ' E B P A ' t ' Z G N in the Hebrew
r r o i N Aramitish (see Ínter al. Ezra i v . 7- D a n . i i .
4 . ) b u t that under the latter appellation it is also c x -
pressly contradistinguished from r í T i n ' , or Jewish,
in 2 K i n g s , x v i i i . 2í¡. I s a . x x x v i . 1 1 .
* Spearman, O n the L X X , & c . letter v. where
the reader m a y find several of the above argumento
enforced, and objections answered.
f See P r i d e a u x Connect. pt. ii. book v . an. A . C.
132.
P 2
 E B í> 212
iongue, which was therefore the common
language of the Jews a t t h a t time, i. e.
about forty years after our Saviour's
death. Comp. A n t . lib. xviii. cap. 7- §
10.—On t h e whole, I conclude t h a t t h e
J e w s did not exchange t h e Hebrew for
t h e Chaldee language at t h e captivity,
and t h a t t h e terms 'Efpctíc, 'E€pdk¿g,
'ESpctíVí, in t h e N . T . denote * not t h e
Syriac, or Syro-Chaldaic, b u t t h e Hebrew
language, commonly so called : though I
readily g r a n t t h a t this language, espe-
cially as spoken by t h e Galileans (see
M a r k xiv. 7 0 . M a t . xxvi. 7 3 , and under
TaXiXcüoc), had in our Saviour's time
deílecled from its ancient p u r i t y , as par-
ticularly appears, I t h i n k , from the words
"A€€a, ' ÁKeXSapa, Eoávepyeg, FóXyoOa,
which see in their proper places. A s to
the language in which t h e ancient Syriac
versión is written, t h a t sometimes coin-
cides with t h e language which our Sa-
viour spoke, and sometimes not. T h u s
llaka, M a t . v. 2 2 , Taliiha Icumi, M a r k
v. 4 1 , and Corlan, M a r k vii. 11, are p r e -
served in t h a t versión. B u t t h e three
first words of our Saviour's dolorous cry,
M a t . xxvii. 4 6 . M a r k xv. 34, are t h e r e
represeuted by Ail, Ail, lemena— ; Boan-
erges, M a r k iii. 17, is explained by Beni
Roma; Golgotha, M a t . xxvii. 3 3 . M a r k
xv. 2 2 . John xix. 17, is expressed by
Gcgttltha; Gabbalha, J o h n xix. 13, by
Gepiptha ; and Alceldama, A c t s i. 19, is
interpreted by Ojiirilh dem. [ T h e pass-
age in Neh. viii. 7, 8, where t h e Levites
are said ' to make t h e people understand
t h e law, and to give t h e sense,' is t h e one
cited by those in opposition to P a r k h u r s t ,
b u t Carpzoff (Crit. Sacr. V e t . Test. p .
214.) observes very justly, t h a t there is no
need to understand translation t h e r e , b u t
only exposition. See on one side, E p h o -
desus t h e grammarian, book v i i ; E l i a s
Levita Pref. to t h e book M e t h u r g e m a n ;
Kimchi Pref. tobook M i c h t o l ; H o t t i n g e r .
Smegm. Orient. p . 3 3 ; Walton Proleg.
iii. § 2 4 ; Buxtorf Dissert. Philol. iii. §
38. seqq. O n t h e other, Mayer Philol.
Sacr. p . ii. c. 2 ; . A l t ¡ n g Dissert. Acad.
H e p t . vii. Diss. i. O p p . T . V, p . 195 ;
Morinus Exercit. xi. p . 77 ; Pfeiffer Crit.
Sacr. ch. iii. qu. 4 ; Lcescher D e Caus.
L i n g . Hebr. lib. i. cap. v. p . 49 seq.]
'É€pdi<zí, A d v . See 'EÉoaíe.—In Ile-
* See this point m e r e particularly preved b y the
learned Spearman, O n the L X X , letter v, and
c o m p . W a l t o n Y, P r c l e g o m . xiii. 5.
E r r
bren, in the Hebrew language. occ. John
v. 2. xix. 13, 17, 2 0 . Rev. ix. 11. ( N . B.)
xvi. 16. So Josephus, A n t , lib. x. cap. i.
§ 2, relating t h e history in 2 K. xviii. 2 6 ,
28, says, t h a t Rabshakeh spake to t h e
Jews ' E é p a i V i , In Hebrew.
' E y y í f w from e y y ¿ c . [ T h i s verb is pro-
perly active ( G e n . xlviii. 10. Is. v. 8.
xlvi. 13.) b u t like f}a§í2¡(o, ÍXTTÍI¡OJ, is used
generally as Neuter or Middle. I t has a
dative, or ele, or ¿ T I with it.] — To ap-
proach, come, or draw near. I t is spoken
of persons, and t h a t whether in a proper,
as M a t . x x i . 1. L u k e xix. 29. xxiv. 2 8 ;
or in a figurative sense, as P h i l . ii. 3 0 .
Heb. vii. 19. M a t . xv. 8. J a m e s iv. 8 . —
of t h i n g s , or events, M a t . iii. 2. M a r k i.
15. L u k e x . 9, 11.—of time, M a t . xxvi.
45. A c t s vii. 17- H e b . x . 2 5 . [ D e u t . x x x i .
14. I s . xxvi. 17. I n M a t . xv. 8. H e b . vii.
19. James iv. 8. To draw near to God is
to worship him. See Exod. xix. 22. Is.
x x x i x . 13. E z . xiii. 13. I n t h e last place,
by God's drawing near to men, is meant
his conferring benefits on them. In t h e
O. T . it is to offer gifts or sacrifice.]—In
L u k e xviii.35, " a distinction (or comma)
should have been placed after avrbv, t h u s :
But it carne to pass, as he drew near
(viz. to Jerusalem), at Jericho, a blind
man, &c." Markland in Bowyer's Con-
ject., where see more ; and with this great
critic I agree, notwithstanding t h e un-
usually confdent r e m a r k s in Campbell's
Note. Comp. ' E i c I. 14. [Schl. says on
this place, t h a t t h e verb does not ahvays
denote motion to, b u t dislance from a
place. When he was not far from Je-
richo.]
' E y y p á ^ t ü , from ¿ y in or on, and ypá<j>o>
to write. [To inscribe. 1 Mac. xiii. 4 0 .
Xen. C y r . viii. 2 . 1 7 . ] — T o EN GR A VE,
or write in or on. occ. 2 Cor. iii. 2, 3. [ I t
obviously means to fix deep.]
{§§¡5° " E y y v o c , n, ó, from íyyvn a
pledge, or pawn, so called from being
lodged * iv yvoiQ in the hands of t h e cre-
d i t o r . — A sponsor, surely. occ. H e b . vii.
22. See Wolfius. T h i s word oceurs not
in t h e L X X , b u t they use t h e N . 'Eyyvn
for t h e H e b . ¡•DIJ? suretyship, joining
with another in contract, Prov. xvii. 1 8 ;
and t h e V. mid. iyyváopai, to malee one-
self a surely, for t h e V. m j í , Prov. vi. 1.
xvii. 1 8 ; and in Ecclus. x x i x . 15, 16.
2 Mac. x. 2 8 , we have t h e N . t y y v o c .
* D u p o r t from E u s t a t h i u s i n Theophrast. C h a r a c
E t h . p. 4 0 S , a n d D a m m i L e x i c ó n , col. 0 2 . 0 5 .
 E F E
[ D e y l i n g (Obss. Sacr. i. p . 373.) says
with great t r u t h , t h a t it is not, in this
place of the Hebrews, simply Fidcjussor,
or one who leaves the oíd debtor still
under the barden qf his debt, b u t Fxpro-
missor, or one who takes it on himself;
aváBo-xpe, as Hesychius explains it.]
' E l T Y ' S , Adv.—Governing a genitive,
Near, nigh,of place. J o h n iii. 2 3 . vi. 19.
—of time. Mat. xxiv. 3 2 . xxvi. 18. [where
time is meant, t h e word is used in t h e
N. T. without a case after i t ] — o f state.
E p h . ii. 13, 17- H e b . vi. 8.
'Eyyvrepoc, a, ov, Comparat. from ky-
yóc.—More near, nearer. occ. R o m . xiii.
11.
' E r E I ' P í l , from H e b . T)>n H i p h . of Ii?
lo raise, raise up, J> being, as usual,
ehanged into y . T h e L X X have in se-
veral passages used kydpto for the H e b .
•VJJi~r, as in Cant. ii. 7. iii. 5. & al.
I. Transitively, To raise up, \_one sit-
ting. M a t . ii. 2 0 , 2 1 . ] from t h e ground.
A c t s [ i x . 16.] x. 2 6 . [From a pit. M a t .
xii. 11.] 'Eyeípopai, Mid. To raise up
oneself, rise up, from a sitting or recum-
bent posture. M a r k x. 4 9 . xiv. 4 2 . J o h n
xi. 2 9 . Acts iii. 6. 'EyeípopaL, Pass. T h e
same. M a t . xvii. 7- A c t s ix. 8.
I I . To raise up, [Jo bid lo arise f] as
children to Abraham, a prophet, &c. See
M a t . iii. 9. L u k e [iii. 8 . ] vii. 16. M a t .
xxiv. 11, 24. [ I n this metaphorical sense,
see L u k e i. 69, to which, perhaps, refer-
r i n g , Hesychius has iíyeipev, ¿LVÉSEIL,EV,
avÉ^ncrEv. Acts xiii. 22. A n d in t h e Pass.
M a t . xi. 1 1 . There hath not arisen. J o h n
vii. 5 2 . ]
I I I . 'EyEipópai, Pass. To rise up, in
hostilitv. M a t . xxiv. 7- [So EwEykpu), Isa.
xix. 2.]
I V . To rouse or raise from sleep. M a t .
viii. 2 5 . Pass. To be roused, awake, or
rise from sleep, and t h a t whether natural,
M a t . ii. 13, 14. viii. 2 6 ; or s p i r i t u a l * ,
Rom. xiii. 11. 'Eyeípopai, Mid. T h e same.
E p h . v. 14. [ A c t s xii. 7. M a r k iv. 2 7 .
Prov. vi. 9.]
V. To raise up, as a person lying sick.
M a r k i. 3 1 , 'Eyeípopai, Pass. and Mid.
To be raised, or rise up, as one who lay
sick. M a t . ix. 5, 6, 7- M a r k ii. 9, 1 1 , 12.
[James v. 15.]
VI. To rouse, or raise up, t h e dead.
See John xii. 1, 9, 17- Acts iii. 15. iv. 10.
xxvi. 8. 2 Cor. i. 9. Comp. J o h n ii. 19,
where Kypke shows t h a t Lucian fre-
* [See Glass. Philal. Sacr. p. 1 1 7 4 . cd. D a t l i . ]
213 E r K
quently uses the phrase vabv kyEÍpeiv for
building a temple, and t h a t Josephus a p -
plies t h e V. to resioring, rcbuilding, as i t
signifies in J o h n . Pass. To be raised up,
from t h e dead, M a t . xvii. 2 3 . xxvi. 3 2 .
xxvii. 52. xxviii. 7 . & al. freq. T h e word
is applied in t h e same sense by t h e L X X ,
2 Kings iv. 3 1 , for t h e H e b . y'prt is
awakened.
V I L [ T o foiild up again. J o h n ii. 20.
So Herodian. viii. 2 , 12. iElian. H . A . xi.
10.—Sometimes t h e word is r e d u n d a n t ,
i and according to Schleusner, in M a t . viii.
26. ix. 6, 7, 19. L u k e xiii. 15.]
"EyEpcne, ios, A t t . EÍI)Q, i¡, from iyiípia.
Resurrection, resuscitalion, being awak-
ened, as it were, from t h e sleep of death.
occ. M a t . xxvii. 5 3 . [Rising up. Psahn
cxxxiv. 2. 3 E s d r . v. 8 3 . ]
'EyKcidéros, a, ó, ?/, from kv in, and ica-
Gírjpi lo let down, set in ambush.—A licr
in wait, one who lets himself down, as it
were, or crouches in some secret place to
spy, listen, catch, or h u r t . So Hesychius
explains kyKÓBtroi by kveb'pívovTEQ persons
lying in wait or ambush ; and Suidas, ky-
¡cáQtroQ by SóXiog deceilful, KarámcoTroc a
spy. Josephus, however, plainly uses this
Word for a person suboi'ned for a p a r t i c u -
lar purpose, D e Bel. lib. ii. cap. 2. § 5 ,
where A n t i p a t e r accuses Archelaus as
pEra rñv ' H p ú o a TEXEVTI)V 'ErKA0E'TOY2
v7r¿nr£p\¡jas (miltcndos subornavit, H u d -
son) r a s wEpidlio-ovraQ ávrw ro StdStjpa,
after Herod's death suborning persons to
p u t t h e diadem on his own head. And
speaking of the false prophets, who pro-
mised t h e J e w s divine assistance, even
when the Romans were buruing their
temple, D e Bel. lib. vi. cap. 5. § 2, he
says, IloXXoí o 7¡crav ' E r i í A ' 9 E T 0 I Trape-,
rüv rvpávvwv TOTE Trpos rov Sijpov Trpoijíií/-
rai. M a n y prophets were then suborned
by the t y r a n t s (and sent) to the people.
So t h e learned Hudson, " Mullí aulcm,
tune a tyrannis subornati s u n t ad popu-
lum prophetas." occ. L u k e x x . 20, which
t e x t Wolfius remarks t h a t Jos. Scaüger
has not improperly rendered " Obsérvalo
eo, subornarunt qui se justos simular en t,
H a v i n g watched them they suborned some
who should feign themselves j u s t men."
Comp. K y p k e . — T h e L X X use the phrase
kyi;ád£ros yívojiai for t h e H e b . l^H lo lie
in wait, Job xxxi. 9, [and xix. 12. Polvb.
xiii. 5. 1. JEsch. S. Dial. iii. 12.]
' E F K A I ' N I A , biv, ra, from ev in or at,
and Kaivóc new.—The feast of dedicaliou,
fcslal solcmnilies in memory qf Ihc dedi-
 E r K 214
catión of t h e temple a t Jerusalem, or of
its purif catión and renovation, as it were,
after it had been polluted by heathen ido-
latries and impurities [by Antiochus E p i -
p h a n e s ] . Of t h e institution of this feast
b y J u d a s Maccabeus, we have a particu-
lar account, 1 Mace. iv. 3 6 — 5 9 . Comp.
2 Mace. x. .5—8, and Josephus, A n t . lib.
xii. cap. 7. § 6, 7. occ. John x. 22, where
see W h i t b y , Doddridge, and Campbell.
[ I t was ce'lebrated in the month Astev,
which answered to our December, and
lasted for eight days. I t was k e p t all
through Judea, and one custom was to
• keep lights b u r n i n g in t h e houses t h r o u g h
t h e eight nights oí t h e f e a s t . l — I n t h e
L X X this N . answers to t h e H e b . n r u n
a religious dedication. E z r a vi. 16, 17.
Comp. N e h . xii. 27. D a n . iii. 2.
'Ey;caiví£k), from iv in or at, and Kaivóe
new. To handsel, in a religious sense, to
dedícate, consécrate, occ. H e b . ix. 18. x.
20. In the L X X it denotes t h e dedica-
tion of t h e temple by Solomon, 1 Kings
viii. 64. 2 Chron. vii. 5 , answering to t h e
H e b . ^ n . Comp. D e u t , xx. 5. 1 Mace,
iv. 3 6 . [ W i t s i u s on H e b . ix. 18. (in
his GScon. Foed. iii. 3 , 29. p . 292.) says
t h a t it does not necessarily mean t h a t
t h a t of which it is predicated is new and
receñí. F o r in 1 Mace, vi, it is used
of t h e temple when dedicated afresh: and
Grotius, on John x. 22, says, t h a t t h e
H e b r e w word to which this answers, i ; n ,
is used of either a first or second dedica-
tion.]
'EynaXím, w, from iv into, and raÁsu to
cali.
I . W i t h a dative of t h e person, To
summon into a court qf'judicature, to cali
to a judicial account, in j u s vocare, to in-
dile, implead. occ. Acts xix. 3 8 . ' E y r a -
Xéopai, Spai, Pass. To be called to a judi-
cial account. occ. Acts xix. 40. [ S e e
Exod. xxii. 9.]
I I . W i t h a dative of t h e person, To
aecuse, lodge an aecusalion against, ob-
ject a crime to. occ. Acts xxiii. 2 8 . ' E y -
teaXéopai, üpai, Pass. To be aecused. occ.
A c t s xxiii. 29. xxvi. 2, 7. Followed by
Kara, and a genitive of t h e persons aecused.
occ. Rom. viii. 3 3 . [ S e e Mathiae § 346.
Fisch. ad Well. iii. p . 3 8 2 . ]
'EyíearaXeÍTroj, from iv in, and icara-
Xdiru lo forsalce, desert.—" T h i s word,"
says Leigh, " is particularly cmphatical.
KaraXeíirio is lo leave, for salee; but this
is m o r e ; it is lo forsalce a person in the
iitmost distress, io leave him plunged in
E r K
the deep mire." Josephus uses it iu this
emphatical sense for forsaking in time of
danger or distress. V i t . §.4. D e Bel. lib.
iii. cap. 7. § 15. and lib. iv. cap. 1. § 5.
L To forsalce, or desert a person in
distress, persecution, calamity, or t h e like.
occ. M a t . xxvii. 4 6 . M a r k xv. 34. Acts ii.
27. 2 Cor. iv. 9. 2 T i m . iv. 10, 16. H e b .
xiii. 5. T h e L X X have frequently used
this verb, and particularly-in Ps. xxii. 1,
have iyicaréXnrEe for the H e b . J~DT1? hast
thou forsalcen ? Comp. ZaSáy^davi. See
also Ecclus. xxiii. 1.
I I . Toforsake, or desert, as t h e chris-
tian assemblies, in persecution. occ. H e b .
x. 2 5 .
I I I . To leave remaining, to reserve
some faithful in t h e midst of apostacy. occ.
Rom. ix. 2 9 . T h e L X X have used t h e
same word in t h e correspondent passage,
Isa. i. 9, for t h e Pleb. T i l í n to leave re-
maining.
'Eyiearoacio), w, from iv in, among, and
learoueéii) to dwell.— To dwell among. occ.
2 Pet. ii. 8. [Bar. I I . 17-]
Efgf 'EyieEvrpí£u>, from iv in, and KEV-
3
TOÍ(U) to pricle, make a puncture, which
from teévrpov.— To insert by malcing a
puncture or small opening, to ingraff. occ.
Rom. xi. 17, 19, 2 3 , 2 4 , where, as the
Apostle observes at t h e 2 4 t h verse, it is
contrary lo nature, i. e. w h a t is not usually
done in the natural world, t h a t a branch
of a wild olive tree should be grafted into
a good olive tree, though a branch of
t h e good be sometimes grafted into the
wild *. T h i s latter, t Pliny says, was for-
merly practised in África; and Kolben, in
his N a t u r a l H i s t o r y of the Cape of Good
Hope, vol. ii. p . 2 7 8 , tells u s , t h a t " long
ago some garden olive slips were carriod
to the Cape from Holland, and grafted
on the stocks of the wild olives a t Con-
stantia, a seat so called in t h e Capiau co-
lony." Theophrastus [ H i s t . P l a n t . ii. 13.]
cited by Wetstein (whom see), takes no-
tice of both t h e abovementioned modes of
grafting olives. [ I t is used in this place
of t h e Gentiles engrafted into t h e body
of Christians. I t is also used in Wisd.
xvi. 11. and usually translated to graft.
Schleus. prefers lo prick or sting in that
place.]
¡ISP0 "EyieXnpa, aroe, rb, from iyieéieXv-
pai perf. pass. of iyicaXéd) io aecuse.—An
* Seo P o l e S y n o p s . in R o m . vi. 17, and Burkítt
on R o m . x i . 2 2 — 2 4 .
+ N a t . H i s t . l i b . xvii. cap. 1 8 . " Afrieerpcctdiarc
qtridem in oleastro est inserere ( o l e a m ) . "
 E r K 2 15 E T K

aecusation. o c c A c t s xxv. 16. xxiii. 2 9 . of t h e most ornamental graces of t h e i r

where Kypke cites Demosthenes, Appiau, profession, should constantly appear in-
and Lucian u s i n g t h e phrase " E N i A U M A all their conversation, so as to strike the
E X E I N for iyKaXeícrQat to be aecused. So eye of every beholder ; and t h a t this a m i -
in t h e text tyicXvpa '¿xpvra is equivalent able grace should be so closely connected
to t h e preceding kyKokúpevov. [ T h u c y d . with their persons, t h a t no oceurrence,
i, 2 6 . ] temptatiou, or calamity should be able t o
£§§¡p° 'TLympSoópai, Spai, M i d . from iv strip t h e m of i t . Faxit Deus ! [Fischer
in, and ¡copeóla to gather, or tie in a knot ; (Prol. de V i t . L e x . N . T . p . 140.) also
and henee in 1 st Aor. mid. to clolhe, which gives this explanation of t h e word. H e
V. is derived from t h e N . KÓpéoe a knot. t h i n k s t h a t nóptuipa was especially used
—To clolhe, properly mith an outer orna- of a short cloak, p u t over other g a r m e n t s
mental garment tied closely upon one mith and h a n g i n g by a knot from t h e shoulder.
knots. occ. 1 P e t . v. 5 . I shall endeavour G a t a k e r Advers. Mise, i- 8, 2 2 7 . and
to justify each p a r t of tltis interpretation : Dresig. de V e r b . Med. N . T . i. p . 4 2 .
l s t , t h e n , GScumenius explains iyicop€¿>- Sibrandas (Bibl. Brem. Class vii. Fase,
caerde by ivei\.f)trao-6e, Trepi\ta\eirde, invest, vi. N o . I.) and Suicer i. p . 9 9 6 . have
clolhe yourselves. 2dlv, 'Eyicó)u€<t)iia d e - written much on t h e word.]
notes an outer or upper garment. Thus Ifglp 'Ey/co7rJ7, rje, i¡, from évÍKorrov,
0
2
L o u g u s , Pastor, lib. ii. speaks of a shep- A o r . of iyKÓirru).—A hindrance. occ. 1
herd, who, to use t h e greater expedition, Cor. ix. 12. [ D i o d . S. i. 3 2 . ]
casting away ró iyicóp&wfia his outer gar- 'EyMTTTio, from iv in, and KÓTTTIO to
ment, ran away naked (i. e. as 1 Sam. xix. strike.—To interrupt, hinder. occ. A c t s
24. Isa. xx. 2.) 2dly, T h e word imports xxiv. 4 . Rom. x v . 2 2 . 1 Thess. ii. 1 8 : and,
ornament. So Suidas interprets Koptco- according to t h e reading of almost all t h e
fiara by KaXXtOTrícrpara ornaments. Theo- ancient, and m a n y modern M S S . , G a l . v.
dotion uses íyicopéíipara for some female 7. Conrp. u n d e r 'ATOKÓV™. A n d in 1
ornaments ( H e b . r-j^ttfp Jillets or rib- P e t . iii. 7, t h e Alexandrian, and m a n y
bands), Isa. iii. 20. A n d in this view later M S S . , and several printed editions,
E p i c h a r m u s applies t h e V . ¡copSSadaí, 'Ei have iyicórcreo-dat, which reading is em-
ye per on icaXwe Kempt>Lorai, B u t if be- braced by Mili and W e t s t e i n , and received
cause he is well dressed. So róXío-acdaí, into t h e t e x t by Griesbach. T h e compli-
by which Hesychius expounds iyKopGw- m e n t intimated by T e r t u l l u s t o Félix, iu
uaaQai, signifies not only to clothe b u t to A c t s xxiv, 4 , is of t h e same cast with
adorn. 4 t h l y , 'JLyKop&Scrb'ai imports being t h a t of Horace t o A u g u s t u s , E p i s t . i. lib.
tied closely with knots. So in Hesychius 2. lines 3 , 4 .
eyKop&wQeÍQ is t h e same as Sédele botina,
In p u b l i c a cominoda peccern,
tied with knots ; and * Gloss. Albert in-
Si longo sermone morcr tua témpora
terprets kyKopt,ú>aaaQe n o t only by ivetXh-
T o m a k e a l o n g discourse, a n d waste y o u r t i m e ,
traode, TrepiitciXearde (as GScumenius above), A g a i n s t tile public good w o u l d b e a crime.
b u t also by ava^EÍXaaBe draw tight, con- CltEECH.
t r a í a t e . Apollodorus likewise says, rr¡v
eiriopiSa—aviodev iveKop€iú<ráprjv, I tied [ D a n . ix. 26. to cut off or destroy.~]
my cloak at t h e top t - O n t h e whole then If^f 'Ey/cpáraa, ae, ?;, from éyicparije.
0

this beautiful and expressive word iymp- —Self-government or moderation with re-
ےio-acr0e used by S t . P e t e r implies, t h a t gard to sensual pleasures, temperance,
the h u m i l i t y of Christians, which is one coniinence. occ. Acts xxiv. 2 5 . Gal. v. 2 3 .
2 P e t . i. 6. [ E c c l u s . xviii. 3 0 . A n d r o n .
* I n A p p e n d i x cited b y S t o c k i u s . Rhod. 7r* rraQüiv, p . 12. Act. Soc. Lit,
See the Commentators i n P o l e ' s S y n o p s . to Jenens. ii. p . 2 4 . ]
w h o m , a n d particularly to the learned Gataker, I 'TiyKparevopai, M i d . from éyicparíie-—
a m principally indebted for the above exposition of
the word. See also Suicer a n d W e t s t e i n ; b u t S i -
To contain or restrain one's self with re-
branda i n W o l f i u s , w h o m see, contends that xí/nSo;, gará lo sensual pleasures, to be tempér-
XS/J.S<U/J.X, and iyxí/j.Saif¡ta in the Greek writers pro- ate, occ. 1 Cor. vii. 9. ix. 2 5 . I cannot
perly refer to t h e dress of girls, shepherds, a n d forbear observing, with t h e learned R a -
slaves, which is fastened w i t h a knot; and so inter-
prets lyv.o¡A&wGa.u(¡i: i n St. Peter, as in Usclf'varply-
phelius and others, how beautifully this
ing not ornament b u t humility. T h e French trans- latter t e x t m a y be illustrated by a passage
lation h a s , " Soiés pares par dedans d'humilité, B e of E p i c t e t u s , E n c h i r i d . ch. xxxv. which
ye inwardly adorned wilh humility.'''' may afford an excellent lesson t o C h r i s -
 E r K 21 o E r o

tiaus. " Would you, says t h a t philosopher, a candidato for admission among the E s -
be a victor in the Olynrpic games? so, in senes m u s t first undergo, adds, nal <¡>aveís
good t r u t h , would I, for it is a glorious cilios HTÜJS iis TOV opikov ' E E K P I ' N E T A I ,
t i i i n g ; b u t pray consider w h a t must go aud appearing worthy he is then admilled
before, and w h a t may follow, and so pro- into t h e society. D e Bel. lib. ii. cap. 8.
ceed to the a t t e m p t : you must then live § 7. [From Lobeck on Phrynicus, p . 3 8 5 ,
by rule, eat w h a t will be disagreeable it appears t h a t it was a word used as to
(* t'ivayiMTpoijiEiv), refrain from delicacies; the probation of senators and wrestlers.
you m u s t oblige yourself to constant exer- See Demosth. L e p t . p . 4 8 9 . Reisk. X e n .
cise, at t h e appointed hour, in heat and H e l l . iv. 1,19, and 40. Apoll. Rhod. i. 4-9.
c o l d ; you m u s t abstain from wine and Krebs. Obss. F l a v . ' p . 3 1 0 . Zonaras L e x .
cold liquors; in a word you m u s t be as c. 6 1 1 . explains it by trvvapidpñcrai.'J
submissive to all t h e directions of your ['Ey/cpv7rrw, from iv in, and Kp-virru) lo
master as to those of a physician." [ S e e hide.— To hide any thing in another thing,
Notes on iElian. V. H . x. 2 . xi. 3.] (as in Diod. Sic. iii. 62.) and then To
'Eyi;pu.TÍie, ios, Se, ó, r¡, from év in, a n d mix. M a t . xiii. 3 3 . L u k e xiii. 2 1 . E z e k .
uparos, power, government. iv. 12. See Schultens ad J o b . x x x .
I. Having sometliing in one's power, a 2 5 . ]
master of it. In this general sense it is "Eyicvos, s, r¡, from iv in, and KVLO lo be
used by t h e profane w r i t e r s ; as by D e - pregnant, which see.—Pregnant, big wilh
mosthenes, íitúlr) ' E r K P A T H ' S iyivero child, in útero gestans. occ. L u k e ii. 5 .
TS apyvpíy, when he became master of the [ J e r . xxxi. 8. Ecclus. xiii. 2. Athen. ix.
m o n e y ; and by Hecatasus in Josephus p. 3 8 7 . ]
contr. Ápion. lib. i. § 22. " After the battle 'Eyxptw, from iv in, and \píio to atioint.
of Gaza, Ptolemy, iyívíro rwv itEpl Copias —To anoinl, rub in, inungere. occ. Rev.
TÓTTIOV ' E r i í P A T H ' S , became master of iii. 18. [ I t oceurs J e r . iv. 30. for t h e
t h e places in Syria." So Josephus him- H e b r e w Iflp to tear, and our Bible has to
self, speaking of Simón the son of Gioras, rent. Gesenius says, t h a t t h e Jewish wo-
D e Bel. lib. iv. cap. 9. § 12, says, 'lepoo-o- men made a certain collyrium to anoint
Xbpwv ' E r K P A T H ' 2 iytvero, H e became t h e inside of t h e eyelid, so as to make a
master of Jerusalem. A n d of Eleazer, small black circle. H e explains it, To
lib. vii. cap. 8. § 4. ra ^papta—'ErRPA- mark the eyes with stibium. See T o b i t .
T I I ' S Só\<¡) yevópevos m a k i n g himself mas- vi. 8. x i . 8. I t appears t h a t it is now
ter of t h e castle by fraud. done with a fine long pencil, (see Sandys's
I I . I n t h e N . T . Having power over Travels, p . 6 7 . ) ; or (as Juvenal, S a t . ii. 92,
one's own appetites and inclinalions, mas- calis i t ) a needle; or, according to D r .
ter qf one's self, as we say, températe, occ. Shaw (Travels, p . 294.), a bodkin, whence
T i t . i. 8. So Xenophon, Memor. Socrat. the use of the word to tear. See Bishop
lib. ii. cap. 1. § 3. edit. Simpson, uses Lowth on Isaiah iii. 16. and comp. E z e k .
v-n-ya ' E r i í P A T I Í modérate in sleep, acbpo- xxiii. 4 0 . 2 K i n g s ix. 3 0 . Schleusner, in
Bto-íiúv ' E r K P A T H ' modérate in venereal t h e Lexicón to t h e L X X , says, t h a t in
pleasures. Jeremiah i t is to fill the eyes beyoncl mea-
¡¡g§p 'Eyicpíva, from iv in or among, sure with stibium, and refers to Simonis
and icpivii) to judge.—Joined with Éavrás, L e x . H e b . p. 1461.]
ourselves, and t h e dative no-i, To adjudge ' E r o ' , from H e b . >53« / . B u t t h e traces
ourselves lo the number or rank of, lo of the H e b r e w appear much more evident
judge or reckon ourselves in the number in the dialectical variations of t h e Greek
or rank qf, lo annumerale, number, reckon, pronoun, as in t h e A t t i c íywyE, t h e Bce-
or rank ourselves with. occ. 2 Cor. x . 12. otic 'íioya and 'íwyya aud the Doric íyoiv,
On which t e x t see H a m m o n d and Elsner. iyíivn, Eytovya ; so t h e Gen. ipü and jiiS,
T o t h e passages they have adduced from Ionic ipéo and peo, are plainiy from t h e
t h e heathen writers in proof of t h e sense H e b . ' n , which is compounded of t h e par-
here assigned, I add one from Josephus, ticle a from, of, and » me, (whence, by t h e
who, after describing t h e probatiou which way, the E n g . I, and me;) and the D u a l
vCii, vü>, from u we, us, and even t h e plu-
r u l ¡ipEÍs, ijpüv, &c. we, Doric upes, iEolic
* O n this word see Simpson's N o t e , and Elsner
appes, and Ionic iipÉEs, seem corruptions
o n 1 Cor. i x . 2 o , w h o r e a d s here a.w-¡Y.¿<§v.-¡tiv, which
i s likewise the word used in the parallel passage o f of t h e H e b . 13íi3« we. A pronoun of the
Arrian, Epictet. lib. iii. cap. 1 5 . first person, / , me. Plural, ¡Ve, us. M a t .
 E A P 217
iii. 11. & sil. freq. On M a t . xxi. 30, see
Elsner and Wolfius*.
'ESafí^w, l s t F u t . édcupícriú, and A t t .
édafiüj, from tSaqjos-—To lay level or even
with ihe ground; spoken of a city, lo
raze to the ground;—of men, io dash
against ihe ground. I t is used in both
senses by the L X X ; in t h e former, Amos
ix. 14, answering to t h e Heb. tDüí io make
desoíate; iu t h e latter, P s . cxxxvi. or
exxxvii. 9, for t h e H e b . f23 to bréale,
dash in pieces. and in Hos. x. 14, or 15.
xiii. 16'. N a h . iii. 10, where it corre-
sponds to t h e H e b . tt?B1 to dash. oee. L u k e
xix. 44.
"EAA4>OS, eos, ae, ro.-—The ground
whereon things rest, and against which
t h e y are impelled in falling, or, more
philosophically speaking, towards which
they are impelled by t h e pressure of the
expansión whether in resting or falling.
occ. Acts xxii. 7. [ N u m b . v. 17- 1 K i n g s
vi. 15.]
" E o p c t , a c , i/, from 'eltipai, 2d fut. of
e(ópai lo sit.—A seat, or siiting. It
oceurs not in the N . T. b u t is here in-
serted on account of its derivatives.
'"¡Lépalos, a l a , áiov, from t o p a . [So t h e
Lexicographers.]—Settled, sleady, sted-
j'ast. occ. 1 Cor. vii. 3 7 . xv. 5 8 . Col. i.
23. [Flirt, v. p . 214. Reisk. I t is se-
dentary, Xeu. de Rep. Lac. i. 3.]
E f g i p 'ULopaíupa, aros, ro, from eSpaiáu
0
io establish, which from kSpalos.—A sup-
port, slay, ground. occ. 1 T i m . iii. 15.
[ I n t h e L X V I t h Dissertation of the 1 st
vol. of PJeyling's Obss. Sacr. t h e reader will
find all t h e interpretations of this passage.
T h e Romanists explain it of their church.
Episcopius Inst. Theol. i. 1,8. and others
would p u t a stop after £¿>v-os; and t h e
interpretation thence arising, is not
wholly, as i t would seem, w i t h o u t appro-
bation of Irenseus, Basilius Seleuciensis,
and Theodoret. See Suicer, ii. 1047, and
G r o t i u s ad loe. O t h e r s explain tc?p- of
Timothy, t h e same words being applied
to the Apostles or their successors. See
Theodoret. O r a t . x. de Provid. p . 4 4 1 .
and a letter of t h e Gallican Church in
Eusebius H i s t . Eccl. v. 1. p . 157. So
Gregory Nyss., Procopius Gaz., Gataker.
Chillingworth, &c. Then Gothofredus
(Exerc. i. de Ecclá) says, t h a t the Apos-
tle, probably, referred in the word <r¿\oe,
* [ T h i s word, with a few others, is left unal-
tered, as a specimen of Farkhurst's e t y m o l o g y , and
a jniíification of the change cffeclcd in other cuses.]
E 0 E
to t h e many columns of the heathen t e m -
ples supporting falsehood, and contrasted
with them the true Church s u p p o r t i n g
t r u t h . Henee, lüpaíwpa also would refer
to some p a r t of an edifice, and was, p e r -
haps, an architectural term of t h e d a y ,
expressing something on which other p a r t s
rested, as t h e foundation of t h e building,
t h e stereobata of t h e column (Vitruv. iii.
3 . ) , the seats on which masses were placed,
t h e footstool under t h e i r feet, &c. J u -
nius (adv, Bellarm. ad T . i. Cont. iii. 4.
vii. c. xiv. § 6.) thinks St. P a u l refers t o
t h e pillars in public places on which d e -
crees, &c. were exposed, and says, t h a t iu
t h e Church (like a column and base) a r e
the decrees of God preserved and exposed
to view. F o r other explanations, see
H e i n s . E x e r c . ad p . 1. p . 5 1 4 . Alex. Mor-
ad l o e , Schmidt Coll. Bibl. N . T . p .
301.]
Ef§§¡° ''EdeXodpntTKeía, as, from édéXkt
to will, and SpwcricEÍa religión, worship.—
Voluntary worship, performed w i t h o u t
any positive command, or absolute obliga-
tion. T h e word in itself seems capable of
a good as well as of an ill m e a n i n g ; b u t
in t h e only passage of t h e N . T . wherein
it oceurs, namely, Col. ii. 2 3 , it m a n i -
festly refers to ver. 1 8 , B E ' A Q N ev G P E S -
K E I ' A t rüiv áyyéXwv, and m u s t therefore
be understood in a bad sense, and is well
rendered by our translators will-worship.
Comp. under Qpno-iceía I I . ['Efc'Xw in com-
position aud with a preposition, not only
frequently expresses voluntary action, (as
éOeXóSuXos a voluntary slave. Poli. Onom.
iii. 69 and 80. ¿déXeydpos a voluntary ene-
my), b u t t h e affecting or aiming a t some
object. T h u s Éo'eXóVoj'oe aiming at the
reputation of industry, édeXcipzios aiming
at elegance, edeXocroíjíós, ¿deXoieaieeiv, &c.
H e n e e , Schl. interprets t h e word u n d e r
notice, as an affected zealfor religión, rr¡v
VTTOicpivopívnv ivXá¡¡eiav ev rij QpncrKeia, as
Theophylact sa}'s. T h c word oceurs in
t h e L e t t e r of the Oriental Bishops (see
Mansi Collectio Conciliorum, iv. p . 1380.
and Theodoret. O p p . T . iv. p . 1 3 3 1 . ed.
H a l l e ) , and in this sense. Bretsch. makes
i t r a t h e r a voluntary and supererogatory
worship invented by man. 'ILQeXowzpicro-o-
OpncrKeía in E p i p h a n . Hesres. i. 16. p. 2 1 .
ed. Bas. points to this meaning. F o r t h e
worship of angels Bretsch. refers to t h e
T e s t . xii. P a t r i a r c h . in Fabr. Cod. P s e u d ,
i. p p . 5 4 7 , 5 6 2 , 657. T h e last passage
is positive, if it is to be depended on.
T h a t commonly cited from T o b i t xii. 12.
 E e N 218
only shows t h a t t h e J e w s t h o u g h t the
angels br ought their prayers to remém-
brame, not t h a t t h e y worshipped t h e m as
mediators. On t h i s latter point, see
Bishop Bull, Sermons xi. and xii, of Some
I m p o r t a n t Points, &c. vol. ii. p . 4 3 2 . T h e
fact, however, as to t h e passage of the
Colossians, seems to me to be as M r . D a -
vison, on Primitive Sacrifice, p . 103,
states. St. Paul is condemning certain
forms of specious, b u t unsound w o r s h i p ;
of which he says, they have a show of
goodness or wisdom in them, in their vo-
luntary tribute qf worship, and in their
humility. H e does not therefore use t h e
word in a bad sense, b u t merely says, t h a t
certain forms of worship which falsely as-
sume t h e quality denoted by it, are d e -
serving of censure.]
' E G E ' A í i , or ' E 0 E A E ' £ 2 . T h e learned
D a m m , Lexic. col. 620, observes, t h a t this
verb is in t h e ancient writers always of
t h r e e syllables, and t h a t where our edi-
tions of H o m e r have SÍ'AW, IdéXo) o u g h t to
be replaced.— To will, be willing, resolve.
M a t . ii. 18. xvii. 12. xxiii. 3 7 , & al. See
u n d e r QéXoj.
Ifgg 'E0¿£w, from ÍQOQ custom. [ E c c l e s .
0
xxiii. 9 . ] — T o accustom. 'Edí(opai, pass.
To be accustomed, or customary. occ.
L u k e ii. 2 7 . [ P e r h a p s the preccpt, for
ÍQUT¡XOQ in 1 K i n g s xviii. 2 8 . answers to
t h e word usually translated by command-
ment. Josephus also calis t h e ceremonial
rites '¿dr¡. See his A n t . xvi. 6. 7- Xen.
C y r . i . 6, 19. 2 M a c . i v . 2 . ]
• í l g f ''Edvápxne, e, 6, from '¿QVOQ a na-
0
ilon, and iípxhi to govern.—An Ethnarch,
Or governor of a nation. occ. 2 Cor. xi. 3 2 ,
where it plainly means a deputy, or sub-
ordínate governor. T h u s Lucian *, M a -
crob. tom. ii. p . 6 3 9 , uses i t as a title in-
ferior to BacaXevQ, " Atravcipoc;—avrl ' E 0 -
NA'PXOY BaciXívc, ávayopevdúe. So
Josephus, D e Bel. lib. ii. cap. 6. § 3. [See
1 M a c . xiv. 4 7 . xv. 1, 2 . ] A s to t h e
historical difficulty in 2 Cor. x i . 3 2 , of
Damascus being then subject to k i n g
A r e t a s , see W e t s t e i n , Wolfius, and Marsh's
Translation of Michaelis's I n t r o d u c t . to
N . T . vol. i. p . 55.
{¡§1" 'E&Vucóc, 5, ó , from ÍOvoc.—An
Heathen, a Genlile, a man qf an heathen
nation. occ. M a t . vi. 7. [ P r o p e r l y , be-
longing or peculiar to a nation, as Polyb.
x x x . 10. 6 . ] xviii. 17-
* [ A n d so 1 M a c . x i v . 4 7 . x v . i. 2 . J o s e p h .
A n t i q . x i v . 7- 2 . ]
E ea
SÜ??* ' E 6 V I K O ¡ C , Adv. from ¿QVIKÓC.—-
Heathenishly, after the manner of the
Heathen or Gentiles, occ. Gal. ii. 14.
" E 0 N O 2 , £OC, HQ, ro.
I . A nation, a people: M a t . xxiv. 7.
xxv. 3 2 . L u k e vii. 5. J o h n xi. 4 8 . A c t s
vii. 7- viii. 9. xvii. 26, in which last
passage t h e word is used by S t . P a u l for
t h e whole race of mankind considered, in
a noble or enlarged view, as one nation *.
[ S c h l . says, it means The Jewish nation,
in L u k e vii. 5. xxiii. 2. John xi. 4 8 , 5 0 ,
5 1 , 5 2 . Acts xxiv. 3, 10, and L u k e xxi.
2 3 ; b u t the remarle is u n w o r t h y cf
Schleusner, for either a J e w is speaking,
or some indicative word (this or that) is
always added.]
I I . Christians, in general, are styled
an holy nation, by St. P e t e r , 1 E p . ii. 9,
even as t h e ancient Israelites were, D e u t .
vii. 6. xiv. 2. & al. freq.
I I I . "TLBvsa, r¡, ra, plur. in t h e N . T .
frequently signifies the Heathen or Gen-
tiles, as distinguished from the J e w s , or
believers. M a t . vi. 3 2 . x. 5, 18. xx. 19,
2 5 . L u k e ii. 3 2 . 1 Cor. v. 1. xii. 2. Eph.
ii. 1 1 . iii. 6. & al. freq. T h i s is an H e l -
lenistical sense of the word, in which it is
very often used by t h e L X X [ a s Neh. v.
8 . ] for the Píeb. tn> iJ the nations,
v
the
heathen; b u t in t h e N . T . it often also
denotes or includes t h e believing or Chris-
tian Gentiles, in eontradistinction from
t h e J e w s , as A c t s x. 4 5 . xi. 1, 18. xxi.
25. Rom. xi. 13. xv. 12, 16. xvi. 4. Gal.
ii. 12, 14, & a l . — I t m a y not be amiss to
observe, t h a t our E n g . Heathen is from
t h e Greek "TLOvn.
"E0oe, toe, ac, rb, from '¿da.
I . Custom, usual practice, or manner.
L u k e ii. 4 2 . [ x x i i . 3 9 . ] J o h n xix. 4 0 .
[ H e b . x. 2 5 . ] & al.
[ I I . Rite, solemn custom. L u k e i. 9.
A c t s vi. 14. xvi. 2 1 . xxi. 2 2 . Especially
t h e Jewish law and ceremony, r i t e . So in
Philo and Josephus A n t . xvi. 6. 7-]
" E 0 Í 1 . — To use, be accustomed, be wont,
whence perf. mid. A t t i c 'éiwda, and plu-
perf. ¿íúdsLv. occ. M a t . xxvii. 15. M a r k
x. 1. 'EiwfcWc, rb, particip. perf. mid.
A t t i c neut. What was customary or usual.
occ. Acts xvii. 2. L u k e iv. 16, K a r a rb
Ludas av™, According to his custom. So
L X X , N u m . xxiv. 1.
* "EfíOf is u s e d for a troop or company h y Homer,
II. iii. line 3 2 ,
B a c k h e retreated !o a troop of friends.
S o II. vii. line 1 1 5 , & al.
 E I
'El, A conjunction, [ i s used with the
Indic. O p t . and very rarely with t h e con-
junctive.]
1. Conditional, If, q. d. it being that.
M a t . iv. 3 . v. 2 9 . & al. freq.
2. Sínce. Rom. viii. 3 1 . [ S c h l . adds
Acts iv. 9. xi. 17- xviii. 15. Mark ix. 22.
T h e first W a h l agrees in, t h e two n e x t
he gives nearly the same meaning for,
quodsi, and in t h e last, supposes cer-
tainty to he implied.]
3. Concessive, Though, although. 2 Cor.
xiii. 4. So 'Ei mi, Although, etsi. M a t .
xxvi. 3 3 . L u k e xi. 8. xviii. 4 . & al. freq.
[ A d d 1 Cor. ix. 2. Rom. xi. 17. I t is
even though, in M a t . xxvi. 3 3 . Luke xvii.
2. See H e r m á n , on Viger. p . 832.]
4. I m p l y i n g t h e event, That. Acts
xxvi. 8, 2 3 . H e b . vii. 15. See J o h n ix.
25, where W h i t b y takes it in the same
sense. Comp. ver. 3 1 . T h i s application
of t h e word by the writers of t h e N . T .
is by some called Hellenistical, and sup-
posed t o be taken from t h e like use of t h e
Heb. particle D S if, to which in the L X X
Ii indeed frequently answers in this sense;
see (inter al.) 1 Sam. x. 2 2 . 1 Kings i.
5 1 . B u t it may be observed, t h a t the
purest Greek writers have used Ii in t h e
same manner. Of this Raphelius on A c t s
xxvi. 8, has produced instances from P o -
lybius and Vigerus, D e Idiotism. cap. viii.
sect. 6. r e g . 3 . from Demosthenes and
I s o c r a t e s ; to which I add from Plato,
Phsedon § 2 3 . p . 207- edit. Forster, A¿iv
SE 7rpo<rcnro(>EÍ'í,ai íri, ' E l nal írreiSav drco-
BávtújjLtv HSEV T'ITTOV ÉTCU ?'/ rrplv yzvéo-Qai.
B u t (it seems) t h a t you ought to demón-
s t r a t e further, that after we are dead (our
soul) will exist no less t h a n before we
were b o r n ; and from Josephus, D e Bel.
lib. v. cap. 11. § 6. «ti TTOWCI rae
-ac ¡favXíirae, ' E l Kpartívrte rióv irokefilov
rtiyfiv KivSevvévom role 'ÍSioie, and se-
verely upbraiding the soldiers, that being
in possession of the enemies' walls, they
were exposed to danger in their own.
T h u s the learned Hudson renders it,
'' Mullinnque increpaiis militibus quod,
cum hosíium mtiros obiinuissent, in suü
pericüiareniur." So lib. i. cap. 26. § 2.
~i¡> pev óveiSdi^uiv ' E l — u p b r a i d i n g him
that—illi quidem, exprobransquod—Hud-
son. Raphelius has well shown in his
Annotation on M a r k xv. 44, t h a t íOc'iv-
paaev éi in that, t e x t means he wondered
tiíat, and does not imply t h a t Pilate had
any doubt whether Jesús were dead, b u t
that lie was surprised that he was dead
219 E I
so soon. To the passages alleged by t h a t
learned writer, where Herodotus and X e -
nophon use $avLiá¿¡eiv ii in this sense, we
may add Xenophon's Memorab. lib. i. cap.
i. § 13, where, speaking of the philoso-
phers who pretended to reason about t h e
constitution of t h e universe, he says of
Sócrates, 'EBA'YMAZE CE, ' E l pf¡ <pávepov
avro'te E^IV, ííri rávra a' Svvarov ávdpunroig
Evpüv, He wondered that i t was not m a -
nifest to them, t h a t it was impossible for
men to discover these t h i n g s . T h e r e a -
der may find other plain instances of t h e
like application o f t h e phrase in Josephus,
Ant. lib. xiv. cap. 7. § 2 . and D e Bel. lib.
i cap. 10. § 2. and Cont. Apion. lib. ii. §
37, and will meet with m a n y more in
reading t h e best Greek writers. Comp.
Kypke. [Add 1 John iii. 13. See M a r k -
land ad L y s . p . 670. (Reisk.) K r e b s .
Obss. Flav." p . 9 5 . L i v . vii. 3 1 . 'Ei is
also used for ut, that, where there seems
an ellipse. A c t s viii. 22. (Pray God, and
try if he will.) xvii. 27- M a r k xi. 13.
See jEsop. F a b . 128. H o m . Iliad. ii. 9 9 .
x. 19. where E u s t a t h i u s says It is for ¿Vue.
In some of t h e places I have cited, i t
may be rendered by whether."]
5. I n oaths and solemn assertions i t
denieth, denoting that not, as H e b . iii. 11.
M a r k viii. 12. T h i s sense is agreeable to
t h e like application of t h e Heb. particle
OM,and to t h e correspondent Hellenistical
use of ¿i by t h e L X X . See W k i t b y on
Heb. iii. 11. and Ps. xcv. 1 1 . D e u t . i. 3 5 .
1 Sam. iii. 14. P s . Ixxxix. 3 5 . cxxxii. 2 ,
3, both in the L X X and H e b . T h e m a n -
ner of expression is elliptical, and may be
supplied by let me not Uve, let me not
be God, let me not be truc, or t h e like,
Tpartiü- 6. Of interrogation or doubt, Whether,
if. M a t . xix. 3 . xxvii. 4 9 . M a r k iii. 2 .
L u k e xiii. 2 3 . Acts vii. 1. xix. 2. & al.
freq. T h e Greek writers use it in t h e
same manner. See Vigerus, D e Idiotism.
cap. viii. sect. 6. reg. 4 . [ A d d M a r k viii.
2 3 . L u k e vi. 7. A c t s xvii. 1 1 . 1 Cor.
i. 16. vii. 16. 2 Cor. xiii. 5. S e e M a t t h .
§ 608.]
7. Of wishing, O if! O that! O si!
L u k e xix. 4 2 . Comp. L u k e xii. 4 9 . xxii.
42. 'Ei is not only t h u s used by the L X X ,
Josh. vii. 7- J o b vi. 2 , b u t Raphelius
shows t h a t H e r o d o t u s , Polybius, and H o -
mer (to whom I add Lucian in P r o m e t h .
tom. i. p . 118.) have applied it in t h e
same manner. Comp. Vigerus D e I d i o t -
ism. cap. viii. sect. 6. reg. 1. in 'Ei, and
 220
K y p k e on L u k e xix. 4 2 . B u t perhaps
both in L u k e xix. 42, and xxii. 4 2 , there
is an ellipsis in the end of the former p a r t
of t h e sentence of it would be well, or t h e
like, as usual in t h e Greek writers after h
and iav. Comp. under KeJv 1. On L u k e
xii. 4 9 , see Campbell *.
8. 'Ei pi), If not, i. e. unless, ewcepi,
but, in an exceptive sense. Mat. v. 13. xi.
27. xii. 24, 3 9 . & al. freq. But, in an
adversative sense. Mat. xii. 4. M a r k xiii.
32. L u k e iv. 26, 27. Rom. xiv. 14. Gal.
i. 7- Rev. ix. 4. xxi. 27.
9. 'Ei Sé pi], But if not, otherwise. John
xiv. 2. [ T h i s is generally used where
there is an ellipse, which can be easily
supplied. In John xiv. 2. W a h l says, If
it were not so. Schl. misrepresents Lampe
by giving as his opinión, one out of four
which he mentions. B u t all seem harsh t ,
and all are, I think, necessarily false, by neg-
lecting t h e particle av; elirov &v bplv m u s t
be, as our translation has it, I would have
told you. Kuinbel says, t h a t this is t h e
most simple and t r u e method of transla-
tion, and he explains i t properly, ' If
there were not many mansions in my
F a t h e r ' s house, and ye could not follow
me thither, I would not have deceived you,
b u t told you so openly.' T h i s too is t h e
'¿re, interpretation of Valla, Beza, Grotius,
and others. I recommend my readers to
compare Epictet. E n c h i r . xiii. xxvi. (twice)
xxx. iElian. V . H . xiii. 42. Aristoph.
P l u t . 4. 8. for instances of this ellipse, and
Casaub. ad A t h e n . v. 2. with Bos. Com-
pare also Xen. Anab. iv. 3 . 6. Cyrop. iii.
1. 3 5 . Plato Lysis, p . 134. ( H e r n d o f )
Arrian. E x p . A l . iv. 4. 17. and B u t t m a n
Gr. G r . § 135. not. 10.]
* [ T h e u s e of S i in this sense i n L a t i n i s very
c o m m o n , as O ! si m i n e aureus iste, & c . O ! m i h i
pretéritos referat si J ú p i t e r a n n o s . ]
\ [ T h e first takes h as interrogative, Have I not
told you that I am going to prepare a place for
you? referring to s o m e unrecorded conversation.
T h e 2 d supposes an ellipse, / / ' I have not heforc
told yon, I tell you now that l'am going, §c. The
3 d ( w h i c h Schl. gives) I cannot construe so as to
suit the explanation. Praternuam autem, quod
d i x i vobis, proficiscor paraturus, & c . T h i s means,
s a y s L a m p e , ' N o t to repeat what I have often said
o f the glory of m y Father's h o u s e , ñor to remind
y o u of m y promiso, that y o u shall hereafter follow
m e thither, I n o w say as an aduitional consolation,
I am g o i n g to prepare a place for y o u . ' H e gives
satisfactory instancia of si Si/in m e a n i n g besides.
T h e 4 t h is, ' B u t i f that is not e n o u g h , ( n a m e l y ,
the assurance of mansions in H e a v e n for t h e m , )
if y o u are still a n x i o u s a b o u t m e , I h a v e already
told y o u (on former occasions) that I go to prepare,'
&c.
E I A
10. 'Ei Se pr/ye, But if not truly, other-
wise truly. M a t , vi. 1. ix. 1 7 ; on which
last t e x t observe, t h a t Xenophon applies
Ii Sé pi) in t h e same manner, as referring
to t h e sense, not to t h e words, in Cyri
Exped. lib. iv. p . 2 7 1 . edit. Hutchinson,
8vo, who, in Note 4, shows t h a t t h e
phrase is t h u s used also by Demosthenes,
Thucydides, iElian, and Dio Chrysostom.
"EiyE, A conjunction, compounded of L
if, and yé truly.
1. If indeed, if truly. occ. Gal. iii. 4.
Col. i. 2 3 .
2. Since indeed, since truly. occ. 2 Cor.
v. 3 . E p h . iii. 2. iv. 2 1 . See Doddridge
[and W h i t b y ] on t h e two latter t e x t s .
[ P h i l . O p . p. 424. Dion. H a l . iv. p . 211.]
7
Eioos, eos, ai;, rb, from eiSoí to see.
I. The act of seeing, sight. occ. 2 Cor.
v. 7.
11. The object qf sight, form, appear-
ance. occ. L u k e iii. 22. ix. 29. 1 Thess.
v. 22. John v. 37 ; on which last t e x t
comp. Exod. xxiv. 17, in t h e L X X , where,
as in many other p a r t s of t h a t versión,
eiSoe answers to the H e b . n t O n sight, ap-
pearance; the Greek writers likewise
use it in t h e same sense. Comp. also
N u m . xii. 8, in H e b . and L X X . Camp-
bell, whom see, understands J o h n v. 3 7 . —
&c. to the end of ver. 3 8 , inlcrroga-
tively, and refers eiSoe to t h e bodily form
( L u k e iii. 22.) in which t h e H o l y Spirit
appeared at Jesús' baptism, and Q¡¿>vr¡v to
t h e voice which was then heard from
heaven.
" E I A Í i and 'EIAE'íi, from the H e b . jn>
to feel, perceive, hiow, to which it fre-
quently answers in t h e L X X .
I . To perceive or know with the out-
ward senses, particularly with t h e sight,
to see. M a t . ii. 2, 9, 10. & al. freq. [It
means, tolookat, in M a t . xxviii. 6. M a r k
xiv. 67. L u k e xxiv. 39. John x x . 27. and .
thence, lo alteud to, in A c t s xiii. 4 1 .
1 John iii. 1. Verbs of sense are so often
changed, t h a t it seems to mean to hear
in L u k e i. 29. as in /Elian. V. H . ii. 10.
Soph. GSd. T . 5 1 3 . W e may add t h a t t h e
verb is used as well of things actually see?¡
as of others seen in visions. See Rev. i.
19. & al. J o h n viii. 56. (caí lile) xii. 4 ! .
H e b . xi. 13. A c t s xi. 6.]
I I . To perceive with the eyes of the
mind, to know, perceive, understand. See
2 Cor. xi. 11, 30. J o h n xxi. 15, 16. 1 Cor.
ii. 11. Rom. viii. 28. H e b . x. 30. & al.
freq. In John iii. 3 , Campbell renders it
discern; see his Note. On> Acts xxiii. 5,
 E l A 221
comp. Wetstein and Wolfius, and see
M a r s h ' s Translation of Miehaelis's Intro-
duce, to N . T . vol. i. p . 5 1 . [Oi¿a is
especially used to express positive know-
ledge. See M a t . vi. 8. Rom. viii. 28.
1 Cor. viii. 2. 2 Cor. xi. 1 1 , 3 1 . xii. 2, 3 .
(o ©fóc oíSev) J o h n xx. 2. xxi. 15, 16,
17. J e r . xx. 12. I n E p h . vi. 8. Col. iii.
24. 1 Pet. i. 18, it is to know from consi-
deraron or persuasión. In M a t . xxiv.
4 3 . John xviii. 4. A c t s xx. 22, 2 5 , and
29, it is to know bqforehand.'J
I I I . To see, experience, as death, cor-
ruption, grief. L u k e ii. 2G. H e b . xi. 5.
A c t s ii. 27. xiii. 3 5 , 3 6 , 37- Rev. xviii. 7.
[ To experience good fortune in 1 P e t . iii.
10. (the phrase being to see good days.
Henee carne perhaps the other phrase,
J o h n viii. 5 6 , to see my day, i. e. to Uve
io my lime, to have experience of me.)
Such expressions are common in] H e b .
and seem to be taken from the Oíd T e s t a -
ment. See Ps. xvi. 10. lxxxix. 4 9 . L a m .
iii. 1.
I V . To know, be acquainted with, as a
person. M a t . [ x x v . 12.] xxvi. 72, 74.
M a r k [ i . 26, 3 4 . ] xiv. 7 1 . [ L u k e xxii.
34. T h e r e is one passage of great diffi-
culty in J o h n i. 32, by some referred to
this head. T h e difficulty is t h i s ; in St.
M a t t h e w we are told t h a t J o h n wished
not to baptise Christ, as not requiring his
baptism, while in this place of St. J o h n ,
he says he did not know him when he
carne to be baptised. M a n y and very
various solutions have been offered. W i t -
sius, Miseel. Sacr. ii. p . 5 3 9 , says, t h a t
t h e easiest is to suppose t h a t J o h n was
not acquainted with Jesús, b u t at the mo-
m e n t of his coming was warned by the
H o l y Spirit t h a t this was the Messiah,
and t h a t this was afterwards conjirmed
by the visible descent of t h e Spirit: but
besides many other objections, this is con-
t r a r y to Scripture. I think, on the whole,
with Macknight, t h a t personal!y J o h n
must have known Jesús, m u s t have known
his holy life, and therefore have refused to
baptise h i m with the baptism of repent-
ance, which he needed not, b u t t h a t he
knew him not as the Messiah. Indeed I
go farther. J o h n had been expressly told
( J o h n i. 33.) t h a t a defiuitc sign would
be given him to point out t h e Messiah,
viz. the visible descent of the S p i r i t ; and
he m i g h t therefore not presume, before
seeing t h e sign, to pronounce any one to
be the Messiah, while yet his knowledge
of the circumstances of Christ's b i r t h ,
E I A
m i g h t strongly incline him to believe t h a t
he would be declared to be s o ; and t h a t
feeling m i g h t dictate t h e address in St.
M a t t h e w , which certainly only indicates
respect and veneration, and contains no
distinct acknowledgment of J e s ú s being
the Messiah. M a c k n i g h t ( H a r m o n y , i.
P a r a p h r . Sect. xv.) contains all t h e va-
rious opinions.]
V. To know, esteem, regard. 2 Cor. v.
16. 1 Thess. v. 12.
V I . To achiowledge, own. M a t . xxv.
12. 2 Thess. i. 8. [1 Thess. iv. 5. T i t . i.
16. H e b . viii. 11. x. 30. 1 S a m . ii. 12.
j E l i a n . V . H . ii. 13.]
V I L To know how, implying both know-
ledge and inclination, [ a n d even power^.
M a t . vii. II. L u k e xi. 13. 2 Pet. ii. 9.
Comp. M a t . xxvii. 6 5 . [ L u k e xii. 5 6 .
Phil. iv. 12. 2 P e t . ii. 9. 1 T i m . ii. 5. 1
Thess. iv. 4. .Elian. V. H . ii. 2 1 . ]
V I H . To see, consider. Acts xv. 6.
I X . To see, converse with. L u k e viii.
20. (Comp. M a t . xii. 47.) Thucydides
[iv. 125.] and Lucian [Dial. N e p t . and
Mere. 17.] use ISEÍV in this sense. I t is
then an Attic application of t h e verb.
See Wolfius and W e t s t e i n . [See J o h n
xii. 2 1 . Acts xvi. 4 0 . xxviii. 1 5 . 2 T i m .
i. 4. T h e following are peculiar senses,
To see about (i. e. io consider). A c t s x v .
6. To remember or recall, 2 T i m . iii. 14.
1 P e t . iii. 9. I n 1 Cor. i. 16, it is I do
not remember whether, or I am not sure
whether. In A c t s xxiii. 5, Schleusner
says, / did not consider. So Bishop San-
derson. B u t Wolf, Deyling, iii. p. 325.
Witsius (Me!. Leid. p . 1 5 6 ) . and others,
say t h a t P a u l , from long absence, did not
know t h e H i g h Priest, as out of t h e
temple he wore his common dress. See
Reland A n t i q . ii. 1. p . 149.]
'EifJíüXfto,'', tí, ™, from íiSuiXoy.—An
idol's temple, occ. 1 Cor. viii. 10. T h u s
used also in t h e Apocrypha, 1 Esd. ii. 10.
1 Mac. i. 4 7 . x. 8 3 . So in t h e L X X , 1
Sam. x x x i . 10, we have 'A^aprawv for
t h e temple of Ashtaroih, or Asi arte; in
2 Mac. xii. 2 6 , 'Arepyare~wv for t h e temple
of Atergatis ; and in t h e heathen writers,
MucreLOV for t h e temple qf the Muses;
~Bat;yeiov —qf Bacchus; Bei/ScSewi' —qf
Bendis, i. e. Diana, &c. Comp. Wetstein
in 1 Cor. T h a t it was t h e custom of t h e
ancient heathen to feast in the temples qf
their idols, Elsner on 1 Cor. viii. 10, has
proved from testimonies of t h e Greek and
Román writers, and has remarked t h a t
t h e same t h i n g is mentioned of the She-
 El A 222
ehemites, J u d . ix. 2 7 . Comp. also J u d .
xvi. 2 3 , 2 5 , with Josephus A n t . lib. v.
cap. 8. § 1 2 ; and see Amos ii. 8. 3 Mac.
iv. 16, and Wolfius and K y p k e on 1 Cor.
viii. 10.
E§§¡p 'EidtoXódvTov, e, ro, from '¿tSaXor
an idol, and Súw to sacrifice.—Somewhat
sacrificcd, or offered in sacrifice to an
idol, A c t s xv. 29. [xxi. 25.] 1 Cor. viii.
1, 4. [v. 10. x. 19, 20. Rev. ii. 14.] T h i s
word is also used in § 5 . of the treatise
eoncerning the Maccabees, printed at the
end of Hudson's J o s e p h u s ; where it is
said t h a t Antiochus commanded his sol-
diers to forcé t h e Hebrews 'EIAQAO0Y'-
TfiSN—¿nro-ysíícrdaí'to taste meat offered
to idols. [All t h e victim was not b u r n t ;
and the p a r t s left were either used for a
feast by t h e sacrificer, or sold. T o t h i s is
t h e allusion made in the N . T . ]
Ifglp '~EtSo)XoXarpéia, ac, r), from éiSúXov
0
an idol, and Xarpéia worship, which see.—
Idolatry, worship of idols or false gods,
idol-worship. occ. 1 Cor. x. 14. Gal. v. 20.
Col. iii. 5. 1 Pet. iv. 8. [ I n Gal. v. 2 0 ,
it is generally idolatry; in l Cor. x. 14.
1 P e t . iv. 3, the eating of the food de-
scribed in the last w o r d ; in Col. iii. 5, a
vice as bad as idolatry. W e learn from
Schcetgen, H o r . H e b . i. p . 7 7 9 , t h a t t h e
J e w s called other g r e a t vices by this
ñame.]
'EiBwXoXarpj/s, 5, o, from íibioXov
an idol, and Xárpig a servant, worshipper.
Comp. u n d e r Aarpeíco.—An idolater, a
servant, or worshipper. of idols. 1 Cor. v.
10. E p h . v. 5. & al.
"TLibujXov, a, rb, from ubos a form, ap-
pearance.
I . An image or represenlalion, whether
corpbreal or mental, of some other t h i n g .
T h u s H e r o d o t u s and Xenophon (Memor.
Socrat. lib. i. cap. 4. § 4.) use eibwXa for
slatues of men, Plato sometimes for uni-
versal ideas, or conceptions ofthe mind,
and L o n g i n u s ( D e Sublim. § ix. p . 4 6 .
edit. 3tia;. P e a r c e ) for a poelical image.
In H o m e r 'éibwXov is used for t h e shade,
or aerial vehicle of a departed soul or
mind, and is distinguished both from t h e
body and t h e soul. Comp, II. xxiii. lines
103, 104, with Odyss. xi. lines 600, 6 0 1 ,
and see Pope's Note on t h e former pass-
age, and Lucian on t h e latter, in Dial.
D i o g . et H e r c u l . tom. i. p. 2 6 2 . Plato
also applies it in t h i s sense, Phsedon, § 30,
where consult F o r s t e r ' s Note. See fur-
t h e r H o m e r ' s application of this word, II.
v, line 4 4 9 . Odyss. iv. line 796. H e s y -
E I A
chius explains stbtoXov by bpoíwpa a simi-
litude, eucwv an image, crnpsiov a sign,
j(a.paKr!ipicv CKioetbés a shadowy reprc-
sentation, or delineation.
I I . In the N . T. An idol, or image set
u p to be worshipped for God, and t h a t
whether intended as a representative of
the true God, as * A c t s vii. 41 ; or of a
false one, Acts xv. 2 0 . 1 Cor. xii. 2. Rev.
'ix. 20.
I I I . A false god, usually worshipped
by an image. See 2 Cor. vi. J 6. 1 Thess.
i. 9. 1 J o h n v. 2 1 . St. Paul says, 1 Cor.
viii. 4 . (comp. ch. x. 19.) t h a t an idol is
nothing in the world, which surely cannot
mean absolutely nothing (whether by an
idol be understood t h e image itself, or t h e
sun, moon, air, Ccesar, or, &c. represented
t h e r e b y ) , b u t " nothing of a God: for t h e
Apostle proves t h a t an idol is nothing, be-
cause there is no God b u t one," as W h i t -
by r e m a r k s ; or, to use t h e words of the
t r u l y learned and excellent j - B r e v i n t ,
" Idols may be somewhat as to the mate-
rial part, for so t h e y are sometimes brave
works of men's hands, statues of gokl, &c.
sometimes excellent works of God himself,
as sun and moon, &c. b u t as to their other
formal being of any excellency, which
m i g h t require divine worship, they are
nothing at all of that which fond wor-
shipper s are pleased lo conceive of them,"
[ T h i s is also, in substance, SchíeusHer's
explanation.] Comp. Isa. xii. 2 4 . H a b .
ii. 18, 19. and 'OVSEÍC I I . See also Sui-
cer's T h e s a u r . in "EicUuXoj', and Wolfius,
Cur. Philolog. on 1 Cor. viii. 4 . — I n the
L X X this word answers not only to thc
Heb. tlblf an image, and ^>D& a gra-
ven image, and to CZ)<aí>'y elabórate images,
but also to m > ^ 5 ruling gods, and to
O'ÜÍPN gods, saviours.
* T h e Heathcnish idolatry of worshípping thc
hosi qf heaven, & c . is i n the i m m e d i a t e l y following
verses m e n t i o n e d as distinct from that of the calf;
and i t is evident from the history, E x o d . x x x i i .
that this latter w a s i n t e n d e d as a representative of
J e h o v a h ; for not o n l y the people said of i t (ver. 4.)
These lie thy gods ( A l e i m ) which brought thee up
out of the land of Egypt, b n t A a r o n also (ver. 5.)
built an aliar before it, and Aaron made proclama -
tion and said, To-morroví is a feast to JEHOVAH :
A n d the similar idolatry of the golden calves set u p
by J e r o h o a m in D a n and B e t h e l i s likewise i n a
very clear and striking m a n n e r distinguished from
the worship of Baal, or the san, 2 K i n g s x . 2ti, 2 9 ,
31. . I n short, the worship of tire calves viasArian,
that o f Baal, or the sun, w a s heathcnish idolatry.
C o m p . 1 Cor. x .
f i n h i s D e p t h and. B í y s t e r y of the R o m á n M a s s ,
p. (i9.
 E I K
'EtKí/, Adv. from encía to yield.
I. Rashly, without sifficient cause, occ.
M a t . v. 2 2 , where i t plainly implies yield-
ing, or giving way to an evil passion.
Comp. Col. ii. 18. So Homer expressly
uses "E1KEIN dvpw for yielding to one's
mind or passion. See II. ix. lines 109,
110, 594. II. xxiv. line 43. Odyss. v.
line 116. [Pol. i. 52. al.]
I I . In vain, to no purpose. occ. Rom.
xiii. 4. 1 Cor. xv. 2. Gal. iii. 4. iv. 11.
In this sense also is implied a being over-
eóme, or yielding to opposition and diffi-
culty. On Gal. iii. 4, see Elsner and
Wolfius. [ X e n . Cyr. v. 1, 6.]
"Encoo-t, óí, cu, ra, Indeclinable.—The
number twenty. L u k e xiv. 3 1 . & al. freq.
'Eu'OírárEi'rE, Indeclinable, from iiKoai
and wívre Jive.—Twenty-five. occ. J o h n
vi. 19.
'E¿/i-oer(r£o'<rap£e, bi, cu, declined as rétr-
aapeg, from eiKoai, and récaapeg four.—
Twenty-four. occ. Rev. v. 8, 14.
'JíiKoaiTpeíe, bi, ai, declined as
from eiKoo-i, and rpelg three.—Twenty - relate to t h e Uves or wills of Christians,
three. occ. 1 Cor. x . 8. where see Wolfius,
W h i t b y , and Doddridge.
"EIKQ, To yield, submit. occ. Gal. ii. 5.
[Wisd. xviii. 5.]
"EIKíi, [ O n l y eoina is used.] To be like,
resemble. occ. James i. 6, 23.
'EIKÚV, óvog, J/, from ÍIKIO to be like, re-
semble.
I. A corporeal representation, an image,
as of a man made of gold, silver, or, &c.
occ. Rom. i. 23. [Schleusner says here
t h a t it is not the image qf the form, but
the form or figure of the thing; and he
compares Tacit. v. 5. Déos in species ho-
minum effingere."] Of a prince's head im-
pressed on a coin. occ. M a t . xxii. 20.
M a r k xii. 16. L u k e x x . 24. Herodian, lib.
i. cap. 27, uses t h e word in this latter
view, 'Ñoplapara—éicrervTráipeva rijv ¿KÉiva
'EIKO'NA, Money struck with his image.
I I . An image, resemblance, likeness.
See 2 Cor. iv. 4. Col. i. i 5. 1 Cor. x i . 7 * .
Col. iii. 10. Rom. viii. 29. 1 Cor. xv. 49-
I I I . I t seems from the tenor of t h e
Apostle's argument, to be used H e b . x. 1 ,
for the essential or substantial form of a
thing, t h a t is, for the very thing itselfl as
opposed to its arda shadow or delineation ;
so it is parallel to a-upa the body or sid>-
stance, which the Apostle elsewhere op-
poses in like manner to its ada, or sha-
* [Compare with this text D i o g . Laert. vi. 5 1 .
L u c i a n I m a g . 2 0 . A r t e m i u , ii. 3 7 . iii. 3 1 . ]
223 E I A
dow, Col. ii. 17- A n d accordingly t h e
Syriac versión explains éiKÓva, H e b . x . 1,
by KDTp the substance, and Chrysostom
by ri)v ciXr¡6eíav the truth or reality. (See
'AXr¡6éia I I . ) Comp. Rom. viii. 29. and
see Wolfius on Heb. x. 1. and Suicer's
Thesaur. in 'EIKÚV III.
'EtXiKpíveía, ag, í;, from éiXiKpivfjg.
—Sincerity, purity. occ. 1 Cor. v. 8. 2
Cor. i. 12. ii. 17- [ I n 2 Cor. i. 12, it is,
says Schleusner, the sincerity approved by
God. ( F o r t h e derivation of this word
see t h e n e x t ) . Theophylact says " p u r i t y
of sentiment and w a n t of guile, h a v i n g
nothing in shade, ñor foul u n d e r a fair
cover."]
'EiXiKpívng, eog, ug, b, n, from ¿1X7], or
éXr] t h e shining or splendour qf the sun,
and Kplvtú to judge, discern.—Sincere,
puré, unsullied, without, or free.from spot
or blemish, properly to such a degree as
to bear examination in the full splendour
of the solar rays. I n this view t h e word
rpetg, in the N . T . is generally understood to
and the learned Elsner has shown t h a t i t
is sometimes applied in this view by t h e
G r e e k w r i t e r s : b u t since in St. Paul i t
seems to refer to boKipá'Ceiv discernment,
and is by St. P e t e r joined with Siávoiav
understanding, t h e learned critic j u s t
mentioned takes it to import t h a t clear-
ness or perspicuity qf mind or under-
standing, by which one is able to see all
things evidenlly, and proceed w i t h o u t
mistake. So éiXacpivíjg may be rendered
olear, clearly discerning, of elcar judg-
ment or discernment, i. e. spiritually, in
all t h i n g s both of Christian faith. and
practico. Elsner shows t h a t t h e H e a t h e n
writers in like m a n n e r apply eiXiKpivéia,
eiXiKpivuig, and eiXacpivég to t h e under-
standing. occ. Phil. i. 10. 2 P e t . iii. 1.
So Clement in his l s t Epistle to t h e Co-
rinthians, § 3 2 : 'Et ríe Ka® ev hza-ov
' E I A i r P I N Í i ' 2 KATANO'HSHt—If any
one shall distinctly and accuralely con-
sider. B u t in Phil. i. 10, as t h e being
éiXiKpivéig seems to be distinguished from
boKipá'Ceiv, as t h e consequence from t h e
antecedent, and refers to the persons; and
as it does not appear t h a t a man is ever
denominated liXiKpivhg in respect of his
understanding, K y p k e adheres to t h e
common interpretation of íiXiKpiveíc, by
sincere, sound, faullless, and adds two or
three instances of this application by t h e
Greek writers.
'EIAI'2SSi. I t is generally derived
 E I M 224 E I M

from ÉIKÉÚJ lo turn, roll or mhirl round, imports the obiabúng somewhat askeu,
(verso, circumago, Seapula). Compare eVcu bflv, they shall be unto you, i. e. ye
'E/VÍVÍTÍO. shall have or obtain them. Raphelius on
I. To roll or wlúrl round. So A r a t u s , this text produces a similar passage from
iu Aristotle, appHes tisis word to the ap- Arrian D e E x p e d . Alexand. ii. 14, 16.
parent niotion, of trie stars roUing round " O , TI yap av Tréidyc ¿pe, " E 2 T A I 2 0 * 1 ;
t h e e a r t h ; and in Homer, II. xxiii. line F o r , whatever you ask of me, you shall
309, we have obtain or have. Comp. Elsner. [With
the gen. it denotes also to be a follomer
^OtcQx yap Iu 7Ttp\ repucxQ' iKlffffífíí]/' (for zhlactiv}—
of, as Rom. xiv. 8. 1 Cor. i. 12. iii. 4. 2
F o r well thou know'st to -uihirl around the goal. T i m . ii. 19. In H e b . xii. 11. seems to
belong to, to be connected wilh joy, i. e.
Comp. line 466. to be joyous. See B u t t m a n , § 11 9. note
I I . In the N . T . To roll up, as a scroll. 8. Mathia:, § 3 7 2 . W i t h the dative,
occ. Rev. vi. 14. L u k e i. 14. is similar to M a r k xi. 24., as
'EijU¿, from lio to be, which from H e b . are M a t . xix. 2 7 . L u k e xiv. 10. E s t . v. 6.
J-pM the s a m e ; b u t t h e o-, which we find I n 1 Cor. ix. 2 , i t is, If I am not aclcnow-
in some of t h e deriections of huí, as in he, ledged by others, & c ]
¿Vi, 'ésjiEv, tVw, ícdt, &c. seems to be com- V I I I . 'OVK étpí, Ñot to be, i. e. olive,
municated to them from t h e Heb. ttf> is, to be dead. occ. Mat. ii. 1 3 . T h i s is not
are. only an Hebraical and Hellenistical phrase
I. To be, exisi, have existence or being. (comp. Gen. xxxvii. 30. xiii. 3 6 . J e r .
J o h n i. 1 , 2 , 10. viii. 58. [ x v i i . 5.] H e b . x x x i . 15. H e b . and L X X ) , but the purest
xi. G. [ A c t s xvii. 28. R o m . iv. 17. & a l . ] Greek writers have used it in the same
I I . And most generally, To be, denot- sense. ' See t h e instances produced by
ing the quality, slale, condition or situa- Elsner, Raphelius,' Alberti, Wolfius, and
tion of a person or thing. M a t . i. 18, 19. W e t s t e i n ; to which I add from H o m e r ,
ii. 9, 13, 14. iii. 11. M a r k i. 6. ix. 7- & al. II. vi. lines 130, 1 3 1 , 139, 140, ' O Y A F —
freq. [Schleusner says it has a future o ? ; v " H N , A'or lived he long. Comp. II. ii.
sense iu M a t . xxii. 2 3 . M a r k xii. 18, 2 5 . lines 6 4 1 , 642. So Virgil, .Sin. vi. lines
L u k e x x . 3G. Acts xxiii. 8.] 869, 870.
I I I . To be, to happen. M a t . [i. 13. xii.
Ostcndent terris huno tantum fata, neeme ultra
44, 45.] xiii. 40, 49. xvi. 22. [xxiv. 3.] E s s e sinent. [ E u r . H i p p . 357. A l c e s t . 270.]
M a r k xiii. 4. [ L u k e i. 06. & al.]
I V . To be reeleoned, or reputed. M a t . I X . 'Ei^íi ¿ t e — T o be for, i. e. to be-
xviii. 17. 1 Cor. iii. 19. 1 T i m . i. 7. come. Mat. xix. 5 . L u k e iii. 5 . 1 Cor. xv.
[Schleusner adds J o h n v. 3 1 . (and so 45. 2 Cor. vi. 18. This seems a merely
Hackspan, p. 4 2 1 . and Episcopius i. P . Hellenistical expression, and in t h e L X X
I I . p . 6. T h i s seems too to be t h e notion often answers to the Heb.—b n>¡"7. Sec
of Rosenmiiller and Kuinoel) Rom. iii. 26. inter al. Gen. ii. 7, 24. xviii. 18. in the
1 Cor. ii. 14. 2 Cor. iv. 7.] H e b r e w and L X X , and comp. u n d e r r<-
V. To signify, denote, represent figu- vopai I . [ A d d Mark x. 8. 1 Cor. iv. 3 .
ratively or symbolicaüy. M a t . xiii. 3 7 , vi. 6. xiv. 2 2 . Comp. Isa. xl. 4 . xlix. 6.
38, 3 9 . & al. Comp. M a t . xxvi. 26, 2 8 . and see Vorst. Phil. Sacr. c. 36. p . 679.
[Add L u k e viii. 9. xv. 26. xviii. 36. J o h n T h e following Senses are peculiar. In
vii. 36. x. 6. A c t s x. 17. Rom. i. 12. 1 M a t . vi. 5, Thou shalt not behave thyself.
Cor. x. 4. ( T h e rock was a sign or sacra- I n H e b . ix. 15, t k ítiv is, It is not al-
menl of Christ. See Mede Disc. xliv.; of lomed, or it is not possible. Comp. Ecclus.
course the L u t h e r a n s do not agree.) Gal. xiv. 17- xxxiv. 2 1 . and Perizon. ad iElian.
iv. 2 4 . E p h . iv. 9. (What does it denote V. H . ix. c. 7- T h e r e is a class of phrases
or signify but that, &c.) Rev. v. 8.] which hardly admit of any description, but
VI. To mean, import. M a t . ix. 13. xii. have a certain similarity. J o h n xii. 50. His
7. M a r k ix. 10. Acts x. 17- commandmenls are (are the source of)
V I I . W i t h a genitive case, it denotes eternal Ufe. In 2 Cor. iii. 17, W a h l says,
possession or properly. M a t . vi. 13, 25 Nom the Lord is (Ihc giver of) the Spi-
ÉTÍI', Of thee is, i. e. thine is. So with a rit. B u t I t h i n k M a c k n i g h t r i g h t in ex-
dative, L u k e ix. 13, OÚK éiaiv i¡p"ív, T h e r e plaining it from verses 6 and 16, That ye
are not to us, i. e. we have not. See L u k e may knom what I mean by the Jews ium-
viii. 42. B u t , M a r k xi. 24, t h e fut. Uai ing to ihc Lord, " the Lord" signifies the
 E I M
covenanl of the spirit of' which we are
ministers, j u s t as in verse 15, t h e cove-
n a n t of the letter is called Moses. Rosen-
múller, I think, means the same thing.
In Eph. ii. 14, He is (the author of) the
peace between Jews and Gentiles. Again,
with ríe, iipí has the sense of lo be of
consequence (See .Acts v. 36. Matthite,
§ 487) ; and indeed with other words it
takes the same meaning, and with ¿Ziv
the opposite. See Mat. xxiii. 18. John
viii. 24, according to Vitringa, and .54.
A c t s xxi. 24. xxv. 11. 1 Cor. vii. 19. xiii.
2. 2 Cor. xii. 11. 1 Cor. iii. 7. x. 19. Gal.
ii. 6. vi. 3, 15. And perhaps it has this
sense without any adjunct. See 1 Cor. i.
28, according to Wolf and Elsner after
Chrysostom, and this gives the best mean-
ing. Comp. Xen. A n a b . vi. 2, 10. Cyr. vi.
2, 8.—The verb is constructed with many
prepositions. (1.) With it denotes either
to derive one's originfrom persons, places,
&c. M a t . i. 20. xxi. 2 5 . L u k e ii. 4. John i.
47. iv. 22. vii. 5 2 . A c t s xxiii. 34. 1 Gor.
xi. 8. 1 John iv. 7. & al. Xen. Cyr. ii. 1,
26.—or to belong to any body, sect, people.
M a t . xxvi. 7 3 . M a r k xiv. 69, 70. L u k e
xxii. 58. John vi. 64. xviii. 17, 25. Col.
iv. 9. 2 T i m . iii. 6. Herodian i. 7- 6. John
viii. 2 3 . L a m p e on St. John observes,
t h a t eV often implies not only originfrom,
b u t cióse connection with, a mystical ge-
neration. T h u s , John viii. 2 3 . iivaí TÜIV
fifoj or Kc'iroj, ii; rS /CÓ07.1B, &c. T h i s last
phrase denotes especially to have received
only a carnal or worldly generation, not
to have the divine life. John xiii. 44, you
are sprung from the evil one, and closely
connected with him. See John xv. 19.
xvii.14, 16. 1 John iii. 12. iv. 1—6. 3 John
l i . : kirai ÍK R% I T / T Í M C or ¿a RÍ/s aXndéiae,
seem to mean atlached lo the faith or the
truth, see John xviii. 37- 1 John iii. 19.
Ga!. iii. 10. W i t h ptrtx, besides t h e ob-
vious meanings, this verb implies to assist,
M a t . xxviii. 20. John iii. 2. viii. 29. A c t s
vii. 9. x. 38. xviii. 16. Rom. xvi. 20. Phil.
iv. 9. W i t h avi' it implies to be among
the followers of L u k e viii. 38. A c t s iv. 13.
v. 17, or lo be of the parly qf. Acts xiv. 4.]
' E í / j t . — T o go. T h i s sense of the V.
seems evidently derived from ¿ipí to be;
the correspondent verbs to which latter
do in other languages often import mo-
tion; as, for instance, the F r e n c h étre,
and English lo be. T h u s the French say,
Je suis a vous dans un moment, I am with,
i. e. I come to you in a m o m e n t ; Je l'étois
voir l'autre jour, I was, or went, to see
:25 ]•: i. J»
him the other d a y ; and the English, I am
for London, i.-e. I am going thither, &c.
&c. T h e simple V. hpt to go, occurs.not
in the N . T., though some have taken it
in this sense, J o h n vii. 34, 36, but is here
inserted on account of its compounds and
derivatives.
" E i r e a i ' the same as 'éveicev (which see),
1 being inserted according to the A t t i c
dialect. On account qf. occ. 2 Cor. vii.
12, thrice.
"EÍ7T£P, A conjunction, from ¿1 if, and
TTTP iruly.
1. Iftruly, if indeed. occ. Rom. viii. 9,
17. 1 Cor. xv. 15.
2. Since indeed, since. occ. 2 Thess. i.
6. 1 Pet. ii. 3 .
3. Allhough, indeed. occ. 1 Cor. viii. 5 .
"Etirwe, from ¿t if. and TTWC anyhow, by
any means.—If by any means. occ. Acts
xxvii. 12. Rom. i. 10. xi. 14. Phil. 11.
'~E.ipr)vévtii, from éipr¡vr) peace.— To \_fol-
lom after] peace, be peaceable. occ. M a r k
ix. 50. Rom. xii. 18. 2 Cor. xiii. 11. 1
Thess. v. 13. I t is used by t h e L X X in
the *same sense, answering to the H e b .
CD'bum. [Ecclus. vi. 6. Polyb. v. 8. 7.]
'Eipr¡vri, rjs, ?;, from 'éipeiv ( f i e ) 'év con-
necting into one or together (see E p h . ii.
14—17.) Peace, freedom, or cessation
from enmily in general.
I. Peace temporal, and t h a t whether
public and political, as L u k e xiv. 3 2 .
A c t s xii. 20.—or prívate, H e b . xii. 14. 1
Pet. iii. 11. [TranquilUty. L u k e xi. 2 1 .
J o h n xvi. 3 3 . 1 Thess. v. 3.]
I I . Peace spiritual, i. e. with God and
our own consciences through Christ, Rom.
v. 1. J o h n xiv. 2 7 . xvi. 3 3 . Rom. i. 7,
where see Macknight, & al. freq. Henee
I I I . I t is used as a personal title of
Christ (comp. 1 Cor. i. 3 0 . ) , the Prince
of Peace. (Isa. ix. 6.) E p h . ii. 14. Comn.
Col. i. 20.
I V . I n an Hellenistical sense it denotes
•any, or all kind qf happiness or well-being.
See Rom. ii. 10. James iii. 18. 1 Thess. v.
3. H e b . xiii. 20. Comp. L u k e x i x . 4 2 .
Henee
V. I t is used as a wish qf happiness
and welfare in salutations, see L u k e x. 5 .
(comp. M a t . x. 13.) J o h n xx. 2 1 , 2 6 . —
and in t a k i n g leave, M a r k v. 34. Acts xv.
3 3 . xvi. 36. In these two last senses the
word is frequently applied in the L X X
for the H e b . ¡mbty; and it may be w o r t h
adding, t h a t the oíd H e b . compliment,
*\b t-¡r?W peace be to thee, is still retained
in the East, with only a slight variation.
 [ W a h l observes, t h a t these words were accordingly rendered by many translators
perhaps used on more solemn occasions by cited in Campbell's Note. 1 Cor. x . 17,
the oíd, and as mere salutations by t h e Because the bread (is) one, i. e. t h e
later Jews. See Gen. xliii. 2 3 . Judges vi. memorial of one and t h e same t h i n g ,
2 3 . Dan. x. 19. L u k e xxiv. 3 6 ; and again namely, t h e body of Christ broken for u s ,
iu leave-taking, Luke vii. 50. viii. 18. 1 we, being many, are one body (of Chris-
Sam. i. 17. xx. 42. xxix. 7- W i n e r Bibl. t i a n s ; ) for we are all partakers qf the
Realworterb. p . 299, and Gesenius's Lex. one bread. See Bowyer's Conject. and
in tDl ?©.]
1
especially D r . Bell, On t h e Lord's S u p -
VI. 'Eipí¡vqv SiSóvaí, To give, or grant per, p. 7 7 , 8 1 , 182. 2d edit.—On L u k e
peace. occ. John xiv. 27, where. Raphelius x. 4 2 , see under Xpeía I.
shows that Polybius uses this Greek phrase I I . I t denotes unanimitij or consent.
for giving or granting peace in a political Acts iv. 3 2 , where see Wolfius and S u i -
sense, and that iii a like view he applies cer's Thesaur. under E¿c I. 4 . 'Ano pías T

áTTo\eíireiv ¿ipí\vi)v lo leave peace, which (yviopriQ, or fitikrJQ, namely) With one
corresponds to afúvaí éipí)vr¡v of t h e consent. L u k e xiv. 18, where see Elsner
Evangelist, and Wetstein.
[ V I L Concord or desire of peace. M a t . I I I . The first. This use of t h e word is
x. 3 4 . Luke xii. 5 1 . Acts vii. 2 6 . Rom. common in the L X X , where i t answers to
xiv. 17. 1 Cor. vii. 15. E p h . iv. 3 . I n the H e b . i n « , used in like m a n n e r ; y e t
Col. iii. 15, Schleusner says, That peace- this appl¡catión is not merely Hellenist-
ableness which is approved by God; b u t i c a l ; for in Polybius [p. 1401.] we meet
Wolf uuderstands ihe peace or favour qf with this expression, iv rf¡ MI'Ai nal
God (gained by Christ), which is so lo EIKÓTIJ pífjXtí, i. e. as we also say in
rule in their hearts, or take possession of English, in the one and twentieth book ;
them, that they should think qf nothing and in Herodotus, lib.v. we rcad r¿¡ E N I T

else. A n d certainly this is t h e sense of Kai rpiaKÚ^co, (ETEI, namely) in the one and
the same words in Rom. v. 1. Phil. iv. 7-] thirtieth year, for ra Tcpíorio, &c. * See
'EipTji'ucóc, ?'/, óv, from Eip>)vr¡. Mat. xxviii. 1. 1 Cor.'xvi. 2 . ' M a r k xvi. 2.
I. Peaceable, peaceful, occ. J a m . iii. Comp. ver. 9. and Rev. vi. 1.
17. [ E c c l u s . iv. 8. P s . xxxviii. 3 7 . ] IV. One, one only, unicus. M a t . v. 18,
[ I I . Wholesome, productive of happi- 4 1 . vi. 27- x . 2 9 , 4 2 . & al. freq.
ness. H e b . x i i . l l . Though Wolf prefers V . A certain one. M a t . viii. 19. xix.
adhering to t h e first sense. Bos construes 16. xxvi. 6 9 . L u k e v. 12. John x x . 7.
it cheerful, or pleasant. See Lucían. Though I once t h o u g h t this a merely
Imag. p . 2. S t a r c k Not. Select. p. 99. Hellenistical or Hebraical sense of tic
says agreeable, referring to Micah vii. 3 . conformable to the similar use of t h e H e b .
D e u t , xxiii. 7. Jerem. ix. 7 . ] 1H« o n e ; y e t Kypke on M a t . viii. 19,
'Etpnvowoúu), w. from í\pí\vr¡ peace, and produces Eurípides, Plutarch, Lucian and
Tcoiéta to make.— To make peace. occ. Coi. Dionysius Halicarn. applying t h e mase,
i. 20. [Prov. x. 1 0 . ] tic, and fem. pía in like manner. So iíc
£|§P° 'TLipnvo-woiÓQ, 5, ó, from EiprjvoTroiiu. ns a certain one, Mark xiv. 4 7 , 5 1 , is
—A peace-maker, i. e. not only between used in t h e same sense by t h e Greek
man and man, b u t between man and God. wriiers, as by Homer. II. i. line 144.
So Theophylact explains iipr¡voñoioí' by ói ' E I " 3 T I S apx aví/p—Some certain
uc

Erípac ^aaíá^ovrac KaraXXaucrópEvoi,—ói chief man ¡ and by Arrian (see Raphelius),

¿?ia StdacrKaXtac rae i^Opés re QeS iwi^pé- and Lucian, tom. i. p . 670. ' E I ' S T I S
(¡iovrec, those who reconcile others a t dif- pev avrü)v—A certain one of them. Comp.
ference, those who by their doctrine con- L u k e vii. 10. [ A d d L u k e xxii. 50. and
vert t h e enemies of God. See more in in t h e H e b r e w 1 Saín. i. 1. 2 Sam. xii. 1.
Suícer's Thesaur. on t h e word. occ. M a t . Gen. xxvii. 44. D a n . ii. 3 1 . Herodian vii.
v. 9. [ X e n . Hell. vi. 3 . 4 . ] 5 . 1 0 . Herod. iv. 7 1 . v. 105. T h u c y d . i. 85.
" E l P a [See é p á ü . ] and Bergler. ad Alciphr. E p p . i. 3 . p. 15.]
7
E I 2 , pía, EV.—A noun of number, One. VI. E¡c Kai 'ÉrcpoQ, One and another,
7

I t is by some derived from t h e V . hpí, to M a t . vi, 24. L u k e vii. 4 1 . So in t h e pro-

be, q. d. a, i. e. one, being or thing. fane writers.
I . One, Rom. iii. 10- & al. freo. John x.
* [ A d d Herod. i v . 1 0 1 . T h u c y d . i v . 1 1 5 . H o m .
30, I and the Father are (not l i e one Iliad. x v i . 1 7 3 . E u r . B a c c h . 0 8 0 . Cíe. de Sen.
person, b u t ) iv one thing, as t h e word is c. 5 . j
 E I 51
V I I . E ¿ s « t í eig, One and the
7
for lie ¡IEV—erepoe ce, or ó fiev—¿
xx. 2 1 . xxiv. 4 0 , 4 1 . T h a t this use of
ete is agreeable to t h e Hebrew and Helle-
nistical idiom cannot be disputed. See
[ L e v i t . xii. 8.] 2 Chron. iii. 17- Zech.
iv. 3 , in Heb. and L X X . B u t it is no
less truc t h a t Aristotle, as cited by the
learned Hoogeveen on Vigerus De Idiot-
ism. cap. i. reg. 4, applies t h e word in
t h e same manner, when he says, A ú o ra
Xóyov '¿xovra, " E N pév ol BetopSpev ra
roíavra rwv ovrtov, év ai ¿tpx e'vóé-
Xpvrai aXXtoe ^ X ' ' ' " E N Sé ye, i¿ ra évSé-
£ í
Xopera. There are two parts of which
reason consists (Dnas anima; rationalis
partes, H o o g e v e e n ) ; one by which we
contémplate such things whose principies
cannot be otherwise, the other by which
we consider contingencies. I add from
Pindar, N e m . vi, line 1,
EN K V ^ W ! / , "EN &£Ü>'J yívo;.
One is the race o f m e n , another
Gods.
See also Soph. Elcct, 696. So in our best
English poets, one and one are often used
for one and another. Comp. 1 Thess. v.
11, 'OucoSofiel-e he rbv eva, Edify one an-
other. For similar expressions in t h e Greek
writers see Kypke.
VIH. T
Ete «t0' ete, One by
Mark xiv. 19. John viii. 9. ' O Se KaO'Iie
— A n d each one in particular—occ. Rom.
xii. 5 . If «t0' in these expressions be p u t
for t h e preposition «t-c'i, it is evident t h a t
the following word oughí, according to the
usual diction of the Grcek, and even of the
sacred writers in other places (see 1 Cor.
xiv. 3 1 . Iiph.v.33.), to have been the accu-
sative eva. Some therefore regard « i 9 ' euj
as an Hebraism, and remark t h a t lis is here
used as if it were undeclined, like Hebrew
nouns. I t may seem, however, from L u -
cian'sproducingmtí'Iic,in h i s * Soloecista,
t h a t , though not indeed a puré A t t i c
phrase, yet it was sometimes used among
t h e Greeks themselves in his time, as it
certain]y is by Eusebius, Praip. E v . X . 1.
Hist. Éccl. X . 4. See Wetstein Var.
Lect. on Mark. B u t Beza, and after him
other learned men, and particularly Black-
* AOTK. 'EL apa KA©' ' E I S Ka.-.Uvu <7í VE pifan;
2 0 A . 'EW'XCCFFI ye. AOTK. "05E ! \ A 0 ' ETS IR¿5;
nipriKdti Luc. What? D o e s each (solecism)
escape y o u as it passes ? S o l . S o in truth they
seem to do. L u c . B u t h o w could KA@' E I S (for
each) miss y o u ? L u c i a n Solrecist. t o m . ii. p . 9 8 4 .
E. edit. B e n e d . [ O n this solecism, see G r a v i u s
on this place of L u c i a n . ]
22/ E T 2
other, wail, Sacred Classics, vol. ii. p . 4 3 , in
Se, M a t . order to vindícate t h e sacred writers from
the charge of solecism, have maintained,
t h a t «t0' should be taken not as a p r e -
position, b u t as a contraction of t h e two
partióles Kal en a and then; so t h a t ete
«(0' he, m i g h t be strictly rendered one
and then one, or another; and ó—«t0'
eie one, or this, and then one or an-
other. A n d t r u e indeed it is, t h a t t h e
purest A t t i c writers often p u t Ktjtra for
«tí tira; and Blackwall cites from A r i -
ai
stophanes «10' applied in t h e same m a n -
ner before an aspírate breathing. B u t
still neither of the phrases éie icaff ete,
ñor ó—i;a8' he, is produced from any
Greek elassie; and if even t h e elegance
of t h e former could be justified by t h e
exposition of Beza and Blackwall, yet
that of t h e latter seems on their p r i n -
cipies still less defensible. W e do indeed
meet with ó «t0' lie for each one in t h e
3d book of Maccabees. chap. v. 2 2 , and in
that o f the several of t h e later Christian Greek wri-
ters, but I believe in none of the ancient
elassie authors. On t h e whole, therefore,
it seems most j u s t and reasonable to say,
t h a t «t0' lie, as used by t h e sacred pen-
men, is either an Hebraical or Hellenist-
ical expression, or at most not used by t h e
puré and elegant writers and speakers of
one. occ. the Greek language. See Bowyer's Con-
ject. on Mark, and comp. under 'Icuorv.e.
[ I X . Each. Rev. iv. 8. Each by itself.
Is. vi. 2. Lucian. Deor. J u d . t. ii. p. 12.
I t is used with É'«XTO£ in this sense. L u k e
iv. 4 0 . Acts ii. 3 . See Wessel. ad Diodor.
Sic. xvi. 3 5 . ]
['Etc. A preposition governing t h e ac-
cusative, and properly auswering t h e
question whether?"].
[I. It indicates motion of any kind, or
the dirección of motion to a place, and
signifies (1) To, or sometimes into, as
Mat. ii. 1 1 . ¿Xdóvree ¿te rr)v óiaav *, ibid.
13, 14, 20, 2 1 , 22. iii. 10. ét revp ¡3¿tX- e
Xerat, ibid. 12. iv. 1, 5, 8, 12, 18, 2 4 . v.
I, 29, 30. vi. 6, 26. ix. 2 6 . xiii. 22. xv.
16. xxvi. 7 1 . Mark ix. 2 2 , 4 3 , 4 5 . L u k e
viii. S. xiii. 19, 2 1 . J o h n xiii. 2. Acts iv.
3. éie TÍ]pr¡o-w. v. 16. viii. 2 6 . xiii. 4. ( 2 )
* [ I n A c t s x v i . 4 0 . transíate iin'o 'Lydia's house,
7
and compare A r i s t o p h . P l u t . 2 3 7 , 2 4 2 , where, as
well as elsewhere in good Greek, the person is p u t
for h i s h o u s e after l¡;; b u t m a n y good M S S . read
T
IRPOF for SIF. S e e also X e n . Cyc. i. 5 . 1. ii. 1. 1-
L y s i a s , p . 1 3 4 . H o m . Iliad. x v . 4 0 2 . Greg. Cor.
p. 4 6 . ed.Schcef. F i s c h . ad W e l l . t. i i i . pt. ii. p . 1 5 0 .
Viger. p . 5 9 1 . ]
 E I 2 228 E I 2

On, as to spil on. Mat. xxvi. 67. xxvii. ix. 62. John i. 7. xviii. 37. Acts vii. 5. ix.
30. M a r k viii. 23.—to strike one on. (3) 2 1 . xi. 18. Rom. i. 1,5, 24. vi. 1 6 . ix. 2 1 .
Amongst, as Luke x. 36. To fall among xiii. 4. xiv. 9. (with Ihis intent.J H e b .
Hueves, xiii. 2 ! . Jolin xxi. 2 3 . Acts iv. xi. 11. & al. T h u s ¿ic TÍ; is mhy ? for
17. xix. 30. Herodian vii. 11. 10. Xen. what? M a t . xxvi. 8. & al.freq. See Herod.
Mein. i. 1. 14. In this sense, too, ¡t shows i. 6. 20. Diod. Sic. i. 56. & al. In M a t .
t h e object to which any thing is directed ; xxvii. 10. they gave. them for the felá, i. e.
and may be rendered (4) Tomarás, near to buy ikefi.eld. T h e preposition is often
to, M a t . xxi. 1. fiyyitrav £tc 'lepoaóXvpa. joined with an< infin. in this sense, and
xxii. 3 . Mark vii. 3 1 . L u k e vi. 20. ix. 62. may be translated For the purpose of, or
xi. 4 9 . xxii. 24. John iv. 5. (comp. v. 8.) To the end that. Mat. x x . 19. xxvi. 2.
ix. 11. xi. 32. (at i. e. with a motion I xxvii. 13. Mark xiv. 5 5 . Acts iii. 19.
tomarás), and 38. xxi, 4. (stood near to) i E p h . i. 18. & al. W i t h the negative pij, it
Acts vi. 15. xiii. 9. xxi. 4. xxvi. 24. may be translated (1) Lest, as in A c t s vii.
Rom. ii. 4. xi. 36. (all things are referred | 19. Lest they should Uve, 1 Pet. iii. 7- &
to him) viii. 2 1 . Shall be freed—(and j al. In H e b . xi. 3 . Heinsius and others
shall come) to liberty, & ai. See Viger ! join pi) to (paivopévwv. Compare Xen.
p . 5 9 3 . I t likewise points out the state ! Mem. iii. 6. 2. Gr. i. 4. 5. 'Eic in a
into which any t h i n g passes by any | similar way expresses the event, and may
change, división, or colleclion, and m u s t be ¡ be translated (2) Unto, where some verb
translated (5) Into. M a t . xiii. 40. (bind like causing, bringing; or the like is often
them into bundles) where comp. H e - to be suppüed. See L u k e ii. 34. Rom. v.
rodian. i. 1. 4. xxvii. 5 1 . Mark xv. 38. 16. twice, vi. 16-, though these may also
\jvas rent into two ('parís)~\ pépr¡ being come under head V. W h e r e the cause is
understood, (compare Polyb. ii. 16. 11. expressed, it is frequently to be translated
Lucían. Dial. Deorum viii. 1. Dio Cass. (3) Wilh respect lo, or regará being had
xxxv. p . 5. Bos. Eliips. p . 237. ed. Schcef. to, Mat. vi. 34. Luke vii. 30. xii. 2 1 .
Herodian. iii. S. 4. & al.) Acts ii. 20. (not rich, regará being had to God's
Rom. i, 26. Rev. xi. 6. ( T h i s notion of will) John iv. 36. Acts ii. 26. xxv. 20.
change is very s t r c n g in Julián. A n t i c . Rom. i v . 2 0 . 2 Cor. ix. 13. xii. 6. Gal. v.
Anthol. G r . t. iii. p. 230. ed. Jacobs. 10. E p h . iii. 16. v. 3 2 . Heb. vii. 14. &
Diod. Sic. i. 12. xix. 32. Polyb. ii. 4 1 . 5. al. 2 Sam. xi. 4. (for b) Diod. Sic. xi. 50.
Antiphon. 6 5 1 . 9 . ) John xi. 52. xvii. 2 3 . Pausan, vi. 2. 4. x. 24. In M a t . x. 4 1 .
Again it is (C) Tomarás, or sometimos W a h l says, rat/one habita doctoris, se.
in, expressing the disposition or direction sibi noli; b u t others, (as Schl.) more
of t h e mind, hopes, feelings, &c. John rightly say, because he is a p?-opket.]
v. 4 5 . ¿te ov in whom ye hope, i. e. to-
[ I I I . For the use ofifor the advantage,
wards whom you look with hopo. Comp.
or disadvantage of. Mat. xx. 1. xxvi. 10.
Plerodian. vii. 10. 1. Polyb. x. 3 1 7 - and
Mark viii. 19. L u k e i x . 13. xv. 22. J o h n
so A c t s xxiv. 15. Rom. i. 27. v. 8. xii.
vi. 9. Acts ii. 22. xxiv. 17. Rom. i. 17.
12. 2 Cor. ii. 4. ix. 13. I Pet, iv. 9. John
viii. 18. xi. 32. 1 Cor. viii. 6 . (for his
i. 12. ii. 1 1 , 2 3 . (Perhaps one should ra-
glory, say W a h l and Rosenm.; but
t h e r say, t h a t this sense explains the
M ' K n i g h t thinks there is an ellipse of
origin of the expression in the three last
Tcpoo-wüpsv ( N u m b . xxv. 2.) and so, I
passages, where it is to believe iu.~) On
think, Hammond) xv. 16. xvi. 6. 2 Cor.
this usage, see Fischer. t. iii. p t . ii. p .
viii. 4. ix. 1. Gal. iv. 11. Col. i. 20. & al.
154. From the same reasons arises an-
other meaning, (7) Against, expressing 1 Sam. xix. 4. Diodor. Sic. i. 98. & al.]
t h e object against whom action or feeling [ I V . Used of time, Until. In Mat, x.
is directed. Mat. xviii. 15. M a r k iii. 29. 22. xiii.13 xxiv. 13. John.xiii. I. Until the
L u k e xii. 10. xv. 18, 2 1 . xvii. 3 . xxii. end. In Mat,.xxi. 19- Mark iii. 19. we
65. Acts vi. 11. 1 Cor. viii. 12. & al. have iie rbv. aiüva, i. e. until the most
Herodian. vi. 7. 11. Xen. Cyr. ii. 2. 2. distant period, i. e. for ever. L u k e i.
and frequently elsewhere.] 50. Rev. 1. Acts iv. 3 . ¿i rr)v avpwv.
e

2 T i m . i. 2. Heb. ii. 3. & al. Diod. Sic.

[ I I . I t seems to express the final cause xv. 2. Herod. vi. 97. Xen. Symph. viii.
or purpose of any t h i n g , either when mo- 18. & al. I n L u k e xii. 19. it is for many
tion is or is not signified, and is translated y e a r s . ]
hy for, M a t . x. 18. xxvi. 18. Shedfor the [ V . W i t h an adjective, it makes a pe-
remission. &c. Mark i. 4. ii. 17. L u k e ii. 32. riphrasis for t h e adverb, or describes the
 E I 2 22!) E 1 2

manner. Luke xiii. 11. tic ro rravTtXéc
altogether, (which in H e b . vii. 25. means
always), Rom.xiii. 14.¿ie EmOvpíacso that
evil desires are excitcd. Perhaps this is
t h e sense in Rom. v. 16, 18, so that (men)
were condemned, 2 Cor. x. 15. fie ra
tiLierpa, and fie wtpio-o-éiav, immoderately
and abundaníly. al. Xen. Meni. iii. 3. 4.
& al.]
[VI. I t is used for év with ( i ) N o u n s
of place. T h u s , Mat. ii. 23. lived in the
city. Mark i. 9. baptized in the Jordán,
and 39. ii. 1. v. 14, 34. xi. 8. xiii. 3.
xiv. 9. L u k e i. 20. xi. 7- John i. 18. ix.
7. xx. 7, 19, 26'. In Acts ii. 39. he
paicpav is, according to W a h l , for év /.laicpa
se. x^P? fa ar
°ffi meaning the Gentiles,
(comp. E p h . ii. 1 3 . ) ; though others, from This verb is used also in the simple sense.
Xen. Cyr. v. 4. 2 ¡ . refer the words to
time, and t h i n k it is, they who Uve in
remote ages. Compare with the first
passages in this head, iEIian. V. H.
vii. 8. Orph. Argón. 509. Soph. Aj. RO.
Taubm. ad Plut. Amphit. i. 1. 25. Krebs.
Obss. Flavv. p. 78 and 215. I t is also
used (2) for év among, or in presence of,
as Acts ii. 22. among you. xxii. 30. before
them- 2 Coi-, viii. 23. before. Herod. viii.
26. (3) W i t h nouns of time. Mat. xii.
41. L u k e xi. 32- at the preaching. So Xen. Hell. v. 2, 12.]
iic & év are used by the L X X for n Gen.
[ I I . To bring in, of a person. L u k e ii.
27.—of things. Acts xii. 45. in which sense
it is often used of merchaudise in good
Greek. Xen. Vect. iv. 40. 5. D e Rep.
A t h . ii. 3. In H e b . i. 6, perhaps it is to
be referred to sense I. I t means, I think,
the formal introduction of one vested with
great authority to those he is to govern,
and W a h l very r i g h t l y refers to the title
of Psalm xc'viii. T h i s , too, is Schleus-
ner's opinión, as he says, To propose
openly, lo conslitute and declare; and
Rosenmiiller quotes Phil. de Agricult.
]). 1.93. C. as another instance. Chrysos-
tom. however, translates when he delivers
lo him the kingdom over the world.~]
['EKTCI/JBW, from éic and O.K¿U> lo hear.
T h u c . v. 45. Aristot. Probl. xi. 37. and
Psalm Iviii. 5 . ]
[I. To hear favourably, as prayers.
Mat. vi. 7. L u k e i. 13. Acts x. 3 1 . Psalm
iv. 1. W i t h ci7ro it means to save, t h e
consequence of such a favourable hearing
being p u t for the antecedent, as H e b . v.
7. and J o b xxxv. 1 2 ; and without á7ro,
in Psalm Iv. 1 6 . ]
[ I I . To obey or heed, 1 Cor. xiv. 2 1 .
Comp. D e u t . i. 43. ix. 23. Tlracvd. i. 126.
['Eio&'xo/xai, from lie and oé°)(op to re-
ai

xxxvii. 20. 2 Chron. xi. 4. and so in
Greek. Diod. Sic. iii. 43. v. 84. & al. freq.
In Acts vii. 53. for év, it expresses the
manner, ' by the disposition.' In Rom. vi.
17. it is according to, or in which; in
M a t . xii. 18. 2 Pet. i. 17. it is for wiih;
and in Mat. v. 35. for by.~]
ceive.— To receive with kindness. 2 Cor.
vi. J 7, where a reception into communion
is meant. See verse 16. and isa. Iii. 12.
Ezek. xi. 17- xx. 35. xxii. 20. Zech. x. 8.
Hos. viii. 10. 2 Mace. iv. 22. Wisd. xix.
15. Xen. Cyr. v. 5, 9 . ]
'hAaépxppai, from éte in, and 'épx°P to ai

[ V i l . W i t h éqxí, yívopai, &c. it ex- come. í t borrows most of its tenses from
presses, To be accountedfor, or as, to be- éio-ekevtib).
come. See L u k e iii. 5. xiii. 9. Mat. xix. I. To come in, enter, in whatever man-
5. xxi. 42. M a r k x. 8. xii. 10. 1 Cor. ner. See Mat. v. 20. vi. 6. vii. 13. viii. 8.
vi. 16. E p h . v. 31. Acts iv. 11. xix. 27. (Comp. Gen. xix. 8, in H e b . and L X X . )
Rom. ii. 26. iv. 3, 22. ix. 8. Gal. iii. 6. Mat. xxvi. 4 1 , 58. M a r k vi. 22. L u k e vii.
Henee, explain Mat. v. 13. Gen. ii. 22, 45. Acts xix. 30. Heb. ix. 12. x. 5 . — [ T o
24. xv. 6, &c.] enter violenlly. Mark iii. 27. Acts xx. 2 9 . ]
[ V I I I . V\ ith an accusative after ríOripi, I I . To enter into the possession qf. occ.
iydptú, and t h e like, it has the meaning of L u k e xxiv. 26. Comp. L u k e xxii. 3 .
an accusative only, which is an Hebraism. John xiii. 27- [ A d d M a t . xix. 23, 24.
See Acts xiii. 22, 47. vii. 21. E p h . ii. 15. L u k e xi. 52. Rom. xi. 25. of the kingdom
So Gen. xxvii. 20. xlviii. 4. J e r . i. 5, &c. of heaven ; and again, Mat. xix. 17- xxv.
for In M a t . v. 22. it is the simple 21. H e b . iv. 1, 3 , 6, 10, 11. éuripxeadaí
DativeT^ éis rov KÓo-pov, is lo be born in Rom. v. 12.
['Eio-áyo;, from éic and ayía to lead, or 2 John 7. or to appear in the world. H e b .
bring.] x. 5, fij rbv KÓTTOV rivoe, is lo suecced to
[ I . To lead in, or introduce. L u k e xiv. any one's labours. In H e b . vi. 10, it is
21. xxii. 54. John xviii. 16, where it is to to reach, or get withinf]
get a personin, & al. Polyb. xxiv. 1, 8. [ I I I . To enter the mind. L u k e ix. 46.
Xen. Hell. i. 3, 13. v. 4. 1. 4.] P a r k h u r s t says, to happen; Schleusner
 E I 2 230
says, it is also to enter and excite the
mind; and refers L u k e xxii. 3. John xiii.
27, to this sense. Comp. Xen. Anab. v*.
1,11-]
[ I V . Tofall into (of temptation). Mat.
xxvi. 41. M a r k xiv. 38. L u k e xxii. 40,
46.]
[ V . To come formar d to. Aets xix. 30.
Polyb. iii. 44. 10. See Loesner. Obss.
Philon. p . 220.]
V I . 'EicrÉpxEGoai raí é'í,ép-)(Eo BaL, ^°
,
in and out. John x. 9. Aets i. 21. I t is
a Plebrew phrase for familiar conversa-
lion, or performing the usual actions of
life, or, according to Wolfius, for exccut-
ing a public office. Comp. N u m . xxvii.
17. 2 Chron. i. 10.- Jer. xxxvii. 4. in H e b .
and L X X , and 'EioTropévopai II.
'Eio-KiÁiw, w, from éiQ in, and i:a\éw lo
cali.— To cali or invite in. occ. Acts x.
23. [Xen. CEc. iv. 15.]
['EiVoooc. from ¿ig and oboe a roaij.
Properly the may of entrance, as the
door, &c. See Xen. Gr. i. 3 , 10. LTerod.
1. J2, 16. Prov. viii. 3 4 . ]
[ I . Entrance, approach. 1 Thess. ii. ! .
and figuratively in Acts xiii. 24, of the
Messiah's entrance into his office ; which
t h e fathers misinterpret of his b i r t h . ]
[ I I . Admission, reccplion. 1 Thess. i. 9.
Heb. x. 19. 2 Pet. i. ¡ 1 . ]
'Etcr7T7)cáw, ¿3, from iic in or into, and
7rrjoáw to leap. To leap, spring, or
rush in. occ. A c t s xiv. 14. xvi. 29. A l -
berti has remarked t h a t this is an empha-
tical Verb used bv the Greek writers to
express violent exer/ion on sudden emer-
gencies. [ A m o s v. 19. iElian. V. H . xiii.
2. Xen. Anab. i. 5, 81.]
'EimrópEvopai, from ÍLQ in, and iropEvo-
pai to go.
I . To go, or enter in. [Properly Mark
i. 21. v. 40. vi. 56. L u k e viii. 16. & al.,
of food p u t in. M a r k vii. 15, 18, 19. In
Mark iv. 19. and vii. 19, it is to enter ihe
mind7\
II. 'Eto-wopEvopai Kai EKTropEvopai
in and out; a Hebraism c\va.otmg familiar
conversation, or the executing qf a public
office, occ. Acts ix. 28. Compare D e u t .
xxviii. 6. xxxi. 2. 1 Sam. xviii. 13, 16, in
H e b . and L X X , and 'EiaÉpyppai IV.
'EITOE^W, from éig in. into, and rpíyw to
run.—To run in. [Acts xii. 14. 2 Mace,
v. 26. Herodian i. 9. 7 . ]
'Eto-^Épw, from éig in or to, and fépto to
bring.
[I. To bring hito. L u k e v. 18, 19. 1 tions and disputes, quoting L u c i a n . D i a l . D e o r u m .
T i m . vi. 17. H e b . xiii. 11. Xen. Cyr. viii. iv. 2 and 3 . x . 2 . ]
8, 10. Joined with éis rae ciKoág (to
bring into one's ears) it is to teach. A c t s
xvii. 20. Comp. E u r i p . Bacch. 6<19. D a n .
55. Soph. A j . 149.]
[ I I . To lead into. M a t . vi. ¡ 3 . L u k e
xi. 4. These passages are usually t r a n s -
lated, Sujfer us not to be led; b u t t h e
arguments on it are rather of a metaphy-
sical than philological nature. F o r t h e
opinions of the fathers, see Suicer ii. p .
g° 655.]
r
E I T A , an Adv. of time or order.—
Then, ajierwards. M a r k iv. 17, 28. viii.
25. & al. freq. In H e b . xii. 9, Alberti
and Raphelius understand kira to denote
an animated interrogation, like the L a t i n
I t a n e ? I t a n e vero? What then ? 1
And
they cite Aristophanes, Demosthenes, and
iElian applying it in this manner. B u t
Q u . ? whether the common interpreta-
tion, Further, furthermore, quod accedit,
as l i r a often signifies, is not S e t t e r * ?
"EITE, A conjunction, from EL if, whe-
ther, and -£ and.
1. And if. 1 Cor. xiv. 27.
2. Whether, repeated etr£—EITE, whe-
ther—or. 1 Cor. iii. 22. viii. 5. xiii. 8.
Phil. i. 18. Col. i. 20. 2 Cor. xii. 2, where
Kypke produces Dionysius Halicarn., D e -
mosthenes, and Josephus repeating EITE in
the same manner. So Plato,- see Vigerus
De Idiotism. p . 515. edit. Zeunii, L i p s .
1788.
'Eiúdetv and 'Eaodóg. See under "Edio.
'EK before a consonant, ' E S before a
vowel.. A preposition [governing a g e -
nitive.]
[I. Used of motion from a place, from
or out qf. M a t . ii. 15. iii. 17- viii. 28. xii.
34, (according to W a h l , but Bret. refers
this place to sense I I I . Schleusner says ac-
cording to; ad animi indolem componitse
oratio) 42. L u k e xvii. 7. John vi. 23.
Acts xix. 16. 2 Cor. v. 8. xiii. 11. & al.
Herodian i. 15. 2. & freq.]
[ I I . I t shows t h e origin or source of
To go any t h i n g ; out qffrom. M a t . i. 3. EK rijg
Qapáp. xxi. 16, 19, 25. L u k e viii. 27-
J o h n i. 13. Rom. v. 16. xi. 6. 1 Cor. viii.
6. 1 T i m . i. 5. 1 John iv. 6. & al. H o m .
II. i. 6. Xen. Mem. ii. 7, 9 . ; and so i t
shows the material of which any t h i n g is
made. Mat. iii. 9. xxvii. 29. Luke xvi. 9.
(perhaps, b u t Schleusner says by means qf
[* Schl. and Bretsch. say i t is iftlieu; Wahl
translates i t b y tum, and says it is used i n q u e s -
 by a right use qf) Rom. ix. 2 1 . Gen. ii. to Wahl, of the relation of one thing lo
23. Song of Solomon iii. 9. Job xxxiii. G. another), as Mat. xx. 2 1 , ' 2 3 . xxii. 4 4 ;
Herodian viii. 4 , 27- Xen. Symp. viii. 32. and so in L X X , says P a r k h u r s t , for S, as
Tbe source of assistance, &c. is indicated in Exod. xiv. 20. 2 Sam. xvi. 6. 1 Kings
in Mat. xv. 5. Mark vii. 1 1. John vi. 65, xxii. 19. 2 Chron. iii. 16. iv. 8.]
where Wahl construes it by, and says it is [ I X . Used for the simple genitive, as
for {/7ro.] in Mat. xiii. 47. (íish) of every kind.
[ I I I . I t serves for parlilion, and is L u k e ii. 3 5 . John iii. 2 5 . xvi. 17- J o h n
used either with ríe or he. Sec. as Mat. vi. 1 3 ; and so in Polyb. ix. 29. 7. Herod.
vi. '¿7. M a r k ix. ¡7. & a l . ; or without, as ii. 6. 16. P e r h a p s this división might be
Mat. xxiii. 34. xxv. !<. L u k e xi. 49. xxii. referred to I I . or I I I . ]
3 1 . xxiv. 3 5 . John iii. 1. viii. 4G. xii. 6. [X. Joined with a Substant., it serves
Acts xv. 14. Rom. i:-:. 24. 2 Kings x. 23. as an Adjective. T h u s L u k e xi. 13. ¿
Isa. xviii. 7. (in Heb.) Herod. v. 3. 18. 7rart)p b tí, ¿pav5 (your) heavenly father.
Xen. Mem. iii. G. 17. T o this Sense Acts x. 4 5 . Rom. ii. 8, 'Oí k't, Lpiühae that
m u s t wc refer the expressions where rrí- are contentious, iv. 16. rb E S : T T Í V E W C 'Atpa-
VEIV, (j>ayet¡>, &c. are joined with E'K. Mat. ap awéppa, lite descendants who have the
xxvi. 27. Mark xiv. )¿3, 25. J o h n iv. 12 — saine faith as Abraham, rb EK vópu criríp-
14. 1 Cor. ix. 7. xi. 28. H e b . xiii. 10. pa, they who have the law. 1 Cor. ii. 8.
Rev. ii. 7. iii. 19, 2 1 . x. 18. In John vi. Gal. iii. 7. T i t . ii. 8. (the adversary.)
G4, 70. xii. 20. Acts x x . 3 0 . Col. i. 18. Diod. Sic. xx. 5 7 . Polyb. iv. 71.. 11.
transíate amongf] iElian. V . H . i. 2 1 . ]
[ I V . I t expresses the cause, and is out [ X L Joined with Subst. or Adject. it
qf or on account qf, and by. Gal., ii. 16. is used for Adverbs. T h u s EK SEvrépn, a
The works qf the law are not the cause qf second lime. Mat. xxvi. 42, 44. EK -rrEpítrcra,
his justif catión. Acts. xxviii. 3 . on'ac- vehemently. M a r k vi. 5 1 . E £ kav5,for a long
count qf Ihc heat. Rev. xvi. 10. J o h n . vi. lime. L u k e xxiii. 8. Diod. Sic. xx. 13.
66. xix. 12. Rom. iv. 16. EK T T Í T E U C , on Herodian viii. 2. 11. EK pérpu, moderately.
account of faith (we shall be h e i r s ) , al. John iii. 34. In 2 Cor. viii. 13, equally.
Thucyd. iv. 74. iElian. V . H . iii. 8- In In E p h . vi. G, rcadily. Xen. CEc. x. 4.
Rom. i. i 7, W a h l says, on account qf & a l . ]
faith; Schleusner gives by, or through " E m ^ o e , r„ ov, " Trapa, rb EKae, b pi)
faith towards believers. T h e efficient iríXae, biov KE-%wptcrpÉvoe, from '¿Kae far,
cause is denoted, Mat. i. 18. John x. 32. far off, not near, ;:s being séparated, or
& al. Diod. Sic. xvi. 6 1 . Herod. viii. 80.] consiciered as dislincl from others," says
[V. I t is used of the standard, rule, or the Etymologist: but E u s t a t h . i n Darnmi
example, by which things are judged, ac- Lexicón, col. 2610, observes more parti-
cording to. Mat. xii. 3 3 , 37. L u k e xix. 22. cularly, " t h a t E I C C Í T O C . is t h e superlativa of
J a m ó s e . 18. 1 John iv. 6. iElian. V . H . '¿Kae, by syncope for éfeáraroe: for unity,
i. 2 1 . Xen. Mem. i. 2. .57. In all these adds he, remains as it were rolled up
cases we may perhaps transíate, by means {^poyyv\»pkvr¡) by itself; the 'number
two recedes from it in two parts, whence
[ V I . I t is used of time, and means the comparativo kiairepoe both is spoken of
after, just after. John xiii. 4. 2 Cor. iv. two; three,four, &c. recede still f u r t h e r ;
6. Rev. xvii. 1 1. (according to Schleusner henee to these is applied t h e superlative
and W a h l ; b u t Bretschn. says among.) tica^oi, which denotes a multitude_/rtr re-
Herodot. viii. 12. Thucyd. iii. 10. M a t t . moved ('¿Kae éo-av) from unity, and di-
§ 574- Sometimes it is from, or ever vided in itself."—Each, every one, sepa-
since. M a t . xix. 12, 20. L u k e viii. 27. rately or distinctly. 1 Cor. vii. 7. Gal. vi.
Acts ix. 3 3 . xv. 2 1 . xxiv. 10. Rom. i. 4. 4. I t is often, both in the profane writers
John vi. 66. xix. 12, & al. iElian. V . 11. and in the N . T . joined, when singular,
iii. 4. Polyb. iv. 17. 4.] with verbs plural, as M a t . xxvi. 22, They
[ V I I . I t is used of price, for or al, as began to say unto him '¿Ka^oe avrwv, viz.
Mat. xx. 2. xxvii. 7. Acts i. 18. Paloeph. each one of them. Phil. ii. 4. Mi; r a 'eav-
i. 46. 3 and 4. Fisch. ad Well. iii. P . ii. rtov EKaioe rxKorrEiTE, Regard not ye, i. e.
p. 122. In good Greek t h e gen. in this each one of you, your own things. Comp.
sense stands without ¿V. See Matthise, § Mat. [ x v i . 2 7 . ] xviii. 3 5 . Acts ii. 6, 8.
342.] 'EráTore, an Adv. of lime, from £(ca<roc
[ V I I I . Used oí ¡¡lace, On (or according each, and ore when,—Always, q. d, cuch
 £ K B 232 EK r

•when, at every time. occ. 2 P e t , i. 15. (Xen. A n a b . i. 1, 7- -¿filian. V . H . ix. 12.)

[Herodian i. 17. 23.] especially of the devils. M a t . vii. 2 2 . Mark
"ÜKUTÓV, bi, ai, ra. Indeclinable.—A
i. 34, 39. Luke ix. 4 0 , 4 9 ; and so John
noun of number, a hundred. Mat, xiii. 8. xii. 31.]
& al. freq. Herodotus, lib. i. cap. 193, V I . To send out or forth \_wilhout vío-
says t h a t the country about Babylon was lence.~\ M a t . ix. 38. L u k e x. 2. Comp.
so fertile as constantly to produce Imo Mark i. 12. John x. 4.
hundred, and sometimes three hundred
V I L To send amay, dismiss. Mark i.
fold. 4 3 . James ii. 2 5 . [ A d d M a t . ix. 45.
''E.KarovraÍTrjQ, EOQ, Acts ix. 40. xvi. 3 7 . Gal. iv. 30. 2 Chron.
ac, ó, h, from hciróv
a hundred, and '¿roe a year.—Qf a hun- xxiii. 14.]
dred years, a hundred years oíd. occ. V I I I . To bring out or forth, lo pro-
Rom. iv. 19. duce. M a t . xii. 3 5 . xiii. 52. L u k e x. 3 5 .
'EKarovrarrXaaíwv, evos, b, ?/, Kal rb— Raphelius cites Poiybius using the word
ov, from EKaróv a hundred, and •ñXaoiuiv, iu this sense three times within the com-
which is used only as a numeral pass of a few Unes. And on M a t . xii. 3 5 ,
termina-
tion, answering to -plex in Latin, and observe that Herodotus, lib. vi. cap. 69,
-fold in E n g l i s h . — A hundred-fold, uses the phrase 'EKBA.AAEIN kVoc for
cen-
tuplex. occ. M a t . xix. 29. M a r k x. 3 0 . uttering an expression.
'EnaTOvrápxyQi £<>c, b, from ÉKaróv a Efgfp "E/CÉWÍC, IOQ, A t t . etoQ, v, from
hundred, and cíp^w to command.—A ÍK&aLvw to go out, escape, happen, eva-
cen-
turión, a Román military dere, evenire, which from ii: out, and
qfficer com-
manding a hundred men. Acts x. 1. & al. (iíuvo) lo go.
[Herodian v. 4. 12.] I. A may out, a may io escape, occ.
'Eicarovrctpxóe, a, ó.—The same as kica- 1 Cor. x. 13.
Tovrápxvii which see. M a t . viii. 5. & al. I I . An event, end. occ. Heb. xiii. 7.
freq. [Herodian ii. 13. 8 . ] — T h e L X X [Schl. and Wahl seem to make it end in
have frequently used this word in the both places. I t occurs in the sense of
plur. for t h e H e b . niNa <1U7 captains of egress. Polyb. iv. 64. 5. Hom. O d . v. 410.
hundreds. See Wisdom ii. 17. viii. 8. xi. 14.]
' E K É Ó X X W , from ÍK oul, and ¡3áX\io to ' E K ^ O X I ' / , ?7c, r), from kK^é&oXa perf. mid.

cast, drive. of éKtciXXui.—A casting out. occ. A c t s

I. To cast out, [eject. M a t . xv. 17.] xxvii. ¡ 8 , where EK€OXI)V rroieladaí, liter-
with the hands. Acts xxvii. 3 8 . [& al. ally, to malee a casting out, signifies to
Herodian vi. 1 . 2 1 . ] lighten a ship, bj' throwing out, or heav-
I I . To cast, or pulí out. Mat. vii. 4, 5. ing overboard, t h e wares with which she
M a r k ix. 4 7 . is laden. Wetstein cites the same phrase
I I I . To cast oul, reject, despise, con- from Dio. Chrys. the L X X have also used
temn. occ. Luke vi. 22, where Kypke it ih the sense of throwing overboard.
shows the V . is t h u s used by Arrian, J o - Jon. i. 5, where it answers to the H e b .
sephus, Dionysius Halicarn., Demosthenes, ^»t£>n to cast forth.
and Plutarch ; and he here explains ovopa 'Eicyapí'(w, from EK out, and yapí'(w to
by authorily, credit, credibility, and pro- give in marriage, which from ycíjuoe mar-
duces Josephus applying the N . in the riage.— To place out in marriage, n u p -
like sense. B u t comp. Campbell. [.¿Elian tui colloco, lo give in marriage, n u p t u m
V . H . ii. 24. Polyb. xxii. 8, 13- and add do, as a father does his daughter. occ.
Rev. xi. 2 . In John vi. 3 7 , it is simply Mat. xxii. 30. xxiv. 3 8 . L u k e xvii. 27- 1
/ mili not refuse lo receive.] Cor. vii. 38. [In each place, but the last,
I V . 'EK^ÚXXEIV 'é¡,w, To cast out, of the the verb occurs in the passive voice, / am
synagogue and congregación, namely, to placed out, I become a wife.~\
excommunicate. John ix. 3 4 , 3 5 . Comp. 'EKyap.LoKop.ai, Pass. from EK out, and
Rev. ix. 2, and see V i t r i n g a there. yapioKti) lo give in marriage. Comp. 'Eic-
V . To cast or drive out, to expel. See yapiCw.—To be given in marriage. occ.
M a t . viii. 12, 16, 3 1 . xxi. 12. L u k e iv. L u k e xx. 34, 3 5 .
29. A c t s vii. 58. 3 John verse 10. On "Enyoi'a, wv, ra, from EK from, and yé-
M a t . xii. 27, see W h i t b y ; and comp. yova perf. mid. of yslvopai lo be bom.—
E£opic<'T7ic below. [ I t is often used of Descendants, grand-children.
5
occ. 1 T i m .
those expelled from their country, king- v. 4 , where the English translation ren-
dom, &c. See Mat. ix. 25. A c t s xiii. 50. ders it nephews, which, a t the time t h a t
 E KA
translation was made, signified * grand-
children, or desccndanis however distant,
but is now no longer commonly used in
either of these senses. [Hesychius says
réicra TÍKVIOV ; the Etymologist TÍKVOV b to be abroad, in this sense, to travel.
í/iúc. A n d henee, I conceive, Schl. malees
it any descendant in a rigkl Une, in op-
position to íyyovoe. On the changes in
signiíication, however, in these words, as
well as t h e interchanges of t h e words
themselves, he refers to Ernesti ad Cal-
lim. t. i. p. 237 ; and on Hom. Odyss. iii.
123. D'Orville ad Charit. p . 3 2 7 . A m -
mni!. ad Ammon. p. 69.]
'E/cfia7raráw, ¿i, from ÍK out, or entirely,
and SaTraváoj io spend.— To spend en-
tirely, expenderé, occ. 2 Cor. xii. 15.
[l'oiyb. xvii. 11. 10. I t is frequently
used in this way with respect to men's
consuming their lives. as in Strab. xii. p.
387. Kypke ii. p . 272, has collected in-
stances.]
'JiKBéxppai, from ÍK out, and St^ppai to
look, expect, which see. [ T h e proper
meaning is, To manage what you receive
from another7\
I. To look out for, lo expect. occ. John
v. 3 . Observe, t h a t the words at the end
of verse 3 , ÍKS£x r "'
o l
^ " vSaroc KÍ-
wv T v T
vr¡<riy, were originálly wauting in t h e
Alexandrian, and another ancient MS.,
as they still are in a third ancient, and
another later one, and t h a t all the 4th
verse was likewise wanting in t h e second
M S . j u s t mentioned, as it also is in the
Vatican, Cambridge, and another later
MS.,- t h a t in three later M S S . it is
marked with asterisks, and in two others
with an obelus, and is moreover unnoticed
in several ancient versions; and t h a t , on
t h e whole, Griesbach marks all the words
beginning with ÍKC £XOUÍ>'WI'
,
in the third,
to voai'ipari at the end of the fourth verse,
as what ought probably to be omitted.
[ T h e word occurs A c t s xvii. 16. 1 Cor.
xvi. 1 I. H e b . x. 13. xi. 10. James v. 7 ;
and perhaps 1 Pet. iii. 20, where see
aw£icb¿xopai. Polyb. iii. 45. 6. xx. 4. 5 . ]
I I . [ 7 b receive at a feast. J Cor. xi.
3 3 . T h e meaning seems rather to act as
if receiving at a feast, i. e. to beslow food
on one another. Henee 3OJ¿I) means a
feast; and so excipio is used in L a t i n . ]
"E/.-<5nAoe, a, ó, ?/, from tic out, and ¿Y;Aoc
manifest.—Manifest, evident. occ. 2 Tim.
¡ü. 9. [ 3 Mace. iii. 19. Polyb. iii. 12. 4 . ]
'Eicbr/péb), a, from 'éicSiipos one who is
* Scc Jolmson's English Dictionary in Ncjiticzc.
233 E R A
absenl, or hath iravelled, from his own
people or country, which from ÍK out qf,
from, and cfjuoq a people.
I. To be absent from one's own people,
T h u s it is used in the Greek writers.
I I . In the N . T . To be absent, either
from the Lord, or from the body. occ. 2
Cor. v. 6, 8, 9. Sócrates in Plato's Phaj-
don. § 12, calis his deparling out of this
Ufe 'AÍIOAH'MIA. See Campbell's P r e -
lim. Dissertat. to the Gospels, p . 239.
[Schleusner says, t h a t the emphasis of
the phrase here depends on the notion of
those who are in the body being in a state
of pilgrimage or travel. Comp. H e b . xi.
13, 14. xiii. 14. 2 Cor. v. 8 . ]
'EcSíówut, from ÍK out, and bidwpi io
give.—To let out, i. e. to set tofarm. occ.
Mat. xxi. 3 3 , 4 1 . M a r k xii. 1. Luke xx.
9. Plato uses this word. See Wetstein
on.Mat. [So Polyb. vi. 1 7 . 2 . Herodian
i. 6. 8. I t is used of men hired out in
Xen. de Vect. iv. 15, 16, and girls put
out in marriage, E x o d . ii. 22. Ecclus. vii.
26. 1 Mace. x. 58. Xen. Anab. iv. 1, 17,
qf animáis, Xen. de Re E q u e s t . ii. 2, 3 .
See Perizon. ad iElian. V. H . xiv. 15, and
Salmas. de Modo Usur. p. 195, seq. I r -
misch. ad Herodian i. 2. 3 . T h e primary
sense is to give out from y our self to others.
Henee it is to publish a law. 3 Esdras i.
32. viii. 4, a book. Pref. Ecclus.]
'~E.K6iriyi.opai, Spai, from ÍK out, or inten-
sive,and otr¡yéopai torecounl.—Torecount,
rehearse, or relate particularly, enarro.
occ. Acts xiii. 4 1 . xv. 3 . [ I n the first
place, it is a quotation from t h e L X X in
Habbak. i. 5, where, as in Ezek. xii. 1 6,
it is for it¡o. Ecclus. xliii. 27.]
'EKSIKÍW, SI, from ÍK intens. and SÍKT)
vengeance, punishment.
I. W i t h an accusative of the person,
To avenge, revenge. occ. L u k e xviii. 3 , 5 .
Rom. xii. 19. Rev. vi. ¡ 0 . xix. 2.
I I . W i t h an accusative of the t h i n g ,
To avenge, punish. occ. 2 Cor. x. 6. [ T h e
word occurs, J e r . iv. 18. 2 Kings ix. 7.
1 Mace. xiii. 6. See Herodian ii. 6. 13.]
'EKSÍK^O-LC, tog, A t t . tug, í;, from t/coÍKew.
I. Avengement, vengeance, revenge.
L u k e xviii. 7, 8. xxi. 22. Rom. xii. 19.
[ H o s . ix. 8. J u d g e s xi. 3 6 . ]
I I . Punishment. 1 P e t . ii. 14. 2 Thess.
i. 8. 2 Cor. vii. 11, of the ineestuous per-
son namely. See Macknight on the two
l a t t e r t e x t s , [ E z e k . xx. 4>. Ecclus. vii. 17.]
{¡§p°''E/ccSi/coe, a, ó, )';, from EKSIKÍW.—
An avenger. occ. Rom. xiii. 4. 1 Thess. iv.
 E K E 234 E lí O

6. But. in Rom. '¿KciKog may be considered | xiii. 28. Heb. vii. 8. Wahl only the 3d
as an adjective, and joined with SatKovog, passage. I n H e b . o u > is so used, Ps. xiv.
a vindictive minister (see B o w y e r ) ; or 5. xxxvi. 13. & a l . ]
rather, as Bishop Pearce conjectured 'EK'E¿0EJ', an Adv. of place, from E V E Í
(Epist. Altera ii. § ) , and, as four M S S . there, and the syllabic adjection BEV de-
cited by Wetstein, and six by Griesbach, noting from a place.
read, iig 'ápyr¡v should be placed before E K - I. From ihence. M a t . iv. 2 1 . v. 26. [ix.
úacog, and joined with SiciKovog, a minister 9, 21.] & al. freq. [Gen. x x . 10.]
for wralh, as j u s t before Su'iKoi'og—éig -o I I . [There, iu Aets xx. 13. Perhaps,
ayadov a ministerfor good. [ W a h l says, however, this is hardly necessary. W e
t h a t EKOIKOS occ. P s . viii. 2 ; b u t the word may say " to take Paul in from t h a t
there is E V C W / - ? J C , by which t h e E t y m . place."]
M . explains it. I t oceurs Ecclus. x x x . 6. 'EKÜVOC, r¡, O, a Pronoun demonstrative.
Wisd. xii. 12. ! Mace. xv. 2 9 , and in I . That, that there (as we s a y ) , or as
Symm. Ps. xcviii. 8.] t h e Freuch celui-lá, lie, she, it. See M a t .
'EKSIÚIICIO, from
E'K out, or intens. and vii. 22, 27. xii. 45. xiv. 3 5 . John i. 8, 18.
enuncio to per secute.—[To expel by perse- James iv. 15.
cution, as L u k e xi. 4 9 . Comp. Mat. xxiii. I I . [Such. Mat, x. 15. James i. 7.—It
35. D e u t . iv. 19. Joel ii. 20. ] Chron. viii. is used emphalically, to express the great
13. xii. 15. Ecclus. x x x . 19. Poli. Onom. day ofthe Lord. Mat. vii. 22. Luke x. 12.
viii. 70. I n i Thess. ii. 15, it is simply 2 Thess. i. 20. 2 T i m . i. 12, 18. iv. 8 ;
lo pcrseciite.] and to express the happiness ofthe future
"Euóorog, a, ó, ?/, from iicowúpi to deliver life. L u k e x x . 3 5 . O n t h e other hand,
up. Given, or delivered up. " I n Poly- Schleusner observes t h a t it expresses i g -
bius [iii. 20. 8.] and Herodian, EKÜOTOI nominy and contempt in M a t . xxvi. 24.
are those who are delivered up to t h e xxvii. 6 3 . ]
cneinv, to be treated according to their 'E/CETO-E, an Adv. of place, from EKEI there,
pleasure." Stockius. occ. Acts ii. 23. See and O-E a syllabic adjection denoting at a
also Raphelius, Wolfius, Kypke, W e t - place.—There, at that very place, [and
stein, and Bowyer. so Ammonius and Thomas M a g i s t e r . ] occ.
'EKCOY_>;, ijg, >'/, from EKcÉxopai t° 0
l° & A c t s xxi. 3. xxii. 5. [ I t is tlience in J o b
for, expect, which see.—A looking for xxxix. 2 9 . ]
( E n g . trans.), expectnlion. occ. H e b . x. 'EK'CIJTÍIO, IO, from EK out, or intensive,

27. [ S e e Sallier. ad Thom. M. p . 2 8 0 . ] and '(nríio to seelc.

'EKSVOI, from EK out, and Sito to clothe. I. To seelc out, or diligenlly, in order t o
—To uncloUie, divest, strip off) spoken of oblain. occ. H e b . xii. 17-—or lo knoro. occ.
raiment. occ. Mat. xxvii. 2 8 , 3 1 . Mark I Pet. i. 10. [ P s . xliv. 2 1 . Ezek. xxxix.
x v . 20. Luke x. 3 0 . [ I n this last place,
it is used of a s h i p p i n g by robbers; see I I . To seelc diligenlly, or earnesily
Gen. xxxvii. 22. I t governs two aecusa- after, namely God, with a sincere and
tives, like verbs of clothing; see Matthia? earnest desire to obtain his favour. occ.
§ 412, G.]—ofthe body. occ. 2 Cor. v. 4 . Acts xv. 17. Rom. iii. 11. H e b . xi. 6.
' E K E ' I , an Adv. of place. T h e L X X have frequently used this
1. There, in that place. Mat. ii. 13, 15. phrase ÍKZ,T\T¿ÍV QEOV for t h e Heb.—ú>-<-]
& al. freq. or Uípl í i l t T JIM. See ínter al. D e u t . iv.
2. Thilhcr, to that place. M a t . ii. 2 2 . J e r . xxix. 13. 1 Chron. xvi. 1 1 . P s . xiv.
xvii. 2 0 . & al. In this latter sense, as 2. [xxiv. 6. Isa. lxv. 10.]
well as in t h e former, it is applied by t h e I I I . To require, or exact severely. occ.
classical Greek writers, as mav be seen in L u k e xi. 5 0 , 5 1 . I n this sense also t h e
Elsner, Kypke, and Wetstein, V a r . Lect. L X X have applied t h e word for t h e H e b .
on M a t . i'i. [ A d d M a t . xvii. 20. xxvi. ttfpl or ti?Di. See 2 Sam. iv. 11. Ezek. iii.
3G. L u k e xxi. 2. John xi, 18. xviii. 2, 3 . 18, 20. Gen. ix. 5. in H e b . and L X X .
xix. 4 6 . Herodian iv. 8, 9. Herodot. i. 'EicdaptÉto, S), from EK out, or intensive,
12). So in H e b . tDW for tiDW. 1 Sam. ii. and Saptéoj to amaze, astonish. To
3 . & al. freq.] amase, astonish. exceedingly. [Ecclus. xxx.
[3. A s an Adverb of time, Then. I 9 . ] whence 'EK&apt>¿opai, i¡xai, Pass. To
give this sense in deference to Schl. and be amazed, astonished exceedingly, either
W a h l , though with some doubt. Schl. with roonder, ox fear, lo be terrified out
refers to it, M a t , v. 24. xxiv. 5 1 . Lidie of one's senses, or wits, as we say, lo be
 E K K
asiounded, or cónfounded. occ. M a r k xiv.
33. xvi. 5, 6. ix. 15,—e^dapt-í/Qn " mas
struck mith astonishracnl; próbably at
those unusual rays of majesty and glory,
which yet remained on his countenance
(comp.'Exod. xxxiv. 29, 3 0 . ) ; " Dodd-
ridge's Paraphrase, whom see, as also
Whitby.
"EicdapSoc. s, ó, from ÍK oul, or in-
tensive, andS'ájUbüc amazemcnt.—Ámazed,
aslounded, astonished exceedingly. occ.
Acts iii. ! i . [ I t is used in this sense in
¡Symm. 1 Sam. iv. 13, and Polyb. xx. 10.
9 ; and in t h e active sense causing fear
iu Theodot. D a n . vii. 7.]
"EicQí-oq, B , u, i/, « t i TU—ov, from ÍKTÍ-
6)]LIL to put out, expose a child, which
see *.—Éxposedj casi out, abandoned. occ.
Acts vii. ] 9.
'EcKtiSctí'ptú, from ÍK out, and KaQcupto lo
purge.-—To purge oul, purge, cleanse.
occ. 1 Cor. v. 7. 2 T i m . ii. "21. [ I t is
used of cleansing metáis from dross, in
Judges vii. 4. Compare Lucian. Dial.
Dion. xiii. 2. Xen. Anab. i. 2. 1 6 ; and
in the figurative sense, as in the passage
in Timothy. Ceb. T a b . c. 14. Xen. Symp.
i. 4. I n 1 Cor. v. 7, it is rather cleanse
away, remove.~\
'EKKÍÍUO, from ÍK out, or intensive, and
KÍUÜ) to burn.— To burn, be violcntly in-
jlamed, exardere. occ. Rom. i. 27, where
see W e t s t e i n ; and observe, t h a t an au-
thentic and striking comment on this
passage of St. Paul may be found in V i r -
gil's 2d Eclogue, where t h e poet, describ-
ing his unnatural lust for Alexis, in t h e
strongest terms, even uses the verv words
ardeo and uro burn, inflame, to express
the violence of his abominable passion,
line 1,
Formosum pastor Corydon ardebat Alevín.
liue 6S,
Me tomen urit amor.
How painful and horrid is it to think, t h a t
a man of Virgil's elegant and improved
understanding should be given u p to a
mind so undiscerning, and to such vile f
* [ O n exposing infants, see Sen. Controv. v. 3 3 . ]
•\ Since writing the above, however, i n the former
editions, I am pleased to find the following remark
of the critical M o n s . B a y l e in his Dictionary, A r t . Pagan times tha'n that for girls, so that a writer of
VIRGIL, N o t e ( E ) , where see more. I n h i s B u - E c l o g u e s m i g h t ¡make h i s shepherds talk according
colics " he ( V i r g i l ) relates very criminal passions, to this cursed f a s h i o n , without il:s being a s i g n that
but that is n o proof that h e was tainted with them.
The passion for hoys roas not less common in the
235 E K K
affections! B u t , L o r d ! what is man ex-
cept Thou give wisdom, and send t h y
Holy Spirit from above? T h a t these
abominable practices prevailed among t h e
Greeks and Romans, and were even i n -
dulged by some of the most eminent of
their philosophers, t h e English reader
may see proved in Leland's Advantage
and Necessity of the Christian Revela-
tion. p a r t ii. ch. 3 . p. 4 9 , &c. and ch. vi.
p . 6 ! , & c , and ch. viii. p . 126, & c , and
ch. xi. p . 183, 8vo. Comp. also Juvenal's
l i d Satire. [Compare, for ir.KO.ibi applied
to lust, Ecclus. xxiii. 2 3 , and ' P l u t a r c h .
tom. iv. pp. 72 and 4 9 8 , ed. Reisk.—to
anger. Diod. Sic. xiv. 108. Polyb. ix.
10. 10.]
'EKKaKÍoi, üi, from ÍK out, and KCIKOQ bad,
weak.faint-licarf.ed. [See Olear, de Stylo
N. T . p . 99, where he proves t h a t Kamc
has these meanings.]
[ I . To flag, faint, or give out. See
Luke xviii. 1, where t h e Vulg. has non
deficere. 2 Cor. iv. 1. Gal. vi. 9. 2 Thess.
iii. 13. Polyb. iv. 19.]
[ I I . To despond or be fainthearted. 2
Cor. iv. 16. (though W a h l refers this t o
Sense I.) E p h . iii. 13. Hesychius EKKH-
K¡pEV apeXtipEV, aKijSEÜipev, io which P h a -
vorinus adds ¿iTrayopeíopEv, which word is
used of this word in Zonar. L e x . c. 6 7 9 .
and Suidas. See Suicer. Thes. Eccl. t . i.
p. 1047.]
'EKKEVTÉM, io, from ÍK intens. and KEVTÉÍO
to stab.— To stab or pierce Vlhrough~\.
occ. John x i x . 3 7 . Rev. i. 7. [Polyb. xv.
3 1 . Polyd. V . c. 3 . ] — I n several places of
the L X X it answers to t h e H e b . 1¡?i io
pierce, stab; and, according to Aldus's
edition, even in Zech. x i i . 10, where
Aquila, Symmachus, and Theodotion have
likewise E¿,EKÍvTr\aa.v.
'EKK\6\'CÍO, from ÍK out, and Kkk'Qoi lo
bréale-—To break out or off. occ. Rom. xi.
19, 20. [ a n d Levit. i. 17.]'
'E/CKXEÍ'O), from ÍK out, and KKE'LOI lo shui.
[ P r o p e r l y , To exelude, by shutting the
doors.~\
[ I . To keep off or sepárale. Gal. iv. 17.
They desire to sepárate me from you and
your love; and so Schleusner, who how-
ever mentions another sense in A r r i a n .
Diss. E p i c í e t . ii. 2 2 , namely to compel;
and says, if we give t h e word this sense
he related his own adventures, oí: approved the p a s -
sions h e mentioned.."
 E K K 236 E K K

here, and with Bengel, Wetstein, Gries- 1. (comp. ch. v. 14. vi. 7.) xi. 22. 1 Cor.
bach, and Grotius read vpag, tlie sense i. 2. Col. iv. 16. Rev. i. 4, 1 1 , 20, ii. 1, 8,
is, they wish lo compel you to follón & al. From these latter passages of t h e
them. Bretschner, however, adopts this Revelation it is evident that the number
reading witli the other sense, they wish of churches is estimated by t h e number of
lo sepárate you from following me. Wahl angels or bishops, and t h a t each of these
says, to drive you from a connection with churches was therefore reckoned as one
mc.~\ because governed bv one ruler, how many
[ I I . To take away, or in the Pass. (to soever were t h e particular congregalions
be taken away) to disappear. Rom. iii. it contained.
27. All ground for boasling disappears. 4. A particular or single congregaiion
Theodoret. OVK en x'^P ' ¿X - Chrysost.
al £l
of Christians. Rom. xvi. 5 . 1 Cor. xvi. 19.
OVK en ydp eyei Kaipóv. Zonaras (Lexic. c. Col. iv. 15. Philem. verse 2. I u t h e same
785.) has é^eKXeírrdn, dvn rS ¿LiréicXeinev sense it is applied in the plur. Acts xiv.
iivrriv h iridie. Phavorinus omits t h e two 23. xvi. 5. 1 Cor. xi. 16. xiv. 34. xv. 9-
last words, whence the explanation is not xvi. i , 19. 1 Thess. ii. 14. Gal. i. 2.
inteliigible. See Raphel. A n i m . p. 5 2 5 . [ S e o t t (Christian Life, p a r t ii. vol. ii. ch.
Alberti Gloss. p. 9 8 . ] vii. p . 2 9 3 ) gives a more particular de-
'JLKKXno-ía, ac, r/. I t seems to be de- fmition : Those believers who were wont
rived from eKKaXelv to cali out, though t h e lo assemhle in any one particular house
learned Mintert chooses to deduce it from lo worship Godf\
t h e H e b . bn¡? an assembly, for which the 5. The place where such a congrega-
L X X have very frequently used 'EKKXrjería. iion assembled. Acts xi. 26. 1 Cor. xi. 18,
I. An assembly of the people, called out 22. comp. 1 Cor. xiv. 2 3 . See the learned
by the civil magistrate. In this sense it Jos. Mede's Works, fol. p . 3 1 9 , & seqt.
is used by t h e * Greeks, and particularly and Wolfius on 1 Cor. xi. 22. [Schleus.
by t h e t Athenians, and t h u s i t is applied, says t h a t many interpreters explain 1 Cor.
A c t s xix. 39. Henee xi. 18. xiv. 19, 2 8 , 3 3 , 3 4 , 3 5 . 3 John 6,
I I . An assembly of the people, though in this sense, but thinks them wrong in
not thus lawfully called out. occ. Acts xix. all. H e says i t is a body of Christians
32, 4 0 . meeting in a prívate house for worship.]
I I I . A general assembly of t h e Israel- — I n the L X X this word almost con-
it.ish people. occ. Acts vii. 3 8 . Comp. stantly answers to t h e H e b . bnp, which
H e b . ii. 12. See Doddridge on Acts vii. denotes in like manner an assembly, or
3S, and comp. Exod. xix. 17, & c , x x . 18. congregaiion, and is often applied to t h e
D e u t . iv. 10. xviii. 16. general assembly of the Israelitish people.
I V . A n d most generally in t h e N . T . See Ínter al. D e u t . xviii. 16, xxxi. 30.
A church of God, i. e. an assembly, or so- Josh. viii. 3 5 . 1 Kings viii. 14, 22, 5 5 , 6 5 .
ciety of men called out of mankind by t h e 'E/.-/cAíVíd, from ¿V out, and KXÍVU lo in-
word of God. I n this view it denotes, cline.
1. The universal Christian church mi- I . To go out qf the way, decline, de-
litant, t h a t is, the whole society of Chris- viate, \_(out of the right way.) Mal. ii. 8 ;
tians wheresoever dispersed, or howsoever and henee, to deviate from the faith.
distressed, throughout t h e world. M a t . ( N u m b . xxii. 32. J o b xxxiv. 27.) Rom.
xvi. 18. [1 Cor. vi. 4. x. 3 2 . xi. 22. xii. iii. 12.]
28. Col. i. 18.1 E p h . [i. 22.] v. 2 3 , 2 5 , I I . W i t h airó following, To decline
27. Col. i. I S , 24. \from, avoid. occ. Rom. xvi. 17. 1 P e t . iii.
2. The universal church triumphant, i 1 1 . [ P s . xxxvii. 2 7 . 1
and glorifed. E p h . v. 2 7 . Comp. H e b . 'JLKKo\vp€áoj, £>, from ÍK out, and KO-
xii. 2 3 . Xvp&áw to swim.—To swim out, or away.
3 . A particular church, though con- occ. Acts xxvii. 4 2 , where Kypke quotes
sisting of several congregalions. Acts viii. Polybius repeatedly using t h e V. in t h e
same sense. [Diod. s. x x . 8 7 . Dionys.
* See P o l l u x , l i b . viii. [ c . 0. § 9 5 , S 6 , 1 1 6 . ] Hal. v. 2 4 . ]
Mintert, L e i g h , & c . 'EKKOyuífw, from he out, and Kopí'(b> to
-f- W h o , besides their r.üpiui h.y.7>r,cÍ3i stated as- carry.—To carry out, i. e. of the city or
semUies, h a d also their cv/xKr.Tai, v,"hich were called'
t o w n ; for t h e * Jews used not to bury
togc/licr b y their military omcers, or civil m a g i s -
tratcs. S e e Potter's A n t í q u i t i e s of Greccc, book i.
ch. 17. [ a n d D e y l i n g O b s s . Sacr, iii. p. 375. J * Sec J o s e p h u s D e B e l . lib. v. 1 3 . § 7-
 E K K 237 E K A

within t h e walls of tlioir towns. So [ I t is entire dependence in Gen. xliv. 3 0 . ]

among * t h e Athenians and Romans there See more in Alberti, Suicer's Thesaur. [ i .
were even laws to forbid t h a t practice. p. 1065,] in 'EKKpépapai, and Wetstein.
Elsner shows t h a t EKKO¡IÍ'CEIV is used in 'EicXaXíoi, ib, from EK out, and XaXéw to
the Greek writers as a. funérea! term. To speak.— To tell, utlcr. occ. Acts xxiii. 2 2 .
the instances he has produced, I add from 'EícXáyUTrw, from EK out, or emphat. and
Lucian, Contemplante tom. i. p . 3 4 0 . Tov Xápwü) lo shine.-—To shine forih or glo-
yéirova Sé rov 'EKKOMI'ZONTA ro Trai- • riously, effulgere. occ. Mat. xiii. 4 3 . Comp.
oíov ¿K ¿pet. B u t he does not look at his D a n . xii, 3 , where t h e correspondent H e b .
neighbour who is carrying out his child word is vntíl lo shine. [ X e n . Hell. i. 1.
to be bnried. See also Suicer's Thesaur. 11. Irmisch. ad Herodian. i. 7. 8. iElian.
on t h e word. occ. Luke vii. 12. Comp. V. H . xiii. 1.]
John xi. 3 1 , 3 8 . Mat. xxvii. 60. John xix. 'Thi:Xav6ávopca, M i d . from ÍK out, and
4 1 . [TElian. V . H . viii. 4. Herodian ii. 1. XavBcivo/iai to forget, which from Xav-
5. Artemidor. Oneiroc. ii. 5 4 . Schol. Ms- dávoj lo lie hid.—To forget entirely, let
chyl. Sept. Theb. 030. See Spanhem. ad slip out of the mind, occ. H e b . x i i . 5.
Aristoph. P l u t . 1009. Effero is t h e word [ P o l y b . v. 4 8 . Verheyk. ad Antón. L i b .
in Latin. Comp. Levit. x. 4 . ] Mctam. c. 2.]
'E/CK-ÓV™, from ÍK out, and KÓwria to 'EKXéyopai, Mid. from ÍK out, and Xéyio
smite, cut.—To cut off. to choose, select, from H e b . npb to take,
I. To cut off OY down, as a tree. M a t . to which EKXéyopai answers in t h e L X X
iii. 10. f vii. 19. Luke xiii. 9 ; [metapho- of Prov. xxiv. 3 2 .
rically] as a branch from a tree. Rom. x i . I. To choose, choose out, " * take by
22, 24. j as t h e hand or foot. M a t . v. 3 0 . may of preference (out) of several things
xviii. 8. offered," or proposed, to elect. occ. L u k e
I I . To cut off, prevent. occ. 2 Cor. x i . x. 42. xiv. 7.
12. [So Polyb. V . 104. 10. Joseph. A n - I I . To choose, choose out, or elect a
tiq. viii. 12. 1 ; and so in Latin prcecidere person to an office or employment. occ.
catisas. T e r e n t . Hecyr. iv. 2. 2 2 . ] L u k e vi. 1 3 . John vi. 70- t xiii. 18. xv.
I I I . To hinder, render ineffeciual. occ. 16, 19. Acts i. 2, 2 4 . vi. 5 . xv. 7, 2 2 , 2 5 .
1 P e t . iii. 7. Comp. M a r k xi. 2 5 , 2 6 . 1 And in t h e like view it is applied, 1 Cor.
Tim. ii. 8. i. 2 7 , 2 8 , where God is said to have
'JLKKpépapai, from ÍK from, and Kpépa- chosen t h e foolish and weak things, &c.
ftai to liang.— To hang from or upon. occ. of this world, to confound t h e wise and
L u k e x i x . 4 8 , where it denotes earnest st.rong, &c. In Acts xv. 2 2 , " U n d e r -
attention, of which it is most beautifully stand á u - s ' s before Ik-Xtía/jti/fss, which
expressive. I t is applied to t h e same p u r - otherwise ought to have been ÍKX£¡,á¡j£voi(:
pose by t h e Greek writers. So Eunapius or ÍKX£Ía¡j.évr¡.—This change of t h e case
in ¿Edes. ' E S E K P E ' M A T O rüv Xóyuv, has been often taken notiee of by learned
Kai rfje áKpóacrewQ ¿K iivEirípTcXaro. H e men. 'E(cXf¿a/.i£;/ac is ill translated d e -
hung on his words, and was not satisfied lectos and chosen, as if i t were t h e pas-
with hearing. T h e Latin writers use sive ÍKXEyBÉi'rag. Markland. (Comp. ver.
pendeo in like manner. T h u s Virgil, 25.) TplalavrEQ a t t h e end of the verse is
jEn. iv. line 7 9 , referred to ' A T T Ó T O A - O I C , as if it were ypá-
ibacri." Bowyer's Conject. F o r instances
— P e n d e t q u e iterum narrantis ab ore.
of similar changes of t h e cases of p a r t i -
A g a i n with pleasure on h i s Vips she hangs. cipios in t h e purest G r e e k classics, see
And Ovid, E p i s t . Heroid. I . line 3 0 , Raphelius and E l s n e r on Acts xv. K y p k e
and Wetstein on L u k e xxii. 2 0 . Vigerus
Narraniis conjnx pendet ab ore viri.
De Idiotism. cap. vi. sect. 1. r e g . 12. and
Tli* attentive wife hangs on her husband's lips. N o t e ; and comp. 1 P e t . iv. 3 .
Pope, Epist. to Lord Cobham, line 184,
T h o ' wond'ring senates hung on all he spolce. * J o h n s o n ' s Dictionary.
•f 'Eyw O J O S KV 6 ¿ s X e ^ á ^ ) i v , i. c. / am. well ac-
* See D u p o r t on Theophrast. E t h . Char. p . 4 7 0 . quainted with those whom I have chosen. ( C o m p .
edit. N e e d h a m , a n d Potter's A n t . o f Greece, book "EiStu I V . ) or, as D o d d r i d g e well paraphrases these
words, " / know the real character, a n d a l l the m o s t
iv. ch. 7.
secret views and transactions of those whom I have
-f- [ T h e verb here m u s t b e translated ought lo íe,
chosen.'" C o m p . verse 1 1 , and c h . v i . G4, 7 0 , and
or is to be, cut down, as áa-oXf »TC<¡ in M a t . x x v i . 3 2 .
see W h i t b y on ,Iohn x i i i . 1!?.
See G r a v . Lectt. H e s i o d . v i . ] . ]
 K K A
I I I . To choose, or choose out lo special
privileges, as God chose the ancient Israel-
ites, as a nation, to be his peculiar people.
occ. Acts xiii. 17 * ; or as he chose Chris-
tians, as Christians, to peculiar blessings
before the fornida tion of the morid, occ.
Eph. i. 4, iivaí-—ayiuc Kai á ^ £ i t 7 r - a e ,
to the end, or with a design, t h a t they
might be holy, and without blame, &c.
( t h e infin. being here used in the same
sense as he rb éwai, verse J 2, and denot-
i n g the end or design, as it f often does
both in the sacred and profane w r i t e r s ; )
or as he hath chosen the poor in this
world, rich in faith, and heirs of the
kingdom, &c. occ. James ii. 5. So, for
t h e sake of the elecl, i. e. the % Christians,
or christian Jews, whom, as believers in
Christ, he had chosen for his people, lie
shortened the days of the siege of Jerusa-
lem. occ. Mark xiii. 20. A n d t h u s I g n a -
tius, in his Address to the Church of the
Ephesians, calis it ' E K A E A E F M E ' N H
elected | | . — Q ' E c X í y o j u a i is construed with
the Acc. except in Acts xv. 7, where it is
construed with iv, as in 1 Chron. xxxiii.
* C o m p . D e u t . iv. 37- vii. 7- x . 15. x i v . 2 . 1
K i n g s iii. 8. P s . c x x x i v . or c x x x v . 4 . Isa. x i i . 8, 0 .
Jer. x x x i i i . 2 4 . in the L X X , in all which passages
the V . exKíyofícci is used in this sense for H e b . "ira
to choose.
f S o ÉXOETÍ, M a t . x v . 2 9 ; Spa¡, Mark xiii. 1 5 ,
1 6 ; tpvháaeíu, A c t s x i i . 4 ; niToixíh, Acts xvii.
2 6 ; ji/TsT», A c t s x v i i . 27; and see E o s , E l l i p s . on
'E;?, p . 3 2 9 , 7th edit.
X See B p . N e w t o n ' s Dissertations on the P r o -
phecies, vol. ii. p . 27'G, Ovo. 2 d edit.
|| T h e reader is particularly desired to observe,
that I have carefully set down every text of the N .
T . wherein this important verb Ex'/Jyoprtí, and its
two derivatives S * A Í X T O Í , and é z A o y í (which see be-
l o w ) occur; because I am persuaded that a diligc.nt
and clase attention to the texts themselves, together
with their respective contexís, and a comparison of
these with similar passages of the O í d Testament,
will be the most efr'ectual, i f not the only, method
of determining or shortening certain modern contro-
versies, and of leading the sincere and impartial
Christian into the real mind of thc Spirit of God
with regard to those contested points. A n d I m u s t
plainly profess, that though I perused s o m e of the
m o s t eminent h u m a n writers on both sides yet, till
a
I took the method here earncsthj recommended,
could never form any scttlcd judgment, ñor obtain
any solid satisfaction on these awful, interesting,
and, as they have been managed, perplexing s u b -
jeets.
H o w striking is the employment assigned b y
M i l t o n to a part of the fallen angels! Parad. Lost,
book ii. line 5 5 7 , & c .
Others apart sat on a hill retir'd,
I n t h o u g h t s more elévate, and reason'd high
O f Providence, Fore-knowledge, W i l l , and Fate,
F i x t - f a t e , Free-will, Fore-knowledge absoluto,
Andfonnd vn end rn icníuVring mar.es ln.it.
238 E K A
1.5. 2 Chron. vi. 5, which is a Hebraism.
See Vorst in Philol. Sacr. p . 662.]
' E K X E ' M ™ , from ÍK out, or emphat. and
Xénrto lofail.
I . To fail entirely, cease. occ. L u k e
xxii. 32. H e b . i. 12. [ J e r . Ii. 30. T h u c . ii.
&c. 28. vii. 50.]
I I . To fail. occ. L u k e xvi. 9 ; where
the word seems to refer both to the cir-
cumstances of the steward in the preced-
ing parable, who, when he had failed in
the world (as we say), made to himself
friends of the deceitful Mammón, and also
to our failing by death or dying, in which
sense it is not only used by the L X X ,
Gen. xxv. 8. & al. answering to the Heb.
to expire, b u t by Plato, Dionysius
Halicarn. Xenophon, and others of the
Greek writers, as may be seen in W e t -
stein. Comp. Campbell's Note. QB/oc is
usually added in Greek writers, as in A l -
ciphr. iii. E p . 28. L y s . O r a t , viii. c. 4.
or rb '(i)v, Polyb. ii. 4 1 . 3 Mace. ii. 23.
See Gen. xxv. 8. xlix. 3 3 . Ps. civ. 29.
W i s d . v. 13. Lam. i. 20. J e r . xiii. 17, 22.
J o b xiv. 11. J u d i t h vii. 22. Test. xii. Pat.
apud F a b r . Cod. Pseud. I. p . 677. See
Pearson Prosf. ad L X X . Pfatf. in Diss. de
V a r . Lect. N . T . p . 165. Theophylact
interprets the word of death. So Elsner.]
'EtcXsKroc, ?), bv, from ii;Xéyopat.
Chosen, chosen out, elecl.
I I . Chosen out to a certain dignity or
office, occ. L u k e xxiii. 35. which seems
an allusion to Isa. xiii. 1, where the Mes-
siah is called by God > Y m my chosen, or
elecl one: and t h a t t h e ancient Jews un-
derstood this prophecy of isaiah as relative
to the Messiah, is apparent from the Chal-
dee Targum on the place, which runs t h u s ,
' Y m n o n i p M Nirti/o n n y « n , Behold my
servant ihe Messiah ! I will be near him :
my chosen—-But, further, the word ÍKXÍK-
TOQ in St. L u k e seems not only to denote
our Saviour's being chosen to the office of
the Messiah, b u t also his being approvei
by God in t h a t capacity (comp. Sense IV.
below), and accordingly St. Mat. ch. xii.
18, explains >1>m in Isa. xiii. 1, by dya-
I
Trnrbe pu my beloved. Comp. 1 P e t , ii.
4, 6, where a t the 4 t h verse ÍKKZKTOV is
opposed to ctiTooEóoKipacrfJ.Évov, rejected,
disapproved, and at the 6th answers to
the H e b . [ n a tried, proved, in Isa. xxviii.
16.
I I . 'EKXCKTOI, bi, Chosen men, picked
out for soldiers. occ. Rev. xvii. 14, where
ÍKXÍKTOI plainly answers but in a figurative
sense, to the Heb. t 3 < Y i m chosen men.
 E K A 239 E K A

which the L X X render by the same word, Isa. * Ixv. 9, 15, 2 3 , auswering to the
J u d . xx. 16, 34. 1 Sam. xxiv. 3. xxvi. 2. Heb. tnO^rii chosen, cholee, and in Prov.
& al. xvii. 3 . Isa. xxviii. 16, to t h e H e b . \r¡2
I I I . Chosen to peculiar privileges and proved, approved.
blessings. In this view it is used for pro- 'EvXoyj), fje, ''/i from hcXéXoya perf. mid.
fessed believers or Christians, whether of ¿V-Xf'yw to choose out, elect.
originally Gentiles or Jews, who are there- I . A choosing out, or election of a per-
fore called by S t . Peter, 1-Ep. ii. 9. y é V o e son to a certain office or employment. occ.
ÉKXEKTOV a chosen generation, i. e. chosen A c t s ix. 15. [So Schleus. T h e phrase is
to be God's peculiar people, as the Jews crRtvoc EKXoyije for EKXEKTÓV. O t h e r s say
anciently were. (Comp. Exod. xix. 6. Isa. an excellent instrument, choice implying
xliii. 20, 2 1 , the apocryphal E s t h . xvi. 2 1 , excellence in the t h i n g chosen.]
and the texts cited from the O. T . in the I I . A choosing out, or election of one
first N o t e under 'Et:Xéyopai I I I . ) occ. Mat. nation rather than another to certain pri-
xxiv. 22, 24, 3 1 . M a r k xiii. 20, 22, 27. vileges and blessings. occ. Rom. ix. 11.
Col. iii. 12. 2 Tim. ii. 10. (Comp. Col. i. xi. 28. T h u s in the first text there was
24, 25.) T i t . i. 1. 1 P e t . i. 1. ii. 9. So an election of Jacob rather than of Esau,
Clement applies t h e word, l s t Epistle to so t h a t t h e posterily of the former should
the Corinthians, § 2, " Y e contended day be served by t h a t of the latter, and should
and night for t h e whole brotherhood, he enjoy other advantages above them. Comp.
ro o-w^Effdaí per IXetíC ical avvaiüí¡o-EO>e rbv
verse 12, 13. Gen. xxv. 2 3 . and Mal. i. 2,
apiQpbv TÜV 'EKAEKTÍTN áu-5, t h a t 3, and see Doddridge's Note on Rom. ix.
through the mercy (of God) and a good 13. And t h u s in Rom. xi. 28, there was
conscience the number of his elect might an election of the Jews to be God's pecu-
be saved." Wake. In the Martyrdom of liar people for their fathers' sake (comp.
Polycarp, § 16. edit. Russel. ' E K A E K - D e u t . iv. 7, 37. vii. 6, 7, S. x. 14, 1 5 . ) ,
TÍ2~N the elect, or Christians, are opposed which election it is plain the Apostle here
to cnritiúv the unbelievers or heathen. urges as an argument, t h a t all Israel
And Ignatius, in his Address to the (though now enemies to God) will here-
Church of the Trallians, styles it ' E K - after be recalled to his favour through
A E K T H Í elect. Comp. "ZVVÉKXEKTOC. faith in Christ. See W h i t b y on Rom. xi.
I V . Chosen, accepted, approved, ex- 28, and the following verses.
cellent. Comp. under Sense I . occ. M a t . * I I I . An election, or beitig chosen to the
xx. 16. xxii. 14. L u k e xviii. 7- Rom. viii. blessings qf the Gospcl. occ. Rom. xi. 5 .
3. (Comp. verse 28, & seqt ) Rom. xvi. 2 P e t . i. 1 Ó. 1 Thess. i. 4, where see Mac-
13. 2 John verse 1, 13. 1 Tim. v. 21 ; in k n i g h t . Also, The persons so chosen. occ.
which last text the elect angels are plainly Rom. xi. 7. [Schleusner says t h a t ¿icXoyíi
those angels who, when many others fell, here is t h e same as the Xúppa in verse 8,
kept their first estáte, and so are approved and KaráXEippa in ix. 2 7 , a few (of the
by God. On this t e x t compare Josephus J e w s . ) ] — I n this latter sense Clement ap-
D e Bel. lib. ii. cap. 16. § 4. towards the plies the word to t h e Corinthian christians.
.end, and see Wolfius.—Clement, in his l s t 1 E p . to Cor. § 29. b (rather f Se) 'EK- e

Epistle to the Corinthians, § 49, uses the A O r i F S pépoe ETrÚLncrEv íavrf), whom he
word in this sense also: By charity were hath made part of the election to himself.
all the elect of God, rráv-ee bi ' E K A E I Í - T h e expression XeTppa rar' iicXoyijv X"f"~
TOi GeS, made perfect. W i t h o u t charity roe, Rom. xi. 5, means a remnant of Jews
nothing is well-pleasing ivápe^ov, to God. reserved, or left, according as they were
Comp. § 1. T h e L X X have several times elecled or chosen out (comp. Mat. xx. 16.
applied the word in this last sense, as in xxii. 14. M a r k xiii. 20, under 'EicXíyopai
I I I . ) from the rest of their countrymcn
to t h e blessings of t h e Gospel through the
. * See 'Whitby on these three texts of M a t . and free grace of God vouchsafed to them on
L u k e . T h e o p h y l a c t ' s N o t e on M a t . x x i i . 1 4 , seems their believing in Christ, without any
very remarkable: Tít>h>¿! xahá i ©«o?, ¡ÍSM-M SE
Trai/TKc, ¿1.(yoi b's E X Á E H T O Í ' o?,¿'y yapffai%ó/J.EVOtxa)
previous merit on their parts. For by
' f l r s Ty fxsv 0 E K T O xaX¡7v, guace they were saved through faith,
0(

aCmt ExAByyvat Trapa

Ti SE ' E K A E K T O ' T S ytuécBcti, !¡ p.r„ ruihipm efi.
God calis m a n y , or rather all, but there are few
chosen; for there are few saved, and fit to be chosen
by G o d : so that it is G o d ' s part to cali, but to be
choien (become elect) or not, is ours.
* On which passages compare Rom. xi. particu-
larly verse !>, 7-
f See D a v i e s ' s N o t e on the place.
 E K N 240 E K n

and that not qf themselves, it was the gift I to swim out, emerge, escape from, secede,
qf God, not qf works, lest any man should \ the last applying to John v. 13. T h e
hoast. See E p h . ii. 8, 9. Vulgate has deelinavit. Battier (Bibl.
'EA.-A.UW, from lie out, or intens. and Xí/ai Brem. Class. v. p . 90.) says it is to give a
¿o loóse.— To dissolve. Whence sign by a nod, command by a nod, but
'EicXvopai, Pass. To be dissolved, lo be- this is rejected by Wolf, Palairet, &c.
come faint, to faint, either in body, as Erasmus derives the word from t,evevio, lo
M a t . xv. 3 2 . M a r k viii. 3 . Comp. ' M a t . become a stranger.—The word ÍKVEVO) to
ix. 36.—or in mind, as Gal. vi. 9. H e b . avoid by a motion qf the head, occurs in
xii. 3 , 5. In the profane writers likewise Xen. de Re E q . x. 4 1 . Diod. Sic. xv. 87.
i t denotes being faint. See Wetstein on 'ECTEW in T h u c y d . ii. 90.] — T h e L X X
M a t . xv. 3 2 , and Wolfius and Campbell on have used it for t h e H e b . ¡XE) turn, tumi
M a t . ix. 36 ; in which latter t e x t W e t - aside, 2 Kings ii. 24. xxiii. 1 6 ; and,
stein and Griesbach for é:;XeXvpévoi adopt according to some copies, for YiD decline,
íaKvXfiévoi, which is the reading of very turn aside, J u d . iv. 18.
many M S S . , six of which ancient. See 'JhKvriipüj, from éic out, and v?/0o> to be
.S/CÚAÁW.—It occurs in the N . T . only in sober. — To awake sober out qf a drunkeu
the above passages, but is used by t h e sleep, applied spiritually. occ. 1 Cor. xv.
L X X in the same senses ,• [of the body] 34. T h e L X X have used it in the same
1 Saín. xiv. 2 8 . 2 Sam. xvi. 14. xvii. 29. sense, for t h e Heb. yp> to awake, Joel i. 5.
& al. for t h e H e b . F|jJ» and r\>¡! to be tired, 'Etcvíiipare, bi fieOiiovree, Awake, ye drunken.
faint. Comp. 1 M a c . iii. 1 7 ; [of t h e (Comp. L X X in G e n . ix. 24. 1 Sam.
mind, Deut. x x . 3 . 2 Sam. iv. 1.] xxv. 37.) So P l u t a r c h , in Demosth. tom.
'Esr/xátTo-oü, from EK out, or intens. and i. p . 8 5 5 , B . of P h i l i p who had been
juáo-o-w to wipe, which see under 'ATTO- drunlc, peOmov, ''ERNIM-AS be— [Joel i.
p.áaaopai. [8ee Oudendorp ad Thom. m. 5. Areteeus iii. 6. iv. 3.J
p . 649. and E u s t a t h . ad Odyss. T . p . 684. 'Eicoúo-ioe, a, ov, from EKÁIV—aira — ov
4 3 . ] — T o wipe, wipe dry. occ. Luke vii. willing.— Voluntary spontaneous, whence
38, 4 4 . J o h n xi. 2 . xii. 3. xiii. 5. [ E c c l u s . the neuter being used as a substantive
xii. 13.] Kara eKÍaiov, of freewill, i. e. voluntarily.
'EKpvKTr¡pí'(w, from LK out, or intens. occ. Philem. ver. 14. [ T h e same phrase
and pv/c-r/pí^üi to moc/c, sneer, which see. occurs N u m b . xv. 3 . See Levit. vii. 16.
To mock, or sneer exceedingly. occ. L u k e xxiii. 3 8 . Xen. Mem. ii. 1. 18. Polyb. vi.
xvi. 14. xxiii. 35.— The L X X have used 14. 7f\
:

i t in two passages, P s ii. 4. xxii. 7, for 'Eicovaíojg, Adv. from ÉK-BVIOCV—Wil-

t h e Heb. iilb to mock, deride ; but Kypke lingly, voluntarily. occ. H e b . x. 26. [with-
on L u k e xvi. 14, observes t h a t the pro- out necessity] 1 P e t , v. 2.
fane writers very rarely use either t h e "EüTraXai, Adv. from ÍK of, and wáXat
simple V . pvK-r¡pí^(o or its other com- anciently formerly.
pounds ; he, however, produces MYKTH- I. Of oíd, in ancient times, occ. 2 P e t .
PI'ZÍ2N, and 'YIIOMYKTH'PISAS from iii. 5 * .
Stobaeus, and 'EIIEMYKTH'PISAN from I I . Of a long time. occ. 2 P e t . ii. 3,
Menander cited by P l u t a r c h . where Alberti, Wolfius, Kypke, and W e t -
'Eicveí/oj, from t e out, and reino to move, stein show t h a t this compound particle
tend, incline. eicwaXai is used by Josephus, Arrian, and
I. To decline, go aside. So Plutarch P l u t a r c h . [ P h r y n i c h u s objects to this
D e Gen. Socrat. tom. ii. p . 5 7 7 , B . word as a compound of an adverb and pre-
'EKNE'YSAS rrjg ¿'(5a, going out of t h e position. B u t see Alberti Obss. Phil. p.
way. 4 6 3 . Schwarz Comm. L i n g . G r . p . 4 4 4 . ]
I I . Simply, To depart, go forth, or '~E.Kiteip¿i'(w, from éic intens. and 7reipá¡io
away, in ÍElian, and t h u s i t seems used io try, prove, tempt.— To try, prove,
J o h n v. 13. T h e l s t aor. é^évevtra in tempt, make trial or proqf qf. occ. M a t .
Thucydides and Lucian denotes swimming iv. 7. L u k e iv. 12. (Comp. Exod. xvii.
out, escaping by swimming: b u t is not 2 — 7 . D e u t . vi. 16. Ps. Ixxviii. or Ixxvii.
this r a t h e r from t h e V . véoi to swim, than 18, 41.) L u k e x . 2 5 . 1 Cor. x. 9. (Comp.
from reino ? See more in Elsner, Wolfius, N u m . x x i . 5.) See Wetstein, W i t b y , and
and Wetstein on J o h n v. 1 3 . [Schl.
seems to consider t h e verb as ÍKVÍIJO de- * [Schl. says, ' tenrpore creationis;' why, I ¿lo
eidedly, and says, t h a t its meanings are not see.]
 E K n 241 E K IT

Campbell on M a t . iv. 7, and M a c k n i g h t tiou a n d will, by erring and wandering

on 1 Cor. x. 9 . — T h e L X X have used this from your original course and destination.
verb for t h e H e b . n o j , D e u t . vi. 16. [viii. So Hutchinson in Xenoph. 'Áva&. p . 452,
1 6 . ] Ps. lxxviii. 18. 8vo. on 'E(C7rí7rrovrae: Eodem sensu adhi-
'E(C7r¿/Lt7¡-<£>, from EK out, and 7rÉu?rto to betur ÍKTx'mruv, A c t s xxvii. 17, 26, nempe
send.—To send out or forih. occ. A c t s de navigantibus, q u i cursu proposito e x -
xiii. 4 . xvii. 10. [1 Sam. xx- 20. xxiv. 19. cussi, vel in brevia incidunt vel in l i t t u s
Polyb. x x . 9. 2. X e n . Hell. iii. 5 . 8 . ] ejiciuntur." B r y a n t ' s observations, &c.
'EK7r£¡)[o-<roc. See under ílépiaaíOQ. p. 2 7 , a n d N o t e . occ. Acts xxvii. 17,
'E/C7T£i-áw, or 'E/.-rrETc'ij'j'vut, from ÍK out, 26, 2 9 . [Comp. Polyb. i. 5 1 . H e r o d . viii.
and 7T£rciw to open, stretch out. [ S e e 13. E u r i p . H e l . 1227. Diod. Sic. v. 5 1 .
Glass. P h i l . Sacr. p . 934. ed. D a t h . ] — for t h e sense to dash against. Schleusner
To stretch out, expand, as t h e hands, in explains, A c t s xxvii. 2 6 , simply to run
earneslly addressing and persuading. occ. the ship ashore, a n d quotes Diod. Sic. i.
Rom. x . 2 1 , where see K y p k e ; and V i - 3 1 . ii. 60. Lycoph. Cass. 1084.]
t r i n g a on Is. Ixv. 2. [ P r o v . i. 24. Is. Ixv. 2 . ] I V . * " tofall to the ground," i. e. be
rjEmrT/oaw, from ÍKarrr¡Sáü) to leap.— ineffectual, excidere. occ. Rom. ix. 6. [/53
To leap out ov forward, rush into. T h i s is so used in Josh. x x i . 4 5 , (where L X X
is Griesbach's reading in A c t s xiv. 14. use ¿ t a 7 r t 7 r r w , ) Xxiii. 14, ( L X X 7rÍ7rroi,)
See Palíeph. de Incred. viii. 14. 2 Mace, and 2 Kings x. 10. comp. J u d i t h v i . 9,
iii. 18. Xen. Cyr. i. 4, 8 . ] and Dion. H a l . iii. 2 8 , for similar use of
[ ' E / c T T i V r w , from l e and Ttíirrw tofall.] Sunríwno. Schleusner quotes very well
I . [ T o fall off from, or fall down—of yapo-nrerÍQ 'éwoc from P i n d a r P y t h . O d ,
chains falling off a person, A c t s xii. 7 ; of vi. 3 7 . ]
a boat falling down into t h e sea, A c t s V . Tofall, cease,-be abolished. occ. I
xxvii. 32 ; of flowers falling off, James i. Cor. xiii. 8. [ S o Theophyl. a d l o e ]
11. a n d 1 Pet. i. 24 ; of stars falling from 'EKTTXÉIO, t5, I s t fut. ¿ / C T T A É W W from lu
heaven, M a r k xiii. 2 5 . Schleusner ex- out, and T T X I W to sail.—To sail out or
plains this last phrase by ceasing to shine ; forth. occ. A c t s x v . 3 9 . xviii. 18. xx. 6.
eodem redit. JíÍTrroj is the word in M a t . [ X e n . A n a b . v. 8. 2 1 . ]
xxiv. 2 9 . Compare Herodian iii. 7, 8. 'EorXr/pótú, ¿i, from EK intens. and TTXÍ¡-
Artera, v. 2 3 . Xen. Cyr. v. 4 . 8.] pó'o [_lo fill, o r ] to fulfl. — To ful/U en-
I I . [ T b fall from (a former state), or tirely. occ. A c t s xiii. 3 2 . [ T h e simple
lose it. T h u s Gal. v. 5, to fall from grace. meaning is to fill, as in L X X . E x o d .
2 Pet.' iii. 17, that ye do not, fall from xxxii. 29, in some copies. I t is used i n
your own solid foundation of Chrislian Polyb. i. 6 7 . 1, of'fulfilling pronúse7\
grace and knowledge. Rev. ii. 5 . (though '}ÍK7r\ripw<jLc, toe, A t t . Ea>e, ?f, from EK-
Palairet, Obss. p . 522, translates i t to de- TrXyncw. A fulfilling, accomplishmenl,
generóte, as in Philost. V. p . 193.) Ecclus. [end.'] occ. A c t s xxi. 26. Comp. N u m b .
xxxiv. 7. A t h e n . xiii. 1. iElian. V. H . iv. vi. 5 , 1 3 . i n L X X , and 1 Mace. iii. 4 9 .
7. See Loesner. Obss. Philon. p . 2 9 1 . 'Es;7rX))(7(rtü, or — r r i o , from E K i n t e n s . a n d
'AwoTrÍTrroj occurs in t h i s sense, J u d i t h xi. ir\í¡c¡<Tü> lo strike.—'EK-rXiicrcopat, Pass.
6. Ps. v. 10. Polyb. v. 3 . 6. ix. 7. 1.] To be exceedingly struck in mind, to be
I I I . W i t h ¿ t e following, To fall upon, astonished, astounded. M a t . vii. 2 8 . xiii.
to run fovl of be cast upon, as a ship. 5 4 . L u k e ii. 48. & al. freq. T h u s P l a t o
Elsner remarles, t h a t a ship is said (i. e. D e R e p . I . cited b v Wetstein in M a t .
in t h e Greek writers) ÍKWÍTI-TEIV when it is 'Eyái cí/cao-cte ' E i S E i l Á A T l í N , Hearing i t ,
dashed against t h e rocks, or runsagronnd: I Mas astonished. So L u c i a n . Scytha,
for t h e latter use of t h e word he quotes tom. i. p . 653. " F o r as soon as I ar-
Polybius and A r i s t i d e s : and of t h e for- rived in your city, ' E S E I I A A T H N ph>
mer, Herodotus, cited by Raphelius, fur- ivdvQ, I was immediately astonished."
nishes u s with an example, ' E Í J E ' I I I I I - P l a t o applies t h e simple wXrio-o-üj in like
TON 7rpoe r e t e rvírpae, They ranfoul, or manner, E p i s t . 7. Ü A I i r E I ' S eyw r w X E -
were dashed against t h e rocks. T h e per- X0£/'rt, (just as we say in E n g l i s h ) " I
sons sailing are also, in t h e above-men- being struck with w h a t was said." [ A d d
tioned circumstances, said sKTríirrew, as Wisd. xiii. 4 . 2 Mace. vii. 12. Xen. C y r ,
Raphelius on A c t s xxvii. 2 6 , shows from vi. 3 , 7. Polyb. i. 6 3 . 7.] " .
Xenophon. " ''EICTTEO-EIV signifies to fall
upon any t h i n g , contrary to your expecta- * Dotldridge.
 KK2 242 E K T

'EKTTVÉIO, S>, from IK out, and TTVEUI to 'EKspéiJHú, from EK out, and <¡ptyu> lo lurn.
breathe. To turn out qf the way, pervert. occ. T i t .
I . To breathe out, emit the breath. iii. ] 1, where see Wolfius. [Comp. D e u t .
Thus^ sometimes used by the profane xxxii. 20. T h e original sense seems to be
writers. io lurn insicle out; see Schol. on Aristoph.
II. To expire, die. occ. M a r k xv. 3 7 , Nub. 89.]
39. L u k e xxiii. 46. Sophocles [ A j . 1045.] 'Eiercipácraw, from he intens. aud ra-
and Plutarch apply t h e V . in this latter pcLcnrio to disturb.—To disturb very much
sense. See Wetstein in Mark. [ E u r . or exceedingly. occ. A c t s xvi. 20. [ P l u t .
Phcen. 1168.] t. vi. p . 5 4 5 . R e i s k . ]
'EKicopkvopai, from EK out, and rropsvopai 'EKTZIVIO, from EK out, and TEÍVO> lo
to go. streich.
I. To go, or come oíd ov forth, spoken I. To streich out, extend, as the hand.
of persons, Mat. iii. 5. xx. 2 9 . John v. 29. M a t . viii. 3. xii. 13. & al. freq. O n Acts
& al.—of words, Mat. iv. 4. xv. 11. Comp. xxvi. 1, W e t s t e i n cites from Polysenus,
Rev. i. 16. xix. 15.—of fame or rumour, 'ANE'TEINE T l f N A E S I ' A N J e í-npyyo-
L u k e iv. 37-—of lightnings and thunders, pí]Tiov, He lifted up his right hand, as
Rev. iv. 5.—of evil spirits, M a t . xvii. 2 1 . going to harangue. Comp. Prov. i. 24.
II. To procced, or come forth, as t h e [ I t is a common Hebraism, when a man
Holy S p i r i t from the F a t h e r . John xv. 26. does any t h i n g with his hand, tp add t h e
I I I . Comp. 'EimcopsvopaL I I . words stretching out his hand. See J u d g .
'E,KTropv¿vio, from ÍK intens. and rropi'Évw xv. 15. 2 Kings vi. 7. V o r s t . de Hebraism.
to commit fornication or lewdness.— To c. xxxviii. p . 710, though Georgius (Vin-
comm.it habitually, ov give one's selfup to, dic. N . T . p. 354.) does not assent. T h e
excessive or abandoned fornication, or remark applies to Mat. viii. 3 ; but cer-
lewdness. occ. J u d e ver. 7. [ G e n . xxxviii. tainly t h e phrase very frequently is not
24.] pleonastic. M a t . xiv. 3 1 . xxvi. 5 1 . M a r k
'EKTTTOLÚ, from h: out, and TTTÓIO to spit. i. 4 1 . iii. 5. L u k e v. 13. vi. 10. J o h n xxi.
•—Properly, io spit out, thence, to reject 18. A g a i n , it implies God's exerting his
with clisgust, or coniempt, respuere. occ. power in Acts iv. 30. See Glass. Philol.
Gal. iv. 14, where see Kypke Observ. Sac. Sacr. p. 934. ed. D a t h . W i t h ¿V¿ it im-
'Expirólo, from I K out, and p\'(ím to root. plies a violent laying qf hands, as iu L u k e
— 'To root out or up, lo eradicate, pro- xxii. 5 3 . and J e r . Ii. 2 5 . ]
perly as plants or trees. occ. M a t . xiii. 29. II. To east out, or let down, as an an-
x v . 13. Luke xvii. 6. J u d e verse 12. f J e r . chor from a ship. occ. A c t s xxvii. 30.
i. 10. Zeph. ii. 4.] 'EKTEXÍLÜ, tú, from EK out, or intens. and
"EjK^aCTLQ, IOQ, A t t . E(l)C, i¡, from h"l;í<z>ipi,TEXÉLO lo finish.—To finish entirely, com-
which see.—An ecstacy, in which the mind plete, occ. L u k e xiv. 29, 30. r_Deut. xxxii.
is for a time carried, as it were, out qf, or 45. Polyb. x. 26. I.]
beyond itself, and lost. 'EKTÍVEIO., ac, jj, from EKTEVÍIQ.—

I . Great astonishment, amazement. occ. Intenseness or continuance. So 'Ev EK-

M a r k v. 42. xvi. 8. [Comp. Gen. xxvii. TEVEÍC}. for ÉKTEVÜG, Intensely, instantly,
3 3 . ] L u k e v. 26. Acts iii. 10. [ D e u t . comp. L u k e xxii. 4 4 . — o r continually,
xxviii. 2 8 . Zach. xii. 4.] comp. L u k e ii. 3 7 . occ. Acts xxvi. 7.
I I . A sacred ecstasy, or " * rapture of [[Properly extensión, from EKTÉIVLO. See
the mind out qf itself, when, t h e use of Herodian vi. 2. 8. T h e word does not
t h e external senses being suspended, God occur according to Lobeck ad Phi-yn. p .
reveáis something in a peculiar manner to 3 ! 1. iu oíd Greek writers. See Phalar.
his servants the prophets or apostles, who Epist. 68. Apollon. Epist. Iii. 3 9 8 . 'EK-
are t h e n talcen, or transported out qf tkem- rEvía or EKTEvéta oceurs in t h e same sense
selves." occ. A c t s x. 10. xi. 5. xxii. 17. in J u d i t h iv. 7. 2 Mace. xiv. 3 8 . In 3
I n this-latter sense "E/crao-ic in the L X X Mace. vi. 4 1 . and-xi. 34, it means intent,
( G e n . ii. 2 1 . xv. 12.) answers to t h e H e b . tenour, purporti]
riDlin a deep or dead sleep. Excellently 'EKTEVEIEPOV, Compar. n e u t . of EKTEV{¡C

therefore have our translators rendered it (which see) used adverbially.—More in-
in t h e Acts by the English word, a trance. tensely or eamestly. occur L u k e xxii.
[See Schweigh. ad Polyb. ii. 5 5 . ] 44.
'EKTEVÍJC, íoc, Se-, ¿, y, Kai ro—EC, from
* Stocldus. ZKTEÍVII].—Continua!., or intense, occ. Acts
 E K T 243 E Ií T

xl!. 5. (Comp. L u k e xxii. 44.) 1 Pet. iv. well-known lines of M a r t i a l , lib. iv. epi-
8 * . Comp. ch. i. 22. gram. S.
'EKTEVWC, Adv. from ZKTEVÍIC. [A word
P r i m a ¡ahitantes atqnc altera disiinet hora,
of late date. See Lobeck ad P h r y n . p . Exercet raucos tertia causídicos,
311.]—Intensely, eurnestly. occ. 1 P e t . i. In quintana varior extendit Roma labores,
2 2 . — T h e L X X use this word for the S e x t a qiiics lassis—&c.
Heb. nplrD in strength, strongly. Jon. iii.
8. Comp. J u d i t h iv. 10. [Joel i. 14. Pol. " T h e Jirst and second hour are engaged
x x x i . 22. 12.] a t t h e temples of t h e gods, the third ex-
'HicTÍdrifii, from EK out, and rídnpi to put. ercises t h e hoarse pleaders, from t h a t unto
I . To expose, as an infant, to pul or the fiflh the Romans are employed in va-
cast him out to chance (as we say). occ. rious oceupations, t h e sixth affords rest to
A c t s vii. 2 1 . Herodotus, lib. i. cap. 112, t h e weary," &c.—The t r u t h is, t h e R o - .
uses t h e V . twice in this sense. [Wisd. mans (as well as the Jews, see J o h n xi. 9.
xviii. 5.] See also W e t s t e i n . M a t . x x . 1—7.) at all times of t h e j^ear
I I . To expound, explain, declare, occ. allotted twelve hours to t h e day, and
A c t s xi. 4. xviii. 2(3. xxviii. 2 3 . [Job twelve hours to t h e h i g h t , reckoning t h e
xxxvi. 15. B u t the passage is obscure.] beginning of the day from sunrise, aud of
T h e L a t i n exponere answers t h e Greek t h e n i g h t from sunset *. So t h a t about
word in both these applications, and is the equinoxes their first hour of t h e day
accordingly used by the Vulgate in all t h e commenced at w h a t we should cali six
above passages. [ T h e o p h . Char. Procem. o'clock in the morning, their second a t
§ 2.] seven, their third at eight, &c. H o w t h e n
can we reconcile J o h n xix. 14, with M a r k
'EnTírá<r<7a>, from EK from, and rtvácro-b)
xv. 25 ? Numerous are the niethods which
to shake, which see under 'Aworiváo-cru).—
have been taken by learned men for this
To shake from or off. occ. M a t . x. 14.
purpose. T h e s e may be seen in Wolfius
M a r k vi. 11. A c t s xiii. 5 1 . xviii. 6 ; where
and others. I shall mention b u t t w o :
comp. Neh. v. 13, in L X X .
l s t , T h a t which proposes with a few M S S .
"TLicrog, 7], ov, from íí, six.—The sixth.
to read in J o h n rpírij third instead of EKTT¡
M a t . x x . 5. & al. freq. Iu order to r e -
sixth (see W h i t b y and D o d d r i d g e ) ; b u t
concile John xix. 14. with M a r k xv. 2 5 ,
as t h a t reading does not appear to be s u p -
D r . M a c k n i g h t t h o u g h t it sufficient to
ported by sufficient authorities, (see M i l i
observe, t h a t St. M a r k reckons by t h e
and Wetstein), this method may be r a t h e r
Jewish account, which.begins the day at
t h o u g h t c u t t i n g t h e knot t h a n u u t y i n g
sun-setting, and reckons twelve hours to
it. 2dly, T h e most satisfactory solution
sun-rising, and then twelve hours more
of t h e difficulty seems to be t h a t stated
t o s u n - s e t t i n g ; so t h a t the third hour in
by H a r m e r , who refers the sixth hour in
M a r k began a t our eight o'clock in t h e
J o h n , not to the time of day, b u t to t h e
m o r n i n g : b u t t h a t " as J o h n wrote his
immediately preceding Tíapa.oKevn ra I l á -
Gospel in Asia, after the destruction of
aya, Preparation of the Paschal peace-
t h e Jewish polity, for t h e benefit of t h e
qfferings, which he shows from D r . L i g h t -
whole Román empire, he could not avoid
foot m i g h t begin at our three o'clock in
m a k i n g use of t h e form and división of
the morning, or even earlier. A n d con-
t h e day t h a t was best knomn, viz. t h e
sequently our Saviour m i g h t be delivered
form in use among t h e Romans, who be-
u p to the Jews about the sixth hour after
gan their day a t m i d n i g h t , reckoning
this time, according to St. John's account,
twelve hours till noon, and from noon
and be crucified a t the third hour of the
twelve hours to midnight, or t h e begin-
day, or between our eight and nine iu t h e
n i n g of t h e n e x t day." T h u s D r . Mac-
m o r n i n g , according to S t . M a r k ' s . B u t
knight, in his Fifth P r e l i m i n a r y Obser-
for further satisfaction on this subject, I
vation to his H a r m o n y , l s t edition. B u t
refer to H a r m e r himself, übservations,
was this indeed t h e manner in which t h e
Romans reckoned their hours ? I t were v e t . — E p i s t . ad A t t i c . l i b . ii. epist. 10. & l i b . x i i i .
easy to quote from t h e i r writers many epist. 5 2 — A d F a m i í . l i b . vii. epist. 3 0 . Caísar.
passages which clearly prove t h a t it was C o m m e n t . lib. iv. § 2 2 . edit. Clarlce and M a i t t a i r e .
n o t t . B u t I shall only produce t h e H o r a t . l i b . i. sat, 5 . lines 2 3 , 2 5 . sat. vi. line 1 2 2 .
lib. i i . sat. vi. line 3 4 . P e r s i u s , sat. iii. l i n e 4 , &
* [CEcumenius here e x p l a i n s it thus, E X T H ? , N o t . D e l p h . Martial. l i b . viii. e p i g , 6 7 ,
* S e e R u t h e r f o i t h ' s A s t r o n o m y , N o s . 3 7 5 , 37G.
t See Cicero Orat. pro M u r e n a , § 3 3 . edit. O l i - Plutarch. Q u a s t . R o m . p . 2 3 4 .
R 2
 E K T
vol: iii. p. 130. & s e q — I n Jolin iv. 6, it
does indeed seem a t first s i g h t as if t h e
Evangelist reckoned the hours of the day
in t h e manner mentioned by M a c k n i g h t ;
because t h e usual time when the women
in t h e East draw water was anciently (see
Gen. xxiv. 11.) as it still is, the cvening.
B u t in reply to t h i s it may be observed,
t h a t from t h e whole of t h e narration,
J o h n iv. it is evident that Jesús found
t h e woman alone at the well, and t h a t
therefore it could hardly have been the
usual time of women's drawing water, b u t
m i g h t much more próbably have been
twelve a t noon than six in the e v e n i n g :
and further, t h a t as t h e Samaritan wo-
man appears to have been a person of bad
cbaracter (see verses 17, 18.), it is likely
t h a t she might choose to come to the well
at a time of day when it was least fre-
quented ; and t h a t this humility of her's
m i g h t especially recommend her to the
favour of HIM who carne to save sinners,
and knew her heart. [Grotius's theory
deserves mention. H e says t h a t the third,
sixth, and ninth hours, which were t h e
most esteemed for prayer and other Ser-
vices (see Wolf on A c t s iii. 2.), were
marked by t h e sounding of a t r u m p e t ;
and t h a t henee, after t h e sounding t h e
t r u m p e t at the third hour, t h e sixth hour
was considered as approaching, and at
hand. T h e Evaugelist then added this
r e m a r k on t h e time to show t h e reason
for the great liaste of the Jews, as it was
not only t h e day of Preparación, b u t the
very hour of killing t h e Passover which
was a t hand. Glass, Lampe, and others,
adopt this opinión ; and L a m p e adds, t h a t
from Maimonides ad Berach. cap. i. Mis-
chir. 2, it appears t h a t t h e Jews really
divided t h e day into four quarters. D r .
T i t t m a n , of Dresden, the most recent com-
m e n t a t o r on St. J o h n (whose Commentary,
so unlike t h a t of m a n y of t h e recent G e r -
mán works, may be safely recommended,
t h o u g h too long, to t h e y o u n g s t u d e n t ) ,
adopts the theory of reading rpírri for eKTr¡
after Beza, Theophylact, & c , adding, t h a t
Wassenberg * and others t h o u g h t t h a t the
words ' H v , di — f K - r j , were a mere gloss.
Schleusner agrees with M a c k n i g h t , and
cites Plin. I V . H . ii. 77. and A u l . Gell.
iii. 2 . ]
'EJO-ÜC, an A d v . governing a gen. from t h e correspondent efferre is in L a t i n . See
lie out.
* [ I n a Dissertation prefixed to Valckencer's earth. occ. H e b . vi. 8. [ G e n . i. 1 2 . ]
S c h o l in libros q u o s d a m N . T . tom. i . . p . 5 0 . ] is used iu t h e same sense by t h e Greek
244 E K *
1. Without, as opposed to rvithin. occ.
1 Cor. vi. 18. (where see under I l á c I V . )
2 Cor. xii. 2, 3 . W i t h the n e u t e r ar-
ticle, To ÍKTOQ the oulside. occ. M a t . xxiii.
26.
2. Except, besides. occ. A c t s xxvi. 2 2 .
1 Cor. xv. 27.
3. 'EKTOS £Í pr), Except that, unless. occ.
1 Cor. xiv. 5 . xv. 2. 1 T i m . v. 19- Lucian
often uses t h e same p h r a s e ; Revivisc.
tom. i. p . 3 8 9 . 'EKTCyS ' E l MIT—¿o,
Unless he be. Quom. conscrib. H i s t . p .
677- E. 'EKTO'S ' E l MIT—rSfl' viroXá^oc
ne, Unless any one should suppose.—See
more instances in Wetstein and Kypke
on 1 Cor. xiv.
'EierpÉTropai, from le out, from, and
rpéww io turn.
I. To be turned out of t h e way, or
aside. occ. H e b . xii. 13. Also, to turn
aside, in an intransitive sense. occ. 1 T i m .
i. 6. v. 15. 2 T i m . iv. 4. See K v p k e on
1 Tim.
I I . W i t h an accusative following, to
turn from, avoid, aversari. occ. 1 T i m . iv.
20.
'EKTOÉ(¡IOJ, from EK intens. and rpitpio io
nourish.
I . To nourish. occ. E p h . v. 2 9 .
I I . To nourish, or bring up. occ. E p h .
iv. 4. I n this latter sense of bringing up
or educating, it is frequently used by the
L X X , answering to the H e b . Vu. See
inter al. 1 K i n g s xii. 8, 10. 2 K i n g s x. 6.
Hos. ix. 12.
"Eicrpoipa, aros, rb, from IxTErpuipai perf.
pass. of the V . ¡=M-trpóW<ü lo suffer abor-
tion, miscarry, which from l/c and rirpwa-Koj
to wound, hurí, and this from t h e simple
rpioio or rpoi t h e same.—An abortion, or
abortive birth. occ. 1 Cor. xv. 8, where
see M a c k n i g h t . — I n two passages of the
L X X , Job iii. 16. Eccles. vi. 3 , it an-
swers to t h e H e b . bt¡l, of t h e same im-
port, from t h e V. bhi to fall, fall away.
[1 Sam. vi. 3 . ]
'Egipto, from JK out, and aiépui to bring,
carry.
I . To bring or carry out. occ. L u k e xv.
22. Acts v. 15. 1 T i m . vi. 7.
I I . To carry out to burial. occ. A c t s v.
6, 9, 10. Comp. ''E.KKopí'Cui. Raphelius
shows from Herodotus and Polybius [vi.
5 1 . ] , t h a t £K(/>ép£iv is a funérea! t e r m , as
also Wetstein. [ X e n . M e m . i. 2. 5 5 ]
I I I . To bring forth, produce, as the
It
 E K X 245 E A A

writers. See Wetstein. [ P l u t . D e E d u c . 17, 18, 3 3 . T i t . iii. 6. where Theophylact

P u e r . c. 14. § 10.] has Ba-ipikiae r a r a peréSbjKe; qfpily, Ecclus.
'Efc^fvyw, from ii: out, and <j>£vyu> tofee. xviii. 1 1 . Ofloaves qf bread, J o b iv. 2 3 . ]
I . [To escape by actual fcight. Acts ' E K ^ W W , or ¿Kxyvw, from ¿ K out, and yy ü>

or x" < 1° pour.

v d
xvi. 2 7 . x i x . 1C. 2 Cor. xi. 3 3 . Eur. Phoen.
v. 1232. H o m e r . II. Z . 5 7 . X e n . C y r . vi. I. [To pour out, as liquids. (Xen. C y r .
140. J u d g . vi. 11. J o b xv. 3 0 . I s . Ixvi. 7. vii. 5. 6.) ; in t h e sense of ivasting, or
P a r k h u r s t and W a h l refer 2 Cor. xi. 3 3 . losing, as L u k e v. 3 7 . Ecclus. x x . 13. see
to t h e next sense.] Sam. ii. 1 1 . I n Sam. iv. 1. i t is to dis-
I I . [To escape (especially ¿mminent persef¡
evils). L u k e xxi. 3 6 . Prov. x. 19. Rom. ii. I I . To shed, as blood. occ. M a t . [xxiii.
3. H e b . ii. 3 . where, as in Ecclus. xvi. 15. 35>] xxvi. 2 8 . M a r k xiv. 24. L u k e xi.
understand Kpípa QeS, though Schleusner 5 0 . xxii. 2 0 . where see Wetstein and
suggests t h a t EKtpEVyh), airo^cvyw, and <j>ev- K y p k e Obs. Sac.
yw, (in H e b . xii. 25.) as in good Greek, I I I . Pass. To be poured, or gush out,
signify, to be absolved from punishment. as t h e bowels. occ. A c t s i. 18.
Aristoph. Vesp. v. 9 9 1 , 9 8 8 . T h o m . M a g . I V . Pass. To be poured out, or shed
VOC. <pevyii)f\ abroad, to be given freely, as t h e gift of
'E/c^oééu, £¡, from enéóGoc.—To terrify. t h e Holy Ghost. occ. Acts x . 45.—or t h e
occ 2 Cor. x . 9. [ D e u t . xxviii. 2 5 . N a h . love of God. occ. Rom. v. 3 .
ii. 11. Zeph. iii. 13.] V. Pass. To rush, or run violenily,
" E c ^ o É o e , a, ó, >;, from ÍK intensive, and effusé r u e r e . So Elsner, who shows t h a t
ij>o§oefear.—Exceedingly affrighted, ter- not only t h e L X X , Alexandr. J u d . ix. 4 4 .
rified. occ. M a r k ix. 6. H e b . xii. 2 1 . xx. 3 7 , b u t T h e m i s t i u s and Polybius, [v.
[ D e u t . ix. 19.] 106.] have used i t in this sense, and t h a t
{§§p° 'E/c0úw, from ¿K out, and ajóui, to t h e latter particularly applies i t t o in-
produce.— To produce, put, or thrust ordinate desire. occ. J u d e ver. 1 1 , where
forih, as a fig-tree its leaves. occ. M a t . comp. K y p k e . [ E c c l u s . xxxvii. 3 2 . A r i -
xxiv. 3 2 . M a r k xiii. 2 8 . I n both these stoph. Vesp. 1460. T e s t . xii. P a t . ( F a b .
texts ¿Kfírn m a y be rendered either t r a n - i. p . 520.) Tropvtía, év r¡ iifiyyQnv iyío.~]
sitively pulteth forth, or intransitively 'TLKywpíoj, S¡, from E K out, and x P M £ W
1°
spring forth ; and tyóXXa. m a y accordingly go.—[To go, or depart out. occ. L u k e
be either the accusative or t h e nominative xxi. 2 1 . N u m b . xvi. 4 5 . A m . vii. 12.
case. T h e former i n t e r p r e t a r o n seems 1 M a c . ix. 6 2 . ]
preferable, because St. L u k e in t h e pa- ' E n l / ú ^ M , from E ' K out, and ^ú%oi to
rallel place, ch. xxi. 3 0 , uses rrpoWZáXwat breathe. To expire, die. occ. Acts v. 5 , 10.
send forth*. [ S c h l . and W a h l give t h e xii. 2 3 . [qffainting in spirit. E z . xxi. 7.]
active sense, b u t Schl. mentions t h e other. 'EKÍIV, So-a, 6v, either from E'ÍKÜJ to yield,
See Symm. P s . ciii. 14. E u r . Phcen. T . submit.— Willing, voluntary, spontaneous.
958.] occ. R o m . viii. 20. 1 Cor. i x . 17. [ E x o d .
' E K ^ E W , from ÍK out, and to pour. xxi. 1 3 . ]
I . To pour out, empty, [properly, as ' E A A I ' A , ac, [The olive tree. R o m .
liquids,] as the phials of wrath. Rev. xvi. xi. 17, 2 4 . (comp. J e r . xi. 16. H o s . xiv.
1. & seqt. 7. See Glass. Phil. Sac. p . 1109. ed.
I I . To pour out. occ. M a t . ix. 17. D a t h . ) R e v . x i . 4 . (comp. Zech.iv. 11 — 1 4 .
M a r k ii. 2 2 . [ T h e r e is in this sense, a and Glass. ubi s u p . ) — r ó opag rS>v éXaiüv,
notion also of wasle, or utter loss, for as The Mount of Olives. M a t . x x i . 1. xxiv.
Schl. observes, ÍK^ÉW is opposed to avv- 3. xxvi. 30. see 2 Sam. x v . 3 0 . Zech.
rnpéw, and in t h e C a m b r i d g e M S . , t h e xiv. 4. J o s . A n t . xx. 8. 6. Bell. v. 2 . 3 .
gloss is áTró\\vrai.~] ( T h e same as 'EXaiuv, see below). Also
I I I . To shed, as blood. occ. Acts xxii. t h e olive-fruit, as J a m . iii. 1 2 . ( X e n .
20. Rom. iii. 15. [Rev. xvi. 6. G e n . ix. CEcon. 19. 1 3 . ) ]
6.] " E A A I O N , a, r o .
I V . To pour out, as money. occ. J o h n I. Oil,the expressed juice qf the olive-
ii. 15. fruit. [ M a t . x x v . 2, 3 , 8. (of lamp-oil,
V. Topour out, [ i n t h e sense of giving see J e r . xl. 10. a coarser sort t h a n t h a t
frecly; used of t h e H o l y Spirit. Acts ii. used for anointing) L u k e vii. 4 6 . x. 3 4 .
xvi. 6. M a r k vii. 13. Rev. xviii. 1 3 . O n
* See G r a t á i s on M a t . x x i v . 3 2 . Jam. v. 14. see Macknight. I n Rev. vi.
 E A A 246
6. Schl. and Bretschn. unnecessarily sup-
pose it used for i\cúa the olive-fruil; it is
coupled with olvoc.~]
I I . "Hkaiov dyaXXtcicrewe, The oil qf
gladncss, denotes the unclion qf the Holy
Spirit, anciently typified by oil, by which
unclion Jesús was appoinied to the offices
of prophet, priest, and king. Comp. u n -
der Meacrlae. occ. H e b . i. 9, where see
M a c k n i g h t , and comp. Ps. xiv. 7. 1 Kings
i. 3 9 , 40. [See also E x o d . x x i . 30.
xxv. 3 1 . xxix. 7- 2 Kings i x . 6. 1 Sam.
x. 1. Schl. and Bretschn. explain t h e
passage without reference to Christ's
offices, as indicating t h e highest honours
and pleasures, as the ancients used to
anoint themselves on feasts and joyful oc-
casions, and Bretsch. (referring to 2 Sam.
xiv. 2. Ps. xxiii. 5 . civ. 1.5. &c.) says,
t h a t anointing oil was thence called zXaiov
7/ cva-pa-oQ- (Ecclus. x. 1.) or ciyaXX.; b u t
this falls short of t h e sense of the passage,
which P a r k h u r s t has properly given.
Rosenmüller acknowledges the allusion to
Christ's regal office. See Glass. Phil. Sac.
p . 416. and 1109.]
'EXaiwv, üvoe, b, from ¿Xaía.—Olivet, a Ecclus. xxv. 2. xlvii. 2 7 , ]
mountain on the east of Jerusalem, so
called from its abounding in olive-lrees.
occ. Acts i. ] 2. Josephus several times
mentions this mountain in his Jewish
W a r ; and in his A n t . lib. vii. cap. 9. § 2,
he speaks of it by t h e ñame 'EXaiwvoc
tipas, as St. L u k e d o e s ; b u t lib. xx. cap.
1 • § 6, he observes, Tj/c TTOXÉOSC avriiepvc
Keípevov á7T¿)(£t •ráSia •ñívrt, I t is situated
opposite the city, at the distance oí fine
stadia or furlongs. T h i s passage the
learned Hudson in his note reconciles
with A c t s i. 12, where Olivet is said to
be a Sabbath-day's journey, or eight sta-
dia from Jerusalem, by r e m a r k i n g t h a t
t h e foot of the mountain m i g h t be no
more than five stadia from Jerusalem, and
t h a t Christ m i g h t , before his ascensión,
advance three stadia further upon it. B u t
comp. under "F-xw X I . — T h e L X X have
frequently used this word for an olive-
yard, answering to the H e b . ¡YJ, as E x o d .
xxiii'. 11. Deut. vi. l l . & a l .
'EXíiaaiov, A t t . — T T L O V , OVOQ, b raí 7'/ raí
rb—ov, A n irregular comparative, from
iXaybg, small.
I . Inferior in worlh or dignity, ivorse.
occ. J o h n ii. 10. H e b . vii. 7. [ W i s d . i x .
5. Lesser.' Gen. i. 16. Exod. xvi. 17,
18.]
I I . Inferior in age, younger. occ. Rom.
i x . 12. 1 T i m . v. 9, where t h e N e u t ,
E A A
eXarrov agrees with xp'ty " understood.
1
See W e t s t e i n and Bowyer. [On R o m . i x .
comp. Gen. x x v . 2 3 . xxvii. 6.]
'EXarrovéo), w, from eXarrov, rb, less.—•
To have too little, lo lacle, occ. 2 Cor. viii.
15, which is a citation of Exod. xvi. 18,
where in the L X X vXarróvrio-Ev answers to
t h e - H e b . Y o r i n wanted, lacked. [Some-
times used actively by L X X , to diminish,
as Prov. xiv. 3 4 . ]
'EXarrów, ¿J, from éXárrinv.
I. To make lomer, or inferior, occ. H e b .
ii. 7, 9. T h e / th ver. is a citation of t h e
L X X versión of Ps. viii. 6, and as well as
t h e H e b . O ' n ' b s n toi'D i n i D n n , may be
literally rendered, T h o u madest him a
little mhile inferior to (as in E n g . M a r g . )
the Aleim, i. e. to t h e material Aleim, or
agents of nature, called by t h e L X X and
the Apostle áyyÉXuc angels ; [used in this
sense by Isocrat. P a n e g y r . c. 47- p- 127.
(ed. Mori) vid. Symmach, 2 Sam. iii. 1.
Philo. de Opif. p . 20.]
I I '~EXarróopai, Spai, Pass. To be les-
sened, decrease. occ. Jolín iii. 3 0 . [ S e e
Ecclus. xii. 2. Sometimes to be deficient in.
'JLXaívto, from éXáw, the same, whence
it borrows several of its tenses.
I. To drive, impel. occ. J a m . iii. 4 .
[ ( H o m . O d . xv. 502.) 2 Pet. ii. 17. L u k e
viii. 2 9 . Ecclus. xxxviii. 2 5 . 2 Mac. ix. 4.
(metaphorically pass. io be harassed.Wisá.
xvii. 15. v. xvi. 18. Joseph. A. J . ii. 14. p .
109. ed. Hav.yj
I I . To row, i. e. drive or impel a ship
or boat with oars. In the profane writers
t h e accusative N . for a ship or ships, is
sometimes expressed with this V. b u t
sometimes omitted, as in the N . T . occ.
Mark 6. 4 8 . John vi. I 9, where see Elsner,
Wolfius, and Kypke. [ S e e 1 Kings ix. 2 7 .
T h u c v d . iii. 4 9 . viii. 108. Hom. Od. iii.
157.]'
ífígf 'EXa<¡/>pía, a s , 77, from eXaippbg.—
3
Lightness, levily, inconstaney. occ. 2 Cor.
i. 17.
'EXa<f>pÓQ, á, bv, q. éXatyépoc, from £'Xa-
tf>oc a stag.—Light, not grievous. occ.
M a t . xi. 3 0 . 2 Cor. iv. 17. A s to the
former passage we m a y observe, t h a t
Lucian has t h e phrase ZYPO N 'EAA- v
ttPO'N. D e Mere. Cond. tom. i. p . 470,
and t h a t in the latter text t h e n e u t e r ad-
jective ró iXaebpbv is used substantively
for ¿Xatypía lightness, [or rb íXatypbv rí¡s
6XÍ\LEIÜQ, for 7'/ éXaeppa 6XÍ\[/ic. (See Gesen.
p. 643. 1. Fisch. ad W e l l . vol. iii. P t . i.
p. 2 9 3 . Matthiee p . 592. 5.) Exod. xviii.
 E A E 247 E A E

26. pvpa é\a(j>puv' a Irijíing matter. occ. ' E A E T X S i . — T o demónstrate, show by

L X X . E z . i. 7 . ] evident and convincing reasóns.
'EAá)£I<roc, tj, ov, Supevlat. of kXaxve I . To convince. J o h n xvi. 8, (where
small.—Smallest, least, in size, quality, see Campbell's Note.) [ T h e passage here
state, dignity, or esteem. See J a m . iii. 4. referred to is one of some difficulty. Kat
M a t . ii. 6. y. 19. (where see Wetstein éXduiv ÍKEÍVOC É\Éyt,Ei rbv KÓapov rcspl hpap-
and Campbell) 1 Cor. iv. 3 . xv. 9. rías, Kal irEpl (¡LKaiocrvvine, Kal 7T£pt KpícrEiúe.
Ifgp 'TÜXa^t^órEpog, a, ov, An unusual
0
Schl. gives t h e verb a different sense, as
Comparative formed from t h e Superlat. applied to apapría, from t h a t which he
éXá^ITOC. Less than the least. occ. E p h . ascribes to it in t h e other two cases,
iii. 8. I t is a very strong and emphatical which is unreasouable. H e says, He shall
word. Grotius on the t e x t cites from the convict the Jews qf the sin qf incredulity
Greek poets several comparatives and su- and shall convince them qf my innocence,
perlatives thus formed from other com- and the victory gained over the power qf
paratives or superlatives: and such are Satán. L a m p e takes KÓcrpoQ of t h e world
sometimes used likewise in t h e prose w r i - at large, and explains t h e passage t h u s .
ters. T h u s Thucydides I V . 118, has He shall convince the world, (1) that
KaWuorepov, Strabo irpíin^ov, Xenophon it is sinful (incredulity being mentioned
Hel. I. ka-yaríirarog, and Sextus E m p i r . only as an example) ; (2) that jusiijica-
I X . p. 627, kXayi^orciTíú. So in L a t . mi- tion can only be gained through me; and,
nimissimus, postremior, postremissimus. (3) that I shall then be made Judge of
See Wetstein on E p h . iii. 8, and comp. all, and that all must therefore submit to
M-U^órepoc. me. T i t t m a n t h i n k s KÓo-poc refers only to
'EAA'íi, ¿5.—To drive, impel, as a ship t h e J e w s here, and gives t h e following
with oars. occ. J o h n vi. 19. H o m e r often explanation. He will show clearly (1)
uses this V . in a poetic form, as II. v. line the great sin qf the Jews in rejecling me,
366, McWi&j' $• 'EAA'AN, H e w h i p t to by the conversión of many thousands of
drive them, i. e. t h e horses, and applies it Jews through the efusión of the Spirit ;
to a ship either with or without vfja. See (2) that I was really just and innocenl,
Odyss. xii. lin. 47, 5 5 , 109, 124. Comp. by teaching through the apostles that God
'FiXávvw I I . has received me into heaven ; (3) that the
"EXey^tg, toe, A t t . eoje, i), from eXÉyicio. opposilion made to me by the rulers of
—A reproqf. occ. 2 P e t . ii. 16. [ J o b x x i . this world is in vain, as my religión will
4. xxiii. 2-3 prevail; and that their policy will be
"E\ey)(oc, 8 , ó, from 'éXey^ío. judged and condemned. A s to t h e proof
I. Conviction, evident demonslralion or from other places of Scripture, t h e L e x i -
manifeslalion. occ. H e b . xi. 1. So T b e o - cographers differ in their a r r a n g e m e n t s of
phylact on the place, "EXty^oc, r¿V ¿TÍ passages u n d e r t h e two first heads. To
¿£(^tc, (pavépwcnc ¿iSijXoiv TrpaypáriúV •KOIÚ. convince, and to convict, seem to differ,
ydp rotura ¡iXéiTEcrQai rio v¿¡ iiptóv wg 7 R Á - when applied to a fault, only t h u s , t h a t
povra. "~EkEyxpe, t h a t is, the showing or t h e individual is himself convinced of his
manifeslation of t h i n g s not s e e n ; for it fault, b u t is convicted of it in the judg-
(faith) makes t h e m lo he seen by our ment qf others, t h e fault being equally
mind as if they were present. So the proved in each case. T h e world, iii either
Syriac versión renders eXey^oc by wbi its limited or extended sense, m u s t be its
the manifestation ; and Chrysostom, from own j u d g e , and I should, therefore, cer-
this expression, "EXEy^os i (3XEwopévwv, tainly refer this passage to t h e first head.
observes, TI 7rí<rt£ roívvv íiiv OII/IQ TSIV In John viii. 4 6 , where t h e same phrase,
áSi'lXwv, (fn'icri, Kal ELQ T>)V ¿ivrrjv roig opu¡- rt'c éXéy^Ei pE 7T£pt apapríag, oceurs,
pévoLQ tpÉpei. irXnpoipopíav ra pr) opóipeva. as t h e r e seems somewhat of an appeal
F a i t h then, says t h e Apostle, is the seeing to others, P a r k h u r s t has probably done
of t h i n g s not manifest, and brings those r i g h t in referring it to head I I . A d d to
things t h a t are not seen to t h e same full this, 2 T i m . iv. 2. In 1 Cor. xiv. 24. it
demonstration as those which are. See is to refute. See T h u c y d . vi. 86.] T i t .
Suicer's Thesaur. under IIt=ri£, vol. ii. col. i. 9.
374. l s t edit. I I . To convict. J o h n viii. 9, 4 6 , (where
II. Conviction qf error, refulation. occ. see Campbell's Note.) J a m . ii. 9. [.351.
2 Tim. iii. 16. [ I s . xxvii. 3 . Job xiii. 6. V. H . xii. 5 1 . Aristoph. P l u t . 5 7 4 . A t h e -
Long. de S u b . fr. iii. 11.] nag. L e g . c. 2.]
 E AE
I I I . To manifest, make manifest, dis-
eover. John iii. 20, where íXkyydi) an-
swers to (¡¡avepúidr] in the following verse.
So the learned Elsner interprets t h e word
in this text, and in E p h . v. 13, and shows
t h a t t h e Greek writers use it in t h e same
sense, as for instance, Artemidorus, Onei-
rocrit. lib. i. cap. 68. p. 5 7 .
' E A E T X E I , Manifests hidden things.
Comp. Wetstein on E p h . [MI. V. H . xii.
5. Schl. thinks this sense belongs espe-
cially to judicial cases, where t h e t r u t h
is clicited by inquiry and t o r m e n t e ;
whence, éXéyxw ' ' ° intuiré s
(see E r -
nest. ad Callim. H . in Del. 88.) and ÍXey-
Xps means torment, Xen. A n . iii. 5. 9.]
IV. To reprove, rebuke. by words. M a t .
xviii. 15. L u k e iii. 19. [ l ' T i m . v. 2 0 . ]
T i t . i. 13. [ii. 15. Gen. xxi. 2 5 . ] — b y af-
fiictions, H e b . xii. 5. Rev. iii. 19. [ 2 Sam.
vii. 14. Tob. xiii. 10.]
S||gJ° 'EXeeivos, i), bv, from é'Xeoc,—Pili-
able, miserable, occ. Rev. iii. 17- 1 Cor. xv.
19, in which latter text observe, t h a t t h e
comparative eXtuvÓTEpoi is used for t h e
superlative eXteivórarot. So Anacreon,
Ode xlvi. line 3 *. Comp. under Met'^W.
'EXeéai, w, from EXEOC-
I. To pity, have pity, or compassion
upon. M a t . ix. 27. xviii. 3 3 . L u k e xvi.
24. Rom. ix. 15, 1 6 , 1 8 ; on which passage
see Wolfius C u r . Phil. lívpie iXír¡aoy—
Lord have mercy—Mat. xvii. 15. I t is
well known t h a t this became a common
form of supplication among Christians.
A n d after t h e propagation of Christianity,
it was used also by the H e a t h e n . T h u s
in Arrian, Epictet. lib. ii. cap. 7. Tbv
Qeov ÉTTIKCÍX¿PEVOL Ssó/iEda ávrS, K.Y P I E
E A E ' H S O N , In our invocations of God we
i n t r e a t him, Lord have mercy—This
seems one of the instances in which the
Christian phraseology was adopted into
t h e popular language. Comp. u n d e r í'i/x»)
VIL
'EXEEÓpai, Suat, Pass. To be pitied, ob-
tain pity or mercy. Mat. v. 7. Rom. xi.
30, 3 1 . 1 P e t . ii. 10, & a l . — [ T o obtain
pardon, especially 1 T i m . i. 13, 16. So
Hos. ii. 3 . Prov. x x i . 26. E z . vii. 4. 9 . ]
I I . To show mercy, pcrform acts of
mercy or pity. Rom. xii. 8, where see
M a c k n i g h t , [ I should be inclined to add
more passages to t h i s head, as 1 Cor. vii.
2 5 . 2 Cor. iv. 1. Phil. ii. 27. 1 Pet. ii.
* [ N . B . T h e A t t i c form i s ¡XHIK .
S
Prra!. a d H e c . p . v i i i . L o b e c k a d P h r y n e c k . p . 8 7 .
T i l e word s o m e t i m e s m e a n s comjxiss-iouaíc.'}
248 E A E
1 0 . ; in all of which pity producing acts of
mercy, is, I think, implied. See Prov. x x i .
26. xxii. 9.]
'EXErifiovvvri, r¡e, V; from EXEÍ¡¡.UÚV.
I. Pity, compassion. So in Callima-
chus's H y m n to Délos, line 1 5 1 , 2, Latona
speaks to the river Peneus,
Ta Kpvwra
— M í ¡ auy E ^ e i o 7ra9>3f KCEXCV ¿Yvfjta, T'iís os
'A»T' EAE'HMOSí'NHI
Ñ o r shalt i h o u suffer ill on m y account
P o r this compassion
[See Is. i. 27. xxviü. 27- Prov. iii. 3 . ]
I I . In t h e N . T . A work qf mercy,
particularly almsgiving. M a t , vi. 1, 2, ¿,
4. Also, The alms itselfl or money given
to the poor. L u k e xi. 4 1 . xii. 3 3 . A c t s
iii. 2, & al. Henee t h e L a t i n ecelesiastieal
writers use t h e word eleemosyna, whence
by a corruption our English alms. [ D a n .
iv. 24. T h e H e b . word üpllf used t h e r e ,
has also the double meaning of pity and
almsf\ T h o u g h several learned men, as
Mili, Doddridge, Bp. Pearce, and C a m p -
bell, (whom see) have t h o u g h t t h a t in
Mat. vi. 1, StKaiócrvvrjv, not EXET]poavvr¡v,
was t h e t r u e reading, y e t i t seems r e -
markable t h a t Griesbach should admit
t h e former word, which is found in only
two Greek M S S . , into the text. See W e t -
stein in Var. Lect.
EXerifiaiv, OVOQ, b, ?'/, from ÍXEÉOJ.—
Pitiful, compassionale, mereftd. occ. M a t .
v. 7- H e b . ii. 17. [Jer. iii. 12.]
" E A E O S , s, b, and " E A E O S , EO , «C, rb. £
I. Pity, compassion, mercy. T i t . ¡ii. 5.
(Comp. H e b . iv. 16.) L u k e i. 7 8 . E p h .
ii. 4. & al.
I I . [Kindness,] a work, or act, qf
mercy.. L u k e [i. 54, 5 8 . ] x. 37. [ R o m .
ix. 2 3 . ] J a m . ii. 13. [ & a l . ] Comp. M a t .
ix. 13. xii. 7. [Joined with hpnvr¡ or
%ápiQ, it seems to express happiness of
all kinds. Schl. adds t h e sense of piely
to God, and cites M a t . ix. 13. xii. 7,
where t h e meaning is obviously general
kindness and beneficence. In Ecclus. xliv.
27, t h e meaning is próbably the same,
and in 1 Mac. ii. 5 6 , it seems used for
goodness in general. Add to this sense,
2 Sam. xiv. 4 5 . ]
'EXEvOEpla, ac, •>), from éXEvdEpoe-—-
Liberty. I n t h e profane writers it is used
for corporal liberty, and freedom from
See Pors.
outward servitude; b u t in t h e N . T . i t
denotes spiritual liberty or freedom, 2
Cor. iii. 1 7 ; especially from legal ordi-
 E A E
nances, [1 Cor. x. 29.] Gal. ii. 4 . v. 1, 1 3 ;
[Theodoret, on both places, gives this ex-
planation :]—joined with freedom from
t h e slavery of sin, J a m e s i. 2 5 . ii. 12.
Comp. Rom. viii. 2 1 .
'EXevdepoc, a, ov.
I. Frec from corporal slavery. 1 Cor.
vii. 2 1 , 2 2 . xii. 13. Gal. iii. 28. iv. 22. &
al. [ T h i s sense includes free birth and
mamimission.']
I I . Free from legal obligalion. occ.
M a t . xvii. 2 5 . Rom. vii. 3 . Comp. 1 Cor.
[vii. 39.] ix. 1, 19. [Herodian i. 10. 4.]
I I I . Free from the slavery qf sin. occ.
John viii. 3 6 . Comp. Rom. vi. 2 0 , where
they who are free from righteousness
mean such as pay no sort qf obedience to
it. [ I n Gal. iv. 2 6 , t h e heavenly Jerusa-
lem is said by Schleusner to be t h e Chris-
tian system which promises freedom from
sin to all. M a c k n i g h t construes the verse
t h u s : But the-Jerusalem above is the free
fvoman, i. e. answers to Sarah. The
meaning of the word depends obviously on
the context, which is too long for discus-
sion here.]
EfJÜi 'EXevOepóüj, S¡, from s-Xévdepoe.—
0
Tofree, set free, from legal ordinances,
Gal. v. 1.—from the slavery of sin. J o h n
viii. 3 2 , 3 6 . Rom. vi. 18, 2 2 . Comp. Rom.
viii. 2, 2 1 . [Ecclus. i. 2 3 . 2 Mace. i. 2 7 .
ii. 23.]
"EXevo-ic, tos, A t t . £oj£, i¡, from kXévdw.
—A coming, advent. occ. A c t s vii. 5 2 .
[Dion. H a l . t. i. O p p . p . 5 6 5 . edit. Reisk.
See Suicer i. p . 1089.]
'EXeajavrivoQ, r¡, ov, from sXé(¡>ac, avroc,
b, an elephant, which from t h e H e b . f]b>A,
or * Phenician an ox, + to which
genus m a n y animáis of large bulle were
anciently referred. T h u s t h e % Romans
called elephants L u c a s boves, Lucanian
oxen; oxen on account of their size and
horns (or as we less properly cali these
latter, their teeth), and Lucanian because
they first saw them in L u c a n i a , d u r i n g
the war with P y r r h u s . — I v o r y , i. e. made
* "AA$A—¡pon/zar ¡raí xatárj TO» BOT'N, P l u t .
In S y m p o s . l i b . i x . q u . 2 .
f See B o c h a r t , vol. i i . 2 5 0 , & seqt.
í S o P l i n y , j i l e p h a n t o s Italia primum
Pyrrlii Regís bello, § b o v e s L u c a s appellavit
Lucariis visos—Nat. H i s t . l i b . viii. c a p . 6. And
Varro still more accurately, A L u c a n i s L u c a s ; ab
eo quod nostri qudm maximam quadrupedem,
i-psi haberent, voearent b o v e m ; Se in L u c a n i s
rhi bello primum vidissent apud hostes elephantos,
id est, quadrapedes cornutas (nam quos dentes multi
div.unt stmi cornua) L u c a m b o v e m appellasse.
L i n g . L a t . lib. vi.
249 E A K
of ivory, or elephant's tusks. occ. Rev.
xviii. 12, where see K y p k e concerning
t h e valué which t h e ancients set upon
ivory, and t h e various uses to which t h e y
applied it. [ S e e E z e k . xxvii. 6, 15.
Amos iii. 15. vi. 4. 1 Kings x. 22. xxii.
39. Herodian iv. 2, 3 , and 13. Reitz. ad
L u c i a n . O p p . t. ii. p . 63.]
' E A I ' S S í i . Comp. 'EiXío-o-io.
I. To roll, roll round. T h u s it is used
in t h e profane writers.
I I . To roll up, as a g a r m e n t . occ. H e b .
1. 12. [Schleusner says, " A s t h a t which
before having been expanded, when rolled
u p , vanishes from s i g h t ; t h e word here
means lo make to vanish, destroy. Comp.
Isa. xxxiv. 4. P s . cii. 2 6 , where some
would read áXXá&tg. Cappell. Crit. S. p .
159. D r u s . Mise. Cent. ii. c. 2 4 . ]
"EXKOC, eoe, HC, rb, from ¡ÍXKII) to draw,
because i t seems to draw or attract t h e
morbid juices to the aflected p a r t . — A n
ulcer, a sore. occ. L u k e xvi. 2 1 . Rev. xvi.
2, 1 1 . [ T h e first meaning was a fresh
wound. See E u s t a t h . ad Iliad. A. 8 1 2 .
p . 841 ; b u t afterwards the ulcerfrom an
oíd wound, Suidas says ró rpávpa rb
ypovío-av. T h o m . M . tcvpíojc ypóviov rrá-
8og BK cnh'ipo yevópevov. See Poes. ad
CEcon. H i p p . p . 122. Comp. 2 K i n g s
x x . 7. J o b ii. 7- Polyb. i. 8 1 . 5 . X e n . de
Re E q . v. 1.]
f Ü p 'EXKÓOJ,
0
W, from íXicog.—To ul-
cérate, exulcérate, whence, as a part. perf.
pass. ijXKuipévoe ulcerated, ulcerous, futí
of ulcers or sores, occ. L u k e xvi. 20.
[ X e n . de R e E q . i. 4. v. 1. P o l l u x O n o m .
i. 201.]
'EXKVW, from '¿XKOJ.
I. To draw, drag, as a net. J o h n xxi.
6, 1 1 . [ H a b b a k . i. 16. 2 Sam. xxii. 17.
Xen. H e l l . vii. 1, 19.]—as men before
magistrates, Acts xvi. 19. [ X e n . M e m . iii.
6. 1. S y m . Ps. lviii. 4.]
II. To draw, as a sword out of t h e
sheath. occ. J o h n xviii. 10.
I I I . F i g u r a t i v e l y and spiritually, To
draw or persuade to t h e acknowledgment
and faith of C h r i s t by t h e external mira-
culous evidences of his divine mission in-
forced on t h e soul by t h e influence and
vidit illumination of t h e Holy Spirit. occ. J o h n
in
xii. 3 2 . vi. 44. Comp. verse 6 5 . J o h n x .
25. xiv. 11. xv. 24. See Jenkin's Reason-
quam ableness of t h e Christian Religión, vol. ii.
Pyr- chap. 3 2 .
"EAKíi, To cause to go or come.—To
De draw, drag. occ. A c t s xxi. 30. J a m e s ii.
6. [ L a m . i. 5. Wisd. xix. 4 . Aristoph.
 E A A
N u b . 1220. X e n . Cyr. viii. 1. 32. Cic. pro
Mil. 15. Liv. ii. 2 7 . ]
'EAAA'S, áSoc, i¡.—Helias, occ. A c t s
xx. 2. Anciently t h e ñame of a city in
Thessaly mentioned by Homer, II. ii. line
683, and II. ix. lines 395, 447. & al. and
of t h e neighbouring country, II. ix. line
474, which lay on the shore of the P a g a -
sean gulf opposite the coast of Mysia and
iEolis in Asia Minor, from which countries
it was probably peopled; and it seems to
have been called Helias from the H e b r e w
word * Ti^bíi beyond, as being beyond the
iEgean sea in respect to the región whence
t h e first planters of it carne. T h e iuha-
bitants of this city and country are by
H o m e r named "EXXnvEg, II. ii- line 684,
by which appellation + Thucydides r e-
marles towards the beginning of his first
book, " H o m e r never means all t h e G r e -
cians, b u t only the inhabitants of the
Phthiotis who were commanded by A c h u -
les." B u t in process of time t h e ñame
'EXXac was extended to all t h e countries
lying between Macedonia and Peloponne-
sus, and even sometimes included both
these latter, and t h e inhabitants of all
this región were called "EXXnveg. I t must
be observed, however, t h a t t h e profane
writers, both G r e e k and L a t i n , often d i -
stinguish, as St. L u k e does, between Ma-
cedonia and 'EXXac or Greece. See R a -
phelius and Wetstein on Acts x x . 2 . —
['EXXac; was first the ñame of a city in
Thessaly, then of Thessaly itself (see
Casaub. D i a t r . in Dion. Chrys. c. 12, and
Salmas. ad Solin. p. 100.); thirdly, of all
Greece, without the Peloponnesus; and,
lastly, of all Greece, witli t h e Pelopon-
nesus. T h e last is t h e sense which oceurs
in the N . T . T h e ñame Greece is de-
rived from t h e TpatKcí, a southern people,
who migrated into I t a l y . ]
"EXXr¡v, nvog, i, from 'EXXac.
I . A Grecian, a native of Helias or
Greece. Rom. i. 14. 1 Cor. i. 2 2 , 2 3 .
Comp. under 'EXXac- [ A d d Acts xvi. 1,
3. xviii. 17. In Rom. i. 14, the Greeks
are opposed to the Barbarians from t h a t
superior culture which t h e y were acknow-
ledged by all to enjoy. I hardly know
if it be worth observing, t h a t Hellen is
said to have been the ñame of t h e son of
Deucalion, who fouuded Helias in T h e s -
saly.]
* See D r . H o d g e s ' s M i s c e l l a n e o u s Reflections,
p . 2 2 6 . edition.
•f [ T h u c y d . i. 3 , where sec H u d s o n . ]
250 E A A
I I . A Gentile, who followed the religión
and manners of t h e Greeks, as opposed t o
a Jew. John vii. 3 5 , twice. Acts xiv. 1.
(Comp. verse 5.) xviii. 4. xix. 10. xx. 2 1 .
[ R o m . i. 16. ii. 9, 10. iii. 9. x. 12. 1 Cor.
x. 3 2 . ] Gal. [ii. 3 . ] iii. 2 8 . Col. iii. 11. &
al. Comp. 2 Mace. iv. 1 0 — 1 5 . vi. 9. x i .
24. [ T h e J e w s divided t h e world into
J e w s and Gentiles, to distinguish the b e -
lievers in t h e t r u e and false religión; and
they spoke of t h e Gentiles generally, as
Greeks, from t h e great extent of country
through which t h e Greek tongue was
spoken, to which Cicero (in O r a t . pro Ar-
chia, c. 6.) bears w i t n e s s * . A n d so we
find in 2 Mace. iv. 13, iXX.nvtcrfj.og and
ctXXofvXtcrjj.bg are used as synonimous.
See also 1 Mace. viii. 1 3 . 2 Mace. iv. 36.
vi. 9. I n Is. ix. 12, we have"EXXj)j/£c for
tz>>n»l>a. So, in t h e fathers, J u s t i n M .
and T a t i a n wrote discourses to the Greeks,
i. e. to t h e Gentiles. See Cyril. Alex. de
SS. T r i n . c. vi. p. m. 2 1 . J u s t i n M . Resp.
ad Queest. 42 and 74. p p . 324 and 3 3 8 .
I n J o h n vii. 3 5 , t h e meaning is, they of
the Jews dispersed among the Gentiles.
T h e phrase is fully explained in t h e note
on StaaTropu."]
I I I . A Jewish proselyle descended of
Grecian parents or anceslors. occ. J o h n
xii. 20. See Doddridge on t h e place, and
comp. Acts xvii. 4. See also Suicer's
Thesaur. on this word. [Schleus. refers
Acts xvii. 4 , to head I I ; b u t I t h i n k
P a r k h u r s t (with W a h l ) , quite r i g h t .
T h e r e is some dispute on John xii. 20.
Selden ( D e J u r e N a t . et Gent. p. 2 S 7 ) ,
wishes to show from this place t h a t t h e
J e w s admitted Gentiles to t h e t e m p l e ;
and so Maldonatus ad loe. Salmasius
(de Ling. Hell. p. 218), also contends
that"EXA?/v alwa.ys in the N . T . means a
Gentile. B u t as A r u d t (Mise. Sacr. p.
6) observes, it is ditíicult to believe t h a t
a Gentile would have enquired or cared
about the Messiah, or have come to t h e
temple of a despised nation to worship.
See Wolf's note for more authorities.]
'EXX?¡viKoe, J), bv. Grecian, Greek.
occ. L u k e xxiii. 3 8 . Rev. ix. 11. [ J e r .
xlvi. 16. 4. 16. 2 Mace". 10, 15. vi. 9.]
' E X X J J V I C , tSos, n, from "EXXTJV.—A Gre-
cian woman, i. e. in religión, a Gentile.
occ. M a r k vii. 26. (where see Wetstein.)
A c t s xvii. 12. [ B i s h o p Horsley (Serm.
xxxvi.) says, " T h i s word describes not
her country, but her religión. She was
* [GrEeca leguntur in ó m n i b u s ferc g e n t i b u s . ]
 E AA 251 E A n

an idolatress, bred in t h e principies of would signify (according to t h e usual

t h a t gross idolatry which consisted in t h e rule of such verbs*) to imítate the Greeks,
worship of t h e images of dead men. A n d whence .'EXXnvtTtjs ought. to be an imiiator
because idolatry in this worst form ob- ofthe Greeks. T h e word does not of i t -
tained moré among t h e Greeks t h a n t h e self define whether t h e J e w to whom i t
nations of t h e E a s t , such idolaters, of applies retained t h e Jewish, or adopted
whatever country they m i g h t be, were, the Christian faith. So Schleusner and
by t h e Jews of t h e apostolic a g e , called Wahl.]
Greeks." I t h i n k t h e reason assignea JÜH" 'EXXJÍVÍTÍ, an A d v . from ''EXXnv.—
above in "EXXr¡v I I . for t h e use of t h e In Greek, in the Greek language. occ.
word, is more satisfactory, especially as John xix. 2 0 . A c t s xxi. 37, 'ÉXXiivi^í yi-
it implies a foliower. of t h e Gentile ido- vú)cricí.LQ; t h e expression is elliptical for I X -
latry.] XjiriTt XaXeiv yivóicriceiQ ; dost thou knom
tczy" 'EXX?7j'i??)c, 5 , ó, from "EXX?if.—An (how t o speak) in G r e e k ? A n d so our
Heilenisl or Grecian proselyte. English translation, canst
occ. A c t s thou speak
vi. 1. ix. 29. x i . 2 0 . After attentive con- G r e e k ? Xenoph. uses an elliptical phrase
sideration, I concur with t h e opinión of exactly parallel, CyropBed. lib. vii. [ 6 . 8.]
the learned Wolfius, on Acts vi. 1, t h a t T d 2 Y P I 2 T I ' ' E ü i S T A M E ' N O Y S , Those
e

the ' E X X r j i ' i T r a i mean such persons as had mho know (how to speak) in Syriac.
been converted from heathenism to Juda- Comp. L X X in N e h . xiii. 2 4 , where t h e
ism. T h a t i t (loes n o t signify merely fo- phraseology is complete.
reign Jems mho used ihe Greek language 'EXXoyéa), Co, from iv, in, into, a n d
in their synagogues and conversation, is Xóyoc; an account.—To bring into the ac-
evident from Acts xi. 20, where these count, impute, reckon, charge. occ. P h i l e m .
'EXXJ/I'ÍTCU are distinguished from t h e TH- verse 18. [Zonaras L e x . col. 696, refers
tScúoi or Jems by birth, mentioned in t h e to this place, and explains ipdi iig %píoc
preceding verse. Doddridge a n d others, TUTO Xúyicrai reckon this to me for a debt.
wdio embrace t h e last mentioned interpre- T h e word is metaphorically used for to
tation of 'EXX??>/i?aí, are so sensible of t h e impute, in Rom. v. 13.T
forcé of this passage, that, upon t h e a u - 'EXTTÍ'CLO, from ÍXTÚQ.
thority of the Alexandriatt M S . , and some I . To hope, expect with desire. Luke
of t h e ancient versions, though opposed vi. 2 4 . xxiii. 8. xxiv. 2 1 . & al. I n 2 Cor.
by almost all t h e other M S S . , they read viii. 5, supply t h e word póvov " m e r e l y "
"EXXnvag instead of ' EXXnvi^cig *; and with Doddridge and Worsley, before ?)X-
D o d d r i d g e is so bokl as to say, t h a t com- rrícraptv. [ T h e verb admits an infinitive,
mon sense would require us to adopt this as L u k e xxiii. 8, or on, xxiv. 2 1 , or a
r e a d i n g , even if it mere not supporled by simple accusative. 1 Cor. xiii. 7. See
the authorily of any manuscript at all\. Herodian ii. § 9. Xen. M e m . ii. 1. 27-]
T h i s assertion, however, can only be s u p - .II. To hope, trust, confide, the prepo-
p o r t e d by supposing, t h a t 'EXATIJ'ITÍ/C must sitions iv, Its, and J?rt (this last either
signify a native, though grecizing. Jem. with a dative or accusative case) being
B u t see Wolfius on Acts vi. 1. xi. 20. í prefixed to t h e object in or upon which
and Suicer, Thesaur. in 'EXX-nvitfie I I . one hopes or trusts. See 1 Cor. x v . 19.
[I am unable to see t h a t Wolf alieges any Phil. ii. 19. J o h n v. 4 5 . 2 Cor. i. 10. 1
a r g u m e n t s for his opinión. 'EXXr¡ví£w T i m . v. 5. 1 P e t . iii. 5. Rom. xv. 1 2 . 1
T i m . iv. 10. [ I n good Greek t h e dative
* [ G r i e s b a c h admits this reading into t h e t e x t . is generally used in this s e n s e ; according
Schleusner approves it."]
f S e e what C a m p b e l l says vefy w e l l on this s u b -
to Griesbach (with Wahl's approbation),
ject in Iris Preliminary Dissertations to the ü o s p e l s , this is t h e case in Mat. xii. 21 ; b u t Schl.
p. 0 3 9 , & c . and p. 04G, & c . takes t h e oíd r e a d i n g . ] — T h e s e are hel-
X Since writing the above i n t h e first edition, I lenistical phrases often occurring in t h e
found that Campbell, in h i s Preliminary D i s s e r t a -
L X X , a n d generally answering either t o
tions to the G o s p e l s , p . 5 , & c . h a s a t large stated
and defended the opinión that the 'EAToínrn) m e n - the H e b . "a ¡líoi, bu—or by—to trust in,
tioned in the A c t s , m e a n not proselytes to Jndaism, to, or upon, as in J u d . i x . 2 6 . x x . 3 6 . 2
but those Jews •who had resided always or mostly Kings xviii. 5. P s . iv. 6 ; or to "3 riDli to
in Grecian cities, and conscqucntly whose common
hope in, as P s . v. 12. vii. I. xvi. I . & al.
tongue was Greek. W i t h o u t accmiescing i n the
Doctor's arguments, I t h i n k t h e T e a d c r w o u l d d o
well carefully to peruse w h a t h e h a s advancetl on * f l a ü a í f o j to imítate the Jews, fytKmittt/ia to fol-
this subject, and then j u d g e for himself.
low thc. partí/ of Philip, & c . & c ]
 E A Y 252 E Aa
freq. or to ~b i>n> to waitfor, P s . xxxi. 2 5 . seems ultimately a derivative from t h e
xxxiii. 2 2 . xxxviii. 16. cxxx. 5. Isa. Ii. 5. Heb. CDVÍ> to hide, referring to t h e magi-
& al. cal sccrets with which such persons p r e -
'EA17T2, Liiog, ?'/. [ T h e word is gene- tended to be acquainted. occ. A c t s xiii. 8.
rally used in a good sense, as T h o m . M. Comp. verse 6, and see Wolfius. [ T h e
says kX-irlg kirl /cciXS, in distinction to rrpóo-- word Elymon in Arabic, signifies not only
ioda, which is used to denote also expec- a wise person in divine and heavenly
talion of evil; b u t this is not without matters, b u t a magician. See V e r s . A r a b .
exception. I t is even sometimes used for Saadiae G e n . x ü . 8- Exod. xviii. 19. L u d .
fear. T h u c y d . ii. 4 2 . as is 'éXrropai. H o m . de D i e u . Crit. S . p . 5 8 1 . Bochart. H i e r o z .
II. xv. 110. H e r o d . vi. 109. See Irmisch. p a r t i. p . 7 5 0 . ]
on Herodian i. c. 3 . 1 1 . p p . 79 and 824 ; 'EAÍif'. H e b . — M y God. I t is plainly
t h e Notes on Thom> M a g . p . 2 9 9 . A m - t h e H e b . >¡Ti!'N, as the word is w r i t t e n ,
mian. Marcell. x i v . 7. So spero. V i r g . P s . xviii. 4 7 . cxliii. 10. cxlv. 1. occ. M a r k
-¿En. i. 547- I n t h e N . T . , however, i t is xv. 3 4 ; iu which dolorous exclamation of
always taken in a good sense.] our Blessed Redeemer there seems a pro-
I . Hope, desire of some good with ex- priety and emphasis beyond what has been
pectalion of obtaining it. A c t s xvi. 19- commonly observed. F o r M a t . xxvii. 4 6 ,
Rom. v. 4. T i t . 2. 1 J o h n iii. 3 . In 1 A B O U T (rrepi) the ninth hour, Jesús cried
Cor. ix. 10, ¿V IXTI-ÍCU at the end of the out with a loud voice, 'HXi, i. e. >!>N, 'ÍJK,
verse is not found in íive ancient, and (as in P s . xxii. 1.) M y God, M y G o d ,
t h r e e later M S S . , a n d is accordingly why hast thou forsalcen me ? t h e ñ a m e
ejeeted from t h e t e x t by Griesbach ; a n d by which he then addressed t h e D i v i n i t y
instead of rrjg kXrríSog ávrü ptrkytw, the referring to his omnipresent * power and
Alexandrian (í$. edit. Woide), and a n - providence; b u t , A T the ninth hour (rrj
other ancient, with two later M S S , read apa rrj ei/várn, M a r k ) , when he was in
I T T ' E X T I - Í S I rS pt-kye-ív; which reading is t h e very jaws of death, he again cries o u t ,
also favoured by t h e V u l g . and both t h e ' E X W Í , 'EX<D(, Eloi, Eloi, why hast thou
Syriac versions, a n d is marked by Gries- forsalcen me? »¡TiÍ>N, »¡YI$>K, Thou, J e h o -
bach as equal, or perhaps preferable, to vah, w h o a r t not only >Vtí my poweiful
t h e other. See Mili, Wetstein, Bishop God, b u t >íT\bü bound to bear together
Pearce, and Griesbach. O n E p h . ii. 12, with my humanity the curse due to man
1 Thess. iv. 1 3 , see Leland on t h e Chris- for sin (for who is Txhin bul Jehovah ?
tian Revelation, p t . iii. ch. 8. p . 3 7 8 , Ps. xviii. 3 2 . comp. G a l . iii. 13.), why
Svo. hast THOU forsakcn me ? I add, t h a t in
I I . The object ofhope, the thing hoped t h e only three passages (I believe) wherein
for. Rom. viii. 24. H e b . vi. 8. Comp. 'rní>K Eloi occurs in t h e O í d T e s t a m e n t ,
Gal. v. 5. Col. i. 5. T i t . ii. 13. H e b . vii. 19- it refers to the sufferings qf Christ, or t o
[ A d d 2 Thess. ii. 16. J o b vi. 8. 2 Mace, the glory which should follow. T h u s in
vii. 1 4 . ] the xviii. P s . which contains a prediction
I I I . Thefoundalion or ground of hope. of h i s death, resurrección, and exaltation,
Col. i. 2 7 . 1 T i m . i. 1. [Acts xxviü. 2 0 . we read a t t h e 47th verse, Jehovah Uves,
1 Thess. ii. 19.] and blessed be my rock, and 'jjttf» •>tT\ba
I V . Trust, confidence, joined with hope, O W i f let my A L U E , mySaviour, be ex-
used with kig in following. 1 P e t . i. 2 1 . alted. I n t h e cxliii. P s . which is upon
V. Confidence, security. occ. A c t s ü . t h e same glorious subject, t h e m a n C h r i s t
26, which is a citation from t h e L X X J e s ú s addresses Jehovah a t t h e 1 Oth verse,
versión of P s . xvi. 9, where ¿V kXwldi a n - Teach me to do thy will (i. e. by oífering
swers to t h e H e b . t~itD2Í? in confidence;
and in this sense of confidence or security * A q u i l a renders "bu, ^ H , PS. x x i i . 1, b y '¡ayíps
kXnlg is used several times by t h e L X X I fioü, \ayipt fin, my strong one, my strong one.
for t h e same H e b . word ntoa, as in J u d . + T h u s read the unpointed editions o f Forster at
O x f o r d , and o f L e u s d e n a t A m s t e r d a m , 1701; b u t
xviii. 7. P s . iv. 8. lxxviii. 5 3 . E z e k . xxviü. other editions, a s W a l t o n ' s P o l y g l o t t , and M o n t a -
2 6 . & al. n u s ' s printed b y P l a n t i n , 1572, together w i t h very
'EAY'MAS, a, ó.—Elymas. T h e ñame many o f D r . Kennicott's Códices, read *ír>K without
of a m a n , signifying a magician or sor- the 1. I f this latter reading be adrnitted, the words
m u s t b e rendered the Áleim of my salvation, which,
cerer, as S t . L u k e himself interprets it. it m u s t b e confessed, is m o s t agreeable to the usual
" H e was called E l y m a s in Persia, where application o f the N - JW which generally denotes 1

he had learned magism." W e t s t e i n . It not a ¡avioiir b u t salvation.

 E MB 253 E MB

myself a sacrifice for man. Comp. P s . xl. with, t h e aífairs of t h e Greeks. M i n t e r t

t h i n k s t h e word alindes to t h e
8. H e b . x. 5 — 1 0 . ) , for thou art >ml>K m y tragical
ALUE. A n d in the beloved one's song buskins, called by Lucian iptáiSec (read
qf praise*, P s . cxlv. 1, he breaketh o u t * ípéarai), in which t h e actors strutted
into this thanksgiving, / will very highly alqft upon t h e stage. I t is also applied
cxalt thee •nib'M my A L U E , the king, to- entering upon a possession. So C h r y -
and I will bless thy ñame for ever and sostom, 'EMBATE'YEIN ' E I 2 rí)v icXnpo-
ever. vopiáv, lo enter upon the inheritance.
'Epavrov, ijcj S. G e n . from ipi qf me, (See more in W e t s t e i n . ) A n d i n t h i s
and avTtí self-—Myself. A compound pro- sense t h e L X X , t h o u g h they appear to
noun which h a t h no nominative. M a t . have mistaken t h e meaning of t h e H e b .
viii. 9. L u k e vii. 7. & al. freq. [_aw ifiavrS use i t , Josh. xix. 5 1 , ¡cal iwopevdr¡crav
is qf my own will, or authority. J o h n v. 30. ' E M B A T E T 2 A I n)v yijv, and they went
vii. 17. viii. 4 2 . x. 18. N u m b . xvi. 2 9 . ] to enter upon the lana. [ I t oceurs also
'EfiSaívoj, from iv in, into, and ¡Salvia Josh. xviii. 8. iEschyl. P e r s . 4 4 9 , where i t
to go, come. has t h e sense olfrequenling, as B p . Blom-
I . To go, or enter into, as into a pool. field remarks, citing a fragment of E u r í -
J o h n v. 4. pides in Dion. H a l i c . t. ii. p . 5 9 . Cratin.
I I . To enter into, or go aboard, a ship. apud Hephsest. p . 57. Soph. CEd. Col.
Mat. viii. 23. & al. freq.— VEpftalvio has 679. Incert. R h e s . 2 2 3 . Compare T h e -
this signification either with or without mist. O r a t . vii. p . 90. ed. H a r d u i n .
the word ship following. See 1 M a c . xv. Aristid. O r . in Minerv. t. i. O p p . p . 19.
36. 2 M a c . xii. 3 . P l u t a r c h . tom. i. O p p . ed. Canter. Schl. on Biel, t h i n k s t h a t
p . 5 4 . ed. Reisk. Philost. Vit. Sopli. ii. t h e verb is used often of a god's holding
31. s. 3 . X e n . A n a b . i. 3 . 17. iv. 3. 20. or inhabiting some place or temple, a n d
In Nalmm iii. 14. i t is used in its proper besides t h e above places, he quotes E u r i p .
sense go into, and does not occur else- Herac. 875. Hesychius says, 'Efipareverai,
where in t h e O . T . ] ro Kari^eiv Kal Kapiriadui yiopíov ?/ óiKÍav
'E^ÉáXAw, from iv in, into, and /3áXX« i) o\ov rbv K\f¡pov—i; fr/ríjerat.] T h e word
lo cast.-—To cast into. occ. L u k e xii. 5. refers to hoslile entry in 1 M a c . x i i . 25.
[ S e e J e r . xxxvii. 20. and comp. G e n . xiii. 20. xiv. 3 1 . xv. 40. occ. Col. ii.
xxxvii. 22. D a n . iii. 6, 11, 15. iElian. 18. Raphelius on this t e x t produces a
V. H . xii. 1. Herodian. iv. 9. 14. X e n . passage from Xenophon in Conviv. [ i v .
Cyr. viii. 1. 3 8 . ] 27-3 vvhere he uses iptareíeiv transitively
¡ U p 'Ejuéáir-ü), a n d - — ó p a i , M i d . from with t h e accusative case for
0
searching,
iv in, and /^cWrw to dip.—To dip in. occ. scrutinizing, or examining into a t h i n g ,
M a t . xxvi. 2 3 . Mark xiv. 20. John xiii. and t h u s also Chrysostom applies t h e
26. [ T e s t . xii. P a t r . p. 637. Arist. N u b . word (see Suicer, T h e s a u r . ) ; and so H e -
150.] sychius explains iptíarevaae b y '(ifTÍicrae
'Ep^areiio), from iv in, and fiartu to seeking. A n d t h i s last Wolfius t h i n k s
tread, which from fiaívw lo go.—To enter, t h e best sense. B u t is t h e r e no difference
or rather, as our translation, To intrude in meaning between épt,arevuv and ip-
into ; for the word seems to imply conceit €areveiv iie ? If there is, I should prefer
and arrogance. So Stockius, ' ' fastuosa t h e first interpretation above given. B u t
incedo, invado, ingero me ; " and M i n t e r t , comp. British Critic, vol iii. p . 2 7 6 .
" i n c e d o , superbé, fastuose incedo." J o - [Schleusner, B r e t s c h . and W a h l , all agree
sephus h a s used t h e word in this view, in adopting Raphelius's explanation. P h a -
A n t . lib. ii. cap. 12. § 1, where, speaking VOi'inus also has ipfiarevo-ai, i^epevvrjcrai tj
of M o u n t Sinai, he says, " t h e shepherds erKoiríjcrai. See also 2 M a c . ii. 3 1 . Krebs.
durst not 'EMBATE'YEIN 'EI2 avrb in- Obss. Flav. p . 340. Philon. de P l a u t . N o e
trude upon i t , because it was regarded as p. 225. Loesner. Obss. e P h i l . p . 3 6 9 . ]
the habitation of t h e D e i t y . " A n d Elsner 'E^i6(€áfí», from. iv in, aud /3i€,áf« to
cites a remarkable passage from Aristides, cause lo go.—To cause to go or enter in,
where he mentions Philip as 'EMBA- to put on board. occ. Acts xxvii. 6. T h i s
TEYÍ1S 'EES ra TSIV 'EXXr/vwi' irpáy fiara, word is used by t h e p u r e s t Greek writers
iniruding into, or impertinenlly meddling for putting on ship-board. See A l b e r t i

* So the H e b r e w title calis it "rnb nbnn a song * S e e L u c i a n . Necyornant. p . 3 1 4 . Q u o m . c o n -

of praise for ihc Moved, scrib. H i s t . p . 0 7 0 . Dt- Saltat. p . 9 2 4 , tom. i.
 E MM 254 E M E

and W e t s t e i n , a n d comp. 'Eptcdvtú. [See upon, or against. occ. Acts xxvi. 1 1 . — [ T h e

Polyb. i. 4 9 . 5. Xenoph. Anab. v. 3 . 1. preposition h has, in composition, some-
Thucyd. i. 5 3 . Lucian. V . H . ii. 26. G a - times t h e forcé of Kara. See Abresch.
taker on Marc. Antonin. x-. § 8. p . 2 9 5 . Amin. ad iEschyl. p . 3 9 2 . 'Epfiávinc oc-
I n P r o v . iv. 1 1 , it is, I cause to n>alk.~\ curs Wisd. xiv. 2 3 . P l u t a r c h . tom. ii. p .
'Ep€Xéwio, from iv in, on, and ¡iXíwoi to 798. t. vi. p . 144. ed. Reisk.]
look. ' E M M A N O Y H A , H e b . — God with us.
I . To view, look upon, i. e. w i t h sted- I t answers both in t h e L X X and in M a t .
fastness and attention. Mark xiv. 67. Luke to t h e H e b . ^KlJni» from tnl> with, U us,
xxii. 6 1 . J o h n i. 3 6 , 4 3 . Acts i. 1 1 . & and bü God, Isa. vii. 14?. T h e ñame i m -
al. [ A d d Isaiah v. 3 0 . xvii. 7- Ecclus. ports God in our nature, a n d for our
xxxiii. 15. X e n . Mem. iii. 11. 10. Cyrop. salces, i. e. for our salvation and happi-
i. 3 . 2. I n L u k e xxii. 6 1 . Schl. t h i n k s ness : and t h u s Isaiah's prophecy, t h a t
t h a t conlempt and indignalion are i m - * THE virgin's son should be called
plied, as by EVÍ/SXEVU in 1 S a m . ii. 2 9 . Emmanuel, was fultílled by Christ's being
xvii. 4 2 . ] called Jesús, i. e. Jehovah the Saviour, a
I I . To behold, or see. occ. M a r k viii. ñame of t h e same import. Comp. 'Ir¡<r5g.
25. Acts xxii. 1 1 . occ. M a t . i. 2 3 .
[ I I I . To consider. M a t . vi. 2 6 . (comp. 'Eppévw, from iv in, and pévio to re-
L u k e xii. 2 4 . ) I s . v. 12. xxii. 8. 1 1 . main.— To remain, persevere in. occ.
Ecclus. ii. 10. 2 M a c . xii. 4 5 . ] A c t s x i v . 2 2 . G a l . iii. 10. H e b . viii- 9 .
'Ep§pipáopai, wpai, from év in, or on [ I t is used in this sense in D e u t . xxvii.
account of] and fipifióopai or flpipciopai to 16. Ecclus. xxviii. 6. a n d ii. 1 1 . Comp.
roar, slonn with anger, from. ¡ipépo) to Xen. de R e p . JEth. ii. 17. Ages. i. 1 1 .
roar, which see under Bpóvrn- See W e t - Epietet. Enchir. c. 2 0 . Corn. N e p . xvii.
stein on M a t . ix. 3 0 , and comp. Ecclus. 214. V i r g . Mn. ii. 160. viii. 6 4 3 . Krebs.
xiii. 3 . Obss. Elav. p . 3 2 1 . M a r k l . a d L y s . p .
I . To groan, or grumble, with indig- 592.]
nation, [ a n d henee, to be indignant.~\ occ. 'Epóg, i), ov, from épS of me, gen. of
M a r k xiv. 5 , where t h e Vulg. excellently, 'Eyu¡ I.—Mine, my own. M a t . xviii. 2 0 .
fremebanl in eam. T h e L a t i n fremo by x x . 15. & al. freq. In Mat. xx. 2 3 ,
t h e way is a derivativo from t h e Greek K y p k e renders "OVK é^iv ipbv ovvaí, it
/ipipii). T h e L X X have once used t h e N . does not beeome m e to give, it is not m y
éfikpípripo. for t h e H e b . O D J furious in- office to give, and produces similar ex-
dignation. L a m . ii. 6, [which word occurs pressions from P l u t a r c h ; observing t h a t
also in t h e same sense in Theodotion's in such phrases epyov work, business,
versión of Ezek. xxi. 3 1 . where Symma- office is understood, which is expressed by
chus has kpfipípnaig, and t h e L X X nvp Xenophon and Euripides. [ T h e word
(fiery indignation). See t h e Schol. on denotes sometimes, of my inventing, or of
Aristoph. E q u i t . 8 1 5 . 1.] my doing. T h u s J o h n vii. 16. My doc-
II. To charge, or forbid strictly and trine is not of my own invention ; a n d see
earneslly. occ. M a t . i x . 3 0 . (where see P h i l i p p . i i i . 9 . ]
Campbell.) Mark i. 4 3 , (where see E l s - E§5¡¡í° 'EpTraty povr), ijg, i¡, from ipiré-
ner. [ I t is r a t h e r , to order under a rraiypaL 1 st pers. perf. of t h e V . iprraí^o).
threat, as Hesychius says, e¡i¡ipip¿)¡xevog, —A mocking, or scoffing. T h i s N . occurs
pera ¿i-eiXrjg évreXXópevog, and thence, to not in t h e common editions of t h e N . T .
threaien, rebulce, chi.de. Suidas explains but in 2 P e t . iii. 3 , t e n M S S . , three of
it, to enjoin, or chide with severity, to which ancient, have év épTraiypóvn ep-
speak with anger; a n d H e s y c h i u s , to •n-aÍKraL, and this reading is supported by
chide, command with power. See Ps. cvi. both t h e Syriac and several other oíd ver-
9. a n d compare i t with N a h u m i. 4 . ] sions, a n d is received i n t o t h e t e x t b y
I I I . To groan deeply, from anguish of Griesbach, whom see, a n d W e t s t e i n . T h e
heart. occ. J o h n xi. 3 3 , 3 8 . Comp. P s . expression is an emphatical one, a n d well
xxxviii. 8 or 9. describes t h e deistical scorners of our own
'EME'£2, ¿5.—To vomit, spew. occ. Rev. days.
iii. 16. [ I s . x i x . 14. X e n . An. iv. 8. 2 0 . 'Eprraiypog, 5, ó, from épireTxa~iypai Ist
-ffilian. V . H . ix. 2 6 . ]
'Eppaívopat, from ev on account * T h u s I s a . vii. ] 4, nDbyn with the n emphatic,
of, and paívopeu to be mad.—To be mad and L X X and M a t . i. 2 3 , ' H rrapího;.
 E M n 253 E M n

pers. perf. pass. of t h e V . t h e expressions, Nnllis est occupationibus

épiráifa.—A
mocking, or r a t h e r a being implicatus, a n d cap. 2 0 , implicatus mo-
mocked. occ.
H e b . xi. 3 6 . [ E z . xxii. 24. 2 Mac. vii. 7 ; leslis negotiis S¡ operosis. See also W e t -
b u t épwdiypa is more usual. See Is. lxvi. stein on 2 T i m . [ P r o v . xxviii. 18. Polyb.
4. P s . xxxviii. 7 . ] i. 1 7 . ]
'Eprcitfít), from iv in, upon, and T?CÚ'£O) 'EpTeXíiQüi, from iv in, and TcXíidio to
ta play, sport. Jill.—To Jill, satisfy, whether naturally
I. Toplay upon, make sport with, mock.. or spiriíually. occ. Luke i. 5 3 . vi. 2 5 .
J o h n vi. 12. E o m . xv. 2 4 , where see
M a t . x x . 19. xxvii. 3 1 , 4 1 . L u k e xiv. 2 9 .
[ I t is construed with t h e dative or with a Kypke. [ I t is construed with an accu-
preposition. A d d J u d g . xvi. 2 5 . Exod. sative of t h e person, and a genitive of t h e
x. 2. P s . civ. 2 6 . I t signifies, to punisht h i n g . (See G r a m m . § xxi. 3 5 . B . (c).
eruelly and insultingly, in 2 Mac. vii. One or other of which is often omitted.
See Exod. xxviii. 5. J o b xxii. 18.
I I . To Mude, deceive. occ. M a t . ii. 16. Ecclus. xvi. 2 9 . vi. 2 5 . P s . cvii. 9. J e r .
'EpreaL-Kriic, 5, ó, from iptraí^LO.—A x x x i . 2 5 . Iu Rom. xv. 24. i t is, When I
mocker, a scoffer. occ. 2 P e t . iii. 3 . J u d e have enjoyed saiisfaciion from your so-
ver. 18. [Is. iii. 4.] ciety.}
'EpTrepLTrariü), LO, from iv in, among, and [ ¡ g ^ 'EpreXoieij, fjc, ?/, from ipreÉTrXoKa
TrepirarÉLoto malte about, which see.— To perf. mid. oí ipTeXíieto.—A plaiting, or
walk about among.—\_To Uve among. braiding of t h e hair. occ. 1 P e t . iii. 3 .
2 Cor. vi. 16. So used of G o d , who is Lucian, Amores, tom. i. p . 1057, minutelv
said to Uve among pious men, from t h e describes TI I I A O K t r T Í T N T P I X Q ' N ,
delight he takes in them. See Levit. xxvi. The braiding of ihe hair, as particularly
12. D e u t . xxiii. 14. Achill. T a t . i. 6. employing t h e attention and paius of t h e
Philon. i. de E b r i e t . t . i. p. 3 5 8 . line 3 8 . women *. Comp. also Pleb. and E n g .
ed.Mang.] Lexicón in TMVp I I I .
''EpTcnc\¿Lii), LO. from iv in, and TrneXáio, 'EpTrvsio, LO, from iv in, and TTVSLO io
or wipTeXciLo, to Jill, whic'h is formed from breathe.— To hispiré, draw in the breath.
t h e obsol. verb T T X Ó W to Jiill, by prefixing So Josephus, D e Bel. lib. v. cap. 1 1 . § 2,
t h e reduplícate syllable reí.—To Jill. occ. uses t h e verb for breathing; iioc ¿pre-
Acts xiv. 17. [ I t means here, lo give veioen, whilsi t h e y breathe, occ. Acts i x .
abundantly, see P s . cxlv. 16 ; and to ful- I , 'Eprcvéiov ¿LTTEiXfjc KUI (¡>¿vtí. T h e phrase
jil, or satisfy. P s . ciii. 5. io satiate. Xen. is elliptical, a u d to complete it,airo, II, or
Sympos. iv. 3 7 . See Ecclus. xvi. 2 9 . xxiv. 'évEKa,from, or by reason of, may be s u p -
i9.: plied. I t beautifully describes Saúl as
'EpTríirrio, from iv in, into, a n d T T Í V - W io being so full of t h r e a t e n i n g s , and so d e -
sirous of slaughter against the disciples
f a l L

of t h e L o r d , t h a t t h e violence of his pas-

[I. To fail into, as a d i t c h . M a t . x i i . sions even affected his breath, and made
1 1 . L u k e xiv. 5. P s . lvií. 6. I s . xxiv. 18. him draw i t quicker a n d stronger, as
In other Greek usually with a Dative, as persons in vehement anger and eager d e -
jElian. V. H . xii. 2 3 . ] sire usually d o . Comp, P s . xxvii. 12.
I I . [To fail among, i. e. to fail into H o m e r has an expression somewhat r e -
one's pomer, to meel with harm, and per- sembling this in t h e A c t s (though t h e
haps generally, as Schl. says, accidentally ; consiruction is diíferent), I I . iii. line 8. &
and so t h e Schol. on Epictet. Enchir. c. al., where he says t h e Greeks were pivEa
9. See L u k e x. 36. fell among thieves, as revEÍovTEc breathing rage, as Pope renders
in A r r i a n Epictet. iii. 12, where is t h e it, or r a t h e r breathing courage; so M i l -
same phrase. See 1 T i m . iii. 6, 7. vi. 9. ton, Par. Lost. b . i . line 554, " — d e l i b é r a t e
comp. Prov. xii. 13. H e b . x. 3 1 . 2 Sam. valour breath'd." A n d Cicero, Catilin.
xxiv. 14. Prov. xxvii. 14. 1 Mac. vi. 8. I I . 1. uses t h e expression " scelus a n -
iElian. V . H . v. 2 . ]
'~Ep7r\ÍK<¡>, from ¿V in, and KXEKLO io con- * ( O n the dressing o f hair a m o n g the ancients,
nect, tie.—To entangle, implícate, impli- see P o t t . E p i s t . Cathol. N . T . t. ii. p . 9 5 . H a d r .
care, occ. 2 P e t . ii. 20. 2 T i m . ii. 4 . So J u n i u s d e C o m m . c. 8. 'EuirASmav seems a c h a i n ,
Epictetus in Arrian, lib. iii. cap. 2 2 , says or ornament u s e d i n t h e hair. E x o d . x x x v . 2 1 .
x x x i x . 1 3 , 1 6 . I s . iii. 1 8 , 2 0 . I n the 1 8 t h verse,
the Cynic should not be ' E M I I E I I A E r -
it i s used i n t h e plural, and Cyprian d e h a b i t a
ME'NON (xxécrecnv entangled in relations; V i r g . p, 9 8 . ( e d . A m s t . ) translates it b y crines.]
Cicero D e N a t . Deor. lib. i. cap. 19, uses
 E ÍM n E M
íielautem, brealhing wickedness ;" and in
Rhetor. ad H e r e n n i n m , usually priuted
in the W o r k s of Cicero, lib. iv. cap. 5 5 ,
we have " anhelans ex intimo pectore cru-
delitatem, from the bottom of his breast
breathing cruel ti/." B u t see more -in
Elsner, Wetstein, and Kypke on the text.
[ A d d Sil. I t a l . xvii. 504. Theoc. xxii. 82.
Inceat. R h e s . 7 8 6 . Chrysost, H o m . ii. de
L a ú d . P a u l . t. vi. O p p . p . 484. B . ed.
Bened. has the same construction as in
o u r passage. Matthiae § 3 6 2 , says t h a t
t h a t of which any t h i n g smells, or which
it breathes, is p u t in the genitive. T h u s
Anacr. ix. 3 . and Aristoph. Eq. 437- irveív
avKoipavríag. O u r verb is used actively,
io inspire, breathe in. Wisd. xv. 1 1 . X e n .
H e l l . vii. 4. 32.]
'EfnropEvopai,ñ ora '¿piropos.— [Properly,
w set on fire, burn, which from t h e oíd V.
to go, make ajourney. See Polyb. xxviü.
10. 5. Soph. C£d. Syr. 464. Gen. xxxiv.
2 4 . Henee it is, to journey for purposes
of trade : and t h e n , ]
I. Intransitively, To trade, traffic,
onerchandise. occ. J a m . iv. 13. [ G e n .
xxxiv. 10. 2 1 . E z . xxvii. 13. X e n . de Rep.
L a c . vii. 1.]
I I . Transitively with an accusative, To
malee a trade, or gain of occ. 2 P e t . ii. 3 .
See K y p k e . [ A t h e n . xiii. 5 6 9 , F . See Pott.
L a t h . E p . ii. p . 2 1 3 . ]
'Epiropía, ag, ?/, from '¿piropos.—Mer-
chandise, traffic, properly, says Scapula,
such as men pass the sea to carry on. occ.
M a t . xxii. 5. [ I s . xiv. 14. Ez. xxvii. 15.
Polyb. iii. 2 3 . 4. Xen. H i e r . ix. 9.]
'Epirópwv, a, ró, from '¿piropos-—A mar-
leel-place, a marl. occ. J o h n ii. 16. [The
sense given by P a r k h u r s t is the original
one. See D e u t . xxxiii. 19- Is. xxiii. 17.
Polyb. xvii. 2. 4- Xen. de Vect. ü i . 3 ; but
in this place of St. John, i t seems to
be used for épiropía, traffic. I t signifies
objects of traffic in Xen. de V e c t . i.
7-]
"Epiropos, H, b, from ev in, and x ó p o c a
passing over or may, which from ireípia lo
pass over, through.
I . Anciently and properly, A passen-
ger, in a ship. T h u s Telemachus in
H o m e r Odyss. ii. line 319 *, says he will
go '¿piropos as a passenger, because, as he
immediately adds, he has no ship of his
own; and Laertes, Ulysses' father, not
knowing who he was, asks him, Odyss.
xxiv. line 299.
* [See E u s t a t h i u s on this p l a c e . P h a v o r i n u s and
the Schol. on A r i s t o p h . P l u t . 5 2 1 . ]
n
í¡ "EMnOPOS ¡¡Ar¡Au$ct;
éV' aWoTptY,;;
NJJO,
— O r art t h o u c o m e a passenger
O n board another's ship ?
I I . A traveller. So used by Sophocles
in CEdip. Colon. [ 2 5 . 3 0 3 . ]
I I I . One who travels, especially by sea,
on account qf traffic, a merchant, a ira-
der. T h u s commonly used in t h e Greek
writers. occ. M a t . xiii. 4 5 . Rev. xviii. 3 ,
1 1 , 15, 2 3 . — I n t h e L X X it generally
answers to t h e H e b . i n o a merchant, a
N . derived in like m a n n e r from t h e V .
'ino to go about. [ S e e Ezek. xxxviii. 13.
Gen. xxiii. 16. Herodian iv. 10. 9. Xen.
M e m . iii. 7. 6.]
' 'Epirpí]6h>, from ev in, and irpíjBto to
7rpáw t h e same.— To set on fire, burn.
occ. M a t . xxii. 7. [ S e e Josh. viii. 8.
J u d g . ix. 4 9 . xv. 6. xviii. 27- Nehem.
i. 3.]
- "EpwpoaBev, A n adv. governing a g e -
nitive, from ev in, and irpócrdev before,
which from irpb the same, and the syllabic
adjection Ser denoting at a place, a being
inserted for t h e sound's sake.
I . Of place, (1) Before, as opposed to
behind. M a t . vi. 2 . M a r k i. 2. L u k e xix.
4. John iii. 2 8 . Rev. iv. 6. T a '¿pirpoo-Bev
(pspr¡ namely) The parts or places mhich
are before. P h i l . iii. 13.—(2) Before, in
the presence of. M a t . v. 16, 24. [ x x i i i .
13.] xxvii. 11. & al. freq. (3) {For-
ward, L u k e xix. 4. Xen. Cyr. iv. 2. 12.]
(4) Of dignity or superiority, Before,
in preference to. occ. J o h n i. 15, 2 7 , 3 0 .
See Campbell on ver. 15, and comp. John
iii. 3 1 . T h e word is used in a sense si-
milar to this last by t h e L X X . answering
to t h e H e b . >5£¡V, G e n . x l v ü i . ' 2 0 . [The
passage of St. J o h n i. 16. is one of con-
siderable difficulty. I t is doubtful, whe-
t h e r '¿pirpocrdev should be taken of time, or
of dignity. L a m p e , who is for the latter
signification, t h u s explains t h e passage,
m a k i n g much t u r n on t h e difference be-
tween yívopai and iipl. He who comes
after me is (as Messiah) made more ho-
nour able than I am, because he was (by
his own eternal nature as God) more ho-
nourable. Chrysostom, Theodoret, A n -
gustí ne, Bede, Grotius, Campbell, and
all t h e versions in modern languages,
except L u t h e r ' s , t h e Rhemish, and an
anonymous English one (in 1 7 2 9 ) ,
agree in this as far as '¿pirpaaBev goes—
W h i t b y , Schleusner, W e t s t e i n , T i t t u i a n ,
 E M <I> 257 E M <I>

Kuinüel, Bretschneider, and others, after iv in, unto, and ipaívw to show.— [Mani-
t!ie Vulgate ; and all tlie other Latin trans- fest, conspicuous. In A c t s x. 40, he
lations, except Bede, transíate H e was ! l
showed himself made himself manifesl.
before me (in t i m e ) , " and they generally Comp. 1 T i m . iii. 16. X e n . M e m . iii. 8.
consider t h a t t h e second clause expresses 10. C y r . viii. 7- 2 3 . Polyb. xxii. 1 5 . 7-
t h e same t h i n g , for he was before me, I n Rom. x. 20, it is metaphorically used,
(Kuinoel saying t h a t ¿Vi means certainly); / became manifest, that is, / became
which is¡ as Campbell says, proving a known. isa. Jxv. I. Exod. xii. 14. iElian.
t h i n g by itself. T i t t m a n too declares po- V. H . i. 2 1 . I t is clear or conspicuous,
sitively (as does D r . Smith, Script. Test, in Symm. Ps. xii. 6.]
ii. p . 3 7 . ) t h a t in the L X X tpTrpocrQtv 'Epipaví^io, from iv in, tinto, and <¡¡aíva¡
never signifies dignity, although Lampe, to show.
Campbell, a n d P a r k h u r s t j u s t l y cite G e n . I . To show plainly, to manifesl. occ.
xlviii. 20 *. I n order to avoid what John xiv. 2 1 , 2 2 . A n d in t h e passive,
Campbell complains of, K y p k e suggests To be manifested, appear plainly. occ.
the notion of a p a r e n t h e s i s ; This is he M a t . xxvii. 5 3 . H e b . ix. 2-1. [ F o r a full
of whom I said (He that comes after me
discussion of this passage of t h e Hebrews,
was really before me) for he was before
see S. Deyling. Obss. Sacr. iv. p . 5 4 1 —
me ; so t h a t t h e last clause gives t h e rea-
580. T h e meaning is, t h a t " as t h e H i g h
son why J o h n used such expressions; b u t
Priest showed himself before God in t h e
this does not seem to do much good,
earthly sanctuary with t h e blood of e x -
and on t h e whole I prefer t h e former
piation, so our Lord has entered into t h e
sense.]
heavenly sanctuary, and there shows h i m -
'E/xirrúio, from iv in, upon, and TTTVU) to self before t h e face of God as our H i g h
spit.— To spit upon. M a t . xxvi. 67- xxvii. Priest and intercessor, and t h e propitia-
30. & al. Observe, t h a t spitting, even in tion of our sins by his own blood." Schl.
a person's presence, was in t h e east al- refers John xiv. 2 1 . to t h e sense to declare
ways esteemed a g r e a t affront -f. H o w openly, or by argument, and verse 2 2 . t o
much more then, spitting in his face ? t h e sense to show, as if Christ spoke t h e
A n d as our Blessed Lord was treated word in t h e metaphorical sense, and t h e
with such barbarous indignity by the Ro- Apostles in t h e proper one.]
mán soldiers, so t h e late excellent Joñas I I . To declare, signify. occ. Acts xxiii.
Hauway, in his Travels, vol. i. p . 298, in- 15, 22. H e b . xi. 14. °The L X X have used
forma u s t h a t t h e Persian soldiers were it in this sense for t h e H e b . ION lo tell,
ordered to spit in the face of a rebel declare, E s t h . ii. 2 2 . [ D i o d . Sic. xiv. 1 1 .
prisoner a t A s t r a b a d — " an indignity of iElian. V. H . iv. 9. Polyb. L e g . 105. and
g r e a t antiquity in t h e e a s t ; a n d t h i s , Joseph. A n t . x. 9. 3.]
adds t h e t r u l y pious writer, and t h e c u t - III. To inform, give informaiion, in a
t i n g offbeards, which I shall have occasion judicial sense. occ. Acts xxiv. 1. x x v . 2,
to mention, brought to m y mind t h e suf- 15. T h e expression in these passages is
ferings recorded in t h e prophetical history elliptical for ivtipávicrav éavréc they show-
of our Saviour," namely in Isa. 1. 6.— ed themselves, or appeared (comp. J o h n
[ T h i s verb is construed with iig in M a t . xiv. 2 1 , 22.), or according to Tbeophylact
x x v i . 67. xxvii. 3 0 , with t h e dative, M a r k and A m m o n i u s , for ivtipíivirrav Sicatrica.-
x. 3 4 . xiv. 6 5 . xv. 19. I t is p u t abso- XÍKr¡v yápT-nv they presented a memorial,
lutely in L u k e xviii. 3 2 . See N u m b xii. Comp. A c t s xxiii. 15.
14. D e u t . xxv. 9 . I t is constructed in "EpajoSoc, a, ó, i¡, from iv in, a n d
good A t t i c with t h e g e n . and Thom. M. <pó€oc fear.—In fear, afraid, terrifed.
p. 105, says, t h a t no good writer uses it Luke xxiv. 5 , 3 7 . & al. [1 Mace. xiii. 2 .
with t h e dative ,• b u t iElian does, V . H . i. Theoph. Char. 2 5 . ) . ]
15. See H e u p e l on M a r k xiv. 6 5 . p . m. 'Epfvcráü), G>, from kv in, upon, and <j¡v-
478. Wetstein i. p . 526. Lobeck on P h r y n . o-áti) lo breathe, blow, blow up, " flatu
distendo, distend by bloming'' Scapula.
'E/i^>ay»)c, íoc, Se, ¿, i), s a l T O — l e , from [ G e n . ii. 7. E z . x x i . 3 1 . J o b iv. 2 1 . ] —
To breathe or blow upon. occ. J o h n x x .
* [ P e r h a p s another instance cannot b e f o u n d ; 22.
a n d it i s singular that Schleusner, in h i s rifaccia-
m e n t o o f B i e l , h a s omicted this. T h e other sense
"Epajvroe, a, ¿, v, from iv in, a n d
is ftequent, J u d g . i. 2 3 . i i i . 2 . M i c v i i . 2 0 . & c ] 0óroe planted, so ft for producing seed
t See H e b . and E n g . L e x i c ó n in pl I . or fruit, from tpíia to produce, which see,
 258

—Implantad, ingrafted. occ. J a m e s i. 2 1 .

iv. 12. R o m . xi. 17. Rev. i. 9. So J u d g .
I t is applied to t h e word of t h e Gospel, vi. 3 5 . E z r a vii. 10. Ecclus. xiii. 12. L u k e
which ministci'S are said (jwriveiv lo plant, xxiii. 42. belongs to this class also, though
1 Cor. iii. C, 7, 8, and which bringeth some transíate it cum regno. These are
forth fmil, Col. i. 6. Comp. M a r k iv. 7, instances of actual motion. I subjoin
8. Barimbas in like manner calis this some of motion in an improper sense.
"EMí>YTON SiopÉav ríjc A I A A X I F S avrS, L u k e i. 1 7 . Rom. i. 24. to turn the hearts
the implanted gift of his doctrine. Epist. qf the disobedient to the wisáom, &c.
§ 9. edit. Russeí, ad. fin. See W h i t b y on 1 Cor. vii. 15. 1 Thess. iv. 7. , See H o s .
James i. 2 1 . F u r t h e r , as in the Greek xii. 6. Henee it is,]
w r i t e r s * , ípfvrov frequently denotes what [7. Tomarás. M a r k ix. 5 0 . J o h n xiii.
is bínale or natural, and sometimes what 3 5 . Rom. xv. 5. 2 Cor. viii. 7. 1 J o h n iv.
is thoroughly implanted or infixed in the 9. I t is used also for against once, L u k e
mind, (seo Elsner, Raphelius, and W o l - xxi. 2 3 ; and in the Oíd T e s t . J o n . i. 2.
fius); so in S t . J a m e s it implies, t h a t t h e J u d i t h vi. 2. Ecclus. iv. 3 0 . Schleusner
heavenly doctrine not only enters into the adds M a t . xvii. 12, where perhaps it is
ears, but is so implanted in t h e soul as they did in his case, like Talis in kosle
to become, as it were, a second nature.
\fuit Priamo.]
Comp. J a m e s i. 18. 1 P e t . 2 3 . 2 P e t . i. 4, [II. OftimeP]
and «I>úffís I I I . [Polyb. ii. 4 5 . 1. Herod. [ 1 . In. A s t h e time in which any t h i n g
ix. 94.] is done. M a t . ii. 1. In the days qf, &c.
['Ei', a Preposition denoting cióse con- iii. 1. & al. freq. M a r k x. 37. in the time
nexion, and used in various ways.] qf thy glory. L u k e xii. 1. in which things,
[ I . Of placer] i. e. in t h e transaction of them, in the
[ 1 . In. M a t . i. 18. iv. 16. i x . 3 5 . iv meantime.]
rale avvayoiyaÍQ. xii. 40. M a r k xii. 3 8 . [ 2 . During. M a t . xii. 2. L u k e xxii. 2 8 .
J o h n x i . 20. A c t s vii. 44. & al. freq.] J o h n v. 7. iv J (se. ypóva>.~) vii. 11. xxiii.
[2. On. Rev. iii. 2 1 . Kadícrai iv ro> 2 3 . A c t s viii. 3 3 . xvii. 3 1 . and frequently
Opóvú). John iv. 20, 2 1 . H e b . viii. 5.] with the article and infin. T h u s iv r¿>
[ 3 . Near or at. L u k e xiii. 4. (See o-Tréipeiv. M a t . xiii. 4. denotes t h e som-
Joseph. D e Bell. J. v. 4. 1.) J o h n x. 2 3 . t ing. L u k e i. 8. ii. 6. v. 1. ix. 3 6 . A c t s
(See f i l i a n . V. H . xii. 5 7 . and Perizon. viii. 6. I n Acts iii. 26, it may be this,
there and on ii. 2 5 . Reitz. on Lucian. i. or that he may turn you, for lie rb. al.
p . 329. ii. p . 36.) Rom. viii. 3 4 . (al the freq. Comp. 1 Sam, i. 7. 2 Chron. xii.
righl hand). So 1 1 Sam. xv. 4. H e b . i. 11, & c ]
3.'viii. 1. x, 12.] [ 3 . Wilhin. M a t . xxvii. 4. M a r k xv.
[ I . Inpresence of. L u k e xvi. 15. 1 T i m . 29. J o h n ii. 19, 20. Rev. xviii. 10. 3 Esdr.
iv. 15. X e n . de Rcp. A t h . i. 18. T h u c y d . ix. 4. D a n . xi. 20. Isa. xvi. 14. Diod. Sic.
iii. 5 3 . iElian. V. H . xiv. 26. Diod. Sic. xx. 8 5 . iElian. V. H . i. 6.]
xi. 12. Polyb. xvii. 6. I. X e n . Cyr. i. 5. 6. [ 4 . At. 1 J o h n i. 2 8 . at his coming.
See H e r m á n on Viger, p . 858. So \2 in 1 Cor. xv. 52. Rev. xv. 1.]
Gen. xxiii. 28. Schl. adds M a t . ix. 3 5 . [ I I I . Of number.]
to these places, b u t I t h i n k w i t h o u t rea- [ 1 . Among. M a t . ii. 6. xi. 11. J o h n i.
son.] 14. Rom. i. 6. xi. 17. J a m e s iv. 1. al. freq.]
[ 5 . With. A c t s ii. 29, mith us. vii. 44, [ I V . To express ageney, instrument-
wilh our falhers. On Acts xii. 11, which ality, or ministry.]
belongs to this class (apud se) see Vívo- [ í . Through, by. M a t . ix. 3 4 . xvii. 2 1 .
pai X I . Acts xxv. 6. So 5, J u d g . xvi. 4. M a r k xii. 3 6 . xiv. 1. L u k e iv. 1. (comp.
E z . x. 15.] M a t . iv. 1.) J o h n xvii. 10. A c t s iv. 9. xi.
[ 6 . To, into, of molion or direction to 14. xvii. 2 1 , 2 8 , 3 1 . Rom. v. 9. xi. 2. *
a place, &c. M a t . x. 16. xiv. 3 . M a r k i. 1 Cor. vi. 2. xiv. 6, 2 1 . Gal. iii. 12. E p h .
16. v. 3 0 . L u k e vii. 17. J o h n v. 4. Acts iv. 14. H e b . i. 2, xiii. 9. Perhaps we may
add M a t . xiii. 3 . xxii. 1. M a r k iv. 2. In
* [ X e n . M e m . üi. 7. 5. A l c i p h . i. E p . 3 1 , and
I think W i s d . x i i . 10, t h o u g h Schleusner m a k e s it * [Bretschneider says these are the words o f E l i -
plantea or ingrafted.] jah. S e e 1 K i n g s x i x . 10. M i c h a e l i s , after J a -
•f [ S o l o m o n ' s P o r c h , however, m a y he called in b l o n s k i , says that this i s an instance o f the c o m m o n
the temple, the temple often m e a n i n g the whole e n - w a y of citing in the H e b r e w writers. In Elias, i. e.
closure of the sacred m c u n t , S e e L a m p e on J o h n in the chapters on división where h e i s mentioned.
ii. 1-1. p. 5 7 0 . ] See M i c h a e l i s i. 1 3 3 , 1 3 4 . 2 4 3 , 2 4 4 , 4 9 2 . See 'En) 1.1. ]
 259 E N A

Epli. vi. 10. Be strenglhened through [ 2 . Of qualilíes, where it implies fur-

(hope in) Christ.] nished mitli. Luke i. \7. full of the spirit
[ 2 . Of t h e i n s t r u m e n t with which a and pomer of Elias. I Cor. ii. 4 , 5. my
t h i n g is done, mith. M a t . v. 13. L u k e iv. speech mas not full of human misdom]
34. M a t . vii. 2. J o h n i. 26, 3 3 . Rom. x. 9. [ 3 . Of condition generally, and modc
xvi. 1C. J a m e s iii. 9. 1 J o h n iii. !S. Rev. of acling. In. M a t . iv. 16. xvi. 2 7 . xxv.
ii. 10. vi. 8. xiv. 15. xvii. 2. Comp. xiv. 3 1 . M a r k v. 2. a n d 2 5 . L u k e xxii. 2 8 .
18. J u d i t h xvi. 12. Ecclus. ix. 16, & c — J o h n ix. 3 4 . v. 5 . Acts viii. 3 3 . 1 T i m . iii.
So to love mith the mhole heart. M a t . xxii. 13. in (preaching) the faith. Seo H e -
2 7 . to morskip mith a sincere spirit, John rodian i. 3 . 3 . X e n . Mem. iii. 5. 4 . H e n e e
iv. 2 3 , 2 4 . ; though see Mede Disc. x i i . ] it comes to be p u t periphrastically with a
[ 3 . On account of. M a t . vi. 7 . L u k e i. noun for t h e adjective, either ( 1 ) , w i t h
2 1 . iv. 42. H e b . vii. 29, 4 1 . 1 Cor. xv. 19. t h e article, as ¿Kick-no-íaic, ralg iv Xpi?¿J
On account of this life. 2 Cor. xiii. 4 . Christian churches. 2 T i m . i. 1 3 . T i t . iii.
E p h . iii. 13. On account of my afficlions, 5. Herodian ii. 4 . 8. ii. 5. 4 . Mathiae §
iv. X.for the Lord's salce, Col. ii. 16. 'Ev 577 ; or ( 2 ) , without t h e article. L u k e
T¿T<¡> signifies on that account. L u k e x. 2 0 . iv. 3 3 , iv Upaía pomerful, meighty. 1 Cor.
J o h n xvi. 3 0 . A c t s xxiv. 16. 'Ev ¿ be- ii. 7. mysterious or mystic misdom. 2 Cor.
cause. Rom. ii. 1. viii. 3 . al. So L u k e i- xii. 2. a Christian. E p h . ii. 2 1 , 2 2 . iii. 2 1 .
2 1 , because he staid.] 1 T i m . ii. 7. a true leacher. 2 P e t . ii. 13.
[ V . I t refers to sociely or partnership Ps. xxix. 4. Soph. CEd. T . 1009. T h e
mith, together mith. M a r k v. 2. L u k e xiv. same is próbably t h e origin of t h e use of
2 1 . (Comp. N u m b . x x . 2 0 . ) Acts vii. 14. iv with a noun for an adverb. M a t . xxii.
And so Rom. xv. 2 9 . 1 Cor. iv. 2 1 . Phil. 16. ev aA-nQéiq sincerely. J o h n vii. 10.
i. 9. H e b . ix. 2 5 . ( P s . Ixvi. 13.) J u d . 14. Acts xvii. 3 1 . xxvi. 7- Col. iv. 5. H e b . i x .
1 J o h n v. 6. a n d perhaps 2 Thess. ii. 9. 19. J a m e s i. 2 1 . Rev. xviii. 1. J u d i t h i. 1 1 .
I n Acts viii. 2 1 , it is a share in, pariici- Ecclus. xviii. 9.]
pation of] [ X . I t is used in adjuration a n d swear-
[ V I . I t refers to the object in which ing, By. M a t . v. 3 4 , 3 5 . xxiii. 1 6 — 2 2 .
one is, or is employed, &c.—In. J o h n v. Rom. ix. 1. E p h . iv. 17. 1 Thess. iv. 1.
3 5 . Rejoice in t h e light. M a t . xxiii. 3 0 . 1 Sam. x x . 4 2 . xxiv. 2 2 . 2 Sam. x i x .
Rev. i. 9. A c t s viii. 2 1 . Rom. i. 9. I Thes.
v. 12. in teaching you. 1 T i m . iv. 15. 1 [ X I . I t is pleonastic, being used with i t s
J o h n iv. 18. 1 Cor. ix. 18. xi. 2 2 . G a l . case for the simple dative. M a t . x . 3 2 . M a r k
vi. 6 . ] i. 15. L u k e xii. 8. A c t s iv. 12. (Ecclus.
[ V I L I t refers to t h e subject.] xlvii. 10.) xvi. 5. 1 Cor. ii. 6. ix. 15. x v .
[ I . In. John x i x . 4 , 6. Fault in him.] 58. 2 Cor. iv. 3 . viii. 7. Col. ii. 7. 1 Thess.
[ 2 . By example qf or from this ín- iii. 12. 1 T i m . iv. 1 5 . (or perhaps in all
stame. 1 Cor. iv. 6. by our example. P h i l . duties.')—In Rom. xi. 17, i t expresses the
i. 3 0 . So ev TtíTtó from this. J o h n xiii. price, as in L a m . v. 4. Eccles. i. 3 . ii. 2 2 .
3 5 . 1 J o h n ii. 3 , 5. i ü . 10, 16.] Ecclus. vii. 18. In Acts vii. 14, i t is up
[ V I H . I t expresses suitableness and to or in number.']
reíation] 'Evaytca\i'(o¡.iai, Depon, from ev in or
[ 1 . According to, according to the mili into, and aym\r¡ the arm, which see.—
or lam qf. L u k e i. 8. J o h n iii. 2 1 . Rom. i. To take into or embrace in the arms. occ.
24. E p h . iv. 1 7 . Col. ii. 6. 1 Thess. iv. 15. M a r k ix. 3 6 . x. 16. See W e t s t e i n a n d
Heb. iv. 11. x. 10. 1 J o h n ii. 8. I n E p h . Kypke. [ D i o d . Sic. iii. 5 8 . Heliod, vii.
iv. 15, perhaps agreeably to your mutual p. 3 1 2 . See also Poli. Onom. ii. 1 3 9 . ]
love,- a n d so Phil. i. 8.] 'EvíCkiog, t<, ó, from sv cí\i in the sea.
[ 2 . With respect to. L u k e xvi. 15. Acts —Being or living in the sea, as fish, &c.
xv. 7. Rom. i. 9. ii. 17. J o h n vii. 37- (and occ. J a m e s iii. 7. T h e G r e e k writers use
1 Cor. xi. 2 2 . ) mith respect lo this. 1 Cor. t h e word in t h e same sense. See W e t -
iii. 18, 'ev aiüvi T¿TÜ). ix. 15. xiv. 1 ].] stein. [ H o m . O d , V . 6 7 . Aristoph. T h e s m .
[ I X . I t expresses t h e habit, state, &c. 333.]
external or internal.] "Evavn, an A d v . joined with a genitive,
[ 1 . In, of dress, &c. M a t . vi. 2 9 . vii. from kv in, and-£j'rí against.—Before, in
15. M a r k xii, 3 8 . L u k e vii. 5 2 . al. So the presence of. occ. Luke i. 8. I n t h i s
perhaps 1 J o h n iv. 2. clothed in or mith sense t h e word is very frequently used in
flesh. 2 J o h n 7.] t h e L X X , answerins: to t h e H e b . «jEiV 6e-
S 2
 ENA 260 E NA

fore the face, in the eyes, *Vi>b to the one, and béica ten.—A noun of number,
eyes, &e. [Exod. vi. 12. J o b x v i . 21.] Eleven, M a t . xxviii. 16. & a l . — T h e oíd
'Evavríog, a, ov, from ev in, and avri G e r m á n eínlíf, and Saxon senblepen, e u -
against. bleopen, &c. whence our English Eleven,
I. VOpposite, a fronte. M a r k xv. 3 9 . manifest.ly insinúate, says J u n i u s , t h a t
st, Ivavriag, se. x<¿P £ stood opposite
a
to one is left, namely above ten, which is
Christ. ( N u m b . ii. 2. 1 Sam. xiii. 5. T h u - considered as a new term in n u m b e r i n g :
eydid. iv. 3 3 . ) H e n e e , applied to mind, henee t h e reason of t h e English ñame is
it means contrary. M a t . xiv. 2 4 . M a r k vi. evident. So tmelve is two, or twa, left,
4S. A c t s xxvii. 4 ; and in this sense of above ten namely. Comp. u n d e r AwcWa,
opposition or hostility, it is often applied and see more in J u n i u s ' s E t y m o l . Angli-
to other things. 1 Thess. ii. 15. T i t . ii. 8. can. in ELEVEN.
They of the contrary part, adversarles, 'Evbétcarog, »?, ov, from ZvcSem.—Ele-
where either or yvúipr¡g m a y be venth. occ. M a t . x x . 6, 9. Rev. x x i . 2 0 .
understood. Tvwpnc is often left o u t in 'EvZíyppai, from ev in, upon, and o¿-
good Greek. Diog. L a e r t . i. 84. Sext. X°pa.L to receive, take.
E m p . Adv. Phys. i. 66- ii. 69. To ¿vavríov I . To take upon, admit, in t h e profane
henee means any thing hosiile or injuri- writers. [ T h u c . v. 1 6 . ]
ous. A c t s xxvi. 9. xxviii. 17. Ezek. xviii. I I . Impersonally, 'Evléxerai, It is pos-
18. N a h u m i. 1 1 . Prov. xiv. 7. E z e k . sible, it may be, q. d. it admits. occ. L u k e
xvii. 5 . ] xiii. 3 3 . So Hesychius explains ¿K ivúé-
I I . 'Evavríov, neut. used adverbially, X e r c u
by áSivaróv eVt it is impossible, in
joined with a genitive, and applied in t h e which sense t h e phrase is used b y t h e
same sense as tvavri, Before, in the pre- purest of t h e Greek writers. See E l s n e r
sence qf. M a r k ii. 12. A c t s vii. 10. & al. and Wetstein on L u k e xiii. 3 3 . T o whose
T h e L X X very frequently use i t in t h e instances several more m i g h t be added
same sense for t h e H e b . 1J3 before, Kísb, from A r r i a n , Epictet. I n 2 Mace. xi. 18,
&c. &c. we have a de 7¡v 'ENAEXO'MENA, what
'Evápxopai, from kv in, a n d apxopai to things were possible, or m i g h t be, and 2
begin.— To begin, or begin in. occ. P h i l . Mac. xiii. 2 6 , cnceXoyiíaaro 'ENAEXOME'-
i. 6. Gal. iii. 3 . [ D e u t . ii. 2 4 , 2 5 , 3 1 . ] NQS, he apologized as much as he could.
'Ecc?E))e, ¿oc, Se, ó, )/, from Iv in, and Comp. 'AvévSeKrov. [Probably XP'V" 1 8

Seco to want,—Indigent, poor, in want. understood. 'Evcexópeva are in profane

occ. Acts iv. 3 4 . writers contingent events opposed t o ne-
"Evbeiypa, aros, ro, from hvbiceiy¡xai. cessary ones, or possible ones. See X e n .
perf. pass. of evbeiKvvco.—A manifest proof Mem. iii. 9. I. Thom. M a g . Ecl. p . 3 0 6 ,
or tohen. occ. 2 Thess. i. 5. [Demosth. says t h a t évd¿xerai is not only for evde-
423. 23.] X'ipevóv ¿rt, b u t for e'vpevwg or árcXüc &'-
'Evbeaevvw, evSeÍKVvpt, from ev in, to, Xtrat.]
and SeiKvvo) to show. [§§p° 'EvBnpéio, üi, from evdrtpoe, one
I . To show, make manifest, demón- who is at home, in his own country, or
strate. R o m . ii. 15. ix. 17. 1 T i m . i. 16. among his own people, from eV in, and Sfjpoc
I I . To show, perform, do, prsestare. 2 a people.—To be at home, Vlive at home,
T i m . iv. 14. Comp. T i t . ii. 10. iii. 2. Uve with.} occ. 2 Cor. v. 6, 8, 9. See
H e b . vi. 10, 1 1 , where see W e t s t e i n , and W e t s t e i n .
on T i t . ii. [Schleusner refers. 2 Cor. viii. 'EvdiSvtrKw, opai, from evdvio t h e same.
2 4 . E p h . ii. 7. 1 T i m . i. 16. T i t . ii. 10. — To clothe, be clothed, occ. L u k e viii.
iii. 2 . H e b . vi. 10. Wisd. xii. 17. 2 Mace, 27. xvi. 19. [ 2 Sam. i. 24. xiii. 18.]
ix. 8. .íEschin. Dial. iii. 2. jElian. V. H . tügÜ" "EVSIKOS, H, b, i/, from iv in, and
xiv. 5 , &c. t o Sense I . A d d to this l i d Siter) justice *.—Agreeable to justice, just.
Sense Genes. 1. 15 and 1 7 . ] occ. Rom. iii. 8. H e b . ii. 2.
'Ey&'i&c, ioc, A t t . £wc, •/;» from evoeítcio l l g p 'Evbópr¡<7ig, wg, A t t . ewg, i], from
0

or evoeacvvw. evSopéco (as i t were), which from ev in,

I. A declaralion, manifestation. occ. upon, and Sopéw lo build, which from be-
Rom. iii. 2 5 , 2 6 . [ P h i l . de O p . M u n d . i. Sópa perf. mid. of bépw the same.—A
pp. 9. 5 0 . ] building or structure. occ. Rev. xxi. 18.
I I . A demonstraiion, evident proof or
token. occ. 2 Cor. viii. 24. P h i l . i. 2 8 . [* 'E» in composition denotes often mitaílenes?,
"EroWi, ói, ¿u, r a , Undeclined, from ev m o / i o ; agrecubh tú law, taivful, Ef./ziT-of, & c . ]
 E N A
Josephus (as W e t s t e i n has remarked) uses
t h e same word. A n t . lib. xv. cap. 9. § 6.
' H ce ' E N A O ' M H S I S ounv ivetíCkero ¡cara
rrje SaXaTTiic lt£ (¡taiwcrítíc TróSac, T h e
structure or mole, which he opposed to
t h e violence of t h e sea, was two h u n d r e d
feet long. [ T h i s word has passed into
Chaldee, where Dlnn means a structure,
or ivall. See Buxtorf's L e x . Chald. p .
552.]
'EvSoi;á¿¡<o, from iv in, and Soíiáfw lo
glorify.—To glorify. occ. 2 Thess. i. 10,
1 2. [ T h e formula ivSo^acrdijvaí ev TIVI,
signifies, to gei glory from another's hap-
piness or misery, so that me may be
praiseá as its authors. In these passages
it is, that God may get glory by the eter-
nal happiness to .which he will promote
Christians. So iu E z e k . xxviii. 2 2 . Exod.
xiv. 4,]
"EvSot,oc, a, ó, i¡, from kv in, and D6t,a
glory.
I . [Glorious, ofhigh reputation, or dig-
nity. 1 Cor. iv. 10. Comp. 1 Sam. ix. 6.
I s . xxiii. 8. E s t h . i. 3 . H i s t . Susan. v. 5.
1 Chron. iv. 9. Xen. Mem. i. 2 . 5 6 . H e -
rodian. i. 6. 17. iElian. V. H . ii. 11.]
I I . [Splendid, of dress and ornaments,
&c. L u k e vii. 2 , 5. Is. xxii. 18. xxiii. 9.
2 Chron. ii. 9. I so u n d e r s t a n d with
Bretschneider t h e word as applied to t h e
C h u r c h — g l o r i o u s , like a bride. Schleus-
ner and W a h l say it means, free from stain
of sin.]
I I I . [Remarkable, illustrious, memor-
able, of miraeles. L u k e xiii. 17. See
E x o d . xxxiv. 10. D e u t . x. 2 1 . J o b v. 9,
and xxxiv. 24. I s . xii. 4. Ixiv. 3.]
"EvSvpa, aroc, ró, from evcíiío.— [A
garment. M a t . vi. 25, 28. L u k e xii. 2 3 .
A wedding garment. M a t . xxii. 1 1 , 12.
T h e eastern nations gave splendid dresses
as tokens of honour, especially to guests.
See Gen. xiv. 22. J u d g . xiv. 12. 2 K i n g s
v. 5 , 22. Is. iii. 22. Zach. iii. 4. W a r n e k r .
in A n t i q . H e b r . c. 2 7 . § 13. A n upper
garment, or cloah. M a t . iii. 4. (comp. Mark
i. 6.) M a t . vii. 15, where t h e r e is a r e -
ference to t h e sheepskins worn by t h e
ancieut prophets, in token of their con-
t e m p t of e a r t h l y splendour. See 1 K i n g s
xix. 1 3 . 2 Kings i. 8. Zach. xiii. 4 . a n d
t h e word Mn\úrr).~]
'Evdvvapóo), ¿i, from iv in, and dvva-
póio to strengthen.—To slrengthen, make
strong, w h e t h e r bodily. H e b . xi. 34.—or
spiritually, A c t s ix. 2 2 . R o m . iv. 2 0 . 1
T i m . i. 12. & al. [ A d d P h i l . iv. 13. 2
T i m . ii, 1. iv. 17. E p h . vi. 10. I t oceurs
261 ENE
P s . Iii. 7. in t h e Passive, mas made con-
fident. See A q . Gen. vii. 20. 24.]
"Evovcric, LOQ, A t t . eoic, >/, from svSíoj.
—A putting on, or wearing of clothes.
occ. 1 P e t . iii. 3 . [ J o b xii. 5 . ]
'EvSvto and ivSvvo), from iv in, into, a n d
Svb> or Bivio to go in or under, also lo put
on, which see.
I . To go or enter into. occ. 2 T i m .
iii. 6. [ E z . xxiii. 2 4 . ]
I I . To clothe, put on, invest. I t is a p -
plied,
l s t . T o bodily raiment. M a t . vi. 2 5 .
xxvii. 3 1 . A c t s xii. 2 1 . & al. [ J e r . x . 9 . ]
2dly. Spiritually, T o t h e a r m o u r of
l i g h t , or of God. Rom. xiii. 12. E p h . vi.
11, 14. Comp. T Thess. v. 8. So to t h e
L o r d J e s ú s C h r i s t , i. e. his temper, con-
duct, and virtues. Rom. xiii. 14, where
see K y p k e . — G a l . iii. 2 7 , where see M a c -
k n i g h t . [ M a c k n i g h t says, t h a t persons
baptised always p u t on new and fresh
clothing, to signify t h a t t h e y adopted a
new course of life, and henee, t h a t it is
used in these expressions to signify, t h a t
those baptised into the ñame of C h r i s t
m u s t adopt his ways of life. Schl. cites
Dion. Halic. xi. p. 689- Tapizvviov iv-
ovópevoL imitating the manners of Tar-
quín. 'ÁTroSvófiai is used in exactly t h e
opposite sense by L u c . in Gall. 19. I n
L a t i n , induere aliquem expresses, becom-
ing one's disciple. T a c i t . Annal. xiv. 5 2 .
xvi. 2 8 . I t is a p p l i e d ] to t h e N e w M a n ,
E p h . iv. 24. Col. iii. 10. Comp. ver. 12,
& seqt. and see K y p k e .
3dly. T o t h e miraculous gifts of t h e
H o l y Spirit, with which t h e Apostles of
C h r i s t were endued. L u k e xxiv. 49-
Comp. Acts i. 4, 8.
4 t h l y . T o t h a t incorruption and i m -
mortality with which t h e bodies of m e n
shall be endued or clothed a t t h e r e s u r -
rection. occ. 1 Cor. xv. 5 3 , 5 4 . [In
2 Cor. v'. 3 . Chrysostom ( H o m . X . in E p .
ii. ad Cor.) explains it, ¿apOapcríav i:al
crüpa áajdaprov \a/3úvree, gelling a new
and immortal body. Schl. suggests, t h a t
we should read iicdvo-c'tpevoif] See under
ífrc'püJ.
'EvéSpa, ac, i;, from in, and 'éSpa a
seat or silting,—[Properly, a place of
ambush, as Phavorinus says, a place w h e r e
men sit to surprise an enemy. J o s h . viii.
9 . ] An ambush or ambuscade. So ivídpav
TToiélv to lay, or set an ambush. occ. A c t s
x x v . 3 . T h u c y d i d e s uses t h e same p h r a s e * .
* [ I n the middle voice, I I I . 90. See Polyb. iv,
59. 3.]
 E N E 262 ENE

See Wetstein. [Josh. viii. 7- 14. Herodian. r a ívóvra by according to what you
iv. 5. 7. vii. 5. 8.] have, u n d e r s t a n d i n g KARA. I t h i n k t h a t
'Ej'ETJPEVW, from kvídpa.— To lie in wait. K ü h n o l is r i g h t in saying t h a t t h e p a -
occ. L u k e xi. 5 4 . A c t s xxiii. 2 1 . [ I t rallel place in S t . M a t t h e w shows t h a t ra
does n o t occur elsewhere in t h e N . T . ívóvra refers to what is in the cup, as in
I n G r e e k writers, it generally takes a X e n . A g e s . ii. 19. H e l l . ii. 3 . 6 ; a n d I
dative, as in Diod. Sic. xix. c. 68. (of am- should therefore, with P a r k h u r s t , ac-
bush in mar), b u t i t is found also with quiesce in Raphelius's explanation, which
t h e accusative. See Wessel. on Diod. Sic. is, " D o not be careful as to t h e vessel or
xix. 69. Appian. Bell. Civ. iii. p . 8 8 1 . P l u t . its splendour, b u t r a t h e r a t t e n d to t h e
V i t . F a b . p . 185. E . L a m . iv. 19. Wisd. c o n t e n t s ; for if with t h e m you assist t h e
ii. 12. Ecclus. xxvii. 10. I t is used a b - poor, food and every t h i n g else is p u r é t o
solutely, L a m . iii. 10. J u d g . ix. 4 3 , and u s ; " or as Bretschneider says, " you have
in its original sense, (sit in, remain, then no need of t h e Levitical purification."
abide in,) in Ecclus. xiv. 23.] Kühnol, however (after E r a s m u s , L i g h t -
"EvíSpov, s, ró. See 'Ej'T'cSpa.—An am- foot, and others), rejects this, and t h i n k s
busk, or lying in mait. occ. A c t s xxiii. 16. our L o r d speaks ironically. T h e Pharisees,
[Griesb. reads évéb~pa. Josh. viii. 2. al.] he says, t h o u g h t t h a t by giving alms
'EVEIXÉW, ai, from kv in, and kiXéio to t h e y could atone for their sins w i t h o u t
roll, which is, I t h i n k , to be deduced from amendment, and he would transíate t h u s ;
t h e V . íCkiao-w (which see), and n o t vice Give what there is in the cup as alms t o
versa.—To roll, or wrap up. occ. M a r k t h e poor, and then (in your opinión) you
xv. 4 6 . [ I Sam. xxi. 12. A r t e m i d . i. need no a m e n d m e n t ; every thing is puré
to you.]
1 4
; ]
"ENEKA, or EVEKEV, A n adv. governing
"UvEipi, from kv in, and lipl to be.— To a genitive.
be in or within. o c c L u k e xi. 4 1 , nXjjv RA
1. Because of, on account of, by reason
ívóvra SOTE k\er¡poavvr¡v, But give what is
of. A c t s xxvi. 2 1 . Rom. viii. 3 6 . [ I t
in ( t h e cup and platter namely)yb?' alms. points o u t t h e cause of our u n d e r t a k i n g
See this i n t e r p r e t a r o n , which is also em- any t h i n g , w h e t h e r t h e antecedent cause,
braced by Wolfius, a n d K y p k e (whom or t h e event. W i t h t h e article before
see), abundan ti y vindicated by Raphelius, t h e infinitive, i t denotes the end or in-
who very j u s t l y demands a proqf, t h a t r a tention.]
a n d ívóvra signifies t h e same as EK rwv
2 . With respect to, in regará qf. 2 Cor.
kvóvrwv, and t h a t because t h e l a t t e r
iii. 10. Raphelius shows t h a t t h i s sense of
phrase denotes according io one's abilities
t h e word is agreeable to t h e use of t h e
or snbsiance, t h e former does so likewise.
p u r e s t G r e e k writers. T o t h e instances
O u r E n g l i s h translation—qf such things
he has cited, m i g h t be added from L u c i a n ,
as ye have, seems to aim a t preserving
Timón, t o m . i. p . 94, ^EI/o-juaroc "ENEKA,
the supposed ambiguity of t h e Greek. See
With respect to l y i n g .
a similar instance in H e b . v. 7. [ B r e t s c h -
3 . 'Ov EVEKEV for EVEKEV THTH 8 , Olí OC-
neider and Kühnol concur with Raphelius
in saying, t h a t ÍK rwv kvóvrwv is t h e proper count qf this that, because that, because.
phrase, and t h a t t h e r e is no example of t h e occ. L u k e iv. 18. So in H o m e r II. i. line
phrase here used being substituted for it. 11. a n d II. v. line 3 7 7 . & al. freq. '¿VEKCI,

O n t h e other hand, Schleusner cites from i. e. « ívEKa, signifies because. Comp.

Moschopulus t h e following w o r d s : EVE^IV
"Avd' ÍOV u n d e r . [ T h e ellipse of EVEKU b e -
avrl RA ivv—ápyíi, ¡>s ro EVE^Í poi 7rX5roc. fore t h e infin. should be noticed. See
Kai É V E T Í V avrl RA Svvaróv k^iv, See M a t . ii. 1 3 . x i . 1. L u k e iv. 10. 2 Cor. i.
also Tliom. M . p . 307-, H e s y c h i u s in voce, 8. 2 P e t . iii. 9. See B o s . ]
a u d Heliodor. -ZEíhiop. ix. 2 5 . Rosen- JFGP" 'Ej'TPYEÍA, as, r¡, FROM kvepyi)S.—
müller too brings two instances from D e - Energy, mighty or effectual morking or
mosthenes pro Corona, where ívóvra is operation. occ. E p h . i. 19. iii. 7. iv. 16.
used for property. Schleusner adds, t h a t P h i l . iii. 2 1 . Col. i. 2 9 . ii. 12. 2 T h e s s . ii.
RA ívóvra m a y stand for KARA r a 'ívóvra 9 , 1 1 . [ I n E p h . iv. 16. Col. i. 2 9 . 2 Thess.
as well as -d Svvara for KARA r a cvvará. ii. 9. it is t h e actual morking or assist-
Schleusner therefore, and Rosenmüller, as ance, action in which e n e r g y is p u t forth.
well as Boisius (Collat. p . 2 2 2 . ) a n d Bos 2 M a c . iii. 2 9 . ] .
( E x . P h i l . in N . T . p . 4 2 . ) , after t h e 'JZvepyéw, w, from ívEpyns-
Syriac and Theophylact, would transíate I . To opérate, act powerfully, put
 ENE 263 E N 0

forth power. M a t . xiv. 2 . M a r k vi. 14. | to express t h e good conveyed by t h e bless-

(Comp. Avvupic V I . ) Rom. vii. 5. I C o r . !ing. So in these places i t is, to make
xii. 6. 2 Cor. i. 6. iv. 2. Gal. iii. 5 . v. 6. happy. See Glass. Philol. Sac. p . 2 2 2 .
E p h . ii. 2. iii. 2 0 . Col. i. 2 9 . I Thess. ii. ed. D a t h . ]
13. 2 Thess. ii. 7 . P a r k h u r s t and Schleus- 'Evé^io, from iv in or upon, a n d é'^w t a
ner contend, against H a m m o n d on Gal. v. hold.
6. ( w h e r e t h e Syriac has faith made per- I . 'Evé-^opai, pass. To be holden or
fect) a n d B u l l "(Op. p . 5 3 4 . ed. G r a b e ) , confined in. occ. Gal. v. 1. So H e r o d o t u s ,
t h a t this verb h a s an active sense in t h e lib. ii. cap. 1 2 1 , Tj) rráyr, 'ENE'XESOAI,
passive voice; and I have therefore placed To be holden in t h e snare or t r a p ; a n d
t h e passages t h e y allege u n d e r this head, Pausanias, ' E N E ' X E S 0 A I rale rréSaie, To
w i t h o u t however meaning to decide on be confined in fetters. See W e t s t e i n
t h e question. T h e r e is t h e passive sense and K y p k e . [ A r r i a n . Diss. E p i c t . iii. 2 2 .
decidedly in 2 Cor. i. 6. I n 2 Thess. ii. 7. 93.]
P a r k h u r s t translates rightly, The mystery I I . 'EvÉxetv nvi, To urge, press, upon
of iniquity is (non) acting, where the one. occ. L u k e xi. 5 3 .
sense is n e u t e r ; a n d he cites 1 Esd. ii. I I I . 'Evíyíiv rivt, To have a quarrel,
20. I n G a l . ii. 8. t h e verb has t h e d a - spiie, or resentment against one, to bear
tive, a n d is in t h e sense of assisling, him ill-will, infestum, vel infensum, esse
giving necessary powers for any office, alicui. So Hesychius explains ivíyti- b y
though Bretschncider says t h a t ivepyí¡o-ae pvnaucaiceí resents, 'éyiceirai (q. d.) sticks
he ¿m-o^oXiiv is an H e b r a i s m for ivepy n)v cióse to, i. e. in haired or spite, occ. M a r k
ÓTT a n d t r a n s l a t e s i t , gavc Peter
-
the office vi. 19, where D o d d r i d g e renders
ivüytv
of an apostle. I n m a n y of t h e above av-¿j> hung upon him ; a n d in a note says,
places, there is a sense of miraculous " T h i s seems to m e t h e import of t h e
operation, as M a t . xiv. 2. G a l . iii. 5 , &c. phrase, which is with peculiar propriety
and especially in 1 Cor. xii. 6. See A r t e m . applied to a dog's fastening his teeth into
i. 1. Polyb. iv. 4 0 . ] his prey, and holding it down." A n d if
I I . \fto effect, accomplish. E p h . i. 1 1 . indeed t h e phrase were ever t h u s applied,
20. Philipp. ii. 1 3 . Is. x i i . 4 . Diod. Sic. I should have no doubt b u t both S t .
xiii. 9 5 . Polyb. iii. 6. 5. T h e participle M a r k and S t . L u k e (ch. xi. 5 3 . ) afluded
passiveis, says Schl., that which iswroughi to this application of i t ; b u t after dili-
with much labour, laborious, a n d so when g e n t search, I can find no instance of
applied to prayer, as in J a m e s v. 16, it ivéxtiv having this signiíication. See
will be ardent, earnest, assiduous; as t h e Wolfius and W e t s t e i n . — T h e L X X apply
V u l g . and L u t h e r have it. So B r . a n d this expression in t h e same sense as S t .
Wah!. P a r k h u r s t says i t is the inspired M a r k , Gen. xlix. 2 3 , for t h e H e b . tntottt
prayer of a righteous m a n , w r o u g h t in io hate, infest. [ T h e r e can be little doubt
him b y t h e energy of t h e Holy Spirit. t h a t t h e two phrases have t h e same mean-
T h e Syriac h a s , prayer poured forth by a ing. T h e G r a m m a r i a n s explain t h e phrase
good man7\ by saying, t h a t t h e r e is an ellipse of
[fgl? 5
'Evipynpa, croe, rb, from eví¡pyn- XÓXov anger. In H e r o d o t u s i. 1 1 8 . vi.
pai perf. pass. of ivepyiw. [Properly, 119. (comp. viii. 2 7 . ) we have certainly
operation, working, a n d especially, powers t h e full p h r a s e , iveí^e créi Szivbv xpXov,
given to man by God. where see Wesseling. Fischer ad W e l l .
I t m a y be e x -
plained, as Phavorinus a n d Z o n a r a s ( L e x . iii. 1. p . 2 6 4 . ]
Col. 7 4 0 ) say, by ya9' l > <J JlaTa
SÍft s o r
Ijlgg 0
'EvdáSe, An adv. from 'évda here,
raculous powers7\ there, (which from iv in) a n d Si a p a r -
l i ^ p " 'Evepyije, éoe, Se, ó, >/, from iv in, tióle denoting to a place.
and epyov a work, action.—Effecíual, 1. Hither, to this place, occ. J o h n iv.
efficacious, energetic. occ. 1 Cor. xvi. 9. 15, 16. A c t s xvii. 6. x x v . 17-
[ ( P o l y b . ii. 6 5 . 1 2 . ) ] Philem. ver. 6. H e b . 2. Here, in this place, occ. L u k e x x i v .
iv. 12. 4 1 . A c t s x v i . 2 8 . x x v . 2 4 . Comp. A c t s
'EvevXoyéú>, £>, from iv in, and ívXoyéw x. 18. [ w h e r e i t means there, as in 2 M a c .
to bless.—To bless in, or by. occ. A c t s iii. xii. 2 / . ]
25. Gal. iii. 8. [ T h e word, properly, is 'Evdvpéopai, üpai, Depon, from iv in,
like ivXoyéoi, simply, lo speak a blessing. and Svpbe the mind.—To have in mind,
See G e n . xii. 3 . xviii. 18. B u t in H e - ponder, think, medítate upon. occ. M a t .
brew, to bless, a n d similar words are used i. 2 0 . ix. 4. A c t s x . 1 9 . W e t s t e i n on
 E N I
Ma't^ i. 20, shows it is construed with an
accusative in the profane writers, as in t h e
Evangelist. T o t h e instances produced
by him, I add from Isocrates ad Nicoc. §
3 , ' E T T E Í C W ce ' E Ñ 0 Y M H ' 9 Q S 1 TlVYS
«bOBCTYS, K. T. X. B u t when they consider
t h e fears—[See Wisd. iii. 14. T h u c y d .
ii. 40. A r i s t o p h . Eccl. 138. Joseph. A n t .
xv. v. 3 . D r e s i g . de Verbis M e d . p . 260.
J o s h . vi. 18. D e u t . xxi. 1 1 . ]
Ifígp' 'Evdípncric, ios, A t t . EWQ, ?/, from
2
ivBvpéofiai.
I. Thought, rejlection. occ. M a t . ix. 4.
xii. 2 5 . Heb. iv. 12.
I I . Thought, device, contrivance. occ.
A c t s xvii. 2 9 .
"Evi, By apócope or abbreviation for
EVETÍ 3d pers. pres. indicat. of EV iipi to he
in.—There is in, there is. occ. Gal. iii.
28, thrice. Col. iii. 11. J a m . i. 17.
"Evi is used in like manner by t h e pro-
fane writers. See Raphelius, Elsner,
Wolfius, and Bowyer, on Gal. [ S c h w a r z
( C o m m . L i n g . G r . p . 486.) has shown,
by many passages from Plato, t h a t EVL is
used iu A t t i c for there is. A d d Aristoph.
P l u t . 3 4 8 . Palajph. fab. 14. Plat. These-
t e t . p . 136. E p i c t . E n c h i r . c. 32. P o l y b .
E x c . L e g . xvii. p . 1123. T h i s is men-
tioned, because some writers have denied
it.]
'Eviav-óc, 5, ó.—A year: so called, ac-
cording to Plato, because iv iavrco (ivl
ávrto ¿lai, it goes or returns upon itself,
agreeably to which Virgil speaks in t h a t
well-known verse, Georgic. ii. line 4 0 2 ,
Atqnc in se suapcr vcsfígia volvitur annus.
T h e year returning on itself revolves.
T h e L X X often use this verb for t h e
H e b . D J t y , which is in like m a n n e r t h e
ñame of a year, from the V . fiW to itér-
ate, repeat, as being t h e * iteration or re-
petition of t h e solar light's revolution
over t h e whole face of t h e earth by its
annuai and diurnal motion and declina-
tion. [ J o h n ix. 19.] A c t s xi. 26. xviii.
1 1 . & al. freq. [ I t is used for time ge-
nerally in L u k e iv. 19. Comp. I s . Ixi. 2.
where Theodoret says, t h a t by t h e accept-
able year of the Lord, is meant, t h e first
advent of Christ, and so Theophylact and
P r o c o p i u s ; mu? is used in H e b . iu t h e same
general way. See Is. Ixiii. 4. and J u d g .
x . 8. In Gal. iv. 10. Schleusner calis it,
the feast ofthe new year; adding, t h a t
* S e e H e b . and E n g . L e x i c ó n under rsw I I I .
264 E N N
others refer it to festival days in certain
years, as for instance, t h e sabbatical and
jubilee years. Br. gives Schleusner's.in-
terpretation, but says, t h a t he prefers to
take Kaipol Kai iviavrol. as sacred anni-
versaries. W a h l construes these words as
annuai festivals, referring to Gesenius, p .
854. 2 . ]
'Evl^npi, from iv in, with, and feripi to
stand.— To be present, or instant, or at
hand, instare. See Rom. viii. 3 8 . 1 Cor.
vii. 26, ivE^wnav, comp. u n d e r "L^-npi.
2 Thess. ii. 2 . 2 T i m . iii. 1. [ A d d 1 Cor.
iii. 2 2 . G a l . i. 4. H e b . ix. 9. D a n . vii. 5 .
1 Mac. xii. 4 4 . 2 M a c . iii. 17. P i n d a r .
O l y m p . ix. 8. Sext. E m p . P h y s . ii. 1 9 3 . ]
'Evicrxyio, from iv in, and layyw to be
strong.—YTo gain strenglh, be strength-
ened and refreshed. Acts iii. 19. So
Gen. xlviii. 2. J u d g . xvi. 28. x x . 2 2 . S e e
F a b r . Cod. Ps. i. p . 3 3 3 . I t is u s e d
transitively, io strengthen, in L u k e x x .
4 3 . 2 Sam. xxii. 40. Comp. I s . iv. 5.
J u d g . iii. 12. See Ecclus. 1. 4. Mathiae,
§ 496.]
"EvvarOQ, n, ov, from ivvéa.— The ninth.
M a t . xx. 5. xxvii. 4 5 . & al. [ T h e J e w -
ish day was from sun-rise to sun-set.
T h e n i n t h hour was devoted to p r a y e r .
T h e Lexicographers, after having stated
t h e n a t u r e of t h e Jewish división of t i m e ,
absurdly add, t h a t t h e n i n t h hour a n -
swered to three o'clock. T h e variable
standard is used a t this day in p a r t s of
I t a l y , where t h e day and n i g h t are di-
vided into twenty-four hours, and one
o'clock is one hour after sun-set, which is
marked by t w e n t y - f o u r . ]
' E w r á , ót, ai, ra. Indeclinable.—A
noun of n u m b e r , Nine. M a r t i u i u s , L e x i c .
E t y m o l . in Novem, derives t h e L a t i n no-
vem nine, from novus, as signifying the
last (whence novissimus), and t h e G r e e k
ivvéa from evos oíd, and veos new, as
being oíd in such a sense, t h a t i m m e -
diately after it there begins a new order
of number. T h u s , says he, t h e t h i r t i e t h
day of t h e month is called * EVTJ cal vía,
i. e. new and oíd, because it. closes t h e oíd
m o n t h , and begins a new one, since t h e
oíd and new perpetually meet each other
(dum vetus et novum perpetuó sibi oc-
cursant), by which last expression I sup-
pose he means, t h a t t h e y m e e t each other
a t t h a t instant of time when t h e oíd
m o n t h ends, and t h e new begins, i. e. ac-
* S e e also D u p o r t on T h e o p h r a s t u s , Char. E t h .
p. 2 7 8 . edit. N e e d h a m .
 E N N E NO

cordiug tu-our way of reckoning, at mid- And t h u s it may easily be reconciled with
night, or according t o t h a t of t h e A t h e - L u k e [ i v . 4 2 . ] ; for yEvopivng ijpipar,
nians, at suuset of t h e last day of t h e which t h e common translation render»,
tiiouth. occ. L u k e xvii. 17. when it was day, m i g h t as well have been
'Ei/vEvriKovTaévvea, ói, ái, ra, Indeclin- rendered, as the day was coming on ; for
able, from EvvEvyicovra ninety (which from yEvopivnQ may be understood (as G r o t i u s
¿¡••vía nina, aud í\icovra t h e Greek t e r - has observed) not. only as expressive of
mination for decimal numbers, see under t h e time already come, b u t as implying
' EGcopípcovTa) and evvka.— Ninety and w h a t is near at hand, or what is forming
nine. occ. M a t . xviii. 12, 13. L u k e xv. now, and ready to approach." Doddridge.
4, 7. [ T h e r e is an ellipse in this expression,
[fSp 'EVVEOC,
0
5, o . — P r o p e r l y , Dumb, 'ívvvypv is for K a r a rbv Evvvyov -yjióvov.
s¡yeechless,one who cannot speak,according W e have in Theocritus Idyll. i. 15. x . 4 8 .
to P l a t o : also, Aslovished, astounded; so TO pEcrap&pLvov, where Kara is t h u s omit-
Suidas explains kvvthc by ¿íéiavog speecli- ted ; and in xxiii. 69. and xxiv. 11. pE-
Icss, E¡,E^rjiciog astonished. T h i s word is UOVVKTIOV for K a r a r d pEe. T h e expression
sometimes written éveog, and may be con- oceurs 3 Mace. v. 5 ; aud in t h e L a t i n in-
sidered as a corruption of avEog of the terpretation in t h e London Polyglott, is
same import (so Hesychius, 'AVEOC i y vedi rendered crepúsculo matutino, which, as
IMI £«LTT\//£;£I ijav¡(pi) which from iívavog Schleusner observes, seems r i g h t , from t h e
dumb, mute, and this from a neg. and avia phrase viro ri/v épyj>pÉvr]v r'ipipav in ver, 2 . ]
(which see under 'Avínoos) lo breathe, Comp. 3 Mac. v. 5. with verse 2.
breathe or cry out; or else perhaps ivvEog 'EI'OÍKE'W. d, from iv in, and uiKÍta to
or EVEOC may be derived immediately from dwell, which from oitcoc a house.— To
the H e b . wh) particip. N i p h . (if used) of dwell in. occ. Rom. viii. 1 1 . 2 Cor. vi. 16.
the V . nwn to be kush, mute, silent, with [ C o m p . Lev. xxvi. 12.] 2 T i m . i. 5 , 14.
n emphatic prefixed. occ. A c t s ix. 7.— — I n t h e L X X i t almost constantly a n -
T h e É X X use EVEOÍ for t h e H e b . Q>DÍ>N swers to the H e b . 2W to dwell, sellle, re-
dumb, Isa, lvi. 1 0 ; and Prov. xvii. 2 8 . main.
for v»iati> o i O N shiilting his lips, t h e y "Evovra, r a , particip. neut. plur. of
have EVVÍOV—iavTOv irouicrag making him- "EvEipi, which see.
self dumb. [ X e n . A n a b . iv. tí. 2 3 . See 'Evórne, Tr¡ro£, i¡, from tic, Ivoc, one.rr-
Alberti Gloss. p . 69.] Unily. o c c E p h . iv. 3 , 13.
'Evvevw, from ky to, and VEVW to nod, 1^^° 'Evovkiu), o), from iv in, aud o'^-
beckon, which see.— To nod or beckon to. XÉIO to disturb, which from by\oe a multi-
occ. L u k e i. 62. (Comp. verse 22.) [ I t tude, tumull.— To disturb, occasion trou-
is to ask by signs in this place. See P r o v . ble in or to. occ. H e b . xii. 15. Lest any
x. 16.] root qf billerness springing up ivóy\r¡,
"Ewoia, ac, ?;, from iv in, and vúoc the disturb or trouble you, vpac being u n d e r -
mind. Inleution', purpose. mind. occ. stood.—This verb is not only several times
Heb. iv. 12. 1 P e t . iv. I. [Pol. x. 27. 8. used in t h e passive voice by t h e L X X ,
I t is also idea in good Greek. See Diog. b u t also frequently in t h e active by t h e
1. 79.] profane writers. See Wetstein on H e b .
"EvvopoQ, H, ó, //, froin iv in, and vópog xii. 15. [ I n Gen. xlviii. 1. 1 Sam. x i x .
a law. 14. x x x . 13, it answers to inflicted dis-
I. Subject to, or under, a. law. occ. 1 ease. In D a n . vi. 2, to injlict injury.
Cor. ix. 2 1 . See Xen. Cyrop. v. 4 . 16. A n a b . ii. 5 . 2 . ]
I I . Lawful, agreeable lo law. occ. Acts "Evoyve, e, ó, í/, from ivéyypai to be
xix. 3 9 . [ I think i t is r a t h e r the regular /tolden fast, bound, obliged.
assembly, i. e. one of t h e usual assemblies I . W i t h a genitive following, Bound,
mcetiiig at fixed times and places, and subject to, or a subject qf. occ. H e b . ii. 15.
under proper authority, Kvpía or vóptpog. Í I . [Subject to, Hable to, obrioxious to,
See D ' O r v i l l . ad Cha'rit. i. c. i. p . 2 1 2 . and perhaps deserving qfJ]
E u r . Phoen. 1 678. X e n . Cyrop. viii. 7. 3.] [ 1. W i t h a genitive.] occ. M a t . xxvi.
"Ewvyov, Adv. from iv in, and vvt\ the 66. M a r k iii. 2 9 . xiv. 6 4 .
nighl.—In the night. occ. M a r k i. 3 5 , [ 2 . ] W i t h a dative. occ. M a t . v. 2 1 , 2 2 .
"Evvuxpv \íav, Far iu Ihc night, " when See B p . Pearce on verse 2 1 . I t seems
the.-nighl was far advanced, aud so t h e t h a t t h e phrase 'ívoyoQ ítai iu- n)v yÍEV-
elawning of the day Mas near at hand. vav TO T i u p o í , is elliptical, and t h a t /3\J¡-
 E N T
Oijvaí lo be cast, should be supplicd before
¿ir. So ftXr¡Qr)vai is expressly added, ver.
2 9 , 30. See Schmidius, and P e t i t in
Pole Synops. on t h e place. To the pass-
ages produced by W e t s t e i n on M a t . v. 2.1,
I add from Lucian, Bis Accusat. tom. i.
]>. 3 3 5 . C. " E N 0 X 0 2 T 0 P 2 NO'MOIS,
Obnoxious to the laws. [ A d d Isa. liv.
1 7 - 2 Mace. xiii. 6. P h i l . de Joseph. p.
55b. D e u t . xix. 10. Phil. de Decaí, p . 7 6 3 .
Gen. xxvi. 11. X e n . Hell. vii. 3. 7-]
I I I . With a genitive following, Bound
by sin or guilt, guilty qf sin, and conse-
queutly obliged to punishment on t h a t ac-
count. occ. 1 Cor. x i . 27, '¿vo^oe éVat TS
cúparoQ Kal lítparoe ra lívpíts, shall be
guilty of (profkning, or of offering an in-
dignity to) the body and blood qf the
Lord. So J a m e s ii. 10, Téyovt rrcivriov
tvoyur is become " guilty of (affronting or
of showing disrespect to) all t h e rest * . "
[1 have not aitered P a r k h u r s t ' s arrange-
rnent, though t h e word does not appear
to me to have a different sense in these
places from the last. I presume t h e r e is
an ellipse of Kpípart, and t h a t the genitive
is in one of its most usual senses, Liable
lo punishment on account of the Lord's
body, or guilty wilh résped to. I n the
2d of these places perhaps '¿v'oyog •ñávriov
m a y be liable lo all the penaílies (for
breaking the other commandmenls.J See
Polyb. xii. 2 3 . 1. L y s . p . 520. 10. T h e
word seems to be used of the punishment,
the tribunal or sentence, and the party
sinned against.]
"EvraXpa, aroQ, RB, from ivriraXpai
perf. pass. of EVT¿XXIO to command, charge.
See under 'EvreXX.op.ai.—A commandment,
precept. occ. M a t . xv. 9. M a r k vii. 7- Col.
ii. 2 2 . [Isa. xxix. 13.]
'EvratfiM'Ciii,from ivrcifia, R A , which in-
cludes the whole f unereal apparalus of a
dead body, [fine clothes, ornaments, &c.
Charit. i. 6. E u r . H e l . 1419. iElian. V.
H . i. 16. Gen. i. 2. Cuper. Obs. ii. 9 . ] —
To prepare a corpse for burial, as by
wasbing, anpinting, swathing, &c. occ.
M a t . xxvi. 12. J o h n xix. 4 0 . See Elsner
and W e t s t e i n on M a t . x x v i . 12, Camp-
bell on J o h n xix. 4 0 , Kypke on M a r k xiv.
8, and Suicer, Thcsaur. in 'Evríiajia and
'Erraípui^oj.—The L X X have used this
word for the H e b . to:n to embalm. Gen.
I. 2.
£¿¿5 ' 'Evra<j>iíiapoc, a, B, from iv~ERA-
* D r . B e l l on the L o r d ' s S u p p c r , p . 9 ü of the
l s t , or 1 0 0 of the 2 d edition.
266 E N T
(putapai perf. pass. of évra<j)tci£ú>, which
see.—A preparalion of a corpseyor burial,
as by anointing, &c. occ, M a r k xiv. 8.
J o h n xii. 7.
'EvréXXopai, Depon, from iv in, upon,
and TÍXXM to charge, command. So t h e
Etymologist explains ivréXXa) by 7 r p o -
^lícraio to order, command. B u t observe
t h a t t h e simple V. TÉXXLO in t h i s sense is
very rarely, if ever, used by any Greek
writer now e x t a n t . I n H o m e r , however,
i t occurs with the preposition ¿Vi dis-
joined from it for Í7UT¿XX(O, II. i. lines 2 5 ,
379.
KpsíTt/jov 8' ' E n ' l fwiU "ETEAAE.
A n d luid a harsh c o m m a n d .
To charge, command, give charge. See
J o h n xv. 17. Acts xiii. 4 7 . M a r k xiii. 3 4 .
Mat. iv. 6. [ T h e Pharisees, says W a h l ,
in M a t . xix. 7, give the strongest sense
to the words of Moses, D e u t . xxiv. 1, and
say he commanded a bilí of divorcement
to be given. Christ seems to correct them
in verse 8, by using l-ÑITPI-afo to pernal,
for ivriXXopai, in repcating their expres-
sion. Schleusner makes ivréXXopai it-
self signify to permil, without suflieient
reason.—We m u s t observe t h a t in H e b .
ix. 20, ivriXXopai is used in a peculiar
sense. W e have, in D e u t . xxix. 1. Xoyol
ríjc Siadí¡Kric (Se or) ?;c ivETEiXaro B Kvpioc ;
and so iv. 13. (in verse 16. oiidero is
used.) J u d g . ii. 20. Jer. xi. 3 . where ive-
TeíXaro is used for SiidEro, the covenant
which he made. T h i s is t h e sense in H e b .
ix. 2 0 , which m u s t be compared with
Exod. xxiv. 8.]
"EVTEVOEV, an A d v . from '¿v6a here, and
t h e syllabic adjection Srev denoting from
a place.—Henee, from henee. M a t . xvii.
20. L u k e iv. 9. John xviii. 3 6 , My king-
dom is not 'évTEvdev henee, t h a t is, as i:;
plain from t h e former p a r t of the verse,
'EK TS KÓopv rara, OF this morid.
"EvTEV¡,ir, IOQ, A t t . £Ü)Q, r¡, from
obsol. ÍVTEVXW, or ivrvyy(civi» to interceda:,
[ w h i c h see.]—Intercession, prayer, ad-
dress to God for one's self or others. occ.
1 T i m . ii. 1. iv. 5. O n t h e former text
Wetstein observes, t h a t Aéncric, irpoo-Ev%r!,
and 'ÍVTEVT\ir, seem to differ in d e g r e e ;
t h e first being a short extemporary prayer
(an ejaculation) ; the second implying a
meditaiing upon and adoration of the Di-
vine Maj'esty; and t h e t h i r d jusrá TTXEÍ-
ovoc •KAPPNAIÍU; having grcaler freedom qf
speech, as O r i g e n defines it, D e O r a t . 44,
 E N T 267
or being an addrcss lo God on some par-
ticular occasion. [Tu t h e Lexicón M S .
quoted by Alberti on Hesychius i. p .
1261, the word is explained to be Prayer
for another's safeiy. Theodoret, T h e o -
phylact, CEcumenius, and Hesychius,
make it to be Prayer for revenge of in-
juries. Schleusner explains it in 1 T i m .
iv. 5, as thanksgiving, from verse 4. See
iElian. V. H . iv. 20. Polyb. ii. 8. 6. I n
2 M a c e iv. 8, i t has the sense of approach
or interview^]
"EJTÍ/LIOC, a, ó, ?/, from iv in, and rípn
honour, esteem, price [as if ó ev rípn &v.
Schleusner makes t h e first sense dear,
high-priced, from rípn valué, and quotes
Prov. xx. 18.]
I . Honourable, whence t h e compara-
tivo ivTLfxcrepoQ more honourable. occ.
L u k e xiv. 8. [Xen. Cyr. iii. 1. 4 . ]
I I . In esteem, esteemed, dear. occ.
L u k e vii. 2 . Phil. ii. 2 9 . [1 Sam. xxvi.
I I I . Esteemed, precious. occ. 1 P e t . ii.
4, 6.
'Erri/J-órepog, a, ov, Comparat. of evrt-
pog, which see.
'EvroXri, ijg, r¡, from évreróXa perf. mid.
of évréXXo¡. See under 'EV-EXAO/ÍCII.—A
command or commandinent, w h e t h e r of
God or man. See M a t . xv. 3 , 6. R o m .
vii. 8, 9, &c. 1 J o h n iii. 22, 2 3 , 2 4 . 2 P e t .
ii. 2 1 . iii. 2 . L u k e xv. 2 9 . T i t . i. 14.
[Schleusner not only makes t h e word in
t h e plural refer to t h e precejits of t h e
Mosaic law generally, as it certainly does
in M a t . v. 19. xix. 17- xxii. 3 6 — 4 0 . M a r k
x. 15. al. (see N u m b . xv. 20. Lev. ii. 27.)
b u t especially to the T e n Commandments
in M a t . xix. 17. M a r k x. 19. ' H évroXri
is for the Mosaic law itself generally. M a t .
xv, 3, 6. M a r k vii. 8, 9. L u k e xxiii. 56.
See 2 Kings x x i . 8. 2 Chron. xii. 1. xxx.
¡1^° 'Evrómog, a, ó, ?/, from év in, and
róiroQ a place.—An inhabilant of a place,
Íncola, occ. A c t s x x i . 12, where see W e t -
stein and K y p k e . [Soph. CEd. C. 843.]
'Evrbg, an Adv. from év in, governing
a g e n i t i v e . — W i t h i n . occ. M a t . xxiii. 2 6 .
L u k e xvii. 2 1 . I n M a t . with t h e neuter
article it is used like a N . Tó évrbg, The
inside. I n L u k e évrbg vpwv has been by
* some modern interpreters rendered,
among you, as if it were synonymous with
év vp'iv, J o h n i. ¡ 4 , so év vflv among us,
* See Pricwus in P o l c S y n o p s . B c z a , W h i t b y ,
R a p h d i u s , W o l f i u s , and Doddridgc.
E N T
L u k e i. 1. vii. 1 6 ; év rólg TuSaíotg among
the Jews, J o h n xi. 54. B u t fVróc is never
elsewhere used for among, either in t h e
N . T . or by the L X X , who in t h r e e
t e x t s , P s . x x x i x . 3 . cix. 2 2 . Cant. iii. 10.
apply i t for within. A n d only one pass-
age has yet been produced from any clas-
sical G r e e k a u t h o r for évrbg signifying
among, namely from Xenophon, Cyri E x -
ped. lib. ii. p . 118. edit. H u t c h . 4to. or p .
115. 8vo. " T h e king t h i n k s you are in
his power, as he has you in the midst of
his country, ical Trorapüiv 'ENTO'2 áSia-
tárm';" and even here perhaps these
latter words m i g h t better be rendered
" within or inclosed in," t h a n " among,"
impassable rivers. A n d it is remarkable,
t h a t D r . H u t c h i n s o n , who from this e x -
pression opposes, in his Note, t h e common
interpretation of L u k e xvii. 2 1 , yet t r a n s -
lates it " intra flumina vix superanda."
F o r a further vindication of évrbg V/JWV
in this t e x t signifying, within you, see
Campbell's N o t e ; to which I shall only
add from t h e learned M a r k l a n d in Bow-
yer's Conject. " T h e word vpüv does
not here signify t h e Pharisees in particu-
lar, but all mankind, as ch. xxii. 19, and
often, I believe, by évrbg vpüv is m e a n t
an inmard principie, opposed to waparn-
p-íjaewg, observation or outward show ; as
is said of t h e Spirit, J o h n iii. 8. [ a n d see
D e m . in P h o r m . p . 913. ed. Reisk.]
'Evrpérew, from év in, upon, and rpéVw
io turn.—To turn, or cause to turn in, or
upon. [Schl. says io cause lo turn away,
whence he explains t h e other meanings
more easily-»]
I . To cause to turn upon one's self (as
it were) through shame, pul out of coun-
tenance, make ashamed. occ. 1 Cor. iv. 14.
[¿Elian. V. H . iii. 17.]
'Ev-péTTüfiai, Pass. To be ashamed. occ.
2 Thess. iii. 14. T i t . ii. 8 . *
I I . 'Evrpéwopaij [Middle'] with an ac-
cusative following, which may be consi-
dered as governed of the preposition c\a
on account qf understood, To reverence,
[or regard, or carefof\ i. e. to be turned
upon one's self on account, or from reve-
rential awe, of. occ. M a t . xxi. 37- M a r k
xii. 6. L u k e xviii. 2, 4. x x . 13. H e b . xii. 9.
Wetstein on M a t , xxi. 3 7 , cites P l u t a r c h
and Diodorus Sic. applying t h e V . in t h e
same manner. [See Polyb. H i s t . ix. 3 0 .
xxx. 9. 2. Xen. H e l l . ii. 3 . 17. Soph. A j .
* [ H e n e e to fl¡/from. 1 M a c e . i. 2 0 . In Ps.
s x x v . 2 0 , it is to be pul to sítame.]
 E NT 68 E N Y

90. ( i u tlie two last examples the geni- Obss. Sacr. iv. p . 5 7 1 . compeilare aliquem
tive is takeu.) Diod. Sic. xix. 7. I u E x . et adire petendi causa. Tícpt is often added
x. 3 . J o b xxxii. 2 1 . Isa. xvi. 7, t h e passive, with a noun, expressing the object of a p -
and in Wisdom ii. 10, t h e active, oceurs plication, To apply with respect to some
in t h e same sense. Hesychius explains it object, as in A c t s xxv. 2 4 . Polyb. iv. 7 6 .
by Xóyov e^eiv to regará.} Theoph. Char. i. 2. Wisd. viii. 2 1 . xvi.
EUgp '~Evrpé(j>ii), from
0
iv in or with, and 28. T h e n joined with hwep and a noun,
rpétpw to nourish.— To nourish in or with. it expresses direct application for another.
occ. 1 T i m . iv. 6 ; where see W e t s t e i n , who To apply on bchalf of another, io inter-
quotes from Galen the very phrase T 0 T 2 cede for, as in Rom. viii. 2 7 , 3 4 . H e b . vii.
A O T O I S 'ENETPA'*IIN. [See Eur. 25. of Christ's intercession, or application
Phcen. 3 8 1 . M a x . T y r . Diss. xviii. 9. to God in behalf of sinners. A s Bretsch.
Herodian v. 3 . 5 . v. o. 4. Phil. de Vict. says, our Lord is compared with t h e Pligh
Off. p . 8 5 5 . de Alleg. p. 5 9 . de leg. ad P r i e s t who interceded with God for t h e
Cai. p. 1020. for instances of this verb people by t h e offering u p t h e g r e a t a n -
applied to discipline and learning, as t h e nuai sacrifice; and t h u s it is " Cum san-
nourishment of t h e mind. So in L a t i n . guine accederé ad D e u m , sanguinem in
Senec. in Consol, ad Polyb. c. 2 1 . Plin. expiationem Deo oíferre." So Joseph. A n t .
E p . ix. 3 3 . Sil. I t a l . ii. 2 8 6 . See Lcesner. xiv. 10. 13. W i t h Kara and a noun, it
Obss. e Phil. p . 3 9 9 . Suicer. i. p . 1127. expresses io malee application against one,
D ' O r v i l l . ad Charit. i. c. 2. p . 220. edit. lo aecuse, as iu Rom. xi. 2. 1 Mace. viii.
32. x. 6 1 . 6 3 . xi. 2 5 ; and without t h e
"Evrpopoc, tí, u, ?/, from iv in, and rpó- preposition, x. 64. iElian. V . H . i. 2 1 .
poe a tremor, terror, which s e e . — I n a Polyb. iv. 3 0 . 1.]
tremor, terrijied, irembling through fear. ESQI" 'EVTVXLTTIO, from iv in, and TVXÍTTLO

occ. Acts vii. 3 2 . xvi. 29. H e b . xii. 2 1 . lo roll or wrap round, as t h e coverlet of a
'Evrpowii, rjc, i¡, from ivréroowa perf. bed, from róXi] a coverlet.
mid. of ivTpí-iru),—Sliame. occ. 1 Cor. vi. I. To swatke, wrap up in. occ. M a t ,
5. xv. 3 4 . [ P s . x x x v . 26.] xxvii. 59. L u k e xxiii. 5 3 .
'Evrpvtpáio, ¿j, from iv in, rpvtpáw to in- I I . To wrap up. occ. J o h n xx. 7.
dulge in luxury, which see.— To Uve liix- 'Evrv-óto, LO, from ev in, a n d TVTTÓLO
to
uriously, banquet, revel, o c c 2 P e t . ii. 13. impress a mark, from rvwoc an impressed
[ T h e passage is ivrpv(j>tor>res iv rale awá- mark or figure, which see.— 'To engrave.
raiQ avrüiv, or iv rale áyínraie vpiov, for occ. 2 Cor. iii.,7. [ P l u t a r c h . viii, p . 672.
there is a doubt as to t h e r i g h t reading. Aristot. de Mund, c. 6.}
Now áyámi is a love-feast, or may denote IfSji 0
'Evv&pí'((i>, from ev in, and v&ple
a gift of charity ; and then we may t r a n s - conlumcly, contemptuous outrage. To
íate here, who Uve luxuriously in your- offer a contemptuous or contumelious in-
sacred feasts, or who abuse your charity jury or outrage to, to injure contumeliously.
lo Uve luxuriously. In this sense t h e occ. Heb. x. 29. [So Joseph. A n t . v. 8. 12.
word oceurs, Herodian ii. 3 . 2 2 . X e n . In t h e same a u t h o r , I. 1. 4 , with iic- Iu
Hell. iv. 1. 15. If t h e other reading be iElian. V . H . ix. 8, with t h e dative.]
preferred, it may be, To exult; exuliing in, 'EVVKVLÍL'CLO, opai, from évínrviov.— To
their own deceits, feeling pleasure from dream. [ I n this sense it oceurs, G e n .
deceiving others, as in Isa. Iv. 2. lvii. 4 . xxxvii. 6, 9, 10. Isa. x x i x . 8. Ivi. 10. Ari-
H a b . i. 10 : or p e r h a p s to amuse one's self stot. H i s t . An. iv. 1 0 ; b u t it is generally
with any one, derive pleasure from insull- used of those who are admonished qf any
ing him, as Brets. says. H e translates it thing by God in a dream, as in Acts ii. 7.
living luxuriously in their own vices. See See D e u t . xiii. 1—5, where i t is followed
Irmisch on Herodian iii. 5. 4, where i t is by évínrviov, as also in Joel ii. 2 8 . In
to plume one's self on.~\—The L X X have J u d . v. 8, i t is used in a bad s e n s e ; either
used this word, Isa. Iv. 2. lvii. 4, for t h e those deceived by false dreams, or deceiv-
H e b . j ; i ? n n lo delight one's self. ing by pretended dreams. Such persons
'Evrvy-)(ávi¡>, from iv in, a n d rvyyávio are described in J e r . xxiii. 2 5 , 2 7 . xxix. 8.]
to get, altain. 'Évínrviov, H, ro, from év in, and vrrvoe
[ I , To get lo lite company and speech sleep.—A dream. So in L a t i n insom-
qf any one, to address one's self lo him, nium a dream, from in in, and somnus
to meet. I t h i n k it usually implies some sleep. occ. A c t s ii. 17, [where it is a reve-
purpose or pelilion, aud so says Deyling, lalion by dream. See the passages of the
O . T . cited in t h e last word. Schwarz. 'E¿£, A Preposition of the same import
(Comm. 1. 9. p . 4 9 3 ) , remarles t h a t this as ÍK, for which it is used before a vowel.
word is realiy an adjective, and t h a t tiSog See therefore under 'EK.
a sight, is understood.] 'EíctyyÉXXw, from i\\ out, and áyyí'XXw
'Évúrriov, [ A preposition governing a to lell, declare.
genitive, derived from t h e neuter of ivá>- [ I . To tell by message. Demost. Phil.
TTIOC, i. e. o iv ¿nrl &v, i. e. being in sight. i. p . 4 5 . Reisk.]
So KUT ivúwiov (or, as in t h e N . T., in II. To tell out, declare abroad. occ.
one word) has t h e same sense. T u ivínria 1 P e t . ii. 9. [Ecclus. xliv. 15. P s . i x .
are the interior walls of a house, &c. which 14.]
received light through t h e open doors.] 'E£ciyooá£w, from i'í out or from, and
[1. Before, i. e. in the presence or ayop¿i(o) to buy.
hearing of any one. L u k e v. 2 5 . viii. 4 7 . I. To buy or redeem. from. I t is a p -
xxiii. 14. Rom. xii. 17. Rev. viii. 14. al. plied to our redemption by Christ from,
Gen. xxiv. 5.] the curse and yoke of t h e law. occ. Gal.
[2. Before, of place. Rev. iv. 5 , 6. xii. iii. 1 3 . iv. 5 .
4-] I I . To redeem, spoken of time. occ.
[ 3 . To or with, like t h e Latin apud. E p h . v. 16. Col. iv. 5 . T h e same phrase
Acts x . 3 1 . Rev. xii. 10. xvi. 1 9 . ] is used in Theodotion's versión of D a n . i i .
[4. W i t h a gen. it is p u t for t h e simple 8, where latipbv vpeie it,ayop¿i'Cere plainly
dative. Luke xxiv. 1 1 . Acts vi. 5. H e b . iv. means ye are gaining or protracting time ;
13. xiii. 2 1 . 2 Sam. x. 3 . See Gesen. p . and priucipally, if not solely, in this view
S20. 9.] it is, I apprehend, to be understood, E p h .
[ 5 . In the judgment of. L u k e i. 15, v. 16. '~El,ayopa'£óp£voi rov Kaipbv, re-
17." Acts iv. 19. viii. 2 1 . 1 P e t . iii. 4. deeming the time, gaining or protracting
Rev. iii. 2. 1 Saín. ii. 7 . ] it, because the days are -novnpai evil,
[G- Against. L u k e xv. 1 8 , 2 1 . 1 Sam. afflicting, abounding in troubles and per-
xii. G. x x . 1.] secutions. Comp. E p h . vi. 13, a n d L X X
[7- To, A c t s ix. 15.] in Gen. xlvii. 9, and see W h i t b y on E p h .
"Evti¡rL'Co¡i.ai, from iv in, into, and '¿Q, v. 16. B u t this sense of t h e expression is
gen. ¿¡roe, an ear.—To admil or receive still more evident in Col. iv. 5 , Walk in
into the ears, to hearken to, a u r i b u s p e r - wisdom towards those that are without,
cipere. occ. Acts ii. 1 4 . — T h e L X X have i. e. your heathen neighbours and g o -
frequently used this verb, which seems vernors, redeeming the lime, i. e. b y your
Hellenistical, and generally for t h e H e b . p r u d e n t and blameless conduct, gaining
J'ítfn to hearken, listen, derived in like as much time and opportunity as you can
manner from flK the ear. Comp. Ecclus. from perseeution and death. [Schl. says,
xxxiii. 18 or 19. [Fischer. Prol. de Vet. 'E'íayopá'Cio is in this place, to have all
L e x . N . T . xxxi. 2. p . 6 9 3 , thinks t h e the anxiety and care of a merchanl, to
word was commonly used in t h e Alex- observe any thing anxiously and cau-
andrian or Macedonian dialect. I t occurs tiously; and he translates this passage,
Gen. iv. 2 3 . I s . i. 2. Job xxxiii. 1. H o s . seek ( e a r n e s t l y ) opporlunilies qf living
v. 1. in t h e Test. xii. P a t . p. 5 2 0 . P a - well and correcting others, for in these
lairet on t h e A c t s , quotes Cinnamus, as days there are many hindrances lo virtue.
does Reinesius E p i s t . ad Vorst. 14. p . B r . says, it,ayopa(tú is to buy up entirely,
39. with Gregory Nazianzene and Jose- (a common sense of en) to get the whole qf.
phus Genesius. See also Zonar. Chron. T h e n t h e meaning is, use all your time
p . 108. 4 8 . tom. i. I t seems from a pas- with diligence. See Dresig. de V e r b . Med.
sage in Lactantius, ( E p i c t . I n s t t . divinn. N. T. p.267.]
c. 4 5 , 2.) where he renders i t by surdos 'E£áyü),- from ií, out, and líyio to bring,
inauribat, t h a t t h e active had t h e sense lead.— To bring or lead forih or out. See
also of, to make to hearf\ M a r k viii. 2 3 . xv. 2 0 . L u k e xxiv. 5 0 .
"~E¡2l, ót, ai, ra, Indeclinable, from the J o h n x. 3 . A c t s v. 19. vii. 3 6 . xvi. 3 7 .
Heb. üíUf six, t h e aspirate being used (as [ I n some cases this verb seems t o imply,
in 'éirra from H e b . itmtí?) for t h e sibilant violence or compulsión, as M a r k xv. 2 0 .
letter, which is however resumed in t h e and 2 Chron. xxiii. 14. ; and in D e m o s t h .
Latin sex, and E n g . and French six.— p. 1090. ed. Reisk. and p. 389. i'fy'iyayov
T h e number Six. M a t . xvii. 1. J o h n ii. civrég &Kovrag.~\
20, Acts xxvii. 3 7 , & al. 'EíjaipÉíü, Si, and mid. 'Elfíipíopai, upai,
 E 3 A 270 E S A

from ¿í o?//, and áipf'w ¿o í a i c . I t bnrrows 20. xiii. 18, Let him that hath under-
most of i t s tenses from t h e obsolcte V . slanding count the number of the Beast:
for it is the number qf a man; and his
I . To lalce or pluck number is six hundred threescore and six,
oul, as au eye. occ.
M a t . v. 29. xviii. 9. See Wetstein. ; as most of t h e M S S . read in Greek
I I . To take out of affiietion or danger, n u m e r á i s ; b u t t h e Alexandrian has in
lo dcliver, cruere, eripere. Acts vii. 10, words a t l e n g t h , et)ai<:ácrwi HíjKovTa ?£.
[ 3 4 . xii. 11. xxiii. 2 7 . ] xxvi. 17. Gal. i. After t h e very m a n y elabórate and fan-
4. & al, See E l s n e r and W e t s t e i n on ciful explanations which have been given
Gal. [See Alciphr. i. E p . 9. Demosth. of this number from t h e time of Irenajus
p. 25C. 2. ed. Reisk. Polyb. xv. 22. E x o d . to t h e present d a y , (for a specimen of
iii. 8. Josh. ii. 13. 1 Kings i. 12. S c h l , which see Vitringa a n d Lowman,) t h e
Bretschn., and Wahl, say, and r i g h t l y , most simple and j u s t interpretation seems
t h a t in Acts xxvi. 17. it is to select, as in to be t h a t of D r . Bryce Johnston in his
D e u t . xxxi. 1 1 . I s . xl viii. 10. xlix. 7. Commentary, which I therefore recom-
J o b xxxvi. 2 1 . X e n . Cyr. iv. 5 . 16. A n a b . mend to t h e serious and impartía] a t t e n -
v. 3 . 4. T h u c . iii. 115. 'E|a/pEroe in this tion of t h e r e a d e r ; after observing t h a t i t
sense (selccted), is common, G e n . xlviii. is an improvement upon Lowman's.
22.] 'EijaXEí'^uj, from i'í, out, or off, and
'Efrupw, from i'í, out, and cupw to take, áXeícpiú to anoint.—Properly, to wipe off
remove.—To take out or away. occ. 1 Cor. ointment.
v. 2 , 13. [ D e u t . xvii. 7, 12. xxii. 2 1 . ] I . To wipe off, as t e a r s . occ. Rev. vii.
[¡Sgf 'E'íai-iopai,
0
Sfiai, from it) out, and 17. x x i . 4.
liiTítu to require or demand.—To require II. To wipe off, or blot out, as some-
or demand (generally) a person to be d e - w h a t w r i t t e n *. occ. Rev. iii. 5. where see
livered u p to punishment, deposco. occ. W e t s t e i n , Kypke, and Macknight. [See
L u k e xxii. 3 1 . See Raphelius and W e t - H e m s t . on Poli. Onom. viii. 5 5 . A t h e n .
stein on t h e place. [See-Irmisch. on H e - ix. 4 0 5 . F . X e n . H e l l . ii. 3 . 2 0 . ]
rodian. i. 12. 1 2 . Demosth. de Coron. c. I I I . To blot out, as sins. Acts iii. 19.
13. Joseph. A n t . ii. 5. 3 . Sometimes i t Comp. Isa. xliii. 2 5 . J e r . xviii. 2 3 . W e t -
is in a good sense, to beg ojf, as in X e n . stein cites from Lysias pro Callia, " O - w c
A n a b . i. 1. 3 . Demosth. p . 5 4 6 . 2 1 . ed. 'EgAAIíGE'IHt CIVTIS ra 'AMAPTH'-
Reisk. Bretschn. says i t is here, to lay M A T A ¿ÍXXCÍ. T h a t his o t h e r offences
miares for, and quotes a similar use in m i g h t be blotted out.—[Schl. says, t h a t
t h e T e s t . xii. P a t r u m , p . 7 2 9 . ra rtvív- this metaphorical use of t h e word alindes
Liara rS BsXiap £¡g iráuav irorriptav OXÍ^Jeoie to creditors blotting o u t t h e ñames of
H,aiT¡¡crovrai vpae. Schl. observing, t h a t those debtors whose accounts were settled.
it is used of course metaphorically, Salan See Wesseling on Diodor. Sic. i. p . 2 0 7 .
desires lo gei yon into his power.] T h e word is used also of a law, lo abró-
'Et)aíipvnc, Adv. from it, of, a n d aí<pvr¡e gate. Col. ii. 1 4 . Demosth. p . 4 6 8 . ed.
suddenly, which see u n d e r 'AicivíSioc.— R e i s k . ] — I n t h e L X X it commonly a n -
Of a sudden, suddenly. M a r k xiii. 3 6 . & swers to t h e H e b . n r i D lo wipe off, blot
al. [ P r o v . vi. 15. xxiv. 2 2 . al.] out, a n d is applied to blotting oul a
'E't)aKo\nQiio, <5, from i'í out, or em- written ñame or inscription, Exod. xxxii.
phatic, and aicoXudéid to follow, which see. 32, 3 3 . N u m . v. 2 3 . P s . Ixix. 2 8 . — t o
—To follow, by going out of t h e way in blotting out sins, N e h . iv. 5 . P s . Ii. 10.
which one was before, or to follow tho- cix. 14. Isa. xliii. 2 5 . J e r . xviii. 2 3 .
roughly, persist in following. occ. 2 P e t . 'E'í,¿i\\o¡xai, from oíd, forth, and
i. 16. ii. 2, 1 5 . O n 2 P e t . i. 16, W o l - cíXXopai to leap.—To leap forth. occ.
fius and Wetstein cite from Josephus, Acts iii. 8. [Joel ii. 5 . H a b b . i. 8. X e n .
Procem. in A n t . t h e phrase Tole MY'- Cyr. vii. 1. 1 4 . ]
0 0 1 2 'EÍ?AK0A0YQH'2ANTA2. [In 'E¿;a>'cWa<Ti£, wg, A t t . EWC, i), from ¿t,
t h e other two passages, i t is r a t h e r to from, and avá^aoie a rising again or re-
imítate. T h e word oceurs Ecclus. v. 2. surrection.—A resurreclionfrom, t h e dead
Is. Ivi. 1 1 . J o b xxxi. 9. Amos ii. 4. namely. occ. P h i l . iii. 11, where i'&iyá^a-
T e s t . x i i . P a t r . p . 6 4 3 . Polvb. xvii. 10.
* [ I t m u s t b e remembered, that the tablets for
'EÍ,aKÓcrioi, cu, a , from'é't)six, and hcarov writing were covered w i t h w a x , whence this e x -
an hundred.—Six hundred. occ. Rev. xiv. pression is very proper.]
 E 8 A 271 E S E

o-ii' r£í>> vEKphiv literally denotes " the re- '~E£airopko¡xai, üpai, from ii, intensive,
surrection from the dead; which sinee and airopéopaL lo hesitate, be at a loss or
the apostle represents as a m a t t e r very stand, be perplexed, which see.— To be
difficult to be obtained, it cannot be the utlerly at a loss or a stand, to be in the
restoration of t h e body simply, for t h a t utmost perplexity. occ. 2 Cor. i. 8. iv. 8 .
the wicked shall arrive at, whether t h e y [ P s . Ixxxviii. 15. Polyb. iii. 4 8 . 4 . ]
seek it or n o t ; b u t is t h e resurrección of 'E£a7ro=r£ÁAw, from ii, out, forth, and
the body, refashioned like to the glorious ¿LTTOtkWa lo send.
body of Christ, mentioned ver. 2 1 , which I. To send forth. occ. A c t s vii. 12. ix.
is a privilege peculiar to the sons, and 30. xi. 2 2 . xii. 11. xvii. 14. xxii. 2 1 .
t h a t by which tliey are to be distinguished Gal. iv. 4 , 6. [ G e n . xiv. 1. Polyb. iii.
from t h e wicked a t t h e J u d g m e n t . " M a c - 1 1 . 4 . ]
kniglit, whom see, and on 1 Thess. iv. 16. I I . To send away, dismiss [contempiu-
Note 5 . [Polyb. iii. 5 5 . 4. I t is doubtful oush¡7\ occ. L u k e i. 5 3 . x x . 10, 11. [ D e u t .
whether t h e word occurs in G e n . vii. 4. x x . ' l 9, 29.]
or not, some M S S . have it. I t is t h e r e ¡ f ^ ° E£apn£w, from k'í, intensive, and
expulsión, as aví^pi often means, to turn aprioe complete.
out, and is used especially of expulsión of I. Of t i m e , To complete entirely. occ.
families or nations from their abode.] A c t s xxi. 5.
'E'£,avaréXKo), from k'í oul, and ávaréWw I I . To furnish or fit complelely. occ.
lo rise, spring.—To spring up, forth, or 2 T i m . iii. 17. [Joseph. A n t . iii. 2 . 2.
out of the ground, as corn. occ. M a t . xiii. Diod. Sic. xiv. 19.]
5. M a r k iv. 5 . — T h e L X X use it four ' E í j a ^ P Á T R R W , from ¿i, out, and a^penrra) to

times in t h e same view, b u t transitively, lighten.— To emit flashes of light, to

for t h e H e b . rpDSfíl to cause to spring. shine, gusten as lightning. occ. L u k e ix.
Comp. 'AvaréXXo) I I . [Gen. ii. 9. P s . civ. 29. [ N a h u m iii. 3 . E z . i. 7. of armsi]
14. exii. 4. Amos i. 4 . ] ¡§gp° 'Eijauríjc, Adv. q. d. 'it, avrijcfrom
' E S á e / T J J J U T , from 12- oul, or from, and or at the same, ¿ípece time, n a m e l y . — A t
aví-npi to \jnake lo~\ rise up. the same lime, presently, instantly, imme-
I. To raise up seed from., the woman diately. occ. A c t s x. 3 3 . xi. 11. xxiii. 3 0 .
namely. So Lot's d a u g h t e r says, ac- Phil. ii. 2 3 . I t is, in Mill's and W e t -
cording to the L X X , Gen. xix. 3 2 . 3 4 . stein's editions, printed in two words, íí,
'ESANA2TII'2Í2MEN 'EK rS wcirpoQ f/pióv LLvrfie, M a r k vi. 2 5 , where see W e t s t e i n ' s
o-¡ríp¡j.a, Let tis raise u p seed from our fa- Note. [ L o b e c k on P h r y n . p . 47.]
ther. occ. M a r k xii. 19. L u k e x x . 2 8 . 'E^eyéipio, from ií, out, and iyíipio to
I I . To rise upfrom among others. occ. raise.—To raise up. [as from sleep. G e n .
Acts xv. 5. xxviü. 16. & a l . ; and t h u s from death,
' E £ A 7 R « - á w , LO, from il, from, and ¿nra- in Dan. xii. 2.] occ. 1 Cor. vi. 14. Rom.
rúdj lo seduce.—To seduce from the r i g h t ix. 17, / have raised thee up, i. e. not
way, lo deceioe into sin or error, occ. Rom. originally, or from t h y b i r t h , b u t '•pmDjJrT
vii. 11. xvi. 18. 1 Cor. iii. 18. 2 Cor. xi. / have caused thee to stand or subsist (as
3 . 2 Thess. ii. 3 . [ E x . viii. 2 9 . X e n . Cyr. it is in the H e b r e w of E x o d . ix. 1 6 ) , /
v. 4. 10.] have preserved thee from perishing by
'E!,áiriva, Adv. the same as i^airiví¡s, the preceding plagues. T o t h i s sense t h e
which is used not only by H o m e r , II. v. L X X , SiaTr¡phQr¡p thou hast been pre-
line 9 1 . II. ix. line 6, & al. for é'í,aí<¡ivr¡Q served. Comp. M a c k n i g h t on Rom. [So
(which see), b u t likewise by Xenophon, Schl., observing t h a t t h e verb which a p -
Cyropsed. p . 3 4 2 . edit. Hutcliinson, 8vo. pears in H i p h a l in E x . ix. 16, is clearly,
Memor. Socrat. p . 2 8 2 . edit. Simpson, to remain, to survive, in E x . x x i . 2 1 . a n d
Cyri E x p e d . lib. iv. p . 3 2 3 , 4 6 2 , edit. J e r . xxxii. 1 4 . ; others say, / have made
Hutcliinson, 8vo. (where see N o t e ) , and you king. Br. makes it, I have excited
by Longinus, p. 148. edit. 3tiaj, Pearce. you against, as 2 S a m . xii. 11. J o n . i. 1 3 .
See also Kypke.—Of a sudden, imme- However, t h e g r e a t body of divines give
dialely. occ. M a r k ix. 8, where see W e t - the same interpretation as P a r k h u r s t . See
stein.—The L X X have frequently used Wolf's note for a list of t h e m . ]
kl/nriva. in t h e same sense. I t seems an í§|§?°" Et,eipi, from ki, out, and dpX io be.
Hellenistical w o r d ; K y p k e , however, — I n t h e N e w T e s t a m e n t it occurs only in
quotes it from Jambíichus. [ N u m b . vi. 9. t h e 3d pers. sing. '¿feri, and n e u t . p a r -
Josh. xi. 7-] ticip. k'é,m>. " E ^ £ 7 Í is generally used as an
 impersonal V. b u t sometimes as a personal
one. See 1 Cor. vi. 12. x. 2 3 . I t is construed
with a dative of the person, and with an
infinitive mood. ' See M a t . xiv. 4. xix. 3.
xii. 2. xxii. 17. N e u t . particip. 'E£¿>, ro,
Lawful. occ. A c t s ii. 29. 2 Cor. xii. 4.
b u t in this latter passage é'í¡bv may be
rendered possible, q. d. ÍK rije SvvíipEioc
ov, being according to, or in one's power,
in which sense the excellent Raphelius on
t h e place has abundantly showed, t h a t
both the verb and participle are often used
in Xenophon.
'"E¿,tipi, from E £ out, and eipi lo go.
I. To go out ov forth. occ. Acts xiii.
4 2 . [ E x . xxviii. 3 5 . ]
[ I I . To depart, (as from a c i t y ) . Acts
xvii. 15. x x . / .]
[ I I I . To escape, (as from a ship). Acts
xxvii. 4 3 . ]
'TLi,E\éyyw, from i'i, intensive, and
éXÉyxw lo convine?. To convince or con-
vict thoroughly. occ. J u d e ver. 15. Xeno-
phon, Apolog. Socrat. § 18, edit. Simpson.
"E<y£—pr¡dúg oíivaír av ' E S E A E T S A I
ME ¿)Q ipeíidopai, If no one can convici me
of lying. [Is. ii. 4. T h u c y d . iii. 64.]
'E'£,ÉXKIO, from i\ out or away, and '¿XKLO
to draw.— To draw out, as a fish with a
hook. So Herodotus of the crocodile, lib.
ii. cap. 70, 'Erreav ?¿ 'ESEAK.T'SGHi éc
yijv, After it is drawn out upon t h e land.
Comp. &¿Xza(o¡. Kypke cites from X e -
nophon, Cyropajd. lib. viii. Mr) 'Y1JO'
TQV rrapaíriKa {¡Soviov 'EAKO'MENON
'AIIO* nov iiyaOüv, Not drawn away by
present pleasures, from what is good. occ.
J a m . i. 14, where see W e t s t e i n and
Kypke. [ T h e r e seems to be some notion
offorcé in this word. See Prov. x x x . 3 3 .
On its difierencefrom SsXeá^io, see Heisen.
Nov. H y p o t h . ad E p . Jacob, p . 525.]
Ejjjgp 'E^épapa, aros, ro, from itepáio to
0
empty out, evacúate, also to vomii (as t h e
V . is used not only by Aquila for the
H e b . íiMp, Lev. xviii. 28, b u t also by the
medical writers among the G r e e k s ; see
Wetstein on 2 Pet. ii. 2 2 ) , which from fíj
out, and ipíao to empty (so Hesychius
fptjv, KEvioo-at), and this from H e b . ¡T1J>
to pour or empty out.—Evacuation, or
matter evacualed, by vomit, vomit. occ.
2 P e t . ii. 2 2 . — T h e L X X , in t h e parallel
passage, Prov. xxvi. 1 1 , render t h e H e b .
word M¡7 vomit, answering to empapa of
St. Peter, by t h e more usual Greek word
'éptrov. ['Efcpáw oceurs in Dioscorid. vi.
19. Archigenes apud Galen. de Comp.
Med. p . locc. viii. 3 . 376- See G a t a k e r
O p p . C r i t t . p. 854. Bochart. H i e r . lib. ii.
c. 5 5 . p . 672. Berger. ad Alciph. iii. E p ,
7. Lobeck. ad P h r y n . p. 64'.]
'~Et,ep£vváiú, w, from i'í, intens. and iptv-
váco to search.—To search very diligenlly
or carefully. occ. 1 P e t . i. 10.—The L X X
frequently use it in this sense. See Ínter
al. I Sam. x x i i i . 2 3 . Prov. ii. 4. Zeph. i.
12. [Polyb. xiv. 1. 13.]
'JLtlépxopat, from it, out, and tpyppai to
go or come.
I. [ T o go out, as M a t . v. 26. viii. 24,
M a r k iii. 6. v. 2. L u k e viii. 27. & al.
used often of those who are going out or
departing from a city, house, &c. as M a t ,
xii. 14. M a r k ii. 13. vi. 12. Luke x. 3 5 .
B u t , in Greek these neuter verbs often
imply t h e action of some extraneous forcé ;
t h u s in H e b . iii. 16, it is to be led out;
in M a t . viii. 32. xii. 4 3 , 44. M a r k v. 13.
vii. 2 9 , 30. ix. 2 9 . L u k e viii. 2. it is lo
be east out, or expelled, in which sense
ÍKWÍTTTIO is often found on t h e same prin-
cipie, e. g. Diodor. Sic. xiii. 174. Agnin,
t h e verb is used of lightning going out or
fiashing, M a t . xxiv. 2 7 . E z . i. 13. Zach.
ix. 1 4 . ; of fluids, as blood, flowing out,
M a r k v. 30. L u k e vi. 19. John xix. 3 4 . ;
of rumours going out or spreading, Mat,
ix. 26. M a r k i. 2 8 . L u k e iv. 14. vii. 17.
J o h n xxi. 2 3 . Rom. x. 18. al. and so of
decrees, being promulgated, L u k e ii. 1.
D a n . ii. 13. I t is used in t h e sense of
escaping, John x. 3 9 . Larn. vii. 1 9 ; and
in t h a t of vanishing away, in Acts xvi.
19. on which see Abresch. A n i m . ad
iEschyl. p. 612.]
I I . [To come out, or come forth. Mat.
viii. 2 8 . J o h n xi. 44. See also M a t . ii. 6.
A c t s xv. 2 4 . 1 J o h n ii. 19. ( I t is lo
creep forth in Acts xxviii. 3.) I t is used
of t h o u g h t s and words coming out of the
heart, &c. M a t . xv. 18, 19. J a m e s iii. 10.;
and of a messenger, &c. coming, or being
sent by another, as M a r k i. 3 8 . John viii.
42. xvi. 2 7 , 28. xvii. 8 . — T h e phrase
it,épx°P Kai iicrépyopai is an Hebraism,
ai
importing, I carry on my daily life, my
affairs. I t oceurs John x. 9. (where
T i t t m a n quotes N u m b . xxvii. 17. 2 Chron.
i. 10. and other places), and A c t s i. 2 1 . See
^EneasPoliorc.c,24.—ThephrasefStpxoí""
ÍKTÍJC óafvós rivbc is (to come forth from
one's loins), to derive one's origin from.
H e b . vii. 5. See Gen. xxxv. 1 1 . 1 Kings
viii. 19. i n t h e H e b . and Vorst. Philol. S.
c. 3 9 . In Gen. xv. 4. & al. é'&pxopai '¿K
TIVOQ is used in t h e same sense. 'Et,ípx°-
pai ÍK pían rtvüiv is lo quit the sociely of.
2 Cor. vi. 1 / . — I n 1 J o h n ii. 1 9 , some trans- — To carry forih and propágale sound.
íate, They were. expelled by us. Sclil. Henee in t h e passive it is, to.resonad,
gives it both in this May, a n d simply, or be propagated. 1 Thess. i. 8 . So
They wenl forih, which is far more agree- Polyb. x x x . 4 . 7 . Joel iii. 1 4 . H e -
able to t h e context.] sychius has t^rryúro, é^nnitro, and E*£/J-
"E'íeti. See u n d e r "EÍJEIUI. Xn~ ' aL
E^ÍJXOEV, éicripvx&l- l
P°!h O n .
n

'EijErá^w, from ¿? out, or emphatic, and 1. 1 1 8 , this verb is used in a n e u t e r

lrá£w to inquire, examine, which see u n - sense.]
der 'Avtra(ü>. "E£tc, toe, A t t . EWC, i'/, from É'XW, É'fcfw.—•
I. To examine or inquire accurately or Hábil, use. occ. H e b . v. 1 4 ; where see
thoroughly. occ. M a t . ii. 8 . x. I I . On W e t s t e i n a n d A r r i a n Epietet. lib. ii. cap.
Mat. ii. Kypke cites t h e expression 1 8 , a t t h e beginning. [ S o Polyb. i. 5 I.
' A K P I B Í T S ' E A E T A ' Z E I N from Strabo, 4 . x. 4 7 . 7 . Aristot. R h e t . i. J. I t is
Demosthenes, and iEschines. \_IEA. V . H . p u t for method of living in X e n . M e m . i.
ii. 2 0 . Polvb. v. 8 1 . D e u t . xix. 8 . Ecclus. 2 . 4 ; for hábil of body, the body itself
xviii. 2 0 . ] ' in Arrian. Diss. Epict. iv. 4 . 2 5 . J u d g .
I I . To examine, ask. occ. John xxi. 12. xiv. 9 . D a n . vii. 1 4 . Ecclus. x x x .
'E41), r¡c, 1), from t h e V . íxppai, fut. 13.]
ítppai, to be next or immediately following 'Egfcnpi, or 'E£i*áw, ¿i, from E^ out,
in time, which see u n d e r "E^oi X V . — and Í'T?IIU or írao> lo stand, place. [In
Subsequencc, succession, order. This N.
the transitive tenses (i. e. t h e present,
however is hardly to be found, except in ¡ imperf., fut., and Ist aor.,) t h e verb
the gen. Éti/e, in which case it is used, by i means, To remove out of its place, expel.
an ellipsis of the preposition Kara, for i;aff \ See Exod. xxiii. 2 7 . Josh. x. 1 0 . B u t i t
lí,i¡o in. subsequencc, succcssivcly, imme- j is especially applied to t h e mind, lo move,
diately in snecession. Henee with t h e •disturb, transport the mind. ( M a r k Ari-
fem. article used as an adjective, 'Ev r;;-j tonin. ix. 3 7 . ) T h e n ta aslonish, to
¡lije vfépa. On the next or following amaze, perplex. L u k e xxiv. 2 2 . Acts viii.
day. occ. L u k e i x . 3 7 . So npepa being 9. In t h e intransitive tenses and passive,
understood, 'Ev rrj íHfie, o c c L u k e vii. I 1 ; To be astonished, or Iransported by
and TJJ E&c, occ. Acts xxi. 1. xxv. 1 7 . amazcmenl. M a t . xii. 2 3 . M a r k ii. 1 2 .
xxvii. 1 8 . T h a t in these expressions we v. 4 2 . vi. 5 1 . L u k e iii. 4 7 . viii. 5 5 . A c t s
should understand t h e preposition rara ii. 7 . 1 2 . viii. 1 3 . ix. 2 ! . x. 4 5 . xii.
before ɣ͡C, appears reasonable from t h e (where, perhaps, fear is implied. See
use of t h e compound word KaOeíijc, which Ezek. ii. 6 . Micah vii. 1 7 . ) Comp. Gen.
comp. See also Scapula's Lexic. in 'E^i/c. xxviii. 1 8 . xliii. 3 3 . E x o d . xxiii. 2 7 . Diod.
[This word 'Eíj) is a mere figment of Sic. xiv. 7 1 . Polyb. xxxii. 2 5 8 . X e n . Mem.
Parkhurst's.] ii. 1. 4 . In M a r k iii. 2 1 . a n d 2 Cor. v.
'E^nyéopai, Spai, from Í £ out, or ein- 1 3 , it expresses such t r a n s p o r t as
. p h a t i c , and riyiouat lo tell, declare. Comp. a m o n n t s to insanity. To be out qf one's
Ainyéopai.— To declare, relate thoroughlywits. In these expressions, t h e r e is an
and particularly, lo recount. [explain, in-ellipse of ra j'oós or ra fpovelv ( X e n .
terpret.'] occ. Luke" xxiv. 3 5 . J o h n i. 1 8 . M e m . i. 3 . 1 2 . ) or rwv ¡pptvwv, Joseph.
A c t s x. 8 . xv. 1 2 , 1 4 . xxi. 1 9 . Alberti, A n t . x. 7 . 3 . See J e r e m . iv. 9 . Vales.
W e t s t e i n , and Kypke, on J o h n i. 1 8 , show Emend. i. c. 7 . p. 1 4 . ]
this word is peculiarly applied by t h e Efgir
'Efco-yyu, from E'£ out, or inten-
Greek writers to [explainiug~] things es- sive, and \ayiih>, lo be strong, able.— To
teemed divine. [See J u d g . vii. 1 3 . 2 Kings be thoroughly able. neo. E p h . iii. 1 8 . ['E¿j
viii. 5 . Hesychius explains it by ippr¡- in composition augments t h e forcé. See
vtvüi, and see X e n . M e m . i. 2 . 5 8 . H e m - Zeun. ad Viger. p . 5 8 4 . T h i s word oc-
sterh. ad Poli. viii. 1 0 . 1 2 4 . Wessel ad curs E c c l u s . vii. 6 . JEUan V. H . iv. 1 8 .
Diodor. Sic. xiii. 3 5 . a n d L a m p e on S t . vi. 1 3 . ]
John i. 1 8 . ] "E£oc¡oe, a, i), from t£ out, a n d ó'c'os a
'Eí-jjKojTa, oí, át, r a , Indeclinable, from way.
i'? six, and r)icovra t h e decimal termina- \ . A going out, departurc. occ. Heb.
tion, of which see under 'EtSopi'iKovra. —
xi. 2 2 , where it is applied to t h e children
Sixty. M a t . xiii. 8 . & al. of IsraePs departurc out of E g y p t , from
['E$Je. ^ See 'E£»).] which event t h e L X X entitled t h e second
['Efy]x¿u>, ¿5, from !£ and >?x ' ' ° sound. book of Moses, "E¿;ocV, and from t h e m
£ w L

T
 ESO
t h e Vulgate and. modera translations,
Exodus*.
I I . Departure, decease, q. d. exit. occ.
L u k e ix. 3 1 . 2 P e t . i. 15. "Efrdoe is used
in this sense not only in W i s d . iii. 2,
(Comp. ch. vii. 6.) b u t in t h e Greek
writers. So the L a t i n s have exitus and
excessus for dying. See Wolfius and W e t -
stein on L u k e ix. 3 1 , and comp. Kypke.
[ S e e for t h e same phrase, Joseph. Ant.
iv. 8. 2. where ra £iji> is added. Philo de
C h a r i t . p . 7 0 1 . A. Plin. E p . vi. 16. Corn.
N e p . ix. 4. 3 . Juven. x. 127- L a c t a n t . de
M o r t . Persec. c. 50. G r e g . Nazian. O r a t .
xl. p . 644.]
'EfcoXodpeíio, from l£ intensive, and óXo-
6p£vú> to destroy.—To destroy utterly.
occ. Acts iii. 2 3 . — T h i s V. is very often
used in t h e L X X , and in Gen. xvii. 14.
Exod. xxx. 3 3 , & al. freq. for the H e b .
n133 to be cut off. [Joseph. A n t . viii. 1 1 .
'E^opoXoyéio, ü, from ¿|f intens. and
¿poXoyéoj to promise, profess, which see.
I. To promise. occ. L u k e xxii. 6 ; where
W e t s t e i n cites Lysias using t h e simple V.
bpoXoyéo) in the same view. [See Joseph.
A n t . vi. 3 . 5. viii. 4. 3 . Xen. A n a b . vii.
4. 9. K r e b s . Obs. Flav. p . 135.]
I I . 'E^opoXoyéofiai, ü/iat, Mid. To
fess, own, as sins. occ. M a t . iii. 6. Mark
i. 5. A c t s x i x . 18. J a m . v. 16. O n M a t .
iii. 6, E l s n e r and Wetstein show t h a t
P l u t a r c h , Heliodorus, and Lucian .apply
t h e V . in a like sense. [ I n Deyling.
'Obss. Sacr. iv. p . 72, we see t h a t exomolo-
gesin faceré, and efcopoXoyeícrdaí, in t h e
primitive church, were the phrases for
public confession. Both he and Suicer in
voce, point out t h e difference between this
and auricular confession.]
I I I . To profess, confess, as t h e t r u t h .
occ. P h i l . ii. 1 1 .
I V . To confess, own, as belonging to
one. occ. Rev. iii. 5.
V. W i t h a D a t i v e following, To give
praise or glory to, lo glorify. occ. M a t .
xi. 2 5 , (where Campbell, whom see, I í c
adore thee") L u k e x. 2 1 . Rom. xiv. 1 1 .
xv. 19. T h e L X X most commonly use it
in t h i s last seuse, answering to t h e H e b .
m i n , which word they elsewhere render
b y aivüv to praise, as Gen. xlix. 8.
1 Chron. xvi. 7; & al. by vpvdv lo celé-
brate wilh hymns, to latid. Isa. xii. 4. &
* [ I t is u s e d often of military expeditions. S e e
f i l i a n . V . H . i. 7. ii. 1 1 . xiii. 1 2 . T h u c y d . ii. 10.
v. 1 4 . ]
274 ESO
al. [ 1 Chron. xvi. 4 . 2 Chron. v. 12. vi.
24.]
'E£¿V, Particip. pres. neut. from '¿geipi,
which see.
'E%opicíc;ti> from intens. and bpid'(w to
adjure.—To adjure, impose an oaih on
another, put him to his oaih. occ. M a t .
xxvi. 63.—In t h e L X X of G e n . xxiv. 3 ,
it answers to t h e H e b . í?'2tVrt to cause to
swear, adjure. Josephus also uses i t ,
A n t . lib. ii. cap. 8. § 2, and in lib. ix.
cap. 7- § 4, applies t h e V. 'E£?Í2TKH2EN,
he adjured, to t h e high-pricst, Jehoiada.
[ S e e iEschin. de F a l s . Leg. p . 2 5 8 . P l u t .
A p o p h t h . p . 174. C. 'Oprimió is so used
in 1 Kings xxii. 6. 2 Chron. xviii. 15.
A t h e n . viii. p . 3 6 2 . C . See K r e b s . O b s .
Flav. p . 5 9 . 'Eloptcéw oceurs in Demosth.
adv. Nea?r. p . 5 2 8 . and T h u c y d . v. 4 7 .
'E^opá'Cw is used for To bind by an oaih,
in Diod. Sic. i. 60. D e m o s t h . p . 1265. ad
Reisk. Polyb. vi. 18. 19-]
E ^ g " 'Etopicterjc, a, ó, from ÉJop/a'f w.—
An exorcist, one who pretends to cast out
devils by adjuring or commanding them
in the divine ñame. occ. Acts xix. 13.
Josephus, A n t . lib. viii. cap. ii. § 5,
(whom see) says t h a t he saw one E l e a z a r
a Jew, by means of t h e ' E £ O P K Í i ' 2 E í 2 N ,
con- exorcisms, t a u g h t by Solomon, casting out
demons, daipóvia, from those who were
possessed by t h e m , and this in t h e p r e -
sence of Vespasian, his sons, the tribunes
of his army, and m a n y of the military.
Comp. M a t . xii. 27, and see W h i t b y ' s
Note there *.
'E^opvcraoj, from t¡¡ out, and opvucria lo
dig.—To dig out.
I . To dig or forcé up, as t h e fíat roof
of a house, eruere. occ. M a r k ii. 4. Comp.
u n d e r 'Atro-s.yá'(w. [ P a r k h u r s t defends
his opinión in the place he refers to. B u t
íífipvaaw can h ardí y be lo forcé up ; and
in this case, t h e people with the sick man
were obviously standing on t h e roof, some
p a r t of which t h e y dug out or removed.
Kuinoel t h i n k s t h a t they merely enlarged
t h e opening for coming out on t h e roof,
enough to let down t h e bed.]
I I . To dig or pluck out, as t h e eye.
occ. Gal. iv. 15. So Lucian Dialog. P r o -
m e t h . & Jov. T 0 T 2 ' 0 Í > 6 A A M 0 Y 2 'Eg-
OPY'TTESOAI. See more instances in
Wetstein. [ J u d g . xvi. 22. 1 Sam. xi. 2.]
'E^ovíeváiú, ii, from ¿£ intens. and ¿Sete,
évoe, no one.—To set at nought, treai
* [ S e e V a n D a l e D i s s . de D i v i n . I d o l a t . V . T .
c. 7- p . 5 2 0 , and K r e b s . O b s . F l a v . p . 2 3 0 . ]
 E ¿5? O 275 E 3 Y

with the uimost contempt. occ. M a r k ix. 1, 2, 3 . [Herodian also (iii. 3 . 12. and
12. [ C o m p . J u d g . ix. 3 8 . P s . xv. 4. 13. comp. ii. 11.) distinguishes k^uo-la
xxii. 2 4 . lxxiii. 20 and 22. Juditli xiii. and apxy. See 1 Cor. xv. 24, and Vales,
19. Ecclus. xlvii. 7. 1 Sam. xv. 26. xvi. ad Euseb. H i s t . E v . V. i. 4 . Krebs. Obss.
I . I n this place of St. M a r k it seems to Flav. p. 282. So Potestas Juvenal. S a t .
be to reject. Hesychius has égudévwo-ae,- x. 99. A m m i a n . Marcell. xv. 5. Sueton.
arrz(íoKÍ¡xacTaQ. So T e s t . xii. P a t . p . 564. Ñ e r o . 3 6 . I n D a n . iv. 2 3 , l^aaía is p u t
See also E u s t r a t . in 1 Nicom. p . 9. 6. for ó i'¿aaíav £%ÍUJ>.] H e n e e , k^ntríai, cu,
E t y m . M . in voc. and Lobeck. ad P h r y n . Angels, or a certain order qf angels, whe-
p. 182.] ther good, E p h . viii. 10. Col. i. 16. 1 P e t .
'E£OV6WEW, w, from l£ intens. and ¿dele, iii. 2 2 . Comp. E p h . i. 21.—or bad, E p h .
ÉVOQ, no one, from ¿TE not even, and hg vi. 12. Col. ii. 15.
one.—To sel at nought, despise, or treat V . The sign or tolcen of being u n d e r
contemptuously. See L u k e xviii. 9. xxiii. t h e power or authority of another, i. e.
I I . A c t s iv. 11. Rom. xiv. 3 . 'E£a0£r?i- the vail. So CEcumenius, KaXvppa, 'Iva
pEvoc, Contemplible, to be despised. Vulg. (¡>alvnrai orí inrb í^anlav rvyvávEí, The
contemplibilis. 2 Cor. x. 10. Comp. u n - vail, t h a t it may appear she is under au-
der KarayivojiTKii) I I . and TJJOE'W I I . [ I n thority ; and Theophylact explains ¿£a-
L u k e xxiii. 1 1 , it is distinctly to treat crlav by Tó r5 i^aaiá^EaBaí avpM,oXov,
wilh contempt, reviling, and derision, and ra'r£Tí, ró KciXvfipa, The sign qf being
i t answers, perhaps, as Schl. says, to under authority, t h a t is, the vail, occ.
p\arra>ri¡McuQ E^HGEVÍ'^ELV in P l u t a r c h . P a - 1 Cor. xi. 10, where see E n g . M a r g .
ral, p. 3 0 8 . Comp. 2 Sam. ii. 30. Prov. Elsner and Wolfius. [ S c h l . says, t h a t
i. 7. E z e k . xxii. 8. 2 Sam. viii. 7. These the vail showed t h e superiorily qf con-
verbs are written i^a&vEai and e £ a - dition of the married women who were
QEVÉCO, E^HSEVOO) and E^UOEVÚOJ, for there allowed to wear i t , over t h e u n m a r r i e d
can be no doubt of t h e r e being only two who were not, and was therefore called
and not four forms.] f'^ao-ia as a m a r k of dignity or authority,
'Etovcrla, ag, ?;, from É'^ETÍ it is lawful a s í n Gen. xx. 16. Sarah's veil is called ?/
or possible. Tipi) ra 7rpoo"í¿7ra.]
I . Liberty, power, of doing as one 'E%ov<ná'(u>, from ¿£uo-ía.
picases. J o h n x. 18. [ A c t s v. 4. R o m . i x . I . W i t h a genitive following, To have
2 1 . ] 1 Cor. viii. 9 . (where see B p . Pearce power or right over. occ. 1 Cor. vii. 4.
and M a c k n i g h t ) ix. 4. 5. & al. Comp. I I . To have, or rather, lo exercise,
J o h n xix. 10. power or autliority over, " oppress"
I I . Licence, privilege, right. M a t . xxi. Campbell, whom see. occ. L u k e xxii. 2 5 .
2 3 , 24, 2 7 . H e b . xiii. 10. Comp. J o h n i. [ N e h . ix. 3 7 . L a m . ix. 17.]
12. Rev. xxii. 14. I I I . 'E^ovaiíi'Copai, To be brought or
I I I . Authority, power. M a t . vii. 2 9 . reduced under power or subjection. occ.
xxviü. 18. M a r k i. 2 7 . L u k e x ü . 5. & al. 1 Cor. vi. 12, where M a c k n i g h t , " I will
freq. [ A d d M a t . ix. 8. x. 1. M a r k iii. not be enslaved by any (kind qf meat)."
15. L u k e iv. 3 2 , 36. ix. 1. xxii. 5 3 . A c t s 'E£ox>l, VS, v, from '¿r,íyw, extare, emi-
viii. 19. Schl. malees a diiference in the nere, to be eminenl, in a natural, and
sense of this word in L u k e iv. 3 2 . Xóyoc thence in a moral sense, from !£ oul, and
EV inania, and M a t . vii. 2 9 . didcio-icujv £%« to have, be.
avrug ¿>g ÉfcuLTtav 'Éy^iiiv, b u t this seems I . Exluberance, eminence, in a n a t u r a l
quite g r o u n d l e s s ; t h e meaning is, t h a t sense. T h u s used by t h e profane writers
' w h a t he said, carne from one conscious and by the L X X , Job x x x i x . 2 8 , ¿V É^oxfi
of j u s t a u t h o r i t y , and claiming it by t h e irérpas on the eminence, or top, qf a rock.
style of his speaking.' See Paley's E v i - [Diod. Sic. v. 7.]
dences, b . ii. ch. 1 1 . División t r e a t i n g of I I . Eminence, in a moral sense, repu-
Christ's manner of teachingT] tation, note, Henee, 'Oí nar '¿¡fiyriv oVrEc,
I V . [Authority ,jurisdiction, ride. M a t . Those who are in eminence, men qf emi-
viii. 9. xxviü. 18. L u k e iv. 4. vii. 8. xix. nence or note. occ. A c t s xxv. 2 3 .
17- xxiii. 7. J o h n xvii. 2 . A c t s xxvi. 2 8 . "E^v-Kvi'Qb), from E£ out,and v-rrvoe sleep.
Col. i. 13. al. 2 K i n g s x x . 1 3 . ] H e n e e , —To awake or rouse another oul of
in a concrete sense, A person invested sleep. occ. John xi. 1 1 . Comp. 2 K i n g s
with power or authority. Comp. 1 P e t . iv. 3 1 . [ T h i s word occurs J o b xiv. 12.
ii- 13, 14. See L u k e xii. 1 1 . Rom. xiii. in the L X X , and often in the other ver-
T 2
 ESÍi
síons. P l u t . Vit. A n t ó n , c. 30. tom. vi.
j). 99. ed. H u t t . E u s t a t h . de Amor.
H y s m . vi. p. 224. & c , b u t the G r a m m a -
rians say t h a t ¿itpvin-í^io is a better word.
I t oceurs Heliod. jEthiop. v. 2 1 . vi. 9.
viii. 12. and in Polyam, S t r a t . iv. 6. 8. in
a n e u t e r sense. See Lobeck on P h r v n . p.
224.]
Ifggp "E0v7rvoc, s, ó, y, from s$¡ out, and
53
VTCVOQ sleep.—Amaice, roused out of sleep.
occ. Acts xvi. 27. [3 E s d r . iii. 3 , where
it is in a deep sleep.]
, "Etw, from ÍK or l£ out.
1. Out, without, as opposed to milhin.
I t is either construed with a genitive, as
M a t . xxi. 3 9 . M a r k v. 10. A e t s iv. 15.
& al. freq.—or p u t absolutcly, as M a t . v.
13. xii. 46, 47- xiii. 4 8 . & al. freq. [ T h i s
word answers both to foris and joras ;
i. c. we may say both úvaí efw and fiáWtiv
2. W i t h the article prefixed it assumes
the n a t u r e of a N . 'O '¿¡¡io, Outer, ex-
ternal. T h u s 'O í%ii¡ y¡pü¡v (ívdpiowos Our
outer man, i. e,. our body with its animal
appetites and aífections, 2 Cor. iv. 1 6 ;
TH£ É'£W, Those that are without, i. e.
t h e palé of Christ's Church. Col. iv. 5 .
1 Thess. iv. 12. 1 Cor. v. 12, 1 3 ; on
which last passage Chrysostom remarks,
Tac £'<T(u, Ka\ r5c róc XOITIC'IJ'BC,
ras "EAAr/j'iic KU)\IOI>, Píe calis t h e Chris-
tians, and the Healhen, those t h a t are
withiu, and those t h a t are without. (So
in Pro!, to Ecclus. Tcüs h-roc means The
Heathen.) B u t M a r k iv. 11, Tole É'JW
plainly denotes the unbelieving Jews. See
Kypke on 1 Cor. [Schl. says t h a t in
M a r k iv. I I . bi t £ « mean the common
herd of Christians opposed to thc apos-
tles, who were esoteric disciples. Schcet-
gen on 1 Cor. v. 12, 13, says, t h a t the
J e w s applied a similar phrase, especially
to t h e Gentiles.]
"E£w6W, Adv. from É'£W without, and the
syllabic adjection $tv denoting from or al
a place.
1. From without. occ. M a r k vii. 18.
2. Without, outmardly, used absolutcly.
occ. M a t . xxiii. 27, 28. 2 Cor. vii. 5, or
construed with a genitivo, occ. M a r k vii.
15.
3 . W i t h the article prefixed it assumes
the n a t u r e of an adjective. To 'é^ioOev
(pípoe, namely) The oiU-side. occ. Mat.
xxiii. 2 5 . L u k e xi. 3 9 , 4 0 . 'O i%u>dív
Koo-pioe, The outmard or external adorn-
ing. occ. 1 P e t . iii. 3 . ' A - o rüiv í£u>0tv,
From those mho are without, i. e. t h e
276 E O P
Christian palé. occ. 1 T i m . iii. 7. Comp.
u n d e r "E£&> 2.
'Eladio, from Ig out, and &Qio to drive.
Comp.'ÁTriüOéopai.
I. To drive out, expel. occ. A c t s vii.
45. where see Elsner and Wolfius. [See
D e u t . xiii. 3 . 2 Sam. xiv. 13, 14. J e r .
xlix. 36. iElian. V. H . iii. 17. H e r o d i a n .
iii. 2. 5.]
I I . To drive or thrust a ship out of the
sea, namely, into a creek. occ. Acts xxvii.
3 9 . Thucydides often uses this V. joined
with iie or irpbc n)v yfjv, or with l i e rb
£r¡pov for running a ship aground. See
Wetstein. [See T h u c y d . ii. 90. Polyb.
xv. 2. 15. So ships driven out of their
course by the wind are called i^dj^ai in
H e r o d . ii. 113. See D'Orvill. ad Charit.
iii. c. 3. p. 3 6 3 . ]
'E?w?-£poe, o, ov, Comparat. from 'í'iio.
— Outer, exterior, occ. M a t . viii. 12. xxii.
13. xxv. 3 0 . — O n M a t . viii. 12, Wetstein
remarks t h a t our L o r d " continúes t h e
image of a feast: t h e banqueting room
was in the night illuminated with many
lamps. Pie who is driven out of it and
t h e house, is in darkness, and t h e further
he is removed, the grosser the darkness."
Seo also Wolfius.
'Eoprá^új, from kopri).—To keep or ce-
Kai lébrale a feast, or rather, To feast. occ.
1 Cor. v. 8 ; which does not appear to
have any particular relation to the cele-
b r a r o n of the Lord's Supper, b u t to refer
to t h e general behaviour and conducl of
Christians as celebrating their redemption
by Christ's sacrifice aud d e a t h * . " L e t
the whole qf our Uves be like the Jewish
feast of passover and unleavened bread."
Clark's N o t e . [ T h e word oceurs E x o d .
v. 1. xii. 14. Nahum i. 15. See Xen. de
Rep. Athen.iii. 2 . Schl. says, t h a t in 1 Cor.
v. 8. it means to worship God, aud refers
to Isa. lxvi. 2 3 . and Loesner Obss. P h i l .
p . 2 7 7 . In t h e passage of Isaiah I can see
nothing to justify this. A t the same
time it is elear, t h a t , as éoprá£io refers to
religious feasts, I believe always in t h e
O . T., such a significatiou is not foreign
to the word. See for example Is. xxx.
2 9 . and among the above passages, Exod.
v. 1. xii. 14, where we have ioprá^eiv poi
or íop-aCíiv Kvpíu).}
' E Ó P T i r , j;e, )';. T h e most probable of
the Greek derivations proposed of t h i s
word seems to be t h a t which deduces it
* S e e Dr. B e l l on the Lord's Supper, A p p e n d i x ,
N o . I V . l s t edit. and N o . V . 2d.
 E D A o 77 E n A

from l'opya perf, mid. of the V. pí'(ia to vii. 5. Rom. iv. 2 1 . 2 P e t . ii. 19. & al.
perform sacred rites: b u t m a y n o t lopri; freq. In Rom. iv. 3 1 , M a c k n i g h t u n d e r -
r a t h e r be a corrupt derivative from the stands ém'ryyekrai passively, as it is used
H e b . ¡TOS)} a solemn assembly, or from Gal. iii. 19. [ T i t . i. 2 . H e b . vi. 13. x. 2 3 .
nlíJJ a solemn j"casi day, with n emphatic xi. 11. xii. 26. J a m e s i. 12. ii. 5 . 1 J o h n
prefixed? T h e L X X , for r V W , D e u t .
ii. 19. Ecclus. x x . 2 3 . 2 Mac. iv. 2 7 . ]
xvi. 8, have l£óoW, loprí), a going Jbrih I I I . To profess. occ. 1 T i m . ii. 10. vi.
(from labour, I suppose), a feast. 2 1 . T h e profane writers sometimes use
[ I . ] .a solemn feast or festival. [Luke
t h e V. in this last sense, as may be seen
ii. 4 1 . xxii. 1. Col. ii. 16.] in W e t s t e i n . [Wisd. ii. 13. Aristot. E t h .
[ I I . The passover. M a t . xxvi. 5. xxvii. x. 10. Xen. M e m . i. 2 . 7.]
15. L u k e xxiii. 17. J o h n iv. 4 5 . comp. E§g|f' 'E7ráyy£Xjtta, arog, rb, from ¿Ví/y-
xiii. 1. So N u m b . xxviii. 17- Ecclus. yeXpai, perf. pass. of éwayyéXXu).—A pro-
xliii. 8. 1 M a c . x. 34. See Reland. A n - mise, occ. 2 Pet. i. 4. iii. 13. [ D e m o s t h .
tiq. Hebr. P . iv. c. 2. § 4.] 397. 3 . ]
'E7rayyE\ia, ag, TJ, from twayyéXku). 'E?ráy(ü, from £7u upon, and &yo> to
[I. Annunciation, declaration. 2 T i m .
bring.—To bring upon. occ. A c t s v. 2 8 .
i. 1 ; for this, I think, gives a b e t t e r sense 2 P e t . ii. 1, 5. O n A c t s comp. Lev. xxii.
than promise. T h e meaning is, accord- 16, in L X X , and see Elsner, W e t s t e i n ,
ing to the kind mili of God that I should and Wolfius. [In this place of t h e A c t s
declare the blessings of cternal life gained it is to lay upon, or to lay a crime to one's
by Christ for mankind. So Schleusner,
charge. So Demosth. p . 5 4 8 . 24. ed.
Bretschner, a n d W a h l . Wolf gives t h e Reisk. Diod. Sic. xvi. 2 3 . Herodian. iv.
same sense, b u t translates i-irayytKía by
6. 6. Comp. Gen. x x . 9. E z e k . xxxiv. 7 . ]
promise, saying t h a t Kara here gives t h e [JUp 'Eiraytaví'Copai, from ¿wlfor, and
0

sense required, as in 1 T i m . vi. 8. T i t . i. Itywvi'CopaL to strive, contend earnestly.—

1. An Apostle for the salce of the. pro- To strive or contend earnestly for. occ.
mise, &c. i. e. An Apostle to sprcad the J u d e verse 3 . See G r o t i u s and Beza on
promise.] t h e place. [So P l u t a r c h . N u m . c. S.]
[ I I . ] A promise, either the act ofpro-
IfSp" 'E-izaQpói'Cdo, from ¿Vi upon, and
mising, or the thing promised. See L u k e
dQpoí£,w to gather together, throng, cromd,
xxiv. 4 9 . A c t s i. 4. ii. 3 3 . vii. 17. xiii. 2 3 ,from ¿idpóog cromded together.— To cromd
32. xxiii. 2 1 . H e b . x. 3 6 . xi. 13, 3 9 . 1 upon. occ. L u k e xi. 29, rüv Be. oy\o)v kwa-
J o h n i. 5 ; b u t in this last t e x t t h e Alex- Qpoi'Copívojv, the multitudes crowding upon,
andrian and Vatican, and very many later viz. him. [ I t is of the same forcé as t h e
MSS., as also several ancient and modern simple verb, which oceurs frequently. See
versions read á y y e A í a ; which r e a d i n g is iElian. V . H . ii. 1. Herodian. iii. 4. 11.]
embraced by Wetstein, and received into 'Eiraiféü), S>, from írrl upon or lo, and
t h e t e x t by Griesbach. [ I n Acts xiih 3 2 . eiivéoi to prcdse.— To bestow praise upon,
2 P e t . iii. 4, 9, it seems to be the fulfil- give praise or commendation to. occ. L u k e
ment of the promise ; and in L u k e xxiv. xvi. 8. Rom. xv. 11. 1 Cor. xi. 2, 17, 2 2 .
4 9 . Acts i. 4. ii. 3 3 . Gal. iii. 14. H e b . iv. In verse 17, éi: ITCCUVÜ for / Mame, is a
1. vi. 12. x . 3 6 , the thing promised.] meiosis or gentle expression used likewise
' E 7 r a y y £ \ \ i D , from ÉVt intens. and á y -by the Greek w r i t e r s . See Raphelius,
yéWtú lo tell, declare. Wolfius, and Wetstein. [ I n Rom. xv. 1 1 ,
I . To declare, denouncc. T h u s used
it is to ulíer praise of, celebralcf]
iu the profane writers, and by t h e L X X , | "E-iraivog, a, ó. See 'Ewaivéu).—Praise.
Job xxi. 3 1 . Isa. xliv, 7, for t h e H e b . T>:n Rom. ii. 29. xiii. 3 . E p h . i. 6. & al.
lo malee manifesl, declare. [ T h e verb has \fErraivog seems occasionally to signify
also the sense of ordering in Xen. Cyr. vii. t h e remará, as well as commendation, of
4. 1. T h u c y d . iii. c. 16. a n d of asking in virtue, as in Rom. ii. 2 9 . xii. 3. I P e t . ii.
Demosth. p. 1122. ed. R e i s k . ; and both 14. See Polyb. ii. 5 8 . 12. So iieaivíio lo
senses are acknowledged in the Greek remará, in Xen. GScon. ix, ! 4 . and often
Lexicographers.] in public decrees. I n 1 Cor. iv. 5, t h e word •
I I . In the N . T . 'ErrayyéXXofMu, D e - means retribution, either gooá or bad.]
pon. To promise. M a r k xiv. 11 *. A c t s 'Ewcdpo), from ÍTTL upon, and aipoi to lift
* [Lobeck on Phryn. pp. 74!), 7 5 0 , shows that up.
the infinitive of the aorist follows verbs of ¿¡rontis- I . To lift up, as the eyes. M a t . xvii. 8.
ing in good Greek.] L u k e vi. 20. & al.—the head, L u k e xxi.
 E n A 278 E n A

28.—the hands, L u k e xxiv. 50. 1 T i m . ii. 'E7rairéh>, ¿i, from ¿TT! intens. a n d ¿tirito
8 (where see Wolfius and W e t s t e i n ) — t h e lo ask.—To beg, ask an alms. occ. L u k e
heel, J o h n xiii. 8. I n pass. To be lifted xvi. 3.'—The word is used in t h e same
up, from t h e ground, namely, as our L o r d sense by t h e L X X , P s . c i $ . 10, for t h e
at his ascensión, occ. A c t s i. 9. Heb. b\&U? lo ask, beg; and so is t h e N .
I I . To koist, as a sail. occ. Acts xxvii. Érraírno-te for begging, Ecclus. xl. 3 1 , 3 4 .
40. So P l u t a r c h in Theseo, p. 9. E . 'ErraícoXtiQth), to, from ¿ r r i upon, or in-
' E I I A P A ' S e A I TU Utov to koist t h e sail, tens. and aicoXudéto tofollom. [ D e u t . xxxii.
and Lucian [ V a r . H i s t . ii. 38.] ' E I I A ' P - 30. & a l . ]
A N T E 2 T¡iv óQúv-qv hoisting t h e sail. See I . To follom t h e steps of one, used
Wolfius, W e t s t e i n , and K y p k e . figuratively. occ. 1 P e t . ii. 2 1 . So T h e -
I I I . 'Erraípopai, mid. or pass. To lift mistius in W e t s t e i n , T O " I S "IXNE2IN
up or exalt one's self, to be lifted up or ex- 'AKOAOYGE1N, [ P o l y b . vii. 14. 3 . ]
alted in pride. occ. 2 Cor. xi. 2 0 . Comp. I I . To follom, be subsequenl, ensue. occ.
2 Cor. x . 5. T h e verb is t h u s applied by M a r k xvi. 2 0 . 1 T i m . v. 2 4 .
t h e profane writers, particularly by T h u - I I I . To follom diligently, prosecule,
cydides. See Wetstein on 2 Cor. xi. 20. pursue a work. o c c 1 T i m . v. 10.
[See Prov. iii. 5. X e n . M e m . iii. 5 . 4. 'E7raicBw, from ¿7rt to, or intens. and ¿licito
Polyb. i. 2 0 . ^Elian. V . H . viii. 1 5 ] to hear.—To hear, hearken lo. occ. 2 Cor.
I V . To lift up, exalt, raise, as t h e voice. vi. 2.
L u k e xi. 2 7 . & al.-—The expression, ÍTTUÍ- Efgjp' ' 'lEiraicpociopat, üpat, from íirt to,
1

pe.iv rip> q>¿)vr¡v, is often used by t h e L X X or intens. and r'iicpoáopin to hear. See u n -
for t h e H e b . «U?3 nw b)p. See J u d . ii. 4. der 'Atcpoariipiov.—To hearken or listen
ix. 7. R u t h i. 9, 14. & al. and kwaípav r¿g to. occ. Acts xvi. 2 5 * .
6<p9a\pnc sometimes, b u t more rarely, for 'E-Tráj/, a conjunction, from iireí after
the H e b . W J n« Hüíl, as G e n . xiii. 10. that, and av if—If, after that, when. occ.
1 Chron. xxi. 10. E z e k . xviii. 6. T h e M a t . ii. 8. L u k e xi. 2 2 , 3 4 .
former phrase is used by t h e Greek writ- [¡Sip 'Hiráyayicec,, Adv. from iirl upon, on
0

ers, particularly Demosthenes (see W e t - account qf, a n d liváyicn necessity.— Of ne-

stein on L u k e xi. 2 7 . ) , b u t t h e latter cessity, necessarily. B u t with t h e article
seems Hebraical. [ T h e phrase, to lift up it assumes t h e meaning of t h e adjective,
one's eyes, is usually little more than to ra kirávayicíe (ovra namely), things (which
see (as in Hebrew, see G e n . xxii. 4. D a n . are) qf necessity, necessary things. occ.
x. 5. 1 Chron. x x i . 1 6 ) . B u t it is em- Acts xv. 2 8 , where Wetstein cites P l u -
phatic in L u k e xviii. 13 ; and perhaps in tarch and Josephus using t h e phrase
vi. 20.— To lift up one's hands, is a phrase ' E l T A ' N A r i i E S E I N A I , To be necessary;
T

referring to t h e Jewish custom of so doing and we m a y remark, t h a t Homer, II. i.

in prayer. See P s . cxli. 2 . — T o lift up line 142, has t h e adv. ¿ V i - n c ^ c fitly, for
the head, is metaphorically used to e x - ¿irirnSés ovrag fit. Comp. also K y p k e .
press joy or consolation.—To lift up the [ A r r i a n . Diss. E p . ii. 2 0 . 1. A t h e n . xiv.
voice is our phrase to raise t h e voice; and p. 657. D . ]
the G e r m á n erheben, i. e. to speak louder. £•§1?° ' E T r a v á y w , from biri to, a n d ctváyto
See Philost, Vit. Apollon. V . c. 3 3 . D e - to bring back or forth.
mosth. de Cor. p . 3 2 2 . I n A c t s ii. 1 4 , i t I . I n t r a n s i t . To return. occ. M a t . x x i .
does not, however, seem t o imply more than 18. [ E c c l u s . xxvi. 2 3 . X e n . C y r . iv. I . 2.]
t h a t he spoke, as in t h e H e b . Judges ix. 7-] I I . To pul, thrust forth, namely, a
'TLtraiayyvopai, from ¿Vi upon account ship or sailing vessel, into t h e sea. occ.
of, and aicrxympai to be ashamed.—To L u k e v. 3 , 4 . Comp. u n d e r 'Kváyto I I I .
be ashamed of. I t is generally in t h e N . T h e participle éiravaxdévrac is in a like
T . construed with an accusative of t h e sense applied t o persons, 2 Mac. xii. 4.
person or t h i n g of which one i s ashamed. [Xen. H e l l . vi. 2. 1.]
M a r k viii. 3 8 . Rom. i. 16. [ S e e L u k e EH^p 'ETravapifivncicii), from éiri to, a n d
0

ix. 2 6 . 2 T i m . i. 8, 12, 16. M a t t h h e § ávapipvf¡cTKti) lo remitid.—To remind, put

408. Diod. Sic. i. 8 3 . Herod. ix. 185. and in mind or remembrance. occ. Rom. xv.
once (see Matthiae § 4 0 3 , and Xen. M e m . 15. [ D e m o s t h . p . 74. 7. ed. R e i s k . ]
ii. 1. 31.) w i t h ] t h e preposition ¿rrí and a 'ETravaircivopat, mid. from iirl upon, and
dative, Rom. v i . 21.—also with an infini- avavávopai lo rest.
tive, H e b . ii. 1 1 . xi. 16. [See Isa. i. 2 9 .
Job xxxiv. 19.] * ['Eirxxpíaaig occurs 1 S a m . x v . 2 2 . ]
 E II A 279
I . To rely, to rest, repose one s setf,
upon. occ. Rom. ii. 17. T h e L X X use it
in t h e sense of leaning or resting upon,
for t h e H e b . JA'tM, 2 K i n g s v. 18. vii. 2,
17. E z e k . xxix. 7. So in a spiritual sense
(as in Rom.) M i c . iii. 1 1 . [See 1 M a c .
viii. 12. Herodian. ii. 1. 3 . ]
I I . To rest, remain upon. occ. L u k e x.
6. I n this l a t t e r sense t h e V . is used by
the L X X for t h e H e b . ¡TU to rest, and
applied to t h e Holy Spirit. N u m . xi. 2 5 ,
26. 2 K i n g s ii. 15.
'Ewa.vepxpp.ai, from éirl unto, and avíp-
yppai to come back.—To come or return
back again, i. e. to t h e same place, occ.
L u k e x. 3 5 . xix. 15. Lucian uses this
decompounded V. D e M o r t . Peregr. tom.
ii. p . 764. 'O Sé éi£ rr)v óacíav 'EIIAN-
EA9Q N, b u t he returning back again to
V
his h o u s e — [ G e n . 1. 5 . ]
'E-rraví^npi, from kirt upon or against,
and áví^npi lo arise.—To rise up hoslilely
against. occ. M a t . x. 2 1 . M a r k xiii. 12.
Comp. 'Avt^npí V . T h e G r e e k writers
frequently use the V. kwavl'srjpi and t h e
N. ÍTravá^ao-iQ in t h e same view. See
Wetstein and K y p k e on M a t . [ T h e verb
implies hostility without provocation, says
the Schol. on T h u c y d . iii. 3 9 . 'Airábame;
is when people revolt after injury offered;
kiravá^ao-LQ when t h e y do so without such
injury or insult. See D e u t . xix. 1 1 . xxii.
26. Ps. iii. 1. Micah vii. 6. H e r o d . i. 8 9 .
Polyb. ii. 5 3 . 2 . ]
Ilgp ' 'EiravópBüHJie, tos, A t t . ewc, ?/,
2
from Éxcu/op0óíú to set right again, to cor-
red, which from km intens. and ávopdáoj
lo make right.—Correction, amendment qf
what is wrong. occ. 2 T i m . iii. 16. Ra-
phelius and Wetstein cite from Polybius,
U P O ' S ' E I X A N O T e í l S I N ra ávd'p¿mojv
fita, For the amendment or correction of
men's life; and from Arrian. 'EIIANOP-
O í i ' S E I r5 ( S ¡ 8 . T o which I add from
E p i c t e t u s Enchirid. cap. 7 5 , Tijv 'E1TA-
N 0 ' P 8 S i 2 I N Troirjo-ai rr)v treavrS, T o make
the amendment qf or to amend thyself.
[ T h e proper meaning is, to straighien
what has become crooked, to bring a thing
back io its former state. See Plat. Rep.
x. 302. Pausan, iv. 7. L y s . 124. 7. I t is
applied especially to correction of manners
or life, either with /3ís or a similar word
added, or absolutely, as in this place of
Scripture. See Polyb. i. 3 5 . A r r i a n .
Epict. iii. 2 1 . X e n . Epist. i. 5. Compare
also 1 Mac. xiv. 34. 3 E s d r . viii. 52. J o -
seph. Ant. xi. 5. Dcmosth. 707- 7- edit,
iíeisk.]
E II A
'Eirávw, an Adv. construed with a geni-
tive, from ¿Vi upon, and avco above.
1. Of place, Above. M a t . ii. 9.
2. Upon. M a t . v. 14. x x i . 7. xxiii. 18.
& al.
3 . ' Over. L u k e iv. 3 9 . [Schleus. says
Beside, as bi) in Gen. xviii. 2. E z e k . xxv.
9. Dan. xii. 6, 7; or near, as vrrép KE-
<pa\f¡r in H o m . Odyss. iv. 802.]
4. Of dignity or pre-eminence, Above,
over. J o h n iii. 3 1 . L u k e xix. 17, 19.
5. Of price, or number, Above, more
than. M a r k xiv. 5. 1 Cor. xv. 6.
'E-rrapKéoj, co, from ¿Vt to, unto, and cip-
KÉÜ) to suffice, satisfy.—With a dative, To
supply, relieve, support. occ. 1 T i m . v. 10,
16. T h e G r e e k writers frequently use it
in like manner. See W e t s t e i n and Kypke.
[Polyb. i. 5 7 . Philost. V i t . Soph. 'ii. 1.
H e m s t e r h . ad Lucian. T i m . c. 5.]
'Eirap^í'a, ag, ?/, from kirapxpQ a go-.
vernor of a province, from ¿Vi over, and
apxppai to rule.—A province, a district
subject to one deputy-governor. occ. A c t s
xxiii. 3 4 . xxv. \.-—This word is not only
used by t h e L X X , Esdr. v. 3, 6. & al. for
t h e Chaldee nnS, b u t also by P l u t a r c h , as
cited by W e t s t e i n . [ T h e provinces sub-
j e c t to Rome, were, in t h e republican
times, divided into two classes: t h e one
called the considar, usually t h e larger,
which were governed by persons who had
served the office of cónsul, and were called
proconsuls, 'Avdviraroi; the other usually
less, called praztorian, and governed by
those who had served t h e prtetorship, and
were called propra2tors, ' Avri^párnyoi.
B u t these terms are sometimes confound-
ed, (See F. F a b r i c . ad Cic. pro Ligar.
1.) and t h e power was t h e same, except
t h a t t h e proconsuls were also commanders
in chief. B u t A u g u s t u s changed all this,
and divided t h e provinces between the
senate and the emperors, giving to t h e
first t h e oíd praetorian or smaller p r o -
vinces ; to t h e second, the oíd proconsular
provinces. Senators were appointed to
govern each, and they who were sent into
t h e senate's provinces had t h e pomer of
the oíd proprsetors, b u t were called pro-
consuls, 'AvOvwaroL; while they who go-
verned the imperial provinces were called
L e g a t i Caísaris, and irpEcrtevrai, and p r o -
praitors, 'Avrf;párr¡yoi, except t h e légate
in E g y p t , who was of t h e equestrian or-
der, and called prsefectus, "TLirápxos or
"Yirapxpe. T h e y who had the care of t h e
cmperor's revenues were called 'E7rtr<)Ó7ROT
or SwaoiTca, Procuralorcs; and some of
 Ii II E 280 E n E

these in the small provinces, as Juda;a, 1. Since, because. M a t . xxvii. 6. Luke

which were appendages of the larger ones, i. 34. 2 Cor. xi. 18. & al. freq. [Xen. A u .
liad the authority and jurisdietion of go- vii. 6. 16.]
vernors. This is takea from Fischer de 2. For, implying a condition, for then,
V i t . Lex. N . T . pp. 4 3 2 — 4 3 7 . T h e word for else,for otherwise. Rom. iii. 6. xi. 6.
'ILTrapxía comprised both kinds of pro- 1 Cor. v. 10. xv. 29. & al. freq.—It is
vinces, aud is t h e same as y yepovla. See evident t h a t in this application there is
P l u t a r c h . Ca:s. p . 708. E . Polyb. i. 15. 10. an ellipsis to be supplicd after ¿ V E I , which
ii. 19. 2. T h e word oceurs in one M S . partióle is also t h u s used in t h e purest
in E s t h e r iv. 11. and J u d i t h iii. 6.] Greek writers. See Alberti on 1 Cor. v.
"E—avXic, ios, A t t . ECOS, ?/, from ¿Vi in, 10, and Blackwall's Sacred Chusics, vol.
and ¿ivXí'Copai io lodge.—A dwelling, ha- ii. p. 5 3 . [iEschin. Dial. ii. 8. 10.]
biialion. occ. Acts i. 20. — [A cotlage, 'E?r£tcV), from E V E Í , and Si) truly.
sheep-fold (JNTuffi. xxxii. 16.) siall, camp, I . An adv. of t i m e , When truly, after
or any habitation, according to Hesychius. that indeed. 1 Cor. i. 2 1 .
In the Acts the phrase comes from P s . I I . A conjunction casual, Since, be-
lxix. 25 ; and so Prov. iii. 3 3 . Isa. xxxiv. cause, for truly. M a t . xxi. 4 6 . L u k e xi.
13. Comp. Polyb. xvi. 15. 5. D ' O r v i l l . 6. [ a l . ] — l t is used much in the same
ad Charit. i. 13. G a t a k e r ad M . A n t o n i n . manner as ¿Veí, but seems emphatical.
i. 1 6 . ] 'E7r£tcV/7r£p, a conjunction, from £?r£¿, Si),
'Enaipiov, A d v . from ¿V¡ upon, and and nép, truly.-—Since in truth. occ. L u k e
avpioi' to-morrow, which see.— To-mor- i. 1. [ T h u c . viii. 6 8 . .Esch. Dial. ii. 12.]
row. E u t with the feminine article p r e - 'Eñeiiio, from ETTÍ upen, aud É'tow lo see.
fixed it assumes thc n a t u r e of a N . , and —To look upon, regará, occ. Luke i. 2 5 .
t h u s it is always used in the N . T. with Acts iv. 29. [ I t is in a good sense in t h e
t h e feminine article of t h e dative case r¡¡ first place. See Glass. Philol. S. p . 964.
iiravpiov, ¿ipépa day being understood, on ed. D a t h . and so in Syiumachus's versión.
the morrow or next day. Mat. xxvii. 62. Ps. Iviii. 11. Ixx. 6. I n t h e 2d place, i t
M a r k xi. 12. & al. freq. [ N u m . xi. 32.] is taken in a bad sense, as in J e r . iii. 8.]
Efsgip 'E,-¡ravTO(j>iopti>, q. d. ETT ¿LVTLO <¡>cop(¡> "Erretpi, from ¿Vi upon, after, and iipí
0

in the very ihejt; (¡¡oipóv theft being de- lo go, come.— To come after, suecced, fol-
rived from <pS¡p a thief.—In the very act low. I t is in the N . T . used only in t h e
orfact. I t is a phrase used by the purest particip. pres. fem. dat. rr¡ i-nriáan on the
Greek writers, and by them applied to succeeding or following, i'ipépa Hay, viz.
any jlagrant wickedness, particularly to which is expressed, Acts vii. t i 6 ; but u n -
aduliery, as well as to theft. occ. J o h n derstood, Acts xvi. 11. x x . 15. xxi. 18.
viii. 4, where see Wolfius and Wetsteiu. T)} éwiáari VVKTI, On the following night.
[ E u r . Ion. 1214. A n t i p h . Or. i. p . 18.] occ. A c t s xxiii. 1 1 . [ C o m p . D e u t . xxxii.
Efgsj" 'Eíra^pí'fw, from ircí upon, or in- 29. 1 Chron. xx. 1 ; and Polyb. iii. 42. xii.
tens. and aa)pí£üj lo foam.— To foam up 7 and 2 1 . ]
or out. occ. J u d e verse 13. So Alberti, "E7T£(7r£p, a conjunction, from ¿TTEÍ, and
Wolfius, and Wetstein cite from Moschus, 7rf'p truly.—Since in truth. occ. Rom. iii.
Idyll. v. line 5, 30.
— — — a. Se SCXOLGCÓ.
'ETrEicrayioyi), íjc, i¡, from ETXEitjliyt¡¡ lo
liiprm 'EIlAePl'ZEI superinduce, which from írri upon, and
— A n d foams the troubled sea. iiaáyio to introduce, bring in.—A super-
ináuction, a bringing in one thing after
f_The place of J u d e refers to I s . lvii. 2 0 . ] or upon another, an introduction of some-
'E7T£y£ipw, from éwl upon, aud" éyeípio lo what more. occ. H e b . vii. 19, where mpéir-
raise.— To raise or slir up, to excite, occ. rovog íXwioos the betler hope seems to be
A c t s xiii. 50. xiv. 2. [ I t is generally p u t for that belier thing hopedfor (comp.
used iu a bad sense. See I Sam. iii. 12. ''EÁ.7r¿c I I . ) , even Christ himself and t h e
xxii. 8. 1 Chron. v. 26. 2 Chron. xxi. 16. benefits of his priesthood. Comp. H e b .
Xenoph. E p h e s . i. c. 4. E u r . H e r e . F u r . x. 15. viii. 6. and Rom. v. 2. E p h . ii. 18.
1084.] iii. 12. Heb. iv. 16. [ T h e word oceurs
'Eweí, from Í5r¿ upon, and si if, that. Joseph. A n t . xi. 6. 3 . of t h e introduction
I . A n adv. of t i m e , When, after that. of a second wife after divorcing the first.]
L u k e vii. 1. "E?r£ira, an adv. of time and order, from
I I . A coujuuction. £7ri upon, or al, and tira then.— There-
 E n E 281 £ n £

upon, then. M a r k vii. 5. Gal. i. 2 1 . 2 Cor. clothe.—To clothe upon, superinduere.

xii. 2 8 . Henee mid. To be clothed upon, put on.
"Eicu-a pera T U T O , Then or afterivards. occ. 2 Cor. v. 2, 3 . Plutarch. in Felopid.
occ. J o h n xi. 7. T h e best Greek writers p. 2 8 3 , D . uses t h e particip. perf. pass. of
often use this and t h e like pleonastic ex- this decompounded V. 'Eo-0//rac 'E1TEN-
pressions, kira pera TSTO, tira pzrd ravra, AEAYME'NOI yvvaiKÚag role Súpcífr,
&c. as may be seen in Wetstein and K y p k e Clothed in female dresses over their breast-
on John. plates. A s for t h e expression, 2 Cor. v.
'EirsKciva, used as an adverb or preposi- 2, To be clothed upon with a house, which
tion, with a genitive, for áVi hctlva, namely M a c k n i g h t t h i n k s an absurdity, i t is cer-
yyena or pép>], io ihose ( f u r t h e r ) countries tainly n o t more so than layiug up in store
or parís.—Beyond. occ. Acts vii. 43 or (or treasuring up) a founáation, 1 Tim.
44. T h u s it is frequently applied uot vi. 19, or than the domestics of God being
only by t h e L X X for t h e H e b . n r ó n o or built upon a foundation, E p h . ii. 19, 2 0 .
¡iN^n (see especially Amos v. 2 7 . ) , b u t T h e t r u t h is t h a t such variation in m e t a -
also by t h e profane writers. See W e t - phorical terms is used by t h e best G r e e k
stein and Bos Ellips. [Comp. Diod. Sic. writers, and even by t h e L a t i n , as t h e
iii. 50. X e n . Hell. v. 1. 10. A n a b . v. 4. 2. learned Merrick has shown in his Ann'o-
the N o t e s on Thom. M a g . p . 3 3 6 , and tation on P s . lviii. 8, p . 116. So o u r
Irmisch. on Herodian. ii. 8. 1 3 . I n 1 Shakspeare in H a m l e t speaks of iaking
Mac. ix. 3ü. Ezek. xxxix. 2 2 . and Micah arms against a sea of troubles. I n 2 Cor.
iv. 5, it expresses t i m e ; after, after- v. 3 , place a comma after yvpvol, Since
wardsr\ indeed we shall be found (or bé) clothed
$i¡¡¡F 'EireKTeívopai, from ¿Vt to, unto,s.nd upon, not naked.
¿KTÍÍVW to extend. [Middle.]—To stretch 'ETcépyppai, from ¿ni upan, lo, and íp-
or press formará to, or towards, as r u n - yvpai lo come.
ners in a race. I t is a most beautiful and I. To come iipon. occ. L u k e i. 3 5 . x x i .
expressive word, denoting t h e utniost ea- 26. Acts i. 8 * . J a m e s v. 1.—of time. occ.
ireruess and exertion to gain t h e goal. So L u k e xxi. 3 5 . So Homer often applies
Chrysostom explains hcíKTíivópEvoc by this V . to t i m e , sometimes with a dative,
cnruoá£(oV as 11. viii. line 4 8 8 , 4 8 9 , Avrap 'A-yuídiQ
T
Jlplv i'¡ Trapaytvicrdaí \a£eiv
•7i-o\\i)y TrpoOvpíav Kal ^eppórnTa d>]\oi, — ' E M T A Y 6 E NüE, T h e n i g h t carne on
Eager to seize before one is arriveá. I t the Grecians. II. ix. line 4 7 0 , Aek-ctr?;
denotes great earnestness and ardour. occ. poi 'EIIH'AYGE N¿£. T h e t e n t h n i g h t
Phil. iii. 14. [ C o m p . Max. T y r . viii. 2.] carne on me. Comp. Odyss. ii. line 107.
'EirtvSvTijs, a, b, from SWEVSVW.—An and xiv. lines 4 5 7 , 4 7 5 .
upper garment. So t h e L X X have twice I I . To come upon, happen. occ. A c t s
used it, namely in 1 Sam. xviii. 4. 2 Sam. viii. 24. xiii. 40. [ I n both instances i t is
xiii. 18, for t h e H e b . Í^JJD. occ. J o h n xxi. used in a bad s e n s e ; in Ecclus. iii. 8.
7, where see Wetstein aud Campbell. [ I n (comp. i. 3 5 . ) in a good one. I n L u k e
this place Theophylact says it was a Sy- xxi. 3 5 , i t implies an unexpected coming,
rian fisherman's upper garment. See also according to Schleusner and W a h l . So
Salinas, ad T e r t u l l . de Pallio. c. 5. p . 410, Herodian. viii. 4. 8 . ]
and Niebuhr's Travels in Arabia, pl. Ivi. I I I . To come upon, in t h e sense of ho-
Fischer ( D e V i t . L e x . N . T . p. 8 3 , sq.) stile attaclc or invasión, occ. L u k e x i . 2 2 .
says, i t seems t o be t h e outer tunic, for So Homer, 11. xv. lines 4 0 5 , 406.
the Greeks, llomans, and Jews (in imita- "''AuTgp ' A l c a c í
tion of t h e m ) wore two, one which touched IpSias 'El"iEPX0Mli'N0T2 fxlvov É'/weSo» •
the skin, and was called by t h e L a t i n s T h e Greeks sustain'd
interula, subucula, and ináusium, by t h e T h ' assaultiug Trojans
A t t i c s yyrwvíaKOQ ( X e n . M e m . ii. 7 1 . 5.
Theoph. Char. 2 5 . ) , and by other Greeks II. xxii. lines 2 5 1 , 2 5 2 ,
a n d vTToicapiaoe;
VTTOSVTII£ and an outer
O'^SE 7IOT £TKy¡V
one called yírtav in A t t i c , and i-wzvdvTnQ
Míüal 'EriEPXO'MENON
or ¿TrucapLo~OQ. Suidas's explanation of
— Ñ o r durst I e'er await
the word is corrupt. T h a t t h e word ex- T h y fierce assault
presses a t u n i c and not a cloak, seems
clear from the use of the term cie'(¿¡aaTo¡]
* [ I n L u k e i. M, and A c l s i. o , the coming o f
'ETWSÚW, from i~l upon, and irüúío lo the H o l y Spirit i m p l i e s his iiiiruculotts operuliou.]
 E n E 282
Scapula refers to Thücydides and P l u -
tarch as using it in t h e same view. [Most
words of motion with ¿Vi, sometimes im-
ply kosiile invasión. See Diog. ii. 2 3 .
Herodian i. 8 . 1 2 . (where see Irmisch),
and iv. 5 . 1 0 . X e n . H e l l . vii. 4 . 2 4 . J o b
xxiii. 6.J
I V . Of place, To come, arrive. occ.
A c t s xiv. 1 9 . [ G e n . xiii. 2 1 . Isa. xii. 4 .
Pol. ii. 7 3 . ]
V. Of time, To be future, coming, or
lo come. occ. E p h . ii. 7 . [ L u k e x x i . 2 6 .
J a m e s v. 1 . ]
'Ew£pb>r¿iij), w, from iwl intens. and Ipai-
ráii) to ask.
I. To ask, interrógale, question. See
M a t . xii. 1 0 . xvii. 1 0 . xxii. 4 1 . M a r k v.
9 . vii. 1 7 . xv. 4 4 . L u k e xxiii. 3 , 6 . See
Elsner on M a t . xxii. 4 6 . [Schleusner
gives another head here, To ask captious
questions ; b u t without any reason. T h e
sense is given by t h e context in t h e pass-
ages he cites. H e refers to Ps. xxxiv. 1 1 .
and Lucian Jov. Conf. p . 1 7 7 . I n Rom.
x. 2 0 , the meaning is to have a desire of
seeking and hnowing God. W a h l t h i n k s
this a Hebraism derived from the custom
of consulting God in oracles. See J u d g e s
i. 1 . xviii. 5 . x x . 18.J¡
I I . To ask, demand, require. Mat.
xvi. 1 .
'EirepwTrjpa, aros, ru, from ín-Epítraopai.
—An asking, or r a t h e r , An answer or
promise in consequence of being asked.
occ. I P e t . iii. 2 1 ; where it is highly
probable t h a t t h e Apostle alludes to t h e
questions and answers*, which, we learn
from Tertullian, were used at baptism.
T h e bishop asked, Dost thou renounce
Satán ? Dost thou believe in Christ ?
T h e person to be baptized answered, I re-
nounce, I believe. T h i s , Tertullian, De
Baptismo, cap. 1 8 , calis sponsiouem sa-
lutis, an engagement qf salvation; and
D e Resurrect. cap. 4 8 , referring, no
doubt, to t h e above text in St, Peter, he
says, The soul is consecrated (sancitur)
not by washing, but by answering ( r e -
sponsione). T o confirm t h e interpreta-
tion of íwEpúrnpa here assigned, we may
add the observations of Grotius, t h a t EVE-
púrnpa is a judicial term, used by t h e
G r e e k expounders of the Román law, and
t h a t in t h e glossary Í7rcparü> is interpreted
by stipulor, which signifies primarily, " to
ask and demand such and such termsfor
* See Cave's P r i m i t i v e Christianity, pt. i. cli.
10. p. 3 1 5 .
E 11 E
a thing to be given, or done, by the ordi-
nary words ofthe law*." But by a me-
tonymy, adds Grotius, which is very
common in t h e law, under the ñame of a
stipulation is comprehended also t h e an-
swer or promise: for in t h e same glossary
¿•üEpoj-topai signifies to promise, engage.
Agreeably hereto Mili, on 1 P e t . iii. 2 1 ,
cites a gloss on the oíd law, published by
Labbé, which explains 'ETEpiorncne by
'Op.dX.oy la, o-vv0r)iCT¡ pnpáriov, Si IAV airo-
KplvErai riQ rrpoQ rijv EirEpíorr¡cnv rroiúv rt
íj SiSóvaí, A promise, an agreemcnt in
words, by which any one answers lo a
question, that he will do, or give some-
thing. See Wolfius, who further confirms
and illustrates this explanation of '~EirEp¿>-
rr¡pa. [See examples of t h e questions
and answers in Acts viii. 3 7 - J u s t . M a r -
t y r . A p o l . i i . § 6 1 . Schleusner and W a h l
agree in this interpretation, as does D e y -
ling, in whose dissertation (Obss. Sacr.
vol. i. pp. 3 6 1 — 3 6 9 . ) t h e various i n t e r -
pretations of t h e passage will be fouud.
I t appears, however, t h a t notwithstanding
w h a t has been said, éir.EpwTnpa does not
occur in any of t h e Greek writers on t h e
Román law, b u t ¿TrEpárno-iQ is used in t h e
sense of stipulation. See Theoph. T i t . de
V e r b . Oblig. in I n s t i t t . L i b . ü i . T i t . 1 6 .
sq. and Basilic. Eclog. Lib. xxiii. T i t . 9 .
Tó EiTEpíirr¡QEv is also used for a promise.
In T h u c y d . iii. 5 3 and 5 4 , this word
means a question]
'ETTE'^W, from EVÍ upon, and tyu> to have,
hold.
I . To restrain, withhold. I n this sense
it is sometimes used in t h e profane w r i t -
ers. [ X e n . Hell. V. 1 . 5 . 1 4 . Herodian vi.
5. 18.]
I I . To delay, tarry, stay. occ. Acts xix.
22,"E7TEO-)(£ xpóvov, H e t a r r i e d some time.
T h e expression seems elliptical for kavrbv
EXECRE Sia xpóvov, he restrained, or kept
himself for some time. Herodotus uses
' E n i S X Í i N XPO'NON in t h e same sense.
See more in Raphelius and W e t s t e i n . T o
t h e instances cited by t h e m , I add, from
Plato's Phsedon, § 3 , p . 1 6 1 . ed. Porster,
'Ov iroXvv ¿" Iv XPO'NON ' E n i S X Í i ' N ,
Staying therefore no long time.
I I I . To retain, hold fast. So Hesy-
chius explains EVE^OJTEC by KparñvrEe-
occ. Phil. ii. 1 6 . Comp. H e b . iv. 1 4 . x.
2 3 . B u t on Phil. see Doddridge and
M a c k n i g h t , who, with our translation,
M a r t i n ' s F r e n c h , qui porienl au devant
* Ainsworlh's Diclionary.
 E n H
d'eux, Diodati's Italian, portando innanzi,
render ¿Trexóvrcc by holding forth, and
t h i n k i t alludes to maritime l i g h t - h o u s e s ;
I know not however t h a t t h e V . lw¿yE
ever lias this sense, which belongs to T T O -
ptXuv.
I V . To advert, attend to, regard, ob-
serve, take heed. I t is joined with a
dative case. occ. A c t s iii. 5 . 1 T i m . iv.
1 6 ; or with T T W S how, and another V .
following. occ. L u k e xiv. 7- B u t in these
uses of t h e V. to apply or flx appears to
283
E ni
L a t e r writers used t h e word for to ca-
lumníate, inveigh, pursue at law, injure
bodily. Demosthenes joins t h e word with
LV
v€pi£, XoiSopía, &c. Pollux once explains
it by épyo\a€£Ív, and elsewhere mentions
it as a judicial word. T h e word ém'ipEía
is used for injury by Diodorus, and for
insult by Josephus A n t . xiii. 1 4 . xv. 2 .
See P i n d a r a p u d Stob. p . 3 0 7 , and refer
to Salmas. Obss. ad J u s . A t t . and R o m .
p. 2 8 8 . ]
' E u r , a preposition, [of] which UPON

be its proper meaning, and in t h e t w o seems plainly t h e primary and leading

latter t e x t s rov vav the mind, which is
sometimes expressly joined with éne^u in
this sense by t h e Greek writers, seems to
be understood. See Wetstein on L u k e .
Elsner and Wolfius understand rov vüv in
Acts iii. 5 . a l s o ; but K y p k e , more agree-
ably to t h e context, supplies rá¡ ¿<¡>da\-
pns the eyes. So Lucian expressly, Dial.
Dor. et Gal. tom. i. p. 1 8 7 , MÓVJJ épbi
' E Ü F I X E TO N ' O * 0 A A M O N .
s S
tíefixed
his eye on me only. [ S e e J o b xviii. 2 .
Herodot. vi. 9 6 - Aristoph. Lys. 4 9 0 . and
the full expression occurs in L u c i a n . T .
ii. 2 1 2 . ]
EÜIf' 'Ewr¡pEá£o), from tVi against, and
" A p n s Mars, t h e supposed god qf war, and
henee sometimes used for war itself See u n -
der" Apeíoc.— To injure, harass, insult, and
as it should seem merely for the pleasure
qf insuliing: for 'O E Ü H P E A ' Z í i N (says
Aristotle, Rhet. I I . 2 . ) <¡>¿uvErai icarafpo-
veiv íVi yap ' E n H P E A 2 M 0 2 iprróSiapoe
v
rale fluXriGEcnv, ¿K 'Iva ri ílvrS, áW 'iva
pr¡ ¿Kelva. " A person who is styled by the
Greeks éwiipecí^bjv seems also to despise,
for ¿irrjpeácrpog is a t h w a r t i n g another's
incliuations, not for any advantage to
one's self, b u t to cross t h a t other." See
Wetstein, occ. Mat. v. 4 4 . L u k e vi. 2 8 .
1 P e t . iii. 1 6 . T h e Vulg. however, renders
t h e V. by calumnian to acense falsely;
our E n g . translation in 1 P e t . by falsely
aecuse; M a c k n i g h t by arraign; and
Elsner on M a t . shows t h a t , in t h e Greek
writers, it is used for criminating or ac-
cusing judicially. Campbell, whom see,
accordingly renders it in M a t t h e w by ar-
raign, and in L u k e by traduce. B u t in
Mat. and L u k e t h e more general sense of
injuring or despitefully using, seems p r e -
ferable; and in this sense also K y p k e on
Mat. shows t h e V. is used in t h e Greek
writers. [Wass. on T h u c y d . i. 2 6 , says
t h a t this verb signifies to do injury either
m word or deed, and generally implies
conlumely lo an inferior. So T h u c y d .
sense.
I. W i t h a genitive,
1. [ I t defines place, in answer to t h e
question where? and signifies upon, on,
in, at, and near."] M a t . iv. 6 . [ v . 1 0 . ] vi.
1 0 , 1 9 . [ i x . 2 . ] xvi. 1 9 . [xviii. 1 8 , 1 9 . ]
xxiv. 3 0 . xxvi. 6 4 . & al. [Add Mat.
xxvii. 1 9 . M a r k iv. 1. viii. 4 . L u k e iv. 2 9 .
J o h n vi. 2 1 . xvii. 4 . A c t s xii. 2 1 . H e b .
viii. 4 , where Schleusner says i t d e -
notes place or origin. L u k e xxii. 4 0 , at
the place, A c t s x x . 9 , at the door. Ple-
rodian v. 9 2 . 3 . Rev. i. 2 0 . X e n . A n a b .
iv. 3 . 2 8 , at the river. M a t . x x i . 1 9 , near
the road or on the road. I n M a r k xii.
2 6 . and L u k e xx. 3 7 , ETO. rí fiara, t h e r e
seems little doubt t h a t we are to construe
In that place which contains the hisiory,
qfthe bush. Jablonski, in t h e preface to
his H e b r e w Bible (Berlin, 1 6 9 9 ) , § 3 7 ,
points out t h e fact t h a t t h e Rabbins se-
lect some principal word in each section,
and cali t h e section by t h a t ñame. Comp.
Herodian i. 8 . 8 . iii. 4 . 6 . Pausan, vii. 2 6 .
8 . X e n . A n a b . vii. 4 . 4 . P l a t . L e g g . v.
T . ii. p . 7 2 8 . ]
2 . \_In, used of the subject. Rom. i. 1 0 ,
in my prayers. Schleusner refers J o h n
VI. 2 , ar¡p¿ía, a hiroísi hirl rwv aaQtvüv, to
this head. I should r a t h e r say, it was in
the case of. W a h l refers it to t h e sense
at, near to. W e have an analogous ex-
pression, The miracles which lie per-
formed on the sickf\
3 . Upon, in, by. M a t . xviii. 1 6 . 2 Cor.
xiii. 1 . So we say in E n g l i s h , upon t h e
word, or oath. [So 1 T i m . v. 1 9 . Irri
paprvpwv on the testimony of witnesses,
in which sense t h e preposition occurs
with t h e dative in D e u t . xvii. 6 .
Comp. D e u t . x i x . 1 5 , in t h e H e b r . a n d
LXX.]
4 . Above [ o r overj denoting pre-emi-
nence, E p h . iv. 6 . [So M a t . ii. 2 2 , over
Judcea. Rev. ix. 1 1 , a king over them. xi.
6, power over ilie waves.~]
 E III 2S4
5. Over, of business, A c t s vi. 3.—or
office, A c t s viii. 2 / ; 'O ITT¿ ra KOITÍÓVOQ,
He who is over the bedehamber, a cham-
berlain. occ. Acts xii. 20. This expres-
sion is agreeable to the style of the Greek
classics. Raphelius and Wetstein show,
t h a t t h e verv phrase, ' 0 1 'EI1T TO"Y
KOITSi"NOS," is several times used by
Arrian. Coinp. Kypke. [See Diodor.
Sic. xiii. 47. Polvb. v. 72. 8. Herodian ii.
2. 5. D e m . 3 0 9 . ' 9 . Xen. Anab. iii. 2. 36.
I n later writers it is often used in this
sense ¿¿ htí TLOV kwcsoXSiv ab epistolis.
See Lennep. ad Phalar. p . 3 0 6 . ]
6. I t denotes the time, office, or govern-
ment of a person [or thing."] So 'Ewl
'EXiacraía, I n the time of Eliseus, L u k e
iv. 27. Comp. Acts xi. 2 8 . ' E T T Í 'AgtáOap
ra apyíepÉuiQ, In the time of Abiathar ihe
high pricst, Mark ii. 26, where see W e t -
stein and Bowyer. I n t h e profane writers
I T T Í is often used in this sense. [Mat. i. 11.
("near thc time.) 3 Esdr. ii. 16. H o m . II.
B . 797. Arrian, iii. 7 3 . JElian. V. H . xiii.
17. Herodot. i. 15. viii. 44. Xen. Cyr. i. 6.
3 1 . Obss. M i s e vi. p . 293.]
7- Before, i. e. governors or magis-
trales, in a judicial sense. Mark xiii. 9.
A c t s xxiii. 30. 1 T i m . vi. J 3 . 1 Cor. vi.
1 ; where see Wetstein. Compare Acts
xxiv. 19. xxv. 9, 26. xxvi. 2. A n d in
this sense, in which it is also used by t h e
profane writers, G r o t i u s understauds it,
M a t . xxviii. 14. [ O t h e r s , as Kuinoél,
say, t h a t iu this place i-n-l is for vito by,
as in Diod. Sic. p. 26. E . So Synim. 2
Sam. xxi. 6. comp. 9, and D e u t . xxi. 2 3 .
Diod. Sic. xi. 5 5 . xvi. 93, (where see
Wesseling.) JEIian. V. H . viii. 12. Xen.
Hell. vi. 5. 3 8 . V e n a t . iii. 4. D'Orvill. ad
Charit. viii. c. 8. p. 642. ed. Lips.]
8. [ I t denotes motion, and answers to
the question whilher ? on, towards. M a t .
xxvi. 12. John xxi. 11. Acts x. 11. Polyb.
ii. 11. 16. Herodian iii. 2. 11. Xen. Cvr.
v. 2. 3 7 . ]
9. [Of, or coucerning, after verbs lo
say, boast, &c. 2 Cor. vii. 14, my boasting
concerning Tilus. Gal. iii. 16. It does
not say, and lo thy seeds, as (if speaking)
of many. So Plato C h a n n i d . p . 111. (62
ed. Heindorf.) L e g g . vii. p . 3 3 2 . D e m .
1392, 23.]
10. According, agrceably lo. M a r k xii.
3 2 . 'Eir aXndeíac, According lo truth,
truly. So Demosthenes, D e Coron.—
"Oure ciKaíuie ar' 'Efí' ' A A I 1 G E I A S H ? Í -
piác éipm-iíva, T h i n g s spoken neither
justly, ñor with any truth.
E n i
I I . W i t h a Dative,
1. [Of place, on. M a t . xiv. 11. on a
charger. M a r k ii. 4. vi. 3 9 . L u k e xix. 44.
E p h . ii. 20. Polyb. i. 67- 13. Herodian i.
6 . 3 ; at ornear. M a t . xxiv. 3 3 . Coinp.
M a r k xiii. 29. and Acts v. 9. John iv. 6,
27- v. 2. A c t s iii. 10. xxviii. 14. Diodor.
Sic. xiv. 113. Xen. M e m . iii. 14. 2. and
Cyr. i. 3 . 11. In M a t . ix. 16, place is
also indicated. No one puts a paich of
new cloih on an oíd garment]
2. [Against. L u k e xii. 5 3 . Ecclus. vii.
12. Joseph. A n t . ii. 9. 7. iElian. V. H .
iv. 5. D e m . 7 0 1 , 14. 7 4 2 , 2 0 . ]
3. Upon, besides. M a t . xxv. 2 0 , 2 2 .
L u k e iii. 20. E p h . vi. 16. 'E?r£ Team ra'-
roie, Besides, or over and above, all these
things. L u k e xvi. 26. Polybius has used
this phrase in the same sense, as may be
seen in Raphelius. So h a t h Lucian, Pseu-
domant, tom. i. p. 8 6 ! . ' E T T ¿ rrácn (St T¿TOIQ,
B u t besides all these (qualifications.)
[ A d d H e b . viii. 1. Col. iii. 13. Lucian.
Dial. Deor. i. 3 . H o m . Odyss. iii. 115.
X e n . Cyr. iv. 5. 3 8 . ]
4. After. M a r k vi. 5 2 , They did not
understand iirl role aprole after, in conse-
quence of the loaves, i. e. being miracu-
lously multipüed. Compare A c t s xi. 19,
and Kypke there, and on Phil. ii. 2 7 . [ I n
Acts xi. 19, transíate after ( t h e death of)
Stephen. So Schleusner and W a h l . P a r k -
h u r s t refers it to head 8, on account of.
H e b . ix. 17, after Ihe dead, i. e. after the
testator is dead. So iElian. V. H. iv. 5.
Xen. de Rep. Lac. xiii. 7. A n a b . iii. 2. 3 .
Hell. iv. 4-. 9- & al., and without a case,
Herod. vii. 5 5 . T h i s sense is nearly allied
with the l a s t . ]
[ 5 . I t denotes conneclion of lime. J o h n
iv. 2 7 , whilst this was doing. H e b . ix. 15,
the sins committed during the (continu-
ance of t h e ) oíd covenant. 2 Cor. iii. 14,
during, or at the reading. Phil. i. 13, al
every remembrance, i. e. whenever I re-
member. Paus. vi. 2. 4. x. 9. 2. Greg.
Cor. p . 4 9 0 . ed. Schcef.]
[ 6 . Under aulhorily qf. M a t . xxiv. 5.
Mark ix. 3 9 . L u k e ix. 4 9 . xxiv. 4 7 . In
A c t s ii. 38, where t h e same phrase oc-
eurs, fiínrriaoiirtú iwl ru> ovópari 'I. X.,
Wolf says it is t h e same as / J W r ite Xpi-
arbv, iie ovopa X., iv ovóp. X., aud refers
to V i t r i n g a Obss. Sac. L i b . iii. c. xxii. But
V i t r i n g a makes a difference between these
three phrases. T o be baptized in the
ñame of Christ (iv ovóp.) is, he says, to
he baptized by the order and authority ot
Christ, in the baptism conmianded by
 E IT 1 285 E n i

him, while the two first imply alike lo be astonished at (by) his teaching.' xviii.
baplized, in order to prqfess communion 13, 26. M a r k iii. 5. vi. 34. (comp. L u k e
with Christ. W a h l says, t h a t iwl indi- vii. 13.) xii. 17. L u k e i. 47- xix. 4 1 . A c t s
cates the condition or law on which any xiv. 3 . R o m . xv. 12. (comp. 1 T i m . iv.
t h i n g is done, and explains this place 10.) 1 Cor. i. 9. 1 John iii. 3 . So Lucian
t h u s : Let him be baplized on the con- Dial. Deor. xii. 2. xxv. 6. Polyb. i. 82.
dition of professing Christ. I n the fol- 6. ii. 17. 1. Diod. Sic. i. 5 1 . ii. 1. iii. 56.
lowing places, condition is implied. Rom. ^ l i a n . V. H . iii. 28. 29. See M a t t h . §
viii. 20. iw' kXwíSi. ' T h e creature was 4 0 3 . a. and c. T h e r e are other instances
made subject to frailty, under the hope where iwl occurs unnecessarily as WI^ÍVÍIV

that it will be freed/ So 1 Cor. i x . 10. iwl nvi. Rom. ix. 36. x. 1 1 . 1 P e t . ii. 6.
under the hope (of a harvest). See Diod. Diod. Sic. i. 79. for wi^zvia takes t h e
Sic. ii. 25 and 3 4 . Lucian. Dial. Deor. dative. So with wpciacro) (in Acts v. 3 5 . )
i. 4. Polyb. i. 59. 7 . * ] which likewise has a simple dative in this
[ 7 . T t indicates ihe purpose or plan. sense. See M a t h . §. 4 0 9 . ]
For or on account of. Mat. xxvi. 50. [ 1 0 . W i t h some substantives it is used
For what are you come? Gal. v. 13. instead of the corresponding adverb. A c t s
ye were called for freedom, i. e. that ii. 26. hopefully or securely. Rom. v. 14.
yon might be free. Eph. ii. 10. for Sinning in the same way as (after the
good works, i. e. to do good works. likeness of). P s . xvi. 9. iEsch. Suppl.
Philipp. iii. 12. 1 Thess. iv. 7- 2 T i m . 636.]
ii. 14. T i t . i. 2. that they may hope [ 1 1 . W i t h the dative it seems p u t for
for eternal life. Wisd. ii. 2 3 . Apol- t h e genitive, as (1) After verbs of naming.
lodor. iii. 9. Polyb. ii. 13. /• X e n . M e m . Luke i. 59, after the ñame of, and so
ii. 3 . 19. T i m e . i. 125. E u r . Phcen. 3 Esdr. iv. 63. In good Greek, t h e g e -
1580.] nitive is used (Herod. iv. 45.) On these
[ 8 . I t indicates t h e cause for which changes of dative for genitive after iwl,
any t h i n g is done. Because qf. for. Luke see Lobeck. ad P h r y n . p . 4 7 4 . (2) After
v. 5. Because qf, thy order. ix. 4 8 . for verbs of saying or wriling. Acts iv. 17,
my name's sake. Acts iii. 16. Because of 18. v. 28, 40.]
faith in his ñame. xxvi. 6. 1 Cor. i. 4. I I I . W i t h an accusative,
Phil. i. 5. iii. 9. Henee, i<¡>' y is because [ 1 . I t denotes place, w h i t h e r , after
(for iwl rárw ¿Vi) Rom. v. 12. 2 Cor. v. 4. verbs of motion, and is on, to. as Mat. iii.
W a h l explains it in P h i l . iv. 10, as 16. v. 5. ix. 18. xii. 2 8 . xiii. 5. xiv. 19.
wherefore ; b u t I think our versión r i g h t , xxi. 44. xxiii. 3 5 . Comp. xxvii. 2 5 , and
wherein, i. e. on or about which thing. Acts xviii. 6. L u k e i. 3 5 . x. 9. xix. 4 3 .
Schl. says although. See some remarks John i. 3 3 . Acts i. 2 1 , 26. ii. 17, 18. x.
a t the end of this article.] 10. xiii. 11. xix. 6. 2 Cor. iii. 13. Gal.
[9. I t indicates t h e cause or means vi. 16. Diod. Sic. i. 27. X e n . Cyr. iii. 1.
by which any t h i n g is done, or on 4. Anab. i. 4. 11.]
which it depends, with verbs neuter [ 2 . Towards (denoting state of feel-
and passive, where the canse is often ing, as in sense 3 ) . M a t . xiv. 14. L u k e vi.
expressed by a smple dative. T h u s 3 5 . Rom. ix. 2 3 . xi. 22. E p h . ii. 17. al.
'(r)v E V ciprio. M a t . iv. 4. L u k e iv. 4. to Herodian. i. 77.]
Uve (by means of) upon bread. The [3. Against. M a t . x. 2 1 . M a r k iii. 2 4 ,
same phrase occurs A then. x. 4 3 . M a x . 25, 26. comp. Luke xi. 17. A c t s xiii. 50.
T y r . xxiv. 6. ¡iioreviiv iwí oivo>. Alceph. Rom. xi. 22. W a h l refers 2 Thess. ii. 4.
iii. Ep. 7. P l a t . Alcib. i. Sub ínit. D e u t . to this head. Schl. a n d our translation
viii. 3 . T h i s is the case, especially after more r i g h t l y say, over, as in H e b . ii. 7.
verbs of rejoicing, grieving, wondering, Herodian. vii. 1. 13. Diod. Sic. ii. 19. xv.
hoping, pitying, Irusting, where t h e 4 1 . Schl., and I think rightly, refers Mat.
Latins use de, or the accusative, or abla- xxvi. 5 5 , we iwl \í¡^r]it to this h e a d ; W a h l
tive, or genitive. M a t . vii. 2 8 . they were to the n e x t . ]
[ 4 . I t expresses the purpose, for, for
* [Condition is a very c o m m o n m e a n i n g in the purpose of M a t . iii. 7. for the pur-
classical writers. H e r o d . i. G0, to marry his daugh- pose of being baplized. L u k e vii. 44. xxiii.
ter, in) ri¡ Tupxnlii on condition of getliiig. /15sch.
Ctes. p. 4 9 9 . to dedícate the groiiud to Apollo, 48. Acts viii. 32. H e b . xii. i O. W a h l
iir) nían iipyíct on condition it shall not be cnlti- refers Acts xix. 13, to this head, and
vated. See M a t h i í e § 5 3 5 . 0.J translates, io use the ñame of Jesús to
 E nr 286 E n i

cure ¿he possessed; b u t t h e action is n o t [ 1 . Although 2 Cor. v. 4 . Phil. iv.

expressed by t h e word following ira. as in 10.]
other cases. Kuinoel, however, translates [ 2 . Because, R o m . v. 12. Phil. iii.
it, on account of, or for the sake of, and 12. t h o u g h this passage should, he
refers t o S t u r z . Lex. X e n . p . 267. See t h i n k s , be referred r a t h e r to t h e n e x t
Pol. x. 3 4 . 8. Herodian. ii. 10. 14. X e n . sense.]
Cyr. i. 2. 19.] [ 3 . On which condition. See M a t h . §
[ 5 . I t defines dnration of time, for, 584. /6. M u n c k e r a d Antonin. Lib. M e t .
during. L u k e iv. 2 5 . xviii. 4 . A c t s xiii. p. 193. B e r g l . ad Aristoph. P l u t . 1 0 0 1 .
3 1 . xx. 1 1 . (xpóvov understood) xxviii. P h i l . iii. 12. On which condition I mas
6. 1 Cor. vii. 3 9 . H e b . xi. 3 0 . Polyb. i. also brought by Christ to the Christian
39. 12. iv. 6 3 . 8. Xen. A n . vi. 1.19. I t religión.]
seems also to define time, t h o u g h not e x - [ 4 . Why? wherefore? M a t . xxvi. 50.]
actly, tomards. M a r k x v . 1. towards I V . I n composition,
morning. Polyb. iii. 83. 7.] 1 . I t retains one or other of t h e senses
[6. W i t h t h e cardinal numbers, about. above assigned, which i t is unnecessary to
Rev. xxi. 16. and so i E l . V. H . iii. 1. Xen. repeat.
M e m . i. 4. 17.] 2 . I t is intensive, or heighlens t h e
[ 7 . I t denotes the place mhere, on or meaning of t h e simple word, as iiri'Cryréíú
at, as M a t . xiii. 2 . xviii. 12. x i x . 2 8 . to seeh earnestly.
xxi. 5 . L u k e ii. 8. v. 2 7 . xxi. 3 5 . J o h n 'E7ri€a£y(i> from EVÍ upon or to, a n d
i. 32. xii. 15. A c t s x. 17. xi. 1 1 . x v . 17. ¡3aívo) to go.— [Properly, To go, or walk
Rev. xiv. 14. x v . 2. Xen. C y r . iii. 3 . on, to tread on, as D e u t . i. 5 6 . X e n .
Cyr. iii. 3 . 27. To ascend, D e u t , xxxiii.
[8. Over, of office or dignity, especially 2 6 . ]
with mOitávaí and elvaí. M a t . xxv. 2 1 . I . To go upon, mount, as an ass. occ.
L u k e xii. 14. H e b . ii. 7. vii. 2 7 . Exod. M a t . x x i . 5, Lin€e€riK¿)c; having mounted,
ii. 19. Diod. Sic. i. 9 1 . Plat. T i m . 3 3 6 . so sitting upon. [ G e n . xxiv. 6 1 . N u m b .
Lobeck ad P h r y n . p . 474.] xxii. 22. iEsch. Dial. i. 4.]
[ 9 . I t serves with a noun as an a d v e r b ; I I . To go on ship-board. occ. A c t s xxi.
Ivrt TO avrb together, i. e. ( 1 ) In the 2, 6. xxvii. 2 . T h e best Greek writers
same place. M a t . xxii. 34. L u k e xvii. 3 5 . use t h e V . in this sense. See Wetstein
1 Cor. vii. 5 . x i . 2 0 . (2) At the same [ T h u c y d . i. 3 . H o m . Od. i. 213.]
time. Acts iii. 1. 2 Sam. x x i . 9. e<f oaov I I I . To come to, enter into. occ. Acts
inasmuch as. M a t . x x v . 4 0 , 4 5 . Rom.xx. 18.
xi. 1 3 . Polyb. iv. 4 1 . 3 . Diod. Sic. i. I V . 'ETTÍGUÍVEIV rrj e-Kapyíq, To enter
93.] upon the government of the province. occ.
[10. I t is p u t with t h e accusative for A c t s xxv. 1 , where Wetstein cites from
t h e genitive.—after verbs of saying, &c. Dio, ' E Ü I B A I N E T N T i n ' A P X H \ u s e d
M a r k i x . 12. 1 T i m . i. 18. H e b . vii. in t h e same view. [Zosim.i. p. 7. Demost.
de Cor. p. 278.]
[ 1 1 . F o r t h e dative with ¿Vi, or dative 'E7rí€áXXw, from éwl upon, or unto and
alone: after verbs expressing connexion. /3áXXw to cast, put.
H e b . viii. 8. Comp. J e r . x x x i . 3 1 . — a n d I . To cast, throw, lay, or put upon, or
verbs denoting joy, grief, hope, or trust, to, injicere, superinjicere, [ a s a net.
as M a t . xxvii. 4 3 . Comp. 2 Cor. ii. 3 . 1 Cor. vii. 3 5 . garments. M a r k xi. 7.
2 T i m . iii. 4 . A c t s xi. 17. 2 Cor. vii. 3 6 . patches ( t o sew t h e m o n ) . M a t . ix. 16.
1 P e t . iii. 5. Rev. i. 7. xviii. 2 0 . See L u k e v. 3 6 . to put one's hand lo. L u k e
Lobeck on P h r y n . p . 4 7 4 . — I n addition ix. 62. to lay hands on violently. M a t .
to t h e above, i t m a y be mentioned, t h a t xxvi. 5 0 . M a r k xiv. 4 6 . L u k e x x . 19.
t h e sense before or in presence of, is a l - x x i . 12. John vii. 3 0 . 4 4 . Acts iv. 3 . v,
leged by P a r k h u r s t to be found in M a t . 18. xxi. 2 7 . G e n . xxii. 12.] O n L u k e
x. 1S, b u t others say, and I think rightly, xxi. 12, Elsner cites Aristophanes [ L y s .
t h a t i t is simply to. I n t h e two passages 440.] a u d Heliodorus using t h e phrase
M a t . vi. 2 7 , and P h i l . ii. 2 7 , there seems ' E n i B A ' A A E I N XEIPA', & — X E I P A ' S ,
to be a similarity, a sense of addition, and in t h e same sense as t h e Evangelist,
we may transíate upon7\ I I . Intransitively. To' rush, beat into,
['E0' ¿> appears to have several senses. M a r k iv. 37- So K y p k e , whom see, and
Schl. gives them as follows :] comp. BÚXXÍD V I . Elsner and Wolfius
 E n i 287 E n i

however understand e-rr&íiWeiv in a t r a n - J e r . xiv. 3 , 4. T h e same custom we find

sitive sense, And (the storm) dashed the among other nations. T h u s in H o m e r ,
naves into the ship. B u t I concur with II. xxiv. lin. 163, P r i a m , when grieving
K y p k e . [See 1 M a c . iv. 2. 2 M a c . xii. for his son H é c t o r , is represented
9, 13. xiii. 15. xv. 1.]
I I I . To come, or fall to one's share ' E v T ü T r a p i v yXa.tvy xsxahufÁfjLsvo;—>
upon a división, occ. L u k e xv. 12, Tó
eTTCoáXXoy pepos rrjg éaíag, The portion of Close-mufflcd in his role—
goods which falleth to one's share, " The
portion of goods t h a t belongeth to me by
t h e laws. T h i s is t h e import of t h e e x - So P a n t h e a , t h e wife of Abradatas, when
pression in other writers, and t h e most taken by Cyrus, is described by * Xeno-
natural i n t e r p r e t a r o n of i t here. T h e phon as s i t t i n g KEKaXvppévn TE, K C U ELQ
reference may be to t h e laws either of t h e yr)v bpSio-a, covered with a veil, and look-
J e w s or of t h e R o m a n s ; for in this t h e y ing upon t h e ground. Isocrates in T r a -
agreed, t h a t they did not allow to t h e fa- pezit. ' E T T E Í S ? ) rjXOopev lie atcpórroXiv, ky-
t h e r of a family t h e voluntary distribu- tcaXvú/cifiEvoQ 'ÉicXaiE, After we were come
tion of his whole e s t á t e ; b u t allotted a to t h e citadel, covering or muffling him-
certain portion to every son. [See D e u t . self, he wept. And t h u s in Plato's Phse-
xxi. 16.] T h e young man therefore only don, towards t h e end, 'TLytcaXvfyápEvoQ
desires the immediate possession of t h a t cnréicXaiov kpavrov, Muffling, I bemoaned
fortune which, according to t h e common myself. In t h e t w o last passages t h e
coúrse of things, m u s t in a few years de- expression is plainly elliptical, and nearly
volve to him." Powell's Disc. xiv. p . 2 2 8 , parallel to t h a t of S t . M a r k . See more
9. Comp. 1 Mac. x. 3 0 . Demosthenes, in Elsner and Wolfius on t h e t e x t , and
D e Corona, mentions, Tf¡e rwv CÍXXOJV av- in Suicer's Thesaurus, under 'ExiSáXXw.
Opwirwv rvxfje
r
« ' E n i B A ' A A O N iip iipag I t should, however, be observed, t h a t
ME'POS, T h a t share of t h e common lot Wetstein and Campbell concur with our
of mankind which falleth to u s . H e - E n g . translation of 'íwit>aX¿iv, by when he
rodotus and other Greek authors use t h e thought ihereon: and t h e former p r o -
same expression, as may be seen in Ra- duces several passages from t h e G r e e k
phelius, Wetstein, and Kypke on L u k e writers, where l7r16aXXf.1v rov VHV or rt]v
xv. 12. [ S e e 1 Mac. x. 3 0 . 2 Mac. iii. Siávoiav are construed with a dative in
2. Polyb. xviii. 34/. 1. Dio Cass. i. 5 6 . this sense; b u t when Campbell (whom
Demosth. p . 3 1 2 . ed. Reisk. Herod. iv. see) asserts t h a t of t h e word used singly
115. G a t a k e r ad Antonin. vii. 7. Wessel in this acceptation, Wetstein has produced
ad Diodor. Sic. i. 1.] clear examples from Polybius, [ i . 8 0 . ]
I V . To throm or put over, as clothes. Theophrastus, [ C h a r . viii.] P l u t a r c h ,
T h u s Eurípides, Electra, line 1221, 'Ey¿> Diodorus Siculus, Diogenes L a e r t i u s , —
¡IEV 'EIIIBAA£i N (pápr¡ ¡cópale epaten,
v
I he seems to go too far, and I believe will
having thrown a cloak over my eyes. So not meet with many persons of t h e same
in t h e pass. or mid. voice, t h e word for opinión among those who carefully e x -
the g a r m e n t being understood, 'E7riۇX- amine t h e examples produced from those
Xeodaí, To lie wrapi over, covered, or io authors. Kypke also produces several
wrap up, cover oneself in clothes, is used passages from t h e Greek writers, in which
by Theophrastus, E t h i c . Char. cap. ii. kn-i'oéiXXEiv by itself may seem to be used
where see D u p o r t . A n d t h u s kw&aXúv for adverting, atiending. I add from
is by many learned men interpreted, Marcus A n t o n i n u s , lib. 10. cap. 3 0 . p .
M a r k xiv. 72, 'EirctaXwv ItcXaie, throwing 205, small Glasgow edit. rarw y a p ' E n i -
{his mantle namely) over his head, or BA AAQN ra-¡(Éo}Q kiTiXi¡o-n rrjs opyne, for
face, he wept, where Theophylact men- aitending to this (hoc enim si adverteris)
tions t h e explanation of I m i a X w v by ¿Vi- you will soon forget your resentment.
KaXv\\iápíV0Q rr)v KEtyáXnv covering his L e t t h e reader consider and j u d g e .
head, which was usual in bitter grief, as [Abresch. ad iEschyl. p . 4 1 0 . Salinas, de
St. M a t . ch. xxvi. 7 5 , expressly informs Fcen. T r a p e z . p . 2 7 6 . and Krebs. Obss.
us this of P e t e r was. So in t h e O í d Flav. p . 9 3 . t r a n s í a t e , covering up his
Testament we read of David, when he face. O t h e r s say, he wept vehemcntly,
wept, covering his head or face, 2 S a m .
xv. 30. xix, 4 or 5. Comp. E s t h . vi. 12. * Cyvopred. l i b . v. ¡id init.
 E n i 288
taking £7ri§á,\\ü) as to aáá. O t h e r s , he
began to weep, for ¿ V i € . is often to begin.
Diog. Laert. vi. c. 2. Schol. T h u c y d . iii.
p . 1967]
t ^ g " 'Ejn€apéii¡, <5, from iirl upon, or
intensive, and ftapew to burden.
I . To burden with expense, be burden-
some, or chargeable, to. occ. 1 Thess. ii.
9. 2 Thess. iii. 8.
I I . To overburáen, overcharge, with
an accusation. occ. 2 Cor. ii. 5 . [Schl.
would include the words 'Iva pr) eirifiapoi
in a parenthesis, and transíate, That I
may not use any harsh expressionf\
'E7ri£i€áf«, from ¿Vi upon, and ¡Sitado)
to canse to go.—To put, or set upon. occ.
L u k e x. 34. xix. 3 5 . A c t s xxiii. 24.
[ 2 Sam. vi. 3 . 1 K i n g s i. 31.]
'E7ri€X.£7rw, from km upon, and /3\EVIU to
look.—To loo fe upon.
I . 7'o foo/c upon, regará wilhfavour or
compassion. occ. L u k e i. 48. ix. 3 8 . [So
Levit. xxvi. 9. I Sam. i. I I . ]
I I . To look upon with respect or re-
verence, to respect, reverence. occ. J a m .
ii. 3 .
'ExíSXr¡pa, a r o c , r o , from iir£í&Xr)pai
perf. pass. of ¿ViSáXAw.—A patch, or
piece of cloth, put, or scwed upon a gar-
ment, to cover a r e n t * . occ. M a t . ix. 16.
M a r k ii. 2 1 . L u k e v. 36 ; from which last
text " the word irri^Xiipa is w a n t i n g in
so m a n y copies, and so unnecessary, that
it seems to be an é-ítXr¡pa. T h e nomi-
native case to o-yjfei I take to be ó ar-
Oponroe, to be fetched out of ¿oelc, which
is avdpio-ñog a , as nenio in Latin is often
homo non. If Kaivbv be the nominative
case, then after eryfCei is to be understood
ro TTaXaiov. M a r k l a n d , in Bowyer's Con-
j e c t . See also Wetstein and Griesbach,
who likewise reject Irrl^Xrjpa. Comp.
K y p k e on Luke.
ffgp° 'ETTIÉOCIOJ, w, from ¿Vi intens. and
floáoi to cry out.—To cry out aloud, to
roar out. occ. A c t s xxv. 24. [ T h u c y d . iii.
59. Dion. H a l . A n t . vi. 74.]
'Em^ovXi), ÍJQ, i), from ¿TTÍ against, and
fjovXi) design, purpose.—A design against,
a lying-in-mait for, an ambush, insidies,
occ. A c t s ix. 24. xx. 3 , 19. xxiii. 30.
[ E s t h . ii. 22. T h u c y d . viii. 24. Herodian.
iii. 5. 9.]
'Ewiyapt>pívw, from ¿7ri to or after, and
yaptpívui used in t h e L X X , D e u t . vii. 3 .
* [ I n S y r a m . J o s h . i x . 5 . the shoes of the G i - ahd observing that the Cambridge, five other M S S - ,
beonitcs, which had various pieces of hide sewed to ar,d the V u l g a t e , omit ivrh,
them, are said to have ÍTti[i>.ni-ioiTa. ]
E n T
1 Kings iii. 1. for the H e b . fnnriM ¡o con-
tract affinily by marriage, and derived
from yapSpbe (q. yapepbc) a relation by
marriage, which in the L X X answers to
the N. jnn in t h e sense both of a father
—and of a son-in-law, and is a derivative
of yapko to marry.
I. In t h e L X X , To conlracl affinily by
marriage. occ. Gen. xxxiv. 9. 2 Chron.
xviii. 1. E z r a ix. 14, for t h e H e b . }nnnn.
Compare 1 Maccabees x. 56. [ 1 Samuel
xviii. 2 2 . Spanh. ad Joel. I m p . pp. 72
and 2 8 2 . ]
I I . In the L X X , To be a son-in-law.
occ. 1 Sam. xviii. 22, 2 3 , 2 6 , 2 7 , for the
H e b . fni-inn. So 1 Mac. x. 54.
I I I . In t h e L X X , To marry a woman,
particularly a brother's wife, by right rf
affinily, after the decease of her former
husband. T h u s it is used Gen. xxxviii.
8. for the H e b . t e and t h u s it oceurs
once in the i i . T. M a t . xxii. 24.
'E~iyewQ, a, h, i\, nal r o — o v , from srrl
upon, and yéa or y>7 the earlh.
I. Earthly, lerreslria!, made qf earlh.
occ. 1 Cor. xv. 40. 2 Cor. v. 1. Comp.
J o b iv. 19. [Phil. ii. 10. T h e r e is a sense
of frailly in each place.]
I I . Earthly, arisingfrom, and allachcd
to Ihc earth, [ a n d so base and imperfect.]
occ. J a m . iii. 15. [Phil. iii. 19. Earlhly,
not raised above the earlh, and so levcl lo
human capacilies. J o h n iii. 1 2 . ]
'E-iyivopai, from ¿Vi upon, and y i r o -
pai to be, come. — To come on, arise,
spring up. Spoken of the wind. occ.
Acts xxviii. 13. So Thucydides I V . 30.
ÍINE'YMATOS 'EniFENOME'NOY. Seo
more in Wetstein. [ T h u c . iii. 74. Polyb.
i. 54. 6. Herodot. v. S . ]
'Eiriyivíoo-Kio, or eTríyvtopí, from e V i i n -
tens. or after, and yívióaicw, or yrtopl lo
know.— To know. M a r k ii. 8. v. 30. vi.
3 3 * . Luke i. 2 2 . v. 22. xxv. 10. 2 Cor. !.
13. I n some of these, one would t r a n s -
íate t h e verb lo understand. In Acts
xii. 14, i t i s to perceive. In L u k e vii. 3 7 .
xxiii. 7. Acts ix. 3 0 . xxii. 2 9 , it is lo
know from informalion. Schl. says, that
in Acts xxviii. 1, it is lo perceive, but
I doubt whether it should not be referred
to the sense to recognisef]
I I . To discern, know a person's real
* [ P a r k h u r s t translates, And many laterv (not
him, J e s ú s , b u t ) the place, referring to B o w y e r ,
and so Griesbach and
I Campbel!.] '
 E n i 289 E n i

character and nature. M a t . vii. 1G, 20.,
xvii. 12. Comp. 2 Cor. xiii. 5.
I I I . To recognise. M a t . xiv. 3 5 . M a r k
vi. 54. L u k e xxiv. 3 1 . Comp, A c t s [iii.
10.] iv. 13. xii. 14. xix. 34. [iii. 10. xxvii.
3 9 . Xen. Hell. v. 4. 12.]
I V . To know thoroughly, understand.
L u k e i. 4. 1 Cor. xiii. 12. 2 P e t . ii. 2 1 .
Comp. A c t s xxiv. 8. Rom. i. 32. [Mat.
xi. 27.]
V. To acknowledge. 1 Cor. xiv. 3 7 .
xvi. 18. 2 Cor. i. 13^ Comp. Col. i. G.
[ T h e r e is some difference as to these
passages. Schl. and Wahl say, t h a t in
M a t . xvii. 12. 1 Cor. xvi. i 8, the sense
is to acknowledge, receive, and venérale,
q u o t i n g Exod. v. 2. 1 Sam. ii. 12. J e r . ii.
8. and referring to 1 Thess. v. 12. and
Euseb. ii. E . iv. 5. T h e verb in 1 Cor.
xiv. 3 7 . is.said by W a h l to be to under-
stand, by Schl. to decide.]
'EiríyvúicriQ, IOQ, A t t . ewc, ?';, from
ímyívíxTKLo.—Knowledge. See Rom.
28. iii. 20. x. 2. Col. i. 9. In several
passages, as Col. ii. 2. 2 T i m . ii. 25. T i t .
i. 1, it is rendered in our translation ac-
knowledgement, or acknowledging ; b u t
knowledge seems the better interpreta-
tion. Comp. 1 T i m . ii. 4. 2 T i m . iii. 7.
['Eytiv ev éiriyvúio-ci is the same as EVÍ-
yivwo-KM. Schl. says, t h a t iiriyvwaiQ is
sometimes the thing known, and then p u t s
éicíyvLomc 0E« or ¿ÍS TS &e5 for religión
and Christianity. occ. 1 Kings vii. 14. occ. A c t s xviii. 28. H e b . vi. 17- [Xen.
Prov. ii. 5. Hor. iv. I . ]
Ej§¡p° 'Eiriypatpi), ijc, f¡, from é-nr/pucpLo.
I. An inscription upon money, denoting X°p
Rev. xxi. 12. [ N u m b . xvii. 2, 3. 1 Mace,
iii. 49.] On Acts xvii. 2 3 , we may ob-
serve with the learned * Ellis, t h a t " it
was a custom among t h e ancients, to en-
grave on t h e altar the ñame of the god to
whom it was dedicated, which, at Atliens
in particular, was necessary to distinguish
them amidst a coníiux of the most r e -
mote and strange ones from all p a r t s of
t h e world."
I I . To write over, or above. occ. M a r k
xv. 26. Comp. M a t . xxvii. 3 7 . L u k e
xxiii. 3 8 . Xenophon Cyropaed. lib. vii.
p. 3 9 3 . edit. H u t c h i n s o n , 8vo, mentions
a sepulchral column, on which the ñame
of an eminent man and his wife 'E1TI-
P E P P A *eAI — 2'YPI A rPA'MMATA
were written in Syrian letters.
'ETriceíuvvpi or erciSeiKvvto, from eirt in-
tens, and deucvvpi or eeiKvvio to show.
I . To show plainly, exhibit to view.
occ. M a t . xvi. 1. xxii. 19. xxiv. 1. L u k e
i. xvii. 14. x x . 24. xxiv. 40. Acts ix. 3 9 .
[In M a t . xxiv. 1. Schl. thinks it is to ex-
hibit ostentaliously. Comp. M a r k xiii. 1.
Xen. de M a g . Eq. c. iii. 1. and § 10.
Cyrop. viii. 4. 8 . ; and to perform pub-
licly, in M a t . xvi. 1. as in Xen. de R e p .
Lac. i. 2. Cyr. viii. 4. 4 . See Irmisch.
ad Herodian. i. 5. 24. 1 cannot see t h a t
the first of these senses is countenanced
by t h e c o n t e x t ]
I I . To show evidenily, demónstrate.
Cyr. v. 5. 8. So Hesych. and P h a v o r . ]
I^^°"E7r!t£xoac!(,froiii EVÍ intens. and cé-
lo receive.— To receive in \Jiosp>iial-
ai

the ñame, &c. of the prince by whose au- ity,] with résped or afj'ection. occ. 3 J o h n
thority it was coined. occ. M a t . xxii. 20. ver. 9, 10. [Polyb. xxii. 1.3.1 M a c xii. 8.]
M a r k xii. 16. L u k e x x . 24. Ef^° 'Erriüripéoj, io, from EVÍC^UOC a so-
I I . An inscription or super scripiion of journer, one who is or Uves among other
an aecusation w r i t t e n on or over a person people, froín ÉVÍ in, among, and cí¡poc a
crucified. occ. M a r k xv. 26. L u k e xxiii. people.— To sojourn, reside, or be a so-
38. T h a t this was agreeable to the R o - journer in a place, occ. A c t s ii. 10. xvii.
mán customs * , may be seen in B p . 2 1 , 'Oí eTTíSrifiSvrec '¿,¿vm, The strangers
Pearson on the Creed, A r t . 4, in H a m - sojourned there.—Theophrastus, E t h . Car.
mond's N o t e on M a r k xv. 26, and in í', speaking of A t h e n s , uses the same
Lardncr's Credibility of Gospel History, p h r a s e : IIoX/W 'EITIAHMO'YSI ZE'-
vol. i. book i. ch. 7. § 10. NOI, M a n y strangers sojourn here. O ur
E n g . word sojourn is from thc French
'E~iypít<¡>to, from EVÍ upon, or over, and
sejour abode, residence. See K y p k e on
ypátyw to write.
Acts xvii. 2 1 . [ A d d Herodian viii. 2 . 9.
I. To write upon, inscribe, engrave,
In A c t s ii. 10. t h e sense is, say Schl. and
whether in a proper or figurative sense.
W a h l , not to stay, or make a residence,
occ. Acts xvii. 2 3 . H e b . viii. 10. t x. 16. b u t to be a stranger, to Uve as a stranger,
and they refer to Xen. M e m . i. 2. 61.]
* [ T h e inscription was written i n black letters
on a white tablet. See S a l m a 3 . de M o d . Usur. p .
C87-1 * Knowledgc of Divine Things from Revela/ion,
t [ C o m p . Cic. A c a d . Q u s s t . iv. c. 1.] p . 2 4 2 . l s t edit.

u
 E n i 290 E n i

í}-i'7" 'E-móia-lico-opai, M i d . from tVi used as a substantive, Gentleness, meelc-

iipon, bcsides, and diaríian-M to order, ap-
point. To appoint any thing besides, to
superada, occ. Gal. iii. 15. [Schl. trans-
lates, to add new and contrary conditions,
such as the Greeks cali iixiliaBr\Kr\. Joseph.
A n t . xvii. 9. 4 . ]
'ETTIOÍSUILII, from éwi into, or intens. and
cídiopt to give. [ P r o p e r l y , To give in
addition. X e n . Cyr. viii. 9. 10. Polyb.
xxi. 14. 4.]
I. To give into the hand, deliver to
one, Mat.'vii. 9, 10. L u k e iv. 17- xxiv.
30, 42. John xiii, 26. A c t s xv. 30. & al.
I I . To give up, dedere, p e r m i t i e r e ,
occ. Acts xxvii. 15, where we may either
understand re irXdíov ra avspif the ship
to the wind, or r a t h e r with Raphelius.
kivrég ourselves ; as A r r i a n E p i c t e t . lib.
iv. cap. 9, speaking of timid persons ¿i
airat, EVCÜVTEC, Eiaarrav 'EÍIE'AQKAN
'EAYTOY'2 Kal ¿IQ inrb pEvparoc rrapzav-
pnaav, who, having once yielded, give
themselves up entirely, and are, as it
were, hurried away by t h e waves. See
more in Wolfius, Wetstein, and Kypke.
, Egip" 'EiruliopBúw, ¿3,—oopai, 5¡xai. Mid.
from ÉTTÍ bcsides, above, and SwpBóio io cor-
red, which see under AíópCWíc,'—To cor-
red, or sel in order. occ. T i t . i. 5. [ P h i l .
in Flacc. ii. p. 5 3 5 . ]
'Eiriobopai, from ÉTTI upon, and ciño to
set, as t h e sun or solar l i g h t . — T o set, oi-
go down, upon. occ. E p h . iv. 26. The
L X X use it in the same sense, and¡ in a
like construction for t h e H e b . «in io go
qf, D e u t . xxiv. 15. ' O v k 'E1TIAY'2ETAI
ó ?/Á<oc 'E1T 'AYTÍ1~(, The sun shall not
go down upon him. See also Wetstein
and Kypke. TPliil. de Legg. Spec. ii. p .
324.]
'EiriáKEta, ac, 77, from Éttieikíic, which
see.—Gentleness, elemeney. occ. A c t s
x x i v . 4. 2 Cor. x. 1, where see Wetstein.
[In A c t s xxiv. 4. piro tita humanitate, of
your courtesy. Comp. Herodian iv. 3. 4.
1 5 . 3 . v. 1. 12. Baruch ii. 2 1 . Wisd. ii.
19. 2 Mac. ii. 22. Polyb. i. 14. 4 . ]
'E^teno/e, éoc, 5c, o, i¡, from kirl intens.
or lo, and Eira to yield.—Yielding, qf a
yielding disposition, genlle, mild, patient.
occ. 1 T i m . iii. 3 . T i t . iii. 2. J a m . iii. 17.
[ A d d 1 Pet. ii. 18. P s . Ixxxvi. 5. Aris-
toph. N u b . 1440. Aristot. E t h . vi. 11.
Dio Cass. xxxvi. 9. In J a m e s iii. 17.
Schl. translates ¿Viao/c he who can ven-
der olhers mild and genlle. O n this
word, see Irmisch. E x c u r s . ad Herodian
i. 2. 5.] Henee the neut. 'EWIEIKEQ, ró,
ness, palience ; F r e n c h translat. douceur.
occ. Phil. iv. 5, where see W h i t b y and
M a c k n i g h t , and comp. James v. 8. H e b .
v. 3 6 , 37. W i s d . ii. 19.
'ETU'CTJTÉIÚ, ñ, from éirl intens. aud 'Qrrrhhi
lo seek. [1 Sam. xx. 1.]
I. To seek earnestly or continually. occ.
M a t . vi. 3 2 . L u k e xii. 3 0 . Rom. xi. 7.
P h i l . iv. 17. H e b . xi. 14. xiii. 14. Comp.
A c t s xii. 19.
I I . To require, demand earnestly. occ.
M a t . xii. 39. xvi. 4. M a r k viii. 12. L u k e
xi. 29. Comp. A c t s xiii. 7-
I I I . To inquire, debate, occ. A c t s xix.
39.
EHHf 3
'EiriOavárws, «, ó, n, from ¿Vi to,
and BcivaroQ death.—Appointed to death.
occ. 1 Cor. iv. 9, where see W h i t b y , D o d -
dridge, K y p k e , and M a c k n i g h t . [ T h i s is
t h e interpretación of Chrysostom. Scali-
ger on Manil. p . 3 1 7 , after Tertullian,
says, condemned to fight wilh beasis ; b u t
there is no grounds for this. O t h e r s in-
t e r p r e t it of t h e gladiators who were
k e p t to fight and be killed in public. T h e
word occurs in Dion. H a l . vii. c. 3 5 . and
in E u s t a t h . ad II. i. p . 448, 5 1 . T h e ad-
verb i-KiQava-'ibíc, in ¿El. V. H . xiii. 2 7 .
and t h e adjective in Reí and D r a g ó n v.
50. according to one M S . ]
'ETTIBEITIQ, ÍOC, A t t . EioQ, i/, from ¿Vtrc-
Bnpt io pul or lay on.—A putting or lay-
ing 011, an imposition. In t h e N . T . it is
applied only to the imposition of hands.
occ. Acts viii. 18. 1 T i m . iv. 14. 2 T i m .
i. 6. H e b . vi. 2. Comp. under Xe/p I I .
[ L a y i n g on of hands was used among t h e
Jews when blessing and divine assistance
was conferred. See Gen. xlviii. 14. 2
Kings v. 1 1 . T h e apostles used t h e same
rite iu ordaining ministers of t h e church,
and in giving t h e extraordinary graces of
the Spirit. T h i s word only occurs in t h e
O. T . in a bad sense. I t is tric/c in some of
the translations, though not in the L X X .
I t is conspiracy in L X X , 2 Chron. xxv.
25, and invasión in 2 Mac. iv. 41.]
'EniBvpÉiú, ü, from ¿Vi in, and Svpbs the
mind.
I . To desire, in a good sense. occ. M a t .
xiii. 17- L u k e xxii. 15. 1 T i m . iii. 1.
Pleb. vi. 1 L
I I . To desire, long for, in an indiffer-
e n t sense. occ. L u k e xvii. 2 2 . Gal. v. 17-
I I I . To desire, covet, lust after, in a
bad sense. occ. M a t . v. 2 8 . Rom. vii. 7.
xiii. 9. 1 Cor. x. 6. Comp. J a m e s iv. 2.
See WVcstein 011 M a t . who shows, t h a t
 E TI I 291 E n i

the profane writers use it with a geni- I mus says, t h a t " it is a sight so pleasing
tive, in like manner as the Evangelist. I to t h e angels, t h a t they cannot be satisficd
B u t observe, t h a t as éiriBvpiív, even when with the contemplatioñ of it." T h e diffi-
applied to women, is capable of an in- culty both here and in L u k e xvi. 2 1 ,
nocent as well as of a bad sense, yvvaUa seems to be from a notion t h a t iwiBvpéb),
in M a t . v. 2 8 . m u s t signify, as usual, a if expressing a desire, necessarily implies
married rvowan, as the following V. ipoí- an unfulfilled desire, which is not true.]
yevaw also shows. See Kypke Observ. l§Sj|p 'EmQvpnrrie, a, ó, from itnQv¡xtiii.
Sacrse. [ T h i s is a doubtful observation —One who desirelh or lusteth. occ. 1 Cor.
of P a r k h u r s t ' s . I t seems to me, t h a t , as x. 6. [ N u m b . xi. 34. X e n . Apol. 2 3 . ]
our L o r d was extending the precepts of 'JLiriBvpía, ag, ?/, from éirtBvpéoj.
the law,hís meaning is clearly this : " T h e I . Desire, in a good sense. L u k e xxii.
law forbad you to commit a d u l t e r y ; but I 15. Phil. i. 2 3 . 1 Thess. ii. 17.
say, t h a t t h e entertaining criminal lust I I . Lust, desire, in a bad sense. M a r k
for a woman is equally s i n f u l ; " and I iv. 19. J o h n viii. 4 4 . Rom. i. 2 4 . vi. 12.
cannot conceive t h a t he m e a n t to forbid vii. 7, where see M a c k n i g h t , 1 J o h n ii.
such desires for married women only. 16, where ?/ ktnQvpía rfje crapicoe, the lust
Schl. under yvvr¡, indeed, refers t h e pas- of the flesh, plainly imports t h e i n d u l -
sage to the sense a wife ; but Rosenmüller gence of our sensual or carnal a p p e t i t e s ;
observes, t h a t poL-^eí" and -¡ropveía are fre- and »/ iiridvpía TSJV ofBaXpüv, the lust qf
quently interchanged, a n d understands the eyes, denotes t h e acquisition of worldly
all lust to be forbidden here. Bretschn. goods or riches, with which the eye is not
also construes y»n) here, simply, as fa- salisjied; and when they are increased,
milia adulta. W a h l by some inadvertence w h a t good is there to the owners thereof,
places it under both heads, mulier and save t h e beholding of them with their
sponsa. E r a s m u s is with P a r k h u r s t ; eyes? Comp. Eccles. iv. 8. v. 1 1 , and
Hammond, and Kuinoel, are not definite. see Wetstein on 1 J o h n ii. 16. ['H ¿V
The verb in this sense sometimes takes an -tov é(¡>6. " Whatever delights the eye of
accusative, as Exod. xx. 17. I t occurs in worldly men, as riches, exhibitions, &c."
Greek writers, Antonin. L i b . c. 1. A r - Rosenmüller. " Magnificence in houses,
temid. Oneiroc. i. 76. Aristoph. Eccles. furniture, &c. which, because it is g r a t i -
60. ITerodot. i. last chapter. See Fisch. fied by t h e eye, may fitly be called t h e
ad Platón. Phsed. § 65.] lust of t h e eye." M a c k n i g h t . Schl. makes
I V . W i t h an Infin. following, To be kiridíipia in both instances, a thing de-
content or glad, to esteem it a great mal- sired, and especially, external things
ta: occ. L u k e xv. 16. xvi. 2 1 . Comp. which fialler lust and excite it through
1 Pet. i. 12, with E p h . iii. 10. T h u s the senses.']
Elsner, on L u k e xvi. 2 1 , explains it, and 'EwiicaOíi^üj, from ¿Vi upon, and KaBí'(io,
observes not only t h a t the L X X have so to sel.—To set or place upon. occ. M a t .
applied it, Isa. lviii. 2, for the H e b . Yin xxi. 7. 'TLirEKÍidurav lirávio ávróov, They
to delighl, be delighted, b u t t h a t Lysias set him upon them : ov rwv <Hvo biro'Cv-
has used it in a like sense, O r a t . 24, yioiv, ciXka rS>v Iparíwv, not upon the two
where he savs it was for the advantage of beasts, b u t on t h e garments, says T h e o -
the Athenians ¿c TTXEI^C ' E Í I I Q Y M E ' T N ph ylaet. B u t observe, t h a t one ancient
TÜV irapói'-Mv vvi'i TrpaypéíTuiv, t h a t as and many later M S S . , have iireic¿iQLae.v he
many as possible should be content with sat upon ; and this reading is agreeable to
the present sítuation of affairs. See more t h e Syriac and several ancient versions,
in Elsner and Campbell on L u k e xvi. 2 1 . adopted by some printed editions, e m -
[I have g r e a t doubts as to this sense of braced by W e t s t e i n , and rcceived into
iirLdvuéw. I t appears to me quite unne- the t e x t by Griesbach. [Beza, Schl. a n d
cessary, as well as without authority, in W a h l also refer avrZv to Iparíwv; others, as
the two passages of St. L u k e . In t h a t of Kuinoel and Rosenmüller, say, either t h a t
St. Peter alone, Schleusner assents, as does ETS is omitted as in Joseph. A n t . ii. 6. 1.
Rosenmüller; b u t Kuinoel says it does Gen. xix. 29. J u d g . xii. 7 ; and so H o m e r
not occur any where in t h e N . T., and it II. K . 5 1 3 . ÍTTCWJ' k-n-Epíio-tro, or again, as
is, perhaps, r a t h e r straining t h e passage Glass. (Phil. Sacr. p . 172.) and Le Clerc,
in Lysias to assign t h i s sense positively t h a t t h e plural is p u t for the s i n g u l a r . ]
to it. H a m m o n d a n d M a c k n i g h t in St. — I n the L X X , 1 Kings i. 3 8 , 4 4 , ímica-
Peter give t h e meaning, to desire. E r a s - Qí'Coi aiisrtvers to t h e Hebrew i n l in H i p h ,
 E n t 292
lo make or muse lo riele, as opon a mulé,
[ i t is lo sil on or gct up on, in 2 Sam.
xüi. 29.]
'E-micaXéto, ü, from ¿Vi upon, aiiíl i;aXéw
lo cali.
I. 'E~iKaXtopai, üpai, Mid. To cali
inion, invoke, as a witness. 2 Cor. i. 2 3 .
Galón and Polybius have the like ex-
•nression; T 0 T 2 GEtVYS 'EffllíAAE-
2A'2GA 1 MA'PTYPAS. See Wetstein.
I I . To cali upon, invoke, in prayer.
Rom. x. 12, 14. 2 T i m . ii. 22. Acts vii.
59, where observe, t h a t there is no word
in the Greek for God, and therefore it
musí be understood t h a t t h e m a r t y r Ste-
phen prayed lo, or invoked the Lord
Jesús, (so Diodati, ch'invocava Jesu,)
and M'ith bis dying breath commended his
spirit inlo his hands, j u s t as his dying
L o r d had a little before commended his
omn spirit into the hands of his Falher,
L u k e xxiii. 46. If Jesús therefore be
not God, Stephen expired in an act of
idolairy. B u t see W h i t b y ' s and Dod-
dridge's Notes, and D r . Horsley's (late
Bishop of St. Asaph) 12th letter to D r .
Priestley. Compare also the learned
Markland in Bowyer's Conjectures, who
observes, t h a t " it is so far from being
necessary to understand Qtbv after ¿Vi-
icaXápevov, t h a t it is quite contrarv to
Stephen's iiitcntion, which was to die a
m a r t y r to the divinity of Jesús Christ.
[ S c h l . translates this passage k-ur ical
X¿y " qui ita ad Deum p r e c a b a t u r ; " b u t
he does not add a word to justify his
translation. Chrysostom and l í a m m o n d
also supply God. Grotius supplies Christ.
Rosenmüller says either is admissible.]
'ErriKiiXüadaí rb bvopa rfi lívpís, to cali
on the ñame of ihc Lord, is an Hellenist-
ical expression, used by the L X X for t h e
Heb. hin» t u t e and signifies not
only to invoke the inte God, b u t to in-
voke him by his ñame Jehovah, or KY'-
P I 0 2 , thercby acknowledging his ne-
cessary exislence, and infinite superiorily
lo all crcalures. T h e first passage of
the O. T . in which we meet with this
phrase, is Gen. iv. 2 6 , where we read,
Then besan men to cali on t h e ñame of
T H E L O R D , or J E H O V A H , ( H e b .
m r v C W 3 . tOp ?, L X X Í7rucaX¿lcr6ai Tü
1
bvopa Kvpla), which surely cannot mean
t h a t men then first bogan lo worship the
truc God, or to worship him publicly:
(see the preceding p a r t of the chapter.)
B u t it seems highly probable t h a t by this
time the ñame CJTI/N Aleim was become
E III
equivoca!,, being applied both by the be-
lieving line of Setli, and the idolatrous
one of Cain, to their respective gods, and
t h a t therefore the believers, to distiuguish
themselves, invoked God by the ñame of
Jehovah. T h u s we read of Abraham's
(Gen. xii. 8. xiii. 4. xxi. 33.) and of
Isaac's (Gen. xxvi. 25.) calling on the
ñame qf the LORD, or Jehovah. And
in t h a t solemn contest between Elijah
and the prophets of Baal, 1 Kings xviii.
Elijah saith, ver. 2 1 , to the people: If
Jehovah be God ( H e b . O ' n b ^ ü T H E ,
i. e. the t r u e , Aleim, or Saviours), fol-
low him; but if Baal, then follow him;
and ver. 24, to t h e prophets of B a a l ;
Cali ye on the ñame of your gods ( H e b .
t D ' u i ' H your Aleim), and I will cali on
the ñame of the LOIiD, or Jehovah;
which they accordingly did respectivelv,
comp. vcr."26, 3 6 , 3 7 . J E H O V A H t h e n
was t h e ñame which emineritly distin-
guished the t r u e from all false g o d s ; and
in t h e N. T . kiriKaXücrQai TO bvopa ra
Kvplu imports invoking the true God,
with a confession t h a t he is Jehovah, i. e.
with an acknowledgement of his essential
and incommunicable attributes. A n d in
this view the phrase is applied to Christ,
Acts ii. 2 1 . (Comp. Joel ii. 32. Acts ix,
13, 14, 2 i . ) Acts xxii. 16. Rom. x. 13,
(comp. ver. 9, 1 1.) 1 Cor. i. 2, where see
Randolph's Addenda to Answer to Con-
siderations on requiring Subscription, &c.
and his Vindication of the Worship of the
Son and of the Holy Ghost, against Lind-
sey, p. 78, ikc.—The L X X for the H e b .
mn> N"lp use 'EirucaXelnOai TO ovopa
Kvpí.u, Gen. iv. 26. xiii. 4. xxvi. 2 5 . P s .
c x v i . 4 . Comp. Ps. CV. 1 : 'EiriKaXííadaí k~l
rof óvúpaTi Kvpíu, Gen. xii. 8. xxi. 33 ; and
'E—ii:aXfüa6ai iv - J ovópari Kvpía, 1 Kings
xviii. 24. Comp. ver. 2 5 , 26. P s . exvi.
17.
I I I . 'ErriicaXéopai, Pass. To be sur-
named. M a t . x. 3 . L u k e xxii. 3 . Acts i.
23. x. 5. & al. T h e profane writers use
it in the same sense, as may be seen in
W e t s t e i n on M a t . [ S e e Lucian in M a -
crob. 15. Appian. Bell. P a r t h . p . 217.
Diod. Sic. iii. 60. Polvb. iii. 8 7 . 6. Xen.
Mem. i. 4. 2.] In H e b . xi. 16, God is
not ashamed to be called, or surnamed,
their, i. e. the patriarchs', God, which is
plain from Exod. iii. 15, 16. God's ñame
is said kTriKaXelcrdaí ¿Vi, lo be called upon
a people, when they are called or sur-
named by his ñame, [i. e. when they be-
long to him, and are especially devoted
 E n i 293
to h i m / ] occ. A c t s xv. 1 7 ; J a m e s ii. 7.
T h e phraseology in both t e x t s is Hebrai-
cal or Hellenistical. On the former com-
pare Gen. xlviii. 16. in H e b . and L X X ;
and as to t h e latter observe, t h a t the
words 'Eoi' Se é~LKtKXr)TaL rb ovopá pa ¿V
livTbQ, upon whom my ñame is called, an-
swer iu L X X of Amos ix. 12. 2 Chron.
vii. 14, to t h e H e b . s i p a -ittf« ZDrvbv 'DUÍ
rendered by our translatcrs which are
called by my ñame.
I V . 'EwncaXéopat, Spai, Mid. and Pass.
To appeal from the sentence of an infe-
rior to a superior j u d g e , or, as it were, to
cali upon the one after the other. Plut-
arch fJMai'cell. c. 2 . ] several times applies
t h e V. in the same view, as may be seen
in W e t s t e i n on Acts xxv. 1 I. occ. Aets
xxv. 1 1 , 12, 2 1 , 2 5 . xxvi. 3 2 . xxviii. 19.
'EjruaiXvppa, aroc, ro, from ÉwuceicáXvp-
pai, perf. pass. of ÍTrucaXvwTio.—Á cover-
ing, a cloak. occ. 1 Pet. ii. 1 6, where see
Kypke. [ I t is used here metaphorieally
as in Menander, fragni. p . .50, though -rtpá-
KÍXvppa is more common. T h e Germán
word dechnantel, and the English cloak,
are similarly used. T h e word oceurs in
its proper sense in Exod. xxvi. 14. xxxvi.
19. 2 Sam. xvii. 19. As they who were
killed violently in t h e east had their
heads covered, t h e word in J o b xix. 2 9 .
seems p u t for a violent death.}
'•E,7racaXv7rrti>, from ¿Vi over, and icaXv--
TÍÚ lo cover.— To cover over. I t is spoken,
üguratively, of sins covered by t h e merits
of Christ. occ. Rom. iv. 7, which is a cita-
tion from the L X X versión of P s . xxxii.
1, where the correspondent H e b . words
to tov éiriKaXvipdrjirav ai apapríai are ' l 3 3
RIKTDN, covered, as lo his sin, even as the
waters covered t h e mountains at the de-
luge, Gen. vii. 1 9 ; as the sea did t h e
Egyptians, Exod. xv. 1 0 ; or as a veil
cuvers a person, Gen. xxxviii. 14- In all
which. passages the same H e b . V. r i D 3 is
used. See H e b . and E u g . Lexicón in
HD3 I. I I . and - | S 3 V I I I . 2. In the L X X
ímnaXínrrio generally answers to the Pleb.
ÜD3 *.
'ETricaráparoe, «, ó, f¡, from ¿Vi upon,
and KaráparoQ cursed, which from ¡cara-
páopai, to curse, which see.—Cursed, ac-
cursed. occ. J o h n vii. 4 9 . Gal. iii. 10, 13,
on which latter t e x t see V i t r i n g a Observ.
* [ I t is p u t for n a n i n 2 S a m . x v . 3 0 , where al-
lusion is made to the Oriental, as well as Greek,
custom of covering the head in grief. See P l a t .
Plia>d. p. «G. l l o m . II. SI. ¡ 0 5 . A p o l l a n , l i l i . A r .
gon, 2<¡-L]
E n I
Sacr. lib. ii. cap. 12. [ I t seems t h a t in
Gal. iii. 10. the sense of the word is Hable
to punishment, lying under the curse or
threat qf punishment. Wahl refers verso
13. to the same sense; but ¡Schleus. more
justly, punished, marked with infamy.
So Macknight, most ignominioiisly punish-
ed. Vitringa's statement is this. " F r o m
D e u t . xxi. 22, 2 3 , whence the Apostle
quotes t h e words, it is clear t h a t they who
were p u t to dea.th for any crinie, were af-
ierwards h u n g u p as a spectacle. See
Josh. x. 26. 2 Sam. iv. 2. xxi: 19. Thy
law, however, ordered t h a t they should
be cut down before sunset and buried, for
he t h a t is hanged is cursed of God, aud
t h u s t h e land would become uncleau.
T h e material words of this passage have
been translated, Every one Uial is hanged
is a curse or reproach lo God; b u t though
the rules of g r a m m a r do not forbid t h e
construction, yet the word used for curse
is never taken iu this sense, ñor (loes this
explanation suit the context. T h e mean-
ing probably is, Every one that is hanged
is an excmplar of the divine curse. I t is
clear t h a t the cause of the curse is not
t h e suspensión, but the crime: but t h e
Israelite so suspended was a type of
C h r i s t ; for lie can only be called cursed
of God typically; a t least, we cannot be-
lieve that every person hanged ou a tree
was eternally condemned by G o d ; and
we m u s t therefore look f o r a t y p i c a l sense.
A n d this seems also to be showu by w h a t
follows, as who can say t h a t the b u r y i n g
a man who had been hanged would p u -
rify the land ? T h e points of resemblance
in the type and antitype are t h e s e : each
was an Israelite, each liad to answer for
heavy crimes, on which God's justice r e -
quired a public example to be -made. T h e
burial of the Israelite, before sunset, show-
ed t h a t satisfaction was made, and in this
especially was he a type of our Lord." So
far Vitringa. In Jolm vii. 49, there is
flifFerence of opinión. Schleusner t r a n s -
lates it qf no valué wha'ever: he does
not defend this explanation. ( I t may be
worth while to refer to J e r . v. 4.) W a h l
and Bolten say it is, vilely seduced by cn-
chanters, to whose curses t h e people a t t r i -
buted g r e a t power. See J o b iii. tí. K u i -
noel says, io be cursed or excomviunicaied.
T h e r e is in one M S . aud in Origen, Cyri!,
andClirysostom another reading, Érraparoí,
which, besides thc usual meaning of I T T Í -
¡:araparoi, means i-ayioybi. (Suid, i. p.
7 8 8 . ) either Icading or led into error.~\—
 E n Í 294 E n i

In tlie L X X it al most constantly answers posite these doctrines were to the p r i n -

to the H e b . 1TO. [ G e n . iii. 14. 17. iv. 11.] cipies of Christianity. occ. Acts xvii. 18 *.
'Evuctípai, from ¿Vi upon, and iceípai ¿o [fÜs"" 'EwtKovpía, ae, i), from krrÍKapoc a
be laid, lie. helper, properly in war, a military ally.
I. To be laid or lie, upon, occ. John xi. In this sense kwÍKspos is often used in
3S or 3 9 . xxi. 9. Spoken [metaphori- H o m e r (as II. 2. lines 130, 8 0 3 , 815. 11.
cally] of necessity; or absoluto obligation. 3. lines 188, 4 5 1 , 456,) and is an obvious
occ. 1 Cor. ix. 16. [ T h u c . viii. 15.] derivative from kirl besides, or over and
I I . To be imponed, as gifts or ofterings. above, and icSpoe a young man, as denot-
occ. H e b . i x . 10, where see Wolfius. i n g a young man who comes to an addi-
Comp. A c t s xv. 10. tional military aid. A n d for ¡cupos or
I I I . To lie, press upon, as a storm. occ. icópog see u n d e r líopíiaiov.—Assistance,
Acts xxvii. 20. So Plutarch cited by A l - liclp, aid. occ. A c t s xxvi. 22. Polybius
berti and Wetstein, X E I M O T N O S ' E i T Í - frequently uses the phrase TYPXA'NEIN
KEIME'NOY. [Comp. Job xix. 3.] ' E n i K O Y P I ' A S , and sometimes with T r a p a
I V . To press upon, as a m u l t i t u d e . and a genitive following. See Raphelius,
occ. L u k e v. 1. [ X e n . Anab. iv. 1. 12. v. Wetstein, and K y p k e . [ W i s d o m xiii. 18.
2. 18.] T h u c y d . i. 3 2 . Demosth. p . 1199. edit.
V. To press,'urge, be urgent or impor- Reisk.]
túnale, by voice or words. occ. L u k e xxiii. If^if' 'EwLKpívoj, from ¿Vi besides, more-
2 3 . Aristophanes, Thucydides, and others over, and tcpívio tojudge, decree.—To de-
of the Greek writers, apply the V. in the cree, [give'] sentence ovjudgment.—In this
same manner, as may be seen in Wetstein sense it is used in t h e profane writers, as
and Kypke. [ P o l y b . i. 19. 3. X e n . Cyr. may be seen in Wetstein. occ. L u k e xxiii.
vii. 1. 3 7 . T h u c . vii. 7 1 . ] 24. [ 2 Mac. iv. 48. iEschin. Dial. iii. 22.
'EiTu;ovpíioi, uif, bt.—Epicureans. A Herodian. vi. 10. 4 . ]
sect of philotíophers among the heathen, 'EiriXap&íivopai, Mid. from £7rl upon,
so called from their founder E p i c u r u s , an XapSávw to take. [ T h i s verb is con-
A t h c n i a n , who was born about 340 years strued with a genitive or accusative. M a -
before Christ. T h e i r teuets were, t h a t thiaj (§ 365 and 3 6 6 ) , t h i n k s it takes a
t h e world was * not made by God, ñor genitive, as signifying or implying p a r t i -
by any wise designing cause, but aróse c i p a r o n ; and t h a t therefore t h e p a r t by
from a fortuitous coucourse of atoms t : which any t h i n g is taken (as the hand,
t h a t there is no superintendiugprovidence &c.) is in the genitive, while t h e whole is
which takes eare of h u m a n affairs: t h a t p u t in the accusative t . ]
the X souls of men die with their bodies: I. [ T o lay or take hold qf. I t often
t h a t consequently there are neither r e - conveys a friendly sense (see H e m s t e r h .
wards ñor punishmeiits after death : and on Lucian. i. p. 313.) as Mat. xiv. 3 1 .
t h a t pleasure, which some of them ex- M a r k viii. 2 3 . L u k e ix. 47- comp. M a r k
plaiued of bodily or sensual pleasure, is ix. 36. L u k e xiv. 4. A c t s xxiii. 19. A r r i a n .
t h e supreme, and indeed the § only good.
Diss. Epict. iii. 2 4 . 7 5 . Xen. de Rep. A t h .
I t is obvious to remarle how directly op-
i. 18. I t does not seem to have this sense,
but rather t h a t oíforcible scizing, in L u k e
* See L u c r e t i u s D e R e r . Mat. lib. i. line 1 5 1 , &c. xxvi. 26. A c t s xvi. 19- xvii. 19. xviii. 17.
lib. iii. lines 1 4 , 1 5 . Cicero de N a t . D e o r . lib. i.
cap. 2 0 . xxi. 3 0 , 3 3 . Aristot. Pol. v. 6. 6. Xen.
•f Upicurus's maxirn, b y which h e dcstroyed the Cyr. vii. 1. 3 1 . I t is to get hold of, to
providente of G o d (according to Lacrtius, h i m s e l f make one's self master qf, in 1 T i m . vi.
an L p i c u r e a n ) , w a s t h i s : To uuv.ápiov ya) af^prav 12, 19. J o e l i i . 9. See Polyb. v. 6 3 . 3.
ÜTS COTO TrpáyfjLUTK E-^EI, y T í á)\?.cit irapíyEi. The
u

blessed and incorruptible B e i n g hath n o business of

iElian. V. H . xiv. 27 J - ]
h i s o w n , ñor doth h e m a k e a n y for others." C o m p .
Cicero de N a t . D e o r . l i b . i. c a p . 3 0 , and L u c r e t i u s ,
l i b . 1. line 57, &c.
X See L u c r e t i u s , lib. iii. especially line 8 4 2 , &c.
§ T h e r e is a remarkable passage i n E p i c u r u s ' s
o w n book n¡p) TíKu;, in which he s a y s , that " he
cannot understand w h a t g o o d there i s , i f w e t a k e
a w a y the pleasures which are perceived b y the taste,
lliose w h i c h arise from venereal gratifications, those
which c o m e i n b y the ears, and the agrecable e m o -
tions which are raised by tiie s i g h t o f beautiful
f o r m s . " Laert. lib. x . § 0'. C o m p . Cicero D e N a t .
D e o r . l i b . i. cap. 4 0 . T u s c u l . Qua:st. l i b . iii. cap. 1 3 ,
and D e F i n i b . l i b . ii. cap. 3 . and D a v i e s ' s N o t e s .
* See V / h i t b y and D o d d r i d g e on the p l a c e , and
the authors b y t h e m cited, to w h o m add Gale's
Court of the Gentiles, part ii. b o o k 4 . chap. 5 . and
L e l a n d ' s A d v a n t a g e and N e c e s s i t y of the Christian
R e v c l a t i o n , part ii. ch. 6 .
•f [ T h u s i n X e n . A n . i. 0 . 1 0 . They toóle Orón-
tes by the giidle, lAáéoi/rc T^V %úvns TOK 'Op6vjr¡v.
See E u r . I p h . A u l . 1 3 7 o . ]
X [ l t is s i m p l y , to hoídfirmly, i n E x o d . iv. 4 .
D e u t . x x v . 1 1 . & al.J
 E n i 295 E n i

I I . ' E7riXá€Ér/0ai Xóytr, or priparOQ, To them—from r u i n — b u t only to men he

lay hold on one's words, in order to accuse doth this favour." So Chrysostom; feí-
him. occ. L u k e xx. 20, 2 6 . — T h e profane yutrav cW áu-5 Kai iróppiú (¡>zvyncrav liv-
writers apply ÍTt-ika&íadcu in the like dpíüwivrjv (pvtTW vp¡-oc KaTaOLÓiE,ac KarÉXa-
sense; and Plato uses the phrase T£2~N &EI>. Schleusner translates Heb. viii. ¡ 9 ,
A O T Q N ' E T J I A A ' B O Y in this view. See in t h e same way, and auotes Ecclus. iv.
Elsner, Raphelius, a n d W e t s t e i n . [ S c h l . 12. A d d Palephat. fab.*24.]
says, t h a t in verse 20, it is io try lo en- 'ETriXavdcu'Ofiai, M i d . from iwl in, and
silare, in verse 26, lo Mame ; but the two XavQávopai toforget, which from XavQíivut
passages appear to me prccisely synoni- to lie hid, which see.—It is construed with
m o u s ; and so Wahl, quoting Xen. Mem. a genitive, and more rarely with an accu-
i. 2 . 3 1 . A d d Hell. ii. 1. 32. Suidas sative, or with an infinitive mood.
explains t h e verb by p.É¡-irj¡Ecrdai; Phavo- I. Toforget, not lo remember. occ. M a t .
rinus by inrrEO-daí nvor ajxaprúvros. So xvi. 5. Mark viii. 1. P h i l . iii. 13. J a m e s i.
arripio in Cic. de N a t . D . c. 65. de F i n . 24. [/Fliian. V. H . ii. 40. Xen. Mem. i.
iii. 4 . ] 2. 21.]
I I I . W i t h a genitive, To assume, take I I . Toforget, " * not to attend, nc-
upon one. occ. H e b . ii. 16. twice. Comp. glect." occ. H e b . vi. 10. xiii. 2, 16. ' E T T Í -
verse 14. T h e angels here mentioued XEXT]apivoQ, particip. perf. used in a pas-
m u s t be t h e material ones, because of sive sense, Forgotten. occ. Luke xii. 6.
these only is the Apostle speaking in this [ S o Evwtriov ra BES is Hebraico for ro>
and t h e preceding chapter, as t h e a t t e n - QE¿> (Gesen. p . 820-) and such a dative
tive and intelligent reader may be con- expresses viro rS 0t5. (Mathia; § 3 9 2 ) .
vinced by comparing the passages of the T h e same phrase is quoted by Bretschn.
O. and N . T . cited under "AyyzXoc V. and Schleusner from Ecclus. xxiii. 1 6 ;
T h e t e x t therefore means t h a t Christ, b u t it does not oceur there. I n I s . xxiii.
when he carne to redeem us, did not as- 16, we have EiriXEX-qo-pEvi) in the passive
sume a glorious, awful, and angelic ap- sense; in Prov. ii. 17. in t h e active. I t
pearance, in Jire and light, iu darkness, occurs passively in Wisd. ii. 4 . Ecclus.
clouds, and thick darkness, as he did at xliv. 10.]
Siuai, E x o d . x i x . 18. D e u t . iv. 11, 12, Ef§¡j° 'E7ríX¿yo/iai, Pass. from ¿Vi upon,
(comp. u n d e r Aiarayí)); but t h a t he took and Xéyopat to be called, which from XÉyco
upon him h u m a n n a t u r e of the seed qf to speak.—To be called or named. occurs
Abraham. (Comp. Gal. iii. 16.) For John v. 2.
though, as the Apostle teaches * , Phil. ii. 'EmXÉyopaL, Mid. from iwl to, or more-
6, 7, when he was bom in the form of over, and Xéyti) lo choose.— To choose, or
God, appcaring in glory under the Oíd associate to one's self, ascisco. occ. Acts
T e s t a m e n t , he thought it not robbery to xv. 40. [Isoc. Paneg, c. 2 5 . Herodian. iv.
be equal wilh God, yet he emptied, or 1. 4 . ] - - T h u s the L X X have used it, Ex.
siripi, himself oí this glory, \a£oiv, t a k - xvii. 9. [xviii. 2 5 . Josh. viii. 3 . ] for the
ing (upon him) the form of a servant, Heb. to choose.
being made in the iikeness qf a man.— 'E-iTiXéi-w, from ETTÍ intens. and XÉITTIO
[ T h e r e appears little ground for assign- tofail.—-To fail, fail enlirely. occ. H e b .
ing this sense to í-itiXap&ávojiai. Ernesti xi. 3 2 . So Isocrates ad Demon. § 5 .
says t h a t the ancient Greek church al- ' E n i A I ' i T O I o av i'ifiáe b TRAC X P O ' N O S .
ways interpreted the verb in this place to | F o r m a n v more similar instances, seo
assislj and t h a t t h e later i n t e r p r e t a r o n Wetstein and K y p k e . [Jer. xxxiii. 17.
aróse from the word used in the Vulgate, A t h e n . v. p . 220. Dion. H a l . c. 36.]
assumat. I do not u n d e r s t a n d this, for 'EiriXriiTpoi'i), ijr, i¡, from | 7 T Í [ X ¿ ] ] -
the Vulgate has Nusquam enim úngelos Xrjapai perf. of EiriX\_avB¿iv~\o¡.iai.—Forgel-
apprehendit, sed semen Ábrahoz appre- fulness. occ. J a m . i. 2 5 , ciKpoari)e £ 7 r í X ? ; < 7 -
hendit. O u r marginal versión is, He fiovrjs, a forgetful hearer. Comp. under
laketh not hold of the angels, & C H a m - AiaXoylo-poe I. [ T h e word occurs Ecclus.
mond gives t h e sense very w e l l : " ' T i s xi. 27. Dio. Cass. p . 840, 9 3 . Reisk. On
not said any where t h a t h e catches hold t h e phrase see Gesenius 644. 2.]
of the angels as t h e y are falling—to save ' E 7 n ' \ o i 7 r o £ , 8 , ó, 7/, from £?rtX£Xoi7r«,
perf, mid. of 'EWLXEÍTCLO lo leave, which from
* See W h i t b y and D o d d r i d g e on this text, and
Catcott's Scrmons, Sermón V . * Johnson.
 E fí I 296 E n i

¿Vi aflcr, and XEÚTW lo leave.—Remain- 'EttíXvw, from EVI intens. and Xva> to
ing, lej't behind. occ. 1 P e t . iv. 2. So loóse.
Isocrates ad Nicoc. TCTN 'EHIAOrnON I. To loóse, unbind. So Wetstein on
XPO'NON o n í y E i v , T o pass t h e remainder M a r k iv. 34-, cites from Herodian, ' E I I I -
of one's lime. See more in Wetstein. AYE'TAI EViTÓXac, H e loosens, i. e. opens
[ L e v i t . xxvii. 18. M a r k v. 3 . J e r . xliv. the letters, which used anciently to be tied
14. Demosth. p . 1250. M a r k Antón, iv. about with a string.
31.] I I . To salve, explain, expound. occ.
fi£áp° 'ETT-ÍXVCTIE, wc, Att. EW£, í], from íin- Mark iv. 3 4 . T h u s used by t h e L X X
Xvto, which see. Sohition, inlerpretation. for t h e H e b . *in&, G e n . x ü . 12, and by
occ. 2 Pet. i. 20. F o r t h e various explana- the profane writers. See Wetstein. [See
tions of this difficult passage, see Wolfius, A(j. G e n . xl. 8. Plerodian. iv. 12. 14.
Wetstein, Mili, W h i t b y , and Doddridge Athen. x. p . 4 4 9 . F . ]
on t h e place, and especially Limborch's I I I . To explain, determine, decide, occ.
Theolog. Christian. lib. i. cap. I I . § 8. & Acts xix. 3 9 .
seqt. who explains To7ac émXvaeuje qf a H¿if" 'Empaprvpéio, ¿i, from EV¡ intens.
prívale exposilion, which any man makes and paprvpttii to witness, testify.—To tes-
out of his own head, in opposition to t h e tify earnestly. occ. 1 P e t . v. 12. [ T h e
explication given by t h e Apostle of Christ word oceurs, Demosth. p . 9 1 5 , 12. p .
speaking or writing under t h e inspiration 1273, 18. and is properly to testify, while
of tlic Holy Spirit. [ T h i s last explana- émpaprvpecrdcu is to cali on one as a wit-
tion is approved bv Wolf, almost all the ness, X e n . Hell. iii. 4 . 4. See 1 Kings ii.
L u t h e r a n and Calvinistic divines, and 42. Nehcm. ix. 29, 3 0 . ]
Lowth (Pref. to Comm. on Isaiah, p . 1 I.) 'EmpeXéia, ag, 7), from EVI/LÍEXI/C, which
Schleus. and Bretschn. say i t means, that see under 'EmpeXáiQ.— Care, a taking
t h e prophets did not understand t h e true carc qf. T h i s word includes every t h i n g
meaning of t b e prophecies t h e y u t t e r e d ; t h a t relates to taking care of another's
and this sense, Schleusner thinks, is s u p - body. See Raphelius. occ. Acts xxvii. 3 .
ported by verse 2 1 . Wahl has, No pro- k-ipeXúag -vyfiiv, " lo enjoy the bcnefl
phecy qf Scriplure can be cxplained by qf their carc." Doddridge. T h e G r e e k
itself, •without assistance qf the event. So phrase is used by Xenophon, Isocrates,
Rosenmuller, Grotius, Heinsius, Calvin, and Aristotle, cited by Raphelius and
Curcellceus, e t alii. More proposed a Wetstein. [ P r o v . iii. 8. 1 Mace. xvi. 14.
new reading iwíjXvcní or in-tXevcric: in t h e Xen. Cyr. i. 6. 16.]
sense of ímpetus or instinct. No7i est res
proprii Ímpetus: b u t every M S . , except 'E~ip¿Xéopai, Spai [or ópaí], Depon,
one, has t h e established reading. Some from empeXiic- See under 'EÍTÍ^EXWC—•
(Cappellus and others) say, that ¿jtíXvitis W i t h a genitive, To take care of occ.
means impulse, and explains the passage L u k e x. 3 4 , 3 5 . 1 T i m . iii. 5. [ T h e word
by saying, The prophets did not speak qf is very properly used by St, L u k e , being,
themselves. Erasmus, a t one time, agreed in good Greek, applied to t a k i n g care of
to this. O t h e r s , as H a r d t and L a u g u i s , the sick or wounded. See Bos Animadv.
think t h a t EVÍ'XI/O-IC, like SútXvrriQ, may ad Script. Gr. p. 6 6 . See Gen. xliv. 2 1 .
signify dcstruction, and explain t h e pas- Prov. xxvii. 2 5 . ]
sage t h u s : Scriplure does not destroy it- 'HTTLpeXüJe, A d v . from 'ilTrtpeXijc;, ÉOQ,
self, bul though written at different times, 5c, ó, )'/, careful, which from hirl upon,
by different men, is still consistent. B i - for, and péXti il is a carc, or concern.—
shop Horsley has four sermons ( 1 5 — 1 8 ) Carefully, wilh care. occ. L u k e xv. 8.
on t h e text, and he explains i t , Not any [ G e n . vi. 5. 3 E s d r . vi. 2 9 . 3 4 . X e n .
prophecy qf Scriplure is qf self-iuterpre- M e m . ii. 4 . 2.]
ialion: not any prophecy is Us own in- 'Empeño, from errl, upon, in, or al, and
terpretar. T h i s declaration, he says, a p - pévu) lo remain.
plies to sepárate prophecies, and t h e whole I. To remain, abide in or al a place.
body of them. All prophecies are p a r t s Acts x 4 8 . xv. 3 4 . x x i . 4 , 10. & al.
of a general system relating to t h e Mes- [ U p ó c Tira, 1 Cor. xvii. 7. tv run, ver. 8.
siab, and therefore a sepárate one cannot See Exod. xii. 3 9 - ]
explain itself; and t h e whole body cannot I I . W i t h a Dative following, To re-
be understood without knowing t h e cveuts main, continué, persist in. Acts xiii. 4 3 .
to which it alindes ~] Rom. ix. i.' xi. 2 2 , 2 3 . & al. [ C o l . i. 2 3 .
I T i m . iv. 16. X e n . Hell. iii. 4. 6.]
 E II I 297 E IT I

I I I . W i t h a Participle Pres. following, 4 0 1 . Ran. 1 0 2 . Schleus. remarks j u s t l y ,

To continué or persist in doing somewhat. t h a t t h e meaning conveyed is r a t h e r not
occ. J o h n viii. 7 . A c t s xii. 1 6 . to perform what you swear, than io swear
'Ewivtvu, from ¿Vi upon, or io, and falsely 7\
vtvw lo nod, beckon. EíifF' 'EwíopKoc, e, ó, r¡, from kirl against,
I. To nod, beckon to. So Homer, II. and opKOQ an oath. Comp.'ETr.iopjv'Éw. [See
ix. line 6 1 6 . Xen. Ages. i. 1 2 . Aristoph. Ran. 1 5 0 .
Herodian viii. 3 . 1 0 . ] — A perjured per-
'I-I, KHÍ Tiarpóxl.w oy ' E ü ' G<ppvcri NE~T2E c;w7r>;. son, occ. 1 T i m . i. 1 0 .
H e s p a k e : then silent to Patroclus nois. 'Ewíovo-a. See under"E7r£tut.
'Emotio-ioe, «, b, i¡, from ¿Vi for or into,
[ S e e Prov. xxvi. 2 4 . X e n . Cyr. v. 5 . 1 2 . ] and ¿cría, being, subslance.—This is a
I I . To assent by nodding. Thus Ho- very difficult word, in t h e i n t e r p r e t a r o n
mer, in t h a t grand description of J u p i t e r ' s of which learned men are far enough from
assenting to the petition of Thetis, II. i. being agreed. I t appears to have been
lines 5 2 8 , 5 2 9 . formed by t h e * Evangelists, in whose
writings only i t occurs, after t h e analogy
'H, 'EVC ¿{ppóiri NE"T2E Kpoiíwv,
KA) XUUILR,(RI\>
of 7T£pi8críoc (from 7¡-£pi beyond, and ¿cría
'¿\U£pí(RIAI 5' apa yji-rv.1 \irtpp¿IITA-JT¡ a'/AXTO;.
being), a word probably coined in like
H e s p a k e ; and awful bends h i s s a b b brows, manner by the L X X , in whose versión
S h a k e s liis ambrosial curls, and g i v e s the nod,
T h e stainp oí' fate, the sanction of the g o d .
alone ( I believe), except in t h e N . T . , i t
POI'E. is to be found. T h e most easy and n a -
tural i n t e r p r e t a r o n of kiríncrwe seems to
I I I . To assent, or consenl in general, be t h a t of the Greek commentators C h r y -
annuere. occ. A c t s xviii. 2 0 . A n d in this sostom and T h e o p h y l a c t ; the former of
sense it is not only used, 2 Mace. iv. 1 0 . M'hom explains "Aprov íiriácnov by TOV irpbe
xi. 1 5 . xiv. 2 0 , b u t also in t h e profane ri¡v ifliptpov '(¿ir¡v T H ' i ' O Y S I ' A t ijpHv
writers, as may be seen in Wetstein. I Xprjo-ifiévovra, T h a t which is convenieut
add from Lucian, Dearum Judie, tom. i. lo our substance for the daily support of
p. 1 6 2 . A . ' E M N E Y ' E I S Tt opwe, YOU
life; and Theophylact [ a d M a t . vi. 1 1 . ]
assent however. [Prov. xxvi. 2 4 . ] says, " A c r o e triiúcnoc is " A p r o e ' E n r rrj
'Ewívoia, ae, jy, from tirivoío) lo think ' O Y S I ' A t Kal av^ácrtí f¡pG>v avrapKne,
upon, which from hri upon, and vóew to Bread, which is sufficient for our sub-
think.—A devicc, contrivance. occ. A c t s stance or subsistence. So Suidas inter-
viii. 2 2 . In the Greek writers it is gene- p r e t s £7ri8iTíoc aproe by ' O ' E n r rr¡ ' O Y -
rally * used in a bad sense. See K y p k e . S I ' A t ri¡.iüiv apixó'Coív, ütfor our subslance
[Jer. xx. 1 0 . ] or being. 'Ewiúcaoe then may be explained,
S ü p " 'Ewiopido), w, from ¿Vi against, and sufficient for one's support, convenient for
opttOQ an oath.—To act or om.it any thing one's subsistence, compeient. See J o s .
conlrary to a promissory oath. Also, To Mede's Works, fol. p p . 1 2 4 , 1 2 5 . B u t
smear falsely. occ. M a t . v. 3 3 . O n which as severa! learned men are unsatisfied
passage Raphelius excellently shows t h a t with this interpretation, and would r a -
it is applied in t h e latter, as well as the t h e r explain the word by ío-morrow's, fu-
former sense, by X e n o p h o n ; so it may be ture, crastinus, futurus, deducing it from
interpreted in general, to forswear, per- íictio-a, the next or following day, I m u s t
jure one's self. See also Wollius and j u s t observe,
Wetstein. I t is not used in the L X X , Ist. T h a t if this latter meaning be as-
but in t h e Apocrypha, 1 E s d r . i. 4 8 . signed to ¿7ri8trtoc, L u k e xi. 3 , a t least,
Wisd. xiv. 2 8 ; where it likewise signifies will r u n cxtremely harsh ; Give us our
to forswear. [ I t is properly lo swear re- to-morrow's, or future, bread, day by day.
pealedly. See Beck Comment. in A r i s - And,
toph. T . iii. p . 4 2 . I t occurs in the sense
of forswearing in iElian. V. H . xii. 8 .
* S o O r i g e n D e Orat. 1 0 . cited b y W e t s t e i n ,
Herodian iii. c. 1 6 . X e n . A n a b . ii. 6 . 2 2 .
TípCJTOV Se T¿V ÍVÉOV ÓTI f] hzl-is ^ IjiiBcrtov irap' y í m
Demosth. p . 1 2 0 4 , 2 0 . Aristoph. N u b . TÜIU 'EXAqvwv ¿Ve T t u v £70[fwv ¿JVOP.A£ui, ¿TE Éy RÑ TfTrj
l^iwTüiy cyvTjOí'ja RIRPINTC/.i, cihh' É'OOÍF •xe'xKáír'jai ¿Tro
* [ I n D e m o s t h . p p . 1 4 1 3 , 1 4 1 4 , in a good one. TITIV ''EvzyyihifSn. " W e m u s t first k n o w , that the
'Ejrnoíw is often taken i n a bad sense. TElian. V . H . word f7TJtíVít>í' i s n o t used b y a n y o f tile Grceks or
xi. 1. x i v . 3 0 . A n d so iirtvax in J o s e p h u s ' s L i f e , learned m e n ; ñor is it in vulgar use, but seems to
§ 4 4 . and W i s d . x v . 4 . ] h a v e been framed by the E v a n g e l i s t s . "
 E n i 298. E n i

2dly. T h a t from i-inúna t h e adjective Spirit, and his miraculous gifts. occ. Acts
should be not iiriimoc b u t ¿Viáo-aioe. See viii. 16. x . 4 4 . xi. 15.—of an ecstasy or
Suicer Thesaur. in 'E?ríBír¿oc; I I I . trance, occ. Acts x. 10. comp. Gen. xv. 12.
3dly. T h a t Trepiúcnoc from 7r£pi and D a n . x. 7. in L X X . — o f bümlness. occ.
¿tría, is an instance of a word formed after Acts xiii. 11.—of fear. occ. L u k e i. i 2.
the same analogy as ímámcc, from irrl and Acts xix. 17. comp. Exod. xv. 16. Jos. ii.
¿tría. A n d , 9, in L X X . — o f reproaches. occ. Rom. xv.
4thly. T h a t i t is not sufficient to ob- 3. [ I n all these latter instances, t h e sense
j e c t with Scaliger, that, according to this is metaphorical. T h e meaning, of course,
derivation, t h e word should be inúcrioc, not is lo take posséssion of, to enter. We
ETrwinoc; for t h a t in many other words have, in E z e k . xi. 5 , t h e spirit of t h e
compounded with E V Í , aud beginning with L o r d E V E V E C E V E V ipé.}
a vowel, t h e t is retained. T h u s in t h e I I . To press upon. occ. M a r k iii. 10,
N . T . we have imsiiciig, éwiopKoc, and in where i t signifies, " t h a t they were ready
t h e Greek writers imóySooc eViÓTrrojuat, to drive each other upon him, so t h a t those
iirióaaopai, ¿Tríapog, & C OCC. M a t . vi. 1 1 . nearer him could hardly stand, being
Luke xi. 3 . [Besides those quoted, t h e pressed forward by those behiud." D o d -
following are in favour of P a r k h u r s t ' s ex- dridge. See Wetstein and Kypke.
planation. Gregor. Nyss. tom. i. O r . iv. I I I . Mov[e~] nearer, and so li[e] closer ;
de O r . Dom. p . 74o. & seq.; b u t not very namely to t h e breast of Jesús, than he did
distinctly. Basil. Reg. Brev. Quajst. 2 5 2 . before a t verse 2 3 , in order to hear what
p . 624. Damasceuus O r t h o d . F i d . iv. 14. he should say. 'Ayyl aybiv Kea>a\i)v, Hold-
Cyril. Alex. L i b . ii. Glaphyr. p . 2 8 6 . ing his head near, as H o m e r speaks, Odys.
Theodoret. ad Philip, c. iv. v. 19. Isidor. iv. line 70. occ. J o h n xiii. 2 5 , where see
Pelusiot. 4 . ep. 2 4 . p . 1 1 . Comelin. A u - Wolfius. [ T h e Vulgate says, Q,ui proxi-
gustin. Serm. xxvi. de T e m p . T e r t u l l . mus Christo aecumbebat, as if imwínTto
de Jejun. T h e places of Chrysostom are was for ava-rrLirTb); b u t this cannot be j u s -
T o m . v. H o m . 19. 30. 4 3 . H o m . 54. in tified. W a h l says, To recline onf\
Gen. p . 426. So T o u p . in E p i s t . Crit. p . $ g p ° 'E?r(7rA)'/ír(rfe>, from ÍTTL upon, aud
140, Schleusner, and many others. T h e Tí\í]tTíTk> to strike.—With a Dative, To re-
second opinión is embraced by Scaliger prove, rebiike, blame. occ. 1 T i m . v. 1.
E p . 4 4 4 . and lately by Fischer de V i t . Herodotus, (as cited by Raphelius) and
L e x . N . T . P r o l . xii. p . 3 1 3 . s q . ; b u t , I Josephus, A n t . lib. xii. cap. 4 : § 2, and §
think, without any strong argument. T h e 8, use the V . in t h e same sense with a da-
word TÜD was used, according to J e r o m e , tive. See also W e t s t e i n . [Llom. Iliad
in t h e Gospel sec. Hebraeos, and this xxiii. 580. Xen. CEcon. xiii. i 2 . Herodian
Fischer relies on ; but, as Suicer observes, iii. 3 . 13. Polyb. v. 2 5 . 3.]
this r a t h e r implies any future time, and £Eirnrvíyüj, from E V Í upon, and •Kviy.o
not lo-morroiv simply. H e n e e m a n y i n - to choak.— To strangle. N a h u m ii. 1 3 .
terpreters apply this phrase to Christ, the In t h e N . T . it is used metaphorically of
spiritual food from heaven, hereafler lo plants, whose growth is choaked or hiu-
give us life. So A t h a n . i. p . 6 0 7 . D a - dered. L u k e viii. 7-]
masc. O r t h . F i d . L i b . iv. c. 14. p . 3 1 8 . 'ETrnrodéw, üi, from eV¿ intens. and wo-
Germán, in Theor. Eccl. 175. Cyril. Alex. déio to desire, which from t h e N . rcúlhc
xiii. de Adorat. p . 4 7 1 . Cyprian. de O r . desire. W i t h an infinitivo or accusative
D o m . p . 268. T e r t u l l . L i b . de O r a t . c. vi. case following, To desire carneslly, lo
p . 181. and others. Finally, t h e word is long for or after. See R o m . i. i 1. 2 Cor.
interpreted supersubslantialis, as if from v. 2. P h i l . i. 8. [ii. 20.] 1 P e t . ii. 2. J a m .
£ 7 r t «Vía, supra subslanliam understand- iv. 5 , Do ye think that the Scripiure
1

i n g here t h e eucharistic bread qf life.] speaketh in vain against this worldly

''Emaríimo, from érrl upon, and iríwrio to temper ? Upoe (pOórov imirodú rb rrvevpa
fail. o KarbÍKncrev iv i'iptv; Doth the (Holy)
I . To fail iipon, as St, P a u l did upon Spirit that dmellelh in us Christians
E u t y c h u s when seemingly dead. occ. Acts (comp. N u m . x i . 2 9 . Rom. viii. 1 1 . 1 Cor.
x x . 10. (comp. 1 K i n g s xvii. 2 1 . 2 Kings iii. 16. 2 T i m . i. 14.) lust io envy?
iv. 34.)—upon t h e neck of another in t e n - (Comp. James iii. 14, 15. 1 Cor. iii. 3.)
derness. occ. L u k e xv. 2 0 . Acts x x . 3 7 . So French translation, Pensez-vous qui
Comp. G e n . xiv. 14. xlvi. 2 9 . in L X X , l'Ecriture parle in vain ? l'Esprit qui a
aud 3 Mace. v. 3 3 . Spoken of thc Holy habité en nous, vous inspire-t-il l'envié ?
 E n i 299 E n i

See also Whitby and Doddridge, and and it is especially applied to stamped
especially Wolfius and Macknight. [Schl. money. See Poli. Ónom. iii. 10. T h u c y -
says it means here To be opposed to, i. e. dides ii. c. 13. T h e word occurs E s t h e r
to have a desire against; and so W a h l . v. 4 . ]
Schleusner translates (removing t h e note 'Eiftcnrarpoc, 5, ó, )/, from hticnrlCo) lo
of interrogatiou) The spirit which dwells give food, to feed, from litl lo, and atri^iu
in you (for he reads vpxv with t h e Vul- to feed, which from alroc corn, food.—
gate) is opposed to envy. Of course he Victuals, food, especially for a large
means the human spirit amended by Chris- number of persons, commeatus. occ. L u k e
tianity. T h e uext dirficulty is to know ix. 12. So in t h e best Greek writers i t
whether the words are intended as a ci- frequently denotes the provisión of vidual
tation from S c r i p t u r e , or not. T h e r e are for an army or feet; and t h e verb ¿VIO-Í-
no words exactly answering to them ; and rl'(E.aQai is used for procuring such provi-
many, as Heinsius, Randolph, and Scott, sión, as Kypke has particularly shown.
t h i n k , t h a t the general tenor of Scripture See also W e t s t e i n . — T h e L X X apply t h e
is referred to. M o s t persons, however, N . íiiLcnrio-pbc in a similar view for t h e
refer t h e words to Gen. vi. 3 , 5, to which Heb. ¡Trtf. Gen. xiv. 2 1 . Exod. xii. 3 9 .
t h e y do not bear any very striking resem- Josh. i. 1 1 . & al. [ A d d Gen. xiii. 2 5 .
blauce. Whatever conclusión we come to, Josh. ix. 11. 1 Sam. xxii. 10. X e n . A n a b .
t h e construction of the passage is ex-
i. 5. 9. vii. 1. 6. H e l l . iii. 2. 19. D e m o s t h .
tremely difficult and harsh. 'EinQvpéii) is
p. 280. 1 1 . p. 6 7 1 . 18. p . 909. 4 . H e r o d .
used in the same sense as Schleus. gives
vi. 7• 3 . Schleusner gives t h e word t h e
to éwnrodéú) in Gal. v. 1 7 ; but then Kara
sense of provisions for a journey; and
follows.]—In t h e L X X likewise, it de-
initjirl'Copai is explained by T h o m . M . p .
notes vehement desire, and answers to the
705, as r a kajócSia Xap&ávu). So H e s y -
Heb. lo desire earnestly, P s . xiii. 1 ;
to iqDrji to be palé or wan through eager chius explains one word by ktpobiacrpbc.']
desire, P s . lxxxiv. 2, &c. - 'EiturKÉiíropai. Mid. from kiil intens. or
upon, and o-KÍitropai to look,
fUg^ 'Eirnródno-ic:, ior, A t t . £<uc,
1
from I. Transitively, with an accus. To look
¿•¡n-KoQéw.—A vehement desire or longing. oul accurately and diligently, in order to
occ. 2 Cor. vii. 7, 11. [ A q . Ezek. xxiii. choose the best. occ. A c t s vi. 3 . [ D i o d .
Sic. xii. 11.]
Diluí5' 'E7ri7ró9ijroc, e, ó, h, bv, from I I . Transitively, with an accus. ex-
éirnrodéo), Much desired. Phil. iv. 1.] pressed or u n d e r s t o o d . — [ T o visit one for
Efg!? 'Erfcrfodía, ac, ?;, from kríLitoQéw. the salce qf knowing his state,
0
inspecl.
—An earnest desire or longing. occ. Rom. A c t s xv. 3 6 . Xen. Cyr. vi. 3 . 10. vii. 1. 5 .
xv. 2 3 . J u d g e s xv. 1.]
'EifLTfopévopai, from ht\ upon or lo, and I I I . Transitively, with an accus. To
•ttoptvtjjxai to come.—To come to. occ. L u k e visit, to go or come lo see, in order lo as-
viii. 4 . [Ezek. xxxix. 14. Dion. H a l . x. sisl or benefit, [ a n d thence to be favour-
43.] able to, regard, show kindness to, take
'Eiíippáiírüj, from sal upon, and páiírta care of. M a t . xxv. 3 6 , 4-3. L u k e i. 6 8 , 7 8 .
to sew.—To sew upon. occ. M a r k ii. 11. vii. 16. A c t s vii. 2 3 . xv. 14. H e b . ii. 16.
[ J o b xvi. 15.] James i. 27- O n t h e two first] t e x t s we
'EiTtipphírw, from hcl upon, and piVrw to may observe, t h a t t h e G r e e k writers like-
casi.-—To throm, cast upon. occ. L u k e wise apply it to visiting the siclc, as m a y
xix. 3 5 . [ N u m b . x x x v . 2 0 , 2 2 . Joshua x. be seen in E l s n e r , Wetstein, and K y p k e .
11. Herodian v. 6. 19. I t is used meta- Comp. also Campbell's N o t e on M a t . xxv.
phorically in 1 P e t . v. 7, for throwing off 36. [See Exod. iv. 3 1 . R u t h i. 6. P s .
your care from your self lo another. See viii. 5. E c c l u s . vii. 3 9 , lo visit the sick.
Ps. Iv. 2 3 . ] Herodian iv. 2. 7. A r t e m i d . iii. 2 2 . ]
'Etlaripoc, tí, b, ?;, from liii for, and [ ' E i r « n c £ j j c í f w , from hitl and aKEvá'(co.—
oijfxa a sign, mark.—Remarkable, emi- To load furniture on carriages or beasls
neut, whether for good. occ. Rom. xvi. 7 . of burthen. Henee t h e middle ( t h o u g h
—or evil. occ. M a t . xxxvii. 16. [ F o r t h e it sometimes retains the active sense, as
bad sense, see Polyb. xviii. 3 8 . 1. Joseph. Xen. H e l l . vii. 2 . 8. and v. 3 . 7.) is To
Ant. v. 7. 1. Lucian. Rhet. Preec. T . iii. load one's self, and then to prepare for a
p. 2 7 ; for the good, Joseph. Bell. J . vi. 3 . journey. T h i s word próbably occurs in
T h e proper sense of t h e word is marked, A c t s x x i , 15, where the common reading
 E n i 300 E n i

malíes no good sense. See i. 2 0 ; t h e correspondent H e b . word in

inrncrKívaijíifxtvoi
Polyb. iu- 24. Diod. Sic. xiii. 2 . ] Ps. cix. 8, is mpa.
{§§1° '~£rfuncr¡vóhi, Si, from sirl in, a n d I I . Visitation. occ. L u k e xix. 44. 1 P e t .
CKIIVÓIJ) lo pilch a tent, to dwell. — To enter ii. 12, where W h i t b y and Macknight,
and dwell in. occ. 2 Cor. xii. 9. So Poly- whom see, explain {¡pipa éiticruoTrfjc by ihc
bius, cited bv Raphelius, To Sé reXevralov, time o/persecution; and for proof, W h i t b y
'EniSKHNíi'SANTES 'EHT rae oucíae, cites Isa. x. 3 . J e r . vi. 15. x. 15, from tlie
A n d at length entering into, and taking L X X ; and W i s d . iii. 7. Ecclus. ii. 14.
possession of, t h e houses—lib. 4 . p . 287- xviii. 20. [ I n L u k e xix. 4 4 , Schleusner
edit. Paris. an. 16'16'. Ibid. p . 33.5. Mera and Wahl take it as the kind or providenl
Sé ráv-a raíe oudaie 'EIIISKrlNQ'SAN- visitation of God. The lime in which God
T E S Kareiypv rr¡v ifóXiv, " After these showed himself gracious lo thee ; and so
things, entering into the houses, they Theophylact ad loe. So in J o b x. 12.
took possession of the city." CEcumenius and xxxiv. 9. A s to t h e visitation lo
explains i-rririnnriicr] in t h e above t e x t by punish in Isa. x. 3 , Theodoret explains
oXr¡ iv oXtí ¡caroadjirr], which I know not the day qf visitation by the lime qf veu-
how better to transíate than, may entirely geance. J e r . viii. 12. Wisd. xix. 14. 'Eiti-
take possession of and dwell in me. T h e crKoTíiio is p u t for lo revenge in Eur. I p h .
modern Greek versión for hirurtcnváiern lias T a u r . 1414.]
KiiroiKÍiaii, and t h e V u l g . renders éifia-i:i¡- 'EitícnzoTtoc, U, ¿, i¡, from eiil upon, over,
vúcrrj éi? epé, by inhabitet iu me, may or intens. and eo-Kova perf. mid. of cnciitro-
dwell iu me. -But, after all, perhaps t h e p a i lo look.—-An overscer, an inspector,
words should rather be interpreted, may one who hath the inspection or oversig/il,
ovcrshadow, and so protecl me, as a tent. a superinlendanl, a bishop. I t is once
T h u s t h e Syriac versión, ib$ p « may pro- applied to Christ, 1 P e t . ii. 25 ; but in
tecl me, and Diodati's Italian, mi ripari, every other passage of t h e N . T . is spoken
which is explained in a Note " Sia la mia of men who have t h e oversighl of Christ's
única salvaguardia e protettione. Greco, flock. occ. Acts xx. 28. (comp. verse 17-)
Sia al disopra di me, a guisa di leuda, P h i l . i. 1. 1 T i m . iii. 2. T i t . i. 7.—In t h e
con che l'huome si ripara dall' arsure o L X X , from whence t h e writers of the N .
dall' altre ingiurie dell' aria. Vedi Isa. T . appear to have taken this word, 'Eitía-
ICOTÍOC denotes an overscer.
xxv. 4. May be my only safeguard aud
prolcclion. Greek, May be over me, like 1. Of t h e ariny. occ. N u m . xxxi. 14.
a tent, with which a man proteets himself Jurl. ix. 2 8 . 2 Kings xi. 1 5 , or J 6, a n -
from t h e heats and other injuries of t h e swering t o t h e H e b . T p a or l i p a .
air. See Isa. xxv. 4 . " Comp. 1 P e t . iv. 2. Of worknien. 2 Chron. xxxiv. 12,
14, aud S^vów I I I . 17, for Heb. n p i n .
' E T r t o x i á f ü ) , from f V i upon, over, and 3 . Of the house of the Lord. occ. 2 K.
crúa a shadom. xi. 18, where H e b . ¡Tipa offices.
I . To ovcrshadow as a cloud, M a t . 4 bü, a ñame of God, is rendered 'E-¡ti-
xvii. 5. Mark ix. 7. Luke ix. 34.—as t h e c-KÓiití, as we m a y say Providence. occ,
shadow of a person passing by, Acts v. 15. Job x x . 2 9 . Comp. W i s d . i. 6,
I I . To ovcrshadow (in an unspeakable 5. 'EntloKOTíot is used for a civil or reli-
manner) as t h e power of the Highest did gious qfjicer. occ. Neh. xi. 9 , 1 4 , 2 2 . In
t h e Blessed Virgin a t t h e concep'ion of the two latter verses it is spoken of t h e
t h e Son of God. occ. L u k e i. 3 5 . See 'Eitímcoirog, or Overscer of the Pricsts and
Suicer Thesaur. in 'Ereío-iciá^to I I . [See Levites. H e b . Tpa. Comp. I Mac. i. 5 1 .
N u m b . i x . 22.] 6. Eleazer, t h e son of Aaron, is in t h e
'ErnaKoiréui, Si, from ¿wl upon, or intens.L X X called 'EitícncotoQ from overseeing
and ecrKotfa perf. mid. of cncéitTopai lo look. the tabernacle and its furniture. oceurs
I. To oversee, take the care and over- N u m . iv. lfi, where, for t h e H e b . m p a
sight qf, lo superintend. occ. 1 P e t . v. 2. ivjbü t h e office qf Eleazer, the L X X has
Comp. 'EifiaKoiti), and 'ETÍÍO-KOIÍOC. 'EiúattoTtoc; 'EXtúfap, Eleazer ihc Over-
scer.
I I . To look diligenlly, take earnest heed.
occ. H e b . xii. 15. [ X e n . de Rcp. Lac. ii. 2.]7. I n Isa. Ix. 17, where t h e prophot is
foretelling t h e glory and felicity of t h e
'Eiíicncoitri, ije, ?/, from t h e same as etus-
KOTtíw. church by t h e accession of t h e Gentiles,
I . The office qf an overscer, or bishop for t h e H e b . x=S\bw "[¡npa Tiptin n p ™
in Christ's church. occ. 1 T i m . iii. 1. Acts TttOn, I will also make Ihy officers pcace,
 E n i 301 E n i

rtnd Ihine exactors righteousness, tlio know, r being inserted for the sake of t h e
L X X has Kai dioaio r a o apxpvrag era IV sound, as it is likewise in 'kop knowing,
iim}vr\, Kal r a e 'EIIISKÜ'IIOYS vi ív CL- íiápia hislory, í-roptu) lo visit, derivativos
Kaioo-vvri, I will appoint thy riders in from the same verb 'io-npi.
peace, and thy overseers (bishuj)s) in righ- I. To know, undersland. See M a r k
teousness : A n d it is not improbable t h a t xiv. 68. A c t s x. 2 8 . xv. 7. xxvi. 26.
t h e Overseers of Christ's church are in 1 T i m . vi. 4 . J u d e ver. 10.
the N . T . called 'E-ÍO-KOTTOI., from this very I I . To know, be acquainled, with, a
passage of Isaiah *..—The above-cited are person. occ. A c t s xix. 15.—or t h i n g . occ.
a!I the passages both of t h e L X X versión, A c t s xxiii. 2 5 .
and of the Apocryphal hooks, wherein I I I . To know, foreknow. occ. J a m . iv.
' E T T Í O T O T T O C occurs. 1 4 . ' Comp. H e b . xi. 8.
'E7rí(77rá(ü, ÓJ, — á o ¡ x a i , Upen, from £7rl 'E7riTc'ir77c, a, ó, from ¿ij>hi]pi to stand or
over, and o-irúm to draw.—To draw t h e place near, to set over.
the prepuce over the glans ( t h u s H e s y - I. In t h e profane writers it denotes
chius, ÍXKVÍTID ra Séppa), and so become one who is sel over any thing, and takes
uncircumeised. [ I t appears from Celsus care qf it. T h u s in Sophocles' A j a x ,
de Medie, vii. 2 5 . t h a t there was a sur- line 27, ' E I I I S T A ' T A I S rroipvUov are t h e
gical operation performed for this purpose. keepers, or shepherds, of t h e flocksj in
T h e instrument was called ~2,icacrQriTÚp. See Xenophon's Cyropaed. lib. viii. p . 4 3 1 .
E p i p h a n . d e Mens. & Pond. p. m. 172, edit. Hutcliinson, 8vo. 'ElTfSTATAI
'¿pycov who also describes the operation. There are overseers of t h e works (comp.
is a very long dissertation by Groddeck 2 Chron. xxxiv. 13, in L X X ) ; and A r i s -
in Schoetgen. H o r . Hebr. i. p . 1159. on totle, Polit. l i b . iv. cap. 15, uses ' E l l T -
this subject. Episcopius (Tnst. Theol. ii. S T A T A I for magislrates, who are presi-
10. p . 44. 6.) seems to think t h a t in this denta and guardians of t h e state. [ S e e
place of Corinthians, the meaning is only, 2 K i n g s v. 16. xxv. 19. 2 Chron. ii. 2 .
let them not try lo appear uncircumeised; xxxi. 12. Exod. i. 11. v. 14. A r r i a n Diss.
but from Groddeck's statements, no doubt E p i c t . iii. 15. 3 . Xen. de R e p . L a c . 8. 4.
can be entertained of t h e frequent prac- A n a b . ii. 3. 7. Mem. i. 1 . 8 . ]
tico of the operation.] occ. 1 Cor. vii. 18f. I I . I n t h e N . T . Maslcr, a title of re-
T h u s Josephus, Ant. lib. xii. cap. 5 . § 1, spect, and acknowledgement of authority.
says of the Jews, who apostatized under I t is used by L u k e alone, and applied
Antioclius Epiphanes, Kai rfjv rüv ¿iiSoícov only to Christ. occ. L u k e v. 5. viii. 2 4 ,
•ñEpiTO¡.n)v zirEKciXv^iav, ¿¡r iív ei.ív Kal r a 4 5 . ix. 3 3 , 4 9 . xvii. 13. B y a com-
r.Epl rr)v ¿nróóvcnv "~EXXr¡vec, " Genitalium parison of L u k e ix. 3 3 . with M a t , xvii.
etiam circumeisionem obtéxere, u t vel 4, and M a r k ix. 5, it is plainly parallel to
nudato corporc Greeci viderentur." H u d - lívpie, Lord, and t o ' P a £ é i , Rabbi; and
son. See bis Note. A n d in tlie T r e a t i s e Luke ix. 4 9 , it answers to AtoáaKaXs,
of the Maccabees, § 5, we read t h a t A n - Masier, leacher, in Mark ix. 3 8 . O n
tioclius TrapsKÉXeviTEV av-iñr '¿va '¿KCL^OV L u k e v. 5, K y p k e shows that Diogenes
rwv 'EÉ'paíW 'EITISITA'20AI, commanded L a e r t . and Diodorus Sic. use it for a
his gnards to Éwio-~acr6ai each of t h e Preceptor. In t h e L X X it constantly
Hebrews. Comp. 1 Mac. i. 15. See W e t - signifies a president or overseer, praífec-
stein on 1 Cor. vii. 18, B u x t o r f ' s Lexicón tus. [ D i o d . Sic. iii. 69. O t h e r instances
Cliald. T h a l m . Rabio, under ^üin, and are given in M u n t h e Obss. Phil. p . 142.
Calmefs Dictionary in F O R E S K I N . K y p k e Obss. Sacr. i. p . 228. See also
'Erri^apai, from ¿Vi intens. and 'io-r¡pi lo Tliom. Mag. v. diSíic-KaXoe. E t y m o l . M a g .
in v. and E u s t a t h . ad Odyss. P . p . 6 4 1 ,
* Ciernen!-., in h i s first E p i s t l e to the Corintliians,
40. T h e word is only found in St. L u k e
§ 4 2 . edit. Kussell, carries the matter m u c h farther. among t h e Evangelists.]
H e cites the text t h u s : Ka-RCTR^CU T C U ; 'ETRICRXOVOUÍ 'E7rt<?t'XXw,from ¿rrl ¿o, and <;¿XXto lo send.
c/.VTtZ'j vj Oiy.uioeúv' ',, y.x) TOU? Aioaovciíf cwTtvv e> iiisíi,
1

I . [ T h i s word in good Greek denotes,

"ItL'ill appoint their overseers (bishops) in righte-
ousness, and their ministers (deacons) in faith:" To give an order, either directly, as X e n .
and produces it as a prophccy of the A p o s t l e ' s a p - Cyrop. iv. 5 . 12. v. 5. 13. (whence ¿tri-
pointing the two offices of bíshops (or prcsbytcrs, TOXI) means a command, see id. ib. v. 5. 2.
comp. § 44.) and deacons in the church.
Aristoph. N u b . 608.) ; or by message, as
+ [ S o m e cxplain i t in this sense in 4 M a c . v. 1 ,
but Schleusner thinks this wrong. T h e word o c -
X e n . Cyr. v. 5. 1 . ; or by l e t t e r , as
curs in its proper sense i n the L X X , as I s a . v. 1 8 . ] Xen. iii. 1 . 1 ; whence it is, to send
 B n i 302 E n i

to by letter, or write lo; and this is' its or returning to one's former evil course of
only sense iu the N . T . I t is followed life. [ G e n . xliv. 13. D e u t , xx. 5. In
by a dative of t h e person. Mitto in L u k e xvii. 4 , some constrúe, and seven
L a t i n is used for writing a letter. See limes in a day come back to you ; others
Cort. ad Sallust. Beli. Catilin. c. 42. come back to a better mind. Add M a r k
and on our word Perizon. ad iElian. xiii. 16.]
V . H . iv. 18. and Krcbs. Obss. Flav. p . I I I . Transitively, To converi, turn to
220. I t oceurs 1 Kings v. 8. according God and holi?icss, L u k e i. 16, 17. J a m .
to t h e M S . A l e x . ] occ. Acts xv. 2 0 . xxi. v. 19, 2 0 . [Acts xxvi. 18.] Intransi-
25. H e b . xiii. 22. tively, To turn, to be t h u s converted or
'Ewi'rijpiot', OVOQ, b, ?/, from ¿Ttí-apai to turned. M a t . xiii. 15. L u k e xxii. 3 2 .
hww, [ a n d then prudent and modérate.} Acts iii. 19. i x . 3 5 . xiv. 15. xxvi. 18,
—Knowing, skilful, understanding. occ. 20, & al. Comp. J o h n xii. 40. [The
J a m . iii. 13. [ D e u t , i. 13. iv. 6. Ecclus. passive 'ETrL^pífopai is used for the m i d -
xl. 3 1 . Xen. Cyr. iii. 3 . 9.] dle in t h e sense, To turn oneself, in M a t .
'E7r¿Tijpí£ü> from ércl intens. a n d <rrjpí£w ix. 2 2 . M a r k v. 3 0 . viii. 3 3 . J o h n xxi.
;

lo strengihen.—To confirm, strengthen. 20. in the sense, turn to, in Gal. iv. 9.
[ I n the pass. to resl on. See 2 Sam. i. 6.] 'EiTL^pELpEiv Kapbiav TIVOQ ¿TTC riva IS, io
In the N . T . it is used only in a figu- turn ihe affections qf one person towards
rative and spiritual sense, for conjirming another, as in L u k e i. 17. E z r a vi. 2 2 .
persons in their adherence to the Gospel, Ecclus. xlviii. 10.]
notwithstanding opposition and persecu- 'EirL^pocpr/, ije, r), from eV^po^a pei'f.
tion. occ. A c t s xiv. 2 2 . xv. 3 2 , 4 1 . xviii. 2 3 . mid. of EVíTp£0tü.—A turning, conversión,
' E T T I T O X ? ; , ijg, h, from éití^oXa perf. mid. occ. A c t s xv. 3 . [ I t is p u t for return in
of ¿TTL^éXXLo lo send.—An epistle, a letter.Ezek. xlviir 8. for atlenlion qf mind.
A c t s ix. 2. xxiii. 2 5 . Rom. xvi. 2 2 . & al. Demosth. p. 158. 24. E p i c t e t . c. 6 3 . X e n .
freq. [ I n Acts ix. 2. it is, letters qfeom- Hell. v. 2. 9.]
mission or authority. I n 2 Cor. iii. 2. it 'ETTLtTvváyw, from EVÍ to, and avváytú to
means, a letter qf recommendation from v. gather, colleet.
1. T h e sense of t h e passage is obviously, I. To colleet, gather together lo one
t h a t the conversión of t h e Corinthians to place, occ. M a r k i. 3 3 . L u k e xii. 1. as a
a Christian life would be a recommenda- hen doth her chickens u n d e r her wings.
tion of C h r i s t i a n i t y . ] occ. M a t . xxiii. 3 7 . L u k e xiii. 34. [used
IJIÜp0 'E7rí=ro/Ji4'w, from iiri^bpiav a of g a t h e r i n g ] t h e elect into the Christian
muzzle, which from EVÍ upon, and •ropa church. M a t . xxiv. 3 1 . M a r k xiii. 2 7 .
the mouth.—To wmzzle. occ. T i t . i. 11. Comp. 2 M a c . i. 27- [2 Chron. xx. 26.
I t is a íigurative word taken from muz- Is. Iii. 12. Polyb. i. 7 5 . 2 . ]
zling dogs (comp. P h i l . iii. 2.) t h a t they 'EwLavvaytoyii, rjg, r¡, from ETTUTV-
m a y not bark or h i t e ; henee applied by váyu).
t h e profane writers (see E l s n e r and W e t - T. A being gathered together. occ.
stein), as by St. P a u l , to slopping the 2 Thess. ii. 1. Comp. 1 Thess. iv. 17.
mouths of noisy and foolish talkers. I I . An assembling together at one
Comp. $Lpóio I I . [ S o it is explained by place, occ. H e b . x. 2 5 . Comp. 2 M a c . ii.
Theophylact. é\éyytw a^>obpti>Q, ¿ke áiro-7. [See also verses 13, 14, 18. and iv.
KXEÚIV ÍIVTOÍQ rii tápara. ' T o find fault 39. Phavorinus and Zonaras (Lex. Col.
with them (or refute t h e m ) very m u c h , 802.) say éma•vvaywyíiv, rt)v crvpipcovíav
so as to s h u t t h e i r mouths.' See D e - EKÍÍKEGEV b 'A7róVoAo£.]
mosth. p. 8 5 . 4. Hesychius has EVITO/W- ¡fgpf 'EwLcrvvrpExw, from EVÍ upon or
'CIÚV IXíyyuív. T h e Schol. on Aristoph. to, and LTvrrpExw to run together.— To
E q . 4 8 0 , explains the verb by KaratnyaQhi. run together upon or to (him, namely).
S e e H e m s t e r h . on Aristoph. P l u t . p . 193. occ. M a r k ix. 2 5 .
Krebs. Obss. F l a v . p . 367-] 'Eiua-v-acric, IOQ, A t t . EO>S, i], from EVÍ-
'Eiri^péípLo, from ¿Vi to, and rpécj>ci) to turn. crvví^apai to meet together against, from
I . To turn, turn to, or towards. M a t . EVÍ upon or against, and avví^npi to stand
ix. 2 2 . M a r k v. 30. viii. 3 3 . A c t s xvi. together.—A concourse, tumuli, insur-
18. [ R e v . i. 12. Zach. v. ].] rection. occ. A c t s xxiv. 12. 2 Cor. xi. 2 8 ,
I I . To return. M a t . x. 1 3 . xii. 44. in which l a t t e r t e x t it is applied to t h a t *
xxiv. 18. L u k e ii. 2 0 . Comp. 2 P e t . ii.
2 1 , where it is applied to lurning back, * See B e z a and Doddriclge on the place.
 E n i 303 E n i

croma of cares, on account of the churchcs, 15. In the first and t h i r d of these places,
wliicli were continually rushing vpon St. I can see no ground for such a translation.
P a u l , and almost overbeariug h i m . — I t is I t is clearly command, decree, or order;
used by the L X X for a lumulluous con- and I t h i n k it is simply decree in the se-
coursc, N u m . xvi. 40, or xvii. 5, answer- cond passage also. W a h l explains this
ing to t h e H e b . m j a company; and passage, that you should enjoin in every
N u m . xxvi. 9, to m~n (infin. H i p h . of may, i. e. seriously and severely. Bret-
Tfíi) to contcnd; and in the Apocrypha, schner translates suo qumque ordine, every
1 E s d r . v. 7 3 , according to t h e Alexan- thing in its own order, and says, t h a t t h e
drian M S . , we have the phrase ' E I I I 2 Y - Apostle refers to t h e precepts delivered
2 T A ' 2 E I 2 BOIOY'MENOI. [ I n t h e se- in verses 1—10. T h e word occurs in
cond passage, Schleusner says, Distrae- Dan. iii. 16, in some M S S . , and in S y m .
tion from tlie number qf persons perpe- Micah vii. 1 1 . Polybius xiii. 4 . 3 . x x i .
tually resorting lo one. Cicero pro A r - 4. 1.]
d u a c. 6. has quolidianos hominum ímpe- 'Eiriráo-o-w, from ¿irl upon, or intens.
tus in the same sense. T h e word occurs and ríiaao) to order, appoint.—To com-
in Sext. E m p i r . E t h . 127- Joseph. contra mand, order. M a r k i. 27- vi. 27, 3 9 . P h i -
Apion. i. 2 0 . ] lemon, verse 8. & al. [ T h e word is p r o -
fjjggf 'ETTic(ba\fis; toe, ye, b, y , raí rb — perly military, and then means To place
1

te, from E ' T T Í for, and cripáXXoj to supplani, soldiers behind the first rank, as in X e n .
ihrom down; which see under 'AaajaXi¡e. A n a b . vi. 3. 9. H e l . i. 6. 2 1 . Polyb. i. 2 1 .
I . Properly, Api io be ihroron domn, 12. 1 Mac. iv. 6 1 . vi. 5 0 . I t is construed
Henee, either with an acc. of the t h i n g , and d a t .
I I . Hazardous, dangerous. occ. Acts of the person, or t h e infinitive. I t occurs
xxvii. 9, where see Kypke. [See Diod. in Gen. xlix. 3 3 . E s t h . iii. 12 ,• and is said
Sic. xiii. 77. Polyb. i! i l . 10. ii. 2 8 . 6. by Thomas M . to be a better word t h a n
Arrian Diss. Epict. iii. 13. 20. Wisd. ix. irpocrrárrw.]
'EwtrtXtw. w, from eVí intens. and T E X É W
V:f.¡' 'EWLO-VVO), from E V Í intens. and lofnish.
íV^úw to be strong. [ T h e word occurs in I. Tofinish, complete, perfect. occ. Rom.
the active sense To strengthen, as in Xen. xv. 28. 2 Cor. vii. 1. viii. 6, 11. Gal. iii.
CEc. xi. 13. I t is To grom strong, or 3 * . P h i l . i. 6. H e b . viii. 5. [ X e n . Cyr. iii.
prevalí, in Ecclus. xxix. 1. 1 Mac. vi. 6. 3. 1. 1 Sam. iii. 12.]
Wahl t h i n k s t h a t this verb, like many I I . To perform. occ. L u k e xiii. 3 2 . 1
others, as SiartKíw, rvyyfivoi, expresses P e t . v. 9. H e b . ix. 6, Aarptíac ETnreXtiv.
only a circumslance, or accessary defini- H e r o d o t u s uses t h e similar expressions
tion of the word A É y o j T E c , They contended SpnaKEÍac —¿v^iúXag — B v a l a c ' E n i T E -
more vehemently. See Mathias § 5 5 2 . ] — A E ' I N to perform ceremonies—devotions
To grom more, sirong, violent, or urgent. —sacrifices, lib. ii. cap. 3 7 , 63. lib. iv..
occ. Luke xxiii. 5. cap. 26. [Schleusner refers 2 Cor. vii. 1.
ii'-ff 'Eirurojpévb), from iirl upon, and to this head. Píe quotes similar expres-
ffapÉvio to heap, [which from erojpbe a sions to those in Plerodotus from iEIian.
heap7\—To heap up. occ. 2 T i m . iv. 3 . V . H . xii. 6 1 . Philo de Somn. p . 6 5 3 . 15.
[Theophylact and CEcurnenius say, t h a t and Herodian i. 5 . 4. I t is to build in
the word implies the mixed heap or m u l - 3 E s d r . vi. 4.]
titude of teachers. T h e word occurs twice [ I I I . To accomplish ; and then in t h e
in Symmachus's versión. Song of Solo- passive, To be accomplished, to happcn.
mon ii. 4. J o b xiv. 17.] 1 P e t . v. 9, where] observe t h a t X e n o -
'E-irayí), r¡Q, ?;, from STnréraya perf. phon, Memor. Socrat. lib. iv. cap. 8. § 8,
mid. of i-KiTCino-io, which see. applies t h e V . E V I T - E X E I O - S C U to t h e bifirmi-
I. A command, commandmeni, appohü- ties endured in oíd age.
ment. occ. Rom. xvi. 26. 1 Cor. vii. C, 2 5 . 'Er(i~r¡dEWQ,a,bvfrom fVirrjS^c t h e same,
2 Cor. viii. 8. 1 T i m . i. 1. T i t . i. 3 . which may be deduced from éitl to, and
I I . Authorily, commanding aulhorily. i)Sve sweet, agreeable, r being inserted for
occ. T i t . ii. 15. [ I n Wisd. xiv. 16. xviii.
16. xix. 6, éitirayri means punishment pro- * [ T h e passive is here p u t in the active sense.
eeeding from God, according to Schleus- W a h l thinks the verb h a s here the sense to erase.
" A n d w i l l y o u n o w cease (from the gift of the
ner ; and h e says he does not know whe- Spirit), so as to g o back to sensual and imperfect
ther this may throw any light on T i t , ii. views of r e l i g i ó n . " ]
 E n i 304 E n i

snuiid's sakc.—Fit, convenicnl, neccssary. Demosthenes, p. 91S. 22, uses it in this

[ S e e 1 Cliron. xxviii. 2. W i s d . iv. 5 . ] sense. Then it means, to set a fine on,
Q u c i s h u m a n a sibi doleat natura negatis.
as Joseph. A n t . xviii. 4. 6. Dio xxxviii.
p. 78. Henee, comes probably, the sense
Without zeliich lauguid nature must decline.
of blaming. T h e original phrase seems
'EjriD/átia, rct. occ. J a m e s ii. 16, is usad to have been é-niripav TI rivi, b u t t h e ac-
in like manner by the profane writers for cusative is often left o u t . ]
what are called the necessaries qf life, I I . To reprove, rebulcc, repreheud.
particularly for food. See Wetstein and Mat. viii. 26. xvi. 22. xvii. 18. xix. 13.
Kypke. [ X e n . CEc. iii. 8. iEsch. Soc. Dial, M a r k ix. 25, (where see Campbell) L u k e
iii. 11. Poli. Onom. i. 1 6 8 . ] iv. 39. [xxiii. 4 0 . ] 2 T i m . iv. 2. J u d e
'IL-iTÍdnfu, from EV¡ upon or besides, ver. 9.
and rídypi to pul. I I I . To charge, enjoin strictly. M a t .
I. To put or lay on, as the hand. Mat. xii. 16. M a r k iii. 12. viii. 30. L u k e iv.
ix. 18. xix. 13. & al. freq. [ I t is used of 41. ix. 21. In all these senses éieiripíiio
the imposition of hands for healiug t h e is plainly of a different root from npáv
sick in the first of these passages, and in to honour, which see. [ I should prefer
M a r k v. 23. L u k e iv. 40. Acts xxviii. 8. the following a r r a n g e m e n t . ]
•—for blessing infants in the second—for II. [ T o reprove, rebuke, reprehend.
giving the Holy Ghost in A c t s viii. 17. M a t . xix. 13. Luke xxiii. 40. 2 T i m . iv.
xix. 6.—for ordaining, Acts vi. 6. 1 T i m . 2. Gen. xxxvii. 9. Polyb. v. 54. 8. Xen.
v. 22. I t is used of] a burden, Mat. xxiii. CEc. xi. 24. T h u c y d . iv. 27. Poli. Onom.
4. Acts xv. 2 8 . — a y o k e , Acts xv. 10. ix. 8 . ]
I I . To lay on, as strokes. occ. L u k e x. I I I . [ T o admonish strictly andseverelij.
30, (where see Wetstein.) Acts xvi. 23. Mat. xii. 16. xvi. 22. M a r k iii. 12. viii.
Comp. Rev. xxii. 18. [Diod. Sic. xi. ID. 30. ix. 25. L u k e xvii. 3 . ( T h i s last
Xen. Mem. ii. 2. 1 3 . ] passage Schl. would construe, admonish.
I I I . To lade, put on board a ship. Acts him with an endeavour lo change his
xxviii. 10. purpose.) In the following passages,
I V . To imposr. a ñame. M a r k iii. 16, 17. there is also a sense of constraint, or
V . To add. Rev. xxii. 18. forcé accompanying t h e admonition or re-
V I . \_To give, deliver, distribute. Mat. buke. Mat. viii. 26. comp. Ps. cvi. 9. xvii.
xxvii. 29. Schleusner also refers Acts 18. Mark iv. 39. L u k e iv. 35, 39, 4 1 .
xxviii. 10. to this sense. See Herodot. J u d e v. 9. So Nahum i. 4 . ]
iii. 1 2 . ] 'EwiTipíci, ctg, y, from éTeiTiiiéib).—
V I I . 'ETriTÍdepai, Mid. with a dative, A punishment, or rather, A rebuke, cen-
To set or fall upon, to assault. occ. A c t s sure, occ. 2 Cor. ii. 6. Comp. 1 Cor. v.
xviii. 10. I t is used in t h e same manner 4, 5, 13. T h i s word is used also, Wisd.
by the L X X (answering to the H e b . íDti*Q iii. 10, for punishment or rebuke. [There
to spoil, and to bttiti'n lo fall upon) and is a book by Philo called He.pi cíOXwv acá
frequently by some of the best Greek wri- éiriripiioy. T h e word, in good Greek,
ters, particularly by Xenophon and P l u - meant the possession qf the rights of ci-
tarch. See the passages in Raphelius and tizenship. D e m o s t h . 230. 10. Diod. Sic.
Wetstein. [ S e e Gen. xliii. 18. E x . xviii. xviii. 18.]
1 l . x x i . 14. Xen. H e l l . i i . 4 . 1 1 . Herod. viii. 'E7r£7-pÉ7rw, from EV¿ to, and Tpiírio to
27. Diod. Sic. xvii. 86. I t is construed iu turn.— To turn any thing to any one.
the L X X either with t h e dative or EV¿.] I. To commit to, deliver to the carc of,
'E-i-(/.iáo, ¿). I t may be dedueed either lo intrust to.—In this sense it is fre-
from tVi upon, and njuciu) lo punish, or quently used in t h e profane writers, and
from EYÍ, and H e b . Nato to defile, pol- in the L X X , Gen. xxxix. 0, for t h e H e b .
lulc, to pronounce defiled, polluted, or un- nlj? lo leave.
clean. [ T h i s , with the concluding remark II. To permit, alloro, suffer. M a t . viii.
on sense I I I , is preserved as a specimen 21. xix. 8. & al. freq. ' [ M a r k v. 13.
of P a r k h u r s t ' s etymologies, and as an ex- J o h n xix. 38. A c t s xxi. 3 9 , 4 1 . 1 Cor.
cuse for having rejected so large a portion xiv. 34. H e b . vi. 3. Esth. ix. 4. Polyb.
of t h e m . ] i. 62. 3. f i l i a n V . H . ii. 5. Xen. M e m .
I. [Stephens and Schleusner give as iii. 5 . 2 . ]
the proper sense, To increase the price of [ligjp 'ETrirpoiTí), r\Q, y, from
0
eTriTÍrpoira
any thing; so Suidas explains it, and perf. mid. of eniTpínio.—A commission,
 E ni 305 E ÍT í

office commilted or intrusted. occ. Acts (jAtvopat to appear.— To appear, be ma-

xxvi. 12. [ T i m e . v. 3 1 . 4 1 . Demost. 897-
23. 2 M a c . xiii. 14.]
ÍJHP" 'E7rt'rpOíTO£5 > °> from ETTITÉT
TÍ
porra,
perf. mid. of Ewtrpéww.—A person intrust-
ed lo act in another's ñame, or to whose
care any thing is commitled by another.
I. A steward, a bailiff, villicus. occ.
M a t . x x . 8. W e t s t e i n on M a t . and R a -
phelius on L u k e viii. 3. cite from Xeno-
phon, 'O ev TOÍIJ liyph'tQ ' E n i ' T P O n O S ,
T h e country—or Inud-stemard. Comp.
Kypke on M a t t h e w . [ X e n . CEc. xii. 2.
xxii. 9 . ]
I I . A steward or treasurer to a prince.
or rather, according to Grotius and Beza,
a depuly-gouernor, a licuienant; for t h e
Greeks called t h e same officer 'Errí-poTroc,
as t h e Romans named Procurator. So
t h e Vulg. Procuratoris. occ. L u k e viii. 3.
Herodotus, lib. i. cap. 108, calis Harpa-
gus Tlávrwv ' E n i ' T P O I I O N , T h e superin-
tendant of all things, to king Astyages
nifesled. occ. T i t . ii. 11. iii. 4. [ í r m i s c h .
on Herodian i. 7- 3 . ]
'EwKpcivEía, ac, i], from ETrupavr/g.
I . Brighlness, splendor. occ. 2 Thess.
ii. 8. Comp. Sense I I . [ 2 Sam. vii. 2 3 .
2 Mace. xiv. 15. xv. 2 7 . ]
I I . The appearance, manifeslation of
Christ in the iiesh. occ. 2 T i m . i. 10.—in
glory. occ. 1 T i m . vi. 14. 2 T i m . iv. 1, 8.
T i t . ii. 13. See Suicer Thesaur. in 'E7rt-
fáveía, who observes from Casaubon, t h a t
the Greek writers particularly apply this
word to t h e appearance qf some deity.
[Schleusner says The appearance qf a God
in splendor. Polyb. iii. 94. 3. Dion. H a l .
i. 2. 68. Wessel. ad Diod. Sic. i. 25.] T o
the instances [ C a s a u b o n ] has produced
from Diodorus Siculus, and Dionysius
Halicarn, I add from Lucian, tom. i. p .
1016, speaking of t h e philosopher D e -
m o n a x : "AKXWTOC ¿ic r)v rv^pi. irapiwv ói-
Kiáv ÉSEITTVEI i;at ¿KádevSe, TWV EVOIKBVTWV

namely. See Raphelius. [Comp. 2 Mac. QES riva 'EIIPfrA'NEIAN y\ynpívwv TO

xi. I. xiii. 2. Sehweighasus. ad A r r i a n . •Kpaypa. " Whatever house h e happened
Diss. Epict. iv. 7. 2 1 . ] to light upon in his way, t h e r e , without
I I I . A guardián, to whom t h e care of invitation, he supped and slept, t h e inha-
orphans is commitled, or rather, according bitants esteeming this as t h e appearance
to Elsner, Wolfius, and others, t h e same of a god."
as the waiDciywyoQ, or keeper of t h e child- 'En-i!J>avrie, éoc, Se, b, ?';, from ÍTriebaívw.
ren d u r i n g their father's lifetime. occ. — Glorious, illuslrious. occ. Acts ii. 2 0 .
Gal. iv. 2. Comp. ch. iii. 2 4 , where t h e T h e correspondent H e b . word in Joel ii.
law is called Traibciywyoc. See also Jose-31, or iii. 4, is tOI} terrible, which is
phus D e Bel. lib. i. cap. 30. § .5. A n t . lib. sometimes applied to a bright, dazzling
xvii. cap. 4. § 2. and under Tlaioáywyae; object, as E z e k . i. 22. Comp. E x o d . xv.
[See Xen. M e m . 1. 2. 40; iElian. V . H . 11. J u d . xiii. 6. [ P r o p e r l y , clear, dis-
xiii. 4 4 . ] cernible. See Poli. Onom. vi. 206. X e n .
'EwLTvy%úvu), from ¿V¡ intens. and rvy- Mem. iii. 1. 10. F o r t h e sense given by
%ávu> to oblain.— I t is either construed P a r k h u r s t see also Mal. i. 14. a n d comp.
with a genitive, or used absolutely, To Diod. Sic. xvii. 65. Polyb. iii. 40. 9. X e n .
oblain, attain, occ. Rom. xi. 7. Heb. vi. Ages. iii. 2.]
15. xi. 3 3 . James iv. 2. [ T h e meaning is 'Ewi(j>avw, from ÉTTÍ upon, to, and <pavw
probably derived from t h e use of t h e word or Lpííw to shine.— To shine upon, give
in the case of archers, &c. hitting t h e light to. occ. E p h . v. 14. Comp. Isa, lx.
mark, as A r r i a n . Diss. Epict. iv. 6. 28. 1. [ O t h e r s write iwiebaiiGi;w, which oceurs
and 0 - K Ó V B rvyúv in P l a t o . T h e word in Job xxv. 5 . ]
oceurs in Prov. xii. 28. T h u c y d . iii. 3. 'ETTt<j>épw, from ¿Vi to, upon, besides, or
Polyb. xxxi. 2 1 . 13.] against, and cbipw io bring.
'EwitpciLvio, from ETTL over, upon, or to, I. To bring, carry io. occ. Acts xix. 1 2 .
and (páivco to shine. I I . To bring upon, inflict wrath or ven-
I. To shine over or upon, to give light geance. occ. R o m . iii. 5. [ X e n . H e l l . vi.
to. occ. L u k e i. 79. Comp. A c t s xxvii. 20. 3. 4. Polyb. iii. 4. 5 . ]
So Virgil, JEn. iii. lines 2 0 3 , 204, I I I . To add, superadd. occ. Phil. i. 1 6.
[ S e e Aristot. R h e t . iii. 6. and Loesner.
Tres aleo incertos ccecá caligine soles Obss. Philon. p . 35 1.]
Erramuspelago, toiidem sine siclere noeles.
I V . To bring against, as an aecusation.
occ. J u d e ver. 9. A c t s xxv. 18. 'E-KKpépeiv
N u m b . vi. 2 5 . to illuminate. átriav is a phrase frequently used in t h e
H . 'Eméaívopai, Pass. from ¿V¡ lo, and purest Greek writers. See R a p h e l i u s ,
X
 E n i 30 G E n i

Wetstein, and Kypke. [ T h u c y d . i. 70. iii. morning dawned.~\—And observe further,

42. Herodian iii. 8. 1 2 . ] that the Syriac ¡til, which properly s i g -
'Ewupwvéio, SJ, from ¿7U intens. or against, nifies to shine, as the day-light (illuxit.
and abujyéoj to cry. Dicitur de luce diurna, Castell.), is a p -
I . To cr^ alovd, clamour, slwui. occ. plied also to t h e evening-light, aud is t h e
L u k e xxiii. 2 1 . Acts xii. 2 2 . very word used in t h e Syriac versión of
I I . W i t h a Dative, To cry out against. Mat, xxviii. 1. L u k e xxiii. 54. A n d this
occ. Acts xxii. 24. [ I can see little rea- latter sense of t h e Syriac n j í may account
son for giving this word any other sense for the similar application of t h e G r e e k
t h a n To cry out loud. In Acts xii. 22, ¿7rt0fcio-K<i> in t h e Evangelists. See Marsh's
Schleusner says to applaud, as t h e people Note 5 1 , on his Translation of Michaelis's
in public used" to do. See Krebs. ad P l u - I n t r o d u c t . to N . T . vol. i. p . 407-
tarch. de A u d . Poet. c. 7. p . 193.] 'E-irtxEipÉoj, Si, from éwl upon or in, and
' E t t i c ^ w o x w , from ¿Vi upon or besides, XEip the hand,— To take in hand, under-
denoting accession, and ¡púaicii) to shine, take, attempt, whether with effect or not.
which from cpcioj the same. occ. L u k e i. 1. A c t s ix. 29. xix. 13. See Ra-
I . Properly, and according t o t h e ety- phelius and Wetstein on L u k e . [ S e e also
mology of t h e word, To begin to shine, io 2 Mac. ii. 30. Xen. M e m . ii. 6. 28. iElian.
dawn, as the day-light, illucesco. So in V . H . iii. 18. E s t h . ix. 25. 2 M a c . vii. 19.
Herodotus, lib. iii. cap. 8G, 'A¡x j/iiép»? Sé In this last, and in Acts xix. 13, it is to
AIA*£12K0'Y2Ht, A s soon as the 'day daré; and so Plesychius explains it by
darvned; and in Polybius, lib. ix. ad init. roX¡.iáw. I n some cases this verb seems
"Apn rfjg f/pépag ' E I I I ' D A I N O ' Y S H S , T h e to be pleonastic, and so it is explained in
day now damning. See Raphelius and L u k e i. 1,6. (with which compare 2 Mac.
W e t s t e i n on M a t . xxviii. 1. ii. 30.) Krebs. Obss. Flav. p. 96. M u n t h e
I I . To draw on, as t h e Jewish Sabbath, in Obss. in N . T . e Diod. Sic. p . 127. and
which began in the evening. (See Lev. Glass. Phil. Sacr. p . 191.]
xxiii. 3 2 . Neh. xiii. 19.) t h u s t h e verb 'E7ri^¿w, S>, from éiii upon or in, and
is plainly used, L u k e xxiii. 54, (compare ^¿0) to pour.—To pour upon or in, io in-
J o h n xix. 3 1 , with D e u t . xxi. 22, 2 3 . ) ; fuse, occ. L u k e x. 34. [ G e n . xxviii. 18.
and in the same view it may be u n d e r - Xen. CEc. xvii. 9-]
stood in t h e only other t e x t of t h e N . T . S ü p '~Ertiyppr\yíw, S¡, from éiri besides
13

wherein it occurs, namely M a t . xxviii. 1, or to, and xppnyéw to lead the chorus, also
' O I ^ E Sé Sa€Éáro)í', rij ETrupuHwúiTr] ({¡pepa, to supply, furnish*. Comp. Xopnyéto.
namely, as in t h e above passages of H e - I . W i t h a Dative of the person, and an
rodotus and Polybius) éig piiiv SaéSárw!', Accusative of the t h i n g , To supply, fur-
Í\XQE Mapía ?'/ MaySaXt'ivn, caí ?'/ &XXr¡ nish, or rather, To supply br furnish
Piapía, ^eojpiiaaL rov rá(¡)av, In the even- abundantly. occ. Gal. iii. 5. 2 Cor. ix. 10,
ing of the Sabbath, when the (Jewish) where see Wolfius, who is for placing t h e
day was drawing on towards the first day comma after Ppúo-iv, and referring x°P l~ r

of the week, Mary Magdalene and ihe yrjrrai to w h a t follows. Comp. Isa. Iv. 10,
other Mary went, i. e. set out (for it does in Heb. and L X X . T h i s V. is used with
n o t appear t h a t they actually carne a t this a dative of the person, Ecclus. xxv. 2 2 . —
time, being probably prevented by t h e [ I n t h e ] Pass. To be supplied, i. e. lo
Gííapng péyag great carlhquake or siorm, have supply, vigour, or nourishment mi-
verse 2, which preceded our L o r d ' s resur- nistred. occ. Col. ii. 19. Also, To be sup-
rection) to visit the sepulchre- F o r this plied or ministred. occ. 2 Pet. i. 11. [ I n
i n t e r p r e t a r o n of this very difficult pass- Col. ii. 9, Schleus. says, To offer mutual
age, t h e reader is obliged to the learned services, and translates The whole body
D r . Macknight, in his Commentary on joined closely by mutual good offices.
t h e place, § 147, where he may find it W a h l construes the word by adjuvo to
further illustrated and defended. See t h e help. Bretschneider says, Alterum alterí
use of HXdov, Acts xxviii. 14. [Mac- jungo, ul Choragi faceré solent.
r
H e ob-
k n i g h t ' s explanation is not on t h e whole serves r i g h t l y , t h a t in t h e parallel place
satisfactory. Schleusner, W a h l , Bretsch- in E p h . iv. 1 6. crvvappoXoyéiú is used in
neider, T i t t m a n (of Dresden) in his
C o m m e n t a r y on St. J o h n x x . adopt the * [ I t can hardly be necessary to state here that
oíd interpretation, and u n d e r s t a n d rj; the Xopüybf was the person w h o s u p p l i e d the e x -
penses of the theatrical entertainments. S p a n h e m . ad
£-iéwo-/,-á(T/; (i)fj.Épa) to express, As the Cali. H y n m . in D i a n . v. 2 5 G . ]
 E n o 307
tilia sense of joining together. T h e simple
verb is used for disposing, and joined with
SiaráTTii) in Lucian. Necyom. i. p . 4 7 7 .
ed. H e m s t . In Ecclus. xxv. 24, Schleus-
ner says, To take Ihe lead, from the ori-
ginal sense of t h e w o r d . ]
I I . W i t h an Accus. and a Dative p r e -
ceded by ev, To supply, add to. occ. 2 Pet.
i. 5. I am aware t h a t Sir Norton K n a t c h -
bull and Doddridge have supposed t h a t
the word, in this place, alludes to t h e an-
cient custom of dancing in chorus. Faith
being represented as t h e leading Grace in
the chorus of Christian virtues, and t h a t
they accordingly explain eTztycipnyriesaTe by
join, or associale to the chorus, of Chris-
tian virtues, namely. T h i s exposition, it
m u s t be confessed, is ingenious, and well
suited to the Apostle's discourse; b u t I
can find no authority for iiriypp-nyéio being
ever t h u s used, which is t h e less probable
in this place, because at t h e eleventh verse
it is evidently applied in its usual sense of
supplying,furnishing, or ministring. [In
t h i s place Schleus. says, Exhibit together,
and translates Join with a firm persuasión
as to religión, the pursuil of virtue. Wahl
gives only to exhibit or declare.]
Í^S^ 'E.ifi)(opriyía, ac, f¡, from ¿Vi^opíi-
yéio.—A supply. occ. E p h . iv. 16. Phil. i.
19.
Ef=§° 'Eifixpííü, from eirl upon, and xpíw
to anoint.— To anoint, daub, smear. occ.
John i s . 6. 11. [ L u c . de Scrib. H i s t . 6 2 . ]
'Eifoucodopéio, S>, from kiti upon, and oi-
KoSopeu to build.
I. To build upon, superstruere. occ. 1
Cor. iii. 10, 12, 14. Eph. ii. 20.
I I . To build up, edify. occ. A c t s xx. 3 2 .
Col. ii. 7. J u d e verse 20. [ I should say
with W a h l , ]
[ I . To build one thing on another, and
henee passively, To rest upon. Col. ii. 7.
resting on Christ (for better knowledge).
Eph. ii. 2 0 . ]
[ I I . To perfect a building, and metaph.
To increase. A c t s x x . 3 2 . 1 Cor. iii. 10,
12, 14. Another incrcases t h e knowledge
of religión which had been begun by the
first teachers. J u d e v. 2 0 . T h e compari-
son of Christians to a building, which is
to be carried on, is common in Scripture.]
EÜI
11
'Etfo/cÉXXw, from eiti intens. and
¿ K É A X W to bring a ship to land, or to run it
aground, which from M ' X X W t h e same, also
to move. To run a ship aground. occ.
Acts xxvii. 4 1 . T h i s word is frequently
used by the G r e e k writers in t h e same
sense. See Wetstein. [ S e e Diod. Sic. i.
E n o
3 1 . Polyb. i. 20. 15. T h u c . iv. 26. A r r i a n .
E x p . Alex. ii. 2 3 . 5.]
Eiíovopá^o), from eicl intens. a n d ovo-
pá'Cw to ñame.—[To give a ñame to.
T h e n in t h e passive, To receive a ñame
or be called. Schleusner says, t h a t like
teaXéofiai, it is to be. Rom. ii. 2 7 . Gen. iv.
17, 2 5 .0 Polyb. i. 29. 2. Xen. CEc. vi. 17-]
¡Up 'Eiíotrévio, from kiri upon, and óV-
ropai to see.— To look upon, behold, be an
eye-mitness of. occ. 1 P e t . iii. 2. ii. 12,
where, " as he leaXíóv epyíov cannot be con-
nected with evoifrévcravrec, which governs
an accus. c. iii. 2,—remove t h e comma
from eiíoKrevcravTeg, they may from your
good works, which they shall behold, glo-
rify God." Bowyer. See E n g . translat,
[Schleusner says on 1 P e t . ii. 12. eiíotirév-
aavrec is for eav etfoTírévuxn ( n a m e l y ) ra
leaXa vpSiv epya. Polyb. v. 6 9 . 6. xxxi. 2 3 .
10. D e m o s t h . p . 160. 13. H o m e r . O d y s s .
11. 1 4 0 . ]
'Enwirnc, e, ó, i/, from kitl upon,
and oitropai to see. See 'JZiroif reino.—A
beholder, an eye-witness. occ. 2 P e t . i. 16.
— O n which t e x t it may be worth observ-
ing, t h a t those who were a d m i t t e d to a
sight of t h e pagan mysteries among t h e
Greeks were said eiíonreveiv, a n d were
called evoríjai. See E l s n e r and M a c -
k n i g h t on t h e place, and W e t s t e i n on 1
P e t . ii. 12. [See Casaub. ad A t h e n . vi.
p. 446. and Spanh. ad Aristoph. R a n . 7 5 7 .
T h e word has another meaning, viz. In-
spector or president of games. See Poli.
Onom. iii. 3 0 . T h e word occurs 2 Mace,
iii. 2 9 . vii. 35.]
"Eiíoc, éoc, HC, rb, from hita to speak.—
A word, an expression. occ. H e b . vii. 9,
¿ic eiroc hiíeiv, as one may say, if I may
use the expression. T h i s is a very com-
mon phrase in the purest Greek writers,
when they are going to say any t h i n g t h a t
sounds too bold or harsh. See G r o t i u s ,
Raphelius, Wolfius, Wetstein, and K y p k e .
[ S e e Polyb. i. 1.2. v. 3 3 . 7. and Wessel.
ad Herodot. ii. 109. T h e phrase means
in a word in P l a t o Apol. Socr. c. 1 . 7 - S.
Ed. F i s c h e r . ]
'Eiiovpíivioe, «, ó, ?'/, from eirt upon, m,
and bvpavbg heaven.—" Ileavenly, celes-
tial. M a t . xviii. 2 5 . J o h n iii. 12. 1 Cor.
xv. 4 0 , 4 8 , 4 9 . & al. freq. I n E p h . i. 3 .
ii. 6, £7¡-apái>íoie heavenly (places) means
t h e Christian Church, called by C h r i s t
himself the kingdom of heaven, because
t h e Christian C h u r c h was foretold, D a n .
ii. 4 4 , u n d e r t h e character of a kingdom
which the God of heaven would set up,
X 2
 K n T 308 E IT Ú.

and which shall never be destroyed." M a c -
k n i g h t . [This word embraces several
ideas. I t is Inhabiting heaven, in Mat.
xviii. 3 5 . 1 Cor. xv. 4 8 , 49. Phil. ii. 10.
T h e n ra irrupávta are either heaven, (and
t h a t , says Schl. is t h e meaning in E p h . i.
3. with spiritual rewards in a future Ufe,
and H e b . ix. 23), or the air (which the
Jews believed to be filled with evil spirits)
as in E p h . vi. 12. See Koppe ad E p h .
ii. 2. Again, another meaning is Of or
belonging to the kingdom of heaven, as in
H e b . iii. 1. a cali to the kingdom; and
t h e word is frequently used of t h e future
joys of the kingdom, as H e b . vi. 4. xi. 1G.
xii. 22. 2 T i m . iv. 18. Wahl so explains
E p h . i. 3 . T h e n it is sublime or divine,
in opposition to earthly. J o h n iii. 12-]
' E I I T A , bi, q\ ra. Indeclinable.
I. A noun of number,_S even. I t is a
plain derivative from t h e H e b . i?aty, or
hVTú) seven, t h e aspírate breathing being
substituted for the sibilant letter (as in
i'é, from XúXú, &c.) which, however, ap-
pears again in the L a t i n septem, and
E n g . seven. M a t . xv. 34, 36. xxii. 25. &
al. freq.
I I . I t is t h e number of sufficiency, or
denotes a sufficient number. See Mat.
xii. 45. Rev. i. 4. Comp. 1 Sam. ii. 5.
P r o v . xxvi. 25. J e r . xv. 2. * T h e radi-
cal meaning of ynu? in H e b . is sufficiency,
fulness, aud t h e number seven was deno-
minated from t h i s root, because it was on
t h a t day from t h e creation t h a t the Lord
by, G e n . ii. 2, complelcd or finished all
his work, or made it sufficient for the
purposes to which it was designed. T h e
seventh day was also sanctified, or set
apart from the beginning, as a religious
sabbath or rest, to remiud believers of
t h a t rest which God then entered into,
and of t h a t ¿>nty (Ps. xvi. ] 1.) sufficiency
or fulness of joy which is in his presence
for evermore. Henee the very early and
general división of times into weeks, or
periods of seven days. Henee t h e sa-
credness of the seventh day, not only
* for which they gave the very same reason
as Moses doth, Gen. ii. 2, namely, t h a t on
it all things were ended or completed.
Comp. Gen. vii. 4, 10. viii. 10, 12. x x i x .
27- Exod. xvi. 2 2 — 3 1 . Ps. xvi. 1 1 . H e b .
iv. 1—11. A n d henee seven was, both
among believers and heathen, t h e n u m -
ber of sufficiency or completion. On Rev.
i. 4. see Vitringa. [ I t often means Se-
veral. Mat. xii. 4 5 . L u k e xi. 26. 1 Sam.
ii. 5. Ruth iv. 15. Is. iv. 1. Suidas men-
tions t h a t krrra. éVt irkí,t)ue. rárrsrai. It
is p u t for seven times in M a t , xxi. 2 2 , as
in Prov. xxiv. 16.]
'EirráKLg, Adv. from íirra seven, and KIQ
a numeral termination denoting times,
from t h e Heb. DD to reckon, count. See
Iú'e. Seven times, occ. M a t . xviii. 2 1 ,
22. L u k e xvii. 4, twice ; where it is used
indefinitely for many times, or often. So
some of t h e Greek versions in Montfau-
con's Hexapla, render t h e H e b . l'Dty seven
times in Ps. exix. 164, by •KXEI^CIKIQ often,
frequently.
'EiTTUKicryfkoi, at, a. from ÉirraKtg seven
times, and -^iXioi a thousand.—Seven
thousand, q. d. seven times a thousand.
occ. Rom. x i . 4.
"EIK1. Comp. *áw I. A n obsolete V .
whence in t h e N . T . we have 1 aor. e'nra,
2 aor. etiroy, iníin. iextiv, particip. itirtov.
I . To uiter wilh the mouth, to say.
M a t . ii. 5. iii. 7. xii. 2. & al. freq. S¿
£r?ra£, Thou hast said. Mat. xxvi. 2 5 , 64.
Comp. M a r k xiv. 62. T h i s is manifestly
a form of assenting to a question asked.
W e meet with similar expressions in the
Greek writers. T h u s in Xenophon, M e -
mor. Socrat. lib. iii. cap. 10. § 15, one
answers Sócrates, 'AYTO*S r5ro A E T E I S ,
t¡ 1¡íiKpaTEQ-\ You say so yourself, O Só-
crates ! In E u r i p i d e s we have S T CE
rávra A E T E I S , éic syio ; you say so, not
I. So in Sophocles, SY' roí A E T E I S viv,
ÓK iy&). See more in W e t s t e i n , and
comp. M a t . xxvii. 11. M a r k xv. 2. Luke
xxii. 70. xxiii. 3 . J o h n xviii. 3 7 , and
L X X in Exod. x. 29. T h e words E « n : T

among believers before t h e giving of

t h e law, b u t also among the t heathen,
b a t h , on which w e rest, h a t h not p a s s e d . " And
thus P h i l o , O f the seventh d a y : 'Eopri; y a p o'u / j i S f
* C o m p . H e b . and E n g . L e x i c ó n under yyvr. 7T¿?^síuc, 17 yü'pag Iftv, a}:?.a TOD íravrof. c í
F o r this is
+ V e r y express are the testimonies of J o s e p h u s a feast, not of one city or country, b u t of a l l . " See
and P h i l o to this purpose. T h u s the former, in his more in H u d s o n on J o s e p h u s , as above.
controversia! Treatise against A p i o n , lib. ii. cap. * See Grotius de Verit. R e l i g . Christ. l i b . i. cap.
3 9 . "OuS £S"JY tí ÍTÍXÍF ' h.hkr¡vujv, OT/Si TFF O'jv, ó'uSe B á p - 1 6 , and N o t . 2 0 , & c .
1
C o o k e ' s I n q u i r y into the
$«POF, ó'üSf tv É'Syof, svS)a ixr¡ TO tÍ¡; é§8ó' u«00F Y¡v Patriarchal a n d D r u i d i c a l R e l i g i ó n , p. 4 , 5 , and
J
,

apyov¡tsv;jue/V, TO É'So? o'u $tct7rs{pcÍTr¡xt. " Ñ o r i s there the authors there quoted, and L e l a n d ' s A d v a n t a g e
a n y city whatever, whether Greek or Barbarían, and N e c e s s i t y o f the Christian R e v e l a t i o n , pt. i.
ñor a single nation, whither the c u s t o m of the S a b - ch. 2 . p. 7 4 , Ovo edit.
 E n a 309
St ó Kípioe, Luke vii. 3 1 , are w a n t i n g in
almost all t h e M S S . , in several ancient
versiohs, in some printed editions, are
marked by Wetstein as what o u g h t to be
expunged, and by Griesbach rejected from
the text.
I I . 'ECTTEÍV EV kavrco, or EV rrj napSíqi,
To say within himself', or in his heart,
i. e. to think within himself. Mat. ix. 3 .
(Comp. M a r k ii. 6.) M a t . xxiv. 48. Rom.
x. 6. These are Hellenistical phrascs
used by the L X X ; the former, E s t h . vi.
6 ; the latter more frequently, Deut. viii.
17. xviii. 2 1 . & al. for the H e b . 3 ^ 3 1 D K ,
or a l b ü 1 D N to say in one's heart; which
Hebrew expressions, we may observe, are
strictly philosophical and j u s t ; since it
seems impossible for men to think even
in their inmost souls without words.
This is well expressed by Wollaston, Re-
ligión of N a t u r e , p . 123, 4to edit. 1724.
" i t is by t h e help of words, at least. in
great measure, t h a t we even reason and
discourse within ourselves, as well as com-
municate our t h o u g h t s and discourse with
o t h e r s ; aud if any one observes himself
well, he will find, t h a t he thinks as well
as speaks in some language, and t h a t in
t h i n k i u g he supposes and r u n s over si-
lently and habitually those sounds, which
in speaking he actually makes.—In short,
words seem to be, as it were, bodies or
vehicles to the sense or meaning, which is
the spiritual part, aud which, without t h e
other, can hardly be fixed in t h e mind.
L e t any man t r y , ingenuously, whether
he can t h i n k over b u t t h a t short prayer
in Plato (Alcib. 2.) T a pév Écr8\a, K. T. \.
abstracted quite from those and all other
words." See some further observations
ou this subject, in Ellis's E n q u i r y , Whence
eometh wisdom and understanding to
man ? p. 10, 14.
I I I . To speak. M a t . v. 11. x. 2 7 . xii.
32.
I V . To tell, declare, inform. M a t . xii.
47, 4 8 . xvi. 20. xvii. 9. xviii. 17. xxvii.
17. [ A d d M a t . viii. o. M a r k vii. 3 6 .
Luke v. 14. J o h n xx. 15. W e find t h e
L X X rendering the word I D N by the dií-
ferent compounds of ayyéXKw. W e have
the sense To inform before hand in Mat.
xxviii. 6 and 7. M a r k xvi. 7. Acts vii.
37, and perhaps t h e sense of leaching in
Mat. xxii. 1.]
V. To command, order, direct *. M a t .
* [ S o dico, Tercnt. P h o r m . i v . 3 . 3 1 . B r o u k h u s .
ad Propert. iii. E k g . x x i i . 15. J
E pr
iv. 3 . x x . 2 1 . xxiii. 3 . M a r k v. 4 3 . viii.
7. & al. freq. Stoekius observes, t h a t t h e
writers of the N . T . seem to have learned
this application of the V. EITTEIV from t h e
Hebrews, who frequently use "IDM in this
sense. We deny not, however, adds he,
t h a t t h e p u r e s t Greek writers use EVKEIV
for commanding, ordering, as, besides
others, Alberti on Mat. iv. 3, and D u k e r
on Thucydides, lib. vii. § 29. p . 4 6 2 , have
shown by various examples; but in them
it is never construed with 'Iva, as--it often
is in the N . T . b u t always with an infi-
nitive. B u t Quasre ? See also K y p k e on
M a t . xx. 2 1 . [ A d d M a t . xxii. 24. M a r k
x. 49. L u k e x. 4 0 . J a m e s ii. 11. See
Aristoph. E q . 1021. Homer. Odyss. Y.
427- Xen. Hell. iii. 5. 8. Barnes ad E u r .
Iph. T a u r . 8 5 . ]
VI. [To cali, or ñame. J o h n x. 3 5 .
1 Cor. xii. 3. Xen; Ages. ii. 12. Hell. iv.
3. 12.]
V i l . [Topromise. Mat. xx. 21. Mark
xvi. 1. E u r . Elect. v. 3 3 . W e m u s t ob-
serve, t h a t t h e signification of this verb is
peculiarly Hable to be aífected by t h e cir-
cumstances in which it is used. T h u s ,
if we say any t h i n g ,
[ 1. W i t h a view of inquiring, it is, in
fact, To ask, as in Mat. xi. 3 . xiii. 10.
Luke vii. 40. and t h e L X X construe l o x
by Éptorciw. Exod. iii. 13. See X e n . Cyr.
i. 3 . 14. and 4. 27.]
[ 2 . I n reply, it is To answer, as M a t .
ii. 5. xii. 11. xxi. 24. See Xen. Cyr. i.
4. 12. ii. 2. 10.]
[ 3 . W i t h a view of obtaining any t h i n g ,
it is To request, as perhaps M a r k ix. 1 8 .
(comp. L u k e ix. 40.) and John xii. 27-]
'Epyá'£opai, from 'ípyov.
I . To work, labour. Mat. x x i . 2 8 .
L u k e xiii. 14. A c t s xviii. 3 . 1 Cor. iv.
12- 1 Thess. ii. 9. & al. Comp. John v.
17. [ I n t h e first passage it has a sense
common in classical Greek, to labour in
agriculture, as T h u c y d . ii. 72. (comp. iii.
50.) X e n . GEc. vi. 11. iElian V. H . ix. 5.
Gen. ii. 5. See Schwarz. Comm. C r i t .
G r . Ling. p. 5 6 4 . ]
I I . To work, perform. M a t . xxvi. 10.
J o h n iii. 2 1 . vi. 28. ix. 4. & al.
I I I . To work, practise, whether good,
as Rom. ii. 10. Acts x. 3 5 , 'Epya'CópE-
vos SiKaioavvny, Working righteousness.
So t h e L X X , P s . xiv. or xv. 2, and Zeph.
ii. 3, for t h e H e b . pli b¡)í¡;—or evil,
Rom. xiii. 10. J a m . ii. 9. M a t . vii. 2 3 ,
'Epya^ópevoi rr)v avoptav, Working ini-
quity. T h e L X X use this latter phrase
 E pr 310
E pr
P s . v. 6 . vi. 8 . xiv. 4 . & al. for t h e H e b . iv. 1 9 . Comp. 'Epyáfojucu I I I . [iEseh.
¡ I N ^ I S , workers qf iniquily. Dial. ii. 3 6 . ]
I V . To be employed in, or about. occ. I I I . Work, business, manufacture, occ.
1 Cor. ix. 1 3 . Rev. xviii. 1 7 . Observe A c t s xix. 2 5 . Comp. J o n a h i. 8 , in L X X .
t h a t in 1 Cor. ix. 1 3 , 'Oí T-CÍ upa ípya'Có- [Theoph. Char. c. 6 . ]
pevot, They who are employed about holy I V . Gain. occ. A c t s xvi. 1 6 , 1 9 - xix.
things, denote t h e Levites, as distin- 2 4 . T h e word is used in t h e same sense
guished from ' O Í T ¿ 6vtna=n]píio irpoot- by t h e profane writers, as by Xenophon,
Spévovres, Them who wail al the altar, M e m o r . Socrat. lib. iii. cap. 1 0 . § 1 . ' E P -
i. e. the priesls, mentioued in t h e n e x t r A 2 I ' A 2 ÍVSKCL, on account of gain, by
verse. See Wolfius, Jos. Mede's W o r k s , Theophrastus, E t h . Char. 2 3 . " ' E P r A -
fol. p . 7 7 , and V i t r i n g a D e Synagogá 2 I ' A 2 davei^UriQ, usurious gain. [Ar-
Veten", Proleg. p. 7 4 . I u Rev. xviii. 1 7 , temid. ii. 3 . Polyb. iv. 5 0 . 3 . ] (See also
'Oabí TI)V SiiXaacrav lpyá¡¡ovrat, As many D a u b u z on Rev. xviii. 1 7 . ) A n d in Jose-
as use, i. e. are employed upon, the sea. p h u s D e Bel. lib. ii. cap. 2 1 . § 2 . we have
T h i s is an elegant phrase, occurring in t h e very phrase ' E P r A 2 I ' A N 1 T A P A -
the purest Greek authors. See Raphelius, 2 X E T N for furnishing gain.
Wetstein, and Kypke. [Schl. says, ra- tÜgÜ^ 'Epyárijc, a, o, from ípyác^opai.
ther, To traffic or get their living by t h e I . A workman, a labourer, properly in
sea, and refers to Raphel. A n n o t . Polyb. husbandry or agriculture. See M a t . [x.
p . 7 2 0 . A l b e r t i Obss. Phil. p . 4 9 5 . A r i - 1 0 . ] xx. 1 , 2 , 8 . [ L u k e x. 7 . ] J a m . v. 4 .
stot. Probl. Sect. 3 8 . Probl. 2 . Arrian. Comp. M a t . ix. 3 7 , 3 8 , and W e t s t e i n
E x p e d . vii. 19. 8 . ] there. [Wolf on Leban. E p . 4 8 . p. 1 3 6 . ]
V . To procure, acquire by labour, as I I . A workman, an artificer. Acts xix.
the word is frequently applied in t h e pro- 2 5 .
fane writers. occ. J o h n vi. 2 7 . See Elsner I I I . A spiritual workman, or labourer.
and Wetstein on M a t . xxv. 1 6 . [ E p h . whether good, 2 T i m . ii. 1 5 . Comp. M a t .
iv. 2 3 . Herodot. i. 2 4 . Polyb. xii. 1 3 . 2 . ix. 3 7 , 3 8 . x. 1 0 . — o r evil, 2 Cor. x i . 1 3 .
iElian H i s t . A n . x. 5 0 . Aristoph. E q . Phil. iii. 2 .
835. See Groev. L e c t . Hesiod. c. 2 . p . 8 . I V . A worker, pracliser. occ. L u k e
Valcken. ad H e r o d . viii. p . 6 3 1 . "Epyoi' xiii. 2 7 - [ 2 Mac. iii. 6 . Xen. M e m . ii. 1 .
is usury or ínter est. See Salinas, de U s u r . 2 7 ] ;

p. 9 . ] " E P P O N , a, rb. I t is generally deduced

V I . To trade, traffic. occ. M a t . xxv. 1 6 . from eopya perf. mid. of pé'(b> lo work.
In this sense t h e L X X seem to have used I . [Any work done or to be done by
it, P r o v . xxxi. 1 8 , for t h e H e b . 1 H D to any one. ( 1 . ) Used of the works of God
trade; b u t in M a t . it should perhaps be in t h e n a t u r a l world. H e b . i, 1 0 . ii. 7 .
r a t h e r interpreted to gain, as it often sig- iv. 4 . 1 0 . or in the spiritual. Rom. xiv.
nifies in t h e G r e e k classics. See W e t s t e i n 2 0 . ( 2 . ) Of t h e works of J e s ú s for t h e
on M a t . xxv. 1 6 , and Hoogeveen's Note goodof man. 1 Cor. xv. 5 8 . xvi. 1 0 . P h i l .
on Vigerus D e Idiotism. cap. iii. § 1 3 . ii. 3 0 . ( 3 . ) Of his miracles. M a t . xi. 2 .
reg. 5 . L u k e xxiv. 1 9 . J o h n v. 3 6 . ix. 3 , 4 . ( 4 . )
'Epya<ría, cíe, ?';, from hpyu(opai. Of the exertions of t h e apostles. A c t s v.
I . Work, labour, pains. occ. L u k e xii. 3 8 . 1 Cor. iii. 1 3 — 1 8 . ix. 1 . — See Xen.
5 8 , where the phrase Sóe epyacrlav exactly Mem. iii. 5 . 1 1 . Symp. i. 1 . ]
answers to t h e L a t i n da operam, give thy I I . \_Deed, or method of acting. G e n e -
diligence, take pains; and is, according rally. J o h n iii. 2 1 . Rom. ii. 6 . xi. 6 .
to Grotius, Casaubon, and other critics, a 1 P e t . i. 1 7 . Rev. xiv. 1 3 . xx. 1 2 , 1 3 .
mere Latinism *. Wetstein, however, cites Of good works. E p h . ii. 1 0 . Col. i. 1 0 .
from t h e rhetorician Hermogenes, [ d e T i t . ii. 1 4 . —especially liberality. Mat,
I n v e n t . iii. 5 . 1 7 . ] a writer o f t h e second xxvi. 1 0 . A c t s ix. 3 0 . 2 Cor. ix. 8 .
c e n t u r y , t h e phrase ' E P T A S I A N AIAO'- 1 T i m . vi. 1 8 . and perhaps H e b . vi. 1 0 .
N A I in t h e similar sense of taking pains I n R o m . xiii. 3 . it is for,a doer ; in John
about a composition, giving it an ela- vi. 2 8 , 2 9 . Rev. ii. 2 6 . i t is workspleasing
bórale handling, or t h e like, " exornata to God, (ahd so works agreeable to the law.
deductio, expolita tractatio." Wetstein. Rom. iv. 2 . Gal. ii. 1 6 . ) Of bad works.
I I . A practice, or practising. occ. E p h . J o h n iii. 1 9 . Rom. xiii. 1 2 . Gal. v. 1 9 . E p h .
v. 1 0 . Col. i. 2 1 . H e b . vi. 1 . ix. 1 4 . and
* [Scc Olear, de Styl. N. T. p. 374.] of crimes. L u k e xi. 4 8 . 1 Cor. v. 2 . See
 E P E 31 1
Xen. C y r . i. 2. 3 . vi. 4. 5. vii. 3 . 15. E u r .
Phosn. 1 0 8 1 . ] A deed [pr~\fact, i s d i s t i n -
guished from ivord, Rom. xv. 18. 1 J o h n
iii. 18. So in Cebes's Picture towards t h e
beginning, A O T í l t ical " E P P í i i lívdayó-
petóv Tiva Kal Ilappsvíb'aov l^nXioKlog (iíov,
E m u l a t i n g t h e life of Pythagoras and
Parmenides, both in word and deed; and
in Plato's Apol. Soerat. § 20. p . 98. edit.
F o r s t e r : " T h e n indeed I showed 'OY
A O T & i 'AAA' " E P r í i i , Not in word, but
in deed.
I I I . A work, office, business. J o h n xvii.
4. Acts xiii. 2. [ x v . 3 8 . ] 1 T i m . iii. 1.
2 T i m . iv. 5 . [ A d d perhaps, E p h . iv. 12.
Phil. i. 2 2 . 1 T h e s s . v. 13. In J o h n iv.
34. it is the chanre given by him. See
X e n . Cyr. i. 4. 25T viii. 1. 10.]
IV. "Epyov rS vópn, Rom. ii. 15, the
work qf the law, " is. I t h i n k , here used
for rov vópov the law s i m p l y . — T h e r e are
various examples of the same kind of
pleonasm in other authors. T h u s A r i -
stophanes in P l u t . ver. 894, has XP'V" 1
repaxjóv, where see Ezech. Spanheim.—
A u d P a u l seems to have here mentioned
not vópov simply, b u t 'épyov rS vóps, be-
cause ípya works are t h e proper object of
t h e l a w ; and he himself had before (ver.
13.) spoken concerning t h e itoiyrhg r5
VÓ¡IH t h e doer of t h e law." T h u s Wolfius.
1 add, t h a t t h e learned B p . Fell, in his
paraphrase, explains 'épyov ra vópa by
matter of t h e law. I t may throw some
further light on the application of 'épyov
in this passage to observe, t h a t H o m e r
uses 'épyov for a thing, or an affair, as we
sometimes speak, U. v. line 3 0 3 , and II.
xx. line 2 8 6 , where he calis a stone, Meya
"EPPON, A g r e a t affair. See 1 Thess.
i. 3 , and Kypke t h e r e , who explains
'épyov 7 r Í T £ W £ by true, real faith. Comp.
2 Thess. i. 11. [Schl. gives the same
explanation as P a r k h u r s t . W a h l says t h e
meaning is, what the law orders, qfficia
legis. A n d Schl. adds, t h a t perhaps this
is the better sense. H e t h i n k s t h e r e is a
pleonasm in E p h . iv. 12. See Spanh. ad
Aristoph. P l u t . 895.]
'EptSífw, from épédoj the same, which
from '¿pie conlenlion,
I. To provoke, in a bad sense, lo irrí-
tate, exaspérate, occ. Col. iii. 2 1 . [1 Mac.
xv. 40. E p i c t . E n c h i r . c. 20. Polyb. i. 40.
6. Xen. Ven. x. 14. H o m . II. A. 5. D e u t .
xxi. 22.]
I I . To provoke, in a good sense, lo stir
up, excite, occ. 2 Cor. ix. 2. T h e com-
pound ¿ivíptQí'Ciú is used in a like good
E P E
sense by Xenophon, P l u t a r c h , and Philo.
See Wetstein. [Arrian. Diss. E p i c t . ii. 2 3 .
15-]
' E P E ' I A Í l . — To slick in, stickfast. occ.
A c t s xxvii. 4 1 . [Polyb. ii. 3 3 . 3.]
' E P E Y T Í i , opai, M i d . — T o give vent
lo, throw out, or uiter abundantly. It
properly signifies to belch, or belch out,
ructare, e r u c t a r e , and is sometimes so
used in t h e * profane w r i t e r s ; but t h e y
also apply it to t h e voice. occ. M a t . xiii.
35. T h e correspondent Heb. word in
P s . ¡xxviii. 2, is / will potir out,
utter.
'Epevváio, £, from épéio to inquire, seek,
(see H o m e r , II. vii. line 128. Odyss.
xxi. line 31.) formed nearly as éXuvviu
from éXáw.— To search, search diligently,
trace, investígale. H o m e r , in whom we
shall be most likely to find t h e ancient
and genuine sense of Greek words, ap-
plies épevváuj to a lion deprived of his
whelps, who " scours t h e plains, and traces
the foolsteps of the m a n " who had robbed
him, II. xviii. line 3 2 1 .
IloKKa. §É r v-yyf ITTJJA&Í, JUÉT' ¿tripue '1XNI'
'UPETNSTN,
"EíTTOÍ/ey e^s'uf O Í .
So to dogs tracing their game by thefoot,
Odyss. xix. line 4 3 6 ,
"IXNH ' E P E T N í T N T E S ? M Í ; %ittm.
Accordingly some of the Greek G r a m -
marians explain hpevvíiia by iyvtbm a n d
aviyvEva lo trace, or follow by the foot ;
and Scapula renders it in L a t i n by in-
dago to track, and vestigo lo follow by the
tract. occ. J o h n v. 3 9 . vii. 5 2 . Rom. viii.
27. 1 Cor. ii. (0. 1 P e t . i. 11. Rev. ii.
23. [Krebs. Obss. Flav. p. 146. says,
t h e r e is no notion of diligent search in t h e
word, b u t only of search, and in proof of
this, he notices t h a t aKpifiüc or some si-
milar word is often added.]—'Epevváre
rag ypáajag, Search, investígate, the
scriptures. J o h n v. 3 9 . T h e V. I t h i n k ,
is not indicative b u t imperulive, as ap-
pears from t h e s t r u c t u r e of the sentence
(see W e t s t e i n ) , and from t h e emphatic
meaning of t h e word itself, which seems
to import such diligence and care in
* S e e T h e o p h r a s t . E t h . Char. 1 1 , and D v m o r t i n
loe. p . 3 7 7 , edit. N e e d h a m . [ I t is used of a f o u n -
tain ejecting water. L e v i t . x i . 10. P i n d a r . P y t h .
i. 4 0 . See Lobcck o n P h r y n i c h u s , p . 6 3 . ]
 E P II
searching, as could hardly be ascribed by
our Saviour to tbe Jews of t h a t time.
Comp, ver. 47, and M a t . xii. 3 . xix. 4.
xxi. 16. Luke xi. 5 2 , and Wolfius on
J o h n v. 39. T h e Syriac versión accord-
ingly renders it imperatively, 1V2 search
ye. Comp. Isa. xxxiv. 16. Campbell,
however (whom see), understands epev-
váre in John indicatively ; and Bowyer
says, " perhaps inlerrogatively, upbraid-
ing them : Do you search the scriptures,
and yet will not come to me ?" L e t the
reader consider aud j u d g e for himself.
[ D e y l i n g say?, (Obss. Sacr. i. 50. p . 251.)
t h a t it is imperative, for t h a t there is no
instance in the N . T. where the 2d plur.
indic. is placed in the beginning of a sen-
tence without vpeig or a, or some other
w o r d ; the imperative is frequently so
p u t , as in J o h n xiv. 11. xv. 2 0 . ] — T h e
L X X apply the compound V. é'ÍEpewciu)
in like manner to the testimonies, com-
mandments, or law of God, for the H e b .
"fíti to observe, Ps. cxviii. or exix. 2, 3 4 ,
69, 115, 1 2 9 ; and in their versión the
simple V. épsvváüi answers to the H e b .
t»an to search by uncovering, to Ipn to
search minutely, to explore, to to
strip, and to WUtn lo feel, search by
feeling.
'Eptüi, Si, from íipw. T h i s verb is
scarcely used in the present tense (see
however P h i l . iv. 4.), b u t henee in the
N . T . we have perf. act. * '¿ipr¡Ka, particip.
hpmdüQ, pluperf. hpl/KEiv, perf. pass. Eiprj-
pai, particip. kipnpÉvog.
I. To say, declare. Mat, xxvi. 75.
L u k e ii. 24. xxii. 13. John iv. 18. & al.
freq.
I I . To declare, promise. H e b . xiii. 5.
I I I . To cali. John xv. 15. [ T h e re-
marle made under É'-to applies to kpéoj.
T h i s verb is to order, in M a t . xiii. 30.
L u k e ii. 24. John xii. 5 0 . —to ask, in
M a t . xxi. 2 5 . M a r k xi. 3 1 . L u k e xx. 5.
1 Cor. xv. 3 5 . —lo answer. L u k e xiii.
27. 2 Cor. xii. 9. Rev. vii. 14. Xen. Cyr.
iii. 1. 5. —to promise, in H e b . xiii. 5. -—to
explain, Rev. xvii. 7.—topredict. M a t . ii.
15. Acts ii. 16. viii. 24. xiii. 40. Rom.iv. 18.]
'Epr¡pía, ac, ?'/, from epypoe, which com-
* S e e the learned D u p o r t , w h o , on T h e o p h r a s t .
E t h . Char. p . 1 8 3 , 4 , deduces these f o i m s from the
I o n i c spíw, and says, "Eiprixa is not from 'íipui bary-
ton, b u t from Ipíw circumflexed. P a s o r , however,
in h i s L e x i c ó n , under "Eipw, will h a v e 'iip^xv. to be
the perf. act. A t t i c from péw for sp¡¡r,xa¡, as éiKv¡ipot for
AéÁtj'pa. C o m p . 'Péai, and V i g e r u s D e I d i o t i s m i s ,
p. 217, edit. Zeunii. L i p s . 1 7 8 S .
.31 2 E P II
p a r e . — A desert, an uncultivaled country.
occ. M a t . xv. 3 3 . M a r k viii. 4. 2 Cor.
xi. 26 *. H e b . xi. 3 8 . [ T h e word in
Ez. xxxv. 4. means desolation. Xen.
Hiero, vi. 4. Hell. v. 4. 4 1 . Anab. ii. 5.
2. T h e Etymol. M . explains it to be «
deserted country..]
" E P H M O S , a, ó, i,.
I. Desert, desoíale, wasle, [having no
or few inhabitantsT^—Mat. xiv. 15. xxiii.
38. L u k e ix. 10. A c t s i. 20. [ A d d L u k e
xiii. 3 5 . Is. xiv. 17. J e r . xxx. 10. N e h e m .
ii. 27. and with M a t . xxiii. 3 8 . Comp.
Julián, ü r a t . vii. p. 4 2 5 . In A c t s viii.
26, where the writer is speaking of Gaza,
some sa}>, dismantled of fortífications;
some understand ¡¡ ÓOÓQ after avrn ; some
refer to the oíd Gaza, which they t h i n k
was deserted after the time of A l e x a n d e r ;
and finally, some say these words are a
gloss.]—"Ep-npoe, f¡, ( t x^P country being a
tmderstood) a desert or wildcrness. John
iii. 14. vi. 3 1 . Acts vii. 3 0 , 36. So M a t .
iv. 1. & al. it signifies the wilderuess
where our L o r d was tempted, which
Maundrell (Journey, March 29) describes
as a horrid, barren, and uncultivated
place. B u t it sometimes denotes no more
than | uncultivated ground used as com-
mon of pasture, in distinction from arable
or inclosed land. L u k e xv. 4. [Acts vii.
3 0 . ] Comp. Mat. xviii. 12. In this sense
the word is applied by the L X X , Exod.
iii. 1. 1 Sam. xvii. 2 8 . xxv. 2 1 , for the
Heb. InlD. T h e ípnpoQ rí/e TaoWac,
M a t . iii. 1. [ M a r k i. 4. L u k e i. 80. J o h n
i. 23.] & al. does not mean a country ab-
solutely desert and uninhabiled, b u t only
little cultivated and thinly inhabiled.
Comp. Josh. xv. 6 1 , 62. [ T h e desert of
Arabia is referred to in A c t s vii. 36. 1 Cor.
x. 5. H e b . iii. 17. See Exod. iii. 1. Polyb.
iii. 5 1. I I . Xen. A n a b . i. 5. 4 . ]
[ I I . Unmarried. Gal. iv. 27. i. e. being
deslitute of a husband. So Is. liv. 1.]
'Epnpóia, Si, from ÍpnpoQ. — To lay
waste, make desoíate, bring to desolation.
occ. Mat. xii. 2 5 . L u k e xi. 17. Rev. xvii.
16. xviii. 17, 19. [Is. xi. 15. Ecclus. xxi.
5. T h u c . v. 4. Xen. A n . i. 3 . 6.]
'EpñpoicriQ, toe, A t t . EOIQ, r¡, from ipiípówe.
—Desolation. occ. M a t . xxiv. 15. M a r k
xiii. 14. L u k e xxi. 20. Compare BtJé-
* [ T h e r e is the same o p p o s i t i o n in J o s e p h . A n t .
ii. 3 . 1 . ]
+ S o X e n o p h o n in S c a p u l a : " E p u m o s X n ' p a
xa\ ¡zpyof, a iesert and u n c u l t i v a t e d country.
% See S h a w ' s T r a v e l s , p . 9. N o t e , and D o d -
dridge on L u k e x v . 4.
 E P I 31 3
\vypa. [ J e r . vii. 3 2 . A r r i a n . E x p . Alex.
i. p p . 2 1 , 2 5 . ed. L u g d . 1704.]
'Épí£w, from tpi£. To contend, dispule.
oceurs M a t . xii. 1 9.—The correspondent
Heb. word in Isa. xiii. 2, is pi>Y lo cry out,
[1 Sam. xii. 14. Ecclus. vii. 2.]
E§S§í° 'EpíOeía*, as, ?;, from hpiQivLo lo
contend, dispute, which from epte.—Con-
íention, ¿i-rife,, love qf strife, qf con-
íention, or dispuling. Suidas explains
kpídcia by i; cict Xóya (j>i\oyeiKÍa a love qf
dispuling, or qf coníention by words.
llom. ii. 8. 2 Cor. xii. 20. J a m . iii. 14.
See Suicer Thesaur. in "Epídeía. [Aristot.
de Rep. v. 2 . ]
"TLpiov, H, ro, from elpoc wool, which
perhaps from Heb. mi> to strip ; as Latin
vellus a jleece, from vello to pluck. [ I t is
probably from '¿ipio to join.— Wool. occ.
Heb. ix. 19. Rev. i. 14. D e u t . xxii. I I .
Xen. Mem. ii 7- 1 2 . ]
E§3g° " E P I S , tfoc,)/.—Coníention,strife,
quarrel. Rom. i. 29- [love qf strife.'] xiii.
13- & al freq. [ a s in Herodian iii. 2.
13.]
IIJSSÍ 'Epífwv, a, r o , from '¿pifos t h e
0
s a m e . — A goat. occ. M a t . x x v . 3 3 . See
BIÉXÍOV.
" É P I C O S , a, b. T h e G r e e k Etymolo-
gists deduce it from '¿api faívtiv, appear-
ing in ihe spring, because kids are yeaned
a t t h a t season of t h e year ; b u t this seems
no distinctive reason of t h e ñame, being
no more peculiar to kids, than to lambs,
calves, &c. W e m a y perhaps better de-
rive it, with t h e learued D a m m , Lexic.
col. 1885, from t h e intensive particle '¿pi,
and 7ra£ a foot, a goat being an animal
t h a t treads very firnily on its feet, and
elimos up the roughest places.—A goal,
propcrlv ayoung goal, or kid. See W e t -
stein on M a t . xxv. 3 2 . So H o m e r joins
together 'épapoi aud apveg lambs, II. xvi.
line 3 5 2 . II. xxiv. line 2 6 2 . & al. occ.
L u k e xv. 29. M a t . xxv. 32 ; where goats,
from their offensive smell, their mis-
chievous, impudent, and libidinous dis-
position, &c. are emblematical of t h e
wicked, who a r e , a t t h e day of j u d g m e n t ,
* [ S o m e write 'Eciieh. T h e word, s a y s W a h l ,
comes from ipiiíuui I work for gain, thence,
¡íeSo; is a vraol-dresser i n I s . x x x v i i i . 12. and
ipihítpuu is to dirss wool, in T o b . ii. 11. Then
the word meant to do any thing for gain, or for
amUtious purposes. I t is used of magistrates
courting the people, Aristot. P o l . v. 5 . H e s y c h i u s
explains it to work, and the n o u n i s used of agri-
cultural labourers in H o m . I I . z . 5 5 0 . P o l i . O n .
vii. 32. 141.]
E PM
to be finally separated from t h e good.
Comp. ver. 3 3 , 4 1 , 4 6 . " Goats are hy-
pocrites, (chap. xxiv. 5 1 ) ; for goats were
clean both for sacrifice and fóod." Clarke's
Note. O n L u k e xv. 2 9 , see H a r m e r ' s
Observations, vol. i. p . 322, and vol. iv.
p. ! 6 3 , 4 .
Egip" 'Eppip'tía, as, r¡, from íppnvévw.
—An interpretation, occ. 1 Cor. xii. 10.
[poner of inlerpreling.} xiv. 26. [Ecclus.
xlvii. 17.]
'Epyuí)j'£Ú«),from hpp-nvzvs an inlerpreler.
which t h e Greek Etymologists derive
from 'Eppfjs Mercury, t h e supposed mes-
senger or interpreter of t h e gods, (which
see).— To interpret, explain, or transíate
out of one language into another. occ.
John i. 3 8 , 4 2 . i x . ' 7 . Pleb. vii. 2. [ E z r .
iv. 7- Xen. A n . v. 4. 4 . ]
' E P M H ' S , a, ó.—Hermes, as t h e Greeks
called h i m ; or, as t h e Romans, M e r c u -
r i u s ; and who, according t o their m y -
thology, was * t h e messenger of t h e gods,
the protector of learning, t h e inventor of
letters, and t h e god of rhetoric and elo-
quence, from which last a t t r i b u t e t h e
Lycaonians took S t . P a u l for H e r m e s , or
Mercury, because he was t h e chief
speaker, occ. Acts xiv. 12. " I t appears
from Josh. xiii. 2 7 , t h a t t h e Canaanites
had a temple to c f i n t the proyector, by
which they seem t o have meant t h e ma-
terial spirit, or r a t h e r t h e heavens, cou-
sidered as projecting, impelling, or push-
ing forwards t h e planetary orbs in their
courses. T h e E g y p t i a n and Grecian
Hermes was originally an idol of t h e
same kind. Henee he was represented
with wings on his head and feet; henee
in his hand t h e $ caduceus, or rod ( t h e
emblem of poner), encircled with two in-
terwoven serpents, to represen! t h e j o i n t
action of t h e conflicting ethers, or lighl
aud spirit in expansión. T h u s equipped,
no wonder t h a t t h e fanciful Greeks made
him t h e messenger, or ambassador of the
gods. Whence, as also by coufoundiug
his ñame H e r m aud t h e Pleb. Q'IJJ skil-
ful, or by deriving i t (as t h e Greek E t y -
mologists generally do) from their V .
'¿ipio or ¿péoi lo speak, they íeigned him to
be t h e god of eloquence, and patrón of
learning. H e was also with them t h e
» See Boyse's Pantheon, chap. 3 3 .
f H e b . and E n g . L e x i c ó n i n n D I V I .
£ P e r h a p s from the H e b . w n p holy, sepárate,
distinguished. S e e A b b é P l u c h c ' s H i s l o i r c d u
Ciel, t o m . i. p. 28B, & c .
 E P Y 3 14 E P X

god of cheating and theft, either because l'Arabie, p. 360, in these w o r d s : " Les
t h e manner in which t h e heavens hnpel Européens ont coutume de donner au
t h e planets, and particularly the earth, golfe d'Arabie le nom de M e r r o u g e ;
in their orbits, evades our senses, or ra- cependant j e ne l'ai pas trouvé plus rouge
t h e r because they, by mistake, referred que la M e r noire, la M e r Manche, c. a. d.
his oriental ñame tz^rt to the verb Tttíl in l'Archipel, ou toute autre mer du monde."
t h e sense of deceiving or cheating. And See more in Niebuhr himself. Several an-
from being t h e god of cheating he be- cient heathen writers agree in t h e same
came, with too obvious a transition, t h e testimony. T h u s * Artemidorus in Strabo
god of mercltandise and commerce. (See expressly tells us, it looks of a green
H o s . xii. 7, or S, in Heb.) So t h e Ro- colour, by reason of t h e abundance of
m a n s called him Mercurius, from merx sea-meed and moss t h a t grows therein,
* merchandise, which from H e b . I D E to which * Diodorus also asserts of a par-
sell: and as commerce could not be ticular p a r t of it. And with their de-
carried on without weights and measures, scriptions compare Wisd. xix. 7. W h e n c e
of these likewise he was reputed t h e in- t h e n did the Greeks ñame it 'Epvdpa Qá-
ventor. Xao-cra? Most próbably from E s a u or
"Epirerov, e, ró, from '¿pirco to creep, Edom, whose descendants having pos-
which from t h e H e b . Fjrn to move mith a sessed themselves of its northern coasts,
trenmlous motion, whence also the Latin the sea itself carne to be denominated tn>
repo to creep, crawl, as also perhaps t h e QHH, i. e. the sea qf Edom; but the
E n g . creep. [Schl. says this is the neu- Greeks receiving this ñame from t h e P h e -
t e r of '¿pirtroQ, dnplov being understood. nicians, rendered it improperly 'Epvdpa
I t is used of any animal which goes on QáXaacra, mistaking tDITN for an appella-
feet, as H o m e r Odyss. iv. 419. Xen. tive, and translating it by epvdpa, as t h e
Mem. i. 4. 11. A n d ¿pirco is p u t for io L X X do t n i « , Isa. lxiii. 2. M e l a and
go frequently. See Theoc. i. 10.5. /Esch. Pliny, cited by Fuller, mention t h a t this
Socr. Dial. iii. 10. E u r . Phcen. v. 4 1 . sea had its ñame from a k i n g called E r y -
Casaub. ad A t h e n . i. p. 6 4 . ] — A creeping thras, who could be no other t h a n E d o m
thing, a reptile. occ. Acts x . 12. xi. 6. (i. e. E s a u ) , or some of his descendants.
J a m . iii. 7. Rom. i. 2 3 . where see D o d - So C u r t i u s , speaking of t h e Erythrajan
dridge's N o t e , and comp. Wisd. x i . 15, sea in its largest extent, lib. viii. cap. 2 9 ,
and under ITútW II. " M a r e certe quo alluitur ne colore q u i -
"Eppoitro, " F.ppuiaQe. See 'Pwvvvpi II. dem abhorret á ceeteris. Ab E r y t h r á rege
'Epvdpbc, a, bv, from epevdoc redness.— inditum est nomen : propter quod ignari
Red. occ. Acts vii. 36. H e b . xi. 29, rubere aquas credunt. The sea with
'Epvdpa QáXaatra, The Red Sea. T h u s which India is washed certainly dijfers
t h e L X X constantly [as E x . x. 1 9.] (ex- not even in colour from others. Its ñame
cept in one passage, J u d . xi. 16.) render mas given it from a king Erythras:
t h e H e b C FftD the meedy sea, by which mherefore the ignorant believe its maiers
is meant the mestern gulf or arm of are redf." [ S e e Reland. Diss. Mise. i.
what is now commonly known by the p. 5 9 . ]
ñame of t h e Red Sea, which arm was " E P X O M A I . I t borrows most of its
anciently named t h e Heroopolitan Gulf, tenses from the obsol. V. éXevdio, and is
and now t h e Gulf of Suez.-—This gulf, plainly derived from t h e H e b . nlK lo go
together with t h e sea with which i t com- from one place to another, for which the
municates, the Greeks called 'Epvdpa L X X use a deflection of iXevQco, Job xxxi.
QáXaova •[. T h e colour of this sea is, 3 2 . I t primarily and properly denotes
however, no more red than t h a t of any motion from one place to another.
other, as we are assured by t h e aecurate I . to come. See M a t . ii. 2, 8, 11. viii.
and a u t h e n t i c Niebuhr, Description de 2. L u k e x i x . 18. M a r k iv. 2 2 . A c t s x i x .

* " M e r c u r i u s á m e r c i b u s est tlictus: Hunc * See the p a s s a g e s cited b y B o c h a r t , vol. i-

emm n e g e t i o r u m omnium cxisliviíibant esse D c u m . " p. 2.
F e s t u s . " Abactibus vocanlnr, itt Mercurius qm.cl •f See more in F u l l e r ' s M i s c e l . Sacr. l i b , iv. cap.
m e r c i b u s prceest." Isidor. l i b . viii. cap. 1 1 , D e 2 0 . P r i d e a u x Connect. vol. i. p . 1 0 , 1 1 . l s t edit.
D i i s G e n t i u m . See also Martinii L e x . E t y m o l . 8 v o . U n i v e r s a l H i s t . vol. x v i i i . p. 3 3 8 . 8vo. S h a w ' s
•f T h e y s o m e t i m e s extended this ñ a m e even to i T r a v e l s , p . 4 4 7 . 2 d edit. W e l l s ' s Sacr. G c o g . vol.
the A r a b i a n and I n d i a n Sea. | ii. p . 9 0 .
 E P X 315
6 . — T o c ó m e to Christ is to believe on him.
John vi. 3 5 . vii. 3 7 . Compare verse 3 8 .
[ W i t h LQ and a noun, i t often makes a
periphrasis of t h e verb connected with t h e
noun. T h u s to come to judgment, is to be
judged. J o h n v. 24. To come to know-
ledge, for to know. I T i m . ii. 4/. and 2 T i m .
iii. 7. See also M a r k v. 2 6 . where t h e
meaning is to worsen.~] Aristophanes has
a similar expression, N u b . line 8 3 0 ,
Sa 5' 'ES T020TTO Tffl~N M A N I Í i ' N EAI-l'AT0A2;
A r e y o u then gromi so very mad ?
Comp. Kypke. [ A c t s xix. 2 7 . ( C a 3 s . B . G.
iii. 17.) Phil. i. 12. To promote, b u t see
IV.—'-'Epxopoii é(£ eavrbv is to return to
one's senses. L u k e xv. 15. Diod. Sic. xiii.
9 5 . ] So Arrian E p i e t e t . lib. iii. cap. 1.
''0«iv''EI2'EAYT0/N''EA0H2, W h e n you
come to your self. See more in W e t s t e i n .
I t is obvious to remarle how similar [is]
t h e phraseology of t h e English. T h e L a -
tins say, ad se rediré, and the French,
revenir á lui-méme, in t h e same s e n s e ;
so French translation in L u k e , — é t a n t r e -
venu á lui-méme.—And in like manner
Diodati's I t a l i a n — r i t o r n a t o a se mede-
simo. Comp. TLvopai X I . [ W i t h 7 r p o g
it has sometimes t h e common m e a n i n g ;
sometimes i t implies to be a follomer of.
L u k e vi. 4 7 . J o h n v. 4 0 . vi. 3 5 , 4 6 . I n
xiv. 6, t h e meaning is, says T i t t m a n , to
attain to elernal life, as appears from
verses 2 and 3 . W i t h kicl it is either to
come hostilely, as in L u k e xiv. 3 1 . Joseph.
A n t . xiv. 11,—or for a purpose, as M a t .
xii. 7,—or tofall to the lot of as M a t . x.
13. John xviii. 4. A c t s xix. 6. I t ex-
presses any motion, as t h a t of birds, M a t .
xiii. 4 . ; celerity, M a t . vii. 2 5 . L u k e xii. 3 9 .
xvii. 27. J o h n x. 12. Rev. iii. 10.; fall of
rain, Heb. vi. 7 . — T o come, is sometimes
p u t for to be born, to be, to exist, as M a t .
xi. 18, 19. xviii. 7. John vii. 4 1 , 4 2 . A c t s
vii. 11. Rom. iii. 8 . Gal. iii. 9. See
Sense I V . ]
I I . To go. M a t . xii. 9. L u k e ii. 44.
John vi. 17. Acts xiii. 5 1 . xxviii. 14. X e -
nophon uses t h e word in t h e same sense,
Cyropajd. lib. vi. p p . 3 2 5 , 3 3 3 . edit. H u t -
chinson. 8vo. So H o m e r II. i. line 120.
[ A d d M a t . xv. 2 9 . L u k e ii. 16. xv. 2 0 .
John iii. 2 2 . (went on.) 2 Cor. xiii. 1.
(I am ready to go.) I t is to go away in
Mat. xiv. 12. xviii. 31.—to go on to what
is next. 1 Cor. xii. 1. Cic. V e r r . iv. 1.
Venio nunc ad, & c ]
I I I . Of time, To come. L u k e xxii. 7.
E 21 9
Gal. iv. 4 . — T o be lo come, to be future.
M a r k x. 30. L u k e xviii. 30. John xvi. 13.
1 T h e s s . i. 10. 'O ipyóptvoc, He who
cometh, a title of the Messiah. M a t . xi. 3 .
L u k e vii. 19. Compare H e b . x. 37. P s .
cxviii. 26. Isa. xxxv. 4. Zech. ix. 9, b u t
especially G e n . xlix. 10, and see Bishop
Chandler's Defence of Christianity, p . 165.
I s t edit.— To be coming, following, next,
or instant. A c t s xiii. 44. xviii. 2 1 . So
Thucydides cited by H . Stephens, ' E P -
XOME'NOY Evas, The following or next
year. See W e t s t e i n on Acts xiii. 4 4 .
I V . To come, ha.ppen. P h i l . i. 12. 2
T h e s s . ii. 2. Rev. iii. 10. J o h n xviii. 4,
where Kypke cites from Dionysius H a l i -
carn. A n t . lib. xi. p . 7 2 1 , 'Ovese SÉSOLKE pf/
' E B ' 'AYTC/N " E A 9 0 I T T Ó Y E <rvv XP "<1> « ¿ r
Seiva, Ñor fears lest in time evils should
come upon him.
Y- To be brought. M a r k iv. 2 1 . T h i s
application of t h e word is proved by R a -
phelius and K y p k e to be agreeable to t h e
style of t h e best Greek writers * .
V I . To come back, return. J o h n xiv.
18, 28. Xenophon applies t h e V . in t h e
same m a n n e r . See Raphelius. [ A d d M a t .
ii. 2 1 . xii. 4 4 . M a r k ix. 14. J o h n iv. 15.
ix. 7.]
'Epwráoj, w. T h e Greek Etymologists
derive i t from '¿popai lo ask, interrógate
(which from íipw to speak), or from 'épwe,
wroe, ó, love, desire.
I. To ask, interrógale, question. M a t .
xvi. 13. xxi. 24. M a r k iv. 10. L u k e ix. 45.
xxii. 68. & al. On J o h n xvi. 30, see
Campbell, a n d comp. verses 19, 2 3 .
I I . To ask, request, desire, beg, be-
seech. See M a t . xv. 23. L u k e v. 3. vii.
36. xiv. 3 2 . J o h n iv. 40, 47- xiv. 16. A c t s
iii. 3. 1 Thess. iv. 1. Xenophon and D e -
mosthenes use t h e V. in this latter sense.
See W e t s t e i n on M a t . xv. 23. [ S e e J u d .
iv. 20. xiii. 6, 18. Comp. 1 Sam. x x x . 2 1 .
2 Sam. viii. 11. 1 Chron. xviii. 10. Joseph.
A n t i q . v. i. 14.]
' E 2 9 H 2 , rjroc, i), from í^ai, 3d
V
pers. perf. pass. of ívwpL to put on, which
see u n d e r 'Aiupítvvvpi.—A robe, garment,
raiment. L u k e xxiii. 11. vVcts i. 10. J a m .
ii. 2. & al. [See 3 E s d r . viii. 7 3 . 7 5 . 2 M a c .
iii. 3 3 . viii. 35. xi. 8. Polyb. vi. 7- 5. Xen.
An. iv. 5. 3 9 . T h o m . M . says, t h a t Icr0i)c
means simply clothing, and ?oA?) expresses
t h e different fashions, &c. of g a r m e n t s . ]
•—-Henee, t h e iEolic d i g a m m a being p r e -
* [ S e e L i b a n . E p . 3 5 8 . Heliodor. v i i i . p . 3 0 5 .
Cic. ad F a m . x i . 2 4 . A r i s t o p h . Concion. 27.]
 EOS O 310 E 2 RI

fixed, as usual, the Latín vestís (by which 'EY¿ $ "ESONTPON hr,v,
"OTTW; ae) #Á£7r>jp us.
the Vulg. render the Greek k<r8r¡e), whence
the E n g . vcst, vesture, veslment, invest, I a looking-gtass w o u l d be,
divest, &c. T o be a l w a y s viewed b y thee.
[§§1?° "Eidrio-tc, wg, eoig, ?'/, from 'é<rQr¡g.
—A robe, garment. occ. L u k e xxiv. 4, A g a i n , Ode xi. line 3 .
where see Wolfius and W e t s t e i n . [This AaS"¿» "ESOPITPON aScel
word oceurs iu Aquila's versión. Isa. xxiii. KÓYWTXF juey tíxzT xjra;—•
18.]
T a k e t h y looláng-glass, and view
'Etrdíw, from '¿crdu> the same. T h y white hairs, alas ! h o w few !
I . To eat, as men. M a t . ix. I I . 1 Cor.
xi. 2 8 , 29. & al. freq.—or as other ani- So Arrian Epictet. lib. iii. cap. 2 2 . p . 314.
máis. M a t . xv. 27. L u k e xv. I 6.—John edit. Cantab. 1655. " E 2 0 1 1 T P 0 N irpürov
t h e Baptist is said, M a t . xi. 18, to have XaQ, íSe era r¿<¿ &ting, F i r s t take your
come pí¡re scrdiwv ¡irire rrívuiv, neither eat- looláng-glass, look a t your shoulders.—
ing ñor drinhing, i. e. as other men d i d ; "EcroTírpor oceurs not. in the L X X , b u t is
for he lived in the wilderness on locusts, used in the sense of a mirror. W i s d . vii.
wild honey, and water, Mat. iii. 4 . L u k e 26. Ecclus. xii. 11, or 1 3 ; which passages
i. 15. T h i s is expressed, L u k e viii. 3 3 , may be illustrated by r e m a r k i n g t h a t t h e
by his neither eating bread ñor d r i u k i n g ancient eastern mirrors were not of glass,
wine. On t h e other h a n d , t h e Son of like ours, b u t of brass (see Exod. xxxviii.
M a n is said, M a t . xi. 19, to have come 8-), and were consequently liable to spots
eating and drinhing, i. e. as others did, and rust, which circumstances are also
and t h a t too with all sorts of persons, not irrelative to 1 Cor. xiii. 12. [Bos
Pharisees, publicans, and sinners. B u t , E x e r c . P h i l . p . 147, and other writers,
L u k e xvii. 27, 28. eating and drinhing is conceive t h a t t h e 'Apostle refers not to a
p a r t of the description of a sensual, world- looking-glass,but to t h e a p e r t u r e s forlight,
ly, careless, and irreligious life. Comp. which t h e ancients certainlyhad,and which
Isa. xxii. 13. 1 Cor. xv. 32, where see were filled with some imperfectly t r a n s -
Wetstein.—\JLating and drinhing is p u t p a r e n t substance in lieu of glass. The
íorfeasting in 1 Kings i. 2 5 . J o b i. 4. In J e w s used t h e expression, to see t h r o u g h
L u k e xxii. 30, we must observe t h a t t h e a specular, to denote imperfect know-
J e w s often spoke of the festivities in the ledge, as B u x t o r f has shown, L e x . T a l -
kingdom of t h e Messiah, and represented mud, p . 171. See a g r e a t number of
t h e happiness of it under the image of a places, cited also by Schoetgen. H o r . H e b .
feast, See Bertholdt. Christol. pp. 197 ad loe. Pie r i g h t l y r e m a r k s , however, t h a t
—199.—'EcrflUiv aprov is simply to eat, if ítroitprov is so construed, it is an tvjtai,
and is applied to any meal. See Vorst. Xeyófierov. T h e r e is a curious passage on
de Hebraismis N . T . c. 3 7 . p . 695.] windows in Philo L e g . ad Caium, p. 1042.
I I . To devour, consume, as fire. occ. and see Plin. N . H . xxxiv. 18. xxxvi. 2 2 .
H e b . x. 27. T h u s in the O. T . t h e H e b . and Olderman D e Specularibus Veterum.]
^ 3 N , lo eat, is often applied to t h e action 'Earfépci, ac, y¡.— The evening. occ. L u k e
oí fire, for which in this sense t h e L X X xxiv. 2 9 . A c t s iv. 3 . xxviii. 2 3 . I t is de-
use other words expressive of eating, as rived from the mase. "Eo-7TEPO£, e, ó, Hes-
edopat, i;ara<páyofiai, mrecrdíii), but never perus, the * evening star, t h a t is, the
(as I can find) ¿o-díw. In H o m e r , how- planet V e n u s , while t e n d i n g from its up-
ever, II. xxiii. line 182, we meet with per to its lower conjunction with the sun,
éa8í(o t h u s applied: when consequently it appears to the east-
• TBÍ Sfia ao¡ j r á v T K f NT"P 'ESSLL'EL •
ward of t h e sun in t h e zodiac, and there-
fore, d u r i n g all t h a t time, rises and sets af-
A l l these with thee the fire devours.
ter him ; and is then ordinarily visible only
[ S o ^>3N in H e b . D e u t . xxxii. 2 2 . See in t h e evening after sun-set. T h e Greek
M a x . T y r . Diss. x x x v i i i ] ecrwepog may be derived either from the f
!§§¡p° "Eaoiirpov, «, ro, from éig or EC
into, and oitropai to seek, look.—A look-
* A g r e e a b l y to that of V i r g i l , E c l o g . x . line 77-
ing-glass, mirror. occ. James i. 2 0 . 1 Cor.
xiii. 12. Comp. "Aiviypa.—''Eeroierpov is lie domum saturce, venit Hésperas, He capelhc.
used in this sense by Anacrcon, O d e xx. f C o m p . H e b . and E n g . L e x i c ó n in 1S!í V I .
line 5. V I I . and in 1311' I I .
 E 2 X 31 E 2 X

Heb. ¡Ti'Bifil or ¡Vfiwn, on account of the rióv xpói'iov, the last times, seem to denote
vivid light or splendor which it reflects. the last age qf the morid, namely, from
This H o m e r has long since observed, II. the first to the second coming of Christ.
xxii. lines 3 1 7 , 3 1 8 , B u t see M a c k n i g h t on the several t e x t s ,
and W h i t b y on 1 T i m . iv. 1. [ W a h l r e -
T
Oi0f 8' c c r í j p lia ¡ÁIT ¿Lfpátri bují-rof ct^.oKyw
fers all the places where the Apostles
"Esntpoj jf KA'AAISTOS iv ¿fxvif 'íruT«i ís-hp.
speak of the last days, times, &c. to t h e
A s radiant Hesper shines xviili heener light, times immediately preceding the inau-
l''ar learning o'cr the silver host of n i g h t ,
W h e n all the starry train etnblaze the sphere.
g u r a r o n of t h e Messiah's kingdom of
POPE. glory, which, he says, t h e y t h o u g h t j u s t
a t hand. T h e s e phrases, therefore, de-
So Milton, iu his description of the even- scribe the times in which t h e y are living.
i'ig. I should r a t h e r say, with Schleusner, t h a t
these phrases d e s i g n a r e n / t a r e time, whe-
• N o w g l o w ' d the firmament
t h e r remote or near, and t h a t t h e context
W i t h l i v i n g s a p p h i r e s : líesperus, that led
T h e starry h o s t , rodé brightest. m u s t determine their sense. In 2 T i m .
Par. I i o s t , b. iv. lines 0 0 4 — 0 0 6 . iii. 1. and 2 P e t . iii. 3, t h e sense is, I
think, little more than hereafier, or in
[ X e n . Cyr. iii. 2. 12. H e l l . vi. 5. 17-] future days, and t h u s says M a c k n i g h t of
'ETÍJKW, from eVijura perf. of í-t)pi to the first. So J a m e s v. 3 . ; t h o u g h Mac-
stand.—To stand, stand still, stand firm. k n i g h t t h i n k s it refers to t h e last days of
Some learned men consider the forms íi- t h e Jewish commonwealth. See also Gen.
Ti'/icsi and h~íiK£Lcrav, M a t . xii. 46. xiii. 2, xlix. 1. Again, we know t h a t t h e J e w s
& al. as the 3d pers. pluperf. sing. and spoke of t h e times of t h e Messiah *, as
plur. of etílico, while others choose to r e - the last days (indeed Kimchi on Isaiah ii.
fer them to 'ÍTÍ;IÍI. I t is, however, certain, 2, where t h e phrase oceurs, says, t h a t it
t h a t t h e G r e e k writers sometimes use t h e has always t h a t m e a n i n g ) , and in t h a t
V. IW/icw. T h u s Aristophanes, L y s . line sense we are to understand it in Acts ii.
635, £i¿Í£ ' E S T H ' S Q , H e r e wili I stand, 17. H e b . i. 2. 1 P e t . i. 20. In J o h n vi.
T

or place myself. A n d t h u s in the Life of 39, 40, 44, 54. xi. 24. and 1 P e í . i. 5, we
H o m e r , ascribed to H e r o d o t u s , § 3 3 , O v x m u s t understand really the last days or
T

' E S T H ' S O M E N , W e will not stay. See time of judgment.']—Iu the term layjxTue,
also Scapula's Lexicón. 1 Cor. iv. 9, " there is a reference to t h e
"Eo-xaróc;, j), bv. T h e G r e e k E t y m o l o - Román custom of b r i n g i n g forth those
gists deduce it from 'íaypv, 2d aor. of 'éyo> persons on the thcatre in the after p a r t
o r crY_oí> lo hold, conlain, or from 'ío-)/w lo of the day, either to fight with each other,
restrain, contain. or with wild beasts, who were appointed
I . The last, of time. John vii. 3 7 . 1 to certain death, and had not t h a t poor
John ii. 18, where iayá.Tn &pa may meau chance of escaping which those b r o u g h t
the last period of the Jewish state *. See forth in t h e m o r n i n g had." D o d d r i d g e .
Wolfius, and Acts ii. 17. James v. 3. M a t . I I . The last, of condition, order, or
xxiv. 5, 24. & al. See also M a c k n i g h t on dignity. M a t . xix. 30. x x . 16. L u k e xiv.
1 John ii. 18, and his preface to this epist. 9, 10. Comp. M a t . x x . 8, 12, 14. [ A d d
sect. iv. B u t comp. L a r d n e r ' s H i s t o r y of M a r k ix. 3 5 . J o h n viii. 9 ; and I t h i n k
the Apostles and Evangelists, chap. x x . § Schleusner r i g h t in adding also 1 Cor. iv.
ii. Káipú) lo-yára, The last time. 1 P e t . i. 9, in the most object condition. See Cic.
5, is \ the end qf the morid, and t h e t i m e pro Rose. 4 7 . Aul. Gell. xv. 12. Pindar.
of j u d g m e n t , called elsewhere loykrr\ Nem. x. 5 9 . ]
ypépa the last day, J o h n vi. 3 9 , 40, 44, I I I . The last, utmosl. M a t . v. 2 6 .
54. xi. 24. xii. 4 8 . \ B u t in 2 T i m . iii. I V . Of place "TLo-yaron, rb (pépog, viz.
1. (comp. 1 T i m . iv. 1.) Heb. i. I. 2 Pet. being understood), The extreme, utmost,
iii. 3, the last days; and J u d e verse 18, or most distant part. A c t s i. 8. xiii. 4 7 .
the last time; and l P e t . i. 2 0 . Inyártov T h e L X X use t h e phrase, kcyárv TTJQ

* [ M a n y (as Schcetgen) think that the m e a n i n g * [Schcetgen ad 2 T i m . iii. 1, s a y s , that the

here i s , the most dangerous, worst.]
t See the learned J o s . M e d e ' s W o r k s , fol. p. 6 5 2 ,
&c.
í See B p . N e w t o n ' s Dissertation o n P r o p h e c i e s ,
, vol. ii. p . 4 5 6 , & c .
times of the M e s s i a h were called the last days, b o t h
b e c a u s e t h e y were the last of the a g e o f p r o p h e c y
(so A b e n E z r a on H o s e a iii. 5. and see M a t . x i .
13.) and because they were the e n d also of the
Jewish state.]
 E s a 3 1-8 E TA

yjjc, for t h e H e b . p H rw¡?, Isa. xlviii. 20. Comp. "E£w 2. So Plato uses the phrase,
xlix. 6. J e r . x. 13. [See also Isa. viii. 9.] o EVTOQ avQpumor, for t h e rational part qf
Nevertheless t h e expression ought not to our nature. See Wetstein, W h i t b y , a n d
be regarded as merely Flebraical or Hel- M a c k n i g h t on R o m . vii. 22.—"Eerw, bi,
lenistical, since H e r o d o t u s also has TA V
Those who are within, i. e. t h e palé of
"E2XATA ri-I"S, lib. iii. cap. 2 5 . So Christ's church. occ. 1 Cor. v. 12. Comp.
Theocritus, Idyll. xv. line 8. See Ra- "Efrü 2.
phelius and Wetstein, and comp. Uépag I . "Eowdev, A d v . from É'O-W within, and 6ev
[ A d d T h e m i s t . xvi. p . 2 0 7 . A . a n d in a syllabic adjection d e n o t i n g / r o ? « a place.
L a t i n Cic. N a t . D . i. 4 2 . H o r . Carni. i. 1. From within. occ. M a r k vii. 2 1 , 2 3 .
3 5 . 2 9 . O n t h e phrase see Vorst. Phil. L u k e xi. 7. [Ofthe mind]
Sacr. p. 4 5 5 . edit. Pisch. and Schwarz. 2. Within. M a t . vii. 15. xxiii. 2 5 , 2 7 ,
M o n u m . Ingen. iii. p . 2 9 1 . ] 28. [Add 2 Cor. vii. 5. Rev. iv. 8. v. 1.
V . Of s t a t e , "Eoyara, r a {npliy fiara, Arrian. Diss. E p i c t . ii. 8. 14. Exodus
v i z . ) , The last state, or condition. M a t . xxviü. 2 6 . ]
xii. 4 5 . L u k e x i . 26. 2 Pet. ii. 20. 3. W i t h t h e article prefixed it assumes
[ V I . T h i s word is used adverbially. t h e n a t u r e of a N . adjective. "EOWQEV, ró
T h u s éoyíiTri, M a r k xii. 6. 2 2 , last qf all, (fxépoQ, namely)-, The inner part, the in-
and soyarov in 1 Cor. xv. 8. See D e u t . side. occ. L u k e xi. 3 9 , 4 0 . 'O EOIOQEV
xxxi. 27, 2 9 . ] (avQpwicog, n a m e l y ) , The inner man. occ.
I f g p 'Eoyfiroig, A d v . from
0
¿ayarog.— 2 Cor. iv. 16, where see W h i t b y , and
'Ecrxárwc 'iyj.iv, To he in the last extre- comp."Eo-oi 3 , and"E¿;fa)0£>' 3 .
mily, i. e. ai the point qf death. occ. M a r k 'Eoúrepog, a, ov. Comparative of ELTLO.—
v. 2 3 . Similar expressions are t h u s used Inner, interior, occ. A c t s x v i . 2 4 . 'Eoí¡~
by t h e best G r e e k w r i t e r s ; and t h e very TEpov, rb, (i. e. fiépog), The part within.
phrase itself, 'E2XA'T£22 "EXEIN, is so occ. H e b . vi. 19, 'Éi<¡ rb iooirEpov rS icara-
applied by Diodorus Siculus. See Elsner, •KEráa-paroc, Within the vail. So t h e L X X
W e t s t e i n , and K y p k e . [ S e e Diod. Sic. use Eoú)T£pov rS KarairEráofiaroc; for ÍYOD
E x c e r p t . Valesian. p . 242. and xviii. 4 8 . nrf-fi ?, Lev. xvi. 2, 1 2 ; and for rO*fib bu
1

Joseph. A u t . ix. 8. 6. iEIian. V. H . xiii. fíln, Lev. xvi. 15. [ S e e N u m b . xviii.

2 7 . So t h e L a t i n s in ultimis esse, &c. B u t 17. Exod. xxvi. 3 3 . ]
Fischer. de V i t . L e x . N . T . Prol. 3 1 . p . 'Era'ipog, a, ó. T h e most probable of
704, observes, t h a t there is no instance of t h e Greek derivatioiis proposed of this
this phrase in better Greek authors, and word seems to be t h a t from t'0oc cuslom,
reckons it Macedonic. Phrynicus, indeed, q. d. lOa'ipog a customary companion or
and Thomas M . , expressly say t h a t t h e friend. 'Ercñpog in [ t h e L X X ] generally
phrase is bad. See Lobeck. ad P h r y n . p . answers to t h e N . nj>1. [See Prov. xxii.
3 8 9 . T a '¿ay_ara is used of the day qf death 2 4 . ] -
in Ecclus. i. 13. ii. 7. See Prov. v. 1 1 . I . A companion, associate, fellow. occ.
and Ecc|us. Ii. 14. T h e word occurs Mat. xi. 16. [ X e n . A n . vii. 3 . 15. Hell. v.
Theod. Amos iv. 1 2 . ] 4. 2 5 . ]
"Ecrco, A d v . from iig or hg in, into. I I . Used in compellation 'EraipE, V o -
1. W i t h a Genitive, Into. occ. M a r k cat. Friend. occ. M a t . x x . 13. x x i i . 12.
xv. 16. xxvi. 5 0 . I t does n o t necessarily import
2. Absolutely, In, within. occ. M a t . affection or regard, as fike does, and is
xxvi. 5 8 . Mark xiv. 5 4 . Acts v. 2 3 . Johu applied in t h e profane writers as in S t .
xx. 26, where kivaí EOÍO denotes being in M a t . t o indiíferent or even obnoxious per-
the house, as K y p k e shows 'éo-io is used in sons. T h u s in Lucian, D e Saltat. tom. i.
Sophocles. So from Arrian Epictet. lib. p . 9 1 2 . ¡3¿\EI IV a<¡>£fi£vog, w ' E T A I ' P E ,
i. cap. 2 2 , h e quotes EÍ,IO E V I V he is out, rwv fiXatrtpripuov rirwv, " Will you, there-
for, he is from home. fore, my friend, leave off this railing, &c."
3 . W i t h t h e article prefixed i t assumes See other instances in Wetstein on M a t .
t h e n a t u r e of a N . adjective *. 'O íow x x . 13, and comp. Campbell's Prelim. Dis-
avOpunroc, The inner man, i. e. the mind, sert. to Gospels, p . 599. [ I n M a t . xxvi.
soul, or spirit qf man. occ. R o m . vii. 2 2 . 50, Schleusner says i t is a disciple; and
E p h . iii. 16. [See X e n . V e n . x. 7-] observes, that disciples were so addressed
by t h e i r masters. See Jamblich. V i t .
P y t h . c. 3 0 . p . 155. L u c i a n . F u g i t i y . p .
* [ T Í i'¡™.T Í Ó ' I K B , for the interior of the house,
occurs 1 K i n g s vi. 1 5 . ] 791. So says Suidas v. Iralpe. Perizon.
 E T E 319 E T I

ad iElian. V . H . iii. 2. M e n a g . ad Diog. toms." 'Opo'(vyíw is tojoin with those qf

L a e r t . iii. 8 1 . ] like kind, and is used of animáis qf the
E § = | ¡ í ° '~EiTEpóy\(Ocrcioe, a, ó, from írtpoc same kind in the same yoke, and qf sol-
another, and yXwcrcra a tongue, language. diers in the same Une. See K y p k e Obss.
—One qf another tongue or language. occ. Sacr. ii. p . 2 5 4 . Some make it to draw
1 Cor. xiv. 2 1 . — T h i s word occurs not in the other side qf the same yoke, i. e. to be
tlic L X X , b u t Aquila has used it for t h e in cióse unión with; and then krEpo'( and m

Heb. )¡)b barbarous, P s . cxiv. or cxiii. 1. bao'C are nearly t h e same. O t h e r s again
And Raphelius cites t h e following words say, t h a t fuyos is the beam qf a balance,
from Polybius [ x x i v . 9. 5 . ] speaking of and crradpbc kr£po^vybc is used (Phocyl.
H a n n i b a l ; T I A E W O I C ciXXoipíiXoie xal ' E T E - Sent, 13.) of a balance inclining to one
P O P A í i ' T T O I S avbpaai xpnci¿ip£VOQ, " H e side, whence É V E O O £vyku) may be to incline
employed a g r e a t number of men who to. Schwarz. (Comm. L u s . G r . p . 591.)
were foreigners both in descent and lan- after Theodoret, says t h e m e a n i n g is to
guage." [ W e must, perhaps, consider E T £ - dispute with; and explains i t from two
poykíúcraoiQ as p u t in t h i s passage for ir£- oxen in t h e same yoke pulling different
paiQ y\(oaaaiQ, as in Isa. xxviii. 1 1 . ; t o ways.]
which place, says Bretschn., perhaps t h e " E T E P O S , a, ov.
Apostle r e f e r r e d ; and, as Schleusner ob- I. [ W i t h o u t t h e article. Another. Mat.
serves, such words are not uncommon in viii. 2 1 . xi. 3 . xii. 4 5 . xv. 3 0 . xvi. 1 4 *
Greek. líaWlwcug is p u t for a beautiful al. Herodian v. 7. 1 3 . X e n . Cyr. vi. 3 . 5.]
offspring, &c] II. [Different, unlike, of appearance.
EjQlP ' ErepoStdao-KaXéoj, w, from 'érepoe L u k e ix. 2 9 ; of n a t u r e or disposition. Rom.
other, different, aud SiSacntaXía doctrine. vii. 2 5 . 1 Cor. xv. 40.,Gal. i. 6. X e n . C y r .
—To teach other or different doctrine, i. 6. 2. viii. 3 . 8. Aristot. Rhet. ii. E t h . x . ;
viz. from t h a t t a u g h t by t h e Apostles, of family. A c t s vii. 18. a king of another
which was in effect the words qf our Lord race, as Krebs. Obss. F l a v . p. 193, shows
Jesús Christ. occurs 1 T i m . i. 3 . vi. 3 . from Joseph. A n t . ii. 9. 1. So H e b vii.
Comp. 1 Cor. xiv. 3 7 . [ I g n a t . ad Polyc. 16. and Exod. xxx. 9, for It, which, in
C-3.H N u m b . xviii. 7, is translated aXXóyEvní-\.
Efgp° 'Erepo'Cvyéw, w, from írepoc an- In A c t s ii. 4, t h e meaning is different,
other, and '(vyoQ a yoke—To draw the strange, or new ; in J u d e verse 7, Brets.
other side qf the yoke, to draw, or be says t h e phrase means strangers, foreign-
joined in, the same yoke; or r a t h e r . as ers ; b u t 1 can see no meaning in t h a t .
our translation, To be unequaUy, or un- T h e others pass t h e passage over. Park-
jitly yoked, particularly * in marriage ; h u r s t says strange, unnalural, which I
for t h e Apostle seems to alinde to t h a t law, t h i n k r i g h t . ]
Lev. xix. 1 9 f , D ' N t ó i ' i - n xb i n n n n ,
1
I I I . [ W i t h t h e article. The other; the
which the L X X render ra K-i'/vn crS ¿ KCI- same as b aWoe, b u t a stronger phrase.
Toy¡_ev<reiQ l-£po£vy<¡), where it is plain, as M a t . vi. 2 4 . L u k e v. 7. vii. 4 1 . xvii. 3 4 ,
Bochart has observed, vol. ii. p . 2-16', t h a t 5 5 . xvii. 10. al. Herodian v. 7. 1. X e n .
krtpo'Cvyii) is used for one qf another kind A n . iv. 1. 2 3 . E i t h e r repeated, or after
or species. " B u t w h y are cattle of dif- £ie, t h e phrase is the one and the other.
ferent species called ir£pó'(vya ? Namely, L u k e xiv. 19, 2 0 . xvi. 7. al. X e n . A n . iii.
because.they are not usttally joined t o g e - 4. 2 5 . comp. 2 8 . ]
ther in t h e same yoke, kv ivl 'QvyS>. So Eí§|r 'ErÉpojQ, Adverb, from É V E O O C . —
Hesychius: 'E-cpó^vytoi, ¿i J U I ) av^vyivreQ, Otherwise, differenlly. occ. P h i l . iii. 15.
Those that. are not yoked together." Le "ETI, Adv.
Clerc. occ. 2 Cor. vi. 14. [Schleusner 1. Any more, any longer, yet, still. See
agrees in this derivation, and says, I t h i n k M a t . v. 13. xxvii. 6 3 . J o h n vii. 3 3 . Rom.
rightly, t h a t t h e m e a n i n g is, " D o not join v. 6, where see Wolfius.
yourselves with persons different and i n - 2. Even, of time, j a m inde. L u k e i. 15.
ferior to yourselves, and imítate their cus- Raphelius shows t h a t H e r o d o t u s uses i t

* See Leslie's Theological W o r k s , fol. vol. i. p .

755. * [Schleusner says that srepui, i n this place, i s
t [See also D e u t . x x i i . 1 0 . T h e ox a n d ass the rest, I think this quite w r o n g : i t should then
were of this kind, the one b e i n g clcan, the other not. be oí erepof.]
See Bochart. Hieros. i. 1. c. 2 . p . 1 1 . 'Erffofvyíct t [ W a h l carelessly says, that i n this place t h e
occurs in the Schol. on Lucian ii. p . 3 2 5 . ] L X X have
 E T O 32 0 E Y

in tlie same view. See also Wolfius, W e t - kon constaney among them. His interpre-
stein, and K y p k e . tation, with which however he does notseem
3 . "En Sé, Moreover. Acts ii. 26. H e b . satisned, is, Having your feet shod with
xi. 3 6 . So t h e Vulg. insuper.—These the salutary doctrine of the gospel, which
two partióles are used in t h e same sense may always be present with you, always
by t h e profane writers. See Raphelius. ready or at hand lo help you. W a h l says,
4. "En Sé Kal, And even, and moreover. Put on your feet (or furnish yourselves
L u k e xiv. 2 6 . [ W e may j u s t note t h a t wilh) a ready mind, which is begolten
en is either future (John iv. 3 5 . Luke and nourished by salutary doctrine: or,
xvi. 2.) or past, 2 Thess. ii. 5.] So have your feet shod, that you may
' Eroipá^u, from érolfioQ.—To prepare, have salutary doctrine always ready. See
make ready. See M a t . iii. 3 . Ps. x. 17.]
xx. 23.
xxii. 4. xxv. 34. xxvi. 17. L u k e i. 17. ü . j ' E T O ' I M O S , r¡, ov.
31. [ J t is r a t h e r to destine, as in M a t . ; I . Ready, prepared. See M a t . xxii. 4 ,
xx. 2 a . L u k e ii. 3 1 . H e b . xi. 16. Rev. ix. iS. xxiv. 4 4 . Mark xiv. 15. J o h n vii. 6. 2
15. Gen. xxiv. 14. Tobit. vi. 18. To j Cor. x. 16. 'Ev erÓLpio eyeiv, To have in
prepare a feast, as in many of t h e above | readiness, be prepared. 2 Cor. x. 6. So
places of t h e N . T . P s . lxxviii. 19.] j Polybius [ i i . 3 4 . 2 . ] cited by Raphelius
'Eroipaaia, ac, v, from empasto to pre- E I X 0 N 'EN 'ETO'IMOt, They were
7
pre-
pare or to eslablish, seltle, as it is used in pared *. See also Wetstein a n d K y p k e .
t h e L X X , 1 Sam. xiii. 13. 2 Sam. vii. 12. [ E x o d . xxxiv. 2 . ]
Ps. Ixv. 7. ciii. 19. & al. for t h e Heb. p H . I I . W i t h a V. Infinitive following, i t
A preparation, or r a t h e r , A basis, foun- denotes futurition, and is equivalent to
dation,firmfooling; for t h u s t h e noun is
fiéWiov, What is to be, f u t ü r u s . occ. 1
applied by t h e L X X , E z r a ii. 68. iii. 3 . P e t . i. 5. 'SíOTriplav eTol.fJ.rjv a7TOKa\v(j>0i¡-
Ps. lxxxix. 15. Zech. v. 1 1 , for t h e H e b . vai, Salvalion which is to be revealed.
¡OO, or m i n n a base, foundalion. (Comp. T h i s use of the Greek tTolpoe seems H e -
D a n . xi. 7, 21.) A n d this l a t t e r sense braical, a n d correspondent to t h e similar
best agrees with t h e scope of E p h . vi. 15, application of t h e H e b . 1'nl*, which most
t h e onlv passage of t h e N . T . wherein it properly signifies ready, prepared. See
oceurs, a n d with t h e u s e of t h e military H e b . and E n g . Lex. in lr\¡) I .
vrróSnpa, in St. Paul's time : for a t verse 'E-oi'/xcüj, A d v . from eTuipoe.-—Readily,
1 1 . t h e Apostle advises his converts to preparedly. B u t in t h e N . T . i t is found
put on tlic whole armour qf God, that they only in the phrase, 'EroípiaQ eyeiv, To be
might be able to stand (^íjvaí) against the ready, prepared. Comp. u n d e r "Eyjo I X .
wiles of the devil; and verse 13, lo take occ. A c t s x x i . 13. 2 Cor. xii. 14. 1 P e t .
the whole armour of God, that they might iv. 5 , in which last text it may denote
be able to w i t h s t a n d (fivnTTivaí) in the simply futurition, who shall or will
evil day, and having done all to s t a n d judge. So t h e Syriac versión f-iry? TiTjn.
(rrijvaí): Stand (^íj-e) therefore,—having Comp. under 'Erólpoc I I . T h e phrase
your feet shod with the eroipátriq firm erolpiúQ eyeiv in t h e sense of being ready
footing or foundation, of the gospel of or prepared, is frequently used in t h e
peace, i. e. with t h e firm and solid know- Greek writers, as m a y be seen in W e t -
ledge of t h e gospel, in which you m a y stein and K y p k e on A c t s xxi. 13. [See
stand firm and unmoved, as soldiers do in Dan. iii. 15. iElian. V . H . iv. 13. Polyb.
their military caligas, which among t h e iii. 1 3 . 2. Joseph. A n t . xii. 4. 2 . ]
Romans were furnished with spikes for "ETOQ, eoQ, ac, TO.-—A year. L u k e ii. 4 1 ,
this purpose *. P o r this i n t e r p r e t a r o n 4 2 . iii. 1. & al. freq. T h i s word in the
of t h e word, which, I doubt not, is t h e L X X most eommonly answers to t h e Heb.
t r u e one, I am indebted t o Byna;us D e fli& a year. [ A n d t h i s word is used in
Calcéis Hebreeorum, lib. i. cap. 5, where Prov. v. 9. as '¿roe is in G r e e k in H e b . i.
t h e reader m a y find i t well illustrated 12, Thy years, i. e. thy life. The L X X
and defended. [Schleus. objeets to this have /3Í'O£.]
i n t e r p r e t a r o n , observing, that as S t . Paul T
E Y , A d v . from t h e H e b . ¡TIN to desire,
is speaking of t h e various helps to gaining choose.
eoníi'firací/inChristianity, he would not rec- I . Well, happily. occ. E p h . vi. 3 .
I I . Well, good. occ. M a r k xiv. 7. [ T h e
* S e e J u v c n a l , Sat. iii. line 2 4 8 , and Sat. x v i .
lines 2 4 , 2 5 . * [ S e e D i o n . H a l . A n t . viii. 17. i x . 3 5 . ]
 E YA 321 E Y A

phrase iv tfoieiv viva, is lo confer benefls I I . T h e L X X apply i t in t h e M í d d í e

on one. So often in good Greek. X e n . voice, Isa. lxi. 1, to t h e Messiah's publish-
Mem. ii. I. 1 9 . ] ing good tidings to t h e poor, and in I s a .
I I I . Well, rightly. occ. A c t s xv. 29. Iii. 7, to t h e preaching of t h e Apostles.
[ E u irpácrereiv is to be fortúnate.
T
See H e n e e in t h e N . T . A c t . and Middle, To
Xen. M e m . i. 6. 8. iii. 9. 14.] publish the gospel, or declare the glad tid-
IV. Well done! E u ! E u g e ! occ. M a t . ings qf Jesús Christ's being come in the
xxv. 2 1 , 13. Luke xix. 17- See W e t s t e i n flesh for the redemption and salvalion qf
on M a t t h e w . man, to evangelhe. I t is construed w i t h
V. I n composition i t i s used in t h e an accusative ofthe t h i n g or person preach-
three first senses j u s t assigned; besides ed, and either with a dative or an accusa-
which i t sometimes imports t h e opposite tive of t h e person who is preached to. See
of SVQ, namely, readiness or easiness, as L u k e iii. 18. iv. 18, 4 3 . [ i x . 6. x x . I . ]
in ivfieráSoroc ready to distribute, '¿VKOWOQ Acts v. 42. viii. 4 , [25.] xiii. 32. Rev. xiv.
easy; and sometimes, b u t more rarely, 6, 'EvayyeXí^opai, pass. To be published
inlenseness, as in ivirpóo-eSpoQ attending as glad tidings. L u k e xvi. 16. G a l . i. 11.
very much or constantly, ivróvwg vehe- 1 P e t . i. 25. comp. ch. iv. 6. [ I n some
mently. places it is simply to teach or preach.
'Evayy¿Xí(b>, from ivayyéXiov. Twice in t h e Active, Rev. x. 7- xiv. 6.
I . I n t h e Active and Middle voice, To And in t h e Middle, Luke iii. 18. iv. 4 3 .
bring glad tidings, good or joyful nervs. viii. 1. A c t s v. 4 2 . viii. 12.— On t h e con-
L u k e i. 19. ü . 10. iv. 18. viii. 1. Acts xiii. struction of this word (which takes t h e
32. Rom. x. 15. 1 Thess. iii. 6. Rev. x. 7- dative, or accusative, and prepositions tic,
T h e L X X frequently apply i t in this sense iv, -rrpoe) see Abresch. Mise. Obss. vol.
for t h e H e b . * ; and in t h e profane x. t . ii. p . 2 1 3 . ]
writers likewise i t is used for bringing or 'EvayyéXiov, a, ro, from iv well, good,
telling good ncws or tidings. See W e t - aud ¿yyeXta a message.
stein on M a t . xi. 5 . I add from Lucian, I . A good message, glad tidings, good
T y r a n n i c i d . tom. i. p . 790. Tr¡v iXsvdépiav or joyful news. T h e L X X (according t o
' E Y A I T E A I Z O ' M E N O S , Bringing ihe Aldus's edition) use ivayyeXíwv for good
joyful tidings of l i b e r t y ; and from Jose- tidings, 2 S a m . xviii. 2 0 , and ivayyéXia.
phus, A n t . ¡ib. v. cap. 1. § 5. " O n t h e for tidings in general, 2 Sam. xviii. 2 2 ,
seventh day Jesús (Joshua) having as- 25, ansvvering to t h e H e b . ¡"fluía. T h e
sembled t h e a r m y and all t h e people, rr)v Greek writers also apply luayyÉXto»' for
áXoj<rtv avrtS rije T R S X E W C ' E Y H I T E A I SÍ- good news or tidings. T o t h e instances
ATO, told them the good nervs of t a k i n g produced by Wetstein on M a t . iv. 2 3 , I
the city." So lib. vii. cap. 10. § 5 . WtKnv add from Josephus D e Bel. lib. iv. cap.
'EYAITEAI'ZETAl, He tells the good H . § 5, T a ct7ró rrie Túpiíe 'EYAPrE'AIA
news of t h e victory. A n d D e Bel. lib. ÍPXE, T h e good news carne from Rome.
iii. cap. 9. \ 6, " T i t u s sending o u t a A n d from Aristophanes (cited by M i n -
horseman, ' E Y A I T E A I ' Z E T A l r ü rrárpí t e r t ) , 'EYAPPE'AIA jca'yw £Vipao-a avrdic,
TO üpyov, tells his father the good news of A n d I told them good news. [See H o -
this affair." [See Theoph. Char. xvii. 5 . mer. Iliad. ¿2?. 150. Spanhem. ad Aristoph.
Aristoph. E q . 540. J e n s . F e r c L i t t e r . p . P l u t . 7 6 4 . 'EvayytXta Qviiv, in X e n .
1. Schwarz. Comm. L i n g . G r . p . 5 9 5 . 1 — H e l l . i. 6. 2 7 , is to ojfer a sacrifice of
In Pass. 'EvayyeAi^o/^cut, To have good thanksgiving for good news. A n d in 2
tidings brought, published, or declared to Sam. iv. 10, i t is the reward for good
one. M a t . x i . 5. [ L u k e vii. 2 3 . ] H e b . iv. news~\
2. " For unto us t h e good tidings are I I . I n t h e N . T . The glad tidings of
published which were published to them. God's erecting t h a t spiritual and ever-
W h a t these good tidings a r e , is evident lasting kingdom foretold in t h e prophet
from t h e context. I t is Ihe promise of Daniel, ch. ii. 44. vii. 13, 14, by t h e com-
rest to God's people." T h u s Campbell in ing of Jesús Christ, t h e t r u e Messiah, in
his V t h Prelim. Dissertation t o Gospels, t h e flesh; or the glad tidings of t h é r e -
part ii., which by all means see. Comp. demption of m a n from sin and death
Heb. iv. 6. t h r o u g h t h e merits and' intercession of
Christ our Saviour. See M a t . iv. 2 3 .
* [Jer. x x . 15. 1 S a m . x x x i . 9. 2 S a m . i. 2 0 .
xviii. 1 9 . ] (Coñlp, ver. 17.) ix. 3 5 . M a r k i. 14. A c t s
f [ S e e Matthia! § 4 2 0 and 4 2 1 . ] xx. 2 4 . 1 Cor. xv. 1, &c. [ I n M a t . xxvi.
Y
 E YA 322 E YA

1 3 . M a r k XÍY. 9 , it is The gospel history 'Evape^éopai, Spat, passive, To be well

of the Vfc, fyc. of Christ. Some construe, pleased. occ. H e b . xiii. 16. I t is used in
this history; a n d in t h i s sense it is used like manner both actively and passively
of t h e works of t h e Evangelists. I n 1 Cor. by t h e profane writers, as m a y be seen in
ix. 2 3 , i t is, says Schleusner, either the VVetstein on H e b . x i . 5 , a n d xiii. 1 6 ,
promises of the gospel, or the remará of where comp. K y p k e . — T h e L X X r e n d e r
preaching the gospel. I t h i n k t h e first Q > ¡ T P N N n « Y^íinn to walk with God, b y
clearly r i g h t : t h e second is forced. In evape^e'iv r¿> Qe<3, concerning Enoch, G e n .
Gal. i. 6, Schleusner says a false doc- v. 2 2 , 2 4 , a n d in several other passages.
trine; b u t W a h l , more correctly, says a [See xvii. 1. Ecclus. xliv. 1 6 . Diod. S i c .
different may of preaching the gospel xiv. 4 . ]
from that of Paul, as appears from w h a t 'Euáp£<roc, a, ó, r'/, Kai rb —ov,
immediately follows.]—Observe, t h a t as from ev well, and apelde pleasing, agree-
t h e Apostle in 1 Cor. ix. 1 4 , uses t h e able.—Well-pleasing, acceptable, or pleas-
phrase, 'EK TO~Y ' E Y A I T E A l ' O Y ¿>7v, to ing well. Rom. x i i . 1, 2 . T i t . ii. 9. [ A d d
live of, or from, the gospel, so Josephus Rom. xiv. 1 8 . 2 Cor. v. 9 . E p h . v, 1 0 .
tells us, D e Bel. lib. v. cap. 1 3 . § 6, t h a t P h i l . iv. 18. al. Wisd. iv. 1 0 . i x . 1 0 . ]
J o h n t h e Zealot, in defence of his sacrile- E§§P° 'Evapé^wg, Adv. from évápe^og.—
gious plundering of t h e T e m p l e , a n d u s i n g Acceptably. occ. H e b . xii. 2 8 . [ A r r i a n .
of t h e consecrated wine a n d oil, pleaded Diss. E p . i. 1 2 . 2 1 . ]
t h a t it was fit, rae r¿> vák> •zparevop.zvBg 'Evyevé<zepos, a, ov. T h e Comparative
' E S 'AYTO'Y rptGjnudaí, t h a t those who of t h e following.
fought for t h e Temple should be fea from 'Evyevng, éoe, S e , 6, ?i, from Iv well, a n d
the Temple. See also Wolfius.—Our E n - ' yévog race, family, which from yeívopai
glish word gospel * from t h e Saxon gofc>- ' to be bom.
j-pell, which is compounded of gofa good, | I . Descenáeáfrom a good family, well-
a n d j"pell a history, narraiion, message, bom, noble, occ. L u k e x i x . 1 2 . 1 Cor. i.
admirably expresses t h e forcé a n d p r o - 2 6 . [ J o b i. 3 . X e n . H e l l . iv. 1. 7- H e r o -
p r i e t y of t h e Greek evayyáXwv. dian i. 1 8 . 1 0 . E u r . Phoen. 4 5 5 . See I r -
tO^T ' E u c t y y e X i T r / G , S , ó, from tvayye- misch ad Herodian i. 2 . 3 . ]
\í'(u).—An Evangelist. These were m i - I I . Generous, ingenuous. So A r i s t o t l e
nisters in t h e primitivo church, who seem ap. H . Steph. cited by W e t s t e i n on A c t s
to have been assistants t o t h e Apostles in xvii. 1 1 , observes, t h a t evyevr)g sometimes
p r o p a g a t i n g t h e gospel, and whom accord- signifies peya\oTrpeirr)s Kal yevvatog. Com-
ingly they sent from place to place, to pare also K y p k e . occ. A c t s xvii. 1 1 , where
execute such particular commissions as we have t h e comparat. mase. plur. 'Evye-
they t h o u g h t proper t o e n t r u s t t h e m vé^epoi, ¿Í, More generous. " T h e r e is
with f. occ. A c t s x x i . 8. E p h . iv. 1 1 . 2 (as W h i t b y has observed) a peculiar spi-
T i m . 4 . 5 . Comp. Acts x i x . 2 2 . rit a n d propriety in t h i s expression, as t h e
'Evape^éu, CJ, from evítpeiog.—To picase J e w s * boasted they were t eXeiiOepot Kal
well, or very much. occ. H e b . xi. 5 , 6. evyeveig,free and noble, b y virtue of t h e i r
descent from A b r a h a m and t h e other p a -
* T h e learned a n d j u d i c i o u s reader cannot b u t triarchs. T h e s e Bereeans, i m i t a t i n g t h e r a -
be pleased with the excellent observation o f J u n i u s tional faith of t h e i r g r e a t progenitor, were
on this w o r d : " G O S P E L . E v a n g e l i u m . A n g l o s a x . ivyevé^epoi his more genuine offspring."
j o ' c f p e l l , A l . Gotspell. H a n c v o c e m retinuere Doddridge. [ S e e Joseph. A n t . xii. 7. 2
A n g l i , c u m ejus u s u s a p u d superiores inferioresque
G e r m a n o s p e n i t u s interciderit. E v a n g e l i i n e m p e
Mac. x. 1 3 . Cic. ad A t t i c . xiii. 2 1 . C h r y -
v o x potior visa est h o m i n i b u s ecelesiasticis, d u m sostom a n d Theophylact explain i t by kiu-
f a m a m sperant aliquid supra v u l g o s a p i e n t i u m , si eiKe^epoi.~}
i n quotidianis ad p o p u l u m h o m i l i i s , atque alia, [f§p° 'Evcia, ag, v-—Fair ov fine mea-
q u a v i s S . scriptura; enarratione, a d m i n u s notas ac
ther. I t is derived from ev J mell or good,
sibi consuetas R o m a n a ; Gracaaque lingua; voces
confugerent. Q u o d tatúen m i n i m e necessarium and Ala (which see u n d e r Zevg) J ú p i t e r ,
erat, c u m v o x j o ' e r p e l l sit k/j.fn.riiia¡ráT-r¡, et c o m - i. e. the heavens or air, whence t h e L a t i n s
positione m e r e T e u t ó n i c a v i m proprietatemque Gr.
bayys'Xiov mirifica reddat. E s t e n i m i 50*0 b o n u s ,
* S e e J o h n viii. 3 3 , 3 9 , 4 1 .
et rpe41 historia, narratio, n u n t i u m . — J u n i i E t y -
•f S o P h i l o in L e g a t . col. 7 9 2 .
m o l . A n g l i c a n . in G o s p e l .
£ S o E u s t a t h i u s i n H o m e r , 11. iii. p . 3 1 4 , 3 0 .
+ S e e E u s e b i u s E c c l e s . H i s t l i b . c a p . 9 , or 10. ZíLíf xat o "Ar¡p SeS^üiTajf é£ a na) y) 'ETAL'.A, y, eV¡y
E c h a r d ' s E c c l e s . H i s t . vol. ii. p . 5 2 4 . !Svo. A . D . ñ 'ETAEPL'A, J ú p i t e r also denotes t h e air, whence
1 8 3 , and Suicer T h e s a u r . i n 'E-jdyyiKnr>¡:. 'EVSFA, that i s , a good state of the air, fair wcaiher.
 É Y A É Y 9

say, sub Dio, in t h e open air; and in I . A seeming well or good, will, plea-
Horace we have sub Jove frígido, in the sure, good pleasure. occ. Mat. xi. 2 6 .
eold air, Iiterally under cold J ú p i t e r , lib. L u k e x. 21.
i. ode 1. line 2 5 . Tlie sanie poet speaks I I . Good will, benevolent affeclion, ctf-
of J u p i t e r ' s , i. e. t h e air's, congealing t h e fectionate desire. L u k e ii. 14. Rom. x. 1.
snow, lib. i. ode 10. lines 7, 8, ' P h i l . i. 15. Comp. Phil. ii. 13, and Mac-
k n i g h t . See Suicer Thesaur. oh the word.
XJt glaciet nives
[So Epíi. i. 5. kindness. See Phil. ii. ¡ 3 .
Puro nummc J ú p i t e r .
In Rom. x. 1, Schleusner says, / wish
See also Cicero D e N a t u r a Deor. lib. ii. from my heart; and so Theophylact, the,
cap. 2 5 . occ. M a t . xvi. 2, where see W e t - vehement desire. 'EvSonía yéveo-daí is
stein's excellent Note. I t is not used in simply for ÍVSOKEIV in L u k e x. 2 1 . In 2
the L X X , b u t in Ecclus. iii. 15. [See Thess. i. 11, W a h l says t h e phrase is, for
iEIian. V . H . ix. 18. Polyb. i. 60. Xen. rráo-av ayadojcrvvnv, iv rj iv^ótcrjaEL b Qebe,
Cyr. vi. 1. 11. Foes. CEcon. Hipp. p . 151.] all the' goodness in which he delighls.
'EVSOKÉW, ¿ , from Iv well, good, and See Ps. xix. 1 4 . ]
Boxea to think. 'EvepyEo-ía, ae, ?;, from Iv well, good,
I. To think well, think good, be pleascd, and 'épyov a work.—A good work or deed
willing, or desirous. L u k e xii. 3 2 . Rom. done, a benefit conferred. occ. A c t s iv. 9.
xv. 26, 27. 2 Cor. v. 8. Col. i. 1 9 , " 0 « iv 1 T i m . vi. 2. On which latter t e x t com-
avrS ivSóicrjffe rráv rb ir\l]poipa Karóacncrai, pare u n d e r 'AvriKap&íivopai II. [In
Because in him the whole fulness, of the Acts iv. 9, it is kindness lowards a sick
Godhead namely, was pleased io dwcll. person*. See Hesiod Theogon. 5 0 3 . H e -
T h e text, according to this explanation, rodian iii. 6. 6. vi. 9. 1. T h u c y d . i. 138.
is so agreeable to what t h e Apostle says, — A s to 1 T i m . vi. 2 , on a fuller consi-
ch. ii. 9, and t h e s t r u c t u r e of t h e words deration, I cannot conceive t h a t either
so conformable to t h a t of other passages, t h e Greek or the context will bear any
(see L u k e xii. 32. Gal. i. 15, 16, and reference of the words, except to t h e
comp. 1 Mac. xiv. 41.) t h a t I have no masters. Let not Ckristian slaves despise
d o u b t b u t t h i s is t h e t r u e i n t e r p r e t a r o n . Christian masters as being their equals
Compare HXripwpa X. [See Ps. x l . 13. in religious matters, but let them serve
(Biel says xxxix. 18.) E c c l u s . xxv. 18. them the better, because they who partake
1 Mac. vi. 2 3 . ] of the benefit (of the Christian religión)
I I . W i t h iv or he following, To be well are indeed faitliful and beloved. It is
pleased with, take pleasure in, to acquiesce said t h a t ivepytcría does not elsewhere
in with pleasure and satisfaction. M a t . iii. occur in this sense; but it is very harsh
17. xii. 18. 1 Cor. x. 5. 2 Cor. xii. 10. 2 to construe t h e passage, they who enjoy
Thess. ii. 12. 'EVSOKÍÍV 'EN—is an Hellen- the benefit of the services qf the. slaves.
istical phrase formed after t h e analogy of See 2 Mac. vi. 13. ix. 26. Wisd. xvi. 2 4 .
the Fíebrew,—2 V o r — n fim, to both T h e word occurs simply as an acíion in
which it answers in t h e L X X . See Isa. Ps. Ixxviii. 11.]
Ixii. 4. Mal. ii. 17. 1 Chron. xxix. 3 . P s . 'EvEpyerko, w, from Iv well, good, and
'épyov xliv. 3 . cxlix. 4, and comp. 1 M a c . x. 47- a work.—To do good. occ. A c t s x .
[ I t is used also in t h i s s e n s e ] with an ac- 3 8 . [ P s . xiii. 6. Wisd. iii. 5. Xen. Cyr.
cusative, To take pleasure in, to delight viii. 2. 6.]
in. H e b . x. 6, 8. T h i s also is an Hellen- 'Evepyérr¡e, a, ó, from tvepyíréoj.—A be-
istical phrase, and is used by t h e L X X nefactor, occ. L u k e xxii. 2 5 . See W e t -
for the H e b . m n , P s . Ii. 18. cii. 15, for stein's Note. [Schleusner says, t h a t t h e
r&n, P s . Ii. 19. [ S e e Levit. xxvi. 34, 4 1 . passage refers to t h e title of 'EvEpyéryc,
Ps. Ii. 16, 19.] —The learned Raphelius given to those who had done service to
:

has remarked on M a t . iii. 17, t h a t t h i s V. their countrv, especially kings, as P t o -

is scarcely to be found in any of the pro- lemy. See 2 Mac. iv. 2. Philo L e g a t . p .
fane writers, except Polybius, who fre- 5 4 9 . Mmhm. Dial. i. 12. Polyb. v. 9.
quently uses it, but. applies it either ab- Dial. Sic. xi. 26. Xen. Apol. Soc. § 2 6 .
solutely, or joins it with a dative. W e t - T h u c . i. 129.]
stein, however, on M a t . iii. has produced "EivdtToe, a, o, ?'/, from lv well, and $£róe
a passage from Diodorus Sic. where i t is placed, disposed.
in like manner coustrued with a dative.
* [ A s to t l ü s c o m m o n construction, see G r a m -
'EVSOKÍCI, ae, //, from É V O W E W . mar, ch. x x i . Sect. 3 4 . ]
Y 2
 E YO 324
[ I . ] Rightly disposed, fit. occ. L u k e
ix. 62. xiv. 35. See W e t s t e i n on L u k e
ix. [ D i o d . Sic. ii. 57. v. 37- P s . xxxii. 6.]
[ I I . Useful. H e b . vi. 7 . ]
'Evdéwg, Adv. from kv&vc.
1. Immediately, instantly. M a t . iv. 20.
viii. 3 . & al. freq.—It must in some pass-
ages be considered as transposed, or else
be rendered as soon as. T h u s M a r k i.
10. Kai ivdéoo ¿ivaSaívwv án-o ra iiSarog,
'éiSe ejtiKopéi' >S rtíg ¿pavee, And coming up
out of the water he immediately sam the
heavens opened, or, As soon as he carne out
of the water he sam, &c. So verse 2 9 . ch.
v. 36. xi. 2 . See Doddridge on Mark i.
10. 'Evdiie is in like manner transposed
by Xenophon, C y r i E x p e d . lib. ii. p. 1 7 1 .
edit. Hutchinson, 8vo. " Proxenus, t h e
Bceotian, 'EYOY^S pév peipaKióv wv, ETTE-
BípEí ytvéadaí avyp ra psyaXa irpárreiv
kavdc, As soon as he was a stripling, de-
sired to be a man, fit for doing g r e a t
t h i n g s ; and by Lucian, D e Mere. Cond.
tom. i. p. 495. Kai ó pév rrpwrog, 'EY-
0Y*2 i-KiaKínropíva irapaKuaag rS SEOWOTS,
irpoSpapiov Kai rr popí] vi cae (nrép^Erai,—
A n d the first who overhears his master
proposing (such a thing) immediately r u n -
ning before, and bringing information of
it, r e t u r n s , &c.
2. Soon, speedily. 3 J o h n verse 14.
[ T o this head Schleusner refers M a t . xiii.
5. xxiv. 2 9 . A c t s xii. 10. Rev. iv. 2. T h e
meaning of the word in M a t . xxiv. 29. has
caused much discussion from the uncer-
t a i n t y , whether our Lord, in t h a t place,
is referring to t h e final j u d g m e n t , or t h e
particular calamities impending over t h e
Jewish nation. Some have said t h a t it
means suddenly, unexpectedly; and t h a t
this is its forcé in John vi. 2 1 . Acts xii.
10. Rev. iv. 2 , adding t h a t t h e L X X
have rendered t h e H e b . word DKnS by
ivfféwg in J o b v. 3 , where Schleusner, I
think, erroneously considers it as mean-
i n g speedily. See Glass. P h i l . Sacr. p .
376. edit. D a t h . ]
'EvdvSpo pito, w, from ivdiig straight,
and Spópog a course.—To come with a
straight course, or run, as the sailors cali
it, occ. A c t s xvi. 11. xxi. 1. [ T h e cor-
responding subst. is used of a horse. Poli.
O n o m . i. 194.]
f§§p° 'Evdvpsw, io, from 'évOvpog.
I . To take courage, be qf good courage.
occ. A c t s xxvii. 22, 2 5 .
I I . To be cheerful, to be in good spirils, iv. 12. v. 12!).]
as we sajr. J a m . v. 13.—Symmachus uses
the .particip. Ivdvpwv for t h e H e b . ib alto, at Athens. See Pausan. Attic. c. 4 9 . ]
E Y K
a good or cheerful heart. Prov. x v . 15.
[See Xen. Hell. vii. 4. 3 6 . Aristot. R h e t .
ii. 2.]
H^p^ "EvQvpog, a, 6, y, from iv well,
good, and Sivpbg a mind.
I. Of good cheer or courage. occ. A c t s
xxvii. 36,"Ev8vpoi Sé yevópevoi, Being en-
couraged. [Xen. Cyr. iii. 1. 2 9 . 2 Mace,
xi. 26.]
I I . Cheerful, whence t h e comparative
neut. sing. 'Evdvpórepov *, used adverbi-
ally, More cheerfully. occ. A c t s xxiv. 10.
[ X e n . Cyr. ii. 3- 5.]
'EvOivw, from ivdvg.— To make straight,
direct.
I. To make straight a way. occ. J o h n
i. 2 3 , for which M a t . iii. 3 . M a r k i. 3 .
Luke iii. 4, use iv&tíag irotelrs. [The
metaphor is taken from t h e kings of t h e
East, who before a j o u r n e y sent officers
to remove difficulties and obstructions in
t h e roads. See Ecclus. ii. 6. xxxvii. 19.]
II. To direct, guide, steer a ship. occ.
J a m . iii. 4, 'O ivdívwv, The person steer-
ing, the steersman. [So E u r . H e c . 3 9 ,
of a shepherd g u i d i n g t h e flock in X e n .
Cyr. i. 2. See Valck. ad E u r . H i p p .
1226. Spanh. ad Callim. H y m n . in Jov.
83.]
'EvBvg, Adv. from Iv well, and .%LO to
rush impetuously.—Immediately, instant-
ly. M a t . iii. 16, (where comp. u n d e r 'Ev-
déwg I.) John xiii. 3 2 . xix. 3 4 . & al.
'Evdve, eia, v, from ivdijg, Adv.
I . Straight, in a natural sense. oceurs
Acts ix. l l . f [ M a t . iii. 3 . M a r k i. 3 .
L u k e iii. 4, 5. See J u l . Poli. Onom. iv.
160. Gen. xxxiii. 12. E z e k . xlvi. 10.]
I I . Straight, right, in a figurative and
spiritual sense, A c t s viii. 2 1 . xiii. 10. 2
P e t , ii. 15.—This word in t h e L X X most
commonly answers to t h e H e b r e w 1U?>
straight, right. [ W i t h A c t s viii. 2 1 .
comp. P s . xciv. 15. H o s . xiv. 9. Vorst.
Phil. Sacr. p . 5 4 . edit. Fisch.]
'EvQvryg, ryrog, r¡, from ivdvg.—Recti-
tude, righteousness, equity. occ. H e b . i. 8.
T h e correspondent H e b . word in P s . xiv.
8. is * w n rightness, righteousness.
{¡Up 'EvKaipéw, w, from Iu well, good,
0
and naipog time, opportunity.
I. To have convenient time or oppor-
tunity, to have, or be at, leisure. occ. M a r k
vi. 3 1 . 1 Cor. xvi. 12. L u c i a n uses the
* [Some MSS. read íuSá/iwf. See Poli. Onom.
-f [There was a street called the Straight Street
 R Y A 325 E Y A

verb ¡n t b e sanie sense, Amores, tom. i. count of (comp. ' A T T Ó I. 5.) his religious
p. 1050. 'Ot c)£ TÜIV e.iriyiyvopévidv aei reverence, to G o d namely, (comp. Bow-
Xoyicrpbt Trjc ávayici)g atpedévreg 'HYK.AI'- yer's C o n j e c t . ) ; b u t t h e former i n t e r p r e -
POYN ÍTTIVOEÍV TI TS>V KpeiTÓvwv—And t h e tation seems preferable. See M a r k l a n d
t h o u g h t s of succeeding (generations) being in Appendix t o Bowyer's Conject. 4 t o .
freed from necessity mere at leisure to i n - O u r E n g . translators in rendering it,
v e n t somewhat better. So likewise P l u - and mas heard in t h a t hefeared, seem to
tarch, whom see in W e t s t e i n . [Polyb. have aimed a t preserving t h e ambiguity
xx. 9 4 . P l u t a r c h t. iii. p . 2 1 3 . ed. of t h e o r i g i n a l ; for in that m a y here
Hutten.] mean either in (as to) that mhich, or in-
II. To spend, or employ, one's leisure asmuch as. I n t h e margin they have,
time. occ. Acts xvii. 2 1 . [JlpocrevKaipéo) is for his piety. [ T h e L X X p u t this word
used in this sense in P l u t . t. viii. p . 4 3 8 . for mNT in Josh. xxii. 2 4 . a n d t h e same
T h e word is condemned by almost all t h e word they r e n d e r by OXtytg in E z e k . xii.
grammarians. See Lobeck. ad P h r y n . p . 18- I n A q . I s . lvii. 1 1 . i t is for fear.
126. T h o m . M . p . 8 2 9 , & c ] See also Polyb. x x x v . 4 . 1 3 . W i s d . xvii.
'EvKaipía, ag, ?), from 'évKatpog.—A con- 8. L i b a n . D . iv. p . 2 6 5 . A. Joseph. Ant. xi.
venient opportunily. occ. M a t . xxvi. 16. 6. 9 . I n Aristoph. Av. 3 7 6 . Dion. H a l .
L u k e xxii. 6. [ P s . ix. 9. Polyb. ii. 19. 2 . A n t . v. p . 286. a n d elsewhere, i t is cau-
1 M a c . x i . 4 2 . Plat. Pha;d. p . 5 3 3 . ed. iion. See M e n a g . ad D i o g . L a e r t , vii.
Heind.] 116. Poli. Onom. iii. 136.]
"Evicaipog, B , ó, )';. See kvKaipito.— I I . Religious, or godly,fear. occ. H e b .
Timely, opportune, seasonable, convenient. xii. 2 8 .
occ. M a r k vi. 2 1 . H e b . iv. 16. [See P s . 'EvXaSeópai, üpai, from Ei/Xa&jc--— To
civ. 2 7 . 2 Mac. xiv. 2 9 . xv. 20. In t b e be qfraid, to be moved, or impressed with
place of S t . M a r k , H a m m o n d says i t a natural or religious fear. occ. A c t s
is a festival day; b u t I can see no reason xxiii. 10. H e b . xi. 7 . [See Prov. x x x . 5 .
for t h i s . Herodian i. 4 . 7. Diod. Sic. ii. D e u t . ii. 5 . 1 Sam. xviii. 2 9 . X e n . M e m .
48.] • • iii. 6. 8. and 9. 4 . 1 Mac. iii. 3 0 . xii. 4 0 .
IfglP 'Evkáipwc, Adv. from evKatpoQ.— Plat. Phasd. § 3 9 . I n Aristoph. E q . 2 3 3 .
Opportunely, conveniently, in scason. occ. A r r i a n Diss. Epict. ii. 1. a n d elsewhere,
M a r k x i v . 1 1 . 2 T i m . iv. 2. [Ecclus. i t is to be cautious. See IvXaéíje-]
xviii. 22. Xen. Ages, viii, 3 . Polyb. i. 4 2 . 'EuXa€i7c, ¿ce, 5C, Ó, r¡, from iv well,
6.] carefully, and '¿XciSov 2 aor. oíXapÉavw.
Efgp" 'Euco7rwr£poc, a ov, Comparat. of I . I t properly denotes [either a thing
tvKOTTOQ easy, which from iv denoting mhich can be easily taken hold qf, in o p -
easiness, and KÓVOC labour.—Easier, more position t o ¡¡vo-X-nirToe, ( s e e L u c i a n t. i.
easy. M a t . i x . 5 . x i x . 2 4 . & al. [ E c c l u s . p. I I 4 . ed. Gra;v.) or, i t is used of p e r -
xxxii. 4. Polyb. xviii. 1. 2.] sons,] one mho taketh any thing, mhich is
'EvXá€tia, ag, >/, from Év\a&)e.—Fear. holden out to him, mell and carefully.
occ. H e b . v . 7 , where C h r i s t i s said t o b e [ i E l i a n H . An. iii. 1 3 . ]
kuratcovo-Qúc head, a n d so delivered from I I . Cautious, circumspect, timid, tirnor-
his fear, t h a t horrid fear, namely, which ous. So Philo, Life oí' Moses, sai tipa
is so affectingly described, M a t . xxvi. 3 7 , ' E Y A A B f f S &v, and being also
38. M a r k xiv. 3 3 , 34, a n d u n d e r which of a timorous disposition; and P l u t a r c h
an Ángel appearedfrom heaven strength- in Pericl. irepí rbv Xóyov l\v 'EYAABff 2 ,
ening him, L u k e xxii. 4 3 . 'EvXáteía is in speaking he mas timorous. C o m p .
used in t h e sense oí fear, n o t only in t h e W e t s t e i n on H e b . v. 7. [ A r r i a n Diss. E p .
L X X , Josh. xxii. 2 4 . (comp. Wisd. xvii. ii. 1. 17. and so Suidas.]
8. and ¿vXa€éopai) b u t also by t h e pro- I I I . Cautious, circumspect, careful in
fane Greek writers. See Wolfius and the morship of God, and in the duties qf
W e t s t e i n on H e b . v. 7 . A n d in t h e L X X religión, devoui, religious. occ. Luke i i .
of Job xxxv. 12, according t o t h e A l e x - 25. Acts i i . 5 . viii. 2 . [ M i c a h v i i . . 2 . ] —
andrian MS. and t h e edition of Aldus, we T h e L X X seem to have used ivXa€eís in a
read 'OYK 'ElSAKO'YSHt 'AITCr vZpswg passive sense for acceptable, Lev. xv. 3 1 ,
irovripwv, And thou wilt n o t hear, and so where ¡cal kvXdSeig Txoá¡o-trz. answers to
deliver from, the insolence qf the wickcd. t h e H e b . D n i t n i , and ye shall sepárate.
T h e words in H e b . v. 7, may otherwise In W a l t o n ' s Polyglott, however, t h e
be rendered being heard from, or on ac- Greek words are rendered, e t abstinentes
 E y A 326 E Y M

facietis, and ye shall make them abstain. edition of Pasor's Lexicón in 'EvXoytjróc,
[ S c h l . translates it Proselyte in A c t s ii. and B p . Pearson On t h e Creed, A r t , I I .
5 . viii. 2. but this is quite uureasonable. HIS ONLY SON, p. 141, fol. edit.
H e t h i n k s t h a t this and other expressions, 1662. [ G e n . i x . 2 6 . xxvi. 2 9 . ]
as tj£¡3ójj.Evoi or (f>opép.Evoi ruv QEOV, de- 'EvXoyla, ac, {¡, from eyXoyéu>.
scribe the proselytes of t h e gate. B u t if I . Blessing, wishing well, or express-
t h i s is allowed, which is very doubtful, ing wishes qf happiness to, J a m . iii. 10.
t h e word is by no means used as a t e r m of Comp. H e b . ' x i i . 17- [where Schl. says i t
designation.] is prophelic blessing.]
'ÉvXoyéin, S>, from Iv well, good, and I I . Praise, eulogy. l í e v . vii. 12. to
XvyoQ a word. God. Comp. Rev. v. 12, 13. [Ecclus.
I . To bless, as one man doth another, iii. 9 . ]
to express good wishes to, to wish happi- I I I . Praise, commendation, to m a n .
ness to. M a t . v. 4 4 . 1 Cor. iv. 12, 1 P e t . occ. Rom. xvi. 18. So used in t h e p r o -
iii. 9. Comp. L u k e ii. 34. H e b . vii. 1, fane writers. See Wolfius on t h e place,
6, 7. [These two last passages Schl. and Wetstein on M a t . v. 4 4 . [ T h u c y d .
construes, io congratúlate one on, and so ii. 4 2 . Theophylact here í n t e r p r e t s i t
in Tobit ix. 6.] fialtery, and rightly, as to t h e meaning
I I . To bless, as man doth God, to from t h e context, b u t Schl. is w r o n g in
praise, laúd, celébrate, magnify, L u k e i. a t t r i b u t i n g such a sense to t h e w o r d . ]
64. ii. 28. xxiv. 5 3 . T h e word is used I V . Blessing, [in t h e sense of good
in this sense of praising by the p u r e s t bestowed.'] See E p h . i. 3 . Gal. iii. 14.
Greek writers. See Elsner on L u k e i. H e b . vi. 7. Comp. 'EvXoyéüi I I I . Rom.
64. [ M a t . xxi. 9. M a r k xi. 9. J a m e s xv. 29, 'Ev TrXnpüjpaTi évXoyiár rS coay*
iii. 9. J u d g . v. 2, 9. Schleusner both in yeXÍB ra Xpt?S, In the fulness qf t h e
his L e x . N . T . and his Edition of Biel, blessing qf the gospel qf Christ, i. e,
and W a h l quote P s . xliv. 2 2 . as having " with a full and a b u n d a n t blessing at-?
t h e same sense, but it does not occur in t e n d i n g m y ministerial and evangelical
t h a t place. I t occurs P s . ciii. 1 and 2 . labours," D o d d r i d g e ; or r a t h e r , accord-
Ecclus. xxxix. 19. 2 M a c . iii. 3 0 . Polyb. i n g to W h i t b y , " with a full i m p a r t m e n t
i. 14. 2. xii. 1 5 . 3 . ] of spiritual gifts to you." Comp. Rom,
I I I . To bless, as God doth m a n ; and i. 11. E p h . i. 3 .
since with God speaking aud acting are V . líon'ipLov TÍJC ívXoylac, The cup qf
t h e same t h i n g , or t h e word of God can- blessing, i. e. t h e cup, or wine in t h e cup,
not b u t be operative, henee God's blessing which is blessed in t h e E u c h a r i s t , and
a person implies his actually conferring corresponds to t h e second cup of wine
happiness, whether temporal or spiritual, which the J e w s were aecustomed to t a k e
upon him. Acts iii. 26. E p h . i. 3 . H e b . after t h e paschal supper, and which, from
vi. 14. [Add M a t . xxv. 3 4 . L u k e i. 4 2 . being blessed by t h e master of t h e house,
Gal. iii. ti, 9. in all of which t h e r e is a was likewise called The Cup qf Blessing.
sense of future or actual benefits bestowed. See B p . Pearce's Comment. on t h e Gos-
B u t t h e word is also used of prophetical pels, p . 4 4 3 , aud D r . Bell On t h e Sacra-
or inspired blessing. See H e b . xi. 2 0 , ment, p . 175, 2 d edit. occ. 1 Cor. x. 16.
21.] [ E r n e s t . Opuse. Theol. p . 20. Reland
I V . To bless, as C h r i s t did t h é loaves A n t . H e b . p . 4 2 7 . Suicer. i. p . 1249.]
and fishes, when he miracnlously m u l t i - V I . Blessing, beneficence, bounty, a
plied them, M a t . xiv. 19. M a r k vi. 4 1 . bounliful present. occ. 2 Cor. ix. 5 , 6.
viii. 7. L u k e ix. 16. (Comp. Gen. i. 22, T h i s seems an Hellenistical sense o f t h e
2 8 . ) — a n d as he did t h e sacramental w o r d ; and t h u s ívXoyla is used in the
bread, M a t . xxvi. 26. Comp. 1 Cor. x. L X X for a present, answering to t h e
16.—and the infants, M a r k x. 16. [See Pleb. r o l l . Gen. xxxiii. I I . 1 Sam. x x y .
M a r k xiv. 2 3 . L u k e xxii. 17, 19. L u k e 27- x x x . 26. 2 K i n g s v. 1,5. [Zonaras
xxiv. 51.] Lex. col. 8 0 7 . says, ¿V ¿vXoylag, perct
'EvXoynrpc, 5, ó, from ¿vXoyéo).—Bless- caxInXeiag, Kai aopórr¡Tog' ó cnreípiúv ¿ir'
ed. L u k e i. 68. Rom. i. 2 5 . ix. 5. & al. évXpyiaig.]
'.O 'V.vXoynTüc, THL\blessed, is used by EfSjfr' 'EvpETítcoroe, n, b, v, from EV ñe-
t h e H i g h P r i c s t as a tille or ñame of n o t i n g readiness, and peraSíúiopL lo im-
God, Mark xiv. 6 1 , agreeably to t h e J e w - part.-—licady io impart or distribute,
ish style. See Wolfius. Schoettgenius's occ. 1 T i m . vi. 18. M . Antoninus, [)ii.
 E YN 327 E YN

14.] cited by W e t s t e i n , uses rb Evperá- and may also be derived from ÍIQ, évbc,
Sorov for readiness to disiribute. [ P l u - alone.
tarch t. ix. p . 390. ed. Reisk.] I . A keeper qf the bed, or bed-chamber,
' E w o t w , ü>, from s u well, and vóos the a chamberlain. Some think it is applied
mind.— To be well affected or (q. d.) well strictly in this etymological sense to queen
minded lowards, another, to be friends Candace's eunuch, A c t s viii. 27, 34, .36,
with him, (as we commonly express it.) 3 8 , 39, because a t ver. 2 7 , he is called
occ. Mat. v. 2 5 , where seo Wetstein. avijp a man: b u t this argument seems
£ D a n . ii. 4. 3 . see cod. Chish. and Gen. very w e a k ; for ¿ivijp 'Aidío\p, according to
xxxiv. 15. (in the 5th versión) Polyb. both t h e Greek and H e b . idiom, is ex-
iii. 12. Herodian ii. 2. 5. Xen. Cyr. viii. actly equivalent to 'Aidíoip n c (see R a -
2. 1.] p h e l i u s . ) and surely an eunuch m i g h t
E§üT "Evyoia, ac, r;, from év well, and be called ávnp as distinguished from a
vóos the mind.—Benevolence, goodwill. woman.—The L X X use ¿WS^oc from t h e
occ. E p h . vi. 7. 1 Cor. vii. 3 , where ob- H e b . d'TD an officer, where we cannot
serve t h a t nine M S S . , six of which an- well suppose any reference to castralion.
cient, for ó(¡>ei\ofj.£VT]v évvóiav have ótpEÍ- Comp. Gen. xxxix. 1, 7, in t h e L X X , and
X J J P , which latter reading is confirmed by j see H e b . and E n g . Lexicón under DID.
t h e V u l g . a n d several ancient versions ' [ F i s c h e r (de Vit. L e x . N . T . Prol. xxi.
and quotations of t h e Fathers, is approved p. 484.) has a long dissertation on t h e
by several learned Critics cited by W e t - word. I n H e b r e w D>1D coming from a
stein, to whom we may add Bp. Pearce, verb lo cástrate, signifies, a casirated
who thinks t h e common reading to be an man. Now all t h e officers in oriental
interpretation only of t h e genuine o n e : courts, guards, porters, chamberlains,
and Griesbach receives oféXnv into t h e cooks, bakers, messengers, &c. were cas-
t e x t . [Schl. says, t h a t in E p h . vi. 7. it ] irated, so t h a t t h e courtiers were called
is fidelily; b u t t h e r e is no occasion for t h e t:'D iD or casirated, and t h e principal
,L

t h i s ; goodwill exactly explains t h e mean- or chief qf the castrated one CD'DHD ni or

ing. H e refers to Lucian. Bis Accusat. C^anDrí ")U>. T h e word then in H e b r e w
p . 3 2 1 . avSpáTrodov evvav ical TTLTÓV (where does not denote t h e office simply, b u t a
t h e meaning is t h e same as here.) A r i - castrated man serving some office. , F o r
stoph. P l u t . 2 5 . A r t e m i d . iii. 5 4 . I n some word indicating t h e office is always
1 Cor. vii. 3 . t h e whole phrase means as added, which would be unnecessary if t h e
h e says, debitum conjúgale prazslare. So word by itself signified t h e office. N o w
<¡>t\ÓTr¡£ in Hesiod. Theog. 125. 3 0 6 . See t h a t ivvSxoe originally and by its de-
also as to x pí¡opai aud x « ' £
a ú n l
t h e same rivation (like iro\Ltíy(p£, &c.) signified
sense, Aristoph. E q . 5 1 4 . Eccl. 625. keeper or guardián of the bed, is not
Scliol. Pindar. P y t h . ii. B . 4. T h e word doubtful, and t h e Glossaries and L e x i -
occurs as benevolence. 1 Mac. xi. 3 3 . 5 3 . cographers give t h e meaning, and yet no
2 Mac. xi. 2 1 , 2 6 . ] instance can be found in ancient writers
'EuMr^í&i», from lvv5)(pc.—To make an where i t had t h a t signification. I n t h e
eunuch, either literally by castralion, or case before us, as it is distinctly said, t h a t
figuratively by mortificaron, occ. M a t . he had t h e charge of t h e treasure (v. 2 7 . ) ,
xix. 12.—Josephus uses this word, A n t . and t h e word cWtWne, like D'TD, is added,
lib. x. cap. 2. § 2 , where Isaiah threatens , to show t h a t he was one of the first r a n k ,
king H e z e k i a h , rae ÉtyóVas ' E Y N 0 Y X I 2 - i t seems probable t h a t IVVSXOQ here can
GHSOME'NOYS, m i awoXEacivrae ró av- only mean, a castrated man in office. T h e
hpaq el vai, ru¡ Ba€uXwvt<j (SaXeuíróVrac H e b r e w word is coustantly cxplained by
fiamXéi, t h a t his descendants should be Onkelos by t h e word ni (great), and by
made eunuchs, and having lost their t h e L X X by cWcWiie ( J e r . xxxiv. 1 9 . ) ;
virility, should serve t h e Babylonish and t h e Evangelists, we know, often added
king. * Greek explanative words to barbarous
'EvvayoQ, a, ¿, from évvt) a bed, and ones. See M a t . xii. 24. M a r k ix. 4 3 .
'éyw to have, keep: [so E t y m . M . and x. 4 6 . L u k e has not only done this,
Pliavor.] unless we prefer Eustathius's xi. 15. A c t s vii. 10. viii. 2 7 . (Candace
derivation, [ad Iliad X. 4 4 . p. 1256, 2 7 . being (see Plin. H . N . vi. 2 9 . ed. Gron.)
Rom.] from 'éwic deprived, and oy¡EiaQ of t h e word for queen in iEthiopia, as P h a -
cohabilation. "Evvic is used by Homer, raoh was for king in E g y p t , or at least
H. xxii. line 44. and Odyss. ix. line 524, t h e ñames applied to reigning per-sons)
 E Y O
b u t lias also added to Greek words, when
used in a Hebrew sense, other explana-
tory ones without any copula. T h u s
xxiii. 2. XpiTov fíaaiXéa, and see M a r k
xv. 32. Therefore, ivvtíypQ Svrárng must
be t h e same as kvvüypg, rovrí^i Svva^ng.
F o r as t h e officers of oriental courts and
especially chamberlaius were castrated,
t h e Greeks out of their natural politeness
transferred t h e word 'EwS^oe as less of-
fensive, to signify a castrated person.
T h u s Plutarch ( V i t . Alex. M . T . i. p .
682. A . ed. Vechel.) and Diodorus (xi. p .
2 7 8 . ed. Steph.) add t h e word to others
describing a chamberlain, and clearly
mean a castrated person. F r o m these
reasonings, Fischer collects sufficiently
t h a t in t h e passage before us, t h e mean-
i n g of t h e word is not chamberlain, b u t a
castrated man. As to P a r k h u r s t ' s re-
ference to Gen. xxxix. 1. about Potiphar,
he has himself destroyed t h e forcé of it in
his note in the H e b . Lex., which (with
other passages) sufficiently shows t h a t
eunuchs frequently m a r r i e d . ]
I I . An eunuch, a man either naiurálly
impotent, occ. * M a t . xix. 1 2 ; or cas-
trated, M a t . xix. 12. A c t s viii. 2 7 . & al.
Eunuchs had anciently t h e charge of the
bed-ehamber, and t h e care of t h e women,
in t h e palaces of the Eaetern princes (see
E s t h . ii. D a n . i.), as t h e y still have in
t h a t p a r t of the world to this day.
I I I . An eunuch, in a figurative sense,
eme mho on a religious account mortifies
his natural inclinations, and refrains
even from marriage. occ. M a t . xix. 12.
[So Fischer, and see Wisd. iii. 14.1—See
Suieer's Thesaur. on this word.
'EvoSów, Si, from \v well, good, and bSbg
a way, journey.
I . To give or afford a good or pros-
perons journey ; whence 'EvoSóopai, üpai,
pass.—To have a prosperóles and suc-
ccssful journey. occ. Rom. i. 10, where
see K y p k e . I t is used in this sense by
t h e L X X , Gen. xxiv. 2 7 . for t h e H e b .
* j Y i a n r n to lead in the way.
I I . To prosper another, to malee him
prosperous. 'EvoSóopai, úpai, pass. To
prosper, be prospered. occ. 1 Cor. xvi. 2.
'3 J o h n ver. 2 , twice. In this l a t t e r sense
* [ I t appears from the Gloss.se V e t , J u r i s , p . 3 ,
that ttje word w a s applied to all w h o either from
infirmity, accident, or a n operation w h e n y o u n g
were unfit for generation. T h e first were aieítoni;,
the second $\iSíxi, the third xas-pároi, according to
T h e o p h . Paraphr. Instituí, i. 1 1 . 9 . p . 1 1 7 . ]
328 E Y n
it is used not only by t h e L X X , Prov.
xvii. 8. J u d . xv. 18, but by t h e profane
writers, as may be seen in Wetstein on
Rom. i. 10. [ W a h l and Schl. refer Rom.
i. 10. to this head, aud perhaps r i g h t l y .
B u t Schl. refers 1 Cor. xvi. 2. to another
sense, to have opportunity. T h i s is u n -
necessary. W a h l translates rightly, o,n
áv ivoSiorai according as he shall have had
good success. T h e word oceurs in this
sense, Herod. vi. 7 3 . 2 Mac. x. 7. See
Glass. Philol. Sacr. p . 1189. ed. D a t h . ,
and compare 2 Chron. xiii. 12. xviii. 11.]
[§§¡f {^EvieápíSpoc, a, ó, ?;, from kv and
irápeSpoc an assessor, (see D e m . 1332,
14.)—One who constanily sits to, or ap-
plies to any thing, assiduous. 1 Cor. vii.
3 5 . according to some M S S . ]
[§§p° 'EuTTEt0i)e, éoe, Se, ó, ?/, from íw
denoting easiness, and ircídio to persuade.
—Easily persuasible, easy to be persuaded
or intreated. occ. J a m . iii. 17. [See P o -
lyb. i. 68. 3 . X e n . Mem. iii. 4. 8. But
Schl. thinks it is here, That which malees
others traclable. H e refers to / E s c h .
Choeph. 257.]
I f g ^ 'Evwspfearog, a, 6, y, from iv well,
easily, and Teepí^arog surrounding, which
from Trepii^npi, or irípií^apai to surround.
—Easily surrounding or encompassing,
apt lo surround or encompass. T h i s is a
very difficult word, being found in n o
Greek writer before t h e time of t h e
Apostles. After examining various in-
terpretations of it both ancient and m o -
dern, (which may be seen in Suicer T h e -
saur. Pole Synops. Wetstein, Elsner, and
Wolfius,) I find myself, with the two last
named learned writers, obliged to ac-
quiesce in t h e exposition Chrysostom gives
of ivietpí'saTog b y f¡ ivKÓXiog Teepii^áptvn
fípag, which easily encompasses or sur-
rounds us. So F r e u c h trans. qui nous
enveloppe si aisément. Diodati's Italian,
ch' é a t t o a darci impacejo, which is apt
to hinder us. occ. H e b . xii. 1, where
K y p k e , whom see, explains i t to t h e same
effect as Diodati. T h e particular sin here
meant by t h e Apostle seems to be t h a t
mentioned by Doddridge, namely, " a dis-
position t o relinquish or dissemble t h e
gospel for fear of suífering." Compare
t h e following contpxt, and chap. iii. 6, 14.
vi, H , 12. x. 2 3 , 2.5, 3 6 — 3 9 . — V e r y in-
genious is t h e interpretation of Wetstein,
who explains !tur£píVaroc in a passive
sense of t h e sin which is surronnded with
so great a cloud of witnesses, who are, as
it were, spectators of thc Christian race,
 E Y n 329
and of the behaviour of those who are still
engaged in it. T o confirm this explana-
tion, lie proves from pertinent authorities,
t h a t both rrepí^aroe and áirepí^aroc are
«sed passively, t h e former signifying sur-
rounded, t h e latter not surrounded. But
then he also quotes a passage from T h e o -
pompus in Athenseus, where irepífaroe
m u s t be understood actively (ÜEPI'STA-
TON j3oüicra rnv Kwpnv iroiei, by h e r cries
she makes t h e village surround h e r , or
brings it aroutid h e r ) ; and Elsner ob-
serves against L e Clerc, t h a t verbal a d -
jectives of a like form in —roe have often
an active signification. A n d since t h e
Apostle joins t h e evirepkarov ápapríav
with oyKov iravrd every weight, and de-
scribes i t as something which Christians
are to lay aside, Chrysostom's exposition
above-mentioned appears j u s t l y preferable
to W e t s t e i n ' s ; and it seems very probable,
t h a t in this epithet evTrepí^arov t h e Apo-
stle alindes t o the long fiowing g a r m e u t s
of t h e ancients, which, if n o t put off in
r u n n i n g a race, would (ir£púVávai) cling
about their legs, and impede their course.
So Diodati, Beza, a n d Piscator in L e i g h
C r i t . Sacr. Comp. under 'Ava'(í>vvvpi.
[Chrysostom's interpretation best agrees
with t h e n a t u r a l m e a n i n g of t h e word
rrepd^npi to surround, a n d i t is used of
h u n t e r s s u r r o u n d i n g their prey. See H e -
rod. i. 4 3 . Theoph. Char. c. 6. T h i s i n -
terpretation is received b y Schl. and
W a h l . Theophylact, who is followed b y
Kypke, says, Through which one easily
falls into irepicrrácreie or troubles. He-
sychius says easy.~]
£|g¡p ' 'Ei;jroua, ae, ?), from éviroiéoi to
=
do good, which from Iv well, a n d rcoíeoí to
do.—Doing good. i. e. works of charity
and mercy, benefeence. occ. H e b . xiii. 16.
[ T h e word is condemned by Poli. v. 140.
I t oceurs Alciph. 1 E p . 10. Diog. L a e r t .
x. 10. A r r i a n . E x p . Alex. vii. 2 5 . 8. See
Reitz. ad Lucian. I m a g . c. 2 1 . ( T . . ii. p .
479.)] / _
'Evrropéoi, <3, and Iviropíopai, üpai, from
IWopoc * having or possessing any thing,
which from ev well, a n d Trópoc (from
• K y p k e remarks, that M u s o n i u s i n S t o b a u s ,
serm. viii. p . 4 7 6 , confirma this sense b y distin-
gilishing between émípn; and w7\ttiriá; the rich.
" S o m e m e n , w h e n t h e y cannot pretend poverty,
¿AV "ETOOPOI XPHM A'TÍIN imf, T I V F C SE xcii nXv-
alti, b u t w h o are possessed of property, and s o m e
even rich, y e t g o so far as n o t to bring u p their
younger children ¡"na ra •¡rpoytvótxvjtt "ETnoPHi « á X -
>-.'••; that the eider m a y be better provieled f o t . "
E Y n
ireípio lo pass through) which signifies not
only * a passage through, b u t a mean or
method found out for doing any thing,
particularly for getting money ; also, gain,
meóme, revenue.—To be able to afford, to
be able, in this sense. occ. A c t s xi. 2 9 ,
where Kypke observes t h a t t h e expression
is elliptical, and t h a t xpripáruv wealth or
some such word is to be understood. H e
accordingly cites from Josephus X P H -
M A ' T Q N 'EYnOPHGEr2,and from Strabo
X P H M A ' T í i N 'EYÜOPO'YNTAS. Comp.
also E l s n e r and W e t s t e i n . — I t is used b y
t h e L X X for t h e H e b . J'ttfn to reach,
atlain to, Lev. xxv. 2 6 , 49 ; for t h e H e b .
fc«D to fnd, obtain. Lev. xxv. 2 8 . [Schl.
and Wahl here transíate, To be rich or
abound in riches; b u t under svoSóoi Schl.
refers to this passage, and to 2 Cor. viii.
2., t o explain 1 Cor. xvi. 2 . which h e
translates. utfert cujusque reifamiliaris,
and this gives t h e same meaning as P a r k -
h u r s t . See Polyb. vi. 5 8 . 9. X e n . M e m .
ii. 7. 4 . I n good Greek, t h e word cer-
tainly implies abundance7\
6§¡T' 'Ev7ropítt, a e , i¡, from ÉWopos,
which see u n d e r 'Eu7rop£<u.—Substance,
maintenance, livelihood, means, opes, fa-
cultates. occ. A c t s x i x . 2 5 . [ I t is r a t h e r ,
plenty, plentiful supply. occ. Diod. Sic. i.
4 5 . X e n . Cyr. iii. 3 . 7 . See Aq. J u d g .
vi. 12. J o b v. 5 . ]
'Eu7rp£?r£ta, ag, }';, from hvreptrciie, íoe,
«e, ó, T), which from kv well, and lepérria to
be beautiful, to become T.—Beauly, pleas-
ing form. occ. J a m . i. 1 1 . [ P o l y b . i. 4. 8.
Thuc. vi. 3 1 . ]
'Ev7rpóo-c'£icrO£, a, ó, i), from ev
well, and rrpócrSsKToe accepted, accepiable;
which latter word is used by t h e L X X ,
Prov. x i . 2 0 , a n d is derived from irpoerSé-
Xopai to receive, accept.— Well accepted,
acceptable. occ. Rom. x v . 16, 3 1 . 2 Cor.
vi. 2. viii. 12. 1 P e t . ii. v . — T h e word is
applied in t h e same sense by P l u t a r c h ,
[ t . i x . p . 196. R e i s k . ] (see W e t s t e i n ) ,
and by Clement, 1 Cor. § 3 5 , 4 0 . edit.
Russel.
t§gp° 'EvKpóaeSpoe, a, ó, Kal rb—ov,
* " Tlópa; transitus, trajectus—item ratio e x -
cogitata aliquid efficiendi: u t Trico; -¿PTIIXÍTWI ratio
pecunia; comparando:. E u r i p . pro q u o & a b s o l u t é
nópo; dicitur a p u d A r i s t o t . R h e t . 1. & P o l i t - lib. i.
cap. 7. I n t e r d u m p r o q u a s t u usurpatnr, u t a p u d
e u n d e m i n P o l i t . significat & reditus, proventus,
o b v e n t i o ; vectigal apud A r i s t o p h . i n V e s p . "
Scapula.
•f- [ I n the L X X it i s u s u a l l y honour, cxcellencc,
or glory. S e c 2 S a m . x v . 2 5 . Prov. x x x i . 2 5 . ]
 EVP 330
from lv intens. and 7rpóo-£¿poc, an assessor,
a constant altendant, also assiduous, which
from irpój near, hard by, and ecpa a seat.
—Constantly attending, whence t h e neut.
'JLvwpóo-sSpov, TO, used as a, substantive.
—Constant, or continual attendance. occ.
1 Cor. vii. 3 5 . Comp. irpoo-sbpévüj. B u t
observe t h a t in 1 Cor. vii. 3 5 , many M S S . ,
five of which ancient, read évirápsSpov to
t h e same sense. A n d this reading is em-
braced by B p . Pearce, whom see, a n d by
Griesbach received into t h e t e x t . [ 3 M a c .
iv. 1 3 . ]
'Ev7Tpoo-u)?ré<i>, <5, from sv well, and
•¡rpómoirov a face, appearance.—To make
a fair appearance, or show. occ. Gal. vi.
12.—The Greek writers often use t h e
adjective svTrpóawwoQ for specious, ap-
pearing fair or well. P o r instances see
Wolfius, Wetstein, and K y p k e . [ X e n .
M e m . i. 3 . 10. See also Demosth. 2 7 7 , 4 .
a n d G e n . xii. 1 1 . ]
'EYPI'SKa— To find. F r o m [ t h e ob-
s o l e t e ] ívpsto we have in t h e N. T . l s t
fut. ívpí¡o-ti>, perf. evprjica, 1 aor. pass. Iv-
pídnv, 1 fut. kvpsñí¡aopai, 1 aor. mid. p a r -
ticip. ívpáptvoc ( H e b . ix. 12.) by syncope
for Ivprjo-ápsvoQ ; if it should n o t r a t h e r
b e d e d u c e d from t h e obs. '¿vpw, 1 aor. hipa,
1 aor. mid. ivpápr¡v, particip. tvpáuevoe.
•See u n d e r 'EvpíWw.
I . To find by seeking, and t h a t whe-
t h e r t h e t h i n g or person were before lost,
as M a t . xviii. 13. Luke ii. 4 5 , 4 6 . Comp.
A c t s xvii. 2 7 ; or not, M a t . ii. 8. 1 1 .
xxvi. 60.
I I . To find by a judicial inquiry.
'íyuo-a, L u k e xxiii. 2. So used by Xenophon
and Demades, cited by Kypke. [ A d d v.
4 a n d 14. A c t s xiii. 2 8 . xxiii. 2 9 . a n d
perhaps M a t . xxvi. 6 0 . ]
I I I . To find without seeking, or by ac-
cident, as we say. M a t . xiii. 4 4 . A c t s
xvii. 2 3 . Rom. x. 2 0 .
I V . To find, mcct with, light upon.
M a t . viiii. 10. xviii. 2 8 . x x . 6. x x i . 2 .
[xxii. 9, 10.] xxiv. 4 6 . xxvi. 4 0 . [xxvii.
3 2 . Comp. L u k e xvii. 18, (which E l s -
n e r , Wolfius, a n d Campbell understand
intcrrogatively, as t h e preceding verse)
P h i l . iii. 9- [ J o h n i. 4 6 . v. 14. L u k e iv.
17-*
V. To find, oblain, get. L u k e i. 3 0 .
ix. 12. [ x i . 9 . ] John x. 9. [ A c t s vii. 4 0 . ]
Rom. iv. 1. 2 T i m . i. 18. H e b . ix. 12.
So Lucian Reviv. t o m . i. 3 9 6 . MóXic
* [John 1 4 . m a y he added to this or the
next d i v i s i ó n . Compare G e n . xliv- ti. and 3 4 . ]
E YP
ySV 'EYPO'MHN T T O X X C Í msre.vtmc, I could,
however, scarcely obtain with many in-
treaties. See also Wetstein and Kypke
on H e b . ix. 12, and Kypke on Rom. iv. 1.
[See ^Elian V. H . iii'. 17, Dion. H a l . v.
49. vii. 3 7 . Pindar. I s t h m . i. 60. Gen.
vi. 8 . ]
V I . To find t h e price or valué of a n y
t h i n g by computation. Acts xix. 19. X e -
nophon applies t h e V . in t h e same sense.
See Raphelius and Wetstein. So H e -
rodotus, lib. viii. cap. 2 8 . E Y P O N Xo-
T
yiZópsvoe—Ifound by computation.
V I I . To save, preserve. M a t . x. 3 9 .
xvi. 2 5 . Comp. Mark viii. 3 5 . L u k e ix.
24.
V I I I . To find, know how, be able.
Rom. vii. 18, where K y p k e cites P l u -
tarch, Pausanias, and A r r i a n using i t in a
like view.
I X . [To know, understand, have a
knowledge of. Rom. vii. 2 1 . x. 20. Acts
xvii. 2 7 . Schl. refers to this head Phil.
iii. 9. that I may be found in him, i. e.
t h a t I m a y be found to be a good Chris-
tian. Pierce says t h e meaning is, t h a t " I
may be found to have p u t on Christ, to
be covered over with h i m , " from Locke's
note on Gal. iii. 2 7 . See I s . Ixv. 1. J u d g .
xiv. 18. Herodian. ii. 1. 8. iElian V . H .
x. 6. Wisd. xiii. 6. 9 . ]
X . 'Evpío-Kopai, Pass. To be found. i. e.
lo be.—In this sense it is frequently a p -
plied in t h e L X X for H e b . SWoi, see
inter al. E x o d . xxxv. 2 3 . E s t h . i. 5 ; and
t h u s i t seems used M a t . i. 18, where
Campbell translates 'Evptdn lv ya^pl
by She proved to be with child.
Comp. P h i l . ii. 8. A c t s v. 3 9 . Rev. xviii.
2 1 , where see V i t r i n g a and K y p k e on
M a t . [Compare L u k e xvii. 18. A c t s viii.
40. Rom. vii. 10. Gal. ii. 17. Rev. xii. 8.
Gen. ii. 2 0 . xlvii. 14. D e u t . xviii. 10.
E s t h . ii. 3 . ]
| ¡ g p 'Eupo/cXúcW, (ovoc,
B
b.—Eurocly-
don, a iempestuous wind, usual in t h e
Mediterranean, and well known to t h e
modera mariners by t h e ñame of a le-
vanter. occ. A c t s xxvii. 14. T h i s wind
" is n o t confined to any one single point,
b u t blows in all directions from t h e N. E .
round by t h e N . to t h e S. E. T h e great
wind, or mighty tempest, or vehement east
wind, described by t h e prophet Jonah, ch.
i. 4. iv. 8, appears t o have been one of
these levanters*. 'Eupo/cXútW, according
* The winds in Jonah, however, appear to have
been miraculous.
 EYS 331
to the annotations of E r a s m u s , Vatablus,
and others, is said to be vox kinc duda
quod ingentes excitet fiuctus (a word de-
rived from its exciting great waves), as if
these commentators understood it to have
been, as Phavorinus writes it (in voce
Tvf&iv), 'EvpvKkvSüjv*, and as such com-
pounded of évpve (latus, amplus, broad,
large, ¿fe.), and KXVSOJV (fiuctus, a nave).
B u t r a t h e r , if an etymology is required,
as we find KXVSOJV used by t h e L X X
( J o n a h i. 4, 12.) instead of "li'D, which
always denotes a tempest, as I conjecture,
properly so called, ' E v p o i c X v c W will be t h e
same with f " E v p a KXVSWV, i. e. an eastern
tempest, and so far express t h e very
meaning t h a t is affixed to a levanter at
this t i m e . " T h u s D r . Shaw, Travels, p .
330, and Note, where t h e reader may
meet with further satisfaction on t h i s
subject, and may find t h e common read-
i n g 'EvpoKXvówv sufficiently defended in
preference to t h a t of t h e Alexandrian
M S . , 'EvpaKvXojv t h o u g h favoured by t h e
V u l g . versión, Euroaquilo, and embraced
by Grotius, Cluver, L e Clerc, and Bent-
ley, T h e ancient Syriac versión h a s
fn^pIlK. See also W e t s t e i n , Doddridge,
a n d Bowyer's Conject. on t h e t e x t . Comp.
Ps. xlviii. 7. Ezek. xxvii. 2 6 . [ A u l .
Gellius N . A . ii. 2 2 . complains of t h e u n -
frequency of t h e occurrence of ñames of
winds in t h e ancient writers.]
'Evpvxwpog, B , ó, from + 'évpve broad,
and x¿pa región.—Broad, roomy, spa-
cious. occ. M a t . vii. 13. [See t í o s . xiv.
17- Is. x x x . 2 3 . & al. 'Evpvxoipía occurs
in S y m m . Ps. xvii. 20. cxvii. 5 . X e n .
Cyr. iv. 1. 8. (where it is a plain.)~]
'E,vo-é€tia, ae, r¡, from av<r£~Si¡c.
I . Devotion, piety towards God. A c t s
iü. 12. I T i m . ii. 2 . 2 P e t . i. 6, 7.
I I . Godlincss, or the mhole qf true re-
ligión ; so named because piety lowards
God is the foundation and principal part
* O n e M S . cited b y ¥ / e t s t e i n and Griesbach
rcads s o .
f 'Eupof the cast -.aind, i s , b y the w a y , from the
H e b . TIN ihc light, which rises in that part of the
heavens.
$ Scapula remarles, that this word m a y seem to
be composed o f ev xecll, and píw to flore, so as to b e
spoken properly of a broad and recll-Jlowiiig river,
as in H o m e r , 11. vi. l i n e 5 0 0 .
'EuuSojf ÁucaHm ' E T [ ' E ~ I O S nn&p.za.
T h a t u s ' d ti? bathe i n the «¡idc-Jlomng stream.
.Comp. II, . line 5<!5. II. x x i . line 1.
v l l l y r . in i \ \ T - in L'.igh's Crit. Sacr.
EYS
qf it. (See H e b . xi. 6. M a t . xxii. 3 7 ,
38.) 1 T i m . i v . 7, 8. vi. 6. Comp. 1 T i m .
iii. 16. [ I should be inclined to refer all
t h e passages except ] T i m . iii. 1 6. to t h e
first sense, adding 2 T i m . iii. 5 . T i t . i.
1. 2 P e t . iii. 12. Xen. Cyr. viii. 1. 25-
Diod. Sic. x i x . 7. Prov. i. 7 . I s . xi. 12.
W e m a y observe t h a t piety to a mother
is called ivcrépltia in .ZEsch. D i a l . iii.
10.]
jfgp"" ' E V C E S É W , £¡, from ivtrtSrje.
I. To exercise piety or true religión.
Comp. 'Evo-íteía I I . occ. 1 T i m . v. 4 ,
where observe t h a t rov—OÍKOV is governed
of t h e preposition Ka-a understood. So
Elsner cites from Isocrates in Nicocele,
§ 3 5 , TA TTspi r S 9EHC ' E Y 2 E B 0 T -
1
c
MEN *. See more in Elsner and Wolfius.
[Susan. 64.]
I I . Transitively, governing an accu-
sative. To worship religiously. occ. A c t s
xvii. 2 3 . So E u r í p i d e s and P l u t a r c h ,
cited by Wetstein, ' E Y S E B O T S I TOY'S
9 E 0 T S , and ' E Y 2 E B E 1 N O E O T S. [ X e n .
H e l l . i. 7. 10.]
'Evtre'Sijg, toe, 9c, ó, y, from E V well,
and o-tSopai to worship.—Devout, pious,
religious, godly. occ. A c t s x. 2, 7. x x i i .
12. 2 P e t . ii. 9. [ I s . xxiv. 16. Xen. Cyr.
viii. 1 . 9 . ]
J f g l 'Evostüis, A d v . from svarcGñe.—>
0
Piously, religiously, godly. occ. 2 T i m .
iii. 12. T i t . ii. 12. [ X e n . M e m . ii. 2 .
13.]
"Evar¡poe, ts, b, r¡, from iv well, a n d
afjpa a sign.—Significant, intelligible,
easy io be understood. occ. 1 Cor. xiv. 9,
where see Wolfius and W e t s t e i n . [ P o r -
p h y r . de Abstin. iii. 4 . Sext. E m p . adv.
A r i t h m . 18. Polyb. x. 44. 3 . A r t e m i d . ii.
44. In P s . Ixxxi. 3 . it is used for rc-
markable.~]
ffgp* "Et/mrXayxyoe, o, o, r¡, from iv
well, and cnrXáyxvov a bowel, which see.
—Of tender bowels, tender-hearied, ien-
derly compassionate f. occ. E p h . iv. 3 2 .
1 P e t . iii. 8. So also in Clement, 1 Cor.
§ 2 9 . "Eva~Xayxvog is used in Sophocles,
and 'Eva-n-Xayyvía in E u r í p i d e s ; b u t in
those writers both these words denote
strength qf mind, high spiriledness. See
Wolfius on E p h . iv. 3 2 . [ a n d Vorst. P h i l .
* Isocrates h a s a very similar expression i n D e -
m o n . § 7, rifcüro» fíh h 'ET2E'BE[ TA" Troop r¿g
©SHf.
•f- Notat,—eos qiii ex i m i s visceribus, aut ex
corde plañe medullitíis miserorum misereamur,
eonimquc eulamilatibus v e h e m e n t i s s i m é afficiantur.
 EYT
Sacr. ii. p. 3 8 . ed. Fisch.] B u t C h r y -
sostom, cited in Suicer's T h e s a u r . under
'Evo-rrXayxvíZopai, applies t h e particip.
kvairXayxvi'CóptvoQ in the sense of ten-
derly compassionate; and Symmachus
uses acnrXayxvoc for t h e H e b . '"llaK cruel,
Prov. xvii. 1 1 , and so doth another H e x -
aplar versión for D e u t . xxxii. 3 3 .
Comp. u n d e r "ZrrXáyxvov I I . [ P r a y e r of
Manass. v. 6 . ]
f-^sp ' 'Evtrxnpóvuje, Adv. from kvcrxv-
5
fiiov.—Honourably, gracefully, deccntly.
occ. Rom. xiii. 13. 1 Cor. xiv. 4 0 . 1 Thess.
iv. 12. [ X e n . Cyr. i. 3 . 7.]
Elgp 'Evcrxvpoctvvrj, r¡e, f¡, from kvcrxv-
0
piav.— Comeliness. occ. 1 Cor. xii. 2 3 .
[ I n Xen. Cyr. v. 1 . 2 . Polyb. x. 18. 7- it
m a y relate perhaps more to decorum of
manners. See iv. Mac. vi. 1. where it
relates to dress."}
'Evaxhpuiv, OVOQ, 6, r¡, from év well,
good, and a-xrjpaform,fashion, tnien,
I . Spoken of persons, Honourable, re-
spectable, reputable. occ. M a r k xv. 4 3 .
A c t s xiii. 5 0 . xvii. 12. See Wetstein and
K y p k e on M a r k .
I I . Of t h i n g s or actions, Decent, be-
coming, comely. occ. 1 Cor. vii. 3 5 . xii.
2 4 . [ A r r i a n . Diss. E p . iv. 12. 6. Schwarz.
Comm. p . 610. Olear, de Stilo, p . 2 8 3 . ]
'Evrúvwc, A d v . from ÍVTOVOQ intense,
from iv intens. and réruva perf. mid. of
réiviú to stretch, strain.—Intensely, vehe-
mently, strenuously. occ. L u k e xxiii. 10.
A c t s xviii. 2 8 . [Josh. vi. 8. Diod. Sic. xi.
6 5 . Xen. H i e r . ix. 6 . ]
¡§§p" 'Evrpawúda, ae, i), from turpú-
irtXoc, which is derived from Iv easily,
a n d trpairov 2 aor. of rpéVw to turn, and
properly signifies one who can * easily or
readily lurn his discourse, and accom-
modate it to t h e present occasion, for t h e
purpose of exciting mirth or laughter; a p. 1 6 2 . 2 1 . ]
wit; b u t since such persons are very a p t
to deviate into buffoonery, and scurrility,
henee éurpán-eXoc is sometimes used in a
bad sense for a buffoon, a scoffer, a
sneerer. So Isocrates in Areopag. [ p .
290.] joins t h e ivrpairéXue with r¿e o-tcww-
retv Svvapévue, those who are e x p e r t in
seoffing. A n d Aristotle, 'Ol piopóXoxoi
évrpc'iTreXoi irpocrayoptvovTai, Buffoons
called évrpáirtXoi.
I . In a good sense, Wit,
facetiousness, merriment. So used by 2 3 , 24, 29, 32,—or in a bad one, A e t s vii.
* " ' E ü T f M - s X / c r — T r a p a T5 ^ E T T F E ' O E S Q A I TI»
Mym hpñrai. E t y m o l . M a g n . [See A r i s t o p h . V e s p . T h e Greek beautifully implies t h a t this
4 6 7 . and the Scholiast.J
532 E Y 3»
Plato. [See Diod. Sic. xv. 7. xx. 63.
Cic. Epist. ad divers. vii. 3 2 . ]
I I . In a bad sense, Buffoonery, scur-
rility, satirical or obscene jesling; for,
from t h e tenor of the A p o s t l e s discourse,
he seems particularly to allude to this
last. (See H a m m o n d . ) So Hesychius
explains kvrpaireXía not only by umpórne
levity, and piopoXoyía foolish talking,
but also by aiaxpoXoyla filthy or obscene
talking. occ. E p h . v. 4. See Wetstein
and Elsner on t h e place. [See Aristot.
M o r . i. 3 1 . E u d e m . iii. 6. iElian. V. H .
v. 13. Wessel. ad Diodor. xx. 6 3 . ]
0
Ejllp 'Evcpnpla, ag, i¡, from evcpripoe-—
Praise or good reporl. occ. 2 Cor. vi. 8.
[iElian V. H . iii. 4 7 . Alciph. i. E p . 3 9 .
See S y m m . P s . xii. 5. cxxv. 2. xcix. 2 .
(where t h e sense is r a t h e r , a hymn qf
praise."]
{^p" ""Ewtyripoe, n, ó, r;, from Iv well,
good, and <píipr¡, report, fame.—Of good
fame or report, reputable. occ. Phil. iv. 8.
[ T h i s word in good Greek expressed
words of good ornen, and the verb ívfn-
péco was either to ulter such words, or,
io abstain from words qf evil ornen,
and be silent. See Spanh. ad Aristoph.
N u b . 2 6 3 . T h e n it carne to signify, ihe
utterance qf blessings or good wishes.
See Demosth. p . 800, 13. i Mac. v. 64.
S y m m . Ps. xxxii. 11. and'¿ve¡>npoemeans,
pleasant to be heard, or according to
Schl. all that expresses kind wishes.]
'Evípopéío, w, from Iv well, and
<¡>opék> to bear.—To bear or bring forth
well or plentifully. occ. L u k e xii. 16.
T h e verb or participle is used by H i p p o -
crates and J o s e p h u s , cited by K y p k e , as
t h e nouns evfopoe and evtpopía are by
others of the G r e e k writers, [as iElian
V. H . ii. 17. Phil. de .Vit. Mos. iii. t. ii.
'Evcppaíviú from ív well, and eppr'iv the
mind.—To rejoice, make joyful iu mind.
I . In a good and spiritual sense, To
rejoice, make joyful. occ. 2 Cor. ii. 2. [ P s .
civ. 15. Herodian. ii. 3 . 19. E u r . Alcest.
788.]
'Ev<j)palvopaij Pass. To be glad, joyful.
A c t s ii. 2 6 . Rom. xv. 10. Gal. iv. 2 7 .
are I I . 'Evfpaívopai, Pass. To \live in
mirth.] I n a n a t u r a l , and t h a t whether
pleasantry, in a good or indificrent, sense, as L u k e xv.
4 1 . L u k e xii. 19. xvi. 19, 'Evtypaivóptvoe
—Xaprcpiáe, Living in jovial splendour.
worldling not only indulged himself in
 KY X 333 E Y X

daiuty meáis, rich wines, music, singing, in this sense by t h e oíd writers, b u t as to
and t h e other articles of l u x u r y , b u t t h a t gratify. See T h o m . M. and Lobeck on
he did all t h i s in an elegant, sumptuous, P h r y n . p . 18. Salmas. Ling. Hellen. p .
and splendid manner. A n d observe fur- 9 8 . B u t i t occurs iu this sense D e m o s t h .
t h e r on L u k e xvi. 19, t h a t our Lord hav- 257, 2. Polyb. E x c . L e g . iii. p . 1092.
ing reproved t h e hypocrisy and erroneous Diod. Sic. xvi. 1 1 . J u d i t h viii. 2 2 . W i s d .
tenets of t h e Pharisees, ver. 15, 18, who xviii. 2. 2 M a c . i. 11.]
were covetous, and who, as Josephus, one 'Evyapida, ag, ?'/, from iv^ápiTog.
of t h a t sect, tells u s , A n t . lib. xviii. cap. —Thankfidness, giving of thanks, thanks-
I. § 3 , r>})' Siaírar S^EVTSXI^UO-LV, bdsv sg giving, whether to man, as Acts xxiv. 3 .
TO ¡.laXaicúrepov svbíSovrtg, lived sparingly, — o r to God, 1 Cor xiv. 16. 2 Cor. iv.
and indulged in no luxury, proceeds now, 15. E p h . v . 4. & a l . freq. [Polyb. viii. 14.
under a parable representing a rich self- 8. See D e m o s t h . 2 5 6 , 9. í n E p h . v.
iudulgent Epicurean Sadducee (see J o - 4. it is r a t h e r , an honourable and agree-
sephus, A n t . lib. xiii. cap. 10. § 6.), to able speech, and so X e n . Cyr. ii. 2 . 1.]
waru his hearers against t h e danger of 'Evj(ápi?og, a, ó, ?;, from év well, a n d
the wrong use of riches, and t o confirm, X«-P s thanks.—Thankful, l
grateful. occ.
in opposiiion both to the hypocritical P h a - Col. iii. 15. [ M a n y explanations a r e
risees and to t h e openly impious Saddu- given of this place, Be ye kind and gra-
cees, t h e doctrine of a future state of cious, as in Prov. x i . 16. T h i s is S c h l .
happiness or misery after death. See also and Wahl's opinión. O t h e r s say, Be ye
W e t s t e i n , and comp. u n d e r SaSdmeaioi. beneficent, as in Diod. Sic. xviii. 2 8 .
[See D e u t . x i v . 26'. x x v i i . 7. X e u . Cyr. O t h e r s , Be ye pleasing lo God. O t h e r s ,
i. 5- 7. vii. 5 . 17. H o m e r O d . ii. 3 1 1 . with t h e Syriac, Be grateful, thankful, in
T h e G r a m m a r i a n s explain t h e word by which sense t h e word occurs X e n . C y r .
svoixéopai.] viii. 3 . 4 9 . ]
'Eivajpoo-íivn, r¡g, ?/, from 'évajpwv joyful, 'EvX% ve, v.
glad, which from lv well, and <ppr)i' the I. A prayer poured forth to God. occ.
mind.—Joy, joyfulness, gladness. occ. J a m . v. 15. [ Í E s e h . D i a l . iii. 10. X e n .
A c t s ii. 2 8 . x i v . 17. [ E s t . i x . 19. J u d i t h S y m p . viii. 5 . J o b xvi. 17. Prov. xv.
xii. 12. E c c l u s . xiii. 11. X e n . Cyr. iii. 3 .
'J 8

6-] ,
I I . A vow. occ. Acts xviii. 18, (where
¡§§§P 'Ev)£ap¿<r£fc>, w, from ívyJipv^oQ.—
see Doddridge.) xxi. 2 3 . I n t h i s l a t t e r
To thank, give, or return thanks, be thank-
sense i t is not only frequently used b y
ful. See M a t . xv. 3 6 , and W e t s t e i n and
t h e L X X (for t h e H e b . Til a vow), b u t
K y p k e t h e r e . M a t . xxvi. 2 7 . L u k e xviii.
also by t h e profane w r i t e r s . See Scapula.
I I . J o h n x i . 4 1 . Rom. i. 2 1 . 1 Cor. i. 4 . [ N u m b . vi. 2, 2 1 , &c. Gen. x x x i . 1 3 . ]
E p h . v. 2 0 . I n Rom. vii. 2 5 , for svya-
"Evxop.ai, from svxv.
piT¿5 T¿> Qsü, two ancient M S S . , w i t h t h e
I. To pray t o God. occ. J a m . v. 16.
Vulg. read ?'/ x « p ? " 6 « ? > ^
l r B
a n o n e a n _

Comp. 2 Cor. xiii. 7. 3 J o h n ver. 2.

cient M S . , with two later ones, have [ N u m b . x i . 2. D e u t . ix. 2 0 . I t is con-
%ápte TÚ QÍW ; and this l a t t e r r e a d i n g strued in good Greek either with irpbg or
Griesbach marks as perhaps preferable t o t h e dative, as X e n . M e m . i. 3 . 2. D e m .
t h e common one. I n 1 Cor. xiv. 18, " I de Cor. i.]
find t h a t t h e Alexandrian and other good I I . To wish. occ. A c t s xxvi. 2 9 . xxvii.
MSS. (four ancient, and two later ones, 29. Rom. ix. 3 , ( w h e r e see Bowyer.)
Wetstein and Griesbach) and t h e S y r . 2 Cor. xiii. 9. Raphelius remarles on
Copt. and E t h i o p . versions leave o u t p5: A c t s xxvi. 2 9 , t h a t Xenophon in like
I render t h i s place therefore t h u s , / give m a n n e r joins ivxopai with a dative, as
thanks to God, speaking in more foreign
Cyropaed. lib. ii. ' E Y S A ' M E N O I T O " I S
la?iguages than you all. S t . P a u l used 0ECTLS r a áyáOa, Praying to the gods
evxapLTsiv in t h e two preceding verses for for good t h i n g s ; and lib. vii. 'Ot Bé
giving thanks in t h e public service of t h e ' E Y S A ' M E N O I T O " I S 9 E 0 " I 2 — T h e y
church, and so i t means here, as I t h i n k . " having prayed to the gods—. So t h e t e x t
Bp. Pearce, whose interpretation is em- may be rendered, / could p r a y to God,
braced and enforccd by M a c k n i g h t , whom that, §c. See other instances in K y p k e .
see.—'Ev^apiséopai, ¿¡.tai, Pass. To be ac-
[ S e e J e r . xiii. 2 2 . xxii. 2 7 . -íEsch. D i a l ,
knomledged with thanks, or thanksgiving.
ii. 6.]
occ. 2 Cor. i. 1 1 . [ T h i s word is not used | "EuxpnToc, a, ó, h, from iv well, or in-
 E Y íl 334 E * Ií

tens. a n d j¿p?)<?oc useful.— Useful, very fernal Furics, 'EvfiéviSee t h e góod-na-

useful. occ. 2 T i m . ii. 2 1 . iv. 1 1 . Philem. lured goddesses. See more on this s u b -
ver. 1 1 . [ S e e Diod. Sic. iv. 7 6 . v. 4 0 . j e c t u n d e r 'ApfeEpoc- [ O n this subject
X e n . Mem. iii. 8. 5. Prov. x x x i . 13.] there are curious differences: Schleusner
'Evu^u^Éw, w, from evxpvyjoe courageous, says t h a t Greeks a n d Romans reckon au-»
which from ev well, and -¿vyj¡ the soul, spices on t h e left hand lucky, and W a h l
mind.'—To be of good courage or comfort. says t h e same as to t h e Greeks. Now we
occ. Phil. ii. 1 9 ; where Kypke cites J o - have sufficient proof from Cicero de D i v .
sephus u s i n g this V. A n t . lib. x i . cap. 6. ii. SO, t h a t t h u n d e r on t h e left was lucky
§ 9, concerning A r t a x e r x e s or Ahasuerus, among t h e Romans, while from H o m e r .
who, rí,v "Eodnpa ' E Y Í Y X E T N nal ra Iliad B . 3 5 3 . á n d I . 3 5 6 . and Xen. Anab.
tepeírro) •KpoaZoKq.v irapedáppvvev, encour- iii. 19, i t appears t h a t t h u n d e r on t h e
aged E s t h e r to be qf good comfort, a n d to r i g h t was esteemed propitious among t h e
expect better things. [ P r o v . x x x . 3 1 . ] Greeks. A n d P o t t e r (quoted in 'Api^e-
'EvaSía, ac, fj, from ev well, good, and poc) says t h a t all left-handed omens were
tvSa perf. mid. of ofw to smell.—A good good in Rome, b u t r i g h t - h a n d e d ones in
smell, a good odour. occ. 2 Cor. ii. 1 5 . Greece. Certainly Aei^ibe is usually for-
E p h . v. 2 . P h i l . i v . 18. [See X e n . Symp. t ú n a t e , and Xcuoe t h e contrary. So a£r¿c
ii. 3 . 2 . Herodian i. 12. 3 . Diod. Sic. iii. Serios in X e n . Cyrop. ii. 1. 1. Anab. vi. 1.
4 5 . ] T h e phrase óaprjv ívooSíae, a sweet- 15. a n d Schneider, L e x . X e n . v. aerbe,
smelling savour or odour, is very fre- especially observes, t h a t " Befra a u g u r i a , "
q u e n t l y used by t h e L X X for t h e H e b . were reckoned fortúnate by t h e Greeks.
mrpj rvl a savour or odour qf rest, which I t is singular too, t h a t V i g e r , iii. 4 . c. 4 ,
is often applied to t h e P a t r i a r c h a l and L e - to whom Schleusner a n d W a h l refer for
vitical sacrifices. See Gen. viii. 2 1 . Exod. a u t h o r i t y , directly contradiets them, a n d
x x i x . 18. L e v . i. 9, 13, 17- ii. 2 . iii. 5 , says, as P a r k h u r s t does, t h a t as left-
16. iv. 3 1 . vi. 15, 2 1 . viii. 2 1 , 2 8 . [ T h e handed omens were reckoned unlucky by
sacrifices so called were those where frank- t h e Greeks, they would n o t use áphepoQ,
incense, &c. were used, b u t this was for- b u t took a word of more auspicious sound
bidden for t h e sin-offering (Lev. v. 11.) to describe t h e left. O n t h e other hand,
as being t h e effect of sin, a n d therefore sinisler was unlucky in L a t i n ; a n d á p -
not pleasing to God ; y e t Christ is called iTEpoe bpvie in Homer means propitious^\
a sacrifice lie oopr¡v évioSíag, although a 'EajáWoLiai, from EVI upon, and aXXopai
sin-offering, probably, because as he t h u s to leap.—To leap upon. occ. A c t s xix. 1 6 .
reconciled God and m a n , his sacrifice was [ 1 Sam. x. 6 . ]
pleasing to God. D e y l i n g Obss. Sacr. i. $¡§5° 'Efínrai,, Adv. from EVI upon, at,
3 5 2 , after W i t s i u s , M i s c e l l . j . p . 5 1 1 . ] and 'diTaí, once.
'Eváivvfioc, a, b, ?), from év well, good, 1. Once, once for all. occ. Rom. vi. 10.
and wvvpa jEolic for oro/xa, a ñame. H e b . vii. 2 7 . ix. 12. x. 10.
I . Of a good ñame, having a good or ' 2 . At once. occ. 1 Cor. x v . 6.
fortúnate ñame. T h u s used in Lucian. EH^ií0 'Eáecñvog, i], ov, from ''E^EÍTOC
I I . The left, as opposed to t h e right. Ephesus, t h e ñame of a city, t h e m e t r o -
'E¿; svuivvpwv (pépojv parís, n a m e l y ) , O n polis of lona, a country of Asia Minor.-—
the left side. M a t . - x x . 2 1 . xxv. 3 3 . & al. Of Ephesus, Ephesian. occ. Rev. ii. 1.
KaraXi7róVr£c ávrr)v évwvvpov, Leaving i t Hgp 'Eajécnos, a, ov, from
13
"Efeoos
on the left. Acts xxi. 3 ; so W e t s t e i n cites E p h e s u s . — A n Ephesian. occ. A c t s x i x .
from L u c i a n , speaking of navigators, Ti)v 28, 34, 3 5 . xxi. 2 9 .
Kpiírnv A E S I ' A N Xatóvrec, Leaving Crete ffggp 'Eajzvperrjc, 5, b, from éfevpíocto
to the right.—Tbv—évwvvpov, The left, to invent, which from EVÍ intens. a n d ev-
foot namely, Rev. x. 2 . [ E x o d . xiv. 2 2 , píoKoj to find.—An inventor, occ. Rom. i.
2 9 . N u m b . x x . 1 7 . ] — A s to t h e reason of 30. * Anacreon uses this word, O d e xii.
this l a t t e r signification, t h e left side was line 3 , where he calis Bacchus, -bv 'E'I'EY-
b y t h e G r e e k s superstitiously reckoned of P E T I T N xophae, t h e inventor oí the choral
evil ornen, a n d i t was p a r t of t h e same dance.
superstition t o cali such t h i n g s by more 'Efypepía, ac, //, from éfypepoQ daily,
auspicious ñ a m e s ; and what couid be lasting one day.
more auspicious than évwvvpos? This, I . Properly, A daily course, a mini-
therefore, t h e y used for t h e left side, in * ['E'jp/o-xw i s to dhcovcr, and ItptvpítrKut to in-
t h e same m a n n e r as t h e y styled t h e In- vmt, according to the Sciiol. o n S o p h . A j . 107-1.J
 E * I 335
slralion lasting a day. So Suidas, ' H
rrje iifiépae Xeirtipyía. [Polyb. xxii. 10. 6.]
I I . A periodical course, a ministration
to be pcrformed after a certain period qf
days, or the family or class which were
to attend such a periodical ministration.
occ. L u k e i. 5, 8. Comp. i Chron. xxiv.
5, 10, 19. 2 Chron. x x x i . 2. N e h . xiii. 3 0 .
I t appears from a comparison of 1 Chron.
xxiv. 19, with chap. ix. 2 7 , and with 2
Chron. xxiii. 8, and 2 K i n g s xi. 5—7,
t h a t these courses of t h e Priests were
weekly, or of seven days each, and began
and ended on t h e S a b b a t h . — I n the L X X
this word sometimes answers to t h e H e b .
JTipVnD divisions, distributions, of the
Priests or Levites namely, but most pro-
perly to t h e H e b . ¡TiDU?a charge, mi-
nistry. See 2 Chron. xxxi. 16. N e h . xiii.
30. I t is used also 1 E s d r . (Apocr.) i. 2.
—Josephus has t h e same phrase as S t .
L u k e , ch. i. 5 , when he calis M a t t a t h i a s
'IEPEY'S ' E S ' E * H M E P I ' A S 'Iwápigoc,
a priest qf the course o f J o a r i b . A n t . lib.
xii. cap. 6. § 1. (comp. 1 Mac. ii. 1.) A n d
in his Life, § 1, he applies ' E ^ u t p i c in
t h e same sense: " M y descent," says he,
". is not only from t h e priests, áXXa KOÍ
¿K rrje TtpíirriQ ' E $ H M E ' P I A 0 2 TÜV éucoai-
recro-ápwv, b u t also from t h e first course of
the twenty-four." [ W e may j u s t m e n -
tion t h a t David (see 1 Chron. xxiv. 4. 2
Chron. viii. 14. Nehem. xiii. 30.) and J o -
seph. A n t . vii, 15. 7, divided all t h e sa-
cerdotal class into twenty-four classes,
sixteen of t h e descendants of E l e a z a r ,
eight of those of I t h a m a r . O n t h e changes
in these after t h e captivity, see Lightfoot,
H e b r . on L u k e i. 5 and 8. T h e word oc-
curs 1 Chron. xxiii. 6, and elsewhere.]
'E0j)Ltepog, a, ¿, from itrl for,
and ¡¡pipa a day.—Daily, sufficient for a
day. occ. J a m e s ii. 15. See Wolfius and
Wetstein on t h e place. [So Aristides, t.
ii. p. 3 9 8 . Dion. H a l . viii. 4 1 . Diod. Sic.
iii. 4 1 . I t is applied also in another sense,
qf a day, living only a day. See E u s t a t h .
ad H o m . Od. 4>. 85.]
Elgp" 'Eajitcréonai, Spai, from ¿Vi unto,
and ÍKvéopai to come, which see u n d e r
'AajiKvéopai.—To come or reach unto. occ.
2 Cor. x. 1 3 , 14. [ X e n . Cyr. i. 1. 5 . Sym.
Job xxxii. 12. Ecclus. xliii. 3 2 . ]
'EcpítnpL, from éwl by, near, or upon,
and hr¡pi to stand.
I. To stand by or near, to present one's
self. [ L u k e iv. 3 9 . Acts x. 17- xxii. 13,
20. Gen. xxiv. 4 3 . B u t in several pass-
ages ( L u k e ii. 9. xxiv. 4. A c t s xii. 7.
E XO
xxiii. 9.) this word is applied to t h e a p -
pearance o f ] heavenly visitants with p e -
culiar propriety, being used in like m a n -
ner by the purest Greek writers, as may
be seen in Raphelius on Acts xxiii. 1 1 ,
and in Wetstein on L u k e ii. 9. [ H e r o d o t .
iii. 141. v. 56. Dion. H a l . vii. 67. Achill.
T a t . iv. p . 2 1 9 . ]
I I . I m p l y i n g local motion, To come in
or near. L u k e ii. 3 8 . x. 4 0 . [ A c t s xi. 11.]
I I I . [?*o come upon unexpectedly. L u k e
xxi. 34. In t h e following passages some-
w h a t of hoslility is implied. L u k e x x . 1.]
A c t s iv. 1. vi. 12. xxiii. 2 7 . To assault.
A c t s xvii. 5. [ S o J e r . x x i . 2. 1 Sam. xv.
5 1
-3 . . . '
I V . To be instant, imminent, at hand.
[ 1 Thess. v. 3 . ] 2 T i m . iv. 6. [ D e m o s t h .
p. 287- 5.]
V. To be instant, urge. 2 T i m . iv. 2 .
[Diod. Sic. xiv. 95.]
V I . To be present. occ. Acts xxviii: 2.
So Polybius has rov 'E4>E2Tíi"TA tótyov
for a present surrounding darkness. See
Raphelius. [ R a t h e r to vex or attaclc.
Polyb. viii. 3 . 7.]
'ES^AGA', Heb.—Ephphata, that is,
Be thou opened. I t m a y be considered
either as t h e 2d pers. sing. imperat. of
N i p h . n n a n , or r a t h e r of H i t h . n n a n n
(the n being in pronunciation softened
into 5 ) from the V. nn£) to open. The
ancient Syriac versión expresses it by t h e
H i t h . form, n n a ñ K . occ. M a r k vii. 3 4 .
[ V o r s t . Phil. Sacr. c. 37.]
"ExOpa, ae, i), from é%6pbe.—Enmity.
occ. L u k e xxiii. 12. Rom. viii. 7 . Gal. v.
20. James iv. 4. E p h . ii. 15, 16, where see
M a c k n i g h t . — I n these two last t e x t s it
denotes the cause or occasion of enmity.
[In Rom. viii. 7, it is a state of enmity,
or, according to Schleusner, what dis-
pleases God. T h e word occurs 3 E s d r .
v. 74. T h u c y d . ii. 6 8 . G e n . iii. 15. N u m .
xxxv. 20.]
'E^flpos, 5, ó, or íyBpbc, a, bv, from
íyQog hatred, enmity, which from '¿^opai
io adhere (say some), because hatred is
a p t to adhere to t h e mind, and become
invetérate.
I . I n an active sense, An enemy, ad-
versary. See M a t . v. 4 3 . x. 3 6 . xiii. 2 5 .
L u k e i. 7 1 . xix. 4 3 . x x . 4 3 . Phil. iii. 18.
[ I t is applied to any t h i n g which was
hostile to or impeded Christianity, as
false teachers. 1 John ii. 18. Gal. v. 2.
Evil men, 1 John iii. 6. So it is used of
death. 1 Cor. xv. 2 6 , as an enemy io our
attaining happiness.']
 E X 12 E X Ll.

I I . In a passive sense, A person hated See also W e t s t e i n ; and comp 1 Cor. xi.
or rejected as an enemy. Rom. v. 10. xi. 22, rég pr) ijovrag the poor. So in A r i s -
28. In this latter view Homer applies tophanes, P l u t . line 5 9 5 , nlg íyovrag
t h e word, II. ix. line 3 1 2 . & al. means the opulent or rich. Comp. Kypke
on L u k e viii. 18. [In M a t . xiii. 12. xxv.
' E X S P O ' S yap fÁQí XETVO?, o/ícuf 'AfSao ffúXí](T;v
' O f x' érepov plv XEÓSEÍ Iw (ppltriv, á'\?\.o §; ftú'&i,
29, Schleusner translates t h e verb by to
use what one has got. So Kuinoel. T h e
W h o ¿lares t h i n k one t h i n g and another tell
harshness of which P a r k h u r s t speaks, is
* " B y m e ' s dctesled," as the gates of hell.
POPE. explained by comparing M a t . xv. 29. O n
t h e use of 'íypvrtc in t h e sense of rich, see
[ E i t h e r with 9E«, or even alone, says Valcken. ad H e r o d . vi. 22. and ad E u r .
Schleusner, it implies an impious man, Phcen. 4 0 8 . Grarv. ad Cic. E p . vii. 2 9 .
one hated hy God. So Soph. OEd. T . A r r i a n . E x p . A l . ii. 1. iEschin. Dial. ii.
1349. JElian. V. H . ii. 2 3 . ] 10. E u r . Alcest. 5 8 . Virg. Georg. ii. 4 9 .
íjjgp*" "%yj2va, rjg, ?;, from t h e mase. I n 2 Cor. viii. 1 1 . ÍK TS 'éyeiv, is out of
'¿%IQ, LOQ, ó, the male viper, which may be your property. See Nehem. viii. 10.]
deduced from '¿-^opai to adhere (as Acts I I I . To have, as a wife. M a t . xiv. 4.
xxviü. 3 . comp. Kadáirrw.) M a r k vi. 18. 1 Cor. vii. 2. Comp. J o h n
I . A viper, properly t h e female. occ. iii. 29.—or a husband. J o h n iv. 17, 18.
A c t s xxviü. 3 . [Artemid. iv. 4 8 . Aq. I s . [See also M a t . xxii. 2 8 . 1 Cor. v. 1. D e u t .
lix. 5.] xxviü. 30. 2 Chron. xi. 2 1 . 1 M a c . xi. 9.
I I . Tevvíipara. íyih'úv, Offspring qf Valck. ad H e r o d . ix. 76. See Gal. iv.
vipers, i. e. a wicked brood of wicked pa- 2 7 . ]
rents (comp. A c t s vii. 5 1 . ) , with particu- I V . To have, obtain. Mat. v. 46. vi. 1.
lar allusion to their father, the devil, t h a t [xxvii. 65.] Rom. i. 1 3 , where see K y p k e .
oíd serpent. Comp. Gen. iii. 15. J o h n viii. [ E s t . i. 11. I t is to get or obtain also in
4 4 . Acts xiii. ) 0 ; and see Bochart, vol. iii. M a t . xix. 16, 2 1 . John v. 24, 3 9 , 4 0 .
3 / 5 . occurs Mat. iii. 7- xii. 3 4 . xxiii. 3 3 . P h i l . iii. 9- Amos vi. 13. Hesiod. O p p .
L u k e iii. 7. [ E u r . Ion. 1262.] & D . 126.]
"EXa V. To hold, retain. 1 T i m . i. 19. iii. 9.
I . To have, in almost any manner. V I . To hold, esteem, count. M a t . xiv.
M a t . iii. 9, 14. vii. 29. xxvii. 16. John v. 5. xxi. 20. M a r k x i . 32. A c t s x x . 24.
4 2 . 1 Cor. xiii. 1. H e b . ix. 4. Rev. iii. 1. Wetstein on Mat. xiv. 5, cites Isocrates
& al. freq. [ I n H e b . ix. 4, it is to con- applying t h e V . in t h e same sense. See
iain, and so Rev. x x i . 7 . ] — O n T i t . ii. 8, also K y p k e . So L u k e xiv. 18, 19, " E ^ E
see Wetstein, who cites the Greek writers JUE irap-nrripévov may be rendered, Reckon
using t h e same, or a similar phraseology. me excused. T h e phrase in this view is
A n d on 1 Thess. i. 9. observe, t h a t many as agreeable to t h e Greek as to t h e L a t i n
M S S . , six of which ancient, several an- s t y l e ; so there seems no sufficient reason
cient versions, and eight printed editions, for calling it a Latinism. See Wolfius.
have '¿(TyopF.i'; which reading is accord- [Phil. ii. 29. Diog. L . Vit. Sol. p. 40. ed.
ingly approved by Mili and Wetstein, and 1615. Lysias 6 1 5 , & c ]
by Griesbach received into the t e x t . V I L To have in one's power, to be
I I . To have, possess. M a t , iii. 4. xii. able, can. M a r k xiv. 8. Heb. vi. 13. Comp.
11. xiii. 9, 14. [xviii. 9. M a r k x. 22, 2 3 . ] J o h n viii. 6. Acts iv. 14. 2 Cor. viii. I I .
Acts xxiv. 16. & al. freq. Mat. xiii. 12, 2 P e t i. 15. K y p k e on M a r k shows t h a t
But whosoever hath not, from him shall i\tiv is used in this sense with o, r¡, n ,
be taken away even t h a t he h a t h . A s this ¿ig and t h e like by t h e best Greek writers.
expression may seem harsh to a classical [See also L u k e vii. 4 2 . xii. 4. (comp. Mat.
reader, it may not be amiss to observe x. 28.) xiv. 14. Prov. iii. 2 7 . Xen. Mem.
with D r . M a c k n i g h t , t h a t Juvenal has i. 2. 4 1 . E u r . Phcen. 427. Herod. viii. 3 .
used a parallel one, Sat. iii. lines 208, 2 1 . So in L a t i n Cic. ad F a m . i. 3 . A u l .
209, Gel. xvii. 2 0 . ] _ .
N i l h a b u i t Codrus; áf tamen i l l u d
V I I I . To seize, jjossess, as trembling
P e r d i d i t , infeliz, totum nil: and astonishment. M a r k xvi. 8. T h e best
G r e e k writers apply 'iyw in like manner.
Codrus had nothing; yet, poor wretch ! he lust
That nothing. See Wetstein, and H o m e r II. vi. line 137,
and II. xviii. line 247, and for other in-
* M y heart detcsts h i m POPE. stances, see Kypke. [Hesiod. Theog. 588.
 ii x a • 337 E X íl

Polyb. v. 9. C. Schleusner thinks, t h a t in péto), Who had been now four days in Ihe
M a t . xi. 18, t h e verb should be taken tombj on which text Raphelius cites t h e
passively in t h i s sense. T h e passive is' similar passages from A r r i a n E p i c t e t . lib.
used of diseases. L u c i a n . t. iii. p . 4 8 . edit. ii. cap. 15, "HAII T P I ' T H N 'HME'PAN
Reitz.] ' E X 0 N T 0 2 a u r a ríJc aTro^íJc, He being
I X . [ T o ajford, bring, canse. 1 J o h n nom in the third day of his abstinence
iv. 18. So probably Rom. i. 13. H e r o d . v. from food, i. e. having now abstained till
101. T h u c y d . ii. 6 1 . H o m . Iliad ÍI. 794. the t h i r d d a y ; and, "HAII Se T P I ' T H N
Kypke Obss. Sacr. ii. p. 150. I t is p u t 'HME'PAN civrc¡> - a TrXa "EXONT1 Karay-
for Tvapíyio.~] yiXXs-ai, When he was now on the third
X . Joined with an Adverb it may be day of his voyage it was told him. J o h n
rendered To be. A c t s xii. 15, "OYTÍ22 ix. 2 1 , 'Avrbc yXiidav '¿x > ^e has age,
el

"EXEIN To be so, I t a se h a b e r e ; compare he is of proper or suilicient age. A l b e r t i

A c t s vii. 1. xvii. 1 1 ; ÍIwc ¿x > Hom and Wetstein produce several instances of
Hcri

they are, or fare, A c t s xv. 3 6 ; especially the like use of this expression in t h e best
with Adverbs expressing an affeciion of Greek authors. A n d H e r o d o t u s , lib. iii.
body or mind, t h u s Kaicüg '¿x > ^ cap. 14, and 16, uses t h e expression, Ti/v
£iV e

iii, "sick. M a t . iv. 2 4 . viii. 1 6. & al. 'E<j- ¿ivr,)v 'IIAIKI'HN " E X E I N , To be of t h e
%árwe '¿xeiv, To be at the last extremity, same age.
M a r k v. 2 3 ; KaXóüe '¿X^LV, TO be well, X I I . Of space. To be distant, for
M a r k xvi. 1 8 ; Kop\pó-£pov '¿x > ^ anéxio. A c t s i. 1 2 ; where, however, t h e
eL,J e

better, to amcnd in health, lo recover, learned and aecurate K y p k e remarles, t h a t

J o h n iv. 52 ; 'E-óipioc ¿X ' ^° ^
uv
dy, no one has yet proved t h a t '¿x¿iv is ever
e rea

A c t s xxi. 13. In these phrases eavrbv, used by the Greek writers for ¿nT¿x >' i° £l

iavn)v, iav-b, him—her—or it—self, are be distant. According to a h i n t therefore

understood ; or else in the four former we of Alberti on L u k e xxiv. 13, he is r a t h e r
may supply criopa the body, which is ex- inclined to refer SaSeára '¿xov ¿coy to the
pressed by Xenophon, Memor. Socrat. lib. mountain itself, q. d. a sabbath day's
iii. cap. 1 2. § 1. TO' 3£2"MA.KaK£>c %x - ¡journey in h e i g h t ; and he observes t h a t
0VTa

'¿XSLV
See also t h e passages cited by Wetstein on G r e e k often relates to m a g n i t u d e
1 0

MaXaiáav, M a t . iv. 2 3 . T o this sense of or size. A sabbath day s journey is about

being belongs also t h e expression rb vvv eight stadia, or one English m i l e ; and in
for rara ro vvv ix i
ov
'¿Xov '"pñypa or t h e Complete Syst. of Geography, vol. ii.
e -

Xprjpa, ul mine se res habet, as the case is p. 124, col. 1, we read t h a t " M o u n t Oli-
a t present. A c t s xxiv. 2 5 . So in Tobit vet—is reckoned near a mile in height."
vii. 11, ¿XXo. TO* K ' f N "EXON i/ceús [ F i s c h . on Well. T . iii. P . ii. p . 64,"says
yiva, nevertheless for t h e present be t h a t is used for enréxw; but W a h l
merry. T h i s phrase is very usual in the says j u s t l y , t h a t in all the instances ad-
Greek writers, as m a y be seen in W e t - duced ( X e n . C y r . vii. 1. 3 8 . H o m . I i .
stein and Kypke on A c t s xxiv. 2 5 . [ S c h l . xiii. 747. Soph. E l . 224,) the sense is ra-
says rightly, t h a t '¿xov is r e d u n d a n t here. t h e r lo hinder7\
T h e phrase means merely, For the pre- X I I I . F o r t h e phrases avay^nv '¿x '>
íu

sent. See Reitz. ad Lucian. Asin. c. 2 0 . ] iv ya^pl '¿x^iv, vópnv ix >

íLV
Sec
X I . W i t h words expressive of time. 'Avayicij, raTiyp) riópy, &c. &c.
To be. J o h n viii. 5 7 , TÍEVTÍpcovra irr¡ Hirió X I V . "Exo/xai, Pass. * To adhere to,
ÍX Í> Thou a r t not yet fifty years, liter- be conjoined or connected with, q. d. To
£¿

ally, Thou hast not yet fifty years. T h u s be holden by. I t governs a genitive case,
the F r e n c h would say, Vous »'avez pas occ. H e b . vi. 9, 'Exópsva nioTnpías, Things
encoré cinquaule années. So Josephus, which are conjoined oí connected with -

A n t . lib. i. cap. 11. § 2, speaking of Sa- salvation f. So Lucian H e r m o t i m . tom.

rán, has t h e phrase, 'Aurijc piv évvevi'i- i. p . 6 0 1 , TlapaTroXv yap ravr cipsívio Kai
KOVTO. "ETH 'EXOY'2112, She being ninety
* " P r a m o n e c - — T y r o n e s , q u a n t n m v i s varis! sint
years oíd. J o h n v. 5, T p i c t K o v r a OKTLO 'é~r¡ significaciones ( h u j u s verb i e-;iaSc.i) eas tamen omnes
eX L0V
rr¡ ao-Qevéia, Being thirty-eighl primariam notionem redoleré, qua? est adhecrere;
years in an infrmiiy or hifirm. J o h n v. construitur tune cura geuerandi c a s u . " H o o g e v e e n
6. Tvovc orí TTOXVV >/¿>r/ xpórov '¿x > Kno?v- in V i g e r i I d i o t i s m . in voc.
cl

•f ¡Schleusner s a y s here, that ra I^O'UEIDI m e a n

-

ing that he had been nom a long time

consta-noy, pcrscverancc, adlietencc to, and trans-
(in t h a t condition, namely.) J o h n xi. 17- lates we are persuadid that yon mili be eonitant lo
Tétro-apae ijpépae ijcri '¿xorra iv r¿> pvr¡- Christianity.']
 EOS
' E M Í T A O S u fUKpág 'EXO'MENA Xíyatc,
W h a t you say is much better, and con-
necled or accompanied wilh no small hope.
A n d iElian in E l s n e r , TíoXXa -póvírarre
Kal irrÍTrova Kat KINAY"NQN 'EXO'MENA
rióv lo-^á-w)', H e commanded many t h i n g s
which were both laborious, and joined or
accompanied wilh t h e greatest dangers.
Seo more in Elsner aud K y p k e . — [ H e n e e
it i s ] To adjoin, be nexl in place, oceurs
M a r k i. 38. Tac eyvpévag KoipoTróXttQ. T h e
adjoining, neighbouring, or n e x t iowns.
So Josephus, A n t . lib. xi. cap. 8. § 6. T a c
'EXOME'NAS wóXets. See also Elsner,
Raphelius, Wetstein, and K y p k e on Mark,
who cite other instances of t h e like appli-
cation of t h e word in t h e Greek writers.
[ C o m p . N u m b . xxii. 5, 11. J u d g e s iv. 11.
T h u c y d . ii. 96. A n d ] — T o be nexl or
immedialely following in time. occ. L u k e
xiii. 3 3 . A c t s xx. 15, Ti) iyopí'.n), On the
n e x t , vpépq day namely, which is ex-
pressed A c t s xxi. 2 6 . So Polybius, TIí"t
'EXOME'NIIt, and TIl'N 'EXOME'NHN
'HME'PAN. See E l s n e r , and compare 1
M a c . iv. 2 8 . [ 1 Chron. x. 8 . 1 M a c . iv. 2 8 . ]
X V . [ W e m u s t observe t h a t in Greek,
'¿X°h with a preposition and noun, forms a
pcriphrasis for t h e verb most nearly con-
nected with t h e noun. T h u s ¿x eLV
iinyvtocrít is k-myívwttKítv. Rom. i. 28.
J a m e s ii. 1. 1 T i m . iii. 4 . T h u c y d . ii. 18.
Sallust. B . C. 3 1 . — W e may ñotice t h e
following phrases, M a t . v. 2 3 , '¿x ílv
Kara ripbc to have a cause qf complaint
against one. See M a r k xi. 25. Rev.
ii. 4. I n J o h n xiv. 3 1 , '¿x £LV TL
' tv
h T i v
is lo have poner over one, according to
Schleusner and T i t t m a n . I n Acts xxiv.
19, É'x"i T,OOC -ira, is to have a charge
/
against one; b u t in 2 Cor. v. 12, i t is
to have the means of defending yourself
against one. In M a t . x v . 3 0 , '¿x r' ®' ELV
íavrS is to bring with one's self; b u t in
M a t . xxvi. 11. M a r k ii. 19. xiv. 7, i t is
to be with7\
"ESiS, an A d v . of time and place. It
either governs a genitive case of nouns,
or is p u t before verbs indieative, or some-
timos infinitive with t h e n e u t e r article
gen. - 5 .
338 EOS
1. Of time, Until, unto. I t generally
imports t h e mere interval of time to a
certain term named, so as to exelude t h e
time beyond, as M a t . ii. 15. xxvii. 45, 64.
L u k e xv. 4. A c t s viii. 4 0 . & al. B u t i t
is also sometimes intermedíate, and signi-
fies an interval, so as not necessarily to
exelude t h e time following. T h u s when
it is said, M a t . i. 2 5 , And he knew her
not E(ÚQ 5 * (which, by t h e way, is for '¿toe
Xpbva, §, i. e. iv J ) until she broughl forth
her first-born son, it by no means follows
from henee t h a t h e knew her cftcrwards.
Comp. .Mat. xxviii. 20. L u k e xxiv. 4 9 . 1
T i m . iv. 13. 2 P e t . i. 1 9 ; and L X X in
Ps. ex. 1. Gen. viii. 7. 1 Sam. xv. 35. 2
Sam. vi. 2 3 . J o b xxvii. 5. Isa. xxii. 14.
2. Whilc, whilsl. M a t . xiv. 2 2 . M a r k
vi. 4 5 .
3. Of place, Unto, even unto. M a t , xxiv.
2 3 , 3 1 . xxvi. 58. L u k e ii. 15. A c t s xiii.
47. So of persons, L u k e iv. 4 2 . A c t s i x .
38.—"Ewc itc, Even unto, as jar as. L u k e
xxiv. 50. Wetstein cites t h e same phrase
from Polybius and iElian. [Levit. xxiii.
14. 1 Mac. ii. 58. Diod. Sic. i. 27. Polvb.
ii. 5 2 . 7.]
4. Of síate, Unto, even unto. M a t . xxvi.
38.
E v
5. Of number, Even, so much as. Rom.
See iii. 12. T h i s seems an Hellenistical s e n s e ;
t h e word is t h u s used by t h e L X X , P s .
xiv. 3. liii. 3 , answering t o H e b . t D J even.
TL
6. " E w c iív, with a Subjunctivc Mcod,
Till, until, whether excluuing t h e time
following, as M a t . ii. 13. x. 11, 23. & al.
— o r not, as M a t . v. 18. xii. 20. & al.
7. " E w c ora. \Whilst. M a t . v. 25. un-
til. L u k e xv. 8. xxii. 16, 18. J o h n ix. 18.
See 1 Sam. xxx. 4. and 1 Mac. xiv. 1 0 . ]
[ 8 . " E w c 71-ÓYE, HOW long? Until when?
M a t . xvii. 17. M a r k ix. 9. J o h n x . 2 4 . —
E
( " E w c by itself has this meaning in Polyb.
iv. 3.) 2 Sam. ii. 26.]
[9. " E w c w c k , SO far as this, of place.
See L u k e xxiii. 5. Sym. J o b xxxviii.
11.]
* [ T h i s phrase oceurs i n G e n . x x v i . 1 3 . M a t .
x v i i . 0. x v i i i . 3 0 , 3 4 . Lufre xiii. 2 1 . I n M a t , x i v .
2 2 . x x v i . 3 6 , it i s , accortUng to Schleusner, vihiUt.]
 339
Z A £2
f, Zc/rt. T h e sixth of t h e more
9 modera Greek letters, but t h e
seventb of t h e ancient, in which F , T ,
¡iav, (whence the Román F , f,) corre-
sponded to t h e oriental Vau: henee as ?
is still used for the ÍTríirr¡fJ-ov, or numeri-
cal character of six, so is £ for seven.
Zeta, then, in t h e Cadméan alphabct an-
swers to t h e H e b r e w a n d Phenician 1 Zain
in form, order, and p o w e r ; but its G r e e k
ñame seems to be corrupted from t h a t of
its sister sibilant !f, Zaddi or Jadda, and
to be softened into Zeta, in order to chime
with t h e ñames of the two following letters
Ela and Theta,
Zúio, (ü, ¿¡rje, (i), &c.
I . To Uve, have life, be ulive, n a t u -
ral! v, M a t . xxvii. 6 3 . L u k e ii. 3 6 . A c t s
xvii. 2S. xxii. 22. [Rom. xiv. 1 ] . In this
place, the verb serves to express an ad-
juration. See N u m b . xiv. 2 1 . J u d g . viii.
19. 1 Sam. xvii. 56.] & al. freq.—Luke x x .
3 8 , IlcWfe yap avTi¡> (wtnv. Therefore
(comp. Pcip 4.) all (the faithful) .live with
respect to him. God considers t h e m not
as dead, but as liviug, since he can, and
certainly will, recall t h e m , i. e. their
whole persons to life. T h e r e is a very
similar passage in the Treatise concerning
the Maccabees ascribed to Josephus, § 16,
where t h e mother eneourages her seven
sons r a t h e r to die than to transgress tlie
law of God, " since they knew brl ót ota
rov Qebv awodvíjcncovrEr, ZO'SI T£2~t
©EÍ2~t, ácnrcp 'A*spaa¡x, T I T C U I K ical 'Ia/abS,
ical iravreQ bi 7rarpiap)¿at, t h a t t h e y who
died for God, lived unto God, as A b r a -
ham, Isaac, and Jacob, aud all t h e p a t r i -
archs." See more in Wetstein and Kypke.
[Schleusner translates here, All have their
Ufe through God's goodnessf\—The par-
ticiple '(wv * is [sometimes] used in a t r a n -
sitive sense, or imports not only living,
b u t causing io Uve, vivifying, quickeniug.
See J o h n vi. 5 1 . (comp. verses 3 3 , 50, 5.4,
58.) Acts vii. 3 8 . [comp. P s . cxix. 51.] 1
P e t . i . 3 . t H e b . x . 2 0 , where see Macknight.
Comp. J o h n iv. 10, and Campbell there.
The V. is likewise applied transitively by
* [ I n H e b . iv. 1 2 . it o n l y expresses lite, ncliviiy
qflifi.]
t [See, however, Sense V I L ]
Z Aíi
t h e L X X , P s . xii. 2. cxix. 40, 50. cxliii.
11. [ I t seems probable t h a t ú o o c f w n - a
in H e b . x. 20, has somewhat of this sense,
leading lo life. In J o h n iv. 10, Schleus-
ner says t h a t (wv is never-failing, in op-
position to s t a g n a n t waters *. A n d in
this sense, as T i t t m a n says, no doubt t h e
woman understood i t ; b u t he agrees with
P a r k h u r s t , in t h i n k i n g t h a t our L o r d used
'(wv for (WOTTOISV. W a h l halts betwcen
t h e two opinions. I cannot doubt t h e
correetness of T i t t m a n and P a r k h u r s t ,
when I compare Rev. vii. 17, énrl '(¿¡crac,
triiycLQ vóciruiv, and xxi. 6. xxii. 17. C h r y -
sostom t h i n k s t h a t our L o r d m e a n t t h e
gift of t h e Holy Spirit. Theodoret and
others refer the meaning to baptism. In
1 P e t . ii. 5, Schleusner construes XÍOoi
'(WVTÍQ as natural, not artificial slones,
like Virgil's viva saxa ( i E n . i. 171.) b u t
passes over t h e same phrase in verse 4 ,
applied to Christ. W a h l explains i t in
verse 4, by OQ, H-e í'(r¡, tvlto while he lived;
and in verse 5, in t h e same way, avrol,
'(ÜVTZQ, ye, while ye Uve. B u t L e i g h t o n
is, I think, r i g h t . Christ is called a liv-
ing stone, " not only because of his i m -
mortality, b u t because he is t h e principie
of spiritual and eterna! life to u s , " " a liv-
iug and enlivening stone." A n d believers
are so called perhaps, " as drawing life
from him by virtue of their unión with
him, as from a living foundation." Ro-
senmüller avoids coming to the point.
M a c k n i g h t says, on t h e first phrase, t h a t
t h e Apostle here terms our L o r d a living
stone, to show t h a t t h e temple ( i . e. t h e
Christian church) of which he is t h e foun-
dation, is built of living men ; and on t h e
second, t h a t living may be taken literally
to distinguish t h e Christian church (con-
sisting' of living men) from other temples
built only of dead m a t e r í a i s . ] — l o '(rjv,
the infinitive with t h e n e u t . article, is
used as a N. for I I fui?/ Life, H e b . ii. 15.
Raphelius has shown t h a t t h e heathen
writers Polybius and A r r i a n apply rb '(yv
in t h e same s e n s e ; and so doth Anacreon,
* [ A s in G e n . x x v i . 1 9 . L e v . x i v . 5 , where J o -
s e p h u s explains it b y fonial and cvcr-Jlotohig. So
M a r t . E p i g . ii. 90./OH* vimis. O v i d . M e t . viii. 57-
V a l e r . F l a c c . iii. 4 2 2 . H e s i o d . O p p , 5 9 5 . ]
Z 2
 z A a 340 z A a

Oilo xxiii. lines 2, 7. And it may not be a dangerous illness. M a t . ix. 18. M a r k v.
amiss to add, t h a t t h u s also l'retrue'ntly 23. J o h n iv. 50, 5 ! , 5 3 . T h e L X X a p -
doth I g n a t i u s , as in his Epistle to the ply the verb in the same sense (for H e b .
Magnesians, § 5, he says, t h a t unless we n-n). 2 Kings i. 2. viii. 8, 9, 10, 14, So
1 1

be willing to die in imitation of Christ's doth Artemidorus, [iv. 5.] cited by

passion, rb '(rjv avrü, bis life is not in us." Wetstein on J o h n . [As to M a t . ix. 18,
A n d to the Tralliaus, § 9, t h a t without 1 cannot agree with P a r k h u r s t . Kuinoel
Christ we have not rb aXndivbv (f¡v, t h e indeed supports him, and says, t h a t t h e
t r u c Ufe." So he calis Christ TS ctawiiv- words áprt kríXeiiT-nnív cannot. be construed
roe iifiüi' (ijv our eternal Ufe, M a g u e s . jam morlua est, but morti próxima erat.
§ 1 ; rb ciSuiKpirov ypcov (rjv, our insepar- B u t this is merely said to reconcile S t .
able Ufe, Ephes. § 3 ; TO aXndivbv >¡fuov M a t t h e w and St. L u k e . TeKevTctoj is lo
(rjv our true Ufe, Smyrn. § 4. [ T h i s die, not io be in the agonies of death;
phrase occurs also Phil. i. 2 1 . T h e mean- and it is curious, t h a t Schleusner, who says
ing of t h a t passage is, says W a h l , " W i t h the contrary, in voce T E A , only adduces
respect to myself, either life or death is these places, and the parliciple TÍKÍVTÜV in
desirahle. F o r if I Uve, Christ will be Acts. So good a grammarian should not
magnified by me " (see verse 2 0 ) ; (or, " I have fixed t h e incompleleness of the p a r -
give my wiiole life lo the propagation of ticipio on the V e r b . B u t Kuinoel says
Christianity," according to Schleusner) " I f t h a t t h e aorist has often the sense of t h e
I die I shall gain, for I shall be with C h r i s t present. T h i s is g r a n t e d , but not when
(verse 23.) B u t if my continuing in the a particular fact is spoken of * : and
Hesb will profit you who believe, í know therefore I entirely agree with Schleier-
not which to choose."] macher (on St. L u k e , Translat. p . 138,)
I I . T h e word is applied to God, who t h a t in St. M a t t h e w , ireXevrrjcre " could
hath life indepeudently from and in him- mean nothing else than she was dead;" and
self, and from whom all who Uve derive t h a t St. Matthew's is a curtaüed account.
their Ufe and being. M a t . xvi. 16. xxvi. If this be r i g h t , we m u s t transfer this
63. John vi. 57, 69. 1 Thess. i. 9. 1 T i m . place to Sense V . as Schleusner (which
iv. 10. vi. 17. H e b . x. 3 1 . is curious) also does. A d d Gen. xii. 13.
I I I . Joined with other words it denotes I xix. 20. Ps. exix. 149, 1 5 1 . JSlian. V. H .
a particular manner qf living. T h u s 1 ii. 3 6 . ]
P e t . iv. 6, (rjv Kara Qídi> irvtvpari, is to j V. To recover life, revire, Rev. ii. 8.
Uve spiritually according io the will qf xiii. 14. x x . 4. In this sense also it is
God, com]). verse 2 ; '(rjv rió Qeo>, lo Une used in the L X X for the H e b . n>n, 2 K.
by God, Rom. vi. \(), l l ! Gal. ii. 19. xiii. 2 1 . Job xiv. 14. Ezek. xxxvii. 9.
Comp. uiider 'AJTO&V//OXW I I . I I I . Trj Si- [ A d d M a r k xvi. 11. L u k e xxiv. 5. John
Kawavv-n '(rjv, To Uve unto righteousness, v. 2 5 . xi. 25. K&V arrodavij, ({¡trerai, words
1 P e t . ii. 24. signifies, to live as persons which seem, says T i t t m a n , to relate to
justified by the death of Christ ought, t h e body, from t h e opposition between
i. e. in all righteousness and holiuess death and life. 'Anodríietaa certainly does,
(comp. Rom. verses 2 , 4, 6, 7, 11.) Zijv b u t (etco is indefinitely used. Though he
•ñvevjiaru To live in the Spirit, Gal. v. die, he shall Uve again in another sinie.
2 5 , is to live under his continual infiu- Perhaps we should add also Acts i. 3.]
enec. Comp. Rom. viii. 15. 'Eavra (r\v, [ V I . To be nourished, SKpported, or pre-
To Uve io one's self 2 Cor. v. 15, is to served in Ufe. M a t . iv. 4. (compare D e u t ,
live agreeably to one's own evil and cor- viii. 3. and see Irrl ii. 9.) Acts xvii. 28.
r u p t inclinations. See W e t s t e i n on Rom. xxii. 22. xxviü. 4. 1 Cor. ix. 14. compare
vi. 10, and Kypke on M a c k n i g h t on Rc:n. 2 Kings i. 2. viii. 8. and perhaps 2 Cor.
xiv. 7-—[2'•ijv TIVI, 'Lv nvi, or Kci-ariva, are
used in this sense, To regúlale your Ufe * [ T h e two cases where the aorist is p u t for the
according to the precepts of any one, so present, are, first, when a custom or halit is e x p r e s s e d ;
and the other, where (see Matthias, § 500'), t h o u g h
as to obey him. T h u s ¡¡ijv irvevpan, in
in L a t i n and E n g l i s h the present is u s e d , the aorist
Gal. v. 2 5 , is To Uve obediently to the expresses an action completed, t h o u g h m o s t rapidly
Spirit. Rom. vi. 2, To Uve in sin or obey fmished, and is u s e d to s h o w that the action is wholly
it. Rom. xiv. 7, To Uve obediently to your- d e t e r m i n e d ; or, as H e r m á n (de R a t . E m . c. 9. p.
self, i. e. according to your own pleasure. 186'. s o . and on V i g e r . p. 1G2.) where a past action
is really i n d i c a t e d ; b u t a periphrasis m u s t be used
A n d so of t h e other passages.l
in any other l a n g u a g e . as **t.nrw / teish il orücral.
i V. To live, as i m p o r t i n e recovery from E u r . M e d . 272.]
 Z E Y 341
vi. 9. (though daily in danger qf dea.th,
tve are preserved) J a m e s iv. 15. X e n .
M e m . iii. 3 . 11. Anab. vii. 2. 33.]
[ V I I . To endure, nevcr fail. Heb. iv.
12. T o this head Wahl refers H e b . x. 20.
1 Pet. i. 3 . Rom. xii. 1.]
[ V I H . To enjoy éter nal Ufe and hap-
piness. John vi. 5 1 . xiv. 19- Rom. i. 17-
vi. 10. viii. 13. 1 Thess. iii. 8. v. 10. B u t
in John xiv. 19, T i t t m a n gives a differ-
ent, and, I think, not a happy explauation,
Because I shall return to life, ye also who
have been as it were dead wilh sorrow,
shall be restored.—There are two or three
passages which I am unable to class satis-
faotorily. I n John xi. 26. ó £üiv ical m-
^evwv is explained by W a h l , whoever per-
severingly believes in me, as if '(wv were
adverbial. See Cesen, p. 8 2 3 . Schleusner
says, every true worshipper. Tittman
translates, Every one who by belief in me
as the author of Ufe hath gained life,
shall enjoy itfor ever*. In Rom. xii. 1,
Ovala is a difficult phrase. Deyling.
Obss. Sacr. iii. obs. 4 1 . p. 402, gives at
length t h e general explanation, t h a t as
t h e Priests in t h e Levitical dispensation
offered dead victims, t h e Christians were
to offer themselves, both souls and bodies,
as sacrifices having spiritual life, i. e. t o
consécrate themselves to God. M a c k n i g h t
explains '(wera by excellent. W a h l says,
a never-failing sacrifice?^
|§§p" ZETOC, ?), ov, from '(éti) to be hot.—
Hol. occ. Rev. iii. 15, 16. [ A q . Lev. vi. 2 1 .
Bretschneider here observes, t h a t as Christ
says in this passage of Revelations, I would
thou wert either cold or hot, we can hardly
admit the common i n t e r p r e t a r o n , namely,
t h a t Zetbg isfervid iu zeal,ns \pv\pbg would
theu be careless or averse to Christianily,
and Christ would not praise such a state
of feeling; he therefore thinks t h a t t h e
metaphor is taken perhaps from food,
which refreshes when cold, and excites
and invigorates when hot: and he thinks
this notion is strengthened by what fol-
lows, péXXio ere kpétrai ?x ra aróparóg
Zevyog, E O S , ec, ro, from 'Czvyvvpi, or
obsol. '(tvyo) tojoin.
[I. A yohe, for connecting oxen. iElian.
V. H . ix. 2 9 . ]
I I . A pair or yohe of oxen. occ. L u k e
xiv. 10. [1 Kings xix. 2 1 . ] — A pair, of
turtle doves. occ. L u k e ii. 2 4 . [Lev. v.
* [ T h e passage is probably o n l y a repetition of
v. 2 5 . See sense V . ]
Z E Y
11.] T h i s application of ¡¡tvyoc to birds
is classical. T h u s Plerodotns, lib. iii. cap.
76. 'Eajcivn lpí,Kojv éVra Z E Y ' P E A , cío
aiyvKÍmv Z E Y ' P E A StÚKovra. There ap-
peared seven pairs of hawks p u r s u i n g two
pairs of vultures. See W etstein. [ I t is T
any pair in Greek. See E u r . H e r e . P u r .
1403. Z e n . CEc. vii. 18.]
Ifgsf Ztvicrripía, ag, ?/, from
3
£evyvvpi,
or obsol. ¿¡evyio lo join.—A band, chain.
occ. A c t s xxvii. 4 0 . These r u d d e r - 6 a » á í
or chains are iu E u r í p i d e s called by t h e
cognate ñame ZsvyXal. See Alberti, W o l -
fius, and W e t s t e i n . [Eurip. Helen.
1552.]
üfgpf ZEÜC, Ó, from %éoj to be hot, [or
1
r a t h e r from i¡i¡v lo Uve, as t h e author of
life.] J ú p i t e r , t h e supreme god of t h e
Greek and Román heathen ; by whom, in
a physical sense, t h e y sometimes m e a n t
the whole expanse of the heavens, some-
times t h e air, b u t most * usually t h e
ether, or warm generative air, P a t e r O m -
nipotens, i E t h e r , the Almighty Father,
Ether, as Virgil calis him, Geor. ii. line
3 2 5 . — T h u s , to cite but two out of m a n y
testimonies which m i g h t be produced,
Eurípides among t h e G r e e k s :
-j* 'Opas roí- ¿\Jyou, tov § ' CÍVE/^OV " A I 0 E P A ,
K a i yrjv nsp)^ syjivQ' uypcítg vj üyxa\a7c'
ToDYov láfíi^s Z H ~ N A , T» 8' ¡j'you @ E O N . v
T h o u seest this lofty, this u n b o u n d e d E T H E R ,
E n c i r c l i n g w i t h h i s fluid arms the e a r t h ;
E s t e e m this JOVE, this venérate as GOD.
A n d E n n i u s among t h e Romans :
Adspicc,
íloc sublime C A N D E N S , quem invocant
OMNES JOVEM.
View
T h i s G L O M I N G h e i g h t , w h i c h A L L i n v o k e as
JOVE.
I t m u s t be further remarked, t h a t Zevg
forms not only t h e gen. Znvbg, dat. Zrjvi,
* Servius in .¿En. i. " P h y s i c i J o v e m j E t h e r e m
volunt intelligi—unde et Zeu?, J ú p i t e r , 0:7:0 rou guv,
id est, a fervore, dicittir. T h e N a t u r a l i s t s will h a v e
J ú p i t e r m e a n the E t h e r , w h e n c e h e i s called Zsvs,
from ¿e7v being hot or warm.'"
f T h e s e lines are cited b y L u c i a n , J u p . T r a g .
tom. ii. p. 2 2 2 , and thus translated b y Cicero D e
N a t . D e o r . lib. ii. § 2 5 , w h i c h see,
Vides sublime fusum, immoderatum MTHER.A,
Qui terram tenero circumjectii amplectitur:
Huno S u m m u m habeto D i v o m : Intne perhibeto
JOVEM.
 Z H A 342 Z II A

acc. Zr¡va*, b u t more commonly t h e gen. way in which Lexicographers aftix senses
Atóc, d a t . At'í, acc. Aía. A t o e and A i c i to words from their own views of t h e con-
occur Acts xiv. 12, 13. Comp. H e b . and t e x t . I n Rom. x. 2. t h e meaning is ob-
E n g . Lexicón u n d e r and 'EvSía above. viously Zeal, in t h e common accepta-
I n 2 Mac. vi. 2, mention is made of Atoe tion. Schl. considering, t h a t while S t .
'OXí/prna Olympian Júpiter, and of Atoe P a u l was a J e w , he t h o u g h t his zeal
EEVÍU Júpiter the defender qf strangers. against Christianity r i g h t , translates,
Z E ' í Z t , (like t h e E n g . seethe) by an Anxiely in defence qf the true Mosaic re-
onomatopoeia from t h e sound of boiling ligión. P a r k h u r s t lookiug only to t h e
water, to which only, I believe, it is a p - fact t h a t S t . Paul o u g h t not to have op-
plied in $ Homer, To be hot,fervent. I n posed C h r i s t i a n i t y , translates it Blind,
t h e N . T . it is only applied spiritually. misguided zealf\
occ. A c t s xviii. 2 5 . R o m . xii. 1 1 . [ T h e Z?j\ów, ¿i, from 4i;\oe.
phrase in Acts xviii. 2 5 . is t h u s explained I . To desire zealously. occ. 1 Cor. xii.
in a Gloss, (see Alberti Gloss. N . T . p . 3 1 . xiv. 1, 3 9 . [ I n Gal. iv. 17. Schleus-
108.) To be ready for spiritual work. ner and Wahl transíate, They desire you,
See Suicer. Thes. i. p . 1296. Phil. de Vit. 1. e. desire to draw you to their side—-that
Mosis, iii. t . ii. p . 178. 13. T h e word occ. you may desire them, orfollow their party.
J o b xxxii. 19-3 I should have no difficulty in accepting
ZíjXoe, H, ó, from ¡¡íu to be hot.—It d e - this, if t h e reading of t h e intermedíate
notes in general a vehement fervour or clause were decidedly y¡¡xáQ; and, on t h e
heat of t h e mind or affections, and so is whole, i t is perhaps t h e best sense even
applicable either in a good or bad sense. with t h e other reading. See iixXdui and
I . [Intense zeal or fervour. J o h n ii. 17. W a h l ' s explanation of i t there given.
Rom. x. 2 . 2 Cor. vii. 7, 1 1 . i x . 2. Phil. Macknight's translation is virtually t h e
iii. 6. Col. iv. 13. P s . Ixix. 9. ( r e f e r r e d t o same. T h e r e is some difficulty, however,
in J o h n ii. 18.) 1 M a c . ii. 5 8 . P l u t . Vit. from t h e recurrence of t h e word in v. 18,
Alex. M . c. 8. Polyb. x. 2 4 . 7.—In 2 Cor. where one can hardly think t h e Apostle
xi. 2. Rosenmüller, Bretschneider, Schl., would vary t h e s e n s e ; and yet, t h e t a k i n g
and W a h l , r e n d e r t h e word Love, P a r k - it as Wahl does, It is praiseworthy lo be
h u r s t , Holy, or godly jealousy; and t h e drawn to a party by honourable intentions,
context is in h i s favour. E r a s m u s too is (évKa\<j> for (caXwe) gives a very poor sense,
with h i m . I t is Love in t h e Song of So- and does not suit t h e context, for t h e em-
lomon viii. 6 . ] phasis of t h e verse is obviously on always,
I I . [Envy, Acts xiii. 4 5 . Rom. xiii. 1 3 . and not merely when I am with you.
1 Cor. iii. 3 . Gal. v. 20. J a m . iii. 14, 16. M a c k n i g h t and Locke make ív icaXü r e -
So Polyb. x i . 8. 4 . Herodian. iii. 2. 1 6 . ] fer to a person, a good man. T h i s cannot
I I I . [Anger. Acts v. ] 7- H e b . x. 2 7 . be. B u t I am inclined to t h i n k t h e whole
((ijXog irvpbs). See L e v . x . 2. N u m b . passage m a y be t h u s rendered (observing
xvi. 3 5 . P s . lxxix. 5 . E z e k . xxxvi. 5 . with Locke, t h a t in t h e six preceding
xxxviii. 19. Zeph. i. 18. iii. 8 . ] — I n t h e verses, t h e Apostle had been speaking of
L X X this N . constantly answers t o t h e t h e strong atfection of t h e Galatians to
H e b . ¡tiOp, which denotes fervent zeal, him while present, a n d their altered feel-
jealousy, indignation; and as (rjXoc is d e - ings since, in consequence of t h e inter-
rived from ¿¡¿ta to be hot, so nN3p refers to ference of strange teachers), They court
t h e corroding or consuming effect off re. you, but not honourably; they seek to
See H e b . and E n g . Lexicón in KJ¡?. [ T h i s break our connexion that you may become
word affords an instance of t h e strange attached to and court them. But it is
right to indulge an honourable atlachment
• W h i c h words may b e from the H e b . rtJT to en-
(such as yours was t o m e formerly), to
cuete, encompass, as d e n o t i n g the w h o l e compass of honour always and with constaney, and
the heavens or air. not merely (to entertain t h e feeling) while
•f H o m e r u s e s this verb i n t h e contracted form, I am wilh youf\
II. x x i . line 3 6 2 .
I I . To be jealous over. occ. 2 Cor. x i .
'fls Tt A£«K ZE~I. 2. [ S e e ZrjXoc I I . ]
A s seethes the caldron. I I I . To envy, be moved with envy. occ.
í B e s i d e s t h e line cited in the last note, see I I . A c t s vii. 9. [xvii. 5.] 1 Cor. xiii. 4 . [ J a m e s
x v i i i . line 3 4 9 . II. x x i . line 3 6 5 . O d y s s . x . line iv. 2. G e n . xxxvii. 10.]
360. Zr¡Xu}rr¡c, 5, ¿, from (nXúoj.
 Z II T
I. W i t h a genitive, A zcalol, zealous of
or for, whether in a good or indilferent
sense. occ. Aets xxi. 20. xxii. 3 . * Gal.
1. 14. T i t . ii. 14. [ P o l y b . x . 2 5 . 2 . E x .
xx. 5. D e u t . iv. 24. v. 9.]
I i . W i t h a genitivo, Zealously desirous
of. occ. 1 Cor. xiv. 12. Comp. ZnXóio I I I .
I I I . Simón t h e Canaanite, one of our
Lord's Apostles, is surnamed ZI/XW-I/C, or
the Zealot, probably on account of his zeal
for the law. So he is also called líavavi-
rt)c, M a t . x. 4. M a r k iii. 18, not from t h e
country of Chanaan, "Kavaav (for then his
s ú m a m e would have been ' O X c t r a r a o c . t ,
see M a t . x v . 2 2 , and L X X , Gen. xxxviii.
2, ov al.) but from the Pleb. Wp to be
zealous. occ. Lidie vi. 15. Acts i. 13. See
Wolfius on M a t . x . 4 , and Doddridge on
L u k e vi. 15.
ZIIMI'A, ac, ?/, maste.—Damage, loss.
occ. A c t s xxvii. 10, 2 ! . Phil. iii. 7, 8.
[where Schl. translates, / renounce all
worldly enjoyments. W a h l , I think all
things hurtful, E z r a vii. 25.]
ZijfuÓLo, ü>, from Znfiía.— To damage,
endamage, Znpiáopat, Zpai, Pass. To be
damaged, entlamaged, su.fj'er or receive
loss, to lose, or be punished with the loss
of mulctari. occ. M a t . xvi. 2C. M a r k viii.
'36. L u k e ix. 25. 1 Cor. iii. 15. 2 Cor.
vii. 9. Phil. iii. 8. [Xen. Cyr. iii. 1. 16.
See P r o v . xix. 19.]
ZIITE'íi, ¿ó.
I. To seek, a person or t h i n g los!, M a t .
'(VTÉLO xviii. 12. L u k e i i . 4 5 , 48. xv. 8. [xix. 10.
al. T h u c . iii. 67. Xen. Vcct. iv. 4 . ]
II. To seek, w h a t was not before losi,
io endeavour earnestly lo find or oblain it.
Mat. vi. 3 3 . xiii. 4 5 . xxvi. 16. M a r k xiv.
1, 11. L u k e xiii. 6, 7. [ 1 Cor. x. 2 4 . ]
2 Cor. xii. 14, & al. Comp. A c t s xvii.
'CIJTÍLO.—A 27. Rom. x. 2 0 . [ P h i l . ii. 2 1 . ]
I I I . To seek, desire, want. M a t . xii. 46.
47. L u k e ix. 9. xiii. 24. J o h n [iv. 2 3 . !
viii. 21.] xviii. 7, where see K y p k e & al.
On M a t . xiii. 4 5 , Raphelius remarks t h a t
Theophrastus, E t h . C h a r . xxiii. applies
'(r¡T¿iv to a person secking or asking of a
* [ I t s e e m s to h a v e been a ñ a m e (either w h l i V Ó , « B
added or n o t ) given to the strict observers and de-
t'eiidcrs o f t h e law. S e e sense I I I . N u m b . x x v . 9.
Tile namc especially describa! persons in the t i m e
of the M a c c a b e e s w h o wished to vindícate the
ncglected law. S e e J o s e p h . B e l l . J . iv. G. 3 . vii.
8. 1.]
•V X c w M K o f is indeed in the reading of the C a m -
bridge, but of no other Greek M S . , M a t . x. 4 . V u l g .
Chanamcus. B u t in M a t . seven, and in M a r k
three M S S . h a v e X x v a v a i o f . V u l g . Canaiucus. S e e
Griesbach.
43 Z II Z
dcaler for something lo purchase; and
t h u s it appcars to be used in M a t . [See
E s t h . iii. 6. Soph. CEd. T y r . 672. A r i s -
toph. P l u t . 575.]
IV. To seek, endeavour, operam daré.
L u k e v. 18. vi. 19. J o l m viii. 19, 2 0 .
xix. 12.
V . Toseek, require. M a r k viii. 11. L u k e
xi. 1 6. xii. 4 8 . Zr¡T£Írai, It is required. 1
Cor. i. 2 1 . iv. 2. Sextus E m p i r i c u s , cited
by Wetstein, applies t h e word in a similar
manner. B u t in this t e x t sixteen M S S . ,
five of which are ancient, read ZIITÜTE. See
W e t s t e i n and Griesbach*. [ H e b . viii. 9.
John viii. 50. N e h e m . ii. 4. 10.]
V I . To inquire, question, J o h n xvi. 19.
[ A d d M a t . ii. 13. A n d so iElian. V . H .
ii. 13. In M a r k xi. 18. it is, To consider
or delibérate (inquire.)}
V I L To seek insidiously, and with an
hoslile or malicious design. M a t . ii. 1 3 ,
20. Rom. xi. 3 . T h e phrase Zr¡r€iv tiu-
yj\v TIVOQ is Hellenistical, plainly t a k e n
from t h e H e b . ffi&J tupa, for which it is
often used by t h e L X X , particularly
E x o d . iv. 19, as in M a t . ii. 2 0 ; a n d
1 Kings xix. 10, as it is by St. Paul, R o m .
xi. 3 . T h e G r e e k writers, instead of
Cnrtiv 'iivyj]v TIVOQ, say í—i&tíklvEiv nvi
Síiva-ov, lo contrive death for one. In
1 Sam. xxiv. 1 1, we have t h e Pleb. phrase
íTfí, to lie in wait for one's life, in
t h e same s e n s e ; the use of m í in which
last passage may confirm t h e derivation of
above assigned.
r
¿í]~npa, IITOQ, TO, from Cnréto.—A ques-
tion, debate, dispute, controversy. occ.
Acts xv. 2. xviii. 15. xxiii. 2,9. xxv. 19.
xxvi. 3 . [ E z e k . xxxvi. 37- Cic. ad D i v .
iv. E p . 2 6 . ]
[f§p° ZíjTiime, LOS, A t t . tíos, ?/, from
question, debate, dispute, occ.
J o h n iii. 2 5 . Acts xxv. 2 0 . 1 T i m . i. 4.
vi. 4. 2 T i m . ii. 2 3 . T i t . iii. 9. [ H e r o d .
ii. 5 4 . v. 2 1 . ]
Ü g f ZIZA'NION, a, rb. P l u r . Zt^ivia,
LOV, ra. Zizane. " A kind of plant, in
appearance not uulike corn or, wheat,
having a t first t h e same sort of stalk, aud
t h e same viridity, but b r i n g i n g forth no
fruit, a t least none good." T h u s M i n t e r t ,
who adds from J o h n Melchior, tom. i. p .
m. 272. " Zi^civiov does not siguify every
M'eed in general which grows among corn,
b u t a particular species qfseed known in
Canaan which was not unlike wheat, but
* [In this place of Hebrews, Schl. constates thc
verb as tase, to be, ]
 z y r 344
being p u t into tbe ground degenerated,
and assurned another nature and forra.
T h e Thalmudísts ñame it O'jil *, Tractat.
Kilaim 1. Halach 1, which t h e very sound
in pronouncing shows to be t h e same as
t h e Zigana; and wliich, I add, may lead
us to the t r u c derivation of this word, t h a t
is, from t h e Chald. fí a kind, or species,
of corn namely whence tha eorr.ipt H e -
; A E I O N ZYTON ¿e ov icaicbv, to fly t h e
brew or Syriac tOPJ, which ir. the ancient
Syriac versión answers to t h e Greek Zt-
'(íuna, M a t . xiii. 2 5 , & seqt.—' A m o n g
t h e hurtful weeds, says Johnson, Herbal,
fol. p . 78, D a m e l l (Lolium álbum) is the
first. I t bringetá forth leaves or sialks
like those qfivheat or barley, yet. vougher,
with a long ear made u p of many little
ones, every particular whereof coutaineth
two or three grains lesser than those of
w h e a t ; scarcely any chaífy husk to cover
them with ; by reason whereof they are
easily shaken about, and seattered abroad.
— They grow in Jields among wheat and
barley.—They spring and Jlourish with
the corn ; and in A u g u s t the seed is ripe.
Darnell is called in the Arabian tongue
Zizania.' T h i s last asseríion cf Johnson's
does not seem quite a e c u r a t e t , yet I t h i n k
Darnell would be a better translation of
t h e Greek Zt^úvia than T a r e s ; though I
am well informed t h a t in t h e N o r t h of
E n g i a n d they still cali Darnell by t h e
ñame of Tares." See also Campbell's Note,
and Scheuchzer, Phys. Sacr. on M a t . xiii.
25, and Michaelis. Recueil Quaest. X V .
f ü f Z0'í>02, a, b.— Thick darkness,
blackncss. This word is used iu the pro-
fane as well as in the sacred writers, and
by them likewise applied to the infernal
darkness, as particularly by Lucian, Con-
templant. tom. i. p. 3 2 1 , D . II APA-
A O r S T£Tt ZO'*Qi, Delivering to the
(infernal) darkness. So one of bis D i a -
logists, in his Cataplus, tom. i. p. 446, E .
when he arrives on t h e other side of t h e
Styx, cries out, 'UpamXüe, ra ZO'í>OY.
O Hercules, what darkness! See more in
W e t s t e i n on 2 Pet. ii. 4. occ. 2 Pet. ii. 4,
17. J u d e ver. G, 13. [ H o m e r . Iliad G. 13.
H . in Mere. 2 5 6 . ] — S y m m a c h u s uses this
word P s . x. or xi. 2. xc. or xci. 6, for t h e
H e b . ba« thiclc darkness. [ P o l y b . xviii.
3-7.1
Ziiyoe, a, ó, from fevyio to join, which ferment and fermentation,
sea u n d e r Zevyoc.
I . A yoke, properly so called, by which L u k e xiii. 2 1 . 1 Cor. v. 6. Gal. v. 9.
* |\S:e Bur.torf's L e x . T a l m . under this h e a d . ]
t Sec Castcll, A R . under 3U.
z y M
d r a u g h t oxen are joined, or fastened to
each other. I t is t h u s used in t h e pro-
fane writers, and in the L X X , D e u t . xxi.
3. 1 Sam. vi. 7. [iElian V . H . v. 1 4 . ]
I I . In the N . T . it denotes figuratively
the yoke cf slavery, or qf a servile con-
dition. So Scapula and Wetstein cite
from Plato's Epist. fevyeiv rb AOY-
servile yoke, as being e v i l ; and from So-
phocles' Ajax, line 962, 3 ,
Tljjif fia A O T A E ' I A Z z T ' r A
Xíi'py,u£y ;
T o what diré yolses qf servilu de we go ?
occ. 1 T i m . vi. 1. Comp. u n d e r A á X o e I .
See Levit. xxvi. 13. Is. ix. 4. Polyb. iv.
82. 2 . ]
I I I . The yoke of legal ordinances. occ.
Acts xv. 1G-. Gal. v. I. A n d as in t h e
former passage it is described as a yoke
which neither they ñor their fathers were
able to bear, so in the latter it is called a
yoke of bondage or slavery, in opposition
to which, especially as aggravated by t h e
Pharisaical traditions (comp. M a t . xxiii.
4.), Christ declares his yoke, i. e. his
doctrine or insíitution, to be easy, or
gentle, occ. Mat. xi. 2 9 , 30. Lucian, in
Amores, tom. i. p. 1055, has an expres-
sion nearly resembling t h a t in Acts,
' A vú.yi;r¡—BAPY'N KAT' 'AYXE'NA ZY-
TON. {¡plv ' E n i e E ' I S A — N e c e s s i t y lay-
ing a heavy yoke on our necks—[In the
L X X , we find Zíyoe used in t h e sense of
the divine law, in J e r . v. 5. In Sam. iii.
27., Schl. gives two different meanings,
either all that is iroublesome and evil, aud
the law of the Lord. Comp. Cic. Phil. i.
2. and Justin. vi. 9 - 7 . ]
I V . The beam of a balance, thence used
for the whole balance, occ. Rev. vi. 5. In
this sense it is applied not only by the
profane writers, b u t frequently by the
L X X , for the Pleb. a pair of
scalcs. [Lev. xix. 3 6 . Hos. xii. 7 ; for
obt¡ in Is. xl. 12. See Ecclus. xxi. 2 5 .
MI V. H . x. 6.]
Zvpi], nc, v, from (éo) lo be hot.
I . Fermenting matter, leaven, so called
from healing in fermentation the mass of
dough with which it is mixed. T h u s the
L a t i n fermentum leaven, whence t h e E n g .
is derived from
ferveo to be hot. Mat. xiii. 3 3 . xvi. 12.
[ E x . xii. 15. al. I t is applied in a para-
ble to describe] the doctrine of the gospel,
which, though it sceined at first small and
 Z YM 345
inconsiderable, y e t , like leaven, speedily
spread its influenee among t h e mass of
mankind, and wherever i t took effect,
wonderfully * assimilated their temper
and conduct. M a t . xiii. 3 3 . L u k e xiii.
2 1 . So I g n a t i u s exhorts t h e Magnesians,
E p i s t . § 10. MeratcíXeo-dE iiQ N E ' A N
Z Y ' M H N , o k^iv 'lr¡aovQ Xpi=roe. " B e ye
transformed into t h e nen leaven, which is
Jesús Christ."
I I . In a bad sense it denotes either
erroneous and corrupi doctrine, which,
like leaven, spreads through, taints, and f
corrupts t h e minds and manners of men,
as M a t . xvi. 6, 11. (Comp. ver. 12.)
M a r k viii. 15. (Comp. u n d e r ' H p a i c W i ' o i )
L u k e xii. 1 ; or evil practices, examples,
and tempers, which have a like pernicious
influenee on t h e i r conduct, as 1 Cor. v. 6,
7, 8 ; in which last verse '(v¡xr¡ irakaia
seems t o mean the oíd leaven of unclean-
. ness and lasciviousness, for which t h e
Corinthians before their conversión were
even % proverbially infamous (comp. 1 P e t .
i. 14. iv. 2, 3 . ) ; and (vpr¡ ra/aetc mi iro-
vnpíag, appears to al lude t o t h e maUcious
and mischievous infusions of their j u d a i z -
i n g teachers. Comp. 2 T i m , iii. 13. T h e
word £vpr¡ is partieularly applied by
Christ, L u k e xii. I, to t h e hypocrisy of
t h e P h a r i s e e s ; " a vice which secretly
puffed up their minds, a n d strangely
spread itself t h r o u g h their hearts and
lives, so as to taint and spoil t h e very best
of their duties " D o d d r i d g e . — T h e above
cited are all t h e passages of t h e N . T . in
which t h e word occurs.
Zvpóoj, Si, from '(vpr¡.—To leaven, fer-
" See this s-abject well treated in E u s e b i u s ' s
Praiparatio E v a n g é l i c a , l i b . i. c a p . 4 .
t P l u t a r c h very r e m a i k a b l y informs u s , that the
Priest of J ú p i t e r , a m o n g tile R o m a n s , was n o t a l -
lowed even to touch leaven, because i) tv/xr xcti : yíyo-
VEV in fyftopa;, ctVTr) 8e rpStipeí TO <púpa.p.ix ¡ur/vv/xsvyj,
leaven both arises from corruption, and cloth itself
corrupt the raass with w h i c h it i s m i x e d . Q u í e s t .
Rom. p. 2 8 9 . E .
X 'Phus Kopii>9ía r.ápr), a Corinthian lass, is a
prostitute, a courtezan ; xopi>Giá&» and xofisfliá&ir-
fci m e a n to reharé: a n d S u i d a s , under the word
X o l f o ; , m e n t i o n s a Greek proverb ; 'Axpcxop»,9í<v
EOixcíf y¿>tp<¡ww7:r¡vsui, Y o u are l i k e to sell your wares
in H i g h - C o r i n t h , i. e. to become a prostitute. It
appears from t h e t e s t i m o n y o f Strabo a n d other
Greek writers, that Corinth w a s crowded with
vítores a n d debauchecs; a n d n o wonder, since it
abounded in trade a n d riches, and since the city i t -
self was dedicated to V e n u s , w h o h a d here a famous
temple, where more than a thousand whores, under
the dcsignation o f 'lipoiíhoi, were devoted t o her
service. See more in 'Vrctstein on 1 C o r . i. 1, and
in W h i t b y ' s Preface to 1 Cor. § 0.
Z í i II
ment with leaven. occ. M a t . xiii. 33 >
[ C o m p . H o s . vii. 4.] L u k e xiii. 2 1 . 1
Cor. v. 6. Gal. v. 9. [ E x . xii. 34. L e v .
vi. 17.]^
Z w y p E í ü , ü, from f w o c olive, and a-ypÉco
to take, t h e same as aypivco, which see.
I. \To take alive, either of game taken
in h u n t i n g or of captives taken in war, as
Thucyd. ii. 5. iii. 6G. X e n . A n . iv. 7. 2 2 .
Diod. Sic. xi. 2 2 . 2 Chron. xxv. 12. and
so Hesychius. Sometimes i t is lo keep
alive, as Polyb. xvi. 3 3 . 5. N u m b . x x x i .
15. I n L u k e v. 10, P a r k h u r s t says, t h a t
the verb in its sense of catching game, is
" a p p l i e d spiritually t o t a k i n g or catching
men by t h e preaching of t h e gospel."
Schcetgen (ad loe.) has cited t h e same
sort of proverbial expression from Sobar,
Genes, fol. 5 3 . col. 21 2. and t h e Jerusalem
T a r g u m on Gen. x . 9 ; in t h e last of which
it is used of enticing men to sin. A n d so
in this passage of S t . Luke. I n 2 T i m .
ii. 26, it is used of sinners, who are
spoken of as taken caplive b y t h e devil to
do his will, like captives in war, who are
made slaves. Beuson and M a c k n i g h t ,
however, in t h i s last place, take t h e verb
in t h e first sense, and coustrue, Being
caught alive vrr üura by him, (i. e. t h e
Lord's servant) t o do EKEÍVH his, i. e. God's
will.]
ZWÍ), r¡Q, i], from ¿¡ATO, £w, io live.
I. Life, n a t u r a l and temporal. L u k e i.
75. xvi. 2 5 . A c t s viii. 3 3 , & al. freq.
II. Manner qf living. Rom. vi. 4.
Comp. E p h . iv. 18.
III. [Happiness, a happy and quiet
life. L u k e xii. 15. 1 P e t . iii. 10. So
Prov. iv. 22, 2 3 . xii. 2 8 . and in L a t i n .
See Vita so used Ovid. P o n t . iv. 6. 3 .
W a h l gives t h i s sense to Rom. viii. G.]
IV. Life [_and happiness'] eterna!.
M a t . vii. 14. xviii. 8, 9. [ x i x . 17. J o h n
v. 24, 2 9 . xi. 1 8 . 1 T i m . vi. 19. 2 T i m .
i. 2. Rom. xi. 14. A n d with áiíovuir or
pÉXkucra. M a t . xix. 10. J o h n iii. 15, 16,
36. A c t s xiii. 4 6 . Gal. vi. 8. 1 T i m . i.
16. vi. 12, 19. T i t . i. 2. iii. 7- I J o h n ii.
2 5 . ] Comp. A c t s v. 2 0 . * P h i l . ii. 16.
Christ is called ¿>J) Ufe in t h e abstract
(even as he is called wisdom, and righle-
* [ M o s t interpreters s a y that the expression here,
all the words of this Ufe, are b y h y p a l l a g e for these
words of life, (as i n J o h n vi. G, 8.) as is c o m m o n .
The word of this salvation, for this word of sal-
vation. A c t s xiii. 20. S e e R o m . v i i . 2 4 . a n d
V o r s t de H e b r a i s m . p . 570. S o S c h l . a n d K u i n o e l .
I s h o u l d transíate ( i f the reading be r i g h t ) , All ihc
doctrine concerning this way of salvation.]
 Z a N 346
ousncss, and sanclif catión, and redemp-
liuii, 1 Cor. i. 30.), as being the Author
of this cternal /j/é to men. John xi. 25.
xiv. 6. 1 John i. 2. Comp. John i. 4.
Col. iii. 3 , 4. A n d let os particularly
observc t h a t A d a m (Gen. iii. 20,) as soon
as he liad received t h e blessed promise,
t h a t the Seed qf the movían should bruise
the serpent"s head, called his wfe's ñame
E v e , m n the manifester, because she mas,
or mas to be, the molher >n ^3 qf all mho
Uve, i. e. to God, spiritually and eternally,
as being t h e motlier of Christ, t h e Seed
j u s t before promised, who is t h e Life of
believers (see John i. 4. xi. 25. Col. iii.
4.), Life without bounds or limitation,
Life spiritual, incessanl, or nninlerrupted
(see J o h n viii. 5 1 , 52. xi. 26.), and eler-
nal. A n d to this reason of Eve's ñame
St. John plainly alludes in his I s t Epistle
ch. i. 2, when he says, t h a t The Life,
meaning Christ, was manifestcd, étpa-
i'cpójOn. Comp. Záoi I . — A n d as Christ,
so the H o l y Spirit is called Life, i. e. as
t h e Nicene Creed expresses it, the giver
of Ufe, Rom. viii. 1 0 ; and in Rev. xxii.
1, he is, as the supporter of eternal life,
represented by a puré river qf water of
life, clear as cryslal, proceeding out of
the throne of God and of the Lamb. [In
Rom. viii. 10. Schl. translates, But the
mind applied with all its power lo righte-
ousness. T h i s is an instance, among many,
of t h e tendency of Schleusner's opinions.
No one who compares v. 9. with v. 10.
can doubt t h a t t h e same spirit is spoken
of in both places. In 2 Cor. v. 4. Zm) is
said by W a h l and Schleusner to be an
humor tai body. I hardly t h i n k it bears
so definile a signiíication. I t seems to
be immortal life.
Zíl'NII, r¡c, i], from t h e H e b . njt to en-
túrele, gird round, whence as a N . fem.
plur. n121 girdlcs, zones, 1 K i n g s xxii.
38. See Heb. and E n g . Lexicón in n j j .
•—A girdle, which was anciently worn
about t h e waist, as it is in t h e E a s t to
this day, to confine the loóse ílowing g a r -
ments of those nations. A c t s xxi. 11.
John t h e Baptist wore one of leather,
even as his type Elijah liad done. M a t .
iii. 4. M a r k i. 6. Comp. 2 Kings i. S.
[ R e v . i. 13. xv. 6 . ] — T h e disciples are
commanded, M a t . x. 9. M a r k vi. 8, to
provide no money, itc rae (¿>vae, literally,
in their girdles, which were probably made
into a kind of purse, as is still usual in
the Eastern countries. T h u s D r . Shaw,
Travels, p. 227, speaking of the dress of
Z Í2 O
the Arabs in Barbary, says, " One end of
(their girdles) being doubled back and
sewn along t h e edges serves them for a
purse, agreeable to t h e acceptation of t h e
word 'Qúivn in t h e Scriptures, which in
M a t . x. 9, and Mark vi. 8. (adds he in a
note), we render a purse''—The Román
soldiers used in like manner to carry their
money in their girdles; whence, in H o -
race, Qjñ zonam perdidit means one who
has lost his purse. E p i s t . ii. lib. ii. lin.
4 0 ; and in A u l u s Gellius, lib. xv. cap.
12, C. Gracchus is introduced saying,
Cum Roma prqf'eclus sum, Quintes, zo-
nas quas argenti plenas exluli, eas ex
provincia inanes retuli. Those girdles
which I carried ovXfull of money when I
went from Rome, I have a t my r e t u r n
from t h e province brought home empty.
See more in Wet st ei n on M a t . x. 9.
fJSueton. Vitell. c. 16. Herodian. i. 1 1 .
X e n . A n . i. 4. 9 . ]
Zuvvvw, or (íúvvvpt, from (úivn, which
see.—To gird. occ. J o h n xxi. 18, t w i c e ;
where t h e l a t t e r p a r t of t h e verse seems
to allude to Peter's having his hands
stretched out, and girded to t h e two a r m s
of the cross, and being t h u s , according to
the Román mode of execution, carried or
led about t h e city of Rome, previously to
his crucifixión. See more in Wolfius and
W e t s t e i n on t h e t e x t . I add T h e o p h y -
lact's N o t e , T?)j/ kwl ra <?avpá iicraatv, Kal
ra SÉo-pa SíjXot. H e shows (Peter's) ex-
tensión on the cross, and his being bound.
[ T i t m a n says, " T h o u shalt stretch out
t h y hands to another, like a eaptive, i. e.
others shall lay hands on thee, another
shall gird thee with bonds and lead thee
where thou wilt be reluctant to go, to
prison or death." T h e word occurs Exod.
xxix. 19. Neh. iv. 18. Paus. ix. 17- H o m .
Iliad. x. 7 8 . ]
Zojoyovéuj, w, from (OJOS olive, and yí-
yova, perf. mid. of obs. yévoj to form,
make, whence also yon/ generation, and
yóroe offspring. ,
I . I n t h e profane writers, To procréale,
or produce an animal, or to bring forih
olive. See W e t s t e i n on L u k e xvii. 33.
[Diod. Sic. i. 7. and 88!]
I I . I n t h e N . T . To preserve ulive.
occ. L u k e xvii. 33. (comp. M a r k viii. 3 5 .
L u k e ix. 2 4 , where t h e word is o-ácrei.)
A c t s vii. 19, 'Etc rb pij '(tóoyovñodat, That
they might not be preserved alive, or live.
In this latter sense, which seems Hellc-
nistical, t h e word is frequently used by
the L X X , answering to t h e H e b . ¡rn lo
 Z íi o
Uve, or n»rin to cause or permit to Uve.
See especially E x o d . i. 17, 18, 22. [Gen. vi.
19. J u d g . viii. 19. 1 Kings x x . 3 1 . 1 Sam.
ii. 6. Schwarz. Comm. Ling. Gr. p . 639.]
Zwov, a, ro, from t h e mase, ¿futís olive,
living, which from (¿uo, 'Cus, to Uve.—A
living creature, an animal. H e b . xiii. 11.
2 P e t . ii. 12. Rev. iv. 6, 7, & al. [ J u d .
10. E z e k . x. 20. Xen. Mem. iv. 3 . 10.
In Rev. iv. 9, 10. Bretsch. and Schl. with
E i c h h o r n transíate, Living and intelligeut
creatures.']
II
r¡, Lia. T h e seventh letter of the
9 more modern Greek alphabet, b u t
t h e eighth of t h e ancient, whence, as a
numeral character, r¡ is still used for
eight. In t h e Cadméan alphabet I I cor-
responded to the H e b r e w or Phenician
Helh in form, ñame, and order, and no
doubt in power, or sound also, which, it is
certain from ancient G r e e k inscriptions
still remaining, was t h a t of an aspírale
breathing, like t h e Román PL T h e lat-
ter Greeks, however, made it t h e mark of
their E long, whereas t h e ancient, like
the Hebrews and Phenicians, had b u t one
character, namely E, for E whether pro-
nounced long or short. So Plato in Cra-
tylo, a yap r¡ é^jiúpeda ¿iXXa e rb TraXaióv,
j'or anciently me did not use n and e.
T h e ingenious D r . Bayly, in his I n t r o -
duction to Languages, p a r t iii. p. 5. gives
us from Montfaucon, Palseograph, Gra;e.
lib. ii. cap. 4, two A t h e n i a n inscriptions
written in t h e oíd Ionic character about
the time of t h e Peloponnesian war, 4 5 0
years before C h r i s t ; in which may be
seen the use of I I for an aspírate, of E
for H, and of O for £ 2 ; b u t for t h e form
of the letters, I rnust, for want of proper
types, refer to Montfaucon and D r . B a y l y
themselves.—The inscriptions a r e :
EPEX8EIA0Í
HOIAE : ENTOI : nOAEMOI
AI7E0ANON I ENKnTPOI \ ENAIT
T I I T O I ': E N * O I N l K E I ¡ E N A A I E T H N ';
ENAiriNEI \ MEFAPOI
TO ; A T T O ENIATTO \
5TI'ATISrON • I-ANTAAOS
347 Z Í2 O
ZIOOIZOLÍOJ, w, from CLMOQ olive, and TTOIEW
to make.
[ I . To give Ufe, and in t h e passive, to
receive lije, lo be quickened, of seed, 1
Cor. xv. 36. of t h e dead restored to life }
J o h n v. 2 1 . Rom. viii. 11. 1 Cor. xv. 2 2 .
and probably, 1 Tira. vi. 1 3 . ]
[ I I . To give happiness, or salvation.
J o h n vi. 63. 2 Cor. iii. 6. I n Gal. iii.
2 1 , it is obviously used of eternal lijo
and happiness.~J
II
I n more modern Greek t h u s :
'0(8= ev T W 7ro?^£ uü» ;
*'i\7rsQ:ivov vj KÚ7Tptf, h 'Aíy-
V7TTW, l'j (]>O;VÍ'K>/, s'j 'KKíZbGrj,
'Ev 'Ar/ivri, Meytfcó'/,,
rúí aUTcu 'Evtái>T(¡J'
2rp«ry/ywi', tyzvjT-Aoc, "Ay.pu-jrro^.
Montfaucon informs us, t h a t t h e t h r e e
last words are t h e beginnings of so many
columns, where t h c ñames of the deceased
are inscribed iu a long series.
H.
I . A Conjunction.
1. Either, or. M a t . v. 17, 3 6 . vi. 2 4 ,
3 1 , & al. freq. In 1 Cor. xi. 27, t h e
Alexandrian, Cambridge, and two later
M S S . for i'i irívn read ¡cal -¡rlvn, aud in t h i s
reading t h e y are supported by t h e first
S5rriac, (and by t h e l a t t e r in m a r g . ) t h e
A r a b i c , iEthiopic, and Coptic versions.
See W e t s t e i n , Griesbach, and M a c k n i g h t .
2. After comparatives, Than. M a t . x.
15. xi. 22, 24. xxvi. 5 3 . Acts xxiv. 11.
xxv. 6.
3 . Rather than, more than. M a t . xviii.
8, 9. M a r k ix. 4 3 . L u k e xv. 7. xvii. 2.
xviii. 14. 1 Cor. xiv. 19, where sec Bow-
yer's Conject. B u t in these passages
\
paXXov rather seems to be understood,
which word is expressed, J o h n iii. 19.
A c t s v. 29. x x . 3 5 , & al. Bos, in h i s
Ellipses u n d e r MaXXov, shows t h a t ?'/ is
used in the like elliptical m a n n e r by t h e
\ AKmiTOS :
best Greek writers : aud to t h e instances
 II 3-13 II I E
1

lie lias produced many more miglit be vi. 19. 5 6 . X e n . An. ii. 3 . 2 6 . I t is a
added. Comp. Kvpke. [Gen. xxxviii. 6'. strong aflirmation.]
2 Mac. xiv. 42. Tob. iii. 6. vi. 8. Soph. 'MyEporévio, from 'llyspúiv.— To be a
Aj. 981. H o m e r Iliad A. 117. Wessel. ad governor, or presidenl. occ. L u k e ii. 2 .
Diod. Sic. xi. 11. Glass. Phil. Sac. p. 41 4. iii. 1. Comp. under 'Anoypaf>i. [From
ed. D a t h . Hoogeveen and Zeun. ad Vigor. Fischer. D e V i t . Lex. N . T . p . 4 3 6 . (see
vii. 7. 4. not. x . ] 'E-n-ap^/ja) it. is clear t h a t 'iíyepovevto was
4. Savc, except. John xiii. 10. A c t s used to express any headship or govern-
xxiv. 2 1 . [comp. Xen. Cyr. vii. 5. 1 6 . ] nient of a proviuce. In L u k e ii. 2 , i t
5. ' A W i'¡, But rather. L u k e xii. 5 1 . expresses the power of a lieutcnant of
—Bul, unless. 1 Cor. iii. 5. 2 Cor. i. 13. the emperor over S y r i a ; in iii. 1, t h a t
So Plato in Pliaedo, § 12. p . 183. edit. of a procurator of J u d e a . T h a t in the
F o r s t e r . " F o r the philosopher will be first of these places, t h e verbs (what-
firmly of opinión, pr,oa¡jñi aXXodi Ka6apójc ever be t h e explanation of the passage)
Bvrévi,ztrdai époi>rirrei 'AAA' "H caei, t h a t can hardly be a mere official designation,
he will no where meet with wisdom clearly as the governor, the protector, standing
bul there, i. e. in Hades. See H o o g e - as it does without either an article or
veen's Note on V i g e r u s D e Idiotism. cap. áj'j)p, is quite certain, as M r . Benson has
viii. sect. 1. r e g . 11. [ W a h l explains this very correctly stated in his Chronology
ellipse t h u s . But (1 carne to give nothing of t h e Life of Chrii.í, p . 1 2 3 . T h e word
eíse b u t ) división. H e r m á n on Viger. occurs iEIian. V . H . xii. 17- Xen. Ages,
(not. 277.) says, t h a t 'AXX' í¡ is unless, i. 1 3 . ]
except, and is therefore usually p u t after 'líytpovía, a c , r¡, from 'Hyefuúv.— Go-
a negation, or an interrogative conveying vernmeni. occ. L u k e iii. 1, where Kypke
a negation.] cites Appian and Josephus using i¡yE¡.wvía
I I . An adverb. in like manner for the Román imperial
1. Of interrogation, from t h e Pleb. n authorily. [Joseph. A n t . xviii. 6. 9 . ]
inteivog. I t denotes a. question asked, 'llyepioj', OVOQ, b, from í'jytopai.
Whal? num ? M a t . x x . 15. 1 Cor. ix. 6. I. Properly, A leader or guide qf the
xi. 14. xiv. 36. " T h a t Scotticism, w h e - way.—Thus used in t h e profane writers,
ther did the word qf God come forth from as by Xenophon (in Scapula), oSü Xat,üv
you alone ? would be t h e exactest render- TirEIvIO'NA, to take a guide of the way.
i n g of "H ciiji vjiíov, ikc." Doddridge. A n d [ X e n . A n . ii. 4 . 1.]
1

in this sense of aslcing a question with II. A leader, governor, prince. M a t . ii.
some degree of earnestncss I apprehend 6. x. 18. xxvii. 2 , 1 1 , 14. Acts xxiii. 2 4 ,
it is used also M a t . vii. 9. xii. 29. So 26. 1 Pet. ii. 14. I t may be worth ob-
L u c i a n , Reviv. tom. i. p . 405. "II rt yap serving, t h a t Josephus, A n t . iib. xviii.
Su inreiv '¿x > "
oc w r
what can he s a y ? " cap. 4 , § 1, gives Pilate t h e same title of
See Blackwall's Sacred Classics, vol. ii. p. 'llytpüv, as St. M a t . does xxvii. 2 , &c.
164,5. and St. Luke, ch. xx. 20. See Campbell's'
2. Of affh-mation, Indeed, íruly, verily. Prelim. Dissertat. p . 3 7 8 . [ I m u s í here
A n d I think it is applied in this sense, as again refer to the word éwap^ía, and say
being a proper mark of a strong breathing, that íiyeuúj' is used of any governor.]
such as men comnionjy use in a veliement ' H P E ' O M A I , apai, from ayu) to bring,
affirmalioí!. T h e partióle "H is often t h u s lead.
used in the profane writers, particularly I. To lead, guide in a way, q. d. lo
in H o m e r (see II. i. lin. 78, 229, 232, bring on, or forwards. T h u s Herodotus,
240, & al. f r e q . ) ; but is not so applied ' H T O Y ' M A I COL rr¡v búbv, I lead you in
when single in the N . T . Comp. under (as to) t h e w a y ; Aristophanes in P l u t .
Mí/y. [ T I icaí is translated by Wahl and lin. 15. ' O Í yap €X¿irovrec role TVCJXOLC
Schl. as an etiam, in L u k e xii. 4 1 . Rom. 'HTOY'MEOA, For we who see lead t h e
iv. 9. In the first it is r a t h e r aut etiam, blind. [ E x o d . xiii. 2 1 . X e n . Cyr. iv. 2 .
as in L u k e xi. 12. Rom. ii. 15. 2 Cor. i.
13.—"llirep, Than. John xii. 43.—'Hxoi, I I . To lead, preside, govern, rule, whe-
(with ?'; following,) Either. Rom. vi. 16. t h e r in a temporal sense, as Acts vii. 10.
Xen. Cyr. iv. 5. 27. H e r m á n ad Viger. p . ( I n Lucian, Pseudomant. tom. i. p. 9 0 4 ,
2 4 8 . — T i pí]v, Truly, certainly, assuredly. we have, 'O róre TIFO'YMENOS BiBvvíac,
Heb. vi. 14. See Gen. xxii. 17. N u m b . T h e then governor of B i t h y n i a . ) — o r in a
xiv. 23, 35. Aristoph. P l u t . 608. Polyb. spiritual one (governing a genitivo), Heb.
 H A II 349
xiii. 7 * , 17, 24. Comp. L u k e xxii. 2 6 .
Mat". ii. 6. [ D e u t . i. 15. E s t h . v. 11. Xen.
M e m . iii. 2. 4.]
I I I . To lead, be the chief ov principal.
A c t s xiv. 12, ¿véiSn avrbg i¡v b yyipevog
ra Xóya, " because he ivas the leader of
the discourse;" on which account they
t h o u g h t he m i g h t more probably be their
god of eloquence. Iambliehus calis him
Qebg ó rtbv Xúywv hyepúv, with a r e m a r k -
able correspondence to the words of the
sacred historian. See other learned illus-
trations of this text cited by M r . JBiscoe
at Boyle's L e c t . chap. viii. § 8. p. 3 1 3 ,
314. Doddridge. See also Elsner, Wol-
fius, and Wetstein on t h e place, Acts xv.
22, 'Arepas nyapértig, Leading or prin-
cipal men.
IV. To think, esleem, rechón. Acts xxvi.
2. 2 Cor. ix. 5. Phil. ii. 3 . 1 Thess. v. 13- &
al. freq. O n Phil. iii. S, Kypke cites X e -
nuphon several times u s i n g t h e phrase
ZIIMIA'N ' I i r O Y M E ' N O S for reckoning
or esteeming as a loss. [See Job xix. 11.
Diod. Sic. xii!. 5 5 . Herodian. iii. 6. 3 . T h u -
cyd. iv. 9. iEsch. Dial. iii. 6. In 1 Thess.
v. 13. Schl. says t h e sense is, lo pay ho-
nour to, b u t W a h l joins yyíl.rrdaí vrre-
pcKirepÍTera, i. e. nepl rikeku, maxind faceré,
to valué at the highest rate.~]
"lióeiv, eig, et, Plup. act. A t t i c of ¡icéw
lo know, bv syncope for rjclpceiv. John i.
3 1 , 3 3 . iv."lO. v. 13. & al', freq.
'H&'we, Adv. from {¡ovg sweet.—G'ad,
miUingl.y, with pleasure. occ. 2 Cor. xi.
19. M a r k vi. 20. xii. 3 7 . So in P l a t o ,
Phaedon, § 14. p. 188. edit. F o r s t e r :
'IIAE'íiS «i-'AKO'YSAIMI, I would gladly
hear. [ 2 lilac, ii. 2 8 . f i l i a n . V. H . viii.
12.]
"HAI-I, An adv. of time.
1. Nom already, at, or by this time.
Mat. v. 2 8 . xiv. 15. xxiv. 32. J o h n x i . 3 9 .
& al.
2. Already, i. e. without menliouing, or
insisling upon any thing further. 1 Cor.
vi. 7- See Raphelius on t h e place.
3. "Uñí] de KU'L, And moreover, yea more-
over, quinetiam, quin imó etiam. M a t .
iii. 10. L u k e iii. 9. Raphelius has shown
t h a t both H e r o d o t u s and Polybius apply
the phrase in t h e same sense.
4. "He?; Trore, Nom at lenglh. So t h e
Vulgate versión, tándem aliquando. Rom.
i. 10. P h i l . iv. 1 0 ; where Wetstein cites
the Greek writers using these two par-
tióles in t h e same m a n n e r ; and on Rom.
* [Fícr.cc avosc an ecclesiastical term.]
H KO
Kypke observes, t h a t they denote a strong
desire either of averting some invetérate
evil, or of obtaining some long expected
good, and shows t h a t they are t h u s ap-
plied by Josephus and Dionysius H a l i -
carn.
"USt-ra, N e u t . plur. superlat. of í¡dic
(which see under'H&'we) used adverbially.
—Most gladly or millingly, mith the
greatest pleasure. occ. 2 Cor. xii. 9, 15.
HAONir, i¡g, i;. T h e Greek Etymolo-
gists derive it from ijdoj to picase.
I. Pleasure. occ. L u k e viii. 14. T i t . iii.
3. 2 Pet. ii. 13. [ I n N u m b . xi. 8, i t is a
pleasant tasle7\
I I . Lust, the desire of sensual plea-
sure. So Píesychius, enSvpíei. occ. J a m .
iv. 1, 3 , where t h e V u l g . concupiscentiis,
q. d. lusts, concumscences. Comp. T i t .
iii. 3 . [ W i s d . v i i . ' 2 . X e n . M e m . i. 2. 2 3 .
i. 5. 6 . ] — I n t h e N . T . it is generally
used in a bad sense. H o w similar is t h a t
passage of St. J a m e s , ch. iv. 1, to this of
P l a t o : Kat ydp reo\épag nal araveig Kal
payeig ¿Sév ctXXo x a p É ^ / E t 1) rb irwpa Kal
ttt ra'ra éwiBvpíai. Pheedon, § 1 1 . p. i / 8 ,
edit. F o r s t e r .
'HBvocrpov, a, r b , from ybvg, smeel,
aud bo-pi) smell.—Mint, a k i n d of herb,
so called from its smeet smell. occ. M a t .
xxiii. 2 3 . Luke xi. 42. 'ílvhocrpog, ¿t ce
pívQrjv, 'ilbíoerpog, but some calí it mint,
says Dioscorides, cited by Wetstein. So
Galen, lib. vi. Simplic. 'llSíoapog, evwt
os pívdr¡v repoaayopkvacn. [ I t was used
by t h e Jews for sprinkling 011 t h e floors of
their houses and synagogues. See Dios-
cor, iii. 41 and 4 8 . Theoph. de Causis
Plantar, vi. 2 2 . Schol. Aristoph. Ran.
1107. 0 1 . Cels. Hierobot. t. i. p . 543.]
"H0oc, eog, ac, rb, from edog, which see.
—Manner, cuslom. "lídeet, i¡6r), ra,
Manners, moráis, occ. 1 Cor. xv. 3 3 ,
where íÓetpacriy, &c. is an Iambic verse
of Menander's. [See the Sentent. Com.
G r . p. 2 4 8 . ed. Steph. p. 7 8 . ed. Cleric.
Polyb. iv. 2 1 . 1. X e n . M e m . iii. 10. 3 .
T h e first meaning of the word is an ac-
customed hábilation. See H o m e r . O d .
xiv. 4 1 1 . Herod. vii. 125. Irmisch. E x -
curs. ad Herodian. i. 2. 6 . ]
T
H K Q . [ O n this word see DaM'es, Mise.
Crit. p. 3 5 1 . ]
I. [ T o be come, arrive. M a r k viii. 3 .
L u k e xv. 27. J o h n iv. 47. A c t s xxviii. 2 3 .
So it is used of time in John ii. 4. I n
L u k e xiii. 3 5 , Kaipbg is understood, unless
with Schleusner we say t h a t ylr¡ ore are
r e d u n d a n t . Joseph, A n t . ii. 3 . 10. X e n .
 H A I 350 II A I

A n . ii. 5. 2 . A n d in this sense too] it is
spoken of Christ in respect of his incar-
naiion and birth into t h i s world, H e b . x.
7, 9.—and of his conversation among men
as t h e messenger of God, J o h n viii. 42.
Comp. 1 J o h n v. 2 0 .
[ I I . To come. M a t . viii. 11. xxiv. 5 0 ,
qf local motion. M a t . xxiv. 14. L u k e x i x .
4 3 , of time to be coming, or at hand. In
J o h n vi. 3 7 , it is to come as a follower ;
a n d so epyopai is used in t h e same verse.
See H e b . x. 3 7 . Rev. ii. 2 5 . Xen. A n . ii.
1. 3.]
I I I . To come, Jiappen, spoken of events.
M a t . xxiii. 36. Rev. xviii. 8.
TIAI', H e b — E l i , Heb. My God.
occ. M a t . xxvii. 4 6 . Comp. Ps. xxii. 2,
in t h e H e b . and 'EXai'í above.
'IIAIKI'A, a, e f¡.
I . Slature. occ. L u k e xix. 3 . Comp.
L u k e ii. 5 2 . E p h . iv. 13. [ S o A r i s t o t .
de P l a n t . i. 4. Diod. Sic. iii. 4 3 . Schleus-
ner refers Mat, vi. 27- L u k e ii. 5 2 . xii. 25,
to this head. W i t h the place of Ephesians,
which is referred by Schleusner to age,
comp. Lucian. I m a g . 7. Philost. V i t . Sonh.
i. p. 5 4 3 . ]
I I . Age. occ. J o h n ix. 2 1 , 2 3 . (See
u n d e r " E w X . ) H e b . xi. 11. Comp. M a t .
X
not the orb or fire, b u t * the lighl qf the
sun. See M a t . xiii. 6. M a r k iv. 6. (Com-
pare G e n . xxxii. 3 2 , in L X X , and H e b . )
M a r k i. 32. L u k e iv. 4 0 . (Comp. G e n .
xxviü. 11.) M a t . xiii. 4 3 . ( C o m p . D a n .
xii. 3.) M a t . xxiv. 2 9 . (Comp. Isa. xiii.
10. E z e k . xxxii. 7-) A c t s ii. 20. (Comp.
Joel ii. 31.) A c t s xiii. 1 1 . (Comp. Eccles.
vi. 5. xi. 7-) M a t . xiii. 4 3 . xvii. 2 . Rev. i.
16. ( C o m p . J o b xxxi. 2 6 . Rev. vi. 12.
(Comp. Joel ü i . 15.) Rev. vii. 16. (Comp.
Ps. cxxi. 6. J o n . iv. 8.) Revelation xii. 1.
(Comp. P s . civ. 2. Mal. iii. 2 0 , or iv. 2 .
W i s d . v. 6. Rom. xiii. 14. Gal. iii. 2 7 . ) —
I t m u s t be further remarked, t h a t in t h e
profane writers likewise, and in t h e popu-
lar language of the Greeks, "HXioe signi-
fies not only t h e orb ov fire, b u t also t h e
lighl qf the sun. T h i s is p u t beyond dis-
p u t e by a passage cited by t h e rev. and
learned William Jones, in his excellent
Essay on the F i r s t Principies of N a t u r a l
Philosophy, p . 2 0 3 , from Sallust t h e p h i -
losopher, who has expressly remarked 1":
T a T-IXÍH ríiv S<I>AI'PAN, raí r>)v airo rí]c
trifiáipas ' A K T I ' N A , " H A I O N ev ovvr¡Mia
icaXípev, " W e usually cali t h e orb of t h e
sun, and t h e ray proceeding from t h e orb,
"HXioc." A n d t h u s in the Poet M i m n c r -

vi. 2 7 . L u k e xii. 2 5 . in which l a t t e r t e x t s nus, Tíept fíÍH Concerning human life,

i t seems to signify t h e «ge qf a, man, or 'He'Xíoc is used for the solar light,
the áuralion qf liuman Ufe. See Wetstein
• MÚ'UvOa SE yíyvETCti ''H&J?
a n d Doddridge on M a t . and an excellent Kxific, Ztrm r hr\ yr,v K I ' A N A T A I ' H E ' A I O S .
Note of CanipheiFs on L u k e , and comp.
flij-guc. [ S e e E z e k . xiii. 18. iEsch. • Short is our youthíul time,
As whilst the sun is spread upon the earth.
D i a l . i. 12. ii. 13. A r r i a n , de Venat,
v. 1.]
H o m e r in like m a n n e r speaking of the
¡Ulp TIAI'KOSj r¡, ov.—ílow
0
great,
morning light, II. viii. 1.
(q. d. hom great a part or sitare.) I t is
used either interrogatively, or indefinitely. '•'HílS ¡J.h upoy.óvrtvrKo; ' E K l ' A N A T O Traaav err uiav.
occ. Col. ii. 1. James iii. 5. The saffiron morn was spread upon the earth.
" H A I 0 3 , a, ¿.
I . The sun, the solar orb, f re, or fíame. I n which passage t h e style of t h e poet, as
Rev. xxii. 5, where <¡¡WTOQ i'/Xía is evidently usual, agrees with t h a t of scripture. T h u s
parallel to ironn TIN the light qf the solar in Joel ii. 2, we read of 1Í1U? the dawn W)i¡
fíame, Isa. x x x . 2 6 , which t h e L X X t h e r e spread upon the mountains.—Suicer, in
render tj)ü>s í/Xia. "HXÍOC is also used in his T h e s a u r u s u n d e r "HXtoe I I I . 1. cites
t h a t versión for n o n in two other pass- the following passage from Clemens Alcx-
ages, Cant. vi. 10. Isa. xxiv. 2 3 ; as it is a n d r . Strom. iii. p . 4 2 8 , Tov rfjs iipépae
for Din the solar orb orfire, J u d . xiv. 18. airiov, ical irarépa rS Lpoirog " H A I O N o
J o b ix. 7. Comp. H e b . and E n g . Lexicón Qeoe ' E S E ' X E E N cívwdev "wov eiri yr¡£
u n d e r non and D^li. airddi TOÍQ ¡iXéireiv Svvap.évois, " God hath
I I . The sun or solar light. T h u s it from above poured forth (efFudit) the sun,
most generally signifies in t h e N . T . A n d t h e a u t h o r of t h e day, and t h e father oí
t h u s t h r o u g h o u t t h e L X X (except in t h e
forecited t e x t s and three more, in one of * Comp. Heb. and E n g . Lexicón under u>ntf I I .
and the authors there cited.
which, J o b xxxi. 2 6 , i t corresponds t o
f Sallustius De Diis & Mundo, published among
the light) it constantly answers to t h e the Opuscula Mytholog. Ethic. & P h y s i c by Tilo-
Heb. Uicw, which undoubtcdly denotes mas Gale.
 II M E 351
light, cqually upon all who can sec." A n d
t h a t t h e Euglish word sun was sometimes
applied in t h e same sense by our ances-
tors, evidently appears by an oíd Chronicle
preserved in t h e Gentleman's M a g a z i n e
for J u l y 1762, p . 306. I t begins t h u s :
" O n Tuesday, J a n u a r y 27, 1607, about
nine in t h e morning, t h e sunne being
fayrly and b r y g h t l y spred, &c." A n d it
is still t h u s frequently used in our com-
mon discourse, as when we speak of walk-
ing or sitting in the sun, * of Ihe suns
being hot, &c.
7
H A 0 S , a, ó.—A nail. occ. J o h n x x . 2 5 .
[Josh. xxiii. 13.]
' H M E F 2 , wv, Iv, a c , We, us, p l u r a l of
'Eyw I, which see.
'Tdpépa, ac, {¡. j
I . A day, [i. e. t h e t i m e ] whilst t h e
sun is above t h e horizon. M a t . x x . 6, 12.
J o h n xi. 9. A c t s xii. 18. xxvi. 13. xxvii.
29, 3 3 , 3 9 . [ I t is p u t for daylighl iu
L u k e iv. 4 2 . vi. 13. xxii. 66. A c t s xii. 18.
R e v . viii. 12. Xen. Cyr. iv. 5. 14. T i m e ,
vii. 1 8 4 . ] — O n 2 Pet. iii. 8, see t h e pass-
ages cited by W e t s t e i n . — T h e expressions
TStTcrapáicovTa {¡pípag Kai TEO-crápaKOvra
vvKrag,forly days andforty nights, M a t .
iv. 2 , and rpele ypépac Kai rpels vínrae,
three days and three nights, M a t . xii. 40,
t h o u g h agreeable to t h e H e b r e w idiom
(see Gen. vii. 4. Exod. xxiv. 18. J o n a h i.
17-), y e t are not merely Hebraica! or H e l -
lenistical, as is evident from H e r o d o t u s ,
lib. iii. cap. 129, 'Err' "EI1TA pév oé TUYIE'-
P A S nal "EIITA NY'KTAS v~ó r5 Tra-
peóvroc KCIKU ó AapEíos aypvTrvíycri iiyzro.
For seven days a n d seven nights D a r i u s
by this misfortune continued sleepless.
So Theocritus, I d y l l . ii. line 86,
Kii/ittv 8' i ¡i xK!vrr¡pi AEK' "AMATA xx) AE'KA
NT'KTAS.
Fox ten days and ten nights in bed I lay.
I I . F i g u r a t i v e l y , Time for nork or la- plural is often used in this sense, as L u k e
bour. J o h n ix. 4. Comp. M a t . x x . 6, 12. ii. 6, The lime was fulfilled.
I I I . The day of eternal life, as opposed 'EXeúowrat ypépai.
to the spiritual darkness of our present (se. rtvwv oíayívopévwv),
state. Rom. xiii. 12. [ S c h l e u s n e r says, val of some time.
* Compare E x o d . x v i . 2 1 . 1 S a m . x i . 9 . N e h .
vii. 3 .
f T h e derivations of rjiiípa c o m m o n l y proposed
are from Í.KS'JO? genile or tame, because appointed taken from t h c L X X , who use it Gen. vi.
for tame creatures; or from f¡ui; ihe morning, and 4. J u d . xvii. 6. xviii. 1. xix. I. & al. for
fóipa. a part, q. d. the danghter of the morning ; or t h e H e b . Q n n C3>au, for which a classi-
from ¡fisípu to desire, because it i s so amiable and
desiraíle to a l l m e n , a n d P l a t o ( i n C r a t y l o ) s a y s
tile ancients called í^/pai' Ifiípctn on this last account.
See Leigh and Mintcrt.
II M E
The time when a more perfeet knowledge
qf religión and virtue shall be propagated
through Christianity. T h e word is used
in this sense, which seems to be the t r u e
one (see M a c k n i g h t ) also in 1 T h e s s . v. 5.
T h e Jews called t h e time of t h e Messiah-
the day. See Schcetgen. Plor. H e b . p .
571.]
I V . A day, comprehending both t h e
day and night, a nuchthemeron, M a t . [vi.
3 4 . ] xv. 3 2 . xvii. 1. [ x x . 19-] A c t s xxviii.
7, 12, 14. 'Etpépav i'é, iipépac, Day after
day. occ. 2 P e t . ii. 8. T h e L X X use t h e
same phrase, E s t h . iii. 7, for t h e H e b r e w
a v i ? CDVa, from day to day. [See G e n .
x x x i x . 10.] N o t t h a t this expression is
merely Hebraical or Hellenistical, for
Kypke cites i t from Euripides, Rhes. line
445, and from Heniochus in Stobajus Ser-
món xxxix. p . 2 4 1 . "tlpépq. Kai ripépg:, Day
by day, 2 Cor. iv. 16. T h i s seems an H e -
braical expression, taken from t h e H e b ,
tul» O V , E s t h . iii. 4. P s . Ixviii. 20, or
from o v i 1 Sam. xviii. 10. [To
these phrases m a y be added some others.
I n M a t , xx. 2, rr)v ypípav is for Kaff r¡pé-
pav, or Kad' íjpépav ÍKanrnv. So is iv
y pepa in 2 P e t . ii. 13. "0\yv ryv ypépav
is also daily, every day, in R o m . viii. 3 6 .
and Isa. xxviii. 2 4 . aud P s . xliv. 2 2 , icaff
ypépav oceurs frequently. See M a t . xxvi.
55. M a r k xiv. 49. Pleb. "vii. 2 7 . x. 11. (In
t h e two last places, t h e phrase does not
mean on every (natural) day, b u t on every
one ofthe days referred, io, i. e. in t h i s
case every day (of expialion.) 'lípépae
Kai VVKTOQ means constantly. L u k e xviii.
7. 1 T i m . v. 5. L u k e xxi. 37- and T h o m a s
M . p . 6 3 0 , says t h a t this is an A t t i c e x -
pression. Xen. Cyr. ii. 3 . 2 3 . See M a t -
thite, § 3 7 8 . 'Ev pía ypépa seems to be
for at once, suddenly, in Rev. xviii. 8.]
V. [TLuépa, Time in general. T h u s ?/
ypépa SyXwo-ei, 1 Cor. iii. 13, is (Future)
lime will show, and L u k e xvii. 3 0 . T h e
xvii. 2 2 ,
A g a i n , At' ypépiov
After an Ínter- 1
A n d see M a r k ii. 1.
A c t s v. 3 6 . xv. 7. xxi. 38.] 'Ev rale
iipépaic tKELvaic, In those days, M a t . iii.
1. T h i s seems an Hellenistical phrase,
cal G r e e k writer would r a t h e r have said,
iv ÍKEÍVW ro> Kaiptjí, or %póV«, or Kar ÍKEIVOV
TOV Kaipbv, or xp '"' ''. [ T h i s phrase oceurs
1 0
 H ME 352
perpetually as M a r k i. 9. viii. 1. xiii. 2 4 ,
a n d it certainly does not convey any ac-
curate definition of time. About that
time. See Krebs. Obss. Flav. p . 6.] T h e
expressions iXevcovrai i¡pépai, and 'íp^ovrai
ilfiépat, the days shall or do come, which
we have M a t . ix. 15. L u k e v. 35. xvii. 22.
xxiii. 2 9 . & al. are also Hellenistical; t h e
latter is used by the L X X , J e r . x x x i . 27,
3 1 . Amos. iv. 2, for t h e Heb. 0<«a a>»>.
V I . 'íluépai, cu, Days, time, qf life or
office. M a t . ii. 1. xxiii. 30. L u k e i. 5. iv.
25. xvii. 28. Comp. H e b . v. 7- This
phrase iv (rale) ypépcuc is likewise H e l -
lenistical, often used in t h e L X X for t h e
Heb. e n r n , J u d . v. 6. 1 Chron. i. 19. iv.
4 1 . v. 10, 17. A classical author, for iv
ilftipaiQ 'HpwSs, &c. would say ii¡>' 'tlpwSu.
[See John viii. 50. M a t . xi. 12. I n L u k e
xix. 4 2 , Thy day is r a t h e r The time and
opportuniiy granted to thee. B u t there is
another phrase connected with this sense
used in speaking of length of life. T h u s ,
Luke i. 7, Both advanced in their days;
or, as we say, in life or in years. So ibid.
18. and ii. 3 6 . Comp. Gen. xvii. 11. xxiv.
1. Josh. xiii. I . xxiii. 1. I think this is
t h e sense in Heb. vii. 3 . Schleusner says
it is there The time qf office.]
V I I . \fll¡iípa, either alone, or with
SKsívr¡, icyjiry, ¿ce, or Kup/a, or 'í?;o-5
Xpi^a, or rS ¿ta ra cívOptlnru, is p u t for
The time when. the Messiah will coiné to
jiulge the universe. M a t . vii. 22. x. 15.
L u k e x. 12. xvii. 24, 20. J o h n vi. 39, 40,
44, 54. Acts ii. 20. 1 Cor. i. 8. v. 5. 2 Cor.
i. 14. P h i l . i. 6, 10. 2 Thess. i. 10. ii. 2.
2 T i m . i. 18. iv. 8. I n L u k e xvii. 24,
20, and 30, according to Schleusner, and
Heb. x. 25, according to P a r k h u r s t , The
destruction qf Jerusalem (which was one
manifestation of t h e Son of M a n ) is s u p -
posed to be i n t e n d e d . ] — F r o m t h e fre-
q u e n t mention in t h e S. S. of the great
day of judgmeni u n d e r t h e ñames of that
day, the last day, the day qf the Lord
Jesús, the day of Christ, the day of judg-
meni, &c. we may account for t h e follow-
ing very uncommon sense, in which t h e
word is once used by St. P a u l .
V I I I . Judgmeni. occur. 1 Cor. iv. 3 ,
where observe t h a t avdpwirívys ypipac,
literally man's day, is spoken in opposi-
tion to the coihing qfthe Lord, verse 5,
and to ' H 'lípépa, the day, i. e. the day
of t h e Lord namely, ch. iii. 13, where t h e
V u l g a t e h a t h D i e s D o m i n i . [Bretschneider
and Schl. give the same explanation of t h e
¡irigin of this p h r a s e ; but to me it appears
UPE
a very foiced one. St. Jerome ( E p . ad
Alliasiam), says it is a provincialism.—
'Hpépa, fot judgmeni, occurs in Demosth.
1072, 27- T h e Syriac has, by any man.
See Glass. P h i l . Sac. p . 8 7 8 . ed. D a t h . ]
[ I X . 'tlpkpa is often p u t for a feast-
day, or day lo be observed. See Acts ii.
1. xx. 6, 16. M a r k xiv. 49. Gal. iv. 10.
L u k e iv. 16. xiii. 14. J e r , xvii. 24. J o h n
xii. 7. H e b . vii. 27. 2 Mac. ii. 16.]
'MjxírepoQ, a, ov, -from ypelc, we, us.—
Our. Acts ii. 11. xxiv. 6.
[Tlytu, t h e Moiie form of íifii, To be.
T h e imperfect ijpyv, occ. A c t s xi. 10. See
Mceris.]
Sf§p° 'll¡.a6av>)e, eos, Se, o, y, from y/u
haf (see ypicvc), and 'iOarov, 2 aorist of
Svrio-Kiú to die.—Ha If dead. occ. L u k e . x .
30. [ T h e word occurs in Diod. Sic. x i i .
62. Herodian iv. 9. 15. TI^i0p/c in A r i s -
toph. N u b . 504. Alaph. iii. 7. I t answers
to seminex in Virg. ÍEn. v, 2 7 5 . W e have
ypíQvnroc in Wisd. xviii. 1 8 . ]
"HMI2Y2, £io, v. M i n t e r t derives i t
from y¡.u haf, and 'icos equal.—Half. neut.
"ílpiav, EOC, ac, ro. Plur. ¿¡pícea, y, ra,
The half. occ. M a r k vi. 23 *. L u k e x i x .
8. Rev. xi. 9, 1 1. xii. 14. [ O n the geni-
tive i/pícac, see Lobeck on P h r y n . p. 246.
T h e word occurs Exod. xxiv. 6. J o b viii.
21. Joseph. A n t . iii. 6. Dion. H a l . iv. 17-
Polyb. v. 3 2 . 1.]
¡ f ^ " 'lípióipiov, a, t u , from ypi haf,
which see under ypiavs, and apa an hour.
—A half hour, half an hour. occ. Rev.
viii. 1. [Poli. Onom. i. 7 1 . ]
'rl/j,<pi£C[ÁÍvcs, P a r t i c i p . Perf. Pass. of
'Apiéiévvvpi, which see among the Anoma-
lous Verbs, in G r a m m a r , § 16.
"ílvtKa, an Adv. of lime.—When. occ. 2
Cor. iii. 10, 1 6. [ X e n . Cyr. i. 4. 2 7 . ]
"11-irep, an A d v . from i¡ than, and -¡cip
truly.—Than Iruly, than. occ. John xii.
43.
g g g * " H U I O S , a, o, y. T h e learned
D a m m , Lexicón N o v . G r a e c , derives i t
from É ' T F Í Ü to follow, as denoting one who
re&d'üy follows t h e will of another, aud is
ready to do w h a t he desires or.wants.—
Placid, mild, gentle, easy. occ. 1 Thess. ii.
7, (where see Wetstein.) 2 T i m . ii. 24.
[occ. Herodian ii. 4. 1. T h u c . ii. 58. TÍ7ri-
órys iu A d d i t . E s t h . xiii. 2 . ]
SíüilP "lípípoc, a, ó, ?;. I t seems formed.
as t h e Lexicons r e m a r k , by transposition,
from rjfiepos tame, gentle, which is properly
opposed to áypwe wild.—Quiet, composed,
* [ A form c o n v e y i n g t h e intcntion of satisfying
the most excessive requests. S e e E s t h . v. 3 . ]
 II P £ l 353 H P íi

occ. 1 T i m . ii. 2. \Jipe¡xía, i)cit¡xib), and -hpz-• pious wretches as t h e y must have esteem-
/u'i£íD, occ. often in t h e versionsof t h c O . T . ] ed t h e Herodians ! [ T h e r e are many who
'H.piiib\ai'oí, wv, ói, from 'HpáS-ns Herod. t h i n k t h e Herodians were only courtiers
— A ñame formed with a Román or L a t i n or servants of Herod. So t h e Syriac,.the
termination, like XpiTiavoc, which see, H e b r e w interpretation of St. M a t t h e w , and
and Wetstein on M a t . xxii. 17- Herodi- L u t h e r . Tertullian, E p i p h a n i u s , C h r y -
ans, a sect, or r a t h e r a p a r t y or faction, sostom (on M a r k xii.), Theophylact, and
among t h e J e w s , so called from Herod the even S t . Jerome in his Dial. cont. Lucifer-
G r e a t . I t is probable, from a comparison anos, say they were persons who believed
of M a t . xvi. 6. with Mark viii. 15, t h a t Herod to be t h e Messiah. B u t in his
t h e y were a branch of the Sadducees : Commentary he rejeets this obviously ab-
A n d , besides t h e impious principies of surd opinión. See Stolberg. Exerc. L i n g .
t h a t sect, they seem to have been parti- Gr. p. 419. Sam. P e t i t . V a r . Lect. c. 18.
cularly attached to t h e family of Herod, Macknight's H a r m o n y , p . 168, H a m m o n d
and consequently t o t b e Román govern- on St. Mnt. xxii. 16.1—As to the question
mcnt, by which Herod had been made which t h e Pharisees and Herodians in
and continued king, and which, at. t h e concert proposed to Christ, about the law-
time of our Saviour's public ministry, fa- fulness of giving tribute to C a s a r , it is
voured and protected bis two sons, H e r o d generally supposed (to use t h e words of
Antipas aud Philip, in their respective Doddridge) t h a t " t h e y hoped to have in-
tetrarchics. (Comp. under Terpcip-^tiQ.) snared him, whatever answer he could
A n d as Herod, to ingratiaíe himself with have r e t u r n e d . If he asserted, on t h e one
A u g u s t u s and the g r e a t men of Rome, hand, t h a t tribute was to be paid to Cm-
had in many things acted contrary to t h e sar, t h e Pharisees, who generally main-
iaw and religión of t h e Jews, by * i n t r o - tained (as J u d a s the Gaulonite had done)
ducing t h e heathenish customs of the Ro- t h a t such a subjection to a foreign power
mans into J u d e a , and even by f building was inconsistent with t h e privileges of
temples, and erecting images elsewhere God's peculiar people, would have endea-
for idolatrous worship, and particularly voured to expose him to popular resenl-
in honour of A u g u s t u s ; so his partizans, ment, as betraying t h e liberties of his
t h e Herodians, seem, like him, to have country. O n t h e other hand, had he de-
professed indeed t h e Jewish religión, b u t nied the lawfulness of this tribute, t h e
to have corrupted it by occasionally com- Herodians would have had a very 'plausi-
plying with the pagan customs of their ble pretence of aecusiug him to the Ho-
Román masters, pleading probably, as l nran power, as a seditious person." T h u s
H e r o d himself did, t h a t t h e y acted not t h e doctor*. [So Kuinoel and H a m m o n d . ]
t h u s of their own accord, but iu obedience B u t considering t h e terms of t h a t hypo-
to the superior powers. And this wicked critical address with which they introduce
occasional conformity to heathenism seems their queetion, Thou carest not for any
to be what our Saviour particularly means man, thou regardest not the person of men,
by the leaven of Herod, ( M a r k viii. 15.) but leachest the way of God in truih ; and
or of the Herodians, as indeed some copies of t h e question itself, Is it lawful to give,
read, TSIV 'HpiiiStavüv. (See Mili and ¿Wat (not áwoSSrat to pav), tribute lo
Wetstein.) T h u s t h e Herodians were, Ccesar, or not ? Shall we give, Siopev, or
both in their religious and political prin- shall we not give ? and especially reflect-
cipies, most diametrically opposite to t h e ing, t h a t on this occasion t h e y sought, as
Pharisees. H o w keen then m u s t have St, L u k e informs us, chap. x x . 20, lo de-
been t h e malice of t h e latter against liver up Christ lo the power and authority
Christ, t h a t , in order to destroy him, t h e y qf the R o m á n -j- governor, it rather seems,
would join in consultation with such im-
* C o m p . R a n d o l p h ' s V i e w of our B.' Saviour's
* H e r o d instituted g a m e s after t h e R o m á n m a n . M i n i s t r y , p. 277.
ner in honour of C a s a r , and e v e n b u i l t a tJicalre in •)- I t is w e l l k n o w n t o those w h o are acquainted
Jerusalem adorned with images o f m e n ; as J o s e - w i t h the R o m á n I-Iistory, that never were crimen
phus informs u s , A n t . l i b . x v . cap. í). § 1, 2 . V e a iagainst the statc, or, w h i c h were n o w reckoned the
h e went s t ü l f a r t h e r ; for h e dedicated and ereeted, is a m e , erimes against the emperor, more strictly en-
out of respect, n o d o u b t , t o the R o m a n s , a golden iquired after, ñor more severely punished, than d u r -
eagle over t h e great gate of the temple. i the reign o f T i b e r i u s . See W e t s t e i n ' s N o t e o n
ing
f J o s e p h . A n t . l i b . x v . cap. 9. § 5. C o m p . D e '.M a t . x x i i . 17. T a c i t . A n n a l . l i b . i. cap. 72. and l i b .
B e l . l i b . i. c a p . 2 1 . § 3 , 7 . iii. cap. 3 8 - and Crevier's H i s t . des E m p e r e u r s , ^
% J o s e p h . ut s u p . tom. ii. p. 3 3 6 .
A A
 Ii 2 Y 354 H #1

tíiat they expected our Saviour would an- occ. A c t s xxii. 2. 1 T i m . i i . 11, 12, where"
swer their inquiry in the negative. B u t see Wolfius. [In Acts xxii. 2. i)o-vytav
then as the Pharisees in general were no- waptyéiv is, lo be silent, ( t h e same as
toriously of the same sentiments, it would havyjav ayziv in X e n . Hell. ii. 3 . 2 3 .
not have been decent for such good raen L y s . O r . x i . cap. 18. See Spanh. ad
to have aecused Christ to Pílate on this Aristoph. R a n . v. 3 2 4 . and WesseL ad
a c c o u n t ; ñor would it have been conve- H e r o d . i. 86.) while in Job xxxiv. 2 9 .
nient, for another very strong reason, lest vcv^lav -xapkyto-Qai is, to cnjoin silence.]
they should thereby have lost their popu- 'ílav-^wr, B, ó, i¡, from i¡crv)iO£, which
larity, and forfeited their influenee with see u n d e r 'líavyciíw.— Quiet, peaceable,
the people, who were generally infected \¿untroubled.~\ occ. 1 T i m . ii. 2. 1 P e t . iii. 4.
with the seditious principies of J u d a s the [ I n Is. Ixvi. 2. it is qjjlicted.]
Caulonite. T h e Pharisees, therefore, "Hrot, from ij whether, or, and rol truly.
prudenlly associated with themselves t h e •—Whether truly, whether indeed, whe-
ílerodiaus, who, on Christ's denying the ther. occ. Rom. vi. 16.
lawfulness of giving t r i b u t e to Csesar, ' H T T A ' O M A I , copai, either from rjrriov
would, no doubt, have shown their zeal less, inferior.
for the Román government by t u r n i n g his I. To be overeóme, .properly as in a
aecusers: and how glad his persecutors battle, or in a law-suit. occ. 2 Pet. ii, 19,
would have been of any foundation for 20. On ver. 19, K y p k e remarks, t h a t
such an aecusation against him, may be iirráo-daí rivi, to be overeóme by any one,
fairly gathered by their actually b r i n g i n g is r a t h e r an unnsual construction; h e
it, at his tria! before Pilate, without any however produces several instances of it
foundation al all, L u k e xxiii. 2. occ. M a t . from Josephus. [ I t occurs in 2 M a c . x .
xxii. 16'. M a r k iii. 6. xii. 13.— F o r a 2 4 . and iElian. V. H . iv. 8. of being over-
fuller account of t h e Herodians see P r i - eóme in battle; iu X e n . M e m . iv. 4. 17.
deaux's Connect pt, ii. book 5 , at the end, Poli. viii. 7 3 . of one losing his cause. In
and Doddridge's Notes on Mark iii. 6, and v. 20. of 2 P e t . ii. it seems r a t h e r to e x -
M a t . xxii. 16. press t h e consequence of being overeóme,
T
IIcrÉ)a, used, according to t h e 'MoWc i. e. yielding, giving way to, and is used
and A t t i c dialect, for 7¡Q thou wast, 2 in this sense frequently as to sensual plea-
pers. imperf. sing. of t h e verb ii¡xl.— Thou sures. X e n . Apol. Socr. 19. C y r . viii. 8.
wast. M a t . xxvi. 61). M a r k xiv. 67. xxiv. 7. -/Elian. V. H . x. 9.]
69. W e t s t e i n gives m a n y examples of I I . To be inferior, occ. 2 Cor. xii. 13.
•¡jo-da used in the purest A t t i c writers. [ S o in the active, Polyb. xv. 4. D e m . 792,
Comp. also Maittaire's Dialects, p . 44, and 25. T h e word occurs I s . viii. 9. x x . 5. &
observe, t h a t in H o m e r — S a is often post- al. for t h e H e b . n¡"l.]
fixed to the 2d person of other verbs be- "lírrripa, arotj, rb, from i]rrciopat.
sides t h e imperf. of kipl and its compounds. I. A diminulion, failure. occ. Rom. xi.
See inter al. II. iv. lin. 3 5 3 , II. xix. lin. 12.
180, 270. II. xxiv. lin. 5 5 1 . I I . A failure, fault. occ. 1 Cor. vi.
'\ío-vyá(w, from ijcrvype quiet. 7. [ H e r e Schl. and Wahl say, t h a t i t
I. To rest from labour. occ. L u k e xxiii. means, as in t h e former case, an inferior
56. condition (in moráis). I t occurs in Is.
I I . To be quiet, Uve quielly. occ. 1 xxxi. 8. of those who from being free
Thess. iv. I I . [ T h u c y d . i. 12.] are reduced to t h e inferior condition of
I I I . To be silent, quiet from speaking. slaves.]
occ. Luke xiv. 4. I t is not only used in "HTTílN, ovoc, b, rj, ¡cal rb—ov.
this sense by t h e L X X , N e h . v. 8, for t h e I . Inferior, less, whence n e u t . ijrrov,
Pleb. uvnnn, b u t K y p k e shows t h a t it is used adverbially, less. occ. 2 Cor. xii. 15.
so applied also by Eurípides, [ M e d . 8 0 . ] I I . Worse. occ. 1 Cor. xi. 17.
P l u t a r c h , Philo, and Josephus. [ H e r o d i a n . "tifie, 3d pers. sing. 2 aor. act. from
viii. 3 . 7- Diog. L . viii. J . ] aéiéoj. Comp. 'Acjiíijpi IX. occ. M a r k i.
I V . To acquiesce. occ. A c t s . x i . 18. 3 4 . x i . 16.—Grotius remarks, t h a t this
x x i . 14. word is vox povrjpi/s, an unique, which no
'VLo-vyja, ac, f¡, from jjav-)ioQ. See 'lícrv- one has observed except in Mark. Kypke,
X<U ÍÜ-
however, has found i t in Philo. L e g a t . ad
I . Quietncss, quiet. occ. 2 Thess. iii 12. Caium, p . 1021, 'O pkv bv 'EKÍKIOV cocop-
I I . Silcnce, quietncss from
1
speaking. •¡riiobte ¿ivopaTroSov rbv íuyvwriaiibv "tov kic
 ÍI X E 355 H X O

'laSawvs "IPMEN, Helicón then, a scor- QxXaaa-a. TI 'HXH'EESAI

pion-like 6lave, sent forth this E g y p t i a n
The sounding main.
poison against t h e J e w s .
'lly¡éb>, 5>, from í ' / x >
o e

I. To sound, as an instrument of brass.

T
H X O S , B, 6.
oce. 1 Cor. xiii. 1. I. A sound. occ. A c t s ii. 2 . H e b . x i i .
I I . To roar, as t h e sea. occ. L u k e xxi. 10. [Herodian. iv. 8. 19. iElian. V . H .
25. I t is used in t h e same manner by iv. 17. P l u t . Sympos. viii. p . 7 2 . B . P s .
t h e L X X , J e r . v. 2 2 . 1. 42, for t h e H e b . ix. 6. W i s d . xvii. 4.]
nnn to tumultúate. So H o m e r applies t h e I I . A report, fame. occ. Luke iv. 3 7 .
adjective lixn^c> H. une 157,

0 A A
e A A

© $, 6, Tketa. T h e eighth of the more Holy Scripture ís wont to denomínate

» modern Greek letters, b u t the ninth collections of waters, seas." [ S o in J o s h .
of the ancient, whence in numbers $ or 6 xv. 5 . y QéCXaaaa i) áXu/o) the salt sea,
denotes nine. I n t h e Cadméan alphabet for t h e lake Asphaltites. Pausanias v. 7 .
it answered to t h e H e b r e w or Phenician calis i t t h e daXaarcra vttcpa. Comp. A r i -
Teth, in ñame, order, a n d power, a n d in stot. Meteor. i. 15. See Reland Palsest.
both its forms, 9 and &, approaches nearer i. 3 8 , where h e points o u t t h e same p r a c -
to t h e H e b . to, t h a n to t h e Samaritan or tice in other languages. Aípvn is used for
Phenician letter. a sea. H o m . II. £2. 7 9 . "EvOope pd\avi
GA'AASSA, T j c , r). T h e best of t h e TTÓVTCO, éirtTOvaj^r/cre Sé Xipvn. See A r i -
various G r e e k derivations of this word stoph. Av. 1339. Heins. Aristarch. Sacr.
seems t o be t h a t proposed by F u l l e r , from p . 168. P a r k h u r s t has mistranslated
rapátrcno to disturb, agítate, properly, as ÍKÓXÍO-ÍV in his citation from Theophylact,
water, t h e tennis r being changed into for Theophylact is quoting G e n . i. 10.J
the aspírate 5-, and p into X. B u t : r a y i t I I I . A sea, or great laver. So t h e b e -
not (like "AXc, which see) be still moré loved disciple saw in visión, Rev. iv. 6,
probably deduced from t h e H e b . ybx to á> * SáXacrtra va\lvr¡, as it were a glassy
urge, ieaze, molest, q. iTü^Wi, because sea, before t h e throne of God, correspond-
continually molested with winds a n d ent to t h e brazen sea, ( H e b . tro*, L X X
storms ? T h e H e b . ñame of the sea, t 3 ' , $ctXa<r<ra) in Solomon's temple, 1 K i n g s
which t h e L X X generally render 3 ú - vii. 2 3 , and, like t h a t , emblematical of
Xaaaa, very well answers t h e G r e e k word t h e troubles a n d affiictions, (comp. under
according to either of t h e above etymolo- Bairrl¿¡ú) V I . ) a n d of t h e purification, of
gies, being in like manner derived from believers. I n Rpv. xv. 2 , t h e sea appears
the V . tu» or t i l to tumultúate. mingled with fire, t h a t is, wrathj and
I. The, or A, sea. M a t . xxiii. 15. A c t s believers a r e represented as s t a n d i n g on
iv. 24. xiv. 15. & al. freq. [ I t denotes t h e edge of i t , having now gone t h r o u g h
The Red Sea, in A c t s vii. 3 6 . 1 Cor. x . t h e i r fery triáis, and singing t h e song of
1. H e b . x i . 2 9 . See Diod. Sic. i i . 1 1 . Moses, as t h e Israelites did after having
xix. 100.] passed t h r o u g h t h e R e d Sea, Exod. x v .
I I . Any lar ge tollection of water, a Comp. 'XíCKivoc, [ O n t h e phrase dáXaa-
Me. M a t . iv, ¡ 5 , 18. M a r k i. 16. J o h n crav spyáCeaOai, see épyál¡opai I V . a n d
vi. 1, & al. freq. T h u s t h e word is used compare Hesiod. T h e o g . v. 440. J u s t i n .
in the L X X , answering to t h e H e b . t n ' , xliii. 3 . Wessel. Obss. i. 15. T h e r e is a
as Gen, x i v . 3 . Josh. xii. 3 . A n d so
Theophylact on J o h n vi. 1, QáWacraav Xé- * Observe that the Alexandrian, and eighteen
yti ri¡v Xípvnw ra yap cv^ypara riov later MSS., with several ancient versions and
printed editions, here read A?, which reading is ap-
bSáriov GAAA'SSAX auáXecrsv >/ B¿ta ypa- proved by Vitringa and Wetstein, and received into
éi¡. " H e calis t h e lake a sea; for t h e thc text by Griesbach.
A A2
 e A N 356 9 A N

proverbial phrase in M a t . xxiii. 15. To i the lusts of the flesh which will bring on
compass sea and land, which answers to a me t h e death awarded by the law ? Again,
Latin one, térra ¿} mari ( P l a u t . Prolog, 2 Cor. iii. 7 . The ministry of death,
in Pcenul. v. 104.) and means, To take means, T h e ministry of t h a t law which
every means to accomplish an end. See awards death without hope of pardon to
Arrían. Diss. E p . iii. 26. D e E x p . Al. vii. t h e sinner. In the first place, however,
2. A t h e n . vii. p. 278. Palairet. Obss. Crit. the idea may perhaps be, " Where shall I
p. 7 2 . ] find a deliverer from t h a t eternal death to
Qcüwroj.—To cherish, fovere. occ. E p h . which the impoteney of t h e law to justify
v. 2 9 . 1 Thess. ii. 7. [ I t is to warm by would leave me ?'" T h e same remark a p -
incubation in D e u t . xxii. 6. A n d comp. plies to v. 5 and 13, where t h e first mean-
J o b xxxix. 14. and 1 K i n g s i. 2 and 4. ing seems to be, The death denounced by
Soph. A n t . 4 1 7 . ] the law.~\
QapSéw, ai, and —éopai, Spai, Pass. I I . Figuratively, Imminent danger of
from Sáp&oc.—To be astonished, amazed, death. 2 Cor. i. 10. [iv. 1 1 . ] xi. 2 3 . O n
astonndcd, either with wonder, or fear. the former of which texts comp. ver. 8.
occ. M a r k i. 27. x. 24, 32. Acts ix. 6. and see Alberti, Wetstein, and M a c k n i g h t ;
[ 2 Sam. xxii. 5. Hom. II. viii. 77- Wisd. on the latter comp- Isa. liii. 9, in H e b .
xvii. 3.] and see Kypke on I Cor. xv. 3 1 .
G A M B O S , t o s , ac, rb.—Astonishment, I I I . Death, spiritual. John v. 24. 1
amazement. occ. L u k e iv. 36. v. 9, (where J o h n iii. ¡ 4 . A s spiritual life consists in
Campbell, whom see, terror.) A c t s iii. constant communication with t h e divine
10. [ S e e Song of Solomon iii. 8. T h u c . light and spirit, who are life, (see under
vi. 3 1 . ] — I n one of t h e Hexaplar versions, Z Í Ü Í ) I I I . ) so spiritual death is the being
Sáptog answers to t h e H e b . püDJi asto- ¡ séparated from their blessed mfhíence.
nishment. D e u t . xxviii. 2 8 . See Suicer's Thesaur. under Qávaros
EÜp Qav¿icnpos, a, ó, //, from Scivaroc I I . b.
0

death, q. Saváripoc.—Deadly, mortal. I V . Death, eternal. Rom. vi. 2 1 , 2 3 .

occ. M a r k xvi. 18. T h e profane writers J a m . v. 20. 1 J o h n v. 16, 17, which in
in like manner apply this word to a respect to t h e natural or temporal is called
deadly poison, either elliptically, without t h e second death, Rev. ii. 1 1 , (where see
fcLppaicov, or with t h a t N . expressed. See Vitringa.) xx. 6, 14, and impües everlast-
Wetstein, Kypke, and W h i t b y , on ver. ing punishment. Rev. xxi. 8. [ A d d Rom.
17. [Diod. Sic. i. 87. Polyb. i. 5 1 . 4. i. 32. v. 12, 17, 2 1 . John viii. 5 1 . 1 Cor.
Theoph. H i s t . Pl. vii. 9. Lobeck on P h r y n . xv. 2 i . ]
i. 651.] . V. B y an Hebraism it denotes the plague
Qavarnípópos, a, ó, »'/, from Srávaroc or pestilence. Grotius, on M a t . xxiv. 7,
death, and (pépo> to bring.—Deadly. q. d. says the H e b . ÍYID is t h u s applied, J e r .
death-bringing. occ. J a m . iii. 8 ; where | ix. 2 1 . xviii. 2 1 . (Comp. J e r . xv. 2.)
E r a s m . Schmidius suspected it to be a B u t however this be, t h e L X X do cer-
poctical w o r d ; but Wetstein and K y p k e tainly often use Boyaros for t h e H e b . 'laT
have produced many instances of its being the plague or pestilence, as Exod. v. 3 . ix.
used by the prose-writers. [Herodian. 3, 15. 2 Sam. xxiv. 13, 15. E z e k . xiv.
iii. 12. 7. iv. l 2. 14.]
c
19, 2 1 , & al. freq. So in Ecclus. xxxix.
Qávaros, a, ó, from '¿Oavov 2 aor. of 29, o r 3 5 , lavaros is joined with \ipbs
Bviicico} or &eívu>, which see. famine, doubtless in t h e same sense. occ.
I. Death, natural or temporal. Mat. x. Rev. vi. 8, with which compare Ezek. xiv.
2 1 . xvi. 28.' L u k e ii. 26, & al. freq. [ I n 2 1 . Rev. ii. 2 3 . xviii. 8. [ T h e r e is a
t h e following places it denotes, Violent phrase of frequent oceurrence, "Ewc da-
death, or the punishment of death. M a t . x. vára, or pé%pi, or aj(pi davárn, which, says
2 1 . xv. 4. M a r k vii. 10. Col. i. 22. Phil. Schl., properly signifies, even with danger
11. 8. H e b . ii. 9. ix. 15. Rev. ii. 2 3 . So of death, as Ecclus. iv. 3 3 . iElian. V . H .
Exod. xxi. 17. X e n . Mem. iv. 8 3 . Cyr. xii. 3 8 . T h e n i t is p u t for vehemently, as
vii. 2 . 2 2 . A g e s . i. 37- Anab. ii. 6.16. T h e r e M a t . xxvi. 3 8 . See Jonah iv. 9. J u d g .
are two other places where the punish- xvi. 16. Lucill. E p i g . 19. Ceb. T a b . c. 18.
ment qf death, as denounced by t h e M o - Rev. xii. 12, where i t has nearly its pro-
saic law, is, I think, intended. Rom. vii. per meaning.]
24. Who will deliver me from the body qf Qavaroii), w, from Bávarog death.
this death ? i. e. who will deliver me from I. .To put to death. occ. M a t . x. 2 1 .
 e A n
xxvi. 5 9 . xxvii, 1. M a r k xiii. 12. xiv.
5 5 . L u k e xxi. 16. 1 Pet. iii. 18. In
M a t . x. 2 1 , M a r k xiii. 12, the word seems
to allude to the Jewish law, D e u t , xvii. 7,
by which, when any person had been
guilty of idolaírous worship, the hands qf
ihe witnesses mere io be first upon him io
put him to death. T h a t the unbelieving
J e w s extended this law to the Christians
is evident from t h e case of St. Stephen,
Acts vii. 5 8 , where we find t h e witnesses
stripping off their clotbes, doubtless to as-
sist in his execution, as is expressed Acts
xxii. 20. Comp. D e u t . xiii. 6—9. [ S c h l .
t h i n k s t h a t iu M a t . x. 2 1 . it is simply,
They shall cause them ( b y their testi-
mony) to be put to death ; and in all t h e
other places W a h l says, To condemn lo
death.}
I I . QavariodijvaL rS rapa, To be dead
to the law, is io be free from it, even as a
dead man is. occ. Rom. vii. 4 . Comp.
ver. 1, and ver. 6, '' A-Kofíavóvrec, as the
M S S . in general, with t h e ancient versions
and m a n y printed editions, read. See
Mili, W e t s t e i n , and Griesbach. Place
¿nroQavóvree between t w o commas, and
connect iv ¿ with vóp&.
I I I . To mortify, i. e. io subdue and
kill, as i t were t h e deeds of t h e body, or
" those carnal inclinations from whence
all criminal indulgences of the body arise."
Doddridge. occ. Rom. viii. 13.
[ I V . To bring into danger qf death,
qfflicl gricvously. In t h e pass. To be in
danger of death. Rovn. viii. 36. comp. P s .
xliv. 22. 2 Cor. vi. 9, with which comp.
P s . cxviii. 18.]
GA'HT£2, 2d aor. 'érafov, 2d aor. pass.
irá<j¡j]v.— To bury. Qá-rr-io or Tíapio may
be derived either from f]to¡J io cover over ;
dropping t h e harsh l e t t e r J), as in Av-n-gio
from t\by; or else perhaps from t h e N .
* m i l , in Regim. m n , an arle or chest,
referring to t h a t very ancient custom (see
Gen. 1. 26.) of burying dead bodies in a
chest or coffin, which was certair.ly some-
times used among t h e oíd Greeks, and
was probably among them prior to the
method of b u r n i n g them | . Acts ii. 2 9 .
v. 6, 9, 10. In M a t . viii. 2 1 , 2 2 . xiv.
12. L u k e ix. 5 9 , 60. xvi. 22. 1 Cor. xv.
4, it seems to denote not only to bury, or
inlcr, according to its u s u a l sense in t h e
* W h e n c e the Greek QÍSr,, b y w h i c h the L X X
render the H e b . word, E x o d . ii. 3 . 5 .
+ See Botter's A n t i q u i t i e s of Greece, book i v .
ch. (!.
357 e A Y
profane writers, b u t also to include t h e
ivraepiatrpóv, funerationem, or prepara-
tion of the body for burial by washing,
anointing, efe. T h u s in t h e L X X , Gen.
1. 26, it is used for the H e b . toan to em-
balm, though iu all other passages of t h a t
versión it answers to 1S¡? to bury, ínter,
pul into the ground or tomb.—The above-
cited are all t h e passages of the N . T .
wherein t h e word oceurs.—On M a t . viii.
2 1 . comp. Tobit. vi. 14, and see K y p k e .
[ C u p e r (Observatt. i. 7. p . 44.) and W e s -
seling (ad Diod. Sic. t. i. p . 223.) have
shown t h a t t h e word expresses any way
of removing and disposing qf a dead
body, with a view to Us putrefaction or
consumption. See iElian. H i s t . A n . x.
22. Trvpi Qáwretv, a n d Vor. H i s t . iv. 1. iv
€vpcraic ocurren* veiepus. See H e m s t e r h .
ad Xenoph. E p h e s . p . 2 0 2 . ed. L o c e l l . ]
Qappéio, Si, from $¡apoéio, LO. See u n d e r
Sápaoc.
I . Tobe confdent, courageous, of good
courage. occ. 2 Cor. v, 6, 8. H e b . xiii. 6.
[ P r o v . i. 2 1 . Xen. H e l l . ii. 4. 6.]
I I . To be confident, have confidence in.
occ. 2 Cor. vii. 16. [ w i t h an accusative,
X e n . Cyr. v. 5. 1 5 ; with a dative, D e -
mosth. 3 0 . 15.]
I I I . To be confdent, bold, lo usefree-
dom and authority. occ. 2 Cor. x. 1 , 2 .
QapcréLú, ü, from -Mpcroc—To have
confidence or courage, io take courage.
M a t . ix. 2. xiv. 2 7 . J o h n xvi. 3 3 , & al.
On M a t . xiv. 2 7 , Oapo-eire—pi¡ <po£éio-9e,
Wetstein cites from Aristophanes, P l u t .
line 1092, 0 A " F P E I , MIÉ $ 0 ' B O Y , and
from Herodotus, lib. i. cap. 9, G A ' P S E I ,
Tvyn, Kai MIP 4>0'BEY— [ G e n . xxxv. 1 7.]
Qápcroc, eoQ, ÜQ, ro, from Sepcrio, t h e
Üiolic l s t F u t u r e of Sépio to be warm
(whence also t h e iEolians use Sépo-oc i n -
stead of S á p c - o s ) f o r persons of a warm
temper are n a t u r a l l y confident and coura-
geous. 'Oí yap G E P M O T Kai G A ' P 2 E I 2 ,
says Scapula.— Courage. occ. Acts xxviii.
15, "EXa€e Sápo-oe, He took courage;
where K y p k e shows t h a t \apt('iveiv Síip-
LTOQ is a puré Greek phrase used by D i o -
nysus Halic. [ x i v . 5 9 . ] and J o s e p h u s .
[Ceb. T a b . c. 16. 1 Mac. iv. 3 5 . X e n .
Mem. iii. 5. 5 . ]
QA'YMA, aroe, rb, for which t h e L X X
use t h e V. Bavpá^io, P s . xlvii. or xlviii. 6.
Eccles. v. 7. J e r . iv. 9. H a b . i. 5.
[ I . A wonderful thing. Xen. A n . vi. 3-
14.]
I I . Wonder, astonishmeni, amazement.
occ. Rev. xvii. 6 ; where V i t r i n g a observes
 e A Y 358 e E A

t h a t t h e L X X use Bavpa for Bavfiatría, the A t t i c , and the n e x t t h e common w o r d ;

J o b xvii. 8. xviii. 2 0 , and as to t h e phra- b u t Schneider observes, t h a t Xenophon
seology, refers to M a r k iv. 4 1 . L u k e ii. 9. uses t h i s word far seldomer t h a n t h e
J E l i a n . V . H . ii. 10. X e n . Ages. ii. 2 7 . ] other.]
Qavfiá(u), from $avpa. Qavpa^oQ, ?), ov, from 5tavpa(io.—
I . To admire. L u k e vii. 9. In Rev. To be admired, or mondered at, ad-
xiii. 3. we have Qavpíi^tiv b-rríaio T5 Qnpíu, mirable, monderful, marvellous. M a t . xxi.
which seems p u t for, To follón rviíh ad- 42. * (where see Wolfius.) John ix. 3 0 .
miration.—Qavpci'(ziv irpóo-w-irov, To ad- 2 Cor. xi. 14, & al. [ P s . viii. 1. T h u c y d .
mire, reverence, respect, a man's person, i. 76. Aristoph. P l u t . 9 9 . ]
io have a man's person in admiration, to Qm, as, i), from Otos — A God-
respect him mith partial favour on ac- dess, a female deity, or idol. occ. Acts x i x .
count of his outmard appearance. occ. 27, 3 5 , 3 7 .
J u d e ver. 16. T h i s is an Hellenistical OEAO'MAI, üpai.
phrase used by the L X X in two s e n s e s * . I. To fix the eyes upon an object, ío
l s t . To respect a man's person mith behold or view steadily or attentively, to
favour and kindness, for t h e H e b . NttM contémplate, observe. M a t . [ v i . 1. xi. 7 . ]
0 ' 3 5 to lift up the face. occ. Gen. xix. 2 1 . xxii. 1 1 . L u k e xxiii. 5 5 . J o h n i. 1 4 , 3 2 .
2 K i n g s v. 1. Comp. J o b xxxiv. 19. Isa. iv. 3 5 . Acts xxi. 2 7 . 1 John i. 1. Comp.
i x . 15. M a t . vi. 1. xxiii. 5, in both which t e x t s
2d. (As by S t . J u d e ) To respect a it is more than bpblv to see. [ X e n . CEc.
man's person mith partial or undue fa- xx. 18. Mem. ii. 1. 2 2 . ]
vour, for t h e same H e b . taUQ Kttf J, D e u t . I I . To see. J o h n viii. 10. A c t s viii. 18.
x. 17. 2 Chron. xix. 7. J o b xiii. 10. xxii. 8. xxii. 9.
Prov. xviii. 5 ; for to súmame in I I I . To see, implying to visit, invisere.
flattery or compliment, J o b xxxii. 2 2 ; and occ. Rom. xv. 24. [ 2 Chron. xxii. 6.]
for 'ja l ^ n to honour the person, Lev. lfgfp Qearpl£io, from Siarpov.—To make
x i x . 15.—Isoeratesto Demonicus, cap. 17, a public spectacle, to expose, as it were,
6 a y s , t h a t " he who lives u n d e r a mon- in a public theatre. Qsarpt^ópzvoi, üo-trep
a r c h y o u g h t , —rbv BamXÉa—GAYMA'- ¿Vi Ssci-pov irapaSeiypari^ópevoi, as it
ZEIjNf, to respect or reverence t h e K i n g . were exposed in a theatre, says T h e o p h y -
[ I n this sense of admiring, t h e word lact. occ, H e b . x. 3 3 , where the Apostle
occurs also Lucian. D i a l . Deorr. xvi. 3 . alludes to t h e y Román custom of expos-
Diod. Sic. iv. 3 1 . X e n . Cyr. iv. 2 . 28. ing malefactors in their thealres to be de-
In 2 Thess. i. 10. it signifies lo celébrate, stroyed by wild b e a s t s ; by which it is
as in Diod. Sic. iv. 7 8 . ix. S , 3 3 . Xen. well kuown t h e blessed Ignatius, first.
Cyr. iii. 1.38.] bishop of Antioch in Syria, suffered m a r -
[ I I . To monder, either p u t absolutely, tyrdom. Comp. 1 Cor. iv. 9.
as M a t . viii. 10. ix. 8. xv. 3 1 . x x i . 20, EfgSí Qíarpav, a, rb, from Seciapai to
0

x x i i . 2 2 . xxvii. 14. M a r k vi. 5 1 . L u k e behold.

viii. 2 5 . xi. 14. Lucian. Dial. D e o r r . ^ I. A theatre, a lar ge building erected
xxiii. 2. Xen. Cyr. vii. 1. 6 — o r with for the exhibition of public shoms, games,
¿ 7 T Í a dative (to monder ai) M a r k xii. 17. &c. occ. A c t s x i x . 2 9 , 3 1 . O n which t e x t s
xv. 44. L u k e iv. 2 2 . Xen. Mem. i. 4. 12. we m a y remark, t h a t among t h e Greeks
iv. 8. 3.—or Sia and accusative, J o h n vii. their theatres served not only for t h e p u r -
2 1 . Rev. xvii. 7.-—or with ¿Vi, J o h n iii. poses j u s t mentioned, b u t often for hold-
7. iv. 27. Gal. i. 6. Xen. M a g . Eq. ix. 8. i n g public assemblies on affairs of the
Venat. i. 3 . I n M a r k vi. 6. J o h n v. 2 8 . g r e a t e s t consequence: T h i s Wetstein has
vii. 2 1 . Gal. i. 6. Schleusner says it is, To shown by many citations on Acts xix. 29,
be angry ati] To w h a t he has produced I add a similar
Qavpíicrios, a, ov, from §avpú£io.— instance or two from Josephus, D e Bel.
Wonderful, marvellous. occ. M a t . xxi. 15. lib. ii. cap. 18, § 7, where, " w h e n t h e
[See P s . Ixxxvii. 14. cvii. 24. Ecclus. Alexandrians were assembled {iKKknaia-

xliii. 27. .iEsch. Socr. Dial. i. 4 . Xen.

A n a b . ii. 3 . 9. Mceris says, that this is
* [ S e e E l s n e r O b s . Sacr. ii. p . 4 3 0 , V a l c k . a d
Eur. H i p p . 105. Abresch. A u c t . Diluo. Thucyd.
p . 3 0 0 . Palairet. O b s s . P h i l , p . 5 1 9 . ]
* [ T h e use o f the feminine for the neuter i s
H e b r e w (where there is n o neuter). S o in H o m .
O d . x x i i . 4 1 1 . S e e V o r s t . P h i l . Sacr. c. x i . p ,
282.]
-f- S e e K e n n e t ' s R o m á n A n t i q u i t i e s , bqok ii- ch.
x x . p. 147.
 e E i
%ÓVTII>V) concerning tlic, cmbassy which
they were sendíng to Ncro, o-vvefipíno-av
pev ELQ ró ' A M Í > I 0 E ' A T P O N lipa role
"EXX>)(7i avyvol Ta&uW, many of the J e w s
crowded into the atnphilheatre together
with the Greeks. So lib. viii. cap. 3 , § 3 .
A n d again cap. 5 , § 2, we find the A n -
tiochians holding an assembly upon public
business in their thealre, GE'ATPON.
[See D'Orville ad Charit. iii. 4. Tacit.
H i s t . ii. 8 0 . ]
II. A public show, or spcclacle as if
cxhibilcd in a íhcatre. occ. 1 Cor. iv. 9,
where see K y p k e . [ W e know t h a t men
were sometimes exhibited in the Greek
theatres to disgrace t h e m , and crimináis
were even p u t to fight with wild beasts
t h e r e . See P h i l . c. F l a c a p . 329. Sueton.
A u g . c. 4 5 . Joseph. Bell. J u d . vi. 9. 2. T h e
word is used in t h e same sense as in this
place in Diog. L a e r t . vii. 1. iEsch. Sac.
Dial. iii. 20. See Krebs. ad Decreta Ro-
manor. pro Judajis, p . 4 2 1 . and Obss.
Flav. pp. 237 and 289.]
0 E I ' N Í 2 . Comp. 'ATTodetPio.
Qelov, a, ró, from Seíoc divine.—Sul-
phur, brimstone. L u k e xvii. 2 9 . Rev. ix.
18. & al. T h i s was among t h e idolaters
of various nations eminently applied in
t h e i r religious purifications *. O n e m e -
thod of purifving a person among the
Greeks was, " by goíng round him three
times, and sprinkling him as often with a
laurel-bough, or with a torch of some r e -
sinous wood, first lighted a t t h e altar,
and then dipt in t h e i r holy water, which
they consecrated with a m i x t u r e of salí
and sulphur; for, as t h e solar fire, or a
demon in t h e sun's orb, was t h e i r chief
acting god, so t h e y t h o u g h t Jire was of
sovereign virtue to purify and make them
h o l y : and therefore, to secure effectuaily
its said supposed virtue, they took care to
have it in double and triple respects, as
in a torch of some turpeniine-tree, and
t h a t set on jire, with t h e addition of sul-
phur. W h e n c e J u v e n a l , Sat. ii. lines 157,
158, says of some of the ghosts in the in-
fernal regions, and on certain occasious:
Cupcrcnt l u s t r a n , si qua darcntur
S u l p h u r a cum ttcdis, ct siforct húmida
' H a d t h e y the implements, as bay-branch
dipt in holy water, with torch aud sulphur,
they would be l u s t r a t e d (or purified).'
Lucian in his Philopseudes mentions t h e
* [ S e e P l i n . N a t . H i s t . x x x . c. 1 4 . A l c x . ab
A l c x . D. O. 3 . o 2 7 . ]
359 0 E A
purifying of a place, by going round it
three times, $é<¡> /cal Scidí, with sidphur
and a torch, and repeating out of a cer-
tain oíd book seven sacred ñames.—Henee
they called brimstone eminently Beiov the
divine thing, and t h e act of sprinkling or
luslrating with brimstone, Tcepideinv to di-
vinify; for which, among other reasons,
God made it an i n s t r u m e n t of his ven-
geance on t h e heathen aud other delin-
quents, condemning them and t h e i r land
to brimstone and Jire for ever. See J o b
xviii. 15. P s . xi. 6'. D e u t . xxix. 2 3 . Isa.
xxxiv. 9. and J u d e verse 7, on t h e over-
throw of Sodom and G o m o r r h a * . " — T h e
English brimstone, by the way, is from
brenne or brin, i. e. burn and stone. [ T h e
proper meaning is Jire from heaven ; and
places touched by lightning were called
9 ™ . A s l i g h t n i n g leaves a sulphureous
smell, and sulphur was used in lustrations,
it got the ñame of Qéiov. See Gen. xix.
24. Isa. x x x . 3 3 . ]
G E Í G S , <i, ov, from G E Ó C God.—Divine.
occ. 2 P e t . i. 3 , 4. Oeíov, rb, The Divine
Being, the Deity. occ. A c t s xvii. 2 9 . Tó
O E Í O V is often t h u s used in t h e Greek w r i -
ters. See W e t s t e i n . [ S e e E x . x x x i . 3 .
Diod. Sic. xvi. 60. Xen. Mem. i. 4. 18.
Luc. de Sacr. c. 1. Aristot. Rhet. ii. 5 . ]
EfSgl Qtiórr¡Q, rí]TOQ, f¡, from Seioe.—
10
Godhead. occ. Rom. i. 20. Comp. W i s d .
xiii. 1—7, and Ellis's Knowledge of D i -
vine T h i n g s , &c. p . 219. I s t edit. [Wisd.
xviii. 9-]
EHH QeLhiSrie, eos, ae, b, f¡, from Selov
13
brimstone.— Of brimstone, or r a t h e r of
the colour of brimstone, yellow. occ. Rev.
ix. 17. See D a u b u z and W e t s t e i n . [ T h e
word occurs in Philost. I m a g . i. 2 7 . L o -
beck (on P h r y n . p. 228,) observes t h a t it
is of t h e very worst a g e . ]
QéXnpa, aros, ro, from SéXoj or $eXéu>
lo will.
[ I . Will, wish, desire. E p h . i. 1 1 . Ac-
cording to the council of his will, Gal. i.
5. 1 Cor. i. 1. xvi. 12. 2 Cor. i. 1.]
[ I I . The thing wished or dcsired, in
which sense we also use Will. M a t . x x v i .
4 2 . L u k e xxii. 4 2 . Rom. i. 10. xv. 3 2 . t
1 Thess. iv. 3 . v. 18, where the desire of
laurus.
the flesh is that to which a body making
* H o l l o w a y ' s O r i g i n á i s , vol. i. p p . 1 7 5 , 1 7 6 .
See also H o m e r , TI. x v i . line 2 2 8 , and O v i d , M e -
tam. l i b . vi. lines 2 5 9 — 2 0 1 .
•)• [Schleusner and W a h l render these two places
in the R o m a n s permission. T h i s is merely a m e .
tapliysical t r a n s l a t i o n ; and I cannot see a n y i m -
propriety in tlic other to m a k e this sense necessary.]
 e E A
its prone ío sÍ7i inclines us, while in J o h n
i. 13. i t seems to be only that to which we
are led by instincl. See 2 Chron. ix. 12.
I n J o h n iv. 3 0 . v. 30. A c t s xiii. 2 2 . xxii.
14. H e b . x. 9, 10. * it is r a t h e r in t h e
sense of a thing commanded, i. e. where
t h e will is expressed. In M a t . vii. 2 1 .
xii. 5 0 . R o m . xii. 2 . E p h . vi. 6. H e b . x.
3 6 , it is r a t h e r a precept.—In L u k e xxiii.
5, W a h l and Schleusner say it is Libido.
I t seems to me to answer exactly to our
pleasure, as sometimes u s e d ; as, for e x -
ample, in Volumnia's speech to her son,
Do your pleasure, i. e. whatever seems
good in your own eyes. Comp. t h e verb
in M a t . xvii. 12. T h e word is not an
A t t i c one, according to Lobeck ad P h r y n .
p . 7. T h e use of t h e plural is observed
by x d - k h u r s t as Hellenistical. H e cites
P s . xv. 2. cii. 7. ex. 2. Isa. xliv. 28.]
QiXncnc, we, A t t . E w c , T), from SiXw.—
Will, pleasure. occ. Pleb. ii. 4. [This
•word oceurs E z e k . xviii. 2 3 . Prov. viii.
3 5 . & al. Schleusner on Biel quotes it as
oceurring in P s . xx. 3 . i. e. Ps. xxi. 6, b u t
t h e L X X has imQvpla. Wisd. xvi. 2 5 .
Poli. v. 165. T h i s word also Lobeck (ad
P h r y n . p . 7.) declares not to be A t t i c ]
6¿\io, from idéXio t h e same (which see)
dropping t h e e.
I. To will. M a t . i. 19. viii. 3 . x i . 14.
L u k e v. 13. J o h n v. 2 1 . I t is sometimes
followed by a V. in t h e Subjunctive mood,
t h e Conjunction Iva that, lo the end that,
being understood. M a t . [xiii. 28.] x x . 3 2 .
xxvi. 17. xxvii. 17. L u k e ix. 54. T h i s
construction of SéXoj is common in the
Greek writers. On J o h n iii. 8, compare
under l í o n - á f a ) I I . [ I n Mat. xvii. 12, the
verb has the same bad ser>se as QéXr¡/J.a in
L u k e xxiii. 5 , They did their pleasure.']
I I . To will, desire, wish. M a t . xii. 38.
[ x v . 2 8 . ] xix. 17, 2 1 . x x . 3 2 . M a r k vi.
2 5 . x . 3 5 . L u k e xxiii. [8,] 20. J o h n [xii.
2 1 . xv. 7.] xvii. 24. 1 Cor. iii. 7. So used
not only by t h e L X X , Ps. x x x i v . 12.
xxxv. 2 7 . & al. for the H e b . pan, but also
by Xenophon. See Raphelius. [Herodian.
i. 2. 3 . I should add M a t . xxvii. 1.5, with
which comp. P s . Ixviii. 30. t M a t . xxiii.
* [ S c h l e u s n e r says that i n the first of these verses
(at least I conduele he m e a n s the first, b u t h i s re-
ferenecs are inaecurate) the sense i s , The obedience
of Chri.it which God required ; w h i l e i n the second
h e m a k e s it God's eternal counsel as to the salvation
of the morid bij Christ. I cannot believe that, on
reference to the p a s s a g e s , a n y one w o u l d agree with
h i m in g i v i n g a different sense w the t w o . ]
'f [Schleusner quotes P s . x x x i x . 20. tíi/.Qinís
3C0 0 E A
37. M a r k x. 4 3 , 44, appear to me also t o
belong to this head, though Schleusner
refers them to sense I I I . A d d also L u k e
xxiii. 8. 1 Cor. xiv. 5. 2 Cor. xi. 12. comp.
Ps. xxxiv. 12. xl. 6. T h e verb, like t h e
noun QéXnpa, seems also to have t h e sense
of command, or will expressed, in M a t .
xiii. 2 8 . A c t s ix. 6. T h e r e are two pass-
ages to which t h e remark in t h e first note
on QéXrjpa applies, viz. 1 Cor. iv. 19.
J a m e s iv. 15, If' God. will; or, according
to Schleusner, If God permit7\
I I I . To endeavour, attempt. M a t . xvi.
2 5 . M a r k viii. 3 5 . L u k e ix. 24.
I V . W i t h an Infinitive following, To
like, ¡ove, delight, affect. M a r k xii. 3 8 .
L u k e xx. 4 6 . I t is t h u s used by t h e
L X X , E s t h . vi. 6, 7, 11, for t h e " H e b .
"3 f a n , or ~b v a n . — W i t h an Accusative
following, To delight in, have afavour or
affection to. M a t . xxvii. 4 3 . Comp. ch.
ix. 13. xii. 7. T h i s is an Hellenistical
sense of t h e verb, which is often t h u s a p -
plied by the L X X , for t h e H e b . "3 pan
to have intense delight in, as D e u t . xxi.
14. P s . xviii. 19. xxii. 8. xii. 11 ; or for
fan simply, as H o s . vi. 6. M a l . iii. 1 . —
[ A g a i n ] QéXii) iv, To delight, take de-
light in, to be delighted with. occ. Col. ii.
18. T h i s phrase is also Hellenistical,
used by t h e L X X in t h e same sense, 1
S a m . xviii. 2 2 . 2 Sam. xv. 26. 1 Kings x.
9. 2 Chron. ix. 8. Ps. cxlvii. 10, for t h e
H e b . 3 f a n . Compare British Critic for
_
March 1794, p. 2 7 3 ; and for A u g u s t
1794, p. 196.
V*. Tí áv BíXol -aro iivaí; What can
this mean ? or What will this come to ?
Acts ii. 12. So Anacreon, Ode xliv. line 6.
TI' ©E'AEI y' ovtxp TO8' E I N A I ;
T
See more in Raphelius and W e t s t e i n .
Comp. A c t s xvii. [ 1 8 , ] 20. [See iElian.
V . t í . iii. 20. and Reisk. A n e m . ad A u c .
G r . vol. iv. p. 694. I t is t h e same as t h e
L a t i n voló, which often expresses to mean,
signify, give as one's opinión; and so I
u n d e r s t a n d 2 P e t . iii. 5, It escapes the
noiice of those who give this as their opi-
nión, and so Wahl. Schleusner says, with
our translation, t h a t the verb here is used
adverbially, They willingly are ignorant.
See jEsch. Choeph. 7 9 1 . L y s . O r a t . xviii.
2. Hesiod. O p p . and D. 3 5 5 . ]
[ V I . To be able. T h i s is a sense given
f/.oi naxci, b u t I cannot find this i n the L X X . líe
probably refers to P s . x x x v i i i . 2 0 . b u t the word is
not QeV.oüTef.]
 e E M 361 S E O

by Hesychius, OEXEU', SimtrOai, and t h c Apostle seems to answer to Sepa in t h i s

Schol. on Aristoph. A v . 5 8 2 . Chrysos- passage. Comp. M a t . vi. 2 0 . L u k e x i i .
tom and Cyril give this sense to J o h n vii. 3 3 . [ I t is r a t h e r a certain and firmly
1 ; and so Schleusner, as well as to M a t . assured good. ]
ii. 1 8 : b u t I can see little necessity for i t QepeXiów, LO, from SepéKioQ.
in either place. I n t h e first, Jesús did I . To found, lay a foundation, of a
not choose to be in Judcea, gives a per- building. occ. M a t . vii. 2 5 . L u k e vi. 4 8 ,
fectly good m e a n i n g ; and in t h e second, in which passages observe redcpeXUoro is
t h e phrase loses half its forcé if we do not t h e 3d pers. sing. pluperf. pass. for ÉYE-
transíate it, And would not be conforten, dspeKícoro, * t h e e being dropped accord-
i. e. refused t o listen t o consolation. 'Oy ing to t h e Ionic dialect. [Josh. vi. 2 6 . 1
. dé\w is constantly used for ~Nolo, to be Kings vii. 10. X e n . Cyr. vii. 5 . 6 . ] — I t
unwilling, as in L u k e xviii. 13, where is applied to t h e e a r t h , H e b . i. 10, which
Schleusner and W a h l say t h a t 0EXW is to is a citation of P s . cii. 2 5 , or 2 6 ; where
dure, as in X e n . A n a b . iii. 1 . 1 0 . which t h e same word édepEkiiútrac is used by t h e
admits t h e same explanation. W e are L X X , for t h e H e b . ÍT1D', which refers t o
not justiíied in translating t h e effect by t h e mondrous forination of the arch, or
the cause.—Schleusner says t h a t QéXio is spherical shell, of earth between t h e t w o
often redundan!, as in Mat, xxii. 3 ; but spheres of water on t h e second day from
surely mili is implied t h e r e : B'K iídeXov is t h e creation, Gen. i. 6, 7, and does i n -
They did not choose lo come. I n t h e deed imply t h e firmness or stability of
other instances which he cites, M a t . xxiii. the parts whereof t h e shell of earth con-
4 (which is t h e most favourable for h i m ) sists, b u t by no means necessarily imports
John v. 3 5 . vii. 17. 2 T i m . iii. 12. E u r . the immobilily of the whole orb. See w h a t
Orest. 9 2 1 , t h e same remark also applies.] Jehovah says to Job on this subject, J o b
QcpéXíor, a, TO, [ a n d ] QepéXiog, a, ó. xxxviii. 4-—6. Comp. Ps. xxiv. 2. civ. 3 ,
I . A foundation, properly of a build- and H e b . and E n g . Lexicón in YiD>.
ing. L u k e vi. 4 8 , 4 9 . xiv. 2 9 . [ A c t s xvi. I I . To found, settle, or establish on a
26.] H e b . x i . 1 0 . * [Comp. D e u t . xxxii. foundation, in a spiritual sense. occ. E p h .
2 2 . 1 K i n g s vii. 9. Diod. Sic. v. 66. xi. iii. 17. Col. i. 2 3 . 1 P e t . v. 10. [Diod. Sic.
63.] H e n e e applied t o Christ, t h e real xi. 6 8 . xv. ].]
or substantial foundation of our faith, 1 QeoStSaKroc, a, ó , r;, from 0£O£
Cor. iii. 10, 1 1 , 12. Comp. E p h . ii. 2 0 . God, and Swanrbc taught \.— Taught by
•—to doctrines, or first principies, H e b . God. occ. 1 Thess. iv. 9. Comp. I s a . ii.
vi. 1. Comp. Rom. xv. 2 0 . 3, 4. liv. 13, where we have in t h e L X X
I I . A foundation-stone. occ. 2 T i m . ii. t h e p h r a s e c S i o W r á c © E a .
19. Comp. Soipayis V. [Schleusner and Efxg © E Ó X o y o e , a , ó , >'/, from G E Ó C God,
0

W a h l transíate it with our versión, a and X ó y o s « word.—A íheologian, a di-

building. Schleusner says a building well vine. S t . John t h e Evangelist was so
founded (referring to Amos i. ¡ 2 . Ecclus. styled by t h e F a t h e r s in an eminent and
i. 17- iii- 11.) i. e. here t h e Christian r e - peculiar sense, because h e handled t h e
ligión, t h e t r u t h and certaiuty of which sublimest t r u t h s of Christian iheology,
God has showu by t h e clearest argu- aud particularly asserted rov rS 0EÜ~Y
ments.] A O T O N ihe D I V I N E W O K D , and proved
I I I . A deposil, a treasure laid up. I t him to be God. T h u s h e is called by
seems to b e u s e d in this sense (which, i t Athanasius, O r a t . contra G e n t e s , t o m . i.
m u s t be confessed, is a very unusual one) p. 4 6 . O E O A O r O S ¿iviip; by Cyril].
by S t . P a u l , 1 T i m . vi. 19, iu which pass- Alexandr. lib. ii. in J o h n ch. i. p . 130,
age t h e Apostle appears t o have h a d an Ti/s © E O A O P I ' A S ó avyypatbíve, The
eye on Tobit iv. 9, f O E ' M A y a p ' A T A - writer of iheology ; a n d by Theophylact,
eo'N e r i s A Y p r z E i s S E A Y T Í T I i i,pé- not only O E O ' A O P O S , b u t by a superla-
t £

pav á v á y K T j s , For thou layest up for thy- tive t e r m , © E O A O P I K í l ' T A T O S . See

self a good deposit, or t r e a s u r e , against Wolfius, M i n t e r t , and Suicer T h e s a u r .
ihe day of necessity. Qeptkiov in t h e on t h e word. I n t h e N . T . QeóXoyog oc-

* [ S e e Matthia;, § 1 0 4 . N o t e 1. W e s s e l . a d
* [ I n this passage the m e a n i n g m u s t b e ajixed, Diod. Sic. xviii. p. 2 7 8 . ]
certain, sure habitation,] f [ T h i s word i s properly That which can be
•\ S e e P a l r u m A p ó s t o l . O p e r a germina, edit. taught; then One who has been taught. See
Iíussel, vol. ii. p . 6 8 . N o t e on QÍ/ÍZ. Vorst. P h i l . Sacr. c. 1 8 . ]
 9 E O
curs only in t h e title of t h e Revelación,
which seems not to have been prefixed to
t h a t book till long after t h e time of St.
J o h n . Wolfius says t h a t Eusebius, who
lived in t h e fourth century, is t h e first
who gave S t . J o h n t h i s title, calling him
in his Preparat. Evangel. 'E€pauov 9 E 0 ' -
A O r O N , the theologian qf the Hebrews.
[ T h e proper meaning in good Greek, is
one who could teach or write on divine
matters. See Diod. Sic. v. 80. (where it
is used of Epimenides.) H e r o d . ii. 5 3 .
D i o g . Laert. i. 112.]
Ifjf* QeoLiayéio, üi, from Qebc God, and
páyppai tojight.—To Jight against God.
occ. Acts xxiii. 9. T h i s verb is used 2
Mac. vii. 19, and frequently in t h e Greek
writers. See t h e instances produced by
Raphelius and Kypke on t h e text. and by
W e t s t e i n on A c t s v. 3 9 ; to which I add
from Josephus, Cont. Apion. lib. i. § 26,
pÉXXtiv G E O M A X E ' I N vopíaae, t h i n k i n g
t h a t he should fight against God; and
from Lucian D e Saltat, t o m . i. p . 922,
povóvuyi GEOMAXfiTN ahnost fighting
against God. [ E u r . I p h . A u l . 1 4 0 9 . P h i -
lost. iv. 15. Diod. Sic. xiv. 69. Xen. CEc.
xvi. 5.]
{§gp° Oeupáyjir, a, b, ?/, from Beopayjhi.
—A fighter against God. occ. A c t s v. 3 9 .
[ I t occurs S y m m . P r o v . ix. 18. xxi. 16.
x x v i . 5.]
Elgjp Qeotrvévo-roe, a, ó, ?% from Qeue
0
God, and icé-KVEvíai, 3d pers. sing. perf.
pass. of irviiii, fut. TVVÍVUW to breathe.—
Breathed or inspired by God, divine/y
inspired, given by divine inspiration. occ.
2 T i m . iii. 16.
QEOQ, a, ó . — G O D . A ñame reclaimed
from t h e heathen, and used by t h e writers
of t h e N . for t h e truc God. Various are
t h e derivations proposed of t h i s w o r d :
t h e most probable seems to be t h a t which
deduces i t from t h e V . Béoi to place (which
see u n d e r rl6r¡pi.) P h u r n u t u s , t h e Stoic,
in t h e reign of Ñero wrote a * Philoso-
phical Explanation of t h e Heathen W o r -
ship and Ceremonies, in which he plainly
refers them all to t h e different p a r t s of
material nature; as, for instance, to t h e
heavens, air, ether, sun, moon, stars, &c.
— T h i s philosopher, in his chapter Hcpl
'OvpavS, Concerning Heaven, says, " I t
is probable t h a t Oeol, the Gods, were so
* P u b l i s h e d b y T h o m a s G a l e under the title of
* O T P N O T ' T O T © í u i p ' a Trspl 0ew» <I>ú(T£cuf, P h u r n u -
tus's C o m m c n t a r y on the N a t u r e of t h e Gods,
a m o n g the O p u s c u l a M y t h o l o g i c a , E t h i c a , et P h y -
sica.
.362 e E o
called from BEO-LC posilion, or placing; for
t h e ancients took those for gods whom
they found to move in a certain regular
and constant manner, t h i n k i n g them t h e
causes of t h e changes in t h e air, and of
t h e conservation of t h e u n i v e r s e : these
then are Gods (QEOI) which are t h e dis-
posers (Sérr/pec) and formers of all t h i n g s . "
And long before P h u r n u t u s , H e r o d o t u s
had w r i t t e n , lib. ii. cap. 5 2 , t h a t t h e P e -
lasgi, t h e ancient inhabitants of Greece,
GEO'YS irpocnovóparrav aijiÉac curo ra
roiára, on KÓapip O E ' N T E S r a T r a v r a
irpúy para, Kal Traerás rapar Iiyav, " called
the Gods GEOY'S, for this reason, because
they had disposed or placed in order all
t h i n g s and all countries." A n d in this
view t h e word QEUQ or 9 t o i (for t h e an-
cient Greeks used i t both in t h e singular
and in t h e plural to express their God,
the heavens) will have much t h e same
radical meaning as t h e H e b . C3>Dtí? the
heavens, derived in like manner from t h e
V . CJÜ7 to place.—* A n d t h a t t h e heavens,
under different attribut.es corresponding
to t h e i r difierent conditions and opera-
tions, were t h e g r a n d objects of divine
worship t h r o u g h o u t t h e heathen world, is
certain not only from t h e ancient ñames
of their gods, b u t also from m a n y plain
declarations of S c r i p t u r e (see inter a l .
D e u t . iv. 19. xvii. 3 . J o b xxxi. 26, 27. 2
Kings xvii. 16- x x i . 3 , 5 . xxiii. 4 , 5. 2
Chron. xxxiii. 3 , 5 . J e r . viii. 2. x i x . 1 3 .
Zeph. i. 5. A c t s vii. 4 2 , 4 3 . ) , and from
numerous and express testimonies of t h e
heathen writers themselves. T h u s , for
instance, Plato in Cratylo, « t a t V o i ' r a i poi
bi rrpSiroi rüiv avQpíi-Ktúv TSÍV irspí TVV 'EX-
Xaba, THTHQ partir 9 E 0 Y 2 riyaicrdaí, &a-,
TTEp vvv TTOXXOI TÜIV fiapt>áp(dv, ijXiov, Kal
aeXhvnv, Kul yr¡v, Kal fepa, icat ¿pavov—
" T h e first inhabitants of Greece seem to
me to have t h o u g h t , as many of t h e b a r -
barians still do, t h a t t h e only gods were
the Sun, and the Moon, and the Earth,
and the Stars, and Heaven \." T h e a n -
cient h y m n s which are ascribed to O r -
pheus, and are still e x t a n t , likewise prove
t h a t t h e oíd Greeks were as deeply i m -
mersed in materialism as their neighbours,
and t h a t t h e only gods t h e y worshipped
were t h e various p a r t s of created nature,
and especially t h e heavens, or some de-
mons, or intelligences, which t h e y s u p -
* C o m p . H e b . and E n g . L e x i c ó n under ntf X I .
and see above under a > í f « I . and A W / U W » I .
f S e e L e l a n d ' s A d v a n t a g e and N e c e s s i t y of tire
Christian R e v e l a t i o n , part i. chap. 3,
 e £o 363 0 E O

posed resident therein. T h u s the author I. In t h e N . T . as iu t h e L X X , Qebc

of these h y m n s calis alraost all their most generally answers to t h e plural
Gods Demons, Aaífiovae, q. d. Aalpovac, C D T T ^ S , and so denotes God, the ever-
Intelligences. And one would almost blessed Trinity. See M a t . iv. 7 . (comp.
t h i n k t h a t h e was designedly opposing D e u t . vi. 1 6 . H e b . and L X X . ) M a t . iv.
the first and second commandments when, 1 0 . (comp. D e u t . vi. 1 3 . ) M a t . xxii. 3 2 .
in his Introductory Prayer, lin. 3 1 , 3 2 , he (comp. Exod. iii. 6 . ) M a t , xxii. 3 7 .
directs his pupil Musams religiously to (comp. D e u t . vi. ' 5 . ) M a r k i. 1 4 , 1 5 .
invoke (comp. D a n . ii. 4 4 . ) Mark xii. 2 9 . (comp.
D e u t . vi. 4 , 5 . ) J o h n i. 1 2 . (comp. Gen.
Aaip-óvac ovpcaíovg T*¡ xa) qspiúus, xa) ivjSgoyf, vi. 2 . ) Acts iv. 2 4 . (comp. G e n . i. 1.
K a i y^oviiug, x a l ¿7ro^9on/ouf .
Eccles. xii. 1 , in t h e Heb.) Acts x. 3 4 .
The demons who in heaven reside, in air, (comp. D e u t . x. 1 7 . ) Both t h e N . T .
In water, or in earth, or underneath and L X X frequently also use Qebc for
The earth .
¡Yin>, comp. M a t . iv. 4 . with D e u t . viii. 3 ,
H e b . and L X X ; Bom. iv. 3 . J a m e s ii.
Comp. u n d e r Aaipóviov L—Tlie L X X
2 3 , with Gen. xv. 6 ; H e b . ii. 1 3 , with
have constantly (very few passages ex-
Isa. viii. 1 8 . — I n M a r k xii. 3 2 , Bebe is
cepted) translated t h e plural ñame caTl^M,
omitted in very many M S S . ( a m o n g
when used for the true God, by t h e sin-
which t h e Alexandrian and t h r e e o t h e r
g u l a r Qebc, never by the plural Otót. In
ancient ones), in several ancient versions,
so doing one may at first sight t h i n k them
particularly the first Syriac, and in se-
blameable: b u t let it be considered, t h a t
veral printed editions, and is accordingly
a t the time t h e L X X translation was
marked by Wetstein as a word t h a t ought
made, t h e Greek idolatry was the fashion-
t o b e e x p u n g e d ; and indeed in t h e Scribe's
able superstition, especially in * E g y p t
reply we should naturally have expected
u n d e r t h e Ptolemies, and t h a t according
to have found, not 0 E Ó C b u t K-úpioe, as in
to this their gods were regarded as de-
our Lord's quotation at. ver. 2 9 . A n d if
mons, i. e. intelligent beings totally se-
Qebe be omitted, t h e l a t t e r p a r t of t h e
párate and distinct from each o t h e r ; and
reply will b e — T h e r e is ONE (Jehovah
t h a t , consequently, had t h e Greek t r a n s -
namely, which is t h e word used D e u t .
lators rendered t h e ñame of t h e true
vi. 4 , b u t for which t h e Greek language
God Cj^nbK, by t h e plural © E Ó I , they
supplied no equivalent t e r m ) , and there
would thereby have given t h e grecizing
is none other but he. Comp. D e u t . iv. 3 5 .
heathen an idea of Him, inconsistent with
Isa. xiv. fí.
t h e Unily of the divine essence, and con-
formable to their own polytheistic no- I I . Qebc, is applied personally.
tions t ; whereas by t r a n s l a t i n g it Qebc 1. B u t very rarely, to t h e Father. See
in t h e singular, they incúlcate the grand however J o h n xiii. 3 . xvi. 2 7 , 3 0 . (comp.
point (with t h e heathen, I mean) of God's ver. 2 8 , 2 9 . ) Acts ii. 3 3 . 2 Cor. xiii. 1 4 .
unity, and at t h e same time did not deny P h i l . ii. 6 .
a plurality of agents, or persons, in t h e 2 . T o t h e Son, M a t . i. 2 3 . J o h n i. 1.
Divine N a t u r e ; since the Greeks (as is xx. 2 8 . A c t s xx. 2 8 . Rom. ix. 5 . 1 T i m .
above observed) called the mhole substance iii. 1 6 - T i t . ii. 1 3 . 1 John v. 2 0 . 2 P e t .
Qebc in t h e i. 1 , & al. In comparing two different
a

of t h e i r god, the heavens,

singular, as well as 6«ói, iu t h e plural. readings, savs Michaelis ( I n t r o d u c t . to
N . T . vol. i. p . 3 3 6 , edit. M a r s h ) , we
m u s t always examine which of the two
* T h i s is evident from the H y m n s of C a l l i m a .
could most easily arise from a mistake or
chus, w h o lived i n the court of P t o l e m y P h i l a d e l -
p h u s , i n whose reign the L X X versión o f the P e n - correction of t h e transcriber ; readings of
tateuco, w a s p rob ab ly m a d e . this kind being generally spurious, whereas
-)• " T h e T a l m u d i s t s t h e m s e l v e s were so p e r . those which give occasion to t h e mistake or
suaded of a plurality expressed i n the word Elohim correction are commonly genuine. Of t h e
[D-nbN], as to teach i n title M e g i l l a , c. i. fol. 1 1 ,
that the L X X interpreters d i d purposely change
following different readings, Acts xx. 2 8 ,
the notion o f plurality couched in the Hebrew 0 E S , lívpín, Xpi<rS, Kvpiu ©£a, 0 E S Kal Ru-
plural into a Greek singular [ © E O ? for © s o i ; ] l e s t pia, Kupía K a i 0 E 3 , t h e first is probably t h e
P t o l e m y P h i l a d e l p h u s s h o u l d conclude that the t r u e reading, and all t h e rest are scholia,
J e w s , as w e l l as himself, h a d a belief in p o l y t h e i s m .
T h i s w a s taken notice of b y S t . J c r o m e in h i s P r e -
because 0 E 5 m i g h t easily give occasion to
face to the b o o k D e Qua¡st. H e b . " A l l i x , J u d g - a n y of these, whereas none could so easily
íaent, p . 1 2 4 . give occasion to 0£a. If St. L u k e wroto
 e E o
G E S , t h e origin of Kvpíu and Xpi<rS may
be explained either as corrections of t h e
t e x t , or as marginal notes, because the
Blood qf God is a very extraordinary ex-
pression ; b u t if he had written Kvpíu, it
is inconceivable how any one should alter
it into 0 E 3 , and on this latter supposition
t h e g r e a t n u m b e r of different readings is
inexplicable. I t seems as if different
transcribers had found a difficulty in t h e
passage, and t h a t each had corrected ac-
cording to his own j u d g m e n t . " Comp.
however Griesbach's Note on A c t s x x .
2 8 . As to the reading Qeog in 1 T i m . iii.
16, besides Mili, Wetstein, Bower, and
Griesbach, see by all means t h e learned
Woide, Praefat. in Cod. Alexandr. § 87.
3. T o t h e Holy Spirit. See L u k e i.
3 5 . A c t s v. 3 , 4. Comp. 1 Cor. iii. 16,
17, with 1 Cor. vi. 19, and 2 Cor. vi. 16.
Comp. also 1 Cor. xii. 6, with ver. 4 , 1 1 .
A n d further comp. Acts iv. 24, 2 5 , with
A c t s i. 16, and 2 P e t . i. 2 1 , and see u n d e r
Aeo-Trúrris I.
I I I . I t denotes t h e Heathen Gods, or
idols. A c t s xiv. 1 1 . 1 Cor. viii. 5. [In
A c t s vii. 4 0 . it is, Images qf Deities, as
in P i n d a r . 0 1 . vii. 5 6 , Bebs is the temple
qf the god Apollo. Add A c t s vii. 4 3 .
Gal. iv. 8. Acts xxviii. 6. See Is. xix.
3.]
I V . I t is spoken of Magistrales. John
x . 3 4 , 3 5 . Comp. P s . lxxxii. 6, and H e b .
and E n g . Lexicón under riba I I . 5.
V . I t is applied catechrestically—to
Salan. 2 Cor. iv. 4. comp. J o h n xii. 3 i .
xiv. 3 0 . [ S a t á n was called The God qf
this world by t h e Jews, as is shown by
Schoetg. H o r . H . and T. i. p . 688. See
Diod. Sic. i. 9 0 . iii. 3 9 . Polyb. x x x i . 2 1 .
9.1—to the belly, which some men make
their god, or in which t h e y place their
supreme happiness. Phil. iii. 19. [ I n
t h e two following places it seems to de-
note, God and his true service or worship.
A c t s xxii. 3 . Rom. x. 2. H e b . vii. 12.
I n Acts vii. 20. as in Jonah iii. 3 , by a
Hebraism, t h e dative of 0£¿e is added as
an intensitive, very handsome. A n d Schl.
and W a h l explain 2 Cor. x. 4. in t h e same
way, very mighty. O u r versión ha.s,through
God, and so Rosenmiiller. T h e same da-
tive has t h e sense, To the honour qf God,
in Rom. vi. 10. 2 Cor. v. 13. ix. 1 1 , 12.
Gal. ii. 19. T h e genitive G E S according
to W a h l and Schl. denotes the excellence,
perfection, and superlaiive qualities of
t h e object spoken of; as iu 1 Thess. iv.
16. Rev. xv. 2 . T h i s in H e b r e w is com-
364 0 E P
mon, as Gen. xxii. 6. Song of Solomon
viii. 6. Is. xxviii. 2. See Gesen. p . 6 9 4 . ]
Qco<rs€eta, as, r), from - S Í O O - E É J / S . — A
worshipping qf God, piety towards God,
godliness, devolion. occ. 1 T i m . ii. 10.—
T h e L X X use this N . for t h e H e b . riRl»
L D ' ! Y 7 N , fear of the Aleim, Gen. xx. 1 1 ;
and for «J'itf rml>, fear of the Lord, J o b
xxviii. 2 8 . [Baruch v. 3 . Ecclus. i. 2 2 .
Xen. A n . ii. 6 1 3 . ]
0£Oo-£É))c, eos, Se, ó, r), from Bebs God,
and créSopai to worship, venérale.—A
worshipper of God, godly, devout. occ.
J o h n ix. 3 1 . H o w similar to which is
t h e sentiment expressed by H o m e r , II. i.
lin. 218,
*Ocrxe &tw, l-neníi^rirai, /xúKa r EXAUDÍ* aura.
H i m , w h o óbeys the G o d s , the G o d s mil hear.
T h e L X X use 0£oo-£&)e for t h e H e b .
t D ' n ^ K UT, fearing the Aleim, Exod.
xviii. 2 1 . J o b i. 1, 8. ii. 3 . [ X e n . C y r . viii.
i-90
[ § § í ° 0£o?uy>/e, eos, Se, ó, ?/, from Bebs
God, and tvyÉto to hate, abhor.—A hater
of God. occ. Rom. i. 3 0 , where see W o l -
fius, and K y p k e , and Suicer Thesaur. on
this word. [ T h i s word may be either,
hated of God or a hater of God. In t h e
first case it is written Beo-vyrjs, (and occ.
E u r . Troad. 1 2 1 3 . Cyclop. 395.) in t h e
second, &Eo^vyr)s. Suidas says, t h a t in
this place it is in this latter sense. So
W a h l . Schl. prefers t h e former.]
Ü S p 0£Ór)ie, rnros, y, from Bebs God.
0
—Deity, godhead, divine nature. occ. Col.
ii. 9. Comp. J o h n xiv. 10.
Qeparrda, as, ?/, from BepairEvoi to heal,
serve, which see.
I . \_Service afforded by servanls to mas-
ters. Xen. Cyr. v. 5. 10. Diod. Sic. ii.
20.]
I I . [A family qf servants, household.
M a t . xxiv. 4 5 . L u k e xii. 42. Dion. H a l .
i. 8 3 . ix. 2 5 . H e r o d . i. 199. v. 10. H e -
rodian. vii. 1. 10. ^ l i a n . V . H . xii. 4 0 .
So Pollux (iii. 75.) explains t h e word.
Comp. Gen. xiv. 16. Perizon. ad iElian.
V. H . ii. 2. and Abresch. D i l u c . T h u c y d .
p. 3 9 8 . T h u s t h e Latin Famulitium, ser-
vitium. See Cic. pro Ccelio 3 3 . Tacit.
A n n . ' x i i . 17- Sallust. de B . C. xxiv. 4.]
I I I . \_Care, altention, cure, healing.
L u k e i x . 1 1 . where t h e V u l g a t e has Qui
cura indigebant. Rev. xxii. 2. Xen. de Re
Eq. iv. 2. Diod. Sic. i. 2 1 and 57- Polyb.
i. 12. 2 . ]
QEPAÍIEY'íi. M i n t e r t deduces it from
 G E P 365 Q E P

t h e H e b . t p n , plur. C S i n T e r a p h i m , i. 2. viii. 3 1 ; in all which passages t h e

which is a derivativo from the V . MSI to L X X use §epáiri»v for t h e H e b . inj? a
be still, as from atve or reverence, and de- servant. B u t from N u m . xii. 7, 8, it a p -
notes * t h e represenlalive images of the pears t h a t Moses was a servant of a su-
objects of religious ame and vcneration. perior kind. [ S e e iElian. V. H . iii. 4 3 .
These Teraphim appear to have been like Herodian. iii. 10. 7. Xen. Cyr. iii. 1. 12.
t h e Cherubim in form, b u t for more p r í - H o m . Iliad T. 7 8 . E u s t a t h . in Od. A. p .
vate purposes, as the Penates (>i5) or 219, 1 9 . ]
household-gods of particular families Qepí'Cia, from Sépoe summer, harvesl,
among t h e Romans. T h e y were in use which see.
both among believers (see Gen. x x x i . J u d . I . To reap or gather, as corn. M a t . vi.
xvii. and xviii. I Sam. xix. 13, 16.) and 26. L u k e xii. 2 4 . J a m e s v. 4. [Levit.
unbelievers (see 2 Kings xxiii. 24. E z e k . xxiii. 10, 22. R u t h ii. 3 . Xen. Sic. xviii.
xxi. 2 1 . Zech. x. 2. Comp. 1 S a m . x v . 2 3 . 1-]
H o s . iii. 4.) A n d because these idols, saith I I . To reap or gather, in a figurative
Avenarius in tpT), were among t h e G e n - sense, Mat. xxv. 2 4 , 26.—as t h e souls of
tiles consulted for t h e recove?'}/ of liealth, men by t h e ministry of t h e gospel, John
henee the verb Sieparrevo} signifies to healf. iv. 36.—as t h e recompense whether of
I . [To serve, in any way. ( O f a servant, good works, [ J o h n iv. 38.] 1 Cor. ix. I I .
Diod. Sic. ii. 2 0 . ) — B y care and attention, 2 Cor. ix. 6. Gal. vi. 8, 9;—or of evil,
3 E s d r . i. 3 . Xen. de Vect. iv. 42. M e m . Gal. vi. 8. Comp. verse 7. [ S e e J o b iv.
i. 4. 10.—of the service offered to God, 8. Prov. xxii. 8. H o s . viii. 7. x. 13. Stob.
A c t s xvii. 2 5 . So Hesiod. O p p . and D . Serm. x. iEsch. P e r s . 8 2 2 . ]
134. Xen. Mem. ii. 1 . 2 8 . Qepawevréov I I I . T h e j u d g m e n t s of God upon t h e
rae Qe.ee. I d . M a g . E q . vii. 1. ix. 9. Isa. earth are expressed by its being reaped.
liv. 17-—of attention paid lo men. Prov. Rev. xiv. 15, 16, where see V i t r i n g a , and
x i x . 6. xxix. 7. Comp. Philost. V i t . Apol. comp. Joel iii. 13. [ H o s . vi. 11.]
vi. 31.] Qepíapoe, S, ó, from redépicrpai, perf.
I I . [To cure or lieal, whether miracu- pass. of §epl'(o).
lously, as M a t . iii. 16. iv. 2 3 . x . 1, 8. I . [Reaping. John iv. 35. Gen. viii. 22.
Acts iv. 14. & al. freq.—or not, as L u k e Xen. CEc. xviii. 3 . Polyb. v. 95. 5 . ]
iv. 2 3 . viii. 4 3 . See Wisd. xvi. 12. X e n . I I . [The lime of reaping, harvesl.
Cyr. iii. 2 . 12. T h u c y d . ii. 4 7 - ] John iv. 35. M a t . xiii. 3 0 . M a r k iv. 2 9 . ]
Qepáwwv, ovroe, b. See u n d e r Qepa- [ I I I . The crop itself. Levit. xix. 9.
TTÉVLO.—A servant. T h i s word in its pri- J e r . v. 1 7 ; and metaphorically ( 1 ) , of per-
mary meaning, seems to denote a servant sons to be gathered into Christ's church,
in a religious sense. So Pindar, O l y m p . M a t . ix. 3 7 , 3 8 . L u k e x. 2 : ( 2 ) , of per-
iii. line 2 9 . 'A-KÓWIOVOS QEPA'HOÑTA, sons whose sins have made t h e m ripe for
serving or morshipping Apollo. H o m e r , punishment, Rev. xiv. 1 5 . ]
Odyss. xi. line 2 5 , calis kings GEPA'- Ef3p° Qepi^fie, 5, ó, from &epí(o).—A
I I O N T E S Attic, servants or ministers of reaper. occ. M a t . xiii. 30, 3 9 . [Bel & D .
Jove (comp. Rom. xiii. 2, 4.) and valiant ! v. 40. Xen. Hiero, vi. 10.]
warrior.", 6 E P A T Í 0 N T E 2 'Apyoe, servants Qeppaívoj, from Béppn, which see.— To
of Mars, II. ii. line 110. II. vi. line 67- & heat, marm. Qeppaívopai, mid. To warm
al. A n d generally in this poet Sepíiriov, one's self. occ. M a t . xiv. 54, 67- J o h n
when spoken of one man in reference to xviii. 18, 2 5 . Qeppaívopai, pass. To be
another, denotes f. a faithful friend to a marm or marmed. occ. J a m e s ii. 16. [See
superior, one who solicilously regards his H a g g a i i. 6. Herodian viii. 4. 2 7 . X e n .
interest, or looks after his affairs, not a Mem. iv. 3 . 8.]
common or domestic s e r v a n t : b u t in t h e Qéppn, rjc, )/, from réOappai, perf. pass.
latter Greek writers it means a servant of t h e V. Sépti) to heat, which from Sépoe
or minister in general, occ. H e b . iii. 5. summer.—Heat. occ. A c t s xxviii. 3 . [ J o b
Comp. E x o d . iv. 10. N u m . xii. 7, 8. Josh. vi. 17. Eccles. iv. 1 1 . T h u c y d . ii. 4 9 . ]
G E ' P O S , eoe, as, rb.—Summer, in G e r -
* S e e more i n H e b . a n d E n g . L e x i c ó n under mán Jsommír, which is * derived from
nsn XV. t h e G e r m á n ¿jbonite the sun, and múyxz to
•\ [ I have left this derivation on account of the
increase (whence meijr more), because t h e
information it contains, not the truth of the E t y -
mology.]
+ See D a m m i L e x i c . in Qífínw.; col. 1 0 3 3 . * See M a r t i n i i L e x i c . E t y m o l o g . in ^ 5 s t a s .
 e II A 366
sun has then more influenCe. So t h e Latin
asstas summer, is related to osstus lieal.—
T h e Greek Srépoc, like t h e H e b . y>¡? (to
which i t generally answers in t h e L X X ) ,
and t h e Germán ¿kcmnur, includes both
t h e spring and summer, " Germani annum
vulgo dividimus in SSííntcv & jibonuner,
W e Germans commonly divide t h e year
into rvinter and summer" says Martinius,
L e x i c . E t y m o l . in Hiems. occ. M a t . xxiv.
3 2 . M a r k xiii. 2 8 . L u k e xxi. 3 0 . [ T h e
H e b r e w has not two words for spring and
s u m m e r ; and t h e reason is evident when
we remember t h e temperature of the E a s t .
See Bochart Hieroz. P . ii. L i b . 4 . c. 2 1 .
p . 5 9 3 . T h e word oceurs Prov. vi. 8.
J e r . viii. 2 8 . Diod. Sic. v. 3 0 . X e n . M e m .
i. 6. 2.]
Gfwpea), Si, from Setopoe a speclatoi; be-
holder, which from Bcáopai to behold,
compounded perhaps with ópáco to see.
I. [To sec. M a r k v. 15, 3 8 . L u k e xxiii.
4 8 . John xiv. 19. xvii. 24. A c t s i x . 7. Rev.
vii. 56. Diod. Sic. xiii. 57- Polyb. v. 18. 4 .
—to behold with atteniion. M a t . xxvii. 5 5 .
L u k e x x i . 6. X e n . C y r . iv. 3 . 2 . ]
I I . To see, perceive. J o h n iv. 19. xii.
19. [xiv. 17.] Acts iv. 13. [ T h e word
signifies to perceive by any sense, as to
hear. M a r k v. 3 8 . and see D a n . vii. 1 1 .
sec. Chish. with which compare Rev. i.
I I I . To see, experience. J o h n viii. 5 1 ,
where t h e phrase Srewpeív dcivarov, to see
death, seems an Hebraism, corresponding
to t h e H e b . filo m « 1 , P s . Ixxxix. 4 9 .
Comp. L u k e ii. 2 6 , and under "ELSIO I I I .
[ S e e Vorst. Phil. Sacr. p . 7 1 6 . Schleus-
ner refers J o h n xvii. 2 4 . to this head.
Comp. P s . xxvii. 4.]
[ I V . To consider. H e b . vii. 4. D e m .
pp. 19, 2 3 . iElian. V . H . iii. 10.]
[ V . Toforesee. A c t s xxvii. 1 0 . ]
Qewpía, ae, from Beupéio.—A sight,
speclacle. occ. L u k e xxiii. 4 8 . [This
word frequently signifies a solemn em-
bassy sent to see public games. Polyb.
x x x i . 3 . 12. P l a t . Phasd. c. 1. X e n . M e m .
iv. 8. 2. I t also denotes a n y t h i n g relat-
i n g to public games or sacrifices. See
Casaub. ad Theoph. Char. ad init.]
QI'IKY), tjs, f¡, from '¿dr)Ka, 1 aor. of rt-
Onpi to place, put,
I . A chest, case, or t h e like, wherein
any t h i n g is pul, theca.— \_A tomb. T h u c .
i. 8. Soph. E l . § 8 9 9 . See Poli. iii. 102.]
I I . A sheath, scabbard for a sword.
«ce. J o h n xviii. ] 1.
QiiXaCh), from SijXi), )7:'¡ )/, thc uipple
e ii p
or pap of a woman's breast, w h i c h Plato
in Cratylú deduces from SáXXuv to thrive,
because i t h a t h this eífect on t h e child.
I. To give the breast, give such, suelde.
occ. M a t . xxiv. 19. M a r k xiii. 17- L u k e
xxiii. 2 9 , in which last passage t h e V . is
applied to t h e breast itself. [ G e n . x x i .
7. iElian. V . H . xiii. 1. H . A . x. 8. xiv.
18.]
I I . To such t h e breast. occ. M a t . x x i .
16. L u k e x i . 2 7 - — I t is used in both these
senses b y t h e best G r e e k writers, as m a y
be seen in Wetstein on M a t . xxi. 16.
[Comp. J o b iii. 12. L a m . ii. 2 0 . P s . viii. 3 .
P l u t . Rom. p . 2 0 . D . Suidas and T h o m .
M . both mention t h e double use of this
w o r d ; and t h e former cites Lysias as
using it in t h e l s t sense. See Graev. ad
Lucian. Solcec. T . ii. p . 7 3 4 . ]
QffXvQ, eia, v, from §r¡\t), which see
u n d e r Br¡\á¿¡io.—Témale, a woman. It
oceurs in t h e feminine, Rom. i. 2 6 , 2 7 ;
[ S o Diod. Sic. i. 8 4 . Herodian. i. 14. 16.
Xen. M e m . ii. 1. 4 . ] in t h e neuter, M a t .
xix. 4 . Mark x. 6. Gal. iii. 2 8 , Tévoe sex
being understood. Comp. u n d e r "Apanv.
[See G e n . i. 2 7 . vii. 2 . E x o d . i. 16. H e -
rodot. ii. 8 5 . ]
€b;pa, ae, y, from Srrjp, which see u n d e r
Bnpíov.
I. A hunting or catching of wild beasts.
T h u s i t is used by t h e profane writers,
and in t h e L X X , G e n . xxvii. 3 0 . [ S o
X e n . C y r . i. 4. 5 . ]
I I . A snare or trap, [any apparatus,
especially] to catch wild beasts in. occ.
Rom. x i . 9. I t is used in this sense b y
t h e L X X , P s . xxxv. 8, for t h e H e b . nttn
a net; and H o s . v. 2, for t h e H e b . n a n t »
slaughter, which perhaps those translators
mistook for Míinu?, as if formed from n n t »
a snare. See H e b . and E n g . Lexicón in
nnttf.
Qnpevio, from Srjp. See Q-qplov.
I. Properly, To hunt wild beasts. T h u s
applied in t h e profane writers. [ X e n . A n .
i. 2 . 7 . ]
I I . To take or catch wild beasts in
hunting. I t is t h u s used by t h e L X X .
See G e n . xxvii. 3 , 5, 3 3 . Eccles. ix. 12.
[ i E l i a n . V . H . xiii. 1.]
I I I . I n a figurative sense, To catch or
lay hold on, as a word or expression. occ.
L u k e xi. 5 4 . See W e t s t e i n on t h e place,
who shows t h a t P l a t o has several times
applied t h e verb in t h e same view. [See
Xen. C y r . ii. 4 . 8. viii. 2 . 1. Mem. ii. 6. 8.
Plat. de L e g . 1. (vol. viii. p . 10. ed. B i p .
Polyb. xxiii. 8. 11. See also P s . lix. 3 . ]
 9 H P 367 9 II P

Q-npiopayjoj, ó , from ¡br¡pU.v a wild gives no opinión. Bretsch., after Grotius

least, and páyjjpai to fight.— To fight and others, understands i t metaphorically,
with wild beasts. occ. 1 Cor. xv. 3 2 , where referring especially to A c t s xix., where is
Theophylaet's remark is, " Qr¡piopayJ.av an account of t h e fury excited in t h e mob
KaXe'i, rtjv irpóe 'luciáiHc ¡cal Ai¡pi¡Tpiov rov a t E p h e s u s against P a u l . Rosenmüller
apyvpÓKüirov payiiv' Tí yap éroi &r¡pii¡)V observes t h a t it is not probable t h a t a
Siiijiepov; H e calis his contest with t h e Román citizen would be exposed to such
J e w s , and with Demetrius t h e silversmith, a contest, a n d t h a t no instance is k n o w n ;
fighting with wild beasts; for how did an assertion, t h e t r u t h of which is very
these differ from wild beasts ?" Compare questionable. I t is absurd, a t least, to
Qijpiov I V . and see Bowyer's Conject. suppose t h a t , of t h e Christians t o r t u r e d
Several Commentaries, however, both an- at Rome, m a n y were not Román citizens.
cient and modera, have explained ídnpio- However, t h e silence of t h e A c t s on t h i s
fiáyjjo-a in this passage, as if S t . Paul fight with beasts is strongly against t h e
had literally/lwg/U with, or been exposed word's being taken in a literal s e n s e ; and
lo, wild beasts. B u t Doddridge t h o u g h t Rosenmüller observes t h a t they who h a d
he had decisively proved in his note, t h a t to do with furious people, were said 6n*
the word must be understood in a.figura- piopayúv, on which point see also H e i n s .
tivo sense, as it is also implied by I g n a - Obs. S. i. 178. Glass. Phil. Sacr. p . 1 1 3 1 .
tius, in his Epistle to t h e Romans, § 5, Deyling has a dissertation on this subject
edit. R u s s e l : " ' A T T Ó 2vplag peypl 'VúiprjQ T . 'i. p. 3 4 2 . ]
OHPIOMAXflT, &a yijs Kai $a\ao-o-r)Q, O n p t ' o y , a , ró, t h e same as * S>)p, which,
VVKTOQ Kai ¿¡pipar, SeCepivog o¿Ka XcóVap- according to t h e G r e e k Etymologists, is
voic, 6 en, ^parudTióv ráypa. F r o m Syria from 5iie.iv to run, or Béeiv pejov running
even u n t o Rome Ifight wilh \_wild] beasts, easily : m a y we not r a t h e r with t Vossius
both by sea and land, both n i g h t and day, derive t h e more common Greek Bijp from
being bound to ten leopards, t h a t is to t h e .lEolic 4>í)p, whence also Latin Fera,
say, to such a band of soldiers." W a k e . ferus,ferox.
•Lucian in like manner, speaking of t h e I . A wild beast. M a r k i. 13. A c t s x,
Philosophers, Reviv. tom. i. p. 3 9 7 . " 'Ov 12. xi. 6. Rev. vi. 8. Comp. Rev. xiii. 1,
yhp TOÍQ rvxovcri 9 H P I ' 0 I 2 1TP02IT0- 2. I n Acts x . 12, t h e words Kal ra Bnpía,
A E M H ' S A I Seño-ei pot, tíW a\a(oaiv av- are not found in five M S S . , t h r e e of which
Opunroig, Kal SvcréXeyKTOir. F o r I am not ancient, ñor expressed in t h e V u l g . or
to fight with ordinary wild beasts, b u t Syriac versions. T h e y seem unnecessary,
with men insolent, and hard to be con- as being implied in t h e preceding r s - p á -
vinced." Compare Qnpióv I V . I g n a t i u s TfoSa, and are m a r k e d by Griesbach as
uses t h e word in its proper sense concern- próbably to be omitted.
ing his approaching sufferings, E p i s t . to I I . I t denotes particularly a venomous
t h e E p h e s . § 1, to t h e Thrallians, § 10. animal, and is applied to a viper. A c t s
And it may be worth adding, t h a t in xxviü. 4, 5. T h e word is used in t h i s
his E p i s t l e to t h e Smyrnéans, § 4, he rea- sense not only in Ecclus. xii. 17 or 13,
sons in a manner very similar to t h a t of b u t also by t h e profane writers, as by
St. P a u l in 1 Cor. xv. 3 2 . A n d it m u s t Dioscorides, lib. i., speaking of t h e p l a n t
be further observed t h a t t h e late very able called vitex or agnus castus, T a cpíiWa
commentator, D r . M a c k n i g h t , whom see, itirodvpió)peva re Kal viro^piúvvvpeva GH-
understands the V. iQr¡piopáyr¡cra liter- P I A hitoKei, which words are t h u s t r a n s -
ally. [Schleus. K r a u s , Stolz, and others lated by Pliny, N a t . Hist. lib. xxiv. cap.
understand t h e passage literally ( w i t h 9. " Suffilu quoque (folia) aut substraía
Chrysostom, Ambrose, and t h e Syriac "fugant v e n e n a t a — T h e leaves also being
versión) because t h e place of contest is set on fire, or strewed u n d e r one as a bed,
m e u t i o n e d ; and it was not unusual to ex- drive away venomous animáis." See more
pose Christians to such contests *. W a h l to t h i s purpose in B o c h a r t , vol. iii. 3 7 1 ,
or in Suicer T h e s a u r . under Qnplov I .
* [Crimináis and slaves deserving p u n i s h m e n t
were subjected to these horrid contests. See M .
Antonin. x . § !!. B u t s o m e t i m e s y o u n g m e n of even Christian vvomen as e x p o s e d to beasts. D e
family entered the lists t o signalise their courage. H a b . V i r g . p . 127. T e r t u l l i a n , A p o l . c. 3 0 , alsP
See A r t e m i d . Oneiroc. i. 9 . S u e t o n . T i t . c. 7- On speaks of Christians as exposed to b e a s t s . ]
this subject see a curious passage in Cyprian de * S e e under Bifi>.i'on I .
trratia D c i , p . 5. ed. A m s t . 1G91. H e mentions •f- E t y m o l o g . L a t i n , in F E K A ,
 e n s 3GS G II 2

A n d observe t h a t Lucian, Philopseud. evils to themselves, P r o v . i. 18, in L X X .

tora. ii. p . 4 7 2 , (cited by Wolfius) does, Comp. Amos iii. 1 0 ; and for instances
like St. L u k e , use ünpiov as equivalent to from t h e Greek writers, of Bnvavpí£u> and
i'^ioVa, where he relates MíSav rbv apire- Bncravpbg being applied to evils, see W e t -
Xupybv—viro ' E X I ' A N H S Cr¡)/0ÉvTa, KEIC- stein and Kypke on Rom. [ C o m p . D e u t .
8ai j¡Sr¡ rf£ur]Tvbra rb otcéXog' avaSSvri yap xxxii. 3 4 , 3 5 . Diod. Sic. i. 90. xx. 3 6
ávrw ra icXi)fiara, Kal ralg cápale irEpnrXé- E u r . Ion. 9 3 2 . Phil. in Place, p . 990. c ]
KOVTI TrpotxEpTvvaav rb QIIPI'ON SaKÜv Kara I I I . To treasure up, reserve, occ. 2 P e t .
rbv fieyav SaKrvXbv—That Midas t h e vine- iü. 7.
dresser—having been bitten by a viper, 0 H 2 A Y P O 2 , S, b.
V

lay with his leg already putrified : for t h a t I . Properly, A rcposiiory for treasure,
as he was binding up t h e viue-branches a place, chest, box or vessel, where trea-
t o t h e trellis, the beast crept to him and sure or stores are reposilcd. occ. M a t . ii.
bit his great t o e — [ S e e Theoc. xxiv. 5 4 . 11. xiii. 5 2 . Comp. M a t . xii. 3 5 , (where
iEschin. Dial. iii. 2 1 . Bochart. Hieroz. see Kypke) L u k e vi. 4 5 . So in M a t . ii.
T . ii. Lib. iii. c. 2. P e t i t . ad Aretajum de 11, t h e Arabio versión renders Snicravpiis
C u r . Morb. i. c. 4. p . 1 2 2 . ] CIVTÜJV by their vessels; and in this sense
I I I . Any kind qf beast, including t h e t h e word is not only generally used by
lame species. occ. H e b . xii. 2 0 . T h e cor- t h e L X X , as D e u t . xxviii. 12. xxxii. 3 4 .
respondent H e b . word in Exod. x i x . 13, 1 Kings vii. 5 1 . Neh. xiii. 12, & al. freq.
is n n ü n , which ¡ikewise implies a n y kind for t h e correspondent H e b . word "WIN,
of beast, especially t h e lame.—Qnpíov is which likewise properly signifies a repo-
used in like manner bv Theodotion, D a n . sitory for treasure, a treasure-house, or
11. 3 8 . iv. 12, 14, 15, 1*6, 2 1 , 2 5 , 32. v. 2 1 , chest; b u t in t h e Greek writers also,
for t h e Chald. s v n , or m>rr. namely, Herodotus, Eurípides, Josephus,
I V . St. Paul applies to t h e Cretans t h e and Herodian, Br rTavpbg denotes t h e place
t

character of KaKa Svpía, evil beasts, which or vessel wherein measures are kept, as
t h e poet Epimenides had formerly given may be seen in Wetstein on M a t . ii. 1 1 .
t h e m . Such epithets to wicked, cruel, or I know not whether it m a y be worth
unreasonable men, are by no means u n - adding, t h a t in t h e profane writers we
usual in t h e Greek and Román w r i t e r s , have expressions similar to those in M a t .
as t h e reader may see by consulting S u i - xiii. 5 2 . T h u s Isocrates tells Demonicus,
cer's T h e s a u r . and Qr¡píov I I . See also § 2 0 , t h a t he had given such and such
Raphelius, W e t s t e i n , and K y p k e in T i t . rules for his conduct, T h a t he m i g h t
c t

i. 12. T o t h e passages t h e y have p r o - not seek t h e m from a n y one else, aXX'

duced I add, t h a t in Josephus, D e Bel. EVTEVQEV, áairEp EK rapiEÍo rrpotytpng, b u t
lib. i. cap. 30, § 3 , H e r o d t h e G r e a t is might draw them from henee as from a
called 01-IPI'OY, and <¡>ÓVIKOV Q H P I ' O N a store-house." And Lucian, Rhetor. Pra;-
niurdcrous wild beast. occ. T i t . i. 12. [See cept. tom. ii. p . 4 5 3 , ironically i n s t r u e t s
Achil). T a t . vi. p . 387- Arrian. Epict. ii. his pupil carefully to read t h e modern
c. 9. Casaub. ad Aristoph. E q . 2 7 3 . and writers, t h a t he m i g h t be able occasion-
ad A t h e n . i. p . 4 9 . So Qi)o in E u r i p . ally to make use of t h e m , KcidarrEp EK ra-
Phcen. 1315.] piÉiu rrpoaípwv, draiving from t h e m as
Qr¡a-avpi'Cw, from Bncravpbg. from a store-house. [See V i r g . Georg.
I . 2 o lay, store, or treasure, up goods iv. 2 2 8 . C u r t . v. 2. Senec. E p . 115.
for future use. occ. M a t . vi. 19, 2 0 . L u k e where Thesaurus is so used. Symm. Prov.
xii. 2 1 . 1 Cor. xvi. 2. 2 Cor. xii. 14. iii. 10. and L X X . Amos iii. 10. t h e Grcek
J a m . v. 3 . [ I n this sense i t oceurs word is used for a granary.-—Josh. vi.
iElian. V . I I . vi. 12. X e n . C y r . viii. 2. 19. 2 K i n g s x x . 13. Herodot. ii. 1 2 1 .
12. B u t Schl. and W a h l say, t h a t in Herodian ii. 6. 1 1 . iii. 13. 9. Joseph. A n t .
M a t . vi. 19. (and W a h l adds J a m e s v. 3.) ix. 8. 2 . ]
i t is only To collect or gct. Schl. cites I I . The treasure itself. T h u s i t i s a p -
M i c a h vi. 10. 2 K i n g s xx. 17. Prov. ii. 7- plied t o earthly treasure, H e b . x i . 26.
T h i s is a distinction w i t h , at all events, a Comp. M a t . vi. 19.—to heavenly treasure,
very slight difierence, even if there be a n y i. e. eternal life and glory, M a t . vi. 2 0 .
fouudation for i t . ] xix. 2 1 . M a r k x . 2 1 . L u k e x i i . 3 3 . xviii.
I I . To treasure up w r a t h , or future 22 t o t h e gospel of Christ, 2 Cor. iv. 7-
punishment. occ. R o m . ii. 5 . So Br¡aav- Comp. M a t . xiii. 4 4 . — t o t h e treasures qf
pí'(ti(Tiv iavrdic KaKa, they treasure up divine wisdom and knorvledge which are
 e A i 369
l a i d u p in Christ, and in t h e écheme of
our redemption by him, Col. ii. 3 . [ S c h l .
explains M a t . xii. 3 5 . of t h e mind itself,
as t h e receptacle of t h o u g h t s or feelings;
W a h l , of the thoughts themselves stored u p
in t h e m i n d . ]
[Qiyyávia or Gt'yw.]
I . To touch, properly with the hand.
occ. Col. ii. 2 1 . Comp. u n d e r "Airropai
IV.
I I . W i t h a genitive, To touch, come to.
occ. H e b . xii. 20. T h e same word is used
by t h e L X X , on the same subject, for t h e
H e b . « J , E x o d . x i x . 12. [Xen. Cyr. i. 3.
8.]
I I I . To touch, hurt. occ. Pleb. xi. 28.
e\¿€oj.
I . To press, squeeze, ihrong, cromd.
occ. M a r k iii. 9. [Ecclus. xvi. 2 3 . A r t e m .
ii. 3 7 . ]
I I . To strailen, compress, or press to-
gether, as it were, whence TedXiupéi'r]
bSóg, A strait, narrow way. occ. M a t . vii.
14. Cebes, in his P i c t u r e , describes the
w a y to t r u e instruction in nearly t h e
same manner as our Blessed Saviour here
does t h a t which leads to life, p . 24. edit.
Simpson : " D o you not see, says the oíd
m a n , a liltle door, (Sípav nva pínpar),
and beyond the door, a way which is not
m u c h crowded, b u t very fem {náw óXtyot)
are going along it, as seeming difficult of
ascent, r o u g h , and s t o n y ? Yes, answers
the stranger. And does t h e r e not seem,
subjoins t h e oíd man, to be a high hill,
and t h e road u p it very narrow (avá£a-
cng TÉVÍJ 7 w u ) , with precipices on each
side ?—this is t h e way leading to t r u e in-
struction." [ A r r i a n . Diss. Ep. i. 2 5 . ]
I I I . To oppress, affiict. occ. 2 Thess.
i. 6. 2 Cor. i. 6. 2 Thess. i. 7, & al.
[ A d d 1 Cor. iv. 8. (where Schl. t h i n k s
the metaphor taken from a wrestler
squeezed in t h e grasp of his victorious
adversary) J o h n vii. 5. 1 T h e s s . iii. 4. 1
Tim. v. 10. (see Pearson. ad I g n a t . p . 17.)
H e b . xi. 37. I s . xlix. 26. xix. 20. Diod.
Sic. xii. 66. xx. 3 1 . A r t e m id. iii. 66.]
Q\í\pis, toe, A t t . EOJQ, i), from 6\¡€OJ.—
Grievous affliction or distress. See M a t .
xiii. 21. xxiv. 2 1 . J o h n xvi. 2 1 . Acts vii.
10. xi. 19. xiv. 2 2 . Rom. ii. 9. 1 Cor.
vii. 28. J a m . i. 27. O n M a r k xiii. 19.
"Eaorrai yap 'At ' H M E ' P A I kicéivaí QAV-
W2, K y p k e cites from A r r i a n , E p i e t e t .
lib. ii. cap. i. t h e similar phraseology, Tt
yap ¿ T t n A l A I ' O N ; Üyvoia. Tí l<rt 11AI-
A I ' O N : ápadía: for w h a t is a child?
Ignorance. W h a t is a child? Want of
e o p
; learning. [ I n J o h n xvi. 2 1 . it is used of
t h e pains of chilcl b i r t h ; in 2 Cor. viii.
13. Phil. iv. 14. of the evils of poverty,
and so J a m e s i. 2 7 . 1 Cor. vii. 2 8 . T h e
expression QXí-^ic Xpt=r5 in Col. i. 24. and
Rev. i. 9. is, Sufferings for the salee qf
Christ. See G r a m m a r . T h e word occurs
2 Sam. xxii. 19. 1 Kings xxii. 2 7 . 2 K i n g s
xiii. 4. & al.]
Gw/tr/cw. T h i s verb, according to t h e
G r a m m a r i a n s , forms its I s t fut. act. in
8vr/^o, its perf. in rédvriKa, and I s t fut.
mid. in dvrilopai.
I . To die, a n a t u r a l death. M a t . ii. 20.
M a r k xv. 4 4 . L u k e viii. 4 9 .
I I . To die, a spiritual death. occ. 1
T i m . v. 6. Comp. Qávaroe H I . [ B a r u c h
iii. 4 . ]
Qvnrbe, r/, bv, from 6v//<ncw to die.—
Mortal, Hable or subject to death. occ.
Rom. vi. 12. viii. 1 1 . 1 Cor. xv. 5 3 , 5 4 .
2 Cor. iv. 1 1 . Qrnrbv, rb, Mortalily, 2
Cor. v. 4. [So G e n . ii. 7. J o b . x x x . 2 3 .
Is. Ii. 12. Xen. Cyr. viii. 7. 3 . i E s c h .
Socr. D i a l . iii. 5. and 17. I n Rom. viii.
11. Schl. and W a h l construe the word as
Dead, and r i g h t l y ; and in Rom. vi. 12.
they consider it as metaphorically used,
Dead (to sin) i. e. renouncing sin. On
this use of t h e dative, see Mathise § 3 8 8 . ]
GopuéÉw, S>, from Qópv€oQ.
I. To disturb, throw into a tumuli, sel
in an uproar. occ. A c t s xvii. 5 . [ S o J u -
lián. P a n e g . c i. P l u t . Cic. p . 868. P .
I t is often used of expressing assent or
dissent in public assemblies, as in Diod.
Sic. xiii. 2 8 . Pol. xxviii. 4. 10. D e m .
16, 2 7 . 5 7 7 , 9. I n A c t s xx. 10. it is m e -
taphorically used (in t h e pass.) of being
disturbed in mind, as in Arrian. Diss. E p .
iv. 8. .EHan. V . H . i. 3 2 . ]
I I . Qopvtéopai, npai, Mid. To malee a
noisc or disturbance. I t is in t h e N . T .
particularly applied to t h e noisc made in
la.mcnling the dead. occ. M a t . ix. 2 3 .
M a r k v. 3 9 .
QópvÉoc, s, b. Comp. TupScifw.
I . A tumult, or uproar. M a t . xxvi. 5 .
xxvii. 2 4 . A c t s x x . 1, & al. In this view
both t h e N . BópvSoe and t h e V . QopvStw
are often used in t h e G r e e k writers.
[ A d d M a r k xiv. 2 . A c t s xxi. 34. xxiv.
18. E z e k . vii. 7- J e r . xlix. 2. L u c i a n .
Dial. Deor. xii. 2,]
I I . A tumultuous assembly, or company.
occ. M a r k v. 3 8 . Such noisy tumultuous
assemblies a t t h e place w h e r e any one lies
dead are still used in t h e E a s t . See
H a r m e r ' s Observations, vol. ii. p . 135.
B B
 e p II 370 ep H

[ S c h l . doubts whether the word here de- ment in an audible manner.—It is used
notes a noisy croivd, (see Mat. Í K . 23.) or either absolutely. occ. M a t . * xi. 17. L u k e
lamentations for the dead. See Nicolai vii. 3 2 . J o h n xvi. 2 0 ; or construed with
de L u c t u Grascorum, c. 9. § 4. 6 ó - an accusative. occ. L u k e xxiii. 2 7 . [ 2
pvfloc is used to express lameatation in Sam. i. 17. iü. 3 3 . J e r . xvi. 5.]
Prov. xxiii. 29. See Gen. xvii. 4. I s . QprjvoQ, eos, ac, rb, from Qpéto to utter a
v. 1 4 . ] tumultuous or confused cry, which seems
G P A ' Y í i . — T o bréale, bruise. occ. L u k e a word formed from t h e sound, like shrielc,
iv. 18, in which passage TvcfKóíe avéi- scream, efe. in E n g . T h e V . Qpéio is
¡SXtuW, recovering of sight to the blind, particularly applied in t h e Greek writers
is taken from t h e L X X , who in Isa. Ixi. to lamcntation, as in irádea dpeopévr¡e, be-
1, have substituted these words for t h e wailing her misfortunes, and 6peopévr¡
H e b . nl|7 ripB E3>T|DN\ the opening of the (reavrij tcaKa, bewailing h e r miseries t o
prison to them that are bound, either be- herself. Hesychius accordingly explains
cause prisoners frequently had their eyes Bpéetv by dpnvelv, and dpeópevov by dXo-
put out, as J u d . xvi. 2 1 . 2 Kings xxv. 7 ; <¡>vpó¡jevov deploring. See S c a p u l a . — A
or r a t h e r because t h e y were s h u t u p in wailing, lamentation, [mournful chant."}
dark prisons. T h e same H e b r e w ex- occ. M a t . ii. 18. [ 2 Sam. i. 17. J e r . vii.
pressions S t , L u k e further explains by 2 9 . ix. 17. Joseph. A n t . vii. 1. 6. Diod.
(WoTEÍXat redpavapsvtie ev ¿upécreí, to Set at Sic. i. 7 2 . X e n . A n a b . x. 3 . ]
liberty them that are bruised, namely Qpr¡tricéia, ac, i), from BpnoKevio to
with t h e fetters or stocks in which t h e y worship God, and t h i s from Opijo-icoe, which
were coníined. This last expression oc- see.
eurs in the L X X of Isa. Iviii. 6, for t h e I. Religión, religious service of God, or
Pleb. Q>tiíE¡n t z r y í n rbu>. I t seems very divine worship. occ. A c t s xxvi. 5 . J a m e s
evident from this passage of St. L u k e , i. 2 6 , 2 7 .
t h a t the inspired penmen of t h e N . T . in I I . Religious worship, or service, of
their citations of t h e Oíd, did not intend angels. occ. Col. ii. 18. Josephus, D e Bel-
either literally to transíate t h e H e b r e w , lib. ii. cap. 8. § 7, informs u s , t h a t those
or to stamp their a u t h o r i t y on t h e L X X who were admitted into t h e society of t h e
translation, but only to refer us to the Essenes swore avvrnpít'reiv Spoíioc ra re
ORIGINAL SCRIPTÚRES. [ R o - rrje aipécreiúQ avrüv /3i€Xía, Kai ra rwv
senmüller seems to agree with P a r k h u r s t , ' A P r E ' A í i N óvbpara, " t h a t t h e y would
bufe Schl. and W a h l transíate t h e word equally g u a r d t h e books of their sect, and
more generally, The affiicted, (broken in the ñames of the angels." And it m a y
spirit) as in D e u t . xx. 3 . 1 Sam. xx. 33- seem from t h e Canon of t h e Council of
D e u t . xxviii. 3 3 . Schl. says, To avenge Laodicea on t h e river L y c u s , which was
the affiicted, aud mentions another i n t e r - held about t h e year 3 6 7 , and condenmed
pretation, viz. To give comfort to those t h e naming qf angels as idolatry, and
mho are dejected from sin, or other heavy from t h e testimony of Theodoret (both
troubles.} cited by Wetstein, whom see), t h a t such
Qpéppa, uroc, ro, from ré6pappat, perf. a superstitious leaven had infected t h e
pass. of rpéíjiio to nourish. [ P r o p e r l y , church of Colosse, which was in t h e
That which is nourished *. See iElian neighbourhood of t h a t of Laodicea. Comp.
V . H , i. 5. E u r . H i p p . 11. H e n e e in the Col. ii. 18. " W h a t was m e a n t by guard-
p l u r a l ] — C a t t l e which are k e p t and nou- ing the ñames ofthe angels, m a y be con-
rished by their owners. occ. J o h n iv. 12, j e c t u r e d from t h e notion which commonly
where see Wolfius and W e t s t e i n , b u t prevailed in t h e East, and in E g y p t , con-
comp. Kypke. TSee .Diod. Sic. i. 74. cerning the power of demons or angels
iElian. V". H . xii. 56. Xen. OEc. xx. 2 3 . over t h e aífairs of this world. I t is p r o -
Some, however, understand it here, of bable t h a t t h e Essenes having adopted t h e
The family, or household. So K y p k e and yisionary fancies of their pagan neighbours
M a i u s Obss. Sacr. iv. p . 7 . See J a m b l . concerning these superior n a t u r e s , i m a -
de M y s t . sect. iv. c. 1. M a r m . O x . N o . 9. gined themselves able by t h e magical use
and comp, E u r . I p h . A u l . 5 9 8 . and iEseh. of t h e ñames of angels to perform super-
Sept. T h e b . 166.]
Qpyvéto, ü>, from dpr/voc.— To wail, la- * [ W a h l says, that i n the t w o first places o n l y ,
it i s To utter the lament at funerals- T h e two
* [Qnicquid alitur. Blomf. ad j E s c h . Sept. first places from the L X X quoted also bear t h i s
Theb. sense.]
 E P II 371 E P I

n a t u r a l w o n d e r s ; and t h a t t h e due ob- all we m a y perhaps, with Pasor, best re-

servance of these mystical rites was t h e duce Opíjo-Kos and its derivatives from t h e
charge, which they bound themselves by H e b . ttíYi to seek, i. e. G o d ; a phrase
oath to take, of t h e sacred ñames of t h e often used in t h e O . T . to express re-
angels." T h u s Enfield, (from B r u c k e r , ) ligión. See 1 Chron. xxviü. 9. 2 (Jirón,
H i s t . of Philos. vol. ii. p . 185. I t may xv. 2 . xvii. 4 . P s . ix. 1 1 , & al. in t h e
however be doubted whether the Colos- Heb.
sians derived their religious r e g a r d for {§§5° Qpiap&Eiih), from Spíci/LiSoc *, a
angels from t h e Esseues, or immediately triumph, which M i n t e r t aud others de-
from t h e principies of t h e eastern, or Pla- duce from Bpíov a Jig-leqf, and apSri a
tonic philosophy. M o s t próbably from brow (properly of a rock), because t h e
t h e latter. See under líroiyEíov I I I . aud victor's brows were anciently crowned
M a c k n i g h t ' s Preface to Colossians, Sect. with fgleaves. B y a passage i n P o l y -
I I . Wolfius however, on Col. ii. 18, ob- bius it should seem, t h a t t h e G r e é k Bpí-
serves, t h a t Qp-no-KEÍa is never in t h e N . T . ayu€oc~was formed from t h e L a t i n trium-
construed with a genitive, denoting t h e phus: for, speaking of t h e Romans, h e men-
object qf worship, any more than 'EVO-E- tions ras irpocrayopEvopÉvtís Trap' ávrdis,
€eía i s ; b u t t h a t in James i. 2 6 , it is what are called by them, G P I A M ' B O Y S ;
joined with a genitive, signifying the sub- and I know not t h a t §plapt.os or its deriva-
ject or person worshipping: and he ac- tives ever oceur in any G r e e k w r i t e r till t h e
cordingly u n d e r s t a n d s t h e Qpno-KÉia riov times of t h e Román conquests. See R a p h e -
'AyyéXwv of a pretended angelic worship, lius on 2 Cor. ii. 1 4 . — W i t h an accusative
far p u r e r t h a n t h a t of other christians, following, To triumph over, lead in tri-
and such as was paid by t h e holy spiritual umph. occ. Col. ii. 15. ( T h u s P l u t a r c h in
angels. B u t t h e former interpretation Romul. tom. i. p . 3 8 . D . 'E6piáp€svaE fíacri-
seems preferable, as best agreeing with XEIS, He led kings in triumph.) 2 Cor. ii.
t h e context, and with t h e state of t h e 14. T o explain which l a t t e r passage we
Colossian church at the t i m e ; and though m u s t observe, t h a t in t h e ancient t r i u m p h s
Qp-rjo-Keta. is not in t h e N . T . construed it was customary for t h e victors not only
w i t h a genitive of t h e O B J E C T , yet i t is so to lead about their conquered enemies, b u t
used in Wisdom xiv. 27, five or six times also to be decompanied in their t r i u m p h a l
by Josephus, quoted by Krebsius, and by cars by their children and relations. In
H e r o d i a n , cited by W e t s t e i n . See some both these views, St. P a u l m i g h t say,
curious r e m a r k s on t h i s subject in T h e t h a t God, rrávrOTE Spiap'&Evovri lipas, was
British Critic for March 1794, p. 274, always leading us, i. e. himself, in tri-
and for A u g u s t , p . 198. [ B r e t s c h n . and umph : for h e was an eminent t r o p h y of
W a h l agree with P a r k h u r s t ; Schl. with Christ's long-suffering, a n d converting
Wolf. See Krebs. Obss. F l a v . p . 3 3 9 . grace, (comp. 1 T i m . i. 16.) and was from
D e y l i n g iv. p . 5 8 6 . T h e word occurs iv a persecutor now become a friend, and
Mac. v. 6. H e r o d i a n v. 3 . 12. a n d 7. 3 . joined with his Blessed Master in the
E l s n e r (ii. p . 263.) mentions t h a t it is triumph of t h e gospel. See more in W o l -
often used in good Greek for a supersti- fius, who shows t h a t Theodoret, GScume-
tious worship.] nius, a n d Chrysostom, explain t h e e x -
&prjaKog, a, b.—Religious, devout, pression in like manner. See also W e t -
a worshipper qf God. occ. J a m . i. 26. stein. [Schl., W a h l , and Rosenmüller,
Some derive i t from Qpát,, in t h e Ionic say t h a t it is, To make to triumph, in t h i s
dialect 9píj£, a Thracian, so called from place of Corinthians, as KX-npovopÉív to as-
D^n Tiras, t h e seventh son of J a p h e t , sign an inheritance. Josh. xvii. 14. j3a-
Gen. x. 2. T h u s Suidas, G P H S K E ' Y E I , O-IXEVEIV to make to reign, in I Saín. xv.
BEOGEÍIEI, irwnpETEi role OEOÍS' AÉyerai yap 3 5 . viii. 2 2 . xii. 1. Bretschn. construes
¿>S 'OptpEvg, 9PA~ÍE?, irptorOQ ETExyo\óyr¡cre
with P a r k h u r s t and W e t s t e i n , To lead,
ra 'EXXI'IVOJV pv-í/pia, Kal rb ripav QEOV
one triumphing, i. e. to exhibit in a state
G P H S K E ' Y E I N EKÚXEO-EV, ¿>Q G P A K I ' A S of triumph, lo give the victory to one.
Saris rr¡s Ivpi'/ereíus' Qpr¡o-KÉvei means, he Kypke (ii. p . 243.) would transíate, Tri-
worships or serves God: for it is reported umphing on account of us, supposing an
t h a t O r p h e u s , a T h r a c i a n , i n s t i t u t e d t h e ellipse of Sia, which is very liarsh.]
religious mysteries of t h e Greeks, and
* [ T h e proper m e a n i n g o f this word in Greek i s ,
called t h e worshipping of God Spiío-KzvEiv, A Tiymn in honour qf Bacchus sung in solcmn
; <

as being a T h r a c i a n invention. B u t after processions. S e e Arrian. E x p - A i e x . v i . 2 8 . 1 . ]

B B 2
 0P o 372
G P r X rpixk, V, " a t . plur. % # *
I . A hair, as of the head. occ. M a t . v.
36. Tpixtc, ai, The hair of t h e head.
occ. Luke vii. 3 8 , 44-. J o h n xi. 2. xii. 3 .
1 Pet, iii. 3 . Rev. i. 14. [where the Syriac
r i g h t l y explains rr¡v Keeoa\nv Kal rae rpí-
X S, as if it ivas rae rpíx e rrje Ke<pa\ric.~\
a a
ix. 8. Doddridge, in Luke vii. 3 8 , r e n -
ders $pi£,l by tresses of her hair, and ob-
serves, t h a t t h e E n g . word might be d e -
rived from t h e Greek. And so indeed it
m i g h t , b u t we seem to have it immedi-
ately from the Frencli tresse a wreath of
h a i r ; and t h i s may be from t h e Italian
treccia t h e same. [ I n M a t . x. 30. L u k e
xii. 7. xxi. 18. A c t s xxvii. 34. it is used
to denote somelhing trifling. See 1 Sam.
xiv. 4 5 . 2 Sam. xiv. 1 1 . 1 Kings i. 5 2 .
Suidas in voce. A r i s t o p h . Ran. 6 2 7 . Cic¡
ad A t t . v. 20. Vorst. D i a t r . de A d a g .
N . T . c. 6 . ]
I I . Hair, as of a carriel, occ. M a t . iii.
4. M a r k i. 6. [ 2 K i n g s i. 8.]
Qpoém, ai, from Bpóoe, the cry or noise
of a lumulluous multitude, which from
t h e perf. mid. riOpoa of the V. Qpéio to
utler a iumulluous cry t . Comp. under
Gp?/!'og.
I . To utler (¿coiifused tumulluaus cry.
I I . To put into a tumull or confesión,
to disturb, terrify; whence Bpóeopai
5uat, pass. to be put into confusión, dis-
turbed, or terrifed. occ. M a t , xxiv. 6.
M a r k xiii. 7. 2 Thess. ii. 2. [Song of So-
lomon v. 4 . ]
G P O ' M B O S , a, !>. Hesychius explains
SpópSoc bv 'Alpa waxv, wemiybe ¿>£ fiavói,
t h i c k blood coagulated like lumps or hil-
l'ocles ; and t h e Scholiast on Sophocles by
OJKOV a tumor, sivelling. T h e learned
D a m m , however, in his Lexicón Nov.
Grase, col. 2376, derives Qpóptoe from
rpé(j)io, fut. Bpéú/ui, perf. pass. réOpappai,
lo coagúlate, as milk for cheese, in which
sense Plomer uses t h i s word, Odyss. ix.
lin. 246,
"AUTÍHG: O íjaiinj pj.lv © P F / ' í ' A S AEUHCHO y á X a x T O f —
Coagulating, tíien, w i t h brisk dispatch,
T h e h a l f of h i s n e w m i l k
COWVEH.
F r o m rpéipu) in this view is also derived -|- " D A Ü S H I E E , filia; Goth. dauter;
rpv(¡>a\tc a cheese, and rp£(j)Oj itself may S a x . • B o h . T e r i , " o o h r o p , "aohturi. A l . doldcr,
tokier, ihohter:
be dedueed from rpérru to turn, which dochter." Junii Etymolog. Anglican.
English V . we apply to t h e coagulation í i n m , Dochter.
of milk. See TptVw.—A clol, a coagu- col. and W a l t o n ' s P r o l e g . i n P o l y g l o t t . X V I . p .
* [ P a r k h u r s t derives this word from njfiií!]
t [See ¿Esch. P r o m . 6 1 2 . E u r . I o n . 7 8 4 . E u -
stath. in l ü a d . p . 377. 7.]
e Y r
lated mass *, particularly of blood, as t h e
word is used by Plato, Dioscorides [i.
1 0 2 . ] iEschylus [ E u m . 184. Choeph.
5 2 6 . ] Galen, whom see in W e t s t e i n . occ.
L u k e xxii. 4 4 , where see B p . Pearce's
N o t e . Herodotus, lib. i. cap. 179, uses
GPO'MBOYS cirripáKTs for clots, or con-
creted lumps, of bitumen. [ S e e also Dios-
cor. 1. 68.]
GPO'NOS, a, ó.
I. A throne, a royal or judicial seat.
See M a t . xix. 2 8 . L u k e i. 3 2 , 5 2 . xxii.
30. Acts vii. 4 9 . Rev. i. 4 . ii. 13. [Schl.
t h i n k s t h a t t h e word signifies also a royal
habitation, and t h a t in this sense it is a p -
plied to heaven as God's dwelling place.
M a t . v. 34. xxiii. 22. A c t s vii. 4 9 . Rev.
xxii. 3 . Comp. I s . Ixvi. 1. Theoc. Idyll.
vii. 9 3 . I t seems often to be used to ex-
press empire or royal power, as in L u k e
i. 32. See A c t s ii. 30. Heb. i. 8. P s .
Ixxxix. 457]
I I . An order of angels, or celestial
spirits. occ. Col. i. 16.
Qvyárnp, rzpoQ, b y syncope rpoc, {j.
I t is certainly w o r t h y of remarle, t h a t
we find this word Bvyárnp. used, with
little variation, not only by t h e + Goths,
Saxons,Almans,Cimbrians, D a n é s , D u t c h ,
aud E n g l i s h , but even by t h e '\. Pcrsians.
TTJP in Svylirnp may be merely a t e r m i n a -
tion, as in t h e G r e e k pí/rnp, 7rárr¡p, a n d ,
as we are informed by B p . Chandler §, ler
usually is of substantives in t h e oíd Persic,
and we m a y add, as ter seems to be in t b e
E n g . sister, and ther in father, brother,
mother, which four last E n g . words are
also nearly t h e same as t h e P e r s i c suster,
pader, mader, brader.
I. A daughter, w h e t h e r an immediate,
M a t . ix. 18. x. 3 5 , 3 7 , & al.—or a remote
desceudant, L u k e i. 5. xiii. 16. [See
Joseph. de Mace. i. 15. Gen. x x x v i . 2 .
Schl. adds A c t s ii. 17. Comp. Vorst.
Phil. Sacr. c. 2 4 . ]
I I . I n the vocative it is used as a corn-
pellalion qf ajfection and hindness. M a t .
ix. 2 2 . M a r k v. 3 4 . L u k e viii. 48. xxiii.
2 8 . Comp. TÉKVOV IV.
* [ S o A t h e n . v. p . 1 0 2 . S e e P o l i . iv. 1 9 . 2 . ]
Ang.
Cira, doller ; D a n . daatter ; B e l g .
S e e Castell, L e x i c . Persic.
101.
§ See h i s . V i n d i c a t i o n o f the D e f e n c e o f C h r i s -
tianity, book i. p . 5 5 , and H e b . and E n g . L e x i c ó n
in 1Q1DS.
 e Y i 373 e YM

I I I . I t deuotes a cily with its inhabit- Q'íilvoe, r¡, ov.— Thyine, made of t h e
ants. M a t . xxi. 5. J o h n xii. 1 5 ; as na I %ov, Sha, or thya tree, so called from Síw
frequently does in t h e H e b . S. S. See to cense, bum as incensé, on account of
Ps. xiv. 1 3 . cxxxvii. 8. Isa. xxii. 4. [ J e r . the sweet smcll of its wood, especially in
xliii. 24. 2 Sam. ii. 2.] A n d t h u s citics or burning. This is observed by Honier,
coimtries are commonly represented by * Odyss. v. lines 5 9 , 6 0 :
women in sculptures and coins. So, for
instance, on t h e reverse of t some medals K=$pu r' E U x e á r o i O , ©Y'OY T a y a ó3w§Éj,
of Vespasian and T i t u s , J u d e a is exhi-
bited as a woman sitting sorrowful on t h e A n d fires o f scented w o o d ,
g r o u n d (comp. Isa. iii. 26. L a m . i. 1. ii. Cedar, and t h y o n , far p e r f u m ' d the isle.
10.) under a palm-tree, with this inscrip-
T h e o p h r a s t u s , H i s t . P l a n t . v. 5 , says,
tion, J Ü D ^ A C A P T A ,
t h a t t h e " thyon or thya tree grows near
" B e n e a t h her p a l m here sad Judasa w e e p s . " the temple of J u p i t e r Ammon, rrap' "Ap-
POPE'S E p i s t l e t o A d d i s o n . pwvi (in África), a n d in t h e Cyrenaica,
t h a t i t is like t h e oypress in i t s boughs,
f§§p° Bvycirpiov, tí, ró, A diminutive of
lea ves, stalk, a n d fruit, and t h a t its wood
Bvyárnp.—A titile daughter. occ. M a r k v.
never rots." I t was in high esteem among
2 3 . vii. 24. [ A t h e n . xiii. p . 5 0 1 . C ]
the heathen, who often made t h e doors of
BveWa, r¡g, ?;, from Bíito to move, or
their temples, a n d t h e images of t h e i r
rusk impetuously, and dtWa a storm,
gods, of this wood. See more in W e t s t e i n ,
whirlwind, which from cíeiv to blow, and
and comp. Pliny's N a t . H i s t . lib. xiii. cap.
ÍÍKEIV to roll round, or wlúrl. So Hesiod,
16. occ. Rev. xviii. 12. [See Salmas. ad
speaking of t h e winds, Theogon. line 874,
Solin. c. 4 6 . p . 6 6 7 . Wessel. ad Diod. Sic.
says,
v, c. 46. Cels. Hierobot. ii. p . 22.]
KazíQT'OTZIN 'AE'AAH;. Qvplapa, aros, rb, from reQvfiíap.ai
stornis they rustí.
I n horrid perf. pass. of Bvpiáoi.
An impetuous or furious storm, a tem- I. Incensé, " * perfmnes exhaled by
pest, a whirlwind, turbo. T h u s H e s y - Jire." occ. Rev. v. 8. viii. 3 , 4 . xviii. 1 3 .
chius explains BvzWa by avípn crv^poíj») O n Rev. v. 1, observe t h a t not t h e in-
Kai oppt) y Karaiyic, a whirlwind, or storm censé, b u t t h e ipíakai, or bowls, are t h e
qf wind; a n d in H o m e r Odyss. v. líne prayers of t h e saints, to which t h e incensé
3 1 7 , we have of Christ's merits was added, Rev. viii. 3 .
Aírjr¡ M I S r O M E ' N A N ÍVÉ¡J.UIV í'AÍatrx 0T'EAAA, C o m p . P s . cxli. 2 , a n d Exod. x x x . 3 4 —
A horrid storm o f fierce conjlicting winds. 38. [ E x . xxv. 16. Diod. Sie. i. 6 2 . H e r o -
[ S e e also Aristot. de M u n d . c. 4 . ] occ. dian. iv. 2. 2 1 . ]
H e b . xii. ¡ 8 . T h e H e b r e w word in D e u t . I I . The act qf censing or fuming in-
iv. 1 1 . v. 2 2 , or 19, corresponding to Bv- censé, occ. L u k e i. 10. Comp. verse 11.
eWa of t h e L X X , and of t h e Apostle, is Qvpiarypiov, e, ró, from Svpiáio.—A
bt¡"\¡} thiclc darkness. Violent whirlwinds vessel or instrument for burning incensé.
and tempests are always accompanied with occ. H e b . ix. 4, where I t h i n k it means
thick dark clouds, a n d no doubt t h e teli? t h e censer mentioned L e v . xvi. 12, in
mentioned in D e u t . was in violent motion which t h e H i g h Priest on t h e g r e a t d a y
(comp. Exod. x i x . 16, 1 8 . ) , whence t h e of atonement took coals of fire from off
like appearance is called ¡Til>D n l l a t h e brazen altar, a n d burnt incensé, in
whirlwind, E z e k . i. 4 , a n d m ) > D , J o b t h e H o l y of Holies, which is therefore in
xxxviii. 1. xl. 6. Comp. N a h . i. 3 . t h e t e x t of Hebrews said 'éx»cra to have
t h i s censer, for use namely. T r u e indeed,
* " B u t w h o are t h e laitics w e are n e x t t o e x a - it is not expressly said in t h e O . T . t h a t
m i n e ? T h e s e are, s a y s P h i l a n d e r , so m a n y cities,
t h e censer employed on t h a t occasion was
nations, and provinces, t h a t present themselves to
you under the shape o f •women. W h a t y o u take golden, b u t neither is a n y t h i n g said t o
for a fine lady at first s i g h t , w h e n y o u c o m e to l o o k t h e c o n t r a r y ; a n d as all t h e other furni-
into her, w i l l prove a toisin, a country, or one o f the t u r e of t h e Holy of Holies was either solid
four parts o f the w o r l d : i n short y o u have n o w gold, or overlaid with t h a t metal, analogy
Afric, S p a i n , France, I t a l y , and several other nations
would lead one to conclude t h a t t h e censer
of the earth before y o u . " A d d i s o n ' s 2 d D i a l o g u e
on A n c i e n t M e d a l s . in which A a r o n offered t h e incensé on
t S e e U n i v . H i s t . v o l . x . p . 6 9 1 , N o t e . T h e t h a t solemn d a y was golden also. A c -
reader m a y find a print o f t w o o f these m e d a l s i n
A d d i s o n ' s D i a l o g u e s , Series iii. N o . 1 3 , 1 4 . * Johnson.
 0 Y M 374 0 Y M

cordingly t h e J e w s have a tradition, cited alleged by Raphelius, in Dion. H a l . v. 1 1 ;

by W h i t b y and Wetstein on H e b . ix. 4, and it is To fight with a hostile mind in
a n d by Ainsworth on Lev. xvi. 12, t h a t Dion. Sic. xvii. 3 3 . Pol. xxvii. 8. 4 . ]
" on every (other) day he who was to burn Qvpóg, 5, ó, from 3¿<d to move impetu-
incensé took coals from off t h e (brazen) ously, particularly as t h e air or wind.
altar in a censer of silver, b u t this day See ©va) I.
t h e H i g h Priest in a censer of gold." I . I t seems to be sometimes used in
Comp. Rev. v. 8. viii. 3. and see Josephus H o m e r for t h e animal soul or breath, as
D e Bel. lib. i. cap. 7. § 6.—I am well where speaking of Sarpedon, who h a d
aware t h a t some learned men have explain- fainted with a wound, he says, II. v. line
ed yjpvcrüv Svfxiaríipwv, H e b . ix. 4, to mean 697,
t h e golden aliar of incensé : b u t how can
' A u r í f 8' á¿U7rnjv0>;, TTep) SE ttvoiyí Bope'ao
t h e H o l y of Holies be said to have this, Züjypsi É7Tí7rvE/ao"a x a x w f XEKaiJqGTa ©YMO'íT.
since i t certainly always stood w i t h o u t
t h e vail, in t h e holy place? See E x o d . But he reviv'd, for Bóreas' cheeríng blast
Breathing around refresh'd his pantivg suul.
xxx. 6. xl. 26. Besides, in t h e only two
passages of t h e L X X where Ssvpia-riipiov Comp. II. iv. lines 4 7 0 , 5 2 4 . II. xvi. line
oceurs, namely 2 Chron. xxvi. 19. E z e k . 743. II. xiii. line 6 7 1 .
viii. 1 1 , it answers t a the H e b . nltopn a I I . The soul or mind, considered as
censer; and lastly in t h e N . T . another comprehending both t h e appetites and
word, namely Bvvia^pwv, is used for t h e passions. In both these views t h e word is
altar of incensé, L u k e i. 11. Comp. Rev. frequently applied in t h e profane writers.
viii. 3 . ix. 13. 1 Mac. i. 2 1 . [See iElian. I I I . A violent motion or passion of the
V . H . xii. 5 1 . D e m o s t h . p . 617. 3 . T h u - mind, anger, wralh. I t is ascribed to
cyd. vi. 46. Read also D e y l i n g ' s T r a c t God, Rev. xiv. 10, 19. (Comp. Isa. Ii.
Obss. Sacr. ii. p . 5 5 8 , who agrees in this 17.) Rev. xv. 1, 7. xix. 15. Comp. Rom.
view. T h e word denotes the altar of in- ii. 8:—to man, L u k e iv. 2 8 . Acts xix. 2 8 .
censé in Joseph. A n t . iii. 6. 8. Phil. de [2 Cor. xii. 2 0 . Gal. v. 20- E p h . iv. 3 1 .
V i t . Mos. p . 668. ed. Paris.] Col. iii. 8. H e b . xi. 2 7 . ] — t o t h e devil,
Qvptáo>, ú~>, from * Sipa, aro?, ro, in- Rev. xii. 12. Qvpoe and ópyr) are often
censé, which from ©v&).—To burn or fume joined in t h e profane, as t h e y are in t h e
incensé, cause it to exhale its odour by sacred writers. T h i s Elsner and W e t -
fire. occ. L u k e i. 9. [See E x . x x x . 7. stein have shown on Rom. ii. 8. [The
xl. 2 7 . Isa. lxv. 3 . Schol. Aristoph. P l u t . pirrase denotes exceeding anger in Rev.
137. Casaub. ad A t h e n . ii. 939.] xvi. 19. xix. 15. Comp. E x o d . xxxii. 1 1 .
Qvjxofiayito, 10, from Bvpbg the mind, D e u t . x x i x . 2 3 . B u t in Rom. ii. 8, t h e
and pá^ppat to figkt.—To be qf a hostile cause is p u t for t h e effect, and heavy pu-
mind against another, to be highly dis- nishment is meant. See Gesen. p . 6 7 1 ,
pleased, incensed, or ofended at, infenso 3. d.] A m m o n i u s , whom W e t s t e i n t h e r e
esse animo e r g a ; or, according to Raphe- cites, defines Svpdg to be Trpótricaipog a
lius, To be obstinately bent on war, either temporary, but bpyr¡, irdXvxpóviog pvqcri-
after receiving a defeat, or without pros- naicia a lasting resentment. [ T h e same
pect of success. occ. Acts xii. 20, where distinction is noticed by Suidas. I t is
however K y p k e , in opposition to t h e e x - not, however, always observed. See Schol.
cellent commentator j u s t mentioned, p r e - Aristoph. Ran. 8 6 8 . D i o g . L a e r t . Z e n .
fers t h e former sense, in which he shows § 1 1 3 . and M e n a g . Comm. p . 3 0 3 . Cic.
t h a t the V. is used by Dionvsius Plalicarn., T u s e . Quajst. iv. 9. T h e word oceurs in
Polybius, and P l u t a r c h , and observes, t h a t t h e sense of passion in Polyb. ii. 19. 10.
Raphelius's interpretation cannot be ad- iElian. V. H . i. 14. X e n . de Re E q . ix. 2 . ]
m i t t e d , because Josephus says not a word I V . I t denotes poison, or more strictly
of this war of H e r o d with t h e T y r i a n s inflaming or inflammatory poison. oceurs
and Sidonians, who were under t h e for- Rev. xiv. 10. Comp. J o b xxi. 20. P s . Ix.
midable protection of the Román empire. 3. lxxv. 8. Isa. Ii. 17. J e r . xxv. 15. T h i s
Compare W e t s t e i n . [See Polyb. ix. 4 0 . 3. is an Hellenistical sense of the word, which
Exc. L e g . 69. Diod. Sic. xvii. 3 3 , for t h e is t h u s used by t h e L X X , D e u t . xxxii..24,
sense given here. I t oceurs, in t h e sense 33, (where it is joined with oivog wine.)
iPs. lviii. or lvii. 4, in conformity.with t h e
* " Apud Hippocratem, Súfiarx, Galenus ex- correspondent H e b . ncri, which signifies
ponit %fu¿/j.!r.Ta suffimenta," Scapula. both wrath, and an inflammatory acrid
 3 75
eYp
poison, such, as serpents emít when en-
raged. Compare J o b xx. 16, in L X X .
Wisd. xvi. 5, and Arnald there. B u t in
Rev. xiv. 8. xviii. 3 , i t seems to denote
inflammatory ¡Mitres or love-poiions, such
as whores used to give their ¡overs. So
t h e learned Jos. Mede interprets it in his
Comment. Apocalypt. p p . 517, 51S. folio.
See also V i t r i n g a in Rev. [Ov/xóc is p u t
for t h e H e b . ttfiO, poison, in D e u t . xxxii.
3 3 . J o b x x . 16. Amos vi. 1 2 . ]
Qvfiów, ü, from %pdr anger, rvratli.— 2 Kings x i x . 3 2 . Joseph. A n t . viii. 7- 2 .
To provolce to anger. Qvp.bup.ai, 5pai,
pass. To be provoked to anger, lo be in-
censed, rvroth. occ. M a t . ii. 16. [ G e n . xxx.
2. Pol. v. 16. 4. X e u . C y r . v. 5. 1 1 . ]
e r P A , a , i), frotó t h e Chald. I T i n t h e
C
same, t o which this word answers in T h e o -
dotion's versión of D a n . iii. 26, and which
is a corruption of t h e H e b . a gate,
b y transposing t h e y , and changing U?
into n , as usual.
I . A door—of a house, M a r k i. 3 3 . ii.
2 . * xi. 4.—of a chamber, M a t . vi. 6.—of
a prison, A c t s v. 19, 23.—of t h e temple,
A c t s iii. 2.—of a sepulchre, M a t . xxvJi.
6 0 . xxviü. 2 . To be at the doors is a
proverbial expression for being near at
hand. See M a t . xxiv. 3 3 . M a r k xiii. 2 9 .nearly resembles t h a t of t h e spies from
J a m e s v. 9. Comp. R e v . iii. 2 0 . I t is
used also in t h e same view by t h e profane
writers. See Raphelius and W e t s t e i n on
M a t . xxiv. 3 3 . [ a n d compare Aristoph.
Plut. 767.]
I I . I t is applied figuratively t o Christ,
who is t h e door, by which we m u s t enter
into his church, and into eternal life, J o h n
x. 9. [or who, as Schleus. and W a h l say,
gives u s opportunity of entering into hea-
v e n . ] — t o an opportunity of receiving t h e
gospel, A c t s xiv. 27-—or of preaching i t ,
1 Cor. xvi. 9. 2 Cor. ii. 12. Col. iv. 3 . Rev.
iii. 8, where see V i t r i n g a . [Similar phrases
occur in L u c i a n . T . ii. p . 720. edit. Reitz.
Zenob. C e n t . i. Prov. 8 9 . Symm. H o s . ii.
17. éie dvpav éXrriSoe, P l u t a r c h . Symp. ii.
Quajst. iii. p . 6 3 6 . ]
Qvpeos, 5, 6, from Sopa a door.
I . H o m e r (Odyss. ix. lines 2 4 0 , 3 1 3 ,
340. comp. line 2 4 3 . ) uses this word for
a great stone, which served as a door to
t h e m o u t h of a cave. Comp. M a t . xxvii.
60'. J o h n xi. 3 8 , 3 9 .
I I . I n t h e l a t t e r Greek writers, cited
* [ T h e phrase ra ?rpofTT¡>Oúpav denotes the ves- 3 3 , Schleusner t h i n k s t h a t i t is p u t in
tibule or empty space before the door, (per quena a
via aditus accessusque asdes est, Aul, Gell. xvi.
16.) called jr^iipo», Gen. xix. 0 . Hom. Od. A . 1 0 3 . the sacrifices,
and 7rp6nvhct, Axioch. 1 9 . ]
9 Y S
by Alberti, Elsner, and Wetstein, and
particularly by Kypke, whom see, it d e -
notes a large oblong shield like a door,
whereas áo-7r¡c means a round one. occ.
E p h . vi. 16. [ O n this difference see
Wessel. ad Diod. Sic. ii. p . 5 0 1 . Alberti
Obss. Phil. p. 3 7 4 . Lips. de Mil. Rom. iii.
p . 166. Spanh. ad J u l . O r a t . p . 2 4 1 . T u r -
neb. Advers. ii. c. 2 7 . B u t this distinc-
tion is not always observed. See Polyb.
vi. 2 1 . T h e word occurs 2 Sam. i. 2 1 .
Diod. Sic. v. 3 0 and 3 9 . ]
Qvpír, loor, f¡. A diminutive of Súpa.
I . A little door. T h u s sometimes used
in t h e profane writers. See Scapula, a n d
Wetstein on 2 Cor. x i . 3 3 .
I I . A window. occ. A c t s x x . 9. 2 Cor.
xi. 3 3 . A s to t h e former passage " S i r
J o h n Chardin's M S . tells us, the eastern
windotvs are very large, and even with
thefioor. I t is no wonder ( t h e n ) t h a t E u -
tychus m i g h t fall out, if t h e lattice was
not well fastened, or if i t was d e c a y e d ;
when, sunk into a deep sleep, he leaned
with all his weight against i t . " H a r m e r ' s
Observations, vol. i. p . 164. S t . Paul's
escape from Damascus, 2 Cor. x i . 3 3 ,
Jericho, Josh. ii. 15, and próbably was,
like t h a t , effected out of a kiosk or bow-
window which projected beyond the wail
ofthe city. Comp. H e b . and E n g . L e x .
in ¡Tip I V . [occ. G e n . xxvi. 8. Isa. xxiv.
18. J u d g e s v. 2 8 . Diod. S i c x x . 8 5 . ]
Qvpiopóg, t¡, b, i], from Sipa a door, and
apoe a keeper. A door-keeper, a porter.
occ. M a r k xiii. 34. J o h n x . 3 . xviii. 16,
17. [ T h e r e were female porters among
t h e Jews. See 2 S a m . iv. 6. J o h n xviii.
16., and so Suidas. W a h l , on J o h n x. 3 ,
remarks, t h a t t h e word is used of one of
t h e shepherds who kept t h e door of t h e
fold, and opened it at t h e knock of a fel-
low-shepherd, as t h e r e were large folds i n
ancient times in which m a n y shepherds
lived entirely. T h e word occurs 2 K i n g s
vii. 10. E z e k . xliv. 1 1 . X e n . C y r . vii. 5 .
2 3 . Hell. vii. 1. 26.]
Qvtrla, a e , i;, from 3VLO lo sacrifice.
I . A sacrifice or victim. L u k e ii. 2 4 .
xiii. 1. A c t s vii. 4 1 . H e b . v. 1. vii. 2 7 .
Compare E p h . v. 2. H e b . i x . 2 6 . x. 12.
[ A d d M a t . ix. 13. M a r k ix. 4 9 . H e b . viii.
3 . i x . 9, 2 3 . x . 1 and 1 1 . I n M a r k x i i .
opposition t o t h e bXonavpara, and means
part qf which were given
to the priests; while in 1 Cor. x. 18,
 e Y s 37 6 e si p

this part is denoted. See D e u t . xviii. 1. in a similar view t h e Blessed M a r t y r a p -

Hos. viii. 13. T h e word occ. Gen. xxxi. plies it, Ad T r a l l . § 7, and A d E p h e s . § 5 .
54. Lev. iii. 1, 3, C, 9 . ] edit. Russel.
I I . I t is spoken of t h e bodies of Chris- •Ova), from Sriw or SEVU to run violently,
tians, Rom. xii. 1.—of their religious ser- approach hastily, " c u r r o vehementer,
vices, 1 P e t . ii. 5.—particularly of their festinanter accedo." T h u s t h e learned
praises of God, and works of charity to Damm, Lexic. who deduces this V . from
men, H e b . xiii. 15, 16.—especially to the ¡JÍOJ or SEVW from t h e sound made by t h e
preachers of t h e gospel, Phil. iv. 1 tí. [In breath of persons running.
P h i l . ii. 17, Qvata may be either the I. To move or rush impetuously, to
preaching of the gospel, or men made rage. T h u s it often signifies in H o m e r ,
agreeable to God by Christianity\\ and is applied to winds, Odyss. xii. lines
Qvcria^íiptov, a, rb, from §vaiá'(ii> to sa- 400, 4 0 8 , 4 2 6 . — t o . a river, "II. xxi. lines
crifice, which from Bva-ía. 234, and 324.—to t h e sea, II. xxiii. line
I . An altar, whether of burnt-oiterings, 230.—to a person, II. i. line 3 4 2 . II. x i .
M a t . xxiii. 18, 19, 3 5 . L u k e xi. 5 1 . 1 Cor. ¡ line 180.
ix. 13. x. 18. Comp. James ii. 2 1 . Rev. I I . In H o m e r , to cast a little of t h e
vi. 9 . — o r o f incensé, L u k e i. 11. Comp. victuals and wine into the fre, as an of-
R e v . viii. 3 . ix. 1 3 . — T h e L X X use it in fering to the gods at t h e beginning or end
t h e latter, as well as in the former sense, of a meal or feast. T h u s a t t h e beginning
for t h e H e b . n ^ t D ; [in the former, Gen. of t h e e n t e r t a i n m e n t which Achules was
viii. 20. xii. 7, 8. W a h l explains t h e two going to give Ulysses, and t h e other
phrases, 1 Cor. ix. 13, rt¡> Ovo-ia^yptü) princes sent to him by Agamemnon, I I .
avppepíi^ovrai, and 1 Cor. x. 18, KOLVÜJVOI ix. lines 2 1 9 , 220,
ra dvcna^ripís, by a personificaron of the 0£O7¡TÍ 8e 0 T ~ 2 A I áv&jyst
a l t a r ; u t altare, p a r t e m accipiunt vic- ITárpojíXov tv hralpov' ó 8' Iv itupi $áKXs © T ' H A A E .
t i m a r u m , i. e. are sharers wilh the altar.
T h e Jirst oblations to t h ' i m m o r t a l s due
I n H e b . xiii. 10, he explains it r i g h t l y as Amid tlic Jlames h i s friend P a t r o c l u s threw.
a victim, as Schleusner does, 1 Cor. ix. 2 3 .
Schleusner translates 1 Cor. x. 18, They So Odyss. xiv. line 4 4 6 , E u m a m s before
confess openly that they worship God, he began to eat,
whose altar it is ; b u t t h i s is very harsh.] "Apy/j.0íTU © T ~ 2 E 0 e o 7 ? ¿EjyÉvÉTí/G-J"
I I . The Christian Altar, t h a t is, The
Table of the Lord, considered as furnish- T h ' initidl off'rings to til' i m m o r t a l s íurnt;
A n d h a v i n g pour'd the consecrated wine
ed with t h e memorials of the sacrifice of
his death, of which memorials Christians H e n e e
are to partake or eat (comp. 1 Cor. x. 2 1 , I I I . In t h e l a t t e r G r e e k writers, To
and verse 18.) b u t of which they have no sacrifice, to slay in sacrifice. occ. A c t s
right to eat, who serve the tabernacle. xiv. 13, 18. 1 Cor. x. 2 0 . Comp. M a r k
occ. Pleb. xiii. 10. T h e most ancient and xiv. 12. L u k e xxii. 7- 1 Cor. v. 7. See
satisfactory illustration of t h e word in Exod. xii. 2 7 . xxiii. 18. xxxiv. 2 5 .
this t e x t may perhaps be taken 'from I g - I V . To slay for food. occ. M a t , xxii. 4 .
n a t i u s , who plainly uses it for t h e Lord's L u k e xv. 2 3 , 27- A c t s x. 13. xi. 7. Comp.
Table, A d Philadelph. § 4, ^siraóáfere év J o h n x. 10.—In t h e L X X it is used for
pit]. '¡Zvyapifíq. yj¡>r¡(rBai. Mía ydp aapí, ra t h e H e b . m i , generally in t h e sense of
Kwpía r/püiv 'lr¡&5 Xpi^á, Kal 'iv Tvornpíov iie slaying in sacrifice, but sometimes for
ívioaiv ra (¿iparoc á v r a ' "Ee Q Y 2 I A 2 - food, as 1 Sam. xxviii. 2 4 . 1 K i n g s x i x .
T H ' P I O N , ¿>c iie kirícKOiTOQ, cipa r<5 irptir- 2 1 ; in which latter application it answers
€vTEpí.i¡> ¡cal Siatcóvoie TOÍQ avvoéXoie pS, to t h e H e b . t i l B , 1 Sam. xxv. 1 1 . Comp.
'Iva b iav irpáaariTE, i:ard Qebv irpáaarjrE. J e r . xi. 19.
" Wherefore let it be your endeavour to G í i ' P A S , ame, o.—Properly, A breast-
p a r t a k e all of the same holy E u c h a r i s t : plate, cuirass, or defensive armour for
for t h e r e is b u t one flesh of our L o r d the breast.—Thus H o m e r , II. xi. line 19,
J e s ú s Christ, and one cup unto t h e u n i t y
Aéunpw ¿v © S l ' P H K A Trcp) 2 T ' H 0 E E 2 I N '¿ium.
of his blood; one A L T A R ; as also t h e r e
is one bishop, together with his presby- T h e b e a m i n g cuirass n e x t adorns h i s lireast.
POPE.
tery, and the deacons, m y fellow-servants:
t h a t so whatsoever ye do, ye m a y do it ac- A n d in this sense only is t h e Ionic Qwpr¡'¿,
cording to the will of God." W A K E . And used in H o m e r , which therefore seems t h e